NICOLE ORESME

and the M edieval Geometry

Q ualities and M otions

A T R E A T IS E

O N T H E U N IF O R M IT Y A N D D IF F O R M IT Y O F

IN T E N S IT IE S KNOW N AS

T ractatus de configurationibus
qualitatum et motuum

E D IT E D W IT H

AN IN T R O D U C T IO N , E N G L IS H T R A N S L A T IO N ,

AND COM M ENTARY BY

MARSHALL C L A G E T T
t

MADISON, MILWAUKEE, AN D LONDON

T H E U N I V E R S I T Y OF W I S C O N S I N P R E S S

1968
 Published by the University o f W isconsin Press To
Madison, Milwaukee, and London my students in the seminar
U .S .A .: P .O . B ox 1379, Madison, W isconsin 53701 in the history o f medieval science
U .K .: 27-29 W hitfield Street, London, W .i at the
Copyright © 1968 b y the University o f Wisconsin
Regents o f the University o f Wisconsin (1947-1964)
A ll rights reserved in which Nicole Oresme was a
Printed in the Netherlands by constant attendant
K oninklijke Drukkerij G . J. Thiem e N .V ., Nijm egen

Library o f Congress Catalog Card N o. 68-14031

 Preface

This, the twelfth volum e in The University o f Wisconsin Publications in Medieval

Science, is the third devoted to the scientific w orks o f N icole Oresme. It is the first
printed edition o f a remarkable effort by Oresme to devise a system to represent
geometrically intensities o f qualities and velocities o f motions and thereby to
interpret the internal structure o f matter and to explain phenomena. It w ill super­
sede, I trust, the partial edition o f Wieleitner, which included less than half o f the
text and was based primarily on one manuscript, as well as the Russian translation
o f Z ou bov, which also provided somewhat less than half o f the w ork. I have at­
tempted to give a critical text based on all fourteen extant manuscripts. The textual
procedures and the abbreviations used for variant readings are those follow ed in
my Archimedes in the Middle Ages, Volum e One, pages xv-xvii, and in the other
volumes o f the Series. A brief list o f abbreviations follows this Preface. I have
given in the Introduction a complete description o f Oresme’s configuration doc­
trine together with a history o f its origins and fate to the time o f Galileo. In the
Appendixes certain other documents describing the configuration doctrine have
been edited with English translations and notes. M y English translations o f the
main text and supplementary documents are purposely literal, although I hope not
too infelicitous. It is true that I have felt compelled to use certain “ medievalisms”
in my English to preserve the distinctions present in the Latin texts. Thus the
word difformis is always translated “ difform” since it is a technical term indicating
a variation o f intensity or velocity that is properly distinguished from the ordinary
term deformis, which w ould be correctly rendered by “ deformed.”
Needless to say, I am indebted to the early efforts o f Pierre Duhem , w ho first
analyzed the text, and o f H. Wieleitner, w ho first published a part o f it. T h e recent
studies o f V . P. Z o u b o v and Lynn Thorndike were also o f help, while the many
penetrating studies o f Oresm e’s thought and the text o f the D e configurationibus by
my friend D r. Anneliese Maier have been indispensable. I must single out for partic­
ular thanks those scholars w ho read the typescript o f my w ork and offered sugges­
tions for its improvem ent: Professors Edward Grant, Indiana University; J. R.
Strayer, Princeton U niversity; and Curtis W ilson, University o f California at San
D iego. It w ill be apparent from my Commentary that I have also benefited from
the advice o f Professor G w yn M cPeek o f the University o f Wisconsin in inter­
preting the musical sections o f Oresme’s work. A t the same time, I must thank
IX
 X Preface

D r. Dana Durand for turning over all o f his Oresme materials to me many years
ago when he left the academic scene.
I should also express m y appreciation to the many European libraries which
provided me access to their collections and films o f the manuscripts o f the D e con­
figurationibus ,to the Institute for Research in the Humanities at the University o f W is­
consin, where I first began this volum e as a Research Professor, and to the Institute
for Advanced Study, my present academic home, where I completed it. T o the
Contents
latter Institute I ow e the increased debt o f a grant in support o f publication. Fur­
ther thanks are due to the National Science Foundation for a grant for the year 1962-
63 which permitted me to return to the European libraries. T h e Herculean assis­
P r e f a c e ......................................................................................... ix
tance provided by Mr. T on y Gagliano, Mr. Bert Hansen, and Mr. James O tte in
the preparation o f the indexes and the reading o f p ro o f deserves the reader’s
thanks as w ell as my own. Finally, I w ould be less than gracious— indeed seriously Introduction
remiss— were I not to acknowledge the expert secretarial help afforded by Mrs.
Loretta Freiling, Mrs. G ail Eager, Mrs. G eorgea von Lutcken, and Miss Ann I Nicole Oresme and the De configurationibus qualitatum et motuum
Zavacky. A . The Scientific T h ou gh t o f N icole Oresme . . . . . 3
MARSHALL CLAGETT B. T he D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum . . . 14
Institute fo r Advanced Study
Princeton, New Jersey
II The Configuration Doctrine in Historical Perspective
March /, i <)6j
A . Origins o f the D octrine . . . . . . . . 5o
B. The Fate o f Oresm e’s Configuration D octrine . . . .7 3
Symbols, Abbreviations, and Latin Terms Used in the C. The Application o f the Configuration D octrine to Phenomena . 112
Text and Variant Readings
III The Composition o f the De configurationibus
add. = addidit lib. — liber A . D ating o f the D e configurationibus . . . . . .122
corr. = correxi, correxit MS = codex manuscriptus
B. Oresm e’s Citations o f His O w n W orks in the D e configurationibus . 125
del. = delevi, delevit mg. hab. = in margine habet C. Oresme’s Citations o f His Predecessors . . . . 133
ed. = edidit, editio, editor om. = omisit, omiserunt, omisi D. Determining the Title . . . . . . . . 135
hab. = habet scr. et dei. = scripsit et delevit E. T h e Character o f the Proemium and the Genuineness o f the Table
inser. == inseruit supra scr. = supra scripsit o f Chapters . . . . . . . . . *139
iter. = iteravit tr. = transposuit, transtulit
lac. = lacuna
IV The Manuscripts and the Text o f the De configurationibus
Parentheses, (), have been used in the Latin text and the variant readings to enclose A . Relationships between Manuscripts . . . . . .142
an editorial comment or sign and/or an alternate reading. Square brackets, [], have B. Sigla and Descriptions o f Manuscripts . . . . .146
been employed to enclose additions to the text made either by me as editor or by
some scribe for the purpose o f clarification. A n gle brackets, < ), have been used
D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum
to enclose additions I have made to the text because I was reasonably certain they
were present in the original text though omitted in the extant manuscripts. A n Text and T ra n slatio n ........................................................................158
italic exclamation point (/) has throughout been used as equivalent for sic, and an C o m m e n t a r y .................................................................................437
italic question mark (?) draws attention to a doubtful reading.

XI
 xii Contents

A ppendixes
Appendix I : The Questions on the Geometry of Euclid by Nicole
O r e s m e ......................................................................................... 521
Appendix II: The Anonymous Tractatus bonus de uniformi et dif-
formi.................................................................................................. 576 List o f Plates
Appendix III: The Semicircular Quality: I.xiv o f the De configura­
tionibus in Manuscript f ............................................................... 623
639 following p . 3 J4
B i b l i o g r a p h y .................................................................................
1. D e configurationibus, M S A (Paris, Bibl. Arsenal 522), 29^ Ca. 1395-98.
A Selective Index o f Latin T erm s...................................................... 651
2. D e configurationibus, M S B (Bruges, Stadsbibliotheek 486), i73r. 14c.
Index of Manuscripts C ite d .............................................................. 701
3. D e configurationibus, M S C (Vatican, Chigi E. IV . 109), 8jr (old pag.). 15c.
General I n d e x ................................................................................. 7°3 4. D e configurationibus, M S D (Erfurt, Stadtbibl. Am plon. Q.298), 64r. 14c.
5. D e configurationibus, M S E (Erfurt, Stadtbibl. Am plon. Q.150), ir. 14c.
6. D e configurationibus, M S F (Bibl. Med. Laur. Ashb. 210), i o i v . 1410.
7. D e configurationibus, M S G (Groningen, Bibl. der Rijksuniv. 103), 69V. 16c.
8. Appendix II, M S //(E rfu rt, Stadtbibl. Am plon. Q.325), 43V. 14c.
9. D e configurationibus, M S /(F loren ce, Bibl. Naz. Cen., Conv. Soppr. J.IX.26),
15 v. Late 15 c or early 16c.
10. D e configurationibus, M S L (Brit. Mus. Sloane 2156), 193V. 1428.
11. D e configurationibus, M S M (Paris, B N lat. 14579), i8r. 15c.
12. D e configurationibus, M S N (Paris, B N . lat. 14580), 6ov. Late 14c or early 15 c.
13. D e configurationibus, M S P (Paris, B N lat. 7371), 2i4r. 15c.
14. D e configurationibus, M S S (Basel, Oeff. Bibl. der Univ. F.III.31), 4r. 14c.
15. D e configurationibus, M S V (Vat. lat. 3097), ir. 14c.
16. Appendix I, M S c (Vatican Chigi F.IV.66), z-jr. End o f 14c or early 15 c.
17. Appendix I, M S s (Seville, Bibl. Colomb. 7.7.13), \o-fi. 15c.
18. Appendix I, MS*/(Vat. lat. 2225), 96V. 15 c.

X lll
Introduction
 I

Nicole Oresme and the

D e configurationibus qualitatum
et motuum

A . The Scientific Thought o f Nicole Oresme1

N o field o f historical study seems so to dispose its adherents to find anachronistic

forerunners and adumbrations as does the history o f science. It is astonishing how
often w e find in the works o f historians o f science and natural philosophy, what­
ever their motives, expressions such as the “ ancient Copernicus,” the “ precursor
o f Leonardo,” the “ medieval Hum e,” or the like. Such extravagances continually
compel other historians o f science to take time out to refute or m odify these often
rhetorical claims, or at least to put them in perspective.
N o medieval schoolman has been singled out as a precursor more often than
the French scholastic N icole Oresme. This brilliant scholar has been credited with
the framing o f Gresham ’s Law before Gresham, w ith the invention o f analytic
geometry before Descartes, w ith propounding structural theories o f compounds
before the nineteenth-century organic chemists, w ith discovering the law o f free
fall before Galileo, and w ith advocating the rotation o f the earth before Copernicus.
None o f these claims is, in fact, true, although each is based on discussions by
Oresme o f some penetration and originality. In view , then, o f how often the name
o f Oresme arises in connection with the problem o f precursorship, I thought it
would not be without interest as an introduction to his Tractatus de configurationibus
qualitatum et motuum to assay briefly some o f Oresm e’s distinctive ideas in natural
philosophy, stressing where possible manuscript evidence not comm only avail­
able and the concepts useful for a study o f the D e configurationibus. W e are in a par­
ticularly fortunate position to attempt such an evaluation because o f the fact that
so many o f Oresme’s works are extant (at least in manuscript) and o f the further
fact that these works can be arranged in tentative chronological order. E ven more

1 This section is based substantially on the the American Philosophical Society, Vol. 108
first part o f my paper, “ Nicole Oresme and (1964), 298-309.
Medieval Scientific Thought,” Proceedings o f

3
 4 Introduction Oresme and the D e configurationibus 5

interesting for the evaluation o f his originality is Oresme’s habit o f repeating and Oresme, like most o f the schoolmen o f his time, or in fact most accomplished
elaborating some o f his more original ideas from w ork to w ork. Thus for no other schoolmen o f any time, presents to us many faces, and glimpses o f these appearances
fourteenth-century schoolman interested in natural philosophy do we have such will be evident in our examination o f the D e configurationibus. A s a professing
complete evidence for the successive development o f his ideas. schoolman, he produced a series o f Quaestiones on standard works that contain a
Before examining some facets o f Oresm e’s scientific thought, and without most elaborate and subtle dialectic that brands him as a worthy representative o f
reiterating the oft-repeated evidence,2 let me summarize some biographical facts medieval scholasticism.3* These include questions on various works o f Aristotle
which w ill be o f use for the later discussion o f the D e configurationibus. A Norman, (the Physics, the D e caelo, the Generation and Corruption, the Meteorology, the Parva
born probably near Caen, Oresme appears first in the records o f the College o f naturalia and the D e anima), as well as Questions on the Elements o f Euclid and the
Navarre at Paris as a theological student in 1348. Presumably ju ^ p rio r to this time Sphere o f Sacrobosco (and quotations from all o f these appear in the Commentary).
he had studied arts at Paris with the so-called founder o f the French school o f On the other hand, as a speculative philosopher interested in preparing and form ­
natural philosophy, Jean Buridan. It was perhaps from Buridan that he took his ing doctrina or disciplina as well as exercises, Oresme also composed a series o f
main interest in natural philosophy. A t any rate, although he became a master o f lucid and direct tracts. A m on g these are tw o treatises on proportionality; the D e
theology in 13 5 5 or 13 56, at w hich later date he became Grand-Master o f the C ol­ configurationibus which is being edited in this volum e; a tract, D e mutationibus mone­
lege o f Navarre, and although he composed the required Commentary on the Sentences tarum; and a w ork on the Commensurability or Incommensurability o f the Celestial Mo­
of Peter Lombard, as w ell as another theological tract and some sermons, his bibliog­ tions.
raphy is principally one devoted to natural philosophy. D uring the late 1350’s he Oresme also presents to us the face o f a determined critic o f astrologers and
began to form ties w ith the Dauphin (the future Charles V ), and that relationship astrology. He took his stand, it seems, not only because he had serious doubts
continued until the death o f Charles in 1380, tw o years before Oresm e’s death. about the genuineness and effectiveness o f most o f magic and astrology but also
Oresme appears to have left Navarre in 1362, occupying successively canonships at possibly because he felt Charles to be too much under the influence o f purveyors o f
Rouen and La Sainte Chapelle at Paris, follow ed by the deanship o f the cathedral occult arts. This phase o f Oresme’s activity resulted in the production o f several
at Rouen in 1364. In that same year Charles acceded to the throne and Oresme tracts on astrology, the most important o f which is one written in French, the Livre
appears to have become his chaplain and counselor even though he was probably de divinationsA
not regularly resident at Paris until 1370. From 1370 to 1377 Oresme engaged in A nd finally w e can say that Oresme presents to us the face o f the humanist and
preparing a series o f French translations at the request of, and w ith stipends from , servant o f his king in undertaking to render technical and philosophical material
Charles. His reward was the elevation to the bishopric o f Lisieux in 1377. Little is from Latin into French. He was, as is well known, not only responsible for a sum­
know n o f the last five years o f his life. ,s
mary o f cosm ology in a French tract, On the Sphere but also for the translation o f
three o f the Aristotelian works on practical philosophy, the Ethics, the Politics, and
2 The most recent biographies of Oresme L e Livre de ethiques reproduces in black and the Economics, in addition to his brilliant final translation of, and commentary on,
white several manuscript miniatures of Ores­
are those found in A . D . Menut, Maistre Nicole Aristotle’s D e caelo in 13 77.6
Oresme: L e Livre de ethiques d 'A risto te and A . me. T o these we can add the beautiful color In reviewing some o f Oresme’s most original discussion that bears on our con-
D. Menut and A. J. Denomy, in Mediaeval reproduction of Brussels, Bibl. Roy. 9505-6,
Studies, Vols. 3-5 (1941-43); cf. D u d el, ed. 2v, in L. M. J. Delaisse, Medieval Illuminations
1968. Much of the evidence has been sum­ (Brussels, 1958), 79, and three black and white
marized once more by Edward Grant in his reproductions (the first two o f which are poor) 3 For manuscripts and editions o f the various While the Livre de divinacions was probably the
edition o f Nicole Oresme, The “ D e propor­ of Paris, B N frang. 565, ir, in E. Buron, Ymago works mentioned here, see the Bibliography most influential of Oresme’s astrological
tionibus proportionum' ’ and “ A d pauca respicien­ mundi de Pierre d 'A illy , Vol. 1 (Paris, 1930), under Oresme. works (at least on the French court), one must
tesA A new attempt at the chronological listing 224; V. P. Zoubov, Traktat, 604; and R. Ta- 4 See Coopland, Nicole Oresme and the A strol- also mention the combined Questio contra divi-
o f Oresme’s scientific works was given by M. ton, Histoiregenerale des sciences, Vol. 1, plate 42. °&ers, which contains both the text o f this natores with its Quodlibeta annexa, which I have
Clagett, The Science o f Mechanics, 338m Menut’s effort to draw traits of character and work and his earlier Tractatus contra judiciarios discussed below in Introduction III.B, and
Still useful for biographical purposes are F. personality from these miniatures seems to me astronomos, with certain other astrological often cited in the Commentary.
Meunier, E ssa i su r. . .N icole Oresme, and E. farfetched, and indeed my scepticism has been material. C f. C. Jourdain, in Revue des questions 5 For the text, see the Ph.D. thesis o f L. M.
Bridrey, L a Theorie de la monnaie au xive siecle. reinforced by the views of my colleague, Pro­ historiques, Vol. 18 (1875), 136-59, Lynn McCarthy, “ Maistre Nicole Oresme: Traitie de
Many o f the editions and studies cited below fessor Millard Meiss, who has widely studied I horndike, A History o f Magic and E x p e r i­ l’espere” . C f. Coopland, N icole Oresme and the
also contain biographical treatments of Ores­ fourteenth-century manuscript illustrations, mental Science, Vol. 3, 398—471, and Pierre Astrologers, 13-20, 173-74.
me. Incidentally, Menut in his edition o f the and particularly those representing Oresme. Duhem, L e Systeme du m onde,\o\. 8, 443—501. 6 For the text o f the Ethiques and the D u d el,
 6 Introduction Oresme and the D e configurationibus 7

sideration o f the D e configurationibus, w e shall find it convenient to start with the resistances differing from those on earth, and (2) “ it is not impossible that the heav­
heavens and w ork our w ay downward to the inner structure o f terrestrial matter. ens are m oved by a power or corporeal quality in them, without violence and w ith­
Efforts have been made to foist on Oresme a proto-mechanistic view o f the uni­ out w ork, because the resistance in the heavens does not incline them to any other
verse, and to claim for him as Lynn W hite has, the first use o f “ the metaphore [sic] movement nor to rest but only [effects] that they are not m oved more quickly.”
o f the universe as a vast mechanical clock created and set running by G o d ,” 7 a The latter statement, o f course, sounds inertial, but, be that as it may, it stresses the
metaphor which that author believes arises from Oresme’s acceptance o f the medi­ difference between celestial resistance and that on the earth. In other treatments o f
eval impetus theory, which explained the continuance o f projectile m otion on the celestial motions, Oresme claims that in celestial motions “ voluntary” forces rath­
basis o f an impressed force or impetus. I assume that^he root o f this judgment er than “ natural” forces are involved, and that the “ voluntary” forces differ from
concerning Oresme lies in the fact that Jean Buridan (and not Oresme) did indeed “ natural” ones in not being quantifiable in terms o f the numerical proportionality
suggest the possibility that G o d could have impressed impetuses in the heavenly theorems applicable to natural forces and resistances.11 Furthermore, in addition
bodies, which, acting without resistance or contrary inclination, continue indefinite­ to his retention o f intelligences as movers, there is a further factor preventing the
ly the m otion o f the heavenly bodies, thus dispensing w ith the Aristotelian intel­
ligences as the continuing movers.8 H ow ever, a reading o f several different works
o f Oresme, ranging from the late 1340’s to 1377, all o f w hich discuss celestial que les mouvemens sont fai% san% violence; et excepte propter hoc dicimus quod prima virtus est
la violence, Test aucunement semblable quant un quedam qualitas que recipit augmentum et
movers, shows that Oresme never abandoned the intelligences as movers, while
honme a f a it un horloge et i l le lesse aler et estre meii decrementum, sed secunda est ipsa substantia
he specifically rejected impetuses as movers (see below, n. 11). In these discussions par soy. A in s i lessa D ieu les ciel^ estre meii^ con­ vera que non recipit comparationem. Secunda
he stresses the essential differences between the mechanics governing terrestrial ti nuelment selon les proportions que les vertus moti­ distinctio est de resistentia quod ipsa potest
motion and that involved in celestial m otion,9 although in tw o passages o f the ve^ ont aus resistences et selon Tordenance establieT accipi dupliciter: uno modo proprie et sic est
(Italics mine.) For the second passage, see the quedam difficultas seu qualitas contraria quo­
U vre du d el10 he suggests (1) the possibility o f G o d ’s having implanted in the heav­
same text, Bk. II, fols. 73d, 175: “ ce n’est pas dammodo virtuti. Primo modo dicto secun­
ens at the time o f their creation special forces and resistances by w hich the heavens
impossible... que le ciel soit meii par une vertu dum cuius diminutionem vel augmentatio-
m ove continually like a mechanical clock, but w ithout violence, the forces and ou qualite corporelle qui est en lui et sanz vio­ nem augetur vel diminuitur velocitas motus__
lence et sans travail, car la resistence qui est ou Aliter capitur resistentia improprie, et sic non
ciel ne l’encline pas a autre mouvement ne a est nisi quedam impossibilitas movendi velo­
see the works o f Menut cited in n. 2, above. citatis orbis ad velocitatem datam, poterit repos, mais seulement a ce que il ne soit meii cius vel tardius; et ita posset dici quod celum
For the Yconomique, see A . D . Menut, in Trans­ comprehendi proportio intelligentie moventis plus isnelement.” C f . A . Maier, Zwei Grund- resistit ne moveatur velocius. Tertia distinctio
actions o f the American Philosophical Society, N ew ad orbem. Que quidem proportio non debet probleme, 25 7, n. 32. Notice in the next footnote est quod quandoque aliquis effectus vel motus
Series, Vol. 47, Part 5, (1957), 785—85 3. Menut vocari proportio virtutis ad resistentiam nisi that Oresme had earlier in the,Questiones de spera provenit a virtute naturali sicut motus lapidis
also promises a text of the Politiques. J. P. H. secundum similitudinem sicut puto quia intel- spoken o f a kind o f improper resistance o f the deorsum, quandoque precipue a virtute que est
Knops, L a Traductionfranfaise de lam oraleaNico- ligentia movet sola voluntate et nulla alia vir­ heavens, a resistance to being moved more voluntas... sicut est motus celi__ (Dropper’s
tute seu conatu vel difficultate et celum non rapidly or more slowly. text, 208)... dico quod inter intelligentiam et
mache, is a critique of Menut’s edition o f the
resistit ei sicut credo fuisse de mente Aristote­ 11 Questiones de spera, Quest. 9 (text of G.orbem proprie non est proportio sed solum
Ethiques.
7 Medieval Technology and Social Change, 125, lis et Averrois.” C f. also n. 11, below. Droppers, 184-86): “ pono primo tres distinc­ similitudinarie ad similitudinem istorum in­
10 Bk. II, fols. 7od-7ia, (Mediaeval Studies, tiones— Prima distinctio est quod quedamest feriorum. Nos enim videmus quod certa velo­
174.
8 Clagett, The Science o f Mechanics, 524-25, Vol. 4,170): “ E t selon verite, nulle intelligence virtus naturalis, quedam voluntaria et libera, citas provenit ex certa proportione, et causa est
n’est simplement immobile et ne convient tta quod distinguo naturale contra volunta­ quia omnis proportio est significabilis per
536.
9 For example, in talking about the ratios pas que chascune soit par tout le ciel que elle rium. Et differunt dupliciter: primo quia virtus numeros, scilicet si sit proportio rationalis;
involved in celestial motions in the D e propor­ meut ne en chascune partie de tel del, pose que naturalis movet cum aliquo conatu vel nixu, modo intelligentia non potest per numeros
tionibus proportionum, Chapter 4 (ed. o f Grant les cielz soient meuz par intelligences, car par sicut equus nititur et conatur ad trahendum significari...” (I have made some minor alter­
292, 406-16), Oresme says: “ E t sciatur pro­ aventure, quant Dieu les crea, II mist en eulz currum, sed virtus que est voluntaria pura non ations in Dropper’s text, using MSS Florence,
portio velocitatis motus alicuius orbis ad istam qualitez et vertus motivez aussi comme II movet cum aliquo tali conatu sed sola volitione Bibl. Riccard. 117, 130V, 13 iv , and Vat. lat.
velocitatem per astrologiam potest sciri ex mist pesanteur es choses terrestes, et mist en ita quod iste sunt diversarum rationum. Se­ 2185, 75r, 75V.) C f. Oresme’s earlier treat­
proportione quantitatum motuum vel circu­ eulz resistences contre ces vertus motivez. E t cunda differentia est quia virtus naturalis est ment in the Questiones super de celo, Bk. II,
lorum descriptorum, et ex proportione tem­ sont ces vertus et ces resistences d ' autre nature et signabilis per numeros et proportiones — Quest. 2, (text of Claudia Kren, 445-61; cf.
porum in quo revolvunt. E x istis duobus, sci­ d'autre ma{t)iere que quelcunque chose sensible ou Sed virtus que est voluntas non est signabilis Erfurt, Stadtbibl. Amplon. Q . 299, z jt - z - jv ) :
qualite qui soit ici-bas. E t sont ces vertus contre ces per numeros nec proportiones; ideo non debet “ Queritur utrum celum moveatur sine fati­
licet ex notitia proportionis a qua venit velo­
citas demonstrata et notitia proportionis velo­ resistences telement moderees, attrempees et acordees dici quod una sit ad aliam dupla aut tripla. Et gatione, et videtur quod non, primo quia dicit

identification o f any o f Oresme’s treatments o f celestial movers with the proposal
o f Buridan. For Buridan impetus is a thing o f permanent nature (res nature perma-
Aristoteles in de sompno et vigilia quod omnis
virtus naturalis est fatigabilis et motus celi est
naturalis et, per consequens, a virtute naturali.
Secundo, nisi talis virtus esset fatigabilis, se-
quereter quod esset infinita intensive, e^ g u o
nunc haberet potentiam movendi per tempus
infinitum sine fatigatione, sicud animal esset in­
finite potentie quod posset vigilare per tempus
infinitum. Tertio, quia aliqua spera quandoque
movetur tardius quam ante, sicud patet de luna
et planetis, propter quod dicuntur stationarii
et directi; etiam igitur moventur cum fatiga­
tione quia retardatio motus est signum fatiga­
tionis. Quarto, celum movetur cum resisten­
tia, igitur cum fatigatione. Antecedens patet
quia movetur certa velocitate et velocitas se­
quitur proportionem potentie ad resistentiam,
ut patet septimo Physicorum et secundo huius,
et tenet consequentia quia resistentia est causa
fatigationis et remissionis potentie. Opposi­
tum patet per Aristotelem, capitulo primo huius
secundi, et per hoc probat quod motus celi
est eternus et etiam celum quia movetur abs­
que fatigatione et pena, et ex hoc reprobat
Commentator alias opiniones antiquas, qua-
rum( ?) una est quod celum cogitur ad perpetui­
tatem motus. Alia erat quod motor celi fatiga­
tur, sed quandoque recreatur. Similiter, dicunt
fabule quod equidem solis comedunt ambro­
siam. Pro isto sciendum quod, ex parte mobilis,
quandoque ad hoc possunt ymaginari tria,
scilicet contrarietas, resistentia et violentia, et
ista se in v icem con seq u u n tu r, ita quod illud
quod contrariatur motori resistit sibi, et vio-
lentatur ab eo, si motor obtineat. Ita etiam, in
proposito, ex parte motoris, potest ymaginari
remissio conatus, et similiter, remissio virtutis,
aut etiam variatio, sicud in voluntario et pos­
sit exemplari de homine. Iterum, possit yma­
ginari fatigatio ratione ipsius motus. Tunc est
unica conclusio, quod quilibet motus celi fit
sine fatigatione; probatur, primo, ex parte
mobilis, quia illud movetur infatigabiliter
quod nullo modo contrariatur motori nec per
se nec per accidens, modo ita se habet celum
respectu intelligentie, igitur et cetera. Maior
Introduction Oresme and the D e configurationibus
9
nentis) , which is o f course corruptible by resistance and contrary inclinations.12
But Oresme seems to hold in his Latin Questiones super de celo that impetus is not
si moveret tardius quam facit, est coacta, et, subito; ymmo, si celum moveretur ab aliqua
per consequens, non esset libera, quod est virtute naturali, hoc est non voluntaria que non
patet ex alia questione et minor probatur quia
contra Aristotelem 1 z° Metaphysice. Iterum, haberet talem impetum ad fnotum circularem sicud
celum non est grave neque leve nec oportet
arguitur ex parte motus quia nullum mobile, gravitas habet ad motum rectum, tunc celum move­
quod dividatur propter motum circularem,
scilicet quod movetur circulariter, quantum retur subito, quod est impossibile. Ideo im­
vel condensetur, et cetera, modo nulla est alia
est de se, potest moveri cum fatigatione quia possibile est ipsum moveri nisi ab intelligentia.
contrarietas respectu moventis localiter. Se­
non habet resistentiam extrinsecam, quia non A d alium, dico quod celum non est aptum
cundo, illud movetur infatigabiliter quod non
oportet dividere medium; ymmo, quod plus natum moveri nec tangi ab aliqua virtute;
resistit motori, ut patet per aliam questionem,
est si esset grave spericum cuius centrum esset ymmo, si manus hominis contra poneretur,
modo celum non resistit quod statim patet
centrum mundi, non videtur quod haberet ali­ tunc non posset celum pellere supra, quia, non
quia tunc celum inclinaretur ad quietem vel
quam resistentiam ad motum circularem quia est mobile motu recto, nec aliqualiter retardare
motum contrarium, et si ita esset, tunc move­
semper est equaliter in loco suo. Igitur virtus motum celi propter hoc quod celum nullam
retur violente. Tunc probatur tertio, quia illud
movens non fatigaretur ex hoc, licet posset habet asperitatem nec potest habere. Ad
movetur sine fatigatione in cuius motu nulla
fatigari aliunde, sicud homo movens illud fati­ rationes: ad primam, dico quod Aristoteles
est violentia, ut patet per aliam questionem,
garetur quia movendo cum hoc brachium loquitur de virtute que non est voluntaria aut
sed in motu celi non est violentia. Primo, quia
suum vel videndo vel stando. E x ista conclu­ que coexigit in sua actione virtutem non volun­
iam non esset eternus; etiam non est resistentia
sione probat Aristoteles quod motus celi sit tariam, quia omne tale agit cum quadam violen­
extrinseca, quia non movetur dividendo me­
eternus. Iterum, etiam e contrario, quando es­ tia, unde in motu animalis est quedam violentia
dium, sicud grave, nec intrinseca quia non
set probatum aliunde quod esset eternus, ex et in motu spirituum et etiam in motu gravium
habet inclinationem ad motum oppositum aut
hoc possit probari predicta conclusio, scilicet medium dividitur violente. Ad secundam,
quietem, quia tunc illa inclinatio esset frustra
quod movetur infatigabiliter et per conse­ negatur quod esset virtus infinita intensiva
et etiam sicud dictum est quia non est grave
quens sine conatu et igitur a virtute voluntaria, nisi haberet resistentiam in passo et sic non est,
neque leve. Quarto, si moveretur cum fati­
igitur a separata et immutabili, igitur et cetera. ut dictum est; ymmo, nullius difficultatis est
gatione vel violentia et cetera, sequeretur
Sed contra hoc, obicitur primo, nisi celum movere celum. A d tertiam, de retardatione,
quod virtus movens nunc esset infinita inten­
resistat motori non videtur quare unus orbis dicendum est quod nullus unus motus celi
sive, quod est falsum, quia tunc moveret su­
moveatur velocius quam alter. Secundo, quia retardatur sed hoc accidit propter pluralitatem
bito. E t consequentia patet quia talis virtus
tunc intelligentia movens orbem lune posset motuum et ideo iterum fit velocitatio. Ad
continue remitteretur, igitur non moveret
movere orbem solis ex quo sibi non resisteret. aliam, negatur quod celum moveatur cum
per tempus infinitum nisi esset infinita et iam
Tertio, tunc una intelligentia posset moveri resistentia, et cum dicitur quod velocitas
patet ex octavo Physicorum quod iste motus est
quandoque velocius, quandoque tardius, ex sequitur proportionem, et cetera, dico quod
eternus, igitur illa virtus esset infinita. Deinde
quo non est resistentia; ymmo, subito, ut hoc non habet locum in motu celi, nisi
arguitur ratione virtutis moventis, quia virtus
dicitur quarto Physicorum quod grave in vacuo, similitudinarie, et quamvis Commentator dicat
est separata a materia et movet sola voluntate
propter defectum resistentie, movetur subito. quod si apponeretur una stella quod non
absque alio conatu, ut patet 120 Metaphysice,
Quarto, tunc homo applicans manum ad celum posset moveri ita velociter, dico tamen quod
ita non habet conatum remissibilem. Unde in
posset illud velocitare aut retardare ex quo non simpliciter non posset moveri quia intelligentia
exemplo voluntas humana si posset facere
resistit. A d primum, dicendum est quod intelli­ non potest movere aliter quam moveat, na­
quidquid vellet facere et non indigeret alia
gentie movent sola voluntate, ut habetur 120 turaliter loquendo.” (I have altered Mrs.
virtute executiva, illa esset infatigabilis quia
Metaphysice, et ideo sola causa quare una movet Kren’s punctuation and text slightly.) Notice
potest velle movere quantacumque velocitate.
velocius est quod vult mover<i> velocius et in the phrase I have italicized that Oresme
Secundo potest argui quia virtus movens ce­
lum est indivisibilis, igitur infatigabilis, quia non propter resistentiam et non potest movere says that virtus voluntaria would not have
ex alia questione patet quod fatigatio est dimi- velocius quia non potest hoc velle, quia volun­ an impetus to circular motion. In another
nutio virtutis vel dispositiva est ad talem dimi- tas eius est immutabilis. A d secundum, dico place in Questiones super de celo Oresme specif­
nutionem. Tertio, potest argui ex eo quod est quod intelligentia movens lunam non impedi­ ically rejects the application o f impetus to
tur propter resistentiam quin non potest move­ celestial motion. (Kren text, 565; MS cit.,
invariabilis et intransmutabilis, et ideo dicitur
primo huius quod talia entia non mensurantur re solem, sed quia non potest velle movere 33v )> where one o f the objections presented
tempore, igitur non potest velle movere una velocius. A d tertium, dico quod nulla potest to impetus is that its action does not take
vice velocius quam alia, neque tardius. Igitur movere velocius, ex quo potest velle nec etiam place in the motion o f the heavens although
 IO Introduction Oresme and the D e configurationibus 11

permanent, but is self-expending by the very fact that it produces m otion.13 I f this each o f which represents a celestial motion, time, or distance, will be an irrational
is truly what is meant by Oresme, w e can see w hy it w ould be o f no advantage to ratio.19 This then renders astrology, whose predictions are based on the precise
use such impetuses in celestial motions, for unless such impetuses were o f infinite determinations o f successively repeated conjunctions, oppositions, and other as­
power— and he w ould reject this for all such powers (see above, fn. n ) — they pects, fallacious at the very beginning o f its operations. A nd so there is a kind o f
w ould continually have to be renewed by G od. One might just as w ell keep the basic numerical indeterminacy which even the best astronomical data cannot over­
intelligences as movers. Even more crucial in rejecting the idea that Oresme uses come. Is it any wonder then that in the third part o f his tract D e commensurabilitate,
the impetus theory to explain heavenly m otion is the fact that he seems to associate in the course o f a dialogue between Arithm etic and Geom etry, Arithm etic is
impetus w ith accelerated m otion,14 while o f course insisting on the uniform motion shocked into asking how the intelligences as celestial movers could endure such
o f the heavens. Incidentally, in returning to the first quotation on the clock meta­ irrationality? For, and I quote Oresme,20 “ if anyone should make a mechanical
phor, w e should note that in the tw o places where the metaphor is given, it is not clock, w ould he not make all the wheels m ove as harmoniously as possible?” G e­
applied by Oresme to the whole universe but only to celestial m otions.15 ometry answers (i.e., Oresme answers) that irrationality o f ratios w ill not rob the
One o f these passages with the clock metaphor leads us into one o f Oresm e’s heavens o f their beauty or be inconsistent with regularity o f movement. Incidental­
most intriguing ideas, namely, the probable irrationality o f the movements o f the ly, his proportional analysis o f celestial motions in this context seems to belie the
celestial m otions.16 A lthough the idea itself is not original w ith Oresme, certainly opinion mentioned earlier that the proportionality theorems applicable to terrestrial
the mathematical argument by which he attempts to develop it is. This argument motions do not apply to celestial ones.21
occurs in his treatise known as D e proportionibusproportionum, i.e..,On Ratios of Ratios. Turning now to terrestrial physics, w e should note first that Oresme, along with
Oresme’s point o f departure in this tract is Thomas Bradwardine’s fundamental many o f the fourteenth-century schoolmen, accepted the conclusion that the earth
exponential relationship,17 suggested in 1328 to represent the relationships between could m ove in a small m otion o f translation.22 Such a motion w ould be brought
forces, resistances, and velocities in motions: F 2/Rz = ( F 1fR 1)v2lvu Oresme goes about by the fact that the center o f gravity o f the earth is constantly being altered by
on to give an extraordinary elaboration o f the w hole problem o f relating ratios climatic and geologic changes. But, he holds, the center o f gravity o f the earth
exponentially. It is essentially a treatment o f fractional exponents conceived as strives always for the center o f the w o rld ; hence arises the translatory m otion o f
“ ratios o f ratios.” A fter his detailed mathematical treatment, Oresme claims, w ith­ the earth. The w hole discussion is o f interest mainly because o f its application o f
out any real p ro o f to be sure, that as w e take a larger and larger number o f the the doctrine o f center o f gravity to large bodies. Still another question o f the
possible whole number ratios greater than one and attempt to relate them expo­
nentially tw o at a time, the number o f irrational ratios o f ratios (i.e., o f irrational
fractional exponents relating the pairs o f whole number ratios) rises in relation to in his edition to emphasize that the ratio of 15126, io3r).
the number o f rational ratios o f ratios.18 From such an unproved mathematical ratios is indeed the exponent (expressed as a 20 D e commensurabilitate, Vat. lat. 4082, io6r:
conclusion, Oresme then jumps to his central theme, whose implications reappear ratio) which relates two other ratios. “ Nam etsi quis faceret horologium materiale
19 D e proportionibus, Chapter IV (ed. of nonne efficeret omnes motus rotasque commen­
in a number o f his w o rk s: it is probable that the ratio o f any tw o unknown ratios,
Grant,262-309);Isis, Vol. 51,311, fn. 63.Grant surabiles iuxta posse.”
in Isis, V o l.5 1 ,3 1 m - 312, and in D e proportioni­ 21 It is certainly clear that, in Chapter IV o f
that motion is continuous (secundo, quia metaphor in Oresme’s D e commensurabilitate bus, 61, fn. 81, gives references to the doctrine his D e proportionibus, Oresme assumes Brad­
istud non fit in motu celi qui est continuus)- vel incommensurabilifate motuum celestium, seen. 20 of the incommensurability of celestial motions wardine’s conception o f a ratio o f velocities as
Oresme in answering that objection (Kren and Thorndike, A History o f Magic and E x p e r i­ in Oresme’s D e commensurabilitate, in his Livre de an exponent connecting two force-resistance
text, 567) agrees that the impetus is not ap­ mental Science, Vol. 3, 405. divinacions, in his A d pauca respicientes, in his ratios. If indeed he is doing this, then he would
plicable to the heavens because the motion 16 Ibid., 405-6. Contra iudiciarios astronomos, in his Questiones de have to assume that even though celestial for­
of the heavens is voluntary as well as regular 17 Clagett, The Science o f Mechanics, 438-39. spera, and in the Livre du del. We should also ces and resistances are different from those on
(“ de motu celi, dico quod non oportet, ex hoc 18 The appropriate Latin passages for this note that the doctrine is mentioned in his ear­ the earth, they still obey Bradwardine’s law in
quod est mere [vere?] voluntarius et etiam re­ argument are given by E. Grant, in Isis, Vol. lier Questiones super de celo (Kren text, 421; cf. some respect. But he does not really address
gularis” ). 51 (i960), 306-13. Oresme’s argument occurs Erfurt, Stadtbibl. Amplon. Q.299, 26r), in his himself to this problem, at least in any detail.
12 Clagett, The Science o f Mechanics, 524, 537. in connection with Chapter III, Propositions X- Quaestiones super geometriam Euclidis, ed. Bu- 22 Oresme takes up this question o f the
13 Ibid., 320, 532. X I, which Grant gives in full with English sard, fasc. 1, 24-25, and in the anonymous D e possible translatory motion o f the earth in the
14 Ibid., 532-53. translation in his new edition of the D e propor­ proportione dyametri quadrati ad costam eiusdem. third questio o f his Questiones de spera. See M.
15 See the italicized quotation in fn. 10, tionibus proportionum, 246-62. Grant has modi­ Finally, we should note a brief mention o f the Clagett, in A ctes du Symposium International R .
above. For another reference to the clock fied his interpretation o f proportio proportionum doctrine in Oresme’s Quodlibeta (Paris, BN lat. f . BoSkoviS, 1961, 217.
 12 Introduction Oresme and the D e configurationibus

earth’s m otion fascinated Oresme, i.e., its possible rotation, which he discussed in In discussing the m otion o f individual objects on the surface o f the earth, Oresme,
some detail in at least three different w orks.23 His late treatment o f 1377, Le Livre against the prevailing opinion, seems to suggest that the speed o f the fall o f
du del, is too well know n to discuss in detail, but we can note that many o f its es­ bodies is directly proportional to the time o f fall rather than the distance o f fall,
sential arguments for the possibility o f the diurnal rotation o f the earth already implying as he does that the acceleration o f falling bodies is o f the type in which
appear in his Questiones super de celo and his Questiones de spera, e.g., the argument on equal increments o f velocity are acquired in equal periods o f time.27 He does not,
the complete relativity o f the detection o f motion, the argument that the phenome­ however, apply the M erton Rule o f the measure o f uniform acceleration o f velocity
na o f astronomy as given in astronomical tables w ould be just as well saved by the by its mean speed, discovered at O xford in the 13 30’s, to the problem o f free fall,
earth’s diurnal rotation as by the rotation o f the heavens, and so on. A t the con­ as did Galileo almost three hundred years later, although Oresme o f course knew
clusion o f the argument, Oresme says in the Questiones de spera (as he did in D u the M erton theorem and in fact gave the first geometric p roof o f it in another
del): “ the truth is, that the earth is not so m oved but rather the heavens.” He goes w ork, the D e configurationibus, but as applied to uniform acceleration in the ab-
on to add: “ H ow ever I say that the conclusion [re the rotation o f the heavens]
cannot be demonstrated but only argued b y persuasion,” 24 giving a rather prob­
abilistic tone to his acceptance o f the common opinion, a tone w e often find in
natural philosophy is essentially conjectural, rather tentative approach was joined with a
Oresm e’s treatment o f physical theory.25 In fact, the more that one examines close­ for he often lets the argument lead him where strongly rational and at times naturalistic view
ly the works o f Oresme, the surer he becomes that Oresme was affected by the it may. A t one time in the Questiones de spera it o f the causes o f phenomena, as the analysis of
probabilistic and skeptical currents that swept through various phases o f natural leads him to express serious doubts about the the D e configurationibus in the next section will
conventional Aristotelian dichotomy o f the confirm and as is evident throughout the
philosophy^n the fourteenth century, and that this, among other features, dis­
terrestrial and celestial regions, each with its Quodlibeta.
tinguishes his thought from that o f a Copernicus or a Galileo, both o f whom, it
own mechanics. A t another time, as we have 27 For Oresme’s discussion o f the problem of
seems to me, were interested in unique and “ real” explanations. A n d so it appears seen here (see above, fn. x 1), the dichotomy is free fall, see Clagett, The Science o f Mechanics,
to me that Oresme expressed a deep conviction in his Quodlibeta when he tells us so firmly insisted on that he would not even 552-54. Interestingly enough, none o f the pas­
(and he speaks o f natural knowledge and not the true knowledge o f faith): “ There­ permit the application o f proportionality sages by Buridan, Oresme, or Albert o f Saxony
theorems to the heavenly motions because of seem to remark (as Domingo de Soto did in
fore, I indeed know nothing except that I know that I know nothing.” 26
the wholly different natures o f the natural ter­ the sixteenth century) that the speed o f fall of
restrial forces and the voluntary celestial forces. bodies is an example o f uniformly difform mo­
23 Oresme’s treatment in his Livre du d el and et terra moveretur circulariter et nos una cum And to make matters worse, he wrote a tract, tion, so that the Merton Rule o f uniformly dif­
his Questiones de spera are treated in Clagett, ea ita quod sol aliquando orit et aliquando oc­
Ratios o f Ratios, which has as one o f its objec­ form motion might be applied to this case.
The Sdence o f Mechanics, 600-9. l’or the discus­ cidit nobis sicut si terra quiesceret et celum mo­
tives the application of Bradwardine’s propor­ However, in a very interesting passage in his
sion o f the Questiones super de celo, Bk. II, veretur etiam sol in celo. Sed de isto motu terre
tionality theorem, constructed on the basis o f Quodlibeta Oresme describes a continuous
Quest. 13, see Kren text, 667-96 (cf. Erfurt, non intenditur in proposito; nec oppinio eorum
forces and resistances in the terrestrial realm, heating process that resembles the usual de­
Stadtbibl. Q.299, 39r-4ov). Note that in this est vera, quia si terra moveretur et celum (corr.
to celestial motions to show the probable in­ scription o f the action o f increasing impetus in
latter, he once more opts for the common e x terra) non, [non] videtur qualiter possemus
commensurability o f the latter. And, as a mat­ accelerating the fall o f bodies, and in this case
opinion or at least that he says it is the “more salvare ecclipses, coniunctiones et oppositio­
ter o f fact, Oresme’s essentially conjectural ap­ Oresme seems to believe that the continuous
common w ay:” (Kren text, 691; M S . cit. 4or); nes planetarum.” Either this was written when
proach is beautifully illustrated in the D e con­ action produces uniformly difform heating
“ Dico quod est alia via communior, et est Oresme was quite young and inexperienced
figurationibus qualitatum et motuum, which is here (BN lat. 15126, i09r): “ Unde nota quod pri­
Aristotelis, quod terra non sic movetur et for­ (since it seems to mix up diurnal motion and
edited, as I shall elaborate in the next section. mum producens et productum ab eo aliquid
tiores probationes ad hoc sunt illa experientia motion along the ecliptic in a way that later
Suffice it to say, it may be that he conceives of possunt facere et faciunt quod non faceret ali­
de sagitta et etiam de proiectis sursum et ratio accounts did not) or it is not by Oresme.
his figuration doctrine in its totality as a kind quod illorum per se. Ideo si gradus maneant a
que querita quo esset iste motus.” The motion 24 Clagett, The Science o f Mechanics, 609, c. 2
of grand ymaginatio or hypothetical scheme principio calefactionis usque finem etc., tunc
o f the earth is discussed and rejected in the 25 See the interesting article of E. Grant,
much like the more limited ymaginationes or continue velocitatur calefactio quia primus et
Questiones super libros meteorologicorum, Book “ Late Medieval Thought, Copernicus, and the
hypothetical and impossible cases that illustrate secundus generant tertium et hoc in breviori
III, Question 4 (St. Gall 839, 72V): “ Quantum Scientific Revolution,” Journal o f the History of
some special theory (as for example when he tempore quam primus secundum et primus,
ad primum sciendum quod possumus ymagi- Ideas, Vol. 23 (1962), 197-220.
conceives o f the earth as being pierced so that secundus [et] tertius generant quartum velo­
nari terram moveri circulariter sicut aliqui 26 MS Paris, BN lat. 15126, 98V: “ Ideo qui­
a weight may fall through to the center or cius quam tertius fuerit generatus et sic de
ymaginabantur quod terra moveretur circu­ dem nichil scio nisi quia scio me nichil scire.”
when he conceives o f the waters o f the firma­ ceteris, et sic continue venit difformiter cale­
lariter motu diurno et celum quiesceret et per Cf. 1 i8v: “ E t quamvis multis appareant faciles,
ment as a rigid shell with their center o f gravi­ factio, sed utrum sit difformiter aut uniformiter
illud salvabant apparitiones in celo, scilicet mihi tamen difficiles videntur. Ideo nichil scio
ty in the center o f the world, and so on). H ow ­ difformiter hoc non est certum, videtur tamen quod
ortum et occasum solis. Unde si sol quiesceret nisi quia me nichil scire scio.” For Oresme,
ever, I should remind the reader that Oresme’s uniformiter.” (Italics mine)
 14 Introduction
stract rather than directly to the natural acceleration o f falling bodies.28 In this
w hole discussion Oresme stands out as clearly superior to his contemporaries.
Other aspects o f Oresm e’s thought w ill be illustrated in particular detail by the
various works that are in the process o f being published in this series. Further­
more, my examination in the next section o f this chapter w ill reveal some interest­
ing speculations o f Oresme on inner qualitative structures. It w ill concentrate on
Oresme’s attempt to use a geometrical scheme to represent those structures. It w ill
also suggest the limitations that Oresme felt in applying mathematics to physical
phenomena.
B. The D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum
The mention toward the end o f the preceding section o f Oresm e’s geometrical
p ro o f o f the M erton mean speed theorem brings us to a consideration o f the w ork
here edited, the Tractatus de configurationibus qualitatum et motuum, a w ork composed
in all likelihood in the 1 3 5o’s while Oresme was at the College o f Navarre (see
Introduction III. A). In its entirety, the tract includes a proemium, a table o f chap­
ter titles, and ninety-three chapters divided into three parts. The first and second
parts each have forty chapters and the third has thirteen. A s I shall show later,
there is a strong possibility that Oresme undertook the preparation o f this w ork as
an elaboration o f the long section on the configuration doctrine appearing in his
Questiones super geometriam Euclidis. Speaking generally, one can say that the first
part o f the D e configurationibus establishes the tenets o f the geom etry o f the figura­
tion doctrine, applies the doctrine to qualities, i.e., to entities which are essentially
permanent or enduring in time, and relates it to the intricacies o f the internal con­
figurations o f qualities. In the course o f elaborating the doctrine o f internal con­
figurations, he suggests how the theory might explain numerous physical and
psychological phenomena. The second part describes how the configuration doc­
trine can be fruitfully applied to motion, i.e., to entities that are successive. Here
again after describing the external, geometrical aspects o f the doctrine, he goes on
to a detailed analysis o f how the actual natures o f motions, possessing some kind o f
essential configuration, may well account for certain sonic and musical effects. A n d
he concludes the second part with a discussion in many chapters o f how these es­
sential configurations o f motion go far in explaining magical and psychological
effects. Thus w e see his broadly conceived doctrine o f configurations giving him a
physical basis to attack magic, just as his elaborate discussion o f the ratios o f ratios
gave him a mathematical base to attack astrology. Finally, in the third part, Oresme
returns again to the external geometrical figures used to represent qualities and
28 See the D e configurationibus, III. vii.
Oresme and the D e configurationibus 15
motions. He shows how in the comparison o f the areas o f these figures w e have a
basis for the comparisons o f different qualities and motions.
Initially, I should point out that there are tw o keys to a proper understanding o f
the D e configurationibus. The first is that Oresme uses the term configuratio with tw o
distinguishable but related meanings, i.e., a primitive meaning and a derived
meaning. In its initial, primitive meaning it refers to the fictional and imaginative
use o f geometrical figures to represent or graph intensities in qualities and veloci­
ties in motions. Thus the base line o f such figures is the subject when we are talk­
ing about linear qualities or the time when we are talking about velocities, and the
perpendiculars raised on the base line represent the intensities o f the quality from
point to point in the subject or represent the velocity from instant to instant in the
motion. The whole figure, consisting o f all the perpendiculars, represents the
whole distribution o f intensities in the quality, i.e., the quantity o f the quality, or
in case o f motion the so-called total velocity, dimensionally equivalent to the total
space traversed in the given time. A quality o f uniform intensity is thus represent­
ed by a rectangle, which is its configuration; a quality o f uniformly non-uniform
intensity starting from zero intensity is represented as to its configuration by a right
triangle. Similarly, motions o f uniform velocity and uniform acceleration are repre­
sented respectively by a rectangle and a right triangle. There is a considerable dis­
cussion o f other possible configurations.
N o w we see that for Oresme differences in configuration taken in its primitive
meaning reflect in a useful and suitable fashion internal differences in the subject.
Thus w e can say that the external configuration represents some kind o f internal
arrangement o f intensities which w e can call its essential internal configuration. In
this way, we arrive at the second usage o f the term configuration. Configuration in
this second sense abandons the purely spatial or geometrical meaning, since one o f
the variables involved, namely, intensity, is not essentially spatial, although, Ores­
me tells us, variations in intensity can be represented by variations in the length
o f straight lines (see the different interpretation o f A . Maier in my Commentary to
I.xxii, lines 4-6).
Oresme suggests at great length how differences in internal configuration may ex­
plain many physical and even psychological phenomena, otherwise not simply
explicable on the basis o f the primary elements that make up a body . Thus tw o
bodies might have the same amounts o f primary elements in them and even in the
same intensity but the configuration o f their intensities may well differ, thus pro­
ducing different effects in natural actions.
The second key to the understanding o f the configuration doctrine o f Oresme is
that which we may call the suitability doctrine, and it pertains to the nature o f the
configurations in their primitive meaning o f external figures. Briefly, it holds that
any figure or configuration is suitable or fitting to describe a quality when its alti­
tudes (ordinates, w e w ould say in modern parlance) on any tw o points o f its base
or subject line are in the same ratio as the intensities o f the quality at those points
<
 i6 Introduction
in the subject. W e shall see as we examine the contents o f the tract in detail below
that it is in the elaboration o f the suitability doctrine that Oresme achieves an
advance over his earlier treatment o f the configuration doctrine in the Questions on
the Geometry o f Euclid. Accordingly, let us now look at Oresm e’s doctrine in some
detail.
T he very first paragraph o f the first chapter o f the D e configurationibus gives us
the essential nature o f and justification for the configuration doctrine:
Every measurable thing except numbers is imagined in the manner of a continuous quan­
tity. Therefore, for the mensuration of such a thing, it is necessary that points, lines, and
surfaces, or their properties, be imagined. For in them (i.e., the geometrical entities), as
the Philosopher has it, measure or ratio is initially found, while in other things it is
recognized by similarity__Although indivisible points, or lines, are non-existent, still
it is necessary to feign them mathematically for the measures of things and for the under­
standing o f their ratios. Therefore, every intensity which can be acquired successively
ought to be imagined by a straight line perpendicularly erected on some point of the
space or subject o f the intensible thing, e.g., a quality. For whatever ratio is found to
exist between intensity and intensity, in relating intensities of the same kind, a similar
ratio is found to exist between line and line, and vice versa. For just as one line is com­
mensurable to another line and incommensurable to still another, so similarly in regard
to intensities certain ones are mutually commensurable and others incommensurable in
any way because of their [property of ] continuity. Therefore, the measure of intensities
can be fittingly imagined as the measure o f lines, since an intensity could be imagined as
being infinitely decreased or infinitely increased in the same way as a line.
A nd, Oresme goes on to say, “ consideration o f these lines naturally helps and
leads to the knowledge o f any intensity.” He stresses, and I underscore this in the
light o f m y previous remark on the fictional or imaginative character o f the external
figures, that the line o f intensity “ is not actually (secundum rem) extended outside o f
the point but is only so extended in the imagination (secundumymaginationem) , and
it could be extended in any direction whatever except that it is morefitting to imagine it stand­
ing up perpendicularly on the subject informed with the quality.” (Italics are my own.)
These lines o f intensity, he continues (I.ii), ought to be called the longitude o f the
quality, but generally and conventionally they are called the latitude o f the quality.
N o w the extent o f the quality in the subject, if the quality is imagined as existing in
a line, is to be imagined as a line on which the lines representing the intensity
from point to point o f the subject are to be erected perpendicularly. This line
representing the extension o f the quality in the subject, which ought to be called
its latitude, is conventionally called its longitude (see I.iii). Thus the w hole quan­
tity o f any linear quality is represented by a surface (I.iv), a surface consisting o f all
the intensity perpendiculars erected on the subject line.
W e have been speaking about the quality o f a linear subject, which Oresme by a
kind o f shorthand calls a linear quality. But Oresme explains further (I.iv) that this
configuration technique is equally applicable to a quality distributed over a sur­
Oresme and the D e configurationibus 17
face or through a body. He says, “ just as the quality o f a point is imagined as a line,
and the quality o f a line by a surface, so the quality o f a surface is imagined as a
body whose base is the surface informed with the quality.” That is, Oresme is tell­
ing us that the surface quality can be represented by a three-dimensional figure that
consists o f the totality o f perpendiculars rising on the surface informed w ith the
quality. He then adds,
Moreover, since in any kind of a body there is an infinite number of equivalent surfaces
and the quality of any one o f them is imagined as a body, it is not unfitting but necessary
that one body be imagined to be at the same time in the place where another body— or
even any other body whatever— is imagined to be. [We can think of this taking place]
by penetration or by mathematical superposition or the simultaneous placing of the bodies
so imagined.
However, we are told, the penetration is not real and one need not imagine a fourth
dimension to imagine a corporeal quality (see the Commentary to I.iv, line 39). W e
conceive o f the corporeal quality as having “ a double corporeity: a true one with
respect to the extension o f the subject in every dimension and another one that is
only imagined from the intensity o f this quality taken an infinite number o f times
— ” Hence, in effect, Oresme is telling us that we can represent a corporeal quality
by an infinite number o f interlacing bodies, each o f which represents the quality o f
some surface or plane o f the body. But although Oresme mentions the representa­
tion o f surface and corporeal qualities on occasion, and in passing, he reserves his
full discussion for the representation o f linear qualities, and so let us return to
them.
Oresme again remarks (I.v) that the intensity lines should stand perpendicularly
on the base or subject line o f the figure, “ for otherwise the intensity and quality
would be [laterally] outside the subject.” That is, they w ould be outside the sub­
ject both w ith respect to the altitude, w hich he is prepared to posit in order to have
a two-dimensional figure represent linear quality, and with respect to the width or
extent o f the subject. He rejects the latter apparently because he feels that the more
immediate correspondence between the width o f figure and the extent o f the sub­
ject w ould be better preserved by having the intensity lines perpendicular to the
base line. His conclusion then is that “ no quality is to be imagined by a surface or
figure having an angle at the base greater than a right angle.” It is as if he were try­
ing to preserve some element o f physical representation at the expense o f achieving
greater geometric generality. A n d indeed the author o f the Tractatus bonus de uni­
formi et difformi, edited in Appendix II, apparently achieved such generality by
abandoning, or at least not specifying, the necessity o f perpendicularity.
It is in I.vi and I.vii that Oresme delineates his crucial and important suitability
doctrine. N o t any quality can be imagined by any figure. Rather no linear quality
can be “ imagined or designated by any figure except the ones in which the ratio o f
the intensities at any points o f that quality is as the ratio o f the lines erected per-
 i8 Introduction
pendicularly in those same points and terminating in the summit o f the imagined
figure.” W hen the figure that fulfills this condition is constructed, it is said to be
“ proportional in altitude to the quality in intensity” (see I.vii), and therefore the
quality is most suitably or most fittingly designated (convenientissime designatur) by
such a figure. Thus, if in figure A B C D , the ratio o f F E to H G is as that o f the in­
tensities at points E and G in the subject, and the same thing is true for other points
and their corresponding lines, then figure A B C D is a fitting one to designate the
quality.
K
The chief consequence o f this doctrine is that not only figure A B C D but any
figure on the same base, whose ordinates preserve these same ratios, is a suitable
one. Thus any lower figure such as A B M N whose ordinates O E and P G on points
E and G and all o f whose remaining ordinates preserve the same ratios as the in­
tensities w ould also be a suitable figure. That is, i f G H /EF = G P/E O , and simi­
larly in the case o f any other pair o f corresponding altitudes o f figures A B C D and
A B M N , then A B M N is also a suitable figure to represent the same quality that
figure A B C D represented. The same w ould be true o f any higher figure A B K L
whose altitudes on any tw o points preserved the same ratio as those on the cor­
responding points in A B C D .
The suitability doctrine is reiterated as Oresme describes the figures represent­
ing the basic kinds o f qualities. Let us alter the order o f Oresme’s exposition and
start w ith a uniform quality, which he treats in I.x on “ quadrangular quality.” It
w ill be immediately noticed that Oresme adopts a shorthand method o f naming the
qualities by the figures used to represent them. T he first kind o f quadrangular
quality is a uniform quality represented by a rectangle. The quality that is uniform
in intensity is obviously represented by a rectangle since the altitude o f the rec­
tangle is uniform throughout; i.e., the perpendicular height above any point o f the
base is the same. A pplying his suitability doctrine, Oresme further concludes that
if a quality is represented by a given rectangle A B C D it is also represented by any
rectangle on base A B , assuming that A B represents the extent o f the subject. This
is obviously true since in any rectangle the ratio o f the altitudes on any tw o points
is a ratio o f equality (i.e., a/b = i). The only proviso in the arbitrary selection
o f the altitude o f the rectangle is that if we are to compare tw o different uniform
Oresme and the D e configurationibus
qualities in equal subjects, say, one that is double the other in intensity, then the
doubly intense quality must be represented by a rectangle that has twice the al­
titude o f the arbitrarily selected figure which represents the initial uniform quality.
The same considerations enter into Oresm e’s discussion o f uniformly difform
qualities, i.e., qualities in which the intensity o f the subject quality varies in a
uniform way as it is distributed through the subject (see I.viii-I.ix). Oresme dis­
cusses tw o categories o f uniformly difform qualities. The first one is a uniformly
difform quality that begins from zero intensity and ends w ith a given intensity, or
which begins at a given intensity and ends with zero intensity. Such a quality is to
be represented by a right triangle. For this reason it is called in the title o f the chap­
ter (I.viii) a “ right-triangular quality.” Oresme is once more naming the quality
from the figure by which it can be represented. A gain Oresme applies the suitabili­
ty doctrine and concludes “ that this quality could be equivalently represented w ith­
out any difference by every triangle having a right angle on the base.” This is
proved by showing that the ratio o f any tw o ordinates on the base o f a right
triangle on a given base is the same regardless o f the height o f the triangle. “ There­
fore, some quality is assimilated to any one o f these triangles, and, further, the
same quality can be assimilated to any other one o f them and be imagined by it.
There is this proviso, how ever: i f some quality is designated by one triangle, an­
other quality o f similar but double intensity must be designated by a triangle that
is twice as high, and similarly for the proportionally greater [intensities].” Oresme
goes on to say that there are triangular qualities that are not represented by a right
triangle, but rather by triangles whose angles on the base are less than right angles
(see Fig. 5 , 1 .ix). These are qualities composed o f tw o uniformly difform parts, one
beginning and one ending with zero intensity, and the suitability doctrine may be
equally well applied to these compound qualities.
The second category o f uniformly difform qualities embraces those which both
begin and end at some given degrees. They are treated by Oresme (I.x) as a species o f
quadrangular qualities since they w ould be represented by a quadrangle having
two right angles on the base and an acute and an obtuse angle at the summit (see
Fig. 6 (b) for I.x). N o w if qualities fall outside o f those categories o f uniform and
uniformly difform qualities described by triangular and quadrangular figures, they
are difformly difform and are to be represented by manifold other figures. In sum­
mary, then, o f the various qualities and their configurations discussed to this point,
Oresme tells us (I.xi):
And so every uniform quality is imagined by a rectangle and every quality uniformly dif­
form terminated at no degree is imaginable by a right triangle. Further, every quality uni­
formly difform terminated in both extremes at some degree is to be imagined by a quad­
rangle having right angles on its base and the other two angles unequal. Now every other
linear quality is said to be “ difformly difform” and is imaginable by means of figures
otherwise disposed according to manifold variation__The aforesaid differences of
intensities cannot be known any better, more clearly, or more easily than by such mental
 20 Introduction
images and relations to figures, although certain other descriptions or points of know­
ledge could be given which also become known by imagining figures of this sort.
Three o f the “ certain other descriptions” or characterizations o f the various
qualities are delineated in I.xi-I.xiii. One such alternate w ay o f characterizing the
qualities and their configurations (and I reverse Oresme’s order o f presentation;
see I.xiii) is by paying attention to the so-called “ summit line” o f the figure, the
line formed by the terminal points o f all the intensity perpendiculars and which is
also called “ the line o f intensity” (see I.x). In the three basic kinds o f qualities pre­
viously described (i.e., the uniform and the tw o kinds o f uniformly difform quali­
ties), the summit line is a straight line. In the figure o f a uniform quality it is paral­
lel to the base-subject line; in the configuration o f a uniformly difform quality ter­
minated in one extreme at zero the summit line is not parallel to the base but it
meets the base, while in that o f a uniformly difform quality terminated in both
extremes at some degree it is again not parallel to the base but does not meet the
base. In all other non-uniform qualities (except those compounded o f the first
three types o f uniform and uniformly difform qualities), the summit lineis a curve.
It is evident that the summit line in Oresme’s system o f graphic representation o f
qualities is roughly equivalent to the segment o f a curve in analytic geometry, just
as the whole figure is roughly equivalent to the area under a curve between speci­
fied points o f the curve. The rudimentary similarity o f Oresm e’s system to Carte­
sian analytic geom etry is accentuated in the commentary appearing in manuscript J
o f the D e configurationibus, where emphasis is put on analysing the curve itself and
numerical determinations o f ordinates are made on the apparent basis o f the equa­
tion o f a circle in terms o f rectangular coordinates (see Appendix III).
Another means o f delineating a uniformly difform quality used by Oresme (I.xi)
is o f interest (and this holds for the configurations o f both kinds o f uniformly dif­
form qualities): “ if any three points [of the subject line] are taken, the ratio o f the
distance between the first and the second to the distance between the second and the
third is as the ratio o f the excess in intensity o f the first point over that o f the sec­
ond point to the excess o f that o f the second point over that o f the third point,
calling the first o f those three points the one o f greatest intensity.” This is similar
in modern parlance to saying that we have a figure o f a uniformly difform quality
when the slope o f the summit line is a constant.
The third way o f characterizing the basic qualities depends rather on the imagery
o f m otion (I.xii) than on a reinterpretation o f the configurations or figures, as had
the other tw o alternate methods. A point d is imagined as m oving over a line A B ,
describing a quality as it moves. I f d has a certain degree o f intensity and remains at
that intensity as it moves regularly, it w ill describe a uniform quality. If, on the
other hand, point d starts without any o f the quality, and during its regular motion,
d is continually altered and regularly increased in intensity, then it will describe a
quality uniformly difform beginning at zero degree. I f it has a degree o f intensity
Oresme and the D e configurationibus 21
at the beginning o f the regular motion and it is regularly increased or decreased in
intensity, it w ill describe a quality uniformly difform terminated in both extremes
at some degree. T o produce difformly difform qualities both the m otion and the
alteration o f d may be made irregular but in a non-compensating fashion. One
could, although Oresme does not specifically do so, apply this imagery o f motion
to the generation o f the figures that he has already used in the other methods o f
characterizing the qualities. Thus one could think o f an intensity perpendicular on
d that remains the same or varies w ith uniform ity or non-uniformity as d moves
regularly or irregularly over A B . The summit o f the line on d w ould trace the
summit line o f the figure as the line on d described the figure itself.
From qualities that are uniform or uniformly difform, Oresme then proceeds to
discuss and classify various kinds o f difform difformity (I.xiv-I.xvi). The first dis­
tinction is between (i) simple difform difformity, i.e., one represented by a figure
whose summit line is a single curved line, and (2) composite difform difformity,
i.e., one represented by some combination o f curved lines, curved and straight
lines, or straight lines and straight lines. In the category o f simple difform difform­
ity are placed (I.xv) tw o kind s:
every simple difform difformity either (1) is imaginable by a figure which is not a segment
of a circle nor proportional in altitude to some segment of a circle but whose summit is
determined by an irrational curvature, or (2) is imaginable by a figure whose summit is
determined by a rational curvature, namely, by a circular figure or one proportional to it
in altitude. And each of these two kinds of figures can be either convex or concave.
Oresme had already explained in I.xiv, one o f the most interesting chapters in
the treatise, what he meant by a figure proportional in altitude to a circular figure.
Since this involves a detailed discussion o f the suitability doctrine and serves to
distinguish the D e configurationibus sharply from his Questions on the Geometry of
Euclid, it deserves extended consideration. He discusses the case o f the quality o f
line A B designated by semicircle A C B :
C
And so I now say that the same quality of line A B is imaginable or can be designated by
a figure having an altitude greater or less than that of the semicircle by any amount you
 22 Introduction
please. For let line C D be drawn as a perpendicular to center D and again let another line
E F be drawn as a perpendicular to line A B . Therefore, since it is possible to construct
on the same points two other perpendiculars less than C D and E F but having the same
ratio between them as do C D and E F and in the same way to construct on all the points
of line A B perpendiculars which are greater or less than the corresponding perpendicu­
lars in semicircle A C B constructed on those points of A B and having between any two
of them the same ratio as the corresponding perpendiculars on A B in semicircle A C B ,
it follows that there can be erected on base A B a figure of less height but which will be
proportional in altitude to this semicircle and with equal reason a figure of greater height
by any amount you wish. Therefore, by chapter seven the quality of line A B can be
correctly imagined by any of these figures without it making any difference.
W hen he came to determine what the summit lines o f these figures o f greater or less
height than the semicircle were, Oresme, not know ing A pollonius’ Conic Sections,
was unable to identify them as ellipses or rather as segments o f ellipses (see the
Commentary to I.xiv, lines 14-54). He did realize that the figure o f greater height
was not a segment o f a circle. But he leaves aside the question o f whether the figure
o f less height was a segment o f a circle. It should be observed that the paraphraser
o f the D e configurationibus w ho prepared M S / proved that both the figures o f great­
er and less altitude cannot be segments o f a circle (see Appendix III). But, like
Oresme, this paraphraser did not identify the figures as segments o f ellipses.
Oresme then adds to this discussion some very important consequences o f not
accepting the suitability doctrine as applied to this quality imaginable by a semi­
circle. I f such a quality were not represented equally well by figures higher or low er
but proportional in altitude to the semicircle,
it would follow (1) that the intensity of point D could not be correctly designated by a
greater or lesser line than D C ... and thus (2) that any intensity would in itself determine
the definite length of the line by which it would be imaginable, and then (3) an intensity
would be equivalent and comparable [i.e., relatable by ratio] to a line or to quantitative
extension, and as a consequence (4) local motion would be comparable in velocity [i.e.,
relatable by ratio] to [qualitative] alteration, all of which seems excessively absurd.
But Oresme in his earlier Questions on the Geometry o f Euclid had drawn just such
absurd conclusions as the result o f holding that the quality imaginable by a semi­
circle can only be represented by the semicircle with the subject line as its diameter
(see Appendix I, Quest. 11, lines 49-5 5). For he there inferred that the intensity at a
point in such a quality could only be correctly imagined by one particular line and
not by a greater or lesser line (ibid., lines 56-61). He further concluded in the earlier
w ork that if the quality representable only by a semicircle were converted into a
uniform quality at the maximum degree represented by the greatest altitude (i.e., by
the radius), that particular uniform quality could only be represented by one partic­
ular rectangle having that altitude. Similarly, if it were converted to a particular
uniformly difform quality, it w ould have to be represented not by any right triangle
but by one specific right triangle. We can see that Oresme in this earlv w ork was
Oresme and the D e configurationibus 23
confusing the comparison o f qualities w ith the initial representation o f them. By
the time he composed his later w ork, the confusion was gone. For the proviso that
Oresme added to his discussion o f the suitability doctrine in the D e configurationibus
was specifically added to distinguish these tw o aspects o f the configuration doctrine.
Hence we can say that the Oresme o f the D e configurationibus w ould have answered
the Oresme o f the Questions on the Geometry ofE uclid by saying: (1) Y o u can, in fact,
represent the quality in question not only by a semicircle but by a figure whose
altitude is proportional to that o f the semicircle, and thus your intensity lines are
not predetermined in fixed lengths. (2) But i f you do represent this quality by a
semicircle, then a uniform quality in the same subject, which has the intensity o f the
maximum intensity o f the initial quality, must, when compared with the original quality,
be represented by a rectangle w ith altitude equal to the radius o f the semicircle. (3)
But when considered by itself that uniform quality could be imagined by a rectangle
o f any arbitrary height. A nd so underlying Oresm e’s whole treatment o f intensities
in the D e configurationibus is the conviction that while intensities may be compared
by comparing lines, intensities are not themselves spatial extensions. This is the
reason, as I suggested above and w ill elaborate on below (see the Commentary to
I.xxii, lines 4-6), w hy the reader must not take too literally the geometric and
spatial identification o f the external figure and the so-called internal configuration.
We need not go into detail here in describing Oresme’s effort to classify the
various kinds o f composite difformity since it is merely a matter o f his combining
the six kinds o f qualities already discussed (i.e., uniform, uniformly difform, ration­
al convex difform difformity, rational concave difform difformity, irrational con­
vex difform difformity, and irrational concave difform difformity). It is, how ever,
worth noting that in effecting the total number o f composite difform difformities,
Oresme apparently knew arithmetical rules for determining the number o f combi­
nations o f six things taken tw o, three, four, and five at a time (see the Commen­
tary to I.xvi, lines 8-17, where the history o f such rules is briefly sketched and
where Oresm e’s error o f calculation o f the number o f combinations o f six things
taken five at a time is discussed).
I n i .xvii and I.xviii Oresme extends his treatment to the figurations o f surface
and corporeal qualities. Such figurations and their characteristics are considered in
a way completely similar to those used to imagine the various kinds o f linear
qualities previously discussed. T he only comment worth singling out for purposes
o f our later exposition is his assertion (I.xviii) that “ with respect to im agination...
a particular corporeal quality is ‘pyramidal,’ i.e., imaginable by means o f a pyramid
•.. A nd similarly certain o f the pyramids are o f greater acuity, others o f lesser
acuity.” W e shall see shortly that Oresme uses variation in “ pyramidal” qualities
to explain certain physical effects.
Before leaving the consideration o f the external configuration o f qualities, Ores-
tne takes up tw o somewhat extraneous matters in I.xix-I.xxi. T he first o f these
chapters outlines a procedure for imagining, by figures, the existence o f contrary
 24 Introduction
qualities in the same subject, assuming that such qualities can be thought o f as
simultaneously present in the subject. For example, if w e think o f tw o coexisting
contraries, each o f which is uniformly difform beginning at zero intensity and ter­
minating at the same degree o f intensity, w e can imagine the qualitative distribution
by a rectangle composed o f tw o right triangles, the upper one representing one o f
the contraries and the lower one the other contrary (see the figure for I.xix). The
succeeding tw o chapters take up the puzzling question o f how to imagine and
compare difformities o f curvature. In I.xx he rejects their comparison by means o f
their departure from straightness since it is impossible to compare, by the use
o f ratios, tw o angles, each o f which is composed o f a straight line and a curve.
This impossiblity results from the fact that it is impossible, on the basis o f Proposi­
tion III. 1 5 ( = III. 16 o f the G reek text) o f the Elements o f Euclid, to compare by
either rational or irrational ratio an angle formed from a straight line and a curve
w ith an angle composed o f tw o curved lines (see the Commentary to I.xx, line 17).
Hence Oresme is led, after further discussion, to the conclusion that “ intensity o f
curvature is not to be imagined by lines__N or is curvature to be imagined by
some figure,” at least if we start from the idea that curvature is measured by depart­
ure from straightness.
O n the other hand (I.xxi), one might say that it is possible to compare the inten­
sities o f uniform or circular curvatures by comparing the radii o f their respective
circles, so that curvature is inversely proportional to the length o f the radius (i.e.,
“ the intensity o f curvature is a direct function o f the smallness o f the radius” ), an
observation that contains the correct notion that curvature is equal to the recipro­
cal o f the radius (see the Commentary to I.xxi, lines 5-8). In such cases
the curvatures of all circular circumferences are simply equal, since as will be seen in the
third part of this [work] later, if any quality is more intense than another but that other is
proportionally more extensive or more extended, then the two are simply equal. Now it is
a fact that the ratio in quantity of circumferences is the same as the ratio of the radii of the
circles of which they are the circumferences__Hence the curvature of the double circum­
ference is twice as extensive [i.e., twice as long] as the curvature of a circumference of
half the double [circumference]. But, in accordance with what has been posited, the
curvature of the double circumference is twice as remiss [i.e., half as intense]. Therefore,
speaking absolutely [i.e., simply] the [total] curvature of the double circumference [con­
sidering both intensity and extension] and that of its half in length, are equal and
similarly for other [circumferences].
Then one could apply these considerations to figures, e.g., em ploying the length o f
the curve, either converted to a straight line or left as a curve, as the base o f the
representing figure, w ith the intensity altitude being imagined by the radius o f cur­
vature. H owever, Oresme does not at this point go into the problem o f determining
the varying radius o f curvature o f non-circular curves, i.e., o f difformly difform
curvatures. But he clearly feels uneasy about this way o f representing the intensity
Oresme and the D e configurationibus 25
o f curvature. A nd so he passes to another way o f gaining knowledge o f curvature,
namely, by the m otion o f a point. The example he gives (I.xxi) is o f a point de­
scribing a spiral, i.e., a point which moves uniformly on a straight line as the line
revolves uniformly. A nd indeed here his intuition is sound, for curvature can be
measured in terms o f variation in radius o f curvature as that radius is angularly
displaced (see the Commentary to I.xxi, lines 60-80). He claims that the point in the
case o f the spiral describes “ uniformly difform curvature,” and this w ould be true
in his system if w e plot the lengths o f the radius against the sizes o f the angle (see
the same commentary). I f the tw o motions were not uniform and were not mutual­
ly compensating, then the point w ould describe a difformly difform curvature. He
seems to claim, rather vaguely, that the various difform difformities mentioned
earlier could be similarly described by altering the tw o motions, i.e., the rectilinear
and angular motions, but w e are not told how any specific difform difformity might
be so described. O n the whole, however, his intuition regarding curvature is
remarkably fertile.
T o this point o f his exposition— roughly half-way through the first part— Oresme
has outlined the character o f his external figures or configurations which con­
stitute convenient representations (or illuminating models, w e m ight say in
modern terms) o f the distribution and variation o f the intensity o f qualities in a
subject. Oresme is now prepared in the remaining chapters o f the first part o f the
tract to link these figures, or better, the general idea o f figures, with the internal
structure and arrangement o f qualities in real bodies and to suggest by these inter­
nal arrangements, or essential configurations, possible explanations o f numerous
physical and psychological phenomena. In undertaking this task, Oresme in
I.xxii makes some preliminary remarks that have led to some confusion on the
part o f modern scholars concerning the ontology o f the inner structure o f qualities
residing in subjects. The confusion consists in the manner in which the external
figures by which the qualities are fittingly represented can be said to exist in the
subjects (see the Commentary to I.xxii, lines 4-6). For in order to lead into the
basic idea that different sensible responses are brought about by different con­
centrations o f intensity in the subject, Oresme starts off w ith an analogy (I.xxii):
It is manifest that bodies can act in different ways as the result of a variation in the shapes
of these bodies. For this reason the Ancients, positing bodies to be composed of atoms,
have said that atoms of fire were pyramidal in shape because of its vigorous activity;
thus bodies can penetrate either more or less depending on the differences existing in the
pyramids. As the result of varying sharpness, it is certain that some can cut more strongly
and others less strongly. It is the same for other actions and shapes.
And since this is the case in regard to the shapes of bodies, it seems reasonable to
speak in a conformable way concerning the previously described figurations of qualities.
So, if there is a quality whose particles are proportional in intensity to small pyramids, it
is accordingly more active, other things being equal, than an equal quality which is
simply uniform, or which would be proportional to another figure not so penetrating.
 z6 Introduction
From this passage it is clear that when Oresme uses the ancient view o f atoms o f
fire as pyramidal in shape he is merely em ploying an analogy. His external config­
urations are not in the body as pyramids but rather they are in truth only external
figures whose varying perpendiculars have the same ratios to each other as do the
actual but non-spatial intensities at the various points o f the subject. A n d if the
qualities represented by small pyramids (arranged in a row like saw teeth) are more
active, say more penetrating or m ore pungent as in the case o f the hotness o f pepper,
it is not because the qualities are themselves small pyramids but rather because the
concentrations o f higher intensities that show up by pyramidal representations are
by these varying concentrations m ore active. O f course, it must be admitted that it
was undoubtedly the actual physical shape o f a pyramid w ith its sharpness that
first suggested to Oresme that there must be an analogical, non-spatial “ sharpness”
in the internal configuration w hich the pyramid represents and that this analogical
sharpness w ould make the quality more active just as sharpness can be more
penetrating.
It is from this chapter on that Oresme slips into the derived, shorthand usage o f
“ figuration,” or “ configuration,” that I mentioned at the beginning o f this exposi­
tion, a usage that applies the w ho le term inology o f the external figures to the inter­
nal arrangements themselves. H e does this as he outlines his principal contention
that differences in physical activity depend upon differences in figuration, a con­
tention that he in no way proves, or in fact could prove in the absence o f any way
to measure intensities. Be that as it may, he does state his concept succinctly:
Again, if the sharpnesses and curvatures of certain cones are of different natures— follow­
ing the imagery posited in chapter twenty— the consequence is that the figurations of the
qualities proportional to them are mutually of different natures. From this it can happen
that the actions of the qualities are also of different natures, since the difference in actions
arises from a difference in the figurations of the agent qualities__it is much more prob­
able that bodies have an efficacy or power arising from a natural figuration of active
quality than from an artificial figuration of quality.
I shall make no attempt to detail all o f the actions to w hich Oresme applies the
doctrine in the course o f the succeeding chapters. I can say, however, that quite
generally his discussion has the problem atic or tentative tone w e have found else­
where in his physical discussions (see above, I.A , fns. 25,26). For example, Oresme
tells us (I.xxiii) that the difference in qualitative figuration is “ perhaps the reason”
w hy a tin vessel, although more dense than a w ooden one, heats up or cools more
rapidly when a hot or cold liquid is placed in it. “ The reason for this is that the
rarity o f the figuration o f the quality in the tin, taken together w ith the corporeal
density o f the tin, is greater and m ore effective for this action than is the [combi­
nation o f the] corporeal rarity o f the w ood w ith its less porous configuration o f the
quality.” The w hole passage in w hich this statement appears is most intriguing
since it contains other interesting shorthand expressions. For what Oresme is
suggesting here is that not only are there different concentrations o f matter in
Oresme and the D e configurationibus 27
bodies that make them more or less dense and cause them to act in different ways
but there are also different concentrations o f varying degrees o f intensity that like­
wise affect activity. A n d so a body that is materially dense may at the same time be
rare in its capacity to receive and distribute qualitative intensity. The shorthand
way o f saying this is that the tin has a certain rarity o f qualitative figuration which
taken with its corporeal density makes it more effective in the heat action under dis­
cussion. T he rather tentative application o f his doctrine to such phenomena is
underlined once more at the end o f this particular discussion when Oresme con­
cludes (I.xxiii): “ N o w , i f in similar cases someone wished to assign another cause
or causes in addition to this one, I shall not argue about it. It suffices for me that
this could sometimes have a place [among the causes].”
Another example given by Oresme o f the existence o f different powers and ac­
tions dependent on differences in figurations occurs in the next chapter (I.xxiv):
For example, the natural heat of a lion is active in a different way than is the natural heat of
an ass or an ox, and it has a different power not only because it is more or less intense, or
has some such difference, but also because it is otherwise or dissimilarly figured in regard
to intensity. It is the same for other qualities of these and other natural bodies. And it is
possible that this is one of the causes why by no artifice can a heat other than seminal heat
be so tempered that a man can be produced without the propagation of a seed. For evidently
not only is the proper temper according to increasing and decreasing intensity required for
this action but also the proper temper according to configuration, a configuration which
nature can produce only in the uterus o f a woman and which cannot be contrived by art.
Incidentally, he does admit the possibility that in some species generation can result
from putrefaction or the application o f external agents. He also admits the possi­
bility that “ although intension and remission are attributed immediately to an
element, still configuration and formation ought to be uniquely attributed to the
heavens, so that a material agent such as a hot body causes heat which the pow er o f
the heavens shapes.” T he mechanism by which the heavenly bodies produce con­
figurations is never discussed and, as w e have seen in the first part o f this chapter,
Oresme was generally skeptical o f astrology, and so presumably he w ould have
thought that the influence o f the heavens on configurations takes place in some
natural way.
The configuration doctrine is further advanced as a possible or partial explana­
tion as to w hy certain precious stones or other things can produce curative or oth­
er effects (I.xxv): “ the cause o f this is a similarity o f this sort between the figuration
in intensity o f the quality o f the thing which is applied and the corporeal or quali­
tative figuration o f the thing which is affected or to which the application is made.”
He suggests that mandrake is a case in p oin t: “ Nature has fashioned its roots in the
image o f man, according to each sex.” Hence it gives to women the power o f con­
ceiving. A n d he goes on to say that while the general constitutional structure o f
some people might make them immune to certain actions like snake bites and that
some such general explanation might explain the effects o f occult powers, still
 28 Introduction
“ most often a specific and determinate cause lies hidden because o f the occult and
imperceptible figuration o f qualities__Therefore, because o f the hidden nature o f
this cause certain stupid necromancers have said that these powers in precious
stones are there as the result o f the presence o f certain incorporeal spirits which
have settled in them.” This is Oresme’s first attack on the necromancers, an
attack to which he will return in Part T w o in more detail.
E ven more interesting is Oresme’s effort to connect his configuration doctrine
with aesthetics. Certain things might be simply or absolutely beautiful not only
because o f the ratio o f primary qualities in them but also because o f their qualita­
tive configurations (indicated by the simple beauty o f the figures by which the
qualitative, internal configuration is represented). The key passage in which he
indicates the possible connection o f configurations w ith simple or absolute beauty
runs as follows (I.xxvi):
it seems reasonable, in regard to the difference in configurations of qualities posited
above, that those qualitative configurations which are similar and proportional to nobler
and more beautiful or more perfect corporeal figures are simply better or nobler— it is
perhaps possible that there is the same or a similar ratio of primary qualities in each of
two individuals that differ in species, but that these individuals differ in species and per­
fection because of the diversity of the configuration of their constitutional qualities. And
similarly in the same species [they differ] according as one participates more perfectly in,
or attains more closely to, the most perfect configuration of qualities due its species.
W hile things may be absolutely beautiful, the judgment o f beauty depends on the
appreciation o f the perceiver, and they thus may be said to be relatively beautiful
with respect to the observer. A t the base o f relative beauty is compatibility or
harmony o f configurations. Just as some rational ratios seem to fit together better
with rational ratios than they do with surds, because o f the nature o f things, so
some configurations seem to fit together better than do others. “ Some,” he tells us
(I.xxvii), “ are mutually conformable or fit together better, while others do not fit
together w ell.” Such a doctrine explains natural friendship or hostility.
Therefore, these two causes— the relation of the ratios of natural qualities and the relation
of their configurations— unite, along with certain other causes beyond our present topic,
to produce either the natural friendship or natural hostility of one species toward an­
other.
This explains w hy certain people like other people, w hy certain species like other
species (man and dog), w hy some people like certain things and others do not like
the same things (even though the things themselves are simply or naturally beauti­
ful). It may also explain w hy some inanimate things attract other inanimate things.
“ For example,” Oresme says (I.xxviii), “ it can be said w ith probability that a mag­
net attracts iron because o f a certain natural bond which they mutually possess as
the result (i) o f the fitting accord between the ratio o f the [natural] qualities o f one
with the ratio o f the natural qualities o f the other, and (2) o f the fitting accord be­
Oresme and the D e configurationibus 29
tween the configurations o f the qualities o f this sort in each o f them.” In a very
similar way diversities in the pleasure different people have in touching, tasting,
and imagining things are laid to the same tw o-fold doctrine o f fitting accord (see
I.xxx).
W ith this discussion o f perceptions and imagination, we are led into the realm
o f psychological phenomena. In doing this, Oresme introduces still another deriv­
ed or analogical meaning o f “ configuration.” In the third sense it is used to repre­
sent a kind o f spiritual configuration within the mind, i.e., a configuration o f
intellective power (I.xxxi).
Accidents of the sensitive soul are, in accordance with the extension of the subject,
figured in the organs with respect to uniformity and difformity in completely the same
way as are sensibles or the other qualities of which we have spoken before. Now, forms
impressed in the exterior senses pass away immediately when the sensibles are with­
drawn. But in the interior sense likenesses or forms remain even in the absence of the
sensibles, just as an imprint remains in wax after the seal has been removed. However,
the organ of the interior sense is not in itself differently shaped according to quantity by
the impressed species or form but is only figured qualitatively in the same way that the
corporeal figure of the eye is not in itself changed by receiving a species o f color. There­
fore, the interior sense or its organ is figured qualitatively in a variety of ways depending
on the diversity of the forms or species which it receives. For if these species are not much
varied, then the figuration of the sense tends more toward uniformity, and by the amount
that they are more diversified, by that same amount will such figuration be more difform
or more removed from uniformity. And although intellective power is indivisible and inorganic
and hence is not figured properly either according to body or quality, still there can be improperly
imagined in it, by some means, a certain spiritual configuration corresponding to the configuration of
the sense, because its intellection depends on the sense. Therefore, just as the interior sense some­
times approaches uniformity and evenness and sometimes is figured with great difformity and, as
it were, unevenness, so conformably we ought to speak of the power of the intellect in its own way.
(Italics mine)
In fact, Oresme goes on to say (I.xxxii), this spiritual configuration can be tempo­
rary and depart quickly after the initial stimulus or it might be more lasting or
even permanent and thus predispose the intellective power to act in a certain way.
More specifically, he suggests the analogy o f making impressions in leather, some
o f which are temporary and others more permanent. “ Therefore, just as it is in
the case o f this quantitative figuration, so similarly we ought to imagine it to be in
the case o f qualitative figuration o f sensitive power, and, in a certain corresponding
way, in the case o f spiritual configuration o f intellective pow er.” Thus his configu­
ration doctrine becomes all-embracing o f physical and psychological phenomena.
A m ong the psychological phenomena treated by Oresme are visions and prophe­
cy. In his analysis o f them (I.xxxiii) Oresme draws a basic comparison between the
reflecting capacities o f mirrors and the prophetic or visionary powers o f souls.
Just as a clear and polished mirror reflects better, so a soul with passions assuaged
and removed from the tumult o f mundane thoughts is better able to prophesy or
 3° Introduction
have visions. Some souls are “ disposed by birth to visions,” but even they have to
be purified and cleansed before they can act effectively (I.xxxiv). In discussion o f the
contamination o f souls and mirrors, Oresme appears to accept the opinion— as
old as Aristotle— that a spotless and clean mirror can become cloudy if looked
upon by a menstruating woman. In the same w ay a pure mind can be “ possessed
and indelibly polluted by the sight o f an unchaste woman, and by th is... rendered
unsuitable for visions.”
Carrying the analogy between mirrors and souls further, Oresme holds (I.xxxv)
that just as differently shaped mirrors can produce images o f varying size and
faithfulness, so different souls can tend to m agnify or alter the future event they are
foreseeing so as to make it seem “ greater or more terrible” than it will be. He draws
a similar analogy in I.xxxvi when he speaks o f the sun being reflected in a scattered
and disorderly w ay by the quivering surface o f the water so that the shape is not
represented but only its light. In a similar w ay sometimes the soul is unable to see
the manner or shape o f a future or hidden event, although it is able to have a dis­
turbed premonition or foreboding o f the future event, to represent, “ as it were,
the color o f the thing in a confused w ay.” “ In this way, then, the thing itself is not
seen distinctly because o f the difformity o f the soul or because it is rough and un­
polished as the result o f [its] variety o f thoughts or o f being agitated by the fluc­
tuating movements o f passions, the situation being o f the same sort as we have
described in connection with inanimate mirrors and quivering water.”
In I.xxxvii-I.xl, further analogies between catoptrics and visionary activity are
presented. The difficulty that souls experience in prophesying accurately is stressed
and laid to the aforementioned deformations. In fact, Oresme suggests (I.xxxix)
that we ought to be most suspicious o f prophecies that specify details, for “ it is
not a characteristic o f the prophetic style to determine all things with particularity
and in detail but rather to do so less distinctly.”
Oresme concludes his discussion o f visions and the first part o f his w ork (I.xl)
w ith a brief exposition o f the efficient causes o f visions. He also discusses the causes
o f those experiences which are not properly visions o f future events, such as the
dream visions o f those “ w ho are in a frenzy or w ho are sick,” and their causes are
obviously morbid. True visions o f future events cannot take place by the irradia­
tion o f the thing seen upon the soul, or vice versa, since “ it is impossible that a
future thing emits or receives rays, for no vestige remains as it has not yet existed.”
Since a true vision o f future events does not take place by irradiation, he concludes
that it takes place “ either as the result o f things that are the causes o f the things
seen, such as an influence from the heavens, or it takes place as the result o f separate
and divine cognizing substances, which is probable.” This latter possibility sug­
gests the reason that “ such a vison is called ‘divination.’ ” “ Therefore, such a
[true] vision is caused by intelligences, or by good or bad angels, or immediately
by G o d .”
In Part T w o o f the D e configurationibus Oresme applies his configuration doctrine
Oresme and the D e configurationibus 31
to entities whose essence is succession. External configurations can be usefully
applied to m otion, and, as w e shall see in our next chapter, it is their application to
motion that has had the most enduring historical consequence. W e learn in Ores-
me’s initial chapter that the velocity o f motion, i.e., the intensity o f motion, can
vary from instant to instant in time and it can also vary from point to point in a
moving subject. “ A n d so m otion has tw o extensions, one that pertains to the sub­
ject and the other that pertains to time.” It also has one intensity. “ N o w the tw o
extensions can be imagined in a certain way as mutually intersecting at right angles
in the manner o f a cross, so that the extension o f duration ought to be said to be
‘longitude’ and the extension in subject ought to be called ‘latitude,’ while the in­
tensity [which w ould be at right angles to both extensions] could be called the ‘alti­
tude’ o f this motion or velocity.” But in fact Oresme conforms to common usage
and calls both extensions by the name o f longitude and the intensity by the name o f
latitude. It is thus clear that Oresme has proposed a rudimentary geometric system
o f three coordinates, any tw o o f which intersect at right angles (see also the Com ­
mentary to Il.i, lines 12-13). A lthough he alludes to examples o f motion where
variations in velocity are considered simultaneously w ith respect to both subject
and time, as w e shall see in a moment, he does not rigorously apply the three-
dimensional system to their simultaneous consideration in later chapters. In fact,
it is his procedure usually to study variation in velocity in time separately from
variation o f velocity in subject. H owever, at this point he remarks on certain dif­
ferences in term inology that might be applied to these tw o kinds o f velocity dis­
tribution. W hen the variation o f velocity is in the subject (e.g., in a rotary body,
the curvilinear velocities o f the various points vary), the variation ought to be call­
ed “ difformity” (and the absence o f such variation “ uniformity” ). O n the other
hand, when the variation in velocity is in time, that variation ought to be called
“ irregularity” (and its absence, “ regularity” ). Thus the motion o f the heavens
ought to be said to be “ difform” and “ regular,” that o f a falling body, “ uniform ”
and “ irregular.” In fact, Oresme follows customary usage by most often calling
any variation, whether in subject or in time, difformity. In his general conclusions
regarding the variation o f velocity, Oresme is the heir o f the M erton College kine-
maticists o f the 1330’s and 1 340’s (see the Commentary to Il.i, lines 33-34).
In II.ii Oresme passes on to the nature o f time itself, discussing various defini­
tions o f it, and distinguishing it in a conventional manner from motion while
noting its intimate connection therewith (see the full Commentary to Il.ii). His
main point is that time is not subject to intensive increase or decrease and thus
cannot properly be said to be uniform or difform, as o f course the velocity o f m o­
tion can. A nd so it is to the velocity o f motion, which can be varied according to
degrees, that Oresme turns. In turning to the variation in velocity in terms o f
intensive degrees, Oresme offers a definition o f “ a greater degree o f velocity”
(H.iii):
 32
Introduction
... in local motion that degree of velocity is greater and more intense by means of which
more space or distance would be traversed. In alteration, similarly, that degree of velocity
is greater by means of which more intensity of quality would be acquired or lost; and so
in augmentation, by means of which more quantity is acquired, and in diminution, by
means of which more quantity or extension is lost.
The use o f the subjunctive “ w ould” is important, for a “ degree” o f velocity implies
an infinitesimal time element and in order to get a proper measure one w ould have
to suppose the body m oving uniformly with that degree over a specified time (see
the Commentary to Il.iii, line 15).
V elocity is measured in a variety o f ways (Il.iv). One distinction is between
“ velocity o f m otion” and “ velocity o f circuiting,” that is, between linear and
angular velocities, the one being measured by the linear space traversed and the
other by the angle described. Thus it can happen that one body can m ove in curvi­
linear velocity more quickly than another and yet circuit more slowly. A nother
distinction is between velocity o f motion generally considered and velocity o f
descent, the one being measured by the space traversed and the other by the com­
ponent o f linear motion toward the center. Thus one body might m ove along a
transversal line with the same speed or velocity o f motion that another body trav­
erses a direct line toward the center and yet it is clear that the latter body “ de­
scends” more quickly. Oresme then adds a further and complicating distinction
regarding motion o f descent. In this further view , he seems to be saying that i f
velocity o f descent is a function o f the proportionate nearness to the center, then
one could imagine a body descending w ith a uniform velocity o f motion and yet
when it was near the center its velocity o f descent w ould be said to be quicker than
when it was descending from farther out because when descending from nearer the
center it approaches the center proportionately faster. These various distinctions
between velocity o f m otion and velocity o f descent also played a role in Oresme’s
Questiones de spera (see the Commentary to Il.iv, lines 19-29). Similar distinctions
can be made for alteration and augmentation. But in spite o f all o f these distinctions,
it can be said universally that “ that degree o f velocity is more intense or greater by
means o f which in an equal time the subject becomes more o f the kind according to
whose denomination the velocity o f acquisition is defined— whatever that partic­
ular denomination might be.” This, then, is a summary repetition o f the definition
o f a greater degree o f velocity mentioned earlier but w ith the specification o f the
equality o f time added to the prior definition. He notes further that he is chiefly
concerned with local m otion and alteration.
Further variations in movement, or as he calls them “ successions in m otion,”
are mentioned (II.v) and are reduced to those previously discussed. Three such
successions are mentioned: (1) succession in the inception o f motion. “ A case in
point is if point d is imagined to flow over mobile A .B so that the part o f mobile A B
traversed by point d is m oved and the part not yet traversed remains at rest until
traversed by point d, as in a pliable rod, which w ould begin to be m oved in this
Oresme and the D e configurationibus 33
w ay;” (2) succession according to quantitative parts in the generation o f substantial,
material form, as in the generation o f fire. These tw o successions and other simple
examples are assimilable to local motion, as the first case makes clear. (3) A further
succession is acceleration or the quickening o f velocity (velocitatio) :
There can be imagined one further succession, for every velocity is capable of being
increased in intensity and decreased in intensity. Now its continuous increase in intensity
is called acceleration, and indeed this acceleration or augmentation o f velocity can take
place more quickly or more slowly. Whence it sometimes happens that velocity is in­
creasing and acceleration is decreasing, while sometimes both are simultaneously in­
creasing. Similarly acceleration of this sort sometimes takes place uniformly and some­
times non-uniformly and in diverse ways.
A ll u f these considerations o f acceleration had been considered by the Merton
College authors and treated most brilliantly by Richard Swineshead in his Liber
calculationum (see the Commentary to II.v, lines 27-32). Oresme goes on to say that
accelerations are reducible to the kinds o f uniformity and difformity mentioned
previously, namely uniformity and difformity according to the parts o f the subject
or according to parts o f the time.
Accordingly Oresme turns to the details o f the configuration o f uniform and
difform velocities, first when considered as distributed in a subject and then when
considered as distributed in time. He notes (Il.vi) that, with respect to variation o f
velocity in the quantitative parts o f the subject, the same kinds o f figures apply as
in the variations o f qualities discussed in the first part: “ (1) in being terminated at
[some] degree or at no degree, and (2) that some difformity is simple and some com­
posite, and (3) that the composite difformity is distinguishable in many w ays.” He
suggests, for example, that a right triangle w ill represent the velocity that is uni­
formly difform throughout the subject and terminates at zero degree, the base line
being the subject line and the perpendiculars the intensity o f velocity lines. Inci­
dentally, it is evident that, since (1) the configuration doctrine is applied in an
exactly similar w ay in representing velocity variation in time, as w e shall see, and
since (2) in the third part the so-called M erton Rule o f uniform acceleration is proved
by the equation o f a rectangle representing a uniform motion at the velocity o f the
middle instant o f time with a right triangle representing the uniform acceleration, a
similar equation could be used to prove the first theorem o f Gerard o f Brussels’
thirteenth-century w ork D e motu, a theorem that holds that a rotating radius “ is
moved equally as” (is made uniform by) the motion o f its middle point (see the
Commentary to Il.vi, lines 13-23).
Continuing his analysis o f variation o f velocity o f m otion distributed through a
subject, Oresme notes (Il.vii) that there is a difference between local motion and
alteration. A line can be difformly altered as to quality and still remain straight or
curved in the manner that it was prior to alteration, “ but a straight line cannot be
tnoved locally with a velocity difformly difform [with respect to the parts o f the
subject] and still remain straight unless that difformity would be composed o f tw o
 34 Introduction
uniformly difform velocities, as w ould be the [case in the] m otion o f the whole
diameter o f a circle [rotating about its center].”
Turning to the difformity o f velocities w ith respect to time (ILviii), Oresme first
remarks that since every velocity endures in time, “ time or duration w ill be the
longitude o f the velocity and the intensity o f the same velocity w ill be its latitude.”
Just as in the first part o f the tract he had noted that the ratios o f intensities can be
imagined by ratios o f lines, since for every ratio between intensities there exists a
ratio between lines, so now he says in good G reek fashion that “ although a time
and a line are [mutually] incomparable in quantity [i.e., no ratio can be formed
between them], still there is no ratio found as existing between time and time which
is not to be found among lines and vice versa.” He claims to be follow ing Aristotle
in concluding that since time is a continuum it can be represented by linear magni­
tude (see the Commentary to ILviii, lines 3-6). Similarly, ratios o f intensities o f m o­
tion can also be represented by ratios o f lines as was the case for intensities o f
qualities. Then follows the actual construction o f some sample figures like those
described in the first part o f the tract.
For example, let straight line A B be designated and let mobile D be moved through
time E F in any way at all— And let there be erected on line A B throughout the whole
[of the line] perpendicular lines [all] in the same surface such that the surface or figure is
proportional in altitude to the velocity of D in intensity. I say, therefore, that the velocity
of mobile D can be assimilated to that surface or figure and can be congruently imagined
by it, so that line A B , which is the longitude o f this figure, will designate the length o f
the duration of the velocity and the altitude of the same figure will designate the intensity
of the velocity. For example, if in all the instants of time E F , the velocity is equally
intense, then on any point of line A B there will be an altitude everywhere equal, and the
figure will be uniformly high, i.e., [it will be] a rectangle designating this velocity that is
simply uniform. But if in the first instant of the time there is a velocity of a certain amount
and in the middle instant of the whole time there is a velocity half [that of the first instant]
and in the middle instant of the last half [of the time] there is a velocity one quarter [of
that of the first instant] and so on proportionally for all other instants (and consequently
there will be zero velocity in the last instant), then there will be on line A B lines of alti­
tude proportional in the aforementioned manner and there will be [constructed there]
the figure of a right triangle designating the velocity; this velocity was in fact one uni­
formly difform terminated at no-degree in its last instant.
It is usually said by modern critics that w e do not have a true graphing system
here since Oresm e’s main concern seems to be w ith the total figure rather than with
the curves representing functions. But in Oresm e’s procedure o f starting with an
instant or point specified on the base line and then passing to other points with
other intensity perpendiculars and finally to the whole figure as a totality o f per­
pendiculars, w e have, I believe, a start toward the coordinate approach. This hesi­
tant start is to some extent reinforced by Oresme’s concern with the summit line,
and particularly in the case mentioned earlier where a uniformly difform quality (in
Oresme and the D e configurationibus 35
actuality its right triangular figure) is characterized by the constancy o f the slope
o f its summit line. One also hears the further criticism that Oresme’s configuration
system falls short o f a true coordinate system in that his coordinate lines are not
considered as indefinitely projected reference lines whose point o f intersection
constitutes an agreed-upon and fixed point o f origin for the coordinates. W hile this
criticism has considerable merit, may I remind the reader o f Oresm e’s earlier anal­
ogy o f the cross for his tw o orthogonally intersecting extension lines (see II.i and
its commentary, lines 12-13). A n d further may I anticipate later chapters o f the
third part by noting that there Oresme suggests cases where the latitude or longi­
tude goes off to infinity, so that either may be said to be protracted indefinitely if
such a protraction is necessary to represent a particular configuration (see the Com ­
mentary to Ill.x i, lines 3-22).
Turning back to Oresme’s account o f the external configurations o f motion, we
can note finally that in Il.ix he raises a dimensional distinction between the repre­
sentations o f variations in velocity according to subject and those o f variations in
velocity according to tim e:
... punctual velocity according to subject (as well as punctual quality) is to be imagined by
a straight line, and linear velocity according to subject is to be imagined by a surface...
while the velocity of a surface is to be imagined by a body and similarly the velocity of
a body is to be imagined by a body in completely the same way as was described in con­
nection with the figuration of qualities in chapter four of the first part. Instantaneous
punctual velocity, however, is to be imagined by a straight line while punctual velocity
enduring in time is to be imagined by a surface; moreover the velocity of a line with
respect to time is to be imagined by a body and similarly the velocities of a surface and a
body [with respect to time] are imagined by bodies, for one does not have to resort to a
fourth dimension, as was said in chapter four of the first part.
Hence the figures that apply to punctual velocity in time are like those applied to
linear velocity according to subject, those that apply to linear velocity in time are
like those applied to surface velocity according to subject, and so on.
Oresme now undertakes in the remaining chapters o f Part T w o to apply config­
urations o f motions to phenomena. He does so in a rather tentative way, in fact in
much the same manner as he applied the doctrine to qualitative phenomena in the
first part. Thus he uses such phrases in reference to configuration as “ perhaps the
cause,” “ can be the cause,” “ could be the cause,” and so on. For example, he
starts II.x by saying:
in local motion we see that something can take place by means of a difform impulse
which would not take place by means of a uniform or equal impulse— And so perhaps
the cause can be assigned as to why a certain fish numbs the hand of the fisherman
through the mediacy of the [fisherman’s] net: one would say that the motion of this fish
has such power arising from the figuration of its velocity that it moves the net and the
hand by means of the net so that in relation to the difformity of its motion the hand
becomes numb.
 36 Introduction
T he same non-assertive tone is found in the second example, which notes that a
lion with a swipe o f his claws is able to separate the tibia o f an ox from the rest o f
his body, while simple pulling, although o f greater force, might not accomplish
this but simply w ould drag the whole ox along. “ The cause o f this can be that this
m otion [of the lion] has such a power from the configuration o f irs difformity.”
N o t only is the tone o f Oresme’s application o f configurations to m otion parallel
to that o f his discussion in the first part but also parallel is his consideration o f the
beauty o f the configurations o f motions (Il.xi), which beauty can be regarded as
absolute (as in the case o f a beautiful religious dance) or as relative (“ a certain con­
figuration appears beautiful to some people but deformed to others, depending on
the variation in the configurations o f their constitutional qualities” ). “ A lso, one
configuration o f the velocity o f alteration helps or heals, while another poisons.”
O ne might suspect that, since “ any simple and single motion in the heavens is ab­
solutely uniform w ith respect to time (Il.xii),” the composite motions o f the planet
ought to be assimilable to beautiful figures, but, in fact, because they are composite
“ it is certain that each o f them is m oved with a difform velocity.” Hence it is that
“ some or all stars are m oved in one time w ith a more fitting and more beautiful
difformity and a more consonant velocity than in another time, as if to produce in
one turn a nobler dance or better harmony than in another.” This change o f har­
m ony or change o f conform ity “ can be one o f the causes w hy sometimes heavenly
bodies emit below more benign, and at other times less benign, influences.” It is
clear that at this point Oresme is not rejecting celestial influences, and thus the
remark seems to be favorable to astrology. H owever, I suspect that he intends
rather to give a more naturalistic explanation o f these influences, an explanation
that finds their causes in patterns and varieties o f movements (although to be sure
the exact mechanism o f how configurations o f the intensities o f movements could
bring about such influences is not touched upon). In support o f my interpretation
is the very next sentence: “ This can also be the cause w hy [certain] other causes,
such as favorable or unfavorable aspects, increase or decrease [things] — But per­
haps this cause was not assigned by astrologers because o f the fact that it is hidden.”
Thus configuration o f motion is presented as a possible hidden cause behind the
more obvious astrological causes.
A t this point (Il.xiii) Oresme adds the only statements o f the treatise relating to the
ontology o f the intension and remission o f qualities. He first remarks that there are
some things, like immaterial and indivisible substances, that are so permanent that
“ their essence remains the same during the whole time and it cannot in any way be
successive.” G o d is the first o f these. “ He remains indivisibly and infinitely in His
very self through His indivisible and indeterminable eternity, which is the same as
G o d Himself.” There are other things whose essence is permanent but which can
be totally successive in so far as they may change their intensity successively:
Oresme and the D e configurationibus 37
O f this sort are accidents such as ratio, similitude, curvature, rareness, light, and, uni­
versally, every intensible and remissible quality. For just as in the intensity of curvature
or rarity there is continually different curvature or different rarity while in the whole
time it consists of one successive curvature or rarity, and similarly in the cases of aug­
menting a ratio or a dissimilarity, so I imagine it to be in the case of the intension of any
intensible quality such as hotness or whiteness, and similarly for the case of the remission
of the same quality. Nor is there in such cases real multitude or superposition of degrees, as some
people think. Therefore, such a quality during the whole time in which there is alteration is
a successive quality and in any part of it it is different [from what it is in any other part],
but such a quality is a permanent thing whenever it is in such a subject which is not alter­
ed in any way with respect to this quality. (Italics mine)
Oresme has not, in this passage, told us how the alteration takes place, but he clear­
ly is rejecting the view that there are denumerable parts o f degrees in intension (see
Commentary to Il.xiii, lines 9-28). Certainly he is stressing that such an alteration
is a succession and thus a continuum, and, as the italicized passage indicates, in
such cases there is no real multitude or superposition o f degrees. A n y such acci­
dent that is totally successive during some time cannot possibly be uniform during
that time, although its intension (i.e., its change o f intensity) can be uniform. This
leads Oresme to the conclusion (Il.xiv) that some such accident— like whiteness—
which is w holly successive and whose succession results from its intension and
remission cannot be successive unless it is difform. A n d its range o f difformity o f
intension can be represented by the various configurations already described in the
first part. And, as in the first part, “ it fo llo w s.. .that because o f the diversity o f the
configurations o f this sort the effects and actions o f natural qualities may be diversi­
fied.” For example, qualities like hot and cold may be so varied in the configura­
tions representing their alterations as to be “ purgative or generative o f bad hu­
mors in human or other bodies... [and] capable o f inducing or expelling some
pestiferous quality.” “ For, as Hippocrates says, changes in the season produce
diseases— But such results are not always a function [merely] o f the magnitude o f
the change, but also, in addition, o f the aforesaid configuration In the same way
the causes o f many other effects can be assigned by follow ing the methods posited
in the last chapters o f the first part.”
H aving so briefly disposed o f the effects related to the configuration o f the inten­
sion and remission o f qualities, Oresme passes to a long discourse on sound and
music (II.xv—II.xxv). The treatment o f sonic phenomena is pertinent to this part o f
the tract since “ every sound is a successive quality consequent upon and caused by
the motion and agitation o f some bodies (II.xv).” He notes that in sensible sounds
there is a certain discreteness brought about by the interposition o f pauses, some­
times so frequent and so small that they are not detected by the ear. Boethius’ Music
is cited as Oresme’s authority. H owever, when even these apparently continuous
sounds are continuously divided, one w ill “ arrive at some particles o f sound each
o f which is simply continuous.. .[and which] is truly and simply on e.. .w hile that
 Introduction
3«
sound which is interrupted by insensible and imperceptible pauses is [only] appar­
ently one.” In this latter case the sound is only improperly said to be one. There
are, in addition, tw o other ways in which sound is improperly said to be one; they
occur in sound which is interrupted by sensible pauses and they are said to be one
b y aggregation. The aggregation is o f tw o kinds, one when the same sound is
successively repeated and the other when there is a simultaneous aggregate o f the
same sound from different instruments or voices. Each o f these four ways o f con­
sidering the unity o f sound is elaborated on in considerable detail in separate
chapters (II.xvi-II.xx). But prior to this elaboration, Oresme relates his treatment
o f sound to the configuration doctrine (II.x v ):
But sound, as well as motion has two kinds of extension. One arises from its subject
and this should be treated in the same way that the subject extension o f motion was
described in chapter six of this part.... But sound, as well as motion, has another exten­
sion, arising from time, and let it now be called the longitude of the sound. Further, sound
has two kinds of intensity, one in height of pitch and the other in strength [i.e., volume].
The difference between these is proved by experience, since the low sound of a trumpet
or a drum moves the ear more forcibly than the high sound of a pipe or a slender reed.
Similarly, after the striking of a string or a bell we perceive that the high pitch of the
sound remains always the same as the sound lasts but that the strength [of its volume] is
continually decreasing.
Hence, in the case o f sound four things are to be observed, namely, pitch, volum e
interruption by rests or pauses, and mixture. “ From the diverse combination o f
these four things almost every variety o f sounds originates, and to them [each] is
reduced, as it were, to root differences or primary elements.” T he first tw o elements
can be “ figured in manifold ways by the figures imagined in the first part o f the
treatise prior to chapter tw enty.” Variation in sound arising from the other ele­
ments can also be figured in multiple ways.
In passing on to the various ways in which sound is spoken o f as one sound,
Oresme is particularly interested in the beauty and ugliness o f sound. A n d though
he speaks o f the aesthetics o f sound at great length, considering beauty both ab­
solutely and relatively, he does not in fact relate the discussion very closely to the
configuration doctrine although to be sure absolute beauty does depend on the
basic consonant ratios and their mixtures. One o f the interesting remarks that
ultimately derives from A ristotle’s D e sensu (see fn. i and the Commentary to
II .xviii, line 8) compares mixtures o f colors w ith mixtures o f sounds (Il.x viii):
. . . just as in the mixture of colors by imperceptible parts if they [the sounds] are duly
proportioned as to quantity and intensity the whole will become beautiful and if unduly
proportioned the whole will be ugly, as is evident in the mixture of wools in cloths; or
also, if a top which is two or more colors were spun very quickly, then, if the simple
colors are well proportioned in quantity and intensity, a beautiful mean color will appear.
Oresme and the D e configurationibus 39
In other interesting discussions Oresme relates harmonic uniformity and difform-
ity to harmonic ratios. But not all harmonic ratios are consonant ones (II.xx):
The third principal requirement for the beauty o f this sound [symphonically unified in
the fourth way of speaking] is the [very] consonance or symphony of the sounds... and
this in a melodious fashion, for otherwise there would be dissonance or discord. More­
over this consonance is in accordance with harmonic ratios— not however in accordance
with all the harmonic ratios but with those which are called symphonic or consonant
ratios.
These consonant ratios had already been discussed in chapter seventeen and were
singled out as the octave, the fifth, and the fourth (i.e., z to i, 3 to 2, and 4 to 3) for
“ simple consonance,” and certain others like the quadruple ratio ( a double octave)
and the triple ratio (composed o f an octave and a fifth) which are “ composite conso­
nances.” Furthermore, in that same chapter a harmonic ratio is defined. He first
forms the tw o series: (a) 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 3 2 ,...and (b) 1, 3,9,27, 8 1,2 4 3 ,.... Oresme
then says: “ every ratio found between any tw o o f these numbers, and only such a
ratio, is said to be a harmonic ra tio .. . .whether both numbers are taken from the
same series or whether one number is taken from one series and the other from the
other series. A nd in the same w ay only these numbers are said to be harmonic
numbers.” W hile in general there is an obvious influence o f Boethius’ Music on
Oresme’s considerations o f consonances, the particular definition o f harmonic
number and harmonic ratio, which he repeats from his Algorismus proportionum,
seems to have been a medieval invention (see the Commentary to Il.xvii, lines
18-24).
As in the first part, Oresme not only talks about absolute beauty but relative
beauty as well. In the course o f this discussion, he examines such factors as novelty
or unfamiliarity, which may produce admiration and delight, and familiarity or
constant repetition, which may diminish our delight in a beautiful song (Il.xxii).
Our appreciation o f a song may be enhanced by the happy circumstances under
which it was first heard, or contrariwise it may be diminished by unhappy circum­
stances. Further, the mores o f the group may condition our appreciation or delight
in a song, some people liking one mode while others like another (Il.xxii). Sundry
other accidental circumstances affect our pleasure in music.
The pow er o f music to affect the passions o f the soul and body is also briefly
examined, w ith a number o f references to various authors testifying to its potency
to affect man and beast (Il.xxiii). The effect o f ugly sounds on the damned at
Judgment D ay is mentioned, as well as the pleasure produced by joyous song for
the blessed. A n interesting example o f how the configuration doctrine is drawn
into the discussion is advanced in connection with the latter joyful music (Il.x xiv ):
And blessed John in the Apocalypse, speaking of this, said that he heard a voice “ as of
harpers harping on their harps. And they sang as it were a new canticle, before the throne,”
etc. And “ new canticle” is said because of the continuous innovation in the figuration
 40 Introduction
of this difformity in sound without a disagreeable repetition of one and the same [figu­
ration].
Finally, the section on sound and music is closed by some observations on the
application o f the difformity o f sounds to the magical arts (II.xxv). In that part o f
magic which operates by demons, i.e., necromancy, “ the configuration o f the dif­
form ity o f sounds is said to have a place. For they say that some demons take great
delight in m elody.” H owever, Oresme, while accepting the existence o f demons,
is highly critical o f the possibility o f conjuring up demons by verbal formulas :
Others also say that such spirits can be invoked, conjured up, or compelled by a certain
verbal composition or configuration; and [they say] many other similar things which are
alien to natural philosophy and to true doctrine. For it ought to be certain to anyone
that demons cannot be ordered by men by means of such devices, unless, permitted by
divinity, they can do certain things for the deception and fraud of a miserable soul who
freely places himself in the hands of his enemy. Therefore... I wish to pass on to that
part [of magic] where some natural reason can be assigned and where a demon, even
though invoked, does not externally operate at all.
In this way Oresme jumps into a detailed discussion o f the magical art, a discussion
which, on the whole, is quite hostile to the claims o f magicians. His avow ed ob­
jective was “ to lay bare the falsity o f this malign art.” This attack has strong
similarity to the treatment o f magic found in the so-called Quodlibeta o f Oresme,
although the latter treatise does not appear to make use o f the configuration doc­
trine (see Introduction III.B). He sneers at the use o f strange signs and characters
by which, he says (Il.xxvi), “ stupid people hope that demons can be conjured up or
forced to appear in certain guises.” A ll the trappings o f the magicians, their mys­
terious incantations and sacrifices are tailored to “ the views and credulity o f the
men whom they intend to deceive.” (Il.xxvii) A ll they do is to produce fear in
simpleminded or highly imaginative subjects (Il.xxvi). I f such things as the ap­
pearance o f demons were really possible as the result o f the magical activity, then
one person should be able to produce them as easily as another, so long as they are
carrying out all o f the procedures (Il.xxvii).
And since this is not so, it follows that these things do not take place in something out­
side but rather in the mind that is deceived. This is also evident because those who cannot
see these things are of better disposition and constitution and of stronger and more secure
mind, while the others who can see such things are of melancholic constitution or of
weak and infirm mind (Il.xxvii).
The defense made against this type o f criticism by the magician is that only people
born under certain constellations and at a given moment o f time are able to reach
the spirits. But Oresme turns this argument about, saying that it may be that the
heavens influence the constitution o f the person and thus determine whether he
could be “ drawn easily, rarely, or never to a dementia o f this sort.” Hence it w ould
be that the heavens influence the relative credulity o f a person vis a vis the magical
Oresme and the D e configurationibus 4i
arts. Furthermore (Il.xxviii), magicians constantly seek out “ boys, adolescents, or
youths,” w ho “ because o f weakness o f mind and easy credulity can be seduced to a
greater degree and more quickly by these things, and most o f all those w ho have
given their imagination and thoughts over to carnal desires, for such ones can be
easily converted to these magical practices. .. . For often such boys, solely as the
result o f the stories o f old wom en which they have heard, at the slightest shadow
think that they see nocturnal demons or deadly divines and similar fabulous
creatures.” In the same passage, somewhat earlier, Oresme emphasizes that “ these
magical results take place in the imagination and not actually.” A nd indeed Oresme
emphasizes that old wom en o f corrupted imaginative power are particularly sus­
ceptible.
M any o f the so-called magical phenomena are reported by people w ho are sick
(Il.xxix). These “ sick people think that they see and hear demons and many other
fantastic things which have no external counterpart. But all o f these things arise
from the defect o f the interior sense organs and the corruption o f the interior,
apprehending, imaginative, or estimative pow er brought about by an abscess o f the
brain or some other cause.” Certain o f these effects take place by the inward w ith­
drawal o f the sensitive animal spirits to the interior powers, such as takes place
when epileptics have fits and fall. Oresme also explains hypnotic visions in a simi­
lar w a y :
For some magicians make a boy (or anybody else from whom they wish to have responses
by means of this art) look towards something polished and cleaned as towards a mirror
or a glass jar or a shining sword or at their nails or at some such thing from which vision
is reflected so that the sensitive spirits through false credulity, with the help of the extrin­
sic object, rebound to the interior powers, and the imaginative or cogitative power re­
sponsible for such an apparition is strengthened.... Thence it happens that it sometimes
appears to such people that the glass jar grows greatly, becoming as large as the heavens,
and afterwards certain things appear in it and finally it seems to be diminished, revert-
ing to its initial state when those spirits return again to the windows of the exterior
senses.
Oresme goes on to discuss at some length the psycho-physiological effects o f
such magical practices. He notes how dangerous this practice can be, sometimes
resulting in permanent damage to mind and body. From this consideration, he
turns to some o f the conditions necessary for the successful practice o f this art, e.g.,
the choice o f a quiet and dark place “ dimly lit and full o f horror” (II.xxx). It is
emphasized that terror is crucial to the practice. A n d since “ it is easier to terror­
ize only one or a few people than a group o f many people,” the magician is
careful to restrict the number o f people present at his invocations or conjurations.
Oresme has already asked pointedly: “ if conjuring does rightly take place and it
has the power to compel the spirit, w hy can it not force him to come in the
presence o f many as well as o f one person? H ow or whence does conjuring lose
its particular power w ith one [additional] man supervening ? This seems complete­
 42 Introduction
ly irrational.” Clearly the difficulty o f making demons appear to many people,
and particularly to those w ho are not terrorized, is an indication that “ such an
apparition is not external.”
Magicians operate not only by the power o f words in attempting to conjure up
demons but also by the application o f certain things or compounds. Th ey either
change the senses by poisonous potions, change the accustomed characteristics o f
the objects, or produce “ mathematical illusions” by the use o f mirrors and the
laws o f perspective. In all these ways they “ make certain things appear which seem
to be impossible to produce by nature” (Il.xxxi). In the course o f an extended dis­
cussion o f pestiferous and poisonous exhalations (Il.xxxii), Oresme suggests that
such exhalations explain the oracles and visions o f soothsayers. These exhalations
can be produced both naturally and artificially. W ithout detailing the relation o f
this kind o f activity to his configuration doctrine, he merely states (Il.xxxii) that
“ such exhalations have this power because o f the configuration o f the difformity o f
their qualities.”
The third root o f the magical art consists in the power o f sounds or words (not
indirectly, as used in the pretended invocation o f demons, but directly). This third
root is more pertinent to the subject matter o f the tract (Il.xxxiii):
It is necessary to recall how permanent qualities vary as the result of the multiple and
strange configuration of their difformity and [thus] have various marvelous virtues... and
further, how various successive movements have diverse powers because of the figuration
o f the difformity of [their] velocities; and [finally] how sounds, on account of the same
cause, have great and wonderful efficacies.... With these things given mindful considera­
tion it is not difficult to see— in fact it is probable— that the difformity o f some sound
could be either naturally or artificially figured in such a way that it will have the power of
changing something outside it, and principally in an animal which is affected by hearing a
sound of this sort. And it is possible that in such a case the shape of the difformity of the
motion accompanying this sound is effective.
Jerome is quoted to the effect that “ the action o f the live-voice has untold latent
energy,” and “ energy” is expounded by Oresme as meaning “ force (virtu s)”
Examples o f the efficacy o f incantations are quoted from Pliny, O vid, Lucan, V ir­
gil, and the L ife o f St. Sylvester. Oresme suggests that it is rather the structure and
the figuration o f the sounds than their meaning that makes them effective, the
principal reason being that such sounds are effective on animals w ho cannot know
their meaning.
Finally, Oresme sums up the mechanics o f the soul’s deception by the magical
arts (Il.xxxiv):
. .. the soul of a man appropriately constituted is sometimes deceived by separation or
reclusion in the manner of a mirror, and often this takes place as in a mirror that is falsely
turned and polished with, as it were, undue difformity, although sometimes it takes place
as in a true mirror__Again, by means of the aforesaid roots [of the magical art], or one
Oresme and the D e configurationibus 43
of them, certain corporeal spirits or fumes colored in diverse ways and variously figured
are formed in such a man. As in the case of people in a frenzy, or melancholics, some of
these spirits are black, some are red, some fiery, some aqueous, and so they are manifoldly
and differently [constituted] in quality, color, shape, and motion. Some perhaps are
bright; others are shining, as in putrefying things that shine at night. And so these spirits
are objects shining forth in the soul or in its interior organs as in a mirror. And it is from
this that arise apparitions of bright angels or foul demons, or visions of dead men, some
of whom are speaking.
H owever, lest w e take too naturalistic a view o f all this, Oresme adds: “ But if an
extrinsic efficient cause o f the vision accompanies the aforesaid spirits, or if that
extrinsic cause acts alone without the spirits, then it is possible for true visions o f
future events or o f other occult things to arise.” In fact, Oresme, as the future
Bishop o f Lisieux, and presumably as a faithful Christian, may well have felt that
he had given cause for the denial o f true miracles and marvels on which faith rested,
for he tells us (II.xxxv):
But there are other marvelous things so dissimilar to, and removed from, any natural way,
that they cannot be reduced to a natural cause by any rational way. Such is the appearance
of demons and their operations before a large number of people of differing tempera­
ments and sound in mind who were not terrified, and particularly where these things
take place at the simple word or command of a worthy man, prudent and uninstructed in
those malign arts, without the use of any of the aforesaid roots and without a sign or
suspicion of any illusion. Thus it is concerning the many other prophesyings and sooth-
sayings, and other marvelous and miraculous things, which clearly have been done by
evil or good spirits or miraculously in some other way. Accordingly, certain people err
with excessive foolishness when they simply deny that spirits of this sort exist and when
they say such things can be produced naturally.
A s examples o f those w ho so err, Oresme mentions Alkindi “ who reduces such
marvelous deeds to rays o f things,” and A lgazel (al-Ghazzali) “ who reduces them
to the force o f the soul and the power o f imagination. For if we judge it correctly,
it seems much more incredible and remote from reason for the imagination o f the
soul to be able to act in a place where it is not than for demons or spirits to exist,
and being present, to produce these things.” A nd so when all is said and done, it is
clear that Oresme belongs to the fourteenth century and not to the eighteenth.
From magic Oresme turns in the last chapters o f the second part to the uniformi­
ty and difformity o f accidents o f the soul, considered with respect to their duration
and change in time, and the configuration doctrine is applied to such uniformities
and difformities, the time or duration o f the accident being called its longitude and
its intensity its latitude (Il.xxxvi).
It is possible, therefore, for some apprehension, cognition, or imagination to last through
an hour. If this is continually of equal intensity, then it will be uniform. But if it is con­
tinually and equally increased in intensity or equally decreased in intensity, then it will be
uniformly difform. Now if during the hour this apprehension is unequally increased or
 44 Introduction
unequally decreased in intensity, it will be difformly difform. And we should speak in the
same way concerning appetite or affection, and thus of any passion. In the category of
difformity of such accidents there can be designated all the genera and species of difform-
ity enumerated and designated in chapters fourteen and fifteen of the first part. These
difformities of accidents of the soul are assimilable to various surface figures and one can
gain understanding of them by means of a knowledge of surface figures in the manner
described for difformities of velocities in chapter seven, and for certain other successive
entities in chapter thirteen of this part.
In examining accidents o f the soul more closely (Il.xxxvii), Oresme notes that
various accidents o f the soul change the body o f the person apprehending. So if he
thinks strongly about revenge, his blood may be stirred and face become florid.
Fear, joy, and other accidents produce different effects externally. T he same thing
happens to animals, the chameleon being cited as an example. Further,
it is possible that movement or passion in the body is varied not only because of greater
and lesser intensity of imagination or affection but also because of a diversity as to dif­
formity in the figuration of the aforesaid accidents o f the soul. For example, if someone
imagines [something] with affection or thinks about revenge, and the difformity of this
cogitation or imagination is duly figured, then the act will duly carry out the commands.
— But if the imagination or affection is not duly figured, then the act will not be duly
performed even though the imagination or affection is sufficiently intense. And in the
same way one ought to speak of a species of love or hate and similarly of other accidents
of the soul. For in this matter one ought to speak of motions of the soul in the same way
as we spoke of motions o f the body.
In the course o f Oresme’s discussion o f accidents o f the soul, he makes another
criticism o f superstition and divination (Il.xxxvii):
. .. sometimes certain movements of the mind precede future unhappiness. One of these is
excessive zeal in foreknowing the future. For just as an itching precedes the scab, so
superstition either precedes or accompanies misery__Further, this searching after fate
is not only a sign of future misfortune but is also its cause, since one is catapulted into
evil eventualities by the very fact that the mind is moved to act with unfitting difformity.
... When, moreover, deformed superstition is assumed, accordingly the mind, as by an
obstacle, is damaged; it stumbles, becomes slippery, and takes a devious path; and, as
the result of the evil auspices, it thence proceeds, as if lame, with a worse deformity__
Those, therefore, who are attracted to witchcraft and divination in the face of His warn­
ings are cast down by God as the result of the law of nature and their own faults.
N o w the soul can not only produce change in the body o f the apprehending
subject, as was previously noted, but it can also produce transmutation in an alien
body. H ow does such transmutation take place? One solution holds that this hap­
pens by command o f the soul alone, i.e., by thought alone. “ B ut” , Oresme con­
tinues (Il.xxxviii),
that such action arises from the soul by thought alone is excessively absurd and irrational.
...Furthermore, it is far removed from philosophy and out of harmony with our faith.
Oresme and the D e configurationibus 45
Accordingly an article of Paris has condemned this. Therefore, there is a second, more
rational way as follows: It is said that imagination or affection can be so increased inten­
sively and its difformity figured in such a way that it acts to change significantly the body
or some member of the person who is so imagining: i.e., towards health or sickness, or
towards some other special disposition__Then the body or member of the person so
altered sometimes can alter the medium and a body near to it at a certain distance, and
most of all if that body is disposed to receive easily such an alteration or impression,
[e.g.] in the way that the eye of a menstruating woman infects the air and by means of the
air infects a clean mirror. And this kind of alteration principally arises where visual rays
are directed [at someone].
It is possible by means o f this method, Oresme believes, to explain bewitchment
naturally. Incidentally, one should note that here again Oresme is careful not to fall
into an error condemned at Paris (see the Commentary to Il.xxxviii, lines 28-29).
The final tw o chapters o f the second part are concerned with the difformity o f
pains and joys. In this discussion, Oresme holds that pain and joy are qualities o f
the soul which are extended in time and intensifiable by degrees and accordingly
the configuration doctrine is applicable to both.
The third part o f the D e configurationibus treats o f the acquisition and measure o f
qualities and velocities. It advances the basic idea that the acquisition o f qualities
can be imagined by the device o f a flowing point, line, or surface (Ill.i). This per­
mits Oresme to conceive o f summit lines changing from parallelism to the base line
to non-parallelism, from straightness to curvedness, and so on, and accordingly to
apply the scholastic doctrine o f first and last instants to the various possible quali­
tative changes, e.g., from uniformity or uniform difformity to difform difformity
(IILii and Ill.iii). Thus since (1) in the case o f a line which changes from straight to
curved, or vice versa, one can give a first, and similarly a last, instant in which it is
straight but not a first or last instant in which it is curved, and since (2) a straight
summit line represents either a uniform or a uniformly difform quality or motion
and a curved one a difformly difform, therefore, (3) it follows that one can give a
first and last instant in which a quality is uniform or uniformly difform but not such
an instant in which it is difformly difform.
This application allows Oresme to construct a hypothetical case o f change,
which w ould seem to be naturally possible according to the configuration doctrine
(as, for example, the case where something becomes suddenly hot in the maximum
degree when immediately before it was cold in the maximum degree— Ill.iv ), but
which in fact is naturally impossible according to our experience. Oresme’s con­
clusion from such a case is that
an argument can be made for proving that a point is not something really indivisible,
nor is a line or a surface something, although the imagination of these [entities] is con­
venient for better understanding the measures of things, as was noted in the first chapter
of the first part. Many other things can be easily inferred according to the aforesaid imagi-
 46 Introduction
nation, which things, although not prohibited by this imaginary scheme, seem to certain
people excessively difficult or perhaps impossible.
Hence once more Oresme seems to imply here the fictional nature o f his external
configurations, fictional because in all probability the geometrical entities by
which the internal configurations are represented are themselves fictions o f the
imagination. He seems to suggest further that because o f the fictional nature o f
these entities, hypothetical cases that are naturally impossible may be constructed.
A similar conclusion is reached in Ill.x ii where Oresme poses by transformation o f
figures that it w ould be possible to have an infinite surface whose uniform quality
w ould be designated by a body absolutely infinite, and “ yet the total corporeal
quality w ould [itself] be absolutely finite. Thence the argument could be advanced
that a point is not something, nor is a line, nor is a surface.”
In III.v Oresme begins treatment o f his final large problem, the measure o f
qualities and motions by the comparison o f the areas (or volumes) o f the figures
that represent them. It should be understood once more that the comparison is o f
figures that are not given any numerical significance for physical measurement, at
least for the comparisons o f qualities. A t a later date such comparisons for figures
representing velocity changes will have a historical significance. In the first place,
Oresme examines the comparison o f uniform qualities whose intensities are the
same but whose extensions are unequal, and the comparison is made o f rectangles
o f equal altitudes but varying bases. He then passes on to the comparison o f uni­
form qualities o f equal extension but whose intensities are unequal, and this is o f
course a comparison o f rectangles o f equal bases but unequal altitudes. Finally, in
Ill.v i, he considers uniform qualities whose extensions and intensities are unequal,
that is, by rectangles whose bases and altitudes are unequal. It is here that Oresme
directly cites his earlier Algorism o f ratios for the multiplication and division o f
ratios.
Certainly the tract’s most celebrated chapter is Ill.vii. In it Oresme has shown
that a uniformly difform quality “ is o f the same quantity as w ould be the quality o f
the same or equal subject that is uniform according to the degree o f the middle
point o f the same subject.” This is proved first for a uniformly difform quality
terminating at zero degree by showing the equality o f the right triangle represent­
ing the uniformly difform quality and the rectangle representing the quality uni­
form at the mean degree (see Fig. z i [a]). The p roof is easily extended to a uni­
form ly difform quality beginning and ending at some degree. T he same proposition
and its p roof is further extended to uniformly difform motion (i.e., uniform accele­
ration) : “ N o w one should speak o f velocity in completely the same fashion as linear
quality, so long as the middle instant o f the time measuring a velocity o f this kind
is taken in place o f the middle point [of the subject o f a uniformly difform quality].”
It is clear, then, that what Oresme has done is to give a rudimentary geometric
p roof o f the so-called M erton Rule o f measuring uniform acceleration. It was this
geometric technique o f Oresme which was to have the most important historical
Oresme and the D e configurationibus 47
consequence in its use by Galileo and others, as w e shall see below in the next
chapter.
The question has often been raised in connection with this proposition o f I ll.v ii
and its geometric p roof whether Oresme realized that the areas o f his figures— that
is, the areas o f the right triangle and rectangle in this p roof— represented, or were
in the same ratio as, the distances when the theorem was applied to velocities. I
think that there can be little doubt that he did realize this, although he certainly
does not make a central point o f it. One has to remember that in the M erton Rule o f
uniformly difform motion, it is the distances o f the uniform motion and uniform
acceleration that are the same, and indeed this is so specified by Oresme in his
Questions on the Geometry o f Euclid (Appendix I, Question 13, lines 72-77). Hence
when it is shown in this chapter o f the D e configurationibus that the areas are equal,
it is evident that they must represent distances or, to put it more precisely, what­
ever ratio one area has to another one distance w ill have to another. This is even
more apparent in Ill.v iii o f the D e configurationibus where after determining the
ratios o f the various areas over the proportional parts o f the base, Oresme specif­
ically states that the distances traversed are in the same ratios as those already
specified for the areas. Thus it w ould appear that for Oresme, just as the simple
denomination o f surfaces was to be determined by attention to the dimensions o f
length and breadth, so the denomination o f motions was to be determined by the
distances which the areas represented or were proportional to, and thus b y atten­
tion to the “ latitudes” and “ longitudes” o f motion. Adm ittedly this is somewhat
obscured by the method o f calculation by means o f the compound ratios o f inten­
sities and extensions outlined in I ll.v i; but this obscurity rises from the medieval
and antique practice o f using Euclidian proportionality statements in w hich the
ratios o f like quantities must be used, so that the ratios o f the motions are deter­
mined by the form : ^ otaj v e lo c ity a _ ^ where y 1 and v 2 are the average
J Total velocity b v,
Distance a
velocities, while the m odem expression w ould simply b e : j ^ stan e ^
v,t,
That the techniques o f integral calculus are needed for more rigorous proofs con­
cerning “ areas under curves,” as Oresme’s figures w ould be called in analytic
geometry, should not blind us to the apparent fact that for Oresme these figures
were representative of, or proportional to, the distances traversed, or that in his
terms the “ total velocity” imagined by such a figure is strictly proportional to the
distance traversed in the time imagined by the base line o f the figure (cf. the simi­
lar opinion o f V .P . Z ou b ov, Traktat, 608-9).
Oresme’s consideration o f the comparison and transformation o f areas and volu­
mes is then extended to a number o f cases where one or more dimensions or parts
are extended or divided infinitely. They constitute in the first place proofs (or per­
haps better, “ illustrations” ) o f infinite series by means o f geometric additions. It is
not my intention to detail these problems here. They are quite clear in the text and
 48 Introduction Oresme and the D e configurationibus 49

translation, and, in addition, I have appended comments to the various chapters. ceived to represent abstract variations and distributions in such a w ay as to prove
H owever, as an example, we can point to the already mentioned Ill.v iii which useful in the development o f a geometrical analysis o f uniform acceleration, had
gives a geometric example o f the summation o f the follow ing series: little use, either in Oresm e’s time or later, in deepening and extending the know l­
edge o f qualitative and psychological phenomena. But the doctrine’s fate, both in
I + f - 2 + i - 3 + ... + — •n + ...= 4 its limited success as an abstract coordinate system and its failure as a useful mech­
Oresme does this by taking tw o “ fo o t” bodies. One he divides into proportional anism o f explanation, w ill be traced in the next chapter.
parts according to the ratio 2/1. He then divides the base o f the other “ foot” body
into proportional parts according to the same ratio. The first proportional part o f
the first body is then placed over the second half o f the second body, the second
proportional part over that first proportional part, the third over the second, and
so on, in the manner indicated in the figure for Ill.v iii, so that over the successive
proportional parts o f the base we have areas whose altitudes increase toward in­
finity. Incidentally, Oresme notes here that he has given “ a more subtle and difficult
demonstration” o f this elsewhere, which, I argue in the Commentary to Ill.viii,
lines 3 5-44, is either a reference to the. Questions on the Geometry o f Euclid or to a lost
Sophismata. T w o other infinite convergent series are treated in Ill.ix and III.x, and
in IILxi the figure o f Ill.v iii is inverted so that the base stretches towards infinity
while the altitudes o f the parts approach zero. In the last tw o chapters o f the tract,
Oresme adjusts and transforms the dimensions o f certain corporeal figures to
produce some interesting and seemingly paradoxical results.
Such, then, are the scope and main conclusions o f Oresm e’s imaginative Tracta­
tus de configurationibus qualitatum et motuum. W e have seen how he attempts to elabo­
rate and apply an essentially simple idea, that external figures w ill help in under­
standing qualitative structure and the various kinds o f movements to which sub­
stance and its qualities are subject because qualities and movements themselves
possess a manifold variety o f internal configurations.
H ow are w e to assay the fruitfulness o f Oresm e’s suggestion that qualitative
phenomena and phenomena related to the motions o f bodies and o f the passions o f
the soul may be caused by internal configurations? The point that is eminently
clear is that Oresm e’s association o f the configuration doctrine w ith particular
phenomena was entirely imaginative and hypothetical. He was in no w ay able to
establish by measurement or otherwise (except perhaps by an arbitrary guess)
which figures represent the internal configurations posed as the causes o f phenom­
ena. In only one case did he suggest a specific figure for a given phenomenon,
namely, a series o f pyramids (like saw teeth) to represent concentrations and pat­
terns o f pungent qualities. Furthermore, in that one case only the vague analogy o f
pungency with the acuity o f pyramids was responsible for the suggestion. N o
measurement or sustained empirical procedure was given as confirmation o f the
suggestion. Indeed, there was no way for Oresme to measure intensity o f any sort
(and, in fact, he rather gives the game away when he confesses in III.v that “ the
ratio o f intensities is not so properly or so easily attainable by the senses as is the
ratio o f extensions” ). The configuration doctrine, then, how ever brilliantly con­

II
The Configuration
Doctrine in Historical
Perspective
A. Origins o f the Doctrine
In discussing the origins o f Oresme’s configuration doctrine, it w ill be convenient
to distinguish Oresm e’s ow n historical justification for his system and the actual
historical steps that seem to have led to it. It w ill be evident from our analysis that
Oresm e’s interpretation o f the authors used to justify his doctrine was in fact
colored by the recent developments in the use o f geometry to represent intensity
both at O xford and Paris in the decades immediately preceding him. Oresme’s first
remarks on the subject (aside from certain analogies employed in his Questions on the
Generation and Corruption and his Questions on the Physics, w hich w e shall discuss
below) appear in Question io o f his Questions on the Geometry o f Euclid ,1where he
disposes o f an objection to imagining the quality o f a line by means o f a surface:
But someone might say: ‘Master, it is not necessary for it to be so imagined.’ I answer
that the imagination [i.e., imagery] is a good one. This is evident by Aristotle who
imagines time by means of a line. Similarly in perspective it is expressly imagined that
active force is to be imagined by means of triangular surfaces. Further, following this
imagination I can more easily understand those things which are said about qualities
uniformly difform and so on. Therefore, I say that the imagination is a good one.
Thus Oresme justifies his use o f surfaces to imagine linear qualities by saying (i)
that Aristotle and an author or authors o f perspective use geometrical entities for
representing the duration o f time and the propagation o f active pow er, i.e., for
things that are not essentially geometrical, and (2) that the use o f surfaces helps us
understand dicta concerning various kinds o f qualities. A similar justification is
made in the next question o f the same w o rk where he supports the affirmative side
o f the question “ whether a linear quality is to be imagined as a surface” by saying :2
1 See Appendix I, Quest. 10, lines 85-91. * Ibid., Quest, n , lines 1 1-1 7 .
5°
The Configuration Doctrine
I respond that the statement is true and could be confirmed by the writers on perspective
like Witelo and Lincoln, who in this manner imagine the intensity of light, and by Aris­
totle, who in the fourth [book] of the Physics imagines time by means of a line, and by the
Commentator [Campanus] in the fifth [book] of this work [the Elements] where he holds,
in expounding ratios, that everything having the nature of a continuum can be imagined
as a line, surface, or body. Now intensity of a quality has the nature of a continuum
since it is divisible to infinity.
It is clear then from these tw o passages that Aristotle’s remarks in B ook IV o f
the Physics were important in Oresme’s mind. The substance o f Aristotle’s state­
ment is to the effect that every magnitude is continuous, and movement follows
magnitude; therefore movement and hence time are continuous, for motion and
time seem to be proportional.3 Furthermore, in B ook V I, where the intimate
relationship between magnitude and time is stressed, Aristotle in his definition o f
the quicker specifically represents time periods by linear magni tudes.4The references
to W itelo and Lincoln (Robert Grosseteste), although somewhat less clear, also
stress that geometrical magnitudes are being used to represent light phenomena
which are not themselves geometrical magnitudes.5 The Campanus passage is
3 219a, 10-19. See the translation o f Moer- dum quam fit diffusio luminis, aliqua latitudo,
beke accompanying the E xp ositio of Thomas propter quam inest ei sensibilitas, et in medio
Aquinas (ed. of P. M. Maggiolo, 281), Medie­ illius lineae est linea mathematica imaginabilis,
val TextN o. 99: “ Quoniam autem quod move­ cui omnes aliae lineae mathematicae in illa
tur movetur ex quodam in quiddam, et omnis linea naturali equidistantes erunt. E t quoniam
magnitudo continua est, sequitur magnitudi­ lux minima procedit ad minimam corporis
nem motus. Propter id enim quod magnitudo partem, quam lux occupare potest: necesse
continua est, et motus continuus erit: quia vero est, quod processus eius fit secundum lineam
motus, et tempus. Quantus enim motus est, mathematicam.” One should examine the use
tantum et tempus videtur fieri. Prius autem et o f triangles in Theorem 24 (page 70), as Witelo
posterius in loco primum sunt: hic autem demonstrates why a luminous body more
positione sunt. Quoniam autem in magnitudine strongly illuminates a space near at hand than
prius et posterius est, necesse est in motu prius one further removed. In fact, these triangles
et posterius esse proportionaliter iis quae sunt are sections o f cones. However, I do not
ibi. A t vero et in tempore est prius et posterius^ know o f a particular passage in Witelo’s work
propter id quia sequitur semper alterum al­ where the general application o f triangles to
terum ipsorum.” “ active force” is made. Notice that Oresme in
4 2 32a-2 33a. See below, the Commentary to his Questio contra divinatores (Paris, BN lat.
II. viii, lines 3-6. 15126, 23 V ) makes the same general statement
5 I do not think a particular passage of about the strength o f action but refers it to
pyramids (i.e., cones): “ In omni etiam actione
Witelo is intended in Oresme’s citations but
rather the references are to his procedure (and est ymaginanda figura piramidalis cuius basis
in fact that of all the perspectivi) o f using trian­ est ipsum agens aut pars eius et conus est in
gles in comparing the propagation and power passo et hoc etiam patet in perspectiva et quod
of light. Note that Witelo in his Optica, Book quanto piramis est brevior et obtusior tanto
II, Theorem 3, (1572 ed., 63-64), distinguishes actio et virtus est fortior, ceteris paribus, patet
between the physical radial line and the mathe­ hoc in perspectiva et quod actio fit fortius
matical line by which the processus o f the light secundum lineam perpendicularem quam se­
takes place: “ Est ergo in linea radiali, secun- cundum aliam.” N ow Grosseteste in his opti-
 52 Introduction The Configuration Doctrine 53

somewhat more tricky, but one can see how Oresme, with his configuration doc­
trine already formed in his mind, might well interpret the passage as supporting his
procedure. Here is what Campanus says in connection with definition three o f
B ook V :
Ratio is the mutual relationship of two things of the same kind, in this that one of them is
greater than, less than, or equal to the other. For ratio is found not only in magnitudes
but [also] in weights, powers, and sounds. Indeed Plato in the Timaeus holds ratio to
exist in weights and powers in the section where he demonstrates the number of the
elements. Moreover, that ratio exists in sounds is evident from music. For (as Boethius
holds in Book IV [of his Music]), if any string is divided into two unequal lengths, there will
be an inverse proportion between these strings and their sounds. But any things in which
ratio is found share the nature and property of magnitude; for it is only found in any
two things of the sort that one is greater than, less than, or equal to the other. More­
over, it is the property of magnitude that something can be said to be unequal or equal
according to it, as Aristotle holds in the Categories [Chap. 6]: whence it is clear that ratio
is found initially in magnitude and, by means of that, in all other things. Nor does ratio
either to us or to nature. This kind of ratio is called “ irrational” and the quantities “ in­
commensurable.” Hence it happens that any ratio found in numbers is also found in
every kind of continuum, e.g., in lines, surfaces, bodies, and times; but the converse is
not true, for there is an infinitude of ratios found as existing between continua which
could not be found in numbers. But whatever ratio isfound in one kind of continuum, the same
ratio can be found in all others. For just as one line is related to any other line, so any surface is
related to some other surface, and any body to some other body, and similarly for time, but it is not
true that any number can be so related to some other number. Hence ratio has a greater
range in the case of continua than in the case of discrete things. Hence it is manifest that
geometric ratio is of greater abstraction than arithmetic ratio, for every ratio with
which arithmetic is concerned is rational, while geometry considers both rational and
irrational ratios.6
6 Euclid, Elementorum geometricorum libri X V duo tempora. Non enim potest dici linea [ M S ;
(Basel, 1546), 103-4: “ Proportio est habitudo in ea E d .] maior aut minor superficie, aut cor­
duarum rerum eiusdem generis adinvicem, in pore, nec tempus, loco: sed linea, linea, et
eo quod earum altera maior aut minor est reli­ superficies, superficie. Sola enim univoca,

exist where there is no similitude according to some magnitudes. Therefore, Euclid has qua vel sibi aequalis. Non enim solum in quan­
titatibus reperitur proportio, sed in ponderi­
correctly said that a ratio exists simply in magnitude when he defined it by the mutual
bus, potentiis et sonis. In ponderibus quidem et
relationship of two magnitudes of the same kind. The intent of this definition is that ratio
potentiis, vult Plato in Timaeo esse proportio­
is the mutual relationship of two magnitudes such that one of them is greater than, less
nem: ubi elementorum numerum ostendit. In
than, or equal to the other. Accordingly it is evidently necessary that they be of the same sonis autem esse proportionem, liquet ex mu­
kind, e.g., as two numbers, two lines, two surfaces, two bodies, two places, or two times; sica. Nam (ut vult Boetius in quarto) si quilibet
for a line cannot be said to be greater than or less than a surface or a body, or a time than nervus in duas inaequales partes dividatur,
a place, but rather a line than a line and a surface than a surface. For univocal things alone erit ipsarum partium suorumque sonorum,
are comparable [by ratio]. Moreover, when he says a “ certain” relationship, you are not eadem converso modo proportio. Sed in qui­
to understand “ certain” in the sense of “ noted” or “ known” but rather in that of buscunque proportio reperitur, ea participant
comparabilia sunt. Quod autem dicit, certa
habitudo, non sic intelligas quasi nota vel scita,
sed quasi determinata: ut sit sensus, Proportio
est determinata habitudo duarum quantitatum:
ita, inquam, determinata, quod haec et non
alia. Non enim est necessarium, ut omnis habi­
tudo duarum quantitatum sit scita a nobis, nec
etiam a natura. Nam proportio quaedam est
discretorum, ut numerorum: quaedam autem
continuorum. In numeris autem, minor est pars
aut partes maioris, ut demonstratur in sep­

“ definite.” Thus the sense is this, “ Ratio is a definite relationship of two quantities,” naturam proprietatemque quantitatis: non
enim reperitur in aliquibus rebus duabus, nisi
“ definite” meaning “ this and not some other.” For it is not necessary that every relation­
in eo quod earum una est reliqua maior, aut
ship of two magnitudes be known by us, nor even by nature. For some ratios are of dis­
minor, aut ei aequalis. Quantitatis autem pro­
crete things, like numbers, while others are of continua. In the case of numbers, the lesser
prium, est secundum ipsam aequale vel in­
number is a part or parts of the greater, as is demonstrated in the seventh book [of the aequale dici, ut vult Aristoteles in Praedica­
Elements]. Hence in all such ratios the relationship is both certain and known. But in the mentis: unde liquet proportionem primo in
case of continuous quantities ratio has a greater range. For there is in this category (i) quantitate reperiri, et per ipsam in omnibus
the case where the lesser is part or parts of the greater, and the ratio in all such instances aliis: nec esse in aliquibus rebus proportionem,
is known by numbers and is called “ rational” (and all such quantities are called “ commen­ cui similis non sit in aliquibus quantitatibus:
surable” because one and the same [quantity] necessarily measures them; hence all propter quod bene dixit Euclides, propor­
numbers are commensurable for unity measures them); but there is also (2) the case where tionem simpliciter esse in quantitate, cum eam
diffinivit per habitudinem duarum quantita­
the lesser is not a part or parts of the greater, and in such instances the ratio is not known
tum eiusdem generis adinvicem. Cuius dif­
finitionis intellectus est, quod proportio est
cal treatise D e lineis, angulis et figuris (ed. o fL . analysis are principally the sphere and the cone. habitudo duarum quantitatum adinvicem,
Baur, 59-60) starts off with a general statement In his D e iride (ib id .,p . 72) he says: “ perspecti­ quae attenditur in eo quod una earum est mai­
that the “ usefulness of considering lines, an­ va est scientia, quae erigitur super figuras visu­ or aut minor alia, vel aequalis ei: per quod
gles and figures is very great, since it is impos­ ales, et haec subalternat sibi scientiam, quae patet quod oportet eas esse eiusdem generis,
sible that natural philosophy be known with­ erigitur super figuras, quas continent lineae et ut duos numeros, aut duas lineas, aut duas
out them.” But the figures he uses in his optical superficies radiosae.” superficies, aut duo corpora, aut duo loca, aut
timo: quare et in eis omnibus est habitudo
certa et nota. A t vero in continuis est propor­
tio magis larga: est enim in ea, ubi minor
quantitas est pars aut partes maioris: et talium
omnium, mediantibus numeris est proportio
nota, quae et rationalis dicitur. Dicunturque
omnes tales quantitates, communicantes, quia
eas una et eadem necessario metitur, unde et
omnes numeri sunt communicantes: omnes
enim ipsos metitur unitas. Est etiam, ubi
minor non est pars aut partes maioris: et in
talibus non est nota proportio nec nobis nec
naturae. Diciturque haec proportio irrationalis,
et hae quantitates, incommunicantes: unde fit
ut quaecunque proportio [ MS ; portio E d .]
reperitur in numeris, reperiatur in omni genere
continuorum, ut in lineis, superficiebus, cor­
poribus et temporibus: non autem e converso:
infinitae enim sunt proportiones in continuis
repertae: quas numerorum natura non susti­
net. Sed quaecunque proportio reperitur in
 54 Introduction The Configuration Doctrine 55
I have italicized the sentence which must have struck Oresme as particularly It seems quite clear that here Oresme starts from Aristotle but then proceeds to
confirmative o f his method o f adapting geometrical figures to intensity problems. highlight the transfer o f extension to intensity. He has done this, I believe, under
Campanus is indeed assuring him that as long as he considered intensities as con­ the influence o f the already common practice at O xford and Paris o f representing
tinua then surely he could always find lines w hich w ould be in the same ratios as intensities by lines, a practice we shall describe immediately below. He has, o f
these intensities. course, in this Physics passage not yet made any specific reference to his two-di­
A s I pointed out in Introduction I, Oresme immediately justifies the use o f lines mensional system whose thoroughgoing development I suspect was still largely
for intensities in the first chapter o f his D e configurationibus by saying that any ratio in the future, although its rudiments must have been then known to Oresme, as
found between intensities could be found to exist between lines. But he does not, w ill become clear.
in fact, tell us precisely what intensity is or how he knows that it is o f the nature o f Finally, in terms o f his ow n justification o f the system in the D e configurationibus
a continuum, except that he believes it to be divisible to infinity. Since in this pas­ we can note that when applying his system to velocity in the second part, he again
sage he quotes Aristotle to the effect that ratio and measure are initially found in quotes Aristotle in suggesting (Il.viii) that,
geometrical entities, presumably it was consideration o f A ristotle’s Metaphysics that
although a time and a line are [mutually] incomparable in quantity, still there is no ratio
clinched the transference o f the concept o f ratios between lines to that o f ratios
found as existing between time and time which is not to be found among lines, and vice
between intensities. That it was the Metaphysics, Bk. X , Chap, i, 1052b, which versa; and it [i.e. ratio] is found originally in lines according to Aristotle in the sixth
Oresme had in mind in his citation o f Aristotle in the first chapter o f the D e con­ [book] of the Physics. And it is the same with respect to the intensity of velocity, namely
figurationibus seems probable since in a somewhat similar citation o f Aristotle in his that every ratio which is found as existing between velocity intensities is also found be­
Questions on the Physics Oresme specifically quotes the Metaphysics'. tween lines, just as was remarked in chapter two of the first part concerning the other
intensities [of qualities]. Therefore, we can arrive at knowledge of the difformities of
This conclusion is evident by the tenth of the Metaphysics of Aristotle where he says that velocities by means of the imagery of lines and also figures.
measure, ratio, comparison, equality, inequality, etc. are initially found in quantity and
[then] transmuted to all other things by means of similarity to this quantity, either W e have already noted above (see fn. 4) the relevant passage o f the sixth b ook that
extended or discrete quantity. From this it is evident by corollary that comparison is Oresme had in mind.
initially in quantity and secondarily in [those] species of quantity like angles, and thirdly W e are now prepared to examine the actual historical efforts before Oresme to
in qualities with respect to their intensity__Then finally I say by way of conclusion that represent intensities by lines and to use surfaces or volumes as analogies to pic­
in every comparison it is necessary to imagine extension, intensity, discreteness, or order, ture the quantity o f qualities, i.e., to picture intensities simultaneously w ith the
and I say that intensity is always imagined by means of extension. (Italics mine)7 extensions o f qualities. It should be remarked that the first steps taken in the
historical path leading to Oresme were taken by philosophers attempting to dis­
tinguish between the intensity o f qualities and their extension, steps that began
uno genere continuorum, eadem reperitur in patet per Aristotelis iom metaphysice ubi dicit actually in antiquity and quickened in the thirteenth century. This has been de­
omnibus aliis. Nam qualitercunque se habet quod mensura, proportio, comparatio, equali-
scribed elsewhere8 and I shall not repeat the details here, except to note that tw o
aliqua linea ad quamlibet aliam: sic se habet tas, inequalitas, et cetera, primo reperitur in
quaelibet superficies ad aliquam aliam, et quod­ quantitate et in omnibus aliis transmutative ad
ideas o f particular importance to the development o f the Oresme doctrine were
libet corpus ad aliquod aliud, similiter et tem­ similitudinem ipsius quantitatis secundum often expressed by the end o f the thirteenth and the beginning o f the fourteenth
pus : sed non sic, quilibet numerus ad aliquem quod ymaginatur aut de extensa aut discreta. century: (1) latitude o f intensity, according to some philosophers, is a continuum
alium, unde magis est larga proportio in con­ E x hoc patet corollarie quod comparatio primo comparable to a line, and (2) if tw o quantities o f tepid water are added together,
tinuis, quam in discretis. E x quo manifestum est in quantitate et secundo in speciebus quan­
the resulting double quantity is till tepid but if the heat o f both o f them could be
est proportionem geometricam esse maioris titatis sicut in angulis, tertio in qualitate quan­
abstractionis, quam proportionem arithmeti­ tum ad intensionem__ Tunc finaliter con­
placed in the matter o f one, the intensity o f heat w ould rise, an opinion that leads
cam: omnis enim proportio circa quam arith­ cludendo dico quod in omni comparatione straight to the analogical use o f surfaces and bodies to picture quantities o f quali­
metica versatur, rationalis est: geometria necesse est ymaginare aut extensionem aut in­ ties.
vero, rationales et irrationales aequaliter \ M S ; tensionem aut discreptionem [i.e., discretio­ Other actual usages o f coordinate systems seem irrelevant to the development o f
aequilateras E d .\ considerat.” The Campanus nem] aut ordinem et dico [quod] intensio sem­
Oresme’s doctrine. A n example is the earlier use o f coordinates in astronomy9 and
manuscript noted in brackets is Columbia per ymaginatur ad modum extensionis et que
Univ. Plimpton 156, 33r-v. in omni ordine est quedam discreptio et ideo 8 See the citations to Maier, Duhem, and du monde, Vol. 7, 506-33, for the two ideas
7 Bk. VII, Quest. 5 (MS Seville, Bibl. Co- restat quod in omni comparatione ymaginatur Clagett given in the Commentary to I.ii, lines here emphasized.
lomb. 7.6.30, 75r, cc. 1-2): “ Ista conclusio aut continuitas aut discreptio.” 19-20. See particularly, P. Duhem, L e Syst'eme 9 C f. C. Boyer, History o f A nalytic Geometry,
 56 Introduction The Configuration Doctrine 57

geography. I need only say that Oresme never specifies the similarity o f his system seems to be the basic analogy o f intensity difference or gradus with distance, and
w ith such earlier efforts. Furthermore, such use o f coordinate geometry as one this is particularly true in a tract o f Arnald o f V illanova.13 A nd indeed the first overt
finds in G reek mathematics, either in the works o f Apollonius or Hero, had no and specific application o f degrees to lines for representational and computational
discernible influence on Oresme, w ho was totally ignorant o f these mathematical purposes takes place in a treatise D e graduatione medicinarum compositarum attributed
efforts. Finally, w e fail to find an acknowledged influence on Oresme o f rudimen­ to Roger Bacon.1* Translations o f the pertinent passages have already been given
tary efforts in music— dating back at least to the twelfth century— to represent in The Science o f Mechanics15 and I shall simply repeat here these passages and my
pictorially the “ intension and remission o f m odes.” 10 comments on th em :
H ow ever there is one fruitful line that merges with the philosophical treatment Every inherent form receives intension and remission, on account of which it becomes
o f intensity o f qualities and this is found in pharmacological treatments o f medic­ understandable when set forth as a line that is called the line of intension and remission.
inal degrees in relationship to the quantities o f the medicines.11 Such treat­ And since every inherent form has a contrary and a mean, that same line will be imagined
ments go back to the time o f Galen and embrace tracts by Alkindi, Constantinus as containing contrary forms. Suppose a hotness is placed in any place whatever on
the aforesaid line. Through the intellect it is understood that it may be increased above
Africanus, and many others.12 Underlying some o f these pharmacological efforts
that point and similarly be remitted until it comes to the first point of the mean between
hot and cold; that very same mean, since it is understood to have longitude, can be remit­
43: “ Little o f any consequence was added to which he analyses in considerable detail the ted or, by another consideration, be increased until it comes to a point equidistant from
the history o f analytic geometry [in the early pharmacological treatises that develop quanti­ the contraries. And similarly it is understood that the mean, through intension, recedes
Latin Middle Ages], unless one excepts rough tative ideas. He originally thought that the from the middle point until it comes to the first point of the contrary, and the contrary
graphical representations of the courses o f the analogy between degrees and surfaces made by is understood to be able to be increased until it comes to whatever point you wish of
planets through the zodiacal constellations. Constantine the African might have played a
intension.
Using thirty subdivisions in longitude and a part in the rise o f the configuration system.
dozen in latitude, the paths of the planets, as The passage of the L iber graduum runs (Mc- Quite obviously this unilinear system o f representing intensities gives a method
given in Pliny’s N a tu ra l History, were plotted Vaugh’s text, 17, quoting Cambridge MS, o f illustrating the basic Aristotelian idea o f qualitative alteration as a movement
during the tenth or eleventh century on a Trinity College 904, ii4 r -v ; cf. Opera Isaac, from one contrary to the other. N ow here in this w ork is there any idea o f tw o
crude system o f coordinates.” Boyer gives Vol. 2 [Lyon, 1515], 78r): “ Ideoque antiqui et
references to the literature on this graph.
geometrical dimensions or o f a coordinate system. In short, when compared to
maxime Galenus, equam complexionem inter
10 See Johannes Afiligemensis, D e musica duas extremitates dixerunt manere, id est inter Oresme’s system, this system is graphically immature, as is illustrated later when
cum tonario, Chap 8 (ed. o f J. S. Van Waesber- primum gradum et quartum. Nam cum omnis the author works out some problems o f mixtures, as for example, the mixture o f
ghe, 70): “ Ut autem horum omnium de quibus superficies duabus lineis sit contenta, et ipse a water o f tw o weights hot in the sixth degree w ith a water o f one w eight hot in
diximus, modorum intensiones et remissiones linee absque medio iungi non possunt, ne­
the twelfth degree:
facile pateant, figura haec perspicienda est.” cessarium est duo mediocres habere. Qua de re
The accompanying figure is reproduced out of gradus quattuor necessarii fuere. Igitur calidum
MS Leipzig Univ. Library 79, 12c., ioov. in primo gradu minus est naturali calore, cali- that this was merely a justification for the means gra distantia cuiuslibet gradus, intendens quod
like that found in the Timaeus, 3ic-32b, and illa est in qua continetur vel comprehenditur
thus has nothing to do with representing the tota latitudo ipsius.” C f. Aphor. 16, 85r, c. 2.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 quantities o f qualities by surfaces. Incidentally, 14 A . Maier was the first to call attention to
V . P. Zoubov, Traktat, 612-13, was the first to this tract in connection with the problem of
stress the possible importance o f Galen’s con­ representing intensities by lines, in Zwei
cept of the latitude (platos) o f health and tem­ Grundprobleme, 97-98.
perament in the development o f the medieval 13 The two passages here presented are given
concept o f latitude o f form. Zoubov is less on pages 334-35 with their Latin texts repro­
inclined to stress the theological roots o f lati­ duced from the published text o f Little and
tude doctrines than Duhem and Maier. Withington, Opera hactenus inedita Rogeri Baco-
13 I am grateful to M cVaugh (ibid., 120) for ni, Fasc. IX , 144, 148. 1 have suggested in my
the following passage from Arnald’s A phoris- earlier treatment o f these passages that the
11 M. Clagett, The Science of Mechanics, 333. mi de gradibus, MS Merton College 230, 85r, c. work may not be genuinely by Roger Bacon
dum in secundo quasi ille naturalis calor, cali­
12 Recently Dr. Michael McVaugh complet­ 1. Aphor. 14: “ Quia dixit immediate quod but rather may be by some early fourteenth-
dum in tertio magis eo est, calidum in quarto
ed a dissertation at Princeton University (The ultra eum est. Eodem modo frigidum, humi- distantia integra qualitatis a temperamento con­ century author.
Mediaeval Theory o f Compound Medicines) in dum et siccum.” However, I suggested to him stituit gradum, idcirco declarat que sit inte­
 5» Introduction
For example, let there be given water of two weights hot in the sixth degree, in respect
to some point contained in the same line; let there be given another water of one weight
hot in the twelfth degree with respect to the same point; a mixture of the two waters
having been made, the hotness of the mixture will be raised in a line of intension through
eight degrees, with respect to the aforesaid point, since the distance that is between six
and eight is one-half of the distance that is between eight and twelve, just as the water
o f one weight is half the water o f two weights.
The author in this passage is o f course arithmetically taking extension into account
in his computation when he considers the relative weights going into the mixture.
But he has not yet represented both extension and intensity geometrically. In fact,
he has computed the intensities arithmetically and then applied the results to sin­
gle lines.
A s I have also noted in the The Science o f Mechanics (page 335), this kind o f uni­
linear procedure was used by the Merton College authors. For example, it was used
extensively by John Dum bleton in his Summa de logicis et naturalibus {ibid., page 306)
in representing latitudes o f velocities. The actual passage from this one-dimension­
al technique to a tw o- or even three-dimensional system was not an abrupt one.
T he first step was to conceive o f the distribution o f intensity through extension in
terms o f an analogy with geometrical surfaces or volumes. This kind o f analogy is
found in the 1 340’s at O xford in the Liber calculationum o f Richard Swineshead (in
the second tract entitled D e difformibus) and indeed also at Paris in a veiled way in
she. Questiones super octo phisicorum libros Aristotelis o f John Buridan and clearly in
tw o o f Oresme’s Aristotelian works.
The passage o f Richard Swineshead explains how it is possible to increase a
quantity extensively without increasing it intensively and in the course o f this
discussion he gives the follow ing analogy:
If a length of a foot is taken, and if there were added to the side of it a length as great or
smaller, the whole length would not be increased, because [the second length] is added in
such a way that it cannot increase that dimension (i.e., length) as such. And so if a body
with a length of a foot be given, to which is added breadthwise a length of half a foot,
still the whole is said to be of a length of a foot, as it was before. And if the length of half
a foot were enlarged to three-fourths of a foot, and the length of a foot were reduced to
the same degree of length, the whole length is decreased as to length, even though one
acquires as much length as the other loses__Thus in the question at hand, that acquired
quality is acquired in such a way that it does nothing intensively to the whole quality,
but only [affects it] quantitatively. Nay rather, in order that it would affect intensively
the whole quality, it would be necessary that it be coextended with it, just as if the ac­
quired length were to increase another length [extensively] or if the other were to become
greater on account of it, [then] it is necessary that it be acquired at the extreme of the
other length; and just as the depth of a body is not increased intensively by the advent of
another depth unless their coextension is effected, or at least their addition according to
depth. Although there be acquisition at the extreme, it would not make the whole deeper,
but would only affect it quantitatively, by occupying a greater space. So neither would
The Configuration Doctrine 59
this acquired quality affect something qualitatively, but only quantitatively with respect
to the whole quality. (The Science of Mechanics, 336-37.)
E ven though this passage is somewhat confusedly expressed the intent is certainly
clear: you could increase a quality extensively w ithout increasing the intensity just
as you could increase the length o f bodies by adding one body to the end o f the
other without increasing the depth o f the whole. One can see how close this analo­
gy is to the earlier-mentioned observation on the addition o f tw o tepid waters. It
w ill also be apparent that it is basically similar to the extended analogy in Oresm e’s
Questions on the Generation and Corruption (which w e shall examine shortly), although
I am not sure whether Oresme did, or could have, read the Liber calculationum
before composing his Questions. A t any rate, it is not without interest that Swines­
head somewhat later in the same tract D e dijformibus gives an argument regarding
the denominations o f parts o f qualities w ith respect to the whole subject o f the
qualities that perhaps reflects the previously conceived analogies with surfaces and
volumes, although no mention o f surfaces or volumes is m ade:
The first opinion regarding a difform quality in which each half is uniform can be sus­
tained, namely that it would correspond to the mean degree between these qualities, and
the argument is based on this, that a quality extended through the whole subject is twice
as productive for the denomination of the whole subject than if the quality [in that in­
tensity] were extended only through one half, which is argued as follows. Let a be desig­
nated which has a calidity of 4 [degrees] throughout. Then the whole is hot at four
degrees by means of the whole calidity. But one half of it is just as productive for the
denomination of the whole subject as is the other half. Therefore, the whole quality
denominates the whole [subject] twice as much as one half of it denominates the whole
[subject], which was to be proved. From this it follows that the denomination of the
whole subject by means of a quality extended through half the subject is only one half
with respect to that quality, for it denominates the whole only half as much as it denomi­
nates the half through which it is extended, and it denominates the latter by its own
degree. Therefore, it denominates the whole [subject] with a degree half [the degree of]
that quality. And if it were extended through one quarter of the whole, it would denomi­
nate the whole with a degree one fourth [the degree] of that quality. And so as it is
extended in a proportionally smaller part of the whole it denominates the whole with a
correspondingly more remiss degree than it does the part through which it is extended.
... Against this position and its fundamentum it is argued: [in the first place] it follows
that if the first proportional part of something were intense in a certain amount, the
second twice as intense, the third three times as intense, and so on to infinity, the whole
would be precisely equally intense as the second proportional part, which however does
not seem to be true. For it appears that the quality is infinite. Hence if it is without a
contrary, it will denominate its subject infinitely— In regard to this argument in opposi­
tion, the consequence is denied, namely, this quality is infinitely intense, therefore it
denominates the whole subject infinitely. For it is extended in such a way that the in­
finite quality produces with respect to [the denomination of] that [whole] subject an
infinitely small quantity. [This is evident] for the quality of the fourth proportional part
 6o Introduction The Configuration Doctrine 61

is twice as intense as the quality of the second proportional part, while the subject of the I have quoted this passage with its apparent distinction o f the dimensions o f
latter is one-fourth that of the former. Therefore, the latter is only one-half as productive
intensity and extension in determining the denomination o f a quality and its pro­
[for the denomination of the whole as is the second]. For if the fourth proportional part
portional parts in relation to the whole subject, not only because it is so expressed
were eight times as intense as the first just as it is eight times as small as it [in extension],
that it appears either to imply the analogy made in the earlier passage between
then it would be just as productive for the denomination of the whole as is the first. But,
as is evident, actually the fourth part is only half as intense as it would be then, for now quantities o f qualities and the measures o f surfaces and volumes or at least to
it is twice as remiss as it would be then. Therefore, the fourth proportional part is now provide an easy jump to such an analogy, but also because it gives the very infinite
half as productive in comparison to the whole as is the first proportional part, and the series to which Oresme applies surfaces in the Questions on the Physics and the D e
first is only as productive in comparison to the whole as is the second, as is evident. configurationibus (see below, fn. 19, and the Commentary to Ill.v iii, lines 8-28). It
Therefore, the fourth proportional part is only half as productive as the second for is also the passage which a Parisian scribe, copying the Liber calculationum in 1375,
the denomination of the whole, and yet its quality is twice as intense. And proceeding illustrates with Oresme’s configuration diagram (see Introduction II.B, fn. 10).
in this way, any quality extended through a posterior part contributes less [to the denomi­ It w ill also be noticed in this last Swineshead passage that he is much concerned
nation of the whole] than the quality extended through a prior part, calling those parts with the determination o f the mean intensity as a factor in seeking the qualitative
prior which are closer to the extreme where the larger parts are terminated. And this is
denomination. A somewhat similar concern with a more explicit analogy between
true of all the proportional parts of a except the first and second which contribute equally
difform intensities and difform dimensions in surface and bodies is found in a
to the denomination of the whole.16
w ork o f Oresm e’s supposed teacher, Jean Buridan— the Questions on the Physics,
16 “ D e difformibus,” in the Calculationes ad illam qualitatem. E t sic correspondenter Bk. I, Quest. 12:
(Pavia, 1498), 14-15 (cf. MSS Cambridge, sicut proportionaliter extenditur per minorem
Gonville and Caius 499/268, i68r-v; Paris, partem quam est totum, ita totum denominat
I posit also that if there is a column equally long on one side as it is on the other, each
B N lat. 6558, 6r-v; Pavia, Bibl. Univ. Aldini { C P , nominatur E d ) gradu remissiori quam side being ten feet long, and another column whose length is not uniform, one side be­
314, 5v-6r): “ Prima tamen opinio de qualitate partem (C, pars E d ) per quam illa (67 , om. E d ) ing ten feet and the other nine, then the first column will exceed the second in length by
difformi, cuius utraque medietas est uniformis, extenditur__ Contra quam positionem et one half foot, for the length of the body is not only in its right side or in its left or in its
potest sustineri, scilicet quod corresponderet eius fundamentum arguitur sic, quia sequitur middle but is [simultaneously] in its right, left and middle. Therefore, it ought not be
(67 , respondeat E d ) gradui medio inter illas quod si prima pars proportionalis alicuius called simply “ long” or “ of such a length” from [the length of] its right side or [that of]
qualitates. E t fundatur argumentum super esset aliqualiter intensa, et secunda in duplo its left but conjointly from its right, left and middle. And if there is no uniformity of
illo : in duplo plus facit qualitas extensa per intensior, et tertia in triplo, et sic in infinitum, length, it is necessary to bring the longer side into adjustment with the shorter by taking
totum subiectum ad totius denominationem totum esset eque intensum precise sicut est
something away from the longer side and adding it to the shorter so that the mean may
quam si sola (67, tota E d ) per medietatem exten­ secunda pars proportionalis, quod tamen non
be found. But this is also proved by an analogy. For let the air be illuminated for a cer­
deretur, quod arguitur sic. Signetur a quod videtur verum. Nam apparet {add. 67 ex illa
tain distance by a light, for example, up to a league, and [let this illumination be] continual­
habeat caliditatem ut 4 per totum. Tunc totum conclusione) quod illa qualitas est infinita,
erit (67, est E d ) calidum per totam caliditatem ergo si sit sine contrario infinite denominabit
ly difform so that near the light is the [most] intense illumination and at the [other] end
ut 4. Sed una medietas illius tantum facit ad suum subiectum__ (15, c.2 )...A d argumen­ the illumination is infinitely remitted so that there is no illumination at all beyond it.
denominationem totius (67, om. P E d ) subiecti tum in oppositum negatur consequentia: And let the total air be designated as b and its 1/1000 part near the light be designated as a,
sicut alia medietas. Igitur tota illa qualitas in hec est qualitas infinite intensa, ergo infinite a being very intensely illuminated. Hence it shall not then be said that the air b is equally
duplo plus denominat totum quam una eius totum subiectum denominat, quia illo modo
medietas (67 . pars sive medietas E d ) totum, extenditur quod infinite modicum faciet ma {E d P , secunda 67 ). Sed quarta pars, ut con­ quam qualitas extensa per partem priorem,
denominat, quod fuit probandum. Ex quo qualitas illa infinita respectu illius subiecti. stat, est nunc in duplo minus intensa quam tunc vocando partes priores que sunt propinquiores
sequitur quod denominatio totius subiecti per Nam qualitas quarte partis proportionalis esset, quia nunc est in duplo remissior quam extremo ubi partes maiores terminantur. Et
qualitatem extensam per medietatem subiecti est in duplo intensior quam qualitas secunde tunc esset. Ergo nunc quarta pars proportio­ hoc est verum de omnibus partibus propor­
(67 , om. E d ) solum est subdupla ad illam partis proportionalis et est per { C P , om. E d ) nalis in duplo minus facit in comparatione ad tionalibus a nisi de prima et secunda que equa-
qualitatem, quia in duplo minus denominat subiectum subquadruplum {P E d , subdu- totum quam facit prima pars proportionalis et liter faciunt ad totius denominationem.” I
totum quam medietatem illam per quam plum 67 ) et ideo in duplo facit minus {add. E d prima tantum facit comparatione ad totum ut have made a few corrections from the three
extenditur, et illam medietatem denominat scilicet quam secunda quod om. C P ) . Si enim secunda, ut patet. Igitur quarta pars proportio­ manuscripts (6 7 = Cambridge; P = Paris; A =
gradu suo (67, summo E d ). Igitur totum per quarta pars proportionalis esset in octuplo nalis in duplo minus facit quam secunda ad Pavia, Aldini) but only those which help to
illam qualitatem denominatur gradu subduplo {E d P , duplo 67 ) intensior quam prima {E d P , totius denominationem (67 , intensionem emend the edition so that it would make better
ad illam qualitatem. E t si extenderetur (67 , secunda pars 67 ), sicut est in octuplo {E d P , qua­ A P E d ) , et tamen sua qualitas est in duplo in­ sense. Thus I have omitted some additional
extendatur E d ) per quartam totius, tantum druplo A ) minor illa [in extensione], tunc tan­ tensior. E t sic discurrendo, quelibet qualitas text in C . I have freely altered the punctua­
tunc denominaret totum gradu subquadruplo tum faceret ad totius denominationem sicut pri- extensa per partem posteriorem minus facit tion.
 6z Introduction The Configuration Doctrine 63

intensely illuminated as the air a unless you wish to denominate the whole by an infinitely throughout the w hole subject (in the example o f the colored rod) meant the deter­
small part of it, in giving up its denomination according to all the other parts, which mining o f the quantity o f illumination or the quantity o f quality by attention to
seems absurd. There is also another analogy. If a rod is uniformly difformly colored the mean intensity and the extent. H owever, he does not assert this, as he pays
according to white and black, proceeding from tip a, the maximally white point, to tip attention only to the practice o f determining the mean intensity, which, he poses,
b, the maximally black point, then it ought not be said that the rod is to be denominated is like determining a mean dimension such as length in the case o f finding areas and
“ maximally white” by reference to a, for by the same reasoning it could be called “ max­
volumes.
imally black;” and so speaking simply it would be called “ maximally white and max­
But it is w ith Oresme himself, in the Questions on the Generation and Corruption
imally black,” which is absurd. Therefore, to denominate simply, it is necessary to
(which gives every indication o f being one o f his earlier works), that Swineshead’s
justify the parts so that simple denomination may be achieved from the mean. And there­
fore it is manifest that those measuring the area of a surface or the volume of a body kind o f analogy most clearly emerges, and in fact the basic tenet o f Oresm e’s sys­
reduce the difformities to uniformity. Accordingly, it seems to me that we should conclude tem is contained therein. The pertinent passage occurs in the midst o f a question as
by way of corollary that the total velocity of a sphere ought not to be denominated simply to whether an indivisible could be altered:
by the velocity of the point in the circumference most swiftly moved, as many commonly Fourth corollary: if something were to be difform in quality, there would be more quality
assert in ignoring the denomination by every other part.17 in the whole than in some part of it. Whence quality is to be imagined to have two dimensions:
For this argument to have been a full-fledged analogy o f the kind we are discuss­ longitude according to the extension of the subject and latitude according to intensity in degree. Then
ing, Buridan w ould have had to say that quantity o f quality is like the area o f a there is a second conclusion, that if the whole quality of one body were in a point it
surface or the volum e o f a body and that in determining the quantity o f quality ex­ would be infinitely intense. This is proved, for the subject is uniform. By the preceding
conclusion the quality of the whole is double the quality of the half. Therefore, if by
tension and intensity are different dimensions similar to the length, breadth, and/or
imagination the whole were placed in one half of the subject, it would be twice as intense
depth o f surfaces and volumes. This may well have been in the back o f Buridan’s
as before__It is obvious, if one uses a surface as an example, that if it is two feet long
mind. But the analogy he does make is that denomination o f a total distribution o f
and one foot high and if it is made half as long while the total quantity of the surface
intensity, where the intensity changes from point to point, is similar to the simple remained as before, then it would be twice as high. And in the same way, if the whole
denomination o f areas and volumes. T o denominate a surface or body “ simply” or quality were placed in a third part, it would be triply intense; and if in a fourth part,
absolutely meant, for medieval schoolmen, to determine its total quantity, i.e., its quadruply intense, and so on without end. Therefore, if the whole were placed in a point,
area or volum e, by attention to all o f its dimensions and not just to one. Thus one it would be infinitely intense__A third conclusion is that it does not follow from this
w ould suppose that Buridan in speaking o f “ denominating simply” in the cases o f that that quality would be infinite [in quantity]. This is evident in the first place because
changing intensity throughout a whole medium (in the example o f illumination) or it is the same as before; it was not augmented, for, although infinitely intended, its exten­
sion has been proportionally divided to infinity, as is imaginable in regard to a surface.18
17 Jean Buridan, Questiones super octo phisico- peret ab uno cono a summa albedine, tamen
rum libros A ristotelis (1509 ed.), 15 v. The Latin illud totale corpus non denominaretur summe 18 Bk. I. Quest. 20, MS Florence, Bibl. ipsa sit in duplo minus extensa, sequitur
text o f this passage is also available in The album. Imo, recompensando unam partem ad Naz. Centr., Conv. Soppr. H.IX.1628, 40V- quod esset in duplo minor, quod est contra
Science o f Mechanics, 216, fn. 39. Incidentally, aliam, debet magis denominari a gradu medio 41 r: “ 4m corollarium: quod, si esset aliquid ypothesim. Patet in exemplo de superficie,
the question under discussion by Buridan of inter partem maxime albam et partem minime difformiter quale, tunc esset maior qualitas in quod si sit longa duobus pedibus, alta uno
the proper measure o f the rotating sphere is albam. Unde diceretur, si baculus esset dicto toto quam in aliqua eius parte. Unde qualitas pede, et si fiat minus longa in duplo et maneat
discussed there, with particular attention be­ modo dispositus, quod aliqua pars baculi esset ymaginatur habere duas dimensiones, scilicet tanta sicud ante, esset in duplo magis alta. E t
ing given to the view o f Heytesbury, who albior quam ille baculus, et alia etiam esset longitudinem secundum extensionem subiec- eodem modo si qualitas totius poneretur in
would measure such a velocity by the fastest minus alba quam ille baculus. Modo sic est de ti et latitudinem secundum intensionem in gra­ parte [tertia], esset in triplo plus intensa; et si
moving point. The Questiones o f Buridan are velocitate in proposito. Partes enim sphaerae du. Tunc est secunda conclusio, quod si tota in 4a, in quadruplo, et sic sine fine. Igitur si
usually dated about 1340 and thus presumably remotiores a polis moventur velocius, et par­ qualitas unius corporis esset in puncto, illa es­ tota poneretur in puncto, ipsa esset in infini­
would have been available to Oresme. A pas­ tes propinquiores polis moventur tardius. Ex set in infinitum intensa. Probatur quia subiec- tum intensa, quod est propositum. E t eodem
sage similar to that which we have been dis­ quo sequitur quod totalis sphaera nec movetur tum est uniforme. Per precedentem conclu­ modo argueretur, si subiectum esset difforme
cussing is found in Buridan’s Quaestiones. . . de velocissime nec tardissime, imo pars remota sionem qualitas totius est dupla ad qualitatem et per ymaginationem posset reduci ad unifor­
caelo et mundo, Bk. I, Quest. 22 (ed. o f E. A. a polo movetur velocius quam totalis sphaera, medietatis. Igitur si per ymaginationem tota mitatem__ Tertia conclusio est quod ex hoc
Moody, 99-100): “ Modo si aliquid sit diffor- et pars propinqua polo movetur tardius quam poneretur in una medietate subiecti, esset in non sequitur quod illa qualitas esset infinita.
miter album aut nigrum, ita quod continue de totalis sphaera, et quanto est pars remotior a duplo intensior quam ante. Patet statim quia Patet primo quia est eadem quam prius; erat
uno cono usque ad alterum conum sit pars post polo, imo ab ambobus polis, tanto movetur aliter non esset tanta qualitas sicud ante, non augmenta quia licet sit in infinitum inten­
partem albedo remissior, licet remissio inci­ velocius.” quia si ipsa esset equaliter (4ir) intensa, cum sa tamen eius extensio est in i nfinitum divisio
 64 Introduction The Configuration Doctrine 65

The basic idea, presented here so lucidly, is that we can imagine a quality as hav­ This application o f surfaces to illustrate a line o f reasoning about velocities varying
ing tw o dimensions, longitude and latitude, the one associated with the extension in time reappears, as we have seen in the first chapter, in more formal dress in
o f the subject o f the quality and the other with its intensity expressed in degrees.
These, o f course, are the very names that Oresme adopts in his fully-developed
Galileis, 128, has stated that almost the same illius horae, tunc in fine horae erit infinitum
graphing system. Because o f this imagined two-dimensionality o f the quality, we
kind o f example as Oresme’s piling up of sur­ in longitudine, quia infinitae sunt partes
can accordingly imagine its quantity by means o f a surface, with the quantity o f faces was given by Roger Swineshead, D e horae et tamen non est nisi quatuor pedum.”
the surface varying in the same way as the quantity o f the quality. That Oresme also motibus naturalibus, which would of course be a Hence, the same type o f operation is suggested
thought o f the surface analogy as applying to m otion is clear from a passage in his decade or so prior to Oresme. However, the here as is found in the aforementioned works
passage is much confused in both manuscripts o f Oresme, but here it is not applied to prob­
Questions on the Physics:
(Erfurt, Stadtbibl. Amplon. F. 135, 46V, c.i, lems o f intensity o f qualities and velocity o f
This then is the first conclusion concerning a motion qualifiedly infinite: A motion in­ and Paris, B N lat. 16621, 82v-83r), and, al­ movements. A passage somewhat later in the
finite in velocity can be produced in a finite time. Proof: It is possible for something to though a quadrangular surface o f one foot tract does indeed suggest the author’s know­
be moved during the proportional parts of an hour, first with some velocity, then twice quantity is divided into proportional parts and ledge of the configuration doctrine (page 51):
as fast, then three times, four times, and so on, this being accomplished by the diminution an infinite line is produced, it does not appear “ Ulterius dico, si .a. et .b. essent duo subjecta,
of resistance to infinity. Then I infer by way of corollary that such a motion would be to me that it is produced by the piling up of et esset .a. sicut dyameter et .b. sicut costa, et
the proportional parts but rather by connect­ sint uniformiter calida per gradus, ita gradus
qualifiedly infinite, for it would only traverse a finite space, namely four times the space
ing diagonally opposite points o f proportional quo .a. est calidum respectu gradus quo .b. est
traversed in the first [proportional] part [of the hour]. One could concede this to be
parts. Furthermore, the division of the sur­ calidum sit sicut dyameter respectu costae, dico
demonstrable as follows. It having been posited that in the first part it traverses the
face is not directly compared to the space quod caliditas .a. est dupla ad caliditatem .b. ;
space of a foot, then if it were moved with such a degree through the remainder [of the probatur, quia istae caliditates sunt ymaginan-
traversed by a variable velocity or to the quan­
hour] it would traverse two feet in the whole time. Again, if with the latitude acquired in tities of a quality, as it is in Oresme’s Questions dae sicut duae superficies quadruplae (/ qua­
the second part it would be moved through that second part and the rest [of the hour], on the Physics and D e configurationibus; and, even drangulae?) similes, quarum latera sunt exten­
it would traverse one foot. And if it were moved with the latitude of the third part through more clearly, there is no element there o f the siones subjectorum, igitur proportio calidita-
that part and the rest [of the hour], it would traverse one half foot, and then one half of configuration doctrine. However, there is an­ tum est sicut proportio subjectorum duplica­
one half, and so on in this way continually; it traverses [all together] precisely as much as other example of the proportional division of ta.” This has striking similarity to a conclusion
that posited in the case; hence it traverses four feet__And if upon a line of two feet in a surface to produce an infinite line that seems o f the Questions on the Geometry o f E u clid of
length, which is divided into proportional parts, one proceeded in that way so that upon to resemble the technique found in the Ques­ Oresme (see Appendix I, Quest. 11, lines
tions on the Generation and Corruption and in the 27-29). In fact, the similarities with Oresme’s
the first part there would be a surface one foot in altitude, and [on the second one of two
Questions on the Physics. This occurs in the anon­ tract are so marked in parts o f this Questio,
feet, and] on the third one of three feet, and so on continually, then this [total] surface
ymous D e proportione dyametri quadrati ad particularly where the author gives some con­
would be equal to a surface four feet in length and one foot wide.19 costam eiusdem appearing in Codex A . 50 o f the clusions relative to the incommensurability o f
Stadtbibliothek o f Bern {i-jz r -jG t) (and at­ celestial motions, that both V . P. Zoubov in
nata proportionaliter, sicud patet ymaginari de pertranseat spacium pedem, tunc si tali gradu tributed by its editor on grossly insufficient Isis, Vol. j o (1939) 130-34 and E. Grant in his
superficie.” moveretur per residuum pertransiret duplos grounds to Albert of Saxony: FI. Suter, “ Die edition o f D e proportionibus proportionum, 77-78,
19 Questiones super libros physicorum, Bk. VI, in toto tempore; et iterum si latitudine acqui­ Quaestio ‘De proportione dyametri quadrati fn. xoi, conclude that the author o f the tract
Quest. 8, Seville, Bibl. Col. 7.6.30, 7ir, c. 2: sita in secunda parte moveretur per ipsam et ad costam ejusdem’ des Albertus de Saxonia,” was probably Oresme or at least that the work
“ Tunc de motu infinito secundum quid est per residuum pertransiret unum pedem; et si Zeitschrift fiir M athem atik und Physik, Vol. 32 has an Oresmian character. I am inclined to
prima conclusio, quod infinitus motus in ve­ latitudine tertie moveretur per ipsam et per (1887) Hist.-lit. Abtheil., 41-42; cf. P. Duhem, think that the author was a disciple o f Oresme
locitate potest fieri tempore finito. Probatur, residuum pertransiret dimidium pedem, dein­ Etudes sur Leonard de Vinci, Vol. x, 341-44). who made free use o f Oresme’s conclusions
quia possible est quod secundum partes pro­ de medietatem medietatis, et sic semper et The passage runs: (page 48): “ 70 dico, rather than Oresme himself, mainly because his
portionales hore aliquid moveatur aliqua velo­ continue, precise tantum pertransit in casu po­ quod corpus finitum, puta quatuor pedum, treatment o f the proportional part division o f
citate, deinde duplo velocius, deinde triplo, et sito ; quare pertransit 4or pedes__ E t si super spatium infinitum potest occupare sine rare- the surface (noted above) seems fuzzier than
quadruplo, et cetera, et hoc propter diminu- lineam bipedalem divisam per partes propor­ factione; patet sic: dividatur corpus quatuor Oresme’s (the author makes no distinction
tionem in infinitum resistentie. Tunc infero tionales fieret illo m odo: super primam partem pedum in prima parte proportionali horae in between simple denomination o f the area and
corollarie quod talis motus esset infinitus se­ esset superficies pedalis altitudinis [et super se­ duas medietates et jungatur una alteri in one dimension) and a succeeding sphere­
cundum quid quia non pertransiret nisi spacium cundam bipedalis] et super tertiam tripedalis longum, postea in 2a parte proportionali wrapping argument leads to a conclusion
finitum, videlicet quadruplum ad pertransi- et sic semper, tunc ista superficies equivaleret dividatur illud compositum in duas medietates regarding the transformation o f an infinite
tum in prima parte; sicut posset concedere de­ uni superficiei 4or pedum in longum et unius et similiter jungantur ut prius dictum est, body into a finite sphere that seems in direct
monstrari, quia posito quod in prima parte in latum.” Miss A . Maier in her D ie Vorlaufer et sic secundum singulas partes proportionales contradiction to a conclusion reported by
 66 Introduction The Configuration Doctrine 67

Ill.v iii o f the D e configurationibus.20 But in the Questions on the Physics, itis being given o f Johannes de Casali, for our argument turns on the question o f whether or not
as a geometrical illustration or analogy to a preceding verbal argument. I should Casali was familiar with Oresme’s Questions on the Geometry o f Euclid. Let us first
further point out there seems to be no further use or treatment o f the nascent con­ examine the passages in which Casali indicates familiarity w ith the configuration
figuration doctrine in the Questions on the Physics. I am thus reasonably confident doctrine:21
that these questions as well as those on the D e generatione date from a period preced­ the third conclusion is that any latitude uniformly difform is precisely as great as the latitude
ing the compositon o f the D e configurationibus, and even before his Questions on the which is uniform at its middle degree, i.e., any uniformly difform hot thing is precisely as
Geometry o f Euclid, where he first outlines the configuration doctrine in detail. hot as is something uniformly hot at the middle degree of the uniformly difform hot thing.
W e have already spoken about the elaboration o f the doctrine as given in the ... Examples of these can be had in quantities.22 For something uniformly hot is through­
Questions on the Geometry o f Euclid in the first chapter, and we have given the text out like a rectangular parallelogram constructed between two parallel lines. Then any
o f the crucial questions in Appendix I. It is clear that it is in this w ork that Oresme part of such a rectangle is equally wide as another part because the latitude of any such
part is measured by the base of the rectangle. Similarly a uniformly difform hotness is
has turned the root analogy o f qualities w ith surfaces and bodies into a well-or­
in every way like a triangle, i.e., if the uniformly difform hotness is terminated at no de­
dered graphing system, in which it is specified for the first time that the intensity o f
gree in one extreme, for one quarter of any such triangle has a line which is just as distant
every point o f an extended subject is to be represented by a line perpendicularly from one extreme of the quarter as from the other, and it is as distant from either extreme
erected on this subject line, surface, or body, and that for every variety o f intensity as another middle line of a small quarter is distant from its extremes and in the same
o f a quality in a subject there can be imagined an equivalent surface or body to ratio, speaking of distance in terms of arithmetical ratio. In like fashion, the smaller the
represent it. I have stressed already the relative immaturity o f the doctrine as latitude of some part is, the more distant from the base is the part in which it is, and in any
presented in th &Questions on the Geometry o f Euclid in comparison with the treatment
21 M y translation is a somewhat modified metice. Similiter quecunque sit latitudo alicu­
given in the D e configurationibus. It will suffice to make a few key remarks. In the
version o f the translation I gave in The Science ius partis versus basem trianguli talis minor est
first place we can be reasonably certain that the Euclid tract precedes the D e con­ in quacunque parte distanti, et in parte magis
o f Mechanics, 383-84. The Latin text of this
figurationibus. The chief argument from the content o f both treatises is that the ex­ passage is taken from the text as there con­ distanti minor latitudo, et nulla pars est uni­
tension o f the crucial suitability doctrine to qualities represented by semicircles, structed (387-91), modified slightly on the formiter lata__ Sed latitudo quelibet unifor­
which I outlined in Chapter I as given in the D e configurationibus, is absent from the basis of reconsidering the manuscript readings: miter difformis terminata in utroque extremo
“ Tertia conclusio est quod quelibet latitudo ad certum gradum similis est quadrangulo qui
Questions on the Geometry o f Euclid, and it can hardly be denied that the extended
uniformiter difformis est tanta precise quanta causaretur per lineam abscindentem conum
suitability doctrine represents a distinct improvement over the doctrine as present­ trianguli supradicti, ita quod consequenter
est latitudo uniformis sub gradu suo medio,
ed in th e Questions, for it permits Oresme not to fall into absurdities like the iden­ vel sic quodlibet uniformiter difforme calidum terminaretur ad gradum minorem in extremo
tification o f one and only one determined line with a given intensity and the even est precise ita calidum sicut est aliquod unifor­ remissiori quantum linea talis plus appropin­
more absurd identification o f local m otion and alteration (see also the Introduction me calidum sub gradu medio illius uniformiter quat (for appropinquatur in The Science o f M e ­
difformis calidi__ Exemplum ad ista in quan­ chanics, 389, line 65; see variant reading) cono
to Appendix I). Furthermore, when Oresme in Ill.v iii o f the D e configurationibus
titatibus potest haberi. Sic enim est per omnia __ Tenet consequentia quia quilibet triangu­
speaks o f having given elsewhere a “ more subtle and difficult demonstration” o f lus mundi habens duo latera equalia equalis
de calido uniformi sicut est de parallelogram-
the summation o f the infinite series in question, I argue in Introduction III.B and mo rectangulo inter duas lineas equedistantes est alicui parallelogrammo rectangulo, cuius
in the Commentary to Ill.v iii, lines 35-44, that this is possibly a reference to a constituto, cuiuslibet talis quelibet pars est parallelogrammi latitudo erit uniformis et
p ro o f given in th t Questions on the Geometry o f Euclid rather than to the passage quot­ eque lata cum alia, quia cuiuslibet partis unius mensurabilis a linea transeunte per medium
talis 1atitudo mensuratur post basem illius paral- punctum eiusdem trianguli; patet, quia detur
ed above from she. Questions on the Physics, since it will appear by comparison o f the
lelogrammi. E t sic est per omnem modum de unus triangulus talis et sit a, cuius linea media
passage from the Questions on the Physics w ith the p roof in the D e configurationibus vel transiens per punctum medium sit b, et
uniformiter difformiter calido sicut est de trian­
that these tw o are essentially alike and so the passage in she. Questions on the Physics gulo, et hoc si illud uniformiter difformiter ponatur iste triangulus inter duas lineas eque­
cannot be the “ more difficult and subtle demonstration.” Finally, the earlier date calidum terminetur ad non gradum in uno distantes, et fiat inter easdem lineas parallelo-
o f h e Questions on the Geometry o f Euclid can be argued on external grounds as well. extremo, quia cuiuslibet talis trianguli una grammum, cuius basis sit equalis linee b, et sit
quarta habet lineam que tantum distat ab uno rectangulum.”
Before considering this argument, we should note the rather confused treat­
extremo eius quarte sicut ab alio et a quolibet 22 I have replaced the more common read­
ment o f the configuration doctrine found in a Questio de velocitate motus alterationis ing of qualitatibus given in the text published
suo extremo precise tantum distat sicut una
Oresme both in the. Questions on the Physics and 20 For a more complete discussion of the in- alia linea media alterius quarte minoris distat in The Science of Mechanics, 387, line 4 2>hy the
a suis extremis et in eadem proportione, sed reading quantitatibus found in MS B and noted
in his Livre du d el (see J. Murdoch, in Scripta finite series in this chapter, consult the Com-
Mathematica, Vol. 27 [1964], 87). mentary to Ill.viii, lines 8-28, 35-44. hoc loquendo de distantia proportionis aris- in the variant readings, line 42.
 68 Introduction The Configuration Doctrine 69

more distant part, the latitude is smaller.... Any latitude uniformly difform terminated in Candia somewhat later specifies just such a triangle to represent uniformly difform
both extremes at a certain degree is similar to the quadrangle formed by a line cutting off latitude (see Introduction II.B, fn. 9).
the apex of the triangle mentioned above, so that it would be terminated in the more N o w if Casali did not mean for a triangle representing uniformly difform latitude
remiss extreme at a degree which would be continually less as the line approaches the
to be a right triangle but simply an isosceles triangle, as is stated in the geometric
apex....The consequence23 [namely, that if a uniform latitude is like a rectangle and a
proof here translated, then his remarks should be interpreted as follow s.26
uniformly difform latitude is like a triangle, then any latitude uniformly difform is precise­
ly as great as the latitude which is uniform at its middle degree] holds, because any trian­
gle having two equal sides is equal to some rectangular parallelogram and the latitude
o f the parallelogram will be uniform and measurable by a line passing through the mid­
dle point of the same triangle. This is evident, for let there be given one such triangle, and
let it be a, whose middle line, i.e., the line passing through the middle point, be b and let
this triangle be placed between two parallel lines, and let there be produced between
these same lines a parallelogram whose base is equal to line b and let it be a rectangle.

It is evident in this treatment that Casali has imagined a uniform quality by a

rectangle and one uniformly difform by a triangle. It is a m oot point whether the In terms o f Figure (a), the statement about a uniformly difform hotness being like
triangle is a right triangle, as with Oresme, or not. One manuscript, in the margin, a triangle, means that in the isosceles triangle A B C (representing uniformly dif­
has added rectangulo after triangulo,24 I f this is a good addition, then the later geo­ form hotness) there is a quarter triangle B E G whose middle line E M is just as
metric p ro o f o f the Merton Rule ought to be conceived o f in terms o f the con­ distant from (i.e., exceeds) one extreme o f the small triangle as it is distant
ventional right triangle and rectangle constructed on the same base that was made from (i.e., is exceeded by) the other extreme and it is just as distant from either
popular by Oresme in his D e configurationibus, IIL vii (and perhaps also in his extreme as the middle line H N o f another quarter triangle A E O is distant from
Questions on the Geometry o f Euclid, Question 15), except that for Casali the right its extreme. (Still another similar interpretation which does not take the expres­
triangle is also an isosceles triangle. This is lent some support by the fact that some sion “ quarter triangle” literally w ould hold that in the isosceles triangle A B C
o f the manuscripts give the right triangle and rectangle to interpret the verbal, there is a triangle A D E whose middle line H I is just as distant from one extreme
M erton College type p ro o f preceding the geometric p roof which I have here quot­ o f the small triangle as from the other, and it is just as distant from either extreme
ed from Casali.25 Such reasoning is not conclusive, however, since it became as the middle line J K o f the other small quarter F C G is distant from its extremes.)
customary for scribes and editors to interpret the logical, verbal proofs in the texts The remark that a latitude uniformly difform and terminated in both extremes at a
they were copying by adding geometric figures in the margins, and so such a figure certain degree is like a quadrangle formed by cutting off the apex o f the triangle
as the right triangle and rectangles given in the Casali manuscripts m ight well have mentioned above is also illustrated by Figure (a), the quadrangle being A L M C
been a later scribal addition. But it is o f interest to note finally in connection with the with E M representing the more remiss extreme and continually becom ing smaller
problem o f whether Casali’s isosceles triangle is also a right triangle that Petrus de as the apex B is approached. Further, the geometric p roof o f the M erton Rule given
by Casali w ould then be illustrated in Figure (b), a being the isosceles triangle
23 I have replaced the former reading of
representing the uniformly difform latitude with b being the latitude through the
lo after triangulo in the fourth sentence. Miss
Ergo quod by the reading o f MS B : Tenet conse­ Maier, in Archivum Franciscanum Historicum, middle o f the triangle and with a rectangle whose base is equal to b and which is
quentia quia. Miss Maier in Archivum Francis- An. 53 (i960) 298, n. 1 remarks on my addi­ constructed between the same parallel lines between which the triangle is construct­
canum Historicum, An. 53 (i960), 300, n. 3 pre­ tion and says that it is in no manuscript; but as ed. I must admit that the whole approach o f this interpretation seems to me less satis­
fers hec conclusio quod which she notes is the I indicated in the variant readings (The Science factory than the interpretation o f the isosceles triangle as a right triangle but such
reading of Vat. lat. 3144 and 2185. She also o f Mechanics, 388, variant reading for line 48)
an understanding o f the Casali p roof seems to have been given by the anonymous
implies that this is the reading o f Riccard. 117, it is in the margin of manuscript B . The text
which is difficult to make out, but this seems has an addition sign indicated after triangulo. author o f the Tractatus bonus de uniformi et difformi, corollary to Proposition I (see
doubtful to me. Before latitudo in the follow­ 25 I have omitted the verbal, logical proof Appendix II) although as I have suggested in the Appendix there is some con­
ing clause I have omitted patet quod from my here, but it is included in The Science o f Mechan­ fusion in that tract about the type o f triangles intended by that author. In the case
earlier text. Patet is in MSS B V and the Edi­ ics, 389-90. MSS B and V both include the
tion o f 1505; the quod is only in V . figure. A has no figures. 26 An interpretation o f the passage on the rectangular is given in my translation in The
24 In my earlier text, I had included rectangu­ basis o f the assumption that the triangle is Science o f Mechanics, 383-84.
 7° Introduction The Configuration Doctrine 71
o f either interpretation (i.e., the one sketched above involving an isosceles trian­ account o f the configuration doctrine must be at least prior to 13 52 and most prob­
gle that is not necessarily rectangular or the one involving a right triangle to repre­ ably prior to 13 51. I f one says that Casali was influenced by the D e configurationibus,
sent a uniformly difform latitude), it seems evident that Casali intended to have his I w ould answer that this is quite unlikely since that w ork must itself have a terminus
latitude lines oriented in the horizontal direction rather than in the vertical direction post quern o f 1351 (see Introduction III. A) and w e w ould then have to posit an al­
follow ed in Oresm e’s scheme. most immediate transmission o f the D e configurationibus to Bologna. It seems more
But how does the question o f rectangularity bear on the question o f possible probable that, if Johannes was influenced by Oresme, the source o f this influence
Oresmian influence on Casali? I f Casali did intend to have a uniformly difform was the Questions on the Geometry o f Euclid. Thus the conclusion which this w hole
latitude represented by a right triangle, it w ould seem to me that it is quite prob­ argument points to, relative to the dating o f Oresme’s tw o works, is that the
able he was influenced by Oresme. In such a case, his only change (essentially in­ Questions on the Geometry o f Euclid was composed prior to the D e configurationibus.
significant) w ould have been to change the orientation o f the latitude lines to con­ Before leaving the Questions on the Geometry o f Euclid in order to trace the fate o f
form with the primitive meaning o f latitude. O n the other hand, if he meant for the doctrine w hich w e have described in detail in the first chapter, w e should note
the triangle representing a uniformly difform latitude to be merely any isosceles that the Questions treats the M erton theorem o f uniformly difform qualities and
triangle (without rectangularity specified), then either he was not influenced by velocities and its implications in a manner that is startlingly similar in form to the
Oresme or, if he was, he grossly misunderstood the importance o f rectangularity treatment o f uniform acceleration in the “ Third D ay” o f G alileo’s Discorsi.28 The
for Oresme’s treatment. It is difficult to see how he could have so misunderstood Questions first includes the conventional form o f the M erton Rule which measured a
the very clear statements o f Oresme. Still, if Oresm e’s views were not the ultimate uniformly difform quality or motion by its middle degree (see Appendix I, Ques­
source o f Casali’s geometric treatment, it is incumbent upon us to find another tion 10, lines 76-79): “ The penultimate [conclusion] is that from this latter to­
source o f the configuration doctrine originating in the 1340’s, and so far no such gether w ith the aforesaid it can be proved that a quality uniformly difform is equal
source has turned up. to the middle degree, i.e., that it w ould be just as great in quantity as if it were
If, then, w e tentatively settle on Oresme as the source o f influence for Casali’s uniform at the middle degree. A n d this can be proved as for a surface.”
geometric remarks, how w ill this help us in dating Oresm e’s w orks ? Miss Maier A lthough Oresme probably gave no p ro o f o f the theorem here, there is one
has shown that the Casali Questio must have been composed prior to 13 52 and prob­ manuscript which includes a garbled p roof (see variant reading for lines 77-79).
ably in 13 51 (but not as early as 1346, as one manuscript tells us).27 This conclusion The proposition is repeated in a somewhat different form in Question 15, lines
carries with it the implication that one o f the tw o works o f Oresme that give an 15 -17 : “ Then the first proposition is that it is impossible for b, which is uniformly
27 See Archivum Francis canum Historicum, An.. we know to have been composed after 1328, difform to no degree, to have as much quality as a [which is equal in subject and is
53 (i960), 276-306. Her main reasons for not and we know him to have been a fellow of uniform in quality], unless it begins from a degree double [the intensity o f a and
accepting the 1346 date for Casali’s work is Merton College, possibly in 1340 and certainly ends with no degree].” For this proposition, one manuscript gives the well-known
that Oresme’s activity and the works o f at in 1344 (see A . B. Emden, A Biographical diagram o f a right triangle and its equivalent rectangle constructed in the same
least Richard Swineshead and John Dumble- Register o f the University o f O xfo rd to A . D . 1500 ,
base (see Fig. 20(a), Quest. 15), i.e., the figure that appears in D e configurationibus,
ton, which she believes influenced Casali, are Vol. 3 [Oxford, 1959], 1836). Similarly, Dum-
too late, and further that this kind of discourse bleton was a fellow as early as 1338, and was
Ill.vii. Oresme in the Questions also recognized that the proposition held for uni­
was not prevalent at Bologna so early. The still a fellow in 1347-48, the last mention of form deceleration to rest (Question 13, lines 73-75): “ I f a is m oved uniformly for
last difficulty can perhaps be gotten around by him (ibid., Vol. 1 [Oxford, 1957], 603). As an hour and b is uniformly decelerated in the same hour by beginning from a degree
assuming that Casali became interested in this regards the arts activity o f Oresme, it is [of velocity] twice [that o f a\ and terminating at no degree, then they w ill traverse
kind of material when he served in the Fran­ clear that he was already a Master of Arts when
ciscan convent at Cambridge as the 59th rector
equal distances, as can easily be proved.”
he first appears in the records of Navarre as a
in 1340-41. It is certainly possible that he at scholarship holder in theology in 1348, and
Since Oresme stresses here that it is equality o f distance (in the same time) that
least read the D e motibus naturalibus of Roger indeed he appears on a list o f art masters of the is involved, it is clear that when talking about velocities, he conceives o f the areas
Swineshead that early, since it was written by Norman Nation in 1349 in connection with a o f the surfaces as representing total distances traversed or, more precisely, that the
1337 (The Science o f Mechanics, 202). In consid­ petition submitted several months earlier in areas are in the same ratio as the total distances traversed. It is then clear that
ering the dates o f Richard Swineshead’s Liber 1348 (H. Denifle and E. Chatelain, Chartularium
Oresme, even in the earlier w ork, understood what was to be the substance o f
calculationum and John Dumbleton’s Summa de universitatis Parisiensis, Vol. 2, 638). Hence, we
logicis et naturalibus, we should recognize that are not at all sure when Oresme began his
we are really quite in the dark as to the actual teaching and writing in the arts faculty. 28 For the first two theorems and the corol- 208—12. For their translation and discussion,
time o f their comoosition. Swineshead’s work lary to the second, see Galileo, L e opere, Vol. 8, see The Science o f Mechanics, 409-16.
 72 Introduction
G alileo’s first theorem and, as w e pointed out, Oresme later added a formal geo­
metric p ro o f in his D e configurationibus, Ill.vii.
But in addition to the M erton Rule for uniformly difform qualities and motions,
Oresme has given in his early w ork a proposition that is formally equivalent to
G alileo’s second theorem relating the distances to the squares o f the times, a prop­
osition usually considered as entirely original with Galileo. It is true, however,
that Oresm e’s proposition is applied to qualities rather than directly to velocities.
Oresme asserts (Question 13, lines 44-61):
The second [proposition] is that, in the case of every subject uniformly difform [in quality]
to no degree, the ratio of the whole quality to the quality of a part terminated at no degree
is as the square of the ratio of the whole subject to that part [of the subject]. This is evi­
dent in the first place because, by the preceding [proposition] such triangles and such
qualities [which the triangles represent] are similar. But the ratio o f similar triangles is as
the square of the ratio of a side to a corresponding side, by VI. 17 [of the Elements], but
the extension o f the subject is as the side of the triangle designating the quality. From this,
the proposition is evident__A third argument for it [i.e., the proposition] is, that by the
first question [i.e., Question 10], it is obvious that any such quality would be equal to its
middle degree with respect to intensity. Therefore, the [equivalent] intensity of the whole
[uniformly difform quality] is twice the [equivalent] intensity of its half, and also the
extension [of the whole is twice] the extension [of its half]. Hence by the second question
[i.e., Question 11, giving a rule for comparing the quantities of two uniform qualities
one of which is both twice as intense and twice as extended as the other], the ratio of the
qualities is as the square of the ratio of subject to subject.
Oresme later in the same question (lines 66-67) notes that one can speak in the same
way “ o f velocities in motions w ith respect to time.” Cf. also Question 11, lines
33-35. Hence, if such a transfer to velocities is made so that the quantities o f the
velocities, i.e., their total distances traversed, are considered in the place o f quan­
tities o f qualities, and their times are considered in place o f subjects o f qualities,
w e w ill have G alileo’s second theorem. Furthermore, one o f Oresm e’s arguments
in p ro o f o f the proposition is based on the M erton Rule for uniformly difform, just
as G alileo’s p ro o f o f his second theorem is based on the M erton Rule.
Finally, it should be remarked that Oresme also has given in the,Questions a prop­
osition equivalent to G alileo’s corollary to Theorem II holding that in the case
o f uniform acceleration from rest the distances traversed in equal, consecutive time
periods are as the odd numbers: 1, 3, 5, 7 ,__ Again, it should be noted that
Oresme has framed the proposition in terms o f qualities (Question 14, lines 28-31):
The Configuration Doctrine 73
“ The second conclusion is that, with a subject so divided [into equal parts] and
with the most remiss part designated as the first part, the ratio o f the partial quali­
ties, i.e., their mutual relationship, is as the series o f odd numbers where the first is
1, the second 3, the third 5, etc., as is evident in the figure.”
Oresme’s proof, it w ill be clear to the reader consulting Appendix I, goes back
ultimately to the proposition relating the quantities o f the qualities to the squares
o f the subject lines. Similarly, Galileo proved his corollary by means o f his T h eo­
rem II relating distances to the squares o f the times. One must presume that Oresme
w ould also have recognized that his proposition held for the distances traversed,
since throughout the w ork he stresses the applicability o f his propositions to
velocities as w ell as qualities. A nd, in fact, the first step towards Oresm e’s odd-
number theorem was taken by the M erton College authors in the context o f veloci­
ties when they proved that a body uniformly accelerated from rest traverses three
times as much space in the second half o f the time as in the first.29
In view o f the fact that Oresme drew much the same consequences from the
Merton Rule as did Galileo, and in view o f the further fact that the order and sub­
stance o f proofs in the tw o authors is essentially the same, we might well ask
whether Galileo read Oresm e’s Questions. I shall discuss G alileo’s sources later in
this chapter, but I can say at this point that there is no evidence that Galileo did
know this w ork, although, as w e shall see, he was clearly the heir o f the general con­
figuration doctrine and the M erton College kinematics.
B. The Fate o f Oresme’s Configuration Doctrine
Oresme’s doctrine o f configuration has been outlined in considerable detail in the
first chapter and its antecedents discussed in the initial section o f this chapter. The
remaining principal task is to sketch the impact it made on his and succeeding
generations. In tracing the later history o f the doctrine, w e shall find it convenient
to distinguish the influence that the doctrine had in the abstract representation o f
quality and velocity distributions, i.e., as a graphing system, and its influence as an
explanation (by means o f varying internal configurations) o f actual phenomena.
This division corresponds to a clearcut division o f treatment within the D e confi­
gurationibus itself, somewhat less than half o f it being spent on describing the exter­
nal figures or graphs while the rest o f the treatise concentrates on using the idea o f
internal configuration as a possible explanation for physical and psychological
phenomena. It w ill be apparent from our account that it is only as a graphing sys­
tem that the doctrine had any real influence, its use for particular phenomena being
virtually non-existent after Oresme’s generation (see Introduction II.C).
W e can first turn our attention to the influence o f the doctrine at Paris among
29 The Science o f Mechanics, 266, 285-86, 291-92.
 74 Introduction The Configuration Doctrine 75

Oresme’s contemporaries and immediate successors. Perhaps its earliest influence
(other than its possible influence on the w ork o f Johannes de Casali mentioned
above) was on the Questions on the Physics o f Albert o f Saxony, a contemporary o f
Oresme whose natural philosophy throughout reflects the view s o f both Buridan
and Oresme. In one place he tells u s :
As for a second method of comparison by which some motions are mutually comparable
there is correspondingly this conclusion, that by such a comparison motions which are
mutually of different kinds are [however] mutually comparable. Proof: For there is a
certain intensity which is signifiable by a certain line and not one greater or less than it.
Therefore, such [an intensity] can be said to be correspondingly equal to the line by
which it is signifiable, and consequently the motion of alteration in which such intensity
is acquired in an hour would be equal and correspondent to the local motion in which
such a line would be traversed in the same hour. The [initial] assumption is proved: Let
there be a line on which a semicircle is described. Let us suppose that each point marked
on this line be just as white in comparison to another point as the line protracted from
this point to the circumference is related [to the line protracted from the other point to
the circumference]. Then this difformity of whiteness is similar to the semicircle. This
semicircle then determines the radius which represents the intensity o f t h e whiteness at
the midpoint of the line on which the semicircle is described.1
Here Albert clearly indicates that he knows Oresme’s technique o f configuration
and its essential idea that the ratios o f the varying intensities o f a quality distributed
in a line can be represented by the ratios o f the perpendiculars erected on the
appropriate points o f the subject line. In this particular passage he is concerned
It was the opinion o f Pierre D uhem 2 that A lbert’s junior contemporary, Marsi-
lius o f Inghen, also employed Oresme’s technique in a passage o f his Questiones in
libros de generatione et corruptione,3 but actually, although it consists in a quantitative
discussion o f degrees, Marsilius does not in this passage relate the discussion to
geometric figures. D uhem was perhaps thrown off by the fact that in the published
w ork, the editor or publisher has included a rectangular figure divided into trian­
gles b y a diagonal in order to represent the existence o f tw o contraries in the same
subject, and that this was precisely the figure suggested by Oresme in his D e con­
figurationibus (see I.xix, and Fig. 11). But as w e shall see, scribes and schoolmen often
used the configuration doctrine to illustrate in the margin textual arguments that
were not actually geometric.
T w o other schoolmen studying at Paris adopted Oresme’s treatment in a more
extensive w ay than did A lbert: Henry o f Hesse and Symon de Castello. I shall
reserve the description o f H enry’s use o f the technique to Introduction II.C
where I discuss the application o f the doctrine to actual phenomena. Symon de
Castello’s use o f the system occurs in a tract entitled D e proportionibus velocitatum in
motibus, falsely attributed to Oresme in the colophon o f its unique manuscript.4
tuor, septem cum tribus, et sic deinceps. E x
2 Pierre Duhem, L e Systeme du monde, Vol. 7,
567: “ C ’est au moyen de la representation geo- quo consequenter dicit opinio quod gradus
metrique imaginee par Oresme que Marsile caliditatis cum gradibus frigiditatis simul stant
in subiecto eodem ubi simul combinati non
expose la theorie qui lui plait si fort.”
3 Bk. II, Quest. 6, Ed. 1518 (io6v, c. 1): excedunt numerum decem {corr. e x denarium);
“ Secunda opinio est quod latitudines summe patet quia non sunt contrarii.” The edition in­

w ith a problem raised in both the Questions on the Geometry o f Euclid and the D e caliditatis et summe frigiditatis sunt equales: et cludes the following inaccurate figure in the
quando caliditatis latitudo remittitur frigidita­ margin:
configurationibus as to whether in some instances a specific quality may determine a
tis latitudo proportionabiliter introducitur, et
particular and specific figure and hence some intensity may be signifiable by a
ideo consequenter dicitur quod quelibet certa
particular line o f fixed and determined length and in consequence different kinds o f latitudo caliditatis cum qualibet latitudine fri­
motions (namely motion o f alteration and local motion) may be directly comparable giditatis qua simul combinata excederet sum­
(see Introduction I, pages 21-23, above). B y this example o f the semicircle, Albert mam latitudinem caliditatis habet contrarieta-
answers in the affirmative, thus taking the position approved in Oresm e’sQuestions tem. Sed cum latitudine frigiditatis cui combi­
nata non excederet latitudinem summe calidi­
but rejected in his D e configurationibus.
tatis non habet repugnantiam. Exemplum, si 4 Paris, Bibi, de 1’Arsenal 522, i68v, c. 2 (ed.
caliditas summa componeretur ex decem of McCue, 228): “ Explicit tractatus de pro-
1 Questiones in octo libros physicorum, Bk. VII, intensio in hora esset equalis et correspondens porcionibus velocitatum in motibus, compila­
gradibus caliditatis proportionabiliter summa
Quest. 5, Ed. 1516 (f. 74v): “ Quantum ad motui locali quo pertransiretur talis linea in tus per magistrum egregium Nicolaum Ores­
frigiditas, tunc dicitur quod quandoque nume­
secundum modum comparationis quo aliqui eadem hora. Assumptum probatur: nam sit me, scriptus Parisius per manum Iohannis
rus graduum caliditatis connumerati( /) numero
motus comparantur adinvicem correspon- una linea super quam describatur semicirculus Monachi, Suessionensis diocesis, scriptus in
graduum frigiditatis excedit numerum decem
denter ista sit conclusio quod motus adinvicem et quilibet punctus in illa linea signatus sit ita vigilia Sancti Pauli.” But as McCue was the
(1correxi ex denarium), tunc illa caliditas et illa
diversorum generum tali comparatione sunt albus in comparatione ad alterum sicut se habet first to point out, the actual author, Symon de
frigiditas invicem habent contrarietatem, ut sex
adinvicem comparabiles. Probatur: nam aliqua linea protracta ab isto puncto ad circumferen­ Castello, names himself in the final paragraph
unius cum quinque alterius, quia faciunt xi, vel
est intensio que est significabilis per aliquam tiam. Tunc ista difformitas albedinis est con­ o f the work (i68v, c.2): “ Hiis ergo taliter qua­
septem cum octo vel quattuor, et sic deinceps.
lineam et non maiorem nec minorem: ergo similis semicirculo, cuius linea illa causat liter dictis mei operis prescripti hic tamen fir­
Sed quando amborum gradus connumerati non
talis potest dici equalis correspondenter illi semidiametrum per quem significabilis est mabo quod si non plenarie a principio promis­
excedunt decem (corr. e x denarium), tunc non
linee per quam est significabilis et per conse­ intensio albedinis puncti medii in linea circa sa servavi, item tam mei intellectus ac fantasie
habent invicem contrarietatem, [ut] quinque
quens motus alterationis quo acquiritur talis quam descriptus est semicirculus.” debilitas quam scabrositas operis, et sex men-
unius cum quinque alterius, vel sex cum qua-
 7^ Introduction The Configuration Doctrine 77

Symon was possibly a junior contemporary o f Oresme.5 He quotes exactly from tor-master Nicholas Oresme in his tract On the Uniformity and Difformity o f Intensi­
I.xi o f the D e configurationibus Oresme’s characterization o f a uniformly difform ty,” He then goes on in this passage to give in extenso the same geometric illustra­
quality by the proportionality: (I3- I 2)/(I2- I I) = ( E 3- E 2)/(E2- E I), where I „ I2, and I3 tion o f this characterization that Oresme gave, first taking up the case o f a quality
are the intensities o f any three points o f the linear subject at distances E „ E 2, and uniformly difform and terminated at zero intensity in one extreme and then one
E 3 from the origin o f the subject line, or, as referred to the right triangle repre­ uniformly difform but terminated in both extremes at some degree, in each case
senting such a quality (and in modern parlance), by the constancy o f the slope o f using the same figures and letters as Oresme did. He proceeds to remark that every
the right triangle.6 He adds that “ this description is related by the venerable doc- quality (he says “ latitude” ) that is uniform is to be imagined by a rectangle, every
quality that is uniformly difform terminated “ at no degree” by a right triangle, and
sium interpalatorum brevitas, me publice sue dcmonstracionis conformiter demonstra­ every quality uniformly difform terminated in both extremes at some degree by a
Symonem de Castello efficaciter excusando, bo ; et hoc tam in latitudine uniformiter diffor- “ quadrangle having [two] right angles on the base and the [two] other angles un­
concorditer perhibeant testimonium veritatis.” mi terminata ad non gradum in uno extremo,
equal.” “ E very other linear quality is said to be difformly difform and to be imag­
Incidentally, he specifically tells us in the open­ quam in alia que terminata est utrobique ad
ing paragraph o f the work that he studied at certum gradum. Quantum ad terminatam ad
ined by figures otherwise disposed in many different ways.”
Paris (f. i26r, c. i ; ed. o f McCue, p. i): “ . . .ex non gradum in uno extremo, demonstratur Symon also, later in the tract, gives Oresm e’s geometric p roof o f the M erton
pluribus diffusisque libellis reverendorum primo sic. Nam sit aliqua talis latitudo unifor­ Rule for a “ uniformly difform latitude,” namely that, in respect to subject, it corre­
magistrorum meorum dudum Parisius in vico miter difformis ymaginata per triangulum sponds to the mean degree.7 Once again he uses exactly the same figures and letters
straminum actu regencium ac aliorum valen­ rectangulum A B C . Erectis itaque in dicto
dum virorum aliqua introductoria modo quo triangulo tribus lineis perpendicularibus— inter secundum et tercium. E t sicut dico de is­ the figures for I. xi o f the D e configurationibus.
potui faciliori collegi.” scilicet B C , F G , et D E — protrahantur due tis tribus punctis, ita dici potest de quibuscun­ 7 MS Paris, Bibl. de 1’Arsenal 522, 167v, c.
5 McCue in his text (pp. vi-vii) tentatively parve linee— scilicet linea E H equedistans que aliis tribus punctis. Sed quantum ad lati­ 2-i68r, c. 2; ed. o f McCue, 224-26: “ Quod
places the tract o f Symon as between 1355 and linee D F , et similiter linea G K equedistans tudinem uniformiter difformem terminatam autem quelibet latitudo uniformiter difformis
1365. Symon quotes Albert o f Saxony and linee F B — ; quibus factis fient, sicut apparet, utrobique ad gradum, sic demonstro: nam in comparacione ad suum subiectum terminata
Nicole Oresme by name, following the Propor­ duo parvi trianguli— scilicet C K G et G H E — ymaginetur talis latitudo per quadrangulum {corr. e x terminentur) utrobique ad gradum
tiones o f the former closely and quoting direct­ qui sunt equianguli, sicut demonstrari faciliter A B C D , in quo protrahatur linea D E eque­ sive in uno extremo terminata {corr. e x termi­
ly from the D e configurationibus of the latter. He potest per quartam, sextam, et 24am primi distans basi A B , ex qua protraccione fiet tri­ netur) ad gradum et in alio ad non gradum
also appears to be quoting without acknowl­ Elementorum. Ergo, per sextam sexti Euclidis, angulus D E C . Deinde protrahantur linee al­ correspondeat gradui suo medio correspon­
edgment from the D e velocitate o f Johannes de latera illos equales angulos respiciencia sunt titudinis in quadrangulo et alie transversales dent!, scilicet, puncto eius medio, probatur
Casali. If he is really as early as McCue sus­ proporcionalia. Per consequens qualis erit equedistantes basi in isto triangulo dicto faci­ dupliciter__ Secundo geometrice probatur
pects, then this would constitute evidence that proporcio G K {corr. e x G H G K ) ad E H talis endo parvos triangulos. Quo facto, faciliter sic, et hoc primo de lineari terminata in uno
Casali was known at a quite early date at Paris est proporcio G K excessus ad G H excessum, poterit demonstrative argui de illis excessibus extremo ad certum gradum et in alio ad non
(see ed. o f McCue, xv-xxi). The direct citation et quia linea G K est equalis linee F B , et linea et distanciis in illo triangulo sicut superius ar­ gradum. Quia sit talis latitudo uniformiter
o f Albert o f Saxony by name occurs on folio E H est equalis linee D F — aliter linea G F et guebatur {corr. e x acquirebatur) in alio, sicut difformis ymaginabilis per triangulum rec­
i 6 i v (ed. o f McCue, 193). For the citation of linea E D non essent equedistantes, et per potest intuenti patere in figura in margine pic­ tangulum A B C , que est uniformiter difformis
Oresme’s name, see n. 6, below. consequens non perpendicularum supra eadem ta. Omnis ergo latitudo uniformis ymaginatur terminata ad non gradum in puncto B et ad
6 MS Paris, Bibl. de 1’Arsenal 522, 156V, linea, quod est contra suppositum— , sequitur per quadrangulum rectangulum qualis esset certum gradum in puncto A in alio extremo,
cc. 1-2; ed. o f McCue, 165-67: “Alia descrip- quod qualis est proporcio F B ad D F , que figura M G E F , et omnis qualitas uniformiter et sit D punctus medius linee subiecte cuius
cio qualitatis latitudinalis uniformiter difformis linee sunt distancie trium punctorum ipsi basi, difformis terminata ad non gradum ymagina- quidem puncti gradus seu intensio ymaginatur
est ista: quod est ilia cuius omnium trium talis est proporcio C K ad G H , qui sunt exces­ bilis est per triangulum rectangulum, qualis per lineam D E . Per consequens ergo qualitas
punctorum proporcio distancie inter primum sus altitudinis proporcionalis intensionis illo­ est supra dictus triangulus A B C , et eciam uniformis sub gradu puncti medii eius ymagi­
et secundum ad distanciam inter secundum et rum eorundem punctorum. Cum ergo qualitas qualis est triangulus inferior B P Q . Omnis vero nabilis est per quadrangulum F A B G . Item
tercium est sicut proporcio excessus primi linee A B sit talis et taliter se habens quod pro­ qualitas uniformiter difformis terminata utro­ arguitur sic: triangulus A B C est equalis qua­
supra secundum ad excessum secundi supra porcio punctorum linee intensioris (/ in inten­ bique ad gradum ymaginanda est per qua­ drangulo F A B G ; sed cum triangulus A B G sit
tercium in intensione, vocando scilicet inten­ sione?) est sicut proporcio linearum in latitu­ drangulum {corr. ex triangulum) habentem latitudo uniformiter difformis linearis termina­
siorem punctum illorum trium primum punc­ dine super eadem puncta perpendiculariter angulos rectos supra basim et alios {corr. ex ta ad non gradum in uno extremo et in alio ad
tum. Ista descripcio traditur in venerabili doc- erectarum, sequitur evidenter quod que est aliquos) inequales, sicut quadrangulus F P - certum gradum, et quadrangulus F A B G sit
tore magistro Nycolao Horem in tractatu suo proporcio excessus primi puncti supra secun­ G M . Sed omnis alia qualitas linearis dicitur qualitas ymaginata uniformis sub gradu medii
de uniformitate et difformitate intensionis', quam dum ad excessum secundi supra tercium in in­ difformiter difformis, et est ymaginanda per puncti, ergo etc. Consequenda nota. Antece­
licet ibidem demonstret, tamen ad clariorem tensione, eadem est proporcio distancie inter figuras aliter dispositas in multis modis varia- dens probatur quia triangulus F C E et triangu­
noticiam hoc studencium, sequendo modum primum punctum et secundum ad distanciam cionis.” For the figures given in the proofs, see lus B E G sunt equales. Ergo quodcumque il-
 78 Introduction
used by Oresme in I ll.v ii o f the D e configurationibus. N otice further that Symon is
now using “ latitude” not just for the dimension o f intensity but for the variation in
intensity over the whole subject; in short, for the whole quantity o f the quality, a
usage which Oresme critically ascribes to “ certain moderns” (I.iii) and which later
authors like Jacobus de Sancto Martino take up, as w e shall indicate below .8
Other authors connected with Paris were certainly well aware o f Oresm e’s
graphic approach. Thus Petrus de Candia, a master o f theology at Paris in 1 381 and
later Pope Alexander V , shows acquaintance w ith Oresme’s system.9A s I mentioned
lorum addatur superficiei A F E B {corr. ex eidem communi, puta superficiei E D A B , re­
A F E A ), resultancia erunt equalia per commu­ sultancia erunt equalia per eandem commu­
nem animi concepcionem. Sed per addicionem nem animi concepcionem sicut prius. Sed per
trianguli C F E causatur <triangulus A B C , et addicionem trianguli C E D dicto quadrangulo
per addicionem trianguli B E G causatur) qua­ {corr. e x triangulo) E A B D , causatur qua­
drangulus A F B G , sicut patet in figura. Ergo drangulus C A B D {corr. e x F G A B ). Ergo
triangulus ABC et quadrangulus AFBG quadrangulus CABD {corr. ex C A B G ) et
<sunt equales). Consequenda est nota. Ante­ quadrangulus F G A B sunt equales. Sed cum
cedens quo ad partem secundam patet de se. quadrangulus FGAB {corr. e x C A B G ) sit
Sed quo ad primam probo, scilicet quod illi latitudo ymaginata uniformis secundum gra­
trianguli parvi sint equales, quia C E et F E dum puncti medii eius et linearis, ergo etc.
{corr. ex G E) latera unius sunt equalia E G Consimiliter posset argui de qualitate super­
{corr. e x EF) et E B lateribus alterius, scilicet ficiali et corporali.” The figures specified are
quilibet suo relativo. Nam tam C B quam G F those of Ill.vii of the D e configurationibus except
linee sunt divise per equalia in puncto E, et that Symon marks the midpoint o f F G in
duo anguli E contra se positi sunt equales per figure 21 (b) by letter H .
1 5arn primi Ele?nentorum. Ergo per quartam 8 C f. John Dumbleton on the “ proper” and
eiusdem basis G E basi E F {corr. ex BF) erit “ improper” usage of “ latitude,” in M. Clagett,
equalis. Per consequens totus triangulus toti The Science o f Mechanics, 362.
triangulo, quod fuit intentum. Eodem modo 9 Petrus de Candia, Lectura super sententias,
potest argui de qualitate uniformiter difformi MS Paris, BN Nouv. acquis, lat. 1467; 151V, c.
terminata utrobique ad gradum, nam sit talis 1, Bk. II [Dist. 3], quest. 4: “ 6a conclusio est
qualitas ymaginabilis per quadrangulum A B - hec: collocatio specierum in latitudine generis
C D in quo protrahatur linea D E equedis- ymaginativa {or imaginaria) non est per modum
tans basi A B ex qua protraccione fiet in dicto discreti sed potius per modum continui
quadrangulo triangulus C E D . Deinde pro­ indicanda... (c.2). E x quo ulterius sequitur
trahatur per gradum puncti medii linea F G quod latitudo huiusmodi ymaginanda est
equalis et equedistans basi subiecte et protra­ per modum trianguli ortogonii duarum line­
hatur eciam linea G D . Item, sicut prius, pro­ arum equalium constituentium angulum rec­
batur quod triangulus C E D et quadrangulus tum. Patet ex ymaginatione latitudinis uni­
F G D E erunt equales {corr. ex equalia), nam formiter difformis.” It is of interest that the
triangulus C F H et triangulus H G D sunt right triangle suggested here in connection
equales ea racione qua prius de aliis. Ergo quo­ with a latitude uniformly difform is also
cumque illorum addito quadrangulo F E D H specified as an isosceles triangle. Such may
{corr. ex F E G D G ), resultancia erunt equalia. also be the case of the triangle used by
Sed resultancia sunt triangulus C E D ex una Johannes de Casali, see Introduction II.A, fn.
parte et quadrangulus F E D G {corr. ex trian­ 24. This passage should also be compared with
gulus F E G ) ex alia. Ergo [quadrangulus et] the treatment of the perfection of species given
triangulus {corr. e x trianguli illi) sunt equales. by Jacobus de Sancto Martino (see fn. 21 be­
E t si sic, ergo iterum quolibet eorum addito low). Somewhat later Petrus adds (152V, c. 2):
The Configuration Doctrine
earlier, a scribe at Paris in 1375 used Oresm e’s system on the margins to inter­
pret the text o f the Liber calculationum o f Richard Swineshead.10 A s in the case o f
“ Ex predictis ergo recolligendo apparet quod
perfectionem specierum possimus tripliciter
ymaginari: in uno modo per modum latitudi­
nis uniformiter difformis__ Prima opinio
biffurcatur, eo quod latitudo uniformiter dif­
formis potest ymaginari ab aliquo gradu (13 3r,
c. 1) infimo versus ullum supremum finitum
vel econtrario ab aliquo gradu supremo versus
ullum infimum. Prima opinio est magistri Jo-
hannis de Rippa__” However, a preliminary
search in Jean de Ripa’s Lectura super libros
sententiarum has not revealed the use o f a right
triangle to represent a uniformly difform
latitude. I hasten to add that I have examined
only (1) a single, incomplete manuscript, Paris,
BN lat. 14580, i24v-49r, which contains the
pertinent section on latitudes (/ Sent., Dist. 2,
questions 3 and 4) as a separate tract entitled
in the colophon D e perfectione specierum (cf.
MS Cracow, Bibl. Jagiellonska 733, 94b:
“ Hic incipit tractatus de perfectione specierum
Iohannis de ryppa v e l. . . , ” as reported in Jean
de Ripa, Quaestio de gradu supremo, ed. o f A .
Combes and P. Vignaux [Paris, 1964], 23);
(2) the conclusions from the Lectura as
published by A . Combes: Jean de Ripa,
Conclusiones (Paris, 1957), see particularly the
questions on latitudes, pages 65-78; (3) the
above cited Quaestio de gradu supremo o f Jean de
Ripa; (4) Jean de Ripa’s Determinations (ed.
of A. Combes [Paris, 1957]); and (5) the partial
edition o f the prologue o f the Lectura by A.
Combes: Jean de Ripa, Lectura super primum
sententiarum: Prologi quaestiones I & I I (Paris,
1961). I should also add that I queried Mgr.
Combes as to whether he knew o f any reference
to the use o f the triangle for a uniformly
difform latitude in Jean’s Lectura and he
graciously made a search for such an example,
but was unable to locate one. In addition,
Mgr. Combes has pointed out to me that Jean
in principle excluded such geometric com­
parisons as the use of the triangle would have
demanded. I am grateful to Mgr. Combes for
the text o f the following passages that illus­
trates Jean’s view. See Jean de Ripa, I Sent.',
Dist. 2, quest. 4, art. 1, ad rationes, ad 3am,
79
(MS BN lat. 15369, fol. 145 b): “ A d tertiam
rationem principalem, nego similitudinem de
speciebus in genere quantitatis continue, et de
speciebus in latitudine entis simpliciter. Nam
in latitudine entis simpliciter, quelibet due
species sunt essentialiter ordinate intantum
quod non est possibile duas species equaliter
communicare in aliqua denominatione essen­
tiali utrique communi. Non sic est de speciebus
quantitatis continue. Si vero species in genere
quantitatis continue dicerent diversas res et
correspondenter diversas rationes specificas,
deductio haberet colorem. Sed quia species
quantitatis continue assignate non sunt diverse
species quoad esse quantitatis, sed solum
quoad modum quantitativum diversum secun­
dum varietatem extensionis, qui modus diver­
sus eidem numero quantitati potest competere,
ideo ratio non procedit. E t hinc est etiam quod
in hoc apparet, quod arguentes ad istam
materiam per mathematica exempla nichil
concludunt, quoniam, sicut in modo quantita­
tive aliter se habent species quantitatis ad
quantitatem simpliciter, aliter species rerum ad
genus superius, ita etiam aliter se habent
species quantitatis considerate secundum
modum mathematicum ad species essentiales
in latitudine entis simpliciter. E t ideo, cum
aliqui per exempla mathematica de angulis et
proportionibus angulorum volunt conformiter
loqui ex agere transferendo ad proportiones
et excessus specierum in latitudine entis
simpliciter, nichil breviter concludunt: alique
enim sunt species angulorum, que consistunt
in gradu indivisibili— sicut species anguli
recti— , aliqui vero in quadam latitudine— sicut
anguli acuti et obtusi— : sed numquid ita
est de speciebus rerum? Certe non. Nulla
est enim species in latitudine entis, que non
habeat secundum perfectionem specificam
certam latitudinem essentialem— sicut patebit
in sequenti articulo. Et ideo ex exemplis
mathematicis in quantitate continua arguere
sic esse in speciebus rerum naturalium, nullum
evidentem potest habere colorem— (Quest. 4,
art. 2, contra conci. 6, M S cit. fol. 147 c-d):
Verumptamen unum premitto, quod si
 8o
Symon, the scribe w ho applied these figures to the text appears to have taken
“ latitude” to stand for an area or quantity o f quality, but w ith this distinction: an
area that represents a change or a difference in intensity.
arguatur contra premissas conclusiones per
exempla mathematica, huiusmodi exempla
sunt refellenda, et maxime illa, que ex pro­
portionibus angulorum et ipsorum excessibus
arguunt consimiles proportiones et excessus
inter species entium. Quis enim non cito ar­
gueret— volens admittere hec exempla— quod
aliquis gradus specificus potest esse indivisi­
bilis, quoniam sic est de angulo rectilineo
infra speciem suam? Quis etiam non argueret
quod aliquis gradus specificus potest esse
divisibilis et continens latitudinem, quoniam
sic est de angulo acuto immediate sub rectili­
neo vel obtuso superiori? Ym o leviter argu­
eretur quod una species finita in genere entis
potest habere infinitam latitudinem infra
propriam speciem, quoniam sic est in mathe­
maticis de qualibet specie quantitatis— puta
linee, superficie et corpore— , sic etiam potest
esse de qualibet figura possibili sperica vel
angulari. Sic etiam potest argui quod una
species finita infinite potest excedere sibi
inferiorem, quoniam sic est de angulo recti­
lineo : infinite enim excedit secundum propor­
tionem geometricam angulum contingentie.
Sed quia exempla mathematica sunt in propo­
sito refellenda, apparet ex hoc: nam sicut
mathematicus potest considerare dimensionem
longitudinis sine latitudine, quamvis in re non
esset possibilis concursus unius dimensionis—
puta longitudinis— sine latitudine in eandem
quantitatem numeralem— considerat enim
huiusmodi dimensiones abstrahendo ipsas a
materiis— sic etiam intellectus potest conside­
rare totam denominationem perfectionis sim­
pliciter in latitudine essendi ut sic, et totam
latitudinem vite ut sic, excludendo omnem
aliam denominationem essentialem. Et isto
modo potest ymaginari quemlibet gradum in
latitudine essendi, absque hoc quod tali actui
correspondeat aliquis gradus vite. Tamen non
est sic possibile in re, quoniam aliquis est
gradus essendi infra propriam latitudinem,
infra quam necessario unitive concurrit ratio
vite, et per rationem vite (147 d) superadditam
entitas, que est sub tali gradu essendi, neces­
Introduction The Configuration Doctrine
Also o f probable Parisian origin, although perhaps by a German student at
Paris, is the Good Treatise on Uniform and Difform first mentioned by A . Maier and
edited and discussed in Appendix II o f this book. I have suggested in my treat­
ment o f this tract that it may predate 1369. T he sources for the treatment o f the
sario est sub alio gradu specifico quam entitas,
que est sub gradu remissiori. E t ita, accedendo
modus arguendi illorum, qui ex excessibus right triangle is given to illustrate division o f a
versus gradum immensum, per novum et
angulorum volunt rimari excessus specierum latitude to infinity by proportional parts divid­
novum concursum unitivum aliarum rationum
in entibus.” ed according to a ratio o f 2:1, as follow s:
formalium variantur gradus specifici entium,
10 Paris, BN lat. 6558. As I remarked above
et essentialiter secundum superius et inferius
in Introduction II. A , the scribe uses the config­
ordinantur. Sed quis scrutinio mathematico
uration technique on f. 6r to interpret the
innitendo posset ad istam indaginem perve­
same series appearing in Oresme’s Questions on
nire? Certe nullus. E t ideo sine dubio moderni,
the Physics and in Ill.viii o f the D e configuratio­
qui iuxta species mathematicas volunt ordinem
nibus (cf. the Commentary to Ill.viii, lines
istum naturarum et specierum rimari, nun­
35-44). The marginal figures are these:
quam pervenient ad intelligentiam veritatis__ Another right triangle is found on f. 2r, a
(Quest. 4, art. 3, conci. 4, M S cit. fol. 150 series o f three stepped rectangles on f. -jt:
a -b ) : E x hac patet clarissime quod, quantum-
cumque sit magna similitudo specierum
numeralium ad species entium, in tantum quod
omnia dicuntur formata in numero secundum
Scripturam, et secundum Philosophum species
sunt sicut numeri, nichilominus tamen maxima n C b C b
est diversitas inter ipsa. Non enim inter aliquas
O n f. 15 v we find the following figures to il­
species possibiles vel individua, que invicem
lustrate a proof regarding coextensive con­
se excedunt, est ymaginabilis talis excessus
The technique is also used in f. iv when a traries :
qualis est inter species numerorum, ita quod
Deus de sua potentia absoluta non potest
creare aliqua duo entia, que sic indivisibiliter
probatio 2e conclusionis
se excedant excessu arismetico sicut quilibet
numerus finitus immediate inferiorem, et
tamen quod tali excessui correspondeat aliqua
latitudo proportionis geometrice. Et ideo, si
quis velit arguere ex excessibus numerorum
quod sic species entium se excedant, quoniam
omnes species entium constituuntur in certo
numero, haberet debile fundamentum. Con­
similiter posset arguere quod nulla species
(150 b) infra se claudit aliquam latitudinem
specificam vel numeralem, quoniam nec On f. i6r:
aliquis numerus.
probatio 3e conclusionis probatio 4e conclusionis
Item: quod quodlibet individuum speciei
superioris indivisibiliter excedit individuum
speciei immediate inferioris, et quod nullum
individuum in aliqua specie potest aliud in
eadem excedere intensive, quoniam sic est in
numeris: nedum enim species entium sed
etiam quelibet individua entium disponuntur
a Deo in numero, pondere et mensura. Si ergo
iste modus arguendi sit debilis, quanto magis
 82
Introduction The Configuration Doctrine 83

configuration doctrine in this tract seem to have been the D e velocitate motus altera­
tions o f Johannes de Casali and possibly the. Questions on the Geometry o f Euclid. For
its detailed know ledge o f the usual distinctions between uniform and uniformly
difform it is indebted to the schoolmen o f M erton College, Oxford. For the most
part, the treatise is confused and mathematically inept but it does reflect some
interesting divergences from, or extensions of, Oresme’s procedure: (i) The
author applies the language arising from the philosophical treatment o f qualities to
the surfaces or figures themselves, so that his initial concern is w ith uniform, uni­
form ly difform, and difformly difform surfaces. Hence it is only after framing and
proving his theorems in terms o f geometric surfaces that he then applies them in
corollaries to qualities and motions. In this application o f the language o f intension
and remission o f qualities to surfaces, he was apparently extending the initial re­
marks o f Oresme when the latter spoke o f the altitude o f a rectangle as uniform and
that o f a right triangle as uniformly difform.11 (2) H e adopts (although not w ith­
out some confusion) the horizontal orientation o f figures associated w ith Casali’s
use o f the configuration doctrine. Hence his latitude lines are horizontal lines rather
than the vertical lines used by Oresme. (3) H e achieves in his introductory para­
graphs a greater generality in regard to uniform and uniformly difform surfaces.
He does not restrict himself to rectangles for “ the uniform ” and right triangles for
“ the uniformly difform beginning at no degree.” Rather he posits that the uni­
form can be represented by any parallelogram and the uniformly difform o f this
kind by any triangle. In his actual proofs he does not appear to stick to the general­
ity already achieved. (4) He ignores— if he knew— Oresme’s suggestion in both the
Questions on the Geometry o f Euclid and the D e configurationibus that the configuration
doctrine can be extended to three dimensions. Instead he adopts a confused system
o f the superposition o f tw o two-dimensional figures to represent surface qualities.
(5) A lthough the author starts from geometrical surfaces, as I have suggested, his
command o f geometry is w oefully weak (see particularly Proposition III, Footnote
J 3 ).
In the same manuscript there is a further reflection o f the configuration doctrine,
or at least o f the geometric analogy o f a surface w ith intensity distributed exten­
sively, in an anonymous Questio utrum omnis qualitas in infinitum divisibilis existens in
Finally, on f. iy r :
caliditas
8 I------------- —,80
frigiditas caliditas
4 4
a frigiditas
0 “ degree” and “ latitude considered absolutely”
—
__ __ ________1
11 See Appendix I, Quest. 10, lines 13-19.
subiecto indivisibili denominet ipsum infinite tale.11 In the introductory arguments that
w ould answer the question in the affirmative, the author conceives o f the right
triangle as representing a uniformly difform “ latitude” and further he thinks o f
such a triangle as containing an infinitude o f intensity lines.
Also every extended quality divisible in infinity is an extensive infinite by reason o f this
mode of divisibility. Therefore, in the same way, every quality intensively divisible in
infinity [is infinite]. The antecedent is proved. Let there be any line you please A B and let
it be divided into separate extensive parts which uniformly difformly diminish to zero.
And let us imagine that these parts are erected upon some line lying laterally next to them.
Such things posited constitute a latitude uniformly difform by means o f a right triangle,
figured as in Figure b. Then it is clear that if all the lineal excesses which are beyond C D ,
the mean degree o f that latitude, are taken away and added to those lines which are be­
low C D , an infinite number o f lines equal to line C D will result. Therefore since all of
these lines which have been erected are parts of line A B , it having been said that it was
divided into separate parts mutually continuous according to the dimension of length,
it follows that A B was of infinite length or infinitely long.13
12 Erfurt, Stadtbibl. Amplon. Q . 325, 53r—tione illius modi divisibilitatis; igitur eodem
54V. It begins: “ Circa materiam propositionis modo omnis qualitas in infinitum divisibilis
intensive [est infinita]. Antecedens probatur.
precedentis questionis in qua dicebatur quod
forma gradualis subiecti indivisibilis, ut cari­ E t sit A B linea quecunque et dividatur in par­
tas, non est innata aliquod subiectum extense tes extensivas non communicantes descen­
informare quero istam questionem: utrum dentes diminutive uniformiter difformiter us­
omnis qualitas in infinitum divisibilis existens que ad non quantum. E t ymaginemur quod
in subiecto indivisibili denominet ipsum in­ ille partes erigantur super aliquam lineam ia-
centem lateraliter iuxta invicem; qualiter posi­
finite tale.” Note the similarity of this ques­
tion to that which Oresme discussed in the te constituent latitudinem uniformiter dif-
Questions on the Generation and Corruption and formem per modum trianguli orthogonii figu­
which we discussed in Introduction II.A. ratam ut in figura b. Tunc clarum est quod
There is a further fragment D e latitudinibus in ablatis linealibus excessibus qui sunt super C D
this manuscript (2 5r-v) which might well have gradum medium illius latitudinis et additis il­
benefited from use o f the configuration system. lis lineis que sunt infra C D resultabunt (corr.
N o trace of it is found, although the author is e x resaltabunt) infinite linee equales linee C D .
attempting to distinguish “ latitude” from Cum ergo omnes ille linee erecte sunt partes
linee A B , dicto modo divise non communi­
from “ latitude considered according to exten­ cantes continuate adinvicem secundum dimen­
sionem longitudinis, sequitur quod A B erat
sion.”
13 Ibid. 53r: “ Item omnis qualitas extensa in infinite longitudinis vel infinite longa.”
infinitum divisibilis est extensive infinita ra­
 84 85
Introduction The Configuration Doctrine
It is evident that incidental to the argument in question the author has given a T o this point w e have discussed the application at Paris o f Oresme’s doctrine to
“ p ro o f” o f the M erton Rule for uniformly difform by reducing the “ infinite” num­ the hypothetical distribution and change o f qualities and motions. From France the
ber o f lines that vary in length from a maximum to o to a similar “ infinite” number doctrine quickly passed to Italy, particularly if w e consider Casali’s rudimentary
o f lines each equal to the line representing the mean degree. It seems that the p ro o f use o f the configuration technique as having its origin in Oresme’s Questions on the
o f the M erton Rule given by Oresme in IIL vii influenced the author, w ho w ould Geometry o f Euclid. A t any rate, Oresme’s technique was o f considerable influence
appear for the purposes o f this preliminary argument to have conceived o f the in Italy. T h e most important and influential treatise produced (in all likeli­
entire intensity as included first in a straight line and then as divided up into an in­ hood) in Italy was the widely copied and oft-published Tractatus de latitudinibus
finite number o f lines to be arranged to “ constitute a uniformly difform latitude by formarum, on occasion attributed to Oresme himself, but probably composed
means o f a right triangle.” There is an obvious confusion o f infinite divisibility about 1390 (or earlier) by Jacobus de Sancto M artino.15 It is indeed but a pale
with infinite extent here, as this author’s main conclusions later indicate, but at this reflection o f the D e configurationibus. Still, it does have some interesting divergences
point w e are not interested in the final solution o f the question buc only in evidence from, and additions to, the treatment o f Oresme. Since it has been discussed
o f the possible use o f the configuration doctrine. Incidentally, the technique o f adequately elsewhere (see the references in fn. 15), I shall discuss it only briefly
juggling dimensions so that it is possible by infinitely diminishing one dimension
here.
to transform a quantity finite in all dimensions into one with an infinite dimension (1) T he first point to notice is that the practice already found in the w ork o f
— used by Oresme in the third part o f his D e configurationibus— was also used by
the author o f this questio.1*
15 See Clagett, The Science o f Mechanics, 345—cording to the doctrine o f Oresme, we could
explain the diverging traditions of attribution
46, 392-401. Some o f the various manuscripts
__ ” An unsatisfactory English translation of
of this work are mentioned on pages 397-98.
14 For example, here are the first two con­
medietas iterum in duas medietates et iterum the text was published by C. G. Wallis under
All o f the manuscripts will be discussed by
clusions (ibid., 53O : “ Prima conclusio: Omne the title, A n A bstract o f Nicholas Oresme’ s
residuum in duas medietates, tunc notum est Professor Thomas Smith in his critical edition
corpus quantumlibet modice longum potest quod quelibet illarum partium non communi­ Treatise on the Breadths o f Forms (Annapolis:
o f this work, which, it is hoped, will appear as
sine sui rarefactione esse (5 $v) infinita longitu­ cantium est eque intensa cum qualibet, licet the St. John’s Bookstore, 1941). Mr. Smith has
a volume in this series. A preliminary edition
do vel infinite longum ex utraque parte patet [in] eque extensa, tota enim albedo istius papiri shown that most o f the manuscripts cluster
and English translation o f this work was pre­
quia cuiuscunque figure fuerit potest reduci ad non est intensior quam eius medietas exten­ around the date 1390. M. Curtze concluded
pared by Mr. Smith as a doctoral dissertation
corpusculum uniformiter longum et tunc divi­ siva ...; ymaginemur ergo quod prima illarum that MS Thorn R 4°2 including a copy o f the
at the University o f Wisconsin under the title:
datur in duas medietates secundum longitudi­ partium proportionalium coniungatur secun­ D e latitudinibus formarum might be dated about
A C ritical T e x t and Commentary upon D e latitu­
nem (corr. ex longum), quarum una maneat de intensive et ulterius agregatum ex prima et 1359 because the explicit o f one o f its items
dinibus formarum, 1954. The popularity of this
fixe in aliquo situ et alia continue dividatur secunda intensive coniungatur tertie, et sic in bears that date (see Zeitschrift fiir M athem atik
work is evident not only from the large num­
secundum longitudinem per partes proportio­ infinitum, et sequitur quod si tota poneretur in und Physik, Vol. 13 [1868], Suppl., 79-80; or
ber o f manuscripts o f it but also from the fact
nales que omnes erunt eque longe et addantur subiectum lineale vel superficiale vel etiam separate reprint [Leipzig, 1868], 35-36). The
that it was several times published in the
continuative ad utrumque extremum partis fixe, simpliciter inextensum, quod ipsa erit infinite item in question is a work Theorica motus longi­
Renaissance. These editions are discussed in
tunc quacunque longitudine data finita in illa intensa, sequitur igitur quod qualitas (corr. e x tudinum 7 planetarum o f Petrus de Guclina (/
Mr. Smith’s dissertation and in the partial
additione resultabit maior longitudo, et si quantitas) que est secundum omnem dimensio­ Modena). The 1359 date does indeed appear to
edition and analysis o f H. Wieleitner, in Biblio­
ponatur medietas que dividatur tandem desi­ nem finita potest fieri sine eius rarefactione be a copying date rather than a composition
theca Mathematica, 3. Folge, V ol. 13 (1912-13),
nere esse in suo situ, sequitur quod, verbi quantitas infinita et econverso.” This piling up date since this work is found in another
115-45. See also P. Duhem, L e Systeme du
gratia, B corpus, quod prius proponebatur, o f the proportional parts in the second con­ manuscript (Basel, Bibi. Univ. F.II.33, 194V-
monde, Vol. 7, 561-63, where doubt is cast on
adhuc est idem numero et est infinita longitu­ clusion is very similar to the procedure used in 196V) where it is dated 1342 and copied in
Oresme’s authorship. Dr. A . Maier has made a
do vel infinite longum. Secunda conclusio: Ill.viii of the D e configurationibus, although the 1349 (see L. Thorndike, in Isis, V ol. 50 [1959],
convincing case for its authorship by Jacobus
Omnis qualitas per modum continue quantita­ author does not bother to stress the sum o f the 48). It could be that the scribe o f R. 4°2 mis­
de Sancto Martino, A n der Grenye, 369-75.
tis extensa quantumlibet parum [/] intensa et areas since his only purpose is to show that we read 1349 as 1359, and thus merely miscopied
Regarding its attribution to Oresme in several
extensa potest fieri quantitas [/ qualitas?] in- can get an infinite dimension from a quantity the former copying date and further mistook
manuscripts and to Jacobus in others, Mr.
tensiva infinita. Probatur proportionali modo that originally had finite dimensions without it as a composition date. A t any rate, until
Smith concludes: “ It is possible that Maier
arguendo sicut precedens, quia illa qualitas changing its quantity. There is some confusion we have more conclusive evidence o f an
could also be right, and that the original work
potest reduci ad uniformitatem intensionis o f qualitas and quantitas here but the author ob­ earlier date we should provisionally settle on
was composed by Jacob o f San Martino. If we
partium [?] manente eius extensione; quo posi­ viously has the quantity o f quality imagined as a date close to 1390 for the D e latitudinibus
were to assume that the original work bore
to dividatur extensive per proportionales a surface in mind. formarum.
the legend in its colophon to the effect that
partes, videlicet in duas medietates et secunda
it was composed by Jacob o f San Martino ac­
 86
Introduction The Configuration Doctrine 87

Symon de Castello (and even in that o f Casali) o f using “ latitude” to stand for the This is proved [thus]: one is represented by a rectilinear figure, the other, indeed, by a
w hole quantity o f the quality is also evident in the D e latitudinibusformarum. Hence curvilinear figure.16
when the author applies the rectangle (Proposition IX ; Clagett, The Science o f
It is evident that the author’ s main concern here is whether the forms and figures
Mechanics, 392), it is to a “ latitude uniform throughout.” Similarly, he indicates
have a rational or an irrational ratio one to the other. It is also clear that the corol­
that “ every uniformly difform latitude beginning from zero degree is to be imag­
laries which the author draws from the notandum are in error since they are framed
ined by a rectilinear [right] triangle (Proposition X I; ibid., 393).” He has thus
as universal propositions. For there could be tw o rectangles representing tw o
adopted the concept o f latitude w hich Oresm e attributed to certain moderns and
uniform motions (or tw o right triangles representing tw o uniform ly difform
which Oresme suggested was not the best way o f speaking.
motions) which w ould have an irrational ratio to each other. Thus the author ought
(2) W hile no doubt influenced by Oresm e’s D e configurationibus, the author o f the
not to have said that “ any tw o uniform m otions whatsoever are related according
D e latitudinibus formarum almost ignored the contents o f B o o k III o f the Parisian
to a rational ratio” (or that “ any tw o uniform ly difform motions whatever are
tract; that is to say, he did not discuss at any length the comparison o f the quanti­
related according to a rational ratio” ). N or is it necessary that one rectangle repre­
ties o f forms by a comparison o f the figures representing them. His brief consider­
senting a uniform motion and one right triangle representing a uniform ly difform
ations are all contained in the seventh (and last) notandum w hich is accompanied by
motion have a rational ratio to each other. Similar criticism can be levelled at the
five corollaries:

Seventh and last it is to be noted that there is the same ratio of form to form as there is o f
figure to figure. For since every form may be imagined by some figure, according as that 16 See Thomas Smith’s edition of the D e
form is uniform or difform, etc., as was declared before, it is apparent that there is latitudinibus formarum, 47-50: “ Septimo et
the same ratio between two latitudes or forms as between the two figures representative ultimo est notandum quod eadem est proportio
forme ad formam que est figure ad figuram.
of them. Whence, just as two certain figures have a rational ratio to one another, so it is
Cum enim omnis forma sit per aliquam
that one is twice another or triple or one and one-half, and so on for the others. More­
figuram ymaginanda secundum quod ipsa
over, some have an irrational ratio, such that one is finitely greater than the other, and yet
forma est uniformis aut difformis, etc., ut in
not twice nor thrice nor one and one-half, and so on for the others. Thus it is to be said of
precedentibus declaratur, apparet quod eadem
two motions, two alterations, two colors, and universally of two latitudes of any kind
proportio est inter duas latitudines sive formas
you wish, that certain ones have a rational ratio such that one is double another or triple que est inter duas figuras representativas
or one and one-half or one and one-third, and so on for the others, while others have earum. Unde sicut alique due figure se habent
an irrational ratio, such that, although one is greater than another, yet it is not double nor ad invicem secundum proportionem rationa­
triple it, etc. About this it is to be known that any two figures, whether they are both lem, ita quod una est dupla ad aliam vel tripla
rectilinear or curvilinear, have a rational ratio to one another. Likewise, any two figures vel sexquialtera, et sic de aliis. Quedam autem
se habent secundum proportionem irrationa­
of which one is rectilinear and the other curvilinear have an irrational ratio to one another.
lem ita quod una est maior altera finite, nec
From that last notabile corollaries follow: The first is that any two uniform motions
tamen dupla nec tripla nec sexquialtera, et sic
whatever are related according to a rational ratio. The second corollary is that any two
de aliis. Ita dicendum est de duobus motibus,
uniformly difform motions whatever are related according to a rational ratio. The third
de duabus alterationibus, de duobus coloribus,
corollary is that any two motions, of which one is uniform and the other uniformly dif­ et universaliter de duabus latitudinibus
form, are related according to a rational ratio. These three corollaries are explained in cuiuscumque speciei quod quedam se habent
the same way, for any such motions are represented by rectilinear figures, and in conse­ secundum proportionem rationalem ita quod
quence have the same ratio accordingly as the forementioned figures. And that which has una est dupla ad aliam vel tripla vel sexquial­
been said concerning two motions is to be understood in the same way for any two tera vel sexquitercia, et sic de aliis. Quedam
latitudes whatever, with the proviso always maintained that they are of the same nature. vero se habent secundum proportionem ir­
portionem irrationalem. E x illo ultimo notabili
sequuntur corollaria: Primo quod quilibet duo
motus uniformes se habent secundum pro­
portionem rationalem. Secundo quod quilibet
duo motus uniformiter difformes se habent
secundum proportionem rationalem. Tertio
quod quilibet duo motus quorum unus est
uniformis et alter uniformiter difformis se
habent secundum proportionalem rationalem.
Hec tria corollaria eodem modo declarantur,
nam quilibet tales motus representantur per
figuras rectilineas, et per consequens secundum
eandem proportionem se habent, secundum
quam figure predicte. E t quod dictum est de
duobus motibus intelligendum est eodem
modo de quibuscumque duabus latitudinibus,
et hoc semper servato quod sint eiusdem
rationis. Alias autem non essent proprie
proportionales non enim est proprie pro­
portio inter albedinem et colorem sicut nec
inter motum localem et alterationem. Quarto
quod quilibet duo motus uniformiter difformi-
ter difformes se habent secundum proportio­
nem rationalem. Probatur quia uterque yma-
ginandus est per figuram curvilineam, ut ex

Otherwise, they would not be properly proportional, for there is not properly any ratio rationalem ita quod licet una sit maior altera, precedentibus patet. Quinto quod nulli duo
tamen nec dupla nec tripla, et cetera. Circa motus quorum unus est uniformis seu uni­
between whiteness and color, just as there is none between local motion and alteration.
quod sciendum quod quelibet due figure sive formiter difformis, alter vero uniformiter
The fourth corollary is that any two uniformly difformly difform motions have a rational
sint ambe rectilinee sive curvilinee, se habent difformiter difformis se habent secundum
ratio. This is proved because each is to be imagined by a curvilinear figure, as is clear proportionem rationalem. Probatur: unus
secundum proportionem rationalem. Item,
from the preceding. The fifth corollary is that no two motions, of which one is uniform representatur per figuram rectilineam, alter
quelibet due figure quarum una est rectilinea
or uniformly difform and the other is uniformly difformly difform, have a rational ratio. et alia curvilinea, se habent secundum pro­ vero per curvilineam.”
 88 Introduction
remaining corollaries since, like the first three, they depend on the erroneous con­
clusion that any tw o rectilinear or curvilinear figures must have a rational ratio
while one rectilinear figure and one curvilinear figure must have an irrational ratio.
It is w orth noting in passing that the author w ould not allow the comparison by
ratio o f alteration and local motion since they are o f differing species. Hence, he
seems to align him self w ith the conclusions o f the D e configurationibus rather than
with those o f the Questions on the Geometry of Euclid. Finally, since the author’s
concern is only w ith the kinds o f ratios that the forms and figures can have to each
other rather than w ith specific area comparisons, it is not surprising that he fails to
include the geometrical p ro o f o f the M erton Rule equating a latitude uniformly
difform with one uniform at the mean degree.
(3) I have already remarked elsewhere that the author’s treatment o f a uniformly
difformly difform latitude is mathematically inept.17 I f Oresme’s procedure had
been properly extended to include this case, so that intensity was plotted against
extension (or velocity against time), the uniformly difformly difform latitude ought
to have been imagined by a segment o f a parabola. H owever, the author o f the D e
latitudinibusformarum did not consider the uniformly difformly difform as a uniform
change o f a change o f intensity (or velocity, i.e., in modern parlance, as a second
derivative d2v/dt2= K ) . Rather he defined it in the follow ing w ay: in any tw o suc­
cessive equal parts o f extension, the ratio o f the excesses in intensity is a constant
other than 1 (for i f the constant ratio o f excesses were 1 we w ould simply have a
case o f uniformly difform). Furthermore, he quite incorrectly suggests a quadrant
o f a circle as the desired figure representing a uniformly difformly difform latitude
and he seems to have believed that the constant ratios o f excesses in intensity
w ould be 3:2. In actuality, the equation o f a circle does not satisfy his general defi­
nition o f a latitude uniformly difformly difform. His definition w ould only be satis­
fied by an equation which related intensity and extension exponentially. Further­
more, we should note that a circle w ould not satisfy the condition that in succes­
sive equal parts o f extension the ratio o f excesses o f intensity is as 3 :z.
(4) Finally, in our estimate o f the D e latitudinibus formarum, some consideration
should be given to the notanda with which the author closes the treatise. Oresme’s
characterization o f uniformly difform by attention to the rate o f change o f intensity in
relation to extension (which Oresme has shown to be constant in terms o f the geom ­
etry o f the right triangle representing uniformly difform; or to put it in modern
terms, the slope is constant) is in a sense extended to the analysis o f latitudes repre­
sented by segments o f circles by the author o f the D e latitudinibusformarum, in that
the latter concentrates on the rate o f change o f intensity in relationship to extension.
In the third notandum he indicates that in a latitude represented by a segment o f a
circle the rate o f change o f intensity terminates at the highest degree o f slowness in
the middle o f the arc, which is to say that the rate o f change o f line A .B in the ac­
17 The Science o f Mechanics, 396.
The Configuration Doctrine 89
companying figure decreases toward zero as w e approach the middle line E F A
In modern terms, the slope is zero at point E . In the fourth notandum w e are told
that in a semicircle the rate o f change o f intensity begins from the highest possible
value (summus) o f swiftness and ends in the middle o f the arc at the highest possible
value o f slowness, that is, that the rate o f change o f A B proceeds from the highest
possible value (infinity) at O to the lowest possible value (zero) at F . 19 A gain using
modern terminology, we can express this idea by saying that in the semicircle the
slope continually varies from 00 at point O to zero at point E .
E
Incidentally, it should be pointed out that it was Jacobus de Sancto Martino, the
supposed author o f the D e latitudinibus formarum, w ho composed a D e perfectione
specierum which gives at the beginning a brief summary o f the configuration doc­
trine in very much the same spirit as the D e latitudinibusformarum:
For latitude is to be imagined by a plane surface and this in many ways. For a certain
latitude is uniform: □ . Such a one is to be imagined by a rectilinear plane surface in
which the lines bounding it that are opposite each other are equidistant and such lines
are called parallel lines, or a surface in which the bounding lines meet so as to form four
equal angles. But another one is called a difform latitude and there are two kinds o f it.
One is uniformly difform: ; the other is difformly difform: . A uniformly
difform latitude either begins from ho degree and is terminated at a certain degree: ; or
it is not terminated: the latter is to be imagined by a rectilinear surface whose lines form
an acute angle L The other kind begins from a certain degree and is termi­
nated at a certain degree: c d ; or it is not terminated and in which case it is to be imag­
ined by a rectilinear surface whose lines are so ordered that they do not form a single
angle but which if protracted would form a rectilinear, acute angle: • Or a uni­
formly difform latitude is one which has equal excess between equally distant degrees....
A degree is also said to be a certain thing in the latitude which indeed exists imaginatively
indivisible according to extension while being divisible according to intensity; and this
is to be imagined by a straight line perpendicularly ascending and producing the whole
latitude in respect to intensity. From this it is evident that in any latitude a degree to
which a longer line corresponds is said to be more intense and one to which a shorter
18 Ibid., 401: “ Tertio notandum quod in summo gradu velocitatis, et terminatur ad
qualibet tali figura sua intensio terminatur ad summum gradum tarditatis, scilicet in medio
summum gradum tarditatis et sua remissio in­ puncto arcus. Remissio vero eius, que incipit in
cipit a summo gradu tarditatis, videlicet, in medio puncto arcus, incipit a summo gradu
medio puncto arcus.” tarditatis et terminatur ad summum gradum
19 Ibid. : “ Quarto notandum quod in quolibet velocitatis, ut patet in figura C D . ”
semicirculo incipit intensio latitudinis sue a
 9° Introduction The Configuration Doctrine 91

line corresponds is said to be more remiss. It also follows from this and the given de­ found.” 21 Thus the latitude doctrine has been used to explicate a hypothetical philo­
scription of uniformly difform that in such a uniformly difform latitude, two degrees that sophical problem somewhat in the manner o f Petrus de Candia (see fn. 9).
are equally intense cannot be found. From this it is further inferred that any degree more The popularity o f the D e latitudinibusformarum in Italy is illustrated in the w ork
intense than another degree exceeds it in some determined ratio: double, or triple or o f Masino Codronchi, Questiones super questionem fohannis de Casali,22 possibly
three-halves, or at least in some irrational ratio.20
written very soon after the D e latitudinibus. The discussion concerning the D e lati­
There is no particular novelty in this description except in Jacobus’ specification tudinibus occurs in Question 1:
o f tw o cases o f uniformly difform that remain unterminated and hence whose rep­
For the first article there is the response of the Master of the latitude of forms, as is clear
resentational surfaces are not closed figures. But even this has a certain antecedent
from him in Chapter IV of his opuscule, which response is based on these reasons: (1)
in the cases o f qualities infinitely extended that are given in Ill.x ii o f the D e con­ First proposition: there can be no quality or form that does not relate to extension. (2)
figurationibus. It is obvious that once more latitude is being considered as the w hole Second proposition: there can be no quality without intensity, for its opposite would
range o f intensities considered throughout the extension. T he only point worth imply [the same] contradiction as [would the assertion] that latitude exists without length.
further notice in connection with our subject is that after rejecting (i) the view (3) Third proposition: every extension or magnitude of quality ought to be measured or
that species or specific latitude is to be imagined by numbers, or (2) the view that imagined by a straight line, as is the case of all quanta. (4) Fourth proposition: the inten­
specific latitude is to be imagined by a straight line beginning from no degree and sity of every quality is to be imagined by a line or lines erected perpendicularly on the
terminating exclusively at the highest degree w ith a single species corresponding line designating the extension, so that for every point of the line denoting extension
there is to be imagined erected on it a line designating its intensity. From these proposi­
to any point o f the line, he concludes that “ perfection o f species is to be imagined
tions it follows that a quality is to be imagined by means of a surface, and, as was said
by a latitude uniformly difform beginning from no degree and extended in infini­
before, is compared thereto. Because of this similarity this term “ latitudo” is equivocally
tum toward the highest degree and in any degree o f this latitude is located one
assumed to import quality. But a line, since it implies intensity alone, and not extension
species and, as no degree is immediate to another degree, so no species is posed as as well, is not assimilated to qualities; [nor is] a body since it implies depth as well, which
immediate to another species. Further, because in a latitude uniformly difform tw o
degrees equally intended cannot exist, so tw o species o f equal perfection cannot be
21 Ibid., 7v: “ Una opinio est quod species si­ extensam et in quolibet huius latitudinis gradu
ve latitudo specifica ymaginanda est per nume­ una species collocatur et sicud nullus gradus
20 D e perfectione specierum, MS Vat. Chis. rent rectilineum et acutum. Vel latitudo uni­ ros __ Secunda opinio in generali est quod la­ est alteri immediatus ita nec aliqua species al­
F.IV.66, 6v~7r: “ Latitudo namque ymaginan- formiter difformis est que servat equalem ex­ titudo specifica ymaginanda est per lineam terius ponitur immediata. Item quia in latitu­
da est per superficiem planam et hoc multipli­ cessum et inter gradus eque distantes__ rectam incipientem a non gradu et terminan­ dine uniformiter difformi duo gradus eque in­
citer, quia quedam est uniformis. E t talis est Gradus quoque dicitur quoddam in latitudine tem ad summum gradum exclusive et cuilibet tensi non possunt esse ita due species equalis
ymaginanda per superficiem planam rectili- existens indivisibile quidem ymaginative se­ puncto illius linee correspondet una species — perfectionis nequeunt reperiri.” It is o f interest
neam cuius superficiei linee ipsam terminantes cundum extensionem, secundum vero inten­ (9r) que quidem vera [tertia] opinio perfectio­ to observe that accompanying this statement in
mutuo se respicientes equaliter distant, et tales sionem divisibile, et hic {corr. e x hoc) ymagi- the Vatican manuscript is a triangle (not a right
linee parallele (corr. e x paralelle) dicuntur, sive nandus est per lineam rectam perpendiculariter triangle) in which certain species have been
cuius superficiei linee ipsam terminantes per ascendentem totam latitudinem quantum ad associated with given parallel lines (see fig.).
contactus angulos causant quattuor equales. intensionem sed causantem. Ex quo patet quod 22 For three manuscripts, see The Science o f
Alia vero dicitur latitudo difformis et hoc in in qualibet latitudine gradus cui longior linea Mechanics, 646, fn. 50. Incidentally, the author
proposito est dupliciter, nam quedam est uni­ correspondet dicitur esse intensior et cui bre­ is simply known as Messinus in these manu­
formiter difformis et quedam difformiter dif­ vior remissior. Item sequitur ex ista et decla­ scripts. However, on page 647 I suggested he
formis. (yr) Uniformiter difformis vel incipit ratione data de latitudine uniformiter diffor- might be identical with Masino Codronchi, a
a non gradu et terminatur ad certum gradum, mi {corr. e x difformis) quod in tali latitudine Bolognese who taught at Pavia in 1390-91.
sive non terminatur et talis ymaginanda est per uniformiter difformi duo gradus eque intensi This suggestion has been confirmed by the
superficiem rectilineam cuius quidem linee nequeunt reperiri. Ex quo ulterius infertur colophon o f a manuscript o f some questions
angulum rectilineum causant acutum. Alia quod quilibet gradus intensior alio excedit illum on the Perihermeneias read at Bologna in 1387
nam incipit a certo gradu et terminatur ad cer­ in aliqua proportione determinata: dupla vel (MS Oxford, Bodl. Canon, lat. 278, 63^: “ re­
tum gradum, vel non terminatur, et hec yma­ tripla aut sexquialtera, vel saltem in aliqua pro­ collecte sub reverendo doctore magistro misi-
ginanda est per superficiem rectilineam cuius portione irrationali.” I have left the figures out nem ymaginatur specierum per latitudinem no de coderonco.” The same manuscript also
linee sic ordinantur quod angulum unum non of the text here and included them with the uniformiter difformem a non gradu incipien­ contains Messinus’ treatment o f Heytesbury’s
causant sed si protraherentur angulum causa- translation. tem et in infinitum versus summum [gradum] D e tribus predicamentis motus, 1 i6 r -i 18v.
 92 Introduction
is not in every quality. And the Master clearly has this opinion, although he does not
pose it openly. From these statements the Master infers that no latitude o f forms is to be
figuratively imagined by, or assimilated to, a circle. In the second place he infers that no
latitude is to be imagined by a figure rising on the base at an obtuse angle, i.e., at one greater
than a right angle, for otherwise there would be a given intensity without extension,
which he holds as a highly illogical inference. Also, just as intension of form is the addi­
tion of form in the same part of the subject, so latitude of figure is the addition of surface
above the same length. Whence just as still more form is added in the part of the subject
and accordingly [the form] is more intense (so long as the extension remains the same),
so by the amount more of surface that is added above the same line, by that same amount
is the figure wider (so long as the length remains the same). He also says that it is impos­
sible for latitude to exist without longitude, as is obvious in the sixth (/, seventh ?) prop­
osition of Chaper IV of the previously cited work. Although the aforesaid Master has
sweet words on some matters, his opinion does not please me. Therefore, I argue against
him— I infer against him that some quality can be imagined by a plane rising on a line at
an obtuse angle. This is proposed because there can be intensity without extension, as has
been said [in arguments concerning indivisible intellective qualities]. Third, I infer that
some quality can be imagined by a circular figure. This is proved, because there can be
imagined a quality whose extension is laid out in a circle and on its points there are
erected along the circle straight lines, [each one] denoting the intensity of the one point
on which it is erected.23
The Configuration Doctrine 93
It is evident that in this passage Masino has presented a fair summary o f the in­
tention o f the author o f the D e latitudinibusformarum but that in his answers he has
systematically misrepresented Jacobus’ views. This can be made particularly clear
b y actually quoting the relevant conclusion on a latitude representable by a figure
rising at an obtuse angle, against which Masino is arguing, and by examining
its intent. It occurs in Part II, Chapter III, Proposition 7, o f the D e latitudinibus
formarum:
N o latitude is to be imagined by means of a figure rising upon a straight line at an obtuse
angle, or at greater than a right angle, which is the same. This is proved, because if so,
then there would be intensity of form without extension, which is just as absurd as if
length is posited without breadth. For let the figure B C D be given and let a straight line
be erected perpendicularly upon the point terminating its longitude, namely point C. This
line will represent the intensity of the form in point C . ..and it is clear that the whole
latitude C D falls outside of the whole longitude, which is B C , and thus the intensity
o f the form would be outside the extension of its subject, which was to be proved.24

23 MS Venice, Bibl. Marc. Lat. VI, 225, i v —
2v; MS Escorial, f.II.8, iv -2 r: “ Quantum ad
primum articulum est responsio magistri de
latitudinibus formarum, ut patet ab eo 40 ca­
pitulo sui opusculi, que super istis rationibus
fundatur. Prima propositio: nulla potest esse
qualitas sive forma non correspondens ex­
tensioni. Secunda propositio: nulla potest esse
qualitas sine intensione, quia oppositum im­
plicaret contradictionem sicut latitudinem sine
longitudine esse. Tertia propositio: omnis
qualitatis extensio sive magnitudo debet men­
surari et ymaginari per lineam rectam (corr. ex.
et causam) sicut omnium quantorum. Quarta
propositio: omnis qualitatis intensio est yma-
ginandaper lineam sive lineas erectas ortogona-
liter super lineam signantem extensionem,
ita quod cuicunque puncto linee denotantis
extensionem est ymaginanda super eam linea
erecta {corr. ex erectam) signans eius inten­
sionem. E x quibus sequitur quod qualitas est
ymaginanda per medium ( Venice M S ; notum,
Escor. M S ) superficiei et ei, ut predictum est,
comparatur; propter quam similitudinem hic
terminus ( Venice M S ; corr. mg ex tertius in E s ­
cor. A IS) latitudo equivoce ( Venice M S ; equa
voce, Escor. A IS) sumatur ad importandum
qualitatem. Linea autem cum non det intelli-
gere nisi intensionem [tantum et non exten­
sionem {Venice M S ; om. Escor. M S )] non assi-
milatur qualitatibus; corpus cum ( Venice M S ;
om. Escor. M S ) etiam dat intelligere profundi­
tatem que non reperitur in omni qualitate. E t
hanc opinionem clare habuit magister [licet
eam non sic aperte ponat. Ex quibus {Venice
M S ; om. Escor.)] infert dictis magister per
figuram nullam latitudinem forme ymaginan-
dam nec assimilandam circulo; secundo infert
quod nulla latitudo est ymaginanda per figu­
ram super basim {corr. e x causam) consurgen­
tem per angulum obtusum sive maiorem recto,
quia daretur intensio sine extensione, quod
ipse pro magno inconvenienti declarat. Et
idem quia sicut intensio forme est addicio for­
me in eadem parte subiecti, ita latitudo figure
est addicio superficiei super eandem longitudi­
nem. Unde sicut quando plus additur de forma
in eadem parte subiecti tanto [forma sive
qualitas] est intensior et tamen manet eadem
extensio, ita quanto plus additur de superficie
super eandem lineam rectam tanto figura est
latior et tamen manet eadem longitudo {corr.
The point that the author is making is that if w e assume an intensity line for
each point o f the subject and one imagines this line to be erected perpendicularly,
then in the case posited in the figure, there w ould be a w hole cluster o f lines C D ,
C D ', and so on up to but not including C F , which w ould fall outside o f the sub-
e x latitudo). Dicit etiam quod ita est impos­ Wieleitner, in Bibliotheca Mathematica, 3. Folge,
sibile latitudinem [esse] sine longitudine, ut Vol. 13 (1912-13), 137: “ 7a propositio. Nulla
patet in sexta propositione quarti sui capituli latitudo ymaginanda est per figuram super
preallegati. Licet predictus magister habet rectam lineam consurgentem per angulum ob­
dulcia verba in aliquibus, mihi non placet eius tusum, sive maiorem recto quod idem est. Hoc
sententia. Ideo arguitur contra eum — E x probatur, quia si sic, tunc esset intensio forme
quibus infero contra eum quod aliqua qualitas sine extensione [Wieleitner add.\ subiecti],
potest ymaginari per superficiem planam con­ quod ita est absurdum sicut si ponetur latitudo
surgentem super lineam per angulum obtu­ sine longitudine. Sit enim figura data B C D et
sum. Illud probatur quia potest esse intensio erigatur perpendiculariter linea recta super
sine extensione, ut dictum est. Tertio infero punctum terminantem longitudinem suam in
quod aliqua qualitas potest ymaginari per fi­ puncto, videlicet C , que linea representabit
guram circularem. Illud probatur quia potest intensionem forme in puncto C , ut patet per
ymaginari qualitas cuius extensio circulatur decimam et undecimam et duodecimam sup­
{Escor. A IS; circular iter ? Venice M S ) et supra positiones, et patet quod tota latitudo C D cadit
punctaliter erigentur circulariter linee recte extra totam longitudinem, que est B C , et sic
denotantes quamlibet intensionem unius punc­ esset intensio forme extra extensionem sui
ti super quem erigitur.” subiecti; quod erat probandum.” I have altered
24 Edition o f Thomas Smith, 19-21; C f. Mr. Smith’s punctuation slightly.
 94 Introduction The Configuration Doctrine 95

ject in that they w ould be beyond the limiting intensity C F , and thus the triangle original D e latitudinibusformarum is referred to merely as the auctor de latitudinibus or
D C F w ould represent a form for which there is no extension or subject. N ow , o f the magister de latitudinibus. In fact, Blasius’ w ork shows multiple influence beyond
course, as Oresme pointed out, w e need not (although it is more convenient to) the tract o f Jacobus. It is clear that he was acquainted with the works o f the M erton
have the intensity lines erected perpendicularly on the base line. They indeed College authors, Casali, and perhaps Oresme as well. 28 The chief remarks indicat­
could be conceived as all at the same obtuse angle (or to put it in modern parlance, ing the possible influence o f Oresme occur in a passage leading up to the geometric
the coordinates need not be rectangular but could be at an obtuse angle). Masino is p roof o f the M erton Rule, which was, as I have said, lacking in the D e latitudinibus
not arguing in this manner against the author o f the D e latitudinibus. He is simply formarum:
stating that there can be intensity without extension, as for example in indivisible
I posit some suppositions: 1. Latitudes of forms are represented by geometrical figures.
intellective qualities. But such qualities are not being considered b y Jacobus. His
The author premises this supposition. 2. The line which divides two sides of any triangle
argument is that if we do accept qualities in subjects with extension and i f we posit into equal parts is one-half the third side. This is obvious from the fourth [proposition]
a system o f intensity lines that are perpendicular to the extension line, then o f of the sixth [book] of Euclid. Let there be a triangle A B C and the line cutting two of the
course w e cannot have a figure with the intensity lines obtuse to the base for there sides into equal parts we let be D E . I say that the line D E is one-half the line A B . For
w ould result intensity outside o f the subject or, as he says, w ithout extension. BC/BE — A C jA D = A B fD E , and B C = 2B E. Therefore, A B = zD E , and D E =
Even less pertinent is M asino’s argument against the author’s statement that “ no 1/2 A B . 3. Any parallelogram with one side equal to the mean degree and the other side
latitude is to be imagined by means o f a circle.” 2* W hat the Master o f latitudes equal to the line of extension is equal to the triangle by which a latitude uniformly dif-
means essentially is that if w e had a line representing extension, the w hole circle form is representable to us and whose mean degree line is the small side of the given
w ould touch it at a point so that there w ould only be a single line (the diameter) parallelogram. This is apparent, [for] with triangle A B C given, whose mean line is D E ,
a parallelogram is formed of the aforementioned lines, and it is B G C F . This supposition
that w ould rise perpendicularly on the subject line. Thus the rest o f the quantity o f
is evident by the facts of geometry__The second conclusion: every uniformly difform
quality w ould have no subject. The essentials o f Jacobus’ argument are presented
latitude, uniformly difformly acquired, whether it is a latitude of something with perma­
in connection w ith his proposition to the effect that “ no latitude is to be imagined nent esse [like a quality] or is a latitude of something with a successive esse [like a velocity],
by a segment o f a circle greater than a sem icircle.... for such a figure rises upon a corresponds to its mean degree. This is clear by the first and the third suppositions.29
straight line at obtuse angles.” 26 I f w e consider M asino’s answer, as quoted above,
it is evident (if I understand him correctly) that he has presented something entirely
A
different and unconnected w ith it, for while Jacobus was concerned only with
plane figures with straight lines as the base or subject lines, M asino’s case in refuta­
tion presents a circular base line with perpendicular lines erected on the circle and
G
thus producing a cylindrical surface rather than a plane surface. Thus he is not
speaking to the intent o f the author. I think the chief difficulty is that Masino has
not really accepted the basic graphic or pictorial idea represented in both Oresm e’s B
w ork and that o f the Master o f latitudes, namely that quantity o f quality can best
be represented by assuming a perpendicular for every point o f a subject line.
The configuration doctrine as outlined in the Tractatus de latitudinibus formarum 28 Miss Maier, A n der Gren%e, 376-77, has Casali’s remarks, but it is on the whole closer
also found response in the w ork o f another Italian author, namely the Questiones argued that Blasius was not acquainted with to the spirit of Oresme than that o f Casali.
super tractatum de latitudinibusformarum o f Blasius o f Parma, a w ork composed prior Oresme’s D e configurationibus. The passage He could, o f course, have been familiar with
which she analyses, it is quite true, is clearly the Questions on the Geometry o f E u clid o f Ores­
to 1 391.27 A s in the case o f M asino’s w ork already mentioned, the author o f the
drawn from Casali and does not reflect Ores­ me, the tract of Symon de Castello or some
25 Smith’s text, 19: “ Tertia propositio. N ul­ 27 A n unpublished edition o f Blasius’ tract me’s treatment (see The Science o f Mechanics, similar work. It is quite apparent that when he
la latitudo ymaginanda est per modum circu­ has been prepared by Dr. Dean Ware and 403-4, Commentary, Paragraphs 2-3). H ow ­ does use figures he appears to equate the term
li.” Father Joseph Brown on the basis of five ever, she does not discuss the passage quoted “ latitude” with the whole quantity of the
26 Ibid., 21: “ 8a propositio. Nulla latitudo manuscripts and two editions. Note that MS in the next footnote which clearly does use the quality in the manner of the author o f the D e
ymaginanda est per portionem circuli maiorem Bodl. Canon. Misc. 177, dated 1392, gives an graphic treatment; and it is on the basis o f this latitudinibus formarum, Symon de Castello and
semicirculo. Hoc patet ex precedenti, talis extra question not present in the other manu­ passage that the argument should be made. As others.
enim figura consurgit super lineam rectam per scripts. I suggest in the body o f the text, it is possible 29 The Science o f Mechanics, 403 (English
angulos obtusos__ ” that this graphic passage was evolved out of translation); 406-8 (Latin text).
 9<S Introduction The Configuration Doctrine 97
W hile this p ro o f might have been suggested by the reading o f Casali’ sOuestio, it the method o f imagining latitude w ould be particularly important to the subject at
is clear that Blasius follows the orientation o f Oresme and the author o f the D e hand.33
latitudinibus formarum in making the extension o f the subject the horizontal base T w o other examples o f the use o f the configuration technique are found in an
line and the degree lines as vertical lines. It is true that he does not specify that the Italian manuscript, Venice, Bibl. Marc. Lat. V III, 19.34 The first to be discussed
parallelogram is rectangular and the triangle is rectangular. Still, such w ould ap­ occurs in a treatise beginning: “ Utrum velocitas in motibus sit attenda penes lati­
pear to be the case since he is follow ing the technique o f the author o f the D e lati­ tudinem acquirendam, an penes gradum latitudinis, an penes latitudinem et exten­
tudinibusformarum and that author represented uniform latitudes by rectangles and sionem simul (ff. 2 i3 r-i9 v ).” T he second is present in the Tractatus proportionum
uniformly difform latitudes by right triangles.30 o f Roger Thom as (ff. i44v-64r). In the first piece, which is anonymous but which
Somewhat similar in subject matter to Blasius’ treatise is an anonymous, incom­ Miss Maier believes also to be by Roger Thom as, w e read:
plete Questio utrum omnis forma habeat latitudinem nobis presentabilem per figuras geo­
Accordingly it is to be understood that just as in the case of continuous quantity men
metricas. In the initial affirmative response to his question, the author quotes the imagine surfaces, lines, and points, so it is to be imagined that a certain latitude or
“ master in the common Treatise on the Latitude o f Forms,” which is o f course the degree of latitude corresponds to a point, another corresponds to a line and another to a
author o f the Tractatus de latitudinibus formarum.31 He also quotes him to the effect surface. The degree or latitude corresponding to a point ought to be understood by
that a latitude uniformly difform is denoted by a triangle and a uniform latitude by means of a line erected on that point, and by the amount more that a greater latitude will
a quadrangle.32 It is o f interest that in discussing the term latitude in the same pas­ correspond to that point, by that same amount may the latitude be understood by a longer
sage he rejects the increasingly popular view that held latitude as standing for line. But the latitude corresponding to a line is understood by means of a surface erected
distance in degrees o f intensity w ith the extension taken into account (i.e., as one on that line. And the latitude corresponding to a surface ought to be understood by means
signifying the change in intensity throughout the extent o f the quality) in favor o f of a body erected on that surface. From this it is evident that uniform latitude or degree
is understood by means of a quadrangular surface erected on the line designating the
the Oresmian concept o f signifying intensity without attention to extension. Un­
subject. But the uniformly difform degree or latitude is understood by means of a triangle
fortunately, the text, which was planned to be in four articles, is complete in this
described on the line designating the subject. If the latitude is difformly difform, it ought
copy only through the first article which is not w holly germane to our discussion o f
to be understood by means of a surface of many angles erected on the line denoting the
the configuration doctrine. Presumably the second article concerning whether subject, and if the difformity of such a latitude is difformly difform, it can be infinitely
latitude uniformly difform corresponds to its mean degree and the fourth treating varied by reason of the diverse parts of the subject. Hence such a surface by means of
which such a difformly difform latitude is understood could be varied through an infinitude
30 The manuscripts and editions of the Bla­
of angles.35
per figuras sibi conformes__ Quia in ista
sius tract that do have figures for uniform and questione varia reperiuntur dicta doctorum Miss Maier makes a special point o f the fact that this author differs from Oresme in
uniformly difform latitudes employ rectangles due famose [opiniones sunt] quarum una po­ singling out the longitude as the “ line designating the subject,” since for Oresme
and right triangles in the manner o f the author nit latitudinem esse meram intensionem for­
o f the D e latitudinibus formarum. I suppose that malem seu meram formalem distantiam, quod 33 Ibid., c. 2: “ Continebit ergo presens ques­ dus sive latitudo correspondens puncto debet
it is still possible to argue that these are scribal est dicere istum terminum ‘latitudo forme’ tio articulos quattuor. In primo videbitur in intelligi per lineam erectam (corr. e x exceptam
additions, but in face o f the fact that Blasius’ significare \corr. mg. e x figure] formam con- generali an omnis forma habeat latitudinem. hic et ubique) super illud punctum et quanto illi
point o f departure is the D e latitudinibus fo r ­ notando ipsam intensam et nihil ultra hoc, In secundo videbitur an aliqua latitudo sit puncto correspondebit maior latitudo tanto
marum, such argument would appear to be non habita consideratione ad aliquam subiecti uniformis et aliqua difformis. In tertio videbi­ intelligitur per lineam longiorem. Sed latitudo
doubtful. extensionem tanquam sibi impertinentem. tur an latitudo uniformiter difformis corres- correspondens linee intelligitur per superfi­
31 MS Venice, Bibl. Marc. Lat. V I, 62, 63r, Alia ponit latitudinem forme esse simul inten­ pondeat gradui suo medio, an alicui eius in­ ciem erectam super illam lineam. Sed latitudo
c. 1: “ Secundo principaliter arguitur ad se­ sam et extensam . . . ut latitudo dyametri et trinseco. In quarto et ultimo articulo prin­ correspondens superficiei debet intelligi per
cundum, scilicet an omnis latitudo sit nobis pre- est item ac si diceretur iste terminus ‘latitudo cipali videbitur quid est modus ymaginandi corpus erectum super istam superficiem. E x
sentabilis per figuras geometricas. Et arguitur forme’ significat formam connotando ipsam latitudinem.’ ’ quo patet quod latitudo seu gradus uniformis
quod sic, primo per magistrum in tractatu habere distantiam gradualem que graduum 34 See A. Maier, A n der Gren^e, 365-69. intelligitur per superficiem quadrangularem
communi de latitudinibus formarum proposi­ distantia est etiam distantia situalis cum alia 35 2i5r, “ Iuxta quod intelligendum quod erectam super lineam designantem subiectum.
tione prima: ‘Quia e tc ... pars latitudinis secundum illam mansit in sicut in quantitate continua homines ymagi- Sed gradus seu latitudo uniformiter difformis
33 Ibid. cc. 1-2: “ Consequentia nota et as­ alia parte subiecti quam informat. Quia prima nantur superficies, lineas et puncta ita ymagi- intelligitur per triangulum descriptum super
sumptum est magistri notificantis latitudinem via inter istas duas apparet mihi verior et nandum est quod quedam latitudo sive gradus lineam designantem subiectum. Si est latitudo
uniformiter difformem per triangulum et uni­ certior et phisicorum dictis conformior... latitudinis correspondens puncto, quedam difformiter difformis, debet intelligi per super­
formem per quadrangulum et alias similiter terminabo latitudinem primo modo sumptam.” correspondens linee, quedam superficiei. Gra­ ficiem multorum angulorum erectam super
 98 Introduction The Configuration Doctrine 99

it is conceived o f as the subject itself. I do not think this to be o f particular signif­
icance, however, for although Oresme does say (I.iii) that the extension o f any
quality “ is designated by a line described in the subject and on which the line o f
intensity o f the same quality is perpendicularly erected,” he is clearly thinking o f
that line as representing an actual dimension o f the quality, and o f course when we
draw or represent by diagram any physical measurements w e do so by arbitrary
lines that designate these dimensions, and certainly this is what Oresme means.
Needless to say further, when Oresme talks about qualities o f lines or linear quali­
ties, the lines do not in fact really exist but are merely mathematical fictions. It is
even clearer that Oresme conceives o f his base line as a representational or denota­
tive line when he talks in the second part o f the D e configurationibus about the varia­
tions o f velocity in time. There the baseline denotes or stands for time; it obviously
is not the time itself. It is evident, o f course, that the level o f abstraction or imagi­
nation must be different in the use o f lines to represent intensity from what it is
in their use to represent entities that are extended. This results from the basic dif­
ference in the nature o f these entities. Incidentally, Masino, in the passage I
quoted earlier, also speaks o f the line “ denoting extension” in the same w ay as he
speaks o f the line “ designating intensity,” thus reflecting the basic idea o f tw o per­
pendicular linear coordinates. But to return to the passage under discussion, it
should be observed that, as in all o f the examples employing the latitude doctrine at
Paris after Oresme, latitude is sometimes being used in the loose sense o f quantity
o f quality, or at least in the sense o f variation in intensity or degree considered
with respect to extension. The author’s conflation o f latitude with degree and the
use o f the latter to designate a w hole latitude or its part is somewhat reminiscent o f
Casali’s tract.36
Follow ing this section on the configuration technique the author o f this piece
gives a definition o f a uniformly difform latitude (ff. 2 15r-v) that possibly originat­
ed in Casali’s w o rk ; he also gives a verbal discussion in the M erton manner o f local
motion, including the M erton Rule as applied to local m otion (ff. 21 jv -i6 r ). It is
only when the author comes to the application o f the M erton Rule to calidity that
he once more returns to the Oresme technique. He gives a p ro o f o f the equality
o f triangle and quadrangle that has its ultimate origin in Oresm e’s D e configurationi­
bus, IIL vii (the same lettering for the figure is used but in reverse order), although
to be sure he might have taken it from Symon de Castello’s w ork or some similar
will be understood by a triangle, e.g., by triangle A B C , so that line B C [is the one]
designating the latitude corresponding to point B. Then I wish that line A B be bisected
at its middle point D , with line D E designating the degree of the latitude corresponding
to point D , which degree is the middle degree of the whole latitude existing in the sub­
ject, and I wish that line F E G be drawn through point E parallel to line A B . Then it is
evident that there is now erected on line A B a quadrangle, evidently A B G F , which is
divided into two partial quadrangles by line D E , i.e., into quadrangle A D E F and quad­
rangle D E B G , which quadrangles are equal to one another since they are halves of
quadrangle A B G F . It is also evident that quadrangle A D E F is bisected by line A E to
form two equal triangles, namely, triangle A D E and triangle F E A . It is also evident
that there has been formed on line E G a triangle E G C which is equal to triangle A F E ,
as can be clearly proved, since (1) side F E is equal to side [EG , both being halves of fine
FG ; and because side G C is equal to side ] G B, both being halves of line B C and since
side B G is equal to side A F , these being opposite sides of quadrangle A B G F , hence (2)
side G C is equal to side A F ; and (3) angle G of triangle E G C is equal to angle F of
triangle A F E , each being a right angle. Hence the whole triangle E G C is equal to the
whole triangle A F E . Therefore, if the latitude designated by triangle E G C is imagined
to be in the space of triangle A F E , it is clear that then the subject, namely, fine A B , will
be uniformly hot at degree D E , which is the middle degree of the whole difform latitude
existing now in the subject. But just as much latitude of calidity now exists in the subject
as there would be before. Therefore, it is evident that a latitude uniformly difform cor­
responds to [its] middle degree, which was to be shown.37
37 2i6v, “ E t hoc declaro sic: si<t> linea super lineam A B est erectus nunc (corr. ex
A B designans subiectum calidum uniformiter numerus) quadrangulus, scilicet A B G F qui
difformiter et sit A terminus privativus, si est est divisus in duos quadrangulos partibiles,
non gradus totius latitudinis caliditatis, et sit B scilicet per lineam D E , scilicet (corr. e x si) in
extremum intensius; tunc, ut dictum est supra, quadrangulum A D E F et quadrangulum

piece that tended to use the term latitude to stand for quantity o f quality: caliditas illius subiecti intelligetur per unum D E B G , qui quadranguli sunt equales ad in­
triangulum, puta per triangulum A B C , ita vicem cum sint medietates quadranguli
And I show this as follows. Let A B be a line designating a subject uniformly difformly quod linea B C designans latitudinem corres- ABGF. Patet etiam quod quadrangulus
hot, with A as its privative term at no degree of the whole latitude of calidity, and let B pondentem puncto B . Tunc volo quod linea A D E F dividitur per medium per lineam A E
be the more intense extreme. Then, as has been said above, the calidity o f that subject A B dividatur in suo medio in puncto D et sit constituentem duos triangulos equales, scilicet
linea D E et designans gradum latitudinis cor- triangulum A D E et triangulum F E ( A } .
lineam denotantem subiectum, et si est dif- talis latitudo difformiter difformis intelligitur respondentem D puncto, qui est gradus medi­ Patet etiam quod super lineam E G constitutus
formitas talis latitudinis difformiter difformis per infinitos angulos possit variari.” us totius latitudinis existentis in subiecto, et est triangulus E G C , qui est equalis triangulo
in infinitum potest variari propter diversas 36 The Science o f Mechanics, 385, 386-87. volo quod per punctum E" ducatur linea F E G A F E (corr. ex A F G ), ut evidenter potest pro­
partes subiecti, ita talis superficies per quam et equedistans linee A B . Tunc patet quod bari, quia latus F E est equale lateri [ E G cum
 I OO The Configuration Doctrine 101
Introduction

The second piece in the Venetian manuscript is a section o f the D eproportionibus scribed in Introduction I V and labelled as Manuscript J o f the D e configurationibus.
o f the Franciscan Roger Thomas. In a brief passage, we are told that something The commentator’s interesting proof o f the noncircular character o f the figures
uniformly difformly hot is equivalent to something uniformly hot at the middle proportional in altitude to a semicircle and constructed on the same base, and by
degree since some area w hich is uniformly difformly w ide is simply (simpliciter) which the so-called semicircular difformly difform quality may just as well be repre­
equal to another area that is uniformly w ide38. The example cited is that o f a trian­ sented, constitutes another halting— but certainly significant— step toward analytic
gle equal to a quadrangle, which certainly seems to link the passage with Ores­ geometry in tw o respects. It emphasizes an analysis o f the curves rather than the
me’s tradition. A s Miss Maier has pointed out, the author refers to his demonstration whole figures, and, even more remarkably, it applies numbers to the longitudes
o f this “ in a conclusion concerning alteration,” and she believes that the reference and latitudes, reflecting a correct understanding o f the equation o f a circle in this
is to the anonymous treatment which we have presented above.39 This w ould ac­ rudimentary coordinate system (see Appendix III for the text and translation o f the
cordingly confirm Roger Thomas as the author o f that treatment. T he only slight commentator’s exposition).
difficulty is that in fact the early p ro o f concerned uniformly difform quality but not Before concluding our consideration o f the spread o f the configuration tech­
one undergoing alteration. H owever, it may be that his reference merely means nique in Italy, we can mention other brief examples o f the use o f the Oresmian
that the conclusion is in the w hole context o f alteration, which it certainly is. In­ figures. A hint o f Casali’s form o f the doctrine is found in the Questiones de elementis
cidentally, w e should note that Thom as’ term inology is similar to that used by o f Antonius de Scarparia, a physician w ho taught in Bologna and Perugia at the
Buridan in the analogy quoted in the first part o f this chapter (fn. 17, above). end o f the fourteenth century and w ho became physician to Pope John X X III in
O f considerable interest for our study o f the knowledge o f Oresme’s graphing 1410. He notes that “ a latitude uniformly difform .. .is signified by means o f a trian­
system in Italy is the paraphrase and commentary o f the D e configurationibus found gle, so that the base is said to be the maximal degree and the apex is said to be no
in a Florence manuscript o f the Biblioteca Nazionale Centrale w hich w e have de­ degree.” 40 T he only point w orth noticing here is that he seems to be follow ing the
horizontal orientation o f intensity lines which w e have associated w ith Casali. A t
sint medietates linee F G ; et quia latus G C est vel quecunque qualitas ad quale, sicut se habet about the same time we find examples o f the use o f Oresme’s figures to illustrate
equale lateri] G B , cum sint medietates linee latitudo ad quantum, et loquor hic ut est una the verbal arguments o f the English schoolmen. One o f the best examples occurs
B C \ cum latus B G est equale lateri A F quia trium dimensionum, ad longum, latum et pro­
in a copy o f Angelus de Fossambruno’s Recollecte on Heytesbury’s D e tribus predica-
sunt latera (corr. e x quadrangula) opposita fundum. Sed uniformiter difformiter (corr. ex
quadranguli (corr. e x quadrangulus) A B G F , difformitos) latum est simpliciter eque latum
mentis (i.e., the first part o f his Regule solvendi sophismata). Angelus came to Padua in
ergo latus G C est equale lateri A F , et angulus sicut uniformiter latum sub (162r) linea media 1400, and a student copied his w ork in 1412 (Venice, Bibl. Marc. Lat. V I, 30, i r -
G trianguli E G C (corr. e x A G C ) est equalis illius uniformiter difformiter lati. Igitur unifor­ ijr ). O n folio 6v in the margins o f this copy w e find tw o right triangles used to
angulo (corr. e x anguli) F trianguli A F E quia miter difforme calidum erit precise eque cali­ represent uniformly difform motions. The one on the right margin is o f particular
uterque eorum est rectus. Igitur totus triangu­ dum sicut uniforme calidum sub gradu medio.
lus E G C est equalis toti triangulo A F E . Igi­
interest:
E t vocatur uniformiter difformiter latum quod
tur si latitudo designata per triangulum E G C est latum aliqua latitudine latitudinis dimensio- 8
ymaginetur esse in spacio trianguli A F E nalis cuius quecunque due partes equales habent
(corr. ex A F G ) constat quia tunc subiectum, equales latitudines dimensionales (corr. ex di-
scilicet linea A B , erit calidum uniformiter mensionalis), et uniforme latitudinis quod equ-
gradu D E , qui est gradus medius totius lati­ non gradus
aliter latum ubique. Exemplum est de triangu­
tudinis difformis existentis nunc in subiecto. lo et quadrangulo. Antecedens igitur probo meas pa 2° ,
Sed nunc (corr. e x nec) est tanta latitudo cali- hora
sic. Nam tale uniformiter difforme latum est
ditatis in subiecto A B quanta tunc esset. Ergo simpliciter equale in quantitate unius unifor­ Note that under the triangle the scribe has repeated the base line, i.e., the line
patet (2i7r) quod latitudo uniformiter diffor­ miter lati (corr. e x lato?) tali equali scilicet in
denoting time. The same practice is follow ed in tw o figures on folio ~jr. The pur­
mis gradui medio correspondet, quod fuit longitudine. Igitur est equale sibi in latitudine
declarandum.” From my numerous correc­ illa. Consequentia patet, si sint superficies.
pose o f such replicas o f the base line is, I suppose, to emphasize that when compar­
tions and my reading in addition in brackets, Antecedens, scilicet quod talia sunt simpliciter ing various kinds o f non-uniform motion, time is their common measure. A some-
it is obvious that the manuscript is a faulty one. equalia, in una conclusione de alteratione alias
Incidentally, the scribe often replaces E with 40 Ibid., 379. MS Vat. lat. 4447 is quoted. O n proportio secundi ad tertium et sic de aliis suc-
demonstravi et leviter demonstrari poterit per
C and I have not noted these replacements. He Euclidem, et hic ideo causa brevitatis pertrans- folio 265 V , c. 1, we read: “ E t debet notari, cessive, et talis latitudo significatur per modum
seems to use “ ci” before vowels. I have chang­ eo.” quod talis latitudo taliter terminata vocatur trianguli, ita quod basis dicitur gradus summus
ed this to “ ti.” 39 A n der Gren^e, 368. latitudo uniformiter difformis, quia qualis est et conus dicitur non gradus sive gradus remis-
38 i6 iv -i6 2 r , “ Item sic se habet caliditas proportio primi gradus ad secundum, talis est sus.”
 102 Introduction The Configuration Doctrine 103

what later copy o f the D e intensione et remissione formarum o f Jacopo da Forlf, a formarum existing in a manuscript o f the fifteenth century in the Univ. Bibl. Frei­
contemporary o f Angelus, also utilizes the right triangle to illustrate a uniformly burg i. Breisgau (MS 238, 2r-2ov). It includes a long and involved discussion o f
difform form (Venice, Bibl. Marc. Lat. V II, 7, iv). The same kind o f Oresmian the M erton Rule o f uniformly difform,45 although that rule was absent from the
representations are found in a later fifteenth-century copy o f Swineshead’s Liber D e latitudinibus. Furthermore, as in Italy, w e find Oresme’s figures used to illus­
calculationum (Pavia, Bibl. Univers. Aldini M S 314, pp. 11, 13, 14, 91, 105, 106). trate non-geometrical discussions o f the M erton theorems. For example, in a
This procedure was also very common in the early printed editions o f various Prague manuscript, Bibl. Univ. 1601.V III.G i9 (Y .III.3 , n. 63), 71V, such figures are
scholastic w orks, e.g., see the comments on Marsilius o f Inghen above, the plate used three times to illustrate such discussions and one is the familiar right triangle
from Heytesbury’s Regule in the edition o f Venice o f 1494 given in The Science of and rectangle constructed on the same base. These figures have the peculiarity o f
Mechanics (facing page 273), and the diagram accompanying the discussion o f the being constructed out o f points in a Pythagorean manner.
M erton theorem by John Dullaert (ibid., 654, fin. 92). I shall say more o f this prac­ As w e come into the sixteenth century, the principal question w e can ask con­
tice below when discussing the possible sources o f G alileo’s know ledge o f the cerns the possible source or sources from which Galileo might have learned o f the
configuration doctrine. configuration doctrine. There can be little doubt that Galileo was in some fashion
Finally, in regard to the spread o f the configuration doctrine in Italy in the fif­ the heir o f the medieval doctrine, as Duhem asserted some fifty years ago.46 G ali­
teenth century, w e should note that Nicholas o f Cusa (most o f whose mathematical leo’s use o f the configuration doctrine is most fruitfully present in his p roof o f the
knowledge appears to have been learned in Italy) adopts the configuration tech­ fundamental uniform acceleration theorem (Theorem I, Proposition I) in the “ Third
nique briefly in the beginning o f B ook II o f his D e mathematicis complementis, com­ D ay” o f his Discorsi e dimostragioni matematiche intorno a due nuove science,47 where
pleted in 1454-There he employs a right triangle to represent the regular variation Galileo states the M erton College acceleration theorem in slightly different form
o f curvilinear motion from point to point in a rotating radius and thus appears to
be follow ing the suggestion o f Oresme in II.vi o f the D e configurationibus (see 45 ff. 8v-i2r. Much o f the argument (pro L e Systeme du monde, Vol. 7, Chap. 6, and
and con) is arithmetical and logical in the particularly 550-61; H. Wieleitner, in B iblio­
Commentary to II. vi, for the Latin text o f the crucial passage o f Cusa). This repre­
Merton manner. But he does argue relative to theca Mathematica, 3. Folge, Vol. 14 (1913—14),
sentation by a right triangle he specifically calls a configuratio. In the same passage he
figures, iov: “ Nota igitur si basis trianguli 242; A . Koyre, Etudes Galileennes, Vol. 2;
also uses a rectangle to represent the uniform velocities o f all points in a straight rectilinei representantis latitudinem uniformi­ Clagett, The Science o f Mechanics, Chap. 6, and
line m oving in a m otion o f translation. ter difformem dividitur per equalia et (corr. ex particularly 414. A . Maier sees the medieval
Some brief comment can also be made concerning the spread o f the doctrine to est) super punctum sectionis erigitur linea doctrine as fundamentally altered, suggesting
perpendiculariter terminata ad lineam ter­ that all that remains from the doctrine as ex­
Central and Eastern Europe. O bviously Parisian scholars w ho left Paris to accept
minantem altitudinem superficiei trianguli pounded by Oresme is a “ schlichtes Mittel der
posts in Eastern universities must have carried the doctrine w ith them— scholars
(corr. e x est li), illa [linea] designat altitudinem graphischen Erlauterung und Veranschauli-
such as Albert o f Saxony, Marsilius o f Inghen, and the like. W e know from uni­ totius figure si eius inequalitas reduceretur ad chung von BegriffenfiVoraussetzungen, Be-
versity records that in the 1390’s in Vienna, Heidelberg, and Cologne several equalitatem.” Tie goes on to complete an argu­ weisen und Resultaten.” See A n der Gren^e,
people lectured on “ the latitude o f form s.” *1 Presumably this subject involved the ment showing that difformity can be reduced 384. But even if this is correct, the remnant of
to uniformity in a latitude uniformly difform the doctrine was not without historical signifi­
Oresme system, at least in the form made popular in the Tractatus de latitudinibus
from o to 8 by adding the excesses beyond the cance for Galileo.
formarum. It is obvious that interest in the system continued during the fifteenth
middle degree (4) to the corresponding 47 L e Opere, Vol. 8, 208-12, where the first
century from the existence o f a number o f manuscripts o f the D e latitudinibus for­ deficiencies below the mean, and he ends again two theorems and the first corollary to the
marum in Eastern libraries.42 Furthermore, the short tract was published in Vienna by referring to a figure, n r : “ ...e t [quod] es­ second theorem are given. For an English
in 1515.43 W e have already mentioned the various pieces appearing in Erfurt manu­ set tota latitudo reducta ad uniformitatem ut 4 translation, see Clagett, The Science o f Mechan­
cum medio patet intuenti in figura designanti ics, 409-18. A discussion o f the Merton theo­
scripts brought together by Amplonianus, whose catalogue was prepared about
excessus partium secundum altitudinem per rem with the appropriate literature has been
1412.44 Attention should also be called to a commentary on the D e latitudinibus
lineas ductas. E x quo sequitur quod correlaria given in the same work, Chapters 5 and 6, and
41 The Science o f Mechanics, 641-42. 44 See this chapter, fns. 12-14, and the sunt falsa cum dicant quod non sit danda certa 630-3in, 646-47, 649, 654-55. Note that the
42 Ibid., 397-98, where manuscripts o f the Introduction to Appendix II. Also in the list latitudo cui talis difformitas conveniat secun­ medieval form o f the theorem usually empha­
D e latitudinibus formarum are listed. Note that o f manuscripts mentioned in The Science of dum equalitatem et sufficit modus ille redu­ sized that the spaces traversed in equal times
manuscript Vienna, cod. 4953, contains com­ Mechanics, 398, we find a copy of the D e latitu­ cendo difformitatem ad uniformitatem qualiter- were equal, while Galileo’s theorem states
ments as well as the text. dinibusformarum from the Amplonian collection cunque incipiat vel dicatur latitudo.” that the times for the traversal o f the equal
43 Ibid., 398. There were other editions in at Erfurt. 46 P. Duhem, Etudes sur Leonard de V in ci, spaces are equal, a change in wording without
Padua, 1482, i486, and Venice, 1505. Vol. 3, 375-98, 562-66, 574-83. C f. Duhem, great mathematical significance.

104 Introduction
and gives a geometric p ro o f employing a right triangle to represent uniform accel­
eration from rest and a rectangle to represent uniform motion at the speed o f the
middle instant o f the period o f acceleration. Theorem I states: “ The time in which
a certain space is traversed by a m oving body uniformly accelerated from rest is
equal to the time in which the same space w ould be traversed by the same body
traveling with a uniform speed whose degree o f velocity is one-half o f the maxi­
mum, final degree o f velocity o f the original uniformly accelerated m otion.” This
theorem is the basis o f the p ro o f o f his celebrated second theorem: “ I f any body
descends from rest w ith a uniformly accelerated motion, the spaces traversed in
any times at all by that body are related to each other in the duplicate ratio o f these
same times, that is to say, as the squares o f these times.” Incidentally, the use o f a
right triangle for uniform acceleration and a rectangle for uniform motion also
plays an important part in Salviati’s explanation (spiegatura) o f the first corollary to
that theorem which held that in uniform acceleration from rest the spaces traversed
in any number o f equal and consecutive time periods starting from the first instant
o f motion “ will be related to each other as the odd numbers beginning w ith unity,
i.e., i, 3, 5, 7 — ” I have already commented on the remarkable similarity o f Ores-
me’s treatment o f the M erton Rule in the Questions on the Geometry o f Euclid with
that o f Galileo. There is, however, no evidence whatsoever that Galileo was famil­
iar with any o f the manuscripts o f the Oresme text, although all three o f the extant
manuscripts are o f Italian provenience.48 Hence w e should look elsewhere for the
source o f influence on Galileo.
G alileo’s source was almost certainly not the treatment by Leonardo da V inci o f
the speed o f falling bodies, although Leonardo did use the right triangle or p yr­
amidal figure in his description:
[The] proof of the proportion of the time and movement (moto) together with the speed
made in the descent of heavy bodies [is found] in the pyramidal figure, because the afore­
said powers (potentie) are all pyramidal since they commence in nothing and proceed to
The Configuration Doctrine 105
increase in degrees of arithmetical proportion (gradi di proportione aritmetricha) . If you cut
the pyramid at any degree of its height by a line parallel to its base, you will find that
whatever ratio there is between the height of this section from its base and the whole
height of the pyramid, there will be the same ratio between the breadth (largely) of this
section and the breadth of the whole base. You see that if A B is 1/4 of A E , so F B is 1/4
of base N E .49
It is not clear from this statement just what is being represented by the lines parallel
to the base, but if they are velocities, then he has indeed a system essentially like
that o f Oresme, except that the latitude lines are horizontally oriented as in the
w ork o f Casali, and later that o f Galileo. There is, however, no evidence o f the
presence o f the M erton Rule in the Leonardo manuscripts, and hence Leonardo
does not equate a right triangle and a rectangle on the same base to prove or illus­
trate such a rule. Hence, it is quite evident that Galileo did not get his understand­
ing o f the Merton Rule and its geometric p roof from Leonardo.
If w e exclude his use o f manuscripts, we are still left with a fair number o f pub­
lished works from which Galileo might have taken the geometric equation o f the
right triangle and rectangle and a general knowledge o f the configuration tech­
nique. As I have noted earlier, the familiar figure appears in conjunction w ith the
Merton Rule for uniform acceleration in the edition o f Heytesbury’s Regule solvendi
sophismata (with a commentary o f Gaetano de Thienis) printed in Venice, 1494, fo­
lio 40V.50 It also appears in tw o editions o f Blasius o f Parma’s Questiones super trac­
tatum de latitudinibus formarum, those o f Padua, i486, and Venice, 1505 ;51*in that
same 1505 edition o f Casali’s tract (unpaginated but folio 3r o f that w ork); and
finally in a different context in the edition o f Swineshead’s Liber calculationum,
printed in Venice in 15 20.52 N o w Duhem has already pointed out that in the juvenile
papers o f Galileo, w e find references to Heytesbury and to Swineshead.53 I f these
passages represent notes on G alileo’s reading, then they indicate a direct connec­
tion with tw o o f the earliest exponents o f the M erton Rule o f uniform acceleration,
and indeed in addition to the M erton theorem itself much o f the earlier vocabulary

48 The manuscripts are listed in Appendix I.
Even the Seville manuscript was in Italy at
one time where it was purchased (in Padua) in
1 5 31. And while it was not in Italy during the
lifetime of Galileo, still it might have been the
source of further copying of the text. For an
account of the Seville collection, see the refer­
ence to Beaujouan’s article cited in the Sigla,
Appendix I.
49 The Science o f Mechanics, 572.
50 Ibid., facing page 273. There are no
figures in Bernardus Torni’s Capitulum de motu
locali Hentisberi (Pisa, 1484), or in the early
edition of the Regule (Venice, 1484).
51 The figure of the right triangle and the
rectangle on the same base appears twice on
the unpaginated second folio (verso) o f the 1505
edition. The figure on the right is that given in
our discussion of Blasius above.
52 Geometric figures are not given in the two
incunabular editions of the Liber Calculatio­
num'. Padua [1485?] and Pavia, 1498. V e find
sundry figures in the 1520 edition on folios 5V,
6r, 6v, j v , to t, iov, n r , n v , i3r, 13V, 14V,
i6v, 19V, 26r, 28r, 38V, 4<or. The figure on 6v
is much like that o f Paris, BN lat. 6558, noted
above in this section, fn. 10. The diagram
containing a right triangle and a rectangle on
the same base is present on folio 19V, where
Swineshead discusses whether something that
is uniformly difformly dense or rare is equiva­
lent to that same thing uniformly dense or
rare in its mean degree.
53 P. Duhem, Etudes stir Leonard de Vinci,
Vol. 3, 580-81. Galileo, L e Opere, Vol. 1, 172.
 io 6 Introduction The Configuration Doctrine 107

still remains in G alileo’s exposition.54 I have further pointed out that in the Juve­ the squares of {ab) and {ad) must be double, ab o f the distance traversed, by bd; and the time
nilia G alileo shows familiarity w ith the peculiar treatment o f the uniform ly dif- is 10. the square 100. the double 200, the o f the third part o f the distance traversed, by
square o f {ad), the roote 14 4/29, the length of df. These lines are easily found by observing
form ly difform forms found in the D e latitudinibusformarum.55 From these various
ad. therefore {bd) 4 4/29. that (thus?) we found that, because of the fact that triangles abc and
facts, I deduce that Galileo had seen both the Heytesbury edition o f 1494 and the
which was required, agayn {ab). the square
ade are similar, — T?— (w hich, if we are
omnibus text o f Venice, 1505, which contained in addition to the tracts o f Blasius 100; triple the 300, the square o f {af). the roote Aabc abz
o f Parma and Johannes de Casali the copiously illustrated text o f the Tractatus de 17 11/35. therefore {df) 3 1 / 7 proximat (?).” correct in assuming that the ratio o f the trian­
latitudinibusformarum.56 If this is so, Galileo could w ell have learned the rudiments (I have indicated most o f Hariot’s deletions by gles represents the ratio o f distances and the
dots under the letters. Doubtful readings have ratio o f base lines represents the ratio o f times,
o f the configuration system from the D e latitudinibus formarum and the geometric
been indicated by question marks. The paren­
p ro o f o f the M erton Rule from either the tract o f Blasius or that o f Heytesbury or yields ;). With ab given as 10 and with
theses after letters are those of Hariot; the
both, and perhaps even the horizontal orientation o f the latitude lines from the Aade = 2Aabc, ad is calculated as 14■ /,,, and bd
square brackets are mine, as are the bracketed
tract o f Casali. The final conclusion o f this reasoning is that G alileo almost certain­ numbers. A line is drawn across the page be­ (which would be the time for the traversal of
ly knew o f the medieval configuration doctrine and its essential usage to represent tween what I have labeled as sections [2] and the second equal part o f the distance) would be
42V In the same way, with Aafg = 3Aabc, d f
uniform motion and uniform acceleration. O ther efforts to use the system by D es­ [3])-
9 (which would be the time for the traversal of
cartes and Beeckman have been adequately treated elsewhere.57 Finally, it can be the third equal part o f the distance) is calculat­
noted that Thomas Hariot may have used the Oresme triangle before Galileo for a ed as approximately 3-f. Hariot does not ap­
discussion o f the acceleration o f falling bodies, and that John Wallis and Christiaan pear to have worked out the second problem
Huygens (and no doubt others) employed it in accounts written after G alileo.58 specified in section [1], the determination of
the distances traversed in equal times, unless
54 The Science o f Mechanics, 251—52. the horizon is performed in aequali time to his we assume, with Kargon, that the cryptic
55 Ibid., 252-53. C f. Galileo, L e Opere, Vol. motion downward to the poynt o f beginning statement at the end of section [2] regarding
1, 120. (?) from (?) his bottom (?) as well in any angle In section [1] Hariot has set the problem,
division in the tropic point means that the
56 It is possible that Galileo might have of random as of the upright. For (?) the same namely to find, in the case of uniform accelera­
tropic point divides the distance into a three to
read the D e latitudinibus formarum and the time as of a bullet o f the same matter and tion, (1) the length of the time periods used to
one ratio. But actually a much simpler inter­
Blasius tract on it in the earlier edition o f Pa­ mass (?) doth measure the perpendicular traverse equal parts o f the distance, and (2) the
pretation o f that statement would be that any
dua, i486. But my reasoning would be essen­ from the highest poynt. lengths o f the distances traversed in equal time
whole trajectory (or “ line o f random” ) o f the
tially unchanged, except that then he would The motion of any bullet downward from periods. As Kargon suggests, in section [2]
projectile is divided into halves (and its time
perhaps not have read the tract o f Casali. any poynt aloft naturali and free is still en- Hariot seems to conclude (although to be sure
as well) in the “ turning point” or high point of
57 See A . Koyre, Etudes Galileennes, Vol. 2, creasing in every poynt in continuall propor­ rather obscurely) that in the motion o f fall the
the trajectory. The meaning o f tropic point as
25-54. C f. The Science o f Mechanics, 417-18. tion in such state (?) as if the line o f his motion distances of fall are in the same ratios as the
a “ turning point” was apparently common
58 Thomas H a rio t: Professor Robert Kargon be devided into aequali partes; as the whole squares o f the velocities. (This would be clear
enough in this period (see the O E D ). If this is
o f Johns Hopkins has kindly called my atten­ line hath to one o f the partes with the rest enough if we applied an Oresme triangle like
all the sentence means, we must certainly re­
tion to a treatment o f the acceleration o f free from the beginning, so hath the velocity at the that used by Hariot in [3], for in such a case
ject the introduction o f a 3 : 1 ratio in the
fall by Thomas Hariot in London, Brit. Mus. end o f the motion to the velocity at the end of the distances would be represented by the
definition o f tropic point. Be that as it may,
Add. MS 6789, 62r: the sayd poynt. The which manner o f propor­ areas o f the triangle and the perpendiculars
Hariot does seem to have used the configu­
“ [i[ If in the time A the body B move the space tion is expressed being the like o f a circle, a would be the velocities.) In section [3] Hariot
ration technique and to have arrived at the
ordinating d sector, the superficies o f a cone, or a triangle appears to be applying the Oresme triangle to
relationship of S oc T 2. Kargon would date
C D , his motion being (aequabilis continusly o f what kind soever. Therefore a line of any the first problem outlined in section [1 ]. Thus,
this piece as between 1595 and 1605.
random is devided by aequali time in the tro- he seems to assume (although he actually in no
cresces [or crestes?— i.e., increases]) uniforme- fohn W allis: John Wallis, Mechanica sive de
picke poynte. way specifies what the triangle and its lines
ly continually crescet [or crestet— i.e., in­ motu tractatus geometricus, Part III, Chap. X ,
3] Let ab of the triangle abc be 10 it is required represent) that triangle abc represents a dis­
creased] : to know in what parte o f the time A , Props. II—III (London, 1670), 646-50:
tance, triangle ade twice that distance, and
half the space o f CD or any other proportionali that a line be added as bd that the and that the
triangle afg three times the first distance. His “ PROP. II.
parte is (?) measured by the motion of B.
triangle ade be double to abc and the sides be object would appear to be the determination of
And conversely and de parallelles that is like and therefore like the times o f traversal o f each successive equal Si Vis Motricis, per se aequabilis, continua
H ow much space o f CD is measured in half triangles; it is required figures to have in num­ part o f the distance traversed where the first fiat applicatio; producetur Motus continuo
the time o f A or any other proportionali parte. bers the line bd. for simply (?) as like figures time is given as 10. Hence, the time o f the first Acceleratus.
[2] The motion o f a bullet by the violence of and in the same proportion is the squares of part o f the distance appears to be represented E t quidem ita Acceleratus, ut temporibus
the powder upward to the highest poynt above like sides, the triangles are double, therefore by the base line ab; the time of the second part aequalibus aequalia concipiat Celeritatis in­
 io8
crementa: Quem Motum vocant Mqualiter
Acceleratum.
Si Vis Impeditivae, per se aequabilis, similis
fiat applicatio; similis prodibit Motus Retar­
datio. Quem Motum vocant /Equaliter Retar­
datum.
E t quidem hoc eousque donec totus tolla­
tur; vel etiam (si Impedimentum illud sit a
V i contraria) ponatur contrarius.
Intelligatur enim Causa Motrix aliqua, uno
Temporis momento. Mobili imprimere gra­
dum Celeritatis ut i . Gradus hic, nisi fuerit
Impedimento aliquo sublatus, etiam sine nova
Causa perseverabit, per prop. n. Cap. I.
Eadem vero Causa, similiter agens, secundo
item Momento applicata, tantundem efficiet;
per prop. 7. Cap. I. Adeoque (perseveranti
gradui primo) secundum superaddet. Et
similiter tertio momento (duobus illis per­
severantibus) superaddet tertium. Atque sic
deinceps.
Adeoque (sumpto initio Seriei a principio
Motus) Celeritatum gradus (adeoque & Longi­
tudines emensae; per prop. 23. Cap. I.) Erunt,
ut i, 2, 3, 4, & c. seu (quod in infinite exiguis
tantundem valet, per prop. I. Cap. 5.) ut o, 1, 2,
3, & c. vel etiam, ut 1, 3, 3, 7, & c. arithmetice
proportionales; seu, ut rectae Triangulum
Complentes, per def. I. Cap. 4. (Respicitur
autem illic, figura ex parallelogrammis trian­
gulo Circumscripta; justo Major: istic, In­
scripta; justo Minor: hic, intermedia, partim
Circumscripta, partim Inscripta; ipsi Trian­
gulo fEqualis: ut ad prop. I. Cap. 5. dictum
est.) Adeoque emensae Longitudines, ab initio
computatae, ut Triangulorum illorum Plana
quae complent illae rectae: adeoque in duplica­
ta ratione Temporum.
Si vero, non ab ipso Seriei initio, principium
Introduction
sumamus; sed ab acquisito seu posito aliquo
Celeritatis gradu; puta, si a posito Celeritatis
gradu ut C initium sumamus; similiter osten­
detur, continuis momentis sequentibus, Cele­
ritatis gradus futuros C + 1, C + 2, C + 3,
& c. seu C + 1, C + 3, C + 5, & c. Hoc est,
ut rectae in Trapezio, seu Triangulo truncato.
Quale autem sumendum erit Trapezium, facile
determinabitur ex ratione quam habet Celeri­
tas ultimo acquisita; ad celeritatem primo posi­
tam: quippe inde determinabitur ratio paral­
lelorum in trapezio laterum maximi ad mini­
mum; eritque Triangulum super eorum maxi­
mo aeque altum, ad Trapezium, ut maximum
illud ad summam utriusque; Altitudine sump­
ta qualibet.
Eodem modo ostendetur, in motu Retar­
dato: Puta, si, posito aliquo celeritatis gradu
quo feratur mobile, ut C, intelligatur Vis Im-
peditiva, in se aequabilis, continuo accedere;
quae propterea singulis momentis tantundem
demat: Fient celeritatis gradus continue se­
quentes, ut C — 1, C — 2, C — 3,C — 4, & c.
puta usque ad C - C = o, ubi motus primo
positus plane absumitur.
Adeoque, si porro continuetur ablatio, puta
ad C — C — 1, C — C — 2, C — C — 3 ,C — C
— 4 ,& c. hoc est, ad o — 1, o — 2, o — 3, o — 4,
109
The Configuration Doctrine
Sequitur ex praecedente. Quippe, si intelli­
&c. seu — i, — 2 , - 3 , — 4, & c. sitque Vis illa
gatur Grave in A ; sublato fulcro, descensum
Impeditiva, non Impeditiva simpliciter, sed in
ob gravitatem suam inchoans; momento pri­
contrarium Motiva, habebitur Motus in partes
mo celeritatis gradum acquisivisse, ut 1; se­
contrarias, cum celeritatis gradibus 1, 2, 3, 4,
cundo, ut 2; tertio, ut 3; & sic deinceps; (prop­
&c. per prop. 12. Cap. 1. Si vero simpliciter
ter tantundem celeritatis singulis momentis
Impeditiva sit; ubi ad C — C pervenitur, tolli­
additum:) adeoque celeritatum gradus tempo­
tur Motus; sed quicunque deinceps succedat
ribus a principio sumptis ubique proportiona­
gradus Impedimenti, utut fortius impediat,
les: puta ut Tempus A b, ad Tempus A B, sic
non tamen in contrarias partes pellit: Supponi­
b /3 (celeritatem in b) ad (celeritatem in B) B /1 :
tur utique Vim Motricem non habere.
& sic ubique: Cum Longitudines emensae,
Prioris instantiam habemus in Motu Gra­
sint Celeritatum gradibus proportionales; erunt
vium sursum projectorum (seclusa considera­
omnes longitudines tempore A b transactae,
tione impedientis medii;) ubi post superatam a
ad omnes transactas tempore A B; (seu tota
Gravitate Vim sursum projicientem, descendit
longitudo transacta tempore A b, ad totam
grave. Posteriorem quadantenus refert motus
transactam tempore A B;) ut omnes rectae
projectorum (seclusa gravitatis consideratione)
in quamcunque partem; Ubi Medii Densitas, complentes A b /3 triangulum, ad omnes com­
vim projectricem obtundit, & sensim minuit, plentes triangulum A B /3 ; H oc est, ut Trian­
tandemque tollit; sed non in partes contrarias gulum A b /3 ad ipsum A B /3 Triangulum;
repellit. Adeoque in Laterum A b, A B, ratione dupli­
cata (propter figuras similes in duplicata ratio­
PR O P. III. ne laterum homologorum.) Ideoque si suman­
tur tempora A b, A b, & c. ut 1, 2, 3, 4, & c.
Si consideretur Gravitas tanquam Vis M o­
trix deorsum, in se aequabilis, atque continue
applicata: A
Descensus Gravium (seclusa consideratione
medii resistentis, & siquid est ejusmodi) est
Motus aequaliter Acceleratus.
Adeoque, temporibus quibusvis a principio
decidentiae sumptis, emensae Longitudines
sunt in duplicata ratione Temporum.
Puta, sumptis Temporibus, ut 1, 2, 3, 4, & c.
emensae longitudines erunt ut horum quadrata
1, 4, 9, 16, & c.
Temporibus autem invicem aequalibus, a
principio continue consequentibus, primo,
secundo, tertio, quarto, & c. ut 1, 3, 5, 7, & c.
quadratorum differentiae, arithmetice propor­
tionales.
Si vero a posito aliquo seu jam acquisito
celeritatis gradu initium sumatur; longitudini­ erunt Triangula A b /3, A b /3 , & c. (adeoque &
bus jam dictis addendum erit quantum ea cele­ transactae Longitudines, ) ut 1, 4, 9, 16, &c.
ritate, aequabili motu, eo tempore acquisitum E t propterea, quae temporibus aequalibus
foret. continue sequentibus, A b, b b, & c. transigun­
Gravium vero sursum projectorum Ascen­ tur; A b /3 , b /3 /3 b, & c. ut eorum differentiae,
sus, est motus aequaliter Retardatus. 1, 3, 9, 7, &c. E t sic ubique.
E t Longitudines ibidem emensae habentur, Puta, sumptis in recta A E, partibus A B,
si auferantur jam dictae longitudines a longi­ B C, C D , D E, & c. ipsis x, 3, 9, 7, & c. propor­
tionalibus : aequalibus illae temporibus tra<n>-
tudine quae Celeritate prima eodem tempore
sigentur.
foret acquisita.
 I I O
A Cohen for alerting me to Wallis’ treatment
T-B
3•
--C
5-
—- D
7-
4- e
Fig. 290
Si vero intelligatur, non ab ipso [Fig. 289]
motus initio in A , computus instituendus; sed
a celeritatis gradu jam acquisito, ut b fi, seu
B C; vel, quod tantundem erit, si non suapte
tantum gravitate motum concipiat Grave, sed
a V i Motrice extrinsecus pellatur seu projicia­
tur, unde Celeritatis gradum concipiat ut b fi,
(qua itaque ferretur nisi quid aliud accederet, per
prop. 11. Cap. i.) quae deinceps ob gravitatis
impetum continue applicatum, continue (ut
dictum est) aequaliter acceleranda sit: erunt
Celeritatis gradus, singulis ipsius temporis b B
momentis, ut rectae trapezium h fi (iB complen­
tes, & Longitudo per id temporis emensa, ut
ipsum b fi fi B trapezium; quaeque temporis il­
lius partibus transiguntur Longitudines, re-
spectivis trapezii partibus proportionales. E t
quidem si intelligatur B b fi parallelogrammum,
repraesentare longitudinem emetiendam tem­
pore b B celeritate ubique ipsi b fi aequali: tri­
angulum (i B fi repraesentabit id quod propter
accelerationem accedit.
Similiter si intelligatur Grave, in A , sursum
projectum ea V i quae Celeritatem imprimeret
ut A a; qua perseverante transigendam tem­
pore A B longitudinem repraesentet A B a a
parallelogrammum. Ea vero, propter Gravi­
tatem, ut Vim contrariam, contra renitentem;
& , propter continuam applicationem aequa­
lem, tantundem singulis momentis dementem;
continue minuetur: ablatis rectis ocfi, ocfi, trian­
gulum <xfi B (/ aBa) complentibus; relictis b fi,
residuos celeritatis gradus repraesentantibus;
donec tandem, ita crescentibus afi, ut fiat a B
ipsi A a aequalis, tota Vis sursum tendens ex-
Introduction The Configuration Doctrine h i
ejusdem altitudinis, ut sunt K E, O G & c. ut,
and also to that o f Huygens. inquam, excessus illius figurae supra hanc,
minor sit excessu trianguli A H L supra pla­
Christiaan Huygens'. Christiaan Huygens, Horo­ num P. hoc enim fieri posse perspicuum est,
logium oscillatorium sive de motu pendulorum ad cum totus excessus figurae circumscriptae
horologia aptato demonstrationes geometricae, Part super inscriptam aequetur rectangulo infimo,
II, Prop. V (Paris, 1673), 29 _ 3 I [Cf. Oeuvres basin habenti H L. Erit itaque omnino ex­
completes, ed. o f Societe Hollandaise des cessus ipsius trianguli A H L supra figuram
Sciences, Vol. 18 (Le Haye, 1934), 137-41.]: inscriptam minor quam supra planum P,
ac proinde figura triangulo inscripta major
“ P R O P O S IT IO V . plano P. Porro autem, quum recta A H
Spatium peractum certo tempore, a gravi e tempus totius descensus referat, ejus partes
quiete casum inchoante, dimidium esse ejus aequales A C, C E, E G , aequales temporis
spatii quod pari tempore transiret motu ae­ illius partes referent. Cumque celeritates
Fig. 291
mobilis cadentis crescant eadem proportione
qua tempora descensus [Prop. I, huj.]; sitque
hauriatur; adeoque in temporis puncto B de­ celeritas in fine totius temporis acquisita
sinat Ascensus. Sed, crescente porro ob Gravi­ H L ; erit ea, quae in fine primae partis tem­
tatem impetu; non modo non feretur sursum, poris A C acquiretur, C K ; quia ut A H ad
sed incipiet descendere, (Vi deorsum jam prae­ A C, ita H L ad C K . Similiter quae in fine
pollente ;) & quidem (ob continue crescentem partis temporis secundae C E acquiritur, erit
impetum aequabiliter) motu aequaliter accele­ E O , atque ita deinceps. Patet autem, tempore
rato, (ut crescunt c fi, c fi, rectae, triangulum primo A C, spatium aliquod a mobili trans­
B C fi complentes;) donec, facto B fi C trian­ missum esse, quod majus sit nihilo; tempore
gulo, ipsi A a B aequali, tantundem descende­ vero secundo C E transmissum esse spatium
rit quantum ascenderat prius: atque adhuc ul­ quod majus sit quam K E , quia spatium K E
tra nisi quis Obex impediat. transmissum fuisset tempore C E , motu ae­
quabili, cum celeritate C K . habent enim spa­
SC H O LIU M
quabili, cum celeritate quam acquisivit ultimo tia, motu aequabili transacta, rationem compo­
Propositionem hanc Hypothetice propo­
casus momento. sitam ex ratione temporum, & ratione veloci­
nimus : quoniam non inter omnes constat, vel
Sit tempus descensus totius A H, quo tem­ tatum, ideoque cum tempore A H, celeritate
quaenam sit Gravitatis Causa, vel etiam secun­
pore mobile peregerit spatium quoddam cujus aequabili H L percurri posuerimus spatium
dum quam Regulam agat, (variis varias Gravi­
quantitas designetur plano P. ductaque H L M H, sequitur tempore C E, cum celeritate
tatis Hypotheses excogitantibus.) Neque nobis
perpendiculari ad A H, longitudinis cujuslibet, C K, percurri spatium K E, quum ratio rec­
hic in animo est, illam in Physicis quaestionem
referat illa celeritatem in fine casus acquisitam. tanguli M H ad rectangulum K E componatur
determinare, in cujuscunque praejudicium.
Deinde completo rectangulo A H L M, intel­ ex rationibus A H ad C E, & H L ad E O
Sed, stante illa Hypothesi Physica, (quam vel
ligatur eo notari quantitas spatii quod per­
reapse veram esse, vel ad veritatem quam pro­ (/C K )-
curreretur tempore A H, cum celeritate H L. Quum ergo, ut dixi, spatium K E sit illud
xime accedere, Experimenta testantur;) Theo­
Ostendendum est igitur planum P dimidium quod transmitteretur tempore C E, cum cele­
rema Mathematicum, ostensum est.”
esse rectanguli M H, hoc est, ducta diagonali ritate aequabili C K, mobile autem feratur tem­
The point worth noticing in Wallis’ treat­
A L, aequale triangulo A H L. pore C E motu accelerato, qui jam principio
ment is that, aside from his use of a right trian­
Si planum P non est aequale triangulo A H hujus temporis habet celeritatem C K ; mani­
gle for uniform acceleration from rest and a
L, ergo aut minus eo erit, aut majus. Sit primo, festum est isto accelerato motu, tempore C E,
quadrangle for acceleration from some degree,
si fieri potest, planum P minus triangulo A H majus spatium quam K E confecturum. Eadem
the specific statement o f the Merton Rule, with
L. dividatur autem A H in tot partes aequales ratione, tempore tertio E G , majus spatium con­
which Galileo began his treatment, is missing
A C, C E, E G & c. ut, circumscripta triangulo ficiet quam O G , quia nempe hoc confecturum
and only the two succeeding forms o f the accel­
A H L figura e rectangulis quorum altitudo esset tempore eodem E G, cum celeritate aequa­
eration theorem remain. However, the basic
singulis divisionum ipsius A H partibus ae­ bili E O . Atque ita deinceps, singulis temporis
theorem lurks still in the equation o f each part
quetur, ut sunt rectangulaB C, D E, F G , altera- A H partibus, a mobili majora spatia quam
of the triangle with its accompanying rectan­
que eidem triangulo inscripta, ex rectangulis sunt rectangula figurae inscriptae, ipsis parti-
gle (see Fig. 286). I am grateful to I. Bernard
 I 12 Introduction The Configuration Doctrine ID

C. The Application o f the Configuration Doctrine to Phenomena such marvelous effects on the basis o f the older doctrine o f varying ratios and
dispositions o f primary, secondary, and tertiary qualities or some other view rather
I have suggested in Introductions I.B and II. A that the configuration doctrine as than on the basis o f varying configurations o f intensity.2 This is one o f the primary
presented by Oresme was used by him not only as a kind o f graphing system to
2 For example, in the Contra divinatores tions of intensities), 115V: “ dico igitur quod
represent abstract quantities o f quality and m otion but that it was also employed to ad quamlibet veram formam et ad verum esse
(Paris, B N lat. 15126, 331') Oresme suggests a
explain particular phenomena such as the relative pungency o f different substances, possible explanation of magnetic attraction on talis speciei vel talis sunt certe dispositiones et
the attraction o f iron by magnets, the natural friendship and hostility o f people and the basis o f substantial form and the ratio of certus numerus qualitatum et dispositionum

animals, the resistance o f certain people to common phenomena like lightning or
snake bites, the remarkable properties o f herbs and gems, and so on. The change
that Oresme made in contemporary doctrine was to add the concept o f internal
configurations o f intensity to the earlier ideas o f the varying ratios and disposi­
tions o f qualities.1 In fact, in his Contra divinatores zndQuodlibeta, Oresme explained
bus adjacentia, peragentur. Quare totum spa­
tium motu acceierato peractum majus erit ipsa
figura inscripta. Spatium vero iliud aequaie
positum fuit plano P. Itaque figura inscripta
minor erit spatio P. quod est absurdum; eodem
enim spatio major ostensa fuit. Non est igitur
planum P minus triangulo A H L. A t neque
majus esse ostendetur.
Sit enim, si potest; & dividatur A H in par­
tes aequales, atque ad earum altitudinem, in­
scripta circumscriptaque rursus, ut ante, sit
triangulo A H L figura ex rectangulis, ita ut
altera alteram excedat minori excessu quam
quo planum P superat triangulum A H L, erit
igitur necessario figura circumscripta minor
plano P. Constat jam, prima temporis parte
A C, minus spatium a mobili transmitti quam
sit B C, quia hoc percurreretur eodem tempore
A C cum celeritate aequabili C K, quam demum
in fine temporis A C mobile adeptum est. Simi­
liter secunda parte temporis C E, minus spa­
tium motu accelerato transmittetur quam sit
D E, quia hoc percurreretur eodem tempore
C E, cum celeritate aequabili E O , quam de­
mum in fine temporis C E mobile assequitur.
Atque ita deinceps, singulis partibus temporis
A H, minora spatia a mobili trajicientur quam
sunt rectangula figurae circumscriptae, ipsis
partibus adjacentia. Quare totum spatium mo­
tu accelerato peractum, minus erit ipsa figura
circumscripta. Spatium vero illud aequale
positum fuit plano P; ergo planum P minus
quoque erit figura circumscripta, quod est ab­
surdum, cum figura haec plano P minor os­
tensa fuerit. Ergo planum P non majus est
qualities: “ Unde forte virtus que trahit ferrum que non sunt ad aliam speciem vel etc., quam­
in magnete non est una qualitas simplex sed vis alique illarum sunt intensibiles et remissi­
forma substantialis magnetis cum tali propor­ biles, et de talibus est difficilius iudicare et
adhuc difficilius esset ubi numerus qualitatum
tione qualitatum__ ” This is presented some­
what differently in another passage o f the posset augeri vel diminui, scilicet ad talem
Ouodlibeta that stresses a similitude between speciem requiruntur quinque qualitates; pos­
the iron and the magnet (but again without set tamen stare cum quatuor vel etc.” And in
mentioning configuration), 124V: “ Sed ferrum regard to mixtures and qualities, he says,
triangulo A H L, sed nec minus esse jam os­
movetur ad magnetem vel forte a magnete ( 1 19 Q : “ Et hic sunt multe pulchre ymaginatio-
tensum fuit. Ergo aequale sit necesse est; quod
quia forte sunt substantialiter similia (non ta­ nes tam de proportionibus diversis elemento­
erat demonstrandum.”
men perfecte). E t si quasi ex impetu quodam rum inter se et etiam de proportionibus mix­
Note that the form o f the enunciation of the
generato in ferro ut perficiatur etc. movetur torum inter se et suarum qualitatum — (119V)
acceleration theorem given by Huygens is
ad magnetem vel a magnete. Unde ferrum et E t sicud supra posui exemplum de mixtis pri­
closer to that given in Galileo’s Dialogue on the
magnes in multis assimilantur et forte si per­ mi modi etiam etc., ita posset exemplificari in
Two Great World Systems {L e Opere, Vol. 7,
ficeretur ferrum seu si generans ipsum esset arismetrica et musica, nam quedam (corr. ex
255—56; cf. M. Clagett, The Science o f Mechanics,
forte et potens quod ulterius procederet etc. quidem) sunt prime proportiones sicud dupla,
414-16), than to that found in Galileo’s D is -
daret sibi formam magnetis, unum autem fer­ sesquialtera, etc., et quedam composite ex
corsi, emphasizing as it does that a body m ov­
rum ad magnetem aliquod cicius movetur et istis sicud ex dupla sesquialtera — Sicud etiam
ing uniformly with the final velocity o f the ac­
fortius quam aliud sive ad unum magnetem in musica, ut dyapason, dyapente, etc.; et que­
celerated motion traverses in the same time as
(i25r) cicius movetur ferrum quam ad aliud dam composite ex dyapason etc. Patet hoc in
the accelerated body a distance double that tra­
quia quandoque est maior vel minor similitu­ motetis et cantibus etc. Nullus autem bene
versed by the body whose motion is uniformly
do.” Cf. 125V: “ Dico etiam ... quedam suffi­ potest cognoscere composita nisi simplicia
accelerated from rest. Notice Huygens’ elegant
ciunt continuare motum que forte non inci­ cognoscat, et ideo primo inquirende sunt ope­
indirect proof instead o f Galileo’s assumption
pere. Sic igitur ferrum quendam impetum et rationes primarum qualitatum et elementorum,
(and indeed Oresme’s and Wallis’ assumption,
dispositionem seu qualitatem habet non solum secundo qualitatum secundarum et tertiarum;
as well) that the triangle is made up of an in­
a magnete acquisita<m> quo vel qua movetur et sic cognoscentur mixta. Sicud autem supra
finitude of parallel lines. A somewhat similar
ad etc. In hoc igitur quod aliquid seu aliqua- dixi, quidam omnia volunt reducere ad primas
figure was added to a discussion o f accelerated
lem dispositionem recipit a magnete dicitur qualitates et proportiones earum, ita quod nul­
motion by Huygens in a piece dated 1659 (see
trahi__ ” Furthermore, if he had already for­ las alias qualitates ponunt. Alii autem quasi
Oeuvres completes, Vol. 17, 130). The editor,
mulated the configuration doctrine, we would infinitas ponunt. E t ista determinare est diffi­
however, believes that the figure was inserted
have expected it to appear in his explanations cile. Unum tamen audeo dicere, quod ex eis­
at a later date {Ibid., fn. 1). [As this volume
of differences in appetitive, digestive, and dem qualitatibus diversimode proportionatis
neared completion in press, I noticed, but was
generative effects. He merely says, however, possunt diversa fieri sine alia pluralitate. Dico
unable to include, the use o f an Oresmian
(5 4r): “ Requiruntur multa et pro multis et a etiam quod, cum aliquam qualitatem seu vir­
triangle by Galileo’s contemporary, Ioannes
multis dependent. Unde et propter operationes tutem vel effectum videmus, qui effectus vel
Marcus Marci, in his D e proportione motus
anime et potentiarum eius et propter operatio­ que qualitas nullam similitudinem in aliquo
(Prague, 1639, s. pag.), to prove Prop. X II:
“ Incrementa velocitatis rationem habent quam nem quinque sensuum etc. propter operatio­ habet cum primis qualitatibus nec secundis
temporum quadrata.” ] nem qualitatum primarum et secundarum et immediate primis, ille potest dici alius vel alia
1 For a sketch of earlier attempts to explain diversarum proportionum etc., diversifican- ab alia qualitate, sive illa qualitas potest dici
such phenomena, see P. Duhem, L e Systeme du tur dicte operationes.” Cf. also a long passage alia quam prime qualitates vel quam etiam
monde, Vol. 7, 576-82. discussing the manifold ways in which diversi­ proportio sola ipsarum. Sed vere est magna
ty arises (without any reference to configura­ difficultas cognoscere bene primas qualitates
 114 Introduction The Configuration Doctrine ii 5

reasons in m y argument in Introduction III.B for a possible early date o f those In the next chapter, H enry points out in a more general w ay that the significant
works, for if they were not to be dated before the composition o f the D e confi­ differences in qualities for educing like forms may not be the total intensities but
gurationibus, we w ould have to assume that Oresme by 1370 had abandoned, or rather their figurations:
had little confidence in, the configuration doctrine as an explanation for such
The total intensity of any such qualities would have a degree proper to the form; yet
phenomena.
because one of two equal intensities can have a mode of intensity that differs according to
But whether or not Oresme himself had any confidence in the configuration the extension of its subject from that of the second— for it happens that a uniform inten­
technique as a mode o f explanation for phenomena, it is patently evident that only sive latitude is precisely equal to a uniformly difform latitude— therefore, although some­
one o f his successors made any extensive use o f the doctrine to explain phenomena, times there happens to be a due ratio and a due degree of total intensity of any quality, it
although, as we have seen, many schoolmen used it to represent the abstract dis­ could be that not any of the complexional qualities would still have, with respect to the
tribution and changes o f qualities and motions. The single exception is Oresm e’s whole extension o f the matter, the latitudinal figuration required for educing that species
junior contemporary, Henry o f Hesse. As both D uhem and Thorndike have point­ of substantial form.6
ed out, Henry, in his effort to outline a special physics w hich is entirely naturally It will be noticed that Henry in this passage has referred to the possible equality
based, takes over the configuration doctrine as an adjunct to such naturalistic o f a uniformly difform latitude w ith one that is uniform. This is an obvious refer­
explanations.3 For example, in Chapter 4 o f his D e reductione effectuum, Henry ence to the M erton Rule but in a somewhat abbreviated form, and, o f course, in
mentions the possible role o f intensive figuration in the explanation o f the sup­ this context o f a discussion o f latitudinal figuration, one w ould suppose that he
posed similarity o f mandrake with the human fo rm : “ It is doubted concerning this, had in mind the familiar figure o f rectangle and triangle associated with Oresme.
whether, in addition to the fact that the matter o f mandrake and that o f man have It should also be remarked that Henry here tends to use latitude in its common but
similar shape and organization, the soul o f man could submit to a similar ratio o f improper sense o f standing for the whole quantity o f the quality.
the qualities o f the elements and a [similar] intensive figuration according to degree A gain returning to the use o f the configuration doctrine for specific phenomena,
and ratio as exist in the form o f mandrake.” 4 This emphasis on tw o factors as the Henry in Chapter 8 outlines the role played by configuration in the functioning o f
determiners o f similar forms, namely the ratios o f the qualities o f the elements and the parts and members o f living bodies:
their configurations, has evidently been taken over directly from the D e configura­
tionibus o f Oresme, for just these factors are emphasized again and again in the posset sequi, supposito quod datis quatuor ter­ forma vitalis mandragore.”
course o f the explanation for various phenomena in I.xxii-I.xxix o f the D e confi­ minis seu qualitatibus invicem proportiona- 6 Ibid., Chap. 3, n 8 v , c. 1: “ cuiuslibet ta­
tis in intentione vel etiam extentione secundum lium qualitatum intensio totalis haberet gra­
gurationibus. Incidentally, while arguing for the possibility o f the similarity o f
sex datas proportiones, quod quelibet alie dum debitum forme; tamen quia una duarum
these factors in mandrake and man (and Oresme in I.xxv had also argued for their
quatuor qualitates eiusdem rationis qualiter- equalium intensionum potest alium modum
similarity on the same bases), Henry suggests that such qualities are capable o f in­ intensionis habere secundum extensionem sui
cunque aliter proportionate aliquibus sex pro­
finite increase and decrease o f intensity.5 portionibus redigi possunt ad proportionem subiecti quam alia— contingit enim latitudinem
illarum. Ratio est quia quelibet talium qualita­ intensivam uniformem esse precise equalem
et suas secundas immediatas et ipsarum opera­ 600 ; L. Thorndike, A . History o f Magic and tum, scilicet intensive et extensive, est in in­ latitudini uniformiter difformi— ergo quamvis
tiones precipue quando permiscentur, cum Experim ental Science, Vol. 3, 481-88. finitum diminibilis seu etiam augmentabilis. aliquando accideret debita proportio et debi­
etiam propter multa diversificentur operatio­ 4 Henry of Hesse, D e reductione effectuum par­ Ergo suppositum illud manifestum. Sunt ergo tus gradus totalis intensionis cuiuslibet quali­
nes, ut superius fuit dictum.” One might ex­ ticularium in causas universales, MS British M u­ naturaliter aliqua corrumpentia hominem ita tatis, tamen posset esse quod non quelibet
pect that in listing the difficulties here Oresme seum, Sloane 2156, 117V, c. 2: “ Dubitatur cir­ applicata quod quatuor prime qualitates in in­ qualitatum complexionabilium adhuc haberet
would have at least mentioned configurations, ca hoc an cum hoc quod materie mandragore correspondenter toti extensioni materie, re­
tendendo et remittendo ita variantur ab illis
although perhaps he felt it even more difficult et hominis habent similem figurationem et or- corrumpentibus quod in aliquo instanti sint quisitam latitudinem (latitudinalem mg.) figu­
to determine such configurations and so did ganizationem possit anima hominis pati simi­ rationem ad ( M S p ; adhuc in b) eductionem il­
proportionate similiter sicut in materia ubi
not bother to mention them. Finally, we can lem elementorum qualitatum proportionem et forma mandragore generatur. Igitur si una lius speciei substantialis forme.” The British
mention that Oresme in thzQuodlibeta explains figurationem intensivam secundum gradum et Museum manuscript has been abbreviated as
forma vitalis non patitur secum dispositionem
the action o f theriac in expelling venom with­ proportionem in quibus stat forma mandra­ b, and in general I have followed it in the notes
materialem appropriatam alteri necessario in
out mentioning the configuration doctrine gore.” For a second manuscript of the D e re­ for this part. However, in a few places here
isto instanti educetur forma substantialis man­
(125 V), although he has used that doctrine as ductione, see fn. 6 below. and in the succeeding notes I have added in
dragore, ex quo materia habet sufficientem dis­
an explanation in the De configurationibus 5 Ibid., n8r, c . i : “ Sed contra apparet quod parentheses some readings from MS Paris,
positionem et debitam ad eductionem (deter­
(I.xxviii, lines 11-12). ymmo in aliqua corruptione naturali alicuius BN lat. 2831, io 3 r -ii5 v . This manuscript has
minatam eductioni mg.) illius forme, et sic ho­
3 Duhem, L e Syst'eme du monde, Vol. 7, 587— viventis immediate forma vitalis naturaliter been abbreviated as p.
minis formam in tali casi immediate sequetur
 116 Introduction The Configuration Doctrine ” 7

Any heterogeneous part of the animal body determines for itself a root heat that is fig­ It is evident that Henry has constructed a special branch o f pathology on the
ured in a way different from that of another, so that one part naturally determines for it­ basis o f his application o f the configuration doctrine to the individual parts o f the
self perhaps a uniform latitude of intensity of heat, and another determines a uniformly human body. Oresme had already spoken o f the difference in the configurations o f
difform latitude, and a third part a further species of latitude difformly difform— of which
natural heats o f the w hole animal body in I.xxiv o f the D e configurationibus. N otice
kind there is an infinite number, as is evident in the art of latitudes of forms. For to every
also that Henry has tw ice used the expression “ the art o f latitudes,” the first time
point o f the heart corresponds some degree of natural heat, to one point a more intense
to support the conclusion that there are infinite difformly difform latitudes, and
degree, to another a more remiss degree. Therefore, it is necessary that the whole expanse
of heat which Nature has determined for the heart be intense in an exceedingly difform the second time to affirm that diverse species o f latitude can be equated intensively.
way, dependent however on the certain mode or species of difformity that is more fitting The first conclusion is certainly supported by the remarks o f Oresme in I.xvi
to that member for its function and condition relative to the whole body and the other (lines 17-21) o f the D e configurationibus, and the second by the whole tenor o f the
members. And one ought to imagine thus the latitudinal expanse of frigidity in the brain first tw o paragraphs o f III. v and the totality o f I ll.v i and IIL vii o f that same w ork.8
and heat in the liver, i.e., that any such part determines for itself the certain disposition of Finally, H enry’s substitution o f the configurations o f common powers for occult
difformity in any of its qualities that is the most fitting [for it] intensively; and then when powers in the explanation o f such phenomena seems to echo the remarks made by
this species of difformity which the member has determined for itself varies, be that in its Oresme in the last part o f I.xxv. Henry reiterates the rejection o f occult influences
calidity, frigidity, humidity, or dryness, this part becomes sick. From this is inferred the and spiritual powers in the explanation o f marvelous phenomena later in Chapter
conclusion that these four qualities in some member may later be equally intense as they
19: “ I think, therefore, that the species o f sensible, active qualities and their com ­
are now when the member is well and may have the same numerical ratios as they now
binations are sufficient for the saving o f all o f the effects on whose account certain
have but that then the animal may still be excessively sick even though it is not now sick.
The cause of this is that the latitudinal intensive figuration according to the extension of people have believed that occult influences and powers reside in things below and
the member which Nature determines for it can be varied in respect to one of its qualities in the stars above. A n d perhaps, accordingly, there is no necessity to posit in
although it is as equally intended in this quality as it was before, for diverse species of things spiritual qualities which fall beyond the human senses.” 9 A n d again in
latitudes could well be equated intensively, as is evident in the art of latitudes. Finally, it Chapter 21 w e read: “ For saving many special effects, inclinations and dispositions
can be inferred that, since one thing is naturally advantageous to the heart and another o f things without recourse to occult qualities, one ought first to consider the
to the liver, while still others are quite harmful, antagonistic, and infectious, it is not number o f the active qualities differing in species which reside in the agent and
necessary to posit some occult power in these matters, but [such phenomena] can be [to proceed] similarly for the patient. Then he ought to consider the mode o f
saved by the common powers of things, i.e., by the powers of the members figured as to combining such qualities in relation to the mode o f combining the passive power,
latitudinal intensity, in a conformable or difform way.7
if you pose similitude or dissimilitude. Then one ought to consider the w ay in
7 Ibid., Chap. 8, 119V, c. 1: “ Quelibet par­
which such powers radiate on to a patient.” 10
determinat sibi certam dispositionem (spe­
tium corporis animalis entrogenea (ethroge- ciem supra, et p ) difformitatis magis (om. p)
nea, p ) sibi determinat calorem radicalem congruentis magis intensive cuiuslibet eius tudinum. Ulterius inferri potest ex eo quod (ex Chapter 3, Proposition 31) indicates that “ the
aliter intensive figuratum quam alia, ita quod qualitatis, et tunc quando ista species diffor­ hoc quod supra, p ) reperitur una res naturaliter latitude o f forms and figures corresponding to
una determinat sibi naturaliter forte latitudi­ mitatis variatur in isto membro quod (quam, proficere cordi, et altera epati et alteri contrari- them can be varied in an infinite number o f
nem intensivam caloris uniformem et alia lati­ tng. et p ) sibi determinat (determinavit, p) in ari et faciliter ledere et inficere, non oportet ali­ ways.” However, this treatise would appear to
tudinem uniformiter difformem et alia aliam eius caliditate vel in eius frigiditate, humidita- quam virtutem occultam poni in illis rebus sed be too late. Furthermore, it contains little
speciem latitudinis difformiter difformis, qua­ te vel siccitate egrotat ista pars. Ex quo infer­ potest salvari ex communibus virtutibus rerum that could be the basis of Henry’s second
rum infinite sunt, ut patet in arte de latitudini­ tur quod stat istas quatuor qualitates postea conformiter vel difformiter, virtutibus istorum reference on the equality o f intensities where
bus formarum. Cuilibet enim puncto cordis in aliquo membro eque intensas esse sicut membrorum latitudinaliter intensive figuratis.” latitudes are different.
correspondet aliquis gradus caloris naturalis, modo cum est sanum et easdem proportiones 8 See also the similar statements in the Ques­ 9 Brit. Museum, Sloane 2156, Chap. 19,
et uni intensior et alteri remissior, et ergo opor­ adinvicem habere quas non (nunc, p ) habent tions on the Geometry o f E u clid (Appendix I be- 12 5v, c. 2: ‘‘Puto ergo species sensibiliumquali-
tet quod tota expansio caloris quam natura et quod tamen animal tunc egrotat valde et low), Question 10, lines 76-79, 82-84, and tatumacti varumsufficereet(«rorr. b ex ad) earum
determinavit cordi sit valde difformiter intensa non nunc. Causa est quia latitudinalis figura­ Question 13 in toto. The fact that Henry makes combinationes ad salvandum omnes effectus
secundum tamen certum modum vel speciem tio intensiva quam natura sibi determinat his reference to the “ art o f latitudes of forms” propter quosdam quidam opinati sunt occultas
deformitatis congruentis magis illi membro ad secundum extensionem membri potest esse raises the question o f whether this is a covert influentias et virtutes in rebus inferioribus et
officium et statum suum in ordine ad totum et variata quantum ad unam eius qualitatem, reference to the D e latitudinibus formarum dis­ stellis superioribus. E t forte propter hoc non
alia membra. E t ita est ymaginandum de lati- quamvis in ista sit eque intensa sicut ante fuit, cussed in Introduction II.B. This seems at est opus ponere aliquas spirituales qualitates in
tudinali expansione frigiditatis cerebri et cali- quia diverse species latitudinum possent bene first glance to be borne out by the fact that the rebus que non cadunt sub sensibus humanis.”
ditatis epatis, videlicet quod quelibet talis pars sibi adequari intensive sicut patet in arte lati- author also (see text o f Thomas Smith, Part II, 10 Ibid., Chap. 21, i27r, c. 1: “ A d salvan-
 118 The Configuration Doctrine it9
Introduction

It is in elaboration o f this general statement, particularly as regards the com­
binations o f active qualities in alchemical and medical compounds that Henry once
more returns to the configuration doctrine: “ The recipes o f alchemists and medics
demonstrate how great a common force the special combinations o f active qualities
and powers or their harmonic influences have.” 11 Furthermore, the aggregate o f
simple substances that is undergoing transmutation is being transmuted
according to a latitude of heat intensively figured in such and such a way, i.e., according
to one such species of latitude difformly difform, or according to another, or according to
several alternately. For it happens in alchemy that according to one such [latitude] gold
is produced and according to another copper, it having been supposed that similar mate­
rials are everywhere similarly proportionate [in latitude]. Hence one ought to conceive of
the various combinations of simple [medicines] used by the medics in the same way.12
A ll o f this again reminds us o f how Oresme had stressed the similarity o f configura­
tions to explain the efficacy o f certain operations with plants and stones (see
D e configurationibus, I.xxv). Incidentally, H enry compares the marvelous effects
produced by the combinations o f active qualities with the marvelous sonic effects
produced by the combinations o f sounds “ either existing through an extended
period o f time in which a diverse kind o f latitudinal intensive figuration is pro­
duced, or existing simultaneously.” 13 A nd so, w e are told by Henry, the various
combinations o f active qualities
are proportionated, in a certain fashion, in the modes in which sounds are combined and
latitudinally figured with respect to hearing. They also produce marvelous effects and
sometimes unaccustomed operations in the hearts of men and animals. These we often
attribute to special influences of the heavens and to occult virtues in inferior things be­
cause of the fact that such combinations are hidden and unnoticed by us.14
It is evident that the last sentences o f this passage constitute a thinly veiled
paraphrase o f the last tw o sentences o f I.xxv o f the D e configurationibus. Further­
more, I hardly need recall the extensive attention paid to sonic phenomena in the
second part o f the D e configurationibus.
The reference here to the hidden nature o f the combinations brings us to our last
point regarding H enry’s use o f the configuration doctrine. In his last chapters he
stresses the difficulties o f determining the combinations and their effects. For ex­
ample, in connection with the action o f foods and confections: “ N o one knows
what kind o f confections and their operations result from the mixture in the stom­
ach o f so many things differing from each other in species.” 15 Furthermore, it is
doubtful whether man can distinguish the special effects due to the combinations
o f natural forces and those which are not.16 In attempting to respond to this doubt,
Henry puts forth a series o f propositions. W hile the first tw o indicate that the
number o f natural forces and their combinations are finite, w e are told in the th ird :
“ Man cannot naturally find the total number o f natural forces.” 17 He stresses, for
example, how difficult it is to know the possible combinations o f just 22 or 2 3 letters
o f the alphabet. Further, w e not only have numerical combination o f the ratios
involved but w e also have a second mode o f combination, “ according to the
unions o f the latitudinal configuration o f natural powers or qualities.” 18 A further
difficulty arises if one considers the possible causal role played by planetary m ove­
ments and conjunctions. This seems to be the force o f the fifth proposition which
refers (but not too intelligently) to another one o f Oresme’s favorite ideas, namely
that o f the possible incommensurability o f celestial m otions:

Proposition 5. It is impossible for man to investigate or find by investigation how many

dum multos effectus speciales et rerum dis­
positiones et inclinationes sine recursu ad oc­
cultas qualitates primo considerandus est
numerus qualitatum activarum differentium
specie in agente et ita de passo. Deinde con­
siderandus est modus combinationis talium
qualitatum in ordine ad modum combinationis
virtutis passi, si pones similitudinem vel
dissimilitudinem. Deinde considerandus est
modus talium radicandi ( /radiandi) in passum.’ ’
11 Ibid., Chap. 23, 127V, c. 2: “ Quantum vim
habeant communem qualitatum et virtutum
activarum speciales combinationes vel influxus
armonie earum ostendunt alkamistarum re­
cepte et medicorum.”
12 Ibid., i28r, c. 1: “ Multum enim refert tale
aggregatum per diem (producere mg.) secun­
dum latitudinem caloris taliter vel taliter inten­
combinations of the seven planets are naturally possible. This is apparent, because it is
sive figuratam transmutari, scilicet secundum
talem speciem latitudinis difformiter difformis,
14 Ibid., i28r, c. 2: “ ita videlicet quod etiam 16 Ibid., Chap. 24, 128V, c. 1: “ Sed dubitatur
vel secundum aliam, vel secundum plures al­
earum varie combinationes quodammodo iuxta materiam capituli precedentis et pro eius
ternarim, quia contingit in alchimia secundum
proportionantur modis quibus combinentur ampliori protractione, utrum homo possit na­
unam talium resultare aurum et secundum
soni et latitudinaliter figurantur respectu audi­ turaliter discernere vel cognoscere qui, quales
aliam cuprum, etiam supposito quod materia­
tus. Faciunt etiam mirabiles effectus et incon­ et quanti effectus speciales et mirabiles natura­
lia sint similia etiam similiter proportionata
suetas quandoque operationes in cordibus lium virium combinationibus fieri possunt et
utrobique (ubique, p ). Igitur conformiter est
ymaginandum de variis combinationibus sim­ (corpore mg.) hominum et animalium quas qui non.”
attribuimus sepe propter latentiam talium com­ 17 Ibid., “ Tertia propositio. Quot sunt na­
plicium apud medicos.”
binationum et inadvertentiam a nobis speciali­ turalium virium combinationes homo non po­
13 Ibid., i28r, c. 1: “ 20 speciales immutatio­
nes et operationes variarum combinationum bus influentiis celorum et occultis virtutibus test naturaliter reperire.”
inferiorum rerum.” 18 Ibid., 128V, c. 2: “ adhuc sunt duo modi
communium qualitatum sensibilium declarant
15 Ibid., i28r, c. 2: “ Nullus enim scit quales combinationum virium: primus est secundum
sonorum similis speciei combinationes varie
confectiones et eius (cuius, supra) operationes species proportionis; secundus est secundum
secundum pausas et proportiones vel secun­
resultant ex commixtione (confectione, supra) concursus latitudinalis configurationis virium
dum temporalem protensionem super quam
tot rerum differentium specie adinvicem in naturalium vel qualitatum.”
consurgit latitudinalis diversimoda figuratio
intensiva, vel simul tempore existentium.” stomacho.”
 120 Introduction The Configuration Doctrine 121

impossible to know whether the motions of all the planets are commensurable with one The above quoted passages, which could be multiplied, are sufficient to show
another or at least how many of their velocities are commensurable, as Master Nicholas that Henry o f Hesse has grafted Oresme’s doctrine completely onto his effort to
Oresme has deduced. This is confirmed, since for this one must know the total span of explain phenomena. The same crucial difficulty that we saw present in Oresm e’s
time between the beginning of the course of nature and its end, because otherwise one use o f the doctrine is also manifest in H enry’s efforts: he does not in fact tell us
would never know whether that time would be sufficient or not for completing those 120 which specific figures account for which phenomena, and indeed by emphasizing
[possible] conjunctive combinations [mentioned in Proposition 3 and taken from Haly’s
the difficulties o f determining the configurations and their combinations he leaves
comment of Verbum 50 of the Centiloquium of Ptolemy].19
us with a feeling o f hopelessness about making any specific determinations. Thorn­
Returning to the difficulty produced by the combining o f ratios, Henry affirms dike has justly remarked on this situation:
that “ the powers o f natural things, themselves limited in number and degree, can
Henry has rejected the conception of occult virtue as an explanation of strange phenomena,
be combined in an infinite number o f species o f ratios,” although to be sure not
but his substitute theory has proved neither entirely convincing nor certain to simpli­
all such combinations o f natural powers are naturally possible.20 Presumably the fy science and increase knowledge of nature. It may be an ingenious hypothesis to sug­
same observation w ould hold for combinations according to configurations (the gest that intension and remission, uniformity and difformity, proportion and configura­
second method o f combination mentioned earlier), although this is not specified. tion of the primary qualities and their derivatives are sufficient to explain all natural
He does, however, in his last chapter, relate the variations in combination to mar­ forces and phenomena without resort to the occult and mysterious. But when we are
velous effects by specific reference to Oresme’s D e configurationibus: repeatedly told that these intensions, combinations and proportions are for the most un­
knowable in detail, the practical value of the new theory becomes dubious. We simply
Marvelous things and various modes and species of effects follow the varieties of the said
pass from the occult to the unmeasurable — 23
combinations. This proposition appears to be so from experiences with the remarkable
effects of the combinations of sounds, even of the same species, varied according to greater It is not surprising, then, that the configuration doctrine as a technique to ac­
intension or remission of pitch and volume, as is evident in the first book o f the Music of count for phenomena died w ith Oresme and Henry o f Hesse. B y the time that there
Boethius and the Treatise on the Configurations ofQualities of Master Nicholas Oresme.21 were thermometers to give some kind o f determination for the intensities o f at
Finally, in that last chapter he underlines once more the importance o f latitudinal least one pair o f qualities, the configuration doctrine as a conceptual scheme for
configuration in the determination o f a species: explaining phenomena long since lay buried, while only its constant insistence on
the representation o f intensity factors in conjunction with extensive factors survived
It stands that two certain things differ in species even when they have operative powers
as a vague notion o f the quantity o f heat. N or is there any evidence that the
[that are the same] in degree, ratio, and species, for their latitudinal figuration can be quite
different here and there, as appears manifest in the art of latitudes. Hence it seems that mechanistic patterns and arrangements o f atoms suggested by the later exponents
the determination of powers similar in species, degree, ratio, and latitudinal configuration o f atomism were in any way influenced by Oresm e’s scheme.
implies specific identity. From this it appears that it is not completely evident whether all One final remark is necessary. A lthough Oresme had no interest in experimental
men are of the same species or not.22 measurement and in fact his system was not designed for such measurement, still
he did try, for the most part, to present a naturalistic mechanism for the explanation
19 Ibid., “ Quinta propositio. Quot septem tutes, numero et gradu limitate, infinitis pro­ o f phenomena and certainly the w ave o f the future rolled in that direction.
planetarum sunt naturaliter combinationes portionum speciebus combinari possunt__
possibiles impossibile est homini investigare N on omnes dictarum virtutum combinationes
vel hominis investigatione inveniri. Apparet naturali cursu sunt possibiles vel convenien­
quia impossibile est scire an omnium planeta­ tes.”
rum motus sunt sibi invicem commensurabiles 21 Ibid., Chap. 25, i29r, c. 2: “ Dictarum
vel saltem quot illorum velocitates commensu- preceding material to justify my addition of latitudinaliter configurative valde aliter potest
combinationum varietates sequuntur mirabiles
rantur, sicut deducit magister nycholaus ores­ et variimodi ac species effectuum. Apparet ista the word “ easdem” in the twelfth proposi­ esse hoc, hic et illic, ut in arte latitudinum ap­
me. Confirmatur, quia ad hoc oportet, neces­ tion. “ Confirmatur quia multe qualitates dif­ paret manifestum. Apparet ergo quod deter­
propositio experimentis (experimentaliter mg.)
sario sciri totum spacium temporis inter ini- in effectibus mirabilibus combinationum so­ ferentes specie videntur equari operative, ut minatio similium virium in specie, gradu, et
cium cursus nature et eius finem, quia alias norum, etiam eiusdem speciei, variatorum se­ lumen et caliditas... et stat duas res differe proportione, et latitudinali configuratione in­
semper nesciret an illud tempus (corr. b ex to­ cundum intensius et remissius, gravius et acu­ specie et solum easdem vires operativas sibi fert idemptitatem specificam. E x quibus vide­
tum spacium temporis) sufficeret vel non pro tius, debilius et fortius, ut patet in primo musi­ essentialiter determinare... X IIma propositio: tur non omnino evidens esse utrum omnes ho­
illis centum xx combinationibus coniunctiona- ce boetii et in tractatu magistri nicholai ores­ Stat aliquas duas res differe specie et solum sibi mines sunt eiusdem speciei vel non.”
libus perficiendum.” me de configurationibus qualitatum.” determinare [easdem] vires operativas in gra­ 23 A History o f Magic and Experim ental
20 Ibid., izc)T, c. 1: “ Naturalium rerum vir­ 22 Ibid., i3or, c. 1: I have included some du, proportione et specie. Patet quia adhuc Science, Vol. 3, 490.
 Composition of the D e configurationibus 123

I ll did not assume the attribution “ Meldensis” until he became Bishop o f Meaux in
13 51, in which position he continued until his death in 13 61.3 But the dedication is
written to him as a living person. Thus at one stroke this dedication gives a terminus
post quern o f 13 51 for the Algorismus and for the D e configurationibus, which cites it.
The Composition o f the Incidentally, in Introduction III.B I shall call attention to another citation in the
D e configurationibus which almost certainly is also o f the Algorismus.
Determination o f the terminus ante quern is far less certain. Perhaps a key to the
D e configurationibus determination is the fact that Oresm e’s Livre de divinacions twice cites the D e confi­
gurationibusA Hence if w e could determine the date o f the Livre de divinacions w e
w ould be able to establish a terminus ante quern.5 T he Livre de divinacions is in its turn
cited by the Traitie de Vespere. But the date o f the latter is only conjecturally put at
A . Dating o f the De configurationibus 1368.6 Hence the question remains: is there any w ay we can get closer to the date
o f the Livre de divinacions? O ne possible w ay w ould be i f w e could accept as the
Unfortunately none o f its fourteen manuscripts gives us any sure evidence o f the w ork o f N icole Oresme the French translation o f Ptolem y’sQuadripartitum attribut­
exact date o f composition o f the D e configurationibus. W e are thus forced to rely on ed to G . Oresme and if w e return to a suggestion made originally by Meunier in
internal evidence supplied by the text and certain external factors. It has become 18 57 to the effect that the Livre de divinacions was Oresm e’s first w ork in the French
fashionable since the appearance o f Lynn Thorndike’s chapters on N icole Oresme language.7 Certainly the latter assumption is reasonable since Oresme remarks in
to question the internal citations o f Oresme to his ow n w orks, on the basis that the preface o f that w ork: “ A n d I beg that I m aybe excused for my rough manner
it is a well-known medieval phenomenon for a w ork A to cite w ork B which o f expression because I have never learned or been used to set forth or write any-
cites w ork C which cites A . 1 I do not question that situations o f this sort often
probatum et examine fuerit emendatum nam that the Livre de divinacions dates before 1359,
arise in the progressive copying o f medieval treatises. H owever, I do not know o f
omne quod fuerit lima vestre correctionis poli­ not 13 64, although to be sure Meunier would
any certifiable example o f this kind in connection w ith the thirty or more works object that its composition in French would
tum, et si detractor latrare potuit ubi tamen
o f Oresme. Furthermore, there is abundant evidence in the various w orks o f Ores­ dentem laniandi figeret, non invenit.” Manu­ have been against the rules o f Navarre (but
me o f his practice o f referring to earlier efforts on a given topic. Hence, it seems to script partly corrected from the text o f E. whether such a rule was actually observed is
Grant, 331. The proemium is missing in unknown). Bridrey, anxious to show that
me that when a citation is made to an earlier w ork, the onus is on the person w ho
Curtze’s text. Oresme composed a French translation of the
suspects the citation to show that it is a later addition, particularly when such a
3 Conrad Eubel, Hierarchia catholica M edii D e mutationibus monetarum prior to 1360, claims
citation appears in all the manuscripts. Thus, for example, one must show by some that the Basel MS (F. V . 6) o f the Livre de divi­
A evi, Vol. i (Regensburg, 1898), 349.
clear evidence that the citation made by Oresme in his D e configurationibus to his 4 Ed. o f G. W. Coopland, 60, 92. For these nacions dates it as 1346 (E. Bridrey, L a Theorie
Algorismus proportionum is false, for this citation appears in all the manuscripts citations, see below, Introduction III.D, Pas­ de la monnaie au X I V ^ siecle, 7m). But an actual
examination o f the Basel MS shows that it
containing Part Three o f the tract and thus can hardly be said to have been added sage 13.
5 Ibid., 1, where Coopland dates the Livre bears the impossible date o f M C C C X V Ifi 316),
in copying. Hence I shall adopt as a principle o f dating Oresme’s works that the
de divinacions between 1361 and 1365, but with­ which G . Haenel in his Catalogi librorum manu-
citations in them o f other w orks are genuine unless there is clear evidence to the scriptorum (Leipzig, 1830), col. 537, converted
out explanation. F. Meunier, E ssai s u r ...
contrary. to 1346. It should be pointed out that the
Nicole Oresme, 49, suggests that the work is
In fact, it is Oresm e’s clear-cut reference to the Algorismus proportionum in the posterior to 1361 and anterior to 1364, al­ Livre de divinacions is referred to in the Livre de
though on dubious reasoning, since he be­ ethiques, begun probably in 1369 and complet­
D e configurationibus (Ill.v i) that allows us to determine the terminus post quern o f the
lieved Oresme left Navarre in 1361 (when ac­ ed by 1372.
D e configurationibus, for several o f the manuscripts o f the Algorismus reveal that the
tually he left there in 1362) and he supposed 6 See L. M. McCarthy’s edition o f the Traitie
w o rk was dedicated to Philippe de M eaux.2 Philippe was originally o f V itry and de Vespere, 23. This suggestion is based on
that if written after 1364 he would have dedi­
cated it to Charles V . One would suppose, how­ Menut’s rather late conjecture o f 1366 for the
1 A History o f Magic and Experim ental Science, Presul Meldensis Philippe, quern Pictagoram ever, that he ought just as well have dedicated Livre de divinacions in his edition o f the Livre
Vol. 3, Chapters 25-27; see particularly 399- dicerem si fas esset credere sententie ipsius de the tract to Charles as Dauphin, particularly de ethiques, 27. Later Menut dated the Traitie de
400. reditu animarum, vestre excellentie, si place- since he was dose to him from at least 1359. Vespere as 1365, but without explaining why
2 MS Florence, Bibl. Laurent. Ashb. 210, ret, offero corrigendum ipsum quem audacter If the last part o f Meunier’s argument is to be (see Livre deyconomique, 790).
i72r: “Algorismum proporcionum Reverende proferam in medium, si tanti viri auctoritate taken seriously, we would then have to say 7 Meunier, E ssa i s u r . . . N icole Oresme, 48-49.

122
 124 Introduction 125
Composition of the D e configurationibus

thing in French.” 8 T h e first assumption is somewhat more difficult to accept; but such a determination must have been prior to 1362 when he left Navarre. Hence,
still it is plausible, for although there is some evidence o f a Guillaume Oresme at the D e configurationibus which alludes to a future treatment w ould also precede that
the College o f Navarre in the 1350’s,9 no other w ork is attributed to him and date.
furthermore there is some similarity o f expression in the Quadripartit and the Another line o f reasoning, no more certain, but inherently probable, w ould
French writings o f N icole Oresm e.10 I f we grant both assumptions, then a remark place the D e configurationibus between 1351 and 1355. The first date is established,
in the preface o f xhz Quadripartit allows us to date that w ork approximately. W e are as before, by the citation o f the Aslgorismusproportionum; the latter date by the pos­
told there that Charles is “ hoir de France, a present gouverneur du royalme.” 11 In sibility that Oresme terminated his teaching o f arts upon the completion o f his
fact, Charles was twice regent for his absent father, the first time in the period theological training and his assumption in 1356 o f the Grand-Mastership o f the
13 56-60, and the second time briefly in 1364 from January 3 until early A pril when College o f Navarre. W ithout pursuing this argument in great detail, may I suggest
he ascended to the throne. I f the first period is the one in w hich the translation was that his administrative duties, coupled w ith extensive w riting in other religious,
composed, the Livre de divinacions as Oresme’s first effort in French w ould be dated theological, and juridical subjects w ould have precluded detailed attention to prob­
at least prior to 1360, as w ould the D e configurationibus which it cites. I f the sec­ lems arising in the consideration o f texts in arts.12
ond period is the correct one, then the Livre de divinacions and the D e configurationi­
bus w ould be dated before 1364. But, o f course, i f the Quadripartit was not done by
N icole, then this reasoning collapses.
W e can perhaps come closer to the date by considering a reference in his D e con­ B. Oresme’s Citation o f His Own Works in the
figurationibus to his hope to treat the question o f the perfection o f species in a future D e configurationibus
treatise (see I.xx). It appears that he treated the subject in a determination made at
Navarre (see Introduction III.B, fn. 1). I f this is the case, then the composition o f When discussing the dating o f the D e configurationibus, I pointed out that Oresme
8 Livre de divinacions (ed. of Coopland, 50,
made specific references to other places where he treated or intended to treat the
as by Nicole (Livre de yconomique, 790), but in
51): “ et supplie que on me ait pour excuse de the 1968 edition o f L e Livre du del, p. 6, he subject under discussion. T he first clear-cut reference occurs in I.xx, lines 15-18,
la rude maniere de parler, car je n’ay pas aprins expresses doubts. I am, however, still inclined where we are told that “ an angle formed from a straight line and a curve and one
de (estre) acoustume de riens baillier ou es- to accept it as being by Nicole. I find the style formed from tw o curves are not relatable b y ratio... and by the grace o f G o d I shall
cripre en francois.” Menut suggests (.Ethiques, o f preface very much like that found in Livre demonstrate this in a treatise On the Perfections o f Species {or. Things).” N o such com ­
27) that Meunier’s reasoning is undermined de divinacions and particularly like that in the
by the fact that Oresme says similar things in
pleted w ork has been surely located among those preserved today in the European
Traitie de Vespere (in fact in the latter we find
other prefaces. But in fact he makes no such several o f the terms used in the Quadripartit). libraries, although some anonymous Questiones in Vat. lat. 986, 1251-13 3V, may be
apology in the prefaces to the Traitie de Vespere Compare also the similarity in expression and part o f such a w ork. Further, in a question determined at Navarre and associated
or the Livre de ethiques. In both o f those pref­ style with the D e mutationibus monetarum. In the with Oresme a reference is made to an articulus de perfectione specierum seu rerum that
aces he apologizes rather for the inadequacy latter Oresme notes that the discussion “ will
o f French as a language to express Latin philo­ be profitable... to the state as a whole.” In the tracts like the D e mutationibus monetarum, the
12 My recent effort to read and orient in
sophical and technical ideas, and not for his Quadripartit the translator remarks that he D e communicatione idiomatum, the A r s sermoci­
chronological order all o f the natural philo­
own lack o f practice in writing it. Further­ writes “ a l’onneur de Dieu et au prouffit publi- nandi, the E xp ositio cuiusdam legis, the D eter­
sophical works o f Oresme on the basis o f the
more, the preface o f the Quadripartit contains que.” (Ed. o f Gossner, 58.) The facts (1) that minatio facta in resumpta in domo Navarre, the
development o f certain key doctrines and his
no apology of any kind. the translation was made at the express com­ Livre de divinacions, the D e malis venturis super
citation o f previous works has led me to con­
9 Nicole Oresme, “ D e proportionibus proportio­ mand o f Charles when he was Dauphin, (2) ecclesiam, the Traitie de Vespere, his various
clude that all o f them grew directly out o f his
num” and “ A d pauca respicientes,” ed. of E. that Nicole Oresme was already secretary to Aristotelian translations (dated between about
teaching arts in the late 1340’s and early 1 350’s.
Grant (Madison, 1966), 4, fn. 8. He was a the Dauphin in 1359, and (3) that Charles later 1370 and 1377), his Decisio an in omni casu, his
In the Bibliography I have indicated by brack­
scholarship holder at Navarre in grammar in turned to Nicole in requesting translations of Contra mendicacionem, and his Sermones. There is
eted numbers my tentative estimate o f the
1352 and in theology in 1353. the Aristotelian works seem to lend credence no evidence that he taught arts after assuming
order o f the composition o f Oresme’s works;
10LeQ uadripartit de Ptholomee, Paris B N MS. to the belief that Nicole was the translator, his grand-mastership at Navarre. The Contra
and I hope at a later time to present a full argu­
Frang. 1348,1-223. As J. W. Gossner in his edi­ particularly when we consider the further fact divinatores, dated 1370 in the MSS, with its
ment in support o f this ordering. I shall only
tion of this work points out, the preface speci­ that Guillaume’s scientific or philological abili­ Quodlibeta annexa, which is described as “ de­
briefly suggest here that after 1355 Oresme
fies the author as “ G. Oresme,” while the colo­ ties remain otherwise completely unattested. termined at Paris,” I argue in Introduction
was concerned with directing the College of
phon in a later hand has Guillaume Oresme. 11 Ed. of Gossner, 58. III.B, was quite probably written much earlier,
Navarre until 1362 (and afterwards with being
Menut as late as 1957 accepted the translation dating from about 1350.
Dean of the Cathedral o f Rouen) and writing
 126 Introduction Composition of the D e configurationibus 127

may be the hoped-for treatment;1 but it could be that Oresme never completed harmonic numbers and ratios in almost the same term inology as he does in Il.x vii
such a treatise, although he did take up the question o f the horn angle in his Ques­ o f the D e configurationibus.3
tions on the Physics, and Questions on the Geometry o f Euclid, and even linked it with A clearer and unequivocal citation o f the Algorismus proportionum occurs in the
comparisons o f perfections. In sum, it seems to me probable that he is harkening third part o f the D e configurationibus, I ll.v i, lines 19-20: “ H ow any one ratio is add­
back here in the D e configurationibus to an earlier idea in these tw o sets o iQuestiones, ed to, or subtracted from, another I have taught in a certain treatise which I have
which he hoped to develop and demonstrate in more detail later at Navarre. called The Algorism o f Ratios.” This is a reference to the first and second “ rules” o f
A second citation to one o f his own works occurs in the second part o f the D e the Algorismus proportionum.4 A s I have noted elsewhere (see Introduction III. A ),
configurationibus, Il.xix: “ Harmonic difformity takes place in accordance with the the presence o f this citation in all o f the manuscripts containing this chapter attests
harmonic ratios described above in chapter seventeen o f this part. Further, har­ its genuineness and provides us w ith a terminus post quern for the D e configurationibus
monic difformity o f this sort can be unduly figured in many ways as w ell as duly since it appears that the Algorismus was itself composed after 1351.
figured, and still in a different fashion according to the division o f the monochord. A third citation to one o f his ow n works occurs in a statement in Il.x x vi o f the
O n this matter [of harmonic difformity] I have composed a special treatise, and D e configurationibus: “ In addition, I have on another occasion demonstrated in a
Boethius treats o f the division o f the m onochord in his Music, B ook IV .” I think certain question, by means o f authority, argument, and induction, that every man
that there can be little doubt that the “ special treatise” to which Oresme here who has meddled in these things (i.e., magical arts) has been affected badly.” The
refers is the so-called Tertius tractatus that is a part o f his Algorismus proportionum. only know n candidates for this reference are the Questio contra divinatores and the
In this special tract, w hich apparently does not bear any independent title, Oresme Tractatus contra iudiciarios astronomos, but it is the first o f these which is cast in questio
gave a series o f propositions concerning the ratios o f circumscribed regular poly­ form, the latter being a very brief tractatus. In order to attempt to find out whether
gons to various regular inscribed polygons, and, as he notes: “ all o f the ratios o f this question cited by Oresme could be the Questio contra divinatores, w e must give
all the aforementioned figures are either harmonic ratios or the square roots o f more general consideration to the various tracts that appear in Paris M S, Bibl. Nat.
harmonic ratios.” 2 Furthermore he explains in the special tractatus the meaning o f lat. 15126 under the follow ing titles (given on folio 15 8r): Questio determinata a
magistro Nicholao Oresme utrum res future per astrologiam possint presciri, ir-391:; A b
1 Determinatio facta in resumpta in domo Navar­ lat. 986 is a part of the Oresme tract {D ie Vor- eodem: Rationes et causeplurium mirabilium in natura, 39r-8or; Plura quodlibeta et diverse
re, MS Paris, BN lat. 16535, m r - i 4 v for the laufer Galileis 190, fn. 69). For the treatment of questiones ab eodem, 8or—93v ; Solutiones ab eodempredictorumprobleumatum, 95r—15 6v.
full determination. O n ii4 v th e author states the horn angle, see Questiones in libros physicorum, These w orks are also contained in Florence M S, Bibl. Laurent., Ashb. 210, 3r-yov,
“ alter articulus in dicta questione fuit de per­ Bk. V II, Quest. 6 (MS Seville, Bibl. Colomb.
with the last three w orks being collectively designated as Quotlibeta annexa questioni
fectione specierum vel rerum circa quam ma­ 7.6.30, 75 V—76r); and Quaestiones super geometri­
teriam multi erraverunt.” However, the state­ am Euclidis, Quests. 18-20, and particularly
premisseiyzzi. 2ir, c. 2, andf. 70V, c. 2). In its last paragraph, the first w ork bears the
ment is not elaborated. It is clear that we have questio 20 (ed. o f H. L. L. Busard, 65, lines date 1370 {Ibid., 2ir, c. 2, and B N 15126, 39r): “ E t sic finitur questio contra divi­
indeed only a resume here. (Incidentally, the 1-28). For another of Oresme’s discussions of natores facta anno 1370 quam non feci causa alicuius invidie nec causa apparencie
association of the piece with Oresme is made perfection, see the Quodlibeta (Paris, B N lat. sed ut se corrigant et advertant quos detinuit error devius quia sepe in astrologia
by L. Delisle in his Inventaire des manuscrits 15126, i28r-3ov).
studui et codices earum revolvi et cum actoribus contuli et ad experiendum musavi
[Paris, 1870], 65, under MS 16535. He speci­ 2 Algorism usproportionum (ed. o f Curtze, 28):
fies for folio hi the following: “ Determinatio “ E t omnes igitur he proportiones omnium
(musam, in A shb.), sed ultra quam posuerim veritatem non inveni, igitur vigilate.’
facta a magistro N . Oresme Parisius in resump­ figurarum superius predictarum sunt armonice
ta in domo Navarre.” But I do not know on vel medietates armonicarum.” Note how 3 Algorismus proportionum, ed. o f Curtze, 29- MS. Florence, Bibl. Laur. Ashb. 210, —
what basis this identification was made. I can Oresme later refers to this same tractatus as 30: “ E t sicud de aliis dicebatur, omnes he pro­ which has the reading unde given here in paren­
find no such indication in folios m r - i 4 v [ o f part o f the Algorismus in his translation o f portiones sunt armonice vel medietates armo­ theses ; it also has the correct readings o f se­
which I possess a photographic copy], al­ the Politics, Bk. VIII, Chapter 7 (Ed. of nicarum__ Verum (unde?) ymaginande sunt cundum, which I have used here, instead o f
though perhaps the word Navarre appears on Vernard, Vol. 2 [Paris, 1489], f. c r [34ir, due series numerorum ab unitate continue Curtze’s secundam.) This passage should be
the margin o f 1 14V. The modern table of con­ c.i in the copy bound as single volume]): proportionalium, una secundum proportio­ compared with the text o f the D e configurationi­
tents lists this item as N o. 3: “ Position faite “ Mesmement qui considere comment les nem duplam, ut: 1. 2. 4. 8. 16. etc. in infinitum, bus, Il.xvii, lines 18-24.
per M. Nicolaus Oresme dans la resumpte a proporcions d’aucunes {corr. ex daucuns) altera secundum proportionem triplam, ut: 4 Ibid., 14: “ Prima regula. Proportionem
Paris.” Possibly Delisle found some indication notables figures geometriques sont parties 1. 3. 9. 27. etc__ E t isti numeri dicuntur ar- rationalem proportioni rationali addere —
elsewhere in the manuscript or even in BN lat. de proporcions armoniques de musique, si monici. Et quelibet proportio inter duos isto­ Secunda regula. Proportionem rationalem a
16408, which is o f the same hand.) Miss Maier comme je demonstray en ung traictie appelle rum, sive sint eiusdem ordinationis, sive unius proportione rationali subtrahere.”
suggests that the anonymous in Vat. algorismes de proporcions.” de alia et alter de alia, dicitur armonica.” {C f.
 128 Introduction Composition of the D e configurationibus 129

This date is repeated in the title given in Ashb. 210: “ Incipit questio contra divi- divinatores o f Oresm e’s intention to elaborate a doctrine “ after the question,” a
natores horoscopios qui facta hominum in constellationibus ponunt per M. Ni. doctrine to the effect that a man can have the sense o f future events without that
Oresme anno domini 1370 parisius compilata et determinata.” I f this date is cor­ arising from the stars or by revelation, and this doctrine is indeed treated in the
rect, Oresme could not have been citing the Questio contra divinatores in his D e con­ Quodlibeta.7 Throughout the whole group o f w orks, Oresme often advises that we
figurationibus. But as we shall see, there is some reason to doubt the accuracy of this seek natural causes o f remarkable effects rather than turning to the heavens, to
date. G od, or to demons.8 In many instances these effects are the same as those treated in
Before discussing the date, let me first observe that careful study o f the entire the D e configurationibus and explained there on the basis o f the configuration doc­
group o f works has led me to believe that they do represent a single whole and trine (e.g., the curative effects o f theriac, the attraction and repulsion o f magnets
were written at about the same time. A gain and again the same ideas and phrases for iron, et al.).9 A n d while generally w e must be most suspicious o f the use o f an
appear throughout.5 Furthermore, there are numerous references in the last works argument from silence for the analysis o f medieval works, it is striking that Ores­
(which along with the scribe o f the Florence M S we shall entitle collectively as the me never uses the configuration doctrine to explain such effects in the Contra divi­
Quodlibeta, merely changing his spelling o f Quotlibeta to that found in the Paris natores or the Quodlibeta but rather explains them on the basis o f the varying pro­
manuscript) to the Contra divinatores.6 In addition, we find an assertion in the Contra portions o f the primary, secondary, and tertiary qualities and their different dis­
positions.10Hence w e must conclude either (1) that by 1370 Oresme had completely
5 One o f the key doctrines repeated manyparva) ignorantia debet concludere seu in­
abandoned, or had little confidence in, the configuration doctrine as a possible
times through all of the tracts is that a small currere maiorem nec ex parvo inconsequenti
change in a cause in the beginning may pro­ maius concedere, nunquam tibi, et cuicumque explanation, or (2) that the w ork was written prior to his application o f the doctrine
duce a great diversity in effects, a doctrine which perito est magis dubium demones esse.” to specific phenomena. M y inclination is to accept the latter conclusion, and there­
he takes principally from Aristotle. For exam­ The same idea and phraseology is often fore to mistrust 1370 as the composition date. Furthermore, w e know that by 1370
ple, see the Contra divinatores, B N 15126, 31V: repeated in theQuodlibeta. Thus he immediately
Oresme was already engaged in his vast project o f Aristotelian translations and there
“ 210 nota quod in aliquibus effectibus et causis proposes (39r-v) to make clear the causes of
is no other evidence o f his teaching arts at Paris in 1370. It could have been an error
quandoque pauca dispositio vel indispositio seu some things which seem to be marvelous,
modicus motus sive modica additio vel sus- asserting “ quod naturaliter fiant sicut ceteri copied by one scribe and repeated by the other (these tw o manuscripts are so closely
tractio causat maximam diversitatem.” C f. f. effectus de quibus communiter non mirantur; identical in textual readings as to suggest that one— I believe the Paris M S— was
35V, “ E t memorie commenda quod pro valde nec propter hoc oportet ad celum tanquam the source o f the other).11 The only works o f his ow n that Oresme seems to cite in
modico quandoque diversificatur multum ad ultimum et miserorum refugium currere
effectus et ideo Aristoteles in primo celi, error nec ad demones nec ad deum gloriosum.” by the 23rd notabile (31 v) in the Contra divina­ ignotum a medicis et incipiet eum habere quan­
in principio est maximus in fine.” Also see the C f. 6ov, “ A d aliud, ut superius dixi, illi tores, to the effect that they so argue because do una mulier vel vir faciet unam truffam per
Quodlibeta, f. 52V: “ modicus error aut disposi­ qui nesciunt causas immediatas et naturales they are ignorant o f principles and natural quam credit illum incursurum illum morbum
tio in principio maximam facit differentiam in fugiunt ad demones, alii ad celum, alii ad causes, i.e., because they are stupid.) C f. also et tamen nullo modo erit causa et ita de multis
effectibus quandoque.” C f. ff. 63r, 73v, ii2 v , deum, et quia talia videntur mirabilia, ideo loir, 105V, 107V, i38r, i45r, 148V, and so on. de quibus mirantur homines et faciunt falla­
i39r, i43r, and so on. Note also the repeated attribuunt etc., sed hoc est falsum etc.” C f. (All my references to the Contra divinatores and ciam sed (corr. ex secundum) non causam etc. et
injunction to save the phenomena that occur 8or, 95r, and so on. N ot only do the few pas­ the Quodlibeta are to the Paris MS unless hoc postea declarabo nec ex hoc recurrendum
here on earth by immediate, inferior, natural sages which I have here quoted show similarity otherwise noted.) est ad horam coniugii vel figuram nativitatis.”
causes rather than by recourse to an influence o f ideas and phraseology throughout both the 7 Ibid., 32V: “ et possibile est quod homo sen­ See, for example, in th e Quodlibeta, f. 61 v: “ E t
o f the heavens, to God, or to demons. See the Contra divinatores and the Quodlibeta, but many tiat seu sibi appareat de aliquo futuro quid inde breviter ita potest contingere quasi de infinitis
Contra divinatores, 5v : “ Ex dictis rationibus patet other common terms and forms appear. The erit et quod nec per astra nec per revelationem que quandoque sic currunt et in illis commit­
quod diversitas et pluralitas effectuum hic in­ constant labeling of the astrological arguments illud didiscerit et ista post questionem decla­ titur fallacia sed non causam etc. quia creditur
ferius plus provenit ratione materie et pass[iv]- as frivolous(/raW<z) or as trifles (truffa) is present rabuntur.” This is more than once mentioned causam esse que non est causa etc.”
arum et causarum immediatarum magis quam in both works. in the.Quodlibeta. For example, see 65r: “ E t si 8 See, for example, the passages cited in fn. 5.
superiorum. Igitur ex illis supperioribus non 6 For example, see 58r: “ Respondeo quod queras quomodo videret futura, respondeo 9 For remarks on parallel phenomena treated
certifficatur quid accidet.” C f. 7V: “ et disposi­ contra hoc est sufficienter argutum in questio­ quod per aliquas causas ex quibus dependent in the D e configurationibus and the complex
tionibus naturalibus potest salvari omnis diver­ ne precedenti contra divinatores.” C f. 99r, et per aliquas coniecturas bonas quas forte ip- Contra divinatores-Quodlibeta, see Introduction
sitas hic inferius. Igitur frustra ponuntur tales “ Vide plus in questione superius.” C f. ioor, semet quandoque non percipit et forte quod II.C, fn. 2.
influende [celestes] particulares.” C f. 33V: ‘Un­ “ Facta autem est responsio ad sextum in ques­ percipit.” There is apparently another refer­ 10 Introduction II.C, fn. 2.
de quidam causas ignotas attribuunt Deo im­ tione principali, notabili 230.” (And indeed the ence in the Contra divinatores to the Quodlibeta 11 It might perhaps be suggested that 1370
mediate, quidam celo, quidam dyabolo. Homo sixth question which asks why people are m ov­ (38V): “ et etiam est possibile naturaliter quod represents a copying date rather than a compo­
autem peritus nunquam ex pura (corr. ex ed to pose astrological judgments is answered homo habebit mirabilem morbum quasi sition date. But it is clear from the concluding
 130 Introduction Composition of the D e configurationibus 131

these tracts are his questions on the D e caelo11and (possibly) those on the Deanim aD certainly have to date the Livre de divinacions as being earlier than 137c.15 The argu­
Since it is reasonably certain that these tw o w orks are products o f his early teach­ ment, then, which I have developed to this point, does suggest that the Questio
ing o f arts, I w ould be inclined to date the w hole group o f w orks as belonging to contra divinatores was an early w ork. I f this is so, then it could well be the questio
a time not long after the composition o f his treatment o f the D e caelo, that is, some cited by Oresme in the D e configurationibus. It can be noted finally that Oresme does
time close to 1350. Further, I suspect that at least one reference in Oresm e’s Livre give a series o f authoritative statements in the Contra divinatores (f. 1 8r-v) that
de divinacions may be rather to the Contra divinatores and Quodlibeta than to the Tracta­ warn o f the dangers o f divination.16
tus contra iudiciarios astronomos,14 as is customarily assumed, and we should most Still, in spite o f the arguments indicating at least the possibility that Oresme was
citing the Contra divinatores in his D e configurationibus, it must be recognized that the
paragraph quoted above that it is the author desinit esse vel finis alicuius que nunquam shorter Tractatus contra iudiciarios astronomos is more centrally concerned with the
rather than the scribe who is speaking. Hence incipit esse naturaliter loquendo.”
dangers to princes and kings o f meddling w ith astrology. Further, we should not take
it is preferable to suggest that a scribe miscopied 13Quodlibeta, 62r-v: “ quia quedam istorum
the date. If, as I suspect, the Paris manuscript [de anima] super librum de anima tractantur
too seriously the fact that he cites the prior w ork as a questio instead o f as a tractatus,
is the source of the Florence manuscript, then sufficienter et quedam super librum primum for in the introduction to his Tractatus contra iudiciarios astronomos he refers to it as a
the title as given in the Florence manuscript sententiarum a magistris nostris de ymagine questio (ed. o f Coopland, 123).
(and absent in the Paris manuscript) must be sanctissime trinitatis tractantibus.” Perhaps A fourth and final citation in the D e configurationibus may be identified as a refer­
attributed to the scribe rather than to Oresme, the fact that Oresme mentions other commen­
ence to his Questions on the Geometry o f Euclid. It occurs in Ill.v iii, line 43, where
and must have been drawn from the colophon taries on the Sentences rather than his own is an
and elaborated upon by the scribe o f that man­ indication that he had not yet composed it. If
after completing a geometric p roof o f the summation o f the follow ing series,
uscript. It is clear that Oresme in the Quodli­ this is so, it would put the Quodlibeta before
1 + ^*2 + i* 3 + -- .-l— ^17 • n + . . . = 4 he says, “ M oreover, I have demonstrated
beta uses the form o f the title given in the con­ 1355, the most probable date of the composi­
cluding paragraph, namely, Contra divinatores, tion o f Oresme’s commentary, or at least be­ this elsewhere with a more subtle and difficult demonstration.” I have already
when making reference to it (see fn. 6 above)- fore 1356 when Oresme became Grand Master
indicated that the same series is mentioned in the Questions on the Physics (see
It should also be observed that the title as o f the College o f Navarre. A passage that per­
given in the Florence work specifies Paris as
Introduction II.A , fn. 19) but in a form that is almost the duplicate o f that given
haps implies that Oresme was a laycus when he
the place o f compilation and determination of wrote this work occurs on f. io ir: “ Dico in the D e configurationibus. Hence it can hardly be the Questions on the Physics to
the tract, an easy inference with the author secundo quod verum est quod nichil scio de which Oresme refers in the D e configurationibus. But the only other place in an ex­
known as Nicholas Oresme. talibus precipue que astrologi imponunt nec in tant w ork where Oresme demonstrates something that is equivalent to this sum­
12Quodlibeta, B N 15126, io jr : “ quia possi­ eis inveni veritatem et tamen ita diligenter
mation is in th&Questions on the Geometry o f Euclid and indeed it is a “ more subtle
bile est, sicud alibi scilicet super de celo est pro­ studui et famosos in illis frequentavi sicud for­
batum, quod si sint in celo aliqui motus incom­
and difficult demonstration.” In fact, what is assumed essentially in the D e confi-
te ipsi qui me reprehendunt et si nichil scivi
mensurabiles quod infinite fuerunt coniunctio- saltem potui iudicia eorum intelligere sicut et
nes et erunt quarum una non erit similis alteri alii layci et forte aliquantulum magis adverten­
et sic etiam nove species. Vide ibi si vis.” tes in eis cognovi eorum sophisticam respon­ monstre autrefois la cause parquoy ilz n’ont 16 Incidentally, it appears from this very
C f. Questiones super de celo, Bk. I : Q . 24 (Erfurt, sionem [?].” If laycus means “ non-clerical” nul effect en personnes qui usent de leur fran- passage that he may well have written the
Stadtbib. Amplon. Q. 299, 26v: Kren text, here, as it usually does, then one might deduce che voulente ou liberte.” The free will argu­ Latin Tractatus contra iudiciarios astonomos prior
421-23), “ Secundo si motus solis et lune sunt that the tract was written before Oresme’s ment does not appear in the brief Contra iudi­ to the Questio contra divinatores (and both prior
incommensurabiles, sicud est verisimile, tunc completion of his theological mastership (i.e., ciarios but is present in the Contra divinatores to the Livre de divinacions). For in his Questio he
semper piramis umbre terre in orbe lune per before 1355 or 1356). However, the passage, (MS cit., 6r, j t ) , although admittedly it is not says (f. i8v): “ Cum predictis autem si vis adde
aliquam viam per quam nunquam transibit, although easy to transcribe, is by no means easy tied to a discussion of omens and auspices but que in alio tractatu contra divinatores sunt
nec potuit transire naturaliter, nec poterit in to construe properly (i.e., does alii layci imply rather to a refutation of astrological influences. collecta de flagellis et vindicta illorum qui pre­
futurum, ergo continue aliquod totum lumen that Oresme is also a laycus ?) and there is at least For example, f. jr : “ Dicere etiam quod sortes dictis se intermiscent.” C. Jourdain, in Revue
categorice corrumpitur quod fuerat ab eterno one instance recorded by D u Cange o f laicus yens ad templum tali hora fit mortuus quia ex des questions historiques, Vol. 18 (1875), 144-45,
secundum aliquod sui et etiam per idem ali­ meaning “ illiteratus” or “ indoctus.” Thus per­ tecto cecidit lapis vel etiam quod hoc provenit believes that this reference is probably to the
quod generatur quod nunquam corrumpetur, haps it here carries the connotation o f “ non­ ex nativitate sua etc. apparet frivolum quia de Tractatus contra iudiciarios, and that the short
quod possit mathematice demonstrari__ veri­ professional” in these astrological matters. suo libro arbitrio et pro bono ibi ibat.” Fur­ Tractatus was the first o f his works on astrolo­
simile est quod sit quandoque aliqua coniunc- 14 The reference in the Livre de divinacions thermore, in the annexed Quodlibeta (13 7V-3 8r) gy. However, Jourdain accepts the date o f
tio stellarum que non potuit esse simile in pre- that is most likely to the Contra divinatores oc­ he strongly attacks the doctrine of elections 1370 for the Contra divinatores as genuine, and
teritum nec poterit in futurum que forte est curs in Chapter Three (ed. of Coopland, 58): and nativities with due attention to free will. he is unable to decide on a proper date for the
causa inceptionis alicuius speciei que nunquam “ Des auguremens et auspices, ou eurs, ay je 15 See above, Introduction III.A, fn. 5. Livre de divinacions.
 132 Introduction Composition of the D e configurationibus 133

princes in his Tractatus contra iudiciarios astronomos and the much more extended
gurationibus is that the series 2 + [1 + \ + ... + ...] is equivalent to 1 + -| • 2
considerations o f the later Livre de divinacions.
+ | . 3+ . . . + ' t i + ..., and in Questions on the Geometry o f Euclid he proves that Hence, taking into consideration these various examples, one realizes that we
have in the case o f Oresme an almost unique example o f a medieval scientist where
t1 + I + i + • • • + + . . . ] = 2. H owever, it is not impossible that the reference
progressive development can be examined in some detail.
in the D e configurationibus is to a now lost Sophismata, although this seems somewhat
less likely than that it is a reference to the Questions.17 I have already remarked on
the fact that Oresme in all likelihood took the beginning and preliminary treat­ C. Oresme’s Citations o f his Predecessors
ment o f the configuration doctrine as outlined in the Questions on the Geometry o f
Euclid and developed it w ith significant changes and corrections in the D e configura- It is a well-known technique o f medieval scholars to lace their texts w ith extensive
tionibus, particularly in connection w ith the development o f the suitability doctrine. quotations from other authors. This practice sometimes results in such a bewilder­
Hence it should occasion no surprise that Oresme w ould quote the zwEivtQuestions. ing mosaic that it is difficult to decide upon the original contribution o f the writer.
I f I am correct in assuming from the previous citation and the argument about Oresme is no freer o f this practice than his contemporaries. From the relatively few
the suitability doctrine that the Questions on the Geometry o f Euclid was composed citations (other than to Aristotle and Averroes) in his various Questions on the
before the D e configurationibus, then perhaps w e have still another veiled and general works o f Aristotle, Euclid, and Sacrobosco, to the perfect orgy o f quotations
reference by Oresme to his Questions in the proemium o f the D e configurationibus found in the astrological w orks, Oresme everywhere demonstrates his conform ity
where he says that “ W hen I began to set in order my conception o f the uniformity to this procedure.1 It is not surprising, therefore, to find a plethora o f citations in
and difformity o f intensities, certain other things occurred to m e.” Thus I would his D e configurationibus. M ore than 150 citations, referring to some 62 different
suppose that the phizstymaginationem meam means his “ conception” or “ imagina­ works, are included.2
tive scheme” as outlined in the Questions, and that “ certain other things” means A m on g the G reek w orks referred to by Oresme in the D e configurationibus w e
additional points beyond those made already in the Questions. Finally the contrast find eight Aristotelian texts: Metaphysics, Physics, D e caelo, D e anima, D e sensu, D e
implied in the proemium between exercitatio (exercise) and disciplina (developed somno et vigilia, Meteorologica, and Ethics. There are also references to the Elements
doctrine) is perhaps the very contrast between the treatment found in a set o f o f Euclid, an indirect reference to the Timaeus o f Plato, a reference to the pseudo-
questiones like those o f his earlier Questions and that o f a tractatus like the D e configu­ Archimedean D e curvis superficiebus o f Johannes de Tinemue, an indirect one to the
rationibus. Spiral Dines o f Archimedes, references to unspecified works o f Galen and H ippoc­
The strong possibility that Oresme took his Questions as the point o f departure rates, and at least one to the Hermetic tract Asclepius (entitled in Oresme’s time
for the further and more complete development o f all aspects o f the configuration D e deo deorum).
doctrine is o f considerable interest in illustrating the general tendency for Oresme Oresme also gives attention to classical Latin authors: to the D e divinatione and D e
to reconsider and redevelop ideas that he puts forth in his earlier works. The same natura deorum o f Cicero; the Georgies, the Eclogae, and the Aeneid o f V ergil; to the
kind o f developmental tendency is illustrated in Oresme’s application o f the con­
1 Coopland, Nicole Oresme and the Astrologers,the same conclusion concerning Oresme’s
cept o f the probable incommensurability o f any tw o unknown ratios to celestial m o­ 23-28, summarizes Oresme’s use o f his prede­ quotations in the D e configurationibus. But see
tions. A s Professor Grant has shown, Oresme first took up the doctrine in a little cessors in his Tractatus contra iudiciarios astro­ also the remarks of A .D . Menut in Transactions
tract A d pauca respicientesA He then composed D e proportionibus proportionum to nomos and in his Livre de divinacions. Coopland o f the American Philosophical Society, N ew Series,
estimates that while some o f the passages Vol. 47 (1957), 795-96, and particularly fn.
serve in part as a mathematical foundation for that doctrine, w ith the object per­
quoted might have been derived second-hand 26 where the works cited are listed. See also
haps o f briefly emending the A d pauca respicientes and then adding it to the end o f the same editor, L e Livre de ethiques d ’ A r isto te,
and some used uncritically, “ In general it may
the mathematical part o f the D e proportionibus. H owever, it appears that Oresme be said that these references [to classical au­ 83, for an index o f names. Finally, we should
became so interested in the revision o f the short tract, that he went on to compose thors] seem to be without that second-handed­ note that in tht Questio contra divinatores with its
a long and completely revised tract which he entitled D e commensurabilitate vel in- ness often concealed in mediaeval writers — annexed Quodlibeta, citations to previous au­
the author’s quotations do not appear, as a thors are made on almost every page of its more
commensurabilitate motuum celi (or celestium). The same kind o f developmental ap­
rule, to have been lifted bodily from the work than 150 folios (in the Paris manuscript).
proach is evident on comparing the brief treatment o f the bad effects o f astrology on
of some earlier exponent o f the same theme, 2 The specific references can be located by
17 See the Commentary to IILviii, lines 35- 18 The “ D e proportionibus proportionum” and who may himself have been using them at consulting the index to this volume.
44, for a discussion of the various possibilities. “ A d pauca respicientes,” ed. o f E. Grant, 72-81. second or third hand.” I have reached much
 134 Introduction
Amores o f O v id ; to the Natural History o f Pliny, with its derivative the Collectanea
o f Solinus; to the D e agricultura o f Palladius; to Justin’s Epitome o f Pompeius Tro-
gus’ Historiae; to the D e hello gothico o f Claudianus; to the Thebaid o f Statius; to the
D e bello civili o f Lucan; to the Carmina o f Sidonius; to the so-called Declamationes o f
Annaeus Seneca; to the D e deo Socratis o f A puleius; to the Disticha attributed to
C ato ; to the D e nuptiis o f Martianus Capella; to the Variae o f Cassiodorus; and to
the D e musica o f Boethius.
O f the early Christian authors used by Oresme the most frequently cited was
Augustine, five o f whose works were em ployed: Contra Faustum Manichaeum, D e
civitate dei, D e genesi ad litteram, D e divinatione demonum, and D e trinitate. A lso referred
to were Jerome’s Commentary on Daniel and his Letters, Leo the G reat’s Sermones,
and G regory the G reat’s Homilies on E zekiel. Needless to say, the Bible itself was
important for Oresm e’s purposes. There are almost fifty citations made to twenty-
three different books o f the Bible: Isaias, Job, Genesis, and M atthew being the
most often cited. W e also find Oresme using the popular Glossa ordinaria on the
Bible, the Postillae o f Nicolaus de Lyra, and an unidentified Postilla.
N or did Oresme slight medieval authors. O f works translated from the Arabic,
he used A lkin di’s D e radiis stellarum, A vicenna’s Liber canonis and Liber sextus
naturalium, al-Ghazzall’s Metaphysica (the second part labelled Physica), and Maimo-
nides’ Guide to the Perplexed. Though not specifically cited here, A verroes’ various
commentaries no doubt played a part in his consideration o f the various Aristoteli­
an w orks, as they did in most o f Oresme’s tracts. A lso o f A rabic origin was Ibn
Butlan’s Tacuinum D ei. In the cases o f strictly Latin medieval authors, Oresme used
or cited the book o f false experiments known as Vacca Platonis and the pseudo-
Ovidian D e vetula, which latter w ork he judged not to be by O vid. The eleventh-
century Viaticum o f Constantine the African and the twelfth-century Decretum o f
Gratian were w oven into his text, as were the poem Tobias composed by Matthieu
o f Vendom e and the polished phrases o f John o f Salisbury’ s Policraticus. For the
several lives o f saints which he quoted, Oresme almost certainly used the Legenda
aurea o f Jacobus de Voragine. Thirteenth-century authors referred to include
William o f A uvergne (D e universo) , Thom as Aquinas (Summa contra gentiles),
Campanus (On the Elements o f Euclid), and W itelo (Perspectiva and D e natura de­
monum) . In sum, this represents a most varied and extensive list o f authorities.
Oresme’s quotations are for the most part accurate; generally, they are pertinent
to the subject he is discussing, although on occasion the meaning o f the biblical
quotations seems forced to fit the context, as, for example, the quotation in I.iv
from the Epistle to the Philippians (3 120-21) to the effect that Christ “ w ill reform
the body o f our lowness, made like (configuratum) to the body o f his glory” seems
to have been used primarily because the term configuratum appears in the verse. O n
rare occasions, an author’s view seems grossly misrepresented, as when Oresme
lists Cicero among those philosophers who support the existence o f demons (see
II.xxxv).
Composition of the D e configurationibus 135
W hat is particularly important is that none o f the authors quoted seems to have
directed the line o f his argument, which is clearly his own, whether it be the basic
outline o f the configuration doctrine or its application to phenomena. W hile Ores­
me’s general attack on magic has much precedence, his tying o f the configuration
doctrine into it gives to it a novel twist not present in the D e universo o f W illiam o f
A uvergne or the w orks o f the various classical authors quoted. It could be that his
general position owes much to Cicero but even here he has brought in medieval
discussions o f fascination and the like that give the argument a somewhat different
flavor.
I have attempted to indicate in the preceding chapters and in the commentary
the various medieval authors w ho were influential in the development o f Oresm e’s
basic idea but whose works were not directly quoted by him, e.g., his master, Jean
Buridan, and perhaps the various M erton College authors. A t any rate, the w hole
tapestry that Oresme has w oven is clearly very much more than a loose aggregation
o f threads. He has, in fact, used the works o f his predecessors to enrich his own
design.
D. Determining the Title
The assigning o f the correct title to this treatise presents certain problems. W hen I
originally discussed the title some years ago,1 1 was hopeful that a careful examina­
tion o f all the manuscripts in the preparation o f a critical text w ould allow a defini­
tive solution. This hope has not been completely realized. But I have been able to
form some hypotheses, i f not assured conclusions, that do embrace the evidence.
Before presenting these hypotheses, it w ill be helpful to summarize the evidence,
both that o f the manuscripts (which is repeated in detail in the variant readings to
our text) and that derived from statements concerning the title found in other
works o f Oresme and the works o f his comtemporaries.
There are five places in the tract where there is evidence that bears on the prob­
lem o f the title: 1) preceding the proemium, where a title might be normally foun d;
2) in the first line o f the proemium where Oresme specifies the general subject
matter about which he is to w rite; 3) the seventh line o f the proemium, where the
various parts o f the tract are indicated; 4) the last line o f the text (IILxiii, line 30),
where the subject matter is again specified; and 5) a colophon follow ing the last
line o f the text. Let us summarize the evidence from each o f these places.
Preceding the proemium
1. N ine o f the fourteen manuscripts omit any title preceding the proemium o f
the text (MSS B V A N S C M D J ).
2. There is, despite some differences, a measure o f agreement among three manu-
1 The Science o f Mechanics, 339, fn. 12.
 136 Introduction
scripts (L E F ) . L is the most precise: it has Tractatus de configurationibus qualitatum
et motuum. E has the shortened title Tractatus de configurationibus (with perhaps the
addition o f a “ q ” for qualitatum). F also has a shortened title, Tractatus de configura-
cione qualitatum, but adds an expanded phrase like the title mentioned below in
Point 5.
3. The titles preceding the proemium in the tw o remaining manuscripts ( P G )
are late and receive no support from other evidence. P has in a hand that is later
than the hand in which the text is written, D e latitudinibusformarum. This no doubt
comes from a confusion with the short tract o f that title sometimes attributed to
Oresme but probably written by Jacobus de Sancto M artino.2 Manuscript G , the
latest o f all the manuscripts, has Tractatus de intensione qualitatum, a title more properly
used in tracts discussing the basic problem o f how forms or qualities can be in­
creased in intensity. T he alternate title in G , Tractatus gloriosus, is uniquely found in
that manuscript and has no support from any other source.
First line o f the proemium
4. In the first line o f the proemium, the manuscripts generally agree in having
Oresme say that the subject matter o f the tract is de uniformitate et difformitate inten­
sionum (see text and variant readings), although manuscript B omits the w ord in­
tensionum, manuscripts A E P interchange uniformitate and difformitate, and manu­
script D omits the whole proemium.
Seventh line o f the proemium
5. Seven manuscripts containing the full proemium (B V N F M S G ) simply say
that there are three principal parts huius tractatus, while four manuscripts ( A E L P )
expand this to tractatus defigurationepotentiarum et mensura difformitatum. The Table o f
Chapters found at the end o f the tract in B has a similar title but changes potentia­
rum to potentia and difformitatum to qualitatum. A garbled statement o f the expanded
phrase is found in C (see variant reading). Cf. also the similar phrase added to the
title in /'’ (variant reading for title). The fragmentary D omits the w hole proem­
ium, while f omits this part o f it.
Last line o f the text
6. Here B V G have de uniformitate ed difformitate intensionum; F M P C have de
uniformitate et difformitate. Manuscripts L A N S J omit the whole last line, and D E
do not have this part o f the tract at all.
Colophon after the last line
7. Manuscripts B C S f (and, o f course, the incomplete D E ) have no colophon
title.
2 See above, Introduction II.B, fn. 15.
Composition of the D e configurationibus H7
8. Manuscripts A N have Tractatus de configurationibus qualitatum and L has D e
configurationibus.
9. Manuscripts M P have Tractatus de uniformitate et difformitate intensionum in
their colophons, although they had only de uniformitate et difformitate in the last line
o f the text (see Point 6).
10. Manuscript A has a conflation o f the titles noted in Points 8 and 9: Tractatus
de uniformitate et difformitate intensionum seu configuracione qualitatum, although as at the
beginning o f the w ork (see Point 2) configuracione replaces configurationibus.
11. Manuscript V has Tractatus de latitudinibus, and A , while giving the title as
in N (see Point 8), adds a phrase that the vulgar name o f the tract is D e latitudinibus
formarum. Both o f these appellations in V and A , I am sure, come from confusing
the tract w ith the shorter D e latitudinibus formarum mentioned in Point 3 above.
This conclusion is reinforced in the case o f A , for a marginal note in A flags this
alternate title and remarks that another treatise is beginning, and indeed the shorter
D e latitudinibusformarum does follow the longer treatise in A .
12. A s in the beginning (see Point 3), the very late manuscript G has: Tractatus
de intensione qualitatum.
N o w in addition to the evidence from the manuscripts o f the tract, the follow ing
evidence from external citations can be gathered :
13. Oresme tw ice cites his tract in the Livre de divinations, written no later than
the early 1360’s and perhaps even as early as 1360 (see Section A on the dating o f
the D e configurationibus). The first and more complete citation in the Livre de divi­
nations (edit, o f G . W . Coopland, 60) gives the title: traitie de la configuration des qualites
et des mouvemens; while in the second citation w e read {Ibid., 92): Livre de la Figurati­
on des Quatite^. Incidentally, Coopland’s suggested addition o f du del after mouve­
mens in the first citation must certainly be rejected, for the tract does not concern
itself with “ movements o f the heavens.” T he title in the second citation is an
obviously shortened designation. The change o f configuration to Figuration also
should be noted (see Point 15 as well). In general, Oresme uses these terms inter­
changeably in the tract itself.
14. Oresme also tw ice cites the tract later (1371 or slightly after) in his French
translation o f the Politics (Ed. o f Vernard, Paris, 1489). Both o f these citations
[Bk. V III, Chaps. 8 (343r, c. 1), 12 (349^ c. 2)] give the title in Latin as: D e diffor­
mitate qualitatum, w hich is o f course attested in none o f the manuscripts o f the
w ork itself.
15. Oresme’s contemporary at Paris, Henry o f Hesse, in his tract D e reductione
effectuum, apparently written before 1373,3 cites the w ork as Tractatus de configuratio­
nibus qualitatum4 or as Tractatus defigurationibus qualitatum . s
3 Thorndike, History o f Magic and E x p eri- Paris, B N lat. 2831, ii4 r; Vienna, Nat.-Bibl.
mental Science, Vol. 3, 473. 4127, 37v >c. T-
4 MSS Brit. Mus. Sloane 2156, f. i29r, c. 2; 5 M SBibl.M ed. Laur. Ashb. 210, f. ioor, c.i.
 i 38
Introduction
16. Another contemporary o f Oresme, or perhaps student o f the next genera­
tion, Symon de Castello, in his D e proportionibus velocitatum in motibus (see above,
Introduction II.B, fin. 6), cites Oresm e’s tract as: D e uniformitate et difformitate in­
tensionis.
What, then, are we to make o f this diverse evidence ? Perhaps the key to its success­
ful interpretation is to assume that, when Oresme first composed the tract, he in­
cluded no formal title before the proemium or in a colophon, supposing that the
first and last sentences o f the tract (see Points 4 and 6) specified the subject o f the
tract sufficiently as D e uniformitate et difformitate intensionum. T he initial absence o f a
form al title w ould explain in general how so much confusion about the title arose,
particularly if the tract was copied once or tw ice in its pristine state. In particular
it w ould explain how a very good manuscript like B and those copied from it lack
a title (see Points 1 and 7). It w ould also explain w hy in some cases D e uniformitate
et difformitate intensionum became the colophon title (see Point 9), for the scribe,
desirous o f adding a formal title, could have seized upon the designations o f the
subject in the first and last sentences o f the tract (see Point 4). This w ould also
explain the later citation o f the tract under approximately this title by Symon de
Castello (see Point 16).
Then let us suppose that shortly after its composition the tract began to be read
at Paris and that the first and last line designations did not adequately distinguish
this tract from others, for while the tract is in a general w ay about the uniformity
and difformity o f intensities, its particular objective is rather to apply a new doc­
trine o f configurations to the understanding o f qualities and motions. Thus let us
say that the w ork began to be known almost immediately after its composition as a
tractatus de configurationibus qualitatum et motuum, and that a copyist actually added this
title to the tract (see Point 2). It w ould seem that this had the approval o f Oresme
himself, for not long after the composition o f the tract, Oresme was already refer­
ring to it under this explicit title (see Point 13), except that he uses the term configu­
ratio instead o f the plural, no doubt to emphasize that the tract describes a system o f
representing the qualities and motions rather than the particular representations
themselves as the plural in the title implies. He perhaps communicated this dif­
ference in understanding to at least one scribe, for I assume that the scribe o f F
much later must have been follow ing someone in his use o f the singular configura-
cione (see Points 2 and 10). A t any rate, w ith the title D e configurationibus (or configu­
ratione') qualitatum et motuum established, it became customary to abbreviate it to D e
configurationibus qualitatum or simply to D e configurationibus, either shortened form
being adequate to designate the key doctrine o f the tract (see Points 2, 8, and 15).
The further title o f Tractatus de figuratione potentiarum et mensttra difformitatum also
appears to have been a scribal intrusion (see Point 5), which, whether or not it had
Oresme’s approval (and there is none but negative evidence on this point), did not
catch on (except w ith Pierre Duhem and H. Wieleitner in the twentieth centu­
Composition of the D e configurationibus 139
ry),6 although the scribe o f F vaguely reflects it in his “ explanation” o f the title pre­
ceding the proemium (see variant readings) and the good manuscript B puts it at
the head o f the Table o f Chapters appended to the text. It is o f interest that Oresme
himself introduces still another shortened title later in 1371 when he refers to the
tract as D e difformitate qualitatum (see Point 14), a title that somewhat reflects the
designation he originally used in the first and last sentences for the subject matter
o f the work. There is, however, no manuscript evidence associating this later
short title w ith the tract, although the late manuscript G (see Point 12) has the
otherwise uncited title D e intensione qualitatum, as well as the alternate title (also
otherwise unknown) Tractatus gloriosus. Finally, we should note that the use o f D e
latitudinibus formarum (see Points 3 and 11) appears to be a simple error, arising
from a confusion o f this tract w ith the short, popular tract entitled D e latitudinibus
formarum.
The title on which I have settled for the title page reflects the hypotheses I have
outlined here. The first part o f it, A Treatise on the Uniformity and Difformity o f In­
tensities, reflects Oresme’s original intention, while the second part embraces the
title commonly used and, at least in part, approved by O resm e: Tractatus de configura­
tionibus qualitatum et motuum. Thus in the title preceding the proemium: \Tractatus
de configurationibus qualitatum et motuum\, I have attempted to indicate what I believe
to have been the actual historical situation, the brackets indicating the absence o f
this or any title in the original text and the title within the brackets being the one
having some acceptance later.
E. The Character o f the Proemium and the Genuineness o f the
Table o f Chapters
It is my impression, as I have already said (in Introduction III.B), that the first line
o f the preface o f the D e configurationibus contains a reference to Oresme’s treatment
o f the configuration doctrine in his Questions on the Geometry o f Euclid. I have based
this on my oft-repeated belief that the. Questions is the earlier o f the tw o works.
Needless to say, this conclusion as to his reference to the earlier w ork is founded
on the further assumption that the reading ymaginationem meam found in seven o f
the manuscripts is the correct reading rather than the r eadi n gymaginationem veterum
found in four manuscripts (see variant reading for I.o, line 2). Thus I believe that
when Oresme says that he began to set in order “ m y conception o f the uniformity
and difformity o f intensities,” it is to his conception as already framed in the Ques­
tions that he is referring. The reference to “ other people” w ho have treated these
6 P. Duhem. L e Systeme du monde, Vol. 7, H. Wieleitner, in Bibliotheca Mathematica, 3.
535 (Note that Duhem has misread the added Folge, Vol. 14(1913-14), 198.
title, changing mensura to mensurarum.). C f.
 140 Composition of the 141
Introduction D e configurationibus

matters obscurely is most likely to the M erton College authors whose subtle and further support that Oresme’ s tract D e mutationibus monetarum, written about the
turgid prose must often have seemed as obscure to their contemporaries as it does same time, has the same overall structure: a proemium, a list o f chapters, and then
to us today. One m ight suppose, however, that Oresme might have come in contact the text. Similarly, in a more modest fashion, the D e proportionibus proportionum
w ith a very loosely expressed configuration doctrine that was afloat in the 1 340’s at also has a proemium, short list o f chapters, and text. A similar but briefer proemium
Paris and O xford, and that it was this loose doctrine o f the kind present in the is present in the Tractatus contra iuditiarios astronomos, to be follow ed by a listing o f
Questio o f Johannes de Casali that Oresme is mentioning here in his preface. the chapters.4 A nd the same method o f organization is seen in the IJvre de divina­
H owever, I freely admit that there is no further evidence beyond the tract o f tions5 and the L e Traitie de Vespere P I take it, then, that this was the customary
Casali for the presence o f such a doctrine. manner o f Oresme in proceeding to w rite a tract.
Oresme’s prefaces that date from about the same period as the D e configurationi­
bus all have the same high tone and purpose. In the D e configurationibus, Oresme
notes that he is to add to the topic (as treated in th eQuestiones and by other scholars ?)
“ so that the treatise might be useful not only as an exercise but also as a discipline.”
He goes on to say that he wishes “ to treat clearly and distinctly those matters which
some other people seem to perceive in a confused w ay.” Similarly, in his D e mu­
tationibus monetarum he intends, he says, “ to write dow n concerning this matter what
seems to me must be said fundamentally, follow ing the philosophy o f Aristotle.
I make no rash statements, but submit everything to the judgment o f my seniors.
Perhaps my words w ill rouse them to settle the truth o f this matter, so that the
experts may all be o f one mind, and come to a conclusion which shall be profitable
both to princes and subjects, and indeed to the state as a w hole.” 1 A lso, in his D e
proportionibus proportionum he hopes that what he says w ill stimulate students “ to
further inquiry.” 2 He goes on to say that “ K now ledge o f these matters should
prove a great help, not only for (understanding) ratio o f ratios but also for the
secrets and difficult labors o f philosophy.” He expresses equally high aims in his
Livre de divinations.2 A fter saying that he hopes to expose the foolishness, wicked­
ness, and danger o f employing the magical arts to seek out “ hidden matters or the
hazards and fortunes o f the future,” and particularly the danger “ to those o f high
estate, such as princes and lords to whom appertains the governm ent o f the com­
monwealth,” he then goes on to say that he has written the book in French so that
laymen may understand it. Then he says, “ A t a former time I w rote in Latin on
this matter and if any man wishes to attack what I shall say let him do it openly
and with set argument, not in mere slander, and let him write against it and I shall
reply so far as I am able, for in such wise w e may arrive at the truth. In any case
what I say is submitted to the correction o f those whom it concerns.”
I am inclined to think that the Table o f Chapters that follows the proemium is
genuine and that it was written by Oresme. It is in ten o f the fourteen manuscripts,
and in the best representatives o f each o f the major groups o f manuscripts, al­
though to be sure it appears at the end o f the text in M S B . W e should note in

1 C. Johnson, The D e Moneta o f Nicholas tionum” and “ A d pauca respicientes,” ed. of E.

Oresme, 1. I have altered the Johnson trans­ Grant, 136, lines 14-17. * I b id .,iz $ . chert, 5*.
lation somewhat. 3 G . W. Coopland, Nicole Oresme and the 5 Ibid., 50-5 2. Cf. the similar structure of the 6 Traitie de Vespere, ed. o f McCarthy, 95-100.
2 Nicole Oresme, “ D e proportionibus propor­ Astrologers, 51. D e communicatione idiomatum, ed. o f E. Bor-

IV
The Manuscripts
and the Text o f the
D e configurationibus
A. Relationships between Manuscripts
It is comm only thought that Oresme’s D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum
circulated in a very restricted w ay and that the shorter D e latitudinibus formarum
was much more significant for the spread o f the configuration doctrine. W e have
already examined the knowledge o f both o f these treatises exhibited in the works o f
fourteenth- and fifteenth-century authors in Introduction II, and some but no
great preponderance o f the concepts o f the D e latitudinibusformarum over those o f
the D e configurationibus was shown. One further basis for the comparison o f their
relative popularity is the number o f extant manuscripts o f each. It is clear that on
this basis the D e latitudinibusformarum did indeed outstrip the longer text in popu­
larity, there being at least twenty-seven manuscripts and three editions.1 Still, my
search for manuscripts o f the longer tract has turned up fourteen manuscripts o f
the D e configurationibus, a number indicative o f the considerable popularity that the
w ork enjoyed, and confirming my earlier description o f the fairly extensive know l­
edge o f some o f the basic positions o f the tract by later authors.
In comparing the fourteen manuscripts o f the D e configurationibus for the prepa­
ration o f this text, I came to the conclusion that there w ould be little use in making
a conventional schema in which the relationship o f the various manuscripts w ould
be precisely illustrated, for it turned out that there w ould be far too many arbitrary
assumptions o f missing manuscripts and the result w ould have been highly artificial.
Furthermore, as we shall note, several scribes seem to have shifted from one manu­
script to another as their model, so much so that the crossing lines o f influence o f
the fourteen manuscripts o f the D e configurationibus w ould look more like the w ir­
ing diagram o f a telephone circuit than an intelligible description o f the family
1 T o the list o f manuscripts cited in The Univ. o f Chicago Library cod. 3, 411-421:;
Science o f Mechanics, 397-98, we can add Seville, and Univ. Bibl. Freiburg i. Breisgau 238, z t -
Bibl. Colomb. 5.1.10 and 7.7.13, i3 ir -3 2 v ; 2ov (with commentary).
142
Manuscripts of the D e configurationibus 143
relationships o f these manuscripts. Still, the collation o f the manuscripts did reveal
some significant dependencies. The most general alignment o f manuscripts produces
tw o major traditions: (I) B V F M S G and (II) A E D L N P , w ith manuscript C now
agreeing with one tradition and now with the other, and /con stitu tin g a paraphrase
and commentary falling outside o f either tradition (although perhaps somewhat
closer to the first). But there is a complicating factor in such easy division o f the
manuscripts. A s in the case o f C (but not to the same extent), some o f the manu­
scripts (certainly A N M and perhaps others) show evidence o f both traditions,
although they seem to depend heavily on the tradition in which they have been
classified above.
The fourteenth-century manuscripts B V o f the first tradition seem, on the whole,
to yield the best text in the great m ajority o f instances o f divergency, w ith manu­
script B being somewhat better than V . Loosely tied to B V is the separate sub­
tradition o f M F . These tw o manuscripts are virtually identical in their readings. M
has been considered to be later than F by paleographical experts, but evidence
from their versions o f the D e configurationibus casts some doubt on this conclusion.
Certainly M is not merely a copy o f F , for M contains instances o f a more complete
reading (closer to that shared by the other manuscripts); and in one instance where
M diverges from F , it resembles the reading o f P (see the descriptions o f F and M
included below w ith the Sigla). The close relationship o f M and F w ould be most
simply explained if w e took M to be earlier than F , i.e., before 1410. Manuscript
S, o f the late fourteenth century, presents a somewhat different sub-tradition o f the
same basic group as B V . Its usefulness is somewhat impaired b y the fact that it
tends to make short w ork o f the many textual quotations, giving only the first tw o
or three words, follow ed by an “ et cetera.” Manuscript C o f the fifteenth century
belongs almost equally to Tradition I and Tradition II, although perhaps leaning
somewhat more closely to Tradition II, for it has a special relationship w ith A ,
w ith which it agrees on occasion against all o f the manuscripts (see Sigla under C ).
The scribe o f C was particularly ignorant o f the intent o f the author and he often
makes stupid errors in reading the w rong w o rd s; at the same time, it is a complete
copy and not entirely useless for textual purposes. Finally for Tradition I, mention
can be made o f G , executed in the sixteenth century. It is quite carefully done (but
tends occasionally to give the sense rather than the letter o f redundant passages).
It has a special affinity to S. For the most part, in staying close to B V , I have ac­
cepted the readings o f Tradition I against those o f Tradition II. There are, how ­
ever, instances when there is good reason to prefer Tradition II (see, for example,
I.xxxiv, lines 9-13, where the reading o f the second tradition seems necessary to
make the main point o f the chapter; and also, Ill.x ii, lines 28-30, where the reading
o f Tradition II presents the only cogent description o f the example intended; and a
number o f less crucial places can be detected by running through the variants).
Tradition II is best represented by manuscripts L P , although they are not the
earliest copies. L is a beautifully written manuscript completed in 1428, sometime
 144 Introduction
prior to N ovem ber 16 (see Sigla under L ). Manuscript P is perhaps somewhat later
than L and not so carefully written. It has a special affinity with the earlier manu­
script M , at least through I.xxxiii where the latter comes into agreement w ith the
first tradition. There are also occasions when A agrees most closely with manu­
script N . A proved to be particularly useful in locating the various passages from
other writers quoted by Oresme, since it often has marginal references to the cor­
rect passages. There is some evidence that this manuscript was copied between
1395 and 1398 (see the Sigla under A ). Its affiliate N was prepared sometime prior
to 1417, as w e can deduce from a note on folio zzzv (see the Sigla under FT). The
scribe o f N clearly had available to him a manuscript o f the first tradition as well,
since on occasion TV’s readings concur with those o f the first tradition rather than
those o f the second. A n d w e even find tw o diverging readings, belonging to both
traditions, included in N . Little need be said about the brief fragment D o f the late
fourteenth century, except to remark that it has significant agreement with L .
Finally in connection with Tradition II, note can be taken o f the partial copy E ,
which is in general agreement with A P and particularly with L . It is perhaps the
earliest o f the manuscripts in this tradition. It is regrettable that it contains less
than half o f the text.
Manuscript J is especially notable for the long addition to I.xiv w hich w e have
included in Appendix III. / is useless for the purpose o f textual construction.
In the variant readings accompanying the text, I have included virtually all o f
the readings from B and L throughout the w hole text and those o f V through
Il.xxxvii. The only exceptions are orthographic variations such as those noted
below. For the preface, the complete readings o f all o f the manuscripts are given.
For the succeeding list o f chapter headings, the readings o f all manuscripts which
include the list are given. In I.i, I.ii, and I.iii, the readings o f all manuscripts but J
are included, and some appropriate readings o f J are also noted. A fter this point,
certain o f the manuscripts have been partially discarded, in the sense that not all o f
their readings have been reported, but only those where divergencies appear in the
manuscripts whose complete readings are being reported and particularly those
which have some conceivable interest for textual problems. T h e manuscripts used
selectively to report divergencies have been enclosed within square brackets.
Hence, for example, the notation B V A P F L D [E N M C G S ] in the beginning o f
the variant readings for I.v means that all o f the readings o f manuscripts B V A -
P F L D for that chapter are given, while only crucial readings o f E N M C G S are
reported. From I.vi on, I have given at the head o f the readings only the sigla o f
the manuscripts whose complete readings are being reported for the given chapter.
The sigla o f other manuscripts are o f course given in their appropriate places with
the crucial divergencies. Incidentally, the patterns o f manuscripts from I.xv through
I.xxv follow very closely those established for the preceding chapters and I have
accordingly presented fewer instances o f the full alignment o f manuscripts in those
chapters. H owever, after I. xxv and for the remaining sixty-eight chapters I
Manuscripts of the D e configurationibus 145
have presented a larger number o f full alignments o f manuscripts, since the
relationships o f the manuscripts appear somewhat more scrambled in the later
chapters.
A s I mentioned earlier, I have made no attempt to note all o f the orthographic
variations from manuscript to manuscript, or even within a given manuscript. N or
have I attempted to record all o f the substitutions o f ergo for igitur or vice versa, al­
though many have been presented as samples. I have adopted certain spellings
throughout the text without reporting the variant readings, the most important
being intensio in place o f intentio or intencio, although the latter are exceedingly
comm on in the manuscripts, even in those manuscripts which fo r the most part
have intensio. A lso, pulcher has been used instead o f pulcer (and similarly for other
words o f this root) w ithout reporting the wide variation in the m anuscripts; the
same is true o f my use o f sicut instead o f sicud, aggregatus for agregatus, andymmo instead
o fymo. I have preferred linearis to linealis and only in a few cases have I noted the
variants (e.g., see I.iv, line 2). I have also used equedistansi written as one w ord,
instead o f the more correct equidistans (or eque distans as in P ), primarily because it is
the overwhelm ing favorite o f the scribes. For the same reason I have adopted the
medieval forms exalatio for exhalatio, extasis for ecstasis, exto for exsto, extinguo for
exstinguo, and so on. Similarly I have adopted dyapason, dyapente, and dyatessaron in­
stead o f the correct forms which have “ i” instead o f “ y.” This is also true of’ymagina-
tio (and the other words o f the same root), for in this case all manuscripts use the
“ y.” In reverse, it is true o f simpathia instead o f the more correct sympathia. But, for
the convenience o f the reader, I have chosen the “ ti” reading before vow els (as
manuscript A generally does) instead o f the more common “ ci.” I have not reported
the variant forms o f the same number, as when in capitulo octavo, octavo sometimes
appears as 8°, sometimes as 8V0, and sometimes as 8, although o f course whenever
a manuscript has a different number that variant has been reported; or as in the
table o f chapter headings when the usual form is 3m, 4m, etc., and some manuscripts
(as B E C ) simply have 3, 4, etc. (see variant reading for I.o, line 13).
I must also refer briefly to the many small difficulties that editors know so well,
as when huius and huiusmodi are abbreviated alike and the editor must choose be­
tween them w ithout know ing the scribe’s intent, or as when the form qualita TP
is used by the scribe (most often to stand for qualitatis but sometimes also for quali­
tatum), or when the editor sees that in a particular place some manuscripts have
ista, others have ilia and still others simply have ia, which, as the variants show,
could stand for either ilia or ista. A similar case is e9°, which rarely is expanded
but sometimes is read econverso and sometimes econtrario\ and I usually adopt the
former reading (but see II. 1, line 29). Generally in such cases I have tried to alert
the reader to ambiguities in the readings. Readings that I believe to be scribal
additions to Oresm e’s original text are enclosed in square brackets. Occasionally,
I have added within angle brackets readings that I think Oresme originally
had or intended but which have dropped out. In reporting the variants, I have
 146 Introduction
used the common system o f abbreviations used in other volumes in this series.2
Each diagram has a legend indicating the manuscript source or sources o f that
diagram. But we can say generally that the drawings in B L S G are virtually com­
plete. The figures in B are those which most often correspond to the text but those
in the other three manuscripts are also very good. C has about one half o f the figures
and ] about one third. T h e fragment D has five figures, and E and N only one
apiece. The remaining manuscripts ( V M N F P ) omit the figures. O n occasion,
I have had to correct the figures or add some lines or letters. In each such case, I
have indicated m y correction or addition.
I have punctuated, capitalized, and paragraphed the text as I thought the meaning
demanded. Furthermore, for convenience and ease o f reading, I have rendered the
letters marking the geometrical figures by capitals, although they are minuscules
in the manuscripts.
In my English translation I have stayed close to the Latin text. In the case o f
biblical passages, I have used the elegant sentences o f the D ouay version except
when emphasis has to be placed on phrases or words in Oresme’s argument and
such w ords or phrases are obscured by the D ouay translation. In the instances o f
Oresme’s quotation from classical Latin authors, I have, when possible, used the
Loeb translations, emending them in literal fashion when it seemed necessary to
reveal more exactly the meaning that Oresme placed on them. It w ill be noticed
that I have made reference in the footnotes o f the English translation to the precise
passages o f classical authors quoted by Oresme. W here there is some particular
textual point in question, I have referred the reader to the Commentary. Generally,
m y citations to classical authors are unambiguous, but perhaps I should point out
that references to Pliny’s Natural History are to book and section numbers (as in
the Teubner and Loeb Library versions) and not to b ook and chapter numbers. The
biblical passages from the O ld Testament have been compared w ith the critical
edition initiated by the order o f Pius X I (see the Bibliography, Biblia sacra iuxta
etc.) for the books so far published in that edition. Similarly, the passages from the
N ew Testament have been compared with those available in the edition o f W ords­
w orth and W hite (see the Bibliography, Novum Testamentum etc.). Other passages
from the V ulgate have been compared w ith the edition o f Hetzenauer (see the
Bibliography, Biblia sacra vulgate editionis).
B. Sigla and Descriptions o f Manuscripts o f the
D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum
The follow ing descriptions are listed in the alphabetical order o f the sigla used
to abbreviate them. Hence the manuscripts are not listed in the order o f their im-
2 See particularly my Archimedes in the M iddle Ages, Vol. 1, xvii.
Manuscripts of the D e configurationibus 147
portance, since the sigla were chosen for the convenience o f the editor in preparing
the text. For the m ost part, the letters were chosen to indicate the name o f the
library, the collection, or the manuscript’s location: A for the Arsenal, B for
Bruges, C for Chigi, and so on. M y preliminary remarks in this chapter have in­
dicated the relative value o f the various manuscripts. Specimens o f the various
manuscripts have been included in the plates. I have photographs o f all manuscripts
and have also personally consulted all but D and E . These and the other manu­
scripts used in the preparation o f this volum e have been listed alphabetically by city
in a separate index. Incidentally, I have not given the incipit, explicit, and colophon
o f the text as they appear in each manuscript in these descriptions below , since
they are given in the variant readings at the beginning and the end o f the text. On
the other hand, when there is an additional title given in a table o f contents in a
codex, I have reported that addition here below.
1. A = Paris, Bibliotheque de 1’Arsenal 522
D ate: probably between 1395 and 1398. See Martin’s description below.
Section used: ir-29r.
General description: H. Martin, Catalogue des manuscrits de la Bibliotheque de
V Arsenal, V ol. 1, 370-72. Cf. L. Thorndike, A History of Magic and Experimental
Science, V ol. 3, 746-47. Martin remarks on the question o f dating (p. 372): “ Ecri-
ture du X I V e au X V e siecle, sur 2 col. Ce manuscrit a du etre ecrit de 1395 a
1398. Pierre d’A illy y est designe (fol. 56) comme eveque du P uy en V elay; si le
manuscrit avait ete ecrit posterieurement a 13 98, Pierre d’A illy eut sans doute ete
designe sous le nom d’eveque de Cambrai. II avait ete nomme eveque du Puy en
1395. Peut-etre ce manuscrit n’est-il que la copie d’un autre ecrit entre 1395 et
1398. E n tout cas, il doit etre de bien peu posterieur a cette derniere date— D e la
bibliotheque du college de Navarre. A u fol. 187V0 cet ex-libris: Iste liber est
librarie parve Artistarum in regali collegio N a verre (sic). Reliure enpeaupauvre.”
The contents o f the manuscripts are listed by M artin and Thorndike. But note that
Henry o f Hesse’s Questio de cometa (98HS r-io6 r) is ascribed in the catalogue to
Oresme and that Symon de Castello’s D e proportionibus velocitatum in motibus
(i26r-69r) is w rongly identified as b y Oresme in the colophon, as is John o f
Holland’ s D e instanti (169^87^.
Special characteristics o f text: For the most part, appears to have “ ci” before
vow els instead o f “ ti.” Tends to replace ac, et, and vel by sive; and vel, sive, and
seu by aut. Uses the spellings lignea and lignearis for linea and linearis throughout.
Occasionally replaces enim by vero and quia by quoniam. Has intendo (or intentio)
but also intensio. Its readings are very close to those o f P until I.xxxvi. In tw o cases
(I.xxxii,lines 24-25,and I.xxxiii, line 2) is like N against all other manuscripts.
A fter I.xxxv, A seems to abandon the second tradition and its readings are closer
to the first tradition until Ill.v ii, line 34, when it shifts back to agreement with N .
 148 Introduction
One other indication that the scribe o f A had simultaneous access to manuscripts
in both traditions is found in II.ii, line 9, where he includes both o f the readings.
A begins to give the titles o f the chapters with I.xxxvi and continues to do so
through Ill.v ii. A has a good many marginal references to citations, and in this
respect is like B . N o figures are included.
2. B = Brugge (Bruges), Stadsbibliotheek 486
D ate: 14c.
Section used: 159^73^
General description: L ’A bbe A . D e P oorter: Catalogue des manuscrits de la B i-
bliotheque Publique de la ville de Bruges, 5 54-5 6. Cf. the old catalogue, P. J. Laude,
Catalogue des manuscrits de la Bibliotheque Publique de Bruges, 422. Oresm e’s text
appears in the D e Poorter catalogue under the rubric (p. 555): “ 8. Tractatus A l­
berti in Mathematica^ but D e Poorter correctly identifies it as Oresm e’s D e uni­
formitate et difformitate intentionum, the ascription to Albert being taken from
Laude’s catalogue. Incidentally, Laude also dates the manuscript as fourteenth-
century but he does not further identify this item, except to note that it contains
a table follow ing the w ork. The manuscript comes from the Cistercian A bbey
o f Dunes. The contents are listed by D e Poorter. It is notable that it contains
several works o f Albertus Magnus, Alfarabi’s D e scientiis, and A lkin di’s D e radiis
stellarum.
Special characteristics o f text: A s I have noted in the introduction to this chap­
ter, B is the best o f the manuscripts, although it is defective itself in a few places,
as for example in the omission o f intensionum in lines 2-3 o f the proemium; the
omission o f utiliter in line 7; the addition o f non in I.xi, line 5; the omission o f
I.xii, lines 11 -1 3 ; the mistaken reading o fplanete for plante in I.xxiv, line 6; the
omission o f celi in Il.i, line 28, and so on. In general, I have adopted the spellings
and w ord order o f B , its usage o f ergo and igitur (but not always), and some com­
mon orthographic variations not noted in the variant readings. Incidentally, B
uses intensio for the most part instead o f intentio or intendo. It has sicut instead o f
sicud most o f the time. The figures are quite complete in B ; the chapter hea­
dings are added at the end o f the text rather than after the proem ium as they
are in most o f the manuscripts. I have suggested in the introduction that this
manuscript is quite close to V . The figures are complete and sound.
3. C = Vatican City, Bibl. V at., Chigi E. IV . 109
Date: 15 c.
Section used: 9 7r-i 59r (new pagination); 8yr-i49r (old pagination).
General description: D r. Anneliese Maier has kindly written to me that, in her
opinion, C is certainly o f the fifteenth century. It should also be noted that in
Manuscripts of the D e configurationibus 149
addition to several works o f Albertus Magnus, it has what appears to be a part
o f the commentary o f Gaetanus on the Regule o f Heytesbury (77r-86v, n.p.) and
some Notule o f Paul o f Pergola (87r-94v, n. p.), and both Gaetanus and Paul are
to be dated in the fifteenth century. Other works o f interest contained by this
codex are a Tractatus de proportionibus (2i8r-37r, n. p.) and G eorge de Pera’s
Questio de additione qualitatis ad qualitatem (23 7V-48V).
Special characteristics o f te x t: A lthough C is eclectic in follow ing one tradition
and then the other, it is particularly close to L at times (see I.xi, lines 26-27, 31,
41-42; I.xxxvii, line 4; Il.xxi, line 19; Il.xxii, line 18; Il.xxiii, line 4 1; Il.xxiv, lines
27, 28, 29), and in one case (Il.xxvi, line 19) it agrees w ith A in a particularly
absurd reading (in illis gentibus for intelligentibus) against all the other manuscripts.
In Part III, Chapters IILiii, IIL iv, III.v, Ill.v i, Ill.v ii, 67tends to agree w ith F M P .
There are many misreadings in C that change the sense o f the text. For exam ple:
I.i, line 14, the reading o f nisi instead o f enim; line 38, 70instead o f 20°; I.ii, line 1,
velocitate instead o f latitudine', I.iv, line 37 , finitorum instead o f fictorum; I.xxv, line
2 5, acute filio instead o f a circe filio ; I.xxvi, line 38, angularis instead o f amigdalaris;
I.xxxv, lines 7-8, meliore quantitate instead o f media quantitate, and so on. The
figures are included for Part I only and they are rather crudely drawn.
4. D — Erfurt, Stadtbibliothek, Amplonianus Q . 298
Date: late 14c.
Section used: 63r-64r.
General description: W . Schum, Beschreibendes Ver^eichniss, 537-38. Cf. Thorn­
dike, A History o f Magic and Experimental Science, V ol. 3, 745-46. Contents are
listed by Schum. Contains in addition to the brief fragment o f the Oresme text,
the D e latitudinibus formarum, three o f Henry o f Hesse’s works, a tract o f Johan­
nes de Wasia, and others.
Special characteristics o f text: This fragment contains only parts o f Li, I.ii,
I.iii, I.iv, I.v, I.xi, I.xii and I.xiii (titles only), I.xiv, I.xv, I.xvi, I.xvii (title only).
This fragment is generally similar to L A N E P and particularly close to L ; i.e., it
agrees w ith L in every divergent reading and only with L in some. There are
only five figures.
5. E = Erfurt, Stadtbibliothek, Amplonianus Q. 150
D ate: end o f 14c.
Section used: i r - i 4 V .
General description: Schum, Beschreibendes Ver^eichniss, 4 11-13 . O ur item ap­
pears to have been written by Paul von Geldern, who was copying in Vienna
about 1387 (cf. p. 346). The contents are listed by Schum. It contains a number
o f pieces by Henry o f Hesse, among other works.
 150 Introduction
Special characteristics o f te x t: This incomplete copy ends in II. vi after gratia in
line 13. Has both intensio and intentio as spellings. Often has sicud. It is probably
the earliest o f the copies in Tradition II, and seems to have been one o f the manu­
scripts consulted by the scribe o f L (see Sigla under L ). It is generally similar to
A L P N . Has only a single figure.
6 . F = Florence, Biblioteca Medicea Laurenziana, Ashburnham 210 (Paoli 136)
D ate: 15c (D e configurationibus dated in colophon as 1410 at Paris).
Section used: 101V-29V.
General description: L. Delisle, Noticesetextraitsdesmanuscrits, V ol. 32 (1886),
4 9 -5 1, C. Paoli, I Codici Ashburnhamiani, Fasc. 3, 225-27, and L. Thorndike, A
History o f Magic and Experitnental Science, V ol. 3, 744-45. Contents described
by Delisle, Paoli, and Thorndike. Has several works o f Oresme and Henry o f
Hesse, and Peter de M aricourt’s D e magnete (here attributed to Henry o f Hesse).
Table o f contents on folio 2V.
Special characteristics o f text: Exceedingly close to M . But M cannot be a
straight copy o f F since it contains a number o f textual passages omitted by F
(see I.x, lines 7-8; I.xiv, lines 44-45, 51-52; I.xxxvii, line 12; Il.i, line 30; II.iv,
lines 34-35). Hence, either M is earlier than F or it was copied somewhat more
faithfully from the same manuscript as F . N ote also that M diverges from F in
I.xl, line 26. F , although beautifully written, is quite careless in its omissions.
A n extreme case is the short chapter I.x where it has omitted tw o lines (7-8) on
its ow n and four others (10-12, 16-17) along with M . A lthough F M most often
align w ith the first tradition, we find that sometimes they concur with P (see
I.xxxiii, lines 3-4; Il.ii, line 42; Il.iii, lines 12, 14; Il.xxix, lines 8-9; II.xxx, lines
61-63; etc0- -^has the peculiarity o f giving the chapter title first and then follow ­
ing it with the chapter number. There are no figures in F . 7*
7. G = Groningen, Bibliotheek der Rijksuniversiteit M S 103
Date: 16c.
Section used: 68r~95v, ii9 r-2 3 v . These tw o sections o f the Oresme text are
separated by the Perspectiva o f Roger Bacon (96r-i i8v), which has been bound
out o f place. This is indicated by the small inked pagination that runs from page
56 (on folio 95v) to page 57 (on folio ii9 r). The Oresme piece had a successive
numeration from 1 to 64 on the top o f the inner margins on both rectos and
versos.
General description: H. Brugmans, Catalogus codicum... Groninganae biblio­
thecae, 36-41. Contains a mixture o f medieval and Renaissance mathematical
items. There is a table o f contents, folios ir~3r, in a hand o f the seventeenth
century, which describes the Oresme text: “ D e intensione qualitatum magistri
Manuscripts of the D e configurationibus H i
Nicolai Oraime, alias Tractatus gloriosus, cum mathematicis demonstrationibus
contra radices artis m agice.”
Special characteristics o f te x t: G is a very intelligent copy but often tends to
syncopate the text to remove redundancies, or what the scribe apparently felt to
be useless additions, as when the citations o f other authors are multiplied (e.g.,
Il.xxxii, lines 41-43 ; ILxxxiii, lines 32—34, 48-50). H owever, when the scribe o f
G does include Oresm e’s citations o f earlier authors, he tends to add to the text
the specific chapter numbers where they were apparently missing in the original
text (e.g., I.xxv, lines 18-19; I.xxix, line 15; I.xxxi, line 22; I.xxxiii, line 18;
and so on). G seems to be closely related to S, as in the case o f I.iv, lines 16-17,
where G is the only manuscript with S to omit a given phrase. Compare also
I.xviii, lines 4-5, where a reading has been modified, apparently from V , in exactly
the same manner in S and G . Both manuscripts resemble V in their readings,
and in one case G agrees with V against all the other manuscripts (I.xxi, line 35),
although C in this case is somewhat similar to them both. The figures are very
carefully executed in G and are virtually complete.
8. J = Florence, Biblioteca Nazionale Centrale, Fondo Conventi Soppressi
J.IX.26
D a te : late 15 c (about 1500?).
Section used: 1 3r—3 5r.
General description: A . A . Bjornbo, in Bibliotheca mathematica, 3. Folge, V ol.
12 (1911-12 ), 97-99. Bjornbo fails to identify the tract as by Oresme. Cf. M.
Clagett, Archimedes in the Middle Ages, V ol. 1, xxi, 389. Contains also Oresm e’s
Algorismus proportionum (37^45 r) and some geometrical fragments bearing the
name Bachon Alardus (46^5 5r), and other items.
Special characteristics o f te x t: J has essentially a paraphrase of, and commen­
tary on, the Oresme text. Its most interesting addition to the text is a p ro o f in
Chapter I.xiv that the figures whose altitudes (i.e., ordinates) are proportional to
those o f a semicircle are not themselves segments o f a circle (see Appendix III).
The text in J is essentially worthless for the establishment o f Oresme’s text.
There are indications that the compositor o f J had a manuscript o f the first tra­
dition before him (e.g., see I.o, line 2; I.i, lines 5 and 11). Titles o f chapters are
missing and the chapters are accordingly run together without adequate indica­
tions o f breaks in the text except for the indications o f the beginnings o f the sec­
ond and third parts o f the text and occasional paragraph breaks that coincide
with the beginnings o f chapters. A b out one half o f the figures are included in /.
They are well drawn but many o f them are out o f place.
 I 52 Introduction
9. L = London, British Museum, Sloane 2156
Date: 1428.
Section used: 159f~93 V.
General description: L. Thorndike, A History o f Magic and Experimental
Science, V ol. 3, 745. This section was presumably copied in 1428, since the colo­
phon o f the D e configurationibus merges w ith the title o f Henry o f Hesse’s D e
habitudine causarum so dated (193V): “ Finit de configurationibus reverendi doc-
toris magistri N icolai orem. E t tractatus de habitudine causarum et influxu nature
communis respectu inferiorum venerabilis doctoris M. hinrici de hassia subtilis
speculatoris incipit, 1428°, i6 t0 die novem bris.” T h e codex contains w orks o f
Roger Bacon, Arnald o f Villanova, Aquinas, W itelo, Oresme, and Henry o f
Hesse.
Special characteristics o f te x t: This is the best manuscript o f the second tra­
dition and is beautifully written. Has “ ti” before vowels instead o f “ ci.” Has
intensio instead o f intentio, sometimes pulcritudo and sometimes pulchritudo. Its
scribe seems to have had available more than one manuscript in its tradition since
he often cites tw o possible readings and one o f these appears to have been i f or a
close copy o f E (e.g., see I.xxiv, line 23; I.xxvi, lines 20, 38; I.xxxii, line 8; and
I.xl, line 2). T h e figures are almost complete.10
* now with one manuscript, now with another. W e have already pointed out that
10. M ~ Paris, Bibliotheque Nationale, Fonds latin 14579
Date: 15 c.
Section used: 1 8r-4ov (old pagination) = 15r-3 jv (new pagination).
General description: L. Delisle, in Bibliotheque de I E cole des Chartes, 6 ser., V ol.
5 (1869), 27. Cf. C. Johnson, The D e fnoneta o f Nicholas Oresme, xiii-xiv. Delisle
dates the manuscript as fifteenth century. Similarly, Mile. M .-T . d’A lvern y has
kindly written me that in her opinion the section containing this w ork o f Ores­
me was “ written toward the middle o f the fifteenth century.” Johnson dates it as
the end o f the fourteenth century, as does E. Borchert, D ie Lehre der Bewegung bei
Nicolaus Oresme, 20. It contains works by Petrus de Alliaco, Oresme, Henry o f
Hesse, Jean de Gerson, Ockham , Nicolaus de Lyra, and Albertus Magnus. The
table o f contents (p. 5, o.p.) gives the follow ing description o f the D e configuratio­
nibus'. “ 3. Tractatus magistri nicholai oresme de uniformitate et difformitate in­
tentionum continens tres partes principales quarum prima et secunda partes ha­
bent 4ota capitula. Tertia est xiii capitulorum.”
Special characteristics o f te x t: I have indicated in my description o f F that M
is quite close to F but still it is not copied from F . I f M is indeed from the mid­
dle o f the fifteenth century, then it and F were both copied from the same manu­
script. I f M is earlier than 1410, then it is possible for it to have been the source
o f F . M includes no figures.
Manuscripts of the D e configurationibus 153
11. N = Paris, Bibliotheque Nationale, Fonds latin 145 80
D a te : late 14c or early 15 c.
Section used: 3jr~ 6 ov.
General description: Delisle, in Bibliotheque de TEcole des Chartes, 6 ser., V ol. 5
(1869), 27, merely says fifteenth century, and notes that it contains w orks o f
Petrus de Alliaco, Oresme, Henry o f Hesse, Ockham, Rob. H elkot (Holkot?),
Nic. de Lyra, and so on. Johnson, The D e moneta ofNicholasOresme, xiii, mentions
that “ it belonged to a Parisian theologian Germanus de Rungiaco, from whose
executors it was bought for 48 sols.; and their signatures to a receipt for the
price, dated4 A ugust 1417, are still to be seen on f. 222V.” Mile. M .-T . d ’A lvern y
writes that it is a composite codex o f several manuscripts and several scribes.
“ The part which occupies folios 1 to 60, on parchment, has been written to­
ward 1400, b y a scribe w ho was probably Parisian.” O n the verso o f the un­
numbered page, the old table o f contents describes the Oresme text as follow s:
“ Tractatus a magistro nicholao oresme de configuratione qualitatum cuius sunt
tres partes principales. Prima 37, secunda 46, tertia 58.”
Special characteristics o f tex t: There is reason to believe that the scribe o f N
had access to manuscripts in both traditions, since it skips about in its agreement
it sometimes agrees very closely with A , and often with A , both o f Tradition II.
A t times it combines the readings o f both traditions (e.g., see I.o, line 2, where
it has veterum vel meam\ III.x, line 29,partibus a paribus, and so on). Generally has
“ ci” before vow els instead o f “ ti.” Has intensio instead o f intendo. N ote that the
scribe o f A/adds comments calling approbative attention to Oresme’s opposition
to assigning the powers o f demons as causes (see variant readings to Il.xxxiii,
lines 55-57, and Il.xxxviii, line 58). N often replaces quoniam by quia. N o figures
are given in N .
12. P = Bibliotheque Nationale, Fonds latin 7371
Date: 15 c.
Section used: 2i4r-66r.
General description: Catalogus...Bibliothecae Regis, V ol. 4, 348. Both Harry
Caplan, Mediceval A rtes Predicandi, 18, and M . Curtze, D ie mathematischenSchriften
des Nicole Oresme, 4, date it as fifteenth century. Mile. d’A lvern y writes that the
part o f the codex including the Oresme text appears to her to be from the sec­
ond half o f the fifteenth century. There is a wide variety o f religious, theological,
and philosophical works in this codex, including Oresme’s D e proportionibus pro­
portionum (269^78 v) and his A r s sermocinandi (279^90^. In a table o f contents on
folios 62V-63r, the text o f the D e configurationibus is described as follow s: “ Trac­
tatus editus a magistro nicolao oresme de latitudinibus formarum cuius sunt
tres partes principales. Prima quadraginta capitulorum de figuracione etpotencia
 Introduction Manuscripts of the D e configurationibus 155
154

uniformitatis et difformitatis. 216. Secunda de figuracione et potencia successi­ Special characteristics o f text: A very good text in Tradition I, quite close to
vorum continens quadraginta tria (sic) capitulorum folio 236. Tertia tredecim B. Has both intentio (or intendo) and intensio; has sicud throughout. Uses brevior for
capitulorum de aquisicione et mensura qualitatis et velocitatis. 249.” minor throughout. Occasionally adds et cetera at the end o f a chapter (and I have
Special characteristics o f text: This was the manuscript used in H. Wieleitner’s ignored these in the variant readings). A t times usesprecedente instead o fprecedenti
fragmentary text o f the D e configurationibus; see Bibliotheca Mathematica) 3. Folge, for the ablative case. Uses proportionabilis instead o f proportionalis (see I.x, lines
V ol. 14 (1913-14), 193-243, and also the manuscript used by Duhem in his first 8, 15-16). In the battle o f igitur versus ergo, V shows some preference for igitur.
exposition ofthis text, Etudes sur Leonard de Vinci, V ol. 3,37 5-98. (Duhem checked A s in the case o f B , there are a few bad readings to be rejected, e.g., I.v, line 15,
this against manuscript N in his later L e Systeme du monde, V ol. 7, 53 4 -6 1 ; and where V has minor instead o f the correct maior. See also V ’ s omission in I.xvii,
Z o u b o v used P M N in his partial translation [see Bibliography, Z ou b ov, Trak- lines 18-19, the mistaken reading o f uniformiter instead o f universaliter in I.xvii,
tat].) O n the w hole, it is a good manuscript o f Tradition II but not so good as L . line 29; the reading o f difformiter instead o f uniformiter in I.xvii, line 31; the read­
W e often find the spelling intentio, both piramides and pyramides, also often sicud. ing o ffigurabitur instead o f variabitur in I.xix, line 29; the omission o f I.xxiii, lines
W e have already noted its close agreement w ith A and on occasion with F M 20-21; the misreading o f calor for celo in I.xxiv, line 35; the omission in I.xxvi,
(see the descriptions o f A and F ). There are no figures in P . lines 37-39; the omission in Il.iv, lines 20-21; the omission in Il.viii, line 3. V ’ s
w orst feature is a complete lack o f figures. Miss Maier employed V in her dis­
cussion o f Oresm e’s w ork in A n der Gren^e, 289-343.
13. S = Basel, Oeffentliche Bibliothek der Universitat, F .III.31
D ate: late 14c.
Section used: ir-28r.
General description: P. Schmidt, “ D ie Bibliothek des ehemaligen Domini-
kanerklosters in Basel,” Basier Zeitschrift fiir Geschichte und Altertumskunde, V ol.
18 (1919), 160-254. Theobald, the Dominican Provincial in Germ any (1390-97),
gave this codex to the Basel Dominican Convent. Schmidt dates it as 14c
(p. 239). O n the unnumbered fly leaf in a late hand, w e read, “7 M agister Oreb
de uniformi et difformi.”
Special characteristics o f text: A good copy o f Tradition I. W e have noted G ’ s
close relation to it, and the relation o f both o f them to V . Both intensio and inten­
tio are found in S, also sicud and sicut. S often makes short w ork o f the many bibli­
cal quotations, usually giving only the first tw o or three words follow ed by
“ etc.” The drawings in S are good and virtually complete.14

14. V = Vatican City, Vat. lat. 3097

D ate: 14c.
Section used: ir-22 v.
General description: Miss Maier kindly writes to me that, on the basis o f ex­
amining the paper, watermarks, and hand, she has no doubt that the manuscript
belongs to the fourteenth century, adding “ sogar wahrscheinlich nicht dem
spatesten.” She remarks further that it is o f Italian origin. In addition to the D e
configurationibus, the codex contains an anonymous D e reprobatione iudicorum astro-
logie (23r-5ov), Bernard o f Verdun’s Super totam astrologiam (5 ir-78 v), a commen­
tary o f Alcabitius’ Isagoge (82r-io2r), an anonymous D e generatione et corruptione
(io3r~46r), a Summa naturalium (Albertus M agnus’ D e negocio naturali?) (i47r-
84r) and other philosophical material.
 [.Tractatus de configurationibus
qualitatum et motuum
secundum doctorem et magistrum
Nych. Orem\

[A T R E A T I S E O N T H E C O N F I G U R A T I O N
OF Q U A LITIE S A N D M OTIONS
B Y N IC O L E ORESME,
D O C T O R A N D MASTER]

U7
 Incipit prohemium [Proemium]

[I.o] Cum ymaginationem meam de uniformitate et difformitate inten­
sionum ordinare cepissem, occurrerunt michi quedam alia que huic pro­
posito interieci ut iste tractatus non solum exercitationi prodesset sed etiam
5 discipline. In quo ea que aliqui alii videntur circa hoc confuse sentire et ob­
scure eloqui ac inconvenienter aptare studui dearticulatim et clare tradere et
quibusdam aliis materiis utiliter applicare. Huius autem tractatus [de figura­
tione potentiarum et mensura difformitatum] tres sunt partes principales.
Prima pars est de figuratione et potentia uniformitatis et difformitatis quali-
o tatum permanentium, secunda de figuratione et potentia successivorum, ter­
tia de acquisitione et mensura qualitatum et velocitatum.
Capitula prime partis: Primum de continuitate intensionis. Secundum
de latitudine qualitatum. 3111 de longitudine qualitatum. 4m de quantitate
I.o. W hen I began to set in order m y1 conception o f the uniformity and dif-
formity o f intensities, certain other things occurred to me to add to the topic so
that the treatise m ight be useful not only as an exercise but also as a discipline.2 In
this tract I have attempted to treat clearly and distinctly those matters w hich some
other people seem to perceive in a confused way, to express obscurely, and to apply
in an unsuitable fashion, and I have attempted to apply them usefully to certain
other matters. This treatise [on the figuration o f powers and the measure o f dif-
formities]3 has three principal parts: (1) O n the figuration and pow er o f the uni­
formity and difformity o f permanent qualities. (2) O n the figuration and pow er o f
successive things. (3) O n the acquisition and measure o f qualities and velocities.
Chapters o f Part I: 1. O n the continuity o f intensity. 2. O n the latitude o f quali­
ties. 3. O n the longitude o f qualities. 4. O n the quantity o f qualities. 5. O n the figu-

F o r title. Title is omitted by V B A N C M f S D
E t incipit tractatus de configurationibus
qualitatum et motuum secundum doctorem
et magistrum Nych. Orem. L
Incipit tractatus magistri nicolay oresme de
configuracione qualitatum intytulatus quia
de figuracione et potencia uniformitatis
et difformitatis qualitatum permanentium
etiam successivarum nec non de acquisicio-
ne et mensura velocitatum in tribus parti­
bus huius tractatus pertractat ut patent F
Incipit tractatus de intensione qualitatum
editus per magistrum nicolaum Oraijme
qui vocatur etiam tractatus gloriosus G
Incipit tractatus venerabilis MagistriNyco-
lai Oresm de configurationibus q(qualita-
tum ?) E
D e latitudinibus formarum ab Oresme mg.
m. recentiori P , et postea in m. regulari'. “ Assit
ad inceptum sancta maria men”
I.o: Omnes M S S . usque ad lineam 12; ( excepto D
qui om. totum proemium); postea M S S A E L F -
M PCNBS
Proemium and 3.
1 [Incipit prohemium] V om. omnes alii M S S . 3 The bracketed title appears to have been a
1 Note that I have rejected the reading, “ the
sed cf. B , f . 1 j i v ubi in tabula capitulorum later addition, as it exists only in MSS A E L P .
view o f the ancients,” in the poorer tradition
legimus Prohemium See Introduction III.D, Passage N o. 5, and the
o f MSS A E L P (see the variant reading for
2 meam B V F M S G J om. C veterum A E L P later remarks indicating my belief that it was a
line 2). See the Commentary, Proemium, line
veterum vel meam N / difformitate et uni­ scribal addition.
2, for the significance o f ymaginationem meam.
formitate A E P
2 See the Commentary, Proemium, lines 4*7
9
8
2-3 intensionum om. B
3 ordinare cepissem tr. S / ordinare: ordi­
clare: clare dearticulatimque G / tradere: 10 secunda B F M S G secunda est V secunda
nasse G j cepissem: incepissem N / oc-
ostendere F , { ? ) M pars A E L N P C / successivorum A E L ­
curunt A / michi om. J . et tr. B post alia /
que om. E / huic om. F M 7 aliis om. F M / utiliter om. B l Huius autem P C S G successivarum B V F M N / tertia:
4 interieci lac. E , om. A intento necessaria E B V F M S G om. A E L P C Huius N tertia pars A E L P N C
intento sunt consona P interiecti J 7-8 [de... difformitatum] A E L P om. B V F - 11 qualitatis et velocitatis A E L P N C
4 -11 u t __ velocitatum: et cetera ut patebit M S G N (sed cf. B in tabula capitulorum, f . 12-76 Capitula__ difformis A E L F M P C N S
in tractatu J T73 r)> var. led ., C ap. I I L x i i i , lin. 3 1 - 3 2 de et B in fine, om. V J G et B in textu hic
4 solum: solummodo C/exercitationi: igno­ figuratione potentie et de qualitate per 12 Capitula__ Primum (x E C ) EFM CSB
rande exercitationum N cogitationi L predicta causa quorundam et mensura dif­ {sed post partis add. B Prohemium) Capitu­
5 q u o : que M / ea: illa N / aliqui: qui M ali­ formitatum C / figuratione: configuratione lum primum {om. A ) prime partis A P L N /
bi G / videntur circa hoc: de hoc videntur E Primum: Primum capitulum B S / Secun­
V / circa hoc tr. E post sentire / confuse 8 tres... principales B V F M N S G om. A E P - dum om. i ’ 2 B E C
sentire om. N confuse E sentire C et confuse C habet tres partes L 13 qualitatum1-2 B F M S et cf. I . i i . i qualitatis
9 pars est B V N G pars A E L P C est F M S A E L P N C I 3m om.S 3 B E C (hic et pro
sentire N et tr. N post eloqui / obscure: hoc
obscure A 9-10 qualitatum permanentium B V F M N - omnibus numeris; vide introductionem, p . 143)
6 convenienter C / aptari A j dearticulatim,.. S G om. A E L P C

158 H9
 i6 o Proemium 161
D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum

ration o f qualities. 6. O n the clarification o f the figures. 7. O n the suitability o f the

qualitatum. 5m de figuratione qualitatum. 6m de figurarum dearticulatione.
figures. 8. O n a right-triangular quality. 9. O n a quality triangular in another way.
15 7m de figurarum coaptatione. 8m de qualitate triangulari rectangula. 9m de
10. O n quadrangular quality. 11. O n uniform and difform quality. 12. O n these
qualitate aliter triangulari. io m de qualitate quadrangulari. n m de qualitate
same [qualities considered] in another way. 13. O n these same [qualities considered]
uniformi et difformi. i2 m de eisdem aliter. 13111 de eisdem adhuc alio modo.
in still another way. 14. O n simple difform difformity. 15. O n four kinds o f simple
i4 m de simplici difformitate difformi. 15111 de quatuor generibus simplicis
difform difformity. 16. O n composite difformity and how it has sixty-two species.
difformitatis difformis. i6 m de difformitate composita et qualiter habet 62
17. O n surface quality. 18. O n corporeal quality and its multiple figuration. 19. O n
20 species. 17m de qualitate superficiali. i8m de corporea qualitate et eius multi­
the figuration o f contraries. 20. O n one w ay o f speaking o f the difformity o f cur­
plici figuratione. 19111 de figuratione contrariorum. 2om de uno modo dicendi
vature. 21. O n a certain other way o f speaking o f curvature. 22. O n the diversity o f
de curvitate quantum ad eius difformitatem. 2 imde quodam alio m odo dicen­
actions arising from a variation in the difformity o f qualities. 23. O n the difference
di de curvitate. 22m de diversitate actionum que provenit ex variatione
in passions that is deducible from the prior statements. 24. O n the variety o f natu­
difformitatis qualitatum. 23111 de differentia passionum que potest ex pre-
ral powers dependent on configuration o f this kind. 2 5. H ow the causes o f certain
25 dictis erui. 24111 de varietate virtutum naturalium secundum huiusmodi con­
effects can be rendered b y means o f the prior statements. 26. O n the beauty o f the
figurationem. 25“ qualiter per predicta cause quorundam effectuum possunt
figuration o f qualities and its perfection, beauty being taken simply. 27. O n the
reddi. i 6m de pulchritudine figurationis qualitatum simpliciter dicta et eius
beauty o f figurations in relation to something else and on the causes o f natural
perfectione. z j m de pulchritudine figurationum ad aliud relata et de causis
friendship and hostility. 28. O n the occult causes o f certain natural actions. 29. O n
amicitie et inimicitie naturalis. 28m de causis occultis quarundam naturalium
the causes o f three kinds o f friendship [between individuals] o f the same species.
30 actionum. 29111 de causis triplicis amicitie in eadem specie. 30111 de causis
30. O n the causes o f the pleasure o f sense and [the pleasure] o f imagination. 31.
delectationis sensus et ymaginationis. 3 im de difformitate in potentiis cog-
O n difformity in cognitive powers. 32. O n the changing o f this difformity. 33. On
noscitivis. 32111 de mutatione istius difformitatis. 33111 de causis visionum
the causes o f visions o f the soul. 34. O n a certain impediment to visions. 35. O n
anime. 34m de quodam impedimento visionum. 35111 de quibusdam differen­
certain differences in visions. 36. O n a certain difference existing in souls that fore­
tiis visionum. 36™ de quadam differentia animarum previdentium. 37111 de
see. 37. On the difference o f things seen in relation to position. 38. O n the differ­
35 differentia rerum visarum in similitudine ad situm. 38111 de differentia v i­
ence in visions consequent upon distance. 39. O n enigmas in visions. 40. O n the
sionum secundum distantiam. 39111 de enigmatibus visionum. 40111 de causis
efficientibus visionum. efficient causes o f visions.
Chapters o f Part II: 1. O n the double difformity o f motion. 2. O n time: its na­
Capitula secunde partis: Primum de duplici difformitate motus. zm de
ture and its non-difformity. 3. O n the quantity o f the intensity o f velocity. 4. O n
tempore, quid sit et quod non est difforme. 3“ de quantitate intensionis
diverse ways o f [considering] velocity. 5. O n certain other successions in motion.
40 velocitatis. 4m de diversis modis velocitatis. 5m de quibusdam aliis succes­
6. O n difformity o f velocity according to the quantitative parts o f the subject. 7. On
sionibus in motu. 6m de difformitate velocitatis secundum partes quantitati-
a certain difference between local motion and alteration. 8. O n the difformity o f
vas subiecti. j m de quadam differentia inter motum localem et alterationem.
velocities w ith respect to time. 9. O n the comparison o f these tw o difformities. 10.
8m de difformitate velocitatum quo ad tempus. 9m de comparatione istarum
14 figurarum dearticulatione tr. F M / articu­ 21 uno om. E A L P
latione S 22 quantum om. L quantitatis F M N / eius
28 relata tr. S ante ad mum: Primum capitulum B E S / duplici
15 triangulari rectangula B N C S et cf. I.v iii.i difformitatem tr. F M / alio: alieno P
29 naturalis: naturaliter S om. A E L P
trianguli rectanguli AEPFM trianguli 23 provenit: provenerunt N provenerint C /
31 e t: vel A E L P C 39 quod non: quomodo (?) C j intensionis
rectangula L ex: et C / variatione: figuratione F
32 visionis A 7” om. A P
16 aliter triangulari: alicuius trianguli L / 24 ante difformitatis add. C 33 / qualitatum:
33, 34 visionum: visionum anime A E L N P 40 quibusdam: quibusdem A
aliter tr. E ante de3in linea 1 j qualitatis S P C / 23111 om. S 23 B A E 34 C /
34 previdentis C 41 in m otu: motus C
18 difformi: et difformi C / simplicis om. differentiis E / potest F M N S C possunt
3 5 in similitudine: ad similitudinem S 42 subiecti om. A E L P C / alterationem: cetera
EALP AEBLP
36 secundum: pro C per A E L P / causis om. C
19 difformitate: qualitate A j e t ... habet om, 25 eruiom. N
A 43 velocitatum B M S et cf. I I .v iii.i velocitatis
M / qualiter: qualitatis A E L P / habet om. 25-26 configurationem: figurationem P
37 post visionum add. S E t sic est finis finiun­ (?) A E L F N P C I quo ad tempus om. A P j
C huiusmodi A E L P j 62 om. L ut A 26 predicta cause: predictatem (/) C
tur tituli prime partis comparatione: operatione E
20 species: speciebus A / corporea qualitate 27 figurationis: configurationis E / qualitatis
38 Capitula__ Primum: 2a pars mg. C / Pri­ 43-44 istarum duarum B N M S et cf. I l . i x . i
tr. N I qualitate: materiali F M AELN P
 162 D e configurationibus qualitatum et m otuum Proemium 163

duarum difformitatum. io m de causis quorundam effectuum secundum prius On the causes o f certain effects according to the prior statements. 11. O n the beauty
45 dicta. n m de pulchritudine figurationum velocitatum. i2 m de figuratione o f figurations o f velocities. 12. O n the figuration o f celestial velocity. 13. O n the
celestis velocitatis. i3 m de difformitate quorundam successivorum. i4 m qua­ difformity o f certain successive things. 14. H ow the causes o f certain effects are
liter quorundam effectuum cause apparent ex predictis. i5 m de natura et evident from the aforesaid. 15. O n the nature and difformity o f sounds. 16. O n the
difformitate sonorum. i6 m de pulchritudine et turpitudine soni simpliciter beauty and ugliness o f sound that is simply and truly one [sound] .17. O n the beauty
et vere unius. i j mde pulchritudine soni qui dicitur unus secundo modo. i8 m o f a sound which is said to be one [sound] in the second way. 18. Clarification o f
50 declaratio predictorum per exempla et per effectus. 19111 de pulchritudine the foregoing statements by examples and by effects. 19. O n the beauty o f a sound
soni qui est unus tertio modo. 2om de pulchritudine soni qui dicitur unus which is said to be one [sound] in the third way. 20. O n the beauty o f a sound which
quarto modo. 2 im recollectio premissorum. 22m de aliis circumstantiis que is said to be one [sound] in the fourth way. 21. A summary o f the things premised
faciunt sonum pulchrum ad aliquid. 23m de causis assignandis multorum [with regard to the beauty o f sound]. 22. O n other circumstances w hich make a
effectuum per predicta. 24111 persuasio quod erit musica in alio seculo. 25“ sound beautiful [not absolutely but] conditionally. 23. O n assigning the causes o f
55 de applicatione difformitatis sonorum ad magicas artes. z 6m de fundamentis many effects b y using the prior statements. 24. A n argument that there w ill be
artis magice et de prima eius radice. z j mprobatio predictorum ex diversitate music in another age. 25. O n the application o f the difformity o f sounds to the
sectarum et complexionum. 28m arguitur ad idem ex etatibus homini. 29111 magical arts. 26. O n the foundations o f the magical art and its first root. 27. A
adhuc arguitur ex alteratione et reclusione anime. 3om arguitur ad idem ex proof o f the prior statements by means o f the diversity o f sects and natural consti­
sequentibus et concomitantibus signis. 3 im de secunda radice artis magice. tutions. 28. A n argument for the same thing on the basis o f the [various] ages o f
60 32111 de quadam specialitate radicis istius. 33m de tertia radice artis magice. men. 29. A further argument [on this subject] from the alteration and retirement
34m de modo deceptionis anime per artem magicam. 35111 determinatio [inward] o f the soul. 30. A further argument for the same thing on the basis o f
quorundam premissorum. $6m de difformitate accidentium anime. 37111 de succeeding and concomitant signs. 31. O n the second root o f the magical art. 32.
causis quorundam effectuum in subiecto proprio ex predictis. 38“ de causis On a certain special case o f this root. 33. O n the third root o f the magical art. 34.
quorundam effectuum in corpore alieno secundum predicta. 39m de difformi- O n the w ay the soul is deceived by the magical art. 3 5. T he determination o f cer­
65 tate penarum. 40“ de difformitate gaudiorum. tain things said earlier. 36. O n the difformity o f accidents o f the soul. 37. O n the
Capitula tertie partis: Capitulum primum per quid ymaginanda est ac­ causes o f certain effects arising in the subject itself, based on the prior statements.
quisitio qualitatis. zm applicatio predictorum ad uniformitatem et difformi- 38. O n the causes o f certain effects arising in an alien body, based on the prior state­
tatem. 3m de quibusdam correlariis. 4m adhuc alia correlaria. 5m de mensura ments. 39. O n the difformity o f pains. 40. O n the difformity o f joys.
qualitatum uniformium et velocitatum. 6m adhuc de eodem. j m de mensura Chapters o f Part III: 1. H o w the acquisition o f quality is to be imagined. 2. A p ­
plication o f the prior statements to uniformity and difformity. 3. O n certain corol­
istarum rerum F difformitatis istarum A P unus F N M laries. 4. Still other corollaries. 5. O n the measure o f uniform qualities and veloci­
istarum L E C 52 quarto: 20 A primo C ties. 6. Further consideration o f the same subject. 7. O n the measure o f difform
44 difformitatum om. E / secundum B N F M C 53 sonum... aliquid B F L M ad sonum pul-
om. S per A E L P crum vel ad aliquid A E P ad pulcritudinem
45 pulchritudine: plenitudine E / figuratio­ soni N sonum adcum (?) C ad pulchrum ^
num: figurationis A E L N P / figuratio­ / assignatis (?) C
num velocitatum tr. C 54 per: pre C / persuasio...erit: quid erit
46 celestis velocitatis tr. N celestis difformita­ persuasio L om. E 66 Capitulum...quid B et cf. I I I . i . 1. Primum
tis F M 55 applicatione: pulcritudine A j magicas 3 9 secunda radice tr. A E P radice C capitulum per quid F M Capitulum pri­
47 effectuum om. N F M artes tr. E causas magice artis M / funda­ 60 istius om. A E L P istius et cetera N / tertia: mum per quam S Primum quomodo
48-49 d e__ 17111 om. E / et...unius: soni mentis : fundamento A E L N P triplici F M A L N P 1 quomodo E per quid C
qui dictur unus simpliciter A P / simpliciter 56 de om. E L P C / probatio B F M S de proba­ 61 modo deceptionis: deceptione C / anime 67-68 et difformitatem om. F
...unius om. C tione A E L N P C I predictorum: prius dic­ om. A P / determinatio: declaratio F M 68 adhuc: addit adhuc A P j adhuc... 3111 om.
48 turpitudine: corporeitate L torum A E L P / ex om. M 62 premissorum: predictorum L predictorum E
49 vere om. N / 1 j m . . . modo om. A 57 ex: de F M / etatibus: diversis etatibus E premissorum N 69 uniformium: et uniformitatum A E P et
50 declaratio: de declaratione A / per2 B L 58 adhuc om. A P ad hoc E ad idem F / argui­ 63 subiecto proprio tr. F M uniformium L uniformitatum C / veloci­
et cf. II.x v iii.2 , om. A E N F M P C S tur1 om. A I e x 1 de A P f arguitur ad idem: 64 secundum: per A L P ex E / predicta: pre­ tatum: difformitatum E / adhuc: ad S
51 est: dicitur A E P / unus1 om. S / dicitur: ad idem arguitur B S adhuc arguitur F j ad dictis E prius dicta N
 164 D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum Part I, Chapter i 165

70 qualitatum et velocitatum difformium. 8m de mensura et intensione in infini­
tum quarundam difformitatum. 9mde quodam [alio] exemplo. io m quoddam
aliud exemplum de difformitate composita ex partibus uniformibus et
uniformiter difformibus. 1 i mde mensura et extensione in infinitum qualitatis
finite seu velocitatis. i2 m de infinita extensione secundum quid et mensura
75 qualitatis finite et uniformis. 13111 de infinita extensione simpliciter qualitatis
finite atque difformis.
qualities and velocities. 8. O n the measure and intension to infinity o f certain dif-
formities. 9. Another example o f the same. 10. A certain other example o f a dif-
formity composed o f uniform and uniformly difform parts. 1 1. O n the measure and
extension to infinity o f a finite quality or velocity. 12. O n the qualified infinite ex­
tension and measure o f a finite and uniform quality. 13. O n the absolute infinite
extension o f a finite and difform quality.

Chapters of Part I
Capitula prime partis]

I.i On the continuity o f intensity

[I.i] Capitulum primum de continuitate intensionis
E very measurable thing except numbers is imagined in the manner o f continuous
Omnis res mensurabilis exceptis numeris ymaginatur ad modum quanti­ quantity. Therefore, for the mensuration o f such a thing, it is necessary that points,
tatis continue. Ideo oportet pro eius mensuratione ymaginari puncta, lineas lines, and surfaces, or their properties, be imagined. For in them (i.e. the geometri­
5 et superficies, aut istorum proprietates, in quibus, ut vult Philosophus, cal entities), as the Philosopher has it,1 measure or ratio is initially found, while in
mensura seu proportio per prius reperitur. In aliis autem cognoscitur in other things it is recognized by similarity as they are being referred by the intellect
similitudine dum per intellectum referuntur ad ista. Etsi nichil sunt puncta to them (i.e., to geometrical entities). A lth ou gh indivisible points, or lines, are non­
indivisibilia aut linee, tamen oportet ea mathematice fingere pro rerum existent, still it is necessary to feign them mathematically for the measures o f
mensuris et earum proportionibus cognoscendis. Omnis igitur intensio things and for the understanding o f their ratios.2 Therefore, every intensity which
10 successive acquisibilis ymaginanda est per lineam rectam perpendiculariter can be acquired successively ought to be imagined by a straight line perpendicular-
70 qualitatum om. E / qualitatum et velocita­ 76 atque: et N / post difformis add. B Expli-
tum: velocitatum qualitatis C / difformium: ciunt capitula tertie partis / post difformis
difformiter difformium E / et2 om. S / inten­ add. E Explicit tabula capitulorum deo
sione corr. e x extensione iyid. cap. I I 1 . 8) / gratias / post difformis add. F M et sic est
in om. F M (erit M ) finis intencionum omnium capi­
71 difformitatum: difformitatum difformiter tulorum huius libri divisi in tres partes et
difformibus (/) A qualitatum E / quodam: cetera / post difformis add. L Tunc sequitur
quorundam F / [alio] supplevi, cf. I l l . i x . i prima pars
I .i
71- 72 quoddam... d e: de quodam alio exem­
1 See the Commentary, I.i, line 5. 2 Ibid., lines 7-9.
plo et N I .i: A E B V D L N F M P C S G [J ] (
7 2 - 73 de (et N ) . . . difformibus B F M N S om. 1 [Capitula prime partis] B , om. alii M S S
P difformitatis composite ex partibus uni­ prima pars tractatus [ J ] 4-5 lineas et superficies: superficies et lineas / per intellectum tr. N post referuntur / ad
formibus A de difformitate E E C 2 Capitulum. . .intensionis B V E G om. AP ista tr. N post qua quod stat in loco dum /
73 et: seu i? A D L N M S [ J ] de continuitate intensionis 4 lineas: linea N ista: illa G / nichil sunt: non sint G
74 seu: vel N sive A E / secundum: propter capitulum primum F Primum capitulum 3 et: aut G / u t ... Philosophus: secundum 8 mathematice om. A P / fingere: sumere E
E L I quid: quam A prime partis P Prima propositio mg. C 1 philosophum [ J ] / Philosophus B V L F - 9 proportionibus: proprietatibus et propor­
75 uniformis: uniformitatis E / infinita ex­ m g .S M S C G D Aristoteles A E N P tionibus M j igitur: ergo G aut C
tensione simpliciter B F M et cf. I l l . x i i i . i 3 Omnes res mensurabiles N C / ymaginan- 6 seu: et M j per prius: proprius G S ( ? ) 10 ymaginanda est tr. F M post intensibilis in
extensione simpliciter infinita A E L N P S C tur C prius E I autem: aut A linea //
/ qualitatis2 om. M 4 mensurationem S mensura [J J 7 dum B V F M S C G qua E N L que P qui A 11 aliquod punctum B V F M S C G [ J ] aliquot
 166 D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum Part I, Chapter i 167

erectam super aliquod punctum spatii vel subiecti illius rei intensibilis, ut, ly erected on some point o f the space or subject o f the intensible thing, e.g., a quali­
verbi gratia, qualitatis. Nam quecunque proportio reperitur inter intensio­ ty. For whatever ratio is found to exist between intensity and intensity, in relating
nem et intensionem de intensionibus que sunt eiusdem rationis similis pro­ intensities o f the same kind, a similar ratio is found to exist between line and line,
portio invenitur inter lineam et lineam et e contra; quemadmodum enim una and vice versa. For just as one line is commensurable to another line and incom­
i5 linea alteri linee est commensurabilis et alteri incommensurabilis, ita est con- mensurable to still another, so similarly in regard to intensities certain ones are
formiter de intensionibus quod quedam sunt commensurabiles adinvicem et mutually commensurable and others incommensurable in any w ay because o f their
quedam incommensurabiles quom odolibet propter continuitatem earundem. [property of] continuity. Therefore, the measure o f intensities can be fittingly
E rgo mensura intensionum potest ymaginari congrue sicut linearum mensu­ imagined as the measure o f lines, since an intensity could be imagined as being in­
ra, cum etiam intensio possit eodem m odo sicut linea in infinitum diminui finitely decreased or infinitely increased in the same way as a line.
20 et quantum est ex se in infinitum augeri. Again, intensity is that according to which something is said to be “ more such
Rursum intensio secundum quam aliquid dicitur magis tale, ut magis and such,” as “ more w hite” or “ more swift.” Since intensity, or rather the intensity
album aut magis velox; ipsa quidem, secundum quod intensio vel intensio o f a point, is infinitely divisible in the manner o f a continuum in only one way,
puncti est tantum uno modo divisibilis et in infinitum ad modum continui, therefore there is no more fitting way for it to be imagined than by that species o f a
igitur non potest convenientius ymaginari quam per illam speciem continui continuum which is initially divisible and only in one way, namely by a line. A nd
25 que est primo divisibilis et uno modo tantum, scilicet per lineam. E t quo­ since the quantity or ratio o f lines is better know n and is more readily conceived by
niam linearum quantitas sive proportio notior est et facilius a nobis concipi­ us— nay the line is in the first species o f continua, therefore such intensity ought to
tur, ymmo linea est in prima specie continuorum, ideo per lineas ymaginanda be imagined by lines and most fittingly by those lines which are erected perpendic­
est intensio talis— maxime vero et convenientissime per illas que subiecto ularly to the subject. T h e consideration o f these lines naturally helps and leads to
applicate super ipsum perpendiculariter eriguntur, quarum consideratio ad the knowledge o f any intensity, as w ill be more fully apparent in chapter four
30 cuiuslibet intensionis notitiam naturaliter iuvat et ducit, prout ex 40 capitulo below. Therefore, equal intensities are designated by equal lines, a double intensity
sequenti plenius apparebit. Ideoque intensiones equales per equales lineas by a double line, and always in the same way if one proceeds proportionally. A nd
designantur et dupla intensio per duplam lineam et sic semper proportiona- this is to be understood universally in regard to every intensity that is divisible in
liter procedendo. E t istud est universaliter intelligendum de omni inten­ the imagination, whether it be an active or non-active quality, a sensible or non-
sione ad ymaginationem divisibili, sive sit intensio qualitatis active sive non sensible subject, object, or medium. For example, it is to be understood in regard
35 active, sensibilis sive insensibilis subiecti aut obiecti aut medii, ut de luce to the light o f the body o f the sun, to the illumination o f a medium, or to a species
punctum N aliquod punctum aut (vel E ) eorundem L in the medium, to a diffused influence or power, and similarly to others, w ith the
aliquot puncta A E P aliquot puncta L D / 18 Ergo: igitur A V E S / ymaginari congrue
spatii: intensibilis spacii A P / subiecti: t r .N
spacii subiecti B / illius... intensibilis om. 19 possit: posset M / possit...m odo: eodem
A P I rei om. F modo possit C / diminui: dividi et diminui 24 igitur V L N S ergo B F M G et ideo A E P / 30 cuiuslibet: cuiuscunque B V G cuiuscuius-
n - 1 2 u t ... qualitatis V S G ut gratia qualitatis F A I / diminui tr. C ante sicut igitur... continui om. C / convenientius libet C I naturaliter iuvat tr. G / ex: in
C verbi gratia ut qualitas F M ut verbi gra­ 20 quantum: quantitas F M / ex: de A P / in ymaginari tr. V A E L P C / 40 capitulo tr. N primo capitulo
tia B L N verbi gratia A E P infinitum om. G 25 que: qui A / est primo B V F M S tr. C
12 Nam. om. E N lac. V / quecunque: qualis­ 21 Rursum: E t rursum A E L N P /post inten­ AELNPCGD 31 apparebit: patebit A , et mg. add. C conclu­
cunque A E L N P / reperitur: invenitur E sio sup. scr. m. rec. C est / aliquid: aliquod 26 sive: seu A / est om. N sio
13 et intensionem om. F M / que: qualitatis A P / dicetur B / magis tale: magis clare A 26- 27 concipitur: percipitur M 3 1 - 32 per.. .intensio om. A P
corrupitur
(?) que B quod quedam F et add. A ante dicitur / tale: tale aut minus (/) C sed add. m. rec. mg. vel concipitur 32 - 33 proportionaliter: proportionabiliter
14 invenitur: reperitur V A E / et lineam om. tale E I ut magis: et minus A ut minus P 27 ymmo: ymo F N A ideo C / linea est: pri­ CG
F M / e contra: e converso F M j enim om. 22 post album add. F aut niger / aut: vel V / mo est linea E / lineas: lineam S 33 istud: illud N / est universaliter tr. V
A P nisi C magis: minus E / intensio1: extensio A est 27- 28 ymaginanda est tr. N 34 divisibilis A / sit: sit etiam V / intensio
14-15 una linea tr. S intensio S 28 vero: enim V S ( ? ) / per illas om. G per illos om. F M
15 linee om. A L / est tr. V M p o s t linea / e t... 22-23 vel intensio puncti A B V C S om. F M C 35 ante sensibilis add. A E L N P sive / insensi­
incommensurabilis om. C / et om. P C F M ut intensio puncti G vel extensio puncti 29 super ipsum om. G / ipsum om. C ipsam L / bilis: non sensibilis C / aut1: sive A P M
17 quedam: quidem S / quolibet A I / earun­ L N P D ut extensio puncti E eriguntur quarum tr. L / quarum: quorum vel B F j aut2: vel B V S G / de om. C S G
dem A B E N P earum V S eorum F M C G 23 tantum: cum L / e t: etiam G V quare A et S j ad : a P 35-36 luce corporis: corporis G corpore V C
 i6 8 D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum Part I, Chapter ii 169

corporis solis et de lumine medii, vel de specie in medio, vel influentia aut
virtute diffusa, et sic de aliis, excepta forsitan intensione curvitatis, de qua
dicetur ad partem in capitulis 200 et 210 huius partis.
Huiusmodi vero linea intensionis de qua nunc dictum est non extenditur
40 extra punctum vel extra subiectum secundum rem sed solum secundum yma-
ginationem, et ad quamvis partem nisi quod convenientius ymaginatur in
sursum perpendiculariter stare super subiectum qualitate informatum.
possible exception o f curvature, concerning which we shall speak in a limited way
in chapters twenty and twenty-one o f this part [of our w ork].
O f course, the line o f intensity o f which w e have just spoken is not actually ex­
tended outside o f the point or subject but is only so extended in the imagination,
and it could be extended in any direction whatever except that it is more fitting to
imagine it standing up perpendicularly on the subject informed w ith the quality.3

[I.ii] Capitulum secundum de latitudine qualitatum I.ii On the latitude o f qualities

Omnis intensio per predictam lineam designata proprie vocari deberet
longitudo illius qualitatis, primo quidem quia in alteratione continua [es­
sentialiter] non exigitur successio secundum extensionem sive secundum partes
5 subiecti [quia potest totum simul incipere alterari] sed ibi requiritur successio
secundum intensionem. E rgo sicut in motu locali illa dimensio dicitur longi­
tudo spatii seu vie secundum quam exigitur successio, ita conformiter
huiusmodi intensio secundum quam requiritur successio deberet dici longi­
tudo ipsius qualitatis. Item sicut velocitas in motu locali secundum longitu-
10 dinem spatii mensuratur, ita in alteratione velocitas attenditur penes in­
tensionem. E rgo talis intensio deberet dici longitudo. Item nulla qualitas
alteratione acquisibilis potest ymaginari sine intensione seu divisibilitate
secundum intensionem, sed bene potest ymaginari sine extensione; ymmo
qualitas subiecti indivisibilis, ut anime vel angeli, non habet extensionem.
15 Cum igitur ymaginetur mathematice longitudo sine latitudine et non e
converso, et intensio sit referenda ad aliquam dimensionem, ut patet ex
E very intensity designated by the aforesaid line ought properly to be called the
longitude o f the quality.1 This is primarily because in continuous alteration suc­
cession according to the extension or parts o f the subject is not [essentially] de­
manded, [for the w hole subject can begin to be altered simultaneously], but suc­
cession according to intensity is required there. Therefore, just as in local motion
that dimension according to which succession is demanded is called length o f space
or path, so similarly intensity o f this sort according to which succession is required
should be called the longitude o f this quality. A lso, just as velocity in local m o­
tion is measured according to length o f space, so velocity in alteration is a function
o f intensity. Therefore, such intensity should be called longitude. Also, no quality
acquirable by alteration can be imagined without intensity or divisibility according
to intensity, but it can well be imagined without extension. Nay, a quality o f an
indivisible subject, such as a soul or an angel, does not have extension. Since,
therefore, length is imagined mathematically without breadth but not conversely,
and since intensity ought to be referred to some dimension, as is evident in the

prius (?) corporis S I.ii: B V A E D L N F M P C S G 3 Ibid., lines 40-41. I .ii

36 et: aut E / vel1: et V E / vel2: vel de E I
aut om. F M vel B
37 virtute diffusa: divina virtute infusa F M j
forsitan: forte IV / de curvitatis scr. m. rec.
C in mg. vel caritatis
38 ad partem: post N partialiter (?) E j in om.
S / capitulo V / 200 e t: 20 N 70 C / huius:
istius V j huius partis om. G
39 Huiusmodi: huiusmodi cot (?) C j vero:
vera C / extendit C
40 extra1: ultra M j subiectum: san4 (?) C j
solum om. A P
41 in om. A E P
42 sursum: situ sive S / informatum V E M -
N S G formatum ( ? ) B , A F L P C D
1 Capitulum secundum B V E L P S C D om.
ANM , tr. F G post qualitatum / d e ...
qualitatum B V E ( ? ) F G om. A N P M S de
latitudine qualitatis L D de velocitate qua­
litatis C
2 Omnis B V S C G M Omnis igitur A E L P D
Omnis ergo F N / designata: ymaginata
F M distincta A / vocari deberet B L N D
vocari debet V F M S C G debet vocari E P
deberet vocari A
3 longitudo: eius longitudo C / illius om. F /
quidem: igitur quidem L igitur N / quia
om. N
3-4 [essentialiter] A E L N P D om.
BVFM SCG
4 exigitur: requiritur E / secundum2 om. N
5 [quia... alterari] A E L N P D om.
B V F M S C G I potest totum E P tr. L N D
p o ssu n t (!) totum A / ibi om. A E P
6 Ergo: igitur L N D ideo A P E / dicitur
V F M S G dicetur B C diceretur A E L N P D
7 seu: sive P
8 intensio: enim intensio L / debet (?) B C
9 ipsius: illius F N M C et tr. N post qualitatis
/ Item: E t N S / locali om. E
10 spatii tr. V p o s t mensuratur
11 Ergo: igitur V N S G / debet (?) V C E /
Item: 30 N / post qualitas add. P neque /
post qualitas add. E in
1 See the Commentary, I.ii, lines 2-24.
12 alteratione: alterative G / seu: sex (?) V
aut E A P sive S / divisibilitate: clifformita-
te A diversitate L D ex
13 bene potest tr. A E / extensione: intensione
L
14 post anime add. E intensive / habent F S
15 ymaginetur: imaginatur A E P / mathema­
tice tr. A E P post latitudine / longitudo:
loquendo L / et om. B
16 e t: et cum E L N P et tamen A j referenda:
differenda A / ex: in A E L N P
17 precedenti capitulo tr. A N / est: esset
BSG I non: et non A E L N P G

/
 17 ° D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum Part I, Chapter iii 171

precedenti capitulo, ipsa referenda est ad longitudinem non ad latitudinem,
et nomine longitudinis magis proprie appellanda. Unde patet quod quali­
tas subiecti indivisibilis proprie non habet latitudinem. Sed multi theologi
20 loquuntur improprie de latitudine caritatis, quia si per latitudinem intelligunt
intensionem, tunc contingeret invenire latitudinem sine longitudine, et sic
eorum transsumptio videretur incongrua. Verumptamen huiusmodi inten­
sionem vocabo latitudinem qualitatis, sicut plenius dicam in capitulo imme­
diate sequenti.
preceding chapter, it (intensity) ought to be referred to length not to breadth, and
it more properly ought to be called by the name o f longitude rather than by that o f
latitude. Thus it is clear that the quality o f an indivisible subject does not properly
have latitude. But many theologians speak improperly o f the “ latitude o f charity” 2
— for if by “ latitude” they understand intensity then breadth w ould be found w ith­
out length, and so their transference o f the meaning w ould seem unfitting. Be that
as it may, I shall call3 intensity o f this kind the “ latitude” o f quality, as I shall de­
clare more fully in the chapter that immediately follows.

[I.iii] Capitulum 3m de longitudine qualitatum I.iii On the longitude of qualities

Cuiuslibet qualitatis extense sua extensio deberet vocari ipsius latitudo et
predicta extensio designatur per lineam in subiecto descriptam super quam
linea intensionis qualitatis eiusdem perpendiculariter erigitur. Nam cum
5 omnis talis qualitas habeat intensionem et extensionem que in eius mensura
sunt attendende, ideo si eius intensio diceretur longitudo tunc extensio, que
esset secunda dimensio, vocaretur latitudo. E t etiam econverso si intensio
dicatur latitudo extensio vocabitur longitudo. Sicut igitur corporis vel su­
perficiei linea longitudinis et linea latitudinis perpendiculariter sibi invicem
io adiacent, ita etiam extensio qualitatis que deberet dici ipsius latitudo yma-
ginanda est per lineam perpendiculariter adiacentem linee longitudinis
qualitatis eiusdem. E t quemadmodum in permanentibus extensio in subiecto
debet dici latitudo qualitatis et intensio longitudo, ita conformiter in succes­
sivis, cuiusmodi sunt motus, sonus, et similia, extensio eorum in tempore vo-
The extension o f any extended quality should be called its latitude. T h e afore­
said extension is designated b y a line drawn in the subject, a line on which the line
o f the intensity o f the same quality is erected perpendicularly. For since every quali­
ty o f this sort has intensity and extension on which its measure is dependent, there­
fore if its intensity were called longitude, then its extension— which w ould be its
second dimension— w ould be called [its] latitude. A n d also conversely, i f intensity
is called latitude, extension w ill be called longitude. Therefore, just as the line o f
length and that o f breadth o f a surface or body are perpendicularly adjacent to one
another, so also the extension o f a quality, w hich should be called its latitude, ought
to be imagined by a line perpendicularly adjacent to the line o f longitude o f the
same quality. A n d just as in permanent qualities extension in the subject ought to
be called the latitude o f the quality and intensity longitude, so similarly in succes­
sive things— o f w hich sort are motion, sound, and the like— their extension in time

1 8 longitudinis: latitudinis E / magis proprie:
proprius B V C S G /appellanda: vocandaN
x9 Sed A E L N P D sicut B V F M C G S / m ulti:
quidam M
20 intelligunt: intelligant A intelligerent E
21 - 22 invenire__Verumptamen: — rump-
tamen V
22 earum G j videretur BFM G videtur
A E L N P C D / videretur incongrua om. S
2 2- 24 Verumptamen...sequenti: vocabulo
tamen latitudinem sicut ipsi ut magis in-
telligantur que dicam et propter consue­
tudinem locandi sic vocabulo D
22-23 post intensionem add. B V S F M C ali-
quotiens sed om. A E L N P ; habet G ali­
quando sed tr. G ante latitudinem
23 sicut...dicam : prout dicam plenius A P
sicut dicam plenius E / sicut: ut N sic J
23-24 immediate om. A E N G isto P
IJ ii.-B V A E D L N F M P C S G
1 Capitulum... qualitatum (qualitatis L D )
B V E E M D om. A N 3m capitulum P S D e
longitudine qualitatum capitulum 3m F G
Tertium capitulum de longitudine quali­
tatis C 3 mg. A
2-4 Cuiuslibet__ Nam om. D
2 extense sua: intense seu intentio F intense
sua intensio M /debet C / ipsius B V F M S G
om. A P sua E L N C et tr. E post latitudo /
ipsius latitudo tr. G
3 designatur B VFM SG designari potest
A L N P designari C potest designari E
4 qualitatis om. E / eiusdem om. V / erigatur
S I Nam: modo P quia N j cum: tamen E
5 omnis om. A f talis om. D
2 Ibid., lines 19-20.
3 Or, “ sometimes call.” See the variant
reading. I have chosen the reading o f the poorer
6 sunt attendende: sit attendenda A E L P D
I ideo: igitur V
6 - 7 diceretur... intensio om. V
6 longitudo: extensio A P
7 vocabitur i 1/ etiam om. F M
7- 8 etiam... longitudo: econtra D
eius
8 extensio: tunc extensio N eius et exten­
sio V I vocatur G / igitur om. V ergo N
8- 9 corporis vel superficiei om. D
8 vel om. A P
9 et: vel E M / linea om. D / sibi: se A E P
9 - 12 sib i.. .eiusdem: se dividant ita et ex­
tradition primarily because, in fact, Oresme
always calls intensity by the name latitudo.
tensio qualitatis et intensio D
10 adiacent: dividunt A E L P j etiam: est G /
extensio: intensio F M / ipsius: eius A E P G
I latitudo: longitudo F M C E S G
11 longitudinis: latitudinis F M
12 quemadmodum: sicut N / in subiecto om.
AELPCD
13 debet dici tr. E / intensio longitudo: ex­
tensio latitudo V
14 sonus: et sonus A E L P C D / similia: con­
similia S G cetera N / earum E j in tempore
tr. G post vocaretur
 I72 173
D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum Part I, Chapter iv

15 caretur latitudo et intensio longitudo. Verumtamen quia extensio est manifes­
tior et palpabilior, ut ita loquitur, et prior cognitione quo ad nos quam sit
intensio, et forsan quo ad naturam, ideo non obstantibus predictis ipsa
extensio secundum communem usum loquendi attribuitur prime dimen­
sioni, scilicet longitudini, et intensio latitudini. E t quoniam differentia
20 huiusmodi impositionis seu improprietas vocationis nichil facit ad rem sed
utroque m odo potest idem exprimi, volo sequi m odum communem ne
propter locutionem inconsuetam illa que dicam minus leviter intelligantur.
Extensio igitur qualitatis in nomine dei vocetur eius longitudo et intensio
ipsius vocetur latitudo sive altitudo. Sed qualitercunque sit, patet ex dictis
25 quod quidam moderni non bene vocant latitudinem qualitatis ipsam totam,
sicut abusio esset per latitudinem superficiei intelligere totam superficiem
vel figuram. N am quemadmodum alique latitudines superficierum sive figu­
rarum inequalium sunt equales ita similiter, sicut postea videbitur, multe
latitudines qualitatum inequalium sunt equales aut etiam econverso.
should be called latitude and their intensity longitude. Nevertheless, extension as it
is thus spoken o f is more manifest, more palpable, and prior in our cognition than
is intensity.*1 It is perhaps also prior in nature. Therefore, notwithstanding my
previous statements, this extension according to the common practice o f speech is
associated w ith the first dimension, namely longitude, and intensity with latitude.
A nd since a difference in the application o f [a name of] this sort, or an impropriety
in naming, actually has no effect and the same thing can be expressed in either way,
I wish [accordingly] to follow the common way. I do this so that those things which
I say might not be less easily understood because o f unaccustomed locution. There­
fore, in the name o f G o d let the extension o f a quality be called its longitude and
intensity its latitude or altitude. But how ever this m ight be, it is obvious from the
things said that certain moderns do not speak in the best way when they call the
w hole o f the quality its latitude, just as it w ould be an abuse [of terminology] to
understand by the breadth o f a surface the w hole surface or figure.2 For just as the
breadths o f some unequal surfaces or figures are equal, so, as w ill be seen later,
many latitudes o f unequal qualities are equal, or vice versa.

[I.iv] Capitulum 4m de quantitate qualitatum I.iv On the quantity o f qualities

Cuiuslibet linearis qualitatis quantitas ymaginanda est per superficiem T he quantity o f any linear quality is to be imagined by a surface whose length or
cuius longitudo seu basis est linea in subiecto quali protracta, ut dicit prece- base is a line protracted in a subject o f this kind, as the preceding chapter says, and
dens capitulum, et cuius latitudo seu altitudo designatur per lineam super whose breadth or altitude is designated b y a line erected perpendicularly on the
basim predictam perpendiculariter erectam secundum quod ponit capitulum

15 intensio: intensio vocaretur N /V erum ­ tionem ii / inconsuetum ^/3 / illa: ista N /

tamen A P C E verum B V F M S G verum
est tamen L N D / quia: quod L N D / ex­
tensio : intensio L N D
16 et2 om. S I prior: peior G
16 -17 quam sit intensio om. D
17 intensio: extensio N / et om. A P / ideo: et
ideo F M ergo D / ipsa om. A P
18 usum: modum A E P
19 scilicet: et i. (id est?) V / longitudo S
19-22 E t ... intelligantur om. D
19 Et: Sed F / quoniam: quia A E P / quoni­
am differentia tr. L / differentia: natura
FM
zo huiusmodi: huius B ( ? ) V F M / seu: vel
A E P I proprietas V F M / vocationis: lo­
cationis P
21 n e: nec L
22 locutionem: modum loquendi A P loqua-
intelligitur N
23 igitur: enim V ergo S / dei: domini N F M
2 3- 24 eius.. .vocetur: ipsius A
23 eius om. D
24 ipsius: eius L S et tr. S ante intensio / ipsius
tr. G ante latitudo / vocetur E N P F M om.
D vocatur L dicatur B V S C G / latitudo
sive altitudo: altitudo vel latitudo P / sive:
seu E D vel A P
24- 29 Sed_econverso om. D
24 sit om. N / ex dictis om. F
25 bene vocant tr. A quidem bene vocant S
26 esset: est P L N / latitudinem superficiei
tr. N I intelligere... superficiem om. S
27 vel: sive F M aut A /Namquemadmodum:
non quemadmodum S quia sicut A E P quia
quemadmodum N j alique: quedam F M j
alique latitudines tr. V / sive: aut A ve lL P
I.iii
1 See the Commentary, I.iii, lines 15-17. 2 Ibid., lines 24-27.
2 linearis (linealis B ) . . . quantitas BFS
28 postea videbitur: patebit postea A E P
[ G N M ] qualitatis quantitas linealis (linea­
29 aut: vel P / aut... econverso om. F M j post
ris L [ E C D ] ) A L P [ C D E ] quantitas linea­
econverso add. E et cetera
lis qualitatis V j ymaginanda est tr. A P [ E ]
3 seu: vel A P [ E ] / pertracta P [ M ]
I.iv: B V A P F L S D — collated throughout;
3-4 precedens capitulum tr. A P [ E ]
[ M E N C G J ] — also used, but not com­
4 seu L P D F [ E M N J ] sive B V [ C G ] sine S
pletely, and then placed in brackets
5-6 predictam... qualitatem2: aliquem A
1 Capitulum... qualitatum L B V D [ C E ] om.
5 predictam: productam L P D [ E N ] / secun­
A S [ A I N ] 4m capitulum P De quantitate
dum. . .ponit: sicut dicitP [ E ] u t p o n i t [ N J
qualitatum capitulum 4m F [ G ] 4 c mg. S 4
sicut ponit D
mg. A
 *74 175
D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum Part I, Chapter iv

secundum. E t intelligo per qualitatem linearem qualitatem alicuius linee in aforesaid base in the way that the second chapter proposes. A n d I understand by
subiecto informato qualitate. “ linear quality” the quality o f some line in the subject informed w ith a quality.
Q uod enim quantitas talis qualitatis per huiusmodi superficiem possit That the quantity o f such a [linear] quality can be imagined by a surface o f this
ymaginari patet, quoniam contingit dare superficiem illi qualitati equalem in sort is obvious, since one can give a surface equal to the quality in length or exten­
io longitudine seu extensione et similem in altitudine eidem qualitati in inten­ sion and which w ould have an altitude similar to the intensity o f the quality, as will
sione, ut patebit post. Sed quod per hoc debeamus ymaginari qualitatem ut be clear later. But it is apparent that w e ought to imagine a quality in this w ay in
eius dispositio levius cognoscatur apparet quia eius uniformitas atque dif- order to recognize its disposition more easily, for its uniformity and its difformity
formitas citius, facilius, et clarius perpenduntur quando in figura sensibili are examined more quickly, more easily, and more clearly when something similar
aliquod simile describitur quod ab ymaginatione velociter et perfecte capitur to it is described in a sensible figure. [This is true] because something is quickly
15 et quando in exemplo visibili declaratur. Satis enim difficile videtur quibus­ and perfectly understood when it is explained by a visible example. Thus it seems
dam intelligere que sit qualitas uniformiter difformis. Sed quid facilius quam quite difficult for certain people to understand the nature o f a quality that is uni­
quod trianguli rectanguli altitudo est uniformiter difformis ? Certe hoc ap­ form ly difform. But what is easier to understand than that the altitude o f a right
paret ad sensum. Cum igitur intensio huiusmodi qualitatis per altitudinem triangle is uniformly difform? For this is surely apparent to the senses. Therefore,
talis trianguli fuerit figurata et ei assimilata sicut fiet in 8° capitulo, tunc de when the intensity o f a quality o f this sort is figuratively represented by the altitude
20 facili cognoscetur huiusmodi qualitatis difformitas, dispositio, figuratio, et o f such a triangle and is assimilated to it in the manner done in chapter eight, then
mensura, et ita de aliis. N ec alio m odo possent species seu diversi modi one recognizes w ith ease in such a quality its difformity, disposition, figuration,
difformitatis agnosci nec aliter assignari, sicut patebit capitulis 140 et 150 and measure1; and similarly for other qualities. N o w there is no other w ay by
huius partis. M ultum enim iuvat ad cognitionem rerum ymaginatio figura­ which the species and diverse modes o f difformity could be recognized and other­
rum, propter quod theologi dicunt illud fuisse figuram alicuius rei ex cuius wise assigned, as w ill be obvious in chapters fourteen and fifteen o f this part. For
25 similitudine in illius rei notitiam poterat deveniri et configurari ei et assimi- the imagining o f figures is a great help in the understanding o f things. A ccordingly,
lari. Nam ut dicit Apostolus de Christo quod “ reformabit corpus humilita­ theologians say that it was from the similarity o f the figure o f something that one
tis nostre, configuratum corpori claritatis sue.” G losa dicit “ i.e., assimilabi- was able to come into know ledge o f that thing and to be conformed and assimilat­
mur corpori illius in claritate.” ed to it. For as the Apostle says concerning Christ, He “ w ill reform the body o f
N unc autem ad propositum revertendo, sicut punctualis qualitas ymagina- our lowness, made like to the body o f His glory.” 2 A gloss on this passage says:
30 tur ut linea et linearis per superficiem, ita qualitas superficiei ymaginatur ut “ i.e. w e shall be assimilated to His body in glorification.” 3
6 per om. F [ M J / linearem: linealem P / qua­ N o w , reverting to the subject at hand, just as the quality o f a point is imagined
16 quam: enim A
litatem2 om. P
17 quod: quo A P as a line, and the quality o f a line b y a surface, so the quality o f a surface is imagined
8 enim quantitas tr. A / talis qualitatis tr.
17-23 Certe__ partis: cui comparatur talis
L D [ E ] talis A / huiusmodi superficiem qualitas D
t r .B
17-18 apparet: patet A [ G N ]
9 quoniam: quia A P [ E N ]
18 huiusmodi om. F [ M ]
10 eiusdem S / quantitati P j in om. L [ N J I.ip
19 trianguli: triangli rectanguli altitudo est 1 See the Commentary, I.iv, lines 8—26. 3 The so-called Glossa ordinaria. See the
11 patebit post tr. P [ N ] patebit [ G J / debe­
uniformiter difformis E / 8°: 90 A P / capi­
amus bis P 2E p ist. to the Philippians 3120-21. Commentary, I.iv, lines 27-28.
tulo om. S
1 1 - 1 5 Sed... declaratur om. D
20 cognoscentur F B / qualitatis difformitas
12 dispositiones A L P [ E N ] / cognoscantur 27-28 assimilabimur corpori glos. ord. assimi­
tr. A qualitatis difformitas et difformis E 25-28 et1 claritate A P L S [ C E G J om.
A L P [ E N ] j eius uniformitas tr. F [ M ] / 21 et...aliis om. A P L [ E C ] et cetera [ N ] / lari corpori P [ E ] assimilatum corpori
V B F [M ]
atque: et A P [ E N J S [ G ] assimilatio in corpora A assimilatum
species: superficies A / seu om. A P / diver­ 25- 26 et1 Apostolus: configurari enim i.
13 citius: citius et E [ N J / et om. B si m odi: diversimode P corpus L [ ? C ]
assimilari unde apostolus ait S
14 aliquod: ad( ? ) S [ C ] aliquid [ N G ] 28 claritate S [ C G ] cf. glos. ord. glorificatione
22 agnosci: cognosci F [ M J / capitulis: in capi­ 25 configurari: figurari A
15 ctom . A P j en im om. D tulis A P L [ E ] A L P [E ]
26- 44 N am _apparebit om. D
15- 16 quibusdam intelligere om. A P 23 en im :si ( ? ) ^ 4 2 7- 29 configuratum... revertendo: et cetera 29 Nunc autem: Sed nunc A P [ E ] I pxm ctuzlis:
16 que: quid L P D [ E C ] quod A patet talis F [ M J
24 illud B V F S [ M G ] illam A E P D [ E C N J / dico igitur quod [ N J
16- 17 Sed... difformis B V A P D F [ M E C N ] , alicuius rei om. A alicuius S [ M ] 30 lin ea ...u t om. A P
27 G \ o s & L [C ]q J o ^ & ifc n itiv e.A g J cP P S [ E G J
mg. L , om. S [ G ] et text. E
25 notitiam tr. V p o s t in / devenire F [ M N ] / i.e. S [ C G ] cf. glos. ord. ibi A E P [ E ]
 176 D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum Part I, Chapter v 177

corpus cuius quidem corporis ymaginati basis est superficies ipsa informata
qualitate prout plenius declarabitur in processu. Cum autem in corpore
quali infinite sint superficies [equales] et cuiuslibet earum qualitas ymagine-
tur ut corpus, non est inconveniens, sed oportet, ymaginari unum corpus
35 secundum situm ubi aliud potest ymaginari simul, vel etiam quodlibet simul,
per penetrationem vel per mathematicam suppositionem (/superpositionem?)
seu simul positionem corporum sic fictorum; que tamen penetratio non est
in re. E t quamvis qualitas superficialis ymaginetur per corpus, et non con­
tingat esse vel ymaginari quartam dimensionem, tamen qualitas corporalis
40 ymaginatur habere duplicem corporeitatem : unam veram ad extensionem
subiecti secundum omnem dimensionem, aliam vero solum ymaginatam ab
intensione ipsius qualitatis infinities replicabilem secundum multitudinem
superficierum subiecti, cuius ymaginationis op(p)ortunitas prius tacta est et
in sequentibus plenius apparebit.
as a body whose base is the surface informed w ith the quality. This w ill be more
fully clarified as w e go along. M oreover, since in any kind o f a body there is an
infinite number o f equivalent4 surfaces and the quality o f any one o f them is imag­
ined as a body, it is not unfitting but necessary that one body be imagined to be at
the same time in the place where another body— or even any other body whatever
— is imagined to be. [We can think o f this taking place] by penetration or by math­
ematical superposition5 or the simultaneous placing o f the bodies so imagined.
H owever, this penetration is not real. A n d although a surface quality is imagined
by means o f a body and it does not happen that a fourth dimension exists or is
imagined,6 still a corporeal quality is imagined to have a double corporeity: a true
one w ith respect to the extension o f the subject in every dimension and another
one that is only imagined from the intensity o f this quality taken an infinite number
o f times and dependent upon the multitude o f surfaces o f the subject. T he suitable­
ness o f this imagined concept has been touched upon before and w ill be more fully
apparent in what follows.

[I.v] Capitulum 5m de figuratione qualitatum I.v On the figuration o f qualities

Omnis qualitas linearis figuratur ad modum alicuius superficiei super
subiectam lineam perpendiculariter erecte. Sit enim A B linea informata
qualitate [Fig. 1]. E t quoniam per precedens capitulum qualitas ista designa-
5 tur per superficiem, oportet quod ymaginetur figurata sicut superficies per
quam ipsa designatur vel ymaginatur. Cuius quidem superficiei altitudo
designat intensionem istius qualitatis. Oportet etiam quod istius superficiei
E very linear quality is “ figured” (i.e., represented in figures) by means o f a sur­
face perpendicularly erected upon a subject line. For let A B be a line informed
with a quality [see Fig. 1]. A nd since b y the preceding chapter this quality is des­
ignated by a surface, it is necessary that it be imagined as “ figured” by the surface
by w hich it is designated or imagined. T he latitude o f this surface designates the in­
tensity o f this quality. It is necessary also that any point o f this surface or figure out-

31 superficies ipsa tr. A 37 positionem: possent V / sic om. A L / fic­

3 2 prout... declarabitur: sicut plenius patebit
A sicut patebit plenius P [ E ] ut post decla­
ratur [ N J / in processu om. [ N J / Cu m :
nunc F [ M J / autem: igitur V
33 sint: sunt A F [ M ] / [equales] B V A P S L
[ E G C N ] , sed delendum est, sicut in F [ M ] ?
33-34 ymaginatur F f M N J
34 sed oportet om. L / sed: sed forte F [ M N J /
post ymaginari add. S sit
3 5 secundum situm: sic fictum F [ N ] situm S
sic infinitum [ C ] / u b i... simul1: simul esse
ubi aliud A P [ E ] / vel: aut A / quodlibet:
quomodolibet F [ M ] quolibet i - quotlibet
[ E ] / simul2: sive A
36 penetrationes L [ C ] / vel: seu V F / per
B S F [ C G M ] om. V etiam per A P [ E N ]
etiam L / suppositionem: positionem V
torum B V S F [ M N ] situatorum A P L [ E ]
sitorum [ G ] finitorum [ C ] / post fictorum
add. L secundum infinitatem
38 qualitas om. L / ymaginatur P [ N ] / et2:
tamen L et tamen [ N J
38-39 contingat B V F S [M G N ] conting1
A P L contingit [ E C ]
39 tamen V P L S [ E G C ] cum B A F J M J N J
40 post duplicem add. S ipse
41-42 aliam... multitudinem om. S
41 vero om. F [ M ] / solum V A P F f E G C ]
solam B L [ M N '] / solum ymaginatam tr. A
42 replicata L
44 in sequentibus: post [ N J / in ... apparebit:
postea plenius patebit A P [ E J
4 The Latin text appears to have superficies
equales. Either the equales ought to be deleted,
or it is used with the meaning o f surfaces that
are equivalent or equal in thickness. One
would suppose that Oresme would have con­
ceived o f them as being o f infinitely small
thickness, syncategorematically speaking, i.e.,*12
4
3 6 See the Commentary, I.iv, line 39.
I.v: B V A P F L D [E N M C G S ]
1 Capitulum... qualitatum B V L D [ E C ] om.
A [ M ] 5m capitulum P D e figuratione
qualitatum capitulum 5m F [ G ] Capitulum
5m [ N S 7 5 c mg. S 6 mg. A
2 lignealis A
3 lineam o m .[ S ] lignealem A
4 quoniam: quia A P [ E N ]
that they are thinner than any assignable
quantity.
5 A ll manuscripts except V (which has posi­
tionem) have suppositionem. However, super­
positionem makes much better sense and so I
have rendered it such in my translation.
6 ipsa om. L D [ N J / ve l: aut A / vel ymagi­
natur om. D
7 intensionem... qualitatis: qualitatem in­
tensionem A / istius1 om. A L P D [ N J /
Oportet: et oportet A P [ E J / etiam om.
A P [ E J igitur G / istius2: illius A P ius [ E ]
alicuius [ S J / superficie A
 i 78 D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum Part I, Chapter vi U9

vel figure quilibet punctus extra lineam A B subiectam stet perpendiculariter

super eandem lineam A B , ut patet per primum capitulum, aliter enim in­
io tensio et qualitas essent extra subiectum, quia illud quod secundum istam
ymaginationem est supra subiectum est secundum rem in subiecto, et econ-
verso, propter quod si quid ymaginaretur super subiectum et non perpen­
diculariter, illud esset secundum rem extra subiectum. Unde patet quod
nulla qualitas ymaginanda est per superficiem vel figuram cuius angulus (a)
Fig. 1
15 super basim sit maior recto, sicut esset quadrangulus A B C D , neque per Figures in MSS B L D S J C G . MS C interchanges letters G and F . MS / interchanges D and C .
circuli portionem semicirculo maiorem, sicut esset portio E F G . Sed per
quamlibet aliam figuram planam potest ymaginari aliqua qualitas linearis. side o f subject line A B stands perpendicularly above this same line A B , as is ob­
vious in the first chapter, for otherwise the intensity and quality w ould be [laterally]
outside the subject.1 [This is true] because anything which according to our imag­
ination is above this line is actually in the subject, and vice versa. A ccordingly, if
[I.vi] Capitulum 6m de figurarum dearticulatione anything were imagined as being above the subject but not above it perpendicular­
ly, then it w ould actually be outside o f the subject. Thus it is obvious that no quali­
Etsi per quamlibet figuram planam aliam a predictis possit recte ymaginari ty is to be imagined by a surface or figure having an angle at the base greater than a
aliqua qualitas linearis, non tamen quelibet potest ymaginari per quamlibet. right angle, e.g., quadrangle A B C D ; or by a segment o f a circle that is greater than
N ulla siquidem qualitas linearis ymaginatur sive designatur per aliquam fi- a semicircle,2 e.g., segment E F G . But some linear quality can be imagined by any
5 guram nisi quorumcunque punctorum ipsius qualitatis in intensione sit pro­ other plane figure.
portio sicut proportio linearum super eadem puncta erectarum perpendicu­
lariter et terminatarum in summitate talis figure ymaginate.
V erbi gratia [Fig. 2], sit linea A B divisa qualitercunque in puncto C sic
quod intensio sit [in] duplo maior in puncto C quam in puncto A , et sit in I.vi On the clarification o f the figures
10 puncto B triplo maior quam in puncto C . E rgo per primum capitulum linea
perpendiculariter ymaginata super punctum C denotans intensionem illius A lthough some linear quality can be correctly imagined by any plane figure oth­
er than those mentioned before, still not any quality can be imagined by any figure.
8jperpendiculariter om. F [ M ] A L D [ E ] / linearis: lignearum A
9 ut: ultiam (!) F ultimam [ M ] / per om. P / Indeed no linear quality is imagined or designated by any figure except the ones in
capitulum: casum P / enim: autem A I.v i: B V A P F L which the ratio o f the intensities at any points o f that quality is as the ratio o f the
1 0 - 12 quia... quod: unde D 1 Capitulum... dearticulatione B V L P [ E C ] lines erected perpendicularly in those same points and terminating in the summit
11 est1: esse P esset [ E ] / s u p t2 iB V [ S C ] sim­ om. A [ M N S J D e articulatione figurarum o f the imagined figure.1
pliciter A P sicud supra F [ M ] / supra... capitulum 6m F D e figurarum dearticu-
For example [see Fig. 2], let line A B be divided in point C in any w ay such that
est om. L lationem capitulum 6m [ G ] 6 c mg. S 7
11 - 12 econverso: econtra A L P [ E C N ] mg. A
the intensity in point C is double2 that in point A ; and in point B let it be triple
12 quod: quid F j si quid: sin L supra j quid: 2 alia F i recte o m .A P / ymaginari tr. A P [ E ] that in point C . Therefore, by the first chapter the line imagined as rising perpendic-
quis F f N M ] / ymaginaretur B F [ S M G C ] ante non
ymaginetur A L P [ E ] yma2 V ymaginatur 3 aliqua... ymaginari om. F / potest om. E
[ N J I super: supra F 4 Nulla om. [ C ] nulle A P [ E ] ; lac. E / quali­
13 Unde: E x quo D tates lineares A P [ E ] j y maginantur A P [ E ]
14 nulla: nulla talis F I sive: seu V aut A vel P [ E ] / designan­
I.v I.vi
15 maior: minor V / esset om. L D / A B C D : tur A P [ E ]
1 See the Commentary, I.v, lines 9-10. 1 See the Commentary, I.vi, lines 4-7.
A B D C B I neque: remanet (?) B j per: 7 et terminatarum: pertractarum F j talis:
2 Ibid., line 16. 2 Ibid., line 9.
secundum F [ M ] vel F
16 semicirculo maiorem om. F [ M ] j portio 8 gratia om. P
om. V 9 quod om. V / sit om. B F [ S M ] / fin] om. linea 9 et tr. A post sit erit A P [ E ] tunc E
17 potest ymaginari tr. A / aliqua om. F [ C ] cf. comm. / maior tr. P ante sit1 in 10 B B F [ S G M ] B in L V A P [ E N C ] / Ergo:
 J8° D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum Part I, Chapter vii 1^1

puncti est duplo maior quam linea ymaginata super A , et linea ymaginata ularly above point C and denoting the intensity at that point is double the line
super B est triplo maior quam linea ymaginata super C . Igitur qualitas ista imagined as rising above point A , and the line imagined as rising above point B is
non potest ymaginari nisi per figuram que sit duplo altior vel cuius summitas three times the line imagined as rising above C . Therefore, this quality can be imag-
15 sit in duplo maior super C quam super A , et triplo maior super B quam
super C , cum hoc tamen stat quod huiusmodi figura posset variari in altitu­
dine secundum proportionem intensionis in aliis punctis linee A B . Sed ex
hoc apparet quod huiusmodi qualitas non potest designari per quadrangulum
rectangulum neque per semicirculum, et ita de aliis infinitis figuris.

[I.vii] Capitulum 7m de figurarum coaptatione

Quelibet qualitas linearis per omnem figuram planam designari potest que
super ipsam perpendiculariter ymaginata proportionalis est in altitudine
eidem qualitati in intensione. Figura autem erecta super lineam informatam
5 qualitate dicitur proportionalis in altitudine qualitati in intensione quando
quelibet due linee perpendiculariter erecte super ipsam lineam que est basis
usque ad figure vel superficiei summitatem sunt proportionales in altitudine
punctis super que stant in intensione.
Verbi gratia [Fig. 3], sit linea A B super quam statuatur superficies A B C D
o eriganturque super basim due linee E F et G H . Si igitur talis sit proportio
E F ad G H qualis est proportio intensionis in puncto E ad intensionem in
puncto C , et sic de aliis punctis et lineis correspondenter, dico quod hec
superficies vel figura est proportionalis in altitudine huic qualitati in inten-
Fig. 2
Figure in MSS B L G C S . Letter C is missing in MS L which has at the tops o f the altitudes i m,
2m, 3mj and at the bottoms 1, 2m, 6. MS L also includes another similar figure with the perpen­
dicular on C toward the middle of the figure.
ined only by the figure which at point C is tw ice as high as at point M or whose
summit at C is double that at point A , and whose summit at point B is triple that at
point C — with the further stipulation however that the figure o f this sort could be
varied in altitude according to the ratio o f intensities in the other points o f line
A B . But from this it is apparent that a quality o f this sort cannot be designated by
a rectangle or by a semicircle; and similarly concerning an infinite number o f other
figures.

I.vii On the suitability of the figures

12 est: C A P [ E ] C est [ N ] / duplo B F [ S M C I.vii: B V A P F L
G ] in duplo L V A P [ N E ] / maoriem/3 / 1 Capitulum... coaptatione (coaptione P) A n y linear quality can be designated by every plane figure which is imagined as
quam: quam sit P / ymaginata1 tr. F [ M ] B V L P [ E C ] om. A [ S M N J De figurarum
standing perpendicularly on the linear [extension o f the] quality and which is pro­
post A in linea 12 / ymaginata2 tr. A P [ E ] coaptatione capitulum j m F [ G ] 7 c mg. [ S ]
post B in linea 13 7 mg. A
portional in altitude to the quality in intensity. M oreover, a figure erected on a line
13 est: erit A P [ E ] / triplo B F f S M C G ] in 2 linearis: lignearum A / planam: plenam A informed with a quality is said to be “ proportional in altitude to the quality in in­
triplo L V A P [ N E ] / quam linea om. F / 3 ymaginatura L tensity” 1 when any tw o lines perpendicularly erected on the quality line as a base
ymaginata om. A / ista om. [ M ] illa P ia 4 informata A P and rising to the summit o f the surface or figure have the same ratio in altitude to
[E ] 5 in ... qualitati: altitudini in qualitate F [ M ]
each other as do the intensities at the points on which they stand.
14, 15 duplo B F L [ M N C G S J in duplo 6 est basis: a basi A
A V P [E ] 7 ad: ad extremum P [ N J / v e l: aut A
For example [see Fig. 3], let there be line A B on which surface A B C D stands
15 triplo: in duplo P in triplo A V L [ G ] 8 puncto F [ M ] / que: quem F [ M ] quam [ S ] and let the tw o lines E F and G H be erected on the base. If, therefore, the ratio o f
16 posset: possit F [ E M C ] potest [ G ] / vari­ 9 statuatur: situetur A L P [ E N ] E F to G H is as the ratio o f the intensity in point E to the intensity in point G , and
ari om. F [ M ] 10 supra L [ C ] / talis sit tr. F [ M G ] similarly for the other points and their corresponding lines, then I say that this sur­
17 Sed: sed etiam A 12 correspondenter: correspondentibus
face or figure is “ proportional in altitude to this quality in intensity,” so that the
18 apparet: patet A [ N ] / potest: posset B A [ G ] I hec: illa A
P [E C J 13 vel: aut A / huic om. L [ C ] I.vii
19 infinitis om. A in infinitis P 1See t h e C o m m e n t a r y , I . v i i , lin e s 4- 8.
 182 D e configurationibus qualitatum et m otuum 183
Part I, Chapter vii

sione, ita quod altitudo superficiei similis est intensioni qualitatis istius; altitude o f the surface is similar to the intensity o f this quality. Therefore, this
i5 quare per talem figuram vel superficiem qualitas ista convenientissime desig­ quality is most fittingly designated by such a figure or surface.2 M oreover, since
natur. Cum autem super eandem lineam A B plures superficies possint erigi on the same line A B a great number o f surfaces can be erected which are proportion-
proportionales vel similes in altitudine, quedam maiores alie minores, verbi
gratia, superficies A B K L maior et superficies A B M N minor, et quelibet
alie que essent consimilis altitudinis licet inequalis, sequitur quod qualitas
20 linee A B poterit indifferenter per earum quamlibet designari; ita tamen
quod si ipsa qualitas ymaginetur per aliquam istarum figurarum signatam
tunc stante ista figuratione qualitas dupla ad istam consimilis intensionis
designabitur per duplo altiorem figuram consimilis altitudinis. E t sic pro-
portionaliter quantumlibet fuerit qualitas maior vel minor, et nichilominus
25 prima qualitas potuit ymaginari in principio per quamlibet maiorem vel
minorem superficiem seu figuram. Iste autem superficies maiores vel minores
sunt simpliciter inequales et dissimiles in figura et etiam in altitudine in-
Figure in MSS B L G C S . In MS J there is a scrambled figure, perhaps derived from this figure.
equales et tamen sunt in altitudine similes sive proportionales. Unde si in
In MS B letters O and P are missing. MS L extends E F and G H to meet L K .
duabus intersectionibus signentur duo puncta O et P eo m odo quo patet in
30 figura nunc posita, tunc si proportio G H ad E F sit sicut proportio G P ad al or similar in altitude— some o f which are larger and some smaller than A B C D , as
E O et sic de quibuslibet duabus lineis erectis conformiter super ipsam basim for example surface A B K L which is larger and surface A B M N which is smaller,
A B , dico quod superficies A B C D et superficies A B M N sunt consimilis and any number o f others which w ould be o f similar although unequal altitude— it
altitudinis sive proportionalis. follows that the quality o f line A B can be designated by any one o f them indif­
ferently. There is how ever this p rovision: if the quality is imagined by some one o f
these designated figures, then with this figuration retained a quality which is double
the original one in intensity and similar to it w ill be designated by a figure o f sim­
ilar altitude but tw ice as high.3 T he same thing holds proportionally for any great­
er or lesser quality, notwithstanding the fact that the first quality could have been
imagined in the beginning by a greater or lesser surface or figure. M oreover these
14 istius om. A L P [ E N ] 24 minor: brevior V [ M G ] / et om. P vel [ M ] greater or lesser surfaces are unequal in area, dissimilar in figure and also unequal
15 quare: qualis F [ S M J / talem om. B / vel: 25 prima qualitas tr. L P [ N ] / poterit [ N J / in altitude, and yet they are similar or proportional in altitude. Hence, if tw o points
sive A / qualitas ista om. F [ M J / ista: illa v e l: aut A
P [E N ]i* [G J
O and P are marked in the intersections as in the accompanying figure, then i f G H /
26 minorem: breviorem V P / seu: vel
16 plures superficies tr. F [ M ] om. [ G J / su­ F P [ E M J aut A / vel V L P E C G et
E F = G PJE O and similarly in regard to any tw o lines erected in like fashion on
perficies ... erigi: essent superficies V / B F [ S M N J aut A / minores: breviores V the base A B , I say that surface A B C D and surface A B M N are o f similar or pro­
possint A F L [ E S M G ] possunt B P [ N C ] 27 sunt om. L [ N J / et1: aut A portional altitude.
17 vel: aut A / consimiles F [ M ] / in altitudine 28 sive: seu A F [ E M J
om. V / alie: quedam F [ M ] / minores: 29 signantur B [ C J / eo: eodem A / quo: duo
breviores V A /
18 maior om. F L [ S M J / minor: brevior V / 29-30 patet... figura lac. A
quelibet: quotlibet B [ S M J 30 nunc o m .[ G ] ultimo modo E nunc ultimo
19 inequalis: equalis A / qualitas: ista qualitas [ E ] ultimo nunc P A ultimo [ N C J / si
A P fE J om. F [ M J
21 ipsa: ista F [ M J / ymaginatur B [ N C ] / 31 de om. A P / quibuscunque F [ M J quibus­
signatam om. F [ M ] figuratam [ N J dam [ N C J I duabus lineis tr. V lineis
22 ista: illa A L [ E G ] / figuratione: signata L [N C J
ista signatione B / qualitatis A L , ? P 32 quod: cum A / superficies2 om. V
23/ designatur F [ M ] / per: pro A / sic om. A 33 proportionis A P L [ E N C ] 3 Ibid., lines 20-23.
2 Ibid., lines 15-16.
 Part I, Chapter viii 183
184 D e configurationibus qualitatum e t m otuum

[I.viii] Capitulum 8m de qualitate triangulari rectangula I.viii On a right-triangular quality

Omnis qualitas ymaginabilis per triangulum habentem rectum angulum
super basim potest ymaginari per omnem triangulum habentem rectum
angulum super eandem basim, et per nullam aliam figuram potest ymagi-
5 nari. Q uo d enim aliqua qualitas sit ymaginabilis per talem triangulum patet
ex capitulo precedenti eo quod aliqua potest esse proportionalis in intensione
tali triangulo in altitudine; et illa est que vocatur communiter qualitas uni­
formiter difformis terminata ad non gradum, que tamen magis proprie
potest dici qualitas uniformiter inequalis in intensione sicut triangulus cui ip-
10 sa proportionatur est altitudinis uniformiter inequalis. Similiter ipsa magis
deberet dici terminari ad privationem quam ad non gradum. Sed quoniam
alia locutio magis est apud modernos assueta et est satis transibilis, ideo in
hoc tractatu eam recipio et admitto.
Q uo d vero predicta qualitas non possit per aliam figuram designari patet
i5 ex eo quod nulla figura alia a tali triangulo habente rectum angulum super
basim est consimilis altitudinis seu proportionalis predicto triangulo, ut
planum est intuenti; igitur nec proportionalis in altitudine isti qualitati in
intensione. E rgo per eam non est ymaginabilis qualitas predicta, ut patet per
6m capitulum. Sed quod indifferenter ista qualitas per omnem triangulum
20 habentem rectum angulum super basim possit congrue ymaginari probatur
sic.
E t sint duo trianguli tales, scilicet A B C minor et A B D maior, super basim
A B ; deinde erigatur perpendiculariter linea E F in maiori triangulo, que
secet lineam A C in puncto G [Fig. 4]. Quoniam ergo duo trianguli A B D et
E very quality which is imaginable by a triangle having a right angle on the base
can be imagined b y every triangle having a right angle on the same base; and by no
other figure can it be imagined. That some quality is imaginable b y such a triangle
is evident from the preceding chapter because some quality can be proportional in
intensity to such a triangle in altitude. This quality is that which is comm only called
a “ uniformly difform quality terminated at no degree.” 1 H ow ever, more properly
it can be called a quality uniformly unequal in intensity just as the triangle to which
it is proportional is uniformly unequal in altitude. Similarly it w ould be better to
say that it is terminated at the “ privation” [of the quality] rather than at “ no degree.”
But since the other locution is the more customary one among moderns and repre­
sents the idea w ell enough, therefore I shall take it up and adopt it in this treatise.
That the aforesaid [uniformly difform] quality cannot be designated by any oth­
er figure is clear from the fact that no figure other than this kind o f a triangle hav­
ing a right angle on its base is o f similar altitude or is proportional to the afore­
said triangle, as is plain to one w ho is observant. Therefore, no other figure is pro­
portional in altitude to that quality in intensity, and hence the aforesaid quality is
not imaginable by any other figure, as is clear b y chapter six. But that this quality
could be equivalently represented without any difference b y every triangle hav­
ing a right angle on the base is proved as follows.
O n base A B let there be tw o such triangles, namely A B C the smaller one and
A B D the larger one [see Fig. 4]. Then let line E F be erected perpendicularly in the
larger triangle, cutting line A C in point G . Therefore, since the tw o triangles A B D
D

I.viii: B V P F L 10-11 magis deberet tr. P [ A G ] magis debet

1 Capitulum... rectangula om. [ S M A ] capi­
tulum 8m [ N ] 8 mg. [ S A ] j triangulari
V L P [ G ] trianguli B F [ C ] trian^ [ E ] /
rectangula L [ G ] rectangulari EPrectan-
guli B F [ G J
z rectum om. P
4 figuram om. F
5 aliqua B V [ S F M C G ] talis L P [ E A N ] /
per talem bis V
7 triangulo: triangulo rectangulo L [ N ]
illa: ista P [ E A ] / est que om. P que [ A ] /
vocatur communiter tr. F fS J / qualitas tr.
F [ M ] post est in linea 7
9 potest B V F [ M N C G ] posset L P [ E S A ]
I in om. L P [ N C J / intensione: intensive
L [E N J
10 proportionaliter P
[N ]
11 dici om. L f S N J
12 magis est tr. V F [ E M N ] est [ C ] / trans-
sibilis B F [ M N J
13 eam tr. P [ E A ] post ideo in linea 12
14 posset P [ E S A ]
15 eo quod: alio quia F [ M ] / tali om. P
16 seu B F [ E S M A C ] sive V L P [ N G ]
17 proportionalis tr. P [ A ] post altitudine /
/ isti qualitati: istius qualitatis P
18 Ergo: igitur V L P [ S G ]
22 tales om. V [ N ] / scilicet om. F [ M ] j minor: Figure in MSS B L S G C . Letter C is missing in MS C .
brevior V
23 perpendiculariter linea tr. F [ M C ] / linea
om. P [ A N ]
24 ergo: igitur V [ S G ] I.viii
24-23 A B D et A E F : A B G et A E D F [ M J 1 I.e., “ zero degree.” I have retained “ no degree” throughout to render non gradum.
 186 D e configurationibus qualitatum et m otuum Part I, Chapter ix 187

25 A E F sunt equianguli, sequitur per 4am 61 Euclidis quod proportio B D ad
E F est sicut proportio A B ad A E . D u o quoque trianguli A B C et A E G
sunt equianguli; quare per eandem 4am 61 proportio B C ad E G est sicut
proportio A B ad A E . E rgo per n am quinti, proportio B D ad E F est sicut
proportio B C ad E G , et ita argueretur de quibuscunque lineis conformiter
30 erectis. E rg o isti trianguli, scilicet triangulus A B C et triangulus A B D , sunt
in altitudine similes seu proportionales, et sic de quibuscunque triangulis
habentibus rectum angulum super basim A B . Igitur cuicunque eorum assi-
milatur aliqua qualitas; eadem quoque potest cuilibet aliorum assimilari et
per eum ymaginari. Sic tamen ut si aliqua qualitas signetur per unum trian-
35 gulum, [alia] duplo intensior similis intensionis signanda est per duplo al-
tiorem triangulum, et sic semper proportionaliter, ut dictum est in capitulo
precedenti.
and A E F are equiangular, it follows by [proposition] V I.4 [of the Elements] o f
Euclid2 that B D / E F = A B f A E . Furthermore, the tw o triangles A B C and A E G
are equiangular. Therefore by that same [proposition] VI.4, B C J E G = A B j A E .
Therefore, by [proposition] V . n [of the Elements]3, B D j E F = B C jE G . A n d it
w ould be argued in the same w ay for any lines erected in this same fashion. There­
fore, these triangles, namely A A B C and A A B D , are proportional or similar in al­
titude. A n d it is the same for any triangle having a right angle on base A B . There­
fore, some quality is assimilated to any one o f these triangles and, further, the same
quality can be assimilated to any other one o f them and be imagined b y it. There is
this proviso,+ h ow ever: i f some quality is designated by one triangle, another qual­
ity o f similar but double intensity must be designated b y a triangle that is tw ice as
high, and similarly for the proportionally greater [intensities], as has been said in
the preceding chapter.

[Lix] Capitulum 9m de qualitate aliter triangulari I.ix On a quality triangular in another way

Omnis qualitas ymaginabilis per triangulum non habentem rectum angu­
lum super basim est divisibilis in duas qualitates quarum utraque est
ymaginabilis per triangulum habentem rectum angulum super basim. Nulla
5 enim qualitas ymaginabilis est per triangulum aut quamvis aliam figuram
habentem obtusum angulum super basim, ut ostensum fuit in 50 capitulo
huius. Omnis igitur qualitas triangularis assimilatur triangulo habenti rec­
tum angulum super basim, de quo dictum est in precedenti capitulo, aut
triangulo habenti utrumque angulum acutum de hiis angulis qui sunt super
10 basim.
Sit itaque aliqua qualitas ymaginabilis per triangulum A B C habentem
utrumque angulum acutum de hiis qui sunt super basim [Fig. 5]; protraha-
E very quality imaginable b y a triangle not having a right angle on the base is
divisible into tw o qualities, each o f which is imaginable by a triangle having a right
angle on the base. For no quality is imaginable by a triangle, or any figure, having
an obtuse angle on the base, as was demonstrated in chapter five o f this part. There­
fore, every triangular quality is assimilated either to the triangle having a right
angle on the base which w e discussed in the preceding chapter or to a triangle hav­
ing tw o acute angles on the base.
A n d so let there be some quality imaginable b y A A B C having both o f its base
angles acute [see Fig. 5]. A n d let perpendicular C D be dropped from point C to
E

25, 27 eque anguli V P [ A ] liter [ S G ] / u t: sicud F [ M ]

25 quod om. P 37 precendeti: immediate precedenti F [ M ]
26 A B - . B A L
27-28 sicut__ est om. F [ M ] L ix : B V P F L
28, 30 Ergo: igitur V
x Capitulum... triangulari om. [ M A S ] Capi­
29 argueretur V L F [ M E C G N ] arguetur tulum 9m [ N ] 9 mg. [ S A ] I Capitulum 9m
B P [S A ]
tr. F [ G ] post triangulari / aliter: alicuius
30 A B D : A B G V E / aliter tr. [ E ] ante de / trianguli B L
33 aliorum B F [M S G ] eorum L P [ N E A ] 7 igitur V F P f E S M N ] ergo B L [ A C G ]
aliquorum V earum [ C ] / assimilari tr. 8 de q u o: ut L P [ E A ]
F [ M ] ante cuilibet / et: et sic F [ M ] Figure in MSS B L S C G . Letters E and C are interchanged in MSS E and C .
ix itaque: utique P [ A ] / ymaginabilis om. P
34 ut: quod [ E S ] / signaretur P [ E A N J 12 utrumque angulum V L [ N S ] tr. [ E ] angu­
35 [alia] supplevi / intensiorem L 2 See the Commentary, I.viii, lines 25,27. 4 This proviso is the same as that discussed
lum A P [ A ] utrumque B F [M C G ] /
36 semper proportionaliter tr. P proportiona­ 3 Ibid., line 28. in the Commentary, I.vii, lines 20-23.
super: supra L [ E S ]
 188 D e configurationibus qualitatum et m otuum Part I, Chapter x 189

turque a puncto C perpendicularis super basim A B , que sit C D ; tunc fient
duo trianguli rectanguli partiales, et una pars qualitatis linee A B assimilabi-
i5 tur uni et altera alteri, et totalis qualitas est composita ex illis duabus uni­
formiter difformibus terminatis ad non gradum. Cum igitur qualitas partialis
linee A D possit assimilari triangulo altiori quantumlibet vel etiam minus
alto, ut patet ex precedenti capitulo, verbi gratia, triangulo A D E vel triangu­
lo A D F , et conformiter est de qualitate alterius partis, scilicet linee D B ,
20 dum tamen ambarum partium duo trianguli in eadem summitate terminen­
tur, sequitur ex hoc quod totalis qualitas linee A B potest ymaginari per
triangulum A B C vel per triangulum A B F et sic quom odolibet indifferen­
ter, servato semper quod angulus superior sit perpendiculariter super punc­
tum D . Unde patet quod talis qualitas triangularis non determinat sibi
25 angulum superiorem certe quantitatis, sed potest esse quantumlibet acutus
vel obtusus, et uterque eorum qui sunt super basim potest quantumlibet esse
acutus. N ulla itaque qualitas, quantacunque sit, determinat sibi in sua figura­
tione ymaginabili angulum certe quantitatis nisi quedam que sibi determinat
angulum rectum unum super basim, de qua dictum est in precedenti capi-
30 tulo, et aliqua est que determinat sibi utrumque angulum rectum de hiis qui
sunt super basim, et alios non, et quedam est que sibi determinat quatuor
rectos [angulos] sicut statim patebit.
base A B . Thus tw o partial right triangles are formed and one part o f the quality o f
line A B will be assimilated to one o f the triangles and the other part to the other
triangle, and the total quality is composed o f these tw o uniformly difform [quali­
ties] terminated at no degree. Therefore, since the quality o f partial line A D can be
assimilated to a triangle which is higher or lower by any amount, as is clear from
the preceding chapter— e.g., to A A D E or to A A D F , and since the same thing is
true for the quality o f the other part, namely the quality o f line D B , w ith the tw o
triangles o f both parts terminating at the same summit, it accordingly follows that
the total quality o f line A B can be imagined by A A B C or b y A A B F or by any other
one without it making any difference— so long as the superior angle is kept per­
pendicularly above point D . Therefore, it is clear that such a triangular quality does
not in itself determine a superior angle o f a definite quantity. That angle can be as
acute or as obtuse as w e wish and each o f the base angles as acute as w e wish. A nd
so no quality, whatever its quantity, determines in itself the quantity o f the angle
used in its imaginable figuration, with these exceptions:1 (1) the particular quality
which in itself determines that one right angle must be on the base— and w e spoke
o f this in the preceding chapter, (2) the quality which determines in itself that both
base angles must be right and the other angles must not be, and (3) the particular
quality which in itself determines that all four angles must be right, as w ill be im­
mediately clear.

[Lx] Capitulum io m de qualitate quadrangulari I.x On quadrangular quality

Quedam qualitas ymaginabilis est per quadrangulum rectangulum et per A certain quality is imaginable by a rectangle— in fact by any such rectangle con­
quemlibet talem super eandem basim constitutum et per nullam aliam figu­ structed on the same base— and by no other type o f figure can it be designated.
ram designari potest. Hec ultima pars patet per predicta in capitulo 6°. This last part is made clear by means o f the prior statements in chapter six.
5 Sit itaque quadrangulus rectangulus A B C D [Fig. 6(a)]. Possibile est igi­ A nd so let there be rectangle A B C D [see Fig. 6(a)]. Therefore, it is possible that
tur quod qualitas linee A B sit proportionalis in intensione huic quadrangulo the quality o f line A B be proportional in intensity to this rectangle in altitude.
13 super L P [ E S A N C J supra B L F [ M G ] z j quantacunque B L [E A C G ] quecunque
14 duo om. L P [ E A C ] / A B om. L [ C ] V F [ S M ] quantumcunque P quantacun­
15 illis om. F [ M ] / duobus F que quecunque [ N J / sit B V F [ M G ] om.
15-16 uniformiter om. P [ A ] L P [E C A N S ]
16 Cum: et cum E / igitur V F L [ E S N M ] F ix
29-3 ° precedenti capitulo tr. P [ A N ]
1 The exceptions are o f course: (1) a quality both extremes at some degree, which must
ergo B P [ A C G ] 30 sibi om. L P [ A C ]
uniformly difform terminated at no degree, have two right angles on the base; and (3) a uni­
zo eadem: earum P 31 alios: alias L P [ A N ]
which must have one right angle on the base; form quality, which must be represented by a
22 A B C : A B E V 32 [angulos] L P [ E A N ] 07n. B V F f S M C G ] /
(2) a quality uniformly difform terminated in rectangle and thus have four right angles.
23 servato: servato tamen P [ E S A ] j angulus: statim om. [ G ] statim prius P post hoc [ C ]
triangulus F [ M N J
25 esse: ei F ea [ M ] I .x : B V P F L 2 rectangulum om. F [ M N ] 3-4 figuram om. F [ M ]
26-27 v e l... acutus om. P [ A ] 1 Capitulum.. .quadrangulari om. [M A S ] 3 quamlibet F P [ M G ] / talem: talem figu- 4 predicta: predictam [ C ] dicta B L F
26 qui: que B / supra F [ M ] / quantumlibet capitulum io m [ N ] 10 mg. [ S A ] j Capi­ ram F [ M ] / eandem basim tr. P [ A ] j con- 5-6 igitur: ergo B [ E A C G ]
esse tr. P [ G ] esse quodlibet [ C ] tulum iom tr. F [ G ] post quadrangulari stitutam F [ E M ] / nullam aliam tr. F [ M ] 6 quadrangulum V
 190 D e configurationibus qualitatum e t m otuum Part I, Chapter xi 191

in altitudine. Igitur erit proportionalis cuilibet quadrangulo rectangulo Therefore, it w ill be proportional to any rectangle constructed on A B , because all
super A B constituto, eo quod omnes tales sunt proportionalis altitudinis such rectangles are o f proportional, although unequal, altitude. Therefore, by chap­
quamvis tamen inequalis. E rgo per capitulum 7m ipsa qualitas est ymagina- ter seven, this quality is imaginable b y rectangle A B C D and similarly by rectangle
10 bilis per quadrangulum A B C D et similiter per quadrangulum A B E F A B E F which is greater and also by one that is less. M oreover, any such quality is
maiorem sive etiam per minorem. Quelibet autem talis qualitas dicitur uni­ said to be “ uniform ” or “ o f equal intensity” in all o f its parts.
formis seu equalis intensionis in cunctis partibus eius.
Rursum sciendum quod aliqua qualitas est ymaginabilis per quadrangulum
habentem duos rectos angulos super basim et alios inequales, sicut per
15 quadrangulum A B C D [Fig. 6(b) ] et per omnem quadrangulum proportiona­
lis altitudinis super basim A B constitutum sive fuerit maior sive minor, ut
patet ex 70 capitulo. Quelibet autem talis qualitas dicitur uniformiter diffor-
mis terminata utrinque ad gradum, ita quod extremum intensius designatur
in angulo C acuto et extremum remissius in angulo D obtuso. Superior vero Figures in MSS B L S C G . Letters C and D in figure (a) are interchanged in MS L .

20 linea, sicut est linea C D , dicitur linea summitatis, vel in relatione ad qualita­
A gain it ought to be know n that some quality is imaginable by a quadrangle hav­
tem potest vocari linea intensionis quia secundum varietatem ipsius variatur
ing tw o right angles on the base and the other tw o angles unequal, e.g., by quad­
intensio.
rangle A B C D [see Fig. 6(b)] and by every quadrangle constructed on base A B
which is o f proportional altitude, whether it be greater or less, as is clear in chapter
seven. M oreover, any such quality is spoken o f as “ uniformly difform terminated
in both extremes at some degree,” so that the more intense extreme is designated
[I.xi] Capitulum n m de qualitate uniformi et difformi in the acute angle C and the more remiss in the obtuse angle D . The superior line,
e.g., line C D , is called “ the line o f summit,” or in relation to quality it can be
Omnis itaque qualitas uniformis ymaginatur per quadrangulum rectangu-
called “ the line o f intensity” because the intensity varies according to its variation
lum et omnis qualitas uniformiter difformis terminata ad non gradum ymagi­
nabilis est per triangulum rectangulum. Omnis vero qualitas uniformiter
5 difformis terminata utrinque ad gradum ymaginanda est per quadrangulum
habentem rectos angulos super basim et alios inequales. Omnis autem alia
I.xi On uniform and difform quality
qualitas linearis dicitur difformiter difformis et est ymaginabilis per figuras
aliter dispositas secundum multifariam variationem, cuius aliqui modi postea
A nd so every uniform quality is imagined by a rectangle and every quality uni­
7 altitudine: latitudine P 16 -17 sive1— dicitur om. F [ M ] form ly difform terminated at no degree is imaginable by a right triangle. Further,
7-8 cuilibet... altitudinis orn. F (sed habet 16 minor: brevior V every quality uniformly difform terminated in both extremes at some degree is to
[M ]) 17 ex 70 B V [ E S G ] in 70 [ N ] 90 L P [ A ] in be imagined by a quadrangle having right angles on its base and the other tw o
8 tales: scilicet tales L scilicet [ C ] / proporti-
[C ] . angles unequal. N o w every other linear quality is said to be “ difformly difform”
onabilis V 18 terminata utrinque tr. L P / utrinque B [ C ]
9 Ergo: igitur L P [ E S M ] / 7m: 9m L and is imaginable by means o f figures otherwise disposed according to manifold
utrique L P [ G ] ubique V utriusque F [ M ]
10 similiter: simpliciter L utrimque [ E S ] utrobique [ A ] uterque/"N ] variation. Some modes o f the “ difformly difform” will be examined later. The
10-12 A B E F ... seu om. F [ M ] / ad: per L [ N J
11 minorem: breviorem V 19 C: D C Z3 de C D C f A J lum n m [ N ] 11 mg. [ S A ] / Capitulum utrimque ad [ S E ] utriusque ad [ A ] utrum-
12 cunctis: omnibusL P [ A C ] 20 sicut om. [ M J I est linea om. F I linea2 1 i m tr. P que ad [ C ] utramque ad V ad utrumque
13 sciendum B V F fM S G ] sciendum est B V f M S G ] om. L P [ E A N C J 2 itaque: igitur P [ A ] L [ M ] I gradum: non gradum B
L P [ E A N C ] I est ymaginabilis tr. F P 21 quia: que P 2-3 rectangulum om. L 7 qualitas linearis: linealis qualitas P linearis
[E M ] 22 intensio: 7a J7intensio 7a [ M ] 4 est om. F [ M A C ] / Omnis vero: et omnis qualitas [ E ] lignealis qualitas [ A ] j yma­
14 rectos: equales P [ A ] j rectos angulos tr. F [ M ] omnis ergo [ C ] ginabilis: ymaginanda L P [ E A N C ]
I .x i : B V P F L 4-5 uniformiter difformis om. L [ N ] 8 variationem: varietatem P
V[N]
15-16 proportionabilis V 1 Capitulum... difformi om. [ M A S ] capitu- 5 utrinque ad B F tr. [ N ] utrique ad P [ G ]
 192 D e configurationibus qualitatum et m otuum Part I, Chapter xi 193

videbuntur. Predicte vero differende intensionum non melius nec clarius aforesaid differences o f intensities cannot be known any better, more clearly, or
10 neque facilius notificari possunt quam per tales ymaginationes et relationes more easily than by such mental images and relations to figures, although certain
ad figuras, quamvis quedam alie descriptiones seu notificationes possint dari other descriptions or points o f knowledge could be given which also become
que etiam per huiusmodi figurarum ymaginationes fiunt n o te: Ut si dicere­ known b y imagining figures o f this sort: as if it were said that a uniform quality is
tur qualitas uniformis est que in omnibus partibus subiecti equaliter est one which is equally intense in all parts o f the subject, while a quality uniformly dif-
intensa. Qualitas vero uniformiter difformis est cuius omnium trium punc- form is one in which i f any three points [of the subject line] are taken, the ratio o f
15 torum proportio distande inter primum et zmad distantiam inter zm et 3m est the distance between the first and the second to the distance between the second
sicut proportio excessus primi supra zm ad excessum z l supra 3m in inten­ and the third is as the ratio o f the excess in intensity o f the first point over that o f
sione, ita quod punctum intensiorem illorum trium voco primum. the second point to the excess o f that o f the second point over that o f the third
Istud primo declaratur de ea qualitate uniformiter difformi que termina­ point, calling the first o f those three points the one o f greatest intensity.
tur ad non gradum que signetur seu ymaginetur per triangulum A B C [Fig. Let us clarify this first with respect to a quality uniformly difform which is ter-
20 7(a)]. Erectis itaque tribus perpendicularibus lineis B C , F G et D E , protra­
C
hatur H E equedistans linee D F et similiter G K equedistans linee F B .
Fient ergo duo parvi trianguli C K G et G H E qui sunt equianguli; ergo per
4am 6* Euclidis proportio G K ad E H est sicut proportio C K excessus ad
G H excessum. E t quoniam G Xestequalis F B et similiter E H est equalis D F ,
25 erit proportio F B ad D F , que quidem linee sunt distande trium punctorum
ipsius basis, sicut proportio C K ad G H , qui sunt excessus altitudinis pro­
portionalis intensioni eorundum punctorum. Cum igitur qualitas linee A B
sit talis quod proportio punctorum linee in intensione est sicut proportio
linearum in altitudine super eadem puncta perpendiculariter erectarum,
30 patet evidenter propositum, scilicet quod que est proportio excessus primi
puncti supra secundum ad excessum secundi supra tertium in intensione,
eadem est proportio distande inter primum punctum et secundum ad distan- Fig- 7
Figure (a) in MSS B L E D G S C , with letters B and C interchanged in MS B . Figure (a) is reversed
in orientation in MS E . Figure (b) in MSS B L D C S G .

10 neque: nec F P [ M A C ] /notificari: decla­
rari vel notificari P / relationes F L P
[ E M N J relationem B V [ S G ]
xi ad: et P / possint dari B V [ L S G ] dari pos­
sunt P possent dari F [ M ] possunt dari
[E A N C ]
12 que: qui F / ymaginationes: notificationes
F [M J
13 est1 om. F [ M ] autem [ N J / equaliter est
tr. L P [ A C ] inequaliter [ N J est qualiter
[G ]
14 \ t t o o m . F [ M ]
15 est: est proportio P [ E A ]
16 supra1 B F L [ S M C G J super P [ E A N J ad
V / supra2: super F P [ E N G J
18 primo B V [ S G J postea F [ M J ergo L [ A J
igitur P [ E N ] vero [ G ] / declaratur: de2 B
19 signetur om. [ E G ] significetur F [ M J / seu
om. [ E G ] vel B
20 Erectis om. [ N ] erectum L P [ A ] / B C :
BC B V B E P A B et [ G ]
21 H E : EH B [ S C G ] / GK: KG P [E ]
equedistans linee: equedistanter L P [ E N ]
22 Fiunt L [ N ] / parvi om. P L [ E N ] / C K G et
G H E : G H E et C K G L [ N J scilicet G H E
et C K G P [ E A ] / q u i: que P / eque anguli
F P [M A ]
23 61 Euclidis om. P [ A ] 61 L [ E N ]
24 excessum om. V
24-25 et2... FB om. B [ A ]
26 que V
26-27 proportionalis intensioni om. L [ C ]
27 intensioni B V intensionum F [ S M N G J
intensionis P [ E A ]
31 supra1: super V ad [ N ] / supra2: super
F P [ E N ] I in intensione om. L [ C ]
32 primum punctum tr. P [ E ] punctum [ A ]
minated at no degree and which is designated or imagined b y A A B C [see Fig. 7
(a)]. W ith the three perpendicular lines B C , F G , and D E erected, then let H E be
/ drawn parallel to line D F and similarly G K parallel to line F B . Therefore, the tw o
small triangles C K G and G H E are formed and they are equiangular. Hence, by
[proposition] V I.4 o f [the Elements of] E uclid1, G K jE H = C K JG H , C K and G H
being excesses. A nd since G K = F B and similarly E H — D F , so F B J D F = C K j
G H , F B and D F being the distances on the base o f the three points and C K and
G H being the excesses o f altitude proportional to the intensity o f these same points.
Since, therefore, the quality o f line A B is such that the ratio o f the intensities o f the
points o f the line is as the ratio o f the altitudes o f the lines perpendicularly erected on
those same points, that which has been proposed is evidently clear, namely that the
ratio o f the excess in intensity o f the first point over the second to the excess o f the
second over the third is the same as the ratio o f the distance between the first and
second points to the distance between the second and the third, and similarly for
I.xi
1S e e t h e C o m m e n t a r y , I . v i i i , lin e s 2 5 , 2 7 .
 194 D e configurationibus qualitatum et m otuum Part I, Chapter xii x 95

tiam inter secundum et tertium, et ita de quibuscunque tribus aliis punctis.
Igitur qualitati sic difformi recte convenit quod premittebatur, et ita per
35 talem triangulum bene designabatur.
Per eundem modum predicta descriptio sive proprietas potest ostendi de
qualitate uniformiter difformi terminata utrobique ad gradum, et sic una que
ymaginetur per quadrangulum A B C D in quo protrahatur linea D E eque-
distans basi A B et fiet triangulus D E C [Fig. 7(b)]; deinde protrahantur linee
40 altitudinis in quadrangulo et alie transversales equedistantes basi in isto
triangulo faciendo parvos triangulos. E t tunc faciliter poterit argui de illis
excessibus et distantiis in isto triangulo sicut superius arguebatur in alio,
prout intuenti potest leviter apparere.
Omnis autem qualitas se habens alio m odo a predictis dicitur difformiter
45 difformis et potest describi negative, scilicet qualitas que non est in omnibus
partibus subiecti equaliter intensa nec omnium trium punctorum ipsius
proportio excessus primi supra secundum ad excessum secundi supra ter­
tium est sicut proportio distantiarum eorum.
any other three points. Hence what w e have premised in regard to a quality dif-
form in this w ay is quite fitting, and so it (this quality) was w ell designated by such
a triangle.
B y the same method the aforesaid description or property can be demonstrated
for a quality uniformly difform terminated in both extremes at [some] degree, and
thus for one w hich w e let be imagined by quadrangle A B C D in which line D E is
drawn parallel to base A B form ing ts D E C [see Fig. 7(b)]. Then let lines o f altitude
be drawn in the quadrangle and also transversals parallel to the base in this trian­
gle, thus form ing small triangles. A n d then one can easily argue concerning the
excesses and the distances in this triangle just as was argued in the other one.
This w ill be easily apparent to one w ho is observant.
Further, every quality which is disposed in [any] other way than those described
earlier is said to be “ difformly difform.” It can be described negatively as a quality
which is not equally intense in all parts o f the subject nor in which, when any three
points o f it are taken, the ratio o f the excess o f the first over the second to the ex­
cess o f the second over the third is equal to the ratio o f their distances.

[I.xii] C ap itu lu m 1 z m de eisdem aliter I.x ii O n th ese sam e [qualities con sid ered ] in an oth er w a y

Rursum in notitiam premissarum differentiarum possumus duci ex yma- Again, we can be led to a knowledge o f the differences which have been premised
ginatione motus, ymaginetur enim punctus d regulariter m overi super by the im agery o f motion. For let point d be imagined as m oving regularly on
lineam A B et sit ita quod quicunque punctus linee A B super quem venerit line A B and in such a way that any point o f line A B over which d comes w ill be
5 punctus d sit eidem puncto d similis et equalis in intensione [Fig. 8]. Si equal and similar in intensity to that same point d [see Fig. 8]. If, therefore, in the
igitur in principio motus ipse punctus d habeat aliquem gradum vel ali­ beginning o f the motion the point <^has a certain degree or some intensity and it con-
quam intensionem et continue sine sui alteratione maneat in eodem gradu
durante illo motu, tunc describet in linea A B qualitatem uniformem. Si vero A ---------- ------------------------------ B
d
in principio motus punctus d nichil habeat illius qualitatis et durante motu
Fig. 8
o ipse punctus d continue alteretur et regulariter intendatur, tunc describet
Figure in MSS S G only.
qualitatem uniformiter difformem terminatam ad non gradum. Si autem d
33 tribus aliis punctis B V [ S G ] aliis tribus 43 potest leviter tr. P [ A ] leviter poterit [ M ] tinually remains in that same degree w ithout alteration throughout the m otion,
punctis F L [ E M C ] punctis tribus P [ A N J patent [ G ] then it w ill describe in line A B a uniform quality. But if in the beginning o f the m o­
34 sic: sicut (?) F / ita F L [ E M A N C J illud 44 dicatur L P [ E A D ]
[S J illa B V [ ?G J ita recte P
tion point d has none o f the quality and during the motion point d is continually
45 negative scilicet om. F [ M J negative [S J /
35 bene om. P recte [ E A ] n on : nec F [ M ]
altered and regularly increased in intensity, then it w ill describe a quality uniformly
36 sive: seu F [ A ] v e l [ M ] 46 omnium o m .F [ M J difform terminated at no degree. If, m oreover, d is regularly increased in intensity,
37 sic om. [ C ] sit [ A E S ] 47 primi om. P j supra I>2: super P [ E A N ]
38 ymaginetur B V L [ G C ] ymaginatur F P 48 distantie P [ E A ] dem: eodem L 9-10 nichil... d om. V
[A N M E S ] 2 Rursum corr. B ex Sursum (et sursum habet 10 ipse: tunc ipse L / punctus d tr. P punctus
39 fiat P [ C ] fiant [S J / protrahatur V [ S E C J / I .x ii: B V F E P A ) I possimus L L j regulariter: continue [ S G ]
linea [ E S ] 1 Capitulum... aliter om. [ A M S ] capitulum 5 sit... d om. F P [ A ] / S i: Tunc F [ M ] 10 - 12 tunc. ... intendatur om. V
40- 41 e t... triangulos om. F 12m [ N ] 12 mg. [ S A ] / Capitulum i2 m 8 describet: describeret P [ A ] describeretur 11- 13 a d ... terminatam om. B
4 1- 42 E t1... triangulo om. L [ C J t r . F [ G ] post aliter / d e .. .aliter om. P / eis- [C]
 196 D e configurationibus qualitatum e t m otuum Part I, Chapter xiii J97

regulariter intendatur et in principio motus habeat aliquam qualitatem vel
intensionem, tunc describet qualitatem uniformiter difformem terminatam
utrinque ad gradum. Similiter, si in principio motus d habeat aliquam
15 qualitatem et illa regulariter remittatur usque in fine motus, tunc d describet
qualitatem uniformiter difformem terminatam utrinque ad gradum. Si vero
qualitas d remittatur usque ad non gradum, tunc qualitas descripta erit uni­
formiter difformis terminata ad non gradum. Sed si d irregulariter movea­
tur et regulariter intendatur vel remittatur aut etiam econverso describet
ao qualitatem difformiter difformem. Posset tamen contingere quod punctus d
irregulariter m overetur et irregulariter alteraretur tali recompensatione seu
equivalentia quod describeret qualitatem uniformiter difformem; sed quan-
docunque non foret talis recompensatio, tunc describeret qualitatem diffor­
miter difformem.
but in the beginning o f the motion has some quality or intensity, then it w ill de­
scribe a quality uniformly difform terminated in each extreme at [some] degree.
Similarly, if in the beginning o f the motion d has some quality and it is regularly
decreased in intensity to the end o f the motion, then d w ill describe a quality
uniformly difform terminated in both extremes at [some] degree. I f the quality o f d
is decreased in intensity to no degree, then the quality described w ill be uniform­
ly difform terminated at no degree. But if d is irregularly m oved and regularly in­
creased or decreased in intensity, or even conversely, it w ill describe a quality dif-
formly difform. H owever, it could happen that point d w ould be irregularly m oved
and irregularly altered in such a compensatory or equivalent fashion, that it w ould
then describe a quality uniformly difform. But whenever there w ould be no such
compensation, then it w ould describe a quality difformly difform.

[I.xiii] Capitulum 13“ de eisdem adhuc alio modo I.xiii On these same [qualities considered] in still another way

A dhuc autem aliter possunt predicta distingui ita quod linea superior The previous things can be discriminated in still another way by letting the
figure per quam ymaginatur qualitas vocetur linea intensionis seu linea sum­ superior line o f the figure by which the quality is imagined be called the line o f in­
mitatis, sicut dicebatur in capitulo io°, verbi gratia, linea A B ( I D C ) in tensity or line o f summit, as was said in chapter ten. A n example is line D C 1 in
5 quadrangulo A B C D [Fig. 9]. Si igitur huiusmodi linea summitatis figure
per quam ymaginatur qualitas fuerit equedistans basi, sicut basi A B y
qualitas per talem figuram ymaginabilis est simpliciter uniformis. Si autem
non fuerit equedistans basi et fuerit recta, tunc qualitas est uniformiter dif­
formis, ita quod si predicta linea coniungatur basi in uno extremo illa dif-
10 formitas uniformis terminatur ad non gradum ; et si in neutro extremo

12 et om. P [ N J
14 utrinque B L [ G ] utrobique V P [E A N ]
utriusque F [ M ] utrumque [ S ] / habet L
15 illa: ita L
16 utrinque B [ G ] utrobique V L P [E A N ]
utriusque F [ M ] utrumque [ S C ]
17 d om. F f S J
18 irregulariter B V F [ M S G ] regulariter
L P [E A N C ]
18-19 moveatur et regulariter om. F [ M A J at­
tendatur et regulariter moveatur [ G ]
19 regulariter: irregulariter L P [ E N J / econ­
verso om. F [ M ] / describeret [ M A ]
20 tamen om. F [ M J / quod punctus om. F
22 describet F [ M ] / sed: seu P
23 describet V F
I .x iii: B V F L P
1 Capitulum... modo om. [ A M S ] Capitu­
lum 13111 de eiusdem alio modo [ C ] Capi­
tulum 13111 [ N ] 13 c mg. [ S] 13 mg. [ A ]
I Capitulum 13m tr. F post modo / adhuc Fig. 9
om. L P Figure in MSS B L S C G . The broken lines are lines found in MS L alone and serve to illustrate
2 autem om. P [ E A C ] et tr. F post aliter / ali­ uniformly difform beginning from zero, uniform, and difformly difform.
ter om. L [ C ] I possunt predicta: possent
predicte P [ A ] possent predicta [ E ] pre­ quadrangle A B C D [see Fig. 9]. If, therefore, the line o f summit o f the figure by
dicta possunt [ C ] which a quality is imagined is parallel to the base, e.g. to base A B ythe quality im ag­
3 ymaginetur L P [ C ] inable by such a figure is simply uniform. I f it is not parallel to the base but still is a
4 A B omnes M S S , sed debent habere D C
straight line, then the quality is uniformly difform, so that if the aforesaid line is
5 igitur: ergo B F
joined to the base in one extreme that uniform difformity is terminated at no degree
6 basi sicut om. P [ S A ]
9 basi tr. P [ E A ] post extremo / basi: a basi I .x i i i
[S] 1 A ll the manuscripts have A B , but that clearly is a slip, for D C is required.
 198 D e configurationibus qualitatum e t m otuum Part I, Chapter xiv l 99

coniungatur basi, qualitas sive difformitas terminatur utrinque ad gradum.
E t quoniam talis linea non potest coniungi basi in utroque extremo, quia
ipsa est recta et basis recta et sic esset linea una, inde patet quod non potest
esse aliqua qualitas uniformiter difformis terminata utrinque ad non gradum.
15 Si vero linea intensionis sive summitatis fuerit curva aut ex multis lineis com­
posita et non una, tunc qualitas per illam figuram ymaginabilis erit difformi-
ter difformis et potest esse quod terminatur utrinque ad gradum vel utrinque
ad non gradum vel ad gradum in uno extremo et ad non gradum in altero.
and if it is joined to the base in neither extreme the quality or difformity is terminated
in both extremes at [some] degree. A n d since such a line cannot be joined to the
base in both extremes— for it is a straight line and thus w ould form a single line
with the base which also is a straight line— it is clear that there cannot be a quality
uniformly difform terminated in both extremes at no degree. Further, if the line o f
intensity or summit line is a curve or is composed o f several lines rather than
one, then the quality imaginable by that figure w ill be difformly difform, and it
can be that it is terminated in both extremes at some degree, or in both extremes
at no degree, or at some degree in one extreme and at no degree in the other.

[I.xiv] Capitulum i4m de simplici difformitate difformi I.xiv On simple difform difformity

Difformis difformitatis de qua nunc agitur duo sunt m odi; quedam enim
est simplex et alia est composita. E t primo dicendum est de simplici. Est
igitur simplex difformitas difformis que designabilis est per figuram cuius
5 linea summitatis sive linea intensionis est una, non composita ex pluribus.
O portet igitur quod sit linea curva; quia si foret recta, iam esset uniformitas
simpliciter aut uniformis difformitas, ut patet ex capitulo precedenti. Necesse
est etiam quod eius curvitas non attingat ad circuli portionem maiorem semi­
circulo ita ut angulus super basim sit maior recto, ut patuit ex 40 (/5 °)
10 capitulo. Potest tamen fieri ut angulus super basim sit minor recto etiam
quantumlibet.
Sit igitur, gratia exempli, linea A B , cuius qualitas sit designabilis per
semicirculum A C B [Fig. 10], quod est possibile, ut patet ex 70 capitulo
N unc itaque dico quod eadem qualitas linee A B est ymaginabilis seu designa-
15 bilis per figuram maioris altitudinis ac etiam minoris isto semicirculo etiam
quantum libet. Protrahatur enim linea C D perpendicularis super centrum D
W e now treat o f difform difformity; there are tw o modes o f such difformity:
simple and composite. W e must first talk o f the simple mode. Simple difform dif­
form ity is that which can be designated by a figure whose line o f summit or line o f
intensity is a single line, i.e. not composed o f several lines. It is necessary, there­
fore, that the line be a curve; because if it were straight, then it w ould be simply a
uniformity or uniform difformity, as is clear from the preceding chapter. Further­
more, it is necessary that the curvature o f the summit line does not attain that o f a
circular segment greater than a semicircle so that the angle1 on the base is greater
than a right angle, as was clear in chapter five.2 H owever, it can happen that the
angle on the base is less than a right angle by any amount you please.
Therefore, for example, let there be line A B , whose quality can be designated by
semicircle A C B [see Fig. 10]. This is possible, as is evident from chapter seven.
A nd so I now say that the same quality o f line A B is imaginable or can be designated
by a figure having an altitude greater or less than that o f the semicircle by any
amount you please.3 For let line C D be drawn as a perpendicular to center D and

11 terminatur tr. P post gradum / utrinque B bique V [ C ] utriusque F [ M A ] utrimque

utrique P utrobique V L [ E A N ] ad utrum­
que F [ M G ] utrimque [ S ] / ad: ad non
P [A ]
12 -14 E t...gradum ow . F [ M ]
12 non om. L / quia: quoniam L [ A ] nam [ E ]
13 linea: linea recta L
14 terminata utrinque: utrobique terminata
usque P [ E ] terminata usque L terminata
utrobique [ A C ] j utrinque om. B L F [ N J
utrique [ G ] utrimque [ S ] utrobique
V P [E A C ]
17 difformis: difformis terminata V / esse...
terminatur: etiam terminari L etiam quod
terminari [ E ] / utrinque1-2 B P [ N J utro­
[ S E ] utrique [ G ] / utrinque.. .utrinque
om. L
17-18 v e l... gradum3 om. [ M ]
18 altero E a° B [ A N ] alio F L V f S P M C G ]
I .x i v : B V L P F
1 Capitulum...difformi [om. M AN S]
mg. [ S A ] I Capitulum i4m tr. F post dif­
formi
2 ago F [ M ] I quedam bis B quidem [ A ]
2-3 enim est tr. P autem est [ A ]
3 est1o m .[ C ] / e t o m .L P [ E G ] / alia: quedam
F [ M N J aliaque [ G ] / est2 V L P [ A C S ]
om. B F [ E M N G ]
I.x iv
1 In this case the angle would be a mixed
angle composed o f the curve and the straight
base line.
14 5 sive: seu B F [ E M C ] / pluribus: partibus
L partibus pluribus [ N ]
6 quia: que P [ E A ] / foret: esset linea F [ M J
foret linea [ E ] esset [ C ] / esset: foret P [ E ]
forent [ A ]
9 ut1 B V F [ A C G S ] quodL P [ E M N ] /patet
L I ex om. P [ A ] / 40 capitulo B V F [ M S ]
tr. L P [ E A N G C J
2 A ll the manuscripts have “ chapter 4,”
but this is a clear reference to the penultimate
sentence in I.v.
3 See the Commentary, I.xiv, lines 14-54.
10 etiam: et P [ G ]
13 A C B B V [ F M ] A B C P L [ A E N G C S ] /
patuit V I 70 capitulo tr. P [ E ] 40 capitulo
F [ M ] capitulo alio/"A ]
14 linea B
15 maioris om. L / ac: aut P [ A ] / ac etiam om.
L
16 s\ ip ta .L P [M ]
 200 Part I, Chapter xiv 201
D e configurationibus qualitatum e t m otuum

C
et iterum protrahatur una alia linea perpendicularis, que sit E F , super
lineam A B . Cum igitur sit possibile duas lineas minores istis duabus super
eadem puncta perpendiculariter stare se habentes invicem in eadem propor-
20 tione sicut et iste due, que sunt C D et E F , et conformiter possint fieri linee
maiores aut minores super omnia puncta linee A B stante semper eadem
proportione inter eas que est inter lineas perpendiculares super A B in
semicirculo A C B , sequitur quod super A B basim poterit erigi figura minus
aha et tamen erit proportionalis altitudinis huic semicirculo A C B et pari
25 ratione magis alta etiam quantumlibet. Igitur per capitulum -jmper quamlibet
istarum figurarum potest qualitas linee A B recte ymaginari indifferenter.
Unde et nisi ita esset quod qualitas linee A B ymaginabilis per semicirculum (a) (b)
Fig. 10
posset ymaginari per figuram maiorem aut minorem et alteri proportionari,
Figure (a) in MSS B L D S C J G . In MS J , C is written over G , and E is replaced by F and F by E .
sequeretur quod intensio puncti D non posset recte designari per maiorem In MS L , the arc is greater than a semicircle. Figure (b) is in MSS B L S C G . I have added the
30 vel minorem lineam quam sit linea D C et sic de aliis punctis nisi intensio broken lines and have made the curves resemble ellipses, which they do not in the MSS. In MS B ,
variaretur et ita quelibet intensio determinaret sibi lineam certe quantitatis both curves are drawn lower than a semicircle. In S , the top curve is a semicircle. In C , the figure
is very crudely drawn. In L and G , the curves are lower and higher than a semicircle but are
per quam esset ymaginabilis et tunc intensio esset equalis et comparabilis
certainly not elliptical. See commentary.
linee vel extensioni in quantitate et per consequens motus localis compara­
bilis alterationi in velocitate, que omnia videntur nimis absurda.
35 Quelibet tamen figura per quam est ymaginabilis ista qualitas linee A B again let another line E F be drawn as a perpendicular to line A B . Therefore, since
est curva. Utrum autem figura minor quam semicirculus per quam ista it is possible to construct on the same points tw o other perpendiculars less than
qualitas potest ymaginari sit portio circuli discutiendum relinquo. Sed dico C D and E F but having the same ratio between them as do C D and E F and in the
same way to construct on all the points o f line A B perpendiculars which are great­
er or less than the corresponding perpendiculars in semicircle A C B constructed on
those points o f A B and having between any tw o o f them the same ratio as the cor­
responding perpendiculars on A B in semicircle A C B , it follows that there can be
erected on base A B a figure o f less height but which w ill be proportional in alti­
tude to this semicircle and w ith equal reason a figure o f greater height by any
amount you wish. Therefore, by chapter seven the quality o f line A B can be correct­
17 una alia linea P [ A E S C ] om. L una alia 25 magis: etiam magis L [ N ] j capitulum 7m ly imagined by any o f these figures w ithout it m aking any difference [which figure
B [ N G J una linea V linea alia F [ M ] j tr. P [ E A ]
is used].
q u e ...E F B V F [ A M S C G ] que sit linea 28 figuram: circulum P / aut: et L sive [ A ]
For if it were not so that the quality o f line A B imaginable b y the semicircle
F E L [ M E N ] et tr. L [ N ] post A B / supra 29 sequeretur B P L [ E M G ] sequitur
L could be imagined by a figure greater or less than the semicircle which is propor­
V F [ S A N C ] j intensio puncti: punctus
19 perpendiculariter stare tr. F [ M ] F [M J tional [in altitude to the semicircle] it w ould follow (1) that the intensity o f point D
20 iste: ille F [ M ] / et3 B V F [ M N J vel 30 v e l: aut P [ A J could not be correctly designated by a greater or lesser line than D C , and similarly
L P [ E C ] u t[ S G ] aut/"A ] / possint 31 lineam: certam lineam F [ M ] / certe: certe for all the points, unless the intensity were varied, and thus (2) that any intensity
B V L [ G J possunt P F [ E M A N S C ] scilicet F [ M ]
2 1-2 2 stante... A B om. F [ M J
w ould in itself determine the definite length o f the line by which it w ould be imag­
32 esset equalis tr. F [ M ] est equalis [ C ] /
22 lineas om. P [ A J / perpendiculares: propor­ inable, and then (3) an intensity w ould be equivalent and comparable to a line or to
equalis: ymaginabilis P [ A ]
tionales B perpendiculariter erectas [ E ] / 33 in quantitate: quantumlibet P quantitative extension, and as a consequence (4) local motion w ould be comparable
A B : AB erectas P [ A J 34 videntur nimis tr. F [ M ] / nimis om. [ N ] in velocity to [qualitative] alteration, all o f which seems excessively absurd.
23 A C B L P [ E N ] om. B V F [ M S C G ] A B C valde P [ A ] I nimis absurda tr. E H owever, any figure by which this quality o f line A B is imaginable is curved.
[ A ] I post A C B add. L [ N ] erectas 35 tamen om. V / est ymaginabilis F L P -
24 altitudinis om. F [ M ] / A C B B V L F [ C ]
But whether the figure less than a semicircle b y w hich this quality can be imagined
[ M A N C ] tr. B V [ E S G ]
ABC P [A S E M N G J is a segment o f a circle, I leave aside as a matter to be discussed. But I do say that it
 202 D e configurationibus qualitatum et m otuum Part I, Chapter xv 203

quod per nullam maiorem potest designari que sit portio circuli, per nullam
enim figuram potest ista qualitas designari cuius A B non sit basis seu corda;
40 sed A B non potest esse corda in circulo minore quam circulus A C B si es­
set completus, cuius ipsa est dyameter. E rgo qualitas ista non potest ymagina-
ri per maiorem figuram que sit portio circuli minoris quam circulus A C B ;
sed neque circuli maioris, quia aut illa portio esset maior medietate sui
circuli, ergo per eam nulla qualitas posset designari, ut patet ex 40 [/5°?]
45 capitulo; aut esset minor medietate sui circuli. E rgo, cum ista portio minor
medietate maioris circuli haberet eandem cordam cum semicirculo A C B ,
illa portio esset minor et esset pars illius semicirculi, ut faciliter patet et p o­
test probari per ultimam sexti Euclidis. Igitur ista qualitas non potest
designari per figuram que sit portio circuli et que sit maior quam semicircu-
50 culus A C B et tamen potest designari per maiorem figuram curvam, ut ante
probatum est. Igitur illius maioris figure curvitas non erit circularis et tamen
terminabit altitudinem figure proportionalem ei quam terminat curvitas
circularis; erunt itaque in altitudine proportionales figure, quarum una est
curvitas circularis et alia curvitas non circularis.
cannot be designated by a greater figure which is at the same time a segment o f a
circle. For this quality can be designated b y no figure o f which A B is not the base
or chord. But A B cannot be the chord in a circle smaller than circle A C B if that
circle were completed, for A B is the diameter o f that circle. Therefore, this quality
cannot be imagined b y a greater figure which is a segment o f a smaller circle than
circle A C B ; nor also o f a greater figure w hich is a segment o f a larger circle. [This
last is evident,] for then that segment w ould either (1) be greater than half o f its
own circle, and therefore no quality could be designated by it, as is clear from chap­
ter five, or (2) it w ould be less than half its ow n circle. [But in the case o f the sec­
ond possibility,] since the segment which is less than half o f a larger circle w ould
have the same chord as semicircle A C B , the segment w ould be less [in area] and
w ould be a part o f semicircle A C B , as is easily evident and can be proved by the
last4 [proposition] o f the sixth [book] o f [the Elements of] Euclid. Therefore, this
quality cannot be designated by a figure which is a segment o f a circle and is [at the
same time] greater [in altitude and area] than semicircle A C B , and yet it can be des­
ignated by [some] greater curved figure, as was proved before. Therefore, the
curvature o f the greater [curved ]figure w ill not be circular but will bound a figure
which in altitude is proportional to that which the circular curvature bounds; and
so there will be tw o figures proportional in altitude, the curvature o f one being
circular and that o f the other being non-circular.

[I.xv] Capitulum 15® de quatuor generibus simplicis difformitatis I.xv On four kinds o f simple difform difformity
dififormis

Omnis igitur simplex dififormis difformitas aut est ymaginabilis per figuram Therefore, every simple difform difformity either (1) is imaginable b y a figure
que non est portio circuli nec proportionalis altitudinis alicui circuli por- which is not a segment o f a circle nor proportional in altitude to some segment o f a
5 tioni, sed eius summitas determinatur curvitate irrationali, aut ymaginabilis circle but whose summit is determined b y an irrational curvature,1 or (2) is imag­
est per figuram cuius summitas determinatur curvitate rationali, scilicet, inable b y a figure whose summit is determined b y a rational curvature, namely, by
circulari vel ei proportionali in altitudine, et utroque m odo dupliciter: a circular figure or one proportional to it in altitude. A nd each o f these tw o kinds
38 per*1*4
6om. V / designari: considerari F yma-
5 45-46 minor medietate L P [ E A N ] minor
ginari [ M ] B F [ S M C G ] minoris et V
39 non om. F [ M ] 47 pars illius: portio F [ M J / faciliter om. [ N ]
40 circulus: triangulus F / A C B : A B C [ E A S ] / patet et om. [ S N C ] etiam L etiam patet
40-41 s i... dyameter om. F [ M ] et P [ A ]
I .x v
41 ipse P
47-48 potest B L F [ A G ] posset V P [ S E M - 1 See the Commentary, I.xv, line 5.
42 circuli minoris tr. F [ M N G ] 4 Ibid., line 48.
NC]
43 sed om. [ M ] / neque: ut F [ M ] / aut: vel 48 probari: probari seu posset F / ultimam:
P [E A ] penultimam [ J G ] / Euclidis om. B V [ S ] / plicis om. P
51-52 n o n ... curvitas om. F (sed habet M )
44 ergo...eam : et per talem [ M ] Igitur: ergo L P [ A N ] / ista qualitas tr. B 4 alicui: alicuius [ F M ]
5 3 in altitudine om. F [ M ]
44-45 ergo... circuli om. F 49 designari: ymaginari F [ M J 5 irrationabiliZ.
54 alia: alia est F [ M ] / non om. F [ M ]
44 potest P [ M A G ] / designari: ymaginari 51 Igitur: ergo B [ M ] / illius: istius F [ M ] 5-6 a u t.. .curvitate iter. V et post curvitate1
[ M ] j ex B V [ S M G '] in L P [ E A N C ’] add. Kirrationali
nullius jL / figure curvitas tr. V / erit: est I.xv.BVLP
5 sui circuli tr. L P [N ] 6 curvitate om. P
4 1 Capitulum 15 m tr. P / quatuor om. L / sim­
 204 D e configurationibus qualitatum e t m otuum
videlicet, aut convexe aut concave. E t secundum istas quatuor differentias
sunt quatuor genera simplicis difformitatis difformis, scilicet, rationalis con­
io vexa, rationalis concava, irrationalis convexa, irrationalis concava.
• Preter has autem differentias sunt alie differentie accidentales, sicut ter­
minari ad gradum vel ad non gradum. Unde difformitas convexa tam ra­
tionalis quam irrationalis potest terminari utrobique ad gradum sicut hic
/—■* in uno extremo ad gradum et in alio ad non gradum sicut hic
15 vel utrinque ad non gradum sicut hic ^ " V Concava vero, sive sit
rationalis sive irrationalis, non potest terminari utrobique ad non gradum,
sed potest terminari utrobique ad gradum sicut hic tEA vel in altero extre­
mo tantum sicut hic . but it can be terminated in both extremes at [some] degree, as here
205
Part I, Chapter xvi
o f figures can be either convex or concave. A ccording to these four differences,
then, there are four kinds o f simple difform difformity, namely (1) rational convex,
(2) rational concave, (3) irrational convex, and (4) irrational concave.
In addition to these four [essential] differences there are other accidental differ­
ences, such as whether the qualities are terminated at [some] degree or at no degree.
Therefore, both rational and irrational convex difformity can be determined in both
extremes at [some] degree, as in this figure C * ; or in one extreme at [some]
degree and in the other extreme at no degree, as in this figure ^ ; or in both
extremes at no degree, as here . O n the other hand, concav.e [difformity],
whether rational or irrational, cannot be terminated in both extremes at no degree,
or in
one o f the extremes, as here .

[I.xvi] Capitulum i6m de difformitate composita et qualiter I.xvi On composite difformity and how it has
habet 62 species sixty-two1 species

Dimissa itaque variatione difformitatis que provenit ex differentiis acci­ Setting aside the variation o f difformity arising from accidental differences de­
dentalibus que sunt terminari ad gradum vel ad non gradum de quibus pendent on whether the termination is at [some] degree or at no degree— since w e
5 sufficiat quod dictum est ante, adhuc preter quatuor genera simplicia figura­ have said enough about this before— there are beyond the four simple kinds o f
tionis qualitatis in priori capitulo posita sunt alia duo superius assignata, quality figuration posited in the preceding chapter tw o others which were treated
scilicet uniformitas simplex et difformitas uniformis et sic sunt 6 genera earlier: simple uniformity and uniform difformity. Thus there are six kinds o f
simplicia figurationis intensionis qualitative. Cum autem difformitas diffor­ simple figuration o f qualitative intensity. Further, since composite difform difform­
mis composita possit effici ex pluribus figurationibus simplicibus, aut unius ity can be effected from several simple figurations, either o f one kind, or tw o, or
10 generis aut duorum aut trium aut quatuor aut quinque aut sex, sequitur per three, or four, or five, or six, it follows by arithmetical rules2 that from each simple
regulas arismetrice, quod de quolibet genere simplici singulo potest fieri kind some combination or composition can be formed, and so we have six species
aliqua combinatio seu compositio et sic habemus sex species difformitatis o f composite difformity. Then taking tw o simple kinds at a time, up to fifteen com ­
difformis composite. Item de singulis duobus generibus simplicibus fiunt binations and composite species are formed. A lso, taking three at a time, twenty
combinationes et species composite usque ad 15. Item de singulis tribus combinations are form ed; and four at a time, fifteen combinations are form ed; five
15 fiunt 20. Item de singulis 4 fiunt 15. Item de singulis 5 fiunt 5 (/6), et de at a time, five (/six )3 combinations; and finally taking all o f them simultaneously,
omnibus simul fit una. E t ita in summa 62 sunt species difformitatis difformis one combination is formed. A n d so in summary there are sixty-two 4 species o f
composite. E t in qualibet specie potest fieri compositio ex duabus figurationi- composite difform difformity. A n d in each species one can make a combination o f
8 videlicet om. P f convexe: confixe P con- 15 utrinque B [S G J utriusque L P [ F M N ]
fexe [ C ] utrobique V [ A C E ] / sicut hic: vel in uno I .x v i 2 Ibid.
9 simplicis difformitatis tr. P [ E A ] extremo ad gradum [ F J 1 Should be “ sixty-three” ; see the Commen- 3 Ibid.
9-10 convexa: concavaL 17 terminari utrobique tr. P / v e l: vel ita P tary, I.xvi, lines 8-17. 4 Ibid. *15
6
10 concava1: convexaL
12 v e l... gradum om. B I .x v i: B V L P
3 Dimissa: divisa L / itaque: igitur P / varia­ 7-9 6 __ difformis om. L
12-13 U nde... hic om. [ F ] 1 Capitulum 16m tr. P 11 arismetrice V P [ C ] arismetice L arismece
tione : varietate L P
12 difformitas: difformis L 1-2 e t... species om. L B (omnes alii M S S habent abbreviationes)
4 ad2 om. P
13 utrobique tr. P post gradum x qualiter: qualitatis (?) P 15 20: duo P I Item I-2: et V / et: ulterius P
3 simplicis L P
14 ad1: terminari ad L 2 habet: huiusmodi etc. P
6 priori capitulo tr. L P j priori: predicto V 16 sunt tr. L P post ita
 zo6 D e configurationibus qualitatum et m otuum
bus simplicibus vel tribus vel quatuor et sic in infinitum et secundum hoc in
qualibet specie potest fieri variatio in infinitum et ratione numeri et ratione
20 ordinis seu dispositionis simplicium figurationum ex quibus iste species
componuntur.
U t autem hoc manifestius videatur ponam in quibusdam speciebus
exempla. Potest igitur difformis difformitas composita fieri ex pluribus unius
generis simplicis sicut ex duabus vel pluribus uniformibus ut hic A et talis
25 potest vocari qualitas seu difformitas graduata. Item in alio genere sim­
plici sicut ex duabus ve l pluribus uniformiter difformibus ut hic vel
etiam hic . Item ex duabus convexis rationalibus, u t hic/TTVT^ et
sic conformiter discurrendo per illa sex genera supradicta. Rursum potest
fieri compositio in duobus generibus sicut ex uniformi et [uniformiter]
30 difformi ut hic f~X vel ex pluribus istorum duorum generum ut hic BfX.
Item in aliis duobus generibus ut ex uniformi et concava rationali sicut hic
C s» ve l ex pluribus istorum duorum generum. Conformiter posset fieri mix­
tio in aliis duobus generibus et rursum in aliis duobus usque ad 15 mixtiones
vel 15 species. Rursum posset fieri mixtio ex tribus generibus usque ad 20
35 species et sic de aliis ut supradictum est, de quibus exempla possunt
sufficienter intelligi per predicta. Habemus itaque 62 species difformitatis
difformis composite et quatuor species seu genera simplicia, ut patet ex
capitulo precedenti, et sic sunt 66 species vel genera difformitatis difformis
et unum uniformis difformitatis et unum simplicis uniformitatis. Satis etiam
40 patet ex dictis quod in notitiam diversitatis harum specierum difformitatis
qualitatum vel aliarum rerum non bene possumus devenire nisi ex assimi-
lationibus et ymaginationibus figurarum.
207
Part I, Chapter xvi
tw o simple figurations, or three, or four, and so on to infinity. A n d so accordingly
in each species there can be infinite variation by reason o f the number and b y reason
o f the order or disposition o f the simple figures o f which these species are com­
posed.
So that this [whole matter] m ight be seen more clearly let me put forth examples
o f certian o f the species. There can be a difform difformity composed out o f several
items o f one simple kind, fo r example out o f tw o or more uniform qualities, as
here dH , and this can be called a graduated quality or difformity. A further example
o f a composition from another simple kind is one composed o f tw o or m ore
uniform ly difform [qualities] th us: , and also this one-= ^ . A further exam­
ple is a composition o f tw o convex rationals, such as this one . A n d so in
the same w ay one could run through the six kinds [of simple figuration] described
above. Then again a composition can be form ed from tw o [different] kinds, as
for example from a uniform and a uniform ly difform [quality] thus :s I V ; or
from more o f these tw o kinds th u s: jD I . A n example o f a combination made
from tw o other kinds is one form ed from a uniform and a concave rational [dif­
form ity], thus: ; or from more o f these tw o kinds. In the same fashion there
could be a mixture o f tw o other kinds and again o f still other pairs up to fifteen
mixtures or species. Further, there can be mixtures o f three kinds up to twenty
species, and so on for the other [combinations] as was stated above. But exam­
ples o f these can be sufficiently understood i f one makes use o f what w e have al­
ready said. A n d so w e have 62 (/63) species o f composite difform difformity plus
four simple species or kinds, as is evident in the preceding chapter. Thus there are
66 (/67) species or kinds o f difform difformity, one o f uniform difformity, and one
o f simple uniformity. It is also clear enough from what has been said that w e can­
not [very] w ell arrive at a know ledge o f the diversity o f these species o f the difform­
ity o f qualities or other things except by assimilating them to, and imagining them
by, figures.

18 et2: et sic B sicut: ut P

19 e tl o m .L 32 hic om. P figuram / hic habet L, istam figuram :
23 P o test:p ateti5 CA / duorum om. P / duorum generum
24 ut: sicutL tr. B f Conformiter corr. P e x conformitas
z~i hic1: ut hic B / pro -= A habet P istam : i— I et tr. post fieri / potest P
et L istam\ A In L. iste due figure line­ 3 3 et rursum om. P sed habet istam figuram:
arum 2 6 -2 7 ad invicem transferuntur / Item: 34 potest P / conmixtio P
lam V 35 u t... est om. V
28 Rursus P 35-36 possunt sufficienter tr. B P
29 in: ex i 5 36 per: secundum L P
30 duorum generum tr. P / in re figure vide 37 seu: vel P
comm. lin. 30 41 qualitatis L / bene om. L
31 in : ex P / aliis duobus tr. P / uniformi... 5 For the variation in this and the next tempted there to justify my addition o f uni-
42 et: vel i 5
rationali: concavi rationali et uniformi P / figure, see ibid., line 30. I have also at- fo r mi ter to line 29.
 208 D e configurationibus qualitatum e t m otuum
[I.xvii] Capitulum 17111 de qualitate superficiali
Sicut in 4° capitulo dicebatur, qualitas superficialis est ymaginabilis per
figuram corpoream perpendiculariter sitam super superficiem qualitate in­
formatam tanquam super basim suam, cuius quidem figure notitia potest
5 haberi ex cognitione superficialium figurarum per quas qualitates lineares
signantur et de quibus quantum pertinet ad presentem materiam tractatum
est sufficienter. Sicut enim qualitatum linearum quedam est uniformis, alia
difformis aut uniformiter aut difformiter, et multipliciter, ita recte conformiter
est de qualitatibus superficialibus. E t sicut qualitas linearis uniformis est
io ymaginabilis per quadrangulum rectangulum, ita superficialis qualitas uni­
formis ymaginanda est per corpus habens 8 rectos angulos corporeos et tale
corpus potest ymaginari altius vel minus altum manente eadem qualitate,
sicut de qualitate lineari dictum est in capitulo 70 et in io°.
E t quemadmodum dictum est ante de qualitate lineari uniformi et difformi
15 ita correspondenter dicendum est de qualitate superficiali. Summitas namque
figure per quam ymaginatur superficialis qualitas uniformis est superficies
plana equedistans basi subiecte, que quidem basis subiecta ymaginatur esse
superficies plana. Summitas autem illius figure per quam ymaginatur qualitas
superficialis uniformiter difformis est superficies plana non equedistans basi.
20 Summitas autem illius per quam ymaginatur qualitas difformiter difformis
est superficies curva vel angularis et composita.
Consimili m odo possunt alie distinctiones, descriptiones, notificationes et
species et differentie prius posite omnes et singule applicari ad superficiei
qualitatem. Omnia autem premissa dicta sunt acsi basis subiecta informata
25 qualitate esset linea recta vel superficies plana sive recta et hoc totum factum
est utpredicta facilius intelligerentur; quamvis enim basis subiecta sepissime
aliter figuretur, intelligatur tamen rectificari et tunc de ea verificabuntur
omnia supradicta.
A dhuc autem qualiscunque fuerit, potest universaliter dici quod summitas
30 figure per quam ymaginatur qualitas uniformis est equedistans basi subiecte.
Summitas vero figure designantis qualitatem uniformiter difformem est
continue et ordinate per partes ipsius proxim ior basi subiecte et si usque ad
basim descendat terminatur ad non gradum. Si vero non, ipsa terminatur
I .x v ii: B V L P 8-9 conformiter est tr. V
1 Capitulum 17m tr. P 9 Et: tunc P
2 est: est qualitas L 10 rectangulum om. L / post ita del. P super­
3 qualitatis L j post qualitate del. P tanquam ficies
super basim suam 11 rectos angulos tr. P
3-4 formatam B 12 altius: per corpus altius L P
4 cuius: cuiusmodi V / figure notitia tr. L 13 in2 o m .L
6 signantur: figurantur L 16 figure: illius figure V
7 qualitas linearis L / linealium P 17-18 esse superficies tr. L
Part I, Chapter xvii 209
I.xvii On surface quality
A s it was said in chapter four, surface quality is imaginable by a corporeal figure
perpendicularly situated on that surface informed with quality as its base. K n o w l­
edge o f this figure can be had from know ing the surface figures b y which linear
qualities are designated. A n d w e have treated the latter sufficiently enough for the
present matter. F or just as certain linear qualities are uniform, others difform or
uniformly difform or difformly difform in a multiplicity o f ways, so one can cor­
rectly [speak] in the same w ay o f surface qualities. A n d just as uniform linear quali­
ty is imaginable by a rectangle, so uniform surface quality is to be imagined by a
body having eight three-dimensional right angles, and such a body can be imagined
as being higher or low er w ith the quality remaining the same, just as was stated
concerning linear quality in chapters seven and ten.
A n d in the same w ay that w e spoke before concerning linear uniform and dif­
form quality, so w e ought to speak correspondingly concerning surface quality.
For the summit o f the figure by which a uniform surface quality is imagined is a
plane surface parallel to the subject base, which subject base indeed is imagined to
be a plane surface. Further, the summit o f the figure by which a uniformly difform
surface quality is imagined is a plane not parallel to the base. M oreover, the sum­
mit o f the figure by which a quality difformly difform is imagined is a curved sur­
face or an angular and composite surface.
In a similar way, the other distinctions, descriptions, points o f knowledge, spe­
cies, and difference posited before can all and individually be applied to the quality
o f a surface. M oreover, all the premises have been previously made as i f the sub­
ject base were a straight line or a plane or level surface. This has been done so that
our previous statements w ould be more easily understood. For, although the sub­
ject base is most often shaped in another way, yet it can be conceived o f as being
straightened and then all o f the statements above concerning it will be verified.
W hatever kind the quality is [i.e. linear, surface, or corporeal], it can be stated
universally that the summit o f a figure b y which a uniform quality is imagined is
parallel to the subject base, while the summit o f a figure designating a uniform ly
difform quality is continually and progressively throughout its parts closer to the
subject base. I f it descends to the base, it is [a quality] terminated at no degree,
18-19 Summitas... plana om. V 29 qualiscunque B V qualitercunque L P /
19 post superficialis add. L est superficies p - universaliter: uniformiter V
20 difformiter difformis tr. V 31 uniformiter: difformiter V
32 partem P
21 c x .o m .L P
2 3 totum : tamen L 33 basim: basim subiectam P / terminat (?)
26 intelligentur V / enim om. L V
27 tamen om. L
 210 Part I, Chapter xviii 211
D e configurationibus qualitatum e t m otuum

utrinque ad gradum. Summitas vero figure designantis qualitatem difformi-
35 ter difformem est continue secundum partes eius inequaliter propinquior
inde remotior a basi subiecta. E t ista possent visis predictis faciliter declarari
et conveniunt tam qualitati lineari quam superficiali seu etiam corporali.
while if it does not so descend, it is [a quality] terminated in both extremes at
[some] degree. The summit o f a figure designating a quality difformly difform is
continually throughout its parts unequally closer or farther from the subject base.
I f one keeps in view the earlier statements, these things can be easily made clear,
and they are just as appropriate for a linear quality as for a surface or even a cor­
poreal quality.

[I.xviii] Capitulum i8m de corporea qualitate et eius multiplici I.xviii On corporeal quality and its multiple
figuratione figuration

Corporea qualitas secundum ymaginationem presentem quantum ad extra B y follow ing the present imagery with respect to [a quality’s being represented
subiectum ad quamlibet sui partem figuratur secundum figurationem quali- as] outside o f the subject in its every part, a corporeal quality is figured according
5 tatum superficialium eiusdem corporis. Unde patet ex prius dictis quod to the figuration o f [all of] the surface qualities o f the same body. Hence it is clear
omni genere om nim odo figurarum solidarum potest aliqua qualitas corporea from the statements made earlier that some corporeal quality can be completely
ymaginari sive figurari, dum tamen a quolibet puncto illius figure possit imagined or figured b y every kind o f solid figure, so long as a perpendicular line
perpendicularis ad basim in eadem figura protrahi, ita quod nichil illius can be drawn to the base o f that figure from any point o f the figure so that none o f
linee sit extra figuram per quam huiusmodi qualitas designatur; et ideo that line is outside o f the figure by which the quality o f this kind is designated.
io nulla qualitas designatur per figuram perforatam vel per figuram subconca- A nd, therefore, no quality is designated b y a perforated figure o f this sort: 0 ,
vam seu concavam contra basim, sicut esset ista 0 vel ista EZ vel aliqua or b y a subconcave figure, i.e., one that is concave opposite the base, as is this
talis. Sed quolibet modo alio est aliqua qualitas figurabilis ita quod ad figure: CZ, or by some such figure. B ut some quality can be figured in any
ymaginationem et similitudinem sepe dictam quedam qualitas corporalis other way, so that w ith respect to imagination and the oft-mentioned similitude a
est pyramidalis seu ymaginabilis ad modum pyramidis aut ex pyramidalibus particular corporeal quality is “ pyramidal,” i.e., imaginable b y means o f a pyramid,
15 qualitatibus composita, aut ex pyramidibus rotundis aut multilateris, et or is composed o f pyramidal qualities, either o f cones or multilateral pyramidal fig­
similiter quedam ex pyramidibus maioris acutiei, alia ex pyramidibus acutiei ures.1 A nd similarly certain o f the pyramids are o f greater acuity, others o f lesser
minoris ad aliam comparata. Similiter quedam figurabilis est ad modum acuity, when compared to another. In a similar way, some [particular quality] can
portionis spere vel columpne et sic de modis et variationibus infinitis be figured by means o f a segment o f a sphere or o f a cylinder, and w e can proceed
secundum genera uniformitatis et difformitatis posita in capitulis 150 et 160. thus through the infinite modes and variations dependent upon the kinds o f uni­
20 Item etiam una est figurabilis in uno modo, verbi gratia, caliditas, et alia formity and difformity posited in chapters fifteen and sixteen. Further, one quality
eiusdem corporis alio modo vel eodem, ut albedo, et forsan alia aliter, ut o f the body — say, its hotness— can be figured in one way, while another quality o f
dulcedo, et sic de aliis. the same body, such as its whiteness, can be figured in another way, and perhaps
another o f its qualities— possibly its sweetness— can be figured in a still different
34 utrinque B P utrobique V L corporis qualitatis superficiei illam partem way, and similarly for other [qualities].
35 eius: ipsius P corporis terminantis V qualitatis super­
36 inde: sive L / basi: base P ficiei illam qualitatem terminantis [ S G ]
I.x v iii
37 seu... corporali om. P / seu B L quam V 5 prius dictis: predictis V / quod: quod de
1 See the Commentary, I.xviii, line 15.13
*5
/ etiam om. L LP
6 qualitas corporea tr. V / corporea om. P
I.x v iii: B V L P 8 perpendicularis: linea perpendicularis L P / 13 quedam: aliqua L P 16 alia: autZ, / alia... acutiei: vel V P
1 Capitulum i8 m tr. P / eius multiplici ita: sic P 15 composita om. P j aut1: et aut B ut V / ex 17 comparatam L
L P [E F G C ] t r .B V 10 v e l... figuram om. V om. P 20 caliditas: sicut caliditas P si caliditas L / et
4 ad : secundum L P 11 seu... basim om. P /figuras om. P / pro 1 2 15, 16 pyramidibus B V piramidalibus L pyra- om. P
4-5 qualitatum... corporis B L P fE A F N C habet L 2 midalibus P piramidibus [ C ] 21 forsan: forsan etiam L
MJ qualitatum superficialium eiusdem 12 Sed om. L P 1 5 et om. P
 212 D e configurationibus qualitatum et m otuum 213
Part I, Chapter xix

[I.xix] Capitulum \ym de figuratione contrariorum I.xix On the figuration o f contraries

N o n est presentis negotii inquirere an qualitates contrarie possint simul
esse eque prim o in eadem parte subiecti. Si tamen ad ymaginationem admit­
tatur quod sic, tunc earum subiectum quod foret uniformiter densum habe-
5 ret in omnibus partibus suis equaliter de toto aggregato ex ambobus con­
trariis, quoniam secundum quod in una eius parte esset minus de uno con­
trario in eadem parte esset plus de alio et econtra. Tale igitur subiectum esset
uniformiter quale in illo genere huius contrarietatis, ut si genus inmediatum
calidi et frigidi haberet nomen impositum, tunc subiectum in quo sunt ambo
io esset uniformiter denominatum ab illo genere. E rgo per capitulum io millud
aggregatum ex ambobus contrariis ymaginabile est per quadrangulum rec-
tangulum. Sumpta itaque portione illius quadranguli per quam quamvis
illarum qualitatum contrariarum est ymaginabilis secundum dicta in priori­
bus capitulis, restabit reliqua portio pro alia contraria qualitate ita quod linea
i5 summitatis figure designantis totum illud aggregatum ymaginabitur loco
basis figure designantis illam alteram qualitatem ac si esset eversa totalis
illa figura.
V erbi gratia [Fig. 11], sit A B subiectum uniformiter densum, in quo sint
simul caliditas et frigiditas; erit igitur uniforme in genere caliditatis et frigi-
20 ditatis. E rg o totum aggregatum ex istis contrariis ymaginabitur sicut qua­
drangulus rectangulus qui sit A B C D . Sit itaque caliditas subiecti A B
uniformiter difformis terminata ad non gradum in puncto A et ad gradum
summum in puncto B , vel saltem ad minimum gradum cum quo non potest
It is not a matter o f present concern to inquire as to whether contrary qu alities in
the first place can exist simultaneously equal in the same part o f the subject.1 H ow ­
ever, if it is admitted in the imagination that they can, then a uniformly dense sub­
ject w ith contraries w ould have in the totality o f its parts an equal amount o f the
whole aggregate o f both contraries, since insofar as there w ould be less o f one
contrary in one o f its parts, there w ould be more o f the other contrary in the same
part, and vice versa. Therefore, such a subject [in its totality] w ould be uniformly
o f the nature represented by the genus o f that contrariety, so that if the genus o f
the immediate [union] o f hot and cold were to have a name assumed for it, then the
subject in which both o f them reside w ould be uniformly denominated by that
genus. Therefore, by chapter ten, the aggregate o f both contraries is imaginable by
a rectangle. A n d so take away that portion o f the rectangle b y which either o f the
contrary qualities is imaginable according to the statements made in the prior
chapters. The portion that is left w ill remain to represent the other contrary quali­
ty, so that, i f we assume the w hole figure to be inverted, the line o f summit o f the
figure designating the w hole aggregate w ill be imagined as the base o f the figure
representing the other quality [that is left].
For example [see Fig. 11], let A B be the subject which is uniformly dense. In it
we let hotness and coldness exist simultaneously.2 Therefore, the subject w ill be
uniform in the [combined] genus o f hotness and coldness. Therefore, the whole

Fig. ix
Figure in MSS B L S C J G . In MS / , triangle A B C is marked E and triangle A D C is marked F .
In MS C , letters C and D are interchanged. MS J adds another figure in which diagonal A C is
I .x ix : B V L P L replaced by an arc A E B .
1 Capitulum 19m tr. P 14 reliqua: aliqua P
2 est: est autem P / possunt (?) V 14-15 linea summitatis: summitas P aggregate o f these contraries w ill be imagined as a rectangle, A B C D . A n d so let
3 primo: primo esse B 15 loco om. P the hotness o f subject A B be uniformly difform terminated at no degree in point
3-4 admittatur om. B 16 -17 totalis illa tr. L A and at the highest degree in point B , or at least at the least degree with which the
5 partibus suis tr. L P 18 sint: sitL B
6 uno: uno eius L 20 Ergo: igitur V
I .x ix
9 sunt ambo tr. L P 21 Sit itaque B P sit igitur V erit igitur L 1 This chapter gives geometric expression to see P. Duhem, L e Systeme du monde, Vol. 7,
xo ab: in L / Ergo: igitur V P 23 puncto B: B punctum V [ potest: possit the problem o f the simultaneous existence of 566-67). See also the passage and figure given
12 itaque: igitur L P LP
contrary qualities raised by Buridan in his in Introduction II.B, fn. 3.
13 qualitatum contrariarum tr. P contrarium
Questions on the Physics (Book III, Question 3; 2 See the Commentary, I.xix, lines 18-27.
 214 D e configurationibus qualitatum e t m otuum Part I, Chapter xx 215

stare frigiditas. E rg o caliditas ista ymaginabitur per triangulum A B C ;
25 igitur frigiditas ymaginanda est per triangulum D C A . Evertatur ergo
figura et ponatur A pro D et B pro C et tunc patet quod frigiditas est uni­
formiter difformis terminata ad non gradum in puncto B. E t sic universaliter
de contrariis que sunt simul, ita quod qualitercunque figuratio unius diver-
sificetur figuratio alterius econtra variabitur equivalenter quantum sufficit
30 ad supplendum uniformitatem totius aggregati. Unde patet quod si unum
contrariorum ymaginetur per figuram convexam, aliud simul existens ymagi-
nandum est per figuram concavam, et econtra, et conform iter in aliis, ut
potest ex dictis faciliter apparere. E t hec predicta sunt communia qualitati
lineari, superficiali, ac etiam corporali, quamvis exemplificatum sit tantum-
35 modo de lineari.
coldness cannot stand. Therefore, this hotness w ill be imagined by A A B C , and so
the coldness is to be imagined by A D C A . Then let the figure be inverted and let A
be put in place o f D and B in place o f C . A n d then it is evident that the coldness is
uniformly difform terminated at no degree in point B. A nd it is the same for all the
contraries w hich exist together, so that how ever the figuration o f the one is
changed, so the figuration o f the other w ill be equivalently changed in a contrary
fashion enough to make up the uniform ity o f the whole aggregate. W hence it is
evident that if one o f the contraries is imagined by a convex figure, the other
existing [with it] at the same time is to be imagined by a concave figure, and vice
versa, and similarly for the other [figures], as is readily apparent from what w e have
said. A n d all o f what has been said before is common to linear, surface, and corpor­
eal quality alike, although the examples given have only been o f linear quality.

[I.xx] Capitulum 2om de uno modo dicendi de curvitate quantum I.xx On one way of speaking of the difformity
ad eius difformitatem o f curvature

N unc restat de curvitate dicendum, habet namque curvitas ad modum N o w it remains to speak o f curvature. For curvature, like the other qualities,
aliarum qualitatum extensionem et intensionem, quedam uniformem, alia has both extension and intensity, and one kind [of curvature] is uniform while an­
5 vero difformem. Sed tamen non est manifestum de proportione curvitatum other is difform. But still it is not manifest, in regard to the ratio o f the intensity o f
in intensione utrum scilicet una sit dupla ad aliam vel in alia proportione aut curvatures, whether one is double another or exists in another ratio [to it], or
si sint inproportiona[bi]les vel non; ignotum enim est penes quid vel circa whether or not curvatures are unrelatable one to the other b y ratio.1 For w e do not
quid attenditur intensio curvitatis. E t pro nunc non apparet mihi nisi alter know w ith what, or w ith regard to what, the intensity o f curvature is measured.
duorum m odorum : unus est quod maioritas curvitatis attenditur penes But for now it appears to me that there are only tw o [possible] ways [to speak o f
o recessum ipsius a rectitudine et distantiam ab ipsa rectitudine, que est the measure o f curvature]. The first is that the increase in curvature is a function o f
secundum quantitatem anguli constituti ex recta et curva sicut est angulus its departure from straightness, i.e. o f its distance from straightness. This is [to be
contingende aut forsan unus alter etiam constitutus ex recta et curva. measured] b y the quantity o f the angle constituted o f a straight line and a curve,
V erbi gratia [Fig. 12(a) ], sit linea A B cui iungantur due linee in puncto A , e.g. an angle o f contingence or perhaps another angle also constructed from a
que sint A C et A D . D icetur igitur quod linea A D est curvior quam linea straight line and a curve.
24 E r g o : igitur V 2 eiusL P [ E F G ] om. B V [ C ] For example [see Fig. 12(a)], let there be line A B , to which tw o [curved] lines
2 5 igitur: ergo L / ergo: igitur V P 5 tamen om. L P A C and A D are joined in point A . It w ill be said, therefore, that line A D is more
26 D : B K / B pro: D aut V j et3 om. V j tunc: 7 sint L P sunt B V / vel: aut P / enim est
sic B tr. L
z-j sic: sic amisi {?) V 8 attenditur B L P attendatur V / attenditur
29 variabitur: figurabitur V tr. P post curvitatis / michi V
31 ymaginatur B 9 attendatur V
32 aliis: illis P 10 ipsius: eius P / ipsa om. P biguously and then most often it appears as the
I .x x
33 potest tr. P post faciliter / dictis: predictis 12 etiam om. V L / recta et curva: curvo et rec­ 1 I have used the English phrase “ unrela­ former o f the two terms. However, it will be
L P j Et: etiam L, j predicta: dicta E to P curva et recta [ E ] seen that I have adopted the latter reading,
table by ratio” to render the Latin inproportio-
13 sit: sicut L I iungantur: coniunguntur P nabilis. There is considerable confusion in the usually writing it as inproportiona[bi]lis to
I .x x : B V L P iunguntur L reflect my doubt as to Oresme’s original inten­
manuscripts as to whether Oresme used /'«-
1 Capitulum 20m tr. P / uno om. P / quan­ 14 sint: sit B sunt L / igitur: ergo B j quod: tion, although the good manuscripts B V often
proportionalis or inproportionabilis. Only oc­
tum om. P aut V / A D : D A E have it thus.
casionally is the word written out unam­
 2l6 D e configurationibus qualitatum et m otuum Part I, Chapter xx 217

15 A C , tanto quanto angulus B A D est maior angulo B A C . N unc autem curved than line A C by the amount that angle B A D is greater than angle B A C .
ita est quod angulus ex recta et curva et angulus ex duabus curvis sunt in- But an angle formed from a straight line and a curve and one formed from tw o
proportiona[bi]les, ut demonstrari posset ex 15 311 Euclidis et eius commento curves are not relatable by ratio, as could be demonstrated from [proposition]
et per D ei gratiam hoc ostendam in tractatu de perfectionibus specierum. III. 15 o f [the Elements of] Euclid2 and its comment [by Campanus], and by the
Igitur angulus B A C et angulus C A D sunt inproportiona[bi]les. Igitur grace o f G o d I shall demonstrate this in a treatise On the Perfections of Species.3 There­
20 totalis angulus B A D est inproportiona[bi]lis partiali angulo B A C , id est, fore, angle B A C and angle C A D are not relatable by ratio. Therefore, the whole
non excedit eum secundum aliquam proportionem que reperiatur in numeris angle B A D is not relatable by ratio to the partial angle B A C , i.e. it does not ex­
nec in quibuscunque continuis que sunt eiusdem rationis, ut inter lineam et ceed it according to any ratio which is found in numbers or in any continua which
lineam et superficiem et superficiem et sic de aliis. E x quo sequitur quod
curvitas maior et curvitas minor sunt inproportionabiles et alterius rationis,
25 quod adhuc aliter ostenditur.
E t sit unus angulus ex duabus lineis similiter curvis seu similis curvitatis
ad eandem partem ; sit tamen maior quam angulus contingentie et sit iste
angulus B A C [Fig. 12(b)]. Igitur potest dividi per lineam consimiliter cur­
vam ad m odum continui quomodolibet, sicut in duo equalia; dividatur ergo
30 in duo equalia per lineam consimiliter curvam que sit A D . D ico igitur quod
impossibile est istum angulum B A D (! B A C ) consimiliter dividi per lineam Fig. 12
Figure (a) in MSS B L S C J G . In MS J , the arcs are drawn above A B , A D being drawn on a
rectam, quod faciliter patet, quia aut ipsa caderet extra lineam A D aut intra,
semicircle with A B the diameter. Figure (b) in MSS B L S C J G .
et quocunque dato, totalis angulus B A C non divideretur per medium; et
pari rationi non potest dividi per lineam rectam in duas partes, quarum una are o f the same kind, as between line and line and surface and surface, and thus for
35 sit ad aliam dupla, nec secundum aliquam proportionem aliam, sive rationa­ others. From this it follows that a larger curvature and a smaller curvature are not
lem sive irrationalem, que possit reperiri in continuis que sunt eiusdem relatable by ratio and are o f different natures. This can be demonstrated in another
rationis. E t per eandem rationem demonstrabitur quod idem angulus iam way.
datus non potest dividi per equalia vel proportionalia per aliquam lineam Let one angle be formed o f tw o lines similarly curved or o f a similar curvature
que sit ad lineam A D dissimilis in curvitate, quia, sicut prius, aut ipsa linea in the same direction. Let one be greater than the angle o f contingence and let this
40 dividens intraret infra curvitatem ipsius A D aut esset extra, et quocunque 15 be angle B A C [see Fig. 1 2(b)]. Hence this angle can, in the fashion o f a continuum,
be divided by a similarly curved line in any division we like, say into tw o equal parts.
Therefore, let angle B A C be divided into tw o equal parts by a line similarly curved,
namely line A D . I say, therefore, that it is impossible that this angle B A C 4 be
similarly divided by a straight line. This is readily evident, because it w ould fall
15 angulus B A D tr. P 27 quam: quam sit L V / iste om. B either outside o f line A D or inside, and in either case the total angle B A C w ould
18 specierum L P [ A E N ] et vide comm. lin. 18 29 dividitur A not be divided in half, and by the same reason it cannot be divided by a straight line
rerum B V [ F M S G J J 29-30 dividatur... equalia om. V into tw o parts one o f which is double the other, nor can it be divided according to
19 Igitur1: ergo B / Igitur2: ergo V 29 ergo: itaque (?) P
any other ratio— whether rational or irrational— which could be found in continua
20 B A C id est: C A D et L P B A C et [ N ] 30 consimiliter curvam tr. B / igitur: ergo B
22 sunt: sint B P 31 possibile L / B A D : B A C G {vide I .x x ,
o f the same nature. A nd by the same reasoning, it w ill be demonstrated that the
23 et1 om. B n. 4) same given angle cannot be divided into equal parts— or into parts relatable by
24 inproportionabiles B V inproportionales L 33 totalis: talis L P ratio— by a line which is dissimilar to line A D in curvature, because, as before, the
(omnes alii M S S habent abbreviatior.es ambi­ 35 proportionem aliam tr. V / aliam om. L P dividing line w ould fall either within or without the curvature o f A D , and in either
guas sed probabiliter stant pro inproportiona­ 36 sive om. P / posset B / reperiri: inveniri P /
les sive improportionales et postea dabo solas sunt: sint L 2 See the Commentary, I.xx, line 17. reading. But the argument makes sense only
lectiones unambiguas) 37 rationem: conclusionem L 3 Ibid., line 18. with B A C . Further, the istum before angulum
25 adhuc: autem adhuc B 39 A D : A D que sit P / quia om. L P 4 Oresme seems to have written B A D in would have no referent if B A C were not
26 seu: et P error, since all manuscripts but one reflect that meant.
 D e configurationibus qualitatum et m otuum Part I, Chapter xx 2x9

dato non divideret totalem angulum per medium. E x quo demonstrabili vel
iam demonstrato probabiliter concluditur quod sicut hoc non potest facere
linea recta, scilicet talem divisionem, quia ipsa est alterius rationis a linea
curva, ita hoc non potest maior curvitas propter hoc quod ipsa est alterius
45 rationis a curvitate minori et inproportionabilis illi.
Igitur si ita est, oportet dicere quod curvitas difformis componitur ex
infinitis partibus alterius rationis et inproportionabilibus et quod quemad­
modum nullus angulus ex curvitatibus similibus potest esse duplus alicui
angulo cuius linee sunt inter se dissimilis curvitatis nec potest esse aliquali-
5o ter ei proportiona[bi]lia, sic neque curvitates dissimiles sunt in invicem
proportionabiles; ita quod nulla intensio curvitatis difformis potest esse al­
teri curvitati dissimili eiusdem difformis curvitatis in proportione dupla vel
in proportione que est medietas duple, neque commensurabiliter, neque in-
commensurabiliter, nec universaliter in aliqua proportione que reperiri
55 possit inter lineam et lineam. Unde patet consequenter quod intensio curvi­
tatis non est per lineas ymaginanda; nec est aliqua curvitas similis in inten­
sione alicui alteri qualitati de alia specie; nec curvitas per aliquam figuram
ymaginanda est; nec eius intensio altitudini figure est assimilanda eo quod
omnis figure altitudo per lineas designatur. E x quo ulterius patet quod nulla
60 curvitas est uniformiter difformis, quia de ratione accidentis uniformiter
difformis est quod sit per totum subiectum eiusdem rationis et quod propor­
tio intensionis ad intensionem vel excessum intensionis in diversis partibus
sit sicut proportio distantie ad distantiam et per consequens sicut proportio
linearum, prout patet ex descriptionibus n * capituli, et hoc, sicut nunc
65 dictum est, convenire non potest curvitati difformi. E t inde sequitur ulterius
quod omnis curvitas difformis est difformis aliter quam aliqua alia qualitas
alterius generis possit esse et quadam extranea, mirabili, et diversa difformi-
tate.
case it w ould not divide the total angle in half. From which demonstrable con­
clusion— or conclusion already demonstrated— it is concluded with probability
that just as a straight line cannot effect this, i.e., produce such a division, because it
is o f a different nature than the curved line, so a greater curve cannot make the
division because it is o f a different nature than a lesser curve and is not relatable to
it by ratio.
Therefore, if this is so, it is necessary to say (1) that difform curvature is composed
o f an infinite number o f parts o f different nature and unrelatable [to each other]
by ratio, and (2) that just as no angle composed o f similar curves can be double an
angle whose lines are o f mutually dissimilar curvature— nor can be relatable to it in
any way b y ratio— so neither can dissimilar curves be mutually relatable by ratio.
Thus no intensity o f difform curvature can be related to another dissimilar curva­
ture in a ratio o f 2 to 1 or [even] in a ratio o f y/z to 1, i.e., either in a commensur­
able or incommensurable ratio— or, universally, in any ratio which could be found
as existing between line and line. The conclusion is hence evident that intensity o f
curvature is not to be imagined by lines. N or is there some curvature which is sim­
ilar in intensity to some other quality o f another species. N o r is curvature to be
imagined b y some figure. N or is its intensity to be assimilated to the altitude o f a
figure, because the altitude o f every figure is designated by lines. Finally, it is evi­
dent from this that no curvature is uniformly difform, for, by reason o f accident,
“ uniformly difform” exists throughout a w hole subject o f the same nature and
where the ratio o f intensity to intensity, or excess o f intensity, in the diverse parts
is as the ratio o f distance to distance, and consequently as the ratio o f lines, as is evi­
dent from the descriptions in chapter eleven, and this [reduction to ratios between
lines] cannot, as was just said, be suitable for difform curvature. A n d so it follows
finally that every difform curvature is difform in a w ay different from that in which
any other quality o f another kind could be, and [so it is difform] with a strange,
marvelous, diverse kind o f difformity.

41 per om. B 55 posset B

42 probabiliter concluditur /r. L P 56 in intensione: intensioni L
43 scilicet...divisionem: tali divisione scili­ 57 qualitati: curvitati P
cet V talem divisionem L 5 8 ymaginanda est tr. P ante per in linea 5 7 /
44 hoc: etiam P est1 om. B L / altitudini: alicui L
45 inproportionabilis B inproportionalis L 59 E x quo om. P
46 ita: in P 60 accidenter (?) P
47 inproportionabilibus B P inproportionali- 61 difformis: difformitas (?) P / sit: si P
bus L 64 linearis L / prout: ut L / et hoc om. P et hic
49-5 0 aliqualiter ei tr. L P quia E
50 sic: sicut L 65 convenire tr. L P post potest
51 proportionabiles B proportionales L pro­ 66 difformis1 om. L / est difformis om. K/aliter:
poses V
aliqualiter aliter L
53 neque l >2: nec L P 67 possit: posset B potest L
54 universaliter om. P
 220 D e configurationibus qualitatum et m otuum Part I, Chapter xxi 221

[I.xxi] Capitulum 2 im de quodam alio modo dicendi I.xxi On a certain other way o f speaking o f curvature
de curvitate

Omnis curvitas circularis est uniformis et econverso, et omnis alia curvi­
tas est difformis. N unc igitur de utraque tangatur alius modus et primo de
5 uniformi, ut dicatur quod intensio eius attenditur penes vel secundum quanti­
tatem semidyametri circuli cuius ipsa curvitas est, vel esse possit, circum­
ferentia aut portio circumferende, ita quod quanto illa semidyameter fuerit
minor, tanto proportionaliter curvitas erit maior. Verbi gratia [Fig. 13(a)]:
Sit circulus maior cuius semidyameter sit A B et circulus minor cuius
«° semidyameter sit A C . Si ergo semidyameter A B dupla est ad semidyamet-
rum A C , curvitas minoris circuli erit duplo intensior curvitate maioris, et
E very circular curvature is uniform and vice versa, and every other curvature is
difform. Therefore, now let us touch upon another way o f treating each o f these.
First, concerning uniform curvature: let it be said that its intensity is measured by,
or according to, the quantity o f the radius o f the circle whose curve is, or could be,
the circumference or part o f the circumference, so that by the amount the radius is
less so proportionally the curvature w ill be greater.1 For example [see Fig. 13(a)],
let there be a larger circle whose radius is A B and a smaller circle whose radius is
B

ita de aliis proportionibus et curvitatibus. Unde patet quod secundum istum

modum curvitates inequales sunt proportiona[bi]les et eiusdem rationis; ita B [C]
quod forsan ad illam probabilitatem adductam in precedenti capitulo dicere-
15 tur, quod quamvis curvitas maior et curvitas minor faciant in angulis
inproportionabilitatem sicut faciunt linea recta et linea curva, forte tamen ex
hoc non sequitur quod propter hoc ipse curvitates sint inproportiona[bi]les
et alterius rationis, quoniam etiam secundum veritatem non in tantum sunt
incomparabiles due linee curve sicut una linea recta et alia curva. D e curvis
20 namque dicitur quod una est magis curva quam altera; sed non sic potest

Fig. 13
Figure (a) in MSS L S C G . Figure (b) is given as in MSS B S G , although G does not include C on
the circumference. A ll three MSS have another separate drawing o f the spiral without the circle,
but G ’ s is corrupt. There are corrupt drawings in MSS L G . I have added the prime to C 'an d the
bracketed letter [C].

I .x x i : B V L P
1 Capitulum 2 im tr. P / dicendi om. V
5 ante attenditur del. P penes
6 est: esset L / esse possit [ E C ] esse potest
P [ A ] esse posset L esse V esset B [S J
7 semidyameter: dyameter L
8 minor: maior P / proportionaliter curvitas:
proportio curvitatis L P
10 Si: Tunc si L P / ergo B igitur V sit L P /
est om. L P
1 x duplo: in duplo L
12 ita om. V I de. aliis om. P
A C . If, therefore, radius A B is double ta diusA C , then the curvature o f the lesser
circle w ill be tw ice as intense as the curvature o f the larger circle, and similarly for
other ratios and curvatures. From this it is evident that according to this method
13 curvitates inequales om. P / inequales: unequal curvatures are relatable by ratios and are o f the same nature. Perhaps then
enim equales L / et om. V one should say, in regard to the probable conclusion adduced in the preceding chap­
14 ad illam om. P / probabiliter V L j adductam: ter, that although a greater curve and a lesser curve form angles that are not relatable
ad dictum P / capitulo om. P
by ratio in the same way that a straight line and a curve produce [such angles that are
15 e t: similiter B / faciunt L
not relatable by ratio], still perhaps one should not conclude from this that the
16 proportionabilitatem L
17 non tr. B ante ex/hoc ipse om. L / ipse om. curvatures are not relatable by ratio and are o f different natures since truthfully it
P / sint: sunt B P is not so much the tw o curved lines that are not [mutually] comparable as the one
19 comparabiles V / una L P [ E C ] om. B V / straight line and the other curve. For it is concerning curves that it is said that one
alia L P [ E C ] om. B V
20 dicitur: diceretur L P / non tr. V P post I .x x i
sic 1 See the Commentary, I.xxi, lines 5-8.
 222 D e configurationibus qualitatum e t m otuum Part I, Chapter xxi 223

dici de curva et recta; ymmo neque recta dicitur magis recta quam curva is “ m ore-curved” than another. This cannot be said concerning a curve and a
sit curva. Forte tamen diceretur quod recta et curva sunt incomparabiles straight line. N or is it said that a straight line is more straight than a curve is curved.
proprie, sed due curve sunt comparabiles proprie in curvitate, nec tamen Perhaps, however, it w ould be said that a straight line and a curve are not properly
proportionabiles, sicut angulus ex recta et curva et angulus ex duabus curvis comparable but that tw o curves are properly comparable in curvature but still not
25 sunt incomparabiles et inproportionabiles, et hoc esset pro modo posito in relatable by ratio in the same way that an angle formed from a straight line and a
alio capitulo. Verumptamen utrum curvitates inequales sint proportionabiles curve and an angle formed from tw o curves are not comparable and are not relat­
vel non, hoc non determino pro nunc. V os qui hoc legitis iudicate. able by ratio, and this w ould be in support o f the method posited in the other
Sed tamen posito iuxta predicta in presenti capitulo quod intensio curvi­ chapter. H owever, whether or not unequal curvatures are relatable by ratio, I shall
tatis attenditur penes semidyametri parvitatem, sequitur inde quod omnium not determine now. Y o u w ho read this, judge [for yourselves].
30 circumferentiarum circularium curvitates sunt simpliciter equales, quoniam But still, if it has been posited in line w ith what has been said earlier in this pres­
sicut postea videbitur in tertia parte huius, si aliqua qualitas sit intensior ent chapter that the intensity o f curvature is a direct function o f the smallness o f
alia et illa alia sit proportionaliter extensior seu magis extensa, ille due sunt the radius, it follows then that the curvatures o f all circular circumferences are
simpliciter coequales. N unc autem ita est quod proportio circumferentia­ simply equal, since, as w ill be seen in the third part o f this [work] later, if any quali­
rum in quantitate est sicut proportio semidyametrorum circulorum quorum ty is more intense than another but that other is proportionally more extensive or
35 sunt circumferentie, ut patet per quintam conclusionem Archimenidis de more extended, then the tw o are simply equal. N o w it is a fact that the ratio in
curvis superficiebus. E rgo curvitas duple circumferentie est duplo extensior quantity o f circumferences is the same as the ratio o f the radii o f the circles o f
quam curvitas circumferentie subduple et per positum eadem curvitas duple which they are the circumferences, as is evident by the fifth conclusion o f the On
circumferentie est duplo remissior. Igitur simpliciter loquendo curvitas Curved Surfaces o f Archimedes.2 Hence the curvature o f the double circumference
duple circumferentie et curvitas subduple circumferentie sunt equales, et is twice as extensive [i.e. twice as long] as the curvature o f a circumference o f half
40 sic de aliis. E rg o omnium circumferentiarum circularium curvitates simplici­ the double. But, in accordance with what has been posited, the curvature o f the
ter sunt equales et eodem m odo dico quod omnes portiones similes circum­ double circumference is tw ice as remiss [i.e., half as intense]. Therefore, speaking
ferentiarum inequalium sunt equales secundum curvitatem, sicut medietas absolutely, the curvature o f the double circumference and that o f its half in length
unius cum medietate alterius, quarta pars cum quarta parte, et ita de aliis. E t are equal, and similarly for other [circumferences]. Therefore, the curvatures o f all
ista videntur rationalia quoniam curvitas dicitur a circuitione seu denotat circular circumferences are simply equal.3 A nd in the same way I say that similar
45 circuitionem. M odo una circumferentia non magis circuit quam alia respectu parts o f unequal circumferences are equal according to curvature, as the semicir­
centri nec una portio circumferentie quam alia maior sibi similis. E rgo cumference o f one with the semicircumference o f another, the quadrant arc o f one
curvitates tales sunt equales simpliciter, quamvis inequaliter sint extense et w ith the quadrant arc o f another, and similarly for the other parts. A n d these re­
inequaliter intense. marks seem to be reasonable since “ curvature” is named from “ circuiting” or
[rather] it denotes “ circuiting.” N o w one circumference does not “ circuit” any
Hec autem ratio quodammodo videtur facere contra primum modum seu
more than another w ith respect to the center, nor does one part o f the circumfer­
50 contra aliud capitulum, et pro isto. Si enim due curvitates dissimiles essent
ence “ circuit” more than another similar part o f a larger circle. Therefore, such
21 dicitur: diceturL 3 5-36 u t... superficiebus om. [ F M ] ut (et lac.) B
23 proprie tr. L P post sunt in linea 22
curvatures are simply equal although they are unequal both in extension and in in­
35 per om. P / Archimenidis L P [ A N E S ]
24, 2 6 proportionabiles B , et lectiones aliorum Alkindi V [ G ] alchidi [ C ] / de bis P tension.
M S S sunt ambiguas sed probabiliter stant pro 36 Ergo: igitur V / circumferentie om. B M oreover, this argument seems in a certain way to act against the first method,
proportionales 38-39 e s t.. .circumferentie1 om. P or against the other chapter, and for this one. For if tw o dissimilar curvatures were
25 comparabiles B V / inproportionabiles B 38 Igitur: ergo L P
proportionales V / esset pro: est quod L 39 circumferentie2L om. B V P 2 Ibid., lines 35-36. 3 Ibid., lines 40-41.4
3
26 alio: 70L P 40 E r g o : igitur P
27 Vos: vos ergo L / legetis B P 40-41 curvitates simpliciter om. P
28 presenti: precedenti-L 41 post equales add. L id est portiones eius­ 43 et1 ... aliis om. L 46 E r g o : igitur V
29 attendatur V dem proportionis sunt equales / dico: dici­ 43-45 etI__ M o d o : quia P [ F ] 47 e t: et similiter V
30 sunt: sint L / sunt simpliciter tr. B V tur L P I portiones: proportiones P 44 rationalia V [ A N ] rationabilia L B [ G ] (et 49 quodammodo videtur tr. L P
32 extensior: intensior L 42 post inequalium add. P portiones eiusdem alii M S S habent abbreviationes ambiguas sed 50 e t... isto om. P / due om. B V / essent om. P
33 equales V / ita est tr. P proportionis probabiliter stant pro rationalia)
 224 D e configurationibus qualitatum e t m otuum Part I, Chapter xxi 225

in intensione inproportiona[bi]les, cum ipse sint proportiona[bi]les in
extensione, ipse essent simpliciter inproportiona[bi]les et inequales. Si
igitur intensio curvitatis secundum istum modum attendatur penes semidy-
ametri parvitatem, omnis curvitas tam uniformis quam difformis erit similis
55 alicui alteri qualitati; atque etiam ad modum alterius qualitatis erit ymagina-
bilis per figuram cuius figure ipsa linea curva vel superficies curva erit basis,
ipsa tamen linea vel superficie ymaginata rectificari, vel etiam ipsa stante
curva, secundum descriptionem vel ymaginationem positam i6° (/17°?)
capitulo.
60 Verumptamen in huiusmodi curvitatis notitiam et uniformitatis ac diverse
difformitatis eiusdem convenientius et facilius devenitur per ymaginationem
motus localis quam figure, ita quod circa centrum A quiescens sit linea sive
semidyameter A B et ymaginetur circumduci seu m overi [Fig. 13(b)]. Si
igitur punctus C continue maneat super B extremitatem semidyametri cir-
65 cumducte, ipsum B vel C describet curvitatem uniformem, videlicet circu­
larem. Si autem punctus C continue descendat super semidyametrum appro­
pinquando ad centrum velocitate uniformi et eadem semidyameter pro tunc
uniformiter circumducatur, dico quod punctus C describet curvitatem
uniformiter difformem, et eodem modo si ipsum C recederet uniformiter a
70 centro, describeret curvitatem uniformiter difformem. Unde si in tempore in
quo punctus B describit circumferentiam punctus C pertranseat totam semi­
dyametrum precise uniformiter ascendendo motu qui esset rectus si semi­
dyameter non circumvolveretur, in hoc casu punctus C describeret lineam
curvitatis uniformiter difformis quam mathematici vocant helicen, forsan
75 sic dictam a quadem specie hedere consimiliter tortuose, que secundum
Plinium dicitur helix; et per talem lineam demonstrat Archimenides circuli
quadraturam. Si autem semidyameter circumducatur uniformiter et punctus
C accedat vel recedat a centro difformiter, aut econverso, vel etiam si semi­
dyameter circueat et C accedat vel recedat et utrobique difformiter difformi-
51-52 inproportiona[bi]les... extensione om. 64 punctus C tr. L / maneat om. B moveatur
V P
51 inproportiona[bi]les om. V ; corr. e x inpro- 64-65 circumducte E circumducentis P cir­
portionales L P et proportionales B / pro­ cumducti B V
portionalities : inproportionales L 66 punctus C tr. L I descenderet P / dyame-
53 igitur: ergo B / istum: illum P trumZ.P
5 5 atque: ita P 67 semidyametro P / pro tunc: partem P
56 figuraL 68 circumducatur: circumducto circuit P
56-5 7 curva... superficie om. P 70 si: simpliciter P
57 rectificari: rectilinearis P 71 circumferentiam: totam circumferentiam
58 160 B V [ E S C G ] in 160 P [ F M A ] 18 al' P / pertransit P / totam om. V
16° L 160 18 [ N ] 72 precise: post se L / m otu... rectus om. P [
61 eiusdem: eadem V esset: e s tL
62 circa: tunc L, 73 circumvoluitur P
63 dyameter V P / ymaginatur P 74 helicen B helice [ S C ] helycen V [ G ] elyce
not relatable by ratio in regard to intensity, then since they are relatable by ratio in
regard to extension, they w ould be simply unequal and unrelatable by ratio. If,
therefore, the intensity o f curvature according to this method is a direct function o f
the smallness o f the radius, every curvature— uniform as w ell as difform— w ill be
similar to some other quality, and also, in the manner o f the other quality, it will
be imaginable by a figure.4 T he curved line itself, or the curved surface, w ill be the
base o f this figure— the line or surface, however, having been imagined as being
converted to a straight line or plane surface, or also one could leave the curve as is
[without rectification], follow ing the description or imagery posited in chapter
sixteen.5
Be that as it may, w e can arrive at a knowledge o f curvature o f this sort and o f
its uniformity and diverse difformity more fittingly and more easily by the imagery
o f local motion than by that o f figures.6 For example [see Fig. 13(b)], let line or
radius A B be imagined as revolved or m oved about center A which remains at
rest. If, therefore, point C continually remains at point B , the extremity o f the re­
volvin g radius, then B or C w ill describe uniform curvature, i.e., circular curvature.
But if point C continually descends along the radius with uniform velocity towards
the center, while the same radius is revolving uniformly, I say that point C w ill
describe uniformly difform curvature. A n d in the same way, if C were to recede
uniformly from the center, it w ould describe uniformly difform curvature. Whence
if point C , m oving uniformly in ascent [toward the center] with a motion which
w ould be simply rectilinear if the radius were not revolving, traverses the w hole
radius in the same time as point B describes the circumference, in this case point C
w ould describe a line o f uniformly difform curvature which the mathematicians call
the helix (spiral), perhaps so called from a certain species o f ivy which is similarly
curved and which according to Pliny is called helix .7 B y such a line Archimedes dem­
onstrates the quadrature o f the circle.8But i f point C approaches or recedes from the
center non-uniformly while the radius is uniformly revolving, or vice versa, or if
both C and the radius m ove with non-compensating difform difformities, then [in
4 Ibid., lines 49-59. as complementary to “ ipsa tamen linea...
5 “ 160” seems to be the correct reading o f ymaginata rectificari,” and thus means that we
the manuscripts, but it is not particularly ap­ rectify the base line for ease o f representation
propriate.The only reference to “ rectification” just as was explained in I.xvii.
o f the curve to be used as a subject line occurs 6 See the Commentary, I.xxi, lines 60-80.
in I.xvii, 24-28. If this is what is being referred 7 N a tu ral History, X V I, 145-46.
to, then the phrase “ secundum descriptionem 8 See the Commentary, I.xxi, lines 76-77.
... 160 (/ 170) capitulo” should be understood
L elycam P elicam [ E J ] elicem [ A ] ely- 76 helyx V / alchimenides L archymedines
cam [ F M ] [C]
75 tortuose om. P 79 circuat P / et C : vel P / v e l: aut P
 226 D e configurationibus qualitatum e t m otuum Part I, Chapter xxii 227

80 tate irrecompensabili, tunc C describeret curvitatem difFormiter difformem.
E t hoc potest multipliciter variari et diversificari; et breviter totidem et
similibus differentiis— immo illis eisdem— potest huiusmodi difformitas
variari, de quibus dictum est ante capitulis 150 et 160.
E x premissis itaque satis sufficienter potest apparere de figuratione in-
85 tensionis in unaquaque specie qualitatis corporee permanentis, nisi quod
adhuc est quedam alia intensio, videlicet acutiei angulorum, in qua non est
reperibilis uniformitas neque difformitas permanens sed tantummodo succes­
siva, de qua in sequentibus apparebit.
all o f these cases] C w ould describe a difformly difform curvature. A n d this dif-
form ly difform curvature can be varied and diversified in many way s : in short, the
difformity can be varied in just as many ways, and with similar or rather the same
distinctions as those described before in chapters fifteen and sixteen.
A nd so from what we have premised w e can arrive at a clear enough idea o f the
figuration o f intensity in any species o f a permanent, corporeal quality— w ith this
exception, that there is still one further intensity, namely that o f the acuteness o f
angles, in which one does not find permanent, but only successive, uniformity or
difformity, as w ill be clear in what follow s.9

[I.xxii] Capitulum 22m de diversitate actionum que fit ex variatione I.xxii On the diversity o f actions arising from a variation in the
difformitatis qualitatum difformity o f qualities

Manifestum est corpora in actionibus suis diversimode posse [variari] It is manifest that bodies can act in different ways as the result o f a variation in
secundum varietatem figurarum eorundem corporum, propter quod antiqui the shapes o f these bodies. For this reason the Ancients, positing bodies to be
5 ponentes corpora componi ex athomis dixerunt athomalia ignis fore pyrami­ composed o f atoms, have said that atoms o f fire w ere pyramidal in shape because
dalia propter eius activitatem fortem. Unde secundum diversitatem pyrami­ o f its vigorous activity; thus bodies can penetrate either more or less depending on
dum possunt corpora magis aut minus pungere; et secundum aliam et aliam the differences existing in the pyramids.1 A s the result o f varying sharpness, it is
acutiem, certum est quedam fortius aut minus fortiter posse secare, et ita de certain that some can cut more strongly and others less strongly. It is the same for
aliis actionibus et figuris. other actions and shapes.
10 E t cum ita sit de figuris corporum, videtur rationabile conformiter posse A n d since this is the case in regard to the shapes o f bodies, it seems reasonable to
dici de predictis figurationibus qualitatum; ut videlicet sit aliqua qualitas speak in a conformable w ay concerning the previously described figurations o f
cuius particule sint in intensione proportionales parvis pyramidibus, et qualities. So, if there is a quality whose particles are proportional in intensity to
propter hoc illa sit activior, ceteris paribus, quam equalis qualitas uniformis small pyramids, it is accordingly more active, other things being equal, than an
simpliciter aut que esset proportionalis alteri figure non ita penetrative. V el equal quality which is simply uniform, or which w ould be proportional to another
15 si forent due qualitates quarum particule unius essent proportionales acutio­ figure not so penetrating. Or, i f there were tw o qualities and the particles o f one
ribus pyramidibus quam particule alterius, illa qualitas que corresponderet were proportional to more acute pyramids than the particles o f the other, the quali­
acutioribus pyramidibus esset activior, ceteris paribus, et sic de aliis figuris. ty corresponding to the more acute pyramids w ould be more active, other things
Nam expertum est qualitatem uniformiter extensam in subiecto, ut puta being equal, and similarly for other figures.
caliditatem, aliter agere et tactum aliter immutare quam equalis qualitas For it has become know n by experience that a quality uniformly extended in a
subject, e.g., hotness, acts differently, and alters the sense o f touch differently, than
80 C: punctus C P / describet V lam capitulorum
81 potest: potest dici L / totidem: ceteris L 3 [variari] L [ N G J om. B V P [ A E F M C S ’]
83 ante: ante in L P j capitulo P 4 variationem P j eorundem corporum tr. P he decided to omit consideration o f angles
9 Although Oresme treats of “ successive
84 poterit P I potest apparere: patet L / corporum: corporum invenire V except for the very brief reference in Il.xiii,
entities” in Part II, he does not consider angles.
86 adhuc est: ad hoc P 5 athomalia: athomalis V I suspect that he intended to discuss them, as line 33.
87 tantummodo: solummodo L 6 -7 pyramidis P I .x x i i
he had done in his earlier Questions on the
7 possint (?) B Geometry of Euclid, Questions 18-21, but that 1 See the Commentary, I.xxii, lines 4-6.
I .x x i i : B V L P 8 fortiter: forte V in the course o f writing the D e configurationibus19
1-2 Capitulum... qualitatum: 22m capitu­ 10 corporum: corporaliter V / rationale P
lum P 11 sit om. P
1 fit B V L [ C ] provenit [ E F G ] et vide tabu­ 18 est: est quod P / qualitas P / extensa P 19 caliditas P / agere... immutare: immutat P / mutare E
 228 Part I, Chapter xxii 229
D e configurationibus qualitatum e t m otuum

20 cuius una particula esset intensa, alia remissa, alia intensa, et sic alternatim
secundum particulas subiecti, ita ut illa qualitas esset difformis et iuxta
ymaginationem positam ad modum parvarum pyramidum figurata. Unde
forsan propter hoc verum est illud quod solet dici, videlicet quod alique
qualitates sunt pungitive ut aliquis sapor vel odor vel frigus vel calor, ut
25 calor qui est in pipere. E t inveniuntur quandoque due qualitates eiusdem
speciei et eque intense et tamen una est magis activa et magis pungitiva quam
alia, cuius causa potest assignari secundum ymaginationem prius dictam.
Secundum hoc etiam potest dici quod aliqua qualitas, verbi gratia caliditas
remissior, est activior quam caliditas intensior v el quam caliditas ignis parvi,
30 eo quod illa intensior forsan uniformis non tantum excedit aliam in inten­
sione quantum alia eam in activitate, quam habet ex predicta figuratione, et
hoc potest esse una causa activitatis ferri candentis cum corporea compaci-
tate. Talis etiam inequalitas activitatis contingere posset propter solam
causam predictam ubi foret equalitas seu paritas compacitatis et omnium
35 aliorum.
Aliquando etiam utrumque contrariorum existentium in aliquo subiecto
est activius quam utrumque vel aliquod similium contrariorum existentium
in alio subiecto in simili proportione et equali intensione, ut verbi gratia
[Fig. 14]: Sint A et B duo tepida; possibile est quod A fortius agat cale-
40 faciendo aliquod magis frigidum et frigefaciendo magis calidum quam
faciat B. E t causa huius sit quia contraria existentia in A sunt pyramidaliter
figurata et non in B , iuxta ymaginationem capituli 181 et 191. Unde pauca vel
nulla mixta completa sunt simpliciter et penitus homogenia; et si aliqua sint
unigenia in substantia, possunt tamen esse in qualitate difformia.
does an equal quality [whose particles o f quality vary as follow s:] one o f its parti­
cles is increased in intensity, a second is decreased in intensity, a third increased,
and so on alternately throughout the particles o f the subject, so that this quality
would be difform and, according to the imagery posited, w ould be figured by
means o f small pyramids. A nd so, according to this, what is commonly said is per­
haps true, namely, that some qualities are pungent, e.g. a taste or an odor, or a cold
or hot quality, like the hotness o f pepper. A n d sometimes one finds tw o qualities
o f the same species which are equally intense and yet one is more active and more
pungent than another. The cause o f this can be assigned by follow ing the imagery
already described. A ccording to this it can be said that some quality, e.g. a less in­
tense hotness, is more active than a more intense hotness or than the hotness o f a
small fire, because the more intense hotness, perhaps uniform, does not exceed the
other in intensity to the degree that the other exceeds it in activity, which activity it
has from the aforesaid figuration. A nd this can be one cause o f the activity o f iron
shining with corporeal compactness.2 Such inequality o f activity could also happen
exclusively from the aforesaid cause where there is equality or parity in compact­
ness and all other things.
A t times, also, each o f the contraries present in some subject is more active than
each or some one o f similar contraries present in another subject in the same ratio
and with equal intensity. For example, let A and B be tw o tepid bodies [see Fig.
14]. It is possible that A acts more strongly in heating something that is colder and
A B

20 alia1: et alia A secunda P / alia intensa om.
P 33 inequalitas activitatis: activitas P / potest
21 et om. L,
23 propter hoc. om. P / verum: inde L
24 qualitates sunt tr. V / sunt: sunt magis L, /
ut1: vel B
2 5 quandoque tr. B post qualitates / eiusdem:
eadem U
26 tamen: tunc L
26-27 quam alia tr. P ante et3 in lin. 26
27 prius: pre-A
28 Secundum hoc: sed hic L / etiam potest
tr. P
29 remissior: remissior secundum varietatem
P I vel quam: ut L /pro parvi lac. hab. V
3o tantam V
31 eam om. P / predicta om. P
32-33 compacitate B V P [ E F M N ] conpaci-
Fig. 14
Figures in MSS B L S G . The left figure is as in MS B . In the other MSS, the “ pyramids” are
tate/"C ] compaciente/" G ] capacitate L [ S A ] somewhat differently oriented.
P, ?V in cooling something that is hotter than does B. The cause o f this is that the con­
34 compacitatis: capacitatis [ C S ]
traries present in A are figured in a pyramidal way, but not in B , follow ing the
36 Aliquando tr. L ante est in linea p j
37 similium A U consimilium B subiectum P /
imagery o f chapters eighteen and nineteen. Hence few or no mixtures are simply
contrariorum om. L and thoroughly hom ogeneous; and even i f they are o f a single genus in substance,
38 simili: consimili L / ut B L om. V P still they can be difform in quality.
39 agit V
40 magis1 B L om. V P
41 faciat B tr .P / Et: E t quod B / sit: est P
42 post figurata add. P et figurat a (/) / capi­
tu li... 191: 181 et 191 capitulorum P / e tz:
et etiam B
2 I have been forced to accept the bastard the correct compactio. The alternate reading
42-44 U nde... difformia om. P
word compacitas from its overwhelming use in found in some manuscripts, capacitas, does not
43 completa om. L / omogenia V / sunt A
44 substantia: subiecto A the manuscripts (see Variant Readings, lines make sense in this passage.
32-33, 34). I suppose that it was formed from
 230 D e configurationibus qualitatum et m otuum
Part I, Chapter xxiii 231
45 Rursum si quarundam pyramidum rotundarum acuties et curvitates sint
Again, if the sharpnesses and curvatures o f certain cones are o f different natures—
diversarum rationum secundum ymaginationem positam 20° capitulo,
follow ing the imagery posited in chapter twenty— the consequence is that the fig­
consequens est ut figurationes qualitatum eis proportionales sint inter se
urations o f the qualities proportional to them are mutually o f different natures.
diversarum rationum. Unde potest fieri quod actiones qualitatum sint etiam
From this it can happen that the actions o f the qualities are also o f different natures,
differentiarum rationum, cum differentia actionum proveniat ex differentia
since the difference in actions arises from a difference in the figurations o f the agent
50 figurationum qualitatum agentium, ut probatum est ante. E t patet alia ratio­
qualities, as was proved before. A nd this is evident by another argument: for
ne, putant enim aliqui quod figure aut ymagines quedam facte in certis
some people think that the figures or images made in certain materials under cer­
materiis sub quibusdam constellationibus celi mirabiles habeant efficatias et
tain celestial constellations have marvelous efficacies and powers. But whether this
virtutes, quod, sive sit verum sive non, tamen multo probabilius est corpora
is true or not, still it is much more probable that bodies have an efficacy or power
habere efficatiam seu virtutem ex naturali figuratione qualitatis active quam
arising from a natural figuration o f active quality than from an artificial figuration o f
55 ex figuratione artificiali qualitatis que secundum philosophos non est de
genere activarum virtutum. quality, which according to the philosophers is not o f the genus o f active powers.

[I.xxiii] Capitulum 23111 de differentia passionum que potest

I.xxiii On the difference in passions that is deducible from
ex predictis erui
the prior statements
Sicut ex diversitate configurationis qualitatum provenit differentia ac­
Just as differences in actions arise from diversity in the configuration o f qualities,
tionum, ita ex hoc poiest assignari ratio de quibusdam differentiis passionum
so accordingly one can assign the reason for certain differences in passions. Thus it
5 ut dicatur quod quemadmodum corpora que sunt rara et porosa secundum
m ight be said that just as bodies are rare and porous according to quantitative fig­
figurationem quantitativam, ipsa quidem facilius et citius patiuntur, ceteris
uration so they are more easily and quickly affected, other things being equal, than
paribus, quam corpora aliter disposita; ita illa corpora, ceteris paribus, erunt
bodies disposed in a different way. Thus, other things being equal, those bodies,
pro aliis velocius passibilia et alteratione magis penetrabilia quorum qualita­
whose qualities in the figuration previously posited are as i f porous to the insertion
tes erunt secundum figurationem prius positam quasi porose per interposi-
o f the contrary quality throughout the imperceptible particles o f the subject, will,
10 tionem qualitatis contrarie secundum particulas subiecti imperceptibiles vel
in place o f others, be more capable o f being affected quickly and w ill be more sus­
quorum qualitates erunt iuxta ymaginationem predictam pyramidaliter
ceptible to penetration by alteration. O r [those bodies will be more easily affected]
secundum parvas pyramides figurate. N am forsan ista est causa quare, si in
whose qualities are figured in a pyramidal way according to small pyramids— to
vase stanneo vel argenteo apponatur vinum vel aqua vehementer frigida
adopt the previously described imagery. Perhaps this is the reason w hy, i f very
aut multum calida, calor ille sive frigus citius penetrabit et fortius aget in
cold or very hot wine or water is placed in a tin or silver vase, the heat or cold
i5 manum tenentis illud vas quam si vas esset ligneum, et tamen ligneum est
w ill more quickly penetrate and more vigorously affect the hand holding the vase
corporaliter magis porosum vel rarum quam stannum. H oc autem est prop­
than it w ould if the vase were made o f w ood, even though w ood is corporeally
ter hoc, quod raritas figurationis qualitatis in stanno, cum eiusdem stanni
more porous or rare than tin. The reason for this is that the rarity o f the figura­
corporea densitate maior est et plus ad hoc facit quam raritas ligni corporea
tion o f the quality in the tin, taken together w ith the corporeal density o f the tin,13 6
5
4
43 pyramidum: acutarum pyramidum P / tum P
sunt ? P 5 3 figuratione artificiali tr. P / artificiali: arti­
46 200: in 20 P i n 21moL culi L / qualitatis om. P
48 rationum: rationum ad invicem L 4 ita: ita quod P / passionis V 13 stagneo B P / vel argenteo om. P / ponatur
56 activarum virtutum tr. P
48-49 U nde... rationum om. L P 6 facilius et citius: citius et facilius L V / vehementer frigida tr. L
48 Unde B ut V 6-7 ceteris paribus om. P 14 aut: vel P / ille: iste P / sive: vel P / agit
I .x x ii i: B V L P
51 certis om. P 8 pasibilia B j alterationem V / quarum L P VL
1-2 Capitulum... erui: 23 capitulum P
52 materiis: temporibus V 10 contrarii V 15 vas2 om. V
1 possunt L
53 sive non om. B j tamen multo: non mul­ 11 quarum P 16 stagnum P hic et ubique
3 figurationis L / qualitatis L P
12 pro parvas lac. hab. V j forsan: forte P 17, 19 eiusdem: eadem V
 232 D e configurationibus qualitatum et m otuum Part I, Chapter xxiv 233

cum qualitatis eiusdem ligni minus porosa configuratione, quia videlicet
20 proportio raritatis qualitatis stanni ad lignum maior est quam proportio
raritatis corporee ligni ad stannum, ita quod multotiens talia corpora secun­
dum qualitatem porosa, quamvis corporaliter densa, de facili calefiunt et de
facili frigefiunt et intense. Cuius causa potest esse quia eorum radicalis et
connaturalis qualitas non de facili mutabilis est, sed illa accidentalis que
25 mixta est cum radicali statim propter ipsius porositatem qualitativam pre-
dictam ab exteriori agente patitur, et sibi contraria qualitas velocius inducitur
quam si illa naturalis qualitas foret aliter figurata. Si autem preter istam vel
cum ista causa aliquis velit in similibus aliam causam vel alias assignare, de
hoc non contendo; sufficit enim michi quod ista quandoque possit habere
30 locum.
is greater and more effective for this action than is the [combination o f the] corpo­
real rarity o f the w ood w ith its less porous configuration o f the quality. F or evi­
dently the ratio o f the qualitative rarity o f the tin to that o f the w ood is greater
than the ratio o f the corporeal rarity o f the w ood to that o f the tin. Thus often
such bodies which are porous according to quality, although corporeally dense, are
intensely heated or cooled with ease. T he cause o f this lies in the fact that, although
their fundamental and innate quality is not easily changed, still the accidental qual­
ity, mixed with the fundamental one, is, because o f its aforementioned qualitative
porosity, immediately affected b y an exterior agent; and its contrary quality is
more quickly induced than i f the natural quality were figured in a different way.
N ow , i f in similar cases someone wished to assign another cause or causes in addi­
tion to this one, I shall not argue about it. It suffices for me that this could some­
times have a place [among the causes].

[I.xxiv] Capitulum 24™ de varietate virtutum naturalium secundum I.xxiv On the variety o f natural powers dependent on
istam figurationem this figuration

It is manifest from natural philosophy and experience alike that all natural bodies
E x philosophia naturali et per experientiam manifestum est omnia cor­
(except the four elements and certain mixtures o f these elements close to them in
pora naturalia preter quatuor elementa et aliqua mixta ex elementis ipsis in
imperfection) determine in themselves their shapes, as, for example, animals,
imperfectione propinqua certas sibi determinare figuras, sicut sunt animalia
plants, some stones, and the parts o f [all of] these. They also determine in them­
et piante et aliqui lapides et partes istorum. Determinant etiam sibi certas
selves certain qualities which are natural to them. In addition to the shape that these
qualitates eis naturales quas quidem qualitates preter figurationem quam
qualities possess from their subject, it is necessary that they be figured with a fig­
habent a subiecto necesse est figurari figuratione quam habent ab earum
uration which they possess from their intensity— to employ the previously de­
intensione secundum ymaginationem premissam. Oportet igitur quod pre-
scribed imagery. It is necessary, therefore, that the aforesaid natural bodies, or
dicta corpora naturalia vel forme ipsorum determinent sibi certam figura­
their forms, determine in themselves a certain figuration o f their fundamental,
tionem suarum qualitatum radicalium seu complexionalium et sibi natura­
constitutional, or innate qualities. Thus, for example, the form o f a lion demands a
lium, ut sicut forma leonis exigit aliam corpoream figuram quam forma
different corporeal shape than does the form o f an eagle, as is evident enough in the
aquile, ut satis patet primo de anima, ita calor naturalis leonis sit secun­
first [book] o f the On the Soul [of A ristotle].1 So, the natural heat o f a lion is, in
dum intensionem aliter figurabilis quam calor aquile vel falconis, et ita de
aliis. respect to intensity, figurable in a different w ay than is the heat o f an eagle or a
falcon; and similarly for others.
19 cum om. V / qualitate P / configuratione: 29 quandoque possit tr. L
figuratione L cum figuratione P
20 qualitate ?B I .x x iv : B V L P I .x x iv
20-21 qualitatis... raritatis om. V 1-2 Capitulum.. .figurationem om. P 1 See the Commentary, I.xxiv, line 13.*12
4
3
21 stannum: stannum est V j multotiens 2 istam B V L [ C J huisusmodi [ E F G ] et vide
om. P
tabulam capitulorum / figurationem B V L
5 perfectione L / figuras: formas P rum naturaliter P / determinant L
22 qualitates P / calefaciunt P [ G C ] configurationem [ E F ] et vid. tab.
6 planete B / partes istorum om. P 1 1 - 1 2 naturalium: dixi naturalium P
23 frigefaciunt P / intensive P capit.
7-8 quam habent om. P 12 aliam: sibi aliam V / figuram om. B figu­
24 naturalis P / accidentalis que: actualis P 3 phylosophia V /est: est quod V
25 propter: post P 8 earum om. L ram vel formam L
4 e x ... ipsis/./-N J ex ipsis elementis P [ E F M ]
9 premissam: predictam B 13 patet: apparet P j sit om. L sic V
27 illa om. P / istam: istius V elementis ipsis B V [ S C G ] ex tali ipsorum
10 naturalia om. P / ipsorum: eorum L ipso­ 14 aliter: est aliter V L / figuratam P / ita: sic P
28 alias: alias causas L [ A ] j ' m om. [ A ]
 234 D e configurationibus qualitatum e t m otuum Part I, Chapter xxv 235

Rursum oportet huiusmodi qualitates secundum alias et alias figurationes
predictas habere diversas virtutes et varias actiones, ut patet ex capitulo 22.
V erbi gratia, calor naturalis leonis est aliter activus et alterius virtutis quam
calor naturalis asini vel bovis non solum quia est intensior vel remissior seu
20 aliqua tali differentia sed quia secundum intensionem est aliter et dissimiliter
figuratus, et ita de aliis qualitatibus et istorum et aliorum corporum natura­
lium. E t possibile est quod hec sit una de causis quare nullo artificio potest
alius calor quam seminalis taliter temperari, quod inde possit hom o sine
propagatione seminis generari, quia videlicet non solum ad hoc requiritur
25 temperamentum secundum intensionem et remissionem sed cum hoc etiam
secundum configurationem predictam quam solum in mulieris utero natura
potest facere, nec ingeniari valet ab arte; et ita de quibusdam aliis animalibus.
Quedam autem generantur per putrefactionem ex materia artificialiter pre-
parata et quibusdam agentibus exterioribus artificialiter applicatis. Sed
30 quoniam radicalis qualitas cuiusmodi est calor naturalis non est de facili
variabilis, ideo in quibusdam non sufficit exterior applicatio rerum nisi cum
hoc exspectetur certa constellatio siderum quoniam talis figuratio radicalium
qualitatum immediate fit a celi virtute. Quamvis igitur intensio et remissio
immediate attribuantur elemento, configuratio tamen et formatio singulariter
35 attribuenda est celo, ita quod agens materiale sicut calidum calorem causat
quem celi virtus figurat. Quandoque tamen celum aut sol vel aliud astrum
immediate calorem efficit et eiusdem caloris difformitatem figurat et facit.
Furthermore, it is necessary that qualities o f this sort have diverse powers and
actions depending on the difference in figurations previously described. This point
is evident from chapter twenty-two. For example, the natural heat o f a lion is active
in a different w ay than is the natural heat o f an ass or an ox, and it has a different
power, not only because it is m ore or less intense, or has some such difference, but
also because it is otherwise or dissimilarly figured in regard to intensity. It is the
same fo r other qualities o f these and other natural bodies. A nd it is possible that
this is one o f the causes w hy by no artifice can a heat other than seminal heat be so
tempered that a man can be produced w ithout the propagation o f a seed. For evi­
dently not only is the proper temper according to increasing and decreasing inten­
sity required for this action but also the proper temper according to configuration,
a configuration which nature can produce only in the uterus o f a wom an and which
cannot be contrived by art. It is the same for certain other animals. Still, certain
[animals] are generated by putrefaction2 from material artificially prepared and by
means o f certain external agents artificially applied. But since a root quality o f the
sort that is natural heat is not easily varied, therefore in certain [animals] the exte­
rior application o f things does not suffice unless one looks in addition for a certain
constellation o f the stars, because such a figuration o f root qualities arises directly
from the pow er o f the heavens. Therefore, although intension and remission are
attributed immediately to an element, still configuration and formation ought to be
uniquely attributed to the heavens, so that a material agent such as a hot body causes
heat which the pow er o f the heavens shapes. Sometimes, however, the heavens
or the sun or some other star immediately produces heat and [also] shapes and
fashions the difformity o f that same heat.

[I.xxv] Capitulum 25™ qualiter per predicta cause quorundam I.xxv How the causes o f certain effects can be rendered by means
effectuum possunt reddi o f the prior statements1

A dhuc autem consequens est ut corpora naturalia adinvicem comparata A still further consequence is that natural bodies, when mutually compared, ac­
secundum huiusmodi configurationes habeant alias operationes adinvicem cording to configurations o f this sort have mutually different operations and are
5 et alias passiones. V erbi gratia, possibile est quod sit aliquis lapis pretiosus differently affected. For example, it is possible that there is some precious stone or

16 qualitatem P / aliam et aliam P / configu- 26 figurationem L P / mulierum P / natura:

rationes V L non P
17 et: a c L 27 n ec... arte om. P 2 Ibid., lines 28-29. I .x x v
1 See the Commentary, I.xxv, lines 5-35.2
5
4
3
19 bovis B V falconis P leporis L / quia om. 31 rerum om. L
E /seu: vel P 32 expectetur L j syderum B P
20 est om. P 34
immediate om. P / configuratio tamen 36 quam P j configurat L / aut: vel L j vel: 2 possint V L
21 figuratur E / et1 om. V P 3 ad hoc P
V L [ A N S C G ] configuratum ? B configu­ aut P
22 E t...e s t: Etiam est possibile P / causis: ratio P [ F M J configuratio autem [ E ] / sin­ 4 huiusmodi configurationes tr. L / habeant
37 eadem ? V j difformiter P
causis hic P om. P I alias: aliquas L
gulariter : signantis P
23 temperari: temperari vel operariE operari 35 celo: calor V / quod om. L j materiale 5 e t: et etiam L / aliquis om. P
I .x x v : B V L P
[E J B V naturale L P 1 -2 Capitulum... reddi: 25“ cam ( ? ) P mg.
 236 D e configurationibus qualitatum et m otuum Part I, Chapter xxv 237

vel aliqua planta cuius una qualitas naturalis est in intensione proportionalis some plant in which a natural quality is proportional in intensity, and similar in
et similis figure vultus humani aut cordis aut oculi aut alie partis vel etiam figure, to the human face or heart or eye or some other part, or even to some other
figure alicuius membri alterius animalis in quantum assimilatio potest fieri member o f another animal— [i.e., proportional in intensity or similar in figure] in-
iuxta ymaginationem prius dictam. Possibile est igitur quod ex contactu vel so far as assimilation can be made in accordance w ith the previously described
10 alia applicatione talium rerum sequatur curatio alicuius egritudinis aut imagery. It is possible, therefore, that from contact with, or from some other ap­
alius effectus qualiscunque sit, et quod causa illius sit huiuscemodi similitudo plication o f such things, a cure o f some disease or some other effect— whatever
inter figurationem in intensione qualitatis illius rei que applicatur et figura­ kind it be— m ight follow and that the cause o f this is a similarity o f this sort be­
tionem corpoream vel qualitativam illius rei que patitur vel cui fit applicatio, tween the figuration in intensity o f the quality o f the thing which is applied and
sicut in figuratione qualitatis de qua minus videretur inveniuntur alique the corporeal or qualitative figuration o f the thing which is affected or to which
15 gemme et alique piante similes corpori hominis aut eius faciei vel alteri parti. the application is made. A s examples o f this in a less visible qualitative figuration
E t hoc significat talia occultas habere virtutes veluti mandragore quarum there are found some gems and some plants which are similar to the body o f a man,
radices natura form avit ad ymaginem hominis secundum utrumque sexum either to his face or to some other part. A n d this indicates that such things have
et que prebent mulieribus virtutem concipiendi, prout invenitur in sacro occult powers. Mandrake is a case in point. Nature has fashioned its roots in the
canone, et ita dixerunt philosophi et doctores sancti preter Augustinum . image o f man, according to each sex. It gives to women the power o f conceiving,
20 Rursum potest esse quod ex dissimilitudine predicte figurationis quali­ as w e find noted in Sacred Scripture,2 and as philosophers and holy doctors except
tative fit fuga vel corruptio rei cui fit applicatio, ita quod gratia exempli per Augustine have declared.3
hoc posset reddi causa eius quod Plinius ponit 28° libro naturalis historie, Again, it is possible that from dissimilitude in the aforesaid figuration o f quality
videlicet quod sunt alique homini familie “ que sunt terrori serpentibus et arises the flight or corruption o f the thing to which the application is made. Thus,
tactu suo leniunt percussos.” Hinc est quod Solinus asseruit dicens “ gentem for example, this could be the cause o f that which Pliny poses in the twenty-eighth
25 Marsorum serpentibus illesam esse nichil mirum: a Circe filio genus du­ book o f the Natural History, namely that there are some human families “ w ho are a
cunt.” H oc est forsitan propter configurationem alicuius qualitatis illorum terror to serpents and by their touch cure those bitten.” 4 Thence it is that Solinus
hominum dissimilem et disproportionatam qualitati complexionali serpentis. asserted, “ It is not remarkable that the people o f the Marsi are unharmed by snakes,
E t talis invenitur ad tempus in hominibus qui sunt de una stirpe vel pro­ for they are descended from Circe.” 5 This is perhaps because o f the configuration o f
genie, ita quod breviter secundum hoc posset assignari ratio generalis some quality o f those men which is dissimilar and disproportionate to the constitu­
30 quarundam occultarum virtutum et mirabilium effectuum sive experimen­ tional quality o f the serpent. A nd such a condition at times is found among people
torum quorum alias ignote sunt cause et nichilominus specialis et determina­ who are o f one stock or progeny. Thus, briefly, according to this a general explana­
ta causa sepissime latet propter huiusmodi qualitatum figurationem im- tion could be assigned o f such occult powers and marvelous effects or experiments
perceptibilem et occultam. Unde propter latentiam huius cause dixerunt17 5
4
0
*2
8 whose causes are otherwise unknown. H owever, most often a specific and deter­
minate cause lies hidden because o f the occult and imperceptible figuration o f
6 aliqua om. P una V 17 radices natura tr. P radices L / formantur L qualities o f this sort. Therefore, because o f the hidden nature o f this cause certain
7 cordis: corporis P j alie: alicuius P alterius 18 que: que probabiliter P / prebent: pro­
L I etiam om. E bant et dant P
9 tactu P 18-19 de sacro canone scr. B mg. (et G in textu
10 alia om. P j talium rerum tr. V j aut: vel post canone): Genesis 30
LP 20 configurationis V
2 Genesis 30:14-17. levant.
11 alius: alicuius alterius L alicuius P / quali- 21 fit1: sit L P / cui: cuius P
3 See the Commentary, I.xxv, line 19. 5 Collectanea rerum memorabilium (ed. o f Th.
tercunque L / huiusmodi L ? P 22 posset tr. P ante per / ponit om. P / hystorie 4 N atural History, X X V III, 30. Note that Mommsen [Berlin, 195 8], 39, line 1).
13 vel1: et V V
Oresme has leniunt where the Pliny text has
13-14 illius... qualitatis om. P 23 sunt terrori: secundum P sunt terroris L
14 qualitatis: quantitatis L / minus videretur 24 leniunt B V P [ M S C G ] leviter L [ F E A N ]
B V [ F M , ? S C P G J hermes loquitur L levant text. Plin. acute filio [ C ] / a : a’ [ E S ] / Circe: cyrte [ E ] 27 disproportionatum L
[ E A N ] / alique: enim alique P 24-26 H in c.. .ducunt L [ A E N C S G ] om. certe [ S ] cyire [ G ] 28-29 vel progenie om. P
15 aut eius: alicuius P B V P [ FM ] z<)-z6 ducunt: dicunt[ S ] 29 ratio: causa L
16 occultas habere tr. L habere occultam P / 25 in lesam /U y /nichil: nec [ A G ] / mirum: 26 forsan L forte V / figurationem V E / ali­ 30 sive: seu L
virtutem P mirum quia [ G ] / a Circe filio: figure [ A ] quarum qualitatum P 32 qualitatis L P
 238 D e configurationibus qualitatum e t m otuum
Part I, Chapter xxvi 2 39

stupid necromancers have said that these powers in precious stones are there as the
quidam nigromantici stulti lapidibus pretiosis has utes virtinesse ex presentia
result o f the presence o f certain incorporeal spirits which have settled in them.
35 quorundam incorporeorum spirituum qui in eis ceciderunt.

[I.xxvi] Capitulum 26m de pulchritudine figurationum qualitatum I.xxvi On the beauty o f the figurations o f qualities and their
simpliciter dicta et earum perfectione perfection— beauty being taken simply [i.e. absolutely]

Although W itelo in the fourth [book] o f his Perspective1 speaks o f beauty at

Quamvis V itelo in 40 sue perspective multa de pulchritudine dicat et
length and a little about the beauty o f figures, still I say for now that just as it has been
pauca de pulchritudine figurarum, dico tamen pro nunc quod sicut in
demonstrated in the theory o f music that certain ratios are more perfect and de­
theorica musice demonstratum est quod quedam proportiones sunt aliis
lightful than others not only in sounds but in other things as w ell (in fact certain
perfectiores et delectabiliores et nedum in sonis sed etiam in aliis, ymmo
ones are simply beautiful and harmonious, although few [of them], as Aristotle
quedam sunt simpliciter pulchre et simphonice, licet pauce, prout vult A ris­
has it in On Sense and Sensible Objects2), so also is it certain that some corporeal figures
toteles in de sensu et sensato, sic etiam certum est quasdam figuras corpo­
excel others in beauty and are simply [i.e. intrinsically or absolutely] nobler and
reas alias excellere in pulchritudine et esse simpliciter nobiliores et perfec­
more perfect. A nd, insofar as nature can be affected, it is probable that such are
tiores. E t probabile est eas perfectioribus corporibus convenire secundum
more fitting for more perfect bodies. F or by this Aristotle proves in the second
quod natura potest pati, per hoc enim probat Aristoteles z° celi et mundi
[book] o f On the Heavens and the World3that the heavens are spherical. Therefore, in
celum esse spericum. E rgo conformiter videtur rationabile de differentia
the same way it seems reasonable, in regard to the difference in configurations o f
configurationum qualitatum superius positarum quod videlicet configura­
qualities posited above, that those qualitative configurations which are similar and
tiones earum que sunt similes et proportionales figuris corporeis nobiliori­
proportional to nobler and more beautiful or more perfect corporeal figures are
bus et pulchrioribus seu perfectioribus sint simpliciter meliores seu nobilio­
res. simply better or nobler.
Hence, it seems to follow that those species which in themselves determine such
Inde sequi videtur quod ille species que sibi determinant tales nobiliores
nobler configurations o f qualities are o f a nobler constitution and a more perfect
configurationes suarum qualitatum sint nobilioris complexionis et perfec­
nature, and that, in one and the same species, the one individual is assumed to be
tioris nature, et quod in una et eadem specie illud suppositum sit melius
better constituted, other things being equal, whose fundamental quality possesses
complexionatum ceteris paribus cuius radicalis qualitas proprius habet m o­
more fittingly the mode o f configuration due its species. Thus for nobility o f con­
dum configurationis debitum sue speciei; ita quod ad nobilitatem complexio­
stitution there is required not only a nobler ratio o f intensity or remissness o f pri­
nis non solum requiritur nobilior proportio secundum intensionem et re­
mary qualities but in addition a noble configuration o f these same [qualities] or o f
missionem qualitatum primarum sed cum hoc nobilis configuratio earun-
another quality. This is because each o f these differences, namely in the ratio o f the
dam vel alterius qualitatis, quoniam utraque differentia, scilicet proportionis
qualities and in their configurations, makes for a difference in constitutions, [both]
qualitatum et configurationis earum, complexiones in diversis speciebus et

34 virtutem P nis dicat E

35 incorporeorum spirituum tr. L / eis B E P - 5 quedam B [ P F M N A C E S G ] om. VE / I .x x v i the Commentary, I.xxvi, line 8.
[ F M S G C ] eos V [ A E ] 1 Witelo, Perspectiva, Bk. IV, Chaps. 148-50 3 Chapter 4, 286b, line 10— 287b, line 21.
proportiones: consonantie [ P F M ] pro­
portionales [ N ] (edition with Alhazen, Opticae thesaurus (Cf. the medieval translation with the exposi­
I .x x v i: B V L [Basel, 1572], 184-86). tion o f Aquinas [Turin, Rome, 1952], 168-75.)
6 nedum: non solum V j ym m o: unde L
1 figurationum V L [E C ] configurationum 7 symphonie L [ E ] 2 Chapter 3, 439b, line 30— 440a, line 3. See
B figurationis [ F G ] et vide tab. capit. 8 in B V L [ F M N C S G ] in libro V [ E ] libro
2 e t... perfectione om. [ C ] / earum B V [ E L ] [ A ] I sic: hic L hoc [ E ]
15-16 nobiliores seu meliores V pinquius [ E ]
eius [ F G ] et vide tab. capit. 9 t t z L V [ E P ] seu B
17 illa B I nobiliores: nobiles A 20-21 modum: more V
3 Vitelo B V Witelo L [N C S G J Vitulo 12 rationale V
18-20 e t... complexionatum om. E a
i 13 configurationum: figurarum E / qualitatis
20 proprius: proprius vel propinquius L pro- 21 debitum: de vite L debite [ E ]
[ A P F M ] W y tu lo fA / / dicat: proportio­ E
 240 D e configurationibus qualitatum e t m otuum Part I, Chapter xxvii 241

in eadem facit differre, quia forsan possibile est quod in utroque duorum
individuorum differentium specie sit eadem vel similis proportio qualitatum
primarum sed illa individua differunt specie et perfectione propter diversita­
tem configurationis complexionalium qualitatum et similiter in eadem specie
30 secundum quod unum perfectius participat vel propinquius attingit ad
perfectissimam configurationem qualitatum debitam sue speciei, aut etiam
econverso. V erb i gratia, possibile est quod equus et asinus vel duo equi con­
veniant in qualitatum figuratione et differant in earundem proportione, aut
etiam econverso. N ec oportet quod configuratio qualitatum que est huic
35 speciei perfectissima sive pulcherrima sit simpliciter perfectissima sed sufficit
solum quod sit illi speciei convenientissima atque pulcherrima, sicut in
figuris corporalibus videmus quod figura rotunda est simpliciter pulchrior
quam amigdalaris et tamen oculus humanus rotundus esset valde deformis
quia eius pulchritudini convenit amigdalaris figura, ut dicit Vitelo 40 sue
40 perspective.
in diverse species and in the same species. For it is perhaps possible that there is
the same or a similar ratio o f primary qualities in each of tw o individuals that differ
in species, but that these individuals differ in species and perfection because o f the
diversity o f the configuration o f their constitutional qualities. A nd similarly in the
same species [they differ] according as one participates more perfectly in, or attains
more closely to, the most perfect configuration o f qualities due its species, or also
conversely. For example, it is possible that a horse and an ass, or tw o horses, are in
accord insofar as the figuration o f qualities is concerned but that they differ in the
ratio o f these same qualities, or also conversely. N or is it necessary that the con­
figuration o f qualities w hich is most perfect or most beautiful for this species is
simply [i.e., absolutely] more perfect. But it suffices only that it is the most fitting
and most beautiful configuration for that species, as in the case o f corporeal fig­
ures where w e see that a round figure is simply more beautiful than an almond-
shaped figure and yet a round human eye w ould be greatly deformed because an
almond-shaped figure is more fitting to its beauty, as W itelo says in the fourth
book o f his Perspective.4

[I.xxvii] Capitulum 27m de pulchritudine figurationum ad aliud I.xxvii On the beauty o f figurations in relation to something
relata et de causis amicitie et inimicitie else and on the causes o f natural
naturalis friendship and hostility

Quamvis nec in proportionibus nec in figuris sit vera contrarietas, tamen A lthough there is true contrariety neither in ratios nor in figures, still it is cer­
5 certum est quasdam proportiones a natura rei magis sibi invicem convenire, tain that some ratios seem naturally to accord better with each other, just as a ration­
sicut proportio rationalis magis convenit cum rationali quam cum irrationali al ratio accords better with a rational ratio than it does with an irrational or surd,1
seu surda, et proportio armonica cum alia armonica quam cum enarmonica. and a harmonic ratio better with another harmonic than w ith an unharmonic ratio.
Sic est etiam de figuris quod quedam sunt sibi invicem magis conformes et So it is also, in regard to figures, that certain o f them are more conformable to, and
magis consone adinvicem quam alie, ita quod una alteri inscripta vel cir- consonant with, each other than to others. Thus when one [of such conformable
o cumscripta seu alio m odo comparata pulchrius se habet ad eam quam ad figures] is inscribed in, or circumscribed about, the other, or compared to it in
hanc vel ad illam aliam, sicut forsan quadratum ad circulum vel ad octo- some other way, it is related to its conformable figure more beautifully than it is
gonum quam ad penthagonum. E t consequens est ut ita sit de predictis con- to some other figure. A s for example, perhaps a square is more beautifully related
to a circle or an octagon than it is to a pentagon. The same thing is true regarding
26 est om. V [ C G ] I valde om. B / deformis B [ E S ] dif-
31 qualitatis F formis L [ A F N M C P G ]
32 d u o om. B 39 Vitelo B V [C ] Witulo L [N J Vitulo
33 configuratione L / differant om. L et hab. [ P F M S A ] Wytulo [ E ] Witelo [ G ] (et cf. 4 See the Commentary, I.xxvi, lines 39-40. I .x x v ii
lac. I earundem: earum de V tin. 3) 1 See the Commentary, I.xxvii, line 7.*1
34 etiam om. V / Nec: Nec etiam L / confi­
guratio : consideratio V / qualitatis L I .x x v ii: B V L
35 sufficit om. L 1 configurationum V monica?) B V [ C S G ] entharmonicha [ N ] n - 1 2 octogonum [ E S G ] ortogonium [ N C ]
37 ~ 3 9 pulchrior... figura: figura perfecta V 4 in2 om. V encarmonicha L eucarmonica [ A ] cachar- orthogonium B V L [ A P F M ]
38 amigdalaris B [ A N S ] figura amigdalaris 5 rei om. B monica [ E ] 12 E t : et per L / est om. L
[F M P ] quadrangularis J L [E ] angularis 7 enarmonica/-? P F M ] entharmonica (euthar- 11 aliam om. V
 242 D e configurationibus qualitatum et m otuum Part I, Chapter xxviii 243

figurationibus qualitatum quod videlicet alique sibi invicem sunt conformes
vel convenientes et alie disconvenientes.
15 Iste igitur due cause, scilicet habitudo proportionum qualitatum natura­
lium et habitudo configurationum earum, concurrunt ad amicitiam vel ad
inimicitiam naturalem unius speciei ad alteram cum quibusdam aliis causis
que sunt preter propositum presens. Inde est quod una causa amicitie natura­
lis inter hominem et canem potest esse convenientia proportionis primarum
20 qualitatum in humana complexione ad proportionem earundem in canina.
E t alia causa potest esse convenientia figurationum earum primarum vel
aliarum naturalium qualitatum in utraque istarum specierum. E t loquor hic
de convenientia, non propinquitatis sed conformitatis, sicut videmus in
musica quod sonus non quanto est alteri sono propinquior tanto est ei
25 consonantior sed requiritur debita proportio, ita hic non attenditur pro­
pinquitas sed debita et naturalis conformitas.
Consimiliter utraque disconvenientia opposita tam in proportionibus
qualitatum quam in figurationibus earundem potest poni inter causas inimi-
citie naturalis, ut, verbi gratia, inter ovem et lupum vel inter aliqua alia
30 animalia differentia specie, quedam enim sunt que non solum invadunt
se invicem propter predicta sive propter nutrimentum sed alio quodam
odio naturali. Unde patet quod, licet aliqua species sit simpliciter et absolute
nobilior et amabilior, tamen cuidam alteri speciei turpior est et odibilior, et
etiam econverso aliqua est absolute turpior et odibilior que tamen cuidam
35 speciei alteri pulchrior est atque dilectior.
the aforesaid configurations o f qualities: some are mutually conformable or fit to­
gether better while others do not fit together well.
Therefore, these tw o causes— the relation o f the ratios o f natural qualities and the
relation o f their configurations— unite, along with certain other causes beyond our
present topic, to produce either the natural friendship or natural hostility o f one
species toward another. Thus it is that one cause o f the natural friendship between
man and dog can be the fitting accord between the ratio o f primary qualities in the
human constitution and the ratio o f the same qualities in that o f the dog. A nother
cause can be the fitting accord between the configurations o f the primary or other
natural qualities in each o f these species. I speak here o f the fitting accord— not
that o f closeness, but that o f conformity. Just as we see in music that it is not by the
degree that one sound is closer to another that it is more harmonious w ith it but
rather that a due ratio is required, so here closeness is not the attendant measure
but rather due and natural conformity.
Similarly discord (contrary to fitting accord) [between species] in respect to the
ratios o f qualities as w ell as to their figurations can be posited to be among the
causes o f natural hostility, as, for example, between a sheep and a w olf, or between
some other animals differing in species. For certain animals attack each other not
only because o f the things we have described or because o f food but as the result o f
a certain natural hatred. Hence it is evident that, although some [one] species is
simply and absolutely nobler and more lovable, yet to some other species it is more
disagreeable and hateful. A n d also conversely some one species is absolutely more
disagreeable and hateful, which however to some other species is more beautiful
and lovable.

[I.xxviii] Capitulum 28m de causis occultis quarundam I.xxviii On the occult causes o f certain natural actions
naturalium actionum

Quemadmodum autem in rebus cognoscitivis iste due cause predicte Just as in things capable o f cognition the tw o aforesaid causes produce natural
faciunt ad amicitiam et earum opposite ad inimicitiam naturalem, sic etiam friendship and their opposites [produce] natural hostility, so also in other natural
5 in aliis rebus naturalibus istemet cause faciunt quedam proportionalia amori things these same causes produce certain things comparable to love and hate that
et odio ex quibus proveniunt mirabiles actiones. Verbi gratia, probabiliter are productive o f marvelous actions. For example, it can be said w ith probability
potest dici quod magnes attrahit ferrum propter naturalem colligandam that a magnet attracts iron because o f a certain natural bond which they mutually
quam habent adinvicem ex convenientia proportionis qualitatum unius ad possess as the result (1) o f the fitting accord between the ratio o f the [natural] qual-
13 figurationibus L [ E ] / sunt om. L 26 debita... naturalis: naturalis et V / con-
15 igitur: ergo B formitas: conformitas debita V
16 concurrant L / ad2 B [ N F P S G J om. 28 qualitatis L j earum L [ E ]
V E [A M E C ] 29 aliqua: aquilam et B 35 speciei alteti tr. L [ E ] / est... dilectior om. L B [E S G A N ]
18 preter: extra L [ E ] 31 sive: vel B 5 amore V
L
19-20 primarum qualitatum tr. L [ E ] 32 U nde: ut L / licet o m . V j sit om. V 7 potest dici tr. V
20 canina: complexione caninaL [ E ] 33 tamen: est tamen V / turpior est tr. L [ E J 8 convenientia: differentia V j qualitatum:
I .x x v iii: B V L
24 est1 om. B 34 etiam om. L / est om. L 4 naturalem V [F M P ] om. [ G ] naturales qualitatis L
 244 D e configurationibus qualitatum et m otuum Part I, Chapter xxix 245

proportionem qualitatum naturalium alterius et ex convenientia configura­
to tionis huiusmodi qualitatum in utroque istorum.
Item tyriaca fugat venenum propter dissidentiam vel quasi odium naturale
proveniens ex disconvenientiis oppositis convenientiis prius dictis. Consimi­
liter potest dici quod propter easdem disconvenientias sanguis hircinus calidus
frangit adamantem, cuius tamen durities indomabilis est ferro et igne. Per
15 idem posset assignari ratio quare aliqua non feriuntur fulmine, sicut ait
Plinius de frutice lauri et de vitulo marino et de aquila que ob hoc dicebatur
armiger Iovis, fulgur enim talia a tota specie refugit et declinat propter
aliquam configurationem naturalium qualitatum eorum cuius configuratio­
nis virtute fulmen abicitur. Ita etiam forte propter hoc aliqui homines habent
20 virtutem magis aut minus attractivam fulguris sive repulsivam. E t ob hoc
aliqui naturaliter minime timent fulgura, alii vero maxime, quamvis in aliis
sint audaces, sicut narrant historie de Tiberio Cesare et de quibusdam aliis.
E t ita posset dici de multis aliis effectibus et experimentis naturalibus, et
cum duabus causis predictis potest assignari in aliquibus causa posita supra
25 in capitulo 220.
ities o f one with the ratio o f the natural qualities o f the other, and (2) o f the fitting
accord between the configurations o f the qualities o f this sort in each o f them .1
A lso, a theriac2 [i.e. antidote] puts venom to flight because o f a contrariety or a
quasi-natural hatred arising from discords contrary to the fitting accords mentioned
before. Similarly it can be said that because o f these discords hot goat’s blood frac­
tures the diamond,3 which, however, withstands iron and fire. By [employing] the
same [kind o f explanation] the reason can be assigned as to w hy some things are
not struck by lightning, as Pliny4 says concerning the laurel plant, the sea calf, and
the eagle, w ho because o f this was called “ shield-bearer o f Jove.” For lightning
shuns such things and turns away from every species because o f some configuration
o f the natural qualities o f those things by the power o f which the lightning is turn­
ed aside. Perhaps also because o f this certain men have a greater or lesser attractive
or repulsive pow er w ith respect to lightning. A n d because o f this some naturally
fear lightning hardly at all while others fear it greatly even though they are coura­
geous in other things, as the histories narrate concerning Tiberius Caesar5 and cer­
tain others. W e could speak in the same way o f many other effects and natural ex­
periments. A n d in addition to the tw o aforesaid causes there can be assigned in
some cases the cause posited above in chapter twenty-two.

[I.xxix] Capitulum 29“ de causis triplicis amicitie in I.xxix On the causes o f three kinds o f friendship [between
eadem specie individuals] o f the same species

Tres modi naturalis amicitie reperiri possunt in eadem specie animalis.
Primus est generalis secundum quem unum individuum naturaliter diligit
5 sibi simile in specie magis quam dissimile. Secundus modus est specialis
inter masculum et femellam in quo apparet quod naturalis amicitia non
semper attendenda est penes convenientiam propinquitatis et similitudinis
sed potius conformiter ut dictum fuit capitulo 270. Nam sicut in musica
dyapason est perfectissima et optima consonantia cuius tamen termini sunt
io distantiores invicem quam termini aliarum inferiorum consonantiarum
cuiusmodi sunt dyatesseron et dyapente, ita quamvis masculus et femina sunt
dissimiliores quam duo eiusdem sexus tamen conformitas unius ad alterum
Three modes o f natural friendship can be found [between individuals] o f the
same species o f animal. The first is the general mode according to which one in­
dividual naturally likes another similar to it more than it does one dissimilar. The
second mode is the special one existing between male and female, in w hich it ap­
pears that natural friendship is not always a function o f the fitting accord o f proxim ­
ity and similarity but rather o f that o f conform ity [of ratio and figuration], as has
been said in chapter twenty-seven. For just as in music the octave is the most per­
fect and best consonance although its terminal notes are mutually more distant than
those o f inferior consonances such as the fourth and the fifth, so also although a
male and female are more dissimilar than tw o individuals o f the same sex still the

10 qualitatis/. 18 aliquam om. L

12 prius dictis: predictis L 19 post abicitur add.L non leduntur fulmine /
I .x x v iii 3 Ibid., lines 13-14.
13 easdem disconvenientias B V [o m . F M ] tr. obicitur V / propter hoc tr. V post habent
1 See the Commentary, I.xxviii, lines 7-10. 4 Ibid., lines 16-17.
L j hircius V in lima 19
2 Ibid., line 11. 5 Ibid., line 22.
14 indomabilis est: indemabilis V 21 minime: minus V / timent: curant/.
15 ratio om. L / feriuntur: ferventur V 22 Tiberio L [ C ] {et vid. commi) tyberio [ E S ]
15-16 sicut... Plinius om. V thebeno [ G ] Iulio B V [ A N P F M J I .x x ix : B V L
i 23 multis: quibusdam V 4 quem: quam L L[AECN]
17 enim om. L. / refugat L, 24 aliquibus: his aliqua alia L 6 femellam B V [ S F M P G ] feminam 11 femina B V L [ A .E C IN S ] femella [ F M P G ]
 246 D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum Part I, Chapter xxx 247

est conformitas perfectissime amicitie et optime consonantie naturalis. Unde
in ecclesiastico dicitur: “ Amicus et sodalis in tempore convenientes, et super
15 utrosque mulier cum viro ,” “ quamobrem,” sicut scriptum est, “ relinquet
homo patrem suum et matrem, et adherebit uxori sue,” et cetera, scilicet
propter conformitatem predictam que forsan est aliqualiter correspondens
proportioni duple in numeris que est dyapason in sonis. Propter quod etiam
convenienter v o x masculi ad vocem femine talem habet consonantiam et
20 proportionem. D ue itaque convenientie prius dicte possunt dici cause
huiusmodi amicitie naturalis quamvis sint alie quedam, sicut procreatio
prolis, adiutorium mutuum, et si que sunt similes, cause que forsan ortum
habent ex duabus premissis.
Tertius modus est specialior secundum quem contingit quod duo indivi-
25 dua, verbi gratia, duo homines, quasi quodam tractu naturali impelluntur ad
benivolentiam mutuam et amorem, et quandoque reperiuntur duo alii qui
vix vel nunquam pro quocunque mundi possunt se invicem diligere, ipsis
tamen ignorantibus causam que potest assignari secundum predictam.
conform ity o f the one to the other is a conform ity o f the most perfect friendship
and o f the best natural consonance. A nd so it is said in Ecclesiasticus? “ A friend and
companion meeting together in season; but above them both, is a wife w ith her
husband;” just as it is written,2 “ W herefore a man shall leave his father and mother
and shall cleave to his wife, etc.,” i.e., because o f the aforesaid conformity, which
is perhaps somewhat like a ratio o f 2 :i, which is an octave in sounds. A ccordingly
the voice o f the male in relation to that o f the female also fittingly has such a con­
sonance and ratio. A n d so the tw o kinds o f fitting accord previously mentioned
can be said to be the causes o f natural frienship o f this sort, although there are cer­
tain other, similar causes, such as procreation o f offspring and mutual assistance
which perhaps arise from the tw o causes that have been premised.
The third mode [of friendship] is one more special. A ccording to this mode it
happens that tw o individuals, e.g. tw o men, are impelled as if by a certain natural
attraction towards mutual goodw ill and love. But sometimes tw o other individuals
are found w ho never, or scarcely ever, like each other under any circumstance, with­
out how ever know ing the cause— a cause that can be assigned along the lines which
we have described.

[I.xxx] Capitulum 30111 de causis delectationis sensus I.xxx On the causes o f the pleasure o f sense and [the pleasure]
et ymaginationis o f imagination

Si per sensus exteriores velimus discurrere primo in tactu, certum fiet Should we hasten through the exterior senses first to touch, w e find it certain
quod aliqua sunt tactui humano delectabilia, aliqua tristabilia, non solum that some things are pleasant to the human touch while others are unpleasant, not
5 propter excellentias tangibilium sed etiam aliunde, et ideo quedam sunt only because o f the [intrinsic] excellence o f the touchable things but also because
tristabilia humano tactui que forent delectabilia tactui alterius animalis. E t o f something arising from another source. Therefore, certain things are unpleasant
similiter in eadem specie aliquod tangibile displicet uni individuo quod placet to the human touch which w ould be pleasant to the touch o f another animal. A nd
alteri. Similiter in gustu sicut asino placent tribuli et pulmentum displicet. similarly, within the same species, some touchable object displeases one individual
A liquod etiam placet homini sano et displicet egro, et sic multipliciter. Con­ but pleases another. The same thing is true o f taste. For example, thorns [unpleas­
io similiter de audibili, nam quedam bruta delectantur in musica et alia non, et ant for man] please the ass, while pottage [tasty to man] displeases the ass.1 A lso,
homines differenter se habent quantum ad hoc et multipliciter, ut notum 14 *2
6
5 something pleases a well man and is displeasing to a sick one, and there are many
such examples. It is the same for something that can be heard. For certain animals
14 ecclesiastico: ecclesiastico 40 G mg. B / 22 adiutorium: ad iuvamen L / sint L
like music and others do not, and men differ much in this regard, as has been noted.
dixit V 26 et1 L V ac B
15 post est add. [ F M P ] genesi z° math 290 27 possunt L [ F M A N P C S G ] possent B V
(/) et hab. mg. [ C ] genesis et add. mg. B possint [ E ]
I .x x i x I .x x x
genesi 20 et add. [ G ] mathesi 29 28 potest B [ A N P F M C S G ] posset V L [ E J /
1 40:23. 1 See the Commentary, I.xxx, line 8.
16 homo: enim L / matrem B (cf . Gen. 2.24) secundum: per L
2 Genesis 2:24. Cf. Matthew 19:5.
matrem suam L V
19 habet: habet et V I .x x x : B V L
20 proportionem: proportionem scilicet dup­ 3 velimus B V [ F M C G ] velemus [ S ] volu­ 4 aliqua2: et aliqua L 8 Similiter: Simili modo V / sicut om. L
lam /. mus L [ E A N P ] I certum fiet: fiet mani­ 5 sed... aliunde om. [ F M P ] / etiam 9 Aliquod: aliquando (?) V
21 quedam orn.L festum L L [ A E N C ] om. B V [ S G ] 11 habentes V
 248 D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum
est. E t ita universaliter de omnibus sensibilibus delectabilibus vel tristabili-
bus, certum est ea diversimode ad diversa animalia se habere quantum ad
hoc. E t quamvis ad istam diversitatem multe cause concurrant, forsan tamen
15 et probabile videtur quod due predicte sint principaliores, videlicet con­
venientia vel disconvenientia proportionis qualitatum et convenientia vel
disconvenientia configurationis earum.
Rursum de delectatione et tristitia ymaginationis vel cogitationis humane
manifestum est quosdam naturaliter delectari ymaginando inhonesta et in
20 turpiloquio, in immunditiis, in sonis atque figuris difformibus. E t istud est
signum vilitatis complexionis eorum in proportione et figuratione naturalium
qualitatum. A lii vero contrario modo abhorrent turpitudinem et naturaliter
diligunt puritatem, decentiam, et honestatem. E t hoc est signum bone con­
figurationis qualitatum naturalium et nobilis complexionis eorum. Hec
25 igitur et similia possent reduci ad causas predictas et multa alia, sed ista loco
exemplorum sufficiant.
[I.xxxi] Capitulum 31111 de difformitate in potentiis cognoscitivis
Accidentia anime sensitive secundum extensionem subiecti eodem modo
penitus figurantur in organis quantum ad uniformitatem et difformitatem
sicut sensibiles vel alie qualitates de quibus dictum est ante. Forme vero
5 impresse in exterioribus sensibus transeunt statim abeuntibus sensibilibus.
Sed in sensu interiori remanent simulacra vel forme etiam in absentia sensi­
bilium sicut vestigium amoto sigillo restat in cera. Verumptamen organum
sensus interioris per speciem vel formam impressam non aliter figuratur
quantitative de per se sed solum qualitative, sicut neque figura corporea
10 oculi ex receptione speciei coloris variatur de per se. Sensus igitur interior
seu organum eius varie figuratur qualitative secundum diversitatem forma­
rum seu specierum quas recipit. Nam si species iste non fuerint multum varie,
tunc figuratio sensus ad uniformitatem magis accedet, et quanto plus diver-
sificate fuerint tanto figuratio talis erit difformior seu ab uniformitate remo-
15 tior. E t quamvis potentia intellectiva sit indivisibilis et inorganica et ideo
nec est corporaliter neque qualitative proprie figurata, tamen aliquo modo
improprie ymaginari potest in ea quedam spiritualis configuratio correspon-
12 ita universaliter: similiter V / de: in L 18 Rursus V / e t: v e lL
14 concurrunt/. 19 et V L o m . B / in om. V
15 probabile L [ E A N C ] probabiliter 21 vilitatis: utilitatis V j eorum om. L
B V [ F M S G ] I sint V [ E A N S G ] sunt
BL[FPC] I .x x x i: B V L
16 qualitatis/. 4 v e l: et V
Part I, Chapter xxxi 249
A n d so universally, in regard to all kinds o f pleasurable and unpleasant sensi-
bles, it is certain that different animals differ in many ways. A n d although many
causes may concur in producing this diversity, still it perhaps seems probable that
the tw o aforesaid [causes] are the most important, namely (1) the accord or discord
between the ratios o f qualities, and (2) the accord or discord between their con­
figurations.
Furthermore, in regard to pleasure and displeasure o f human imagination or
cogitation, it is manifest that certain people take delight naturally in imagining dis­
graceful things and in obscene talk, filth, and deformed sounds and figures. A n d
this is a sign o f the vileness o f their constitution w ith respect to the ratio and fig­
uration o f their natural qualities. O n the other hand, in contrary fashion, others
abhor foulness and naturally like purity, decency, and honesty. A n d this is a sign
o f the good configuration o f their natural qualities and o f their noble constitution.
Therefore, these effects and ones similar to them, as well as many others, can be
reduced to the aforesaid causes. But w e have given here sufficient examples.
I.xxxi On difformity in cognitive powers
Accidents o f the sensitive soul are, in accordance with the extension o f the sub­
ject, figured in the organs with respect to uniformity and difformity in completely
the same way as are sensibles or the other qualities o f which we have spoken be­
fore. N ow , forms impressed in the exterior senses pass away immediately when the
sensibles are withdrawn. But in the interior sense likenesses or forms remain even
in the absence o f the sensibles, just as an imprint remains in wax after the seal has
been removed. H owever, the organ o f the interior sense is not in itself differently
shaped according to quantity by the impressed species or form but is only figured
qualitatively in the same w ay that the corporeal figure o f the eye is not in itself
changed by receiving a species o f color. Therefore, the interior sense or its organ
is figured qualitatively in a variety o f ways depending on the diversity o f the forms
or species which it receives. For if these species are not much varied, then the fig­
uration o f the sense tends more toward uniformity, and by the amount that they
are more diversified, b y that same amount w ill such figuration be more difform or
more removed from uniformity. A nd although intellective power is indivisible and
inorganic and hence is not figured properly either according to body or quality,
still there can be improperly imagined in it, by some means, a certain spiritual con-
5 sensibus: sensibilibus L sitatem formarum
7 amoto: amico (?) V 14 figuratio: figuratio sensus B / uniformitate:
8 per: propter L unitate V
9 post qualitative add. L secundum diver­ 16 neque: nec L
 2 JO D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum
dens configurationi sensus, quoniam eius intellectio dependet ex sensu.
Sicut ergo sensus interior quandoque ad uniformitatem et planiciem accedit
20 quandoque etiam valde difformiter et quasi aspere figuratur, ita conformiter
suo m odo diceretur de potentia intellectus. E t hoc videtur notari in sacra
scriptura eo loco ubi anima multiformibus cogitationibus, sollicitudinibus,
huius seculi divitiis, et voluptatibus vite implicata terre comparatur obducte
spinarum asperitate et ob hoc inepta est talis anima ut in ea fructificet semen
25 quod est verbum Dei.
[I.xxxii] Capitulum 32m de mutatione istius dififormitatis
Multotiens per exempla grossa et sensibilia devenitur in notitiam occul­
torum. Sit itaque, exempli causa, aliquod corium in quo scriptura vel
ymago alicuius sigilli imprimatur. Quandoque igitur propter naturam corii
5 seu qualitatem materie et fortem impressionem contingit quod postea corium
non potest ita distendi quin semper remaneat et appareat impressio. Quando­
que vero ad extensionem redit planicies et disparet littera vel ym ago; et
dupliciter, aut de facili aut cum difficultate. E t iterum dupliciter, vel ad
tempus ita quod facta relaxatione rursum apparet ymago vel simpliciter sic
10 quod cessante distensione nunquam postea revertitur prior littera vel
c[h]aracter. Sicut est igitur in ista figuratione quantitativa, ita conformiter
ymaginandum est in qualitativa figuratione potentie sensitive et quodam
modo correspondentis in spirituali figuratione potentie intellective; anima
enim multiplicibus cogitationibus occupata et passionibus affectata facta est
i5 quasi aspera et difformis. Quandoque igitur per abstractionem vel conver­
sionem eius ad unum ipsa nititur huiusmodi difformitatem delere et tamen
non potest sicut experimento patet quod aliqui quasdam meditationes et
sollicitudines non possunt abicere sed ipsis invitis frequenter occurrunt.
Quandoque vero anima potest seipsam a talibus abstrahere et priorem dif-
17 ymaginari potest tr. L / spiritualis configu­ I .x x x i i : B V L
ratio tr. V 1 mutationis V
18 configurationis V 3 Sit: sed B
21 diceretur V L om. B et tr. L ante suo 4 igitur: ergo V
21-22 de sacra scriptura scr. mg. B 6 M *...3 6 ante ita del. B ista
luc (?)
8 dupliciter1’2: duplum al’ (alibi) disparet L
22 post loco add. [ G J Mathi 13 (?) / cogitati­ disparet [ E ] / vel: autZ.
bus V / solitudinibus L 9 rursus B j apparet: patet L / sic om. L
23 huius: et huius L j et voluptatibus vite om. 10 vel: seu V
L 1 obducta L 11 est igitur: ergo est V
24 fructificet tr. B p o st Dei in linea 2/ 12 et bis B
Part I, Chapter xxxii 251
figuration corresponding to the configuration o f the sense, because its intellection
depends on the sense. Therefore, just as the interior sense sometimes approaches
uniformity and evenness and sometimes is figured with great difformity and, as it
were, unevenness, so conform ably w e ought to speak o f the power o f the intellect
in its ow n way. A n d this seems to be noted in the H oly Scripture1 in the place
where the soul, entangled in the multiform thoughts, cares, and riches o f this age,
and the pleasures o f life, is compared to earth covered by a roughness o f thorns,
and therefore such a soul is unsuitable as a place wherein the seed which is the
w ord o f G o d may bear fruit.
I.xxxii On the changing o f this difformity
One often comes into the knowledge o f occult things by gross and sensible ex­
amples. A n d so, for example, let us consider leather in which w riting or the image
o f some seal is impressed. Then sometimes, because o f the nature o f the leather or
the quality o f the material and the strong impression, it happens that afterwards
the leather cannot be stretched without the impression always remaining visible.
O n the other hand, sometimes on stretching evenness returns [to the surface o f the
leather] and the w riting or image disappears. A n d it does so in tw o w ay s: either
with ease or w ith difficulty. A nd [it disappears] in tw o further w ay s: either tem­
porarily, so that when the pressure o f stretching has been relaxed the image ap­
pears again, or completely, so that when the stretching has ceased the former w rit­
ing or mark never returns. Therefore, just as it is in the case o f this quantitative
figuration, so similarly w e ought to imagine it ,to be in the case o f qualitative
figuration o f sensitive power, and, in a certain corresponding way, in the case o f
spiritual figuration o f intellective power. For the soul occupied by many thoughts
and affected by many passions has been made as it were rough and difform. There­
fore, sometimes by abstraction or turning to one thing it endeavors to obliterate
difformity o f this sort and yet cannot, as is evident by the experience that some
people cannot set aside certain meditations and cares which frequently recur to
them although they do not wish them. Sometimes, however, the soul can abstract
I .x x x i
1 Matthew 13 : j, 22-23.
13 correspondentis: corrumpitur L / spiri- nibus V
tali L 15 e f . a c L
14 cogitationibus: intellectionibus cogitatio- t8 invitis: in iunctis V
 252 D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum Part I, Chapter xxxiii 253

20 formitatem seu asperitatem excutere, ut postea dicere possit, “ cogitationes
mee dissipate sunt, torquentes cor meum.” E t aliquando potest hoc facere
leviter et aliquotiens difficulter. Aliquando etiam postquam anima ab ista
distensione seu abstractione cessaverit, iterum revertitur ad pristinum sta­
tum. Aliquando vero priorum obliviscitur penitus transeuntibus cogita-
25 tionibus primis et actu et habitu; quod etiam solet fieri sine tali abstractione
per lapsum temporis aut propter infirmitatem vel aliam lesionem.
itself from such things and shake off [its] earlier difformity or roughness, so that
afterwards it can be said,1 “ M y thoughts are dissipated, tormenting my heart.”
A nd sometimes it can do this easily and sometimes with difficulty. A lso, sometimes
after the soul ceases the distension or abstraction [it employed to rid itself o f dif­
formity], it is returned once more to its original state [of difform ity]; while some­
times it completely forgets the prior things, its first thoughts passing away both
actually and habitually. This also customarily happens w ithout such abstraction
[and merely] by the lapse o f time or because o f sickness or another injury.

I.xxxiii On the cause o f visions o f the soul

[I.xxxiii] Capitulum 33111 de causis visionum anime
Illa dicuntur ab anima per visionem percipi que previdentur in sompniis
aut in extasi vel in excessu mentis secundum multos modos a theologis et
philosophis assignatos. In hac autem visione aliquid concurrit per modum
5 efficientis, quidquid sit illud, et aliud per modum recipientis, de quo nunc
exemplariter dicendum est. Quemadmodum igitur non omnia corpora sunt
apta nata ut sint specula et reflectentia radios ordinate— ymmo cum aliis
quibusdam circumstantiis principaliter requiritur quod sint polita et tersa, ita
anima difformitate cogitationum aspera et impolita non est ad hoc disposita
10 ut sit speculum in quo reluceant futura vel alia secreta que per visiones cer­
nuntur. Sed anima que extinctis passionibus et cogitationum varietate
deposita per abstractionem facta est quasi uniformis aut etiam diflormis
difformitate polita vel ordinata ad hoc apta est et in ipsa tanquam in speculo
quodam relucere possunt multa que sunt aliis animabus occulta, cuius sig-
i5 num est quod illi qui solent tales visiones habere sunt ut plurimum a pas­
sionibus sedati et a tumultu cogitationum semoti. Propter quod cum Ysaias
propheta vellet ostendere quid esset venturum quando impleretur sermo
alterius prophete dicentis populo Israel, “ Senes vestri sompnia sompniabunt
Those things are said to be perceived by a soul through a vision, w hich are fore­
seen in dreams or in an ecstasy or excess o f the mind, in accordance w ith the many
modes designated by theologians and philosophers. In this sort o f vision, m ore­
over, something in the manner o f an efficient [agent] concurs w ith something else
in the manner o f a receiving [patient]. N o w w e ought to speak o f this b y means o f
an example. Therefore, just as not all bodies are naturally suitable to be mirrors and
reflect rays in an ordered w ay (in fact, in addition to certain other circumstances it
is chiefly required that they be polished and clean), so a soul that is unpolished and
rough with the difformity o f thoughts is not disposed to be a mirror in w hich the
future or other hidden things discernible b y visions shine forth.1 B ut the soul,
which, with passions extinct and the variety o f thoughts set aside, has been made
by abstraction as it were uniform or even difform with a polished or ordered dif­
formity, is suitable for this [visionary foresight], and in it as in a certain mirror
many things which are hidden to other souls can shine forth. T he sign o f this is
that those w ho are accustomed to have such visions are for the most part assuaged o f
passions and far removed from the tumult o f thoughts. A ccordingly, when the
prophet Isaias wished to show what the future w ould be upon the fulfillment o f the
statement o f another prophet2 w ho said to the people o f Israel, “ your old men

20 post possit add. [ G ] cum Iob 17 capitulo et I .x x x iii: B V L

habet mg. B Iob 17
21 sunt om. B j aliquando: quandoque V
22 leviter: leviter absque difficultate L
2 3 distensione: dis et lac. hab. L
24-2 5 Aliquando... habitu B V L [ E F M
C P S G J et quandoque totaliter obliviscitur
ita quod nec in actu manet in (om. A )
anima et (nec A ) in (om. N ) habitu (om. N )
e t ( o m .N ) [ A N ]
24 priorum ? B [ E ] prioris L ipsorum V
25 tali om. B
26 propter B om. V per E j ve l: aut L
2 Illa B V L [ E P F M C G S ] illa que [ A N ]
3 in1 om. V / v e l: aut V / in2
L [ A E P N C M S ] om. B V [ F G ]
I .x x x ii I .x x x iii
3-4 a ... philosophis: astrologorum et philo­
1 Job 1 7 : 1 1 . 1 See the Commentary, I.xxxiii, lines 6 -11.
sophorum [ F M P ]
2 J oel 2:28. Cf. A cts 2:17.
3 c tB V fA E N S G J e ta L [C J
5 nunc om. L
6 sunt: sint A 17-18 de sermo...Israel scr. B mg. in Joel 20
16 a: e t B /cum V [ E A N P F M S G ] om.
8 principaliter: primo L / quod: ut L L B [C ] aut actuum z°
11 extinctis: exutis (/) E 17 post propheta add. E ysae 40 (/ 40) et scr. 18 post Israel add. G Ysaie 40 et Iohel 2 et mg.
13 difformiter L / v e l: et L j et mg. B in ysa 40 / venturum: futurum vel A Ioel 20
B [ F M P C S G ] ut L [ E A N ] quod V venturum E
 254 D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum Part I, Chapter xxxiv 255

et iuvenes vestri visiones videbunt,” protinus inquit, “ erunt prava in
20 directa et aspera in vias planas; et revelabitur gloria D om ini,” acsi diceret
quod tunc quorundam anime a pravarum cogitationum asperitate abstrahen­
tur in uniformitatis planiciem et per hoc in eis quasi in quibusdam speculis
revelabitur in visione gloria Dei.
shall dream dreams and your young men shall see visions,” he [Isaias] said directly,
“ the crooked shall become straight and the rough ways plane, and the glory o f the
Lord w ill be revealed.” 3 [This is] as if he were to say that then the souls o f certain
ones w ill be drawn away from the roughness o f crooked thoughts into the even­
ness o f uniformity; and accordingly in them, as if in certain mirrors, the glory o f
G od w ill be revealed in vison.

[I.xxxiv] Capitulum 34111 de quodam impedimento visionum I.xxxiv On a certain impediment to visions

N on omni homini anime sunt a natura disposite ut sint specula visionum. N ot everybody’s soul is naturally disposed to be a mirror o f visions. But o f those
Earum autem que sunt specula a natura aut que de facili possunt fieri specula souls which are naturally mirrors or can easily become mirrors there are tw o kinds.
duo sunt modi. Sicut et speculorum inanimatorum quorum aliqua sunt sine Just as in the case o f inanimate mirrors, some o f which are pure and clean w ithout
5 macula pura et munda, alia autem contaminata seu infecta que nichil repre- a spot while others are contaminated or infected and unable to represent anything
sentare possunt donec abstersa fuerint et mundata, ita sunt alique anime que [faithfully] until w iped off and cleaned, so there are some souls which although
quamvis a nativitate sint ad visiones disposite tamen si quarundam pas­ disposed by birth to visions yet if they contract the blemish o f certain passions or
sionum aut vitiorum labem contraxerint nichil possunt previdere bene nisi faults are unable to foresee anything w ell unless they have been purified before and
prius purificate fuerint et abstersa fuerit omnis illuvies. “ Omnia ergo,” ut every uncleanliness has been wiped away. A s Pope Leo says,1 “ Therefore, all
10 ait Leo papa, “ que animi puritatem et mentis speculum obnubilant abster­ things which becloud the purity o f the soul and the mirror o f the mind are to be
genda sedulo et quadam elimatione radenda sunt.” Ideo Apostolus Petrus wiped away carefully and rubbed off by a certain filing.” Therefore, the Apostle
volentes recipere gratiam revelationis evangelice veritatis prohibet configura­ Peter2 prohibits those wishing to receive the grace o f the revelation o f evangelical
ri prioribus eorum desideriis. Propter quod dicebat Rabi Moyses Egiptius truth from being conform ed to their former desires. A ccordingly, Rabbi Moses the
quod tempore concupiscentie et tristitie et timoris prophete non prophe- N Egyptian was accustomed to say that in the time o f concupiscence, sadness, and
15 tant neque vera futura denuntiant. E t in Ysaia legitur, “ Sacerdos et pro­ fear, prophets do not prophesy nor announce true future events.3 A n d in Isaias it is
pheta nescierunt pre ebrietate; absorb sunt a vin o.” E t quemadmodum read, “ The priest and the prophet have been ignorant through drunkenness; they
speculum immaculatum et mundum a muliere menstruosa inspectum statim are swallowed up w ith w ine.” 4A nd just as a spotless and clean mirror that is looked
inficitur quadam nubecula turpi— et si fuerit novum , tunc vix aut nunquam upon by a menstruating woman immediately becomes infected by a certain un­
de cetero poterit clarificari, sic adolescenti animam puram habenti et natura- sightly cloudiness (and if it is new it can never, or scarcely ever, be made clear
again),5 so one must seriously warn a young man having a pure mind against his
19 prava: plana B 9 purificate: mundificateL / abstersa
20 et2: et ibi B V [ A N P F M C S ] om. [ G ] absterssa B
21 tunc: tunc quando L j a pravarum: anti­ abstersa alio abstracta B abstracta [ E ] / il­ since they are given only in B E S G .
3 Isaias 4 0 :4- 5 .
quarum B luvies B [ E A N ] om. [ G ] et lac. hab. V inglu­ I.x x x iv 2I Epist. Peter 1:14, “ quasi filii obedientiae,
21-22 abstrahantur V viei B sordicies [ F M P ] sordes [ C ] alluvies non configurati prioribus ignorantiae ve­
1 S. Leo Magnus, Sermones, Sermo X L I \A l.
23 post revelabitur add. V in eis quasi / in visi­ [S ] strae desideriis.”
X L] (Migne, P B , Vol. 54, c. 272). Oresme’s
one tr. B post Dei sed B add. signum trans­ 9 -11 Om nia... sunt o m .[ N ] 3 See the Commentary, I.xxxiv, lines 13-15.
reading o f radenda is given as a variant for
positionis" post speculis et supra in 9-13 Om nia... desideriis B [ E S G J om. 4 Isaias 28:7.
reddenda. Perhaps this and the succeeding
B V [A PFM C ] biblical quotation should be placed in brackets 5 See the Commentary, I.xxxiv, lines 16-19.
I .x x x i v : B V B 10 animi: a. et lac. hab. B
3 a . . . speculaom. L 10-11 abstergenda sunt [ E ]
5 pura: sed pura L 11 Apostolus Petrus: Petrus apostolus ait [ E ] egiptyus 2 8/et2:a c L
6 absersa B 12 veritatis om. [ E ] 14-15 prophetizant B 16 absorpti B
7 sint tr. B ante a in linea 7 / disposite tr. B 13 prioribus: predonibus (?) e t [ E ] / Egiptius 15 vera: ulla B / Ysaya B / de Ysaia scr. mg. 18 quadam om. B / tunc o m .B
post sint B B [ P F M E S A ] om. [ G ] egyptius V [ N ] B [ A ] ysa. 28 / post Ysaia add. [ G ] capitulo 19 poterit clarificari tr. V
 256 D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum Part I, Chapter xxxv 257

20 liter bene aptam cavendum est nimis ne per aspectum impudice mulieris eius
nobilis animus capiatur et indelebiliter polluatur, ac per hoc reddatur ineptus
ad huiusmodi visiones et alia opera studiosa. E t ideo tali dicebat sapiens,
“ fili [...] longe fac ab ea viam tuam, et ne appropinques foribus domus eius,”
scilicet mulieris.
noble mind being possessed and indelibly polluted by the sight o f an unchaste
woman, and by this being rendered unsuitable for visions o f this kind and other
studious undertakings. A n d therefore a wise man said to such a young man, “ M y
s o n .. .rem ove thy w ay far from her, and come not nigh the door o f her house,’’
that is, the wom an’s house.6

[I.xxxv] Capitulum 35“ de quibusdam differentiis visionum I.xxxv On certain differences in visions

Preter multas differentias visionum ab auctoribus traditas seu inter eas In addition to, or among, the many differences in visions treated by authors,
quedam magis videntur ad propositum pertinere que summuntur secundum the ones that seem to pertain more to our subject are those based on a similarity to
similitudinem ad figurationes et potentias speculorum. Sunt enim quedam the shapes and powers o f mirrors. For certain mirrors are uniform and plane or
5 specula uniformia et plana seu recta et alia curva, et dupliciter aut sunt straight, and others are curved. A n d the curved ones are o f tw o kind s: either con­
concava et illa representant rem sub quantitate maiori, aut convexa in cave (and these m agnify the object) or convex (and in these the object appears
quibus res apparet sub quantitate minori. In planis vero videtur sub media smaller in size). In plane mirrors the object appears to be o f medium size.1 It is the
quantitate. Sic etiam de animabus quedam est in qua ad m odum speculi plani same also in regard to souls: in some souls, as in the manner o f the plane mirror, a
representatur res futura vel alias abscondita sine diminutione vel excessu. thing o f the future or something otherwise hidden is represented w ithout reduction
10 A b alia vero sicut in speculo concavo res previdetur maior et terribilior sive or enlargement. B y another soul, as in the concave mirror, something is foreseen
melior quam sit vel erit. E t ab alia sicut in speculo convexo cernitur minor. as greater or more terrible or better than it is or than it w ill be. A n d by [still] an­
Horum autem exempla quasi innumerabilia patent in historiis de prenun- other soul, as in the convex mirror, something is discerned as being less. Alm ost
tiationibus futurorum. innumerable examples o f these [various types] appear in the stories o f the pro­
Rursum de speculis curvis tam concavis quam convexis quedam sunt nouncements o f future events.
15 sperica vel sicut portio spere, alia sunt columpnaria vel pyramidalia, aut Again, in regard to curved mirrors (concave as w ell as convex), some are spheri­
quedam alia irrationali curvitate inflexa. E a vero que sunt sperica, licet non cal or segments o f a sphere, others are cylindrical or pyramidal, or are curved with
representent vere magnitudinem ut dictum est, tamen de rerum figura non a certain irrational curvedness. Those w hich are spherical, although they do not
fallunt. Sed in aliter curvis fit deceptio in magnitudine et principaliter in represent the size truly, as has been said, still are not fallacious in representing the
figura, ita ut vultus humani in eis videantur oblongi, incompositi, et shape o f the objects. But in mirrors curved in a different w ay deception occurs in
20 deformes, et ideo dicuntur specula falsa. Ita etiam quedam anime occulta magnitude and, principally, in figure, so that the face o f a man appears in them to
prevident maiora vel minora et aliter quam erunt vel quam sint in re, acsi be lengthened, decomposed, and deformed, and therefore they are said to be false
huiusmodi anime vel earum organa forent difformia difformitate indebite 7 *
2
10
9
8 mirrors. So also certain souls foresee hidden things as greater or less and disposed
differently than they w ill be or than they are in fa c t; as if souls o f this sort, or their
20 aspectum: inspectum L 7 apparent L / In om. V organs, were difform w ith a difformity unduly polished according to non-spherical
21 anima V / redduntur V 7-8 media quantitate B V [ A P F M S G ] tr.
23 de fili... eius scr. mg. B [ A ] pro ver. 5; et L [ E N J meliore quantitate [ C ]
hab. mg. [ C ] sapiens in proverbiis / fac tr. 8 etiam: etiam est L, 6 Proverbs 5:8. The fili is drawn from the I.x x x v
L post ea 9 alias: alia V 1 See the Commentary, I.xxxv, lines 4-20.
preceding verse.
10 alia B L V [ E N G ] aliqua[ F M P C ] a *[ A S ]
I .x x x v : B V L 11 alia V L [ E N ] aliqua [ F M P C ] aa [ A S G ]
1 quibusdam om. L illa B I sicut: sibi V / speculo convexo spericata V 18 fit: sit V
2 auctoribus B actoribus L autoribus V / L [ E C N F M P S ] tr. B V convexo [ A G ] 17 representent B V [ A N S G ] representant 20 deformes B V [ A P F S ] difformes
seu om. L 12 H orum : quorum V L [ E P F M C J I magnitudinem B V L [ E N M C G ] / anime: alie anime V
3 que: quedam L 15 piramidalia E [ A N P F M C ] ymaginem L [ E S G ] / figu- 21 minora: breviora V /acsi:u tsiZ .
5 duplicia L / aut sunt: sunt autem L 16 irrationali: irrationabili E rationali [ G ] / ra: figuratione L
 258 D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum
polita secundum curvitatem non spericam; et propter hoc habent visiones
non veras. Unde Ieremias Ierosolime, “ Prophete, inquit, tui viderunt tibi
25 falsa et stulta; [ ...] viderunt tibi assumptiones falsas et eiectiones.”
259
Part I, Chapter xxxvi
curvature. A n d because o f this they have visions which are not true. W hence Jere-
mias said to Jerusalem: “ T h y prophets have seen for thee false and foolish things;
[... ] they have seen for thee false burdens and banishments.” 2

[I.xxxvi] Capitulum 36m de quadam differentia animarum
previdentium
A dhuc autem sicut sunt specula quedam que representant magnitudinem
et figuram, ita sunt alia que non representant figuram sed solum colorem, ut
5 ait Aristoteles 30 metheorologicorum. H oc autem contingit propter divari-
cationem radiorum inordinate reflexorum, que quidem inordinatio quando­
que provenit ex difformitate speculi in superficie aspera et impolita et ali­
quando ex inquietudine superficiei et mobilitate speculi; sicut dum sol
relucet in aqua tremula, tunc enim lucem solis videmus in aqua sed latet
10 eius figura, que tamen pateret in aqua tranquilla. Consimili modo contingit
quod aliqua anima modum et figuram effectus futuri vel occulti videre non
possit, aliquotiens tamen quasi rei colorem confuse presentit. Sepe enim
accidit quod animus hominis ferventer amantis comm ovetur dum circa ami­
cum absentem aliquid notabile geritur, et quandoque adversam hominis
15 fortunam antecedit prius timor nullo exteriori terribili adhuc imminente, sed
huiusmodi timoris latet origo et est presagium mali futuri. Inde ait Statius,
“ Pessimus in dubiis augur tim or,” et Claudianus inquit, “ sed malus interpres
rerum metus omne trahebat augurium peiore via,” et cetera. In hoc autem
modo res ipsa non videtur distincte propter difformitatem anime vel quia
20 ipsa est cogitationum varietate aspera et impolita aut passionum fluctuosis
motibus agitata conformiter ad ea que de speculis inanimatis dicta sunt et de
aqua tremente. E t quamvis alii modi visionum supra positi non contingunt
24 non: vel B / Ieremias: Iheremias L Iere-
I .x x x v i : B V L
myas [ N J Micheas [ C ] / Ierosolime B [SJ 4 solum colorem tr. V
om. [ A N P F M C ] Ierosolim V Iheroso- 5 Aristotelis V
lime L Iherosolim [G J in tenis (Pthenis?)
5-6 divaricationem B V [ G ]
[ E ] / inquit om. L
(?) L [ E P F M ] variationem [ N J diversi­
24-25 tu i... eiectiones: viderunt (?) falsa et
tatem [ C ]
cetera S
7 pervenit L
24 tui B V [ E G ] om. [ F M P S ] c u m L [ N ] tan­
8 mobilitate: mutabilitate L
tum (? tm )[ A F ] / tibi: ibi-L 9 relucet: lucet L /tremula B V mota vel tre­
25 viderunt... eiectiones om. [ C ] et cetera mente L mota [ E ] mota tremente [ N J /
P M / tibi: ibi L j et2: et etiam L [ N ] / eiec­ tunc... aqua om. L [ E ]
tiones B V [ A G J erectiones L [ N F J detec­ 10 pateret B V [ A N P C G ] potest apparere L
tiones [ E ] potest videri [ E ]
11 videri V
12 possit B V L [ E A S G J potest [ N P C F M J /
I.xxxvi On a certain difference existing in souls that foresee
Furthermore, just as there are certain mirrors which represent size and shape, so
there are others which do not represent shape but only color, as Aristotle says in
[Book] III o f the Meteorological- This happens because o f the scattering o f the rays
reflected in a disorderly w ay— the disorder arising sometimes from the non-uni­
form ity o f the rough and unpolished surface o f the mirror and sometimes from
the fact that the surface is not at rest and the mirror is in motion. A n example is the
case o f the sun being reflected in quivering water where we see only the light o f the
sun in the water, its shape being then hidden, although it w ould be apparent i f the
water were calm. In a similar w ay it happens that some soul, although it is unable to
see the manner or shape o f a future or hidden effect, yet sometimes presents, as it
were, the color o f the thing in a confused way. For often it happens that the mind o f
a man very much in love is disturbed when something notable happens to his absent
friend; and sometimes a fear precedes some adverse fortune o f a person without
any exterior source o f fear yet at hand. T he origin o f fear o f this kind is hidden and
is a foreboding o f a bad future. Thence Statius says2: “ Fear, w orst o f augurs in
perplexity [broods deeply],” and Claudianus says: “ But fear, ever a poor inter­
preter, reads disaster in the portent,” etc.3 In this way, then, the thing itself is not
seen distinctly because o f the difformity o f the soul or because it is rough and un­
polished as the result o f [its] variety o f thoughts or o f being agitated b y the fluc­
tuating movements o f passions, the situation being o f the same sort as w e have de­
scribed in connection w ith inanimate mirrors and quivering water. A n d although
the other modes o f visions posited above do not take place in the souls o f animals
2 Threni (i.e., Lamentations o f Jeremias) 2:14. I .x x x v i
divariationem
Oresme’s quotation is accurate except that he 1 See 372a 34 and 373b 17-19. See the Com­
has left out the m id d le o f th e verse, which I mentary, I.xxxvi, lines 3-4.
have indicated by the bracketed dots, and he 2 Thebaid, III, 6.
has omitted an autem after viderunt. 3 D e bellogothico, 262-63.*2
0
tationum L [ E ] ipsa est varietate cogi­
presentit B V [ A G ] presentat [S J represen-
tationum [P C F M ] / aspera BVL
tat L [ E N C F M P ]
[A E N S G ] inquieta [ P C F M ]
13 commovetur om. B
15 eminente L 21 et om. V
22 non B V [ A ] neque L nunquam [ E J
17 augur: augetur L
20 ipsa... varietate B V [ A S G ] varietate cogi­
 260 D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum Part I, Chapter xxxvii 261

in animabus brutorum eo quod non sunt apte ut sint talia specula, forsan
tamen possunt esse specula isto ultimo modo ut quasi quodam instinctu
25 nature presentiant futura vel occulta et hoc confuse sicut aves quedam ut
bubo quam dicunt funus auspicari. Unde Statius “ feralia bubo dampna
canens” et cetera, et de equo in libro Iob dicitur quod ipse “ procul odora­
tur bellum .” Similiter delphini maris prenuntiant tempestatem et avis alcione
tranquillitatem, et multa exempla de istis reperiuntur in historia naturali.
since they are intrinsically unsuitable to be such mirrors, yet perhaps they can be
mirrors in this last mode [of visions], so that, as it were, by a certain instinct o f na­
ture they foretell in a confused w ay future and hidden events, as certain birds like
the horned ow l w ho, they say, gives a sign o f death. W hence Statius, “ The horned
ow l w ith its dismal funereal chant,” etc.4 A n d in regard to a horse it is said in the
book o f Job “ he smelleth the battle afar off.” 5 Similarly dolphins foretell a storm,6
and the bird called the kingfisher the calm [after the storm].7 M any examples o f
these [kinds o f animal auspices] are found in natural history.8

[I.xxxvii] Capitulum 37m de differentia rerum visarum in I.xxxvii On the difference o f things seen in relation
similitudine ad situm to position

Speculum inanimatum secundum diversos situs ipsius varia representat,
ut si opponatur ad sursum representabit corpora superiora. Si vertatur
5 deorsum representabit inferiora, si ad latus lateraliter iacentia, et sic diversi­
mode. E t conformiter potest ymaginari de anima in qua sicut in speculo
quandoque relucent abscondita que sunt in excelsum supra, quandoque videt
ea que latent in profundum inferum subtus, et aliquotiens illa que in hoc
mundo quasi iacent ad latus. Q uod etiam potest referri ad durabilitatem
10 mensure, ut ipsa anima videat supra illa que sunt in eternitate, aut infra,
scilicet ea que sunt in presenti tempore, aut ad ante ea que ventura sunt in
futuro, aut etiam retro ea que transierunt tempore retroacto. D e quolibet
enim istorum potest esse visio seu prophetia, ut dicit G regorius super
Ezechielem.
A n inanimate mirror represents things differently in accordance w ith its variation
in position. Thus, i f it is turned upward, it w ill represent superior bodies; dow n­
ward, inferior bodies; to the side, bodies that lie to the side; and similarly for the
many other positions. O ne can imagine the same thing for a soul in which, as in the
mirror, sometimes are reflected hidden things which are above on h ig h ; sometimes
it sees things w hich lie hidden in the depths below , and sometimes it sees things
which, as it were, lie to the side in this world. This kind o f distinction can also be
made in reference to the duration o f its measure. Thus this soul m ight see, above,
those things which are eternal; or below , those things which are at the present
tim e; or in front, those things w hich w ill come about in the future; or even behind,
those things which took place in past time. For there can be a vision or prophecy
concerning each o f these, as G regory says in his [Homilies] on E zekiel.1

23 animabus brutorum B V animalibus brutis
L alias sunt sic experti tamen scilicet nes­
24 u t: et B
25 v e lom. V /ut: sicut[ P C F M G ]
26 bubo: bubo dampna canens L / quam di­
cunt : quasi dicant L j quam... auspicari
om, [ P C F M ] j funus: scimus L / feralia
V f A C F M S ] om. [ G ] foralia B L [ E N ]
27- 28 odoratur B [ S ] odorat V [ E A G J odora­ etiam si L
vit L [ N ] odorabat [ P F M ] adorabat [ C ]
28- 29 Similiter... tranquillitatem om.
[P C F M ]
28 delphini B V [ P S ] delphines E [ E N J del-
fini [ A ] / altiene L
29 reperiuntur tr. V ante de / post naturali
add. N E t multi sunt homines quibus ante
aliquid mali notabilis accidit ipsi presciunt
(?) (et sic quandoque non possum dormire
certe aliquid accidet michi sinistrum) quia
4 Thebaid, III, 51 1. cites Pliny and O vid as authorities. He also
mentions there other examples o f animal aus­
5J°b 39:25.
ciunt quid nec in quo. pices.
6 Pliny, Natural History, X V III, 361. Cf.
Cicero, D e divinatione, II, 70, Sect. 145. 8 See the Commentary, I.xxxvi, line 29.
I .x x x v i i : B V E
7 Presumably because the kingfisher ( = I.x x x v ii
4 opponatur B V [ E S ] opponitur [ N J appo­
halcyon) was thought to breed when the sea 1 Homiliae in Ezechielem, 1 st homily (Migne,
natur [ A P F M G ] ponatur L [ C ]
was calm, i.e., in the so-called halcyon days P L , V ol. 76, c. 786): “ Prophetiae tempora
5 inferiora: inferiora corpora L [ E ] / si:
(Pliny, Natural History, II, 125; X , 90; and tria sunt, scilicet praeteritum, praesens et
Ovid, Metamorph., X I, 744-48). Oresme makes futurum.” A long discussion o f this point
7 excelsis E
a similar reference to the halcyon in his Livre ensues.
8 profundum B L [ A N S G ] profundo [ E P C ]
de divinacions (ed. o f Coopland, 64) where he
profundis V [ M ] perfundumfF ] / inferum:
inferiori [ E P C ] / illa: ea L
9 quasi B [ A N F P G om. L [ E S ] quacunque 12 futuro: futuro tempore L / retro... tem­ lius actio ideo qui continue vel sepe cogi­
V cause ( ? ) [ C J pore om. L [ E F ] I retroacta L tant de celestis aut qui continue de bellis
10 supra: illa que sunt supra scilicet V 14 post Ezechielem add. [ N ] secundum quod aut et ceteris tales quandoque clarius in
11 ad om. E [ A ] ab [ E ] / ante ea [ E P F M S ] homines sunt dediti ad cogitandum de talibus prevident etc.
om. [ N C ] antea B V [ ? A ] ante L e a [ G ] istis vel illis quia in passis dispositis fit faci­
 262 D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum Part I, Chapter xxxviii 263

[I.xxxviii] Capitulum 38111 de differentia visionum secundum I.xxxviii On the difference in visions consequent upon distance
distantiam

Quemadmodum non omne visibile potest in quocunque speculo a qua­ Just as not every visible thing can be seen in any mirror at any distance but rather
libet distantia intueri sed a certis distantiis et variis secundum diversas only at certain and varying distances dependent on the different sizes o f the visible
5 magnitudines rerum visibilium et differentias speculorum, sic etiam anime things and the differences existing in the mirrors, so also souls which are capable o f
que sunt occultorum visive non a quantalibet distantia temporis possunt seeing occult things cannot see them from any distance in time but rather are limit­
inspicere, ymm o quantum ad hoc sunt certis spatiis limitate quamvis procul ed in this regard to certain spans— although they do see afar and thus are said to
videant et inde dicuntur prophetare. Unde Daniel angelo qui sibi multa prophesy. W hence Daniel said to the angel w ho had revealed many things to him ,1
revelaverat dixit, “ Dom ine mi quid erit post hec: et ait, Vade Daniel quia “ O my lord, what shall be after these things?” A n d he said: “ G o , Daniel, because
10 clausi sunt signatique sermones usque ad prefinitum tempus,” et cetera, the words are shut up and sealed until the appointed time,” etc., as if the pow er o f
acsi illa potentia visionis ibi terminaretur quantum ad talia quia forsan maiora vision w ith respect to such things were terminated there because perhaps greater
previdentur a maiori distantia; verumptamen supernaturaliter Deus potest things are foreseen at a greater distance. Still G o d can supernaturally make a rev­
quom odolibet revelare. elation in any way at all.
Rursus sicut magnitudo distantie raro percipitur in speculo nisi valde Again, just as the [actual] magnitude o f the distance is rarely perceived in a mir­
i5 confuse, et quandoque res videntur prepostere quamvis speculum sit bonum ror, except in a very confused w ay— and sometimes things seem distorted although
et verum, ita anima quandoque previdet futura ordine prepostero et in the mirror is a good one and true, so a soul sometimes foresees future things in a
eorum visione non perpendit distantiam nisi in confuso, ut quod sunt prope distorted order, and in its vision o f them it judges their distance, namely as to
vel longe, sicut unus predixit de Christo, “ videbo eum, sed non m odo: whether they are near or far [in time], only in a confused way. So one has foresaid
intuebor illum, sed non prope.” E t alius postea dixit, “ Prope est ut veniat concerning Christ,2 “ I shall see him, but not now : I shall behold him, but not near.”
20 tempus eius, et dies eius non elongabuntur.” Tem pus autem non vident A n d another one afterwards has said: “ H er time is near at hand, and her days shall
precise signando diem vel horam, sicut Salvator dixit de die iudicii quem not be prolonged.” 3 But they do not see the time precisely by indicating the day or
“ nemo scit neque angeli,” et cetera, et ita de aliis nisi forsan a D eo fuerit the hour, as the Saviour has said concerning the day o f judgment,4 which “ no one
valde singulariter revelatum, sicut aliquotiens invenitur in prophetiis. knoweth, not even the angels,” etc., and [it is] thus concerning other [prophecies].
Propter quod illi qui nimis dearticulant tempora eorum que prenosticant T o be sure, perhaps something w ill have been revealed in great particularity by
25 per modum visionis nisi ostendant aliud signum non sunt estimandi veri G od, as is occasionally found in the prophets. Because o f this [general temporal
prophete sed sunt de illis qui dicunt se per revelationem cognoscere ea vagueness o f prophecies], those w ho articulate too finely the times o f the events
que ex statu rerum et cursu temporum sua estimatione coniecturant fore which they foretell by means o f a vision are not to be judged as true prophets un­
I .x x x v i i i : B V L less they show another sign. T h ey are rather to be reckoned among those w ho say
14 Rursum V
3 a : in L 15 confuse: difficile V / videntur [ A P F S G J
that they know by revelation things which by a judgment based on the state o f
6 posset L videretur B V videtur L [ E N ] / bonum: things and the course o f the seasons they merely conjecture w ill take place. Con-
7 sunt: sub L rectum L
8 videt L I et inde: etiam vere L / dicantur V 17 eorum: eorum via L / post quod add.
I sibi multa tr. V [ P F M ] numerorum 24
9 revelaverat B [ A M G ? F ] revelavit 18 sicut: ut L / post Christo a d d.[G ] numeri
L V [ E N S ] prophetaverat [ ? P ] revelabat 24 / eum: istum/.
[ C ] / dicit E
9-10 de D om ine... tempus scr. mg. [ A G ]
18 - 19 de videbo.. .prope scr. mg. B numeri 20
(/ 24) et m g .[A ] numeri 24
LxxC;f""'!", „
" 9-
3 / , a t o i 4:1.
* M a ttim w .il.
2 Numbers 24:17. *
2
Daniel’ 120 19 sed: scilicet L / post postea add.f P F M ] Ysa
9 ait: dixit V 14/ post dixit add. [ G J Ysa 14
10 sunt tr. E post signatique / signataque B 19- 20 de Prope... elongabuntur scr. mg. B cii mundi L / quem: quod L forsan L forsan fuerit V forte B
11 terminetur/. Y sa 14 22 de n em o.. .angeli scr. mg. B N t z4 e tm g .[A ] 24 dearticulat V / prenosticantur E
12 verumptamen: verum /. / supernaturaliter 20 Tempus: tunc post V M* 29 / et cetera om. V et cetera M* 24 25 veri: veres/.
tr. L post potest 21 post dixit add. [ G ] Mathesi 24 /iudicii :iudi- [ P F M ] j ita: ita forsan L ita forte [ E ] / 27 fore: esse V
 264 D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum Part I, Chapter xxxix 265

ventum. D e quibus Ezechiel dicens inquit, “ dices prophetantibus de corde
suo, [ — ] V e prophetis insipientibus qui sequuntur spiritum suum et
30 nichil vident, [ — ] et divinant mendacium dicentes: A it D om inus: cum
[Dominus] non miserit eos.” E t iterum in Ieremia de talibus dicitur, “ v i­
sionem cordis sui loquuntur, non de ore D om ini.”
cerning these Ezekiel says: “ thou shalt say to them that prophesy out o f their ow n
heart: [ . . . . ] W oe to the foolish prophets w ho follow their ow n spirit and see
nothing, [ . . . . ] and they foretell lies saying: T he L ord saith: whereas the L ord hath
not sent them.” 5 A n d again in Jeremias it is said concerning such people: “ they
speak a vision o f their ow n heart, and not out o f the mouth o f the L ord .” 6

[I.xxxix] Capitulum 39111 de enigmatibus visionum I.xxxix On enigmas in visions

Res quandoque videtur in speculo ita confuse quod non percipitur Sometimes a thing is seen in a mirror in such a confused w ay that neither [its]
magnitudo neque figura, et ita est aliquando de visione anime sicut dictum size nor shape is perceived. So it is sometimes w ith a vision o f the soul, as has been
est capitulo 36°. Aliquotiens etiam licet videatur in speculo magnitudo et said in chapter thirty-six. A lso, sometimes, although size and shape are seen in a
5 figura, hoc tamen est alicuius rei cooperientis rem principalem, sicut vesti­ mirror, it is only the size and shape o f something covering the principal object, as
menti hominem tegentis. Item si discooperiatur vultus hominis adhuc non for example, o f the garment covering a person. A lso, if the face o f a man is un­
cognoscetur in speculo ita determinate quod ex hoc sciatur nomen proprium covered still he w ill not be recognized in the mirror specifically enough for his ow n
aut proprie conditiones ipsius, nam visio per speculum confusa est. Ideo name or proper conditions to be known. This is because the visual image has been
dicitur in canonica Iacobi quod vir qui consideravit “ vultum nativitatis sue confused by the mirror. Therefore, it is said in the Epistle o f James that a man be­
10 in speculo [...] et abiit [et] statim oblitus est qualis fuerit.” held “ his natural countenance in a glass [ . . .] and went his way, and presently he
N unc igitur conformiter dictis aliquas res occultas videt anima non facialiter forgot what manner o f man he w as.” 1
sed sub velamine quodam, sicut de speculo dictum est. E t hanc assimilatio- N ow , therefore, in a w ay similar to what has been said, a soul w ill see hidden things
nem notavit Apostolus quando de divinis inquit, “ Videm us nunc per not in the open but under a certain cover, as was said concerning a mirror. A n d the
speculum et in enigmate: tunc autem facie ad faciem,” et cetera. Res etiam Apostle has noted this similarity when he says concerning divine th in gs: “ w e see
15 future videntur sub nube. Unde et idem Apostolus dicit prophetas fuisse now through a glass in an obscure manner, but then face to face,” etc.2 A lso, things
sub nube, videntur enim sub tegumento et umbra aliarum rerum, sicut o f the future are seen under a cloud. W hence the same Apostle says that prophets
homines sub forma brutorum, ut patet in prophetiis et aliis prenuntiationi- were under a cloud,3 for they are seen under the cover and shadow o f other things,
bus futurorum. E t si quandoque in visione res ipsa detegatur aut sine as men in the form o f animals, as is evident in prophecies and other pronounce­
velamine videatur, nunquam tamen nisi rarissime cognoscitur ita proprie ments o f future things. A n d if sometimes in a vision the thing is uncovered or is
20 nec ita distincte, sicut quando postea cernitur in effectu, ymmo aliqui rem seen without a cover, it is only very rarely that it is as properly and distinctly recog­
nized as when afterward it is discerned in actuality. Nay, some people foresee a
28 post Ezechiel add. [ P A M ] 130 e t [C ] 210 / / et B [ A F P S G M ] om. [ N ] sive L [ E ] vel
dicens inquit dices: inquit dicens inquit V aut [ C ]
dicit E / post inquit add. [ G ] Ezechieli 130 6 vultus: visus V I .x x x ix
5E zechiel 13 :z, 3, 6 . 0 resme has put the three
28-31 de dices... eos scr. mg. B [ A ] Ezechielis 7 sciatur: sortitur L 1 E p istle o f James 1123-24.
scattered verses together. I have indicated
130 8 namque E 2 I Corinthians 13:12.
their spacing by [ __ ]. I have added Dominus
30 videtur L / divinatum V 9-10 de vultum ... fuerit scr. mg. B [ A ] Iaco­ 3 This may be a reference to I Cor. 10:1. But
in line 31 from the Vulgate; it is missing in all
31 Iheremia L / post Ieremia add. [ G ] capitulo bi p° of the manuscripts o f the D e configurationibus. if so, it is certainly out o f context.
23 9 post Iacobi add. [ G ] in primo capitulo / na­ 6 Jeremias 23:16.
31-32 de visionem.. .Domini scr. mg. B [ A ] tivitatis: nutricis E
leremie 230 10 statum E
Corinth 130 16 enim L [ F M P C ] om. V [ E ] etiam B [ A S G ]
11 igitur: ergo B / vidat (?) B / non: neque
I .x x x ix : B I X E / facialiter: faciliter E 14 et cetera om. E / etiam: autem E et [ N ]
2 quandoque: quoque V / videtur 12 sub: sine B 15 de Apostolus dicit scr. mg. B i e (?) ad 17 in : ex E
B V [ F M P C S ] videntur L [ E A N G ] 13 post inquit add. [ G ] ad Corinth 13 Cor io° et mg. [ A ] ibidem io°/fuisse: vi- 18 s i: licet E / in visione tr. E post ipsa
4 est: est in L [ N ] / etiam: enim L / liceat L 13-14 de Videmus... faciem scr. B [ A ] i e ad desseE 20 aliqui: aliquam E
 z66 D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum Part I, Chapter xxxix 267

provident vere sed falluntur in aliqua eius qualitate, sicut Hermes Egiptius
qui destructionem ydolorum E gipti previdit, sed hoc fore malum atque
dolendum putavit.
E x dictis itaque patet quod prophetie que dearticulant generationes,
25 nomina propria, et particularia facta regum et aliorum qui iam precesserunt
nisi aliter probate sint putande sunt ficte. Sunt enim historie preteritorum
post facta composite per verba de futuro fingendo quod sic fuerat propheta­
tum et ita fecit Vergilius 6° Eneydos de Romanis, ut ait Augustinus, et tale
est illud quod dicitur de Christo in libro de vetula, qui false imponitur
30 O vidio, quod apparet ex alio quoniam secundum predicta in capitulo 340
non est credibile quod vir habens ita immundas cogitationes sicut explican­
tur in illo libro haberet spiritum prophetie clariorem quam aliquis sanctus
propheta legitur habuisse. Porphyrius etiam voluit dicere quod tales fuerunt
prophetie Danielis, dicit enim quod illum librum non fecit Daniel sed postea
35 compositus fuit a quodam qui appellatus est Epiphanes temporibus Anthio-
chi. Sed huic solertissime respondent Eusebius Cesariensis, Apollinarius, et
Methodius, sicut ait Ieronimus. N on igitur est stilus propheticus particulari­
ter et dearticulatim omnia determinare sed minus distincte, ut dictum est,
quamvis aliqui non prophete nimis accedant ad aliud extremum qui confin-
40 gunt orationes amphibolicas et verba ambigua, flexiloca, et obscura, que ad
omnem eventum possunt applicari, et mentiuntur se divinare, sicut quando­
que faciebant sacerdotes Apollinis, ut dicit Tullius in libro de divinatione.
In detestatione talium in Ezechiele dicitur, “ non erit ultra [...] divinatio
ambigua in medio filiorum Israel.”
thing truly but they are deceived in some quality o f it, as Hermes the Egyptian w ho
foresaw the destruction o f the idols o f E gypt, but he thought that this was a bad
thing and to be deplored.4
A n d so from the things which w e have said it is evident that prophecies which
detail the generations, the proper names, and particular facts o f kings and others
w ho have already gone before are to be considered fictitious unless otherwise
proved. For they are stories o f past events composed in future terms after they
have happened by feigning that such had been prophesied. For example, V irg il in
the sixth o f the Aeneid did this in regard to the Romans, as Augustine says,5 and
such is that w hich is said concerning Christ in the book On the Old Lady, w hich is
falsely attributed to O vid .6 Its falseness is apparent from something else; consider­
ing what was said earlier in chapter thirty-four, one cannot believe that a man hav­
ing such foul thoughts as are described in that b ook w ould have a spirit o f proph­
ecy clearer than that which some holy prophet is reported [in the Scriptures] to
have had. Porphyry also wished to say that the prophecies o f Daniel were o f this
sort, for he says that Daniel did not produce that book but that it was composed
by a certain person called Epiphanes7 w ho lived in the times o f Antiochus. But, as
Jerome says,8 Eusebius o f Caesarea, Apollinarius, and Methodius made most skill­
ful replies to this. Hence it is not a characteristic o f the prophetic style to determine
all things with particularity and in detail but rather to do so less distinctly, as has
been said, although some w ho are not prophets go to the other extreme in an ex­
cessive w ay by inventing speeches w ith double meaning and obscure, equivocal,
and ambiguous words, which can be applied to any occurrence; and they pretend
that they are prophesying, as sometimes the priests o f A p ollo were accustomed to
do, according to Cicero in his b ook On divinationP In execration o f such things it is
said in E zekiel,10 “ there shall be no more [... ] doubtful divination in the midst o f
the children o f Israel.”

21 aliqua eius qualitate: eis qualitate aliqua V phanes B V [ E N ] Ephiphanes [ P C ] Epy-

/ Egiptius B L fA E F M C S G ] Egyptius phanes [ G ]
V [P N J 35-36 Anthiochi [ L E F M P N C ] om. B Antio­
22 Egipti B L [ A E P F M C S G ] Egypti V chi V [ A ]
Egyptii [ N J 36 solempnissime L / Apollinarius correxi ex
24 patet: apparet V / que: si V Apollinaris in M S S .
25 qui: que V / presessunt (?) B 37 Iheronimus L / stilus: solus L [ E ]
26 Sunt enim: sicut E 39 nimis tr. L p o s t extremum in linea 39 4 Augustine, D e civitate D ei, VIII, Chap. 23; 8 Commentariorum in Danielem Prophetam
27 fingendo om. L / sic: sicut L 40 amphibolicas B [ A N M P G ] amphiboloi- cf. also the Hermetic Asclepius, Chaps. 23-24. liber unus (Migne, P L , Vol. 25, c. 491). See
28 fecit: facit B / Eneydos L V [ E A N S ] cas L [ E ] amphybolicas V [ S ] / flexiloca: See the Commentary, I.xxxix, lines 21-23. the Commentary, I.xxxix, lines 33-37.
eneidos B [ P F M ] Augustius L flexiloqua V 5 Augustine, D e civitate dei, V , Chap. 12, 9 D e divinatione, II, 56, Sects. 115-16.
32 illo: isto L 42 Tullius: Tulius V / in om. V quoting the Aeneid, I, 279 et seq. and VI, 847 10E^ecbiel 12:24, which actually reads: “ Non
33 propheta om. E / Porphirius L [ S G ] / tales: 43 detestatione talium tr. V et seq. enim erit ultra omnis visio cassa, neque divi­
tales etiam L 43-44 de non... Israel scr. mg. B Ez 12 et mg. A 6 See the Commentary, I.xxxix, lines 29-33. natio ambigua in medio filiorum Israel.” As
34 prophetie om. L Ezech 12 (?) 7 See ibid., lines 33-37, for Oresme’s mis­ usual, I have indicated Oresme’s omission
33 fuit: est B / Epiphanes L [ A M F ] Ephy- interpretation of Jerome. by [ . . . ] .
 268 D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum 269
Part I, Chapter xl

[I.xl] Capitulum 4om de causis efficientibus visionum I.xl On the efficient causes o f visions

Quam vis sit altioris speculationis ulteriores causas visionum considerare A lthough consideration o f the ulterior causes o f visions is a matter o f higher
quia tamen animus ex prioribus dictis excitatus inardescit et concupiscit speculation, still, because the mind excited by the things already said takes fire and
audire a quo vel unde veniant huiusmodi visiones, ideo breviter et super- desires to hear from where visions o f this sort come, therefore by proceeding
5 ficialiter transeundo potest dici quod in tali visione est aliquid quod aspicit briefly and superficially it can be said that in such a vision there is (1) something
et illud est anima, aliquid quod aspicitur et est res visa, aliquid in quo aspici­ that does the looking and this is the soul, (2) something that is looked at and this is
tur per modum speculi et est una pars organica que est speculum alteri parti the thing seen, (3) something in which the looking takes place in the manner o f a
cognoscitive, aut ipsum organum est speculum ipsi anime, aut potentia mirror and this is one organic part which is a mirror to the other cognoscitive
sensitiva potentie intellective, aut intellectus possibilis intellectui agenti, aut part; or the organ is a mirror to the soul itself, or the sensitive power [is a mirror]
io forsan ipsamet indivisibilis anima est speculum sibi ipsi. E st etiam ibi ali­ to the intellective power, or the possible intellect [a mirror] to the agent intellect,
quid formans ve l efficiens speciem in anima et illuminans eam, et illud ali- or perhaps the very indivisible soul is a mirror to itself. (4) There is also something
quotiens est ab intra, sicut accidit quibusdam sompniantibus et freneticis vel there which forms or effects the species in the soul and illuminates i t ; and that is
infirmis. Sed per hoc precise non habetur vera et propria visio futurorum vel sometimes from within as happens to people w ho are dreaming or w ho are in a
aliter occultorum, quia non est probabile visionem talium causari nisi aut ab frenzy or w ho are sick. But in this case a true and proper vision o f future or other­
i5 ipsis rebus visis aut a causis earum aut ab aliquo eas precognoscente. E t wise hidden events is not had exactly, because it is improbable that a vision o f such
visum est quibusdam quod hoc fit per irradiationem rei vise super ipsam sorts is caused by anything except (1) the things seen or (2) things that are them­
animam aut econverso. Sed impossibile est rem futuram radios emittere sive selves the causes o f the things seen, or (3) something [separate] that precognizes the
recipere, quia non est nec aliquod vestigium reliquisse quia non fuit. E t quo­ things seen. A n d it has seemed to some people that such a vision takes place by an
niam res presens tempore et absens loco non alio m odo visionis inspicitur irradiation o f the thing seen upon the soul or vice versa. But it is impossible that a
20 ab anima quam futura, sequitur quod huiusmodi visio non fit per irradia­ future thing emits or receives rays, for no vestige remains as it has not yet existed.
tionem rei vise super animam aut ipsius anime super rem visam. Hec igitur A n d since a thing present in time and absent in space is not seen b y the soul
illustratio fit a causis rei vise, sicut ab influentia celi, aut a substantiis separatis through any mode other than that o f a future vision, it follows that a vision o f this
cognoscentibus et divinis, quod est verisimilius; et ob hoc talis visio dici­ sort does not take place b y an irradiation o f the thing seen upon the soul or o f the
tur divinatio. D icit enim Tullius in libro de natura deorum quod presensio soul upon the thing seen. Therefore the [aforesaid] illumination [of the species in
25 futurorum m ovit antiquos ad ponendum deos et fuit unum de quatuor the soul] takes place either as the result o f things that are the causes o f the thing
principalibus mediis quibus devenerunt in notitiam deitatis. Talis igitur seen, such as an influence from the heavens, or it takes place as the result o f separate
visio causatur ab intelligentiis seu angelis bonis vel malis aut immediate a and divine cognizing substances, w hich is more probable. It is by reason o f this
I .x l: B V L latter possibility that such a vision is called “ divination.” For Cicero says in the
[ P M ] v ici* [ G ]
1 de causis om. V 14 aliter V [A F P S ] om. [ N M G ] aliorum
book On the Nature of the Gods that the presentiment o f future things m oved the
2 ulteriores: ulteriores al’ (alibi) altiores E B L [ E ] alteri [ ? C ] j aut om. L ancients to posit gods and that it was one o f the four principal means b y which they
altiores [ E ] 15 eos L came into know ledge o f deity.1 Therefore, such a vision is caused by intelligences,
3 quia om. [ F M P ] / tamen V [ A E F M P G ] 16 irradiationem: evadiationem (?) V
om. [ C J c u m L ? B [ N S ] 17 mittere E
5 potest dici tr. L [ E ] / aliquid: et aliquid 18 quia2: videtur quia E
L [ N E ] / aspicitur B 23 et1: ac B j et2 om. V / visio: divisio V
6 aliquid: et aliquid L [ E N P F C ] / quo: 24 Tulius [S J / presensio [ E G ; cf. C ic .] pre­
quod L [ E N ] sensio alibi presensatio E presentatio vel
7 per:inE /rE y presensio [ N J presentia B [ S J presentatio
8 est: et est E V precognitio [ P F M C ] presencio [ A ] “ Cleanthes quidem noster quattuor de causis
r .x i
9 possibilis: passibilis[ G ] 26 quibus: quod E / deitatis B [ E A G ] di­ dixit in animis hominum informatas deorum
1 D e natura deorum, II, 5, Sect. 13. The argu­
I o Est etiam B V vel est L / ib i: illius B vinitatis L V [ F N C ] trinitatis et deitatis esse notiones. Primam posuit eam de qua modo
ment from auguries to the existence of gods is
II species E [ P J trinitatis et divinitatis/"M ] veritatis[S J dixi, quae orta esset ex praesensione rerum fu­
briefly noted in II, Sect. 12, and then is fol­
12 intra B V [ A N F C S ] intellectu L [ E ] intus I igitur: ergo B turarum.”
lowed by the passage to which Oresme refers:
 Z-JO
D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum Part II, Chapter i 271

D eo, de quo scriptum est in libro Danielis quod “ ipse revelat profunda et or by good or bad angels, or immediately by G od , o f whom it has been written in
abscondita, et novit in tenebris constituta.” the book o f Daniel2 that “ He revealeth deep and hidden things and knoweth what
is in darkness.”

Incipit secunda pars Here begins the second part

huius tractatus de difformitate of this tract and it treats of the difformity
successivorum of successive things

[II.i] Capitulum primum de duplici difformitate motus Il.i On the double difformity o f motion

5 Omnis motus successivus subiecti divisibilis habet partes et est divisibilis
uno modo secundum divisionem et extensionem seu continuitatem mobilis,
alio modo secundum divisibilitatem et durationem seu continuitatem tem­
poris, tertio m odo saltem ymaginative secundum gradus et intensionem
velocitatis. A prima autem continuitate dicitur motus magnus vel parvus, a
io secunda brevis aut longus, a tertia velox aut tardus. Habet itaque motus
duplicem extensionem, unam subiectivam et aliam temporalem, et habet
unam intensionem. D ue autem extensiones possunt ymaginari quodam
m odo orthogonaliter seinvicem ad modum crucis intersecare, ita quod ex­
tensio durationis diceretur longitudo et extensio subiectiva vocaretur
15 latitudo, intensio vero posset vocari altitudo ipsius motus seu .velocitatis.
Sed si iuxta premissa m 3 0 capitulo prime partis intensio velocitatis appel­
laretur eius latitudo, tunc utraque extensionum ad intensionem comparata
poterit dici longitudo et sic velocitas habebit duplicem longitudinem sicut
habet duplicem extensionem, et in utraque istarum extensionum potest in-
20 tensio velocitatis multipliciter variari. E t quoniam difformitas oritur ex eo
E very successive motion o f a divisible subject has parts and is divisible in one
way according to the division and extension or continuity o f the mobile, in an­
other w ay according to the divisibility and duration or continuity o f time, and in a
third w ay— at least in imagination— according to the degree and intensity o f veloci­
ty. From its first continuity motion is said to be “ great” or “ small” ; from its sec­
ond, “ short” or “ lon g,” and from its third, “ sw ift” or “ slow .” A n d so m otion has
tw o extensions, one that pertains to the subject and the other that pertains to time,
and one intensity. N o w the tw o extensions can be imagined in a certain w ay as
mutually intersecting at right angles in the manner o f a cross,1 so that the extension
o f duration ought to be said to be “ longitude” and the extension in subject ought to
be called “ latitude,” while the intensity could be called the “ altitude” o f this motion
or velocity. But according to what was premised in the third chapter o f the first
part, if intensity o f velocity were to be called its “ latitude,” then each o f the exten­
sions in relationship to intensity could be called “ longitude,” and so velocity w ill
have a double longitude just as it has a double extension, and in each o f these ex­
tensions the intensity o f velocity can be varied in multiple ways. A n d since dif-

28 post Danielis add. [ G ] 30 ( !) capitulo cipalis et [ G ] Explicit prima pars de inten­

28-29 de ipse... constituta scr. mg. B in (?) sione qualitatum 2 D aniel 2:22. E .i
Dani’ 2 et mg. A Daniel 28 ( !) / et abs­ 1 See the Commentary, Il.i, lines 12-13.
condita om. B [ P J T it. et I I . i: B V L
zcf et om. iL I e t . . . constituta om. [ C ] sed add. 1-3 Incipit (om. L ) . . . successivorum B L [ A ]
et sic est finis illius capituli et per conse­ 5 subiecti: sive L 12 D u e : que (?) E
om. V [ N ] Incipit secunda [ F M P ] Secun­
quens totius tractatus / post constituta add. 6 extensionem et divisionem L / continua­ 13 ortogonaliter B [ S G ] / se-: seu E / seinvi­
da pars de figuratione et potentia successi­
[ E ] Explicit prima pars huius tractatus tionem V cem tr. V p o s t crucis
vorum [ G ] Secunda pars particularis mg.
deo gratias et add. [ P F M ] Explicit prima 7 et: temporis et L 15 posset B V [ A F C M ] potest L [ E N S G J
[ C 7 Incipit pars secunda [ E ] secunda pars
pars huius operis et [ A ] explicit prima mg. [ S ] Secunda pars [ J ] 7-8 temporis: eiusdem L possit [ P ]
pars et [ N ] E t sic finitur prima pars prin­ 4 duplici om. E 10 aut1-2: vel E 16 intensio: in tempore [ P F M ]
 272 D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum Part II, Chapter ii 273

quod intensio varie extenditur, inde sequitur quod motus sive velocitas
potest habere duplicem difformitatem vel etiam uniformitatem duplicem:
unam secundum partes vel extensionem mobilis, que proprie dicitur uni­
formitas aut difformitas; aliam vero secundum partes vel durationem tempo-
25 ris, que proprie dicitur regularitas vel irregularitas. Habet ergo motus
ratione subiecti uniformitatem vel difformitatem et ratione temporis sive
secundum tempus regularitatem vel irregularitatem. E t secundum hoc dice­
retur quod motus celi est difformis et est regularis, motus vero gravis deor­
sum potest esse econtrario uniformis et irregularis et etiam potest esse uni-
30 formis et regularis vel difformis et irregularis. Sed non est possibile quod
motus circularis sit uniformis. Verumptamen in sequendo modum loquendi
consuetum vocabo quandoque improprie regularitatem nomine uniformita­
tis et irregularitatem nomine difformitatis, sed cum determinatione noti-
ficante concomitante vel prima.
formity arises from the fact that intensity is variously extended, so it follows that
motion or velocity can have double difformity or even double uniform ity: one ac­
cording to the parts or extension o f the mobile— which is properly called “ uni­
form ity” or “ difformity” — and the other according to the parts or duration o f time
— which is properly called “ regularity” or “ irregularity.” 2 Therefore, m otion has
“ uniformity” or “ difformity” by reason o f subject, and “ regularity” or “ irregular­
ity” by reason of, or according to, time. A n d according to this it ought to be said
that the m otion o f the heavens is “ difform” and “ regular,” while the motion o f a
heavy body downward can be contrariwise “ uniform ” and “ irregular;” and it also
can be “ uniform ” and “ regular,” or “ difform” and “ irregular.” But it is not pos­
sible for circular m otion to be “ uniform .” H owever, in follow ing the customary
manner o f speaking, I shall sometimes improperly call “ regularity” by the name o f
“ uniformity” and “ irregularity” by the name o f “ difformity,” but I shall do so with
an accompanying or prior remark acknowledging this.3

[Il.ii] Capitulum 2m de tempore, quid sit et quod non Il.ii On time: its nature and its non-difformity
est difforme

Primum omnium successivorum est tempus— ymmo tempus in una sui The first o f all successive things is time. In fact, time, in one signification o f it, is
significatione est ipsamet successio morosa rerum mutabilium secundum itself the enduring succession1 o f mutable things according to before and after, or
5 prius et posterius seu earum duratio successiva. N ec tempus sic sumptum it is the successive duration o f these things. But time assumed in this fashion is not
est motus sed est successio ipsius motus vel mobilis. Nam et si omnia the motion but is the succession o f the motion or movable thing. For even if all
quiescerent, adhuc esset tempus; aut si omnia mota moverentur velocius things were at rest, still time w ould exist; or if all things in m otion were m oved
quam nunc moventur, non tamen velocitaretur tempus. E st itaque tempus more quickly than they are now m oved, still the time w ould not be quickened.
secundum istam significationem quoddam accidens de predicamento quando, A nd so according to this signification time is a certain accident o f the category
o N ec est idem quod res temporalis, nec tamen est res separabilis a re tempora­ “ when.” N or is time identical w ith a “ temporal thing.” [But if not identical w ith a
li, quia sine tali re non potest absque implicatione contradictionis existere, temporal thing] still it is not a thing separable from a temporal thing, for it could not
nec ab ea potest separari etiam per divinam potentiam absolutam. Unde Iexist in the absence o f such a temporal thing without implying a contradiction.2
proprie loquendo tempus sic sumptum non est aliqua res sed est modus rei, I N or can it be separated from a temporal thing even by divine absolute power.
1 Whence properly speaking time so assumed is not some thing but is rather a mode
23 partes B V [ A N G ] partem L [ E P F M C S ] et difformis [ E ]
24 aut: seu V / partem[ P F M S C J 30 vel: et etiam [ E ] / v e l... irregularis om.
2 Ibid., lines 23-25. I F it
25 ergo B igitur L V [ F ] (sed hab. M )
3 Ibid., lines 33-34. 1 See the Commentary, Il.ii, line 4.
27-28 dicitur L 31 sequendo: sumpto B 2 Ibid., lines 10-11. *2
5
4
3
28 celi om. B 32 improprie om. E
29 econtrario V [ P S ] e9° B L [ N G J econverso 34 -ficante B V [A G ] -ficate L -ficatione
[ E ] econtra [ A M ] contrariis [ F ] contra­ [ E S G ] -fite [ P F N M ] j concomitante vel I l.ii: B V L 7 mota om. V
rius [ C ] / post irregularis add. L [ N J seu V L [ E N G ] concomittante vel [ A ] con­ 2 est B [ F A ; cf. tab. cont.] sit V L [ G ] significationem B V [ F M P S G ] acceptio­
regularis et [ E ] seu et regularis / potest: comitate vel B concomitantem vel [ S ] 3 ymmo tempus: tamen motus L cum tem­ nem L [ E N ] acceptionem seu significa­
posset V communicant cum [ M ] communicanter pus [ E ] tionem [ A ] figurationem ? [ C ]
29-30 et2... vel: sive f A ] j uniformis... regula­ c u m fP F C ] 4 mutabilium: mobilium L [ E ] 1 o res2 B V [ F M A P C S ] om. L [ E N G J
ris: regularis et uniformis L [ N J regularis 5 eorum L
 274 D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum
sicut Aristoteles dicit quod accidens non est ens sed est entis, scilicet
i5 dispositio entis. Ideo tempus istud dicitur ens vel res equivoce, nec est
significabile simpliciter incomplexe ad modum substantie sed est significa­
bile complexe et hoc mentali complexione imperfecta. Quam vis sit de
numero eorum que secundum nullam complexionem perfectam dicuntur,
ut dicit Aristoteles, et magis proprie convenit sibi significari per sincathegore-
20 matica sicut per adverbia temporis quam per nomina, sed propter necessita­
tem locutionis oportet illud nominaliter appellare.
Huiusmodi igitur duratio sive successio— quomodocunque vocetur— non
est aliqualiter intensa sed tantummodo extensa secundum prius et posterius.
E t quoniam dictum est in capitulo precedenti quod difformitas provenit ex
25 eo quod intensio diversimode est extensa, idcirco tempus sic dictum nullo
m odo est difforme nec etiam proprie uniforme, sicut etiam tempus non
dicitur velox vel tardum. Verumptamen improprie tempus potest dici
uniforme quoniam illa duratio que tempus est modo predicto non mensura­
tur proprie nisi per motum uniformem, id est, regularem; propter quod in
30 alia significatione apud Aristotelem usitata tempus dicitur de motu illo quo
talis morosa duratio prius dicta convenienter mensuratur a nobis, scilicet
de motu celi. Ideo quedam nomina significantia revolutiones celi et partes
earum dicuntur nomina significantia tempus, sicut hora, dies, mensis, annus,
et sic de aliis. E t quoniam per unam talem revolutionem vel partem eius
35 totum unum magnum motum mensuramus vel numeramus ut dicendo
mille anni sunt,” “ mille dies sunt,” et sic de aliis, hinc est quod tempus
dicitur numerus motus. Rursum cum idem motus celi sufficiat ad mensuran­
dum omnes durationes rerum mutabilium que sunt simul seu quarum una
non est prius quam altera, ideo secundum hoc dicitur quod idem est tempus
40 in celo, in mari, et in terra. Tempus vero isto modo sumptum, licet sit idem
quod motus qui est uniformis vel difformis, tamen motus non secundum
difformitatem eius mensurat durationem, et propter hoc motus quamvis sit
tempus, esto etiam quod nullum aliud tempus esset, tamen quia nomine
temporis non connotatur aliqua intensio et intensio requiritur ad uniformi-
45 tatem et difformitatem, ideo quomodocunque sit tempus nullo modo
dicitur difforme, nec proprie uniforme.
14 Aristoteles dicit B L [ A F M N ] tr. ta [ G ]
V [ E P C S G ] I est2 B L [ N S C J om.
22 quomodocunque B [F M P S ]
V [ A F M P G ] ens [ E ] modo L [ E A G ] quocunque V [ N C ]
15 ens vel res L [ E N F M C P ] res vel ens 25 diversimode est tr. L [ E N ]
B V [ S G J res aut ens [ A ] 27 vel B V [ N M S J aut L [ E F P G ] sive [ A ]
16 modum: nodum A neque [ C ] / potest: posset V [ A G ]
18 que: que etiam L [ E N ] 30 usitata tr. V ante apud
19-20 sincatheca V f P M J sinthata B [ F ] sin- 31 convenientius L [ E N J
cathegoreunta L sinkata [ E C ] sincaca [S J 32-33 nomina.. .earum om. L [ E ]
sincata [ A ] sinchategca [ N ] sincategreun- 33 m t m \ s L V [ N P E ] om. B [ A S F C G ]
Part II, Chapter ii 275
o f a thing, just as Aristotle says that an accident is not being but is of being, that is, a
disposition o f being.3 Therefore this “ time” is said to be a being or a thing [only]
equivocally. N or is it capable o f signification in a completely uncomplex way in the
manner o f substance, but is rather capable o f signification [only] in a complex w ay
and, at that, by an imperfect mental complex. A lthough it is one o f those things
which are spoken o f according to no perfect complex, as Aristotle says,4 and it is
more properly fitting that it be given signification by syncategorematic terms like
the temporal adverbs than by nouns, still because o f the exigency o f speech it is
necessary to speak o f it by means o f a noun.5
Therefore, duration or succession o f this kind— in whatever w ay it m ight be
called— is not somehow increased in intensity, but only extended according to before
and after. A n d since it has been said in the preceding chapter that difformity arises
from the fact that intensity is diversely extended, therefore time so stated is in no
way “ difform” or even properly “ uniform ,” as time also is not said to be “ quick”
or “ slow .” 6 H ow ever, time can be said improperly to be uniform, since that dura­
tion which is time in the aforesaid way is not properly measured except by uni­
form m otion, i.e. regular motion. A ccordingly, in another signification used by
Aristotle, time is spoken o f from the m otion by which the previously mentioned
enduring duration is conveniently measured by us, namely, from the m otion o f
the heavens.7 Therefore, certain nouns signifying revolutions or parts o f revolu­
tions o f the heavens are said to be nouns signifying time, as “ hour,” “ day,”
“ m onth,” “ year,” and so on. A n d since by such a revolution or its part w e measure
or number a complete large motion, as when we say “ there are one thousand years,”
or “ there are one thousand days,” etc., hence it is that time is said to be “ the num­
ber o f m otion.” Further, since the same m otion o f the heavens suffices for measur­
ing all the durations o f mutable things which are simultaneous, or o f w hich one is
not prior to another, therefore it is accordingly said that the time is the same in the
heavens, on the sea, or on earth.8 But although time assumed in this w ay is iden­
tified with m otion w hich is uniform or difform, still m otion does not measure dura­
tions by reason o f its difformity. A n d according to this, although m otion is time
and it is assumed also that no other time w ould exist, still, because by the noun
“ time” intensity is not connotated and intensity is required for uniformity and
difformity, therefore [we conclude that] in whatever way time exists, in no w ay is
it said to be “ difform,” or, [even] properly, “ uniform .”
3 Ibid., line 14. 6 Ibid., lines 26-27.
quocunque
4 Ibid., lines 17-19. 7 Ibid., lines 27-32.
s Ibid., lines 19-21. 8Ibid., lines 39-40.
36 mille1: tot L [ E N ] / sunt1 om. L rationes L [ E ]
37 Rursum: Rursus A / cum: tam V 43 aliud tempus tr. V
41 tamen: et tamen L 44 temporis: motus L [ E ]
42 difformitatem: diversitatem difformitatis 45 ideo: et ideo A
[ P F M ] diversitatem difformitas [ C ] / du­ 46 proprie: etiam L [ E ] etiam proprie [ M P ]
 276 D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum Part II, Chapter iii/iv 2 77

[Il.iii] Capitulum 3m de quantitate intensionis velocitatis Il.iii On the quantity o f the intensity of velocity

Cum utraque uniformitas motus primo capitulo posita consistat in inten­
sionis equalitate et utraque difformitas ex inequalitate proveniat premitten-
dum est penes quid attendatur quantitas gradualis intensionis ipsius veloci-
5 tatis. Verumptamen circa velocitatem tria sibi invicem propinqua possunt
considerari. Unum est quantitas ipsius velocitatis totalis pensatis intensione
et extensione, et de hoc dicetur in tertia parte huius tractatus que erit de
mensuris qualitatum et velocitatum. A liud quoque potest ibi considerari,
scilicet denominatio qua subiectum dicitur tale fieri velocius aut tardius, de
io quo etiam dicetur in capitulo sequenti. Tertium est ipsa gradualis intensio
que facit ad istud propositum, et de qua nunc dicendum est. D ico ergo quod
universaliter ille gradus velocitatis est simpliciter intensior sive maior quo in
tempore equali plus acquiritur vel deperditur de illa perfectione secundum
quam fit motus. V erbi gratia, in motu locali ille gradus velocitatis est maior
i5 et intensior quo plus pertransiretur de spatio vel de distantia, et in altera-
tione similiter ille gradus velocitatis est maior quo plus acquireretur vel
deperderetur de intensione qualitatis, et ita in augmentatione quo plus
acquireretur de quantitate et in diminutione quo plus deperderetur de quan­
titate vel de extensione, et ita generaliter ubicunque reperiretur motus.
Since each uniformity o f motion posited in the first chapter consists in equality
o f intensity and each difformity arises from inequality [of intensity] w e ought to set
out first [the measure o f gradual intensity, i.e. w e ought to specify] w ith what the
gradual intensity o f the velocity is measured. H owever, in the matter o f velocity
three closely related ideas can be considered. One is the total quantity o f the veloci­
ty taking into account both intensity and extension. I shall speak o f this in the
third part o f this tract, which w ill be concerned w ith the measures o f qualities and
velocities. Another thing to be considered in connection w ith velocity is the denom­
ination in terms o f which a subject is said to become such a kind more quickly or
more slowly. I shall also speak o f this in the follow ing chapter. Third, there is the
gradual intensity [of velocity]. This is the subject which must now be considered.
Therefore, I say universally that that degree o f velocity is absolutely more intense
or greater by means o f which in an equal time more is acquired or lost o f that
perfection according to w hich the motion takes place.1 For example, in local mo­
tion that degree o f velocity is greater and more intense by means o f which more
space or distance w ould2 be traversed. In alteration, similarly, that degree o f
velocity is greater by means o f which more intensity o f quality w ould be acquired
or lost; and so in augmentation, by means o f which more quantity is acquired, and
in diminution, by means o f which more quantity or extension is lost. A n d so gen­
erally [our definition w ould hold] wherever m otion w ould be found.

[Il.iv] Capitulum 4m de diversis modis velocitatis Il.iv On diverse ways o f [considering] velocity

N on est pretermittendum quod idem motus vel fluxus multis nominibus
diversimode connotantibus appellatur et secundum hoc velocitas denomi­
nans diversimode attenditur sive mensuratur, ita quod quantitas intensionis
gradualis multis modis assignatur, quibus tamen convenit descriptio prius
dicta in capitulo precedenti.
V erbi gratia, primo in motu circulari mobile dicitur m overi et dicitur
W e must not overlook the fact that the same motion or flux is called by many
names that connote a variety o f things, and, according to the denomination, veloci­
ty is attended or measured in a variety o f ways, so that the quantity o f gradual in­
tensity is assigned in diverse ways, w ith which, however, the definition stated
earlier in the preceding chapter is in accord.
For example, first, in circular motion a mobile is said “ to be m oved” and it is

I l.iii: B V L [FM P]
1 intensionis velocitatis tr. L [ E ] 14 velocitatis: motus vel velocitatis [ F M P J
2 primo: ex primo L [ E N ] / posita om. L [ E ] 14-15 maior et intensior B [ S G ] maior (quo
I l.iii 2 Ibid., line 15.
8 quoque: etiam L plus acquiretur aut deperderetur de inten­
1 See the Commentary, Il.iii, lines n - 1 4 .
9 aut: vel L [ G ] sive [ A ] sione) et intensior [ A ] maior vel intensior
11 istud V [ E S N ] illud L [ P M ] i<> B [ A F C G ] [ F M P ] maior sive intensior [ C ] intensior
I et B [ A F M P C S G ] om. L V [ E N ] / qua: et maior L [ E N ] intensior sive maior V C ] reperiuntur L 3-4 denominans: denominata L [ E ] deno­
quod L / dicenda B / ergo B V [ A P C G M ] 16 velocitatis om. V minata nominans [ N ]
igitur L [ E N F S ] 17 de:in B I l.iv : B V L 4 post quod add. B quantitas intensionis sive
i i - i 2 quod universaliter tr. L [ E N J 18 acquireretur om. V 2 idem: idem estZ. mensuratur ita quod
1 2 universaliter tr. [ F M P ] ante est / quo: alio 19 reperireturB V [ A F S G ] reperiturfE N M P 2-3 nominibus diversimode tr. L V 7 movere V
 278 D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum Part II, Chapter iv 279

circuire. Intensio autem velocitatis motionis attenditur penes spatium said “ to circuit.” N o w intensity o f the velocity o f m otion is attended with [or is
lineare quod illo gradu pertransiretur. Sed intensio gradus velocitatis measured by] the linear space which w ould be traversed by [something in motion
10 circuitionis attenditur penes angulos circa centrum descriptos. Inde con­ at] that degree. But the intensity o f the degree o f circuit velocity [i.e. angular veloc­
tingit quod aliquod mobile ad aliud comparatum circulariter motum velo­ ity] is attended w ith [or is measured by] the angles described about the center.1 So it
cius m ovetur et tamen minus velociter circuit, sicut forsan Mars velocius happens that one body in circular m otion in comparison to another “ is m oved”
m ovetur quam sol et hoc motu proprio propter magnitudinem circuli more quickly yet “ circuits” less quickly, as perhaps Mars is m oved in its proper
descripti et tamen sol velocius circuit et velocius revolvitur circa centrum. [curvilinear] m otion more quickly than the sun because o f the [larger] magnitude
15 Contingit etiam ex hoc quod celum m ovetur difformiter sed circuit uniformi­ o f the circle described and yet the sun circuits and revolves about the center more
ter. Nam partes que sunt versus polos tardius moventur quam alie et tamen quickly. It also happens from this that the heavens are “ m oved” difformly but
equevelociter circueunt sicut et alie. A strologi vero magis attendunt ad “ circuit” uniformly. For the parts w hich are near the poles are m oved more slow ly
velocitatem circuitionis quam ad velocitatem motionis. than the other parts and yet they all circuit w ith equal velocity. Astronomers in
Item in motu recto, verbi gratia, in motu descensus, velocitas motus fact pay more attention to angular velocity than to the velocity o f [curvilinear] m o­
20 attenditur penes spatium pertransitum. Velocitas autem descensus attendi­ tion.
tur penes appropinquationem ad centrum. Ideo possibile est quod A et B A lso, in rectilinear m otion, as in m otion o f descent, the velocity o f “ m otion” is
equevelociter moveantur et tamen non equevelociter descendant, eo quod attended w ith [i.e. is measured by] the space traversed. But velocity o f “ descent”
A m ovebitur per lineam rectam ad centrum et B per lineam transversalem, is attended b y [its] approach to the center.2 Therefore, it is possible for A and B “ to
et ideo A descendet velocius quam B et tamen B equevelociter movetur. be m oved” with equal speed and yet not “ to descend” equally quickly if A is
25 Similiter cum descensus attendatur penes proportionem approxim ations moved along a straight line to the center and B along a transversal course; and
ad centrum, continget quod illud quod uniformiter m ovebitur sive regulari­ therefore A descends more quickly than B but B has the same velocity o f motion.
ter per lineam directam a centro difformiter descendet, quia velocius ap­ Similarly, when descent is [considered] a function o f the proportionate nearness to
propinquabit centro de prope quam de longe, semper tamen stante equali the center, it [could] happen that something w hich w ill be m oved uniform ly or
velocitate motus. regularly3 on a straight line drawn from the center w ill [however] descend non-
30 Rursum in alteratione contingit quod eadem alteratio est dealbatio et uniformly, because it w ill approach the center [proportionately] more quickly
assimilatio et tamen subiectum velocius dealbatur quam alteri assimilatur when it is near the center than when it is far from the center, and yet it continues
aut econverso. Y m m o aliquando subiectum intenditur in albedine et remit­ always to have the same velocity o f motion.
titur in similitudine, et aliquando econtra, et ita de aliis. A gain, in alteration it happens that the same [motion of] alteration is a
Item in augmento velocitas acquisitionis attenditur penes quantitatem “ whitening” and an “ assimilation,” and the subject is more quickly “ whitened”
35 acquisiti sed velocitas maiorationis seu augmentationis attenditur penes than it is “ assimilated,” or vice versa. In fact, sometimes the subject is increased in
proportionem magnitudinis que est in principio motus ad magnitudinem intensity w ith respect to whiteness but remitted in respect to similitude, and some­
que est in fine, et ita proportionaliter de partibus augmentationis. Ideo ali­ times vice versa, and similarly for other alterations.
quod mobile quandoque velocius acquirit magnitudinem quam illud aliud In augmentation, m oreover, the velocity o f acquisition is attended w ith [i.e.
is measured by] the quantity o f that which is acquired, but the velocity or [pro­
9 illo: isto V portionate] increase or augmentation is attended with [i.e. measured by] the ratio
25 descensus: velocitas descensus L [ E ] / at­
12 moveretur B
tenditur B I approximationis: appropin­ o f the magnitude in the beginning o f the m otion to the magnitude at the end, and
15 sed: et L quationis L [ C ]
17 circuenturZ.
thus proportionally for the parts o f the augmentation. Therefore, one mobile some-
27 a centro: ad centrum L [ E ]
20-21 penes... attenditur om. V 27-28 appropinquabit centro: centro appro­
22 et: et utrunque deorsum et L [ E J et tamen pinquat E
hoc deorsum [ N J / eo : scilicet L [ E ] 30 alteratio est: albatio et E albatio est [ E N ]
2 3 rectam L V [ E N P F M C ] directam 34 Item: Item dicitur L
B[A SG ] II.iv
34-35 penes.. .attenditur om. [ F ] sedhab. [ AI]
24 descendit V / et L [ E G ] quod V [ A N ] 1 See the Commentary, II.iv, lines 7-10. uniformiter movebitur sive regulariter, see my
37 proportionabiliter L
quoque B cum [ F A I P C S ] / moveatur 2 Ibid., lines 19-29. earlier remarks in the Commentary, II.i, lines
38 illud B [ N ] om. [ E ] istud L V id [ A S G ]
[F M P C S ] unum /T M PC ] 3 For the significance o f the expression 23- 255 33- 34 -
 28o D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum Part II, Chapter v 281

demonstratum et tamen tardius augmentatur, sicut arbor magna que crescit
40 in die de duobus digitis et arbor parva de uno digito, magna enim arbor
velocius acquirit magnitudinem et tardius augmentatur. Aliquando autem
contingit econverso. Unde patet quod si velocitas acquisitionis quantitatis
est uniformis, velocitas augmentationis erit difformis et etiam econverso; et
ita conformiter de diminutione. Simili modo in rarefactione idem fluxus est
45 motus partium seu punctorum ipsius mobilis et rarefactio eiusdem et tamen
si rarefactio est uniformis motus localis partium vel punctorum erit in
velocitate difformis.
Verumptamen universaliter in omnibus ille gradus velocitatis est intensior
sive maior quo in tempore equali subiectum fit magis tale secundum illam
50 denominationem qua dicitur velociter acquiri, quecunque sit illa. Verbi
gratia, gradus velocitatis descensus est maior quo subiectum mobile magis
descendit vel descenderet si continuaretur. Similiter gradus circuitionis est
maior quo magis circuiret, et gradus as similationis maior quo fieret similius,
et gradus augmentationis maior quo fieret maius in equali tempore, et sic de
55 omnibus aliis. E t sicut iam dictum est secundum multiplices denomina­
tiones multipliciter variatur sive denominatur velocitas, et per consequens
di versificatur uniformitas atque difformitas. Verum quia ad quedam est
motus per se ut potissime ad qualitatem et ubi, ad alia vero per accidens ut
ad alias denominationes premissas sicut sunt proportiones, relationes et
60 similia. Ideo principaliter intendo dicere de uniformitate et difformitate
motus localis et alterationis. D e aliis tamen posset dici conformiter sicut
dicetur de istis.
times demonstratively acquires magnitude more quickly than another and yet is
augmented more slowly. A n example is that o f a large tree which grow s in one day
an amount o f tw o digits and a small tree [which grows in the same time] an amount
o f one digit. For the large tree more quickly acquires magnitude and [yet] is more
slow ly augmented. But sometimes the reverse happens. W hence it is evident that i f
the velocity o f acquisition o f magnitude is uniform, the velocity o f augmentation
w ill be non-uniform and also vice versa. T he same thing holds for diminution.
Similarly in rarefaction the same flux is represented both by the m otion o f the parts
or points o f the mobile and by the rarefaction o f the same body, and yet if the rare­
faction is uniform the local motion o f the parts or points w ill be difform in velocity.
H owever, [in spite o f all these distinctions it can be said] universally, in all
things, that that degree o f velocity is more intense or greater by means o f which in
an equal time the subject becomes more o f the kind according to whose denomi­
nation the velocity o f acquisition is defined— whatever that particular denomina­
tion may be. For example, [that] degree o f the velocity o f descent is greater by
means o f which a mobile descends more [in the same time], or w ould descend more
if it were continued. Similarly [that] degree o f circuiting is greater by means o f
which something w ould circuit more [in the same time], and the degree o f assim­
ilation is greater by means o f which something becomes more like something else
[in the same time], and [that] degree o f augmentation is greater b y means o f which
something becomes larger in the same time, and similarly for all other cases. A nd
so, as now has been said, velocity is denominated, or is varied in many ways ac­
cording to many denominations. Consequently uniformity and difformity are
diversified. This is true because, with respect to certain things— chiefly quality and
place— there is m otion per se; while, w ith respect to others, such as those things
with other denominations premised, like ratios, relations, and similar things, there
is motion in an accidental way. I intend, therefore, to speak chiefly o f the uniformi­
ty and difformity o f local m otion and alteration. H owever, we could speak in the
same way concerning the others as we speak o f these.

[II.v] C ap itu lu m $m de q u ib u sd am aliis su ccession ib u s in m o tu I I .v O n certain o th er successions in m o tio n

Preter triplicem divisibilitatem vel successionem repertam in motu et in In addition to the threefold divisibility or succession found in motion and
primo capitulo assignatam adhuc possent ymaginari due alie successiones in specified in the first chapter, tw o further successions in motions can be imagined—

39 demonstratum B [ A P F A 1C S ] otn. L [ N J
demonstratur V denominatur [ G ] seu
augmentationem [ E ]
44 Simili m odo: similiter L [ E ]
45 eiusdem: ipsius V
46 ve l: seu L / erit: est L
49 tale: tale aut tantum L
50 velociter B V [ A N S G ] velocitas
L [E P F M C J
51 quo: qua V j subiectum: solum V
52 vel: vel magis L [ E ] / continuaretur: con­
tinuaretur descensus L
53 qu o: quo subiectum mobile L [ E ]
34 maius om. L [ E ] / tempore: tempore maior
proportio ad proportionem L tempore
maior proportio aut minorem aut priorem
[E] 60 principaliter: proportionaliter V
55 omnibus aliis L [ E F M P S C ] aliis in omni­ 62 dicetur tr. L p o s t istis
bus B [ A G ] aliis motibus V aliis [ N ] /
multiplicationes V I I .v .B V L
36 multipliciter om. L [ E ] multiplicitas V 1 in motu L [ A F E G ] et cf. tab. cap.; om. B V
38 ubi: ad ubi V 2 et om. L
59 premissas: predictas V
 282
D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum Part II, Chapter v 283

motu sed tamen reducibiles ad premissas. In motu enim quandoque est these how ever are reducible to those premised. For sometimes in m otion there is
5 successio secundum inceptionem. Verbi gratia, in motu locali possibile est succession according to inception. For example, in local motion it is possible that
quod aliquod mobile totum simul incipiat m overi et possibile est quod the w hole o f some body begins to be m oved at the same rime, but it is possible [at
incipiat m overi pars post partem, sicut si punctus D [Fig. 1 5] ymaginetur another time] that one part begins to be m oved after another. A case in point is if
fluere super mobile A B ita quod pars ipsius mobilis A B pertransita a point [see Fig. 15 ] is imagined to flow over mobile A B so that the part o f mobile
puncto D m oveatur et pars nundum pertransita quiescat donec pertransea-
10 tur a puncto D , sicut esset de virga plicabili que sic inciperet moveri. H oc d
A ----------1------------------------ -------B
autem precise habet locum in motu alterationis ubi reperitur successio secun­
Fig. 15
dum partes quantitativas subiecti ac etiam in generatione forme substan­
Figure in MS B .
tialis materialis; in qua generatione est successio secundum partes quantitati­
vas sive secundum extensionem, non tamen secundum partes graduales et in- A B traversed by point d is m oved and the part not yet traversed remains at rest
15 tensionem, sicut est in generatione ignis. Huiusmodi vero successio assimila- until traversed by point d, as in a pliable rod w hich w ould begin to be m oved in
tur quodam m odo motui locali, sicut patet in exemplo nunc posito de motu this way. But this is precisely what happens in the m otion o f alteration where suc­
puncti D , et quodam modo assimilatur augmentationi secundum hoc quod cession is found according to quantitative parts o f the subject and even in the gen­
continue plus et plus sive maior et maior portio de subiecto movetur, vel eration o f substantial, material form. In such generation there is succession accord­
quod plus est generatum de forma. E t omnis successio que in hoc reperitur ing to quantitative parts, or according to extension, but not how ever according to
20 aut est secundum partes subiecti aut secundum partes temporis aut secun­ gradual parts and intensity. A n example is in the generation o f fire. Succession o f
dum velocitatem istius successionis secundum quod in exemplo posito this kind is assimilated in a certain w ay to local motion, as is evident in the example
punctus D ymaginaretur m overi velocius aut tardius, et sic totum reducitur just posited o f the m otion o f point d, and it is [also] assimilated in a certain w ay to
ad tres di visibilitates in primo capitulo assignatas. Propter quod omnis augmentation since there [i.e., in augmentation] continually more and more, or a
uniformitas sive difformitas que posset in hac successione inveniri reducenda greater and greater portion, o f the subject is m oved or more form is generated.
25 est et continetur sub duobus generibus uniformitatis et difformitatis in primo But every succession which is found in this [type] is (1) according to parts o f the
capitulo iam positis.
subject, or (2) according to parts o f the time, or (3) according to the velocity o f the
A dhuc autem potest ymaginari alia successio, omnis enim velocitas est succession— as, in the example posited, point d w ould be imagined to be m oved
intensibilis et remissibilis. Eius vero continua intensio vocatur velocitatio et more quickly or more slowly. A n d everything thus is reduced to the divisions
hec quidem velocitatio seu augmentatio velocitatis potest fieri velocius aut specified in the first chapter. A ccordingly, every uniformity or difformity which
30 tardius. Unde quandoque contingit quod velocitas intenditur et velocitatio could be found in this kind o f succession is to be reduced to, and is contained in,
remittitur, quandoque vero utraque simul intenditur. E t similiter huiusmodi
the tw o kinds o f uniform ity and difformity already posited in the first chapter.
velocitatio aliquando fit uniformiter et aliquando difformiter et diversimode. There can be imagined one further succession, for every velocity is capable o f
Sed quoniam omnis divisibilitas sive successio que in huiusmodi velocita- being increased in intensity and decreased in intensity. N o w its continuous in­
tione reperitur est aut secundum partes subiecti aut secundum partes tem-
crease in intensity is called acceleration, and indeed this acceleration or augmen­
tation o f velocity can take place more quickly or more slow ly.1 Whence it some­
$ assignatam: ymaginatam V / possunt 19 est generatum B V [ A S ] tr. [ F M P J gene­
L [ N J / ymaginari B L [ A E P C N S G ] assi­ times happens that velocity is increasing and acceleration is decreasing, while some­
ratur L [ E N ]
gnari V [ M ] assignari aut ymaginari [ F ] 21 istius: ipsius L / posito om. E
times both are simultaneously increasing. Similarly acceleration o f this sort some­
4 premissa V 22 ymaginatur-L times takes place uniformly and sometimes non-uniformly and in diverse ways.
5 inceptionem: interruptionem L [ E ] 2 3 tres: tres divisiones vel L But since every divisibility or succession which is found in acceleration o f this
7 si punctus: penes [ F M P C ] 24 potest E I in ... successione om. E sort is according to parts o f the subject, or according to parts o f the time, or ac-
8 pertransita: pertranseat [ F M P C ] 26 iam om. E
9 nondum V
27 alia: una alia E / velocitas: successio V
ix precise L [ E N F C ] precipue V [ A G ] pre- IE v
28 continua om. V
scise [ M ] precie B f P S J 1 See the Commentary, II.v, lines 27-32.
31 quandoque: et quandoque V j vero om. V
14 si v e : materie sive L [ E ] 32 aliquando1 : quandoque E j et om. V
18 zt2L [ A E S G ] a c B V siv e [ F P C ] 33 omnis om. E / divisibilitas: diversitas E j 34-3 5 temporis: corporis [ F M P ]
que: que estZ,
 284 D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum Part II, Chapter vi 285

35 poris aut secundum intensionem gradualem, ex qua trina divisibilitate
duplex oritur uniformitas sive difformitas, ut ostensum est in capitulo primo,
ideo sicut prius omnis uniformitas atque difformitas que potest ex hoc oriri
reducitur ad duo genera supradicta, scilicet ad uniformitatem secundum
partes subiecti aut ad uniformitatem que est secundum partes temporis, et
40 ita de difformitate. D e ea itaque que est secundum partes subiecti mobilis
primo dicatur.
cording to gradual intensity, and from such threefold divisibility arises tw ofold
uniformity or difformity, as was demonstrated in the first chapter, therefore, as
before, every uniformity and difformity which can so arise is reduced to the tw o
above-mentioned kinds, that is, to uniformity and difformity according to parts o f
the subject or uniformity and difformity according to parts o f the time. A n d so let
us first speak o f that which is according to parts o f the subject.

[II.vi] Capitulum 6m de difformitate velocitatis secundum partes II .vi On difformity o f velocity according to the quantitative
quantitativas subiecti parts o f the subject

D e uniformitate subiectiva ac difformitate velocitatum quantum ad earum In regard to the configuration and variation in figures representing uniformity
configurationem et figurarum variationem penitus dicendum est sicut and difformity o f velocities with respect to subject, one should speak completely in
5 dictum est in prima parte huius tractatus de uniformitate et difformitate the same w ay as w e spoke before in the first part o f the tract where the uniform­
permanentium qualitatum, quoniam difformitas velocitatis eodem modo ity and difformity o f permanent qualities were discussed. This is clear since the
potest ymaginari et eodem m odo proportionatur et configuratur et totidem difformity o f velocity can be imagined in the same way, can be proportioned and
ac eisdem modis potest diversificari quot et quibus modis prius fuit ostensa figured in the same way, and can be diversified in as many and in the same ways, as
variari difformitas qualitatum, sicut per terminari ad gradum et ad non it was demonstrated before that the difformity o f qualities is varied. These vari­
10 gradum, per hoc quod quedam est difformitas simplex, alia composita, et ations are, for example: (1) in being terminated at [some] degree or at no degree,
quod composita multipliciter distinguitur, et sic de omnibus differentiis and (2) that some difformity is simple and some composite, and (3) that the com ­
supradictis. posite difformity is distinguishable in many ways, and so on for all the differences
Verbi gratia [Fig. 16], si linea A B moveatur, possibile est quod quilibet mentioned above.
punctus eius alteri comparatus equali velocitate moveatur, scilicet omnia For example [see Fig. 16], if line A B is m oved, it is possible that any point o f it
15 equevelociter, et hoc vel motu locali vel alteratione, et tunc erit velocitas is moved w ith the same velocity as any other point, namely that they are all m oved
secundum partes subiecti uniformis. Similiter possibile est quod velocitas
puncti A sit duplo maior quam velocitas puncti C dividentis A B per me­ c d
A - ------------------- 1--------- 1----------B
dium et velocitas C duplo maior quam velocitas puncti D dividentis
Fig. 16
reliquam medietatem per medium, et sic proportionaliter de aliis punctis, et Figure in MSS B L S G . MS L also has a right triangle with base A B marked.
20 quod nulla sit velocitas in puncto B terminante; et in isto casu erit velocitas
equally fast.1 This is so in either local m otion or alteration. A n d we have then
36 seu E j in L [ E N F M P C S J om. B V [ A G ] liter E
37 atque: sive V velocity uniform according to the parts o f the subject. Similarly, it is possible that
8 prius...ostensa: ostensa fuit prius V
38-39 secundum... uniformitatem om. 9 qualitatis E the velocity o f point A is twice that o f point c (dividing line A B in half) and the
[F M P S C J 10 alia: et alia E et quedam [ N S ] velocity o f c is tw ice that o f point d (dividing the remaining half in half), and so on
39 aut B V [ G ] et L [ E N ] sive [ A ] 11 distinguuntur L [ G ] proportionally for the other points, with there being no velocity in terminal point
41 dicam E 13 post gratia desinit E / s i . . . A B : A B linea E B. In this case the velocity w ill be uniformly difform terminated at no degree in
14 punctus B V 7 A S G J A C D B punctus L [ N J
I I.v i: B V L punctus A C D B [ F M P C ]
3 ac B V [ F M S C G ] et L [ E N P J sive [ A ] 16 subiecti uniformis tr. E / est om. D
4 configurationem: assignationem E figura­ 19 proportionabiliter E
tionem [ A ] 20 isto casu B 1 7 A C G J tr. L [ N J illo casu
5 tractatus om. V / e t: ac E [FM~\ i° casu [SJ alio casu [ P ] II.vi
7 modo om. E / proportionaliter et configura- 1 See the Commentary, II.vi, lines 13-23.
 286 D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum
uniformiter difformis terminata ad non gradum in puncto B, et ipsa est
ymaginabilis per triangulum cuius basis est linea A B et qui est proportiona­
lis in altitudine huic velocitati in intensione. Posset etiam esse una alia veloci­
tas uniformiter difformis terminata utrinque ad gradum et una alia difformi-
25 ter difformis quomodolibet. Exemplum vero nunc positum est de velocitate
lineari que est ymaginabilis per figuram superficialem sicut est qualitas
linearis. E t similiter eodem m odo potest dici de velocitate superficiali et de
corporali quantum ad hoc sicut in prima parte huius dictum est de configura­
tione qualitatum. Omnes etiam notificationes et descriptiones uniformitatis
30 et difformitatis qualitative in prima parte posite capitulis i i ° ,12°, 130 con­
veniunt uniformitati et difformitati velocitatis si eis applicentur et eis pos­
sunt faciliter coaptari.
[ILvii] Capitulum 7m de quadam differentia inter motum localem
et alterationem
E t quamvis omnis species difformitatis possit in motu alterationis reperiri
ac etiam in motu locali, tamen linea recta quacunque difformitate potest
5 alterari ipsa manente recta et similiter curva ipsa manente curva, linea vero
recta non potest m overi localiter velocitate difformiter difformi et manere
recta nisi illa difformitas esset composita ex duabus uniformiter difformibus,
sicut est motus totius dyametri circuli. Sed de ista instantia non est vis. N on
potest itaque linea recta m overi alia difformitate difformi quantum ad partes
10 subiecti; quoniam si ipsius linee A B omnia puncta equevelociter moveantur,
ille motus erit uniformis; si inequaliter, oportet quod illa inequalitas sit
continua et tunc ille motus erit uniformiter difformis et talis est motus semi-
dyametri circuli moti circa centrum immobile, aut quod sit inequalitas dis-
continua que dicitur difformiter difformis. E t hoc non potest esse nisi linea
15 plicetur et curvetur aut frangatur in partibus eius, sicut posset faciliter
demonstrari ex descriptionibus difformitatis positis in capitulo 120 prime
partis; linea vero curva vel fracta secundum variationem difformitatis sue
22-23 proportionabilis V / 130: et i3m0Z.
23 potest L
24 utrinque B [ S G J utrobique V [ N ] utrius- I L v ii : B V L
que L [ A F M P ] 3 possit B V L [ F M P C S ] possint [ A N G ]
26 est ymaginabilis tr. L [ N J 6 manere: remanere L [ N ]
27 posset V / de2 om. L 9 alia: aliqua [ F M P C ]
29 qualitatum B V [ A S G ] qualitatis 14 q u e om. V / dicatur L
L [ N F M P C ] I etiam B V f A S C G J enim 15 et B V [ F M P C G ] aut L [ N S ] sive [ A ] /
L [ N F A IP ] potest L
30 capitulis B V [ A F M S G ] capitulo L [ N P C ] 16 in L I N F M P C J om. B VJA SG ]
Part II, Chapter vii 287
point B , and it is imaginable by a triangle whose base is line A B and which is pro­
portional in altitude to this velocity in intensity. There could also be another
velocity uniformly difform terminated in both extremes at some degree and still
another difformity difform in any way at all. But the example now posited is o f
linear velocity, w hich is imaginable by a surface figure just as is a linear quality.
And, in this regard, we can speak similarly in the same way o f surface velocity and
o f corporeal velocity that we spoke o f the configuration o f qualities in the first
part o f this tract. A lso, all the definitions and points o f know ledge in connection
with qualitative uniformity and difformity posited in chapters eleven, tw elve, and
thirteen in the first part are suitable for uniformity and difformity o f velocity, if
applied to them, and they can be easily adapted to them.
ILvii On a certain difference between local motion and
alteration
A lthough every species o f difformity can be found in motion o f alteration as well
as in local m otion, still a straight line can be altered [in quality] w ith a certain dif­
form ity and yet remain straight and similarly for a curve as it remains a curve, but
a straight line cannot be m oved locally w ith a velocity difformly difform [with
respect to the parts o f the subject] and still remain straight unless that difformity
w ould be composed o f tw o uniformly difform velocities, as w ould be the [case in
the] motion o f the w hole diameter o f a circle [rotating about its center].1 But this
[exceptional] example is o f no moment. A nd so a straight line cannot be m oved
w ith any other difform difformity according to the parts o f the subject. For if al
the points o f line A B are m oved with equal velocity, that motion w ill be uniform ;
if they are m oved w ith unequal velocity, it is necessary either that (1) that inequality
be continuous (and then that motion w ill be uniformly difform and such is the mo­
tion o f a radius o f a circle m oved about an immobile center) or that (2) the inequality
will be discontinuous which is spoken o f as difformly difform. A nd this [latter case]
could only be if the line is bent and curved or broken in its parts, as could be
easily demonstrated from the descriptions o f difformity posited in chapter twelve
o f the first part. N o w a curved or broken line can be m oved w ith many kinds o f
difform difformity depending on the variety in difformity o f its figure. It can also
IL v ii part, the curvilinear velocities o f the points of
1 That is to say, each half o f the diameter is each radius varying uniformly from zero at the
moved with a velocity uniformly difform as to center to a maximum at the end o f the radius.
/ 120 B V [ A M C G ] 22° L z F [ N S ] 140 [ F ] 17 sue: sive.L
 288 D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum Part II, Chapter viii 289

figure multiplici difformitate difFormi potest moveri. Potest etiam m overi be m oved w ith uniform velocity, but it cannot be moved w ith velocity uniformly
velocitate uniformi sed non potest m overi velocitate uniformiter difFormi. difform [as to parts]. For example [see Fig. 17], it is not possible that line A B C D
20 V erbi gratia [Fig. 17], non est possibile quod linea difFormis A B C D movea­ be m oved with a uniform ly difform velocity, as can easily enough be deduced
tur velocitate uniformiter difFormi, ut satis faciliter potest ex predictis per­ from the things said before.
pendi.
Nam omnis linea sive fuerit recta sive curva aut quom odolibet difFormis,
signata in corpore uniformiter moto m ovetur velocitate uniformi, omnis
Fig. 17
25 vero linea recta signata in corpore circulariter m oto sicut in celo m ovetur Figure in MSS B L N S G . The figure is cut off in B . It has only two humps in S G and five humps
velocitate uniformiter difFormi quomodocunque signetur vel saltem veloci­ in L .
tate composita ex duabus uniformiter difFormibus. Omnis autem linea cir­
cularis signata in celo concentrica axi ipsius motus vel cuius centrum est in For every line (whether it is a straight line or a curve or is difform in any way) that
axe motus m ovetur velocitate uniformi. Sed omnis alia linea in celo signata, is designated in a body in uniform motion is itself m oved with uniform velo city;
30 sive sit circularis sive fracta aut qualitercunque curvata, m ovetur velocitate while every straight line designated in a body that is circularly m oved (as in the
difFormiter difFormi. Hec autem que dicta sunt exemplariter de linea intelli- manner o f the heavens) is m oved with any kind o f uniformly difform velocity, or
gantur consimiliter de superficie conformiter figurata, et semper in hoc at least w ith a velocity composed o f tw o uniform ly difform velocities.2 But every
capitulo intellexi de uniformitate et difformitate secundum partes quantita- circular line designated in the heavens which is concentric to the axis o f this motion
tivas subiecti. or whose center is in the axis o f m otion is m oved w ith uniform velocity. But every
other line designated in the heavens (whether it is circular or broken or curved in
any kind o f way) is m oved w ith a velocity difFormly difform. M oreover these things
which have been said by way o f example concerning lines can be similarly under­
[Il.viii] Capitulum 8m de difformitate velocitatum quo ad tempus stood fo r a surface figured in a similar way. A n d always in this chapter I have under­
stood uniform ity and difformity as being with respect to the quantitative parts o f
Omnis velocitas tempore durat. Tem pus itaque sive duratio erit ipsius the subject.
velocitatis longitudo et eiusdem velocitatis intensio erit sua latitudo. E t
quamvis tempus et linea sint incomparabiles in quantitate, tamen nulla pro-
5 portio reperitur inter tempus et tempus que non inveniatur in lineis et
econtra; et per prius reperitur in lineis secundum Aristotelem 6° phisicorum. Il.viii On the difformity of velocities with respect to time
E t similiter est de intensione velocitatis, videlicet quod omnis proportio que
reperitur inter intensionem et intensionem velocitatis reperitur etiam inter E very velocity endures in time. A nd so time or duration w ill be the longitude o f
lineam et lineam, sicut de aliis intensionibus dicebatur in z° capitulo prime the velocity and the intensity o f the same velocity will be its latitude. A n d although
a time and a line are [mutually] incomparable in quantity,1 still there is no ratio
18 difformitate: difformiter V 31-32 intelliguntur V
found as existing between time and time which is not to be found among lines,
18-19 Potest.. .uniformiter: difformiter V 32 consimiliter o m .L / figurata: signata L and vice versa; and it [i.e. ratio] is found originally in lines according to Aristotle
20 quod... difformis: difformis quod L 34 subiecti om. L in the sixth [book] o f the Physics.2 A nd it is the same with respect to the intensity o f
21 ut: et L / predictis B V [ A F S ] dictis
velocity, namely, that every ratio which is found as existing between velocity in­
L [ N A 1P C J predicto [ G ] IL v iii: B V L
tensities is also found between lines, just as was remarked in chapter tw o o f the
2 3 sive1: que L / difformis om. V 1 velocitatum: velocitatum motus L
24 signata: figurata L 3 longitudo ... velocitatis om. V / eius L
25 linea rectatr.Ljcelo: orbe V centro [ C j 4 tamen nulla tr. L
26 quomodocunque B V [ S G ] quomodolibet 5 invenitur L
L [ N A ] quocunque modo [ F M P ] quo­ 6 Aristotelem B V L [ A N C S G ] philosophum
modo [ C ] [ P F C A I ] I 6°: 2 See above, fn. 1. cannot, in the Greek and medieval conception
27 uniformiter difformibus: uniformibus L 7 velocitatum L II.v iii o f ratio, be related by a ratio.
3o sive F [ N F A 1P S G ] sive sit B V [ A ] 1 Since time and a line differ in species, they 2 See the Commentary, Il.viii, lines 3-6.
 290 D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum Part II, Chapter viii 291

10 partis. Ideoque in notitiam difformitatum velocitatum possumus devenire first part concerning the other intensities [of qualities]. Therefore, w e can arrive at
per ymaginationem linearum ac etiam figurarum. knowledge o f the difformities o f velocities by means o f the imagery o f lines and
Signetur ergo gratia exempli una linea recta que sit A B et moveatur D also figures.
mobile per tempus E F quom odolibet sive sit motu circulari sive recto seu For example, let straight line A B be designated and let mobile D be m oved
alteratione, et sive sit super lineam A B sive super aliam. Eriganturque super through time E F in any w ay at all, whether it be in circular motion, rectilinear m o­
i5 lineam A B per totum linee perpendiculares in superficie, que quidem super­ tion, or m otion o f alteration, and whether it be over line A B or over some other
ficies vel figura sit proportionalis in altitudine velocitati ipsius D in inten­ path. A n d let there be erected on line A B throughout the w hole [of the line] per­
sione. D ico igitur quod illi superficiei vel figure poterit velocitas D mobilis pendicular lines [all] in [the same] surface such that the surface or figure is propor­
assimilari et per eam congrue ymaginari, ita quod linea A B que est huius tional in altitude to the velocity o f D in intensity. I say, therefore, that the veloci­
figure longitudo designabit longitudinem durationis huius velocitatis et ty o f mobile D can be assimilated to that surface or figure and can be congruently
20 altitudo eiusdem figure designabit intensionem ipsius velocitatis. V erbi imagined by it, so that line A B , which is the longitude o f this figure, w ill designate
gratia, si in omnibus instantibus temporis E F velocitas sit equaliter intensa, the length o f the duration o f the velocity and the altitude o f the same figure w ill
tunc super quemlibet punctum linee A B erit altitudo equalis ubique et designate the intensity o f the velocity. For example, if in all the instants o f time A / 7,
figura uniformiter alta, scilicet quadrangulus rectangulus designans hanc the velocity is equally intense, then on any point o f line A B there w ill be an altitude
velocitatem simpliciter uniformem. Si vero in primo instanti illius temporis everywhere equal, and the figure w ill be uniformly high, i.e., a rectangle designat­
25 fuerit aliquanta velocitas et in instanti medio totius temporis fuerit velocitas ing this velocity that is simply uniform.3 But i f in the first instant o f the time there
subdupla et in instanti medio ultime medietatis fuerit subquadrupla et sic is a velocity o f a certain amount and in the middle instant o f the whole time there
proportionaliter de aliis instantibus, et per consequens erit in ultimo instanti is a velocity half [of that o f the first instant] and in the middle instant o f the last
nulla, tunc super lineam A B erunt linee altitudinis proportionales secundum half [of the time] there is a velocity one quarter [of that o f the first instant] and so
modum predictum, et erit figura trianguli rectanguli illam velocitatem desig- on proportionally for all other instants (and consequently there w ill be zero veloci­
30 nantis, que quidem velocitas erat uniformiter difformis terminatum ad non ty in the last instant), then there w ill be on line A B lines o f altitude proportional in
gradum in ultimo instanti suo. Et, ut breviter dicam, omnis uniformitas et the aforementioned manner and there w ill be [constructed there] the figure o f a
omnis difformitas velocitatum potest eisdem modis notificari et describi, qui right triangle designating the velocity; this velocity was in fact one uniformly dif-
modi fuerunt positi in prima parte huius de uniformitate et difformitate qua­ form terminated at no-degree in its last instant.4 A nd, as I briefly note, every uni­
litatum capitulis i i °, 120, 130. Similiter difformis difformitas velocitatis quo form ity and every difformity o f velocities can be made known and described by the
35 ad tempus tot habet genera et species et totidem configurationes quot et que same methods which were posited in connection w ith the uniformity and difform­
numerate sunt in prima parte huius de difformi difformitate qualitatis in capi­ ity o f qualities in chapters eleven, twelve, and thirteen o f the first part o f this tract.
tulis 140, 15 °, et 160. Sunt igitur difformis difformitatis ipsius velocitatis quo Similarly, the difform difformity o f velocity w ith respect to time has just as many
ad tempus quatuor species simplices et 62 species composite in quarum cog- kinds and species and the same number o f configurations as are enumerated o f the
difform difformity o f quality in chapters fourteen, fifteen, and sixteen o f the first
12 ergo B [A F M G ] om. L [N P C J igitur 25 totius om. F part o f this w ork. There are therefore four simple species o f difform difformity o f
V [S ] 28 altitudines V velocity with respect to time and sixty-two5 composite species which one can easily
13 E F : A F B 29 e t: et quadranguli L / trianguli: sic L
14 aliam: aliam A B V 33 huius: huius tractatus L huius et B
16 figure sint proportionales V 33-34 qualitatum B V '[ A F S G ] qualitatis L
17 igitur V L [ N F M P ] ergo B [ A C G ] [N M P C ]
3 The figures for a uniform and a uniformly 4 See the Commentary, II.vi, lines 13-23,
18 et om. V / huiusmodi L 34 capitulis: tripliciter L [ N ] / 130: et 131110
difform velocity are missing in the manuscripts, where the similar definition of lines 16-21 is
19-20 longitudinem... intensionem: intensio­ capitulis A et 130 [ N A I P ]
but are, o f course, simply a rectangle and a discussed.
nem alio extensionem L / e t... velocitatis 35 et1 om. V / totidem configurationes tr. L
right triangle like those specified in the treat­ 5 The number should be 63. See the Com­
om. V [ P ] 36 d e: tractatus de uniformitate et difformitate
ment of qualities in Part I. mentary, I.xvi, lines 8-17.
20 intensionem: intensionem in alio extensio­ qualitatis in capitulis L
nem [ N ] 38 species simplices tr. L [ N ] / 62 species:
21 temporis om. V sex A 38-39 cognitionem V [ A F M S ] cognitione
22 ubique om. L
B L [N C G ]
 292 D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum Part II, Chapter ix 293

nitionem per ymaginationem figurarum faciliter devenitur, et nulla est ad hoc understand by means o f the imagery o f figures; and there is no other way for this
40 alia via, aut si sit, illa est incomparabiliter difficilior quam sit ista. [understanding], or if there is, it is incomparably more difficult than is this way.

[Il.ix] Capitulum 9m de comparatione istarum duarum

difformitatum

Circa uniformitatem quantum ad propositum istud parva est difficultas. II .ix On the comparison of these two difformities
Sed sicut in primo huius partis capitulo dicebatur duplex est velocitatis
5 difformitas: subiectiva scilicet atque temporalis, que quantum spectat ad
There is a small difficulty concerning uniformity in regard to what has been
propositum in hoc differunt quod punctualis velocitas subiectiva sicut etiam
proposed [i.e. w ith respect to velocities]. In the first chapter o f this part it was
qualitas punctualis ymaginanda est per lineam rectam et velocitas linearis
said that difformity o f velocity is o f tw o kind s: that o f subject and that o f time. N o w
subiectiva ymaginanda est per superficiem seu per superficialem figuram,
as regards what has been proposed, these tw o kinds o f difformity differ in this:
velocitas vero superficiei ymaginanda est per corpus, et similiter velocitas
Punctual velocity according to subject (as well as punctual quality) is to be im ag­
10 corporis per corpus et penitus eodem modo sicut fuit dictum de figuratione
ined by a straight line, and linear velocity according to subject is to be imagined by a
qualitatum 40 capitulo prime partis, sed punctualis velocitas instantanea
surface or by a surface figure while the velocity o f a surface is to be imagined by a
ymaginatur per lineam rectam et punctualis velocitas temporalis ymaginanda
body and similarly the velocity o f a body is to be imagined by a body in completely
est per superficiem; temporalis autem velocitas linee ymaginatur per corpus
the same way as was described in connection with the figuration o f qualities in
et similiter superficialis et corporea ymaginantur per corpus quia non con-
chapter four o f the first part. Instantaneous punctual velocity, how ever, is to be
15 tingit dare quartam dimensionem sicut dicebatur 40 capitulo prime partis.
imagined by a straight line while punctual velocity enduring in time is to be imag­
E t sic patet quod difformitas subiectiva linee mote designatur per figuram
ined by a surface;1 m oreover the velocity o f a line with respect to time is to be im­
superficialem; similiter temporalis difformitas velocitatis puncti moti desig­
agined by a body and similarly the velocities o f a surface and a body are imagined by
natur per superficialem figuram. E t quoniam in cognitione[m] figurarum cor­
bodies, for one does not have to resort to a fourth dimension, as was said in chap­
poralium possumus devenire ex notitia superficialium figurarum, ideo ex
ter four o f the first part.2 A n d thus it is evident that subject difformity o f a line in
20 comparatione difformitatis subiective velocitatis linee mote ad difformita-
motion is designated by a surface figure and similarly the temporal difformity o f
tem temporalem velocitatis puncti moti poterit aliarum difformitatum compa­
ratio deprehendi. the velocity o f a point in motion is [also] designated b y a surface figure. A n d since
we can learn about corporeal figures from a knowledge o f surface figures, there­
Sit igitur gratia exempli linea A B que moveatur secundum locum vel
fore a comparison o f other difformities could be discerned from the comparison o f
secundum qualitatem quom odolibet et signetur in ea punctus D qui etiam
the subject difformity o f the velocity o f a line in motion to the temporal difformity
25 moveatur. Poterit itaque contingere quod difformitas subiectiva velocitatis
o f velocity o f a point in m otion.
linee A B erit similis seu proportionalis et similiter figurata sicut temporalis
For example, let line A B be m oved in local motion or alteration in any w ay at all
difformitas velocitatis puncti D . E t poterit contingere quod iste difformita-
and let point D be designated in it, w hich point is also moved. A nd so it can hap­
39 ad hoc: adhuc L [ N ] 12 punctualis om. V pen that the subject difformity o f the velocity o f line A B w ill be similar or propor­
40 aut: et L [ N J / ilia: alia V / sit om. V 14 ymaginata V
tional to, and figured in the same way as, the temporal difformity o f the velocity
15 40: in 40L [ N ]
I l.ix : B V L 16 sic: hic V
o f point D . A nd it can happen that these difformities are dissimilarly figured in
1 istarum B V [ F ] om. L illarum [ G ] iarum 18 cognitionem B [S J cognitione V L
AT/ [ A N P F M C G ] / figurarum: premissorum
3 uniformitatem: unitatem L L
4 capitulo tr. L post primo 2.1 deprehendi: apprehendi L comprehendi
6 punctualis: potest talis B [N C J I l.ix
11 qualitatum: qualitatis L [ N C ] / 40: in 40 27 iste: ille L 1 For additional remarks on the concept o f Mechanics, 214-15, 365,4x5-16.
L [ N ] / punctualis: tunc talis V instantaneous velocity, see The Science of 2 See the Commentary, I.iv, line 39.
 294 D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum
Part II, Chapter x 295

tes dissimiliter figurantur quom odolibet et ita potest dici de puncto A et de
quolibet puncto in linea A B signato vel etiam extra ipsam. Unde patet
30 quod aliquotiens eiusdem motus diffbrmitas subiectiva et difformitas tem­
poralis sunt similes, aliquando dissimiles, quandoque dissimilitudine con­
sona quandoque dissona iuxta ymaginationem de figurationibus positam in
270 capitulo prime partis, et hoc est generale omni motui. Preter hec autem
in alteratione invenitur tertia difformitas, scilicet ipsius qualitatis, ita quod
35 ibi reperitur triplex configuratio: una qualitatis et due alterationis seu eius
velocitatis, et inter quaslibet earum potest esse similitudo vel dissimilitudo
multiformis secundum modos varios configurationum superius assignatos.
every possible w ay and the same thing can be said o f point A and o f any point
designated in, or even outside of, line A B . W hence it is evident that sometimes the
subject difformity and temporal difformity o f the same motion are similar and some­
times they are dissimilar. Further, sometimes they are consonant in their dissim­
ilarity and sometimes they are dissonant— follow ing the imagery o f figurations
posited in chapter twenty-seven o f the first part. A ll o f this [concerning these tw o
difformities] is general for every kind o f motion. But in addition to these [two
kinds o f difformity] a third difformity is found in alteration, namely that o f the
quality itself, so that there is found there configuration o f three kin d s: one o f
quality and tw o o f its alteration or velocity, and among these [three kinds] there
can be similitude or manifold dissimilarity depending on the various modes o f
configurations assigned above.

[II.x] Capitulum io m de causis quorundam effectuum secundum II .x On the causes o f certain effects according to the
predicta prior statements
Sicut dictum fuit de difformitate qualitatum in capitulo iz ° prime partis, W e can now speak o f the difformity o f velocities in the same way that w e spoke
ita quodammodo potest nunc dici de difformitate velocitatum, quod videlicet o f the difformity o f qualities in chapter twenty-two o f the first part, namely, that
5 aliter et aliter aliquid operatur vel agitur secundum diversitatem difformi- something operates or acts differently depending on the diversity o f the difformity
tatis illius actionis vel illius motus quantum ad figurationem velocitatis o f that action or that motion in respect to the figuration o f its velocity. For in local
eiusdem. N am in motu locali videmus quod aliquid potest fieri impulsu m otion w e see that something can take place by means o f a difform impulse which
difformi, quod tamen non fieret impulsu uniformi et equali, nec forsan would not take place by means o f a uniform or equal impulse or perhaps by an
impulsu maiori alia difformitate difformi. Inde forsan posset reddi causa impulse greater than another difform difformity. A n d so perhaps the cause can be
10 quare quidam piscis mediante rethi stupefacit manum piscatoris, ut diceretur assigned as to w hy a certain fish numbs the hand o f the fisherman through the
quod motus istius piscis habet talem virtutem ex figuratione sue velocitatis mediacy o f the [fisherman’s] net: one w ould say that the m otion o f this fish has
quod sic m oveat rethe et manum mediante rethi ut ad difformitatem motus such a power arising from the figuration o f its velocity that it moves the net and
ipsius manus fiat stupor.
the hand by means o f the net so that in relation to the difformity o f its m otion the
Rursum quedam animalia habent vim separativam sicut leo arripiens cum hand becomes num b.1
i5 ungulis tibiam bovis trahendo separat a reliquo corpore totum membrum, Further, certain animals have a power capable o f separating things, as the lion,
quod tamen non faceret alius tractus quantumcunque fortior quia totus bos snatching at the tibia o f an ox with his claws, by a drawing motion separates the
simul traheretur. E t causa huius potest esse quia motus iste habet talem whole member from the rest o f the body, which action, however, another kind o f
28 figurantur: figurentur L [ N J / potest: traction however strong w ould not be able to accomplish, for the whole ox w ould
I I .x -.B V L
poterit L 3 p n m e .p a tiis L [ A N C S G ] tr .B V [ P M ] be dragged along at the same time. The cause o f this can be that this motion [of the
29 signata L / patet om. V 5 aliquid B V [ A S G ] om. L [ N F M P C J et
31 aliquando: et aliquando L [ S C ] I I .x
tr. S G post videlicet
32 post quandoque add. L dissimilitudine / in 7, 8, 9 impulsu V [ A ] in pulsu B L [ F P ] in- 1 See the Commentary, II.x, lines 9-13.
B L [N C ]o m . V [ A P F M S G ] pulsu [ N M S ] ipulsu [ G ]
33 270: 210 L [ N ] et 70 [ F ] 20 alio [ C ] 8 tamen om. L [ N ] fieret B [ A M C G ] potest facit L torpefacit [SJ torpefacit et stupefa­ B [ A N S G J alia (?) L aa I J F A I P C J
34 invenitur L [ N P F A I C G ] tr. B V [A S ] fieri L V [ N 1 / nec: nec etiam B cit [ A ] torpefacit quod stupefacit B stupe­ 14-15 cum ungulis tr. L [ N ] post trahendo in
post autem 9 forsan: forte V [ N ] / posset B [ A F M S C ] facit et torpefacit [ N ] linea / /
35 eius om. [ P M S ] eiusdem B possit V [ P J potest L [ N G J 11 istius: illius V 15 tibiam: tybiam Uthibiam [ A ]
37 assignatarum L [ N ] 10 rethe B / stupefacit V [ F M P C G ] stupe 14 Rursum: et rursum L [ N ] / animalia 17 iste: ille L [ N J
 296 Part II, Chapter xi/xii 297
D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum

virtutem ex configuratione sue difformitatis, et hoc habet leo a natura ut
sciat motum suum taliter figurare. E t ita posset reddi causa de multis aliis.
20 E t conformiter secundum hoc possunt assignari cause quorundam effectuum
propter configurationem velocitatis alterationis. Nam et aliqua calefactio
aliquid facit quod alia dissimilis non faceret, non solum propter intensionem
velocitatis sed propter aliam configurationem difformitatis, ita quod forsan
ex hoc possunt assignari cause aliquorum effectuum quorum rationes alias
25 ignote sunt.
lion] has such a power from the configuration o f its difformity, and the lion natur­
ally knows how to shape his m otion in such a way. A n d so the cause o f many other
effects could be assigned. A n d similarly the causes o f certain effects can be assigned
to the configuration o f the velocity o f alteration. For a certain heating accomplishes
something which a dissimilar heating w ould not, not only because o f the intensity
o f the velocity but also because it has a different configuration o f difformity. Hence,
perhaps by proceeding in this w ay there can be assigned causes o f certain effects
the reasons for w hich are otherwise unknown.

[II.xi] Capitulum n m de pulchritudine configurationum II .xi On the beauty of configurations of velocities

velocitatum

A dhuc autem posset dici de configurationibus velocitatum quantum ad
pulchritudinem et turpitudinem earum simpliciter dictam vel secundum
5 quid quasi conformiter ad ea que dicta sunt capitulis 26° et 270 prime partis
de configurationibus qualitatum. V erbi gratia, ut diceretur quod aliqua
configuratio velocitatis in difformitate est pulchra simpliciter secundum se
et delectabilis sicut est configuratio difformitatis in tripudio vel in plausu
iocundo, alia vero est simpliciter turpis, quedam etiam aliquibus hominibus
10 apparet pulchra, aliis autem eadem apparet difformis secundum variationes
configurationis qualitatum complexionalium eorundem, prout dicebatur in
capitulis prime partis in presenti capitulo allegatis. Aliqua etiam configuratio
velocitatis alterationis iuvat aut sanat, alia nocet, et sic conformiter ad ea
que dicta sunt de qualitatibus in ultimis capitulis prime partis.
Further, as regards absolute or conditional beauty and ugliness in configurations
o f velocities, one w ill be able to say exactly the same sorts o f things that were said in
regard to configurations o f qualities in chapters twenty-six and twenty-seven o f the
first part. For example, one w ould say that some configuration o f velocity is ab­
solutely and intrinsically beautiful and delectable, as is the case o f the configuration
o f difformity in the religious dance or in harmonious clapping, while another con­
figuration is absolutely ugly. A lso, a certain configuration appears beautiful to some
people but deformed to others, depending on the variation in the configurations o f
their constitutional qualities, as was said in the chapters o f the first part which w e
have cited above in this chapter. A lso, one configuration o f the velocity o f alter­
ation helps or heals, while another poisons; and so w e can speak in the same w ay
as w e spoke concerning qualities in the last chapters o f the first part.

[Il.xii] Capitulum i2m de figuratione celestis velocitatis II .xii On the figuration o f celestial velocity

Quam vis quilibet motus celi simplex et unus sit simpliciter uniformis A lthough any simple and single motion in the heavens is absolutely uniform
quantum ad tempus, tamen quia constat quemlibet planetarum m overi motu with respect to time, how ever because it is clear that each o f the planets is m oved
composito et super diversos polos et circa centra diversa, idcirco certum est with a composite m otion on diverse poles and about diverse centers, therefore it is

19 sciat: faciat L [ N ] / posset.. .causa: pos­ velocitatum B V [ A N S G ] qualitatum L

sunt reddi cause V / de multis aliis om. B velocitatis f F M P C J
24 possunt B [ P M ] possent [ A F S G C ] posset 4 earum B [ A F M P S G ] eorum V [ C ] earun- [F M P C j I l.x ii: B V L
V potest L [ N ] j causa L [ N j / alias: aliis dcm L [ N ] j dicta L 10 apparet*1’23
: apparentL [ N G ] e t tr. [ F A I P C ]
4 1 figuratione B V [ A F G ] configuratione L
L aliis vel aliter [ N ] 5 26° om. V 2omo L 220 [ N ] xxviii [ C ] / apparet1 post etiam / difformis: difformia 2 simpliciter om. L [ N ]
et L [ A N F M P C S G ] om. B V L [ G ] turpia [ N ] / variationes B V L [ N G ] 3 quantum om. V quo L [ N ] / tamen quia
I l.x i: B V L 7 velocitatis: qualitatis L [ N ] variationem [ A F M P S C ] tr. L [ N ]
2 velocitatum B L [ A G ] velocitatis l '[ F ] 8 configuratio Y L [ F M P C N S G ] figuratio 1 1 eorundem B V L [ A S G ] earundem [ N F A I 4 centra diversa tr. V
3 posset B \ 7 M A C P F ] potest L f N S G J / B [A J j plausu B IL fA N S G ] pulsu PC] 4 -7 idcirco... diversa om. V
 298
D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum
5 quemlibet eorum m overi velocitate difformi, quoniam ex duabus vel pluribus
velocitatibus uniformibus eiusdem corporis super varios polos aut circa
centra diversa fit velocitas inequalis, irregularis, sive difformis. Unde etiam
et stellas fixas dicunt astrologi m overi velocitate difformi. O portet igitur
quamlibet difformitatem celestis velocitatis secundum predicta aliqualiter
10 figurari et opinandum est quod decenter figuretur et quod pulchre figure
assimiletur. Nihilominus tamen aliqua astra aut omnia uno tempore m oven­
tur decentiori et pulchriori difformitate et velocitate magis consona quam
alio tempore, acsi una vice facerent nobilius tripudium quam alia sive
meliorem concentum. H unc enim concentum, ut ait Cassiodorus, “ ratio
15 tantum animo dedit sed auribus natura non prodidit.” D e quo etiam potest
intelligi illud verbum Iob dicentis, “ concentum celi quis dormire faciet?”
quia sicut in Genesi legitur, “ frigus et estus, hyems et estas, nox et dies, non
requiescent.” M utatio autem huius concentus aut difformitatis potest esse
una de causis quare aliquando hic inferius corpora celi immittunt influentias
20 benigniores, aliquando minus benignas. H ec quoque causa potest alias causas
veluti aspectus benivolos intendere vel remittere et malivolos, eo modo quo
dicuntur malivoli intendere aut mitigare vel etiam totaliter impedire. Sed
forsan hec causa propter eius latentiam non fuit ab astrologis assignata.
[Il.xiii] Capitulum 13» de difformitate quorundam successivorum
Rerum quedam sunt ita successive quod non possunt aliquo modo per­
manere, sicut tempus et motus. A lie sunt ita permanentes quod licet habeant
esse vel durare temporaliter, divisibiliter, et successive, tamen earum es­
sentia toto illo tempore eadem permanet nec potest esse aliqualiter successi­
va, sicut substantie indivisibiles et immateriales. Sed prima illarum, que Deus
est, nec habet essentiam successivam nec esse sive durare quoquom odo
successivum. Y m m o indivisibiliter et infinite permanet per seipsam eterni-
tate sua indivisibili et interminabili, que est idem quod ipsemet Deus. Alie
8 et orn. L j igitur: ergo B
hiems L hyemps V [ F N ] hymens [S J
9 difformitatem: velocitatem V
yems [ C ] homines [ A ]
xo opinandum: opus V / figuraretur V
18 requiescunt V / huius om. L / aut diffor­
11 uno tempore tr. L [ N J
mitatis om. L [ N J
13 una vice: uno tempore L j alio JL
19 immittunt L V [ A N P S J immittant B [ G ]
14-15 ratio tantum: non tamen L [ C ] non
emittunt [ P ] imistunt ? [ C ] / ante influen­
tantum [ N ] ideo tantum [ F S ]
tias iter. V hic inferius
15 perdidit V
21-22 v e l... intendere om. F
16 Io b : Iob 38 S / faciet: sunt V 23 assignata: intenta L
17 legitur tr. L post sicut / hyems B [ P G ]
299
Part II, Chapter xiii
certain that each o f them is m oved w ith a difform velocity since from tw o or more
uniform velocities o f the same body on various poles about diverse centers there
arises an unequal, irregular, or difform velocity. Hence even the fixed stars, the
astronomers say, are m oved with difform velocity. Therefore, it is necessary that
each difformity o f celestial velocity be figured in some way according to what we
have said, and one ought to think that it is figured properly and that it is assimilat­
ed to a beautiful figure. Nevertheless some or all stars are m oved in one time w ith a
more fitting and more beautiful difformity and a more consonant velocity than in
another time, as if to produce in one turn a nobler dance or better harmony than in
another. F or this harmony, as Cassiodorus says, “ reason gave only to the mind,
nature not producing it for the ears.” 1 O f this harmony also can be understood the
statement o f Job: “ w ho can make the harmony o f heaven to sleep?” 2 For, as it is
read in Genesis: “ cold and heat, summer and winter, night and day shall not
cease.” 3 But change o f this harmony or difformity can be one o f the causes w hy
sometimes heavenly bodies emit below more benign, and at other times less benign,
influences. This also can be the cause w hy [certain] other causes, such as favorable
or unfavorable aspects, increase or decrease [things] in the way in which un­
favorable ones are said to increase, or to mitigate, or even to impede [something]
completely. But perhaps this cause was not assigned by astrologers because o f the
fact that it is hidden.
Il.xiii On the difformity of certain successive things
Certain things are so successive that they cannot last in any way. Examples are
time and motion. Other things are so permanent that, although they have to exist
or last temporally, divisibly, and successively, still their essence remains the same
during the w hole time and it cannot in any w ay be successive. Examples are im ­
material and indivisible substances. But the first o f these, which is G od, neither
has a successive essence nor does He exist or last in any w ay as a successive entity.
In fact, He remains indivisibly and infinitely in His very self through His indivis­
ible and indeterminable eternity, which is the same as G od Himself. But there are
I l.x ii
sance Studies, Vol. 5 (1961), 98-100.
1 Variae, II, Letter 40 to Boethius (Ed. o f
2Job 38:37.
Mommsen, 72, sect. 15). For Oresme’s and
other medieval views on the harmony o f the
3 Genesis 8:22. The Vulgate has “ aestas et
hiems.”
spheres, see Zoubov, in Mediaeval and Renais­
5 illo om. V
I l.x iii: B V L
8-9 in eternitatc V
3 sicut B L [ P F M C ] sicut sunt V [ A N S G ]
 3oo
D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum
io vero sunt res quarum essentia est permanens, sed eadem vel similis potest
esse totaliter successiva. Cuiusmodi sunt quedam accidentia, sicut est propor­
tio, similitudo, curvitas, raritas, lumen, et universaliter omnis qualitas
intensibilis et remissibilis. Sicut enim in intensione curvitatis vel raritatis
est continue alia et alia curvitas vel alia et alia raritas et in toto tempore illo
15 est una curvitas vel raritas successiva et conformiter in augmento proportio­
nis vel dissimilitudinis, ita ymaginor in intensione cuiuscunque qualitatis
intensibilis, sicut caliditatis ve l albedinis, et similiter in eiusdem qualitatis
remissione. N ec est ibi realis multitudo sive superpositio graduum prout
aliqui opinantur. Talis ergo qualitas toto illo tempore in quo est alteratio
20 est una qualitas successiva et in qualibet eius parte est alia et alia, sed talis
qualitas est res permanens quotiens est in subiecto quod secundam ipsam
nullatenus alteratur. Sic igitur est quedam proportio permanens, alia succes­
siva; quedam dissimilitudo permanens, alia successiva; et sic de similibus
relationibus. Similiter quedam est curvitas permanens, alia successiva; que-
25 dam raritas permanens, alia successiva; quedam caliditas vel albedo perma­
nens, alia successiva; et sic universaliter de quibuslibet qualitatibus inten-
sibilibus et remissibilibus vel etiam aliis accidentibus intensibilibus quibus­
cunque sicut de acutie angulari vel aliquo tali.
A lie autem sunt res quarum essentia est permanens. E t similis potest esse
3o successiva secundum partem non tamen secundum totum, sicut est illa forma
substantialis que est acquisibilis successive secundum partes quantitativas
subiecti et non secundum intensionem. E t ita opinor esse de omni forma
substantiali materiali; ita est etiam de angulo superficiali vel etiam corporeo.
Durante enim acquisitione vel deperditione talis forme ipsa continue est alia
35 et alia secundum partem non secundum totum. E t in toto illo tempore est
una res partialiter successiva, et motu tali non existente ipsa est permanens.
N unc igitur in omnibus talibus sive totaliter sive partialiter successivis res
illa que sic est successiva secundum hoc quod in una parte temporis est
magis aut minus intensa quam in alia aut etiam maior vel minor uniformiter
40 et difformiter et diversimode secundum hoc ipsa iuxta ymaginationes prius
positas varie figuratur ad modum difformitatis ipsius velocitatis secundum
partes temporis, de qua dictum est ante, ita quod huiusmodi rei sic succes-
11 est om, L [ N J
18 sive superpositio B l r[ A G ] om. [ C F A 1P ]
14 est continue tr. L [ N ]
sive suppositio L [ N ] sive sic positio [ S ]
15 vel: vel una L [ P M ]
19 ergo B L [ A C S G ] igitur V [ P F M N ]
16 ve l: vel etiam L [ N ] 20 sed:et V
17 intensibilis: intensibilis et (vel C M ) remis­
23 dissimilitudo: similitudo I ' / alia: et alia
sibilis [ N F M P C ] I vel V [ G ] om.
L
[ F C M N ] seu L sive [ A S ] et B / similiter: 23-24 e t . .. successiva om. B [ G ]
sunt ? \ ' 24 est om. V
17-18 e t ... remissione o m .[ C ] c contra [ F M P ] 26 et: et similiter L
17 qualitatis: caliditatis L 27 et: vel L
301
Part II, Chapter xiii
other things whose essence is permanent while the same thing or something similar
can be totally successive. O f this sort are accidents such as ratio, similitude, cur­
vature, rareness, light, and, universally, every intensible and remissible quality. For
just as in the intensity o f curvature or rarity there is continually different curvature
or different rarity while in the whole time it consists o f one successive curvature or
rarity, and similarly in the cases o f augmenting a ratio or a dissimilarity, so I imag­
ine it to be in the case o f the intension o f any intensible quality such as hotness or
whiteness, and similarly for the case o f the remission o f the same quality. N or is
there in such cases real multitude or superposition o f degrees, as some people
think.1Therefore, such a quality during the w hole time in which there is alteration is
a successive quality and in any part o f it it is different [from what it is in any other
part], but such a quality is a permanent thing whenever it is in a subject w hich is
not altered in any w ay w ith respect to this quality. Therefore, in the same w ay some
ratio is permanent while another is successive, some dissimilitude is permanent
while another is successive, and so on for similar relations. Similarly some cur­
vature is permanent while some is successive, some rareness is permanent while an­
other is successive, some hotness or whiteness is permanent while another is succes­
sive. A n d this is so universally for any intensible and remissible qualities at all or
even for any other intensible accidents such as [being] acute-angular or some such
thing.
But there are other things whose essence is permanent. A n d there can be a sim­
ilar thing whose essence is successive according to the part but not, how ever, ac­
cording to the whole. A n example is that o f a substantial form w hich can be ac­
quired successively according to the quantitative parts o f the subject but not ac­
cording to intensity. A n d I think that this is so concerning every material sub­
stantial form and also concerning a surface or corporeal angle. F or during the
acquisition or loss o f such a form , it is continually different as to the part but not
as to the whole. A n d in the w hole time it is a thing that is successive according to
part, and i f such a m otion does not exist then it is permanent. N o w then in all such
things either totally or partially successive that thing which is thus successive, ac­
cording as it is more or less intense in one part o f the time than in the other, or
also according as it is uniformly and difformly larger or smaller in different ways, is
figured with the previously posited imagined concepts in the manner o f a difform-
ity o f velocity with respect to the parts o f time (of which w e have spoken before),
I L x ii i
1 See the Commentary, II.xiii, lines 9-28.*3
59-40 uniformiter et difformiter B l f A S G ]
30 tamen om. L [ N ]
uniformitas sive difformitas L f N F M P C ]
33 est etiam tr. I ' [ G ] j etiam om. L [ N S C ]
34 continue est tr. L [ N ]
 302 D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum
sive tempus est longitudo et intensio vel maioritas ipsius est sua latitudo. E t
posset exemplificari de curvitate, de caliditate, de forma ignis, et sic de
45 aliis similibus prius dictis.
Advertendum est tamen quod non est possibile quod res que est totaliter
successiva sit uniformis, sicut proportio, curvitas, vel albedo, licet velocitas
intensionis possit esse uniformis. Sed possibile est quod res partialiter
successiva sit uniformis, sicut illud quod augetur quantitative ad unam
50 partem et tantumdem precise diminuitur ad aliam. Si autem non diminuere­
tur ad aliam partem vel si diminueretur non tantumdem precise, tunc illud
esset difforme.
[Il.xiv] Capitulum i4m qualiter quorundam effectuum cause
apparent ex predictis
Res itaque totaliter successiva modo predicto, sicut est curvitas vel albedo,
cuius successio est propter illius rei intensionem vel remissionem, non potest
5 esse successiva quin ipsa sit difformis. Verumptamen si talis res permaneret
sine alteratione eius, ipsa posset dici secundum durationem temporis unifor­
mis. V erbi gratia, si esset aliquod subiectum quod secundum curvitatem vel
caliditatem intenderetur per unam horam et per secundam horam maneret
in eodem statu sine alteratione et per tertiam intenderetur vel remitteretur,
10 tunc in prima hora esset qualitas difformis, in secunda uniformis, et in
tertia difformis, et totalis illa qualitas trium horarum esset secundum istam
ymaginationem difformis difformitate composita. Cum igitur huiusmodi
difformitas possit multipliciter variari et diversimode figurari secundum
modos positos in prima parte huius capitulis 1 50 et 160, consequens est iuxta
i5 eiusdem partis capitula z z m et 23111 et deinceps quod propter huiusmodi
diversitatem configurationum diversificentur effectus et actiones naturalium
qualitatum.
V erbi gratia, potest esse quod aliquotiens alicubi calor vel frigus seu
quevis alia qualitas aeris variatur per tempus per intensionem et remissio-
20 nem tali configuratione; propter quam ipsa est malorum humorum purga­
tiva vel forsan generativa in corporibus humanis, vel in aliis, aut etiam
inductiva alicuius pestifere qualitatis, vel etiam expulsiva, et sic de aliis; et
44 posset B V L [ A S C ] potest [ P N F M G ] Il.xiv : B V L
46 impossibile L
3 totaliter om. L [ A ]
48 res: res que estZ.
8 caliditatem: qualitatem[ P F A I ]
50 tantumdem: nundum L / aliam: aliam par­ 9 tertiam: tertiam horam L
tem L
1 1 istam om. L
51 diminueretur non tr. L
12 difformitate: difformiter L j igitur: ergo V
Part II, Chapter xiv 3°3
so that the time o f a successive thing o f this sort is the longitude, and the intensity
or largeness o f it is its latitude. A n d it can be exemplified o f curvature, o f hotness,
o f the form o f fire, and also o f the other similar things previously mentioned.
It must be observed, how ever, that it is not possible for a thing w hich is w holly
successive to be uniform, as is the case o f ratio, curvature, or whiteness, although
the velocity o f intension could be uniform. But it is possible for something which
is partially successive to be uniform, as is the case o f that w hich is increased quanti­
tatively in one part precisely in the same amount as it is diminished in another.
But if it were not diminished in the other part or i f it were not diminished precisely
in the same amount, then that w ould be difform.
Il.xiv How the causes o f certain effects are evident from
the aforesaid
Something that is w holly successive in the aforesaid w ay, like curvature or
whiteness, and whose succession results from the intension or remission o f the
thing, cannot be successive unless it is difform. H ow ever, i f such a thing were to
last without alteration, it could be said to be uniform according to the duration o f
time. For example, if there w ere to be some subject w hich w ould be increased in
intensity as to curvature or hotness for one hour and for the second hour w ould
remain in the same state w ithout alteration and for the third w ould be increased or
decreased in intensity, then in the first hour it w ould be a difform quality, in the
second a uniform quality, and in the third a difform quality, and the w hole quality
o f the three hours w ould be, according to this imagery, a difform quality composite
in difformity. Since, therefore, difformity o f this sort could be multiply varied and
figured in diverse ways according to the modes posited in chapters fifteen and six­
teen o f the first part o f this w ork, it follows from chapters twenty-two, twenty-
three, and thereafter, that because o f the diversity o f the configurations o f this sort
the effects and actions o f natural qualities may be diversified.
For example, it can be that sometimes, somewhere, hot or cold or some other
quality o f the air is varied in such a configuration for a time b y means o f intension
and remission, and that, accordingly, it is purgative or generative o f bad humors in
human or other bodies, or also that it is capable o f inducing or expelling some pes­
tiferous quality, and similarly w ith regard to other qualities. A n d this takes place
20 quam: quam c tL ,
13 possit: potest L / variari om. L
21 in2 B [ A N P F A I S C G ] om. V in etiam L
1 5 et2; et sic L
19 per tempus per: post L
 304 D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum Part II, Chapter xv 3°5

hoc non solum propter primarum qualitatum intensionem maiorem vel
minorem sed propter huiusmodi intensionis et remissionis configurationem
25 secundum temporalem durationem m odo predicto. Nam, ut ait Ypocras,
mutationes temporum generant morbos, et maxime maxime. Sed tamen non
semper est ibi attendenda mutationis magnitudo— ymmo etiam cum hoc
configuratio prius dicta cuius signum est quod aliquando minor mutatio
plures egritudines causat quam alia vice faciat mutatio maior. Per eundem
30 modum possent cause multorum aliorum effectuum assignari iuxta modos
positos in capitulis ultimis prime partis.
not only because o f the greater or lesser intensity o f the prime qualities but also be­
cause o f the configuration o f intension or remission o f this kind according to tem­
poral duration in the aforesaid manner. For, as Hippocrates says,1 changes in the
seasons produce diseases, and the greatest changes make for the greatest production
o f diseases. But such results are not always a function [merely] o f the magnitude o f
the change, but also, in addition, o f the aforesaid configuration. The indication o f
this is that sometimes a minor change causes more diseases than a major change
produces at another time. In the same way the causes o f many other effects can be
assigned by follow ing the methods posited in the last chapters o f the first part.

[II.xv] Capitulum 15II.111 de natura et difformitate sonorum II.xv On the nature and difformity of sounds1

Omnis sonus est qualitas successiva consequens et causata ex motu et E very sound is a successive quality consequent upon and caused by the m otion
pulsu corporum aliquorum. E t quemadmodum motus a quo sonus causatur and agitation o f some bodies. A nd just as the motion by which sound is caused and
et conservatur non potest esse permanens, ita necesse est quod sonus, si conserved cannot be permanent, so it is necessary that a sound, if it exists, is a succes­
5 est, sit qualitas successiva. Est autem in sono sensibili quedam discretio per sive quality. But there is in sensible sound a certain discreteness brought about by
interpositionem pausarum que quandoque sunt ita frequentes et ita parve the interposition o f pauses which sometimes are so frequent and so small that they
quod non percipiuntur auditu sed totum videtur esse unus sonus continuus4 are not perceived by the ear and the w hole seems to be one continuous sound, as
prout vult Boetius in primo musice sue et declarat de sono causato ex pulsu Boethius has it in the first book o f his Music2and explains in connection with sound
alicuius nervi tensi. Unde forsan sonus sive sibulus parve fistule non est caused by the striking o f some string under tension. Thus perhaps the sound or
10 simpliciter continuus, cuius signum est quod, si quis flatu oris pulset in whistle o f a small reed pipe is not simply continuous. A n indication o f this is that
magna tuba vel fistula grossa, tunc sentitur eiusdem tube corporis fremitus if anyone blows into a large trumpet or great tube, then the noise that one hears
qui non fit sine iterationibus discontinuis et disiunctis vel reflexionibus inter­ from the large trumpet is not without discontinuous and disjunct repetitions or
cisis, et sic motus est discontinuus ac etiam sonus. E t hoc quidem quod intervening interruptions and thus the motion is discontinuous and the sound as
sensibiliter patet in instrumento magno censendum est per rationem esse well. A nd that which is evident by the senses in a large instrument ought to be
i5 in parvo, quamvis in parvo non percipitur ad sensum. Cum igitur in huius­ judged by reason to exist in a small one, although it is not perceptible to the senses
modi intercisione non sint simpliciter infinite alternationes sonorum et in the small tube. Since in interrupted [sound] o f this sort there is not simply an
infinite number o f alternations o f sounds and pauses, it is necessary [by division] to
23 vel: autL [ N ] 8 causato ex pulsu om. V
26 maxime maxime B [ A J om. [ G '] maxime 9 fistole V
scilicet maxime L maxime V [ F M P S C ] I o quod B V [ A C S G ] quia L [ N F M P ]
precise maxime [ N ] II fistula: tympana V / eiusdem: huiusmodi
27 semper est tr. L [ F M ] est [ P J est solum [ F ] I tube om. L [ C J fistule [ S ] / fremitus: I l.x iv vel acutus, quamvis uterque ex pluribus con­
[ N ] I mutationis magnitudo tr. V / cum sinnitus ? V 1 This is the basic thesis o f A ir s , Waters, and stet, gravis quidem ex tardioribus et rarioribus,
hoc om. [ P F M ] 12-13 v e l.. .intercisis om. [ P F M ] rerum le- Places. See particularly Chapter xi for violent acutus vero ex celeribus ac spissis: velut si
29 mutatio maior B V L [ A N C G ] tr. [ F A 1P ] sionibus ? L changes in season. conum, quem turbinem vocant, qui diligenter
mutatio minor [ S ] 14 magno: magno scilicet V / censendum: I I .x v extornet eique unam virgulam coloris rubri
30 possent V [ A N F M G J possunt B L [ S C J sentiendum L / per rationem om. V et hab. 1 See the Commentary, II.xv, line i . vel alterius ducat, et eum qua potest celeritate
possentque [ P J / aliorum om. L lac. 2 Institutio musica, I, 3(ed. o f G. Friedlein, 190, convertat, tunc totus conus rubro colore vide­
15 igitur: ergo B lines 11-2 1): “ Sed quoniam iunctae sunt velo­ tur infectus, non quo totus ita sit, sed quod
II. x v : B V F 16 simpliciter L [ S G ] om. V [ A N C ] sine B citates sonorum, nulla intercapedo sentitur partes puras rubrae virgae velocitas conpre-
6 sint V scilicet [ P F A I ] auribus et unus sonus sensum pellit vel gravis hendat et apparere non sinat.”
 306 D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum Part II, Chapter xv 307

pausarum, necesse est devenire ad aliquas soni particulas quarum quelibet arrive at some particles o f sound each o f which is simply continuous. Therefore
est simpliciter continua. Ille igitur sonus est vere et simpliciter unus qui non that [particle of] sound [arrived at by such division] and not interrupted in any way
est aliqualiter intercisus. Ille vero qui intercipitur insensibilibus et imper- is truly and simply one, while that sound which is interrupted by insensible and
ao ceptibilibus pausis [seu intercipedinibus] est apparenter unus. Sed ille qui imperceptible pauses is [only] apparently one. But that sound which is interrupted
sensibilibus pausis intercipitur dicitur unus improprie et per aggregationem. by sensible pauses is said to be one improperly and [only] by aggregation. A n d in­
E t hec quidem aggregatio duplex est: una enim est simplex in qua non sunt deed this aggregation is o f tw o kinds. One is simple aggregation in which there
plures soni simul tempore, sicut est una cantilena vel una antiphona; alia are not several sounds existing simultaneously as in a single cantilena or a single
est aggregatio composita in qua simul resonant plures soni, sicut fit dum antiphon.I*3 T he other is a composite aggregation in which several sounds resound
25 leti emiscent blanda modulamina chori. Sic igitur quatuor modis dicitur simultaneously, as takes place when joyful choirs mingle pleasant melodies. So
sonus unus. sound is said to be one sound in four ways.
Sonus autem sicut et motus duplicem habet extensionem: unam a subiecto But sound, as w ell as motion, has tw o kinds o f extension. One arises from its
suo, de qua omnino dicendum est sicut de extensione subiectiva motus subject and this should be treated in the same w ay that the subject extension o f mo­
dictum est ante capitulo 6° huius partis, et de hac nichil plus m o d o ; aliam tion was described in chapter six o f this part, and I shall speak no more about this
3o vero extensionem habet [sonus, et] motus, a tempore, que nunc vocetur now. But sound, as well as motion, has another extension, arising from time, and
longitudo ipsius soni. Habet etiam sonus duplicem intensionem: unam in let it be now called the longitude o f the sound. Further, sound has tw o kinds o f
acutie, aliam in fortitudine. Quarum differentia probatur experimento, intensity, one in height o f pitch and the other in strength, [i.e., volum e]. The dif­
quoniam gravis sonus tube vel timpani fortius m ovet auditum quam acutus ference between these is proved by experience, since the low sound o f a trumpet or
sonus fistule vel gracilis canne. Similiter post percussionem nervi vel cam- a drum moves the ear more forcibly than does the high sound o f a pipe or a slender
35 pane sentimus quod acuties soni uniformiter manet semper equalis sono reed. Similarly, after the striking o f a string or a bell w e perceive that the high
durante et tamen continue remittitur ipsius fortitudo. Habet ergo sonus pitch o f the sound remains always the same as the sound lasts but that the strength
conformiter duplicem remissionem: unam que dicitur gravitas contra acu- [of its volum e] is continually decreasing. Therefore sound in the same w ay has
tiem et aliam que dicitur debilitas contra fortitudinem. D e prima autem tw o kinds o f remission [i.e. decrease in intensity]: one which is called lowness in
intensione et de remissione sibi opposita Boetius nititur dare causam sed contradistinction to height [in pitch] and the other which is called weakness in con­
40 de secunda non loquitur. Huic ait quod dictum est gravitatem esse remis­ tradistinction to strength [in volum e]. Boethius attempts to give the cause o f the
sionem non obstat quod in musica ipsa signatur per maiorem numerum, first kind o f intension and remission (which are opposed to each other), but he does
quia ibi non signatur soni remissio sed resonantis corporis vel alicuius alterius not speak o f the second.4 In regard to the former he says that it has been asserted
magnitudo. Gravitas autem et acuties soni dicuntur ad aliquid sicut velocitas that lowness [of pitch] is remission notwithstanding the fact that it is designated in
et tarditas motus. E t similiter fortitudo et debilitas soni dicuntur ad aliquid. music by a larger number, because it is not the remission o f the sound that is being
45 Sicut igitur omnis tarditas est velocitas ita omnis gravitas soni est acuties, designated by the number, but the magnitude o f the resonant body or o f some­
thing else. But lowness and height [in the pitch] o f sound are spoken o f relatively
18 simpliciter1 om. L I hac L [ S C ] om. [ N ] hoc ?B , V [ ? P , A M ] as are speed or slowness in motion. A nd similarly strength and weakness [in the
20 seu (om. V sive G ) intercipedinibus B V [ G ] 30 [sonus et] motus om. L V [ C ] , sed correxi ex volume] o f sound are spoken o f relatively. Therefore just as every slowness is a
om. L [ N P F M C ] seu interceptionibus motus in B [ A N S G ] et soni motus in swiftness, so every lowness o f sound is also a height, although in a different fashion,
[A S ] [ P F M ] I nunc vocetur tr. V
22 enim om. V [ S ] 33 m ovet: movet appetitum L
24 soni om. B / fit dum : solet dici L 34-35 campane: timpani L tympani [ N ] 3 See the Commentary, II.xv, line 23. atque ideo et in acumen maioribus numeris
25 emiscent B L [ N C ] immiscent V emissent 36 ergo B [ P F M G C ] igitur V L [ A N S ] 4 Institutio musica, IV, 5 (ed. o f Friedlein, 3 14, intendimus et minoribus in gravitatem saepe
[ P F M A ] emiscunt [ S ] conmiscent [ G ] / 40 dictum L [ A P F M ] nunc dictum [ S C ] line 18— 315, line 9): “ Nec lectorem res ilia remisimus. Hic vero ubi chordarum spatia
post chori add. [ N ] et mg. [ A G ] Vergilius interdictum B V [ G ] conturbet, quod intendentes saepe spatia pro­ sonosque metiemur, naturam rerum sequi
25-26 dicitur sonus tr. L [ N ] 40-41 gravitatem esse remissionem: de gravi­ portionum numero maiore signavimus, re­ necesse est, maiorique longitudini chordarum,
27 unam: unaZ. tatis remissione L [ N ] mittentes vero minore, cum intentio acumen ex qua gravitas existit, ampliores, minori vero,
28 suo B V [ A G S ] om. L [ N F M P C ] , et tr. [ S ] 41, 42 significatur V faciat, remissio gravitatem. Illic enim propor­ ex qua vocis acumen nascitur, dare breviores.”
ante subiecto 42 ibi om. V tionum tantum spatia signabamus, nihil de See the Commentary, II.xv, line 40.
29 dictum: sicut dictum V / ante om. B [ N G ] 45 igitur L [ N F M P S C ] ergo B V [ A G ] gravitatis aut acuminis proprietate laborantes,
 308 D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum Part II, Chapter xvi 5 °9

licet ad aliud et ad aliud, et omnis debilitas soni est etiam fortitudo. Propter
quod gravitate et acutie utor ut uno.
Et dicam quod in sono quatuor sunt principaliter attendenda: videlicet
acuties, fortitudo, intercisio, et mixtio; de qua mixtione dicetur post. Et ex
50 istorum quatuor diversimoda combinatione omnis fere sonorum varietas
originatur et ad ista reducitur tanquam ad principales differentias seu pri­
maria elementa. In utroque autem duorum primorum, videlicet acutiei et
fortitudinis, sonus potest habere uniformitatem et difformitatem multiplici­
ter figuratam secundum ymaginationes positas in prima parte huius ante 2om
55 capitulum partis eiusdem. Et propter hoc huiusmodi figurationes difformi-
tatum in sonis diversificari possunt multipliciter propter variationem alio­
rum duorum, scilicet intercisionis pausarum et mixtionis sonorum. De istis
autem figurationibus sonorum dicendum est fere in omnibus conformiter
sicut dictum est ante de aliis successivis excepta diversitate que provenit
60 ex intercisione et mixtione predictis.
and every weakness o f sound is also a strength. Accordingly I employ lowness and
height [in pitch] as one [and the same concept].
And I say that in sound four things are to be principally observed: namely,
height [of pitch], strength [of volume], interruption [by rests or pauses], and mix­
ture. Mixture will be spoken of later. From the diverse combination of these four
things almost every variety of sounds originates, and to them [each] is reduced, as
to root differences or primary elements. In respect to each of the first two, namely
height and strength, sound can have uniformity and difformity figured in manifold
ways by the figures imagined in the first part of the treatise prior to chapter twenty .5
And accordingly figurations of difformities in sound of this sort can be multiply
diversified because of the variations of the other two [elements], namely inter­
ruption by pauses and the mixture of sounds. In regard to the figurations of sounds,
one should speak in almost completely the same way as was spoken before concern­
ing other successive things, except for the diversity arising from the aforesaid inter­
ruption [by pauses] and mixture [of sounds].

[Il.xvi] Capitulum i6m de pulchritudine et turpitudine soni II .xvi On the beauty and ugliness o f sound that is simply
simpliciter et vere unius and truly one [sound]

Si sonus est unus primo modo ita ut sit simpliciter et vere continuus, tunc If a sound is one sound in the first way so that it is simply and truly continuous
ad eius pulchritudinem— prout puto— quatuor principaliter requiruntur. then, as I think, four things are principally required for it to be beautiful. One is
5 Unum est acuties temperata, neque enim sonus ultra modum gravis vel temperate pitch, for neither a sound excessively low nor excessively high is pleasant
ultra modum acutus est delectabilis sive pulcher sed talis potius offendit or beautiful but rather offends the ear.
auditum. Item aliud requiritur, scilicet fortitudo moderata, quoniam si Another thing is also required, namely moderate strength, for if it is too weak it
fuerit nimis debilis non erit bene audibilis neque pulcher. Si vero sit nimis will not be very audible and will not be beautiful. But if it is excessively strong,
fortis, tunc de proprie ledit aut corrumpit sensum et a remotis non auditur then it particularly offends or corrupts the senses and it is not heard distinctly by
10 distincte. Non igitur est simpliciter pulcher, talis enim sonus simpliciter those who are removed from it [at a proper distance]. Therefore, it is not simply
qualis apparet auditui bene disposito, et hoc quantum ad pulchritudinem vel beautiful, for such a simply [beautiful] sound of this sort will be apparent to the
turpitudinem a debita distantia et cum aliis circumstantiis requisitis debite ear that is well disposed and, with respect to beauty or ugliness, this [sound must
moderatis. Tertio requiritur ad talis soni pulchritudinem acutiei uniformitas, be] at a proper distance and there must be in addition the requisite circumstances
quoniam si eius acuties foret uniformiter difformis sonus ille esset inarmoni- duly moderated.
In the third place, uniformity of pitch is required for the beauty of such a sound.
48 F t o m .C [ N J
For if its pitch were uniformly difform, the sound would be inharmonic or en-
56 in sonis: soni L
49 intercisio: intensio L / E t om. L [ N J 57 scilicet om. L
51 originatur B V [ A C G , ?S] oritur 58 conformiter tr. L ante in in linea j 8 5 There seems to be no connection between earlier efforts to represent intension and remis-
L [ N F A 1P ] Oresme’s suggestion of applying his figures to sion of pitch pictorially (see Introduction II.A,
52 videlicet: scilicet V [ N ] I l.x v i: B V L the intension and remission o f sounds and the fn. 10).
54 huius o m . F f N J / 2om: 30111 F et 8um [ P ] 8 Si vero: nec etiam si L [ N ]
et octavum [ F M ] 10 [ A ] 30 in alio ante 9 tunc: quia tunc L [ N ] / aut: et V [ F ] sive
3om [ N ] MI / sonus: est sonusF [ G ] 12 a o m .L
55 eiusdem: eiusdem prime L 10 \ g \ .t u t L V [ P F M S ] om. [ N ] ergo B [ A C G ] 11 ve l: et I J S G ] sive [ A ] 14 uniformiter: difformiter uniformiter V
 3io D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum
i5 cus sive enharmonicus et valde turpis. Sed adhuc foret turpior si eius acuties
esset difformiter difformis, nisi illa difformitas esset armonica et graduata seu
armonice graduata, quod tamen vix aut nunquam posset contingere sine
intercisione pausarum que non cadit in sono simpliciter continuo de quo
nunc est sermo. Q uid autem sit difformitas graduata patet ex 160 capitulo
20 prime partis; sed quid sit difformitas armonica dicetur in capitulo immediate
sequenti. Quarto vero ad huius soni pulchritudinem facit fortitudinis ipsius
pulchra difformitas. Nam experientia docet quod talis sonus unus secundo
vel tertio m odo quandoque redditur delectabilior propter intensionem aut
remissionem fortitudinis ipsius debite factam. E t ita ymaginandum in partiali
25 sono simpliciter continuo et vere uno de quo nunc loquor. Contrarium
autem vel privatio seu defectus alicuius istorum quatuor, vel opposita
plurium aut omnium eorum, diminuit puchritudinem aut causat turpitudi­
nem sive difformitatem in sono.
[Il.xvii] Capitulum i7 m de pulchritudine soni qui dicitur
unus secundo modo
Sonus dicitur unus secundo m odo, ut dictum est ante, quando est apparen­
ter unus et videtur continuus quamvis secundum veritatem sit per pausula-
rum imperceptibilium frequentiam intercisus. A d pulchritudinem autem
eius cum quatuor prius positis que ad eius particulas exiguntur adhuc alia
tria requiruntur. Unum est pausarum imperceptibilium et sonorum par­
vorum quantitas debite mensurata. Si enim pausule fuerint nimis magne,
quamvis totum videatur unum continuum, vel etiam si parvi soni fuerint
inter se intercisi aut ad pausas indebite mensurati seu male proportionati,
tunc ille sonus erit raucus aut asper aut alia quadam nota turpitudinis vici-
atus. E t si forsan pausule fuerint nimis parve vel nimis rare seu rare seminate,
tunc sonus erit ab asperitate temperata nimis remotus, sicut sunt quedam
15 enharmonicus om. [ A ] correxi ex eukar- 25 quo: qua V
monicus B L [ G ] eucarmonicus K eubar- 26 autem: vero L / vel1: seu V / seu: vel V
monicus [FM CPS] enharmonicus [N ] 27 diminuit B V [ A P N S ]
enarmonicus [ J ] j et valde turpis bis B et ? F , ?M , ? C ] I causat B V [ S , ?C , ? A ] om.
multum turpis [ A ] [ N ] causantZ.^G ] tamen [ P F M ]
16 illa B V L f C G J ista [ N F M P J ia [ A S ] 28 sive: aut B
17 posset: potestL
20 quid: quia L I F x v ii: B l F
21 sequente V / facit: requiritur L 3-4 est apparenter tr. V
22 talis: totalis V 5 autem: aut V
23 modo om. V 6 particulas om. V
311
Part II, Chapter xvii
harmonic and very u gly.1 But it w ould be still uglier if its pitch were difformly
difform, unless that difformity were harmonic and graduated, i.e., harmonically
graduated, which how ever could never or scarcely ever happen without interrupt­
ing it w ith pauses which are not present in sound which is simply continuous, and
this is the sound w e are now speaking of. M oreover, what graduated difformity
consists in is evident from chapter sixteen o f the first part; but what harmonic dif­
form ity is w ill be stated in the chapter that immediately follows.
In the fourth place, beautiful difformity in strength [of volume] makes for the
beauty o f the sound. For experience teaches that such a sound that is one sound
[speaking] in the second or third way sometimes is rendered more delightful by
duly increasing or decreasing its strength. A nd the same thing is to be imagined in
the case o f the partial sound that is simply continuous and truly one and o f which I
am now speaking.
M oreover, the contrary to, or privation or deficiency of, one o f these four condi­
tions, or the opposite o f several or all o f them, diminishes the beauty o f the sound
or causes ugliness or deformity in it.
Il.xvii On the beauty of a sound which is said to be one [sound] in
the second way
A sound is said to be one [sound] in a second way, as was stated before, when
it appears to be one and seems to be continuous although in actuality it is inter­
rupted by the frequent occurrence o f imperceptible pauses. For its beauty three fur­
ther conditions are required beyond the four posited earlier which apply to its [in­
dividual] small parts. One is the duly measured quantity o f the imperceptible,
small sounds. For if the [interrupting] pauses were excessively long although the
whole sound seems to be a continuous one, or even if the small sounds interrupted
each other or were improperly measured or badly proportioned with respect to the
pauses, then the sound w ill appear raucous or rough or vitiated by a certain note o f
ugliness. A nd if perhaps the small pauses are excessively small, or excessively rare,
or rooted rarely, then the sound w ill be excessively removed from a tempered
roughness, as are certain voices which are judged to be insipid because o f their
diminuunt L [ G ,
I l.x v i
1 See the Commentary, Il.xvi, lines 13-15.
7-8 sonorum parvorum tr. V 11 alia quadam: aliqua alia L [ N ]
9 continuum: contiguum B / si: si nimis 12 seu: vel nimis F aut nimis [ N ] rare2
L [N ] V [ M C , ? P ] om. F G raro B L [ A N S ]
10 intercisi L [ N G ] om. B V [ A S C ] autem (? ) 13 sunt:sintjL
in comparatione [ P F M ]
 312 Part II, Chapter xvii 313
D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum

voces que propter quandam levitatem seu continuitatem nimiam iudicantur excessive lightness and a quality o f continuousness, as perhaps the cry ot a cat and
15 insipide, ut forte vox cati et quorundam hominum qui videntur habere arte­ the voice o f certain men who seem to have windpipes that are smoothed or oiled.
rias delinitas sive unctas. In the second place, a symphonic mixing [in the succession] o f the small sounds is
Secundo requiritur parvulorum sonorum simphonica conmixtio, pro required. For a know ledge o f this the follow ing must be prem ised: I f there are as
cuius notitia premittendum est quod si fuerint quotlibet numeri ab unitate many numbers as you wish that start from unity and proceed continually by trip­
continue tripli sicut est hic: 1, 3, 9, 27, 81, 243, et sic ultra, et iterum quotlibet ling: as 1, 3, 9, 27, 81, 243, ... and further if there were as many other numbers as
20 alii ab unitate continue dupli sicut est hic: 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, et cetera, dico you wish that start from unity and proceed continually by doubling as: 1, 2, 4, 8,
quod omnis proportio inter quoslibet duos istorum numerorum reperta et 16, 32,..., I say that every ratio found between any tw o o f these numbers, and only
solum talis dicitur armonica— sicut est proportio 3 ad 1 et proportio 3 ad 2 such a ratio, is said to be a harmonic ratio, as for example the ratio o f 3 to 1 and the
et proportio 2 ad 1, et sic de aliis, sive ambo numeri sint de eodem ordine sive ratio 3 to 2 and the ratio 2 to 1, and similarly for the others. This is so whether both
unus de uno et alter de alio. E t similiter isti soli numeri dicuntur armonici. numbers are taken from the same series or whether one number is taken from one
25 Harum autem proportionum quedam et pauce sunt simphonice que dicuntur series and the other from the other series. A nd in the same w ay only these numbers
consonantie— sicut est proportio dupla, que est 2 ad 1, et in sonis dicitur dya- are said to be harmonic numbers.1 But only a certain few o f these ratios are sym­
pason; similiter proportio sesquialtera, que est 3 ad 2, et dicitur dyapente; phonic ratios— those that are called consonant ratios, as a double ratio (which is 2
similiter proportio sesquitertia, que est 4 ad 3, et dicitur dyatessaron. Queli- to 1), and in connection w ith sounds this ratio is called an “ octave” .2 Similarly,
bet enim istarum dicitur consonantia simplex; sunt etiam quedam conso- sesquialterate ratio (i.e. 3 to 2) which is called a “ 5th” [is a consonant ratio], and as
30 nantie composite ex hiis, sicut quadrupla que est duplex dyapason, et tri­ well a sesquitertiate ratio (4 to 3), which is called a “ 4th” . For each o f these is said
pla que est composita ex dyapason et dyapente. to be a “ simple consonance.” There are also certain others which are composite
Isti igitur soni parvuli partiales qui apparent unus sonus si fuerint equaliter consonances, such as a quadruple ratio (which is a double octave), and a triple
acuti inter se non erit turpitudo sed erit quedam media pulchritudo. Sivero ratio (which is composed from an octave and a fifth).3
fuerint inequaliter acuti secundum alternationem consonantem, sicut si Therefore if these small sounds that are parts of, and together appear to be, one
35 primus est duplus ad secundum et tertius est equalis primo et duplus ad sound are equally high in pitch, ugliness w ill not result but rather a certain mean
quartum et sic de aliis ita quod omnes per ordinem denominati numero beauty. W hile if they are unequally high in pitch according to a consonant alter­
impari sint equales inter se et dupli ad denominatos numero pari, tunc erit nation, as i f the first is double the second, and the third is equal to the first and
notabilis pulchritudo, et tanto erit maior quanto consonantia in qua se double the fourth, and so on for the others, so that all o f them denominated by the
habebunt erit perfectior— sicut dyapason est melior et perfectior consonantia series o f odd numbers are mutually equal and double to those denominated by the
40 quam dyapente et dyapente quam dyatessaron. Si autem fuerit alternata con­ even numbers, then there w ill be marked beauty, and the beauty w ill be greater in
mixtio trium parvulorum sonorum et consequenter secundum tres perfecti­ the degree that the consonance in which they are related is more perfect— the
ores consonantias, tunc erit conditio pulcherrimi soni, ut verbi gratis, si pri- octave being a better and more perfect consonance than the 5th and the 5th than
the 4th. M oreover, a condition o f beautiful sound will arise if there is an alternated
mixing o f three small sounds and they proceed according to three more perfect
15 et L [ A N F M S G ] ac B [ P ] aut V vel [C ] 31 dyapason et dyapente: dyapente et dyapa­
15-16 arterias tr. L p o s t unctas / artereas V
consonances, as for example, if the succeeding sounds— first, second, third, fourth,
son L [ N ] / dyapenthe B hic et alibi
16 delenitas [ C ] / unctas: unitas [ S G ] 32 igitur: ergo V / partiales om. V
17 parvuolorum B 34 si: est L I I. xvii ways, but in the best manuscripts they all be­
18 premittenda V 35 est duplus tr. L [ N ] / est2 B [ F S G ] om. 1 See the Commentary, II.xvii, lines 18-24. gin dy- and one must conclude that this was
19 ultra: ultra et cetera L / quodlibet V [ N ] \'r[ M ] e t i t L [ N ] / equalis: inequalis \ ’ 2 The Latin terms for octave, fifth, and the way in which Oresme spelled them. Hence
21 duos orn. L 36 aliis: aliis per ordinem L / denominati fourth are, o f course, derived from the Greek I have retained the incorrect spelling in the
22 31: duorum L [ A TJ L [ A N S G ] denominationes B denomina­ terms and are correctly spelled diapason, dia­ text without, I hope, unduly confusing the
22-23 e t . . . i bis L tos K denominato [ C ] ordinatos [ P F M J pente, and diatessaron. In the manuscripts of the reader.
24 soli numeri tr. V 37 denominatos: denominationes B [S J D e configurationibus they are spelled in diverse 3 See the Commentary, Il.xvii, lines 25-31.
28 dyatessaron [ A C ] diathessaron [ G ] dya- 37-38 erit notabilis: vocatur F [ N J
a 38 notabilis: non vilis V
tesseron V dyatesscron B L , et omnes alii thessaron [ G ] dyatesseron B \ rF [ C ] , et 42 consonantias: consonantes L soni V / con-
39 est: eritL [ N ]
omnes alii M S S habent abbreviationes ambiguas ditio: quid H /pulcri L [ N J
manuscripti habent abbreviationes ambiguas 40 dyatessaron corr. e x diatessaron [ A ] dya-
 3*4 D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum Part II, Chapter xviii 3*5

mus sonus, secundus, tertius, quartus, quintus, sextus, et sic de aliis, se habe­
ant inter se quantum ad acutiem sicut isti num eri: 4, 3, 2, 4, 3, 2, 4, 3, 2, et sic
45 ultra. Si vero illi parvuli soni fuerint inequales in proportione vel propor­
tionibus armonicis que non sint consonantie, tunc sonus erit turpis, ut si
primus sonus sit supra secundum per duos tonos et ita tertius supra quartum
et quintus supra sextum, et sic de aliis consequenter. Sed si huiusmodi
inequalitas sonorum secundum acutiem fuerit in proportione que non sit
50 armonica, sicut est proportio 5 ad 1, adhuc sonus erit turpior; et si fuerit in
proportione irrationali, erit nimis turpis. E t adhuc inter huiusmodi propor­
tiones irrationales est magna differentia quo ad istud secundum hoc quod
alique sunt magis irrationales quam alie, ut patet io° Euclidis; et alique etiam
inscibiles et innominabiles, ut patet in commento quinti E uclidis; et quedam
55 sunt magis remote et magis extranee a proportionibus armonicis vel con­
sonantibus quam alie, et secundum hoc sonus potest fieri turpior et turpior.
Tertio vero licet minus principaliter ad pulchritudinem soni unius isto
modo facit difformitas fortitudinis ipsius debite figurata sicut dictum fuit de
sono primo m odo uno in capitulo precedenti.
fifth, sixth, and so on— are related to others with respect to height o f pitch as these
num bers: 4, 3, 2, 4, 3, 2, 4, 3, 2, and so on. N o w if the small sounds are unequal in
ratio or are in harmonic ratios which are not consonant, then the sound w ill be
ugly, as when the first sound is higher than the second by tw o tones, and similarly
the third than the fourth, and the fifth than the sixth, and so on successively. But if
the inequality in pitch o f sounds o f this sort is in a ratio which is not harmonic, as
5 to 1, the sound w ill be still uglier; and if it is in an irrational ratio, it w ill be ex­
cessively ugly. Further, between irrational ratios o f this kind there is a great dif­
ference, in that some are more irrational than others, as is evident in [Book] X o f
[the Elements of] Euclid, and also some are unknowable and unnameable, as is
evident in a comment o f [Book] V o f [the Elements of] E uclid;4 and certain ratios
are further removed from , and more extraneous to, harmonic or consonant ratios
than are others, and accordingly the sound can become uglier and uglier.
In the third place— although this is less basic— duly figured difformity in the
strength o f the sound w hich is one in this w ay makes for its beauty, as was said in
the preceding chapter in regard to sound that is one in the first way.

[Il.xviii] Capitulum 18m in quo est declaratio predictorum per Il.xviii Clarification o f the foregoing statements by examples
exempla et per effectus and by effects

Hec itaque mixtio parvulorum sonorum imperceptibilium facit totum A nd so the mixture o f small imperceptibly distinct sounds makes the whole
sonum apparere unum continuum. E t secundum diversitates premissas sound appear to be one continuous sound. A nd such a sound is beautiful or ugly in
5 talis sonus est pulcher aut turpis; quemadmodum ex mixtione colorum accordance w ith the various differences premised; just as in the mixture o f colors
secundum partes imperceptibiles si debite proportionentur secundum by imperceptible parts, if they are duly proportioned as to quantity and intensity, the
quantitatem et intensionem totum fiet pulchrum et si indebite totum erit whole w ill become beautiful and if unduly proportioned the whole w ill be u gly,1
turpe, ut patet de mixtione lanarum in pannis, aut etiam si trocus duobus as is evident in the mixture o f wools in cloths ;2 or also if a top which is o f tw o or
coloribus bipartitus aut tribus vel pluribus velocissime regiretur, tunc si illi more colors were spun very quickly, then i f the simple colors are w ell proportioned
10 simplices colores fuerint bene proportionati in quantitate et extensione (?) in quantity and intensity3 a beautiful mean color w ill appear.4 But i f they are not
apparebit unus color medius pulcher, si autem indebite fuerint proportionati duly proportioned, an u gly mean color w ill appear. The same thing is true o f a
apparebit unus color medius turpis, et ita conformiter est de sono apparenti
43 sextus: et sextus L [ N ] 57 Tertio: 40L
4 Ibid., lines 51-56. 3 The manuscripts have extensione but this is
44 sic: sic semperL [ N ] 38 debite om. B
I l.x v ii i probably an error since intensione makes better
45 soni fuerint: sint V
1 Cf. Aristotle, D e sensu, Chapter 3, 439b- sense when taken with quantitate.
46 sonus om. V I l.x v iii: B V L
440b. 4 See the quotation from Boethius cited in
48 Sed: E t L [ N J 5 colorum: celorum L
2 See the Commentary, Il.xviii, line 8. II.xv, fn. 2.
49 sit: est V 8 de: ex L /duobus: duobus mediis L
50 5 : 5 3 ! ^ 9 pluribus V [ F A I P ] pluribus et B L [ A N C S ]
5t huiusmodi om. V / regiretur: giraretur L giretur [ N ] B V L [ A N J C ] , vide translationem 1 1-12 pulcher... medius om. B
34 quinti B [ A J om. [ S G ] 50 quinti 10-11 i n .. .proportionati om. [ F M P ] 11 apparebit: tunc apparebit L / unus 12 est o m . V
V L [ P F M N J J undecimo [ C ] 10 in ... extensione om. [ SG] j extensione L [ N F A I P S C G ] visui unus B V [ A ]
 3i6 D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum
Part II, Chapter xviii 3U

uno ex sonis partialibus mixto. Et ista est causa quare quedam campane
sound which appears to be a single sound but is a mixture o f partial sounds. A n d
turpiter sonant et alie dulciter, quia videlicet quelibet campana propter
this is the reason w hy certain bells ring in an ugly w ay and others agreeably, for
15 formam et magnitudinem sui resonat multos sonos licet sonus eius appareat
evidently certain bells because o f their size and shape are sounding many sounds,
unicus et secundum differentias predictas causatur in huiusmodi sonis pul­
although their sound appears to be one. And, depending on the aforesaid differ­
chritudo vel turpitudo maior aut minor. Hec est etiam causa propter quam
ences, there arises in sounds o f this sort either greater or less beauty or ugliness.
quidam nervi non possunt in tantum tendi nec tantum remitti quod possint
This is also the reason w hy certain musical strings no matter how much they are
cum aliis concordare. Inde solent cythariste tales cordas seu nervos appellare
increased or decreased [in tension] cannot be made to harmonize w ith others. For
20 falsos, quilibet enim talis nervus resonat seu reddit plures sonas invicem non
this reason citharists are accustomed to designate such cords or strings as false. For
concordes ideoque totus aggregatus ex illis non potest aliis consonare. Sed
any such string resonates and produces several sounds not mutually harmonious
de tali sono potest dici ille Cathonis versiculus, “ conveniet nulli qui secum
and so the whole aggregate o f the sounds cannot be made to harmonize wdth other
dissidet ipse.” Nam ad m odum predictarum fidium falsarum sunt aliqui
strings. But o f such sound this verside o f Cato5 can be said, “ There is no accord
homines in semetipsis tam male compositi et in moribus ita dissoni quod
with one w ho is at variance with himself.” For, in the mode o f the aforesaid false
25 sive in prosperitate sive in adversitate sive fuerint tensi sub servitutis rigore
stringed instruments, there are some men w ho are so badly put together in their
seu etiam relaxati libertatis favore nunquam tamen possunt bene facere aut
constitutions and so unharmonious in manners that whether they are in the state o f
in familiari conversatione cum aliis concordare. Unde semel allocutus sum
prosperity or that o f adversity, whether they are stretched in the vigor o f servitude
quemdam pacis domestice turbatorem sub nomine talis corde in hiis m etris:
or relaxed in the favor o f liberty, they are still unable to do well or to harmon­
“ discordans corda, discors concordia, corda nostris concorda ( /) cordis, con-
ize with others in familiar conversation. A n d hence I one time addressed a disturber
30 cors tibi corda.”
o f the domestic peace in terms o f such a chord in these meters. “ A discordant
A dhuc autem ex dictis potest reddi causa huius quod aliqui dicunt, si chord— a discordant concord; if you have a concordant chord— it w ill be in con­
tamen verum sit, videlicet quod nervus sonorum ex intestinis lupi factus
cord w ith our chords.”
nunquam potest consonare neque concordare cum nervis ex intestinis ovis Furthermore, on the basis o f what w e have said one can assign the cause o f that
factis. E t hoc est quia forsan ille lupinus nervus sibimet ipsi dissonat aut
which some people say (assuming it is true), namely that sonic strings made from
35 forsan consonat sibi ipsi sed in tali resonantia que non potest armonice nec
w o lf gut never can harmonize or accord w ith strings made from sheep gut. A n d
etiam arismetice proportionari resonantie ovilis nervi quantumcunque unus
this is perhaps because the lupine string is inharmonious with itself; or perhaps it
nervus aut alter remitteretur seu laxaretur vel tenderetur, sed sunt inpro- is harmonious w ith itself but sounds w ith such resonance that it cannot be har­
portiona[bi]les eo m odo quo dictum fuit io ° capitulo prime partis de angulo m onically or arithmetically proportioned to the resonance o f the sheep string how ­
rectilineo et de angulo qui est ex recta linea et ex curva. Rursum dicunt qui-
ever much one or the other string is loosened or relaxed, or tightened. Rather they
40 dam quod tympanum factum de corio lupi percussum prope tympana que are not relatable by ratio, as was said in chapter tw enty o f the first part in regard to
sunt ex ovino corio composita facit ea rumpi, destrui, seu crepari, quod, si
a rectilinear angle and an angle formed from a straight line and a curve. Again,
ita sit hoc, contingit propter motum et fremitum aeris causatum cum huius­
certain people say that a drum made from w o lf hide when struck in the neigh­
modi sono tympani lupini, qui quidem sonus habet in acutie et fortitudine borhood o f drums made from sheep hide causes the latter to be broken, destroyed,
difformitatem contrariam ovino corio, et etiam ille motus habet in difformi- or cracked, which— if true— happens because o f the motion and rumbling o f the
14 alie: alique V air caused by the sound o f the lupine drum, which sound has a difformity in height
L [ A F M P C S G ] tr. [ N ] sum alloquutus
1 5 magnitudinem: ymaginem L B aliquotus sum V [of pitch] and strength [of volume] contrary to that o f sheep hide. A n d also that
17 aut B V vel L 28 metris om. V
18 tendi B V [ A S ] extendi L [ N C J intendi 29 concorda: cum corda [G ] concordia [ N ]
[ P F A 1G ] 29-30 concors om. L 5 Disticha, Bk. I, Dist. 4.
20 quilibet: quibus K 31 autem om. L / dictis B L [ A N C ] om.
21 Sed o m .F [P F A 1 G ] predictis V [ S ] / huius om. V / 35 neque L 42 motum et om. L [ N ] / causatum
22 versiculus: versus V si V L [ A N S C G j quod si B sed [?P, ?F, 36 arismetice: armonice V / ovilis: ovili B V L [ A N S C G ] tantum [ P F M ]
25 tensi B V [ A S ] om. [ N G ] tenti L [ P F A 1] ?M] ovilis L 44-45 e t . .. corio B L [ A N S C G ] om.
densi [C ] 33 neque B V [F G C ] nec [ A A 1 P S J vel L [ N J
38 2o°: 20 V [ A ] \ '[ P F M ]
27 familiari: faciliori L j allocutus sum 34 forsan: forte V j lupinus: lupiZ.
40 qucque B
 3i8 D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum
Part II, Chapter xix 3*9

motion has in its difformity a configuration inimical to that o f the sheep hide and in
45 tate sua figurationem ipsi ovino corio inimicam et in hac virtute destruit
virtue o f this destroys it, follow ing the imagery posited for other successive enti­
illud secundum ymaginationes positas de aliis successivis io° et 140 capitulis
huius partis. ties in chapters ten and fourteen o f this part.

[ILxix] Capitulum 19111 de pulchritudine soni qui est II .xix On the beauty of a sound which is said to be one
unus tertio modo [sound] in the third way

It has already become evident from the fifteenth chapter o f this part that the
E x 150 capitulo huius partis iam patuit quod tertius modus secundum
third way in which a sound is said to be one is b y the simple aggregation o f many
quem sonus dicitur unus est per simplicem aggregationem multorum sono-
sounds each o f which is “ one” sound in the second w ay [of speaking]. T he “ ag­
5 rum quorum quilibet est unus secundo modo. Que quidem aggregatio pro
gregation” in this w ay o f speaking is not called “ simple” because the sounds are
tanto dicitur simplex quia non sunt ibi plures soni simul et semel— ymmo
present there simultaneously at one single time. Rather there are several sounds
sibi invicem succedunt cum interpositione pausarum, sicut est in una anti-
which succeed each other after the interposition o f pauses, as in an antiphon or in a
phona vel in qualibet cantilena. M odi vero pausarum sunt quatuor differen­
certain kind o f cantilena. N o w the modes o f pauses are four in number and differ
tes secundum magis et minus. Ideo possunt rationabiliter sic nominari vel ita
according to degree. Therefore, they can be rationally named or distinguished as
10 distingui: Pausarum quedam est magna, alia parva, alia minor, alia minima,
follow s: (1) long pauses (2) short pauses (3) minor pauses (4) minimal pauses. Thus
ita quod illa vocetur magna que durat tempore notabiliter magno et que
a pause is called “ long” which lasts a notably long time and annuls every kind o f
tollit ipsius soni omnimodam unitatem, sicut est pausa unius hore, et de
unity o f sound. A n example is a pause o f one hour. O f such a pause I shall speak
tali pausa nichil plus dicam. Pausam vero parvam voco que durat tempore
no more. N o w I call a “ short” pause that which lasts for a short but perceptible
parvo tamen perceptibili, sicut est illa quam cantores appellant pausam unius
time. This is what singers call a “ pause o f one tempus or tw o ” 1 and which is
i5 temporis vel duorum, et quam in cantu vocabili oportet facere propter
necessary in a vocal song to allow for breathing. A nd this pause produces a dis-
respirationem. E t hec pausa facit apparere discontiguitatem in sono tollitque
contiguity in the sound and annuls the unity o f sound according to the first and
unitatem soni primo modo dictam et secundo m odo; verumptamen stat
second w ay o f speaking. H ow ever it is in accord w ith unity o f sound assumed in
cum unitate soni tertio m odo sumpta. Pausa autem minor est que fit tempore
the third way. A “ minor” pause is that which takes place in an imperceptible time
imperceptibili et que facit apparere in sono discontinuitatem sed non dis-
producing discontinuity but not [apparent] discontiguity in the sound. A n example
20 contiguitatem, sicut est illa que fit inter duas notulas vel duos sonos proxi­
o f this occurs when there are tw o notes or proximate sounds unequal in pitch (or
mos acutie inequales aut etiam equales qui vere sunt discontigui sed propter
even equal) which are truly discontiguous but because o f the imperceptible time o f
imperceptibilitatem temporis illius pause videntur esse quasi contigui et
the pause seem to be as i f contiguous and immediate. But this is not called a pause
immediati. Hec autem a cantoribus non vocatur pausa; tollit tamen unitatem
by singers. Still it does annul unity o f sound speaking in the first or second way,
primo m odo dictam et secundo modo sed fit ut plurimum in sono tertio
although occurring often in sounds said to be a unit in the third way. A “ minimal”
25 modo uno. Pausa vero minima est omnino auditui imperceptibilis neque
pause is completely imperceptible to the ear and it does not produce discontiguity
facit in sono apparere discontiguitatem aut discontinuitatem et stat cum
or discontinuity in the sound. It is in accord w ith unity o f sound speaking in the
46 d e: in V / capitulo L [ N ] 12 est V L [ N F A I P C ] esset B [ A S G ]
47 huius: huius prime V 13 parvam voco B [ P F M S ] tr. L [ A G ] par­ I l.x ix
vam V dico parvam [ N ] 1 See the Commentary, Il.xix, lines 14-15.
IL x ix : B V L 15 vocabili: notabili L [ N ] / propter: propter
5 secundo modo om. V facere L
21 acutie: acutiei L [ S ] in acutie[ N ] / vere: L [ A F M S J ut [ P ]
7 pausarum: causarum V 16 pausa facit: causa fuit V causa facit G
non L vero ? V 26 discontiguitatem aut discontinuitatem
10 Pausarum om. L [ N ] / alia1: alia est L [ N C ] 17 dictam tr. L post soni in linea iy
23 intermediati V j H o c V FX / [ A M F C ] discontinuitatem aut dis­
/ minor: maior L [ N S ] / minima: minor 18 cum: in L j sumpta B V L [ C G ] dicta
24 sed: si L / ut plurimum om. L C contiguitatem B [S G ] disscontiguitatem
L [N J [ A N F M S P ] / est om. L
25 neque B V [ N G ] necque [ C ] nec [ P ] discontitem [ N ]
11 vocetur: dicitur L [ N C J 20 duos om. L [ N G ]
 320 D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum
Part II, Chapter xix 321

unitate soni secundo modo dicta, sicut dictum fuit 150 capituio huius partis. second w ay, as was stated in chapter fifteen o f this part. A nd so tw o modes o f
In sono itaque tertio modo uno duo modi pausarum reperiuntur, scilicet pauses are found in sound that is a unit in the third way, namely the short pause
pausa parva et pausa minor, et cum hoc in eius particulis invenitur minima and the minor pause. W e also find a minimal pause in the small parts o f this kind o f
30 pausa sed de illa dictum est supra.
sound. But o f this we have spoken above.
D ico igitur quod ad sonum taliter unum quantum ad eius pulchritudinem In regard to the beauty o f a sound that is one in such a w ay [as the third], in
preter septem prius enumerata que ad pulchritudinem suarum partium addition to the seven conditions demanded for the beauty o f its parts (conditions
exiguntur adhuc alia tria sibi propria requiruntur. Unum est huiusmodi which we have already enumerated), three other conditions are required that are
pausarum predictarum, scilicet parvarum et minorum, et etiam sonorum ab peculiar to it: (1) A duly measured quantity o f the aforesaid kinds o f pauses (i.e.
35 eisdem pausis interceptorum, quantitas debite mensurata, ne videlicet sonus short and minor pauses) as w ell as [due measurement] o f the sounds interrupted by
taliter unus nimis minute vel etiam nimis grosse descindatur seuinproportio- these same pauses, so that such a sound [of the third kind] will not be too minutely,
nabiliter dividatur. Secundo principaliter et maxime requiritur secundum or even too grossly, cut up, and divided unproportionally. (2) Fundamentally and
acutiem debita difformitas armonica seu conveniens conmixtio armonica. above all a due harmonic difformity according to pitch, or a fitting harmonic
Difformitas autem armonica iit secundum proportiones armonicas, que vero mixture, is required. Harmonic difformity takes place in accordance w ith the
40 sint proportiones armonice dictum est supra capitulo 170 huius. Adhuc harmonic ratios described above in chapter seventeen o f this part. Further, har­
autem huiusmodi difformitas armonica potest indebite figurari et multipli­ monic difformity o f this sort can be unduly figured in many ways as well as duly
citer ac etiam debite et adhuc differenter secundum divisionem variam figured, and still in a different fashion according to the division o f the monochord.
monocordi, de qua feci specialem tractatum et de cuius monocordi divisione On this matter [of harmonic difformity] I have composed a special treatise2 and
agit Boetius in quarto musice sue, quoniam divisio sive difformitas armonica Boethius treats o f the division o f the m onochord in his Music, B ook IV . [The
45 in genere dyatonico est pulchrior quo genere communiter utimur et requirement o f due harmonic difformity is evident] since such a harmonic division
secundum quod procedit ascensus vel descensus per illud quod vulgariter or difformity is more beautiful in music based on the diatonic scale than on that
dicitur gamma. In isto etiam genere difformitas multipliciter variatur per scale which we comm only use (in which ascent or descent proceeds through that
modos qui dicuntur musici, et secundum hoc unus cantus excedit alium in which is popularly called “ gamma” ).3M oreover in this (former?) kind [of scale] dif­
pulchritudine, sicut sensibiliter patet in responsoriis antiphonis et aliis formity is varied in many ways by means o f the modes which are called “ musical
50 cantilenis. Tertio ad huius soni pulchritudinem facit— tamen minus prin­ modes” ; and accordingly one song exceeds another in beauty as is evident to the
cipaliter— fortitudinis ipsius soni difformitas debite figurata, sicut dictum senses in responsive antiphons and other cantilenae. (3) There is a third, less basic,
fuit supra de sono simpliciter uno in capitulo 160 et de sono secundo modo requirement for the beauty o f this kind o f sound, namely a duly figured difformity
uno in capitulo 170 huius partis. Opposita autem istorum predictorum sunt in the loudness o f the sound, as was stated above in the sixteenth chapter concern­
cause turpitudinis in sono taliter uno scilicet tertio modo, de quo nunc ing a sound which is simply one and in chapter seventeen o f this part concerning a
55 est sermo.
sound which is one in the second w ay [of speaking]. Conditions that are contrary
27 150 capitulo tr. L [ N ] 38 armonica1: aut armonica L to the aforesaid ones are the causes o f the ugliness o f such a sound, evidently o f a
29 pausa parva tr. V /particulis B L [ A N S C G ] 38-3 9 seu.. .fit: sicut L [ N ] sound which is one in this way [of speaking] and o f which w e now treat.
articulis V partibus [ F M P ] 40 supra: prius L / capitulo 170 tr. V / huius:
31 igitur: ergo I ' huius partis V [ S ]
32 septem: tria L / suarum: sonarum V 43 specialiter L [ N ] / monocordi divisione
33 uYi&om.L tr. L [ N J
34 et etiam om. I ' 44 agit B [ A F A IP S C G ] tractat L [ N J ait V /
35 interceptorum: receptorum L / mensurata: 2 The reference here is, in all probability, to I 1 I.B, and especially fns. 2 and 3 of that part,
sue om. B / quoniam: quando D
esse mensuratarum L mensuratarum [ N ] 45 est: est melior et L [ N J the 'Tertius tractatus appended to his Algoris- 3 See the Commentary, II.xix, lines 44-47.
36 etiam om. L [ N ] / descindatur: dividatur 46 prccedit L j velL [ F A 1P S G ; et B 1 'f A N C J mus proportionum. See above Introduction
L / illud om. L [ N J
36-37 inproportionabiliter (improportiona- 47 gamma B V J P F A 1 G ] gemma L [ N J gama sponsoriis et L responsoribus B 53 uno om. F / istorum predictorum B V
biliter) I A '[ G ] improportionaliter [P ] et [ SC ] gutma vel gama [ A ] 51 fortitudinis om. L f C J [ A S C J tr. L predictorum [ F A I P J illorum
omnes alii manuscripti habent ambiguas abbre- 48 hoc:que L 51-52 dictum fuit tr. U predictorum [ G ] istorum [ N ]
viationes 49 responsoriis V [ A N S C ] om. [F A fP J re- 52 simpliciterow.il 54 taliter: tali L
 322 D e configurationibus qualitatum e t m otuum
P i .xx] Capitulum 20m de pulchritudine soni qui dicitur
unus quarto modo
Quarto m odo sonus dicebatur unus per aggregationem compositam ex
multis sonis resonantibus simul. A d cuius pulchritudinem preter decem
5 prius posita adhuc alia quinque videntur concurrere. Primo ibi requiritur
certus numerus sonorum. Unde duo soni non faciunt ita bonam consonan­
tiam sicut tres aut plures. Similiter possent tot esse quod videretur esse
quedam confusio. Secundo ad hoc facit eorundem sonorum conformitas,
videmus enim quasdam voces magis sibi invicem conformari quam alie,
io quandoque propter similitudinem quandoque propter equalitatem, aliquan­
do vero propter dissimilitudinem et inequalitatem convenientem, et con-
formitatem quandam que reddit consonantiam pulchriorem. H oc autem
non solum accidit in vocibus sed etiam in musicis instrumentis, quedam
enim magis consonant cum voce humana quam alia et aliqua eorum unius
i5 generis cum aliis quibusdam alterius generis magis consonant et cum aliis
minus. Inde est illud proverbium legistarum dicentium quod “ psalterium
non concordat cum cythara.” Tertio ad huius soni pulchritudinem principa­
liter requiritur sonorum consonantia seu simphonia, id est, simul sonantia, et
hoc melodiose quia alias esset dissonantia seu discordia; hec autem conso-
2o nantia secundum proportiones armonicas non tamen secundum omnes sed
secundum illas que dicuntur simphonice vel consonande. Que vero sint ille
patet ex musica et tactum fuit supra capitulo 170 huius partis. Quarto re­
quiritur consonantiarum variatio debita, hec namque variatio multum facit
ad augmentum sonore pulchritudinis et tanto magis quanto fuerit conven-
25 ientius facta secundum hoc quod una consonantia decenter cadit post
aliam deinde una alia consequenter quodam ordine delectabili atque decoro,
sicut noverunt boni compositores cantionum. Quinto ad hoc etiam facit ut
difformitates fortitudinis sonorum simplicium que debent esse debite figura­
te, ut patet ex capitulo precedenti, sint etiam convenienter mixte ita quod
30 unus sonus sicut tenor quandoque remittatur in fortitudine et pro tunc
alius intendatur aut aliquo alio modo convenienti et debito. E t sicut prius
II. x x : B V L 19 hoc: hoc est L [ N C ] /discordia: concordia
3 dicebatur: diciturL [ N J V fashion.
4 cuius: eius V [S J 21 symphonice V [ N J / sint B V f A F S G J
5 quinque: etiam L sunt U N P C M J
6 bonam: unam L [ C J 22 et: u t L [ N J j fuit: est K
7 aut plures om. L [ N ] 26 aliam: alia V j atque B l ' J A N C ] om. G et
9 magis: melius L [ N J / sibi invicem L [ FM PCJ
V L f N S P G J tr. B [ A F M ] om. [ C ] 27 cantuum L j ad hoc etiam : adhuc L [ N ] /
14 alia: cum aliaZ. faciunt L [ C J
17 cythara: cithara[ C G ] 28 difformitates tr. L post sonorum in linea 28 I
18 symphonia [ N J difformitates B L [ A N S C ] difformitas
Part II, Chapter xx 323
II.xx On the beauty o f a sound which is said to be one
[sound] in the fourth way
A sound was said to be one [sound] in a fourth w ay by the composite aggregation
o f many simultaneously resonant sounds. For its beauty five further conditions
seem to go along with the ten already posited. (1) In the first place, a certain num­
ber o f sounds is required there. Thus tw o sounds do not produce as good a con­
sonance as three or more sounds. Similarly, there can be so many sounds that a
certain confusion results. (2) A conform ity o f these same sounds is conducive to
the [beauty o f the composite sound]. For w e see that certain voices better conform
with each other than do other voices, sometimes because o f their similarity and
equality, while sometimes because o f dissimilarity and a fitting inequality plus a
certain conform ity which produces a more beautiful consonance. This happens
not only in the case o f voices but also in that o f musical instruments. For certain
instruments are more consonant w ith the human voice than are others, and some
o f them o f one kind are more consonant w ith certain others o f another kind and
less consonant w ith others [of a third kind]. Hence the proverb o f the legists which
says that “ the psaltery is not in accord w ith the cither.” 1 (3) The third principal re­
quirement for the beauty o f this sound is the [very] consonance or symphony o f the
sounds, i.e., their sounding together simultaneously, and this in a melodious
fashion, for otherwise there w ould be dissonance or discord. M oreover this con­
sonance is in accordance w ith harmonic ratios— not how ever in accordance w ith
all the harmonic ratios but w ith those which are called symphonic or consonant
ratios. W hich ones they are is evident from music and our previous discussion in
chapter seventeen o f this part. (4) D ue variation in the consonant sounds is re­
quired. F or this variation does much to increase the beauty o f the [composite]
sound. This w ill be more fittingly done according as one consonance properly fo l­
lows another and in turn is follow ed by another in a certain delightful and decorous
order, as good composers o f songs have known. (5) The fifth requirement for the
[beauty o f this sound] is that the difformities in the strength o f the simple sounds,
which ought to be duly figured as is evident from the preceding chapter, in addition
are fittingly mixed so that one sound like that o f a tenor is at one time softened at
the same time that another one is made louder— or in some other fitting and proper
I I .x x thara) for a number o f passages indicating the
1 1 have not located this proverb o f the legists, differences between these two stringed instru­
but see the Thesaurus linguae latinae (under ci­ ments.
V [ F M P ] difformita8 [ G ] / fortitudines L quenterZ.
29 precedente B [ G ] / convenienter: conse- 31 alius: aliud L / alio om. L
 324 D e configurationibus qualitatum et m otuum Part II, Chapter xx i 325

de aliis circumstantiis fuit dictum ita nunc dicendum quod opposita predic- A n d as w e have said before in regard to the other circumstances [producing
torum aut soni pulchritudinem tollunt aut minuunt. beauty] so w e should now say that the opposite o f these aforesaid [further condi­
tions] annul or diminish the beauty o f [this] sound [spoken o f as one in the fourth
way].

[Il.xxi] Capitulum 2im in quo est recollectio premissorum Il.xxi In which there is a summary o f the things premised [with
regard to the beauty o f sound]

Iam ergo enumerate sunt decem conditiones que principalius videntur con­
currere ad simpliciter dictam et perfectam pulchritudinem soni unius tertio
m odo et cum illis alie quinque et sunt quindecim que sonum faciunt pul-
5 chrum qui quarto modo dicitur unus. A u t ergo sonus habet omnes condi­
tiones sive circumstantias bonas aut ab omnibus deficit aut aliquas habet
bonas et alias non. Si omnes habet bonas seu pulchras, tunc est simpliciter
pulcher. Sed adhuc huiusmodi pulchritudo tantum potest augeri quantum
ille circumstande vel earum alique possunt meliorari. Si autem ab omnibus
xo bonis circumstantiis deficiat, tunc est simpliciter turpis et huiusmodi tur­
pitudo tantum potest augeri quantum ille circumstande vel earum alique
possunt intendi. H oc autem est in infinitum sicut patet de intensione fortitu­
dinis et acutiei vel gravitatis, similiter de figuratione difformitatis in acutie
et fortitudine que quantumlibet etiam in infinitum potest a debita et ar-
15 monica configuratione recedere. Si vero sonus partim habeat de circum­
stantiis bonis et partim ab eis deficiat, tunc non erit pure pulcher neque
pure turpis sed medius et istud medium potest multipliciter variari et habet
magnam latitudinem secundum hoc quod circumstande bone sunt plures
vel pauciores, principaliores vel minus principales, magis aut minus intense;
20 et eodem m odo de turpibus sicut quilibet potest ex prius dictis faciliter
perpendere.
Hence ten conditions have already been enumerated which seem to concur more
fundamentally in producing the perfect beauty (considered absolutely) o f a sound
said to be one in the third way. T o these have been added five others, making fif­
teen conditions w hich produce a beautiful sound said to be one in the fourth way.
Therefore, either a sound has all o f these good conditions or circumstances or it is
deficient in all o f them, or it has some good conditions and others that are not. I f it
has all the good or beautiful conditions, then it is simply [i.e. absolutely] beautiful.
But, further, beauty o f this kind can be increased by the degree that these circum­
stances, or some o f them, can be improved. If, however, it is deficient in all o f the
good circumstances, then it is simply ugly and ugliness o f this sort can be increased
by the degree that these circumstances, or some o f them, can be increased. There is
an infinite range o f this increase as it is evident from the [infinite range of] in­
creasing intensity o f the volum e and high or low pitch and similarly from the fig­
uration o f difformity in pitch and volum e which also can recede by any amount
toward infinity from a proper and harmonic configuration. But if a sound has some
o f the good circumstances and is deficient in the others, then the sound w ill not be
purely beautiful nor purely ugly but w ill be a mean and this mean can be varied in
many ways and has a great range according as the good circumstances are many or
few, more or less fundamental, more or less intense. It is the same with respect to
ugly sounds, as anyone can easily judge from the things that have been said before.

32 dicendum B V [N S C G J dicendum est 10 bonis om. B

[ A F M P J est dicendum/./opposita: com­
posita/.
33 soni pulchritudinem tr. L [ C ]
I l.x x i: B V L
z ergo B V [ C G ] om. L [ N ] igitur [ A F M P S ]
2-3 concurrere om. B
3 simpliciter: simphonicam ? V
1 seu B V [ F C ] au t/, vel [ P M ] sive [ A S G ]
9-12 meliorari__ possunt om .L,
12 intendi B V L [ A N S C G ] intendi vel remit­
ti [ F M P ]
13 configuratione L [ N ]
14 fortitudinis L / etiam om. L [ C ] / et2 om. L
15 figuratione V /partim habeat B V [ A F M P ]
tr. L [ C 7 habet partim [ N ] partem habeat
[S G ]
16 tunc: aut L j erit est L [ N G ]
19 principaliores L [ C ] / aut: vel L
20 faciliter B V L [ A N C ] om. [ F M P S G ]
 326 D e configurationibus qualitatum et m otuum Part II, Chapter xxii 327

[Il.xxii] Capitulum 22m de aliis circumstantiis que faciunt II .xxii On other circumstances which make a sound beautiful [not
sonum pulchrum ad aliquid absolutely but] conditionally

Preter circumstantias soni iam positas adhuc sunt quedam alie circumstan­
de magis accidentales et que faciunt sonum pulchrum non simpliciter sed ad
5 aliquid vel secundum quid. E t exempli causa una est inconsuetudo audiendi
sonum tam pulchrum; aliquotiens enim ex illa inconsuetudine et novitate
generatur admiratio et admiratio illa causat delectationem propter quam
sonus ab homine insolito talia audire pulchrior iudicatur. Unde etiam
aliquando consuetudo seu frequentia audiendi aliquem pulchrum cantum
10 secundum commune proverbium generat fastidium et minuit delectationem
et quandoque infert tristitiam et tunc sonus non apparet ita pulcher sicut
est in rei veritate; ideoque sepe delectat mutatio etiam in minus pulchrum.
Inde ait Sidonius, “ postque chelim placuit fistula rauca Io v i.”
Alia circumstantia est memoria preteritorum, ut si quis fuerit in magno
15 solatio cum cordis iocunditate et pro tunc aliquam pulchram melodiam
totiens audiverit quod illius melodie fantasia in eius memoria sit impressa,
tunc contingit [quod] quando postea audit similem sonum vel cantum,
quod simul concomitative revertitur actualis memoria illius letitie in qua
alias erat dum talem cantum audivit et ob hoc magis delectatur, nisi presens
20 tristitia impediat, et ex isto cantus fit sibi pulchrior. Similiter etiam econ-
verso cantus apparet minus pulcher aut turpior alicui si dudum cum primitus
illum didicit in tristitia extitisset. Inde est quod videmus senes magis de­
lectari communiter in cantilenis quas didicerunt tempore iuventatis quando
videlicet lasciviores erant aut iocundiores quam sint m odo postea quando
25 “ et labor et cure subeunt tristisque senectus,” ut ait Vergilius.
A lia est circumstantia complexionis vel etatis, quidam enim habent sensus
ita hebetes vel obtusos et iudicium ita tardum quod non possunt faciliter
perpendere subtiles et pulchras mutationes nec veloces decisiones in sonis.
Ideo neque ista admirantur nec in talibus delectantur sicut sunt aliqui
30 senes et etiam aliqui iuvenes ingenio hebetes. A lii vero in talibus propter
In addition to the circumstances o f sound already posited there are still other
circumstances which are more accidental and which make a sound beautiful, not
absolutely, but conditionally or dependently. For example, one [of these accidental
circumstances] is the unaccustomedness in hearing such a beautiful sound. For
sometimes, from this unfamiliarity and novelty, admiration is produced and this
admiration produces delight.1 A n d from this delight the sound is judged b y the
man unaccustomed to hear such sounds to be more beautiful. Hence sometimes
familiarity w ith or frequency o f hearing some beautiful song, according to the
common proverb, “ breeds contem pt” and diminishes the delight, and sometimes it
induces sadness, and then the sound does not appear to be as beautiful as it actually
is.2 A n d therefore changing to something less beautiful often produces delight.
Thence Sidonius says :3 “ A fter the lyre the hoarse pipe pleased Jove.”
Another [accidental] circumstance is the memory o f things past, so that if any­
one is very happy and at that time hears a beautiful melody so many times that a
semblance o f the melody is impressed in his memory, then it happens afterwards,
when he hears a similar sound or song, that then concurrently his present memory
o f pleasure returns to the state in which it was while he first listened to the song
and so accordingly he takes greater delight [in it] unless some present unhappiness
stands in the way. A n d for this reason the song becomes more beautiful to him.
Conversely, in the same way, a song w ill appear less beautiful, or more ugly, to
someone if he was sad when he first learned it. Hence it is that w e see old men
commonly take greater delight in songs w hich they learned in the time o f their
youth when evidently they were more fresh and cheerful than they are now when
“ labor, cares, and sad old age are at hand,” as V irg il says.4
Another circumstance is one o f constitution or age. For certain people have
senses which are so dull or obtuse and judgment so slow that they cannot easily
appreciate the subtle and beautiful variations and quick beats in sounds. Therefore
such things are not admired by, or pleasing to, some people, like old persons or

I l.x x ii: B V L 19 audivit: audiret vel audivit L, audit [ S ] /

5 causa: gratia causa L o b : ab V
12 etiam ow. L [ C ] et [ G ] 21 appareret B / primitus : prius seu primitus I l.x x ii
13 Sidonius V f A G J Sydonius B [ N F M P S ] L 1 Zoubov, in Medieval and Renaissance Studies, 3 Carmina, I, 16.
Sydonius vel Ysodorus L / postque 22 exstitisset .L Vol. 5 (1961), 96-97, puts stress on this pas­ 4 This may have been quoted from memory.
B [ A S M ] om. [ P ] postquam V L [ F N C G ] 24 erant: cantus V sage in recounting Oresme’s analysis o f music­ I assume it refers to the Georgies, III, 67-68:
/ Io v i: soni L V 23 cure: cedia V dure text. Verg. / suberunt al aesthetics. “ ... subeunt morbi tristisque senectus
14 preteritarum L L [A J 2 See the Commentary, Il.xxii, lines 8-12. Et labor et durae rapit inclementia mortis.”
16 totiens om. L / audiverit B V [ F A S ] audie­ 27 hebetes B V [ F ] hebetem [ S ] ebetes
rit ? L [ N M P G ] I impressa: repressa L L [ A N M C P ] / vel B V L [ N ] et [ A F M -
17 quod om. L [ A ] , delendum est? 29 iste B ebetem [ S ] habent ? [ P F M ]
P S C ] /et B vel L V
18 concomitantem L [ C ] 28 pulchros V / nec: ut V 30 hebetes cum A corr. ex ebetes B V L [ N C G ]
 328 D e configurationibus qualitatum et m otuum Part II, Chapter xxiii 329

causas oppositas maxime delectantur sicut quidam iuvenes rare com plexio­
nis.
A lia est circumstantia morum. Unde Boetius in prologo musice ait,
“ lascivus quippe animus lascivioribus delectatur modis.” “ Rursus asperior
35 mens incitatioribus gaudet.” E t postea subdit, “ gaudet gens modis morum
similitudine.” Alia est circumstantia materie de qua vel pro qua fit cantus,
sicut aut pro nuptiis aut pro mortuis. Unde si inconvenienter aptentur musici
modi, cantus non ita delectant. A lia est circumstantia loci, alia temporis, et
sic forsan de multis aliis circumstantiis que sunt quodam modo accidentales,
40 et faciunt, augent, vel minuunt in sono pulchritudinem non simpliciter
dictam sed secundum quid vel ad aliquid, sicut premissum est ante.
youths w ho are dull by nature. But other people— such as youths o f a sensitive
nature— for the opposite reasons take great delight in such [subtleties].
Still another circumstance is one o f manners. Thus Boethius says in the pro­
logue to the M u s i c , 5“ the licentious mind takes delight in licentious m odes.” “ Again,
the rougher mind enjoys the rousing [modes].” A nd afterwards he holds, “ a people
enjoys modes similar to their manners.” Another circumstance is one o f the matter
from which or for which the song arises, as for marriages or for deaths. W hence,
if unfitting musical modes are applied, the songs are not so pleasing. Another
circumstance is one o f place, another one o f time, and so on perhaps for many
other circumstances which are in a certain w ay accidental, and they produce, or
increase or diminish, beauty in a sound not absolutely but conditionally or depend­
en cy, as has been premised earlier.

[Il.xxiii] Capitulum 23m de causis assignandis multorum ll.xxiii On assigning the causes o f many effects by using
effectuum per predicta the prior statements

E x testimoniis multorum philosophorum, medicorum, et theologorum
constat magnam esse potentiam musice atque efficatiam quantum ad pas-
5 siones anime et corporis secundum quod sunt quidam cantus sive modi
musici differentes. Unus enim est ita compositus ut sua tarditate moveat
auditores ad vite honestatem, morum gravitatem, pietatem, et devotionem.
E t iste modus antiquitus vocatus est Dorius, quem Plato dicebat esse
musicam bene moratam. Alius vero econverso incitatione seu velocitate et
o fremitu quodam exasperat animos et incitat ad bellica facta, qui non solum
com m ovet homines sed etiam bruta. Unde in libro Iob de equo dicitur
quod, “ ubi audiverit clangorem buccine dicit: Vah, procul odoratur bellum,
exultat audacter, in occursum pergit armatis.” E t iste modus olim vocabatur
From the testimony o f many philosophers, physicians, and theologians it is
clear that music has a great power and efficacy to affect the passions o f the soul and
the body according as certain songs or different musical modes are used.1 For one
[mode] is so composed that by its slowness it m oves its listeners to honesty o f life,
seriousness o f manner, piety, and devotion. A n d this mode was called in antiquity
the Dorian mode, which Plato was accustomed to speak o f as “ a well-mannered
music.” 2 Another mode, in an opposite way, by its rousing nature, or its quick­
ness and resounding quality, stirs up minds and incites to warlike deeds, m oving
not only men but animals as well. W hence in the book o f Job it is said concerning
a horse, that “ when he heareth the sound o f the trumpet, he saith, Ha, Ha: he
smelleth the battle afar, he pranceth boldly, he goeth forth to meet armed men.” 3

5 For the three quotations, see Institutio page 181, lines 20-22: “ Idcirco magnam esse
musica, I, Chap. 1 (ed. o f G . Friedlein, 180, custodiam rei publicae Plato arbitratur musi­
31 iuvenes om. L lines 12-13, I4_I5> 18-19). cam optime moratam pudenterque coniunc-
6 Unus: sonus i?
35 incitatioribus B V [ P S C G ] om. [ F M ] mu­ I l.x x iii tam, ita ut sit modesta ac simplex et mascula
9 seu: v e lL e t [ N ]
tationibus L / subdit om. L / gens: mens L j 1 See the Commentary, Il.xxiii, line 3. nec effeminata nec fera nec varia.”
10 quodam: eo quod L quod [ N ] / incitat:
modis morum: modernorum L instat V incidat [ C ] 2 Oresme did not know Plato’s discussion of 3 J°b 39:25- For clangorem buccine the Vulgate
37 sicut o m .L the modes in the Republic, III, 398-99. His simply has buccinam, the clangorem being no
1 1 movet L / de lob scr. mg. [ A ] lob 390 / lo b :
38 modum L / delectant B V delectat L / tem­ knowledge o f what Plato said (and his knowl­ doubt mistakenly drawn from verse 24. The
lob 39 [ G ]
porum B edge o f it is somewhat confused) comes from phrase “ exultat... armatis” has been added
12 audiverit: audivit L [N C ] audiverunt
40 pulcritudine B Boethius, Institutio musica, I, Chap. 1 (ed. of from verse 21. The better reading of the V ul­
[ F P ] / buccine: bucine letabatur L buc­
41 ve l: et V / ad om. L Friedlein, 180, lines 22-23) where the exact gate in line 12 is “ audierit.” This verse is al­
cine diurnalis [ N ] / dicit: dicitur L dicet
phrase here quoted appears but not specifical­ so quoted by Oresme in his Livre depolitiques
[S]
I l . x x i i i : B V L ; MS M not used at all; illegible ly in reference to the Dorian mode: “ Unde d 'A ristote, VIII, 10 (ed. of 1489, Vol. 2,
13 in occursum B [ A N S ] mercrasim ( !) L
on this folio Plato etiam maxime cavendum existimat, ne de C V v [346V, c. 2]).
et occursum V in occursis [ C ] / pergit:
5 anime om. L / e t: et etiam L [ N ] £at L bene morata musica aliquid permutetur.” Cf.
 33° D e configurationibus qualitatum et m otuum Part II, Chapter xxiii 331

Frigius. Alius autem modus quadam mollitie media stimulos lascivie levibus A n d this mode was once called the Phrygian mode. A nother mode, by means o f
i5 infert animis, qui quondam Lidius vocatus est. Nam isti modi a terra vel voluptuousness, lasciviously stimulates light minds. This was once called the Lydian
gente traxerunt nomina ubi quisque modus magis exercebatur, sicut dicit mode. For these modes drew their names from the country or the people where the
Boetius. particular mode was practiced more, as Boethius says.4
Rursum aliqui soni ignavum soporem excutiunt, alii quietem saluberrimam Again, some sounds drive out idle sleepiness, others restore wholesome rest to
vigilantibus reddunt, alii dulcedinem magna hominum corda rapiunt et the wakeful. Still others, b y the great human lyre, seize sweetness and force out
20 omnem sollicitudinem faciunt eici ut armoniam “ solummodo delectet every care so that “ harmony alone is pleasant to hear,” as Cassiodorus wishes.5
audiri,” ut vult Cassiodorus. Narrat etiam Constantinus in viatico, “ O r­ A lso, Constantine in the Viaticum6 narrates that “ Orpheus the musician had de­
pheum musicum sic dixisse, imperatores me ad conviviam invitant, ut ex clared as fo llo w s: ‘Emperors invite me to dine that from me they m ight take pleas­
me se delectent; ego tamen delector ex ipsis, cum animos eorum flectere ure. I, however, take delight from them, since I could turn their minds from anger to
possim de ira ad mansuetudinem, de tristitia ad letitiam, de avaritia ad gentleness, from sadness to joy, from greed to liberality, from fear to courage.’ ”
25 largitatem, de timore ad audaciam.” M usic operates not only on men but on gross animals as well, for example on
E t nedum operatur musica in hominibus sed etiam in brutis grossibilibus cattle and camels, as is stated in the Tacuinum J Similarly, it operates on birds:
sicut in bobus et camelis, ut dicitur in tacuino. Similiter in volatilibus; unde whence C ato : “ the pipe sings sweetly while the bird catcher deceives the winged
Catho, “ Fistula dulce canit, volucrem dum decipit auceps.” A c etiam in creature.” 8 A n d also on aquatic animals: whence Martianus says, “ the grateful
aquaticis; unde Martianus ait, “ et melicos cantus belua grata tulit.” Delphi- creature took up the melodious songs.” 9 For the dolphin, delighted by the music,
30 nus enim musica delectatus Arionem cytharistam in medio maris a nautis brought A rion the citharist safely to shore after he had been thrown into the
proiectum salvum pervexit ad portum, sicut narrat Plinius et alii historici. middle o f the sea by sailors, as Pliny and other historians narrate.10 A lso the pow er
Item etiam musice virtus se diffundit ad corpora ita ut aliquis auditor soni o f music is diffused to the body, so that some listener, taken by the beauty o f the
dulcedine captus quod canere non prevalet verbo tacitus manibus clamat, ut sound and silenced because he is not particularly able to sing verbally, expresses
dicitur in policratico; et “ non sponte convertitur ut motum quemquem him self w ith his hands, as is said in the Policraticus;11 and “ he is involuntarily altered
35 similem audite cantilene corpus effigiat,” sicut ait Boetius. Relevat etiam so that the body m ight produce a motion similar to that o f the song heard,” as
corpora fatigata et hominum et brutorum, ut dicitur in tacuino; et multas egri- Boethius says.12 A lso, it comforts bodies that are tired, both in men and animals, as
tudines sanat, sicut illam quam medici vocant amorem hereos, et multas is said in the Tacuinum,n and it cures many sicknesses, such as the one that the
alias; maxime vero illas que ex accidentibus anime oriuntur, ut dicitur ibidem, doctors call amor-hereos14 as well as many others, and most o f all those diseases
et hoc etiam dicit Boetius et multi alii. E t si tanto auctori prebere fidem licet, which arise from accidents o f the soul, as is said in the same w ork. Boethius also
says this as do many others.15 A n d if it is permitted to credit such an author,
14 similos { ! ) L / lassivie L 30 delectatus: delectans L [ N ] / cytharistam:
x8 saporem L / saluberrimam:----- um B ------- et aristam [ L ] citharistam A citaristam [ N ]
aL 4 Institutio musica, I, 1 (ed. o f Friedlein, 180, VIII, 10 (ed. o f 1489, Vol. 2, C V v [346 v,
31 narrant B / historici [ A C ] om. [ N G ] hys-
19 hominum corda B V [ A F P ] tr. L [ S C G ] lines 15-16). c. 2]).
torici B [ S ] historiaci-L hystoriaci V hystocl
20 eici: eis L / solummodo: solum B 5 Variae, II, Epist. 40 (ed. o f Mommsen, 13 I can only find a passage supporting the
[ P ] histoCI [ F ]
21 audiri: auditum L audire [ A F P ] / Cassio­ first phrase o f this sentence in the Policraticus
32 ita om. L [ N C ] 70, sect. 3).
dorus: casyodorus B cassidorus [ P C ] / 6 See the Commentary, Il.xxiii, lines 21-25. o f John o f Salisbury. See Book I, Chap 6 (ed.
3 3 captus: captus quod captus L / canere: car­
Narrat etiam B V [ S G ] ut narrat L dicit o f Webb, Vol. 1, 40-41): “ et vi sua corporum
mine L ore [ F ] 7 Ibid., lines 26-27.
etiam [ F ] narrat et [ C ] 8 D isticha, I, Dist. 27. Boas in his edition integram penetrat densitatem, et quasi tactu
35 corpus [ F P ] cf. text. Boet. om. B V L
23 animos eorum tr. L [ N ] (Amsterdam, 1952, 63-64) prefers cum to dum quodam movet animum, et pro arbitrio suo
[ S C G ] / effigiat B V [ S ] efficiat L effugiat
24 possim B [ A S G ] et cf. text. V ia t, possum but indicates that the latter is a common nunc deficit, nunc extollit.”
[ C ] effingiat [ N ] effungant [ F ]
L V [ N F P ] possunt [ C ] 12 Institutio musica, I. 1 (ed. o f Friedlein, 187,
36 dicitur om. L / tacuino B V [ A N F S G ] et variant.
27 tacuino B [ S N ] et alii manuscripti habent ab­ 9 D e nuptiis Philologiae et M ercurii, V III, 908 lines 5-6). Friedlein’s text has quoque aliquem
alii manuscripti habent absurdas vel ambiguas
surdas vel ambiguas lectiones (ed. o f Eyssenhardt [Leipzig, 1866], 339, line for quemquem and effingat for effigiat.
lectiones
28 A c \ sic V e t [ S C ] 13 See the Commentary, Il.xxiii, lines 26-27.
37 illam: illi V illa [ P ] 27)- 14 See the Commentary, II. xxiii, line 37.
29 ait om. L / melicos B [ A F N ] et cf. text. 38 ex : de L 10 Pliny, N a tu ral History, IX , 28. Oresme
15 Institutio musica, I, 1 (ed. o f Friedlein, 185—
M art, mellicos L [ P ] mellices V melicas 39-43 E t ... intumescit L f N C S G ] om. B V changes the story slightly. The same example
[ S C ] melos [ G ] is quoted in his Livre de politiques d ’ A r isto te, 87).
[A F P ]
 332 D e configurationibus qualitatum e t m otuum
40 Solinus asseruit musicam non solum animata sed etiam elementa surda
mutare; ait enim sic: “ in alesina regione fons est alias quietus et tranquillus
cum siletur, si insonent tibie exultabundus ad cantum elevatur, et quasi
miretur vocis dulcedinem, ultra margines intumescit.” Plures quoque alie
efficatie musice ponuntur ab auctoribus quas gratia brevitatis omitto et ad
45 propositum veniendo dico quod illorum effectuum et predictorum causa
potest ex prioribus capitulis assignari et est configuratio varia difformitatis
sonorum in intensione et remissione acutiei et fortitudinis eorundem sono­
rum cum aliis circumstantiis prius dictis.
[Il.xxiv] Capitulum 24111 in quo est persuasio quod erit musica
in alio seculo
T o t sunt circumstande soni simpliciter pulchri et ita nobiles et perfecte ut
non sit difficile videre quod impossibile est eas omnes naturaliter aut arti-
5 ficialiter perfectissime congregari in hoc mundo inferiori aut in materia
passibili. Cum autem sonus pulcherrimus sit possibilis, quantum est ex se
rationabile, videtur quod huiusmodi possibilitas que est ad actum bonum, ad
rem nobilem et perfectam, aliquando et alicubi reducatur ad actum. A liter
sequeretur quod ista possibilitas foret eternaliter frustra. Si itaque sonus
10 pulcherrimus atque perfectissimus non potest naturaliter aut artificialiter
fieri in materia passibili, relinquitur quod alibi reperitur et auditur vel ali-
quotiens audietur. E x quo satis congrue persuaderi potest quod talis ar-
monia perfectissima atque pulcherrima audietur post resurrectionem fina­
lem in vita beata.
15 Unde et quamvis non sit eadem ratio de sono turpi adhuc tamen salvo
meliori iudicio videtur dicendum quod dampnati post diem iudicii ad
augmentum pene ipsorum audient corporaliter quendam sonum seu ulula­
tum terribilem et dolorosum. Scriptum est enim “ ibi erit fletus et stridor
dentium,” ut de hoc intelligatur alia scriptura que dicit, “ Resonabat autem
41 in alesina [ S G ] in Halesina text. Sol. in alle- I l.x x iv : B V L
sina [ N ] mollesina L molesina [ C ] 6 se: hoc L [ N ]
42 cum: cui L [ N J / si [S J cf. text. Sol. sed
8 nobilem: bonam L
L [ N C ] sed cum [ G ]
9 eternaliter: actualiter[ F M P ] perpetuo [ N ]
44 auctoribus B [S J om. [ F P ] actoribus L [ A ] 10 non om. L [ N ]
autoribus V [ C G ] 11 alicubi L
46 capitulis: causisL [ A N ] / varia om. V [ N ] 15 adhuc o m . L f N ]
47 acutiei bis L / eorum L 17 ipsorum om. L [ N G ]
17-18 ululatum B [ N F M P S G ] ullulatum
Part II, Chapter xxiv 333
Solinus has asserted that music alters not only animated things but also the mute
elements, for he speaks as fo llo w s:16 “ In the Halesine region there is a fountain,
which when there is no noise is tranquil and quiet, but, if pipes are sounded, exult­
ing it rises in song, and, achieving the almost marvelous sweetness o f a voice, it
swells beyond the borders.” A lso several other powers o f music are put forth by
authors, but for the sake o f brevity I omit them, and returning to the question at
hand, I say that the cause o f the aforesaid effects can be assigned from [our discus­
sion in] the preceding chapters. It is the varying configuration o f the difformity o f
sounds in respect to the increasing or decreasing intensity o f pitch and volum e o f
those sounds together w ith the other circumstances stated before.
Il.xxiv In which it is argued that there will be music
in another age
T h e circumstances o f a sound which is absolutely beautiful are so numerous, so
noble, and so perfect that it is not difficult to see that it is impossible for them all to
be brought together to the highest perfection either naturally or artificially in this
inferior w orld or in passible matter. M oreover, since the most beautiful sound is
possible, insofar as it is o f itself capable o f rational treatment, it seems that a
potentiality o f this sort for a good act, or a noble and perfect thing, ought to be
brought to actuality sometime and somewhere. Otherwise it w ould follow that this
potentiality w ould be eternally frustrated. A n d so if the most beautiful and most
perfect sound cannot be produced naturally or artificially in passible matter, it
remains that it is found and heard (or sometimes heard) elsewhere. From this, one
can be persuaded fittingly enough that such an intensely perfect and beautiful har­
mony w ill be heard after the final resurrection in the blessed life.
Therefore, although the argument concerning an ugly sound is not the same,
still, saving a better opinion, it seems that it ought to be said that the damned after
the day o f judgement w ill hear, upon the increase o f their corporal punishment, a
certain terrible and painful sound or wailing. For it has been written that “ there
w ill be a weeping and gnashing o f teeth.” 1A n d o f this is to be understood another
scriptural passage which says: “ O n the other side there sounded an ill-according
16 Collectanea rerum memorabilium, 5, 20 (ed. I l. x x i v
o f Th. Mommsen, 52, lines 10-12). 1 Matthew 13:42. Cf. 24:51 and 25:30.
19-20 de Resonabat.. .planctus scr. mg. [ A ]
V L [A C ]
18 ante ibi scr. mg. [ G ] mathi 24 / ibi: illic B Sapi. 18
19 autem B V [ A S C ] et cf. text. V ulg.; om.
18-19 de ib i... dentium scr. mg. [ A ] M 4 24
19 que dicit: qua dicitur L [ N C ] L [N PFM ]
 334 D e configurationibus qualitatum et m otuum Part II, Chapter xxv 335

20 inconveniens inimicorum vo x, et flebilis audiebatur planctus.” Ille namque
sonus erit dissonus et figuratus quadam difformitate difformi, inamenus,
omni circumstantia bona privatus, offendens et contristans miseros audien­
tes. Igitur econtrario probabile est quod tunc dulce melos felices mulceat
aures. Inde Cassiodorus ait, “ dicunt enim debere credi ut beatitudo super-
25 celestis illis musicis oblectationibus perfruatur, que nec fine deficit nec
aliqua intermissione marcescit.” E t beatus Iohannes in apocalipsi de hoc
loquens dicebat se audivisse vocem “ sicut cytharedorum cytharizantium in
cytharis suis, et cantabant quasi canticum novum ante sedem,” et cetera. E t
dicitur “ canticum novum ” propter innovationem continuam figurationis
30 illius difformitatis sonore absque fastidiosa replicatione unius et eiusdem.
Sed istis omissis ad alia transeamus.
cry o f the enemies, and a lamentable m ourning was heard.” 2 F or this sound w ill be
dissonant and figured b y a certain difform difformity, gloom y, deprived o f every
good circumstance, offending and saddening the miserable listeners. Therefore,
in an opposite w ay, it is probable that a song sweetly touches happy ears. Thus,
Cassiodorus says, “ for they say that it ought to be believed that supercelestial
blessedness enjoys musical pleasures thoroughly. This is without end, nor does it
weaken by intermission.” 3 A n d blessed John in the Apocalypse, speaking o f this,
said that he heard a voice “ as o f harpers harping on their harps. A n d they sang as it
were a new canticle, before the throne,” etc.4 A n d “ new canticle” is said because o f
the continuous innovation in the figuration o f this difformity in sound w ithout a
disagreeable repetition o f one and the same [figuration]. But, w ith these things
omitted, let us turn to other things.

[II.xxv] Capitulum 25m de applicatione difformitatis sonorum II .xxv On the application o f the difformity o f sounds to
ad magicas artes the magical arts

Cum igitur sit impossibile nature et arti omnes bonas circumstantias soni
in suo esse perfectissimo pariter adunare— que scilicet enumerate sunt 210
capitulo huius partis— nec etiam possibile est congregare omnes malas,
saltem taliter quin in infinitum ulterius possint quantumlibet peiorari, facile
est videre quod quadam singulari et artificiosa subtilitate aliquid potest addi
ad pulchritudinem aut turpitudinem aut aliam quamvis soni formationem
ultra id quod communiter solet fieri natura vel arte et quod aliquid speciale
atque mirabile per humanam diligentiam potuerit circa hoc inveniri. Si
itaque communis musica tantam habet efficatiam et virtutem sicut narratum
est capitulo 230 huius, consequens est ut aliqua specialis et extranea sonorum
difformitas vel configuratio potuerit ingeniari que maiores et mirabiliores
haberet effectus, quemadmodum videmus quod per artem medicine fiunt
confectiones mirande virtutis sicut est tyriaca vel aliquod tale. Inde est
quod artes magice fundantur pro parte in quorundam sonorum certe con­
figurationis potentia et virtute tam in melodia quam in verbis.
Therefore, since it is impossible b y nature and by art for all the good circum­
stances for a sound to unite together in its most perfect being— the circumstances
enumerated, that is, in chapter twenty-one o f this part— and furthermore it is not
possible for all the bad conditions to come together (at least to such a point that
they could not be worsened as much as w e like toward infinity), [so] it is easy to
see that (1) b y a certain singular and artful subtlety something can be added to the
beauty or ugliness or any other formation o f sound beyond that which commonly
takes place by nature or art, and that (2) in this matter something special and mar­
velous could be found b y human diligence. A nd so i f ordinary music has such
pow er and efficacy as was described in chapter twenty-three o f this part, it follow s
that some special and strange difformity or configuration o f sounds could be de­
vised that w ould have greater and more marvelous effects, just as w e see that b y the
art o f medicine compounds o f marvelous pow er (like theriac or some such com ­
pound) are made. A nd so it is that the magical arts are based in part on the pow er
and force o f a certain configuration o f sounds, both in melody and in words.

23 tu n c: c ir c a F 31 a liu d V z Wisdom\8 : 1 0 . O r e s m e e t la m u s iq u e ,” 97, rem arks on th is

26 m a r c e s c it/ " ANFCG] m a r c e s s i t BVL- 3 Variae, B k . I I , E p is t. 40 (ed . o f M o m m s e n , c ita tio n fo r th e im p o r ta n c e o f n o v e lty in

[PSM] II.xxv: BI L 7 2 , S e c t. 1 5 ), w h e r e th e r e a re m in o r v a r ia n ts . O r e s m e ’ s m u s ic a l a e s th e tic s . C f . th e C o m m e n -

2 6 - 31 E t ___ t r a n s e a m u som. [SJ 3 ig itu r VLfANPG] e r g o B[FMSCJ / 4 ApocalypseofJohn 1 4 : 2 - 3 . Z o u b o v , “ N ic o le ta ry , I l.x x ii, 8 -1 2 .

27 s ic u tom. L[NC] / i n om.L a r t i e t n a t u r e L[N] / s o n i : s o n o V s u i [F]

2 8 i n . . . s u i s om. [N] 2 1 0 c a p i t u l o BV[AG] om . [SJ tr.
2 7-
4 -5
10 p o tu e r it BV[FMPC] p o tu it L[AN] [PM] h a b e t e f f e c t u s [FJ / q u o d . om. F
2 8 s u is om. L[C] / s e d e m : s e d e m dei L[C] L[ NPFMCJ L[NCJ / t y r i a c a BVL[NSPJ
p o te r it [SGJ 13 a d m ir a n d e
29 in n o v a tio n e m : in v o c a tio n e m seu in n o v a ­ 6 p o s s i n t BVL[NSGJ p o s s i t [AFMP] p o ­ t i r i a c a [AGJ t h y r i a c a [F] t h i r i a t h a [M]
12 c a p i t u l o om. L[ i -]
tio n e m L i n v o c a t i o n e m [NC] t e s t [C]
13 d e fo r m ita s V 16 -17 fig u r a tio n is /.
30 fa s t id io s a : f a s t id io s in e L fa s tio s a P 7 a l i q u i d . . . a d d i : a d d i p o t e s t a l i q u i d L[NJ
14 h a b e r e t e f f e c t u s tr. L h a b u e r it e ffe c tu s
 33 6 D e configurationibus qualitatum e t m otuum Part II, Chapter xxvi 337

Artis namque magice generaliter dicte due sunt partes: una que fit per
demonem et alia que non fit per demonem. Ea namque que in demonum
20 invocatione consistit ac eorum ministerio exercetur nigromantia proprius
appellatur et in ipsa configuratio difformitatis sonorum dicitur habere
locum. Asserunt namque quod aliqui demones summe diligunt melodiam,
ait enim Mercurius in libro suo de deo deorum quod dii musicis cantionibus
delectantur. D icunt etiam quod alii demones summe odiunt musicam. D icunt
25 insuper quosdam demones certo sonorum modulamine coartari et alios
effugari, sicut in sacris litteris habetur de Saule rege a quo D avid in sono
cythare malignum spiritum expellebat, aut secundum alios impressionem
seu vexationem factam a demone mitigabat. A lii quoque dicunt tales spiri­
tus quadam verborum compositione seu configuratione posse invocari,
3o coniurari, vel cogi, et multa similia aliena a philosophia naturali et a vera
doctrina. D ebet enim unicuique certum esse demones non posse ab homini­
bus per talia aliter coartari nisi quia divinitus permissi quedam possunt
facere ad deceptionem ac captionem miserabilis anime que se sponte ponit
in manibus inimici. Hac igitur parte dimissa ad illam transire volo de qua
35 potest assignari aliqua ratio naturalis et ubi demon etiam invocatus nichil
penitus operatur ad extra quamvis peccatum quod in ea re committitur
aliquotiens a dyabolo suggeratur, et ista pars generali nomine ars magica
potest dici.
For generally speaking there are tw o parts to the magical a rt: one w hich operates
b y means o f demons and the other which does not so operate. That part which
consists in the invocation o f demons and operates by their agency is more properly
called necromancy, and in it the configuration o f the difformity o f sounds is said to
have a place. For they say that some demons take great delight in melody. In this
connection Hermes in his book On the God o f Gods says that the gods are pleased by
musical songs.1 T h ey also say that other demons hate music very much. T h ey say
further that certain demons are restrained and put to flight by a certain melody o f
sounds, as the Sacred Scriptures say o f K in g Saul from w hom D avid expelled an
evil spirit by the sound o f a cither2; or as some others interpret it he mitigated the
impression or distress produced by the demon. Others also say that such spirits can
be invoked, conjured up, or compelled b y a certain verbal composition or con­
figuration; and [they say] many other similar things which are alien to natural
philosophy and to true doctrine. For it ought to be certain to anyone that demons
cannot be ordered b y men by means o f such devices unless, permitted b y divinity,
they can do certain things for the deception and fraud o f a miserable soul w ho
freely places himself in the hands o f his enemy. Therefore, w ith [this] part set
aside, I wish to pass on to that part [of magic] where some natural reason can be
assigned and where a demon, even though invoked, does not externally operate at
all, although a sin committed in this matter sometimes may be suggested b y the
devil. This part can be called by the general name o f “ magical art.”

[Il.xxvi] Capitulum 26m de fundamentis artis magice et de II .xxvi On the foundations o f the magical art and
prima eius radice its first root1

A rs magica que contra veram nigromantiam distinguitur, licet nigroman­ T h e magical art, distinguished from true necromancy but fictitiously called
tia ficticie appelletur, principaliter fundatur in tribus. Iuvat namque se necromancy, is based principally on three things. For the magician supports him­
5 magus falsa persuasione aut rerum applicatione aut verborum virtute et self by false persuasion, by the application o f things, or by the pow er o f words,

18 A r te s V[FS] / d u e BV[ANCG] om. L, m in e A

s c ilic e t d u e [FMP] d u e n a m q u e [S] 2 6 -2 7 so n o cy th a re BV[NFMPS] so n o c i-
19 e t . . . d e m o n e m BV[ANSCG] om . th a re [ACG] s u a L
cy th a ra
II.XXI'
1 S e e t h e C o m m e n t a r y , I I . x x v , lin e s 2 3 - 2 4 . b a t e n im a b e o s p ir itu s m a lu s .” C f . W illia m o f
L[FMP] / a l i a : a l i a v e r o V 2 8 -2 9 s p i r i t u s om.L
2 I Samuel 16 :2 3 , “ Ig itu r quandocum que A u vergn e, De universo, P a r t II, P ars III, C h a p .
20 a c : a u t L[N] j m i n i s t e r i i s L[NJ 29 c o m p o s itio n e : a p p o s itio n e A
s p ir itu s D o m i n i m a lu s a r r ip ie b a t S a u l, D a v i d 21 ( = X X b is ), 1 6 7 4 e d ., 10 5 6 , c . 2 H .
21 c o n f i g u r a t i o B[ANSC] c o n f i g u r a t i o n e 30 a vera: v e ra [SC] s a n a / " FMP]
to lle b a t c ith a r e m , e t p e r c u tie b a t m a n u su a , e t Il.xxvi
L[GJ c o n f i g u r a t u r V f i g u r a t i o [FMP] 31 non posse BL[ANSCGJ tr. V[FMPJ
r e fo c illa b a tu r S a u l, e t le v iu s h a b e b a t; r e c e d e ­ 1 S e e th e C o m m e n ta r y , I l .x x v i , lin e 1.
23 M e r c u r iu s : M a r tin u s V T r is m e g is tu s m g. post h o m i n i b u s
[C ] 3 1 - 3 2 a b . . . t a l i a om . L hic, sed hab. p e r t a l i a
24 D i c u n t e t i a m : e t d i c u n t L d i c u n t [C] e t anten i s i Il.xxvi: BVL 4 B[ AFMPSG] f i c t i c e VL[C] f i c t e
fic tic ie
e t i a m d i c u n t [N] / d e m o n e s : d i i L[N] 3 4 i n i m i c i om . B / i g i t u r : e r g o V a u t e m [G] 1 d e2cm.V (?) [N] / a p p e l l a t u r L[MC] / n a m q u e s e
25 m o d u la m in e : m o d u la tio n e seu m o d u la ­ 35 a s s i g n a r i : r e d d i L[NCJ 3 q u e om. L[C] tr. L[S] a u t e m s e [N]
 33«
Part II, Chapter xxvi 339
D e configurationibus qualitatum e t m otuum

and sometimes by several or all o f these things on which that art, which Pliny2
aliquando pluribus horum vel omnibus istis in quibus fundatur ars illa, quam
calls “ most fraudulent,” is founded. N o w for the sake o f usefulness, even though I
Plinius fraudulentissimam vocat. N unc autem utilitatis causa etsi in parte a
digress in part from the question in hand, I wish to pursue this matter somewhat
proposito disgrediar volo tamen circa hoc aliquantulum insistere et in
and, in the explanation o f these roots, to lay bare the falsity o f this malign art, so that
declaratione istarum radicum huius artis maligne detegere falsitatem, ita
no person o f sound mind, I believe, w ho thinks about the things to be said here
io ut opinor quod nullus sane mentis qui hic dicenda pensaverit ad tales artes
w ill be affected by such arts in the future. In addition, I have on another occasion
afficietur in posterum, et cum hoc alias in quadam questione per auctoritates,
demonstrated in a certain question by means o f authority, argument, and induction»
per rationes, et per inductionem ostendi omni homini male contigisse qui se
immiscuit in hiis rebus. that every man w ho has meddled in these things has been affected badly.
A nd so the first root o f the magical art is the lying persuasion o f that w hich is
E st itaque prima radix artis magice mendax persuasio falsi per quam ipse
false. T h e magician him self is fooled by this and sometimes he deludes others. For
i5 magus decipitur et alios quandoque deludit. Putat enim operari aut v i
he believes that he operates by an occult force o f the stars or by some sacrilegious
stellarum occulta aut superstitione sacrilega; plerumque etiam mentitur se
superstition. V ery often he also falsely declares that he does something by astrol­
per astrologiam facere quod per artem prohibitam nititur adimplere. In
og y which he strives to bring about b y the prohibited art. For in the books o f
libris namque eorum quos ficte nigromanticos vocant quedam verborum
those w hom they falsely called necromancers a certain verbal composition is
compositio fingitur, in qua sunt persuasiones que sunt intelligentibus im-
feigned in which there are persuasions improbable to the intelligent but having the
20 probabiles sed ignaris verisimiles et aliqualiter tolerate. Sunt etiam ibi que­
semblance o f truth and some acceptability to the ignorant. There are also these
dam orationes ex verborum significatione commoventes animam, que tali­
certain utterances w hich by the meaning o f their words m ove a soul and which
bus adhibet fidem cum admixtione extraneorum et terribilium nominum
lend faith to such things when they are mixed w ith the strange and terrible names
quibus finguntur demones appellari. Adduntur etiam signa quedam extranea
b y which the demons are imagined to be called. There are also added certain
et c[h]aracteres, per que omnia sperant stulti posse demones coniurari vel cogi,
strange signs and characters. B y means o f all such things stupid people hope that
25 ita ut appareant sub certis figuris et imparata faciant aut respondeant ad
demons can be conjured up or forced to appear in certain guises to do things that
quesita. E x hiis itaque levis animus abstrahitur et terrore concutitur ac per
have not been prepared or to answer to requests. A n d so by all these things a
ymaginationem fortem et falsam credulitatem alteratur et immutatur, ita ut
simple mind is distracted and shaken b y terror, and by strong imagination and
hom o fiat extra sensum et velut demens seu in quadam specie manie. Hinc
false credulity it is altered and changed so that the man takes leave o f his senses and
est quod putat se videre aliqua que non videt et audire que non audit, habens
becomes like one demented or in a species o f mania. A nd so it is that he believes
30 in semetipso proprius erroris causam. D e talibus enim dicit sacra scriptura
that he sees things w hich he does not see and hears things which he does not hear,
quod “ apparebat illis subitaneus ignis timore plenus; et timore illius percussi
the cause o f the error being actually in himself. For the H oly Scripture speaks o f
que non videbatur faciei, estimabant deteriora esse que [non] videbantur. E t
such things :3 “ [But] there appeared to them a sudden fire, very dreadful: and being
magice artis appositi erant derisus,” et “ hii cum derisu pleni timore langue­
struck with the fear o f that face w hich was not seen, they thought the things which
bant.” H oc autem est possibile et sepe factum est absque alicuius demonis
they saw to be worse. A n d the delusions o f their magic art were put dow n,” and
6 illa BV[S] om. [ G] is ta [PFM] ia [AJ in h ib ita m L p r o h y b ita m [S] p h is ic a m “ they were sick themselves w ith a fear w orthy to be laughed at.” M oreover, this is
L[NCJ
m a g ic a [FM]
7 L
fr a u d u le n t is s im a m : s c a n d o le n tis s im a m 19 in te llig e n tib u s : in te llig ib ile s V in illis
10 o p in o r u m ? V /s a n u s V / d ic e n d a : d ic t a V g e n tib u s L[ CJ
1 1 a f f i c i e t u r B V[FMSCG] e f f i c i e t u r [ANP] 1 9 -2 0 im p r o b a b ile s : im p o s s ib ile s [ FMP] 2 NaturalHistory, X X X , 1 . I n h is e x c o r ia tio n V u lg a te has autem. I t h a s perculsi illius f o r
v e l p e r e a s in fic ie tu r L / h o c : e r g o V 20 ?B t o l e r a r e ?V
to le r a te c o lo r a teomnes alii o f th e m a g ic a l a r t, h e re fe r s t o it as fraudulentis­ O resm e’s illius percussi, a n d f i n a l l y i t o m i t s non
1 1 - 1 3 e t . . . r e b u s om . [G] manuscripti sima artium plurimum, and he p o in ts out its i n l i n e 3 5 , w h i c h is p r e s e n t i n a l l o f t h e m a n u ­

1 2 p e r 1 B[ AMFPS] p e r e t V e t L[CNJ / p e r 2 21 s ig n if ic a tio n e : c o n fig u r a tio n e [FMP] fi­ e x tr a o r d in a r y in flu e n c e . s c r ip ts .

om. F g u r a tio n e [G] 3 Wisdom 1 7 :6 -7 , 8. A fte r apparebat th e
1 3 i m m i s c u i t BV[AFP] i m m i s c e t L i m m i ­ 2 3 fin g u n t u r : s ig n a n tu r L / a p p e lla r e V
s c e n t [N] i n m i s c u i t [SC] i m m i s i t [M] 2 3 -2 4 om.fPFJ
a p p e l l a r i ___ d e m o n e s
28 v e lu t om. V / m a n i e VL[AFSJ om. [ GJ [SJ I post s c r i p t u r a add. [GJ s a p i e n t i e 1 7 /
1 4 a r t i s m a g i c e tr. V / i p s e m e t L[CNJ 24 k a ra cte re s L[NJ
B[MPC, ?N] de s c r i p t u r a scr. mg, A S a p i e n t i e 1 7 0
16 su p e r s tito r u m s o r tile g ia L
in a n ie
26 e t : e t a V ac [SJ / a c BVfAFMSGJ et
29 q u e 2 B[AFMPSCJ a l i q u a q u e VL[NJ 32 [ n o n ] om . S et text. Vulg., sed omnes alii
1 7 a s tr o lo g ia m : a s tr o n o m ia m V / a r te m : p a r ­ L[NPGJ
t e m V a r t e s [SJ/ p r o h i b i t a m i ? V[ANCG]
30 s e m e t i p s o om. [FMP] s e m e t i p s i s V s e s u i manuscripti habent eum
27 e t 1 : i n F a c[CJ
 340 D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum Part II, Chapter xxvii 341

35 vera apparitione seu visibili presentia, quamvis possit aliquando veraciter possible and has often been done without the true appearance or visible presence
apparere, sicut dictum est in capitulo precedenti. o f some demon, although sometimes one can truly appear, as has been said in the
preceding chapter.

[ILxxvii] Capitulum 27111 in quo est probatio predictorum ex ILxxvii In which the prior statements are proved by means o f the
diversitate sectarum et complexionum diversity of sects and natural constitutions

Q uod autem coniuratio talis non habeat virtutem in se ut faciat demones That such conjuring does not in itself have the pow er to summon demons is
venire, argumentum est hoc, quod magi in variis sectis aut legibus et in argued as fo llo w s: magicians in various sects and under different laws, in diverse
5 diversis temporibus et regionibus utuntur aliis et aliis coniurationibus. periods and regions, use mutually different incantations. For they fabricate their
Confingunt enim suas invocationes et sacrificia iuxta opinionem et creduli­ invocations and sacrifices according to the view s and credulity o f the men whom
tatem hominum quos intendunt decipere et vocant demones aliter et aliter. they intend to deceive, and they call up the demons in different ways. For if anyone
N am si quis aspiciat incantationes antiquorum gentilium quas tetigerunt looks at the incantations o f the ancient peoples w hich the poets touched upon, he
poete, videbit quod totaliter differunt a modernis. Unde in aliquibus libris will see that they differ completely from modern ones. Hence in certain new books
10 novis artis notorie que est quedam magica invocantur sancti et angeli quos o f the notorious art, which is a kind o f magic, saints and angels w hom the Chris­
venerantur christiani, antiqui vero invocabant Plutonem, Hecatem, et deos tians venerate are invoked, while the ancients were accustomed to invoke Pluto,
suos, et alii nunc invocant demones aliis nominibus. E t hoc est signum Hecate, and their gods; and still others now invoke demons by other names. A n d
quod hec non fiunt virtute significationis verborum , nisi quia per hoc this is an indication that these do not arise from the powder o f verbal signification,
animus leviter credulus alteratur. unless by this the easily credulous mind is altered.
15 A liud argumentum est ex complexione, nam sunt aliqui ita complexiona- Another argument follows from natural constitution, for there are some people
ti quod licet tota virtute sua temptaverint per hanc artem aliquid experiri so constituted that although they have attempted by all their m ight to experience
nunquam tamen demon vel aliquod tale poterit aut potuit eis quom odolibet something by this art, they never can or could make a demon or some such thing
apparere, cum tamen nichil omiserint facere de hiis que continentur in appear to them, even if they have omitted doing none o f the things which are
libris illius artis. A lii vero bene potuerunt per talia immutari. Si autem hec contained in the books o f the art. But others could be easily changed by such
ao fierent virtute coniurationis, tunc demon veraciter appareret et figuraretur things. I f these things [such as the appearance o f demons] took place by virtue o f
ad extra. E rgo unus ita bene deberet operari virtute coniurationis sicut alter, conjuration, then the demon should truly appear and take form externally. There­
ex quo neuter aliquid omitteret. E t quoniam non est ita, sequitur quod hec fore, one person ought to be able to operate by virtue o f conjuration just as w ell as
non fiunt in re extra sed potius in mente decepta; quod etiam patet, quia another, i f neither omitted anything. A n d since this is not so, it follow s that these
illi qui non possunt ista videre sunt melioris dispositionis et complexionis things do not take place in something outside but rather in the mind that is de­
a5 ac firmioris animi et securioris, alii vero qui talia possunt sunt in complexio- ceived. This is also evident because those w ho cannot see these things are o f better
36 d ic tu m : v is u m V disposition and constitution and o f stronger and more secure mind, while the
9 d iffe r u n t: d is c o r d a n t L[N], et tr. L[N]post
m o d e r n is
I L x x v i i : BVL L[NFMPC] tr. BV[AS] [ FMP] / y m i t a r e V
9 -10 lib r is n o v i s 16 te m p ta v e r in t L[ ?A,NSG] a t t e m p t a v e ­ tiu s a r tis
3 c o n iu r a tio B[AFMPSG] tr. L[CN]
ta lis n o v is [G] r in t!^ te m p ta v u n t B t e m p t a v e r u n t [FMP] zi ig itu r L[S] / s i c u t : c o m p l e x i o n i s s i c u t L
c o n iu r a tio V / h a b e t L[N] / v i r t u t e m : 12 n u n c om . V[SG] j a l i i s BV[ASCG] e t t e n t a v e r u n t [CJ / e x p e r i r i : r e p e r i r e L[N] 22 o m i t t e r e t BL[NCGJ o b m i t t e r e t [FMP]
v e r ita te m L a li i s L s u i s [N] a l i o s [FMP], et[FMPJom. 17 d e m o n om .B a d m i t t e r e t [S] o m i s e r a t V
a u t B[FMPG] e t L[NSC] s i v e [A ] / i n 23 f i u n t : f i a n t [S] f u i t V[FJ
o m i s e r i n t ?B,L[CG, ?N] a m i s e r i n t [S]
4 n o m in ib u s 18
om. L[N] 13 fiu n t BVfAFSGJ s i n t L f a c i u n t [MP] e m i s e r a t V o b l i m i s c e r i n t [M] o b m i s e r i n t 2 4 i s t a : i l l a L[G] i s t a i t a V t a l i a [NJ / e t : a c
e t 1 om . L / a li i s 1 om. B L
5
fu it [C] f i t [N] I s i g n i f i c a t i o n i s : f i g u r a t i o ­ [FA] a b h i n s c e r i n t [P] / h i i s : e i s L / q u e :
8 a s p i c i a t B[FMPG] i n s p i c i a t VL[NSCJ n is V 25 a c : a u t V / a l i i : a l i a V / p o s s i n t L
q u e ta m e n L
r e s p i c i a t [A J e x c o m p l e x i o n e om. L[AJ
15 19 i l l i u s a r t i s BV[ ASGJ tr. L[C] om . [N] i s ­
 342 D e configurationibus qualitatum e t m otuum
Part II, Chapter xxviii 343
ne melancolici aut levis et infirmi animi. Sunt etiam ut in pluribus miseri,
imprudentes seu indiscreti, quod est signum eius quod dictum est ante. others w ho can see such things are o f melancholic constitution or o f weak and
infirm mind. They are also, like those w ho are miserable in several things, im­
H oc idem potest argui ex dictis ipsorummet magorum. Nam ad resisten­
prudent or indiscreet. This is an indication o f that which has been said before.
dum huic veritati predicte et ad defensionem sui erroris ipsi in quibusdam
The same thing can be argued from the statements o f the magicians themselves.
30 libris invocatoriis scripserunt quod alique sunt constellationes et momenta
For in order to resist the truth o f what has been said above and to defend their
temporum in quibus si aliquis nascatur nunquam poterit tales spiritus videre
error, they have said, in certain books about invocations, that there are some con­
sive percipere quidquid ipse faciat sed unus alius hoc bene poterit. Istud
stellations and moments o f time under which someone born w ill never be able to
autem videtur confirmare propositum, quoniam constellatio nativitatis unius
see such spirits or to perceive anything which he [the magician] does, but another
hominis non diminuit virtutem future coniurationis sed ad complexionem
one w ill be w ell able [to see such spirits]. This then seems to confirm what has been
35 nati aliquid facit et cum aliis causis ipsum taliter disponit ut ad huiusmodi
proposed, since the constellation o f the nativity o f one man does not diminish the
dementiam faciliter aut vix vel nunquam trahi possit. Quemadmodum etiam
power o f future conjuring but does something to the natural constitution o f the
ex configuratione celi in aliquo tempore currit consequenter una egritudo et
person born [under it] and along w ith other causes so disposes the person that he
est communis et in alio tempore rara, et ita de quibusdam aliis rebus, ita
could be drawn easily, rarely, or never to a dementia o f this sort. A lso, just as a
similiter aliquotiens influentia celi multos inclinat ad falsam fidem et levem
sickness consequently proceeds from a configuration o f the heavens at a certain
40 credulitatem magicis artibus opportunam et sunt tunc temporis multi magi
time, and is common, and at another time is rare, as is the case o f certain other things,
et aliquotiens pauci vel nulli. Hec igitur fiunt artificiose in hominibus quos
so similarly the influence o f the heavens inclines many people to a false faith and a
ad hoc inclinavit natura, non autem a demone qui non subiacet constella­
tionibus celi. weak credulity suitable for the magical arts and there are at that time many magicians
and other times few or none. Therefore, these things arise artificially in men whom
nature has inclined for this [sort o f thing]. But they do not arise from a demon,
who is not subject to celestial constellations.

[Il.xxviii] Capitulum 28m in quo arguitur ad idem ex

Il.xxviii In which it is argued for the same thing on the basis of
etatibus hominum
the [various] ages o f men
H oc idem probatur rationibus sumptis ex parte etatis. Pueri namque et
This same thing can be proved by arguments based on age. For boys, and ado­
adolescentes seu iuvenes propter animi levitatem et facilem credulitatem
lescents or youths, because o f weakness o f mind and easy credulity, can be seduced
5 magis et citius possunt per ista seduci et maxime illi qui nundum dederunt
to a greater degree and more quickly by these things, and most o f all those w ho
ymaginationem suam et cogitationes voluptatibus carnis, tales namque
have given their imagination and thoughts over to carnal desires, for such ones can
facilius possunt ad ista converti. Ideoque utentes illa parte magice que docet
be easily converted to these magical practices. Therefore, those w ho employ that
aliquos in circulo ponere ad hoc faciendum eligunt sibi tales pueros vel
part o f magic which requires placing some people in a circle to accomplish its
puellas innocentes. Ista igitur fiunt in ymaginatione non in re. Sepe enim
objective chose for it innocent boys and girls. Therefore, these magical results take
o tales pueri propter solas narrationes vetularum quas audiverunt ad modicam
place in the imagination and not actually. F or often such boys, solely as the result
umbram putant se videre nocturnos demones aut divinas fatales et similia
o f the stories o f old wom en which they have heard, at the slightest shadow think
fabulosa.
that they see nocturnal demons or deadly divines and similar fabulous creatures.
26 c t L [ N F M P S C G J etiam/k4 J aut 35 u t: nec L
27 imprudentes: et imprudentes V [ A ] pru­ 37 ex: ex aliqua V / consequenter: convenien­
dentes [ P ] sicut [ F M ] fecit ut sicut [ P J nunquam [ S G ]
ter sive communiter ? omni manuscripti ha­
29 huic veritati tr. V huic virtuti [ M , ? P ] / 41 igitur B V [ A F M P J autem L [ N S C ] 6 ymaginationes suas V
bent abbreviationes ambiguas
et om. V / sui erroris tr. V 42 m c \ m a tL [ N S ] 8 tales om. L [ N P C ]
38 rebus om. L [ C ]
32 bene poterit B L [ A N S C ] tr. Vr[ F M , ? P ] 43 celi om. L [ C ] 9 igitur: autem B ergo/" A C ]
40 opportunam [ A ] om. [ F M P G ] oportunam
34 future: figure V nature [ A ] , et [ A ] om. 11 videre om. V / divinas L [ A N S C G ] duas
B L [ S ] opportuna [ C ] optimam V aptam
coniurationis I I .x x v iii: B V F B [ F P ] demones V deas [ M ]
[ N ] I sunt B V [ A C G J om. L [ N S ] facit ut
5 nundum B [ A N P F ] nondum L V [ M C j
 344 D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum Part II, Chapter xxix 345

A d hoc etiam est argumentum de etate senili. A d quedam namque male­
ficia magica peragenda sunt apte vetule quedam quarum virtus ymaginativa
15 ex malicia complexionis cerebri viciata est et corrupta et aliquibus rebus
nimis affixa. Ideoque ymaginatione sua possunt multa miranda facere, sicut
deducit A lgazel in 50 phisice sue, qui omnes huiusmodi effectus artis magice
et fascinationis et talia reducit ad causam predictam. N on igitur fiunt a
demone sed ut plurimum ymaginatione. Q uod iterum patet a signo, quoniam
20 non quecunque anus seu vetule in hoc possunt sed pauce et potissime ille
que in singulis oculis duplices habent pupillas, ut dicunt auctores. E t
Ovidius in libro sine titulo de quadam sic inquit: “ Oculis quoque pupilla
duplex fulminat, et geminum lumen ab orbe redit, evocat antiquis proavos
atavosque sepulchris.” D e hiis Solinus ait, “ Apollonides perhibet in Scithia
25 feminas nasci que bitie vocantur: has in oculis pupillas geminas habere, et
perimere visos (/visu?) si forte quem irate aspexerint. Hec sunt et in Sar­
dinia.” Si autem hec fierent virtute invocationis vel coniurationis et ad extra,
non est aliqua ratio quare magis in hoc possent tales anus quam alie. Provenit
igitur ex corruptione virtutis ymaginative, cuius corruptionis signum est
30 duplex oculi pupilla cum etate senili et fragili sexu.
One can also argue to the point on the basis o f old age. For certain old women
whose imaginative pow er has been vitiated and corrupted as the result o f the bad
quality o f the cerebral constitution and has become excessively attached to some
things are [particularly] apt for the carrying out o f nefarious magical practices.
Therefore, by their imagination they can do many marvelous things, as A lgazel
deduces in the fifth part o f his Physics, [where] he reduces all such effects o f the
magical art and o f fascination and like things to the aforesaid cause.1 Therefore,
these things do not arise from a demon but most often from imagination. A gain
the evidence for this is that not any crone or old woman can do this but only a few
and the most capable are those w ho have double pupils in one eye, as the authors
say. A n d O vid in his b ook w ithout title speaks o f a certain woman as fo llo w s:
“ From her eyes, too, double pupils dart lightning strokes, w ith light that issues
from twin orbs. She summons forth from ancient tombs ancestors remote.” 2 O f
these same wom en Solinus says, “ Apollonides says that there are wom en born in
Scythia called hithiae w ho have tw in pupils in their eyes and can slay w ith their
sight if perhaps they look upon someone in anger. These are also in Sardinia.” 3
But if these things were to take place by virtue o f incantation or conjuring and
[were to do so] externally, there is no particular reason w hy such old wom en are
able to do this better than others. Therefore it must arise from corruption o f the
imaginative virtue, the sign o f which corruption being the double pupil o f the eye,
together w ith old age and fragile sex.

[Il.xxix] Capitulum 29111 in quo adhuc arguitur ex alteratione II .xxix In which this is further argued from the alteration and
et reclusione anime retirement [inward] o f the soul

Rursum quod talia sepe fiant sine demone adhuc ostenditur. Nam certum That such things often take place w ithout demons is further demonstrated. For
est ex innumerabilibus experientiis et ex auctoribus medicine et aliis historiis it is certain on the basis o f innumerable experiences and the [statements of] medical

13 argumentum: augmentum V nat C / proavos om. L,

14 quedam B V [ A N S ] om. L f F M P C G J
15 viciata: variata ? B / corrupta V [ A F M
P C G J corumpta B L [ N S ]
16 nimis: minus L / afflixa L [ M ]
17 Algazel V L [ A N ] Agazel B [ M S C G ] Aga-
ziel/"F P j I phisice B L [ A N F M P C ] meta-
physice V f S G J / omnes huiusmodi om. L /
magicis V
18 fascinationes V [ N ]
20 potissime L [AFM PSCG ] potissimum
BV
2\ auctores i F M P ] actores B L [ A N ] autores
V [C G J '
22 de quadam tr. L post inquit in linea 22
23 fulminat: fluminat, alio fulminat L flumi-
24 sepulchris et cetera B V [ A ]
24-27 D e...SardiniaL [ N S C G ] om.
I l.x x v ii i mentary, Il.xxviii, lines 19-21.
B V [A F M P ]
1 Seethe Commentary, Il.xxviii, lines 16-18. 3 Collectanea rerum memorabilium, I, 101 (ed.
24 ait [ S G J om. L [ N C J / Apollonides [ S J
2 Am ores, I, 8, lines 15-17. O vid ’s text has of Th.Mommsen, 26, lines 3-5).Oresme’s quo­
Appollonides [ G ] Apelodes L [ N ] Aspo-
gemino instead of geminum, although some MSS tation is quite accurate, with only minor varia­
lonides [ C J / Scithia [ S G ] sicia L [ N ]
have the latter reading. The preferred reading tion, and where the reading o f Oresme varies
sichia [ G ]
is micat instead o f redit\ still the latter occurs. (as visos instead of visu) it is for the most part
25 bitie [ S C ] vicie L [ N ] lucie [ G ] / geminas
M y translation is adapted from the Loeb found among the variant readings cited by
om. [ S ]
translation o f G. Showerman. See the Com­ Mommsen.
26 visu text. Sol. I quem irate tr. [ S ] j t t [ G ] ,
cf. text. Sol. etiam L [ S C N J
27 hec: per hec L / virtute: in virtute L / ad ymaginative tr. L / corumptionis B V L [ S ] 1 adhuc o m .L [ C ]
om. F 30 oculi pupilla tr. L 3 fiunt L V
29 ex om. L / corruptione [ A N F M P C G ] 4 historiis L [ A F M P C ] om. [ G ] hystoriis
corumptione B V L corne [ S ] I virtutis I l.x x ix : B V F B V [N S ]
 346 D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum Part II, Chapter xxix 547

5 quod ex pluribus accidentibus et in multis egritudinibus et speciebus manie authors and other histories that a similar thing often happens as the result o f sever­
ex diversis causis sepe contingit simile, quod videlicet infirmi putant se al accidents and from numerous causes in many diseases and types o f mania, name­
demones videre et audire et multa alia fantastica, quorum nichil est ad ly that sick people think that they see and hear demons and many other fantastic
extra. Sed omnia illa eveniunt ex vitio organorum sensuum interiorum et things w hich have no external counterpart. B ut all these things arise from the
ex corruptione interioris apprehensive seu virtutis ymaginative vel estima- defect o f the interior sense organs and the corruption o f the interior apprehending,
io tive propter apostema cerebri vel ab alia causa et aliquotiens provenit ori­ imaginative, or estimative pow er brought about by an abscess o f the brain or some
ginaliter a corde. Consimiliter patet de freneticis et de illis qui dicuntur other cause. A n d sometimes it arises originally from the heart. Similarly it is
lunatici. N am clarum est a nomine quod dicuntur a luna secundum cuius evident in deranged people and in those w ho are called lunatics. For it is clear from
cursum comm oventur humores eorum. Unde certum est quod hec non the name that they are named from the m oon in accordance with whose course
fiunt a demone sed via nature. Multa etiam mira de talibus narrat Augusti- their humors are moved. W hence it is certain that these things do not arise from a
i5 nus ia 0 super genesim ad litteram et alii auctores quamplurimi. Sicut ergo demon but in a natural way. A ugustine1 in the tw elfth book o f his Literal Commen­
predicta possunt fieri ex egritudine vel alia occasione via nature ita possi­ tary on Genesis and very many other authors recount numerous other such marvels.
bile est effectus magorum fieri per viam artis que imitatur naturam absque Hence just as the aforesaid effects can arise from sickness or on another occasion by
alia actione spiritualis substantie separate. way o f nature, so it is possible the effects o f magicians are produced by w ay o f an
N unc autem ostendendum est quod quedam istorum principaliter fiunt art which imitates nature without any other action o f separate spiritual substance.
2o propter revocationem seu reclusionem anime ad intra et retractionem spiri­ N o w it is to be demonstrated that certain o f these effects take place, in the main,
tuum animalium sensitivorum ad virtutes interiores, quoniam anima sic as the result o f the revoking or inward reclusion o f the soul and the withdrawing
retracta seu recollecta non in se sed in spiritibus suis mirabilem habet p o­ o f the sensitive animal spirits to the interior powers, since the soul drawn back or
tentiam, cuius signum est quod in arrepticiis et epilepticis ratione egritudinis collected in this w ay does have a remarkable power, not in itself but in its spirits.
spiritus retrahuntur et recluduntur ad intra sicut in epilepticis tempore quo The sign o f this is that in victims o f seizure and epileptic fits the spirits (as the
25 cadunt et tunc sensus exteriores sopiuntur ita ut non videant neque audiant result o f the sickness) are retracted and retire inward, as in the case o f epileptics at
et laborat virtus interior. Quidam autem illorum in illa extasi mirabiles the time when they fall. A n d then the exterior senses are deadened so that they
habent visiones; unde postea narrant se vidisse multa et quandoque pre- neither see nor hear and the interior power goes to w ork. Certain o f these people
dicunt futura et revelant occulta. E t ita legitur in historiis de M achometo in an ecstasy o f that kind have marvelous visions. Hence afterwards they narrate
legislatore Sarracenorum et in sacris litteris de Balaam qui de semetipso that they have seen many things and sometimes they predict future events and
30 dicebat: “ D ixit hom o cuius obturatus est oculus [...] qui cadit et sic aperiun­ reveal occult matters. A n d so it is read in the histories concerning Muhammad,2
tur oculi eius” et cetera, i.e., oculi interioris virtutis aperiuntur. Possibile est the legislator o f the Saracens, and also in the sacred scriptures concerning Balaam,
tamen quod iste Balaam cum hoc habuerit revelationem a demone sicut w ho said o f him self:3 “ T he man hath said, whose eye is stopped u p .. .he that fall-
aliqui expositores dicunt aut etiam a spiritu sancto sicut alii dicunt. E t de eth and so his eyes are opened,” etc., i.e. the eyes o f the interior pow er are opened.
5 manie: inanie [ M ] inanii V
H owever, it is possible that this Balaam had in addition a revelation from a demon
19 istorum: istarum L istorum vel illorum
6 videlicet B V [A F SC G ] om. L scilicet as some expositors say, or even from the H oly Spirit as others say.4 A n d concern-
[P F M ]iX io iv a n [G ]
[N M P ] 20 et B V [ A S C G ] om. [ F M P J ac L [ N J
8 veniunt L [ C N ] 21 ante ad add. L vel per sensitivorum alias
I I .x x ix possessed by demons sometimes say true
8-9 e t... apprehensive om. [ F M P ] spirituosorum
1 D e genesi ad litteram, XII, Chap. 12 (Migne, things not accessible to the senses.
9 corruptione [ A S C G ] corumptione 23 epilepticis corr. e x epylepticis L epylenticis
P L , V ol. 34, cc. 463-64), where Augustine 2 See the Commentary, II.xxix, lines 28-29.
B V L [N ] B V epilenticis [ A F M P S G , ? N , ? C ]
speaks o f the phrenetici and their visions. On 3 Numbers 24:3-4.
10 ab alia causa: ob aliam causam L 23-24 ratione... epilepticis B V [ N C S G ] om.
the other hand, in Chapter 13, Augustine tells 4 See the Commentary, Il.xxix, lines 31-33.
11 similiter V [ A ] L[AFM P]
us that it is not too surprising that those
cuius 24 epilepticis corr. ex epylepticis B epilenticis
12 cuius: eius Aeius V
[ N S C G J epylenticis V
14 etiam B V [ A ] om. L [ C N J enim [ P F M G ] 26 illorum B L [ N C ] eorum [ A F M P ] eorun- 30 post dicebat add. [ G ] , mg. [ A ] numeri 24 31 i.e. om. L [ A ] et [ C ]
et [ S ] I de talibus om. V dam V / in : ex L / mirabiles om. F (24°, A ) I Dixit [ G ] et text. V u lg .et ita corr. 33 aliqui om. L [ N C ] / sicut om. [ A C ] ut L
15 ergo B [ F M P C G ] om. [ A J igitur V L [ N S ] 28 historiis L [ A F M P C G ] hystoriis B V [ S ] ex dicit in aliis M S S / obturatus A V [ A S G ] [N ]
17 magarum L 29 in: in morum (i.e. numerorum) 24 L obscuratus L [ N F M P C ]
 348 D e configurationibus qualitatum et m otuum Part II, Chapter xxix 349

hoc nichil assero sed sufficit michi quod anima sic reclusa tales possit visio-
35 nes habere via nature. Sunt enim sensus exteriores veluti foramina quedam
quibus obstructis tota influentia spirituum retinetur ad intra et sic virtus
interior fit inde potentior. Cuius signum est quod ceci habent fortem
ymaginationem, et sicut versificator ait, “ Sensus ab alterius perditione viget.”
Sicut igitur in illis hominibus fit huiusmodi reclusio spirituum natura vel
40 egritudine, ita possibile est quedam conformia fieri in homine apto nato et
perterrito per falsam persuasionem aut stultam credulitatem. E t hoc faciunt
magi, hec enim est una radix illius artis, sicut premissum est ante. Nam
quemadmodum ad membrum vulneratum sanguis affluit et alias partes velut
exangues dimittit, sic ad organum virtutis estimative terrore sauciatum vel
45 alias lesum spiritus recurrunt et organa exteriora quasi stupida sive sopita
relinquunt.
A dhuc autem istud probatur a signo, nam aliqui magi puerum vel quem­
vis alium a quo per hanc artem volunt habere responsa faciunt aspicere
contra aliquod politum et tersum sicut contra speculum vel contra fialam
50 vitream aut contra ensem splendentem vel super ungues suos aut contra
aliquod tale a quo possit visus repercuti ut videlicet per falsam credulitatem
cum adiutorio illius obiecti extrinseci spiritus sensitivi reverberentur ad
interiores potentias et fortificetur cogitativa virtus sive ymaginativa propter
quod fiat apparitio talis. Unde et anima aliquotiens per hoc abstrahitur et
55 distenditur et fit quasi speculum, eo modo quo dictum fuit in ultimis capitulis
prime partis. Inde accidit quod talibus apparet quandoque quod illa fiala
crescat nimis et fiat ita magna sicut celum et postea apparent in ea quedam
et tandem videtur diminui et ad primum statum reverti quod fit quando
spiritus illi regrediuntur iterum ad fenestras exteriorum sensuum et inde
60 habuit ortum illa fama communis de quibusdam qui dicuntur habuisse vel
portasse demonem privatum inclusum in fiala cum tamen certum sit et ex­
pertum quod unus alter bene compos mentis sue nichil tale in illo vase vel
fiala percipet nec auditu nec visu.
in g this I assert nothing, but it suffices for me that the soul having thus retired
could have such visions b y w ay o f nature. For the exterior senses are like certain
holes. W hen these are blocked the w hole influence o f the spirits is retained within
and so the interior force accordingly becomes more powerful. The sign o f this is
that blind people have a strong imagination, and as the versificator says, “ one
sense grow s strong by the loss o f another.” *5 Therefore, just as a reclusion o f
spirits o f this sort takes place in such men as the result o f nature or sickness, so it
is possible that similar things take place in a man naturally apt [for this sort o f
thing] and terrified by false persuasion or stupid credulity. A n d magicians do this,
since this is one root o f the art, as has been premised before. F or just as blood
flows to a wounded member, leaving the other parts bloodless, so the spirits flow
back to the organ o f estimative pow er damaged by terror or otherwise hurt, leav­
ing the exterior organs as if dulled or deadened.
This position is proved in still another way by means o f a sign. For some magi­
cians make a boy (or anybody else from w hom they wish to have responses by
means o f this art) look towards something polished and cleaned as towards a
mirror or a glass jar or a shining sword or at their nails or at some such thing from
which vision is reflected6 so that the sensitive spirits through false credulity, with
the help o f the extrinsic object, rebound to the interior powers, and the imaginative
or cogitative pow er responsible for such an apparitionis strengthened. Whence the
soul is sometimes diverted and distended by this, becom ing like a mirror in the
manner discussed in the last chapters o f the first part. Thence it happens that it
sometimes appears to such people that the glass jar grows greatly, becom ing as
large as the heavens, and afterwards certain things appear in it and finally it seems
to be diminished, reverting to its initial state when those spirits return again to the
windows o f the exterior senses. A n d from this arises the common story o f certain
people w ho are said to have had or carried their private demon shut up in a glass
jar, when, how ever, it has been established and experienced that someone else o f
sound mind perceives no such thing in the vase or jar by sight or hearing.

34 assero om. B / michi: modo L / tales possit
tr. L tales posset [ M P ] tales possent [ S ]
36 ad intra OW..L
3 7 interior om. JL [N J
38 e t ... ait: iuxta illud tobie [ G ] / Sensus: unus
sensus L [ N ]
39 natura vel: naturaliter vel ex L [ N ]
40 conformia: conformiter [ P F M ] / apto
nato et (om. S N , sive A ) B V L [ A N S G ] ex
parte nature [ P F M ] apta nata [ C ]
41 falsam: talem L [ N C ] , sed add. N C falsam
post persuasionem / persuasionem: ymagi­
nationem V ymaginationem persuasionem
[ S ] / aut B L f A F M C ] et V [ N P S G ]
44 exangues: exsangues V [ N ] j terrore sauci­
atum B V [ G ] tr. [ N J terrore succium [ A ]
saucium terrore L [ C ] terrorum saucium
[S ]
44-45 sauciatum... alias om. [ F M P ]
45 concurrunt V / sopita om. B
47 autem om. L [ S C N J / istud: illud [ F P ] id
B [ A M ] j probatur: probabiliter E
s Matthieu de Vendome, Tobias, line 342
(ed. of F. A. G . Mueldener [Gottingen, 1855],
33). Matthieu was called the versificator because
49 contra1: in L [ N ] / e t: vel V
51 possit B V [ A S C G J posset [ F A 1P N ] po­
test L j possit visus tr. V
52 extrinsici B [ C G ] / sensitivi om. L
53 sive: seu L [ N ]
54 talis om. L / per hoc om. L
5 5 distenditur: ostenditur L [ C ]
56 fiala: physala [ S ] fiola [ F P C ]
o f his authorship o f the popular A r s versifi-
catoria.
6 See the Commentary, Il.xxix, lines 47-63.
59 inde: ibidem L [ C ]
60 illa: istz L [ N ] ia [ A S ]
61 fiala: fiola [ F M P ] phiala B phyala [ S ]
phiola [ C ]
62 alter om. L [ N ] / tale om. L [ C N ]
62-63 vel fiala om. [ N ]
63 fiala: in illa fiala L in ilia fiola [ C ] phyala
[ S ] fiola [ F M P ] phiola [ G ]
 Part II, Chapter xxx 351
350 D e configurationibus qualitatum et m otuum
II.x x x In w h ic h it is a rg u ed fo r the sam e th in g o n the basis o f
[ ii .xxx] C ap itu lu m 30111 in q u o a rg u itu r ad id em ex seq u en tib u s
su cceed in g and co n co m ita n t signs
et co n co m itan tib u s signis
That these things can take place b y means o f the reclusion o f the soul is clear by
Hec namque fieri per reclusionem anime adhuc patet alio signo, quia sepe another sign. For it often happens that, if boys so placed in a circle to watch some­
contingit quod pueri sic positi in circulo ad inspiciendum in aliquo splendido thing shining see a vision, they immediately become blind either absolutely or
5 si viderint visionem fiunt statim ceci aut simpliciter aut ad tempus et fiunt
temporarily, and they become like the man whose eye has been stopped up, o f
sicut homo cuius obscuratus est oculus, de quo dictum est in capitulo prece- whom w e spoke in the preceding chapter. N o w the cause o f this is that in the act
dente. Causa vero huius est quia in actu illo virtus visiva destituitur a spiriti­ [of internal vision] the [external] seeing power is made destitute o f its spirits as
bus suis ad intra recurrentibus. Contingit etiam quod de cetero non respiciunt they withdraw inw ard.1 In regard to another [kind o f people so blinded], it even
ita ordinate sicut ante sed quasi essent perterriti aut frenetici. E t quandoque happens that they do not see again in so orderly a fashion as they did before but
io habent oculos mobiles et visum inordinatum quia turbati sunt a furore rather as if they were terrified or delirious. A n d sometimes they have m oving eyes
oculi eorum. H oc autem accidit eis ex inordinatione spirituum virtutis visive, and disordered sight because their eyes have been thrown into disorder b y mad­
que quidem inordinatio fuit facta in illa alteratione mentis et ex motu spiri­ ness. This happens to them, m oreover, as the result o f the disordering o f their
tuum in reclusione eorum et in regressu sicut aliquibus accidit ex timore power o f sight, this disorder having been accomplished in the course o f the alter­
nocturno maxime quin subito post tenebras obicitur eis forte lumen, quia ation o f the mind and b y means o f the m otion o f the spirits in their retirement and
i5 tunc spiritus nimis subito et inordinate regrediuntur. E t inde venit fama withdrawal. This happens to some people as the result o f a nocturnal fear, partic­
quod talibus non statim debet ignis ostendi. Causa igitur predictarum appa­ ularly when after darkness perhaps a light is shown to them suddenly. For then
ritionum est reclusio anime prefata. E t hoc diffuse probatur in libro de uni­ the spirits withdraw exceedingly fast and in a disorderly fashion. Thence comes the
verso parte ultima ubi talium effectuum assignatur causa predicta.
common opinion that a fire ought not be shown immediately to such people. The
A dhuc autem est aliud signum, quod maxime accidit coniuratoribus: cause, therefore, o f the aforesaid apparitions is the previously mentioned retire­
so quotiens enim aliquis talis nigromanticus fecerit suas invocationes, si ars ment o f the soul. A n d this is proved copiously in the book On the Universe, in the
illa habuerit tunc aliquam efficatiam ita quod aliquid apparuerit sibi, facies
last part where the aforesaid cause o f such effects is assigned.2
seu vultus eius erit postea per magnum tempus— ymmo ipse totus— notabi­ But there is still another sign, which most often happens to conjurers. For as
liter immutatus in macie corporis, in colore, et in aspectu, ita quod vix cre­ often as some such necromancer makes his invocations, and i f the art then has
deretur esse idem qui erat ante, et apparebit longo tempore quasi semimor- such a power to make something appear to him, his face or countenance— in fact,
25 tuus et habebit circa oculos nigritudinem quandam ad modum mulieris his w hole appearance— w ill afterwards remain for a long time notably changed in
menstruose. E t non solum erit immutatus in corpore sed etiam [erit] totus corporal leanness, in color, and aspect, so that one w ould scarcely believe that he is
turbatus in mente, ita quod apparebit sicut ydeota vel furiosus et totus the same person as before. A n d he w ill appear for a long time as if half-dead and he
alienus ab aliis et quodammodo a seipso et non bene sui compos. E t non
w ill have a certain blackness about the eyes in the manner o f a menstruating woman.
statim— ymmo forte nunquam— revertetur ad pristinum statum. A n d not only will he be changed in body but also he will be completely disturbed
30 H oc autem est maximum argumentum quod in tali actu fuit immutatio mentally, so that he w ill look like an idiot or madman, totally different from other
I I .x x x : B V L people and, in a certain way, from himself, and not o f sound mind. A n d he does
tur [ N ]
3 namque om. [ N ] autem namque L / adhuc 16 non statim tr. [ A ] / statim debet B L not revert immediately— nay perhaps never— to his pristine state.
om. L [ N C ] I alio: alio modo V [ S C G ] tr. V [ N F M P ] / predictarum: is­ But this is a most telling argument, that in such an act there was a great change o f
5 fiunt statim tr. L [ N J fient statim [S] / sim­ tarum jL dictarum [ N A I P ]
pliciter V L [ A N S C G ] totaliter B [ F M P ] i o invocationes: convocationes V coniura- I I .x x x
6 obscuratus L [ N F A I P S C ] obturatus B tiones [ S ] 1 See the Commentary, II.xxx, lines 3-8. 2 Ibid., lines 17-18.
[ A G ] obturbatur ? V 2i tunc om. V / sibi: sibi autem L sicut [ G ]
9 sicut: sicut fecerunt L [ N ] /sed quasi: acsi tunc [ N ]
26 erit1 V L [ A N S C G ] om. B [ F M P ] / sed: 30 fuit: fit L [ A ] fuerit [ G ]
L 2z seu: vel L [ P J aut [ N S ] sive [ A ] ymmo V [ S ] / [erit] L V [ C ] om. 30-31 immutatio (in mutatio) magna tr.
io - i i quia...eorum l 'rL [S C G J om. 22-23 notabiliter: naturaliter V '
B [A F A IP N S] L [C N ]
B [ A F A IP ] 23 macie: materia [ F P ] materie [ A M ] et
26-27 [erit].. .turbatus om. [ G ]
io turbati sunt V [S C G ] turbatur L turban­ om. L [ N C ]
 352 D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum Part II, Chapter xxx 353

magna virium sensitivarum et passio mentis que redundavit in corpus et
reclusio sive commotio magna spirituum sensitivorum, sicut dictum est
ante. E x quorum spirituum et virium interiorum perturbatione tanta potue­
runt multa fantastice et ymaginabiliter apparere. Unde patet quod preter
35 dampnationem anime quam quis meretur inde adhuc est maximum pericu­
lum talia attemptare.
A d istud propositum faciunt etiam quedam extrinseca signa. In quibus­
dam namque libris eorum precipitur ieiunium vel spiritualis dieta et vita
solitaria et similia tanquam quedam preparatoria dispositiva quorundam
40 hominum quorum mentes non possunt ita faciliter immutari; per abstinen­
tias enim et per solitudines et [per] talia com plexio alteratur, animus immuta­
tur, et a prioribus et communibus cogitationibus abstrahitur atque ad
facilem credulitatem huiusmodi rerum disponitur et preparatur.
Solent etiam ad talia negotia perpetranda captare sibi tempora certa et
45 quieta et quandoque nocturna, sepe enim eligunt tenebrosa silentia sicut
loca obscura et horrore plena; qualia describunt et ascribunt eis Statius,
Lucanus, et alii, que omnia iuvant ad procurandum insaniam et terrorem
et sunt signa quod ea que apparent non sunt vere in re sed, sicut predictum
est, in falsa estimatione. Propterea arguitur per aliud signum, quotiens enim
50 magi utuntur sola ista radice, scilicet invocatione cum pertinentibus sibi
ipsi nunquam volunt esse plures. D icunt enim, et habent in libris, quod
demon prosemel non apparet nisi uni soli aut paucis; sed hoc videtur dictum
voluntarie et sine ratione. Si enim coniuratio recte fiat et ipsa habeat virtu­
tem coartandi illum spiritum, quare non poterit ipsum cogere ut veniat in
55 presentia multorum sicut unius, aut quom odo vel unde perdet coniuratio
virtutem propriam uno homine superveniente? H oc enim omnino videtur
irrationabile et ideo secundum veritatem hoc non est propter aliud nisi quia
non est facile aut possibile multorum animos prosemel et ad idem et tam
fortiter immutare.
60 E t similiter sicut dictum fuit ad hoc multum operatur terror et facilius
est terrere unum solum vel paucos quam comitivam multorum. Q uod etiam
ad hoc faciat timor signum est, quoniam in talibus stupor et pavor preveniunt
31-3 2 virium.. .magna om. L [ N J [ N F M P C G ] per similia L
33 perturbatione: commotione et perturba­ animus L V [ G ]
tione V 42 et2: et a L [ S ]
34 multe V / fantasmatice L / patet: apparet V 44 perpetranda L fA F M P C J
38 namque: autemL [ C ] enim[ S N G ] B V [ S G ] faciendum [ N ] / sibi om. L [ C N ]
39 quedam om. L [ S J / preparatoria dispositiva 46 describunt et ascribunt B L [ F M S C ] ascri­
L V [ A N ] t r . B preparatoria dissortiva ? [ C ] bunt et describunt V ascribunt [ P ] de­
dispositiva et [ P F S G ] disposita [ M ] scribunt [ A N G ] j eis B V [ A S G ] om.
40 ita om. L [ C ] / per L [ A F M P N S C G ] et L [N F M P C ]
per B V 47 alia V [ C ]
41 e t 1 om. V [ S G J /[per]2 B V f S J om. 49 aliud: istud L
the sensitive powers and an affection o f the mind which overflowed to the body, as
well as a great withdrawal or movement o f the sensitive spirits o f the sort described
before. From such a perturbation o f these interior forces and spirits many such
things could appear in a fantastic and imaginary way. Whence it is clear that, in
addition to the damnation o f his soul which one merits [in practicing this kind o f
activity], there is still further the greatest [physical] danger in attempting such
things.
There are also some extrinsic signs which support that which has been proposed.
For in certain o f their books a fasting or spiritual diet and a solitary life and similar
practices are prescribed as certain preparatory conditions for men whose minds
cannot be changed so easily; because b y abstinence and deprivations and such
things the natural constitution is altered, the mind is changed and drawn away
from prior, ordinary thoughts, thus being disposed and prepared for easy belief in
things o f this sort.
A lso, they are accustomed to seek out certain quiet and sometimes nocturnal
times to carry out such affairs. For they often choose a dark stillness, as, e.g., places
dimly lit and full o f horror. Statius,3Lucan,4and others describe these kinds o f places,
imputing to them all the things that help to produce frenzy and terror. These are
signs that the apparitions are not truly real but are, as has been said before, rooted
in a false judgement. A ccordingly it is argued by another sig n : whenever the magi­
cians use this root alone, namely invocation, they never wish to have more people
present beyond those which are o f concern to them. For they say, and they have it
in their books, that a demon does not ever appear except to one person alone or to
a few. But this seems to be a w illful statement [of their own] w ithout reason. For
if conjuring does rightly take place and it has the power to compel the spirit,
w hy can it not force him to come in the presence o f many as w ell as o f one person?
H ow or whence does conjuring lose its particular pow er w ith one [additional]
man supervening? This seems completely irrational. Therefore, in truth, this
[requirement o f one or few people present] is for no other reason than that it is not
easy or possible to alter the minds o f many people at the same time in the same way
and equally strongly.
A nd similarly, as has been said before, terror is much used for this activity and it
is easier to terrorize only one or a few people than a group o f many people. That
/ animus: e fear is productive o f this is an indication [of the subjective character o f apparitions],
3 Thebaid, IV , 418-42. 4 D e bello civili, V I, 311-12. Cf. 642 et seq.
pertractanda
50 sola ista B V [ S C ] tr. L [ A F N ] sola ilia 37 quia: quod V
[ G ] I sola tr. [ P M ] post radice 58 impossibile L
51 et B [ F M P S G ] om. [ C ] quod V L [ A N ] 60 dictum fuit tr. L [ A N ] supra dictum [ C ]
52 ante demon scr. L [ N ] demel 61-63 Q u o d .. .econverso om. [ F M P ]
54 coartandi: coniurandi [ C ] 62 quoniam: quia L [ N ]
35 unius: paucorum L et paucorum [ N ]
 354 D e configurationibus qualitatum et m otuum

visionem, ita quod apparitio ex terrore causatur potius quam econverso.

Item si invocator ut nunc dictum est utatur hac sola radice et astiterint duo
65 vel tres viri, tunc semper aut ut in pluribus continget si aliquid appareat
uni quod nichil apparebit alteri, scilicet illi qui non est territus aut turbatus.
H oc autem est manifestum argumentum, quod nichil taliter apparens est ad
extra. Si enim demon vel spiritus in forma naturaliter visibili exterius
appareret, ipse videretur a quocunque ibidem presente— ymmo melius ab
70 illis qui non sunt alienati mente; qualiter enim potest esse quod iste qui
socium suum nequit videre demonem videat, alter vero qui socium suum
videt non potest demonem percipere? Si enim adesset aliquid exterius
visibile, potius videretur ab illo cuius oculi sunt bene dispositi quam ab illo
qui iam terrore nimio factus est quasi cecus. Iste igitur causam huius appa-
75 rentie habet ad intra in fantasia sua. E t sicut ex simili causa non est creden­
dum infirmo de saporibus ita nec isti de visibilibus plusquam frenetico qui
quandoque etiam dicit se videre dyabolum.

[Il.xxxi] Capitulum 31111 de secunda radice artis magice 1. D e configurationibus, M S A (Paris, Bibi. Arsenal 522), 29^ Ca. 13 9 5 9 8•

Sicut premittebatur 2 50huius alia radix cui innititur ars magica est quarun-
dam rerum applicatio et ista radix magis pertinet ad principalem materiam
tractatus istius. Triplici autem modo per talem applicationem vel usum
5 rerum magi quedam faciunt apparere que videntur impossibilia fieri per
I f
naturam; uno quidem modo per immutationem sensuum, alio modo vera
fmt
immutatione rerum obiectarum, et tertio m odo mathematica illusione. •hf»!*»fa*
.a£*.tmk f
Quantum ergo ad primum modum sciendum est quod quedam sunt res s&htm>
<1V
aut rerum confectiones, sicut sunt quedam piante vel radices, aliqui etiam •vi.^
10 lapides, aliqua semina, spermata animalium, venena, et quedam similia, que
1' lad* t-irmtC t <*>•«"i® »■ tcf^ru2
»f* *X . i i " " **
«• 1
6 3 causatur om. L [ N ] L [NFM PC] (W <«it« S S s i^ S s -^
f0 <g>&n-r.
f*T tje
»*<<<7»if jl Mn.
iHm .(f
64 Item : ita V / nunc: iam F 73 ab illo: ille V or vcN&nrdr»*
% _ »«.*0 W
1 _ . >“.«»•** .y
65 si: quod si L [ N C ] scilicet quod [ A ] / ap­ 74 igitur V [ N A F M P S ] ergo B [ C G ] enim «•»•' £§*£. *■ -rr
X m #* {A a at. ™hff xw.%. T
paret V [ N ] L /5»* 4* 2 t m f l t f f u t *•**• u*r ». 1 t*e*ir < * ? C r ti 61
js Ortd» ..,3 M & m S t * ii **
a»
66 quod: quod tunc V / perterritus B 76 nec: ut V «ortwtt* »* «*0?* ^ f ' ' l ,au>
(VcKttfa f!» *3*4 *■a? 4jh^^-
67 argumentis L / ad: aliquid L [ N ] 77 quandoque etiam B V [ A N ] tr. L [ S C ] &»-** o i >-» •* wv .«» V xf nUv*.
a * v8«''« 01 £■
69 apparet B / ibidem: ibi V [ G ] quandoque [ F M P G ] a i 1**S »0« CflK.*V it
d* I»* fWAt-' 9 -n fn U f.y r t» V fe »
70 mente: a mente L [ G ] / iste qui B V favftrtlSa»w**1®4(w«s.ito Vvf»3? art ST 1 ^ 4^ X>mf*u
[P F M C ] qui iam L ille qui [ S G J qui I l.x x x i: B V F r V-% ytca (itP>**l»,* ’♦’ftcT f i »
(ijf» f * ^ V " v r"Ad®/*■ *•*»« •^ 4 's' dP
fcniy •S i*v5* ■0
».**•» “7 - - - -■ ** - ~ 1 'X. dR-.C .«2 ^
[A N ] 1 magice om. F >~i> i * C 34» *■!< "i •*-®- 4. 5i)f&
Tta
iS r f£ f<
■ »1.^<etSSf
wff" & i*-»» ^.Ti>*4. if‘iVr O',
71 suum2 o m .L [ C ] 2 250 B V [ P F M A ] 250 capitulo F [ S C G ] aff (V^T«n 3
AiiptciM -*4> -
*-Jtt arwtid JO-jo.'»'!»'"1 iflif Ati»4“»?%«
72 demonem B \ '[ A S G ] ; tr. I J J - M P C ] post capitulo 25 [ N ] I ars: radix ars B iTS t~<r.id a»Wc It fvAoi 3n«i
Ott »ian..:c4 ',.’'«’
_ ^
videt in linea J2 / adesset B V [ A S G ] esset 3 materiam: partem F [ N ]
,".V
a
*—.mSr o>v’ fi-’iK»*•.--n—
4
c• ..%
^%'wi#
4 ks 1
, 2t.(%!
Va*iu»c,
X* Ttttin*

2. / 9 ^ configurationibus, M S B ( B r u g e s , S t a d s b i b l i o t h e e k 4 ^^)> 1 73 **• M 5--

 8>
y n t X H ntirjntAirt $ cr
^ ro*m ftc«te nihsnfotni <nbnm& cetpzffim
d in lt fi? fn du^ A a Iu i a h C
hu irfif& t*
'tHfatec* ut tt* foU+n**
aAx&rngtSc&Ht § , ZnfipUn* n t <j* c a <|«c

t» ftn b u i ^ V v i i c w i ^ riA< f*viA« ? oi ^f i

**wMy# <*#»& f u y ^Zzz<adnto ^ w i n w t p#
fen n ft I? quid*fai%'j * m t^ l < fn # z ^ ***-
'***4 *tfht:*% f j & H A Jp(l $ -f$0t«3u*W«
« 4r y M f c lW A 4 rp*
* fiu p ejfiu tef **Z A « # a

l~ a .< ? t* * * u * * i t e m s //
» «f»i«HIC *r»MMI^
*2$ wfe, l # d M f
^ k i* u y f a t u m '
f£ * f

d V ^ < n & # A xH tu m e
' ^iitfifr
*^p ur&* u __ issr
-»^W«
3. D e configurationibus, M S C (Vatican, C higi E. IV . 109), 8yr (old pag.). 15c. 5. D e configurationibus, M S h (Erfurt, Stadtbibl. A m plon. Q . 150), ir. 14c.

<?•». f|ua
#l 1 fp 4*MlAot«l«J*^S«W»ft.
«?., j s y j i f e i * t a j# . ■ ^ (witfir <n««W N«pr ^jpi’*' &<* m ,f*A <nt
^5, ^ftwiNNIV*HtfpfMuHtt fwrWie .
£ * > » * > R R £ h, 4 fa *^ i 4ttV’’fiw^5»&wk»c' a»Wvk«»
. .. sr*^r ife**’ ‘sk ^«Kis
•mJ «(fWj/S nrnA*tik Wf&Witf ? ♦ #***' -«r* A# ‘f*((?*&•«? «***# v
i* 4“aSn«»Ati« f.-5 'S®^Ik»****
/ 1 f4 t x”’ %. AOMmZ
*4 N ^ a w g*lm i u ^ **?»
u*tu»
iu S -"Hem tueftiM *5EV I si?**’ ^ ^
f infimmeaee
3>vgbtu«tfU« twa *4,v' 'Wkt ^*C*
odtium diJittAac
ip f,: aehtruir £7tn|St ^U^fcdtf’
fi tu*4u qws*«a*i
. , - v **• 4.“ ‘4 y^Mir
at \ntc>uui >r tf« tv*t*ctt.5 m*u (V«
I **v ^ f p r /V? •rut*m^ pMjf«t,„• ||A r ‘*1 {^ « mmh 4f S
.•(»» 4*^ *-»'■ »V c V '*r,u. «»v * ,y«# >%m «• 4 *HflWOr ^
-« -fAr {'.«<(4 i=r.-'S^n».« cCjv}t« w ttHWWUttvt«H(vttV _ L
4f A c m flitaiitii.' .vpc.A |«»Sk. 5iV»*“tetni |fTt|"*%a ffUif* *<»k. ^ « C h<*•»««
. jf.V«»«* i“T At -.- .M.Sk C*“4H»£j«k»„>....(nr Jxfl**' fk «1.^ -iHjrtii?
£ V*Ti«^ » ^[J^i.-,.vi>A ti- m&jpM*4
S J* >•%■<»>.A* ...... » k*(U^ C < ncuH t^ 0O rv
-A:'sHMn‘ r y*0*t{4a^frnt
Say*’ AMHta
IgrJ**» «e j ,^ac
r**'-fi^" “ V-'ri.1.1 V..»|4. *...r'iir
4. D e configurationibus, M S /) (ISrfurt, Stadtbibl. Am nion. Q . 298), 641. 14c. « « W f ’ .]n iU O f., iR?**’ qnk^.tmS^-UTn«wirut&r
Cf V C ri. ..I f«..n:ffi»«i*> ^ * 9~u\Cv V*f.t*jTg6“4.#fVT
A«.,...fn_. ki- „.i|T.,n ;^:«ir.r W W ( 1^ 9 »A2W
V,- U'r»/T»r».te- *

«TAfJttHilit
6. D e configurationibus, ATS /* ( B i b l .pmc pn*
A led . L a u r . A s h b . 210), i o i \. i 4 10-

"©«•ii 9a iM>"«iRlrt
 9. D e configurationibus ,
tvw rittajn?-
M S J (Florence, Bibi. N az.
Cen., C o n v. Soppr. ^ V * ^ 1
C a
J.IX .26), 15V. tn?* _
1 Pnydt**! §
Late 15c or early 16c.
* f \ ^ r & f i n y b u r & & *V 1
4» *-»n «rfcSJF *t G w n X t p m ~ , m
v ^ .yV’ 4 S r i 5 t e f fp X - ^ ? »

*mhm^ -»p tn’S K S f -

♦ j?«n» «J&JRJ' ^ ut^iA&p
* . 'f c ^
€<>*•****' ^ fU x—‘%ZT

k&gT'Stt' m mMb ff^ m T fn? *& ^S' um

f c f ' ’ *
f **£ '*+ '% *

w
:Aj«5s|i

4 *Wwif A.& />" vfirnmd

«99* *#»»«# •
V4 fc«nf )ii w(M»t »•»«|S*»< ..i~» iw/rat' 0« jM««f tfi
«■ »SUrtouf- Ilft»*».-<wt«
1«Siai-^gtif ax9rrm*fi+jf*»Sit- t ^ jtm n i fitfftc O x *
tmmuJt* #* »*« fi§ f»« (TT4NP
fUk*m 9 *0bi- 6 v” > 'u ttp . n<«»£*i ««»}
4*n*fii**p6t(t tHfitiCV»»# <* <*»- ( t f a W f ifa. W llp g i.
7 - D e configurationibus , M S G (Groningen, Bibi, der Rijksuniv. 103), 69V. 16c. .»1* *xt* p t S - * * <>•«w’ «ntfMi t <*zpUju*mtiiSi. Atft refptu
tnf&KU" ! W M » t A % »o«#w»itf
/» < * <w <j»‘ ftt j » « « r a j ‘ iwm*<3 W- w ^ 9«J3KTR<«|f£»
M £»«•’ *»* e g**rj/r°&t .».<«>«*
*'*fr*u* **-6 ^war4'' <*«:&*m ■ ftiAPjpotmi SttpfA («*» »m n#*4%Ar*f-
:" ‘ 7 & tf*• * * * f* > ‘ ^ i | t $ a # * * * * » « f « *3.•«•**r>J &*■ *’& e * * * * * * * -* v
i**Mg n—GSkM atfjg*«Sfif* ^
H f- I |Mhi m W*<«flbw
Vi* £&»' /»»vy®4®***"
<«•% v sl* r W * * **f* •* ^ j r * ~ * £ * * £***•»** rt* tt/fitftn'tthttf »*•J** * «Sy»»»*»^, Mite»agfiai^m -
i si >»**«* -«*•*€* $.*» *r •*ff'^*!**^*
«w* wfg» « /a « t k f t t x t »• ™ptaif .«f^tn-t caOa&tf
j" »K(>«!«i«r- ttu. /r^fc^oT <««A^«‘
l « *’ **-»"*
i**’’ r~ K + 6*•r 4~» .| * * -.-a w y — O • 5 y *”* *f^f i rt
' D5 K * -,*.y*«~
» \ | J 'VV
VV f •?»<«♦ f k u f $•*•***** r * y. «»“W.. M*#-[t> » ™ « B n '
-.7»..1
»»«m«> n k< 10. Df? configurationibus,
fin,^t4tr cA tntn at <f/» /T«p «£a VW
WlV
mi ^TS&*.<« «*M
1; «hI ^*«***- '■ ♦**-«
«M -«t
* t 6- ^k
»• 'T H V J '**4 '**^®**‘W
v «4|U* jl^ n * ^
? f !>■ <*■ ■ '!>- ■' 3 ^ * f ^fa
e * a :**. M S L (Brit. Mus. Sloane 2156),
<*«* %*?*•*•»<• p t ^ y f * * * f ^ J r f * * ^ * " 4* <• O ,#>
»1 ^ c W j f» <*•♦ * f W * y t , , <*,H t * « # jj/ r f i* '
193V. 1428.

* * * * / f* * J ^ < ? * ^ f* tZ t * r + r -* jtfi~ ~ -iS f« * * * * * * *

, 4 jA {*••£ I» ♦ v»**V f * * * * * * ft-SsJ-VSM fS u V « & « V * ‘*
1 ?
-v ^ r-p- •«> ti? (*»rv ^a £* a <“A a m
-... ^ -■ 'd
— . , -*~ ^ s E s a .*f s y “ v* ~X i ?•»:** 7
V«» liiiMymthiw tw? i»^ W**4
< < 4 «j y »i>p «i»W W i f 1^

WN-"rr |)m<»v &f>ir tyiXii^«i|i*»?(li

fW « rft»r' ,~>^P-M
-5&*fHv M
xWytf 8hftf’«n><«iy
IUi *tv« f “*>:'*
1 «f <*%? * 1 ^ ” i j t m / i ^ y W h w ! /(J * S f iw w 1®
a > t»«/ O" ^*«1 G J (»M t>1 p«^ny <CyU «
* ak« >#
*ww /M •
*»»' «mj * » ^ 1 A*^«A tX—fN**^nT’’Ar
v **4p*~<Tn*»t «/ip^a^UV»*: «fi
<*T*a.m*4 t£'>»t (Ufkn
wr*** »11^ 1 i**«|»>jr* #» f -&*■ '■ t **>
11. D e configurationibus, * ” l*,n fn r* w ‘4 w ^ I l t p ^ « W ] | r u ^ i f Q k fimi m 3 » w & fic m n o lf i r y S * 1
<v»» ■]■ •- f 1 ‘ - t**f f 'ii «yir-ini r T '|T nAwr^
M S d/(Faris, B N la t. 14579), i ^ J w ' Y » 4 c r y S» .‘CtJ < fy «Sw rf
8. A ppen d ix II, M S I I (Plrfurt, Stadtbibl. Am plon. Q .325), 43V. 14c. £t Ifcede^wlmw)U^ V****4Piap5Wti*
i8r. 1 5c. . »«-/
 >*► «£»*• fT’--'-' r T «,- ., «.,.,r . ,

4 *^ A*M«Jff »**H4 tf& *« jC** ^ p 4 Acw# Rl»,'-I

^aw# 4trf .'fri»#*3 »1»^» r^ - /jr»j#^f - ^ ;•
««ttn&nA W* »«*tnfinra 4& £ 4H4 >it>c Ar **■ *•&»f4*pi * W ^ ,« 4W S f e f/'m-.:-
ft *|t*i* M*p»»*rl Hr-jV^*»,** f fy**f**"~^**m**psmp*n 4 ? « iw > - 'd r t a » » *
iv.ti&j* /t,<3 <*w* ^'♦ Ar«J*^f^»«-tt4^44ij|^«rk'«MiSM»p‘*!<!
f»M^<3ri*f *»ip f* £>*0* E-*»*** jWt'«if '«»' O "* ^ iC filM ii)» «M« w flp W firW *!
^► S;Tp-M*<-^pAteH<*TW“3t f* •#>f,‘«1**^ fcafte «( mpmrr*'&*S£fk 4^«*^** <p*u»j it « s w ^ ^ ^ S g , , « ^ L f * P * '? ”
Ht lt»#**)-A ft| %tf&&
%*$ |^^<|0^€»w«p<Mr U4 fi- ^X »*7 «# ^ v,^*7
0 6 « P Ht£jpSw JiwS si**r « t » s p #c4p t » tl ?% & $ ?• SeA jjfa jitfQ fr &Mm
4^1 C#*4ifAr®& ni*f ** f,-s# t. r »■sir. k a ^ V
■a**f f&n4»&^F*Hc**?fi^t*i %m tifkffitv*r*»*(#%rf As
iirmsiUmf* tw^fltapw# gttmSprt |W U « » d r V * r J V t A r » f fjp < n :« v
I3w rt 1*«A ?1\ .»ir* •»<♦ «?Wf -4 far ««KlV.^ «
V 4#»*<i§*''&«** /f*&<•»£«~ui
4,y' f * 3 te0 **gk*'~<* il"'Pk-if<*«9 ** & ^^ ,* * * c i > * s ,n«•■v p-
Z «s^4<$£l*%F- f * * '*** j ' p n * & » » f
*•■ p^ pZ $ pfG m Jkitft e**4 14. D e configurationibus, M S i ” (Basel, Off. Bibi, der U n iv. F. III. 31), 4r. 14c.
£P^nlmU*^*£^^00mMf% •* a#**j* f ^
p^pMf2T«f#A*2TtBfafit&Jfri |fl A«f
p*!** <tfrffk (W I3wp^jp*##»,*rt<ci -*Ol|* ,
*0 4 *&*»**u. ' 4* ' “^35^ *■ s'
f 4 0 ^ qgreHft'p*** *ff4 ■
'-• ’ •;.*./ **■ , :?l
c a jfiw t itMMu'^LdtuA JW*)»»'
j -i-, .r^ v ■ >;• ., imn* J**# p tMA

J fc s * f . P l $T**Z? * * !* iL
rhm <iI*m»fAAaWb SI&2 ftiU
^ ^ ^ ,M S i y (fa ri, , B N . h t . I4>,o), 60V. Late , 4c L early ^e. fSibS’lr duxH*i- AcpT^er/'

■ * & & < & £ $ -. _' - •■ £•«>*•••"« '#r &HC4& At TA^aPVrtt.'

Aha * ^ w W # s ^ ilr i
«»
/% ^ 7- ‘ '2 5 3 ' >qvl
fiU^W *P»*# ffMUMMflK,
♦ *|«*wl0 ^ 4*5»te ^Uf^d f%t%GhA '/Sp»..<tt>a lS t i#
<(uMtr a /♦ sC#
|s<**#At-AA 1 ifwAy^ ftr^;trA t aCfttfRwi ««iRUAf
' «“«pfe
?sic ce^w» r ^ « r ,lM>,l|p ^ a*i^ 'ocmv<2’
p m«6; iwe^SctA t 9 >^ &**
T ~ ~ f - V .« , *T»C «^A" ^ •-5W
wmt***? J*r*td»&U ^ v J R i l " T wm»' r^STfe mfS?V} fX&sy***!1* ^*1
^ ^ 1^ *** ^ /^eaM«r
pi». A^pU^lptlp ■ fft*- >&■<? E <^*4rir<w#f*'' ___
4 ^pft».» 'a»* d F - ^ f ^ A ’
t *i|Sfe! ,* t . P 2 Xdtw<>iB W * 9 tf a m T ) % B m L & S
9 ^t e^/Tvi
%Ot# |MOC0 'V^t^'St^C**«a^n IV'**»M<v«ndfitM -|N^V®?**£
ofi ih*A 4-ffcT'
£**■ *■ *fr&vZ >a£31 v jintfr-ia* <41 j P x r ' - ^ cm****** otMS
{k^,f|tHiii4 a Q«»t" *iJ?TWx js&tii^W ^ as4 M **['
~ J i f f tiAJ-J »' nit ^TfH^ A C ^ A ^ S g ; (iKUBu&e*)
F c J tZ y L t T i ^ T llZ lf ^ * U Ln*f {««r^gii^WMr |«ryynk*<^SZ^i -0?<i A<k*t
a*. sfftU tb Z t ^ “Wk « fw w •®6wA" <95’ >”>mtfif A«alHt .»<■t5?MIA
^ ^ <f£*A 15. configurationibus, M S V (Vat. lat. 3097), ir. 14c.

ijU* c - ^ ~.. a^6*A

/ > configurationibus, M S /J ( P a r i s , B N la t. 7 3 7 1 ) , 2 i 4 r . 1 5 c .
 16. Appendix I,
2> Part II, Chapter xxxi 355
w p * * ? ♦ *» MS c (Vatican Chigi
fir *-
*** «•*«5',|***# « s s a e S B F.IV.66), 27r. End of 14c since in such affairs stupor and fear precede a vision, so that an apparition is caused
or early r 5c.
s E s ^ t - “ “ by terror rather than vice versa. A lso, if an invoker uses this [magical] root alone,
- , - — «» ■■» ' if M - T .# **6 *
t^ML*'** py j*ar ..^«w- »r
as has just been said, and there are tw o or three people present, then always or
fc*« w >
•'A « M
•ST« P * <^NM
#»“•*4* **PM
^

4®f n S & Z ' y

44
% «« » ^ ^

t P*Jl^ ^ f ’v^ ^ “*'w2»‘'>

ifay often it happens, if something appears to one o f them, that nothing w ill appear to
the other, evidently to the one who is not terrified or disturbed. This is a clear
argument that such an apparition is not external.5 For if a demon or a spirit appears
j ^wMJC'^jpKw# -feN* jp & a fe- fa , u externally in a form naturally visible, it w ould be seen by anyone present at that
L a «*#* a j r v ' t p ife? tL^ ^<****3«*„>«£•** if,%,& place; in fact, it w ould be seen better by those w ho are not mentally deranged. For
v*&& 4*i*#i #Mee#?i*SKr*fa$* pSr**5j"
« Q r .J O t M
how can it be that he w ho is unable to see his associate sees the demon, while he
' g ^ & g i 17. Appendix I,
W •%«£ <*£# Wr -¥<Wr*4 fS f*SP 4<u<£oW1^ who sees his associate cannot perceive the demon? For if there were something
^C.6e 4.«»*%«» «•***&%«atif . ■ m * L f * * » & «h 1 MS j- (Seville, Bibl.
w f a * ^ * $ * ^g***!* *?‘■ '•■ 'Ss*'**** % «**•* *V-v' ♦ 'l’^ Colomb. 7.7.13), io7r. present which was externally visible, it ought rather to be seen by someone whose
a*r*<* • WWI «H* <)H«t(^| eyes are better disposed than by one w ho has been, as it were, blinded by excessive
4lW MS? 15c.
ai>a>>H— .» -*»«*-•*■ terror. Therefore, the latter has the cause o f this apparition within his fantasy. A nd
for the same reason that one ought not to believe in the dreams o f the sick he
» f 'f J j W * . .«r. f* : should not believe in the visions o f one in a frenzy, w ho sometimes even says
*m ? A««n«. «*#*£• t■ *+,< S'jtriw, .4* f-n • d- rnp***i m
‘ »' *"<*»«.
*
that he sees the devil.
» ...... V. f*<^(f*'- %<m<ui~.MA&f.
f • 3-e f ~*. Ji A .+-W* <
*
* * A'ff A.. %* ,- w f - .f f f w -f
T: 'r - r j s
’“ ’ •■•' ' >’ }« % » r. , ‘ <5
V||l* S#-*».|»f^ ^‘*’ ‘ • »« * U»yi^
. . .
■ "^M_ir ~ 4° y f-f .' .... If”. ..' ^ ’ ;, “,.*i-' ;■
* . ., . . .■*, T’ ' T *M'f?y » ■a•- Vs t tty f l
. , - >t ''
Vr^e.|f V4..*. ,-' , «ton 4 niK <• tm»«*t> v
^ ?V^flif1 ' ^ *r* ,vKJ«.'■'’>-'^W-i>$?•' act- S ’ ’ ‘‘ m /^aP*- f~ £t« * * -
Il.xxxi On the second root o f the magical art
. * *• p < - + J f f <"**$ ~ . . ~ •«** as'^wa*?”- pT. .' f“tfr' •< 1* «v V».* ‘ L f T r - n
% p fa ;frn f. ! - ? ■ '* A n «Im o tn » u t (& .• ^,w »f
n. 7 :iV , M E W * WWW? 3*“^' ^ ■*'*<jf- pHfjfimrO / ,vv\'-- A s was premised in chapter twenty-five o f this part, another root on which the
•V ^ ’ ■.•+
’ «a ^9n« rt <’*,
’ r «>.* < v .^ r tr ,(V f ■ ^ tiP<V4n)£lt<kA& .. 1J
f « . j > .1« . , » * « ^ t . / V ^
i . : A • magical art depends is the application o f certain things, and this root is more perti­
f t »®» «H-.»>V
‘K'' ” •’» V-t ♦«• d.
a -fa * •*> XK»4
« ^ .V .

...' *r p j .« "W * -■ ' ..i'. 7 U' ^

j ; puf p'l Up nent to the basic subject-matter o f this treatise. B y such application or use o f things
, „ ppr •• ._ * ' 7 1- ps .. .f ‘t ’." a * ( cud arv ftam magicians make certain things appear which seem to be impossible to produce
'4 jm^ ., r*' j» ■ ♦ » ^ ■ fw ■■ ■
...' & .. »n . ■’ m®-’
J s$m %vt y^.% L-'”'’1 ^ -*
■Vaw -• iAn'dl.. .1a ai«i%nty - by nature, [and they do so] in three ways: (1) by changing the senses, (2) by true
««dwPt’rryji ^Si.iSf 'j* «»♦ "' < • •»?. n^r*V
c; ^tiRw'Afi ^ \— t<Jnv< alteration o f the object things, and (3) by mathematical illusion.
E '
T* «I'*'»■», # f M •
^.♦ .jJ1 i ^ fl> 4|Nf«»>43
-A,f <1 f.
-r**-r ;/
•r 5t A s for the first method, it should be know n that there are certain things or
.'<t * * - ,
niWift <U.* ,-c*--Im*fl*1*5'»»-««-»‘~- compounds o f things which have the efficacy or power, when tasted or applied in
iUt m tibttrfifititn a i f r»fKrfiMT*0^ 4mf^tmkkMf'0SrpUr'~ some way, to alter people’s minds. Examples are certain plants or roots, some
a^atLrVjSP”11* ***•^ stones, some seeds, the sperm o f animals, and poisonous potions and similar
1* & 6* ^<w4«/L#e»4L«*K<**
< f* r y m X
TmptLmtfrfrtt
f f r t r
•’tf*-
SFum rfiij MM» ■f'ifimtf^Si^
*n*t*M. -■*•***£■ LfZjpp aiw JO neutt '
«*»6?<**vfktfwSt,A A naiwi.rawiV*^
»f *m*JLfor #S*f -pmJ-mH far T p Z fM Z Z ilj, o r v is io n in a m ir r o r o r p o lis h e d s u r fa c e , th e
5 T h ese rem arks are not u n lik e th o se of
mmtpmfftZ-'cir «f t tmC^Jt0*‘fi» r'
y (>**f*JfMnrew « * * > $ * * * i& * W illia m o f A u v e r g n e m e n tio n e d a lr e a d y in th e c o n c lu s io n b e in g th a t n e ith e r th e t h in g s nor

* t i ^ r ^ * ~ sr (‘f ’*fu<'s*
fajr***Pmuiix*/fliCdJ»t «CM*4* C o m m e n t a r y , I I . x x x , lin e s 3 - 8 , t h a t a g r o u p o f th e ir fo r m s w h ic h seem to be seen in th e
ffrtiM ixii.<a -j ntrftmti*m v<f ttUCm-UJLd^SMm^ad+«p**filmf
b o y s a n d g ir ls w i l l n o t se e t h e s a m e a p p a r itio n in s tr u m e n ts a re a c tu a lly th e r e .
«§• n t * g « * * £ i & r f * & (& * ■
^-- f . L « a*.<m*^ - - -•
{ L ^ f t t U f t f t u f + f u mu* f a
fUt^PtULi fa+ktfiim 4a«* <er<i-«^L i 'v — ,rr i"*"*****^ im m u ta tio n e V [ A F M P S G ] m u ta tio n e
V*nmaary *Vy ftrer^jut 4 tractatus istius B [A F M P S ] tr . [ C G ] 7
«W*»4>y«wyQ^yL w»4<»»>^» h
1r«•* aW« (C fU ftf tin i mw huius tractatus L [ N ] radix istius V L [ N ] im ita tio n e B
{•? p td b f T » * f+
fp*A*(ii*f^tmitff*.im/€Vt*'*+j_ 5 viduntur V / impossibilia: quasi impossi­ 9 s u n t om. V / a l i q u i e t i a m tr. JL[N]

Jf 4 r«S»*rira W«i/«ftutn fcpZtUi" \nAM*f&r/**jr ff tfjLtm AmPt*. 18. A ppen d ix I, sp e r m a ta : e t sp e r m a ta L / e t: e tia m L [ N ]

bilia V 10
f* -* * * * * #
</i«lf'um i Wyxrfw «ft mttttrjgti'im.*U*t y.*yAftttJi*
< d h * $ tn J * i~ * ( tt A
MS r (\Aat. lat. 2225),
96V. 15c.
 356 D e configurationibus qualitatum et m otuum Part II, Chapter xxxi 357

res tantam habent efficatiam et virtutem ut gustate aut aliquo modo appli­ things. W e also see this clearly in the case o f wine consumed by a drunk person and
cate possint mentes hominum immutare, quod etiam manifeste videmus de o f many other examples. Therefore, magicians are accustomed to use these things
vino in homine ebrio et de multis aliis. D e istis ergo se solent magi iuvare as aid s: e.g. the after-birth membrane which adheres to foals and is called hippo­
sicut de pellicula secundine que adheret pullis equarum que dicitur yppo- manes, that which is called kaloyon, and the afterbirth o f cats.1 W hence O vid says
i5 manes et de eo quod vocant kaloyon et de secundinis catorum. Unde Ovidius concerning a certain nefarious woman: “ She knows w e ll... the w orth o f the ven­
de quadam malefica muliere dicit sic: “ Scit bene [ ...] quid valeat virus om o f the mare in heat.” 2 A n d Lucan says o f a certain other woman many similar
amantis eque.” E t Lucanus de quadam alia dicit multa consimilia. Propter things.3 A ccordingly such people are called venomous or evildoers, since their art
quod tales solent appellari venefici sive malefici, quoniam ars eorum est is to poison the minds o f men. For just as the end o f medicine is the health o f the
animos hominum intoxicare. Sicut enim finis medicine est sanitas corporis body so the end o f this art is the ill-health o f the mind. W hence in the L ife o f St.
20 ita huius artis finis est insanitas mentis. Unde in vita sancte Agnetis legitur Agnes one reads that the infidels, imputing that she was using magical arts, said to
quod infideles eidem imponentes quod magicis artibus uteretur dicebant the tyrant: “ Take away the sorceress, take away the evildoer, w ho alters mental
tyranno, “ tolle magam, tolle maleficam que mentes immutat et animos alien- faculties and deranges minds.” 4 M oreover, that some such effects arise by virtue o f
nat.” Q uod autem aliqui effectus tales fiant virtute predictarum rerum hoc the aforementioned things, Cicero says in the book On Divination5 and also the
dicit Tullius in libro de divinatione et beatus Augustinus 180de civitate D ei blessed Augustine in [Book] X V III o f the C ity o f Godp where, am ong many such
25 ubi inter multa talia narrat de quodam qui sumpsit venenum in caseo et per things, he tells o f a certain person w ho consumed poison in a cheese and slept for a
aliquot dies dorm ivit et postea acsi narraret sompnia dicebat se fuisse factum number o f days. Afterwards, as i f he were narrating dreams, he said that he had
caballum et annonam inter alia iumenta baiulasse. Causa vero istorum potest been transformed into a packhorse, and had, along with other beasts o f burden,
assignari per ea que dicta sunt 250 capitulo prime partis huius, quoniam in carried grain. T h e cause o f these things can be assigned by referring to the state­
qualibet tali re prime qualitates sunt ita proportionate et taliter secundum ments o f chapter twenty-five o f the first part o f this w ork, since, in any such things,
30 difformitatem figurate quod ex earum proportione et figuratione resultat the prime qualities are so proportioned and so figured with respect to difformity that
quedam qualitas complexionalis illius rei, que quidem qualitas ex m odo sue there arises from their ratio and figuration a certain constitutional quality o f the
configurationis in intensione cum aliis qualitatibus primis vel aliis virtutibus thing. This quality by means o f its configuration in intensity along w ith its other
eiusdem rei potest in predictos effectus, sicut fuit ibidem declaratum. prime qualities or other powers is capable o f [producing] the aforesaid effects, as
Quantum autem ad secundum sciendum quod quandoque magus non was declared in the same place.
35 solum immutat sensus hominum sed etiam in ipsis rebus obiectis aut in N o w in regard to the second method it ought to be know n that sometimes a
medio per quod sentiuntur aliquas facit mutationes insolitas circa colores aut magician not only alters the senses o f men but also produces unaccustomed
figuras aut motum vel aliqua alia. E t sicut prius dictum est istud fit virtute et changes in the colors or figures or motions or such characteristics o f the objective
applicatione aliquarum rerum que propter predictas configurationes quali­ things themselves or o f the medium through which they are perceived. A nd, as
tatum suarum habent extraneas et singulares efficatias ubi fuerint debite was said before, this takes place as the result o f the power and application o f some
things which, because o f the aforesaid configurations o f their qualities, have strange
11 aut B V [ A S C ] om. [ F M P G J vel L [ N J 17 similia V [ A S ]
12 possint B L [ A N F S J possunt V [ M P C G ]
and singular efficacies where they are duly applied. W hence Paschasius had the
18 quod V [ A F M P S C ] om. B L [ N ] / appel­
13 se solent B L [ A N ] tr. V j se tr. [ F M P C ] lari: vocari L / quoniam: quia V [ N ]
post iuvare 19 hominum: eorum L
I l.x x x i
14-15 sicut... catorum L [ N S C G ] om. 20 Agnetis [ S ] etvidecomm. Agathe B [ F P C G ] sage or passages to which Oresme refers here.
1 See the Commentary, Il.xxxi, lines 14-15.
B V [A F M P ] Aghathe V Agates L Aghate [ M N ] A ga- Perhaps it is to the D e divinatione I, 49 (Sect.
2 Am ores, I, 8, lines 7-8.
14 secundine [ S C G ] secundina L seu secun­ thes [ A ] 113) and II, 55 (Sect. 113), which discuss
3 l i e bello civili, V I, 667 et seq.
da [ N ] I equarum [ S C G/equorum JL [N J 21 artibus uteretur: nititur V a talibus uten- prophecies made by people in a frenzy.
4 See the Commentary, Il.xxxi, lines 20-23.
14-15 yppomanes corr. ex. ycomenes L [ N C ] tur/"C ] 6 D e civitate D e i, X V III, 18.
5 It is difficult to know the particular pas­
u 22 animos om. B
ycenomes/Afyconomet [ G ] 23 tales om. L [ C N ] / predictarum: harum
15 kaloyon N koloyon L kaloren S baloien G predictarum L aliquarum predictarum [ S ] 27 istorum: eorum V illorum [ N ] / posset L 34 autem V [ A S G ] om. L [ N F M P ] dicit B I
colorem C (callion ? cf. commi) 24 Tullius: tulius L V [ S C ] /in libro ow. B 28 quoniam: quando L quia [ N ] quod B V [ N C S G ] est quod L [ A F M P ]
16 de... sic om. L [ C ] / sic om. V /virus 25 casio A 31 quedam om. L [ N C ] 37 prius om. L [ N C ] et tr. B post est / istud:
B V [ A F S C ] vires L [ N J virtus [ P M G ] 26 fuisse om. V / factum om. L [ N C ] 32 aliis2: talibus V illud [ M G ] i« B [ A ] j fit: de L [ C ]
 358 D e configurationibus qualitatum et m otuum Part II, Chapter xxxi 359

40 applicate. Unde Pascasius beatam Luciam fecit lotio perfundi ut ab hiis blessed Lucia besprinkled with urine so that she w ould be cleansed o f those things
rebus lavaretur quibus putabat eam factam esse immobilem, tunc enim magi which he believed had made her immobile, for at that time the magicians were ac­
talia faciebant. customed to do such things.7
Quantum vero ad tertium advertendum est quod aliquando contingit A s for the third method, it ought to be observed that it sometimes happens that
quod magus nec sensus nec mentes immutat nec etiam res obiectas in a magician changes neither the senses nor minds nor even the objective things in
45 substantia vel accidentibus eo modo quo apparent immutate sed per illam substance or accidents so that they appear changed, but rather they delude those
partem mathematice que dicitur perspectiva aut per aliquam aliam propor­ who are present b y means o f that part o f mathematics which is called perspective
tionalem astantes illudit, sicut per specula, per agilitatem motus, per traiecta- or by some other similar [device], as, e.g., b y mirrors, by sleight o f hand, by trans­
tiones, et per alia multa, et ita solent facere quidam ioculatores. Sed tamen formations and by many other such ways. Certain jesters are accustomed to operate
non est proprie nec vere ars magica nisi cum hoc concurrat aliquid aliorum, in this way. But this is not properly or truly the magical art except when it is accom­
50 puta alia radix vel alia pars huius radicis. Nam etiam multa similia possunt panied by something else, that is, another [magical] root or another part o f this
contingere sine hoc quod aliquis homo intendat alium illudere et ita sepe root. For also many similar things can happen without someone intending to
contingit de nocte ex deceptionibus que accidunt circa visum. Unde multa deceive another. Thus it often happens at night as the result o f tricks played upon
de hoc narrat W itelo in libro de natura demonum. the vision. In his book On the Nature o f Demons, W itelo speaks much about this
E t quoniam multi appetunt scire et uti aut admirantur utentes ista radice kind o f thing.8
55 quantum ad duo prima membra eo quod est naturalis, ideo prudenter animad­ A n d since many people seek to know and use, or at least admire those w ho use,
vertendum est quod de occultis efficatiis lapidum, plantarum, seminum, et the first tw o parts o f this root because they are natural, so one should prudently
aliarum rerum naturalium illa dumtaxat expedit scire que humane necessitati observe that it is at least expedient to kn ow those aspects o f the occult powers o f
aut utilitati seu ad bene vivere sunt accommodata. E t cognitione talium con- stones, plants, seeds, and other natural things, w hich are suitable to human need,
tentari debemus cuiusmodi sunt ea que sciunt medici, cyrurgici, aurifabri et use, or good living. But w e ought to be contented w ith the understanding o f such
60 alii. A lia enim secretiora ipsa natura ut ita dicam veluti mater pudica non things as are know n by physicians, surgeons, goldsmiths, and others. T h e other
vult detegi; sed propter inhonestatem vitandam et ad cavendum abusum more secret things nature herself, like a modest mother so to speak, does not wish
celanda sunt, sicut sunt vires vel activitates quas haberent spermata, venena, divulged. But for the sake o f avoiding something shameful, and as a guard against
et quedam alia in aliquibus mixtionibus abhominandis et applicationibus abuse, these things ought to be concealed, as for example the powers and activities
abusivis: hec namque potius dicenda sunt veneficia seu malificia quam bona possessed b y sperm, poisons, and certain other things in some abominable mixtures
65 experimenta, [ut sunt quedam posita in libro qui dicitur vacca Platonis et in and abusive applications. For they ought rather be called poison producing or
pluribus aliis]. Propter quod leges humane que sunt nature conformes iuste maleficent things than good experiments. [Examples are certain things posited in
talia prohibent tanquam periculosa et que nimis possent obesse sed prodesse the book which is called the Cow o f Plato and in several other books.]9 For this
parum vel nichil. Quedam enim istorum propter latentiam et difficultatem reason human laws, w hich conform to nature, justly prohibit such things as dan­
plus habent curiositatis quam afferant utilitatis. D e quibus sapiens unum- gerous, as being capable o f excessive injury and producing little or nothing. For
certain o f these things, because they are hidden and difficult, possess more o f
40 fecit tr. L [ A N S C J ante beatam / lotio lac. V per coniecturationes B per transiec-
curiosity than they offer o f utility. O f these matters a certain wise man has taught
B V [ G ] locia L lo co [ P F M ] lotione [ ?SJ tationes [ A ] per iactationes [ N ]
litio [ A ] lutio [ N ] / perfundi L V [ C S G ] 48 alia multa om. [ N ] multa talia L [ C J
et vide not. 7 profundi B [ A N F M P ] 49 aliquid L [ F M P G ] aliquod B V [ A N S ]
41 putabant L [ N M P ] / factam esse tr. V in­ aliud [ C ] 8 See the Commentary, II.xxxi, lines 52-53.
7 V ita Sanctae Furiae, no doubt from Jacobus
fectam esse [ F M P ] factam [ S ] / tunc: 52 multa tr. L [ N C ] post hoc 9 This bracketed material was probably not
de Voragine, Legenda aurea, Chap. IV (ed. of
tunc temporis B 53 Witelo B [ G , ? N ] Witulo V L Vitelo [ C ] in the original text, since it is only in manu­
Th. Graesse, 31): “ Putans vero Paschasius
42 talia: illa V Vitello [ S ] Vitulo [ A ] Unisselo [ F P ] scripts L C N . For the Vacca Platonis, see the
secundum quorundam figmenta, quod lotio
44 nec2: aut B V [ C ] / immutat om. L [ N ] Unisella [ M ] Commentary, II.xxxi, lines 65-66.
fugarentur maleficia, jussit eam lotio perfundi.”
45 vel V L [ S C J vel in B [ F M P ] sive [ A ] aut 55 prudenter om. V [ G ]
[N ] 59 que: quibus L / sciunt: usi sunt L sunt [ N ]
47 sicu tl B V [ A ] 61 detegi om. L / ad om. L [ A ] 63 abhonorandis V horrendis [ N ] 67 prodesse: predicte V
47-48 per traiectationes L [ S C ] om. [ F M P G ] 62 sunt om. L [ A N ] 65-66 u t . . .aliis L [ C N ] om. B V [ A F M P S G J 68 Quedam: quidam V quelibet [ F M P ]
 360 Part II, Chapter xxxii 361
D e configurationibus qualitatum et m otuum

70 quemque docuit dicens: “ non est tibi necessarium ea que abscondita sunt
videre oculis tuis [ ...] et in pluribus operibus D ei non eris curiosus, [ ...]
multos enim supplantavit suspicio eorum et in vanitate detinuit sensus
illorum ” et cetera. Nam et in libris qui de talibus scripti sunt est modicum
75 veritatis. Omnes quoque qui se de hoc intromittunt sine instantia male
finiunt dies suos, quoniam fine perverso tanquam filii inverecundi nituntur
caste parentis nature violare secreta. Ideoque digne maledicti sunt ab auctore
nature.
when he says :10 “ it is not necessary for thee to see with thine eyes those things that
are h id __and in many o f G o d ’s works thou shalt not be inquisitive... A n d the
suspicion o f them hath deceived many, and hath detained their minds in vanity,”
etc. For in those books which have been written concerning such things there is
little truth. A lso all those w ho dabble in this kind o f thing w ithout direction11 end
their days badly since w ith such a perverse aim they seek, like shameless children o f
a virtuous parent, to violate the secrets o f nature. Therefore they have been fitting­
ly cursed by the A uthor o f nature.

[ILxxxii] Capitulum 32m de quadam specialitate radicis istius ILxxxii On a certain special case o f this root

Pretermittere nolui quoddam aliud speciale quo utuntur aliquando magi.
Pro cuius intellectione premitto quod quandoque infra terre viscera quidam
spiritus corporeus naturaliter generatur, qui quidem spiritus a loco sue
5 generationis vel ex aliis causis contrahit quandam pestiferam sive veneno­
sam virtutem. Aliquotiens etiam similis spiritus generatur ex aliis putrefac­
tionibus sicut ex cadaveribus vel ex talibus. Inde fit quod huiusmodi spiritus
exterius exalatus et per auras diffusus viventia corpora graviter ledit et
quandoque mortaliter inficit. Propter quod Palladius libro suo de agricultura
10 dicit quod “ in fodiendis puteis cavendum est periculum, quoniam plerum­
que terra sulphur, alumen, bitumen educit, quorum spiritus mixti anhelitum
pestis exalant, et occupatis statim naribus extorquent animas, nisi quis fuge
sibi velocitate succurrat. Igitur preponenda est lucerna que si extinguatur
cavendus est locus, quoniam eum spiritus pestifer occupabit” ; hoc ille.
15 Aliquotiens etiam ex talibus exalationibus pravis causate sunt mortalitates,
sicut in historiis invenitur.
I have not wished to omit a certain other special case [of this root] w hich magi­
cians sometimes use. F or its understanding I premise that sometimes within the
bowels o f the earth a certain corporeal spirit is naturally generated, w hich spirit
contracts a pestiferous or poisonous pow er from the place o f generation or from
other causes. A lso, sometimes a similar spirit is generated from other putrefactions,
as from cadavers or some such things. A n d so it happens that a spirit o f this sort,
exhaled externally and diffused by the breezes, gravely injures living bodies and
sometimes mortally infects them. For this reason Palladius says in his b ook On
Agriculture that “ in digging wells one must be beware o f danger, since very often the
earth brings forth sulfur, alum, and bitumen, whose mixed spirits produce an
exhalation o f pest, and when they have been smelled immediately put souls out o f
sorts unless someone helps him self by fleeing quickly. Therefore a lamp ought to
be set up, which i f extinguished warns us about the place since [it indicates that] a
pestiferous spirit is present there.” 1 Further, sometimes deaths are caused by such
bad spirits, as one finds in historical accounts.

10 This is run together from Ecclesiasticus 13 is quite accurate except for the omission o f
72 supplantavit t r .L [ N J p o s t eorum / vanitate: 3:23-26, with omissions indicated by [...]. fossorum after est in line 10. Oresme has sub­
6 generatur om. L [ C N ]
varietate et L varietate [ M ] Note also that Oresme in line 70 has omitted stituted the sentence of lines 13-14 (“ Igitur...
7 ex2 B V [ A F M P C ] om. L [ N S G J (et S G
74 et2 om. L [ A C N J etiim after est from the Vulgate text; in line 71 occupabit” ) for the following statement of
om. talibus)
75 quoque: enim V [N J / sine: fere sine he has substituted D e i for eius\ in line 72 enim Palladius: “ Prius ergo quam descendatur ad
8 viventia corpora tr. L [ N C ]
V [A S ] for quoque and eorum for illorum. intima, in eis locis lucernam pones accensam.
10-11 plerumque terra tr. L [ N C J
77 autore V L [ M C J actione [ N J 11 sine instantia can either be read with intro­ Quae si extincta non fuerit, periculum non
11 sulphurea V / bitumen: latumen L [N ]
mittunt as I have done here (with the meaning timebis; si vero extinguetur, cavendus est
buttomen B vitionem [ S J / educit: adducit
I l.x x x ii: B I D “ without direction” ) or with male fiunt (with locus, quem spiritus mortifer occupavit.” In­
L [ G ] / anhelitum L [ N G J et text. Pali, ane-
2 nolui V L [ A C S ] volui B [ N F M P ] nolo the meaning “ without a contrary instance,” cidentally, Schmitt gives extinguatur as a vari­
litum B [ A S ] annelitum Nalinentum
[G] i.e., “ without exception” ). ant reading and notes that all o f the manu­
[F M ]
3 quidam om. Kquedam fd'7 II. x x x ii scripts have occupabit [as does Oresm e]; how­
15 mortalitates: infirmitates et mortalitates L
4 naturaliter generatur tr. L / loco: suo loco 1 D e agricultura, IX , 9 (ed. o f Schmitt, 194). ever, Schmitt has corrected it to occupavit.
mortalitas [ N J
V Oresme’s quotation through succurrat in line
16 historiis L [ A AI P C G ] hystorWs B \ '[ N F S ]
 362 D e configurationibus qualitatum et m otuum Part II, Chapter xxxii 363

E t inde est quod ecclesia sancta pro locis fidelium orando precatur, ut A n d so it is that the holy church beseeches by prayer, on the behalf o f places o f
illic non resideat spiritus pestilens, non aura corrumpens. Rursus huiusmodi the faithful, that no pestilential spirit nor corrupting breeze m ight reside there.
spiritus pestilens aliquotiens inducit varias egritudines capitis et in viribus Again, a pestilential spirit o f this sort sometimes brings about various sicknesses o f
20 sensitivis. Ita narrat Galienus de quadam pestilentia que propter cadavera the head and o f the sensitive powers. Thus G alen tells o f a certain pestilence (aris­
multa ex prelio accidit in parte Ethiopie et pervenit usque ad terram greco- ing in Ethiopia from many battle corpses and spreading to Greece) w hich was the
rum et fuit causa tante oblivionis quod advenit eis dispositio secundam quam cause o f such forgetfulness that those [contracting it] fell into the state o f a man
homo nominis sui oblivisceretur et filii sui. Possibile est igitur quod sit who w ould forget his name and his son.2 Therefore it is possible that there is some
aliqua exalatio talis et tante virtutis quod mentes immutet vel quod faciat such exhalation o f pow er so great that it changes minds or causes the sensitive
25 spiritus sensitivos ad intra recludi et exteriores sensus obstupescere et spirits to be closed within and the exterior senses to be stupefied, thus making
visiones mirabiles apparere. E t valde probabile est quod hac de causa qui­ marvelous visions appear. A n d it is very probable that this is the cause o f w hy
dam solebant dare responsa que fuerint olim in magna admiratione. Unde certain people were w ont to give the [oracular] responses which were once the
Iustinus libro 240, loquens de sacerdotibus Apollinis Delphici, sic ait: “ Tem ­ object o f great admiration. W hence Justin in b ook twenty-four,3 where he speaks
plum autem Apollinis Delphis positum est in monte Parnaso, in rupe undi- o f the priests o f the D elphic A pollo, says: “ T he temple o f A p ollo at D elphi was
30 que inpendenti” et sequitur “ in huius rupis amfractu media ferme montis placed on M ount Parnassus on a cliff overhanging on all sides” ; and later, “ in the
altitudine planities exigua est, atque in ea profundum terre foramen, quod middle bend o f this cliff almost at the top o f the mountain there is a small plain and
in oracula patet; ex quo frigidus spiritus v i quadam velut vento in sublime there is there a deep hole in the earth, which hole opens into the oracles. From this
expulsus mentes vatum in vecordiam vertit impietasque de eo (/deo?) hole a cold spirit forcibly expelled on high like a wind turns the minds o f sooth­
responsa consulentibus dare co git,” hoc Iustinus, ita quod ventus ille faciebat sayers to madness and forces their minds filled w ith it to give responses to those
35 eos divinare et hoc dicebant ab Apolline accepisse. N on enim loquebatur seeking consul,” — so much Justin. So it was that the wind was m aking them pro­
demon in ydolo, ut aliqui putant, sed sacerdotes loquebantur populo quasi phesy and they said that they had received the prophecy from A pollo. For a demon
referentes oracula dei sui. was not speaking in an apparition, as some think, but the priests were speaking to
Item de quodam alio simili foramine loquitur Lucanus dicens: “ N on tripo­ he people as i f repeating the oracles o f their god.
das D elii, non Phitia (/Pythia) consulit antra.” Similiter Vergilius de Enea Lucan speaks o f another similar hole: “ He sought not the tripods o f D elos nor
40 dicit: “ Antrum immane, petit, magnam cui mentem animumque Delius the caverns at Pythia.” 4 Similarly V irg il says o f A eneas: H e “ seeks the vast cavern
inspirat vates aperitque futura.” Sed quod per hoc anima insaniret notat [of Sybil] into whom the Delian seer breathes a m ighty mind and soul, revealing
Vergilius dicens: “ stimulos sub pectore vertit A p o llo ,” et statim sequitur, the future.” 5 But that by this the mind w ould go mad V irgil notes when he says:
“ ut primum [cessit] furor et rabida ora quierunt,” et cetera. Sic quoque “ A pollo applies the spurs beneath her breast,” and immediately follow ing: “ A s
deus per prophetiam dicebat: “ E go [...] Dom inus [...] irrita faciens signa soon as the frenzy ceased and the raving lips were stilled,” etc.6 A lso G o d was
45 divinorum, at ariolos in furorem vertens.” Augustinus etiam in libro de accustomed to speak thus through prophecy: “ I am the L o r d .. .that maketh void
natura demonum dicit quod duo sunt genera divinationis: ars et furor. the tokens o f diviners, and maketh the soothsayers mad.” 7 Further, Augustine in
17 E t om. V I ecclesia sancta: facta est ecclesia his b ook On the Nature o f Demons8 says that there are tw o kinds o f divination: art
quadamB V text. lust, quodam L f A N F M ]
L facta est in ecclesia [ N ] ecclesia sacra /sublime: fulmine V
[S G ] 33 impletus L [ N ] / deo text. lust.
19 aliquotiens inducit B V [ S ] tr. L [ C ] aliquas 34 ventus ille tr. V
2 See the Commentary, II.xxxii, lines 20-23. 4 D e bello civili, V I, 425.
inducit [ F M P ] aliquando inducit [ G ] 36 ydolis L [ N ] / populo om. L / quasi om. B
3 Epitom a historiarum philippicarum Pompei 5 Aeneid, VI, n - 1 2 .
quandoque inducit [ A N ] 38-39 tripodas B [ A P ] text. Luc. tripodat L
Trogi, Bk. 24, VI, 6 and V I, 9 (ed. o fO . Seel 6 Ibid., V I, 101-2.
21 partibus V [ A S G ] je to m . V tripudas V trepedas [ N C ] tripedas [ F M ]
[Leipzig, 1935]). In V I, 6, Seeks text has 7 Isaias 44:24-25.
23 sit: sicut L tripidas [ G ]
D elphici (for D elphis), omits the second in, and 8 See the Commentary, Il.xxxii, lines 45-
24 et: estZ, 39 Deli text. Luc. / Phitia B [ A F P C S G ] phy-
has inpendente. In V I, 9, it has hoc (pot huius') and 46.
28 Delphici: Delphi L Delfici V tea V ficta L [ N ] Pythia text. Luc.
29 Delphis: Delphici text. lust. / est om. L [ C ] has deo (for eo).
41-43 Sed... cetera om. [ G ]
30 montis: in montis V 43 cessit text. Verg. om. M S S / et cetera
32 in oracula: in oraculo [ A P ] miraculum L B [ F P M S ] om. L [ A N C G ] et V 45-46 A ugustinus...furoro m .[ F M P ]
text. V ulg. mira L [ N F M P ]
I vi ?B , ? F , text. lust, in V L [ A M P C G ] / 44 dicebat om. [ S ] p. d. L j irrita B V [ A C S G ] 46 ars: scilicet ars V [ G ]
45 divinorum: ydolorum V
 364 D e configurationibus qualitatum e t m otuum 365
Part II, Chapter xxxii
Simili m odo potuit fieri illud quod communiter famatur de purgatorio and frenzy. T he comm only reported story o f the purgatory o f St. Patrick could
sancti Patricii, dicitur enim quod quidam intravit foramen in latere cuius­ have happened in a similar w ay.9 For it is said that he entered a hole in the side o f a
dam putei, et cum post aliquantum tempus reversus esset, dicebat se vidisse certain well, and when after some time he had returned, he said that he had seen
50 multa mirabilia que non sunt bene credibilia nec dictis sanctorum consona, many marvelous things which are not very credible nor consonant with the state­
sed quasi similia vel proportionalia eis que Vergilius de Enea fabulatur. ments o f saints but which are quite similar or relatable to the things w hich V irgil
Ideoque magis verisimile est quod ille per modum supratactum fuit naturali­ reported o f Aeneas. Therefore it is more probable that he was naturally put into a
ter in stuporem versus et quadam exalatione pestifera in mente mutatus et ita stupor by the aforedescribed m ethod; and his mind deranged by a certain pestif­
deceptus. Unde et propter illum malum aerem aliqui in illo specu mortui erous exhalation, he was thus deceived. W hence, and because o f this bad air, some
55 sunt aliquando, ut dicitur. Q uod autem ista taliter fiant, signum est, quod si people have sometimes died in that cavern, as is said. M oreover, that these things
quis antequam intraret huiusmodi loca purgaret aerem per fumum aromati­ take place in such a w ay is an indication that if someone, before entering places o f
cum aut per ignem aut aliquo alio m odo et prepararet se comedendo fortes this sort, w ould purge the air w ith an aromatic fume or by fire or in some other way
species et bibendo bonum vinum, nunquam appareret sibi aliquid tale quia and w ould prepare him self by eating strong food and drinking good wine, some
certe non lederetur ab huiusmodi prava exalatione que quandoque est ibi such thing w ould never appear to him because certainly he w ould not be injured
60 solum ad tempus. Ideo postea nichil apparet etiam si nulla fieret preparatio by an iniquitous exhalation o f this sort which is sometimes present there only
talis. temporarily. Therefore afterwards [if he waited long enough] there w ould be no
Nunc autem ad propositum, si per tales exalationes que fiunt naturaliter apparition even if no such preparation was made.
possit sensus humanus ita turbari, possibile est etiam artificialiter aliquos N o w turning to the question at hand: if the human sense could be so disturbed
fumos facere ex certis rebus, per quos possint homines dementari, ita ut by such naturally produced exhalations, it is also possible to make artificially out o f
65 quedam forme terribiles vel alia fantastica eis appareant. Tales autem fumos certain things some fumes by which men could be driven mad so that certain
solent facere illi magi qui dicuntur nigromantici, et vocant ista suffumiga­ terrible forms or other fantastic things appear to them. Those magicians called
tiones. Unde Lucanus de quadam maga dicit: “ Gaudet funereas aris inponere necromancers are accustomed to make such fumes and they name these fumes
flammas.” Hec enim “ molimina magicarum artium [...] commemorare p o­ “ suffumigations.” W hence Lucan says o f a certain sorceress :10 “ She rejoices to lay
tius quam docere solent poete,” ut habetur in decretis: 26% questio 2a. Una funeral fires on the altar.” For these “ endeavors o f the magical arts the poets are
70 vero de causis istorum posset assignari ex dictis in prima parte tractatus accustomed to commemorate rather than to teach,” as it is had in the Decretum [of
istius, videlicet quod exalationes tales hanc habent virtutem ex configura­ Gratian], [2d part, Causa] 26, question 2.11 N o w one o f the causes o f such things
tione difformitatis qualitatum suarum. could be assigned from what was said in the first part o f this treatise, namely that
such exhalations have this pow er because o f the configuration o f the difformity o f
their qualities
47 istud L I quod om. L u t: quod-L
49 dicebat se vidisse om. V 66-67 vocant... suffumigationes: viderunt de
51 similia vel proportionalia: proportionalis istis fumis [ F M P ]
seu similia V consimilia [ N ] 66 ista B L [ S A C ] istas V [ N J illa [ G ]
52 magis om. [SJ quod magis L [ C ] 66-67 suffumigationes: figurationes L [ N C ]
54 specu B V [ A S C G ] sepe ,L [ N J loco 67 dicit om. L / funereas B [ A S G ] text. Luc.
[ FM PJ fumereas L [ N ] fumigeras V
55 aliquando om. L [ N ] quandoque [ A ] 68-69 H e c . . .2 a om. [ F M P G ]
57 aut2 L [ F M P C J vel B V [ S N J sive [ A ] 68 molimina B L [ C ] volumina V [ S N ] meli-
58 sibi om. L / aliquid V L [ A F M S G ] aliquod mina [ A ]
B[NPCJ 69 questio om. V
60 solum tr. L post tempus 70 istorum: istarum L [ C ] illorum/-G ] /posset
62 Nu n c ... propositum om. L [ N ] L V [ F M P S ] possit B [ C ] potest [ A N G ]
63-64 possibile... quos om. F 71 hanc B V [ A C G ] o m . L [ F M P S ]
63 possibile est B V [ A C G ] ita possibile est 72 difformitatis qualitatum B V [ A C G j diffor- 1928], 342). Oresme has transferred Gaudet
9 Ibid., lines 47-50.
L [ N J posset [ M P ] mitatum qualitatum [ F M P ] deformitatis from its position in Lucan’s text after flammas.
10 D ebello c iv iii,Y I, 5 25-26 (L o eb L ib ra ry ed.
64 ex. . . rebus om. V / possunt V [ N C ] / L difformitatum [ N ] and tr. o f J. D . D u ff [L o n d o n , N e w Y o r k , 11 See the Commentary, IT.xxxii, lines 68-69.
 366 D e configurationibus qualitatum et m otuum Part II, Chapter xxxiii 367

[ILxxxiii] Capitulum 33111 de tertia radice artis magice ILxxxiii On the third root o f the magical art

Tertium fundamentum artis magice consistit in sonorum seu verborum The third base o f the magical art consists in the power o f sounds or words and it
virtute et magis pertinet principali proposito huius operis. Rememorari is more pertinent to the principal subject matter o f this w ork. It is necessary to
autem oportet quom odo qualitates permanentes propter multiplicem et recall h ow permanent qualities vary as the result o f the multiple and strange con­
5 extraneam configurationem difformitatis earum varias atque mirabiles ha­ figuration o f their difformity and [thus] have various marvelous virtues, as was
bent virtutes prout patuit in ultimis capitulis prime partis huius, rursum obvious in the last chapters o f the first part o f this w ork; and further, how various
qualiter motus successivi propter figurationem difformitatis velocitatum successive movements have diverse powers because o f the figuration o f the dif­
diversas habent potentias, qualiterque soni propter eandem causam magnas form ity o f [their] velocities; and [finally] h ow sounds, on account o f the same
et miras efficatias habent ut iam ostensum est in hac parte. Quibus attentis et cause, have great and wonderful efficacies, as has just been demonstrated in this
10 consideratis non est difficile videre— ymmo probabile est— quod naturaliter part [of the w o rk ]. W ith these things given mindful consideration it is not difficult
vel artificiose possit alicuius soni difformitas taliter figurari quod habebit to see— in fact it is probable— that the difformity o f some sound could be either
potentiam aliquid ad extra mutandi et precipue in animali illo quod afficitur naturally or artificially figured in such a w ay that it w ill have the pow er o f changing
per auditum ab huiusmodi sono. E t possibile est quod ad hoc faciat aliquid something outside it, and principally in an animal which is affected b y hearing a
figura difformitatis motus concomitantis ipsum sonum. A d hanc autem sound o f this sort. A n d it is possible that in such a case the shape o f the difformity
i5 efficatiam potissime aptus est sonus v o x et maxime vo x humana. D e qua ait o f the motion accompanying this sound is effective. A nd the sound most endowed
Ieronymus: “ Habet enim nescio quid latentis energie vive vocis actus” w ith this pow er is the voice, particularly the human voice. O f this Jerome says:
(“ energie,” id est, virtutis). Unde Plinius 28° libro naturalis historie enume­ “ The action o f the live-voice has untold latent energy,” (“ energy, ” i.e. force).1
rat multa miranda de verborum efficatia et virtute in morbos sanando et que- Whence Pliny in the twenty-eighth b ook o f the Natural History enumerates many
dam alia operando. marvelous examples o f the efficacy and power o f words in curing diseases and d o ­
20 Hac igitur radice aliquotiens usi sunt magi, ut habetur ibidem. E t ista ing certain other things.2
pars magice appropriate vocatur incantatio vel incantatoria a cantu, et hoc Therefore, magicians use this root sometimes, as it is reported in the same place
est signum quod ipsa operatur in virtute cantus et difformitate vocis. Ideo [in the Natural History\. A n d this part o f magic is appropriately called “ incanta­
ille compositiones verborum quibus magi se iuvant dicuntur carmina; de tion” or “ incantatory” from “ cant,” and this is an indication that it operates by
quadam enim vetula dicit O vidius: “ E t solidam longo carmine findit virtue o f chanting and by the difformity o f voice. Therefore these verbal composi­
25 humum.” Quandoque autem magi hoc solo sine iuvamine alterius radicis tions which the magicians use as aids are called carmina [or poetic incantations].
immutant hominum mentes. Inde ait Lucanus: “ Mens hausti nulla sanie For O vid says concerning a certain old w om an:3 “ and w ith long incantation she
polluta veneni, excantata perit,” et cetera. Quandoque etiam cum hoc iuvat lays open the solid earth.” M oreover, sometimes magicians use only this root w ith­
se magus alia radice. Ideo dicit Lucanus: “ Pollutos cantu diris[que] venefica out the help o f another to derange men’s minds. Thus Lucan says: “ but even when
succis,” et cetera. Aliquando etiam per hanc radicem immutant animalia defiled by no horrid draught o f poison, men’s minds are destroyed b y incanta­
30 bruta. Unde V ergilius: “ frigidus in pratis cantando rumpitur anguis.” E t tions,” etc.4 Sometimes magicians also use another root in addition. Therefore,
Lucan says: “ the w itch [forbade Philippi], defiled by her incantation and [sprin­
I L x x x iii: B V L 12 aliquid B V [ A C G ] om. L [ N F M P S ] / im­ kled] with her dreadful potions.. .” s Sometimes they also alter brutish animals with
4 autem oportet tr. B oportet [ N J / multi­ mutandi L [ N C ] this root. W hence V irg il says, “ The cold snake in the meadows is split b y song.” 6
plicitatem L 15 est: est ipse V
5 difformitatis B V [ A C G ’] difformitatum 20 igitur om. L [ N J ergo B V [ G J :
IL x x x iii 2 N a tu ra l History, X X V III, 10-21.
[ N F M P J deformitatum L aliquando L quandoque [ N J / Et om. L
1 Epistolae, Epis. 53 (Migne, P L , Vol. 22, 3 Am ores, I, 8, 18.
7 figurationem V [ A N F M C S G ] configura­ 22 difformitatis L V / Ideo om. L e t omnes L
c. 541; cf. ed. o f Hilberg [Leipzig, 1910], 446). 4 D e bello civili, V I, 457.
tionem B L [ P ] / difformitatis B V [A N 24 carmina L / fundit ? L [ S J
Oresme’s text varies slightly from these edi­ 5 Ibid., V I, 580. I have added -[que] from
C S G ] deformitatis L difformitatum [ F 25 sine: fine sine alio L cum [ F M P ]
tions, both o f which omit enim and replace Lucan’s text.
M P] 26 Undc L [ C N J
rive vocis actus by viva vox. 6Eclogae, VIII, 71.
9 efficatias habent tr. L [ C ] efficatias habeant 27 incantata ZLCWy
[G ] 28 [-que] text. Luc. / veneficia L [ N J
11 deformitas L 29 succis: sucis texi. Luc. / animalia: alia ?L V 30 anguisL [ A N F M P S C G ] angis B V
 368 D e configurationibus qualitatum e t m otuum Part II, Chapter xxxiii 369

in psalmo dicit propheta: In “ similitudinem serpentis et aspidis surde et
obturantis aures suas, que non exaudiet vocem incantatium, et venefici
incantantis sapienter,” id est, artificiose componentis sive figurantis difformi-
tatem cantus aut vocis. E t sic forte fecit quidam magus, de quo habetur in
35 vita sancti Silvestri, quando in aurem cuiusdam tauri murmuravit et statim
taurus eiectis oculis exspiravit.
Q uod autem ista fiant non ex v i significationis sed virtute formationis et
figurationis sonorum patet per tria signa. Unum est illud quod nunc dictum
est de brutis, que per hoc immutantur et tamen non perpendunt significa-
40 tionem verborum . A liud est quia si verba virtute significationis agerent tunc
equivalentia in significando in alio ydiomate haberent eandem virtutem,
quod tamen ipsi magi negant. Tertium est quia non semper utuntur voce
significativa sed murmurant nescio quid quadam extranea et insolita diffor-
mitate sonora difformi— ymmo difformi atque dissimili humane voci com-
45 muni. Unde Lucanus de quadam incantatione loquens sic dicebat: “ Tunc
vo x Letheos cunctis potentior herbis excusare (/excantare) deos confundit
murmura primum dissona et humane multum discordia lingue. Latratus
habet illa canum gemitusque luporum .” E t in Ysaia dicitur: “ Querite a
phitonibus (/pythonibus) et a divinis qui strident in [in]cantationibus suis”
50 et cetera; “ stridere” enim non est communis locutio. Cum etiam magus per
alias radices immutaverit propriam mentem et alienatus fuerit terrore et
falsa credulitate, aliquando contingit quod varios sonos format ad intra et
resonat inconveniens vo x quasi tubalis, quam emittit ab ymo pectore ali-
quotiens non sponte, et tunc putatur quod demon loquatur in illo vel sub
55 terra. Unde in Ysaia ubi dicitur “ Querite a phitonibus,” et cetera, quidam
libri habent “ Querite a ventriloquis,” et alia littera habet “ Querite a phitoni­
bus qui de terra loquuntur et de ventre clamitant” ; nam et alibi in eodem
A nd in the psalm the prophet says: “ [their madness] is according to the likeness o f
a serpent, like the deaf asp that stoppeth her ears, which shall not hear the voice o f
the charmers; nor o f the wizard that charmeth w isely,” i.e. artificially composing
or figuring the difformities o f the song or voice.7 A n d thus it is perhaps what a
certain magician, mentioned in the Life of St. Sylvester, did when he muttered in
the ear o f a bull and the bull, his eyes having popped out, immediately expired.8
That these things do not m ove by force o f the meaning o f the sounds but by
virtue o f their structure and figuration is evident b y three signs. T he first is that
which has just been stated concerning brutes: they are altered by this [sort o f in­
cantation] and yet they do not judge the meaning o f words. Another [sign] is that,
if words w ould act by virtue o f their meaning, then words in another idiom having
an equivalent meaning ought to possess the same p o w er; but this these magicians
deny. T he third [sign] is that they do not always use a meaningful sound but mur­
mur some sounds that are difform with some strange unaccustomed difformity,
difform and dissimilar to the ordinary human voice. Whence Lucan, speaking o f a
certain incantation, said as follows :9 “ A n d then [her] voice, more pow erful than
any drug to bewitch the gods o f Lethe, first uttered mutterings, dissonant and in
great discord w ith the human tongue. The d og’s bark and the w o lf’s how l were in
that voice.” A n d in Isaias it is said:10 “ Seek o f pythons, and o f diviners, w ho
mutter in their enchantments. . . , ” for “ to mutter” is not comm on speech. A lso,
since the magician b y means o f the other roots [of magic] deranges his ow n mind
and is made strange b y terror and false credulity, sometimes it happens that he
forms various sounds internally and an unfitting and almost trumpet-like cry
resounds, a cry which he emits from the depths o f his breast, sometimes involuntar­
ily, and then it is thought that a demon is speaking in him or under the earth. Thus
in Isaias where it is said “ Seek o f python s. . . ” certain books have “ Seek o f ventrilo­
quists,” and another reading has “ Seek o f pythons w ho speak from the earth and

31 de psalmo scr. A mg. c° 57° / similitudinem B L [ N G ] I eandem virtutem: eadem V

L [ N C G ] om. [ S J similitudinem inquit
B V [A F M P J
32-34 q u e.. .vocis om. [ G ]
34 cantus aut vocis om. V [ F P J
35 tauri B [ A N M P G J thauri V L [ F S C ]
36 taurus B [ A N M P G ] thaurus V L [ F S C ]
37 ista om. L [ C ] illa [ G ] / non om. B [ C ]
37-38 formationis et figurationis B V figura­
tionis et formationis L [ C ] figurationis in
alio formationis et formationis [ N J
38 tria: duo V / nunc om. [ P ] communiter V
39 et om. L [ N ]
40 est: signum est L [ N C J / verbaL [ N J om.
[ A F A I P ] lac. B V verbum [ C ] tales [SG J
/ agerent: agentis ? V [ S ] ageret [ C ]
41 ydiomate V [ A F M P C ] ydeomate
42 Tertium: Tertium signum L [ N ]
aliud signum [ C ]
43 quedam L [ C ] / insolida V
43-44 difformitate: difformitate quadam L
45 Lucanus om. L [ C ] j dicebat: aiebat V ait
[ N J / Tunc: tum text. Luc.
46 potentior: pollentior text. Luc. / excusare:
excantare text. Luc. excussare B
47 dissone L / multis L [ C , ?N J
48-50 E t . . .locutioo m .[ G ]
48-49 a phitonibus: amphitionibus [ F M P ]
hic et alibi
49 phytonibus V L [ S ] pythonibus text. Vulg.
/ strident L [ F A 1P ] text. Vulg. stridunt
B V [ A S , ? C ] scribunt [ N J
50 et cetera om. L [ N C J / est om. L
Tunc
7 Psalms 57:5-6. The Vulgate has sicut in­
stead of et after serpentis.
8 See the V ita Sylvestri in Jacobus de Vora­
gine, Legenda aurea, Chap. X II (ed. o f Th.
Graesse, 78).
51 aliam radicem V / immutaverit: immutaret
L [ ? N ] mutaverit [ G ]
52 contingat V
5 5 pithonibus [ C ]
5 5-57 e t .. .phitonibus om. P et om. L [ N ] hic;
sed ante nam in linea j y habet L Sed quidam
libri habent querite a ventriloquis et habet N
post sonorum in linea 60 E t quidam libri
9 D e bello civili, V I, 685-88. Lucan’s text has
Turn for Tunc, pollentior for potentior and excan-
tare for excusare.
10 Isaias 8:19.
habent querite a ventriloquis. Maluit actor
iste sic solvere in casis positis in presenti
capitulo et in precedenti atribuere quam
virtuti demonum.
55-5 8 e t... obprobrium om. [ G J
57 clamitant B [ A F A 1P S ] adiurat L adiurant
[ C ] adiurant clamitant [ N J ad mutant ? V
/alibi: alibi etiam L ibi [ F A I P ]
 37° D e configurationibus qualitatum et m otuum Part II, Chapter xxxiv 371

libro in obprobrium dicitur, “ erit quasi phitonis ( /pythonis) de terra v o x tua, cry out from the belly” ; for elsewhere it is said in the same book in reproach: “ thy
et de humo eloquium tuum mus[s]itabit.” E t hec sufficiant de difformitate voice shall be from the earth like that o f the python, and out o f the ground thy
60 sonorum. speech shall mutter.” 11 These things suffice regarding the difformity o f sounds.12

[ILxxxiv] Capitulum 34® de modo deceptionis anime per II.xxxiv On the way the soul is deceived by the magical art
magicam artem

Cum igitur magus usus fuerit omnibus aut aliquibus aut aliquo predic-
torum, tunc anima hominis apti nati decipi quandoque fit per abstractionem
5 seu reclusionem ad modum speculi, et ut in pluribus fit tanquam speculum
tornatum falsum et quasi indebita difformitate politum, licet quandoque
fiat speculum verum iuxta modum tactum in fine prime partis huius. Rur­
sum per predictas radices vel aliquam earum causantur in tali homine qui­
dam corporei spiritus vel fumi diversimode colorati et varie figurati, quorum
10 sicut in freneticis aut melancolicis quidam sunt nigri, alii rubei, quidam
ignei, alii aquei, et sic multipliciter et differenter in qualitate, colore, figura,
et m otu; et aliqui forsan sunt clari, alii lucidi, sicut putredines de nocte
lucentes. Isti itaque spiritus sunt obiecta relucentia in anima vel in eius or­
ganis interioribus sicut in speculo. E t ex hoc oriuntur apparitiones clarorum
i5 angelorum vel turpium demonum aut visiones hominum mortuorum, qui­
dam loquentium, sicut forsan fit in eis qui dicuntur habere spiritum phitoni-
cum, et ita de aliis. Si autem cum predictis spiritibus concurrat causa extrin-
seca efficiens visionis, aut si ipsa causa extrinseca agat se sola sine eis, tunc
possibile est ut fiant vere visiones futurorum vel aliorum occultorum , sicut
20 dictum est in ultimo capitulo prime partis.
W hen the magician uses all, several, or one o f the aforementioned [methods],
then the soul o f a man appropriately constituted is sometimes deceived by separa­
tion or reclusion in the manner o f a mirror, and often this takes place as in a mirror
that is falsely turned and polished with, as it were, undue difformity, although some­
times it takes place as in a true mirror according to the method touched on in the
end o f the first part o f this w ork. Again, by means o f the aforesaid roots, or one
o f them, certain corporeal spirits or fumes colored in diverse ways and variously
figured are formed in such a man. A s in the case o f people in a frenzy, or melan­
cholics,1 some o f these spirits are black, some are red, some fiery, some aqueous,
and so they are manifoldly and differently [constituted] in quality, color, shape, and
motion. Some perhaps are b righ t; others are shining, as in putrifying things that
shine at night. A n d so these spirits are objects shining forth in the soul or in its
interior organs as in a mirror. A n d it is from this that arise apparitions o f bright
angels or foul demons, or visions o f dead men, some o f whom are speaking. A n
example perhaps occurs in those w ho are said to have a pythonic spirit, and similar­
ly for others. B ut i f an extrinsic efficient cause o f the vision accompanies the afore­
said spirits, or if that extrinsic cause acts alone w ithout the spirits, then it is possible
for true visions o f future events or o f other occult things to arise, as has been said
in the last chapter o f the first part.

58 dicitur tr. V [ S ] postYihto 11 differenter: difformiter L [ N C G ] / quali­

58-59 de erit.. .musfs]itabit scr. mg. [ A ] Ysae
290
58 pythonis text. Vulg. / vox tua tr. V
59 mussitabit text. Vulg. mutabit L versicabi-
lis [ S ] I hec sufficiant B V [ N C S G ] hoc
s u f f i c a t L [ A F ] sufficit hoc [ M P J
I L x x x iv : B V L
1 anime om. L
3 aut1 B [ A F M P S G ] vel L V [ N C ] / aut2
L [ P N M S C J vel B V f F G J sive [ A ]
6 tornatum B V [ A ] om. [ G ] cornutum et
L [ N J curvum [ F M P ]
tate om. L
13 relucentia: lucentia V
15 angelorum: angulorum V
15- 16 quidam loquentium B V [ S ] om. [ G ]
quedam loquentium L [ A N C ] loquentium
quandoque [ F M P ]
16- 17 phitonicum L [ F M P C G J phytonicum
B V fS J 11 Isaias 29:4. preceding chapter rather than to attribute them
18 ipsa causa extrinseca L V [ A N S C ] om. 12 The scribe of MS IV at this point notes that to the power of demons.” See the variant
B[FM P] Oresme prefers the explanation outlined in reading for lines 55-57.
20 dictum est L [ F M P ] fuit dictum B V this chapter rather than to have recourse to the IL x x x iv
[ACSG 7 power o f demons: “ this author preferred to 1 See the Commentary, II. xxxiv, line 10.
solve thus the problems posed in this and the
 37z D e configurationibus qualitatum et m otuum Part II, Chapter xxxv 373

[II.xxxv] Capitulum 35111 in quo est determinatio quorundam II .xxxv In which certain o f the things said earlier are
premissorum determined

E t ne quis ex predictis occasionem sumat erroris advertendum est quod Lest anyone be led into error by what has been said earlier, it ought to be ob­
huiusmodi divinatores aut m agi fingunt et mentiuntur se multa posse facere served that diviners o f this sort or magicians pretend or falsely declare that they
5 que non possunt et iactant se fecisse que non fecerunt et libentius loquuntur can do many things that they are unable to do and they boast that they have done
inter ignaros et utuntur ambagibus et verborum cautelis. things which they did not do and they speak more w illingly to those w ho are
Plurima etiam de talibus factis narrantur que simpliciter falsa sunt et ignorant, and they use circumlocutions and cautious w ords.1
similia fabulis vetularum. Quedam etiam rationabiliter negari non possunt M any such deeds that are narrated are simply false and like old w ives’ tales.
que habentur ex historiis et testimoniis fidedignis et quasi ab omnibus Certain others which derive from histories and testimony w orthy o f faith and are
10 approbatis. Huiusmodi vero mirabilia sunt in duplici differentia. Quedam attested by almost everybody cannot be denied rationally. M arvelous things o f
enim— ymmo ut plurimum— naturaliter aut artificialiter fiunt per modos this sort are o f tw o different kinds. For some o f them— nay, very many o f them—
prius tactos quamvis aliquando sint valde similia et propinqua eis que fiunt take place naturally or artificially by the methods mentioned earlier, although some­
a demone vel miraculose, sicut ea que faciunt magi aut que accidunt frene­ times they are very similar and close to those produced by a demon or miraculously.
ticis et amentibus. Unde et aliqui naturali infirmitate egroti dicuntur arrep- Examples [of this first group] are those which the magicians produce or which
15 ticii quasi essent a demone arrepti. E t Avicenna quandam egritudinem happen to people w ho are in a frenzy or out o f their senses. W hence some people
cerebri vocat demonium. Rursum in uno alio loco dicit sic: “ et quibusdam who are sick w ith a natural sickness are said to be “ seized” as if they were seized by
medicorum visum est quod melancolia contingat a demonio, sed nos non a demon. A n d Avicenna calls a certain sickness o f the mind “ demonium.” 2 A gain
curamus cum phisicam docemus, quoniam si contingat a demonio sufficit in another place he says: “ and it has seemed to certain physicians that melancholia
nobis ut convertat complexionem ad coieram nigram, et sit causa eius results from a demon, but w e do not care when w e teach medicine, for [even] i f it
20 propinqua colera nigra, scilicet melancolie. Deinde sit causa illius colere results from a demon it is sufficient for us that it converts the complexio to black
nigre aut demonium aut non demonium.” H oc Avicenna. bile, and so the proximate cause o f it, i.e. melancholia, is black bile. Thence let the
A lia autem sunt mirabilia ita dissimilia, ita remota ab omni via naturali, cause o f that black bile be either a demon or not a demon.” This is Avicenna.
quod nulla via rationabili possunt ad causam naturalem reduci, sicut appari­ But there are other marvelous things so dissimilar to, and removed from , any
tio demonum et operatio eorum coram tota una magna multitudine homi- natural w ay, that they cannot be reduced to a natural cause by any rational way.
25 num diversarum complexionum et bene compositorum in mente qui non Such is the appearance o f demons and their operations before a large number o f
erant perterriti, et maxime ubi ista fiunt ad simplex verbum aut preceptum people o f differing temperaments and sound in mind who were not terrified, and
unius probi viri prudentis et penitus indocti in illis artibus malignis et particularly where these things take place at the simple w ord or command o f a
absque usu alicuius radicum predictarum et sine nota aut suspicione alicuius w orthy man, prudent and uninstructed in those malign arts, without the use o f any
illusionis cuiuscunque; et sic de multis aliis coniecturis et de aliis mirabilibus o f the aforesaid roots and without a sign or suspicion o f any illusion. Thus it is
30 atque miraculis que constat facta fuisse per malos spiritus aut per bonos vel concerning the many other prophesyings and soothsayings, and other marvelous
and miraculous things, which clearly have been done by evil or good spirits or
I I .x x x v : B V L 14- 15 egroti... egritudinem om. [ S ] /
1 in quo est B V [ A ] om. [ F G ] est L [ C ] / arrepticii... demone om. [ F M P ]
determinatio B f A C G J cf. tab. cap. deter­ 15 quasi... arrepti om. L
minatio et declaratio L deceptio E decla­ 1 5 - 21 E t Avicenna om. [ G ]
I I .x x x v dered “ verbal tricks.”
ratio [ F ] 16 cerebri om. F {et tr. V p o s t vocat)
1 Perhaps verborum cautelis ought to be ren- 2 See the Commentary, II.xxxv, lines 15-21.
4 se multa B V [ A N S G ] tr. L [ F M P C ] 18 cum: dum L j phisicam: phisicam causam
5 que1: et V / se om. [ N ] se multa L [ S C ] F physicam [ S ] physicam tamen [ N ] / do­
6 ambagibus L [ A N F M P S C G ] ambiguis B ceamus L [ N C ] ? L sic B [ N ] fit text. A v i. tota una [ N C ]
abagibus V / cautelis: cautalis B cantilenis 19 sit [ A , ?S ] text. A v i. sic B L , ? V [ N F P C , 23 naturalem: rationabilem V 28 radicum.. .alicuius om. L
[M P ] mj 24 demonum om. L e t demonium Kad modum 29-30 coniecturis... facta om. L
11 ymmo om. L [ G ] 20 melancolie B V [ A N S ] om. [ G ] melanco­ [ N ] I tota una magna B V [ G J una tota 30 constat B [ A N S C J constant V [ F M P G ]
14 naturali om. [ S] naturaliter L [ N ] lia L [ F M P C ] I sit V [ A F M P S C ] sicut magna [ A ] una tota L una magna [ F M P S ]
 374 D e configurationibus qualitatum et m otuum Part II, Chapter xxxvi 375

alio modo miraculose. Propter quod nimis insipienter errant quidam simpli­
citer negantes huiusmodi spiritus esse et dicentes talia posse fieri per naturam:
sicut Alkindus qui talia facta miranda reducit ad radios rerum et Algazel ad
virtutem anime et potentiam ymaginationis. Nam si velimus iudicare recte,
35 multo incredibilius et a ratione remotius videtur ymaginationem anime
posse talia agere ubi ipsa non est quam demones vel spiritus esse qui presen-
tes faciant ista. Ille etiam error multis aliis rationibus evidenter reprimitur—
etiam a philosophis, sicut patet per Apuleium in libro de deo Socratis, per
Tullium , per Platonicos, et per alios multos. Sed quoniam hec questio
40 magis est extra propositum, ideo eam nunc dimitto.
miraculously in some other w ay.3 A ccordingly, certain people err with excessive
foolishness when they simply deny that spirits o f this sort exist and when they say
that such things can be produced naturally. A n example is A lkindi w ho reduces
such marvelous deeds to rays o f things ;4 another is Algazel w ho reduces them to
the force o f the soul and the pow er o f imagination.5 F or if we judge it correctly, it
seems much more incredible and remote from reason for the imagination o f the
soul to be able to act in a place where it is not than for demons or spirits to exist
and, being present, to produce these things. Further, that error is clearly refuted by
many other arguments— and also b y philosophers, as is obvious by Apuleius in his
book On the God o f Socrates,6 b y Cicero,7 by the Platonists,8and by many others. But
since this question is rather outside o f the subject at hand, I now set it aside.

[Il.xxxvi] Capitulum 36® de difformitate accidentium anime Il.xxxvi On the difformity o f accidents o f the soul

Accidentia anime intellective sunt indivisibilia extensive; propter quod
non reperitur in ipsis difformitas subiectiva nisi improprie, eo m odo quo
fuit dictum 310 capitulo prime partis. In accidentibus vero anime sensitive
5 invenitur difformitas subiectiva. Sed de ea dictum est in ultimis capitulis
prime partis. In utriusque autem potentie anime aliquibus accidentibus
invenitur difformitas successiva, cuius quidem difformitatis sive accidentis
tempus sive duratio est longitudo et eius intensio dicitur latitudo. E t de hac
difformitate nunc dicam.
10 Accidentium autem anime triplex est genus vel modus, videlicet appre­
hensio, appetitus, et passio. Possibile est igitur quod aliqua apprehensio vel
cogitatio aut ymaginatio duret per aliquam horam. Si igitur ipsa fuerit
continue equaliter intensa, tunc erit uniformis. Si autem continue intendatur
equaliter vel equaliter remittatur, ipsa erit uniformiter difformis. Si vero
i5 durante hora ipsa apprehensio inequaliter intendatur aut remittatur, erit
difformiter difformis; et consimiliter dicendum est de appetitu vel affec­
tione et ita de qualibet passione. In difformitate vero talium accidentium
Accidents o f the intellective soul are indivisible in extension. A ccordingly no
subjective difformity is found in them except improperly in the manner described
in the thirty-first chapter o f the first part. H ow ever, subjective difformity is found
in accidents o f the sensitive soul. But we spoke about this in the last chapters o f the
first part. Successive difformity is found in the accidents o f both powers o f the soul.
The time or duration o f this difformity or accident is its longitude and its intensity
is called latitude. I shall speak now o f this difformity.
There is a three-fold mode or genus o f accidents o f the soul: apprehension,
appetite, and passion. It is possible, therefore, for some apprehension, cognition,
or imagination to last through an hour. I f this is continually o f equal intensity,
then it w ill be uniform. But i f it is continually and equally increased in intensity or
equally decreased in intensity, then it w ill be uniformly difform. N o w i f during the
hour this apprehension is unequally increased or unequally decreased in intensity,
it w ill be difformly difform. A n d w e should speak in the same w ay concerning
appetite or affection, and thus o f any passion. In the category o f difformity o f such

33 radios eras. [ P ] radices V / Algazel
L [ N F M S G ] Agazel B V [ A P C ]
36 posse talia tr. V [ S ]
37-40 Ille — dimitto om. [ G ]
38 Apuleium V [ N F M S ] Appulleium B L [ A ]
Appuleium [ C ] puleium [ P ]
39 Tullium B [A N M P ] om. [G ]
V L [ F S C ] I per1 : et L et per [ N S J
3 Ibid., lines 22-31. might have believed that some o f the material
I L x x x v i: B V L given by Cicero in the D e natura deorum and the
4 Ibid., line 33.
3 improprie e o : de V D e divinatione could be considered as proving
5 Ibid., Il.xxviii, lines 16-18.
4 partis: partis huius V the existence of demons even if Cicero did not
6 D e deo Socratis, Chaps. V I -V I I (ed. o f P.
5 subiectiva om. V believe in their existence.
Thomas, 13-15).
13-14 uniform is...erit oot. [ F M P J 8 I do not know which Platonists Oresme
7 Oresme’s inclusion o f Cicero among the
13 continue2 om. L [ A C ] had in mind. Platonic views are recited in so
philosophers who support the existence of
Tulium 13-14 intendatur equaliter tr. L [ N C ] demons seems questionable. Perhaps he might many o f the works available to Oresme, as for
15 aut B [ F M S G ] vel L [ N C ] sive [ A ] have thought that the tone o f the Dream of example, those of Cicero, Apuleius, Macro­
16 et: et tunc V est [ SJ/ consimiliter:similiter Scipio was such as to make it likely that Cicero bius, Augustine, Pseudo-Dionysius, Witelo,
F s ic [ P ] believed in their existence. Or I suppose he and so on.
 376 377
D e configurationibus qualitatum et m otuum Part II, Chapter xxxvii

possunt assignari omnia genera et omnes species difformitatis que fuerunt
numerate et assignate capitulis 140et 1 50prime partis. Q ue quidem difformi-
20 tates accidentium anime variis figuris superficialibus assimilantur, et in
earum cogitationem per figurarum superficialium notitiam devenitur, eo
m odo quo dictum fuit de difformitatibus velocitatum capitulo 70 et de
quibusdam aliis successivis capitulo 130 huius partis. Rursum de pulchritu­
dine configurationum huiusmodi accidentium conformiter dicendum eis
25 que dicta sunt de pulchritudine configurationum velocitatum capitulo n °
huius partis, ita quod aliqua ymaginatio aut affectio configuratur secundum
successionem pulchre aut turpiter, bene vel male. Ideoque Petrus Apostolus
conversos ad bonum admonet, dicens, non sint “ configurati prioribus ig ­
norande vestre desideriis,” acsi diceret quod oportet affectiones eorum con-
30 figurari bene que prius erant male. H oc etiam potest applicari ad configura­
tionem subiective difformitatis horum accidentium, sicut dicebatur capitulo
340 prime partis.
accidents there can be designated all the genera and species o f difformity enumerat­
ed and designated in chapters fourteen and fifteen o f the first part. These difformi-
ties o f accidents o f the soul are assimilable to various surface figures and one can
gain understanding o f them by means o f a know ledge o f surface figures in the
manner described for difformities o f velocities in chapter seven, and for certain
other successive entities in chapter thirteen o f this part. A gain ,1 in regard to the
beauty o f the configurations o f accidents o f this sort, the same thing should be said as
was said concerning the beauty o f the configurations o f velocities in chapter eleven
o f this part, so that an imagination or affection is figured, in respect to succession,
either beautifully or in an u gly w ay, either w ell or badly. Therefore Peter the
Apostle admonishes those converted to the good way, saying [to them] that they
should “ be not conformed to the former desires o f your ignorance,” 2 as i f to say
that their affections which were form erly configured badly ought [now] to be con­
figured well. This also can be applied to the configuration o f the subjective difformi­
ty o f these accidents, as was said in chapter thirty-four o f the first part.

[ILxxxvii] Capitulum 37m de causis quorundam effectuum in ILxxxvii On the causes o f certain effects arising in the subject
subiecto proprio ex predictis itself, based on the prior statements

Apprehensio aut cogitatio seu ymaginatio corpus hominis apprehendentis Apprehension, cogitation, or imagination change the body o f the person w ho is
immutat, et potissime ratione appetitus concomitantis vel etiam passionis. apprehending, and particularly by reason o f accompanying desire or passion. For if
5 Nam si quis fortiter cogitet de vindicta cum affectione intensa, sanguis someone thinks strongly about revenge, and does so with intense excitement, his
ipsius com m ovetur et facies immutatur, et eodem modo de timore et gaudio blood is stirred and his face is changed. It is the same with respect to fear, joy, and
et aliis accidentibus anime. Homines etiam secundum varietatem istorum other accidents o f the soul. A lso, because o f the variety o f these accidents people
aliter et aliter operantur ad extra, et similiter bruta ut patet in genesi de o vi­ produce different effects externally. It is the same for dumb animals, as is clear in
bus Iacob[i]. E t ad istud propositum adducit Augustinus exemplum de came- Genesis concerning the sheep o f Jacob.1 A n d in support o f what has been proposed
[o leonta et probat istud et declarat multipliciter in libro de trinitate. E t simili­ Augustine adduces the example o f the chameleon and proves this, explaining it in
ter Avicenna 6° naturalium per multa experimenta declarat qualiter ymagina­ manifold ways in his b ook On the Trinity.2 A n d similarly Avicenna in his Sixth
tio immutat corpus ymaginantis in complexione et qualitatibus, sanitate et Book of Natural Things3 by many experiences makes clear h ow imagination alters
egritudine, et ita de aliis. Unde et de passione timoris narrat Solinus unum the body o f the person doing the imagining, both as to complexion and qualities,
health and sickness, and similarly in other respects. Whence Solinus narrates a
18 omnes om. L [ N C ]
sitis [ S G J
23-32 Rursum__ partis L [ N C S J om. I l.x x x v i I I.x x x v ii
29 desideriis [ S C G ] text. Vulg. om. L [ N J
B V [A F M P ] 1 Genesis 30:32-43, but particularly verses
30-32 H o c .. .partis om. [ G ] 1 The remainder o f this chapter, lines 23-32
2 3 - 26 Rursum.. .partis om. [ G ] (“ Rursum__ partis” ), ought perhaps to be 38-39.
3x horum L [ N C J huiusmodi [S J
24- 25 huiusmodi.. .configurationum [ S C J bracketed, since it appears only in manuscripts 2 See the Commentary, ILxxxvii, 9-10.
om. L [ N J 3 I b i d lines 10-13.
I L x x x v ii: B L LN SC.
24 dicendum [ C J ymaginandum [ S J 2 / E p ist. Peter 1:14.
2 ex predictis B [ V C G J om. L [ A F J
25 velocitatum L [ N C J eis que dicta sunt [ S J 3 apprehendens/.
27 vel L [ N C ] aut [ S J / Ideoque Petrus 5 cogitat L [ N J (et tr. N p o s t cameleonta) B[ VAFM PJ
L [ N C J Ideo sanctus Pau. [ S ] 8 et2 om. L [ N J 11 6 ° :in 6 ° L eodem [ C ] 13 Unde L [ N C G ] om. [ S ] / ct om. [ N G ]
28 bonum L [ N C J fidem [ S G J j sint ? L [ N C J
9 Augustinus: beatus Augustinus L [ N C J 13-16 U n d e.. .nostris L [ N C S G ] om.
 37» D e configurationibus qualitatum et m otuum Part II, Chapter xxxvii 379

effectum satis notabilem dicens quod “ Athis filius regis Sardis, mutus ad id
i5 usque temporis, in vocem erupit vi tim oris; exclamasse enim dicitur ‘parce
patri meo, Cyre, et hominem te vel casibus disce nostris.’ ”
Possibile est igitur ut non solum propter intensionem maiorem et
minorem ymaginationis vel affectionis varietur motus seu passio in corpore
sed etiam propter diversitatem figurationis predictorum accidentium anime
20 in difformitate. V erbi gratia, si quis cum affectione ymaginetur aut cogitet
de vindicta et istius cogitationis vel ymaginationis difformitas fuerit debite
figurata, tunc ipse actus imparatos exercebit debite et erit in prosecutione
seu executione intentionis sue quasi bene fortunatus. Si vero ymaginatio sive
affectio indebite figuretur, ipse operabitur indebite, quamvis ymaginatio vel
25 affectio fuerit sufficienter intensa. E t conformiter dicendum est de difformi­
tate speciei amoris vel odii, et sic de aliis accidentibus anime. N am de m o­
tibus anime quantum ad hoc dicendum est conformiter ad ea que de moti­
bus corporis dicta fuerunt capitulo io° huius et capitulo i i ° de pulchritu­
dine figurationis velocitatum.
30 Unde contingit quod unus proiciens telum vel lanceam si debite vibra­
verit eam, directius et fortius percutiet quam unus alter fortior qui iaceret
eam indebite cum fortiori conatu, et sunt aliqui apti naturaliter ad debite
proiciendum et alii sunt quibus hoc natura negavit. Talis autem diversitas
non venit ex intensione velocitatis sed ex eius varia figuratione. E t ita
35 ymaginandum est de motibus anime. E t forsan ista est causa eius, quod
communiter accidit, scilicet quod unus faciliter consequitur illud quod
intendit, affectat aut sperat; alius autem quamvis intensius speret et dili­
gentius agat nunquam tamen aut vix poterit propositum adipisci. Propter
quod non inconvenienter potest dici quod bona et debita configuratio
40 difformitatis talium accidentium anime ad quam aliquis naturaliter inclina­
tur est hominis sic inclinati bona fortuna et contrarium esset mala fortuna.
E t sicut dictum fuit 220 prime partis huius aliquotiens futuram infelicita­
tem precedunt quidam animi motus quorum unus est ardor nimius preno-
scendi futura. Quemadmodum enim pruritus antecedit scabiem ita superstitio
14 Sardis L [ N C G ] om. [ S ]
23-24 ymaginatio sive affectio: affectio sive
14-15 ad id usque [ C G J text. Sol. ad illud us­
ymaginatio L ymaginatio seu cognitio [ S ]
que [ S J tunc L [ N ] 24 figuratur L [ N ]
16 Cyre L [ N ] text. Sol. cire /A] care [ G ] cyro
28 huius: huius partis L [ N ] j e t L [ A N F M P ]
[C]
et in B [ V S C G ]
17 igitur ut B f S J igitur L [ N F M P ] ergo ut
30-31 vibraverit B L [ V N S G ] pto icia t [ F M P ]
[ V A C G ] I propter: per L [ N M J j et
31 eam: eam et B
B [ F M P S G ] vel L [ V N C ] aut [ A ]
33 h o c :h e c L
20 aut B [ V A N S C G ] om. [ F M P J vel L 35 ista: illud L
{et etiam om. [ F M P ] ymaginetur) 39 convenienter L
22 persecutione L
41 et...fortuna om. L [ C J /fortuna2: fortuna
23 exsecutione [ V N P ] huius B
remarkable enough effect o f the passion o f fear, saying “ Athis, the son o f the king
o f Sardis, dumb until that time, burst forth into speech under the force o f fear;
for it is said that he exclaimed: ‘ Spare my father, Cyrus, and recognize by our
misfortunes that you too are a man.’ ” 4
Therefore, it is possible that movement or passion in the body is varied not only
because o f greater and lesser intensity o f imagination or affection but also because
o f a diversity as to difformity in the figuration o f the aforesaid accidents o f the
soul. For example, if someone imagines [something] w ith affection or thinks about
revenge, and the difformity o f this cogitation or imagination is duly figured, then
the act w ill duly carry out the commands and he w ill be as one particularly fortu­
nate in carrying out or executing his intention. But i f the imagination or affection is
not duly figured, then the act will not be duly performed even though the imagi­
nation or affection is sufficiently intense. A n d in the same way one ought to speak o f
a species o f love or hate and similarly o f other accidents o f the soul. For in this
matter one ought to speak o f motions o f the soul in the same way as we spoke o f
motions o f the body in chapter ten o f this [part] and o f the beauty o f the figuration
o f velocities in chapter eleven.
Whence it happens that when one person w ho is hurling a javelin or spear
shakes it properly, he w ill fling it more directly and further than another w ho is
stronger [but] throws it im properly w ith greater force. A nd there are some people
w ho are naturally adept at hurling things properly and others to whom nature has
denied this. Such diversity does not come from increasing the intensity o f the veloc­
ity, but rather from its varying figuration. A n d one ought to think in this w ay o f
motions o f the soul. A nd perhaps this is the cause o f a common occurrence: namely,
that one person easily carries out his intention, desire, or hope, while another per­
son who hopes for something more intensely and acts w ith greater zeal, yet never,
or scarcely ever, is able to achieve his goal. A ccordingly it can be said not unfitting­
ly that a good and due configuration o f the difformity o f such accidents o f the soul,
a configuration to which someone is naturally inclined, is the good fortune o f the
man so inclined. A n d the contrary w ould be [his] bad fortune.
A nd, as was said in chapter twenty-two o f the first part o f this w ork, sometimes
certain movements o f the mind precede future unhappiness. One o f these is ex­
cessive zeal in foreknow ing the future. For just as an itching precedes the scab, so
te. However, Mommsen notes A t i s and A thy s
4 Collectanea rerum memorabilium, I, 112 (ed.
as variant readings and also that a number o f
of Mommsen, 28, lines 7-10). Oresme’s quota­
manuscripts omit esse. C f. Herodotus, I. 85.4,
tion agrees with Mommsen’s text except for
I. 86.6
the latter’ s spelling of A ty s, its omission of
Sardis after regis, and its addition o f esse after
42 22° B L [ V C ] 22° capitulo [ F M P S ] capi- 43 quidam o m .L
tulo 22° [ N G ] I huius om. L [ N ] / futuram 4 4 antecedit B [ V A F M P ] precedit L [ N , mg.
o m .L C ] intendit[ S G ]
 380 D e configurationibus qualitatum et m otuum 381
Part II, Chapter xxxviii

45 aut prevenit aut concomitatur miseriam. Unde Seneca hoc inquit: “ humana
conditio pessimum habet ut quos fortuna miseros fecit etiam superstitiosos
facit.” H ec etiam inquisitio fati non solum est signum futuri infortunii sed
etiam causa, quoniam in malos eventus eo ipso inciditur quod mens ad agen­
da inconvenienti difformitate movetur, ut in presenti capitulo iam dictum
50 est. Cum autem superstitio prava premittitur, ex hoc animus tanquam quo­
dam offendiculo leditur cespitat, lubricat, exorbitat, et malis auspiciis
exinde quasi claudicando procedit difformitate peiore, sicut est de illis quibus
imprecatur psalmista dicens, “ Fiat via illorum tenebre et lubricum .” Illos
igitur voluntaria superstitio detrudit in malum, quos ad hoc inclinavit natura.
55 E t plus nocet spes fatua aut timor ex divinatoris responso conceptus quam
iuvet cautela que talibus omissis semper est diligentius adhibenda. Sic igi­
tur et lege nature et suis demeritis precipitantur a D eo, qui contra eius monita
sortilegiis et divinationibus invituntur. Unde in deuteronomio precipit D o ­
minus suo populo dicens, “ cave ne [ ...] inveniatur in te [ ...] qui ariolos
60 sciscitetur, et observet sompnia atque auguria, ne sic sit maleficus neque in­
cantator neque phytones (/ pythones) consulat nec divinos,” et cetera, et
sequitur: “ omnia enim hec abhominabitur Dominus, et propter istiusmodi
scelera delebit eos,” scilicet populos qui tales admittunt.
superstition either precedes or accompanies misery. Whence Seneca says th is: “ The
worst characteristic o f the human state is that those whom fortune has made poor
it also makes superstitious.” 5 Further, this searching after fate is not only a sign
o f future misfortune but is also its cause, since one is catapulted into evil even­
tualities by the very fact that the mind is m oved to act w ith unfitting difformity, as
has already been said in the present chapter. W hen, m oreover, deformed super­
stition is assumed, accordingly the mind, as b y an obstacle, is dam aged; it stumbles,
becomes slippery, and takes a devious path; and, as the result o f the evil auspices,
it thence proceeds, as i f lame, w ith a worse deformity. This is the case o f those
whom the Psalmist curses when he says: “ Let their w ay become dark and slippery.” 6
Freely adopted superstition pushes dow n into evil those, therefore, w hom nature
lias so inclined. A n d the foolish hope or fear born from the response o f the divi­
nator produces a harmful effect that is greater than [the] helpful effect o f the pre­
caution which must always be more carefully em ployed after such things have been
given up. Those, therefore, w ho are attracted to witchcraft and divination in the
face o f His warnings are cast dow n b y G o d as the result o f the law o f nature and
their ow n faults. Therefore, in Deuteronomy the L ord warns his people, saying:
“ beware lest...th ere be found among y o u ...a n yo n e that consulteth soothsayers,
o r observeth dreams and omens, neither let there be any wi2ard, nor charmer, nor
anyone that consulteth pythonic spirits, or fortune tellers,” etc., and further, “ For
the L ord abhorreth all these things, and for these abominations he w ill destroy
them,” i.e., the people w ho commit such acts.7

[ILxxxviii] Capitulum 38111 de causis quorundam effectuum in ILxxxviii On the causes o f certain effects arising in an alien
corpore alieno secundum predicta body, based on the prior statements

Anim a quandoque immutat subiectum proprium, ut dictum est in capitulo Sometimes the soul alters its ow n subject, as has been said in the preceding
precedenti. Potest etiam duobus modis esse causa transmutationis corporis chapter. But also it can be the cause o f the transmutation o f an alien body in tw o
5 alieni: uno m odo localiter per applicationem membrorum sicut m ovendo w ays: (1) In one w ay, locally, by the application o f members, as by m oving some-
45 hoc: h ecA legi et [ N J / monita B [ V A C G J mandata
46 etiam: hec etiam L hec et [ N J (et habet N L [ N J (et alii M S S habent ambiguas abbrevia­
etiam post superstitiosos) tions)
47-50 H e c ...e s to m .[ G ] 59 suo om. L
5 The work quoted is Annaeus Seneca, Declamationes. There was complete confusion
47 Hec om. L [ N J / etiam B L [ A C ] om. [ V ] 60 et observet L text. Vulg. ut observat B ut
Oratorum et rhetorum sententiae, divisiones, colores, o f the two Senecas in the Middle Ages.
autem [ F M P S ] et [ N J / fati om. L [ N C J observet [ V N S C G ] ut servet [ A J
VIII, Contr. 1 (ed. o f A . Kiessling [Leipzig, 6 Psalms 34:6.
50-51 e x ... auspiciis: tunc animus quasi cespi- 60-63 n e__ admittunt om. [ G ]
1872], 381, lines 4-7). Oresme also quotes this 7 Deuteronomy 18:9-11, 12. The Vulgate
rando labitur et [ F M P ] 60 sic L text. Vulg. om. B [ V C A J
passage in his Livre de divinacions, Chap. 10 (ed. omits sic and has pythones (although phytones is
51 exorbitat om. [ S G ] et exorbitat L 61 phytones B [ V N J om. [ A J phitones L
o f Coopland, 82, 178) and in his Tractatus con­ a common variant). It also has abominatur (but
52-53 procedit... psalmista om. [ A ] pythones text. Vulg.
tra judiciarios astronomos, Chap. 6 (ed. of Coop- again abhominatur is listed as a variant).
53 imprecatur: ingratatur L [ N J / Fiat via 63 scilicet L [ V N F M P J videlicet B [ A S C J
B [ A S G J fiant [ N J fiant vie L [ V C ] land, 136); and in the latter under the title
5 5 timoris L [ N J I L x x x v iii: B L
57 lege B [ V A S C G J legi L legis [ F M , ?PJ z secundum predicta om. L 5-6 movendo aliquid: movet aliquis [ F M P J
5 sicut: sicut per predicta L [ N J
 382 D e configurationibus qualitatum et m otuum 383
Part II, Chapter xxxviii
aliquid cum manu, alio m odo sine tali exteriori applicatione sed quadam thing with the hand. (2) In the other way, w ithout any such exterior application,
actione latenti. E t isto modo agit anima per ymaginationem seu cogita­ but [rather] by a certain latent action. A nd it is in this w ay that the soul sometimes
tionem fortem quandoque in corpore alieno, sicut contingit in fascinatione. acts on an alien body by means o f a forceful thought or imagination, as happens in
Unde Vergilius in bucolicis: “ Nescio quis teneros visu (/ oculus) michi the case o f bewitchment. W hence V irgil says in the Bucolics'.1 “ Some eye is casting
io fascinat agnos.” E t super illo verbo epistole ad Galatas ubi dicitur “ O a spell over m y tender lambs.” A n d on that w ord as used in the Epistle to the Gala­
insensati Galate, quis vos fascinavit” et cetera dicit glosa, “ fascinus vel tians where it said2 “ O senseless Galatians, w ho hath bewitched thee, etc.,” the
fascinatio est quid vulgo nocet infantibus; dicuntur etiam quorundam [Ordinary\ Gloss says: “ Bewitching or bewitchment commonly is that w hich is
oculi visu virentes et eorum actus fascinatio dicitur.” Rursum ibidem: harmful to infants; for the eyes o f certain people are said to be potent in sight and
“ Invidus enim non solum sibi nocet cum aliena felicitate tabescit sed their action is called bewitchment.” 3 Again, in the same place [it says]: “ For a per­
15 etiam hiis in quibus aliqua bona esse incipiunt. Unde in libro qui sapientia son who is envious not only hurts him self when he languishes [enviously] in the
Salomonis inscribitur, ‘fascinatio malignitatis obscurat bona,’ ” sic igitur face o f alien happiness but he also harms those in whom some good things have
habetur in glosa illa. Talis autem actio anime potest dupliciter ymaginari begun to exist. W hence in the book which is entitled the Wisdom of Solomon [one
fieri: uno m odo solo imperio anime, cui quidem anime si fuerit nobilis yle reads]: “ the bewitching o f envy4 obscureth good things” ; end o f quote from that
seu materia mundi obedit absque alia intermedia alteratione. E t per istum Gloss. M oreover, such action o f the soul can be imagined as taking place in tw o
20 m odum voluerunt Avicenna 6° naturalium et A lgazel 50 phisice sue fascina­ ways: [1] in one w ay by the command o f the soul alone; and, if the soul is noble,
tiones fieri; uterque enim eorum hoc nititur declarare diffuse. D icunt etiam j/<?, or the matter o f the w orld, obeys it [immediately] without another, intermediate
alia mirabilia per hoc fieri posse, sicut transmutationes elementorum, pluvias, alteration. A n d it is by this method that Avicenna in his Sixth Book of Natural
sterilitates, mortalitates, et similia, quod si ita esset adhuc illud posset reduci Things5 and A lgazel in the fifth o f his Physics6 held that bewitchments take place;
ad intentionem ymaginationis cum quadam figuratione eiusdem ad hoc spe- for each o f them strives to show this copiously. Th ey also say that other marvelous
25 cialiter requisita. things can take place by this method, e.g., the transmutations o f elements, rains,
Sed hoc fieri ab anima per solam cogitationem est nimis absurdum et cases o f sterility, deaths, and the lik e ; now , supposing this to be so, one could still
irrationabile, sicut fuit tactum 350 huius; est etiam remotum a philosophia reduce such action to the intention o f the imagination combined with a certain
et fidei nostre dissonum. Propter quod de hoc est articulus Parisius condemp- figuration o f it specially requisite for this kind o f action.
natus. Ideo est alter modus rationabilior ut dicatur quod ymaginatio vel But that such action arises from the soul by thought alone is excessively absurd
30 affectio potest tantum intendi et eius difformitas taliter figurari quod ipsa agit and irrational, as was touched upon in the thirty-fifth chapter o f this part. Further­
et immutat notabiliter corpus vel aliquod membrum hominis sic ymagi- more, it is far rem oved from philosophy and out o f harmony with our faith. A c ­
nantis, videlicet ad sanitatem vel egritudinem aut ad aliquam aliam disposi- cordingly an article at Paris has condemned this.7 Therefore, there is [2] a second,
more rational w ay as fo llo w s: It is said that imagination or affection can be so in­
6 cum: in L [ N ]
solummodo B [ A , ?SJ creased intensively and its difformity figured in such a w ay that it acts to change
7 latente L
15 de sapientia scr. mg. A sapientie 40
9 quis B [ V F M P C ] text. Verg. quid significantly the body or some member o f the person who is so imagining :i.e. to ­
16 obscurat: obstatL [ F M P ]
L [ A N S G ] j visu michi: oculus mihi text. wards health or sickness, or towards some other special disposition, as is clear by
18 nobilis [ V A N F M C S G ] mobilis B nota­
Verg. {et scr. mg. L Textus habet oculis bilis L [ P ]
michi fascinat agnos et mg. C de visu scr. vel 20 Algazel L [ V N M G ] Agazel B [ A S C P F ] / Wisdom 4:12, with the Glossa accepting maligni­
I I .x x x v iii
oculo) tatis instead o f nugacitatis.
50: 20L 1 Eclogae, III, 103. Virgil’s text has oculus for
10 illo [ P F C ] isto L [ N J i° B f V M J illud 21 enim om. L [ S C ] {et tr. P post eorum) vero 4 Note that Oresme used the same text o f
visu.
[ S G ] {et om. [ S G ] verbo) / de Galatas scr. [A ] Wisdom 4:12 as the Glossa or perhaps took this
2 E p istle to the Galatians 3:1.
mg. [ A ] ad galatas ^0 / post galatas add. [ G ] 23 istud L [ C ] 3 B iblia sacra cum glossis etc., Vol. 6 (Lyons, reference from the Glossa since he too accepts
30 / galatos L malignitatis (“evil” or “ envy” ) instead o f the
26 per... cogitationem om. L 1545), 82r. The phrase vel fascinatio appears to
11 gallati L [ N ] galathe [ S G ] / et cetera om. 28 Parisius: parysiensL [ N ] have been added by Oresme. The second preferred nugacitatis (“ vanity” ).
[ F M ] veritati vero {om. [ C ] ) non obedire 5 See the Commentary, II.xxxviii, lines 19-
28-29 condempnatus L [ N F M P S ] excom- quotation is somewhat different in the Glossa
L [N C ] 21.
municatus B [ A V C G ] ordinaria'. “ Invidus enim non modo sibi nocet,
1 1 - 1 2 vel fascinatio om. Glos, ordin. sed et his in quibus aliqua bona esse incipiunt; ^ Ibid.
3o agit et B [ A F M P S G ] etiam L [ N ] {et tr. N
13 ibidem: ibidem dicitur [ V M P J unde Salomon: Fascinatio malignitatis ob­ 7 Ibid., lines 28-29.
ante ipsa) agit vel [ V ] & t [ C ]
14 solum L [ N F M P C G ] modo Glos, ordin. 31 immutat: immutet L mutat [ C ] scurat bona.” The last is a quotation from
 3 84 D e configurationibus qualitatum e t m otuum Part II, Chapter xxxviii 385

tionem specialem, sicut patet per iam dicta in capitulo precedent!. Corpus
autem vel membrum hominis sic alteratum aliquando potest alterare medium
35 et corpus sibi propinquum secundum distantiam certam, et maxime si illud
corpus fuerit dispositum ad faciliter recipiendum talem alterationem vel im­
pressionem, eo modo quo oculus mulieris menstruose inficit aerem et medi­
ante aere inficit speculum mundum. E t hec alteratio principaliter fit ubi
diriguntur radii visuales, sicut dicitur de basilisco quod aspectu suo interficit
40 hominem, oculi namque sunt quasi quedam foramina capitis et sunt com ­
plexionis rare et coniuncti sive connexi organis interiorum sensuum; ideo
notabilius immutantur propter accidentia anime et in eis apparent maxime sig­
na cogitationum vel affectionum. Unde alibi dicitur: “ Si oculus tuus fuerit
simplex, totum corpus tuum lucidum erit. Si autem oculus tuus fuerit ne-
45 quam, totum corpus tuum tenebrosum erit.”
Dicendum est ergo quod per modum nunc tactum agit ymaginatio in
corpus alienum et hoc modo possibile est fascinationem naturaliter fieri,
ut si fuerit aliqua vetula que ex malitia complexionis cerebri invideat
pulchritudinem vel sit inclinata ad affectandum compressionem et corrup-
50 tionem tenerrime carnis unius infantis, tunc possibile est quod circa infantem
presentem ita fortiter ymaginetur et affectionem suam tali difformitate figuret
absque aliqua arte quod oculi proprii illius vetule ex hoc inficientur et con­
trahent quandam maleficam qualitatem per quam inficietur infantulus ad
quem ipsa vetula diriget visum et qui infans est huiusmodi peregrine impres-
55 sionis faciliter susceptivus. Unde in quadem postilla super epistolam ad
Galatas iam allegatam scribitur sic: “ Anim a enim vehementer affecta immu­
tat oculum et oculus immutatus immutat aerem; aer autem immutat carnem
teneram et ledit parvulos ut cibum evom ant,” hoc ibi. Ideoque ex illa
immutatione seu malifica qualitate accidit aliquando talibus vetulis quod
6o in singulis oculis duplices habent pupillas, sicut fuit allegatum 28° huius
N on est ergo ymaginandum quod hec faciat ymaginatio sola, nec quod
tantam habeat potentiam ut aliqui putant. Ipsa etiam raro operatur ad
extra m odo predicto et remisse et cum difficultate et in presentia et ad
what has just been said in the preceding chapter. Then the body or member o f the
person so altered sometimes can alter the medium and a body near to it at a certain
distance, and most o f all if that body is disposed to receive easily such an alteration
or impression, [e.g.] in the way that the eye o f a menstruating woman infects the
air and by means o f the air infects a clean mirror.8 A nd this kind o f alteration
principally arises where visual rays are directed [at someone]. So it is said concern­
ing the basilisk that by his sight he kills a person.0 For eyes, being o f rare
complexion, are like certain holes in the head, and are joined or connected to the
organs o f the interior senses. Therefore, they are notably altered as the result o f
accidents o f the soul; and most o f all the signs o f thoughts and affections appear in
them [the eyes]. W hence it is said elsewhere: “ I f thy eye be simple, thy w hole body
will be lightsome. But if thy eye be evil, thy w hole body w ill be darksome.” 10
One ought to say, therefore, that by means o f this method now treated the
imagination acts on an alien body, and by this method it is possible that bewitch­
ment takes place naturally, so that if there is some old woman w ho, as the result o f
the evilness o f the complexion o f her brain, is envious o f beauty or is inclined to
shrivel and corrupt the very tender flesh o f an infant, then it is possible for her in
regard to an infant w ho is present to imagine w ith such strength and to shape her
affection w ith such difformity that her ow n eyes are accordingly infected w ithout
[the use of] some [magical] art and they contract a certain maleficent quality by
which an infection results in the small infant at whom this old woman directs her
gaze, the infant being one w ho is easily susceptible to a foreign impression o f this
sort. W hence in a certain postil on the Epistle to the Galatians already cited it is
written th us: “ For a soul strongly affected alters the eye and the eye having been
altered alters the a ir; the air m oreover alters tender flesh and harms small children
so that they vom it up their food.” 11 Therefore, from this change or maleficent
quality it sometimes happens to such old wom en that they have double pupils in
single eyes as was alleged in the twenty-eighth chapter o f this part.12Therefore, one
ought not to think, as some people do, that this imagination alone does these
things, nor that it has such a power. Further, this pow er rarely operates externally
in the aforesaid way, [and i f it does, it does so] w eakly and w ith difficulty, and in

35 istud L.
39 diriguntur tr. L [ N C G ] post visuales / in­
terficit B [ V A M P C ] inficit L [ N F S G j
40 quasi om. L [ C ]
41 sive: seu L [ N J vel [S J
43 post dicitur add. G Math. 6°
44 totum om. L / autem om. L [ N P ]
45 totum om. L [ N ]
47 naturaliter : nunc L [ C ] notabiliter [ S ]
52 ipsius L [ F M P ]
53 quandam L [ A N F M S P G ] om. C tempo-
ratam ? [ V ] tanquam ? [ B ] / inficiet L [ N J /
infantulus: infantulum L [ N J masculus [ P J
54 huiusmodi [ A N M P G , ? S ]h m u s
B L [ V F C ] / peregrine om. L [ C ]
56 gallatos L
57 zu tem L [ V A N S C G ] om. B [ F M P ]
58-60 u t... huius om. [ G ]
58 hoc ibi om. [ N J , sed[ N ] add. Melius est sic
dicere quam demonibus attribuere. Sed
quero quomodo scitur quod vetula hoc
facit; si dicitur quod sic pluries est exper­
tum, ego nego etiam ista simul contingere
possunt, scilicet presentia vetule et in-
8 Ibid., I.xxxiv, lines 16-19.
9 Ibid., II.xxxviii, lines 39-40.
10 Matthew 6:22-23.
11 I have not found this postilla on the
Epistle to the Galatians 3:1. It does not appear
firmitas pueri./ hoc: hec [ ? M P C S ] j ibi:
ille[ V ]
59 seu: et L [ N C ] sive [ A ]
60 duplicem [ F M P ] / pupillam [ F M P ] / 28°
capitulo B
to be among the postillae o f Nicolaus de Lyra,
at least in the edition available to me.
12 See the Commentary, Il.xxviii, lines 19-
21. See also ibid., II.xxxviii, line 58.
61 hec: hoc [ V S , ? N , ? G ]
63 remisse B [ A S ] remisso L [ V F M P G ] re-
moto [ N ] / et2 om. L [ N ] / difficultate et in
om. [ C ] / et3 om. [ V A C ]
 386 D e configurationibus qualitatum et m otuum Part II, Chapter xxxix 387

certam distantiam et non nisi in corpore multum disposito et apto ad sus- the presence [of many people], [operating] for a short distance and only on a body
65 cipiendum huiusmodi actionem. which is very disposed and apt for receiving an action o f this sort.

[Il.xxxix] Capitulum 39111 de difformitate penarum II .xxxix On the difformity of pains

D e actionibus anime sufficiant que dicta sunt. Restat igitur de passionibus
eius breviter et exemplariter transcurrere. Sunt autem quatuor secundum
Tullium ut recitat Augustinus: scilicet, timor, spes, dolor, et gaudium, quas,
ut idem Augustinus ait, Vergilius pulchra brevitate notavit, dicens, “ Hinc
metuunt, cupiuntque dolent gaudentque,” et habetur Eneydos 6°. Sed quo­
niam timor est de dolore— ymmo est quidam dolor ut dicit Aristoteles— et
spes est de gaudio, ideo dicam nunc solum de dolore seu pena et de gau d io;
de aliis vero poterit quisque conformiter ymaginari.
Suppono igitur penam seu dolorem esse quandam anime qualitatem que
tempore extenditur et gradualiter intenditur. Possibile est igitur ut sint due
tales qualitates simpliciter equales et tamen una erit fugibilior et peior quam
alia, quod potest dupliciter contingere: uno modo propter inequalitatem
intensionum, alio modo propter diversitatem configurationis difformitatis
earum. Exemplum de prim o: Sint A et B due pene et A sit duplo magis
intensa quam B et duplo minus extensa; tunc erunt simpliciter equales, ut
satis clarum est et patebit ex tertia parte tractatus istius, et tamen penay 4
est peior et lugibilior quam B pena. Tollerabilius enim est esse in pena re­
missa per duos dies quam in pena multum intensa per unum diem. Iste vero
due penes equales et uniformes ad invicem comparate diversimode figurantur
secundum ea que dicta fuerunt capitulo 70 prime partis; ita quod si A pena
assimiletur quadrato, tunc B pena assimilabitur quadrangulo altera parte
longiori cuius longius latus denotabit extensionem, et erunt equales huius­
modi quadrangulus et quadratum.
D e secundo autem, videlicet de diversitate difformitatis, dico quod
possibile est duas penas esse, ut puta C et D , que sunt equales simpliciter et
E nough has been said o f actions o f the soul. It remains, therefore, to treat brief­
ly, and with examples, o f passions o f the soul. A ccording to Cicero,1 as Augustine
recounts, such passions are four in number: fear, hope, sorrow, and joy, which,
as the same Augustine says,2 V irgil has noted with beautiful brevity when he
says: “ Hence they fear, they desire, they grieve, and they enjoy,” and this is had in
the sixth book o f the Aeneid. But since fear arises from pain— in fact it is a certain
kind o f pain, as Aristotle says3— and hope arises from joy, therefore I shall now
speak only o f pleasure and pain or sorrow. Anyone can conceive o f the other
[passions] in a conformable way.
I suppose, therefore, that pain or sorrow is a certain quality o f the soul which is
extended in time and is intensifiable by degrees. Hence it is possible for tw o such
qualities to be simply equal and yet for one more to be shunned and worse than
another. This can happen in tw o w ay s: in one way as the result o f an inequality in
intensity, and in the other way as the result o f a diversity in the configuration o f
their difformity. A s an example o f the first, let A and B be tw o pains, with A being
twice as intensive as B and half as extensive. Then they w ill be equal simply, as is
clear enough and obvious from the third part o f this tract, although pain A is
worse than, or is more to be shunned than, pain B. For it is more tolerable to be in
less pain for tw o days than in great pain for one day. But these tw o equal and uni­
form pains when mutually compared are differently figured, follow ing the state­
ments o f chapter seven o f the first part; so that if pain A is assimilated to a square,
then pain B will be assimilated to a rectangle whose longer side w ill denote the
extension, and the rectangle and square will be equal.
In regard to the second way, i.e. to the diversity o f difformity, I say that it is
possible for there to be tw o pains, namely C and D , which are simply equal and

I l.x x x ix : B L 8 ideo... gaudio om. L I I .x x x ix 733-

1 penarum: potentiarum [ V ]
4 Tullium B [ A N F M P ] om. [ G ] Tulium
L [ V S C ] / scilicet om. L [ N J
5 Vergilius. . .dicens: conuntiat Vergilius L
6 cupiuntque L [ A N ] et text. Verg. etA u g . cu­
piunt B [ V F M P C S G ] I dolent [ A N ] et
text. Verg. et A ug . dolentque
B L [ V F M P C S G ] I eneydis B
7-8 ym m o.. .dolore om. [ S ]
7 est2 om. B [ A V ]
9 de: et de L [ A ] quia de [ N ] / vero om. 1 Augustine, D e civitate D ei, X IV , 8 (ed. o f 3 Nicomachean Ethics, Bk. II, Chap. 5, 1105b
B [ N G ] quoque [ S ] B. Dombart, Vol. 2, 16, lines 29-30), referring 19-23; 1106b 18-20. Oresme comments on
12 simpliciter equales tr. F / erit: esset L sit to Cicero’s Tusculan Disputations, III, Chaps. the first o f these passages in his L e Livre de
[S] 10-11, and particularly Chap. 11, Sect. 24. ethiques d ’A ristote (ed. of Alenut, 157), noting
16 erunt simpliciter tr. B 2 Augustine, ibid. (ed. o f Dombart, 19, line again that Virgil has mentioned the four prin­
17 et1: ut L et etiam [ M P ] / ex: in L [ A N C ] 3), quoting directly from the Aeneid, VI, line cipal passions.
19 duas B [ V S ] (sed habet [ S] horas pro dies) /
diem: diem et cetera L [ N ]
21 prime partis [ A F M P S C G ] tr. L B [ V ] B [ F M P ] diversitate difformitatumL [ N ] / 26 suntL [ V N M S C ] sint B [ A F P G ]
25 diversitate difformitatis [V ASCG ] tr dico quod om. L [ N C ]
 388 D e configurationibus qualitatum e t m otuum Part II, Chapter xl 389

equaliter extense, et per consequens erunt equales in intensione equivalen-
ter. Si igitur C pena secundum eius difformitatem fuerit pulchre et quodam­
m odo armonice figurata vel saltem minus turpiter iuxta prius dicta 2 5°et
3o 26° capitulis prime partis et D pena turpiter et inarmonice figuretur, tunc C
pena erit inde tollerabilior et minus fugibilis et econtrario D pena erit ex
hoc fugibilior et minus tollerabilis, et quanto figuratio difformitatis fuerit
turpior tanto pena ceteris paribus erit peior.
E x hiis patet quod si sint due pene sensus eterne, quamvis propter in-
35 finitatem neutra sit altera simpliciter maior, tamen ea que est intensior est
fugibilior. Posito etiam quod sint secundum intensionem equales, ac tamen
propter differentem configurationem nunc dictam altera earum poterit esse
peior; ita quod duabus penis quarum neutra excedit alteram in intensione
nec etiam extensive poterunt due anime inequaliter cruciari. E t forsan ita
40 est in inferno ubi pene non sunt simpliciter uniformes sed fit variatio
quedam; quam notavit scriptura ubi de dampnato dicitur quod “ ad nimium
calorem transeat ab aquis nivium .” Quelibet igitur pena infernalis difformis
est difformitate difformi et secundum magis et minus.
equal in extension, and consequently they w ill be equivalent in intensity. Hence if
pain C is, in respect to difformity, figured beautifully and in a certain w ay harmo­
niously, or at least in a less ugly w ay (follow ing the statements in the twenty-fifth
and twenty-sixth chapters o f the first part), and pain D is figured in an ugly and
unharmonious way, then C w ill be more tolerable and is less to be shunned, and
pain D contrariwise is accordingly more to be shunned and is less tolerable. A nd
by the amount that the figuration o f difformity is uglier, so the pain w ill be worse,
other things being equal.
From such considerations it is obvious that, if there are tw o pains sensed for an
eternity, although neither is simply greater than the other because o f their infinite
extension, still the one that is more intense w ill be the one to be more shunned.
Also, if it has been posited that they are equivalent in intensity, still because o f the
difference in configuration just mentioned one can be worse than the other, so that
tw o souls can be unequally afflicted by tw o pains, neither o f which exceeds the
other in intensity or in extension. A nd perhaps it is thus in hell where pains are not
simply uniform but where a certain variation [in pain] arises, a variation noted in the
Scriptures where it is said concerning one damned that he “ passes from the snow
waters to excessive heat.” 4 Therefore any infernal pain is difform w ithadifform
difformity and [varies] according to more and less.

[II.xl] Capitulum 40111 de difformitate gaudiorum II.xl On the difformity o f joys

D e gaudio seu delectatione quam suppono esse qualitatem quandam
extensam duratione et intensam in gradu conformiter dicendum. Nam si
sint due delectationes sive letitie simpliciter coequales et una earum sit
5 magis intensa quam altera et proportionaliter minus extensa, illa que erit in­
tensior erit eligibilior per contrarium illius quod dictum est de dolore in
capitulo precedente. E t ista est intentio Aristotelis 90 ethicorum dicentis
sic: “ Paucum enim tempus delectari valde magis eliget utique quis quam
multum quiete, id est, remisse, et unam actionem bonam et magnam quam
One ought to speak in the same way concerning a joy or a pleasure, which I
suppose to be a certain quality extended in time and intended in degree. For if
there are tw o pleasures or delights which are simply coequal and one o f these is
more intensive than the other and proportionally less extended, the one that is
more intense is the one that is preferable by the contrary o f that which has been
said concerning pain in the preceding chapter. This is the meaning o f Aristotle in
the ninth b ook o f the Ethics when he says:1 “ For he w ould prefer a brief time o f
great enjoyment to a longer period o f lesser joy, one great and good action to many

27 equaliter extense tr. L [ N ] dicitur om. [ F A I C J dicit L (et tr. L post

28-29 quodammodo armonice tr. L armonice
[ G ] quodam non armonice [ C ]
29 prius dicta: predicta L dicta [ C N ] / 250:
in capitulo 250L [ N ]
30 capitulis om. L [ N ] / pena om. L [ N ] / in­
armonice: inarmoniace L armonice [ S ]
31 inde tollerabilior: intollerabilior L toller­
abilior [ N J
39 extensionc [ A C S G ] / anime om. L
41 post scriptura scr. [ G ] et mg. [ A ] lob 240 /
ubi)
4 Job 24:19. I have taken the reading of text of the medieval translation accompanying
42 transeat [ S C ] et text. Verg. transiet
transeat from manuscripts S C since it is the the E xpositio of Aquinas (ed. of R .M . Spiazzi
B [ V A F A I P ] transiret L [ N G J / diffor­
preferred reading of the Vulgate. However, [Turin, 1964], 490), Text. No. 1360: “ Paucum
mis om. L
transiet, the reading o f the better manuscripts, enim tempus delectari valde magis eliget uti­
4 3 magis B [ V A N G ] maius L [ F M P C S ]
is a variant in the Vulgate text. que quam multum quiete; et vivere bene an­
I I.x l num, quam multos annos qualitercumque; et
I I .x l: B L
1 Nicomachean Ethics, Bk. IX , Chap. 8, 1 169a unam actionem bonam et magnam quam mul­
2 quandam om. L
22-25. There are some divergencies in word tas, et parvas.”
4 simpliciter om. L [ N J
order in Oresme’s quotation from those in the
9 magnam: magnam et bonam L
 39° E e configurationibus qualitatum et m otuum Part II, Chapter xl 391

io multas et parvas, et vivere bene per annum quam per multos qualitercunque,”
et cetera.
Si vero fuerint due letitie equales in extensione ac etiam in intensione
fuerintque differenter difformes, illa erit eligibilior atque melior cuius dif-
formitas erit nobilius et melius figurata, est enim aliqua talis qualitas que est
15 melior et eligibilior ceteris paribus quam si foret simpliciter uniformis, eo
quod ipsa est difformis quadam difformitate decora. Unde et cum correc­
tione videtur rationabiliter posse dici quod sicut anime beate vel angeli boni
duplicem habent volitionem ita habent duplicem sive multiplicem delec­
tationem, habent namque unam volitionem principalem de bono incommu-
20 tabili et finali que permanet semper invariabilis et immota, aliam autem
habent de aliis volitis que est mutabilis et difformis. Inde ait sanctus doctor
in fine summe sue contra gentiles: “ N on est,” inquit, “ voluntas anime sepa­
rate mutabilis de bono in malum; licet sit mutabilis de uno volito in aliud,
servato tamen ordine ad eundem ultimum finem,” et cetera, sicut etiam cor-
25 pora beatorum erunt mobilia aliter haberent frustra dotem agilitatis. Cum
igitur volitionem et operationem concomitetur delectatio, ut dicit Aristote­
les io° ethicorum, consequens est ut anime beate et angeli boni sicut habent
duplicem volitionem ita habeant duplicem delectationem: unam scilicet
incommutabilem de bono incommutabili que est simpliciter uniformis,
30 aliam vero variabilem et per consequens difformem secundum hoc quod
gaudent, modo de uno deinde de alio, modo plus modo minus. Eorum
accidentale gaudium ad tempus augetur pro conversione unius peccatoris,
salvatore dicente quod “ gaudium erit angelis D ei super uno peccatore peni-
tentiam agente.” Habet itaque creatura beata simul duas delectationes vel
35 plures quarum una est principalior et simpliciter uniformis et quasi gravior
sicut tenor in cantu, alia vero vel alie sunt difformes difformitate pulcherri­
ma, consonantissima, armonica, et concordi. Sive igitur ibi sit alia melodia,
sicut tactum est capitulo 240, sive non, ex hiis tamen potest intelligi confici
ille supercelestis concentus, de quo ait Augustinus: “ beati,” inquit, “ miseri-
small ones, to live w ell for a year than to live in a limited way for many years,”
etc.
If there are tw o pleasures equal in extension and also in intensity and which are
difform in different ways, that one is preferable and better whose difformity will be
more nobly and better figured. For some such quality is better and preferable,
other things being equal, than if it were simply uniform, because it is difform with
a certain fitting difformity. Whence, subject to correction, it seems that it can be
rationally said, that just as blessed souls or good angels have a double volition so
they have a double or multiple pleasure, for they have one principal volition [aris­
ing] from the unchangeable and final good which remains always invariable and
unmoved. But they also have another kind o f volition which is changeable and
difform. Thence the holy doctor says in the end o f his Summa against the Gentiles'.
“ The w ill o f the separated soul is not changeable from good to evil, although it is
changeable from one volition into another, so long as the order toward the final
end is preserved,” etc.;2 just as also the bodies o f the blessed w ill be mobile for
otherwise they w ould have the quality o f agility in vain. Therefore, since enjoy­
ment accompanies volition and action, as Aristotle says in the tenth book o f the
Ethics,3 so it follows that just as the blessed souls and good angels have double
volition so they have double enjoyment: i.e. one that is unchangeable and arises
from the unchangeable good, and this is simply uniform; the other which is
variable and thus difform according as they take joy now from one thing then
from another, now more [intensely], now less. For their accidental pleasure w ill be
increased in time, upon the conversion o f one sinner— according to the words o f
the Savior “ there shall be joy before the angels o f G od upon one sinner doing
penance.” 4 A n d so the blessed creature has tw o pleasures at the same time, or
several o f them; one o f these is the more fundamental, and is simply uniform and,
as it were, more serious, like the tenor in a song, while the other or others are
difform w ith a most beautiful, most consonant, harmonic, and concordant dif­
formity. W hether or not there is another melody there, as was treated in chapter
twenty-four, still from these things w e can understand the formation o f the super­
celestial harmony o f which Augustine speaks: “ the blessed will sing o f the mercies

10 et1 om. L [ N J 26 ut: quiaL [ N J

17 anime.. .boni: angeli beati boni vel anime
beate L
18 sive B [ V A N F C ] vel L [ M P S G ]
18-19 delectationem B J V A N S G ] tr.
L [ F M P C ] post duplicem
22 fine summe: summa L
22-23 contra.. .m alum om. B
25 beatorum: bonorum L / dotem: vocem L
dotes [ C ]
29 simpliciter : simplex L simplex et simplici­
ter [ N J
32-3 3 de p ro... dicente scr. mg. [ A J luc 50 ( !)
33 quod om. L [ N J
36 alia.. .alie B [ F M S C G ] alie vero L [ N ] alia
vel alie [ V ] alie [ P J alio vero sive alie [ A
37 consonantissima om. B / sit om. L
38 tamen o m .L 2Summa contra gentiles, Bk. IV , Chap. 95. 4 L u k e 15:10. Oresme appears to have omit-
See the Commentary, II.xl, lines 25-27. ted coram before angelis from the Vulgate.
 392 D e configurationibus qualitatum et m otuum Part III, Chapter i 393

40 cordias domini in eternum cantabunt, quo cantico in gloriam grade Christi o f G o d in eternity. . . certainly there will be no greater joy in that city than this song
[ ...] nichil erit profecto illi iocundius civitati.” to the glory o f the grace o f Christ.” 5

Incipit tertia pars Here begins the third part

de acquisitione et mensura qualitatum [of this treatise]: On the Acquisition and Measure
et velocitatum of Qualities and Velocities

[IH.i] Capitulum primum: per quid ymaginanda est Ill.i How the acquisition of quality is to be imagined
5 acquisitio qualitatis

D uplici m odo potest contingere successio in acquisitione qualitatis, Succession in the acquisition o f quality can take place in tw o w a y s: (1) according
scilicet secundum extensionem et secundum intensionem, sicut superius to extension, (2) according to intensity, as was stated in the fourth chapter o f the
fuit dictum capitulo 40 partis secunde. Acquisitio itaque extensiva qualitatis second part. A n d so extensive acquisition o f a linear quality ought to be imagined
linearis ymaginanda est per motum puncti fluentis super ipsam lineam subiec- by the motion o f a point flowing over the subject line in such a way that the part
10 tivam, ita quod pars pertransita sit qualificata et pars nundum pertransita
non qualificata. Sicut si punctus c moveretur super lineam A B et quidquid C D
esset ab eo pertransitum esset album et quidquid nundum esset pertransitum
nundum esset album [Fig. 18(a)]. Acquisitio autem extensiva qualitatis
superficialis ymaginanda est per motum linee dividentis partem superficiei
A B A B
40 Christi om. L seu tractatus altius (alterius?) de acquisi­
41 profecto B [ / I F A I S G ] text. A u g . perfecto tione et mensura qualitatis et velocitatis/"C ] (a) (b)
L [ V P C ] perfectius [ N ] / illi iocundius 1 3a pars mg. [ S ] , mg. [ J ] tertia pars tr. B F i g . 18
tr. L [ N ] iocundius [ A ] j post civitati add. tertia pars eiusdem [ A ] Figure (a) in MSS B G . Figure (b) in MSS J J G L . MS L merely has two parallel lines A B and C D
[ P M ] et sic est finis istius. Explicit secun­ 2-3 qualitatis et velocitatis L close together.
da pars huius tractatus, et add. [ F ] et sic 7 scilicet om. L [ N ]
est finis, et add. [ G ] Explicit secunda pars, 8 capitulo 40 [ V A N F M P S C G ] tr. B L /
traversed has received the quality and the part not yet traversed has not received
et add. [ A ] Amen. Explicit secunda pars partis secunde B [ V A N S ] tr. L [ G ] prime
huius tractatus, et add. [ N ] Explicit secun­ partis [ F A I P C ] / extensiva B [ A F A I P S G ]
the quality. A n example o f this occurs if point c were m oved over line A B so that
da pars et add. L Sequitur (!) pars huius om. [ C ] extensive L [ V7N ] any part traversed by it w ould be white and any part not yet traversed w ould not
tractatus, et add. [ S ] et sic explicit pars se­ 9 motum B [ V N ] (et cf. lin. 14, 1 /, 1 7 -1 8 , 22, yet be white [see Fig. 18(a)]. Further the extensive acquisition o f a surface quality
cunda 2 j, 70) modum L [ A I A C S G ] moni [ P ] ought to be imagined by the motion o f a line dividing that part o f the surface that
medium [ F ]
l i t . et I I I . i: B L 9-10 subiectivam om. L subiectam [ C ]
1-3 Incipit... velocitatum mg. B L [A N G ] 10 nundum B [ A N F A I P ] nondumL [ V C S G ]
(except fo r the variants in B A L below) om. hic et alibi 5 D e civitate D ei, X X II, 30 (ed. o f Dombart, cantico in gloriam gratiae Christi, cuius san­
[V P ] Incipit tertia etc. [ M ] Incipit 2a ( !) 12 esset1 tr. L post pertransitum1 / esset3: est L Vol. 2, 633-34): “ Alioquin si se fuisse miseros guine liberati sumus, nihil erit profecto illi
pars que est de figuratione et potentia 14 superficialis: linearis L j est: esset L [ N ] nescituri sunt, quo modo, sicut ait psalmus, iucundus civitati.” Augustine is referring to
qualitatum successivorum [ F ] Tertia pars misericordias D om ini in aeternum cantabunt? Quo Psalms 88:2.
 394 D e configurationibus qualitatum et m otuum Part III, Chapter 395

15 alteratam a parte nundum alterata. E t acquisitio extensiva corporee qualita­
tis conformiter ymaginanda est per motum superficiei dividentis partem
alteratam a parte nundum alterata.
Acquisitio autem intensiva qualitatis punctualis ymaginanda est per
motum puncti continue ascendentis super punctum subiectivum et motu
20 suo describentis perpendicularem lineam ymaginatam super eundem punc­
tum subiectivum. Acquisitio vero intensiva qualitatis linearis ymaginanda
est per motum linee perpendiculariter ascendentis super lineam subiectivam
et suo fluxu vel ascensu derelinquentis superficiem per quam designatur
qualitas acquisita. V erbi gratia [Fig. 18(b)]: Sit A B linea subiectiva. D ico
25 igitur quod intensio puncti A ymaginatur per motum vel per ascensum
perpendicularem puncti C et intensio linee A B vel acquisitio intensionis
ymaginatur per ascensum linee C D . Acquisitio autem intensiva qualitatis
superficialis conformiter ymaginanda est per ascensum superficiei motu suo
ymaginato derelinquentis corpus per quod illa qualitas designatur. E t simi-
30 liter acquisitio intensiva corporee qualitatis ymaginatur per motum superfi­
ciei quia superficies fluxu suo ymaginato derelinquit corpus et non contingit
dare quartam dimensionem sicut dictum fuit 40 capitulo prime partis.
E t sicut nunc dictum est de acquisitione qualitatis ita conformiter dicen­
dum est et ymaginandum de deperditione, sive deperdatur extensio sive
35 etiam intensio, ymaginatur enim talis deperdi tio per motus oppositos moti­
bus prius dictis. Sicut etiam nunc dictum est de acquisitione aut deperdi­
tione qualitatis ita conformiter ymaginandum est de acquisitione aut deper­
ditione velocitatis tam in extensione quam in intensione.
has been altered from the part not yet altered. A nd the extensive acquisition o f a
corporeal quality in a similar way is to be imagined by the m otion of the surface
dividing the part altered from the part not yet altered.1
T he intensive acquisition o f punctual quality is to be imagined by the motion o f
a point continually ascending over a subject point and by its m otion describing a
perpendicular line imagined [as erected] on that same subject point. But the inten­
sive acquisition o f a linear quality is to be imagined by the motion o f a line per­
pendicularly ascending over the subject line and in its flux or ascent leaving behind
a surface by which the acquired quality is designated. For example [see Fig. 18(b)],
let A B be the subject line. I say, therefore, that the intension o f point A is imagin­
ed by the m otion, or by the perpendicular ascent, o f point C , and the intension o f
line A B , or the acquisition o f the intensity, is imagined by the ascent o f line C D .
Further, the intensive acquisition o f a surface quality is in a similar way to be imag­
ined by the ascent o f a surface, which (by its motion) leaves behind a body by
means o f which that quality is designated. A n d similarly the intensive acquisition
o f a corporeal quality is imagined by the m otion o f a surface because a surface by
its imagined flux leaves behind a body, and one does not have to pose a fourth
dimension, as has been said in the fourth chapter o f the first part.
One should speak and conceive o f the loss o f quality in the same w ay that we
have now spoken o f its acquisition, whether that loss is o f extension or intensity.
For such loss is imagined by movements which are the opposite o f the movements
described before. Furthermore, one ought to speak o f the acquisition or loss o f
velocity, both in extension and intensity, in the same way we have just spoken o f
the acquisition or loss o f quality.

15 alteratam om. L alterate [ F M P ] / a: ab al­ 34 deperditione B L [ V N S G J perditione

tera L [ N ] [ A F M P C ] / deperdatur: deperditioE/ex­
15 -17 alterata__ alterata om. [ C ] / E t ...a l­ tensio L [ V N G ] etiam extensio B exten­
terata om. [ F M P ] sive [ F M P ] intensio [ A S ] intensive [ C ]
15-16 qualitatis om. L [ A N ] 3 5 etiam intensio B [ V ] om. L intensio [ N G ]
17 alteratam: alteram L etiam intensive [ F ] etiam extensive [ C ]
19 subiectum L [ C ] etiam extensio [ A ] intensive [ M P ] ex­
19-21 e t .. .subiectivum om. L[N] tensio [ S ]
2 1 subiectivum om. L subiectum [ C ] 36 etiam om. [ G ] enim L [ N ]
22 subiectivam: summam E 36- 37 aut deperditione B L [ V ] om. [ N F M P
24 subiectaE C ] de perditione [ A ] et de perditione [ G ]
25 per2 B L [ F M P ] om. [A V N S C G ] / perditione [ S ]
ascensum B L [ V A N S ] ascensionem 3 7 - 38 deperditione: de perditione [ A F P ]
[ FM PCGJ perditione [ V ]
27 autem om. L [ N ] vero [ F ] 38 in extensione quam in intensione B [ V F M
29 designatur: ymaginatur [ V ] P G ] in (om. C ) intensione quam in {om. S)
30 acquisitio om. F [ N J extensione L [ S C ] in intensum quam ex­
30-31 superficiei: superficiei qualitatis L [ N J tensum [ N ] extensive quam intensive 7 7 /./
32 fuit: est L j 40 capitulo tr. [ V 'A C ] [D ] 1 S e e t h e C o m m e n t a r y , I l l . i , lin e s 1 3 - 1 7 .
 396 D e configurationibus qualitatum et m otuum Part III, Chapter ii 397

[IILii] Capitulum i m in quo est applicatio predictorum IILii Application o f the prior statements to uniformity
ad uniformitatem et difformitatem and difformity

Sicut dictum fuit capitulo io° prime partis linea superior figure per quam
ymaginatur qualitas linearis vocatur in hoc proposito linea summitatis et
5 similiter superficies superior illius corporalis figure per quam ymaginatur
qualitas superficialis seu etiam corporea vocatur superficies summitatis.
Nunc autem sicut dictum fuit 130 et 170 capitulis eiusdem prime partis quo­
tiens illa summitas, sive sit linea sive superficies, est equedistans basi, tunc
est qualitas uniformis. Quotiens autem illa summitas est recta et non equedis-
10 tans basi vel se habens equivalenti modo, tunc qualitas est uniformiter dif-
formis. Quotiens vero se habet alio modo, tunc qualitas vel intensio est dif-
formiter difformis. Huic ergo ymaginationi addatur motus illius summitatis
per quem acquisitio denotatur, ut patet ex capitulo precedenti. E t faciliter
poterit cuilibet apparere qualiter ex hoc possunt multa evidenter inferri,
15 quorum pauca ponam non sufficiende gratia sed exempli causa.
Secundum enim modum loquendi modernum, si linea varietur de recta in
curvam aut econtrario, contingit dare primum instans in quo ipsa est recta
et similiter ultimum sed non potest dari primum aut ultimum in quo ipsa
est curva aut fracta. Ym m o bene sequitur: nunc est curva, ergo adhuc erit
20 curva; et etiam sequitur: ergo ante erat curva. E t potest linea esse recta
solum per instans, sed non potest esse curva vel fracta precise per instans; et
ita de superficie. E t quoniam rectitudo linee vel superficiei summitatis
denotat qualitatem esse simpliciter uniformem aut uniformiter difformem et
curvitas vel fractio eiusdem summitatis denotat qualitatem esse difformiter
25 difformem ut dictum est statim, inde sequitur quod contingit dare primum
instans et ultimum in quo qualitas est uniformis aut uniformiter difformis et
non potest dari primum instans vel ultimum in quo est difformiter difformis.
E x quo similiter sequitur quod si ipsa est difformiter difformis, adhuc erit et
prius fuit difformiter difformis, et quod subiectum potest esse uniformiter
30 difforme vel etiam uniforme solum per instans vel qualitas potest esse uni­
formis vel uniformiter difformis solum per instans sed non potest esse dif­
formiter difformis solum per instans, et ita de aliis que faciliter possunt ex
dictis inferri.
A s has been said in chapter ten o f the first part, the superior line o f the figure by
which a linear quality is imagined is called in our proposal “ the line o f summit.”
Similarly the superior surface o f the corporeal figure by which a surface quality is
imagined is called the “ surface o f summit,” as is also that o f a corporeal quality.1
N o w as has been said in chapters thirteen and seventeen o f the same first part, so
long as the summit, whether it is a line or a surface, is parallel to the base, then the
quality is uniform. Further, so long as it is right [i.e. rectilinear or rectiplanar] but
is not parallel to the base, or is not related to the base in an equivalent way, then the
quality is uniformly difform. But so long as the summit is related [to the base] in
another way, then the quality or intensity is difformly difform. T o this conceptual
scheme one can add the motion o f the summit by means o f which acquisition is
denoted, as is evident from the preceding chapter. A n d it w ill be readily clear to
anyone how many things can be evidently inferred from this treatment. O f these I
pose a few, not for the sake o f completeness but rather as examples.
For according to the way o f speaking o f the moderns,2 if a line changes from
straight to curved or vice versa, one can give a first, and similarly a last, instant in
which it is straight, but one cannot give a first or last instant in w hich it is curved
or broken. Rather, this is a sound consequence: “ N o w it is a curve, therefore it
still w ill be a curve,” and it also follow s, “ therefore it was a curve before.” A n d
“ a line can be straight for only one instant, but it cannot be curved or broken for
precisely one instant” ; and similarly for a surface. A nd since the straightness o f a
line or a surface o f summit denotes a quality as simply uniform or uniform ly dif­
form, while “ curvedness” or “ brokenness” denotes a quality as difformly difform,
as was just said, hence it follows that one can give a first and last instant in which a
quality is uniform or uniformly difform, and that he cannot give a first or last in­
stant in w hich it is difformly difform. From this it follows similarly (1) that if this
quality is [now] difformly difform, it still w ill be [in the future] and it form erly was
[in the past] difformly difform, and (2) a subject or quality can be uniform or uni­
formly difform for only one instant but cannot be difformly difform for only one in­
stant. Other things can be similarly inferred from what has been said.

I I I .» : B L
3 capitulo: in capitulo L
4 et om. L [ N J
6-8 summitatis... illa om [ S ]
7 fuit: est L [ N ] / partis om. L
12-15 H u ic__ causa om. [ G ]
17 dare L [ V N C ] ( e t c f .lin . 2 }) om.
B [ A F M P S G ] I recta: curva[ V ]
18 ipsa om. L [ N ]
20 etiam sequitur L [ V ' A N F A I P ] om. [ G ] tr.
B bene sequitur est curva [ S ] sequitur [ C ]
I I L ii 2 Ibid., lines 16-33.
24 qualitatem: curvitatem L [ N ]
1 See the Commentary, IILii, line 6.
28 E x ... difformis om. L / est: sit [ C G ] / et:
ut jL
30 vel1 .. .uniforme om. L vel uniforme [ S ] et 30-31 vel2 (aut A ) . ..instans B [ A N S G ] om. 32 difformis: difforme L
uniforme [ G ] L [V F M P C ]
 398 D e configurationibus qualitatum et m otuum Part III, Chapter iii 399

[Ill.iii] Capitulum 3m de quibusdam correlariis Ill.iii On certain corollaries

Sicut nunc dictum est de rectitudine linee vel superficiei ita est omnino de
equedistantia alicuius linee vel superficiei ad alteram, quoniam contingit
dare primum instans et ultimum in quo aliqua linea est alteri equedistans et
5 potest esse alteri equedistans solum per instans. E t sicut dictum est de
curvitate linee ita est in omnibus de equedistantia quantum ad hoc. E t
quoniam equedistantia designat uniformitatem et inequedistantia difformi-
tatem ut patet ex capitulo precedenti, patet ut prius quod contingit dare
primum instans in quo qualitas est uniformis et similiter ultimum, et primum
io in quo non est difformis et similiter ultimum in quo non est difformis, et
sic de aliis prius dictis.
Item quamvis qualitas possit esse uniformiter difformis tantum per in­
stans, tamen non potest esse difformis tantum per instans. Item quamvis
possit dari primum instans in quo est uniformiter difformis et similiter ulti-
15 mum, potest tamen contingere quod non detur. Sed non potest contingere
quin detur primum et ultimum in quo est uniformis. Si enim a qualitate
difformiter difformi transeatur ad uniformiter difformem, tunc erit dare
primum instans in quo est uniformiter difformis. E t si econtrario, erit dare
ultimum in quo est etiam uniformiter difformis. Si autem a simpliciter
20 uniformi transeatur ad uniformiter difformem, tunc non est dare primum
instans in quo est uniformiter difformis sed ultimum in quo non. E t si
econtrario, non est dare ultimum in quo sit sed primum in quo non. E t ista
leviter patent ex consideratione rectitudinis et equedistantie linearum.
Item possibile est quod per totum tempus alterationis qualitas sit dif-
25 formis, difformiter vel uniformiter, et in instanti terminante alterationem ip­
sa sit uniformis. Item possibile est quod subiectum nichil habeat illius quali­
tatis ad quam debet alterari et immediate post sit uniformiter difforme se­
cundum eam, quod patet exemplo, ut si linea C B [Fig. 19], que est linea
summitatis, iaceret super lineam subiectivam A B et inciperet elevari velo-
30 cius in uno extremo quam in alio; ex quo sequitur quod possibile est ut
subiectum totum simul incipiat alterari ad aliquam qualitatem et ad nullum
Everything that was just now said about the “ straightness” o f a line or a surface
holds for the “ parallelism” o f one line or surface to another, since one can give a
first and last instant in which one line is parallel to another and one line can be
parallel to another for only one instant. A nd what was said o f the “ curvedness” o f
a line holds for all the pertinent aspects o f parallelism. A nd since parallelism desig­
nates uniformity and non-parallelism, difformity, as is evident from the preceding
chapter, it is as clear as before that one can give a first, and similarly a last, instant
in which a quality is uniform, and a first, and similarly a last, instant in which it is
not difform, and similarly in regard to the other things said earlier.
A lso, although a quality could be uniformly difform for only an instant, still it
cannot be difform only for an instant. Further, although one could give a first, and
similarly a last, instant in which something is uniformly difform, yet it can happen
that it is not given. But it cannot happen that there is not given a first and last in­
stant in which it is uniform. For if a quality passes from difformly difform to uni­
form ly difform, then one w ill be able to give a first instant in which it is uniformly
difform. But if the passage is in the other direction, then one w ill be able to give
also a last instant in which it is uniformly difform. N o w if the passage is from sim­
ply uniform to uniformly difform, one cannot give the first instant in which it is uni­
form ly difform but only the last in which it is not. A nd if the passage is in the op­
posite direction, one cannot give the last instant in which it is, but only the first in
which it is not. A nd these statements are readily evident from a consideration o f
the “ straightness” and “ parallelism” o f lines.
A lso, it is possible that throughout the whole time o f alteration a quality is dif­
form— difformly or uniformly— and [yet] in the instant terminating the alteration
it is uniform. A lso it is possible that a subject has none o f the quality w ith respect
to which it is due to be altered, but immediately afterward it is uniformly difform
according to that quality. For example [see Fig. 19], if line C B , the summit line,

I l l .i i i : B L
1 d e ... correlariis [ V F C G ] in quo
aliqua correlaria L in quo sunt alia corre-
laria B [ A ]
2 omnino: omnino dicendum [ F M P J
4 dare B [ V A N ] om. [ F M P C S G ] dari L
7 quoniam: quoniam est B quia [ N ]
8 precedente B [ V ] / patet2: et patet L
9 primum: primum et ultimum [ F M P C ]
9-10 qualitas... quo2 om. [ V ]
9 post uniformis add. L tantum per instans
10 et1...difformis B [ A S ] om. L [ N F M P C ] j
sunt in2... difformis om. [ G ]
17 difformiter: uniformiter L / transeatur:
transferatur L
Figure in MS L , to which I have added the prime in B '. The figure in MS B is a rectangle with
19 ultimum: ultimum instans [ V ]
the summit line marked C C . In MSS S G , the figure is given as a right triangle indicating the stage
20 est: erit L
when B has only moved infinitesimally, so that B B ' appears as a single point B .
23 leviter B [ V F M P C G ] breviter L [ A N S ]
24-26 Item .. .uniformis om. L [ G ]
w ould lie on a subject line A B and w ould begin to be lifted more rapidly in one
27 post om. [ C 7 post hoc L [ N ]
29 inciperet: incipiet L inceperit [ A ] extreme than in the other, it follows accordingly that it is possible for the w hole
30 u t: quod L [ N C ] subject to begin to be altered at the same time w ith respect to some quality and
 400 D e configurationibus qualitatum et m otuum Part III, Chapter iv 401

gradum illius incipiat totum simul alterari, sed ad quemlibet, pars post
partem, ut, verbi gratia, quod alteretur ad albedinem non pars post partem
et ad quemlibet gradum albedinis alteretur pars post partem, et sic totum
35 simul incipiet esse album et nullo gradu albedinis incipiet esse album totum
simul sed quolibet successive. E t hec omnia que dicta sunt de qualitate
possunt de velocitate dici et ad eam conformiter applicari.
[thus] for the w hole subject to begin to be simultaneously altered at no degree o f
that quality, but [yet] to be altered part after part, to any [specific] degree. A n
example is that which [begins] to be altered w ith respect to whiteness not in part
after part manner, but is altered in a part after part way to any [specific] degree o f
whiteness. Thus the w hole simultaneously begins to be white but does so in no
degree o f whiteness; yet it becomes white in any [specific degree] successively. A ll
o f these statements concerning quality can be made concerning velocity and ap­
plied to it in a conformable way.

[III.iv] Capitulum 4m in quo sunt adhuc alia correlaria Ill.iv In which there are still other corollaries

Rursum inequedistantia duarum rectarum linearum vel superficierum Again, the non-parallelism o f tw o straight lines or surfaces can be diminished as
potest quantumlibet diminui et similiter quantumlibet augmentari, scilicet much as w e like [up to parallelism] and similarly it can be increased as much as w e
usque ad perpendicularitatem. Verbi gratia [Fig. 20(a)], si linea C D sit ine- like up to perpendicularity. For example [see Fig. 20(a)], if line C D is not parallel
5 quedistans linee A B , tunc per inclinationem puncti C versus lineam A B to line A B , then by the inclination o f point C toward line A B that non-parallelism
illa inequedistantia quantumlibet minuitur usque ad equedistantiam, et per is diminished as much as w e like up to parallelism and by the elevation o f point C ,
elevationem puncti C vel erectionem linee C D inequedistantia quantumlibet
C"
augetur usquequo linea C D stet perpendiculariter, tunc enim maxime rece­
dit ab equedistantia. E t ita potest dici de inequedistantia superficierum. Et
10 quoniam diminutio difformitatis per diminutionem inequedistantie desig­
natur et conformiter minuitur vel augetur, inde statim sequitur quod dif-
formitas uniformis potest quantumlibet diminui usque ad uniformitatem
simplicem et quantumlibet augeri ab uniformitate simplici recedendo.
E x quo iterum sequitur quod per alterationem successivam in qua nichil
15 acquiritur subito possibile est aliquem punctum vel lineam vel superficiem
subito alterari ad aliquam latitudinem vel intensionem totam. Verbi gratia

sign to C '. Figure (b) in MSS L S J G . Line D C ' is missing in MS S. The figure is reversed in MS
J and D C ' and D C " are missing there. I have added all prime signs and [D].

or by the erection o f line C D , the non-parallelism is increased as much as w e like

32 incipiat tr. L [ N ] post simul
33-34 ad .. .alteretur om. [ V ]
34 alteratur L
35 simul om. B / esse album2 tr. L [ N J post
simul in linea 36
37 e z L [ A ]
I ll.iv : B L
3 diminui... quantumlibet om. L
4 perpendicularem/. / si B L [ V A N M G ] sit
[F P S C ]
4-5 sit inequedistans [ V A N G ] sit in ine-
quedistans B in equidistantia [ F M P ] sic
inequedistans [ S ] sit equedistans L
equedistantia [ C ]
5 linee om. L
7 C D : ab CD L [ N ] a CD [ V ]
13 ab : ab ipsa L [ N ]
15 acquiritur subito tr. L [ N ] acquiritur [ S ]
16 vel intensionem om. L
until line C D stands perpendicularly, for at that point it has receded a maximum
amount from parallelism. A nd the same thing can be said for the non-parallelism o f
in­ surfaces. A nd since diminution o f difformity is designated by diminution o f non­
parallelism and is decreased or increased in a conformable way, so it immediately
follows that uniform difformity can be diminished as much as we like to simple uni­
form ity and increased as much as we like by receding from simple uniformity.
From this it again follows that by a successive alteration in which nothing is
acquired suddenly, it is possible for some point or line or surface to be altered
 402 D e configurationibus qualitatum et m otuum
Part III, Chapter iv 403
[Fig. 20(b)], sit ita quod medietas subiecti A B sit calida in summo et alia
suddenly to some latitude or w hole intension. For example [see Fig. 20(b)], let it
medietas sit uniformiter difformis terminata ad gradum summum in puncto
be that one half o f subject A B is hot in the maximum degree and the other half is
C et ad non gradum in puncto B , ita quod linea C D dyametralis sit linea sum­
uniformly difform, terminated at the maximum degree in point C and at no degree
mitatis figure designantis qualitatem uniformiter difformem. E t ymaginetur
in point B , so that the diagonal line C D is the line o f summit o f the figure desig­
m overi linea C B quousque sit perpendicularis super A B , ita tamen quod
nating the uniformly difform quality. A n d let line C B be imagined as being m oved
B punctus semper sit immotus. Tunc patet quod secundum hoc quod linea
until it is perpendicular to A B , point B how ever always remaining unmoved.
C B continue dirigitur continue plus de subiecto fit calidum in summo et
Then it is clear that according as line C B is continually m oved towards perpendi­
residuum continue fit magis difforme uniformiter; et alteratio semper est
cularity, so continually more o f the subject becomes hot in the maximum degree
successiva, et tamen in ultimo instanti terminante alterationem totum subiec-
w ith the remainder continually being more [steeply] uniformly difform, and the
tum erit calidum in summo. E t similiter punctus B erit calidus in summo, qui
alteration is always a successive one. A n d yet in the last instant terminating the
quidem punctus immediate ante erat frigidus in summo vel nichil habens de
alteration the whole subject w ill be hot in the maximum degree, and similarly
cali ditate.
point B w ill be hot in the maximum degree, a point which immediately before was
E t eodem modo potest esse de linea vel superficie in corpore alterato.
cold in the maximum degree, i.e. it had no hotness.
Posito itaque ulterius quod alicuius corporis ultima superficies sic fiat
The same situation can exist for a line or surface in a body which has been al­
subito luminosa et concesso quod illud corpus non illuminaret medium ad
tered. A n d so it having been posited finally that the end surface o f some body im­
illam partem donec ipsa superficies ultima esset luminosa, sequitur quod
mediately becomes luminous in this way, and it having been conceded that the
aliquod totale lumen corporeum posset causari simul et subito in aliquo
body w ould not illuminate the medium in that direction until that end surface
medio, quod tamen non est naturaliter possibile. Item cum prior casus de
w ould become luminous, it follows that some w hole corporeal light could be
alteratione subiecti A B non videatur naturaliter impossibilis et tamen na­
caused simultaneously and suddenly in some medium, which how ever does not
turaliter impossibile est aliquid subito fieri de summo frigido summe cali­
appear to be naturally possible. A lso, since the former case o f alteration o f subject
dum et ita de aliis, inde potest sumi argumentum ad probandum quod
A B does not seem to be naturally impossible and yet it is naturally impossible for
punctus non est aliquid realiter indivisibile nec linea est aliquid nec super­
something to become suddenly hot in a maximum degree after being very cold in a
ficies, quamvis eorum ymaginatio sit conveniens ad rerum mensuras melius
maximum degree (and similarly for other cases), so an argument can be made for
cognoscendas, ut tactum fuit in primo capitulo prime partis. Multa alia
proving that a point is not something really indivisible, nor is a line or a surface
possunt faciliter inferri iuxta ymaginationem predictam que tamen ipsa
something, although the imagination o f these [entities] is convenient for better
ymaginatione non prohibita viderentur quibusdam nimis difficilia aut forsan
understanding the measures o f things, as was noted in the first chapter o f the first
impossibilia. Sed ista exemplariter posita causa brevitatis sufficiant.
part.1 M any other things can be easily inferred according to the aforesaid imagi­
nation, which things, although not prohibited2 by this imaginary scheme, seem to
certain people excessively difficult or perhaps impossible. But for reasons o f brevity
the cases posited are sufficient as examples.

17 ita om. L [ N ] ista [ CJ / quod: quod A L, 36 summo L [ V N F M S P ] summe B [ A ] /

20 ymaginatur L [ N ] frigido: calido L [ N ] / summe: summum
21 moveri linea tr. L [P]
23 fit B [ V S G J om. [ F M P C J sit L [ N J 36-37 calidum: frigidum L [ N J
24 fit: sit L 37 ad probandum om. L [ N J
26 erit: est L [ A ] et [ C J 38 punctus om. L [ N ] / aliquid realiter: ali­
30 alicuius: alterius L / sic fiat: sic fiet [ C ] sit qualiter [ F M P C J aliquid [ S ] aliquid rec­
L [N ] tum A
32 ipsa B [ V F C G ] om. [ M P ] illa L [ N S J / 41 ipsaow. L [ C J I ll . i v considered a genuine reading o f the text and
esset om. L 42 prohibita B prehibita [ V G S A ] phisica
1 See th e C o m m e n ta ry , I l l . i v , 3 4 -4 3 . the latter is attested by the manuscripts. This is
33 simul et om. L L [ M P C J physica [ F N ] / viderentur another example o f the basic excellence of
2 I am convinced that prohibita (the reading
3 5 naturaliter om. L B [ V A S G J videntur L videtur [ F M P C J manuscript B .
o f manuscript B alone) is the only reading
35-36 naturaliter om. L [ N J
that makes sense in line 42 so long as non is
 4°4 D e configurationibus qualitatum et m otuum Part III, Chapter v 405

[III.v] Capitulum 5m de mensura qualitatum uniformium III.v On the measure of uniform qualities and velocities
et velocitatum

Universaliter omnium duarum qualitatum linearum sive superficierum
ac etiam velocitatum mensura sive proportio est sicut figurarum per quas
5 adinvicem comparate ymaginantur. Dicam autem “ adinvicem comparate”
propter unum quod fuit notatum capitulo 70 prime partis. Pro mensuris
igitur et proportionibus qualitatum seu velocitatum habendis remittendum
est et recurrendum ad geometriam. N ec de hoc in proposito ulterius trac­
tandum est nisi tantummodo ostendendo applicationem mensurationis
10 figurarum ad mensuram qualitatum et velocitatum quasi per quedam exem­
pla et per quoddam exercitium.
D ico itaque primo quod omnium qualitatum uniformium equalium gra­
duum proportio est sicut suorum subiectorum sicut etiam omnium quadran­
gulorum equalis altitudinis proportio est sicut suarum longitudinum. Item
15 omnium qualitatum uniformium equalium subiectorum proportio est sicut
proportio suarum intensionum; ut si subiecta sint equalia et una sit duplo
intensior quam alia, illa intensior erit ad aliam dupla. Verumptamen pro­
portio intensionum non ita de proprie vel ita faciliter attingitur per sensum
sicut proportio extensionum.
20 E x dictis autem sequitur quod per solam condensationem qualitas in­
tenditur nisi aliunde minuatur et per solam rarefactionem remittitur nisi
aliunde augeatur. E x quo ulterius sequitur quod si contraria sint in eodem
subiecto simul et illud subiectum condensetur, utrumque contrariorum pro
eodem tempore intendetur. H oc autem videtur experientie concordare.
25 Nam subiectum tepidem condensatum et compactum fortius calefacit minus
calidum et fortius frigefacit minus frigidum quam faceret antequam esset
condensatum. Utrumque enim contrariorum fortius sentitur in denso quam
sentiebatur in raro. N ec istud videtur irrationabile quoniam in sola con­
densatione non est vera calefactio, eo quod caliditas non augetur. Ym m o
30 secundum quod intenditur proportionaliter minuitur extensive; quamvis
The universal rule is this, that the measure or ratio o f any tw o linear or surface
qualities or velocities is as that o f the figures by which they are comparatively and
mutually imagined.1 I say “ comparatively and mutually” because o f the proviso
noted in chapter seven o f the first part.2 Therefore, in order to have measures and
ratios o f qualities and velocities one must have recourse to geometry. N othing
more o f our subject remains for treatment except to show the application o f the
mensuration o f figures to the measure o f qualities and velocities by means o f cer­
tain examples and by means o f a certain exercise.
A nd so I say first that the ratio o f all uniform qualities o f equal degrees [of
intensity] is as [that of] their subjects, just as the ratio o f all rectangles o f equal
altitude is as [the ratio of] their base lengths. Further, the ratio o f all uniform qual­
ities whose subjects are equal is as the ratio o f their intensities, so that if the sub­
jects are equal and one is tw ice as intense as another, the one that is more intense
w ill be double the other.3 H owever, the ratio o f intensities is not so properly or so
easily attainable by the senses as is the ratio o f extensions.4
From these statements it follows that by condensation alone a quality is in­
creased in intensity, except when it is decreased from another source; and by
rarefaction alone it is decreased in intensity except where it is increased from an­
other source. From which, finally, it follows that i f contrary qualities are present
simultaneously in the same subject and that subject is condensed, each o f the con­
traries w ill be increased in intensity for the same period o f time. M oreover, this
seems in accord w ith experience. For a tepid subject when condensed and made
[more] compact heats more vigorously something that is less hot and cools more
vigorously something that is less cold than it was wont to do before being con­
densed. For each o f the contraries is sensed more strongly in the dense subject
than it was sensed in the rare subject. N or does this seem unreasonable since in
condensation alone there is no true production o f heat because [the amount of] heat
is not increased. In fact, according as [the subject’s quality] is intensively increased,
it is being proportionally decreased in extension. For although it w ould not be

III. v: B L 13-14 sicut... est om. L

1 qualitatis uniformis L
3 sive: ac etiam B
5 comparate1 om. L
7-8 remittendum est et B [ V A N F M J om.
L [ P S G ] remittendum et [ C ]
8 ad: est ad L [ P S G J / in ... ulterius
B [ A F M P C ] proposito ulterius L [ N ] ul­
terius ad propositum [ V ] ulterius in pro­
posito [ S G ]
1 o et [ V A P F M S C G ] ac B L f N J
13 suorum subiectorum [ A V S G ] t r . B duo­
rum subiectorum [ F M P C ] subiectorum
[ N J / omnium om. L
15 uniformiter/.
16 sunt/.
18-19 non... extensionum om. L [ G ] III .v 4 This indicates that Oresme was well aware
18 attingitur tr. B post proprie 1 See the Commentary, III.v, lines 3-5. o f a crucial difficulty to the use of his system,
20 autem om. L [ N ] 2 Ibid., I.vii, lines 20-23. namely the determination by the senses of the
24 intenditur L [ V C ] 3 Cf. Questions on the Geometry o f Euclid, ratios o f intensities. See the last paragraph of
30 proportionabiltier [ V G J Quest. 11 (Appendix I, Quest. 11, lines 19-23). Introduction I.B.
 406 D e configurationibus qualitatum et m otuum
enim non esset possibile quod unum contrariorum augeretur vera alteratione
ad ipsum quin aliud minueretur, non tamen est impossibile quod utrumque
intendatur dum tamen neutrum essentialiter augeatur vel minuatur sicut fit
in condensatione.
[III.vi] Capitulum 6m adhuc de eodem
Rursum ad propositum redeundo dico quod, omnium qualitatum uni­
formium inequalium extensive ac etiam intensive si magis extensa est magis
intensa, proportio maioris ad minorem est composita ex proportione exten-
5 sionis ad extensionem et proportione intensionis ad intensionem. Si autem
magis extensa sit minus intensa, tunc proportio extensionis ad extensionem
subtrahenda est a proportione intensionis ad intensionem aut econtra et
remanebit proportio unius qualitatis ad alteram. Illa autem qualitas erit
maior que erat in intensione vel extensione terminus maioris proportionis.
10 V erbi gratia, sit A qualitas triplo extensior quam B qualitas et similiter sit
duplo intensior. Addenda est ergo proportio dupla ad proportionem tri­
plam et proportio composita erit sextupla, scilicet proportio 6 ad unum. In
tali ergo proportione excedit A qualitas B qualitatem. Sed ponatur quod A
qualitas sit duplo magis extensa quam B et B sit triplo magis intensa quam
15 A . Tunc subtrahenda est proportio dupla a proportione tripla et remanet
proportio sesquialtera, scilicet proportio 3 ad 2. E t quoniam A erat terminus
maioris proportionis, scilicet triple, ideo B qualitas est maior quam A quali­
tas in proportione predicta, scilicet in sesquialtera.
Qualiter autem unaqueque proportio addatur alteri vel ab altera subtraha-
2o tur ego docui in quodam tractatu quem vocavi algorismum proportionum.
In predicta vero mensuratione semper accipienda est tota extensio qualitatis
sive fuerit linearis sive superficialis sive etiam corporea. E t sicut dictum est
de mensura qualitatis linearis ita dicendum est de mensura velocitatis nisi
quod pro extensione capiatur tempus durationis ipsius velocitatis et acci-
25 piatur intensio gradualis, et sic de aliis successivis. V erbi gratia, velocitas
uniformis que durat per tres dies est equalis velocitati triplo intensiori que
durat per unam diem, et ita de pena et delectatione ac etiam de lumine si
31 enim om. L [ N ] vero [ A ] /contrariorum:
3 est: sit B
extremorum L [ N J 9 terminus lac. [ N ] eius L
32 est B f V A S C ] est illud L esset [ F M P C ] / 13 ergo om. L
possibile [ F M P C ] 17 maioris proportionis: minoris L maioris
33 vel minuatur om. L [ S ] [N ]
23-24 nisi... velocitatis om. [ F ]
I I I . vi: B L 24 pro om. L [ N ] j per extensionem [ M P ]
3-4 est... intensa om. [ F M P C ] 27 durat: datur L [ F M C ]
Part III, Chapter vi 407
possible for one o f the contraries to be increased b y true alteration with respect to
that [contrary] without the other being diminished, still it is not impossible for
each o f them to be intensively increased so long as neither is essentially increased
or diminished; and this is the case in condensation.
IILvi Further consideration o f the same subject
A gain returning to the principal subject, I say that in the case o f uniform qualities
which are unequal in both extension and intensity, if the one that is more extended
is more intense, then the ratio o f the greater to the lesser is composed [of the prod­
uct] o f the ratio o f extension to extension and the ratio o f intensity to intensity.1 If,
however, the one that is more extended is less intense, then the ratio o f extension to
extension is to be taken from [i.e. divided into] the ratio o f intensity to intensity or
vice versa, and the result is the ratio o f the one quality to the other. But that qual­
ity will be greater w hich was either in extension or intensity the term o f the larger
ratio. For example, let A be a quality three times as extensive as quality B , and
similarly twice as intense. There the double ratio is to be added [geometrically, i.e.
multiplied] by the triple ratio, and the compound ratio will be a sextuple ratio, i.e.,
six to one. Therefore, quality A exceeds quality B in such a ratio. But let it be
posited that A is tw ice as extensive as B , while B is three times as intense as A .
Then the double ratio is to be taken away from [geometrically, i.e., divided into]
the triple ratio and a sesquialterate ratio results, i.e., a ratio o f 3 to 2. A n d since B
was the term o f the larger ratio, i.e., the triple ratio, therefore quality B is great­
er than quality A , in the amount o f the aforesaid ratio, i.e., in a sesquialterate
ratio.
H ow one ratio is added to, or subtracted from, another ratio [geometrically, i.e.,
how one is to be multiplied b y or divided into another ] I have taught in a certain
treatise which I have called The Algorism of Ratios. 2 But in the aforesaid mensura­
tion one must always take the whole extension o f the quality, whether it be a linear,
surface, or corporeal quality. A n d just as w e have spoken o f the measure o f linear
quality, so w e ought to speak o f the measure o f velocity, except that instead o f
extension the time o f the duration o f the velocity is taken, and intensity according
to degree is taken, and similarly for other successive entities. For example, a uni­
form velocity w hich lasts for three days is equal to a velocity that is three times as
intense which lasts for one day, and similarly for pain, pleasure, and also for light,
I ll.v i Geometry o f Euclid, again demonstrating that in
1 The discussion in this chapter of the cases the D e configurationibus Oresme presented more
where the intensities and the extensions are detailed considerations o f the same problems
both unequal clearly goes beyond the rules and ideas that appeared in Me. Questions.
found in Question 11 of The Questions on the 2 See the Commentary, IILvi, 19-20.
 408 Part III, Chapter vii 409
D e configurationibus qualitatum e t m otuum

ymaginetur ens successivum. Unde in Ysaia dicitur, “ erit lux lune sicut lux
solis, et lux solis erit septempliciter sicut lux septem dierum,” quia videlicet
30 lux unius diei septempliciter intensa equalis est luci que per septem dierum
spatium extenderetur.
if it is imagined to be a successive entity. W hence it is said in Isaias :3 “ A n d the light
o f the moon shall be as the light o f the sun, and the light o f the sun shall be seven­
fold as the light o f seven days,” for evidently the light o f one day increased inten­
sively by sevenfold is as the light w hich w ould be extended through a space o f
seven days.

[III.vii] Capitulum de mensura qualitatum et velocitatum IILvii On the measure o f difform qualities and
difformium velocities

Omnis qualitas, si fuerit uniformiter difformis, ipsa est tanta quanta
foret qualitas eiusdem subiecti vel equalis uniformis secundum gradum
5 puncti medii eiusdem subiecti; et hoc intelligo si qualitas fuerit linearis. E t
si fuerit superficialis, secundum gradum linee m edie; si vero fuerit corporalis,
secundum gradum medie superficiei, semper conformiter intelligendo.
Istud ostenditur primo de lineari. Sit igitur una qualitas ymaginabilis per
triangulum A B C que est uniformiter difformis terminata ad non gradum in
10 puncto B [Fig. 2 i(a)]; et sit D punctus medius linee subiecti ve, cuius quidem
puncti gradus vel intensio ymaginatur per lineam D E . Igitur qualitas que es­
set uniformis per totum subiectum secundum gradum D E ymaginabilis est
per quadrangulum A F G B , ut patet per io m capitulum prime partis. Constat
autem per z 6am primi Euclidis quod duo parvi trianguli E F C et E G B sunt
E very quality, i f it is uniformly difform, is o f the same quantity as w ould be the
quality o f the same or equal subject that is uniform according to the degree o f the
middle point o f the same subject.1 1 understand this to hold if the quality is linear.
I f it is a surface quality, [then its quantity is equal to that o f a quality o f the same
subject which is uniform] according to the degree o f the middle line; i f corporeal,
according to the degree o f the middle surface, always understanding [these con­
cepts] in a conformable way. This w ill be demonstrated first for a linear quality.
Hence let there be a quality imaginable by A A B C , the quality being uniformly
difform and terminated at no degree in point B [see Fig. 21(a)]. A n d let D be the
middle point o f the subject line. T h e degree o f this point, or its intensity, is imag-
c

center perpendicular. In MS / , line E D is missing and the center perpendicular is marked K H .

Both figures are reversed in MS J .

28 ens B [ V A F M P C J esse L [ S G ] esse ens

ined by line D E . Therefore, the quality w hich w ould be uniform throughout the
7 medie superficiei tr. L [ N S ] superficiei [ V ]
[N ] whole subjectat degree D E is imaginable by rectangle A F G B , as is evident b y the
/ semper: secundum hoc E
29-30 videlicet lux tr. L lux [ N ]
8 ostenditur primo tr. L [G ] ostenditur tenth chapter o f the first part. Therefore, it is evident by the 26th [proposition] o f
31 extenditur L [ S ] [F M P C J [Book] I [of the Elements] o f Euclid2 that the tw o small triangles E F C and E G B
1 1 - 1 2 esset B [ V A S G ] est L [ N F M P C J
I I L v ii: B L I I L v ii
13-14 Constat autem B [ V S G J constatque
3-4 ipsa... uniformis om. [ F M P ] 3 Isaias 30:26.
1 See the Commentary, IILvii, lines 3-5.
L [ N ] constat et [ F M P C ]
5 s i... linearis: qualitate lineari B 2 Ibid., line 14.
14 E F C : E F G B [ V J
 4io D e configurationibus qualitatum et m otuum Part III, Chapter vii 411

15 equales. E rgo maior triangulus B A G qui designat qualitatem uniformiter
difformem et quadrangulus A F G B qui designaret qualitatem uniformem
secundum gradum puncti medii sunt equales. E rgo qualitates per huius-
modi triangulum et quadrangulum ymaginabiles sunt equales. E t hoc est
propositum.
20 Eodem m odo potest argui de qualitate uniformiter difformi terminata
utrinque ad certum gradum, sicut esset qualitas ymaginabilis per quadrangu­
lum A B C D [Fig. 21(b)]. Protrahatur enim linea D E equedistans basi subiec-
te et fieret triangulus C E D . Deinde protrahatur per gradum puncti medii
linea F G equalis et equedistans basi subiecte, et protrahatur etiam linea
25 G D . Tunc sicut prius probabitur quod triangulus C E D et quadrangulus
E F G D sunt equales. E rgo addito utrobique quadrangulo communi A E D B
fient duo tota equalia, scilicet quadrangulus A C D B qui designat quali­
tatem uniformiter difformem et quadrangulus A F G B qui designaret quali­
tatem uniformem secundum gradum puncti medii ipsius subiecti A B . Igitur
30 per capitulum io mprime partis qualitates per huiusmodi quadrangulos desig-
nabiles sunt equales.
Conformiter potest argui de qualitate superficiali ac etiam de corporali.
D e velocitate vero omnino dicendum est sicut de qualitate lineari, dum
tamen loco puncti medii capiatur instans medium temporis velocitatem
35 huiusmodi mensurantis. Sic itaque patet cui qualitati aut velocitati uniformi
adequatur qualitas sive velocitas uniformiter difformis. Proportio autem
qualitatum et velocitatum uniformiter difformium est sicut proportio quali­
tatum et velocitatum simpliciter uniformium quibus adequantur. E t de
mensura et proportione illarum uniformium dictum est in capitulo prece-
40 denti.
Si autem qualitas seu velocitas fuerit difformiter difformis, tunc, si
componatur ex partibus uniformibus aut uniformiter difformibus, ipsa
poterit mensurari per suas partes, de quarum mensura dictum est ante. Si
vero qualitas fuerit alio modo difformis, sicut difformitate illa que per curvi-
45 tatem designatur, tunc oporteret recurrere ad mensurationem figurarum
curvarum inter se aut earum cum rectis figuris; et hoc est alterius specula­
tionis. Sufficiant ergo que dicta sunt.
are equal. Therefore, the larger A B A C , w hich designates the uniformly difform
quality, and the rectangle A F G B , which designates the quality uniform in the
degree o f the middle point, are equal. Therefore the qualities imaginable by a
triangle and a rectangle o f this kind are equal. A n d this is what has been proposed.
In the same w ay it can be argued for a quality uniformly difform terminated in
both extremes at a certain degree, as w ould be the quality imaginable b y quadran­
gle A B C D [see Fig. 21(b)]. For let line D E be drawn parallel to the subject base
and A C E D w ould be formed. Then let line F G be drawn through the degree o f
the middle point w hich is equal and parallel to the subject base. A lso, let line G D
be drawn. Then, as before, it w ill be proved that A C E D = □ E F G D . Therefore,
w ith the common rectangle A E D B added to both o f them, the tw o total areas are
equal, namely quadrangle A C D B , w hich designates the uniformly difform quality,
and the rectangle A F G B , which w ould designate the quality uniform at the degree
o f the middle point o f the subject A B . Therefore, b y chapter ten o f the first part,
the qualities designatable by quadrangles o f this kind are equal.
It can be argued in the same way regarding a surface quality and also regarding a
corporeal quality. N o w one should speak o f velocity in completely the same fashion
as linear quality, so long as the middle instant o f the time measuring a velocity o f
this kind is taken in place o f the middle point [of the subject].3 A n d so it is clear to
which uniform quality or velocity a quality or velocity uniformly difform is equat­
ed. M oreover, the ratio o f uniformly difform qualities and velocities is as the ratio
o f the simply uniform qualities or velocities to which they are equated. A n d w e
have spoken o f the measure and ratio o f these uniform [qualities and velocities] in
the preceding chapter.
Further, i f a quality or velocity is difformly difform, and i f it is composed o f uni­
form or uniform ly difform parts, it can be measured b y its parts, whose measure has
been discussed before. N o w , i f the quality is difform in some other w ay, e.g. with
the difformity designated b y a curve, then it is necessary to have recourse to the
mutual mensuration o f the curved figures, or to [the mensuration of] these [curved
figures] w ith rectilinear figures; and this is another kind o f speculation.4 There­
fore what has been stated is sufficient.

21 utrinque B [ S G ] om. [ C ] utriusque L [ A ] 33 D e1 o m .L [ N ]

utrobique [ V N ] uterque [ F M P ] 34 capiatur B [ V S G ] om. [ F M P ] , tr. L [ A N ]
23-24 et... et3 om. L
post temporis / instans: instantis L infert
26 sunt B [ V A N S G ] fient JL erunt [ F M P C ] [F M P ]
26- 27 equales... fient B [ V A N S G ] om. [ F M
36 qualitatis aut velocitatis A 4 Ibid., line 46.
P C ] equales quare L 3 Ibid., lines 33—35•
37 e t: aut L [ N ] sive [ A ]
2 7- 28 A C D B ... quadrangulus om. F 38 F t o m . L [ A N ]
28 designaret B [ A V S ] designat L [ F N M 39 e t: et de L [ V M P ] / uniformium om. L [ N ] tas L [ N ] difformitas sive qualitas [ A ] 47 Sufficiant... sunt B L [ V S ] om.
? P , ?C , ? G ] 41 qualitas... velocitas: velocitas seu quali- 44 sicut om. [ C ] sicut de L [ N ] [AN FM PCG]
 412 D e configurationibus qualitatum et m otuum Part III, Chapter viii 413

[Ill.viii] Capitulum 8m de mensura et intensione in infinitum Ill.viii On the measure and intension to infinity of
quarundam difformitatum certain difformities

Superficies finita potest fieri quantumlibet longa vel alta per variationem A finite surface can be made as long as we wish, or as high, by varying the
extensionis absque eius augmento. Nam talis superficies habet longitudinem extension without increasing the size. For such a surface has both length and
et latitudinem et possibile est ipsam secundum unam dimensionem quan­
tumlibet augeri ipsa tamen non augmentata simpliciter dummodo secundum
aliam dimensionem proportionaliter minuatur, et ita est etiam de corpore.
Verbi gratia de superficie [Fig. 22]: accipiatur superficies quadrata pedalis,
cuius basis sit linea A B ; et sit alia superficies similis et equalis, cuius basis sit

Fig. 22
Figures in MSS B L J G . MS L reverses the left drawing and adds another “ foot” to the left o f E
on the right drawing. MS B makes the base o f the left drawing CD and that o f the right drawing
A B . MS G reverses both drawings.

breadth and it is possible for it to be increased in one dimension as much as we like

without the whole surface being absolutely increased so long as the other dimen­
sion is diminished proportionally, and this is also true of a body. For example1
[see Fig. 22], in the case of a surface, let there be a surface of one square foot in
area whose base line is A B ; and let there be another surface, similar and equal to it,
I ll.v iii: B L 7 proportionabiliter V / diminuatur [ V A N
i intensione B L [ V ] extensione [ F C G ] C ] / ita est etiam B [ V S ] ita est [ F M P I ll.v iii
6 tamen om. L [ A N S ] C ] ita etiam L [ A N G ] 1 See the Commentary, Ill.viii, lines 8-28.
 414 D e configurationibus qualitatum e t m otuum
io linea C D , que ymaginetur in infinitum dividi per partes continue propor­
tionales secundum proportionem duplam super basim C D eodem mo­
do divisam, et sit E prima pars, et F secunda, et G tertia, et sic de aliis.
Sumatur igitur prima istarum partium, scilicet E , que est medietas sui totius,
et ponatur super primam superficiem versus extremum B. Deinde super
i5 totum hoc ponatur secunda pars, scilicet F , et iterum super totum hoc pona­
tur tertia pars, scilicet G , et ita de aliis in infinitum. Quo facto, ymaginetur
basis A B dividi per partes continue proportionales secundum proportionem
duplam, eundo versus B. Et statim patebit quod super primam partem
proportionalem linee A B stat superficies alta per unum pedem, et super
20 secundam partem stat superficies alta per duos pedes, et super tertiam per
tres et super quartam per quatuor, et sic ulterius in infinitum, et tamen
totalis superficies non sit nisi duo pedalia prius data in nullo augmentata.
Et per consequens totalis superficies que stat super lineam A B est precise
quadrupla ad illam sui partem que stat super primam partem proportiona-
25 lem eiusdem linee A B . Illa ergo qualitas sive velocitas que proportionaretur
in intensione huic figure in altitudine esset precise quadrupla ad partem sui
que foret in prima parte temporis vel subiecti secundum huiusmodi divisio­
nem. Verbi gratia: sit prima pars proportionalis secundum proportionem
duplam ipsius linee A B versus extremum A alba seu calida aliquantum et
30 secunda duplo albior et tertia triplo albior et quarta quadruplo et sic con­
sequenter in infinitum utrinque secundum seriem numerorum. Tunc ex
predictis apparet quod totalis albedo linee A B est precise quadrupla ad albe-
dinem prime partis, et ita esset de albedine superficiali, ac etiam de corporali
si conformiter esset intensa.
35 Eodem modo si aliquod mobile moveretur in prima parte proportionali
alicuius temporis taliter divisi aliquali velocitate, et in secunda moveretur
duplo velocius, et in tripla triplo, et in quarta quadruplo, et sic consequenter
in infinitum semper intendendo, velocitas totalis esset precise quadrupla ad
velocitatem prime partis, ita quod illud mobile in tota hora pertransiret
40 precise quadruplum ad illud quod pertransivit in prima medietate illius hore;
ut si in prima medietate vel parte proportionali pertransiret unum pedem,
in toto residuo pertransiret tres pedes et in toto tempore pertransiret
quatuor pedes. Istud autem alias demonstravi demonstratione subtiliori et
19-20 superficies... stat om. [FM PC ]
29 A om .[ V ] D L \ aliquantum: aliquantulum
20 partem om. B / stat... alta om. L [ N ] /pedes: L [ SC]
partes L j tertiam: tertiam partem L [ A N ] 30 quarta: quarta in L [ A N S ]
21 tres: tres pedes L [ A N ] 31 utrinque B [F M P G ] utrobique [V C ]
22-23 totalis__ consequens om. L
utriusque L [ A N ] utrinam ?[S ]
24 sui partem om. L superficiem V 32 apparet B [ V F M S G ] patet L [ A N P C ]
25-29 Illa__ K B b i s L 33 ita om. B I ac etiam B [ S G ] et etiam [ V ] et
27-28 divisionem: dimensionemL [ A N J L[AN FM P]
28 pars om. B [ V ] 3 5 moveretur: movetur B moveatur [ A ]
4D
Part III, Chapter viii
whose base line is C D . Let the latter surface be imagined to be divided on line C D
to infinity into parts continually proportional according to the ratio 2 to 1, with its
base divided in the same way. Let E be the first part, A the second, G the third, and
so on for the other parts. Therefore, let the first o f these parts, namely E , which is
one half the whole surface, be taken and placed on top o f the first surface towards
the extremity B . Then upon this whole let the second part, namely F , be placed,
and again upon the whole let the third part, namely G , be placed, and so on for the
others to infinity. When this has been done, let base line A B be imagined as being
divided into parts continually proportional according to the ratio o f 2 to 1, pro­
ceeding towards B . And it will be immediately evident that on the first proportion­
al part o f line A B there stands a surface one foot high, on the second a surface
two feet high, on the third one three feet high, on the fourth four feet high, and so
on to infinity, and yet the whole surface is only the two [square] feet [in area]
previously given, without augmentation. And consequently the whole surface
standing on line A B is precisely four times its part standing on the first proportion­
al part o f the same line A B . Therefore, that quality or velocity which would be
proportional in intensity to this figure in altitude would be precisely four times the
part o f it which would be in the first part o f the time or the subject so divided. For
example, let the first part (towards extreme A ) of the proportional parts divided
along A B according to the ratio 2 to 1 be a certain amount white or hot, the sec­
ond twice as white [intensively], the third three times as white, the fourth four
times, and so on to infinity on both sides according to the [natural] series o f [whole]
numbers. Then from the prior statements it is apparent that the total whiteness of
line A B is precisely four times the whiteness o f the first part; and it would be the
same for a surface, or for a corporeal, whiteness, if it were increased in intensity in
similar fashion.
In the same way, if some mobile were moved with a certain velocity in the first
proportional part o f some period o f time, divided in such a way, and in the second
part it were moved twice as rapidly, and in the third three times as fast, in the fourth
four times, and increasing in this way successively to infinity, the total velocity
would be precisely four times the velocity o f the first part, so that the mobile in the
whole hour would traverse precisely four times what it traversed in the first half of
the hour; e.g., if in the first half or first proportional part it would traverse one
foot, in the whole remaining period it would traverse three feet and in the total
time it would traverse four feet. Moreover I have demonstrated this elsewhere
with a more subtle and difficult demonstration.2 But this present treatment con-
2 Ibid., lines 35-44.
41 ut: et L [ A N ] / pertransiret: transivit 43-45 Istud... pretermitto om. [ G ]
L [A N ] 43 demonstravi: demonstratur L
42 pertransiret1: transiret [ A N ]
 416 D e configurationibus qualitatum e t m otuum
difficiliori. Sed ista est magis conformis huic tractatui et sufficit; ideo aliam
45 pretermitto.
[IILix] Capitulum 9m de quodam alio exemplo
Ym aginetur linea A B [Fig. 23] in infinitum divisam signative per partes
continue proportionales secundum proportionem quadruplam, ita quod
prima pars proportionalis sit tres quarte totius et secunda sit tres quarte resi-
5 dui primi et tertia sit tres quarte residui secundi et sic consequenter in in­
finitum; ut si tota linea esset sicut 64, tunc prima pars proportionalis
secundum istam divisionem esset 48 et secunda esset 12 et tertia esset 3 et
quarta esset tres quarte residui, scilicet unius, et sic ultra. H oc posito,
super primam istarum partium linee A B ymaginetur superficies aliquante
10 altitudinis uniformis, et super secundam partem sit superficies duplo altior,
et super tertiam quadruplo altior, et super quartam octuplo altior, et sic in
infinitum semper duplando, ita quod altitudines superficierum procedant
continue augmentando secundum proportionem duplam et longitudines
continue diminuendo secundum proportionem subquadruplam. E t sic secun-
i5 da pars superficialis est ad primam subquadrupla in longitudine et dupla in
altitudine, et ita se habet tertia ad secundam et quarta ad tertiam, et sic ulte­
rius procedendo. D ico ergo quod totalis superficies vel figura est precise
dupla ad primam sui partem, i.e., ad partem que est super primam partem
proportionalem linee A B .
20 Q uod probatur sic: Sit superficies que est super primam partem sicut 48.
Igitur illa superficies que est super secundam partem, si non esset altior
quam prima, ipsa esset sicut 12. N unc autem ipsa est duplo altior quam
prima. Igitur ipsa secunda est sicut 24, et per idem tertia est sicut 12, et
quarta sicut 6, et sic ulterius procedendo secundum proportionalitatem
25 subduplam. Unde et ista proportio istarum superficierum posset ostendi per
ea que dicta sunt 6° capitulo huius partis. Habemus igitur quod prima pars
est dupla ad secundam et secunda dupla ad tertiam et tertia dupla ad quar­
tam, et sic consequenter. E rgo totius aggregati ex omnibus infinitis prima
pars est medietas, et secunda est medietas residui, et sic ultra. E rg o totum
I I L i x : B L [ M has not been used here; it is 12 duplando: duplicando L subduplando [ A ]
illegible.] subduplicando [ N ] / superficierum: super­
2 ymaginemur lineam L [ A N ] ficierum partium L [ A N ]
5 et...secundi om. [ A N ] / secundi om. [ C ] 14 subquadruplam: quadruplam L
tertii secundi L 15 et dupla: duplaque L [ A N ]
6 tunc B [ V F P S ] om. L [ A N C G ] 19-20 proportionalem__ sicut om. L
8 scilicet o m .B [ C ] 21 partem om. L
9 illarum L [ N C G ] 22-23 N u n c__ 24 o m .L
Part III, Chapter ix 4 U
forms more to [the scope of] this treatise, and suffices. Therefore I shall pass over
the other [demonstration].
IILix Another example of the same1
Let there be imagined a line A B [see Fig. 23] divided infinitely into desig­
nated parts continually proportional according to the ratio o f 4 to 1, so that the
first proportional part is three-fourths o f the whole, the second is three-fourths o f
the first remainder, the third is three-fourths o f the second remainder and so on
successively to infinity. Thus i f the whole line were as 64, then the first proportion­
al part, according to this division, w ould be 48, the second w ould be 12, the third
would be 3, and the fourth w ould be three-fourths o f the remainder, i.e., § o f 1,
and so on. W ith this posited, let a surface o f some uniform altitude be imagined as
standing on the first part o f line A B , and on the second part a surface tw ice as
high, on the third one four times as high, on the fourth one eight times as high, and
so on to infinity, always doubling the height, so that the altitude proceeds to
increase continually according to the ratio o f 2 to 1 and the base length is continual­
ly diminished according to the ratio o f 1 to 4. A n d so the surface o f the second
part is related to that o f the first b y being one-fourth o f it in length and tw ice it in
heigh t; the third is similarly related to the second, and the fourth to the third, and
proceeding thus to the end. I say, therefore, that the w hole surface or figure is
precisely tw ice the first part, i.e. tw ice the part which stands over the first propor­
tional part o f line A B .
P ro o f: Let the surface over the first part be as 48. Therefore the surface over the
second part, if it were no higher than the first, w ould be as 12. H owever, it is
tw ice as high as the first. Therefore the second surface is [actually] as 24. B y the
same reasoning, the third surface is as 12, and the fourth is as 6, proceeding thus
to the end, always by a ratio o f 1 to 2. Hence it is that this ratio o f these surfaces
could be demonstrated by what has been said in the sixth chapter o f this part.
Therefore, we have it that the first part is double the second, the second double the
third, the third double the fourth, and so on successively. Therefore, the first part
is half the whole aggregate o f all the infinite parts, the second is half o f the re­
mainder, and so on. Therefore, the w hole aggregate is precisely double its first
I I L ix
1 See the Commentary, Ill.ix, lines 2-40.
23 12 corr. ex 6 in omnibus M S S (sed diagr. J habet 6)
habet 12) 25 ista: istarum L ipsa [ S G ]
24 6 corr. ex. 3 in omnibus M S S {sed diagr. J
 4i8 D e configurationibus qualitatum e t m otuum Part III, Chapter ix 419

ii
30 aggregatum est precise duplum ad primam eius partem; quod est proposi­ 11
Ii
tum. Illa igitur qualitas que esset similis seu proportionalis in intensione huic
figure in altitudine esset etiam precise dupla ad primam sui partem.
Et eodem modo de velocitate, ut si dies 12 horarum sic foret divisa quod
prima pars proportionalis ipsius esset 9 hore et secunda similiter esset tres
35 quarte residui, et sic consequenter, deinde poneretur quod aliquod mobile
moveretur in prima istarum partium aliqua velocitate et in secunda duplo

A 48 12 34*3/4
B
Fig. 23
Figure in MSS B S J G . Only MS G seems to mark the “ £” part, as the text indicates. MS J also
marks the areas o f the first four parts correctly: 48, 24, 12, 6.

part, which was proposed. Therefore, that quality which would be similar or propor­
tional in intensity to that figure in altitude, would also be precisely double its first
part.
It is the same way with velocity. Suppose that a day of 12 hours were divided so
that the first proportional part of it would be nine hours, and the second would
similarly be three-fourths of the remainder, and so on continually; then suppose
30 partem o m .L some mobile were moved during the first o f these parts with a certain velocity, and
31 esset B L [ A N S G ] est [ V F P C ]
 420 D e configurationibus qualitatum e t m otuum
velocius et in tertia quadruplo velocius et in quarta octuplo et in quinta 1610,
et sic in infinitum intendendo, dico quod si in prima parte diei sic divisi
pertransiret unam leucam, in tota die integra pertransiret precise duas leucas
40 et tamen in infinitum velociter moveretur.
flll.x] Capitulum iom de quodam alio exemplo difformitatis
composite ex partibus uniformibus
et uniformiter difformibus
Sit linea A B in infinitum divisa per signationem partium proportionalium
5 secundum proportionem duplam ut communiter solet fieri, ita quod prima
pars proportionalis sit medietas totius et secunda sit medietas residui et sic
in infinitum. Sitque qualitas prime partis uniformis aliquo gradu, et qualitas
secunde partis sit uniformiter difformis ab eodem gradu usque ad gradum
duplum, et qualitas tertie sit uniformis illo gradu duplo, et qualitas quarte
10 uniformiter difformis ab illo gradu duplo usque ad duplum illius dupli, et
sic consequenter alternati m de aliis partibus ad similitudinem figure hic
posite. D ico igitur quod qualitas totius erit tripla sesquialtera ad qualitatem
prime partis eiusdem, ita quod proportio totius ad illam primam partem erit
sicut 7 ad 2. E t conformiter potest dici de qualitate superficiali vel etiam
15 corporali [Fig. 24].
Conclusio probatur sic: Sumantur partes denominate numero impari,
scilicet i a, 3a, 5a, 7a et sic ultra; tunc patet ex casu quod prima pars est
quadrupla ad tertiam in extensione, et similiter tertia est quadrupla ad quin­
tam in extensione, et quinta ad septimam, et septima ad nonam, et sic de
20 aliis. Rursum patet ex casu quod econtra qualitas tertie est dupla ad qualita­
tem prime in intensione, et qualitas quinte ad qualitatem tertie similiter
dupla in intensione, et sic consequenter. Igitur per predicta in 6° capitulo
huius partis qualitas prime partis est dupla ad qualitatem tertie, et qualitas
tertie est dupla ad qualitatem quinte, et sic de aliis. E rgo totum aggregatum
25 ex omnibus [partibus] denominatis numero impari est precise duplum ad
primam partem que denominatur unitate, que quidem unitas tenet locum
37 velocius om. L 12 tripla L [ A N S ] dupla B [ V F P C G ]
14 7: u n u m L [ C J
I I I . x : B L [ M illegible and not used here] 16 Conclusio: consequentia L
2 partibus om. L / uniformibus: uniformita­ 17 sic om. L [ N A ]
tibus L 20 est dupla tr. L
6 medietas totius: medietas linee A B L totius 24 est L [ A N S G ] om. B f V P S C ]
medietas linee A B [ A N ] / secunda: se­ B L f A N G ] om. [ V P S C ]
cunda pars L [ A N ]
Part III, Chapter x 421
in the second twice as fast, in the third four times as fast, in the fourth eight times as
fast, in the fifth sixteen times as fast, and so on, increasing to infinity. I say that, if
in the first part o f a day thus divided it w ould traverse one league, in the whole day
it would traverse precisely tw o leagues and yet it w ould be m oved infinitely fast.
III.x A certain other example o f a difformity composed
o f uniform and uniformly difform parts1
Let line A B [see Fig. 24] be divided in infinity by the designation o f parts pro­
portional according to a ratio o f tw o to one, as is the common custom, so that the
first proportional part is one-half o f the whole, the second is half o f the remainder,
and so on to infinity. A n d let (1) the quality o f the first part be uniform in a certain
degree, (2) the quality o f the second part be uniformly difform from that same de­
gree to a degree tw ice it, (3) the quality o f the third be uniform in that double de­
gree, (4) the quality o f the fourth be uniformly difform from that double degree to
a degree twice the double degree, proceeding continually and alternately with the
other parts in a manner similar to that o f the figure placed here. Therefore, I say that
the quality o f the w hole w ill be triple sesquialterate to the quality o f the first part o f
it, so that the ratio o f the w hole to that first part w ill be as 7 to 2. One can speak in
the same w ay o f a surface quality or corporeal quality.
P roof o f the conclusion: Let us take the parts denominated by odd numbers,
namely, the first, third, fifth, seventh, and so on. Then it is evident from the case
[posited] that the first part is quadruple the third in extension and similarly the
third is quadruple the fifth in extension, and the fifth the seventh, and the seventh
the ninth, and so on for the others. A gain it is evident from the case that contrari­
wise the quality o f the third is double that o f the first in intensity, and the quality o f
the fifth similarly is double that o f the third in intensity, and so on to the end.
Therefore, by the prior statements made in the sixth chapter o f this part, the qual­
ity o f the first part is double the quality o f the third, the quality o f the third is
double the quality o f the fifth, and so on for the other [odd-numbered parts].
Therefore the total aggregate o f all [the parts] denominated by an odd number
is precisely double the first part which is denominated by unity, unity occupying
/ dupla
I I I .x
1 S e e t h e C o m m e n t a r y , I I I . x , lin e s 4 - 4 7 .
 422 D e configurationibus qualitatum et m otuum 423
Part III, Chapter x

imparis in serie numerorum. Per eundem modum posset ostendi quod
qualitas secunde partis dupla est ad qualitatem quarte, et qualitas quarte
dupla est ad qualitatem sexte, et sic de aliis partibus numeris paribus de-
30 nominatis.
the place o f an odd number in a series o f numbers. B y the same method it can be
shown that the quality o f the second part is double the quality o f the fourth, and
the quality o f the fourth is double that o f the sixth, and so on for the other parts
denominated b y the even numbers. j

28-29 quarte dupla est [ A N S G J o m .L [ F P C J bus a paribus [ A N ] / numeris paribus

quarte dupla B quarte V [ F P C ] numeris imparibus L numeris
29 partibus L [ F P C ] paribus B [ V S G ] parti- B [V A N S G ] margin after 4a part, and the figure in J is very crude.

424 D e configurationibus qualitatum et m otuum
Sed adhuc aliter procedatur, qualitas enim secunde partis est uniformiter
difformis. E rg o per capitulum ~jm huius ipsa tanta est quanta si esset uni­
formis secundum gradum puncti medii. E t ex casu statim sequitur quod
ille gradus puncti medii est sesquialter ad gradum prime partis, scilicet sicut
35 3 ad 2. Igitur qualitas partis secunde tanta est quanta si esset uniformiter
intensior quam prima secundum proportionem sesquialteram, et ipsa est
duplo minus extensa quam prima. E rgo per 6m capitulum huius ipsa qualitas
prime partis est sesquitertia ad qualitatem secunde, ita quod se habet ad eam
sicut 4 ad 3. Sed sicut se habet prima ad secundam, ita se habet tertia ad
40 quartam, et quinta ad sextam, et sic de aliis. E rgo totum aggregatum ex [par­
tibus] denominatis numeris imparibus est sesquitertium ad totum aggrega­
tum ex partibus denominatis numeris paribus. Si igitur, gratia exempli,
prima pars huius qualitatis sit sicut 2, tunc totum aggregatum ex ipsa et
aliis imparibus est sicut 4, ut preostensum est. Igitur totum aggregatum ex
45 omnibus paribus est sicut 3, ut statim visum est. E rgo totalis qualitas est
sicut 7. E st itaque proportio totius qualitatis ad primam sui partem sicut
7 ad 2, i.e., tripla sesquialtera, quod fuit propositum. E t simile potest ad
velocitatem facilius applicari, sicut dictum fuit in capitulo precedenti.
[Ill.xi] Capitulum 1 i mde mensura et extensione in infinitum
qualitatis finite seu velocitatis
Resumatur figura capituli 81 huius partis, cuius figure basis erat linea A B ,
et convertatur ymaginatio aut vertatur figura ita quod basis sive longitudo
5 ipsius sit linea B C in infinitum ultra C protensa et linea B A sit huius figure
prima et maxima altitudo [Fig. 25]. Tunc, sicut in illo 8° capitulo ostende­
batur, totalis superficies seu figura ista est precise quadrupla ad medietatem
superficiei que iacet super primam partem linee, que pars sit B C . Igitur ipsa
totalis superficies dupla est ad superficiem que iacet super B C .
10 Q uod patet aliter, ipsa enim totalis superficies habet infinitas partes,
quarum secunda est ita longa sicut prima et tertia sicut secunda vel prima et
31 procedatur om. [ C J proceditur L [ A ] J B L [N V M P SC G ]
qualitas enim: et L qualitas [ A ]
41 numeris: a numeris L [ A N ]
32 quanta: quanta esset L [ A N ]
42 partibus om. L [ C ] / numeris: a numeris
34 scilicet J L [A J
L [ A N ] ex numeris [ V ] / Si B [ V S G ] sit
35 3: est L [ A N ] / quanta: quanta esset L L [A N FP C ]
37 per om. [ F P ] / 6m capitulum B [ V G ] tr. 43 sit B [ V S G ] om. L [ A N F P C ]
L [ A N S ] 6° capitulo [ F P ]
45 paribus B [ S N ] om. [ A ] partibus paribus
38 sesquitertia L [ V N S ] sesquialtera [ F C ] partibus L [ V P G ]
B [A F P C G ] 47 i.e. om. L scilicet [ G ]
40-41 [partibus] [ F A ] cf. lin. 42 om.
425
Part III, Chapter xi
But let us proceed in still another w ay, for the quality o f the second part is uni­
form ly difform. Therefore, b y the seventh chapter o f this part its quantity is just
as great as i f it were uniform at the degree o f the middle point. A n d from the case
it immediately follows that that degree o f the middle point is sesquialterate the
degree o f the first part, i.e. as 3 to 2. Therefore, the quality o f the second part is
just as great as i f it were uniformly m ore intense than the first part according to a
ratio o f 3 to 2, and it is one-half as extended as the first. Therefore, b y the sixth
chapter o f this [part], the quality o f the first part is sesquitertiate the quality o f the
second part, so that it is related to it as 4 to 3. But as the first part is to the second,
so is the third to the fourth, the fifth to the sixth, and so on for the others. There­
fore, the w hole aggregate o f the parts demonstrated b y odd numbers is sesquiter­
tiate the whole aggregate o f the parts denominated b y even numbers. I f therefore,
for example, the first part o f this quality is as 2, then the whole aggregate o f it and
the other odd numbers is as 4, as was demonstrated before. Therefore, the whole
aggregate o f all the even numbers is as 3, as was just seen. Therefore, the w hole
quality is as 7. A n d so the ratio o f the w hole quality to its first part is as 7 to 2, i.e.
it is a triple sesquialterate ratio, w hich was proposed. A similar [argument] can be
easily applied to velocity, as was said in the preceding chapter.2
IILxi On the measure and extension to infinity o f a finite
quality or velocity1
Let us assume again the figure o f chapter eight o f this part [see Fig. 22], the fig­
ure whose base line was A B , and let us turn the image about or invert the figure so
that its base or length is line B C infinitely extended beyond C , and line B A is the
first and greatest altitude o f this figure [see Fig. 25 ]. Then, as was shown in chapter
eight, the w hole surface or figure is precisely quadruple to half o f the surface
which lies on the first part o f the line, which part is B C . Therefore, this whole
surface is double the surface w hich lies on B C .
This is clear in another way. For the w hole surface has [an] infinite [number] o f
parts, o f w hich the second is as long as the first, the third as the second or first, and
2 Ibid., 47-48. I ll.x i
1 See the Commentary, Ill.xi, lines 3-22.*3
6
5
4
I l l . x i : B L [M not used] tulo [ F P C ]
3 Resumatur: Resumatur igitur [ F P C ] / li­ 7 totalis: talis L [ C ] / seu: sive L [ N G ] / fi­
gura: latitudo in figura L / est om. L j pre-
nea om. L [ A N ]
4 longitudo: magnitudo [ F P C ] scise B
5 B A : AB L [ A N P ] 8 pars sit: est pars L [ A N ] est pars sit [V ]
6 sicut om. L sic B / 8° capitulo tr. L capi­ 10 Q u o d o m . L [ A N ]
 426 D e configurationibus qualitatum e t m otuum Part III, Chapter xii 427

sic de aliis, et secunda est in altitudine subdupla ad primam et tertia ad se­ so on for the others, and the second is one half the first in altitude, and the third the
cundam et sic consequenter. Igitur prima est dupla ad secundam et secun­ second, and so on to the end. Therefore the first is double the second, the second is
da dupla ad tertiam et sic de aliis. E rgo totum est precise duplum ad primam double the third, and so on for the others. Therefore, the w hole is precisely double
15 partem. E t per hoc conversive potest probari conclusio capituli 8* huius. the first part. A n d the conclusion o f the eighth chapter can be proved conversely by
E x quo patet quod qualitas subiecti in infinitum extensi que esset per istam this argument.
figuram ymaginabilis esset precise dupla ad qualitatem prime partis uniformis
illius qualitatis. Consimiliter si aliquod mobile m overetur una die aliquanta
velocitate et secunda die duplo tardius et tertia die duplo tardius quam in
90 secunda et sic in infinitum, nunquam in eternum pertransiret duplum ad
pertransitum in prima die. Sed quocunque spatio dato minori quam duplum
ad pertransitum prima die tantumdem spatium aliquando pertransiret.

[Ill.xii] Capitulum i2m de infinita extensione secundum Fig. 25

quid et mensura qualitatis
finite et uniformis
Corporea qualitas trinam habet dimensionem subiectivam, cuius subiecti
5 seu qualitatis figuratio absque augmento potest multipliciter variari. Et,
gratia exempli [Fig. 26], sit A corpus pedale divisum signative per partes
continue proportionales secundum proportionem duplam, et sit prima B ,
secunda C , tertia D , et sic ultra. Accipiatur itaque prima pars et fiat de ea
unus circulus. Deinde sumatur secunda et adiungatur prime circulariter.
10 Sed tamen in tantum augeatur latitudo ipsius secunde quod totalis circulus
sit duplo magis extensus quam ante et ipsa pars secunda fiat proportionaliter
Figure in MSS B S J G . The figure is reversed in MS / and erroneously drawn there.
From this it is clear that the quality o f a subject infinitely extended which w ould
be imaginable by this figure w ould be precisely double the quality o f the first uni­
form part o f that quality. Similarly, i f some mobile w ould be m oved during one
day with a certain velocity, and during the second day twice as slowly, and during
the third day tw ice as slow ly as during the second day, and so on to infinity, never
in eternity w ould it traverse tw ice that w hich it w ould traverse during the first day.
But it w ould sometimes traverse a quantity o f space equal to any given space less
than double that traversed on the first day.

Ill.xii On the qualified infinite extension and measure o f a

finite and uniform quality

A corporeal quality has three dimensions o f subject. The figuration o f such a

13 sic consequenter: quarta ad tertiamL/"A N ]
13-14 Igitur... tertiam om. L [ A N ]
15 potest [ A N F P S C G ] posset B L [ V ]
18 Consimiliter B L f N S G ] similiter [ A V F
PC]
19 die1 om. L.
19-20 et2... secunda B [ V F P S ] quam in pri­
ma [ A N ] quam in secunda L
19 duplo2 B [ S V ] triplo [ F P C G ]
21 die: parte [ A N ]
22 prima die B [ V P F C ] tr. L [ A N ] in prima
die [ S G ]
I l l . x i i : B L [AI not used]
6 signative B [ F P G , ? C ] (cf. I I I .i x , lin. 2;
et I I I .x , lin. 4) figurative L [ V A N S ]
8 de ea: de illa L [ A N ] {et tr. L [ A N ] post
itaque in linea 8)
9 secunda: secunda et sit B L secunda pars
/"(T/dupla [ C ]
ix proportionaliter B [V F P C ] secundum
oportunitatem seu (sive A ) proportionali­
ter L [ A N ] secundum oportunitatem [ S G ]
subject or quality can be varied in many ways w ithout its augmentation.
For example,1 [see Fig. 26] let A be a body o f a foot quantity divided by the
designation o f parts continually proportional according to a ratio o f 2 to 1. Let B
be the first part, C the second, D the third, and so on. A nd so let the first part be
taken and a circle [i.e. a cylinder] be made o f it. Then let the second be taken and
added to the first circularly. But, however, let the width o f the second be so in­
creased that the total circle is twice as extended as before; and this second part is
proportionally less deep so that it [i.e., the increase in extension] can take place
I ll.x ii
1 S e e t h e C o m m e n t a r y , I l l . x i i , l in e s 5 - 1 9 .
 428 D e configurationibus qualitatum e t m otuum
minus profunda, quod potest fieri absque augmento et absque rarefactione
illius partis secunde, scilicet per solam transfigurationem. Deinde adiungatur
tertia pars proportionalis ipsius, que est D , et fiat totalis circulus triplo
latior, et iterum quarta et fiat circulus quadruplo latior, et postea quinta
conformiter, et sic de aliis, et semper sine augmento et sine rarefactione per
solam transfigurationem. H oc facto, patet statim quod A corpus erit in
infinitum longum et in infinitum latum et tamen non erit augmentatum sed
precise equale pedali.
N unc autem ad propositum eodem m odo possibile est ad ymaginationem
quod aliqua qualitas finita, sicut gravitas unius fibre, sit in infinitum longa
et in infinitum lata et cum hoc ubique uniformis seu uniformiter intensa,
quoniam subiectum quod est uniformiter grave et unius fibre potest trans­
figurari et extendi m odo predicto absque alteratione seu remissione vel in­
tensione gravitatis. Possibile est igitur quod talis qualitas sic extensa sit
solam om. L libre [ N J
libre B [ V F C G ] linee L [ P ] linee puta 24-25 seu... intensione om. [ F P C ] / vel in-
libre unius [ A J linee in altero unius tensione om. L
429
Part III, Chapter xii
A
Fig. 26
Figure in MSS B S G . MS B marks through part F , MS J through part G , and MS G through part
E . In the lower figure, the viewer is to imagine he is looking from below at a series o f successively
thinner and wider cylindrical disks all on the same axis, while the upper figure is a cube represent­
ed by one o f its faces.
without any augmentation and without rarefaction o f that second part, i.e. so that
it can take place by transfiguration alone. Then the third proportional part o f the
body, i.e., D , is added and the total circle is made three times as w ide [as it was
at first], and the fourth part is added to make a circle four times as w ide; and after­
wards a fifth [is added] in the same way, and similarly for the other parts, and this
is always done w ithout augmentation and w ithout rarefaction, [i.e., it is done] by
transfiguration alone. W ith this done, it is immediately evident that body A w ill
be infinitely long and infinitely w ide and yet it w ill not be augmented but w ill be
equal precisely to a foot.
N o w in regard to the subject at hand, it is possible in the same way to imagine
that some finite quality, e.g., gravity o f one pound, is infinitely long and infinitely
wide, and in addition that it is everywhere uniform or uniformly intense, since the
subject which is uniform ly heavy and one pound in w eight can be transfigured and
extended in the aforesaid way w ithout alteration or the intensive decrease or in­
crease o f [its] gravity. It is possible, therefore, for such a quality extended in this
 43° D e configurationibus qualitatum et m otuum Part III, Chapter xiii 43 1

uniformis, et possibile est quod esset difformiter difformis, sed non esset
possibile quod esset uniformiter difformis; quod videtur aliquibus mirabile,
et tamen pulchrum est et facile speculari. Si in corpore prius fabricato protra­
hatur per punctum B una linea recta infinita ad utramque partem acsi ipsa
30 esset dyameter circuli infiniti ut sic loquatur, illius linee qualitas linearis
uniformis erit designabilis per figuram superficialem infinitam utrinque
finite altam uniformiter et in infinitum longam et per consequens simpliciter
infinitam. Sed implicat contradictionem, nec est ymaginabile, quod sit super­
ficies in infinitum longa utrinque cuius altitudo sit uniformiter difformis.
35 Unde patet quod qualitas uniformiter difformis non potest esse extensa modo
predicto.
Item autem in corpore predicto esset superficies infinita cuius qualitas
uniformis esset designabilis per corpus simpliciter infinitum, licet non undi­
que, et tamen totalis corporea qualitas esset simpliciter finita. Inde posset sumi
40 argumentum quod punctus non est aliquid, nec linea nec superficies, sicut
arguebatur 40 capitulo huius partis. A dhuc autem ex hoc posset argui quod
necesse est corpus agens agere secundum eius profundum et non solum
secundum superficiem terminantem; si enim esset corpus finitum lucidum
predicto m odo extensum et ageret solum secundum superficiem extremam
45 indivisibilem secundum profundum, iam sequitur quod illa lux superficialis
finita ageret in medio infinito propinquo ad extra lumen simpliciter in­
finitum, et quod effectus agentis finiti esset simpliciter infinitus.
way to be uniform, and it is possible for it to be difformly difform. But it is not
possible for it to be uniform ly difform, w hich seems marvelous to some. Y e t it is
beautiful and easily conceived. I f in the body previously fabricated, a straight line
is drawn through point B and extended infinitely in both directions as if, so to
speak, it were the diameter o f an infinite circle,2 the uniform linear quality o f that
line w ill be designatable by a surface figure infinite on both sides and uniformly,
but finitely, high and infinitely long, and thus absolutely infinite. B ut it implies a
contradiction, nor is it imaginable, for a surface to be infinitely long in both direc­
tions whose altitude is uniformly difform. W hence it is evident that a quality uni­
form ly difform cannot be extended in the aforesaid method.
A lso in the aforesaid body there w ould be an infinite surface whose uniform
quality w ould be designatable by a body absolutely infinite— although not infinite
in all dim ensions; and yet the total corporeal quality w ould [itself] be absolutely
finite. Thence the argument could be advanced that a point is not something, nor
is a line, nor is a surface, as was argued in the fourth chapter o f this part.3 Further­
more, it could also be argued from this [case] that it is necessary for an agent to
act according to its depth and not merely according to its limiting surface. For if
there were a finite luminous body extended in the aforesaid way, and i f it w ould
act only according to its terminal surface indivisible as to depth, it n ow follow s
that a finite surface-light w ould produce, in the neighboring infinite medium out­
side, a light which was absolutely infinite, and that the effect o f a finite agent w ould
be absolutely infinite.

[Ill.xiii] Capitulum 13111 de infinita extensione simpliciter Ill.xiii On the absolute infinite extension o f a finite
qualitatis finite atque difformis and difform quality1

Qualitas finita potest ymaginari in infinitum extendi simpliciter undique A finite quality can be imagined as being extended infinitely in an absolute w ay
sine eius augmento, dum tamen eius intensio proportionaliter minuatur. Sed and in every dimension w ithout its augmentation, so long as its intensity is pro­
5 non potest fieri sine difformitate difformi. Sit enim A unum corpus simplici- portionally decreased. But this cannot be done w ithout difform difformity. For let
26 est: essetF[NJ
alteram [ G ] utrinque infinite altera L finite
26-27 sed... difformis om. L[A] altam B [ V J finite alteram [ A P ] finite al­
26 esset2 B [ VFP] est [NCSGJ tera [ F ] finite alteri [ C ] altam [ N ]
27 aliquibus: aliquoddam [ V] 2 Ibid., lines 28-30. I ll.x iii
32 uniformiter: difformiter [ S G] 3 Ibid., lines 37-41. 1 See the Commentary, Ill.xiii, lines 3-27.
28 tamen om. L[AJ
34 utrinque L [ S G ] om. B [ V N F P C ] utrius-
28-30 in ... loquatur L[ANSG] cf. comm. que [ A ] / altitudo B [ V S G J latitudo
enim a puncto B protrahatur linea recta L[ANFPC] I ll.x iii: B F
finita L
infinita in corpore prius fabricato B[VFP 38 esset: erit L 40 punctum F / nec linea om. L [ S G ] 3 finita o m .F / undique: undiquaque/- V A N ]
C] 38-39 undique [ V F P C G ] undiquaque 41 ex hoc om. L [ G ] undequaque[ S ]
29 recta om. [SJ / ad ... partem om. [S] B L [ A N ] undequaque [S ] 5 A : a.b. L [ A N ]
43 secundum: secundum eius [ S P ]
3o linee: libre [ V ] 5-6 simplex A
39 tamen om.L[A N ] / corporea: corporee L 43-44 terminantem... superficiem om. F
31-32 utrinque finite altam [SJ utrinque finite corporea vel corporis [ A N ] / finita: in- 44 et om. F vel B
 432 D e configurationibus qualitatum e t m otuum
ter infinitum undique, scilicet ad omnem partem, et quod totum occupet.
Sitque una qualitas finita, quecunque sit, et causa exempli sit gravitas unius
libre, que ymaginetur dividi per partes proportionales continue secundum
proportionem duplam. Accipiatur itaque medietas istius qualitatis et ymagine-
io tur poni in una spera, quantalibet signata, ubilibet in isto corpore infinito, et
sit B [Fig. 27]. Deinde sumatur secunda pars proportionalis, scilicet me­
dietas residui illius gravitatis, et ponatur in una spera equali prime et infor­
met eam totam et que sit sumpta in isto corpore infinito et circumdet con­
centrice aliam primo sumptam, et sit C . E t quoniam ista gravitas est duplo
15 minor quam prima et equaliter extenditur, ideo proportionaliter— scilicet
in duplo— sit minus intensa. Postea sumatur tertia pars proportionalis gra­
vitatis premisse et coextendatur vel informet tertiam speram equalem et
concentricam prime ve l secunde, que sit D , et sit ut prius qualitas illa propor­
tionaliter minus intensa, et ita fiat de aliis conformiter et consequenter in
20 infinitum. Igitur si esset aliquod corpus simpliciter et undique infinitum,
non repugnaret quin aliqua eius qualitas, sicut gravitas, foret extensa a
principio, sicut gravitas unius libre extenderetur in casu nunc posito. Q uo
dato, statim patet quod huiusmodi gravitas est extensa in infinitum un­
dique et quod ubique in isto corpore infinito est aliquid illius gravitatis
6 undique L [ F M P C ] undiquaque
17-18 informet.. .prius om. [ V ]
B [ V A N G ] undequaque [ S ] 17 et2: vel.L
9 istius B [ V G ] om. [ A N ] proportionalis B 18 prima B
ius [ S ] illius [ F M P C ]
20 et undique tr. B post infinitum
10 assignata L [ A N ]
22 extenditur L [ V ]
15 scilicet om. [ A ] si L [ S ] videlicet [ C ]
Part III, Chapter xiii 433
A be a body w hich is absolutely infinite on all sides, i.e. in every direction, and
which occupies everything. A n d let there be a finite quality, whatever it may be,
and, for example, let it be a gravity o f one pound. L et this finite quality be imag­
ined as divided into parts continually proportional according to a ratio o f 2 to 1. A n d
let half o f this quality be assumed and let it be imaginatively placed in a sphere,
designated as large as w e like, a sphere located anywhere w e like in this infinite
body, and let the sphere be B [see Fig. 27]. Then let the second proportional part
be taken, evidently the part that is half o f the remainder o f the gravity, and let it
be placed in a sphere [-like shell] that is equal to the first sphere, and let it spread
Fig. 27
Figure in MSS B G . MS B marks B as “ medietas,” C as “ 2a” , D as “ 3a” . MS G includes and
letters a further part E . The symbol <f>in M S B seems to stand for “ sphere.”
its form to the whole o f the sphere, and let the second sphere [-like shell] be placed
in the infinite body, concentric w ith the sphere first assumed. Let this sphere [-like
shell] be C . A n d since the gravity [in C ] is one half in quantity that o f the first
sphere and is equally extended, therefore it is proportionally less intense, i.e. is
half as intense. Then let the third proportional part o f the premised quality be taken
and extended in, or spread its form in, a third sphere [-like shell] equal and concen­
tric to the first or second, the third sphere being designated as D , and as before let
that quality be proportionally less intense. Let this [same process] be done for the
other [proportional parts] in a comparable manner and successively to infinity.
Therefore, i f there were some body simply infinite on all sides [i.e. in all dimen­
sions], it w ould not be contradictory for some quality o f it, such as gravity, to be
extended from an initial amount, just as the gravity o f one pound w ould be ex­
tended in the case just posed. W ith this given, it is immediately evident that gravity
o f this kind is extended in infinity on all sides and that there is some o f that finite
gravity everywhere in the infinite body. Therefore, it is not necessary for the force
 434 D e configurationibus qualitatum e t m otuum Part III, Chapter xiii 435

25 finite. N on oportet igitur ut corporis infiniti virtus sit infinita nisi ipsa foret
uniformiter extensa aut difformitate difformi reducibili seu equivalenti
uniformitati in infinitum extense. Multa quidem alia possent ex predictis
inferri, sed hec tanquam quedam elementa sufficiant gratia exercitii et ex­
empli.
30 E t de uniformitate et difformitate intensionum dictum sit in tantum.
E xplicit [tractatus de configurationibus qualitatum reverendi doctoris
magistri N ycolai Ore<s)me].
o f an infinite body to be infinite unless that pow er w ould be uniformly extended or
extended w ith a difform difformity reducible or equivalent to a uniformity infinite­
ly extended. M any other things could be inferred from what has been said, but
these things, like certain elements, suffice for the sake o f exercise and example.
And enough has been said o f the uniformity and difformity o f intensities. [Thus]
ends [the Treatise on the Configurations o f Qualities o f Master Nicholas Oresme].

25 £ote.tom .L finis huius tractatus quem sedi feci pari-

26 extensa B L [ V A N S G ] intensa [ F M P C J ]
/ difformitate: difformiter [ V ]
27 possunt B [ P C ]
28 sufficiant tr. L post exercitii
28-29 gratia... exempli om. [ S ] / et exempli
om. L [ A N ]
30 E t . . .tantum B [ V F M P C G ] om.
L [ A N S J ] I E t1 B [ C V F M ] E t hoc [ P ]
A c [ G ] / et2: ac B [ V ] / intensionum B [ V
G ] om. [ F M P C ]
31 ante Explicit add. [ A N C ] Deo gratias
31-32 E xplicit.. ,Ore<s>me [ N ] om. [ C ] Fi­
nit de configurationibus reverendi doctoris
magistri Nicolai orem L et cetera Explicit
B {et hic add. B tabulam capitulorum cum titulo
sequenti: Tractatus de figuratione, potentia,
et mensura qualitatum cf. Proem, lin. 7);
Explicit tractatus de configurationibus
qualitatum*1 qui vulgari nomine vocatur
de latitudinibus formarum etc. A {et in
marg. add. A signum q et scr. incipit alius
tractatus, et secundum veritatem Tractatus de
latitudinibus formarum sequitur)', Et sic est
sius anno domini 1410. Explicit tractatus
Magistri Nicolay oresme de uniformitate
et difformitate intensionum seu configu-
racione qualitatum etc. F {et mg. F explicit
tractatus magistri nycolai oresme de uni­
formitate et difformitate intensionum); E t
sic est finis huius tractatus. Deo laus. Arnen.
Explicit tractatus magistri nicholay oresme
de uniformitate et difformitate intensio­
num. Deo gratias. Amen. amen. Qui plus
vult scribere scribat, ego nolo plus et cetera
P ; E t sic est finis huius tractatus. Explicit
tractatus magistri nicolay oresme de uni­
formitate et difformitate intensionum. Deo
gratias etc__ M ; Explicit tractatus de lati­
tudinibus bis V ; Explicit tractatus utilis
sicut patet intuenti diligenter M. Oreb. S ;
Explicit tractatus de intensione qualitatum
magistri “ orayme “ nicolai {i.e. nicolai
orayme) multum subtilis contra radices artis
magice qui alio nomine vocatur tractatus
gloriosus G ; Explicit J
 Commentary

This commentary is largely limited to locating the sources quoted and used by
Oresme. Explanatory material is held to a minimum since I have expounded the
doctrine and its history at considerable length in Introduction I and II. T he cita­
tions to the various works o f Oresme in this commentary are ordinarily in abbrevi­
ated form. A fuller bibliographical form can be found in the Bibliography. In­
cidentally, when a standard classical author such as V irgil, Cicero, Boethius, and
the like is cited by Oresme, I have merely called attention to the pertinent passage
in the footnotes given with the translation. But if some question o f authorship
needs further explanation, I have in those footnotes directed the reader to the
Commentary.

Proemiwn : I :o

2 “ ymaginationem meam” — I have indicated in Introduction III.E that this

phrase may w ell be a reference to his prior consideration o f the configuration
doctrine in the Questions on the Geometry o f Euclid, a possibility already men­
tioned by A . Maier,^«<^rGra^;£!, 3 4 5 .C f.V .P . Z ou b ov, Traktat, 720, n. 1. In­
cidentally, I have renderedymaginatio w ith the English “ conception.” Per­
haps it has the more specific meaning o f “ imaginative scheme,” as it so often
does in the w orks o f Oresme and other fourteenth century scholastics. See m y
remarks in Introduction I.A , fn. 26.
4 “ exercitationi” — Presumably an “ exercise” leading to a determining o f the
truth. See Oresm e’s D e mutationibusmonetarum{zd. o f Johnson, i)w hereO resm e
uses the phrase: “ exercitari ad determinandum veritatem.”
5 “ discipline” — Oresme in his L e Livre de ethiques (ed. o f Menut, 103), says: “ II
ententpar art science pratique et par doctrine science speculative,” explaining
the first sentence o f the Ethics. But later in a comment on that same first
chapter {ibid., 105) we read: “ et entent par discipline science speculative.”
Thus there seems to be an identification o f disciplina with doctrina and both wi th
scientia speculativa.

437
 438 De configurationibus qualitatum et motuum
Li
5 “ ut vult Philosophus” — The primary reference seems to be to Aristotle’s
Metaphysics, Bk. X , Chap, i, 1052b, which in the M oerbeke translation (see ed.
with the Expositio o f Aquinas, Bk. 10, lectio II, Text N o. 820 [Turin, Rome,
i 95° j 464]) begins as fo llo w s: “ Maxime vero in eo quod est metrum esse pri­
mum uniuscuiusque generis, et maxime proprie quantitatis. H inc enim ad alia
venit. Metrum etenim est, quo primo quantitas cognoscitur....” For the im­
portance o f this passage to Oresme, see m y discussion in Introduction II.A ;
and particularly for Oresm e’s reference to it in his Questions on the Physics, see
fn. 7.
7-9 “ E tsi...co gn o scen d is.” — Oresme suggests here an opinion that geometrical
entities are really “ nichil,” i.e., they are mere mathematical fictions useful for
the “ measures o f things” and “ for the understanding o f their ratios.” This is
one o f the three possible and tw o probable ways o f conceiving o f a point and
other geometrical entities as discussed by Oresme in his Questiones de spera
from which I quote tw o pertinent passages (see M. Clagett, in A ctes du Sym­
posium International R .J . Boskovic 1961, 218-20): “ For the solution o f this
question, there is one w ay which posits that a point is nothing other than a
body o f the genus o f quantity or substance, if quantity is substance. But the
supporters o f this view have to concede that a point is divisible and that it is
m oved and many other similar concessions__ But these conclusions (or con­
cessions) do not accord w ith the ancient expositors and authors. A ccordingly
I shall not treat [it] this way. N o w in addition to this there are tw o other, prob­
able ways. The one is that a point does not exist in the nature o f things but is
only feigned by imagination. The other is that a point is an indivisible ac­
cident w hich is reductively posited in the genus o f quantity.” (“ Sciendum
quod de solutione istius questionis est una via, que ponit quod punctus non
est aliud quam corpus de genere quantitatis vel substantie si quantitas sit sub­
stantia. E t isti habent concedere quod punctus est divisibilis, et quod movetur,
et sic de aliis— et quia non bene concordant cum dictis antiquorum exposi­
torum et auctorum, ideo non pertracto eam. E t preter istam sunt alie due vie
probabiles. Una est quod punctus non est aliquid in rerum natura sed solum
fingitur per ymaginationem. Alia est quod punctus est unum accidens indivi­
sibile quod ponitur in genere quantitatis reductive.” ) “ It was seen above [in
the first question] how it can be supported that points, lines, and surfaces are
certain accidents made distinct from the body and in the genus o f quantity.
N o w it remains to be seen how one can support another w ay which posits
that lines, points, etc. are nothing {nihil) but are only imagined to exist.”
(“ Visum est supra quom odo potest substineri quod puncta, linee, et super­
ficies sunt quedam accidentia distincta a corpore de genere quantitatis. N unc
restat videre qualiter alia via potest substineri que ponit quod linee, puncta,
Commentary to I.i-I.ii 439
etc. nihil sunt, sed solum ymaginantur esse.” ) In the. Questiones de spera, Ores­
me does not decide between the tw o probable views (“ points, lines, etc. are
indivisible accidents o f the soul” or “ points, lines, etc. are nothing but are
only imagined to exist” ) and he argues the probability o f each view in tw o
separate arguments. In the D e configurationibus he clearly leans toward the
view o f these entities as fictions; in addition to the statement here on which
we are commenting, see IIL iv, lines 34-43, and IILxii, lines 37-41. In the first
o f these additional passages Oresme advances the argument that it m ight be
the fictional character o f these entities that makes it possible sometimes, when
applying these entities, to infer a conclusion about natural actions which is
actually improbable or impossible. In his Questiones super de celo Bk. II, Quest.
7 (Kren text, 543, lines 187-89), there is no doubt o f his opinion that they are
fictional; at least the point is considered fictional when associated w ith the
center o f the world. Furthermore, such is certainly a conventional view . A nd
one could hardly use this view as appearing in a lengthy discussion in the
anonymous Questiones de anima included in M S Bruges, Stadsbibl. 477, 27°r—
71 r, as a basis for deciding that h z Questiones belong to Oresme, particularly
as they differ markedly from h e Questiones specifically attributed to Oresme in
tw o manuscripts: M unich, Staatsbibl. cod. 761, 40V, and Bruges 514, 97r (but
such seems to be the argument o f R. Mathieu in Archives d'histoire doctrinale et
litteraire du moyen age, V ol. 31 [1957], 25 2-5 3.). Incidentally, Alhazen in a sim­
ilar fashion holds that visual rays are imaginary (“ D icere ergo esse radios, est
nihil, et omnes mathematici dicentes esse radios, non utuntur in demonstra­
tionibus nisi lineis imaginariis tantum.” Opticae thesaurus, [Basel, 1572], 15).
Cf. G . Federici Vescovini, in Centaurus, V ol. 10 (1964), 19.
40-41 “ ymaginationem” — The contrast between secundum rem and secundum yma­
ginationem made here by Oresme is clear evidence that he considers the specific,
external figure representing the quality as a fictional entity not existing as such
in the matter (i.e., as a specific geometrical figure). See my general discussion
o f this in the beginning o f Introduction I.B, and below in the Commentary,
I.xxii, lines 4-6.
I.ii
2-24 “ O m nis.... sequenti.” — In this and the next chapter Oresme makes a case for
interchanging the terms latitudo and longitudo as applied to qualities. Partly on
the basis o f an analogy w ith local m otion and partly on the basis o f the use o f
these terms in geometry, he w ould prefer to call intensity by the name o f longi­
tudo and extension by that o f latitudo. But since, he notes in the next chapter,
the impropriety o f the current names produces no real difference, he settles
for the accustomed locution, for otherwise by using unaccustomed terms he
might be less easily understood. Incidentally, in his earlier exposition in the

440 D e configurationibus qualitatum e t m otuum
Questions on the Geometry o f Euclid (see Appendix I, Quest, io, lines 41-44) he
seems quite satisfied w ith the accustomed terms. A t least he makes no com­
ment to the contrary.
19-20 “ m ulti... caritatis” — For the use o f the term latitudo in connection w ith the
problem o f the intension and remission o f forms and the collateral problem o f
degrees o f charity, see above all A . M aier,Z*m Grundprobleme, 32 et seq. Cf. P.
Duhem , L e Systeme du monde, V ol. 7, 480-5 33, and M. Clagett, in Osiris, V ol. 9
(1950), 132-40.
ida
1 5—T7 “ V eru m tam en ...naturam” — Oresme makes the point that extension is
more immediate than intensity in our cognition o f things. This is perhaps
related to the statement o f III. v that “ the ratio o f intensities is not so properly
or so easily attainable by the senses as is the ratio o f extensions.”
24~27 “ S e d .. .figuram .” — For the distinction between latitude as applied to in­
tensity and latitude as applied to the w hole quantity o f the quality, see M.
Clagett, The Science o f Mechanics, 305^ 362, 395-96. I have made extensive
reference to these tw o different ways o f regarding latitude in Introduction I
and II above.
Liv
8-26 “ Q u o d — assimilari.” — The point that is clearly made in this passage is that
the use o f the figures makes for quicker understanding o f the various aspects
and complexities o f qualities because it gives a method o f presenting the qual­
ities, that is, their difformities and dispositions, visually. T he ymaginatio or
conceptual scheme o f figures “ is a great help in the understanding o f things.”
Sensible figures supply the key to ready and easy understanding o f concepts
like uniformity and difformity, and particularly o f uniform difformity which is
difficult for people to understand without the aid o f figures. The same point
was made in justification o f the use o f the figures in the Questions on the Geom­
etry o f Euclid (Appendix I, Quest. 10, lines 88-91).
27-28 “ G lo s a .. .claritate.” — See Biblia sacra cum glossis etc. V ol. 6 (Lyon, 1545),
io 2v: “ i.e., assimilabimur corpori illius in claritate quam habuit in trans­
figuratione.” For a discussion o f the compilation o f the Glossa ordinaria, see
B. Smalley, The Study o f the Bible in the Middle -Ages, 46—66. The central figure
was Anselm o f Laon.
39 “ quartam dimensionem” — He makes a similar point concerning the non­
necessity o f having a fourth dimension in his Questions on the Geometry o f Euclid
(Appendix I, Quest. 10, lines 50-58; Quest. 11, lines 110-12). There he quotes
a line o f argument from A ristotle’s D e caelo (see Appendix I, Quest. 10, Foot­
note 5) and from Campanus’ version o f the Elements {Ibid., Quest. 11, F oot­
Commentary to I.iii—
I.vii 441
note 13). Oresme adds the further argument in his commentary in the Livre
du del, fols. 4a-4b (ed. o f Menut [1968], 46) that one can imagine only three
lines mutually intersecting a point at right angles to each other.
I.v
9-10 “ aliter. . . subiectum” — I have discussed the significance o f the fact that
Oresme requires the intensity lines to be perpendicular to the base line, for
“ otherwise the intensity and the quality w ould be outside the subject.” The
obvious meaning o f this is that if the lines were not perpendicular, not only
w ould they be outside o f the subject vertically (and this he was prepared to
grant in order to have some geometric representation o f intensity w hich is
not itself geometrical) but they w ould also have to be outside o f the subject
laterally, in the sense that the surface representing the w hole quantity o f the
quality w ould not then be directly above the subject line. He had already ad­
mitted that it was quite possible to have the intensity lines intersecting the
subject line at an angle other than a right angle. But it w ould be more fitting
from the standpoint o f what one m ight call physical intuition to have the
quality kept within the lateral bounds o f the subject. Cf. th&Questions on the
Geometry of Euclid, Appendix I, Quest. 11, 130-3 3.
16 “ semicirculo maiorem” — Cf. xMzQuestions on the Geometry o f Euclid, Appendix
I, Quest. 11, lines 134-3 5.
I.vi
4 -7 “ N u lla ... ymaginate.” — This is the first statement o f the suitability doctrine
that lies at the heart o f Oresm e’s system. It w ill be made more precise in the
succeeding chapter. I have already described its importance in Introduction
I.B.
9 “ [in] duplo” — I have bracketed in, since, in general, the first tradition has
merely duplo, triplo, etc., while the second adds in before these adverbs, but in
line 9, most o f the manuscripts o f both traditions have in. T he bracketing
merely calls attention to this fact, even though I reject it as a reading.
I.vii
4-8 “ F igura...intensione.” — This constitutes a definition o f the phrase that
characterizes the suitability doctrine, namely, a figure that is “ proportional in
altitude to the quality in intensity.” T he phrase is repeated often in the suc­
ceeding discussions. I have discussed it in Introduction I.B.
15-16 “ quare... designatur.” — It is from this phrase and the title o f this chapter that
I have coined the expression “ suitability doctrine.” The expression merely
 442 D e configurationibus qualitatum e t m otuum
reflects the statement emphasized here that a quality is most fittingly or suit­
ably designated or represented by a figure that is “ proportional in altitude to
the quality in intensity.”
20-23 “ ita .. .altitudinis.” — This constitutes an important proviso to the general
statement that any figure whose altitudes (ordinates) were in the same ratio as
the intensities w ould be suitable. The proviso merely holds that when we are
comparing qualities, w e must take as the basis o f our comparison some specific
figure o f the infinite possible figures o f the same kind.
Lviii
25, 27 “ 4am 6‘” — Proposition V I.4 in the Campanus version o f the Elements used
by Oresme reads (ed. o f Basel, 1546, 141): “ Omnium duorum triangulorum,
quorum anguli unius angulis alterius sunt aequales, latera aequos angulos
continentia sunt proportionalia.”
28 “ u am quinti” — Proposition V .1 1 in the Campanus version o f the. Elements
reads (ibid., 121): “ Si fuerint quantitatum proportiones alicui uni aequales,
ipsas quoque proportiones sibi invicem aequales esse necesse est.”
I.xiv
14-54 “ N u n c— circularis.” — I have emphasized in Introduction I.B the impor­
tance o f this section. It indicates Oresm e’s altered treatment o f the problem o f
the quality represented by a semicircle (see also my remarks in the introduc­
tion to Appendix I). A s I have said, Oresme now realized in the D e configura­
tionibus that such a quality could be represented by higher or low er figures
whose altitudes (i.e., ordinates) are in the same ratio as those o f the semicircle.
He was puzzled as to what kinds o f figures these w ould be. H e definitely re­
jects the possibility that the figures o f higher altitude could be segments o f a
circle, while he says that he w ill not consider the case o f the figures o f lower
altitudes. Incidentally, the compositor o f M S J o f the D e configurationibus in­
dependently proves the case o f the figures low er than the semicircle and fur­
ther suggests that a similar p ro o f can be constructed for the case o f the figures
higher than the semicircle (see Appendix III). Unfortunately, Oresme had
little or no knowledge o f conic sections. For, in fact, the conditions he speci­
fies for these curves comprise one o f the basic ways o f defining ellipses: i f the
ordinates o f a circle x2 -f- y 2 = a2 are all shrunk (or stretched) in the same ratio
a/b, the resulting curve is an ellipse whose equation is x 2/a2 + y 2/b2 = 1.
Hence, w ithout realizing it, Oresme has given conditions which show that
the circle is merely one form o f a class o f curves w e call elliptical. It should be
remarked that even if Oresme had had some knowledge o f G reek conic sec­
tions, he might w ell have had difficulty in applying the G reek formulation o f
Commentary to I.viii-I.xv 443
the ellipse to his figures, which are like curves in Cartesian geometry. C.
B oyer’s remarks on the basic difference between the manner o f representing
the ellipse in Cartesian coordinates and that o f Apollonius are o f interest in
connection with this problem : “ G reek geometers did not seek to reduce the
number o f unknown quantities or lines in a figure to one or tw o, as is done in
astronomy or in plane Cartesian coordinates, but they sought instead to make
as simple as possible the relationships in terms o f areas. For example, in modern
notation the equation o f an ellipse w ith respect to a vertex is written as
(x — a)1 y2
= 1,
a2 b2
where x and y are the tw o unknown lines OQ and P Q ... Apollonius w ould
express this same property in rhetorical language equivalent to the ab­
breviated notation
PQ2 O Q -Q V
C D 2~ O C - C V ’
where C is the center and O H is the major axis, a form involving a third
unknown lin e ,^ H . That is, his equations for the ellipse and hyperbola are in
terms o f an ordinate and two abscissas.” (History o f Analytic Geometry, 28-29).
48 “ ultimam sexti” — Euclid V I. 32 in the Campanus version (Basel, 1546, 166)
reads: “ Si in circulis aequalibus supra centrum sive supra circunferentiam
anguli consistant, erit angulorum proportio tanquam proportio arcuum illos
angulos suscipientium.” There seems to be no doubt that Oresme meant to
cite this particular proposition (only the late manuscripts J G have penultimam
sexti instead o f ultimam sexti). It does not seem to me, how ever, to be appro­
priate, since Oresm e’ s argument is couched in terms o f circular segments and
not sectors.
I.xv
5 “ curvitate irrationali” — Thus non-circular curves are labeled as “ irrational.”
Cf. his Questiones de spera, Quest. 7 (ed. o f Droppers, 134, lines 61-63 '■>M S Vat.
lat. 2185, 73V, c.2): “ 3a distinctio est quod aliquid dicitur m overi secundum
 444 D e configurationibus qualitatum e t m otuum
lineam curvam irrationalem et est illa que non est portio alicuius circuli. A liud
dicitur m overi secundum lineam curvam rationalem que est circulus vel pars
circuli.” Actually, Oresme’s classification o f rational curves in the D e con­
figurationibus is broader than that in the D e spera since it also includes figures
that are “ proportional in altitude to some segment o f a circle,” that is, the
figures mentioned in the previous chapter.
I.xv i
7 “ Cum __ composite.” — This passage indicates the existence in Oresm e’s
circle o f some kind o f rule for determining the number o f combinations o f n
things taken k at a time, and thus embraced by the modern form ulation:
( k ) = K5 ^ t j T k ! ] -
Oresme, it w ill be noticed, determines “ b y arithmetical rules” the correct
answer for the number o f combinations o f six things taken tw o at a time,
then three at a time, and then four at a time. But he clearly erred in the case
o f five at a time, when giving the number o f combinations as “ 5” rather
than as “ 6.” Pierre Duhem, L e Systeme du monde, V ol. 7, 546, in translating this
passage simply changes “ 5” to “ 6” w ithout specific comment, but he clearly
implies in a footnote that the numerical error is an error o f the copyist, for he
says there that in this passage in B N lat. 7371 several numbers have been in­
exactly copied. T h e fact is that all o f the manuscripts have “ 5” instead o f “ 6,”
and, furthermore, the figure in lines 2 and 36 for the total number o f composite
difform difformities is given as “ 62,” w hich implies the incorrect figure o f
“ 5.” The correct total is rather “ 63.” Incidentally, when Duhem corrects the
figure o f “ 5” to “ 6,” he fails to correct the total sum to “ 63” (cf. V .P . Z ou bov,
Traktat, 662, w ho corrects both figures and notes D uhem ’s inconsistency).
Still more, a further sum o f all difform difformities given in line 38 is errone­
ously stated by Oresme to be “ 66,” again im plying “ 5” rather than “ 6.” The
correct figure is “ 67” (Zoubov, ibid., 663, notes the correct figure but does not
change the text accordingly). Thus we are faced with the inescapable conclu­
sion that Oresme has made a simple error o f calculation. The appearance o f
the incorrect numbers in all o f the manuscripts is clear testimony to the lack
o f mathematical skill among the copyists.
It should be pointed out that the correct rule for the special case o f taking n
things tw o at a time, namely, ---- —-, was know n in Latin texts since the
2 illo erit principium coniunctionis 4 que multiplicatur per 2 cum dimidio et
time o f Boethius (Cf. H. Wieleitner, in Bibliotheca Mathematica, 3. Folge, V ol.
14 [1913-14], 213-14), and that in this form it is cited at least tw ice in other
w orks o f Oresme (see Grant, Nicole Oresme: “ D e proportionibus proportionum”
Commentary to I.xvi 445
and “ A d pauca respicientes” , 254-57, 406-7). The more general rule fo r the
number o f combinations o f n things taken k at a time was expressed by the
Indian mathematician Bhaskara, ca. 115 o. A somewhat different procedure o f
com puting combinations was know n to Rabbi ben Ezra about the same time
(seeD . E . Smith, History o f Mathematics, V ol. 2,525). His procedures for deter­
mining the number o f possible conjunctions o f the seven planets appear in a
Latin translation o f 1281 o f his ha-Olam under the title, Liber coniunctionum
planetarum et revolutionum annorum mundi qui dicitur de mundo et seculo (see his
Opera [Venice, 1507], -j-jy-^ r): “ Si tu inveneris librum alb. (Albumasaris) de
coniunctionibus planetarum, non acquiescas ei nec audias ipsum, sustentatus
enim est super coniunctiones planetarum secundum medium cursum vel equa-
lem. N on est autem sapiens aliquis qui huic consentiat. Verum namque est pla­
netis esse coniunctiones secundum orbem signorum. A dhuc neque sustenteris
super coniunctiones planetarum secundum tabulas sapientum indorum, vera­
ces enim non sunt neque tanto neque quanto. Rei autem veritas sustentari
super tabulas sapientum experiende seu magistrorum secundum tempus quod­
libet. Coniunctiones vero 120, quarum quidem numerum elicere poterimus
hoc modo. Scitum est quod omnis numerus qui componitur ab uno numero
cum alio quemcumque volueris ex-(78r)-trahi potest per eius multiplicatio­
nem super medietatem propriam et super medietatem unius. Exem pli gratia,
nos volumus scire quantus est numerus qui aggregatur ex uno usque ad 20.
N os multiplicabimus 20 super medietatem suam quod est 10 et super medie­
tatem unius et aggregabitur numerus 210. N unc ergo incipiamus experiri
quantus est numerus coniunctionum binariarum {corr. luminarium), hoc est,
ut si coniungantur per se 2 stelle. Scitur autem quod planete sunt 7, sic enim
erunt saturno cum ceteris planetis sex; multiplicentur ergo 6 per eius medie­
tatem et per medietatem unius et erunt 21. H ic ergo est numerus duplicium
coniunctionum. Deinde {corr. ex quod) si scire voluerimus quot sunt coniunc­
tiones ternarie. Si posuerimus iovem cum saturno et adhuc cum uno plane­
tarum aliorum 5 numerus ascendet usque ad 5 que multiplica per 3a que sunt
medietas numeri et medietas unius et aggregabitur 15. Hee sunt ergo coniunc­
tiones saturni. Tunc erunt coniunctiones iovis 4 que multiplices per 2 et di­
midium et aggregabitur 10. E t coniunctiones martis 3 que multiplices per duo
et erunt 6, coniunctiones vero solis 2 que multiplices per unum cum dimidio
et exibunt 3. Coniunctio autem veneris cum inferioribus est una et super om­
nes insimul 3 5. H ic ergo est numerus coniunctionum ternariarum. Si autem
scire volueris seu extrahere coniunctiones quaternarias, incipiamus a saturno,
iove quidem et marte cum ipso. E t quia oportet quidem 3 coniungantur cum
erunt 10. Postea erunt coniunctiones iovis cum aliis et erunt primo 3; multi­
plices per 2 et exibunt 6 et sunt 16. Deinde incipiet saturnus cum marte et
erunt 2; multiplicentur per 1 et dimidium et erunt 3. Post hec erit una coniunc-
 446 D e configurationibus qualitatum et m otuum Commentary to I.xvi 447

tio, erunt 4 coniunctiones adhuc et coniunctio solis cum inferioribus et erunt ledge o f the Boethian form o f the special case. But a general rule was know n to
per totum 3 5 coniunctiones quaternarie. Deinde (corr. ex Quod) si extrahere L evi ben Gerson and appears in his Sefer macaseh hosheb o f 1321 (see G . Sarton,
volueris coniunctiones quinternarie, nos inveniemus saturno 15, iovi 5, marti Introduction to the History o f Science, V o l. 3, 59 7 ; cf. the note o f G . Enestrom, B i­
1. Tunc erunt coniunctiones quinternarie 21. Coniunctiones vero sexternarie bliotheca Mathematica, 3. Folge, V ol. 14 [1913-14], 261). A lthough I do not
saturni sunt 6, io vi una et sunt 7. Coniunctio autem septenaria non est nisi una. know o f a Latin translation o f this w ork, L evi’s mathematical activity was
Tunc ergo erunt omnes coniunctiones 120 et quarumlibet impar numerus qui known to the Parisian circle. For example, his D e harmonicis numeris o f 1343
per 7 dispartitur. Inquit translator: hec est itaque sermo avenare (Ibn Ezra) was composed at the specific request o f Philippe de V itry, to w hom Oresme
secundum quod iacet in arabico*, sed visum est nobis aut truncatam fuisse dedicated his ow n Algorismus proportionum. Still, I do not kn ow o f any Latin
author other than Oresme w ho demonstrates know ledge o f these combinato­
litteram in exemplari aut salvis bene dictis eius doctrinam nimis confusam
rial rules, beyond the special case for n things taken tw o at a time. In fact,
tradidisse et minus artificiosam.” (I have altered the punctuation somewhat.)
H enry o f Hesse, Oresm e’s junior contemporary, w ho was much influenced by
A s the translator points out, this is a somewhat confused passage. But it does
seem clear that Ibn Ezra is using a form o f the rule for taking n things tw o at a Oresme, expresses the difficulty o f determining the number o f possible com ­
binations o f 22 or 23 letters o f the alphabet (Brit. Museum, Sloane 2156, 128V,
time and extending it successively to planets joined as units o f tw o, three, and
so on (see the interesting article o f J. G insburg in The Mathematics Teacher, c. 2) without mentioning that there are rules to determine such matters. The
best he can do, to illustrate that it w ill be a large number, is to cite the Haly
V ol. 15 [1922], 347-56, in which he translates this passage from the Hebrew
commentary on the Centiloquium attributed to Ptolem y (Prop. 20), where the
and extends Ibn E zra’s treatment to produce general rules). This can be illus­
total number o f possible conjunctions o f only seven planets is specified as 120
trated by follow ing his procedure in the case o f the seven planets conjoined
three at a time. Initially he considers Saturn and Jupiter as a unit, and then without any rules o f calculation.
There is some variation in the figures for this line as given in the various
determines by the rule o f the special case that this unit makes 15 conjunctions
w ith the remaining planets. Then Jupiter is joined with Mars as a unit and this manuscripts. In line 30, all manuscripts having figures except N have the
figure which has been reproduced first in the text. A^’s figure is this: ZHX .B u t
unit makes w ith the remaining planets, excepting Saturn, 10 conjunctions by
follow ing the rule o f the special case. Similarly, Mars joined w ith the sun makes for the second figure, the variation is extensive (and I have simply accepted
with the remaining planets, excepting Saturn and Jupiter, 6 conjunctions ac­ arbitrarily the figure in B ) :
cording to the special rule. Then the sun conjoined w ith Venus produces 3
conjunctions w ith the remaining planets, and Venus conjoined w ith M ercury
makes 1 conjunction w ith the M oon. Hence, the total conjunction o f the seven
planets taken three at a time is 3 5. T he same procedure w ould then be follow ed
for determining the number o f conjunctions o f the planets taken four at a time,
five at a time, and six at a time. The grand total is correctly given as 120 con­
junctions. N o w Oresme might have used a similar procedure which he distilled
from Ibn E zra’s remarks or which he independently drew from his own know-

* The usual (and probably correct) opinion
is that the original text from which this trans­
lation was made was Hebrew (and indeed a
number o f Hebrew manuscripts o f it are ex­
tant), and that it was translated either (1) first
into Old French by Hagin and then into Latin
by Henri Bate (R. Levy, The Astrological Works
of Abraham ibn E%ra, 24-27), or (2) directly
from Hebrew into Latin by Bate in 1281-82
(see colophon, 1507 ed., 85r ; Thorndike in
Isis, Vol. 35 [1944], 294-95). But this passage
seems to say that the translation was made
from an Arabic text (cf. Jules de Saint-Genois,
Catalogue des manuscrits de la Bibliotheque de £ZZ3 = PAE A ^ A =j
G and [Ghent, 1852], MS 417, 37-44). A similar
conclusion was reached by an anonymous Incidentally, my addition in line 29 o f “ [uniformiter]” is based on the fact
author who, in referring to and quoting from
that nine o f the ten manuscripts having figures have a figure that repre­
the D e seculo, says that the translator was
Henricus Bate and that the translation was sents a quality that is composed o f “ uniform and uniformly difform” qualities.
made from Arabic into Latin (MS Paris, BN Hence there can be little doubt that this was Oresme’s intention, although he
lat. 7281, 273r: “ non plus dicit de hoc sed eius may well have committed a slip and written uniformi et difformiter difformi as
translator de arabico in latinum, Flenricus
given in B V C (see variant reading).
Bate, dicit. . . .” ).
 448 De configurationibus qualitatum et motuum Commentary to I.xviii-I.xxi 449

I.xv iii I .x x i
15 “ pyram idibus... multilateris” — Pyramids are classified as either multilateral
5-8 “ in ten sio...m aior.” — A gain Oresme demonstrates his intuition for signifi­
pyramids, i.e., the figures which are still called pyramids, and cones (“ round
cant general concepts. H aving rejected any comparison by ratios o f mixed
pyramids” ). For a treatment o f “ pyramids” in the Middle A ges, see m y Archi­
angles, he now stresses the importance o f the radius o f curvature as a measure
medes in the Middle Ages, V ol. 1, Chapter Six, where both kinds o f pyramids
o f curvature. It is quite clear that he has seized upon the basic idea that in
play a central role in the so-called D e curvis superficiebus Archimenidis, a w ork
circles the measure o f curvature is inversely proportional to the length o f the
which was, on occasion, called the D e pyramidibus (ibid., 440, n. 4).
radius. A lso implicit here is the complementary idea that the curvature o f a
circle is constant, for clearly the radius o f a circle does not change.
I .x ix 35-36 “ q u in ta m ...superficiebus.” — This in fact is a reference to the third prop­
osition o f the D e curvis superficiebus o f Johannes de Tinemue (M. Clagett,
18-27 “ V erbi — A ” — This example was also given by the editor or publisher o f
Archimedes in the Middle Ages, V ol. 1, 462): “ Quorumlibet duorum circulorum
Marsilius o f Inghen’s Questiones in libros de generatione et corruptione (see Intro­
circumferende suis diametris sunt proportionales.” H owever, Oresme is
duction II.B, fn. 3, above). Incidentally, V . P. Z ou bov, Traktat, 606, although
quoting a version o f the tract to which tw o extra propositions had been added
noting that Oresme does not use negative coordinates, cites this example o f
(one after Proposition I and the other after Proposition III), thus changing the
I.xix as a rather special case implying them.
proposition number from III to V (ibid., 444, n. 21, 520-21).
40-41 “ E r g o .. .equales” — The argument here introduces the notion o f a quantity
I .x x o f curvature (K) similar to his concept o f quantity o f quality, which quantity
o f curvature is measurable by the length o f the curve (c) and the intensity o f
17 “ 1 5 . . .E uclidis” — III.15 in the Campanus version (ed. o f Basel, 1546, 66)
curvature (k). In such terms all circles are equal in curvature, or as Oresme
runs: “ Si ab altero terminorum diametri cuiuslibet circuli orthogonaliter linea
puts it, they are “ simply” equal just as qualities are said to be simply equal
recta ducatur, extra circulum eam cadere necesse est. A tque inter illam et cir­
when their quantities o f qualities are equal, or just as surfaces are said to be
culum, aliam lineam rectam capi impossibile est. A ngulum autem ab illa et cir-
simply equal when their areas are equal. The argument in modern notation is
cunferentia contentum, omnium acutorum angulorum esse angustissimum.
A ngulum vero intrinsecum a diametro et circunferentia contentum, omnium this: (1) K x = Cjkj and K 2 = c2k2. (2) k x = - a n d k 2 = (3) -f = - 1. Thus,
angulorum acutorum esse amplissimum necesse est. Unde etiam manifestum
from (2) and (3), we conclude (4) Cjkj = c2k2. Therefore, (5) K x = K 2.
est, omnem lineam rectam a termino diametri cuiuslibet circuli orthogonaliter
49-59 “ H e c . .. . capitulo.” — Oresme now proposes a way o f representing curva­
ductam, circulum ipsum contingere.” This is equivalent to III. 16 o f the Greek
tures by figures similar to those proposed for qualities. First, we let the curve
text. For a discussion o f mixed angles, see my Archimedes in the Middle
Ages, V ol. 1,430-31. itself be the base line (whether one rectifies the curve or not is immaterial, al­
though it w ould seem preferable to do so if the resulting figures are to be
18 “ tractatu.. .specierum.” — For the question o f whether Oresme composed
compared to those developed for qualities). Then at each point o f the curve as
such a tract, see Introduction III.B, fn. 1. Incidentally, I am not at all sure that
base line a perpendicular is to be erected that is equal to the radius o f curvature
the reading specierum, which I have taken from the usually poorer tradition o f
at that point. Thus I w ould suppose (although Oresme does not specify this),
L P A E N , is to be preferred to rerum, the reading in B V F M S G J . N otice
that a circle’s curvature w ould be represented by a rectangle if the curve it­
from the citation in fn. 1 that the Determinatio facta in resumpta in domo Navarre
self has been rectified, since the radius o f curvature is constant. A curve whose
makes reference to an articulus on this matter that includes both readings (“ de
radius o f curvature changes uniformly from a maximum to o, w ould be rep­
perfecdone specierum vel rerum” ). The general title, D e perfectione specierum,
w ould seem to be more popular as the works by Johannes de Ripa (or de resented by a right triangle; and so on. Hence Oresme w ould now be able to
compare curvatures by comparing the figures just as he intends to compare
Rupa) and Jacobus de Sancto Martino with that title seem to testify (see above
Introduction II.B, fns. 9, 20, and 21). qualities and motions in Part III by the comparison o f their figures.
60—80 “ Verum ptam en__ difformem.” — A gain Oresm e’s intuition serves him well,
for he is proposing to measure curvature by reducing it to a relationship be­
tween the rate o f change o f the length o f the radius and the rate o f angular
 45° D e configurationibus qualitatum et m otuum
rotation o f that radius. He does not have the mathematical skill to formulate
this more specifically. But in fact a modern formulation o f curvature (defined
as the rate o f change o f the inclination o f the tangent w ith respect to change o f
arc length) can be made in polar coordinates by using precisely the same vari­
ables as those suggested by O resm e:
dr\2 /d2r'
r2 + 2
d6
K =
_ '\dd
w ith r being the radius o f curvature and 6 being the angle o f rotation. Since
^ = o for a circle, we arrive at the conclusion that K = a conclusion
dtf r
implied in Oresm e’s earlier discussion o f the relation o f curvature to the small­
ness o f the radius. Furthermore, we can point out that it makes sense for
Oresme to call the curvature o f the spiral a uniformly difform curvature, for it
is indeed generated by a uniformly changing radius length as that radius
sweeps out equal angles. A n d if w e used Oresm e’s configuration system and
simply plotted the values o f radius length against the values o f the angle o f
rotation, the familiar right triangle w ould be form ed:
76-77 “ dem onstrat.. . quadraturam.” — This reference to Archim edes’ proving the
quadrature o f a circle b y use o f the spiral is, o f course, a reference that ulti­
mately relates to the Spiral Lines where by means o f the spiral a right triangle
is constructed whose sides including the right angle are equal to the circum­
ference and radius o f the circle respectively (Prop. X V III). N o w , as a matter o f
fact, I believe that Oresme is not directly referring to the Spiral Lines but
rather to a hybrid treatise on quadrature that was composed in 1340 b y putting
together some o f the propositions o f the Spiral Lines and the first proposition
o f the Dimensio circuli, a tract that was inserted in some copies o f the D e men­
surandi ratione o f Johannes de Muris (see M. Clagett, in Isis, V ol. 43 [1952],
237-39). But at least Oresme appears to have recognized the Archimedean
source o f the propositions o f this tract. There is some evidence that Oresme
had directly consulted the only complete manuscript o f the M oerbeke trans­
lations, M S Vatican, O ttob. lat. 1850 (see m y Archimedes in the Middle Ages,
V ol. 1 ,12 , and particularly 720, “ Addenda” ).
Commentary to I.xxii 4 JI
I .x x ii
-6 “ an tiq u i...fortem .” — The ultimate source o f this remark is probably the
Timaeus, 56A-B (“ N ow , taking all these figures, the one w ith the fewest faces
[a pyramid] must be the most mobile, since it has the sharpest cutting edges
and the sharpest points in every direction__we may take the pyramid as the
element or seed o f fire.” ). In fact, this passage was not present in Calcidius’
translation, although Calcidius in his commentary refers to the association o f
the pyramid w ith fire by Plato (ed. o f J. H. W aszink, 1962, 71, lines 13-15):
“ quando iuxta ipsum Platonem ignis quidem forma et figura pyramoides esse
dicatur, id est in modum pyramidis excrescat.” Actually, Oresme probably
had in mind the long discussion in the D e caelo, B ook III, Chapters 5 (304a)
and 8 (307a), where the pyramid is often associated with fire, and the penetrat­
ing sharpness o f the pyramid is related to the activity o f the fire. I have point­
ed out in Introduction I.B, that the reference to ancient atomism provides
Oresme w ith an analogy.
This chapter above all raises the question as to the ontology o f the internal
configurations. In discussing Oresm e’s conception o f configuration, A . Maier
gives an interpretation o f the nature o f internal configuration as used by Ores­
me that differs from the one that I have suggested in Introduction I.B. She
says (Ausgehendes M ittelalter, V ol. 1, 342-43): “ N e voir dans les configurationes
d ’Oresme— il les appelle parfois seulement figurationes— que des representa­
tions graphiques destinees uniquement a exprimer certains rapports quantita-
tifs au m oyen d’une abstraction methodique, serait meconnaitre les faits.
Pour Oresme ce sont la les formes spatiales veritables et tres reelles des quali-
tes. La grandeur intensive n’est pas autre chose qu’une dimension spatiale,
invisible sans doute, mais saissable par la pensee humaine. Ainsi parle-t-il en
tout ingenui te de qualitates rectangulares ou semicirculares, etc.; il ne veut pas
dire par la que le sujet de la qualite est un rectangle ou un demi-cercle, mais que
la configuratio de cette qualite a cette forme. Cela ressort le plus clairement d ’une
consideration qui se rencontre a plusieurs reprises aussi bien dans le Traite
que dans les Quaestiones [super geometriam Euclidis]: en soi, souligne-t-il des le
debut, la choix de l’echelle des latitudes est arbitraire, pourvu que les propor­
tions soient respectees; mais, par la suite, il constate qu’il y a des cas ou ce
choix n’est plus libre, a savoir s’il s’agit d’une qualite semicirculaire ou d ’une
qualite quadrangulaire. Dans ces cas, l’echelle est prescrite par la nature, car si on
la modifie, la qualite cessera d’etre quadrangulaire ou semi-circulaire.” I
w ould agree entirely with the first sentence, but not w ith the succeeding ones,
at least so far as the D e configurationibus is concerned, since they all reinforce
the idea that for Oresme the internal configurations were real spatial forms.
Several points, which I repeated in several places in Introduction I.B above,
seem to militate against this view. (1) In the first place, Oresm e notes at the
 452 D e configurationibus qualitatum e t m otuum
very beginning o f the tract (I.i) that the line o f intensity “ is not actually {se­
cundum rem) extended outside o f the point but is only so extended in the imagi­
nation {secundum ymaginationem).” Hence, at this point it is quite clear that
while the intensity may be imagined by a line it is not actually a line. (2) Poten­
tially, the forms o f the figures representing the w hole intensities may vary in a
very fundamental way because the lines o f intensity could be erected on the
subject-base line at angles other than right angles (as he says in the same
passage, I.i), although intensity lines that are perpendicular are the most
suitable and fitting. Hence, the specificity o f spatial figures for the forms seems
to vanish. (3) It is true that the view expressed in the Questions on the Geometry
o f Euclid was, that only a single semicircle on a given base could represent a
given semicircular quality and, thus, only a single rectangle w ould be suitable
for a uniform quality constructed out o f the semicircular quality and only a
single right triangle for a given uniformly difform quality constructed out o f
the semicircular quality. This led to the absurd identification o f a given line
with a given intensity and the equally absurd equality o f a motion o f alteration
w ith a local motion. This view w ould seem to lend some support to Maier’s
argument. But this view was completely abandoned in the D e configurationi­
bus, as I have many times said (see Appendix I, Introduction). Thus by I.xiv
o f the D e configurationibus, Oresme clearly shows that some o f the figures that
could just as w ell represent the so-called semicircular qualities w ould not
only not be semicircles, but not even circular segments; and thus the con­
straint that Miss Maier speaks o f in the selection o f figures disappears. One
wonders just what is the so-called “ true spatial form ” in such a case. (4) Final­
ly, as she herself admits in a footnote {Ibid., n .i 5) when Oresme is considering
successive entities in Part II o f the D e configurationibus he is “ un peu reserve
et avare d’exemples.” In fact, in both Parts II and III, Oresme reasons about
velocities in a w ay that is completely symmetrical w ith his treatment o f quali­
ties in the first part. A nd one certainly cannot believe that the so-called inter­
nal configurations inherent in these motions are “ true spatial form s,” how ­
ever real they might be. Hence, I believe we must conclude that, although the
internal configurations o f qualities are real, they are not spatial for Oresme.
A s I have suggested above, he merely finds it convenient to label these inter­
nal configurations by the geometric and figurative language o f the external
representations just as he originally found it convenient to represent intensi­
ties by lines. Thus it is by means o f a kind o f short-hand that Oresme uses the
expression “ triangular quality,” “ quadrangular quality,” “ semicircular qual­
ity,” etc. M ay I reiterate finally that Oresm e’s mention o f atoms in this chap­
ter is not in m y opinion an adoption o f atomism on his part, as Miss Maier
seems to suggest {Ibid., 343). O r if there is some appeal to a kind o f atomism
o f intensive concentrations, it certainly is an atomism o f a vastly different sort
than any form o f ancient atomism. For Miss M aier’s argument, consult also
Commentary to I.xxiv-I.xxv 453
her A n der Gren^e, 290-91, 306-7. A m ong the earliest authors to discuss the
non-mathematical side o f the D e configurationibus were Lynn Thorndike in
A History o f Magic and Experimental Science, V ol. 3,425-33, and Dana Durand,
in Speculum, V ol. 16 (1941), 167-85. The latter cautiously raises the question o f
Oresme’s atomism.
I.x x iv
13 “ primo de anima” — This is a reference to the D e anima, Bk. I, Chap. 3
(407b, 23-26), w hich reads in the M oerbeke translation (ed. w ith Thomas
Aquinas’ commentary, 4th ed. [Turin, 1959], 30): “ Videtur enim unum quod­
que [corpus] propriam habere speciem et formam. Simile itaque aliquid dicunt,
sicut si aliquis dicat tectonicam in fistulas ingredi. Oportet enim artem quidem
uti organis, animam autem corpore.” Aquinas comments on this {ibid., 34):
“ unumquodque corporum, et maxime animalium, habeat propriam formam
et propriam speciem, et proprium movens et proprium motum, et multum
differat corpus vermis a corpore canis, et corpus elephantis a corpore culicis.”
28-29 “ Q u ed am .. .applicatis.” — This very comm on belief that generation takes
place in putrefaction (which had the support o f Aristotle) was also the object
o f a separate questio by Oresme in his,Questiones super libris meteorologicorum, Bk.
IV , Quest. 5 (MS St. G all, 839, i6 ir -i6 2 v ): “ Utrum aliqua animalia possint
generari per putrefactionem.” In support o f such generation he alludes to
Aristotle’s Meteorology, B ook IV (Chap. 1, 379b 6-8). In the M oerbeke trans­
lation accompanying the published works o f Averroes the crucial sentence
runs (Junta edition, V ol. 5 [Venice, 1562], 470C): “ E t animalia fiunt in iis,
quae putrescunt, propterea quod, quae segregatur, caliditas, naturalis existens
consistere facit segregata.”
I. xxv
5-35 “ V e rb i__ ceciderunt.” — I have suggested in Introduction II. C, that Oresm e’s
application o f the configuration doctrine to remarkable phenomena in the
form o f the interaction o f similar and dissimilar configurations was the out­
grow th o f an older doctrine which explained such phenomena on the basis o f
similar and dissimilar ratios and/or dispositions o f primary qualities. One
earlier description o f such phenomena that may have influenced Oresme (at
least in selecting the phenomena to be explained) is that o f William o f A u ver­
gne in his D e universo, Part I, Pars I, Chapter 46 (Paris, 1674, 657-5 8), a w ork
specifically cited by Oresme in other chapters o f the D e configurationibus. W illiam
in this section describes the substances w ith special powers in terms o f their
peculiar “ aspects” and “ habitudes” in relation to other things: “ Ut autem
consummationem tibi faciam de radicibus judiciorum astronom icorum : di-
 454 D e configurationibus qualitatum e t m otuum
cam brevi sermone, quia quod maxime probabile videtur de virtutibus et ef­
fectibus stellarum et luminarium, habetur ex operationibus virtutum rerum
aliarum, tam animalium quam partium ipsorum : amplius herbarum, medici­
narum, lapidum, et istae virtutes sunt sicut aspectus et habitudines ipsarum ad
alias res. Quorum primum exemplum pono tibi basilici (/) serpentis, cuius as­
pectus et habitudo ad naturam humanam est sicut odium aut ira vehementis si­
ma, et ira est, per quam interficit hominem, cum ipsum viderit; comm overe­
tur enim aspectu humano in tantam iram et talem, quod impressionem mortis
facit in homine, et cum de naturis occultis aliorum animalium similia et forte
maiora audiveris, non miraberis haec. Sic vides de medicinis, quia reubarbari
aspectus est in choleram, et est sicut odium naturae aspectus huiusmodi, et
contrarietas quaedam imperiosa, ut diffuget ipsam choleram, et exire compel­
lat a corpore humano, quasi fugentem (/) a facie ipsius.... Sic theriaca in
venenum, quod est ex cibo, habet aspectum sive habitudinem odii imperiosis­
simi, propter quod fugit a facie ipsius et praesentia huiusmodi venenum. Fer­
rum autem ad lapidem magnetem duos habet aspectus, ac tertium quasi me­
dium et compositum, et primus aspectus eius est, quasi habitudo amantis in
amatum, propter quod trahitur ab ipso et sequitur ipsum, sed limitata longi­
tudine quocunque translatus fuerit. Contrarius autem aspectus et habitudo est
ei ad aliud genus magnetis a quo fugit tanquam ab hoste. Tertius aspectus est
ei ad tertium genus magnetis qui trahit ipsum altera sui parte, altera vero
diffugat et repellit, et iste aspectus est quasi compositus ex duobus primis. Sic
omnium lapidum pretiosorum et politorum est quidem aspectus amoris ad
paleas modicas atque levissimas. Sic considerandae sunt tibi virtutes omnium
lapidum et gemmarum, quemadmodum dicitur de sapphiro, quod aspicit in
anthracem morbum et in ardores febriles, et huiusmodi aspectus est sicut odii,
propter quod et istum sanare et illos refrigerare creditur a multis.” I have
altered the punctuation somewhat.
“ preter Augustinum .” — See Augustine, Contra Faustum Manichaeum, B ook
xxii, Chap. 46 (Migne, P A , 42, c. 435): “ E st vero quidam Liae fetus ex benefi­
cio Rachel editus, cum virum suum secum debita nocte cubiturum, acceptis a
filio Liae mandragoricis malis, cum sorore cubare permittit. D e hoc autem
pomi genere opinari quosdam scio, quod acceptum in escam sterilibus feminis
fecunditatem park; ac per hoc putant omni modo institisse Rachel, ut hoc a
filio sororis acciperet cupiditate pariendi: quod ego non arbitrarer, nec si tunc
concepisset. N unc vero cum post Liae duos alios ab illa nocte partus, D om i­
nus eam prole donaverit, nihil est cur de mandragora tale aliquid suspicemur,
quale in nulla femina experti sumus.” The reference by Oresme to the similar­
ity between mandrake and the human form was commonplace. Closest to
Oresme’s expression o f similar configurations is the account o f Henry o f
Hesse, D e reductione effectuum (see above, Introduction II.C, fn. 4).
Commentary to I.xxvi 45 5
I.x x v i
“ de sensu” — The crucial passage o f the D e sensu (439b 30— 440a 3) runs in the
medieval translation accompanying the commentary o f Aquinas (ed. o f Turin,
Rome, 1949, 31), Text N o. 5o : “ Eodem itaque modo, hoc oportet habere et in
consonantiis. Q ui quidem in numeris, proportionatissimi sunt colores, quem­
admodum ibi concordandas; hi autem delectabilissimi colorum esse viden­
tur, veluti croceus et puniceus {pel purpureus?). Pauci autem tales propter
causam, propter quam quidem et symphoniae paucae. Q ui autem non in
numeris, alii colores.” Aquinas’ comment on this and the preceding passage
(Text N o. 49) constitutes a summary o f what he believes to be Aristotle’s
views on quantification {ibid., 32): “ Circa primum considerandum est quod
sicut Philosophus dicit decimo Metaphysicae, ratio mensurae primo quidem
invenitur in numeris, secundo in quantitatibus continuis, deinde ultimo trans­
fertur etiam ad quantitates (/ qualitates?), secundum quod in eis potest inveni­
ri excessus unius qualitatis super aliam, sive per modum intensionis, prout
aliquid dicitur albedo maior, quae est in maiori superficie. Quia vero propor­
tio est quaedam habitudo quantitatum adinvicem ; ubicumque dicitur quan­
tum aliquo modo, ibi potest dici porportio. E t primo quidem in numeris;
quia omnes in prima mensura, quae est unitas, sunt adinvicem commensura­
biles. Communicant autem omnes in prima mensura, quae est unitas. (99)
Sunt autem diversae proportiones numerorum, secundum quod diversi nu­
meri adinvicem comparantur. Alia enim est proportio trium ad duo, quae
vocatur sesquialtera, et alia quatuor ad tria, quae vocatur sesquitertia. Quia
vero quantitates continuae non resolvuntur in aliquod indivisibile, sicut nu­
meri in unitatem, non est necesse omnes quantitates continuas esse adinvicem
commensurabiles; sed est invenire aliquas, quarum una excedat alteram, quae
tamen non habent commensurationem. Quaecumque tamen quantitates con­
tinuae proportionantur adinvicem, secundum proportionem numeri ad nu­
merum, earum est una mensura com m unis; puta si una sit trium cubitorum,
et alia quatuor, utraque mensuratur cubito. (100) E t ad hunc modum in quali­
tatibus etiam contingit esse excessum et defectum, vel secundum aliquam pro­
portionem numeralem, vel secundum excessum incommensurabilem. E t hoc
est quod dicit quod contingit esse multos medios colores secundum diversas
proportiones. Contingit enim quod album iaceat iuxta nigrum secundum
proportionem duorum ad tria, vel trium ad quatuor, vel quorumlibet aliorum
numerorum: aut secundum nullam proportionem numeralem, sed solum se­
cundum incommensurabilem superabundantiam et defectum (101)— D icit
ergo primo, quod ex quo medii colores distinguuntur secundum diversas pro­
portiones albi et nigri, ‘Eodem modo oportet’ se habere in mediis coloribus,
sicut ‘et in consonantiis’ quae causantur secundum proportionem vocis gravis
et acutae. Sicut enim in consonantiis illae sunt proportionatissimae et delec-
 456 D e configurationibus qualitatum et m otuum
tabilissimae quae consistunt in numeris, sicut diapason in proportione duorum
ad unum, et diapente in proportione trium ad d u o ; ita etiam in coloribus illi
qui consistunt in proportione numerali sunt proportionatissimi, et hi etiam
videntur delectabilissimi, ‘sicut croceus et purpureus,’ idest rubeus. E t sicut
paucae symphoniae delectabiles, ita etiam pauci sunt colores tales. A lii vero
colores, qui non sunt delectabiles, non consistunt in proportione numerali.”
39-40 “ V it e lo ...perspective.” — W itelo, Perspectiva (or Optica), Bk. IV , Chap. 148
(ed. o f Basel, 1572, 184): “ Figura etiam facit pulcritudinem (/): unde arti-
ficata bene figurata videntur pulchra, magis autem opera naturae: unde oculi
hominis cum sint figurae amygdalaris et oblongae, videntur pulchri, rotundi
vero oculi videntur penitus deformes.”
I.x x v ii
7 “ surda” — It is o f interest to note that the use o f the Latin surdus as a mathe­
matical term for irrational magnitudes apparently first took place in the
twelfth century when Adelard o f Bath made his various versions o f the E le­
ments. The Arabs had used asamm (“ deaf” ) to render the G reek alogos, in that
which is called Definition 3 o f B ook X in the G reek text. Hence Adelard
merely follow ed the A rabic in a literal fashion in introducing the Latin term
for deaf, i.e., surdus. See the so-called Adelard II version o f the Elements, M S
Bodleian Library, Auct. F.5.28, 24V, Bk. X , D ef. 7 ( = last part o f D ef. 3,
G reek text): “ eidem vero incommensurabiles {E d .: incommunicantes) dicen­
tur {E d .: dicuntur) irrationales sive surde.” Cf. the ed. o f Basel, 1546, 243.
Gerard o f Cremona also uses the term in his translation o f the Elements: Paris,
B N lat. 7216, $6r. For the Arabic use o f asamm in this same definition, see the
version o f Nasir al-DIn al-TusI (Rome, 15 94), 225.
I.x x v iii
7-10 “ m agn es...istoru m .” — For other views o f Oresme on magnetic attraction,
see Introduction II.C, fn. 2. N ote that Pliny had given magnetic attraction
and repulsion as examples o f natural sympathia and antipathia ('Natural History,
Bk. X X , 2). Cf. the Commentary, I.xxv, lines 5-35.
11 “ tyriaca... venenum” — Tyriaca is the classical theriaca or theriacus (a directtrans-
literation o f the G reek term). It is used here in the generic sense o f an antidote
(Cf. Pliny, Natural History, X X , 264; X X IX , 24). But Pliny also uses it for a
specific kind o f grapevine: X IV , 117. Cf. the Commentary, I.xxv, lines 5-35.
1 3-14 “ sanguis... adamantem” — This supposed phenomenon is given by Pliny as
an example o f natural antipathy {Natural History, X X , 2).
16 -17 “ Plinius.. .Io vis” — The examples o f laurel, sea calf, and eagle are all given
Commentary to I.xxvii-I.xxxiv 457
by Pliny {Natural History, II, 146). The eagle is called armigera Iovis in a later
passage o f Pliny {ibid., X , 15).
22 “ narrant... Cesare” — I have accepted the reading o f Tiberio from E C instead
o f the more common lulio since the story is related o f Tiberius Caesar in the
Natural History (X V , 135) and in Suetonius, Lives o f the Caesars, Bk. I l l (Ti­
berius), 69. It indicates that Tiberius used to put a wreath o f laurel on his head
during a thunderstorm so as to protect himself from lightning. It may be, o f
course, that Oresme related the story from memory, and so w rote lulio in­
stead o f Tiberio. The story is recounted (as in Pliny and Suetonius) by John o f
Salisbury, Policraticus, Bk. I, Chap. 13 (ed. o f W ebb, V ol. I, 62, lines 25-27).
I .x x x
8 “ Sim iliter.. .displicet.” — Cf. the D e anima attributed by M athieutoOresm e(M S
Bruges, Stadsbibl., 477, 283^ c. 2): “ 70arguitur de gustu: nam cardones quos
asinus iudicat esse suaves per gustum hom o per gustum iudicat esse amaros.”
I .x x x iii
6-11 “ Quem adm odum ...cernuntur.” — W ith this sentence, Oresme begins his
highly developed analogy o f prophecy and catoptrics which runs through the
remaining chapters o f Part I. The idea o f the soul as a mirror is certainly an
ancient one and it is difficult to say where Oresme first found the idea, al­
though the earliest author (other than biblical authors) quoted by Oresme is
Leo the Great (see I.xxxiv, lines 9-11). Oresm e’s detailed comparisons o f the
shapes and properties o f mirrors with those o f souls seem original.
I.x x x iv
13-15 “ P r o p te r ...denuntiant.” — Rabi Moyses Egyptius, D u x seu director dubi­
tantium aut perplexorum (Paris, 1520), Bk. II, Chap, xxxvii, 641c: “ T u etiam scis
quod omnis virtus corporalis debilitatur et confunditur quandoque; virtus
autem imaginativa corporalis est sine dubio. E t propter hoc contingit quod
prophetia aufertur a propheta in tempore iracundiae et angustiae, sicut dixe­
runt sapientes__Similiter etiam invenies quod quidem prophetae prophetave­
runt diebus aliquot, et postea recessit ab eis prophetia. Istud vero non fuit
factum secundum accidens. Ista etiam est causa propinquior, sicut mihi vide­
tur, in recessu prophetiae tempore captivitatis, scilicet tristitia, et pigritia, in
quam incidit homo ex causa multiplici, praecipue dum est servus, oppressus,
et tributis serviens: nec est sue potestatis.” The Guide to the Perplexed was
translated into Latin in the first half o f the thirteenth century.
16-19 “ E t ... clarificari” — This supposed effect o f the sight o f a menstruating
woman on a mirror was mentioned by Aristotle, D e somniis, 459b 27— 460a
 458 D e configurationibus qualitatum et m otuum
26. For the medieval translations under the title D e sompno et vigilia, see the
edition of H. J. Drossaart Lulofs (Leiden, 1947,) 12-17. Cf. Pliny, Natural
History, VII, 64. It is clear that it is the passage of Aristotle that Oresme has in
mind rather than that of Pliny, since it is Aristo de who specifies that when the
menstruating woman looks upon the faces of very clear mirrors they (the
mirrors) become “ sanguine like a cloud,” while Pliny merely holds that the
reflection of the menstrual fluid produces the result. Aristotle’s explanation of
the phenomenon is quite naturalistic, as is Oresme’s (see Chap. Il.xxxviii,
lines 33-38). While the woman is menstruating, her eyes are affected, they in
turn affect the air near the mirror, and the air then affects the face of the mirror.
Notice also that Oresme makes the same point as Aristotle, namely that if the
mirror is new, the spot is difficult to remove. Incidentally, the supposed phe­
nomenon is also mentioned in Oresme’s Questiones super de sensu et sensato
Questio 3 (Erfurt, Stadtbibl., Amplon. Q. 299, 131V): “ 30 hoc patet de mu­
liere menstruosa que inspiciendo speculum mundum ipsum inficit maculis
rubeis.” Cf. 132V: “Ad tertiam negatur consequentia. Ad probationem dicitur
quod mulier ita bene inficeret non videndo sicud videndo, licet hoc proveniat
ex emissione vaporum ab oculis provenientium ex sanguine menstrui indiges­
ti; nec hoc aliquid facit ad visum.”
I.x x x v
•20 “ Sunt falsa.” — Oresme covers the same ground regarding mirrors in his
Questiones super libris meteorologicorum, Bk. I ll, Quest. 15 (MS St. G all 839, 97r-
98r), although in much more detail. Here are a few statements similar to those
found in this chapter o f the D e configurationibus'. “ (97r) Quantum ad primum
sciendum est quod speculorum quedam sunt plana, quedam convexa, quedam
concava. Concavorum et convexorum quedam sunt piramidalia, quedam sunt
columnaria__E t adhuc speculorum quedam sunt superficies simplices ha­
bentia et lenes, quedam superficies compositas ex multis concavitatibus et
rectitudinibus habent, et talia dicuntur aspera__(98r) E t sit prima conclusio:
in speculis planis potest apparere vera quantitas rei__Secunda conclusio: in
speculo convexo res apparet minor quam si esset in loco speculi et directo as­
pectu videretur— Tertia conclusio: in speculo concavo ipsa res visibilis ap­
paret maior quam sit in rei veritate Quarta conclusio: in speculo columnari
sive sit concavum sive convexum res apparet alterius figure quam sit in rei
veritate, apparent enim figure oblonge.” Oresme in the.Questiones gives short
proofs o f the various conclusions.
Commentary to I.xxxv-I.xxxix 459
I.x x x v i
“ A d h u c ... colorem ” — Oresme addresses himself to this problem in his
Questiones super libris meteorologicorum, Bk. I ll, Quest. 15 (MS St. G all 839, 96V-
99v ) : “ Queritur 15“ ° utrum aliqua specula representent solum colorem et non
figuram, accipiendo colorem prout extendit se ad lucem et colorem proprie
dictum.” I have already quoted from this question in m y Commentary, I.xxxv,
lines 4-20. It is quite a long question but I shall only note that Oresme directly
quotes the text o f the Meteorologica from the M oerbeke translation w ith the
Averroes commentary (Junta edition, Venice, 1562, 448 H). Hence w e must
presume that it is this translation which he also had in mind in making his
citation to the Meteorology here in the D e configurationibus. The key supposition
and primary conclusion from the Questiones follow (98r): “ et sit prima sup­
positio illa, quod figura rei obiecte speculo non apparet per reflexionem nisi
reflexio sit uniformis et ordinata_(98V) Illo supposito sit prima conclusio,
quod speculum asperum non representat figuram quia, quamvis radii inci­
dentes incidunt eodem ordine, cum tamen reflectuntur difformiter et difformi
ordine et diversificantur radii reflexionis ita quod una pars rei representatur
ibi et alia ibi (dei. ?) hinc in de difformi ordine. Igitur in speculis [asperis] non
potest apparere figura rei obiecte. Consequentia patet per suppositionem et
antecedens patet propter asperitatem speculi__E t ex illo etiam sequitur quod
in speculis asperis apparet lux vel color et non figura. Ex isto etiam patet quod
questio ut proponitur est vera.
“naturali.” — The addition in manuscript N (see the variant reading) seems
to suggest that human presentiment of misfortune is inauspicious, although
admittedly not very precisely so. The composer of N mentions his own ex­
perience that when he cannot sleep he is certain something sinister will hap­
pen to him.
I .x x x ix
23 “ s icu t.. .putavit.” — The original account o f Hermes’ prediction occurs in
the Hermetic Asclepius, Chaps. 23-24 (see ed. o f A . D . N ock, Corpus herme-
ticum, V ol. 2 [Paris, 1945], 326-28). This w ork was known to Oresme as D e
deo deorum and quoted elsewhere by Oresme (see the Commentary, II.xxv,
lines 23-24). But I am quite sure that Oresme read the account o f Hermes’
prediction given by Augustine in the City of God (VIII, Chap. 23), for it will
be noticed that both Augustine and Oresme speak o f Hermes’ sorrow in
making such a prophecy. Augustine says: “ Sed Hermes cum ista praedicit,
velut amicus eisdem ludificationibus daemonum loquitur, nec Christianum
nomen evidenter exprimit, sed tamquam ea tollerentur atque delerentur, quo­
rum observationem caelestis similitudo custodiretur in A egypto, ita haec
 460 D e configurationibus qualitatum e t m otuum
futura deplorans luctuosa quodam modo praedicatione testatur.... Haec vana
deceptoria, perniciosa sacrilega Hermes Aegyptius, quia tempus, quo aufer­
rentur, venturum sciebat, dolebat; sed tam inpudenter dolebat, quam inpru-
denter sciebat.”
29-3 3 “ libro — habuisse.” — There is no modern edition o f the D e vetula, although
one is being prepared by D . M. Robathan; there are several early editions, be­
ginning w ith one in Perugia, ca. 1474. I have used the edition published by
S. Closius, Brunellus Vigelli et Vetula Ovidii (Wolfenbiittel, 1662). The pro­
phetic passage to which Oresme refers occupies pages 76-77 o f the D e vetula,
B ook III, Chapter 3 5. For other medieval and Renaissance citations, some with
doubts as to O v id ’s authorship, and the difficult question o f its possible au­
thorship by Richard de Fournival, see Miss Robathan, in Transactions o f the
American Philological Association, V ol. 88 (1957), 197-207. Miss Robathan still
believed (1961) that “ in many respects Fournival seems a likely candidate for the
distinction o f having written this pseudo-Ovidian poem .” Incidentally, I must
thank Miss Robathan for sending me a typescript o f part o f the introduction
to her forthcom ing text o f the D e vetula and for answering my questions
concerning its tradition. This same passage with the prophecy o f Christ in the
D e vetula is cited in John o f L iibeck’s prediction o f the coming o f antichrist;
see L. Thorndike in Journal o f the Warburg and Courtauld Institutes, V ol. 26
(1963), 346, fn. 11.
33~37 “ P orph yriu s.. .Ieronim us.” — A s I indicated in fn. 8 o f I.xxxix, this passage
comes from Jerome’s Commentaries on Daniel (Migne, P L , V ol. 25, c. 491):
“ Contra prophetam Danielem duodecimum librum scripsit Porphyrius, no­
lens eum ab ipso cuius inscriptus est nomine, esse com positum : sed a quodam
qui temporibus A ntiochi qui appellatus est Epiphanes, fuerit in Judaea, et non
tam Danielem ventura dixisse, quam illum narrasse praeterita. Denique quid­
quid usque ad Antiochum dixerit veram historiam continere: si quid autem
ultra opinatus sit, quia futura nescierit, esse mentitum. Cui solertissime res­
ponderunt Eusebius Caesariensis Episcopus tribus voluminibus, id est, oc­
tavo decimo, et nono decimo, et vicesim o; Apollinarius quoque uno grandi
libro, hoc est vicesim o sexto, et ante hos ex parte M ethodius.” It is quite ob­
vious that Oresme has misunderstood the phrase qui appellatus est Epiphanes as
applying to the supposed author o f D aniel’s Prophecy, when in fact it applies
to Antiochi, to which it is in immediate apposition.
II.i
12-13 “ D u e ... intersecare” — The analogy to a cross is repeated later in Oresme’s
Livre du del, 4ab (ed. o f Menut [1968], p. 46) and extended to all three dimen­
sions in his discussion o f dimensions: “ Item, encor appert autrement, quar
en une plaine superfice l’en peut ymaginer .ii. lignes qui se intersequent en un
Commentary to II.i-II.ii 461
point et font .iiii. angles escarres ou drois aussi comme en une cro iz; et sont
ces .ii. lignes longitude et latitude. E t si l’en ymagine une autre ligne traver­
s a l selonc spissitude ou parfondesce parmy cestes en cel point, et a angles es­
carres ou drois, ces .iii. lignes feront environ le point moyen .xii. angles droiz.”
23-25 “ que...irregularitas.” — T he same distinction between “ uniform ity” and
“ regularity” was made in Oresme’s Questiones de spera, Quest. 4 (Vat. lat. 2185,
72V, c. 2; cf. D roppers’ text, 84, lines 30-33): “ Tertia distinctio est quod dif­
ferentia est inter motum uniformem et regularem, quia uniformis atenditur
quantum ad partes quantitatis. Unde illud m ovetur uniformiter cuius una pars
non m ovetur velocius alia; sed regularis atenditur penes partes temporis, scili­
cet quando mobile non m ovetur velocius in una parte temporis quam in alia.”
33-34 “ s e d .. .prim a.” — I f this phrase means what I have suggested in the transla­
tion, then it should be observed that Oresme did not keep strictly to his prom ­
ise, for he normally uses “ uniform ity” and “ difformity” as applied to the in­
tensity o f velocity w ithout any preliminary or covering remark. Still he did
in the next chapter, line 29, speak o f “ uniform motion, i.e., regular m otion.”
Cf. II.iv, lines 26-27. In generally ignoring his distinction, he is indeed follow ­
ing the usual practice o f the schoolmen (see The Science of Mechanics, 238-39,
245, 248-49). Incidentally, the basic distinction between the uniform ity and
difformity o f velocity according to parts o f the subject and according to time
was itself commonplace.
II.ii
4 “ successio morosa” — For the meaning o f morosa as enduring, see Thomas
Aquinas, Summa theolog., I—II, 74, 6, 3 o b j.: “ M orosum dicitur aliquid propter
diuturnitatem tem poris.” Cf. I—II, 31, 2, obj. 2: “ Diuturnum vel morosum
dicitur aliquid secundum tempus.” The ultimate point o f departure for
Oresm e’s discussion is B ook IV o f the Physics, as it was for most o f the school­
men; but as the succeeding remarks show, medieval discussions like those o f
Ockham and Buridan, and no doubt others, were not without their influence.
A s a matter o f fact, Oresme does not appear particularly interested here in the
metaphysical ontology o f time. One might compare Buridan’s definition
{Questiones super octophisicorum libros, Bk. IV , Quest. 12 [Paris, 1509], 78V, c. 1):
“ tempus est res successiva habens partes priores et posteriores adinvicem et
quod iste partes non sunt simul.” M uch closer to Oresme’s actual definition is
that found in the Questiones super octo libros physicorum attributed to Marsilius o f
Inghen, Bk. IV , Quest. 15 (Lyon, 1518, 56V, c. 2): “ Tunc fit prima conclusio
ista, quod tempus est successiva duratio rei mutabilis sive mensura durationis.’
Oresme’s ideas on time are developed in far more detail in his Questiones super
septem libros physicorum, Bk. IV , Quests. 16-21 (Seville, Bibi. Colom b. 7.6.30,
54r-57v). W ith more detail given, some o f the conclusions appear in some­
 462 D e configurationibus qualitatum et m otuum
what different light than those suggested here in the D e configurationibus. H ow ­
ever, one o f his principal conclusions in Questio 17 {ibid., 5 5r, c. 1 runs:
“ proprie tempus est duratio successiva rerum.”
10-11 “ n ec...existere.” — He w ould accept the signification o f time as a certain
accident and at the same time w ould deny that it could exist in the absence o f
a temporal thing. See the more decisive and extended views o f William O ck­
ham in his Quaestiones in libros physicorum, Bk. IV , Quest. 37 (ed. o f F. Corvino
in Rivista critica di storia della filosofia, A nno X I [1956], 41-42): “ Prima [con­
clusio] est, quod tempus non importat aliquid absolutum distinctum a rebus
permanentibus praeteritis, praesentibus et futuris.... Secundo sic: si tempus
sit aliquod accidens distinctum a rebus permanentibus, quaero tunc in quo
habet esse subiective: non in m obili.... N on potest tempus poni in aliquo alio
subiective.” Incidentally, Corvino has given the text o f all o f the questions on
time, i.e., Questions 35-57, in this journal, A nno X I, 41-67, and X II [1957],
42-63. Cf. L. Baudry, Lexiquephilosophique de Guillaume d ’Ockham, 265.
14 “ s icu t.. . entis” — See Metaphysics, V II, 1, 1028a 10-20. In the medieval trans­
lation accompanying the Expositio o f Aquinas (Turin, Rome, 1950, 315),
Text N o. 560, the crucial statement runs: “ Ens dicitur m ultipliciter__Toties
autem de ente dicto, palam quia horum primum ens est quod quid est quod
significat substantiam — [ 5 6 1 ]...Alia vero dicuntur entia, eo quod taliter
entis, haec quidem qualitates esse, illa vero quantitates, alia passiones, alia
aliud quid tale.” Thomas explains this as follows {ibid., 1251,316): “ E t ex hoc
patet quod ipsa substantia dicitur ens ratione suiipsius, quia absolute signifi­
cantia substantiam significant quid est hoc. A lia vero dicuntur entia, non quia
ipsa habeant secundum se aliquam quidditatem ... sed eo quod ‘sunt talis
entis,’ idest eo quod habent aliquam habitudinem ad substantiam quae est per se
ens.” Cf. Physics, Bk. IV , Chap. 11 (219a 8-10). In the M oerbeke translation
with Aquinas’ Expositio (Turin, Rome, 1954, 281), Text N o. 98, we read:
“ Quare aut motus aut aliquid motus est tempus. Quoniam autem non est
motus, necesse est motus aliquid esse ipsum .”
17 - 19 “ Q u a m vis.. .Aristoteles” — I do not know which passage o f Aristotle Ores-
me had in mind. The proper identification is complicated by the fact that
Aristotle does not speak in the medieval terms o f significabile simpliciter in-
complexe and significabile complexe which so intrigued the fourteenth-century
writers, the latter meaning signifiable by a proposition or mental judgment
and the former by the elements alone o f such a proposition. The particular
problem here is to interpret an Aristotelian passage in such a way as to judge
that it says that time is signifiable by a proposition and an incomplete proposi­
tion at that. M y only suggestion is that Oresme might well have interpreted
A verroes’ exposition o f the first lines o f Chapter 10 o f B ook I V o f the Physics
(217b 32— 218a 3) as holding that time is essentially incomplete and that even
the effort o f mind that must be brought in for its description (or in medieval
Commentary to II. ii 463
terms to form a mental complexio about it) is itself incomplete because o f the
essential incompleteness o f time (Junta edition o f Venice, 1562, Passage 88,
173M -174B): “ Iste sermo sic componitur. Tempus componitur ex praeterito
et futuro, quoniam instans distinguens non est tempus, sed praeteritum iam
defecit et futurum nondum est: et haec duo non sunt: ergo tempus com poni­
tur ex non ente. E t d ix it: aut si fuerit, est difficile et occultum, quoniam ex
sermonibus Logicis non praecise iudicabitur aliquid esse aut non esse, sed
secundum existimationem intrinsecam. Dom inus dicit, et ex his componitur
tempus infinitum, quod semper est— E t deceptio in hoc sermone est, quo­
niam ita est de motu, motus enim comprehenditur sensu et nulla pars eius est
in actu, sed quaelibet pars demonstrata recessit: ergo est compositus ex hoc,
quod iam deficit et ex hoc quod nondum est. Sed talia non habent esse com ­
pletum, sed esse eorum componitur ex actione animae in eo quod est in eis
extra animam: et entia completa sunt illa, in quorum esse nihil facit anima, ut
post declarabitur de tempore, secundum quem est de numero entium, quo­
rum actus completur per animam. E t forte hoc innuebat, cum dixit, aut erit
difficile et occultum, idest erit de entibus latentibus, quia si in anima non es­
sent, non essent nisi in potentia.” (Punctuation altered.) Oresme in his earlier
discussion in the Physics, Bk. IV , Quest. 20 {M S cit., 56V, c. 2) remarks in
terms similar to those in the D e configurationibus that time is not a simply in­
complex cognition: “ D e secundo qualiter tempus percipitur {corr. ex precipi-
tur) prima propositio est quod percipere {corr. ex participare) non est percipere
hoc aliquid, i.e., cogitare aliquam rem que est tempus sicut celum vel motum,
ymo est percipere aliquid durare sicut de motu et de aliis et ideo non est cog­
nitio simpliciter incomplexa ymo complexa equivalens complexe.”
19-21 “ e t . . .appellare.” — Cf. Oresme’s earlier treatment in his Questiones super sep­
tem libros physicorum, Bk. IV , Quest. 16 (Seville, Bibi. Colom b. 7.6.30, 54r,
c. 2); “ Suppositio prima, quam significatur hoc nomine ‘tempus,’ unde modo
significare illud quod respondetur ad questionem quando {corr. ex per ante),
sicut hodie et heri et etiam ante et illud quod determinaretur per consimillia
adverba temporis et ita determinantur (?) nomina temporalia sicut dies, an­
nus, instans et illud quod significat partes temporis.” C f .Questiones attributed
to Marsilius o fln g h en , Bk. IV , Quest. 15 (Lyon, 1518, 56V, c. 1): “ Quantum
ad primum notandum quod per tempus intelligitur illud quod convenienter
respondetur ad questionem quando aut quantum durabit vel quantum dura­
vit; ut si queratur quando venisti, respondetur hodie vel heri; vel si queratur
quantum duravit iste morbus, respondetur per duo menses. Tunc patet quod
isti termini ‘hore,’ ‘dies,’ ‘mensis,’ ‘annus’ et huiusmodi sunt termini signi­
ficantes tempus.”
26-27 “ sicu t...tardu m .” — A ll o f the authors quote this basic Aristotelian idea.
Aristotle says this in the Physics, Bk. IV , Chap. 10, 218b 13-15. Cf. the M oer­
beke translation accompanying Aquinas’ Expositio, (Turin, Rome, 1954» z l l )
 464 D e configurationibus qualitatum et m otuum
Text N o. 96: “ Am plius autem, mutatio quidem omnis velocior aut tardior
est, tempus autem non est. Tardum enim et velox tempore determinantur.”
Aquinas’ comment (ibid., 278): “ Omnis mutatio et motus est velox aut tar­
dus : sed tempus non est huiusm odi: ergo tempus non est motus vel mutatio.”
Later on in Chapter 12, Aristotle repeats the denial o f time as fast or slow
(220a 32— 220b 2). (Medieval Text N o. 109, ibid., 291: “ Manifestum est au­
tem propter quid tardum et velox non dicitur: multum autem et paucum, et
breve et longum .” )
27-32 “ V erum ptam en.. .celi.” — This idea o f the regular motion o f the heavens
as the basis o f time measurement is in Aristotle, Physics, Bk. IV , Chap. 14
(223b 18-23 [see M edieval Text N o. 133 (ed. o f Turin, Rome, 1954, 308): “ si
igitur quod primum mensura est omnium proximorum, circulatio, quae re­
gularis est, mensura maxime erit, quia numerus huius notissimus est.... Unde
et videtur tempus esse sphaerae m otus: quia hoc mensurantur alii motus, et
tempus hoc m otu.” ]). In the course o f elucidating this passage, Aquinas
says (ibid., 311): “ E t inter alios motus circulares, maxime uniformis et regu­
laris est primus motus, qui revolvit totum firmamentum motu diurn o: unde
illa circulatio, tanquam prima et simplicior et regularior, est mensura omnium
m otuum.” This idea appears several times in Questiones super septem
libros physicorum, Bk. IV , but particularly in Quest. 18, the conventional ques­
tion based on the definition o f time as the measure o f motion according to be­
fore and after (MS S eville,B ib l.C o lo m b .7.6 .30,55 v, c. 1): “ Secunda conclusio,
quod tempus est numerus numeratus patet, quia tempus est motus celi, sicut
annus numeratus et mensuratus per aliquam sui partem sicut per diem vel
horam mediante actione anime.” In the, Questiones, Bk. IV , Quest. 16 (Lyon,
1518, 57r-v) attributed to Marsilius o f Inghen, a whole question is devoted to
this basic identification o f time with the motion o f the heaven, a not uncom ­
mon practice in the fourteenth-century commentaries on the Physics.
39-40 “ id e o .. .terra.” — A gain Aristotle is being echoed {Physics, Bk. IV , Chap.
14, 223a 17-18 ; M edieval Text N o. 130 [ed. o f Turin, Rome, 1954, 308]):
“ et propter quid in omni videtur esse tempus, et in terra, et in mari, et in
caelo.” Actually, Oresme suggests in his treatment o f the Physics (MS Seville,
Bibl. Colomb. 7.6.30, 54r, c. 2) that Aristotle says that time is the same in
these three regions (“ Quinta est quod ubique est idem tempus, ut dicit
Aristoteles quod est idem in celo, in mari, in terra.” ), but while this might be
implied from the w hole discussion o f Aristotle, his specific reference merely
says that there is time everywhere, i.e., in these three regions.
I l.iii
11 -14 “ D ic o ... m otus.” — For a similar definition o f motion in terms o f perfection
that was current in the fourteenth century, see The Science of Mechanics, 454,
lines 13-16.
Commentary to Il.iii—
Il.iv 465
15 “ pertransiretur” — For the significance o f the use o f the subjunctive, see the
discussion o f this definition in Introduction L B , page 32. Cf. The Science of
Mechanics, 214-15, where the significance o f the subjunctive for the measure
o f instantaneous velocity in definitions by William Heytesbury and Richard
Swineshead is treated.
Il.iv
7-10 “ V e rb i descriptos.” — For a similar distinction between angular and curvi­
linear velocity, see The Science o f Mechanics, 224-26, 228-29. Cf. Oresm e’s
Questiones de spera, Quest. 13 (Droppers text, 296; cf. M S Vat. lat. 2185, 77V,
c. 1): “ Secunda distinctio est quod motus circularis potest dici regularis dupli­
citer sicut etiam velocitas in talli (/) motu potest capi dupliciter. Uno modo in
comparatione ad maximam lineam circularem descriptam in talli motu. A lio
modo in comparatione ad centrum quando in temporibus eisdem describit
equales angulos circa centrum.”
19-29 “ Item __m otus.” — The initial distinction between velocity o f motion as
measured along a straight line and velocity o f descent as the component o f
any such m otion along a radius directed toward the center o f the w orld was
also made in Oresm e’s Questiones de spera, Quest. 7 (Droppers text, 148; cf.
M S Vat. lat. 2185, 74r, c. 2): “ Quarta conclusio est quod aliquid potest velo­
cius m oved quam descendere. Ista conclusio probatur, quia si aliquod m o­
bile sicut a grave descendat per lineam transversalem sive dyametricalem,
tunc motus eius mensuratur per illam lineam et descensus eius non mensura­
tur nisi per lineam que est pars dyametri mundi et est quasi costa respectu al­
terius sui quadrati cuius altera esset dyameter. M odo dyameter est longior
linea quam costa. E rgo motus est velocior quam descensus.” T he further
distinction that Oresme makes in the latter half o f this statement in the D e
configurationibus, which includes the possibility that velocity o f descent along a
diameter o f the w orld could be considered as measured by its proportionate
nearness to the center rather than by the length o f the line traversed, reminds
us o f the distinction between simple augmentation and proportionate aug­
mentation made by the M erton authors (see Appendix II, fn. 19 to English
translation). A t any rate, some authors talk as if velocity o f fall is to be meas­
ured by proximity to the center and Walter o f Burley is careful to refute them
(see The Science o f Mechanics, 550), although in fact Burley is principally trying
to refute the idea that proxim ity to natural place is the cause o f the body’s ac­
celeration.
 466 De configurationibus qualitatum et motuum
ILv
27-32 “ A d h u c— diversimode.” — For various examples o f theorems applying to
varying acceleration and deceleration in the Liber calculationum o f Richard
Swineshead, see The Science o f Mechanics, 292-94, 297, 302-4.
IL v i
13-23 “ V erbi — intensione.” — A s I suggested in Introduction I.B, if the varia­
tions in velocity according to the parts o f the subject were represented by fig­
ures in the same way as the variations in velocity according to time (and
in fact in this passage Oresme suggests representing a velocity uniformly dif-
form throughout the subject by a right triangle), then the first theorem o f
Gerard o f Brussels’ D e motu could be proved by the familiar equation o f (1) a
rectangle representing a line in which all o f the points are m oving w ith the
mean velocity o f a rotating line and (2) a right triangle representing the uni­
form ly difform distribution o f velocity in the rotating line. For the theorem o f
Gerard and its proof, see The Science o f Mechanics, 185-95.
It is o f interest that the celebrated Nicholas o f Cusa appears to follow Ores-
me’s suggestion o f representing a motion uniformly difform as to subject by a
right triangle {De mathematicis complementis, in Nicolaus Cusanus, Opera, V ol.
2, fol. 70V): “ Lineam figuravi: motus puncti concipio, quae si recta fuerit:
tunc si uno eius termino fixo manente movetur, hic motus rectae per triangu­
lum orthogonium figuratur. Ut si ab linea movetur a stante: motus figuratur
per triangulum abc. si enim motus b est ut latus bc: tunc proportionabiliter
omnia puncta dabilia. puta si d est punctus m edius: tunc de est motus d et de
latus est medium ad bc. Si vero ab recta m ovetur aequaliter in a sicut in b : mo­
tus configuratur per duplicem orthogonium sive quadrangulum abcd. omnia
enim puncta dabilia: aequaliter moventur. Si vero a movetur similiter et b sed
inaequaliter: hoc fieri potest infinitis modis, et unica figura non poterit con­
figurari. E x prima configuratione motus lineae rectae__” (I have changed the
punctuation slightly and italicized the letters o f the figures.)
C definition in his analysis o f a velocity uniformly difform with respect to time
It w ill be noticed that Nicholas also suggests that the motion o f a line in which
all points m ove with the same speed be represented by a rectangle and that, by
Commentary to II.v-II.vi 467
varying the speeds o f the points, w e could produce an infinity o f variations
which no single figure could represent. I have added the first lines o f the next
passage to show that Nicholas uses Oresm e’s name for the representing right
triangle, namely a configuratio.
But to return to the Oresme passage under consideration, a definition o f
velocity uniform ly difform according to subject is here implied in the example
given in lines 16-21 (“ S im iliter... 2?” ). Such a velocity is uniformly difform
when the initial velocity o f the first proportional part o f the rotating subject
is tw ice the initial velocity o f the second proportional part o f the subject, the
initial velocity o f the second proportional part is twice the initial velocity o f
the third proportional part, the initial velocity o f the third tw ice that o f the
fourth, and so on through the proportional parts. M uch better is the similar
definition given by Richard Swineshead in his Liber calculationum for the case
o f a velocity uniformly difform according to time (see my The Science o f M e­
chanics, 291): “ For let it be posited that a decelerates uniformly to zero degree.
Then in every instant o f the first proportional part [of the time] it w ill be
m oved twice as swiftly as in the corresponding instant o f the second propor­
tional part [of the time], and similarly for the succeeding [proportional parts o f
the time], as is evident.” In Swineshead’s example, o f course, it is the time
which is divided into proportional parts rather than the subject since he is
discussing a velocity uniform w ith respect to time. Swineshead’s implied
definition is better than Oresm e’s because Swineshead takes the velocity o f
every instant o f a proportional part o f the time and compares it w ith the
velocity o f every corresponding instant o f the succeeding proportional part,
while Oresme merely takes the initial velocity o f one proportional part o f the
subject and compares it with the initial velocity o f the succeeding proportion­
al part. T o make his definition sufficient, Oresme w ould have had to add
that the ratio o f 2 :1 holds for the velocities o f all the corresponding points o f
the successively compared proportional parts o f the subject. Perhaps this
more complete definition is implied by the phrase “ and so on proportionally
for the other points.” Similarly perhaps Oresme implies the more complete
in Il.viii, lines 24-30, where after giving a case almost exactly like that found
here in IL vi, he adds “ and so on proportionally for all other instants.” This
could mean either “ all other initial instants o f successive proportional parts o f
the time” (and if so the definition w ould be as incomplete as it is here in ILvi)
or it could mean “ all other instants in each proportional part o f the time”
(and if so it w ould be similar to Swineshead’s definition).
 468 D e configurationibus qualitatum e t m otuum
Il.v iii
3-6 “ E t . . .phisicorum .” — Certainly Aristotle in B ook V I, Chapters 1 and 2 o f the
Physics, 231 a— 233b, begins his analysis o f motion and time on the basis o f an
initial analysis o f a continuous magnitude, thus clearly im plying the priority
o f continuity in magnitude. He also uses linear magnitudes to represent times
and stresses the convertibility o f time and magnitude as to divisibility and
ratio. But in fact the priority o f magnitude among continua (which as we saw
in Introduction II. A , Aristotle implied elsewhere in B ook X o f the Metaphys­
ics, Chap. 1, 1052b) is not actually stated here. For the convertibility o f time
and magnitude, see the medieval translation o f 233a 8-17 (Medieval Texts
N o. 16-17) accompanying Aquinas’ Expositio (Turin, Rome, 1954, 381-82):
“ Si igitur semper verum est converti, converso autem semper fit divisio;
manifestum quoniam omne tempus continuum est. Similiter autem manifes­
tum et quod magnitudo omnis continua est: per easdem enim et aequales
divisiones tempusque et magnitudo dividitur. Amplius autem et ex consuetis
rationibus dici manifestum est, quod si tempus continuum est, quod et magni­
tudo. Siquidem in medio tempore medium transit; et simpliciter in minori
minus. Eaedem namque divisiones temporis et magnitudinis sunt.”
I I .x
9—13 In d e .. .stupor.” — See P. Duhem , L e Systeme du monde, V ol. 8, 427, quoting
Aegidius Romanus to similar effect. Cf. Aristotle, Historia animalium, IX , 37,
620b 19-24; and Pliny, Natural History, IX , 143-44. These passages o f
Aristotle and Pliny do not mention the effect o f the action o f electrical fish on
the fisherman but only on other fish. It is the passage o f Aegidius Romanus
which shows that it was the stingray that Oresme had in mind.
I l.x iii
9-28 “ A lie — tali.” — In this passage Oresme touches briefly on the question o f the
nature o f the intension and remission o f every kind o f intensible and remis­
sible quality. It is immediately evident that he rejects the existence o f a multi­
tude or denumerable number o f degrees o f such a quality undergoing inten­
sion or remission, for the quality intended is a successive entity and hence a
continuum. A similar rejection is found in Oresme’s Questiones super de celo,
Bk. I ll, Quest. 3 (Kren text, 763; cf. M S Erfurt, Stadtbibl. Am plon. Q . 299,
44r) : “ et cum dicitur quod si forma ignis potest denudari ab uno gradu, igi­
tur ab alio et cetera: hoc non valet quia ibi non est talis multitudo graduum;
ymmo caliditas est indivisibilis intensive sicud curvitas, licet acquiratur per
m otum.” O ne might suspect from the passage in the D e configurationibus and
its use o f superpositio graduum as well as multitudo, that Oresme meant to reject
Commentary to II.viii-II.xiii 469
the theory that intension takes place by the addition o f degree to degree.
H ow ever this is by no means clear. In fact, in the Quodlibeta (MS Paris, B N
lat. 15126, i36 r-v), he seems rather hesitantly to accept such an addition:
“ Sic dico cuiuslibet qualitatis esse in indivisibili, quamvis sicut Sortes per
augmentationem partium fit maior sic etiam calor aut lumen per aggregatio­
nem graduum et additionem talium partium dicitur augeri aut secundum com­
munem modum loquendi intendi. E t si dicatur quod non per additionem gra­
duum etc., tunc dico quod est alia in numero quam prius. In qualitatibus vero di­
citur intendi seu intensio quid in substantiis dicitur augeri vel augmentatio,
quia in qualitatibus in eadem parte subiecti fit additio qualitatis vel saltim alia
qualitas quam p r iu s ....(136 v )....H ic autem, ut dixi, sunt multe difficultates
quas mihi difficile esset hoc determinare et etiam nimis prolixum. D ico igitur
quod cuiuslibet rei est certus terminus. ‘Certus,’ dico, i.e., determinatus sue
magnitudinis etc. D ico secundo quod ille terminus in diversis speciebus est
diversus. D ico tertio quod secundum communem modum loquendi et fere
secundum omnes ille terminus habet latitudinem, adhuc in eadem specie, ym­
mo etiam et in eodem individuo, tam in magnitudine quam in numero, quam
duratione, quam etiam potentia seu virtute. D ico quarto quod probabile et
ymaginabile et saltem veraciter loquendo, unius rei simplicis cuiuscunque ter­
minus dictus tam magnitudinis quam durationis quam virtutis est indivisibilis.
D ico quinto quod in rebus compositis terminus dictus habet latitudinem et est
intensibilis et remissibilis solum per aggregationem seu additionem nove rei
superaddite, sicud diceretur de domo quod terminus sue magnitudinis etc.
vel etiam Sortis per appositionem nutrimenti etc.” H owever, it is clear that
Oresme has in mind here the increase o f intensity brought about by the addi­
tion o f one quantity o f quality (considering both intensity and extension) to
another quantity o f quality in the same part. Oresme also seems to argue for a
limited acceptance o f intension by addition in his Questiones super septem libros
physicorum, Bk. V . Quest. 7 (MS Seville, Bibl. Colomb. 7.6.30, 6 iv , c. 1). He
argues at least for its acceptance in the intension o f qualities in the third spe­
cies, o f a form not having a contrary such as light, o f some qualities that do
have contraries such as calidity, gravity, whiteness, and other corporeal qual­
ities, but he w ould apparently reject it for the intensity o f qualities involving
relations such as faster or slower, more or less angular or curved, more or
less grave or sharp in sound, e tc .: “ Sustinendo primam oppinionem (/) de
contrariis, quod sunt simul, dicendum est primo quod aliquid fit magis aut
minus tale multipliciter: Primo secundum mutationem sui, sicut in refla­
tione (/) dicitur magis simille (!) vel magis propinquum, et similiter per mu­
tationem sui dicitur (bis /) magis et minus in reflatione sicut magis velox aut
magis tardum, que sunt relativa, ut patet ex eorum diffinitione. z°, aliquid fit
magis et minus per mutationem sui localem, sicut aliquid dicitur magis sursum
aut magis deorsum. 30, per mutationem in qualitate consequente reflationem,
 470 D e configurationibus qualitatum et m otuum
sicut velocitatem consequitur sonus, et ideo est ibi grave aut minus et etiam
accutum ( /), vel proportionem sicut sanitas vel egritudo, et ideo dicitur magis
sanum vel minus. 40, secundum mutationem secundum qualitatem ubi tamen
acquirendo aliquam rem secundum illam viam, sicut est in quarta specie, quod
aliquid dicitur magis aut minus accutum ( /) aut curvum, et etiam in secunda,
quod dicitur magis vel minus rarum vel etiam durum. 50 acquirendo ali­
quam rem sicut qualitatem de tertia specie et formam non tamen habentem
contrarium, cuiusmodi est lumen. 6° acquirendo talem qualitatem habentem
contrarium, cuiusmodi caliditas, gravitas, albedo, et hec intelligenda sunt de
qualitatibus corporalibus— Tunc ad propositum, questio [utrum forma in­
tenditur per additionem gradus ad gradum sive partes ad partem] intelli­
genda est de duobus ultimis modis quibus immaginatur acquiri aliqua qua­
litas absoluta. Tunc est conclusio, quod semper istis modis fit intensio per ad­
dictionem ( /) partis ad partem, gradus ad gradum, et remissio (corr. ex remis­
sione) de perditione, sicut est in lumine, caliditate, albedine.” In returning
to the passage in the D e configurationibus, we should reiterate in conclusion
that Oresme emphasizes that the intension o f the intensible and remis­
sible quality is a successive entity and so presumably is a continuum. Miss
Maier has remarked on the similarity o f this view to the position o f Durandus
de St. Pour^ain (Zwei Grundprobleme, 71-72, 86).
II. xv
1 “ natura... sonorum .” — W ith this chapter begins Oresm e’s long discussion o f
sound and music. The only previous treatment o f it is the brief account o f
V . P. Z o u b o v in Mediaeval and Renaissance Studies, V o l. 5 (1961), 96-107. Z ou-
b o v stresses the role th at the concepts o f novelty and incommensurability
played in Oresm e’s analysis o f aesthetic beliefs. He compares Oresm e’s state­
ments in the D e configurationibus with his remarks in the D e commensurabilitate,
the Livre du del, and so on.
23 “ cantilena. . . antiphona” — The term cantilena had several meanings, as J.
Stainer and W . A . Barrett indicate in their A Dictionary o f Musical Terms
(London, 1888), 72: “ Cantilena (It.). (1). A n oft-repeated, old song. (2) In
medieval music, singing exercises in which were introduced all the intervals o f
the scale, etc. (3) In old church-song the plain-song or canto-fermo sung in
unison by one or more persons to an organ accompaniment. (4) A ballad.”
O f these suggested meanings (3) seems the best. One m ight be tempted to
translate it as canticle. H owever, my friend D r. G w ynn M cPeek, wise in these
matters, believes that since it is linked here and in other passages with “ anti­
phon,” it m ight w ell have the meaning o f all other kinds o f responds beyond
the antiphon (and not simply canticle). Antiphons, o f course, involve choirs
(or parts o f choirs), where each choir is singing in unison. Still, as M cPeek
Commentary to II.xv-II.xvii 471
points out, when one surveys all o f the uses o f cantilena, the one thing in com­
mon to the definitions is that it is a simple song in contradistinction to an
elaborate one, and thus in this context o f the D e configurationibus may merely
mean a simple song sung in unison. In view o f the difficulty in know ing
precisely what is meant here, and in its succeeding usages, I have chosen the
uncourageous but safe course o f leaving the w ord untranslated.
40 “ d e .. .loquitur.” — Z ou b ov, w riting in Medieval and Renaissance Studies, V o l.
5 (1961), 101, w ould see Oresme’s distinction between intensity in acutie and
intensity in fortitudine as being an improvement over the general imprecision
o f medieval authors in regard to these terms.
Il.x v i
13-15 “ T e r tio .. .turpis.” — Z o u b o v in Medieval and Renaissance Studies, V ol. 5
(1961), 106, leaves out the w ord talis in line 13 and so interprets this remark,
which Oresme applied only to a continuous sound (“ truly and simply one” ),
as applying to sound in general. He thus, in this point, makes Oresme more
conservative than he is. E ven in the case o f this kind o f sound, Oresme sug­
gests that the difform sound might not be ugly if the “ difformity were har­
monic and graduated.”
Il.x v ii
18-24 “ prem ittendum ....arm onici.” — Oresme defines harmonic ratios and num­
bers in precisely the same w ay in his Algorismusproportionum, Bk. I l l; (see
above, Introduction III.B, fn. 3). I have not been able to find any reference in
antiquity or the M iddle A ges (before the fourteenth century) to this concept
o f harmonic ratio and number. T he immediate origin o f it appears to be
from among Oresm e’s contemporaries at Paris. A t least, a quite similar treat­
ment is found in L evi ben G erson’s D e harmonicis numeris, dated in 1343 and
undertaken at the request o f Philippe de V itry, to whom Oresme also dedicat­
ed his Algorismus proportionum. In that tract, L evi seems to say that the def­
inition o f harmonic number in question is that o f Philippe (MS Basel, F.II.33,
i 7 i r ; cf. the wretched text o f Joseph Carlebach, Lem ben Gerson als Mathema-
tiker, 129, w hich has several errors in the passage): “ In Christi incarnatio­
nis anno 1343 nostro opere mathematico iam completo fui requisitus a quo­
dam eximio magistrorum in scientia musicali, scilicet a magistro Philippo de
Vitriaco de regno francie, ut demonstrarem unum suppositum in predicta
scientia, scilicet: Om nium numerorum armonicorum quilibet 2 numero dis­
tinguuntur preter istos, 1 et 2, 2 et 3, 3 et 4, 8 et 9. Arm onicum autem nume­
rum sic describit: armonicus numerus est qui et quelibet eius pars preter uni­
tatem per equa 2 vel 3 continuo vel vice 'versa usque ad ipsam unitatem findi
 472 D e configurationibus qualitatum et m otuum
potest. V erbi gratia, continui i, 2, 4, 8; et 1, 3, 9, 27; et vice versa 6, 12, 18, et
24, et cui parere desiderans vo lo in hoc loco libri nostri hoc principium de­
monstrare. Sed quia tales numeri vel sunt de specie continue proportionalium
[proportione] dupla ut primi, vel de specie continue proportionalium propor­
tione tripla ut secundi, vel ex specie productorum ex ductu unius prime spe­
ciei in unam secunde ut tertii, sub aliis verbis theoreuma dem onstrabo__” It
is clear that Philippe’s definition is somewhat broader than N icole’s. For Phi­
lippe not only are the members o f each series harmonic numbers but also
their products. Furthermore, harmonic ratios are not defined in the tract o f
L evi ben Gerson. Possibly the ultimate origin o f N icole’s concept lies in the
combinations o f the elements o f these tw o series in the Timaeus (3 5 B -C ) to
produce the series 1, 2, 3, 4, 8, 9, 27, used in the action o f dividing the world
soul, and further used in form ing consonant ratios in musical theory. Cf.
Aristotle, D e anima, Bk. I, Chap. 3, 406b, 28-29, where the Timaeus is quoted
to the effect that the soul substance is divided “ according to the harmonic
numbers.” This runs in the medieval translation accompanying the Commen­
tarium o f Aquinas (ed. o f Turin, 1959, 26): “ Constitutam autem ex elementis,
et dispartitam secundum harmonicos numeros, quatenus connaturalem sen-
sum harmoniae habeat, et ut omne feratur secundum consonantes m otus.”
Aquinas comments {ibid., 28): “ Item sciendum est, quod in numeris sunt di­
versae proportiones, et infinitae; quarum aliquae sunt harmonicae, idest con­
sonantiarum causa. Nam dupla proportio est causa consonantiae, quae dicitur
diapason; sesquialtera proportio causat consonantiam, quae dicitur diates-
saron; sesquioctava proportio causat tonum ; et aliae consonantiae quibus­
dam aliis proportionibus causantur.” It is evident, therefore, that at the time
o f Thomas harmonic numbers were those employed in form ing the consonant
ratios o f music, and that they were thus the numbers commingled from the
first terms o f the tw o series into a single series in the Timaeus. But the crucial
step beyond this, a step represented by Oresme’s view o f harmonic numbers
and ratios, was to assume that all o f the numbers o f both series continued in­
definitely are to be designated as harmonic numbers whether or not they form
the consonant ratios o f music, and that any ratio between tw o o f these num­
bers (and not merely those producing consonance) is to be considered a har­
monic ratio. W hen this further step was taken, I do not know.
-31 “ Harum— dyapente.” — The treatment o f consonances and their ratios by
Oresme is conventional and in the manner o f Boethius, Institutio musica, I, 7
(and passim). Oresme has several references to consonances in his LeLivrede
politiques d'A ristote (Paris, 1489). For example, see Bk. II, Chap. 6, folio xlvii r
(misprinted as xlvi), c. 1 [63^ (the numbers given in brackets are successive
numbers added in ink in the copy I used at the Pierpont M organ L ibrary):
“ Car en chant ou en son (corr. ex san) quant a propos deux choses sont a con­
siderer : une est consonance et l’autre est melodie. Consonance ou simphonie
Commentary to Il.xvii 473
est acord de plusieurs sons ensemble sicomme il fut dit ou vii chapitre. Et
quant les sons sont equalz ou quant ilz sont trop inequalz est hors proporcion,
done ce n’est pas consonance. Mais melodie est concorde des sons en les variant
l’unapres l’autre par succession de temps. E t seil n’y avoit variacion ou s’e lle y
estoit trop grande ou hors proporcion deue ce ne seroit pas melodie” [Note
that I have added a few o f the essential apostrophes missing in the old French
text.]. Cf. Bk. I, Chap. 7, folio xxxix v, c. 1 [5 5v ] : “ Consonance est acord de
plusieurs sons desquelz les ungs sont plus accuz ou plus hausx et les autres
sont plus graves ou plus bas selon certaines proporcions qui son appellees
armoniiques et consonaces. E t plusieurs autres proporcions desquelles, les
termes sont plus prochaines et ne sont pas consonantes, sicomme a parler
grossement de proporcion de vii a v i ne sont pas armoniques ne consonantes,
sicomme a parler grossement la proporcion de xii a vi est consonante mais la
proporcion de xii a vii ne la proporcion de vii a vi ne sont pas armoniques ne
consonantes.” Later on (Bk. V , Chap. 38, folio ccxv r, c. 1 [23or]) the three
main consonances (i.e., the simple consonances), diatessaron, diapente, and
diapason are defined in the conventional manner.
56 “ E t . . . turpior.” — Here Oresme raises one o f his favorite doctrines (and
one that seems to be exclusively his), namely that there are differences in the
irrationality o f ratios, an idea that is present in at least three o f his w orks, but
in somewhat different form in each work. Here in the D e configurationibus he
seems to make tw o points. T he first is that some irrational ratios are more ir­
rational than others. T o support this he quotes B ook X o f the Elements. Pre­
sumably this is a reference to Definition 4 (Ed. o f Basel, 1546, 243): “ Lineae
incommensurabiles in potentia dicuntur, quarum superficies quadratas non
numerat una communis superficies. Quae cum ita sint, manifestum est quia
omni lineae positae, multae aliae sunt incommensurabiles, quaedam in longi­
tudine tantum, quaedam in longitudine et potentia.” Thus one w ould suppose
that Oresme thought o f those ratios which are irrational both in length and in
square as being more irrational than those ratios which are irrational in length
but rational in square. The second point he makes is that certain irrational
ratios are unknowable and unnameable, and Campanus’s comment on D ef­
inition 16 o f B ook V o f the Elements is given as the authority (for this com ­
ment, see below, Appendix I, Question 14, fn. 8). Here, as in the D e proportio­
nibus proportionum, where a like appeal is made to Campanus, he clearly is mis­
using or bending Campanus to his view , because all that Campanus means is
that all irrational ratios are unknowable as to denomination since their terms
have no common measure. But, as is clear in the D e proportionibus proportionum,
Chap. I, lines 278-332 (ed. o f E. Grant, 160-64; cf. 326-31), Oresme has in­
troduced a new sense o f commensurability and irrationality: “ Omnis propor­
tio rationalis immediate denominatur ab aliquo numero, aut cum fractione
aut fractionibus aut sine fractione — Proportio, vero, irrationalis dicitur
 474 D e configurationibus qualitatum e t m otuum
mediate denominari ab aliquo numero quando ipsa est pars aliquota aut partes
alicuius proportionis, aut quando est commensurabilis alicui rationali, quod
est idem, sicut proportio dyametri ad costam est medietas duple proportionis.
Dico, ergo, quod non apparet verum quod omnis proportio irrationalis sit
commensurabilis alicui rationali. Et ratio est quia omnis proportio est sicut
quantitas continua quo ad divisionem ut patet per ultimam suppositionem.
Ergo potest dividi in duo quorum quodlibet est incommensurabile toti per
nonam decimi. Igitur erit aliqua proportio que erit pars duple et tamen non
erit medietas duple, nec tertia pars, nec quarta, nec due tertie, et cetera, sed
erit incommensurabilis duple et per consequens cuicumque commensurabili
ipsi duple per commentum octave decimi. Et iterum, pari ratione, aliqua po­
terit esse incommensurabilis duple et etiam triple et cuilibet commensurabili
alicui istarum sicut est medietas sesquitertie, et sic de aliis. Et sic, forte, pote­
rit esse aliqua irrationalis que est incommensurabilis cuilibet rationali. Nunc
videtur ratio si aliqua est incommensurabilis duabus et aliqua tribus et sic
ultra quoniam sit aliqua que sit incommensurabilis cuilibet licet non sequatur
ex forma argumendi ( ! ) sicut aliqua quantitas continua omnibus quantitatibus
unius ordinis est incommensurabilis. Istud, tamen, nescio demonstrare sed si
oppositum sit verum est indemonstrabile et ignotum. Hoc etiam patet in com­
mento ultime diffinitionis quinti Euclidis ubi dicitur quod infinite sunt pro­
portiones irrationales quarum denominatio scibilis non est_Quare, potius,
videtur intelligere quod denominationes aliquarum non sunt scibiles quia
ipsarum nulle sunt denominationes cum omnis denominatio, vel mediate vel
immediate, ab aliquo numero denominetur.” Before quoting Professor Grant’s
evaluation of this passage, let me say that, in viewing the purpose and content
of the treatise, we can see that Oresme is making a new and apparently origi­
nal distinction between irrational ratios whose fractional exponents are ra­
tional, e.g. (f)J, and those whose exponents are themselves irrational, ap-
parently of the form (f . In the course of making this distinction Oresme
introduces new significations for the terms pars, partes, commensurabilis, and
incommensurabilis. Thus pars is used to stand for the exponential part that one
ratio is of another. For example, starting with the ratio (f)*, Oresme would
say, in terms of his exponential calculus, that this irrational ratio is “ one half
part” of the ratio -f, meaning of course that if one took the original ratio
twice and composed a ratio therefrom, f would result. Or one would say
that the ratio f can be divided into two “parts” exponentially, each part
being (f)*, or more succinctly in modern representation: f- = [(f)*]2. Further­
more, Oresme thought of the fractional exponent (-£) as mediately denom­
inating the whole irrational ratio (f )*. In addition, Oresme would say a ratio like
(p)i is “two third parts” of f , meaning that if we exponentially divided f into
(ffi • • (ffi, then (f)* is two of the three “ parts” by which we compose the
Commentary to Il.xvii 475
ratio f , again representable in modern symbols as (f) = (?)* • (?-)*. And the
exponent f is the mediate numerical denomination of the irrational ratio (ffi.
This new signification of pars and partes also led to a new exponential treat­
ment of commensurability. Thus any ratio that could be shown to be an
exponential part or parts of another ratio would be called commensurable with
it; thus (2)* is commensurable with \, since, exponentially, it is a one half part of
it. Similarly, using the second example above, is commensurable with f-
since, exponentially, it is f parts of it. Now let us go to the heart of Oresme’s
argument for a further class of irrational ratios that are not exponentionally
commensurable to any rational ratio as analysed by Grant (page 329): “ Ores­
me now moves to render plausible his contention that there do exist irrational
ratios that have no mediate numerical denomination and are incommensur­
able to every rational ratio. The argument is based on Campanus’ comment on
Euclid X .9 ... which says that if quantities A and B constitute some whole, C,
then ‘if A and B are incommensurable, C will be incommensurable to each of
them.’ . . .Now by supposition five a ratio can be divided into two ratios, say
A and B , that are mutually incommensurable, from which it follows, by
Campanus’ comment, that the whole ratio C will be incommensurable to each
of them. Once again, where Euclid and Campanus take A , B and C as quanti­
ties, Oresme reinterprets each quantity as a ‘ratio of quantities’ [and the re­
lationship of commensurability and incommensurability in exponential
terms]__Thus ratios A and B will each be incommensurable [exponentially]
v
to ratio C, the whole. In symbolizing this, we may say that A 4= and
- p r
B 4= C», where q > p , s > r , and -, - are ratios of integers; or, expressed in an-
4 s E r p
other way, it is possible to represent this as A — C * and B = C*, where-
r , . ^
and - are irrational exponents [And, if I may interrupt again Grant’s exposi-
j) f
tion, since the fractional exponents - and - are supposed to denominate the
ratio mediately and they are irrational, the ratios in these examples are thus
not mediately denominated by numbers]. If C , the whole ratio, were a double
ratio, Oresme says (1.289-94) that there is some ratio, say B , that is no [numer­
ical, exponential] part of a double ratio but is incommensurable to it and to
any ratio commensurable to a double ratio— i.e., to all ratios in the series
(f)p, where p is an integer or improper fraction. And if it is incommensurable
to (f)p, it may also be incommensurable to (f)p, and so on indefinitely.” In­
terestingly enough, nowhere in this discussion does Oresme suggest an exam­
ple of an irrational ratio that is not denominated either mediately or imme­
diately by numbers. However, when we turn to what may be his earliest men­
tion of this class of irrational ratios, in an hitherto unnoticed passage of his
jQuestiones super septem libros physicorum, Bk. VII, Quest. 5 (MS Seville, Bibl.
 476 D e configurationibus qualitatum et m otuum
Colom b. 7.6.30, 75 r, c. 1), w e find an example given: “ Quantum ad tertium
principale est primo una distinctio, quod quedam est comparatio proportio­
nalis, alia est inproportionalis. Secunda distinctio est quod proportionalis est
duplex: quedam est finita et alia infinita.... Si sit finita, tunc est triplex: que­
dam est rationalis, sicut dupla, tripla et subdupla et sic de aliis, [que] quidem
(corr. ex quedam) nominatur numeris vel fractionibus immediate et subdupla
nominatur a dupla et cetera. A lia est irrationalis, scilicet quedam nominatur
(corr. ex nominatio) numeris mediate et habet ad proportionem rationalem
certam comparationem, sicut proportio diametri ad costam, que dicitur me­
dietas duple. Sed alia est irrationalis et inscibilis cum hec est (corr. ex hoc m o­
do) innominabilis per numeros, nec mediate nec immediate, sicut forte est
proportio circuli ad quadratum inscriptum (corr. ex inscripti), et illa descriptio
habet trahy [ex commento] xime (? i6 me ?) diffinitionis 5 euclidis (corr. ex euchi-
dis).” The example o f an irrational ratio not denominated mediately by num­
bers, given here in a tentative way, is that o f a circle to its inscribed square,
i.e., n j2. I f Oresme had his exponential analysis o f irrational ratios in mind, at
least germinally (and his distinction here o f irrationals mediately denominat­
ed by numbers from those not so denominated w ould seem to imply that he
• 71 p
did), then he must have thought at this time that - #= C~q, where is rational.
2 q
But later he found no way to analyse this ratio by follow ing his exponential-
part analysis. A n d so perhaps for this reason he sets it aside in the extensive
discussions o f the D e proportionibus. Incidentally, no better evidence could be
given o f the genuineness o f the attribution o f the Questions on the Physics to
Oresme than the appearance in B ook V II o f this characteristically Oresmian
doctrine o f the distinction o f different kinds o f irrational ratios, an evaluation
that is reinforced by the appearance also o f his configuration doctrine in ger­
minal form [see Introduction II.A , fn. 19], and by certain similarities there
w ith his treatment o f time (see the Commentary, II. ii, lines 17-19).
Il.x v iii
“ u t . . .pannis” — Cf. Oresme’s Questiones super de sensu, Quest. 9 (Erfurt, Stadt-
bibl. Am plon. Q . 299, i43r): “ Secunda opinio, quod colores medii ex eo ap­
parent quod colores extremi vel substantia talibus coloribus colorata divi­
duntur in parvissimas (? ) partes ita quod nulla seorsum posita esset per se
sensibilis tamen iste partes iuxtaposite senciuntur et apparet totum medium
esse medio colore coloratum quamvis realiter nullus sit ibi medius color. E t
ista est causa quare pannus est alterius coloris quam sit aliqua lanarum et ap­
paret ibi color qui ibi non est.” Oresme also gives the same example o f the
cloth mixed o f various w ools in theQuodlibeta (MS Paris, B N lat. 15126, 4 8 V ) :
“ E t quandoque inde generatur una cognitio confusa aut media composita
Commentary to II.xviii-II.xxii 477
quasi ex pluribus extremis. In panno mixto ex pluribus lanis diversorum colo­
rum nullus color per se percipitur quia pili seu partes diverse sunt nimis parve
ad hoc quod seorsum cogniscitur sed percipitur unus color quasi medius ex
illis.”
I l.x ix
14—15 “ cantores... duorum” — In suggesting that I leave tempus as untranslated
and that I not translate it as “ beat,” Dr. McPeek writes: “ There are several
temporal divisions with their equivalents in the notational system that was
developing when Philippe de Vitry and Oresme were writing. One of these is
tempus (others are modus, maximodus, both longer than tempus'). In other words,
Oresme refers to a specific notational sign here that is represented by a breve
rest, and which was found in certain places appropriate to phrase endings of
less than primary importance. A different sign is used at longer or more im­
portant places in the text where a greater sense of finality is desired. More
often than not in Oresme’s day, a breve did represent one beat, but by no
means is this always so. On the contrary, it is one of the most significant
features of the notation of that day that, differing sharply with former prac­
tice, it could reflect a variety of temporal arrangements in the notational sys­
tem. In other words, while a breve pause would often be a beat, it might at
other times be more or less than a beat, but it would still be one tempus, no
matter what the value of the note used as the integer valor or what note was
used as the ta ctu s....! rather strongly object to the use of ‘beat’ therefore,
since it refers actually to an entirely different frame of reference. Recent music­
al scholarship has put the older practice of rendering ‘beat’ for tempus to
severe question.”
44-47 “ quoniam.. .gamma.”— As Zoubov pointed out in Medieval and Renaissance
Studies, Vol. 5 (1961), 106, Oresme is conservative in his preference for music
based on a diatonic scale to that based on the medieval scale, the gamma or
gamma-ut, a hexachord scale whose beginnings are associated with Guido of
Arezzo (d. 1050). As D. A. Hughes remarks (The New Oxford History o f Music,
Vol. 2, Early Medieval Music Up to 1300 [Oxford, 1954]» 292) : “ The Greek
gamma (T) was used as a symbol for the note below the lowest A : hence the
term gamut, or scale (= gamma-ut).” That note was designated as ut. Hughes
describes Guido’s system briefly (page 291) and his selection of the names ut,
re, mi,fa , sol, and la for the notes of his hexachord scale.
I l.x x ii
8-12 “ U n d e ...pulchrum .” — Cf. Oresme’s D e commensurabilitate, M S Paris B N lat.
7281, zj zr: “ Que est ista cantilena, que placet sepe aut multocies repetita?
Nonne talis uniformitas gignit fastidium? Y m m o certe novitas plus delectat
 478 D e configurationibus qualitatum e t m otuum
nec esset reputatus cantor optimus, sed cuculus, qui non posset vel sciret
modulos musicos variare, qui sunt variabiles in infinitum.” Quoted by
Z o u b o v in Medieval and Renaissance Studies, V ol. 5 (1961), 97, fn. 4, and in
substantial agreement w ith E. G rant’s new unpublished text based on seven
manuscripts.
I l.x x iii
3 “ E x ... theologorum ” — M ost o f Oresme’s sources are quoted in the course o f
this chapter. But to these we must also add William o f A uvergne’s D e uni-
verso, Part II, Pars III, Chap. X X b is (Paris, 1674, 1056-57), where the power
o f music is discussed.
21-25 “ N arrat...audaciam .” — For Constantine’s Viaticum, see Thorndike, H is­
tory o f Magic and Experimental Science, V ol. I, 749. This w ork was an adaptation
from an A rabic w ork o f Ibn al-Jazzar. For the passage in question, see Opera
omnia Ysaac, V ol. 2 (Lyon, 1515), f. 147' Viaticum, Bk. I, Chap. 20; D e amore
qui dicitur hereos: “ D icunt alii quod Orpheus dixit: imperatores me invitant
ad convivia[m ]: ut ex me se delectent: et ego quidem condelector ex ipsis:
cum quo velim animos eorum flectere possim : sicut de ira ad mansuetudinem:
de tristicia ad leticiam : de avaricia ad largitatem : de timore ad audiciam. H ec
est ordinatio organicorum musicorum atque vini circa sanitatem anime.”
26-27 “ s e d .. .tacuino.” — The treatise is called both Tacuinum D ei and Tacuinum
sanitatis. It is a medical w ork o f Ibn Butlan, apparently translated from the
Arabic by the Jew Faragius. (See Thorndike, History o f Magic and Experimental
Science, V ol. 2, 757). The pertinent passage occurs in M S Vat. lat. 2426, 31V
(cf. ed., Argentorati, 1531, 28-29): “ M usice sunt instrumenta iuvamenta
(iuvativa, ed.) ad conservandam sanitatem et ammissam restituendam iuxta
diversitates complexionum hominum. Nam et antiquitus ordinata erat hec
ars ad retrahendam animos ad salutiferos mores. Deinde medici exercitati
sunt ad curandum per ea corpora egra. Igitur si (sic, ed.) se habent toni ad
egros sicut medicine ad corpora egra. E t operatio musice ad animos est mani­
festa et incessu camelorum quando ductores ducunt eos honeratos et cantant
quia (add. ed.) ex hoc confortantur, et in puris etiam qui delectantur in cantu.
Operatur etiam cantus habilitatem et delectationem et confert ad orationes
prorogandas et lectiones. E t medici utuntur eo ad mitigandos dolores. E o ­
dem m odo faciunt honera gravia ferentes ut levia et facilia videantur.”
37 “ amorem hereos” — This malady, a love-sickness, has caused some discussion
because o f Chaucer’s reference to it in The Knighfs Tale, lines 1372-76, which
in the edition o f F. N . Robinson (Cambridge, Mass., 1957), page 30, runs:
A n d in his geere for al the w orld he ferde,
Nat oonly lik the loveris maladye
O f Hereos, but rather lyk manye,
Commentary to II.xxiii-II.xxv 479
Engendred o f humour malencolik,
Biforen, in his celle fantastik.
Particularly difficult is the peculiar form hereos, which most authors link w ith
eros (see the brilliant article w ith extensive texts o f J. L. L o w es,Modern Philol-
ogy, V o l. 11 (19 11-13) 491-546). T he earliest known use o f this bastard form
hereos is that found in the Viaticum translated by Constantinus Africanus (see
Lowes, pages 512-16, for the text). Since the passage in the Viaticum mentions
the use o f music in its cure and since w e have shown elsewhere that Oresme
had read the Viaticum, this may w ell be the source o f Oresm e’s reference,
although Oresme was probably also familiar w ith the discussion in Bernard
G ordon’s w ell know n Lilium medicinae (for the text see Lowes, pages 497—502).
He may have also been familiar w ith G ilbert the Englishm an’s Compendium
medicine (Lugduni [1510], 63^ c.2), not mentioned by Lowes. There G ilbert
treats the causes o f febris ephimera (defined as a disease arising from a “ dis-
temperance o f the spirits” ). G ilbert joins amor hereos to “ carnal concupiscence”
in his discussion o f the production o f a kind o f cogitatio et solicitudo unaccept­
able to the soul. T he outcome is the production o f the fever. “ Quandoque fit
cogitatio et solicitudo de rebus laudabilibus... et interdum fit de rebus tem­
poralibus illaudibilibus et inhonestis, sicut dicitur de amore hereos et carnali
concupiscentia, et hec apud animam non sunt acceptibilia. Quare provocantur
tales ad proferendum immunda verba et, cum sit vitium anime, corrumpit.”
Finally, it should be noted that the disease was also designated as amor heroicus
and it is not impossible that the faulty w ord hereos in some odd paleographical
way comes from the G reek berds(“ hero” ), perhaps through the adjectival form
heroos w ith the “ 0” changing to V ’ (and thereafter being mistaken as a G reek
genitive). It was under the name o f amor heroycus that Arnald o f V illanova w rote
a separate tract: Tractatus de amore qui heroycus nominatur (see the article o f
Low es, pages 495-97). It is this latter disease, as my friend O w sei Tem kin has
pointed out to me, o f which Richard Burton writes, in the Anatomy o f M el­
ancholy, Part 3, Sec. 2, Mem. 2, Subs. 2: “ this mad and beastly passion, as I
have said, is named by our Physicians Heroical love” (see Low es, page 5 39).
II.x x v
23-24 “ a i t .. . delectantur.” — Presumably this is an inexact reference to the Her­
metic Asclepius, Chap. 38 (ed. o f A . D . N ock, Corpus hermeticum, V ol. 2 [Paris,
1945], 349, lines 2-5; cf. Chap. 9, page 307, lines 5-12), w hich since the time
o f W illiam o f A uvergne had been know n under the title D e deo deorum (cf.
N o c k ’s Introduction to the text, 271). The crucial part o f Chap. 38 runs: “ E t
propter hanc causam sacrificiis frequentibus oblectantur, hymnis et laudibus
et dulcissimis sonis in modum caelestis harmoniae concinentibus, ut illud, quod
caeleste est, caelestius et frequentatione inlectum in idola possit laetum, hu-
 480 D e configurationibus qualitatum et m otuum
manitatis patiens, longa durare per tempora.” It is much more likely, how ­
ever, that Oresme was quoting William o f A uvergne’s interpretation o f Chap.
38 rather than the Asclepius directly {De universo, Part II, Pars III, Chap. 8
[1674 ed., 1030, c. 2]): “ D icit Mercurius in libro suo de D eo D eorum , quia
D ii musicis cantationibus delectantur; quod inde manifestum est, quia omnes
idolatrae cultum musicalem D iis suis semper exhibuerunt, et adhuc exhibent.”
Thus it w ould appear that just as Oresme apparently quoted the Asclepius
through Augustine earlier (see the Commentary, I.xxxix, lines 21-23), so now
he is evidently quoting it through William. Incidentally, W illiam makes a
further citation to the D e deo deorum (again to Chapter 38), in the D e universo,
II, III, Chap. 22 (1674 ed., 1060, c. 2FG), a citation not noted by N ock.
Il.x x v i
“ fundamentis artis magice” — I have made no effort in this commentary to
survey the extensive literature on medieval magic. The reader may consult
Lynn Thorndike’s History o f Magic and Experimental Science for detailed ref­
erences to the principal medieval authors and the modern literature concern­
ing them. I have been satisfied to run dow n Oresme’s direct quotations. It
should be realized by the reader that Oresme obviously had available in Paris
rich libraries w hich he must have constantly used. I should also point out in
this general note that Oresme knew well the third part o f the second part o f
William o f A uvergne’s gigantic D e universo, an extensive study o f demons,
and presumably it influenced his considerations not only in the passages where
William is quoted directly but also in other places where he is not specifically
mentioned. A thoroughgoing analysis o f Oresme’s views on magic ought to
correlate the view s as expressed here in the D e configurationibus w ith those
found in the Contra divinatores and Quodlibeta, and an excellent start has been
made in that direction by Thorndike in Chapter X X V II o f Volum e Three o f
his History. Cf. the passages from the Contra divinatores and Quodlibeta cited
above in Introduction III.B, fn. 5. One passage from the Quodlibeta (Paris,
B N lat. 15126, 8or) referred to in that note w ithout quotation can be added
here as indicative o f his rather naturalistic approach to phenomena attributed
to dem ons: “ Supradicta capitula satis sufficiunt intelligenti ad ostendum quod
propter diversitatem effectuum et mirabilitatem non oportet tanquam ad
causam recurrere ad celum et influentiam ignotam nec ad demones nec ad
deum gloriosum plusquam pro aliis quibuscunque, quia in predictis capitulis
sufficienter est ostensum quod ita mirabiles vel propre inveniuntur effectus hic
inferius pro quorum causis inveniendis ad predicta tanquam ad causas homi­
nes non recurrunt sed de causis naturalibus sunt bene contenti. Tertio est
ostensum quod cause naturales ibi assignate et modus inveniendi sunt possi­
biles et verisimiles multo magis quam quod demones aut influentia ignota
Commentary to II.xxvi-II.xxix 481
sint predictorum effectuum cause__E t clare pateat quod nec ad demones nec
ad influentiam ignotam oporteat recurrere effectus inferiorum naturaliter
fieri salvando.”
Il.x x v iii
16-18 “ Id eo q u e.. .predictam.” — T he second part o f al-Ghazzali’s Metaphysics was
comm only know n as the Physica or D e philosophia naturali. Hence, the variation
in title noted in the variant readings for line 17, most manuscripts having
Physice and some having Metaphysice. Oresme seems to have been impressed
by al-Ghazzali’s extensive remarks on the power o f the imagination. See
M uckle’s edition o f the medieval Latin translation: Alga^ePs Metaphysicsy
Part II, Tract. V , 188-96, and particularly 193-94, the section beginning:
“ N onum est de causis miraculorum et prodigiorum — Igitur sola imaginacio
est causa fiendi has permutaciones in hyle corpus — Aliquando autem im­
pressio alicuius anime pertransit ad aliud corpus, sic ut destruat spiritum esti-
macione, et inficiat hominem estimacione, et hoc dicitur fascinacio. E t prop­
ter hoc est illud proverbium, quod oculus mittit hominem in fossam et came­
lum in caldarium, et dicitur quod homines fascinari verum est; huius autem
rei sensus hic est, quod quia multum placet ei camelus, et miratur de eo, et
eius anima est maligna, et invidiosa, estimat casum cameli, et inficitur corpus
cameli ab eius estimacione, et statim cadit.” In a similar discussion in his
Questiones super septem libros physicorum, Bk. II, Quest. 14 (MS Seville, Bibi.
Colom b. 7.6.30, 28r, c. 2), Oresme in the course o f arguing for the increase or
decrease o f the dispositio called fortuna byymaginatio says: “ 20 dico quod quan­
doque hoc fit per ym aginationem ... Nam patet primo per agatalem (/ agaza-
lem) 50 physice sue ubi dicit quod anima per ymaginationem potest admittere
(corr. ex acmictere) hominem in fovea <m>. . . ” which, although corrupt in its
reading, quite clearly reflects the same passage that he has in mind in his D e
configurationibus. See also the next comment.
19-21 “ quoniam ... auctores.” — Oresme also mentions O vid in the same passage o f
his Questiones super septem libros physicorum (28r, c. 2) quoted in the preceding
comment, adding further a reference to Pliny’s Natural History (VII, 18):
“ que patet per plinium {corr. ex pluneum) in de naturali y storia ubi dicit quod
quedam vectule per immaginationem mediante visu interfecerunt homines et
dicit quod habent duplicem pupillam {corr. ex polulam) in occulo, et hoc idem
dicit ovidius.”
I l.x x ix
28-29 “ E t ... Sarracenorum” — See, for example, Vincent o f Beauvais, Speculum
historiale, Bk. 23, Chap. 39 (ed. in Bibliotheca mundi, V ol. 4 [Duaci, 1624], 913,
 482 D e configurationibus qualitatum e t m otuum
c. 1): “ Post haec vero M achomet caepit cadere frequenter epileptica passione.
Q uod Cadiga (corr. ex Eadiga) [ = Khadijah] cernens valde tristabatur, quod
nupsisset impurissimo homini et epileptico. Quam ille placare desiderans,
talibus sermonibus demulcebat eam dicens: ‘quia Gabrielem Archangelum
loquentem mecum contemplor, et non ferens splendorem vultus eius, ut pote
carnalis hom o, deficio et cado.’ ” This comes from the so-called Coro2an ver­
sion o f the prophet’s life. For this and other medieval stories concerning
Muhammad’s revelations in the Latin W est, see N . Daniel, Islam and the West
(Edinburgh, i960), 27-32.
31-3 3 “ Possibile... dicunt.” — I have made no effort to run dow n the various com ­
mentaries on this passage. H owever, see the Biblia sacra cum glossis, interlineari
et ordinaria, etc., V ol. 1 (Lyon, 1545), Numbers, Chap, iv, 307r, c. 1: “ M irum
quom odo tam dignus habeatur Balaam, qui assumpta parabola, haec de se-
metipso pronuntiet. Q uom odo enim vere videns est, qui divinationi et auguriis
servit, qui magicae studet. N isi forte quia spiritus dei factus fuerit in ipso,
et verbum dei positum in ore eius, tam magna de eo dicuntur.” Cf. the postilla
o f Nicolaus de Lyra, ibid., c. 2: “ Uno m odo exponitur de m odo revelationis
quae fiebat sibi a demonibus, quia fiebat communiter in somno vel in aver­
sione a sensibus, et tunc oculus corporalis non videt. A lio m odo exponitur
de modo revelationis divinae sibi factae, quia fiebat sibi absque gratia iustifi-
cante ut sic videret veritates pro aliis, tamen non videbat ad consecutionem
vel promotionem propriae salutis, et sic erat malitia excaecatus.”
47-63 “ A d h u c .. . . visu.” — For a detailed account o f catoptromancy, see A . Delat-
te, L a Catoptromancie grecque et ses derives. Delatte’s first chapter mentions the
principal passages from medieval and modern authors. O n this question, see
William o f A uvergne’s D e universo, Part II, Pars III, Chap. 18 (1674 ed., io49J
C.2B): “ illos similiter divinos nuncupant qui instrumenta aliqua adhibent,
quare in eis aspiciantur occulta huiusmodi, sicut speculum, aut unguis puerilis,
aut ovum , aut manubrium eburneum aut gladius elimatus, quibus omnibus
apponitur etiam unctio ex oleo, ut augeatur instrumentorum huiusmodi luci-
ditas: addunt etiam deceptores, et malefici, exorcismata quaedam, sive adiura-
tiones et observantias temporum et horarum, tanquam virtute rerum huius­
modi fieret apparitio, vel visio in instrumentis praenominatis.”
I I .x x x
3-8 “ Hec — recurrentibus.” — A rather similar example is given by William o f
Auvergne, D e universo, Part II, Pars III, Chap. 18 (1674 ed., 1049, c - ZQ : “ lam
autem audivisti per me, quia in instrumentis illis [i.e., speculis, gladiis, etc.]
utique neque res sunt, neque rerum formae quae videri videntur; alioquin
necesse esset, ut ab aspicientibus omnibus, et aeque clare videntibus, aequali­
ter viderentur. Claruit autem iam multis experimentis, quia cum septem vel
Commentary to II.xxx 483
decem pueri ac virgines ad huiusmodi visiones applicantur, vix unus eis in­
venitur qui videat rem, cuius revelatio quaeritur, videlicet furtum aut latro­
nem aut aliquod de occultis. Propter hoc igitur inducti sunt sapientes non­
nulli ex antiquis et dixerunt, omnia instrumenta huiusmodi illud solum ope­
rari ad huiusmodi apparitionem seu visionem, quod dicam. H oc igitur est il­
lud, videlicet, reflexio aciei mentis in se ipsam, mentis inquam eius, qui aspi­
cit in huiusmodi instrum ento; prohibet enim luminositas instrumenti ipsum
aspicientem faciem mentis in exteriora intendere, seu dirigere, et repellit eam
atque reflectit in se, propter quod cogitur intueri in semetipsa.” (Punctuation
altered.) The withdrawal inward o f the soul is more specifically outlined in the
passages included in the next comment. It is clear in these various passages that
Oresme has added detail to the doctrine as outlined by William o f A uvergne,
if, as he seems to imply at the end o f this chapter, the D e universo was his
source o f the doctrine.
17-18 “ E t...p re d ic ta .” — See the passage noted in the preceding comment. Fur­
thermore, the doctrine o f the retirement or withdrawal o f the powers o f ap­
prehension inward is outlined in considerable detail as one cause for prophetic
splendor in W illiam o f A uvergne’s D e universo, Part II, Pars II, Chap. 70
(1674 ed., 923, c .iB -D ): “ verisimile est virtutem imaginativam accedere ali­
quatenus ad splendorem propheticum, de quo certum est exercitatis in eo,
quod descendere habet virtutem super imaginativam, et quaedam species
prophetiae imaginativa est, quoniam fit in virtute illa, et secundum ipsam et
adiuvatur virtus imaginativa ad recipiendum huiusmodi splendorum pri­
vationibus sensuum exteriorum __Causa autem in hoc est, quoniam lumi­
nositas naturalis, seu natura animarum nostrarum ex obturatione sensuum
multiplicatur interius, tanquam aqua currens ex obice, vel per obicem retinen­
tem seu prohibentem fluxum illius, vel tanquam radii luminis per reflexiones,
quae fiunt a speculis, vel aliis politis, vel tersis corporibus, et hanc distinctio­
nem idcirco posui, quia alii de philosophantibus opinati sunt hoc fieri per
reflexionem, alii tanquam per retentionem virtutis apprehensivae interioris, et
debes scire in hoc, quia non fit solum per huiusmodi retentionem, vel priva­
tiones, confortatio seu multiplicatio virtutum apprehensivarum, sed etiam
motivarum, propter quod qui debiles habent pedes, et tibias; manus plerum­
que fortissimas habent, et brachia__Manifestum igitur tibi esse debet ex hiis,
quia quod minus habeat in visu exteriori, suppletum est ei in ipsa virtute ima­
ginativa, vel in sensu communi interiori, et quia suppletio ista fuit ei vel ex
multitudine dicti nativi luminis, vel ex superadditione divini muneris similis
prophetico splendori, nihilominus tamen sciendum est tibi sensu naturae mul­
tas apprehensiones mirabiles fieri, et hanc ipsam apprehensionem mulieris,
amore viri, de quo agitur, inflammatae potuisse fieri sensu naturae.” A n even
longer treatment o f the withdrawal inward o f light to intensify the imagination
is found in Part II, Pars III, Chap. 20 (1674 ed., 1055, cc.1-2), in a passage
 484 D e configurationibus qualitatum et m otuum
where he is explaining the possible reason for the increase o f the imaginative
pow er o f the blind: “ Quia igitur organa sensuum ad modum huiusmodi exi­
tuum sive foraminum se habent, non est mirum, si obstructis vel uno vel pluri­
bus exitibus huiusmodi, influentia, quae fluere non permittitur, ad alios exitus
transmittitur, hoc est, ad alia organa sensuum. E t hoc indubitanter apparet in
multis hominibus excaecatis, in quibus tanta est vis imaginationis, ut pene
suppleat apud eos defectum visus__Q uid igitur hic aliud dici, seu cogitari
potest, nisi quod lumen retentum intra, et non habens, qua exiret, caecitate
oculos obstruente, in ipso organo virtutis imaginativae adductum, et multipli­
catum est eousque, ut defectum visus illi caeco suppleret.” He goes on to sug­
gest again that this might be one o f the causes o f prophetic splendor. Inciden­
tally, in commenting on the investigation o f such splendor and similar phenom­
ena, William makes an eloquent appeal for investigating such matters and not
merely taking refuge in the omnipotent pow er o f the Creator or the w ill o f
G o d ( C . 2 B ) : “ In his igitur, et huiusmodi, oportet te diligenter intendere, et
non sequi consuetudinem imperitorum quorundam, qui etiam in omnibus
rebus administrandis, quarum causas ignorant et investigare prorsus ne­
sciunt, ad omnipotentis simam virtutem creatoris recurrunt, dicentes miracula
esse omnia huiusmodi. Similiter declinare debes a via eorum, qui in rebus
huiusmodi ad imperiosissimam D ei voluntatem altissimi refugiunt, quaestio­
nes indissolutas penitus relinquentes, et liberatos se esse putantes, cum dixe­
rint, quia sic voluerit creator, vel voluntas ipsius causa est solum rerum talium :
errant autem intolerabiliter.” It is not difficult to see how warm ly Oresme
must have received such advice.
I l.x x x i
14-15 “ pellicula... catorum.” — For a complete discussion o f hippomanes and the use
o f this w ord in antiquity, see Pease, ed., Publi Vergili Maronis Aeneidos liber
quartus, 426-29. A s for kaloyon, I suspect that this is a garbled reference to the
hypnotic herb called by Pliny (Natural History, X X I, 177) halicacabon or callion.
It is the G reek kallios or kallion, an hypnotic strychnos.
20-23 “ U n d e .. .alienat.” — It w ill be noticed that all manuscripts but S give the
source as the L ife o f Agatha. I suspect, therefore, that the error was Oresm e’s
and that the scribe o f S caught it. Oresme no doubt read the V ita sancte A g-
netis in the Legenda aurea, Chap, xxiv (ed o f Th. Graesse, 115): “ A d hoc tem­
plorum pontifices seditionem excitantes in populo exclamaverunt: tolle ma­
gam, tolle maleficam, quae mentes mutat et animos alienat.”
52-5 3 “ U n d e .. . demonum.” — So far as I know , the D e natura demonum o f W itelo
remains unpublished, but see M S Brit. M us., Sloane 2156, 148V-54V (for the
whole tract), and particularly 15 iv : “ Videntur etiam demones hominibus
sanis et intrepidis ex visuum deceptione, et hoc me docuit hayten filius hii-
Commentary to II.xxxi-ILxxxii 485
tayn filii hayten tertio libro suo de aspectibus, sic ut de nocte aspecto homine
et viso nemore remoto ab eo, aut pariete, videbitur propinquitas hominis ad
nemus vel parietem cum lateat visum distantia illorum licet plurima. Sed for­
san exibit idem radius visualis super caput hominis et altitudinem nemoris aut
parietis secundum quantitatem distantie a nemore vel pariete. E t in hoc casu
videbuntur eiusdem altitudinis hom o et nemus, vel hom o et paries. V el forte
homo videbitur maioris quantitatis quam sit, quod non accideret si in tem­
peramento esset quantum distantia hominis ad nemus discerneretur ac altitu­
do uniuscuiusque secundum terminum apparentem mensuraretur. E t hoc
bene potest esse seu evenire in crepusculis matutino vel serotino vel etiam
alias tempore nebuloso. Tales itaque forme homini super formam homini
debitam extense in aere creduntur demones ab hominibus quia apparent
equales obiectibus silvarum cum sint veri homines.”
65-66 “ u t . . .aliis.” — For the Vacca Platonis, see Thorndike, History o f Magic and
Experimental Science, V ol. 2, 723^ 735n, 783, 809-10. T h ew o rk w as sometimes
attributed to Galen. It hardly need be said that it has nothing to do w ith either
Plato or Galen. W hoever added this phrase, Oresme or someone else, cer­
tainly was justified in denying the experiments described in the Vacca Platonis
as bona experimenta. Let me give an example from the text in M S Vat. Pal. lat.
1892, n j r : “ D e conversione formarum. Quando volueris convertere formas
hominis in formam simii, et ipse est in civitate alia, tunc ingenera et unge (corr.
ex ungat) faciem eius aut aliquid corporis eius cum aliquantulo sanguinis ip­
sius form e; deinde suffumiga cum suffumigio apud te, ipsius enim forma con­
vertetur in loco in quo est statim.”
I l.x x x ii
20-23 “ I ta ...s u i.” — I have not been able to locate this exact statement in any
medieval text o f Galen. H owever, there is a somewhat similar statement in
G alen’s D e symptomatum causis, Bk. II, Chap. 7 (1565 ed., 24B): “ Vidim us e-
nim quosdam, qui et literas et artem omnino fuerant obliti, immo nec propria
nomina meminerant; cuiusmodi aliquid Athenis in peste accidisse memorat
Thucydides: quosdam enim ex eis qui evaserant, et se ipsos et suos ignoravis­
se.” But this is in the Renaissance translation o f Thomas Linacre. N o medieval
translation o f this w ork was available to me.
45-46 “ A ugustin us.. .fu ror.” — I have not been able to find this specific reference,
which I suppose must be to Augustine’s D e divinatione daemonum (Migne, P L ,
V ol. 40, cc. 581-92), although there is a passage in Chapter 5 (c. 586) that
distinguishes between such pronouncements by demons, brought about by
the demons mixing their subtle bodies w ith the bodies and thoughts o f men
either awake or sleeping, and pronouncements brought about by a more acute
perceptibility o f natural signs: “ Suadent autem miris et invisibilibus modis,
 486 D e configurationibus qualitatum e t m otuum
per illam subtilitatem suorum corporum corpora hominum sentientium pene­
trando, seseque cogitationibus eorum per quaedam imaginaria visa miscenda,
sive vigilantium sive dormientium. Aliquando autem non quae ipsi faciunt,
sed quae naturalibus signis futura praenoscunt, quae signa in hominum sensus
venire non possunt, ante praedicunt. N eque enim quia praevidet medicus
quod non praevidet eius artis ignarus, ideo iam divinus habendus est.” Inci­
dentally, this division assigned by Oresme to Augustine is quite compatible
with the kind o f division suggested by Cicero in his D e divinatione, I.vi, 1 1-12,
where he has Quintus say that there are tw o kinds o f divination, the one de­
pendent on art and the other on nature, and among the latter is divination in
a frenzy (ed. o f Falconer, 234): “ D uo sunt enim divinandi genera, quorum al­
terum artis est, alterum naturae. Quae est autem gens aut quae civitas quae
non aut extispicum aut monstra aut fulgora interpretantium, aut augurum,
aut astrologorum, aut sortium (ea enim fere artis sunt), aut somniorum aut
vaticinationum (haec enim duo naturalia putantur), praedictione m oveatur?”
47~ 5° “ S im ili.. .consona” — Oresme’s reference is to an extraordinarily popular
w ork that circulated in many forms in the M iddle Ages. The original Tractatus
de purgatorio was written by Henry o f Saltrey in the twelfth century. It is con­
cerned w ith a fantastic place in Ireland know n as the purgatorium o f St. Patrick,
where there was reputed to be located a pit leading into purgatory. The ro­
mance o f H enry describes in detail the adventures o f the knight O w en after
entering the pit. Incidentally, the original version o f Henry was reedited at
least three times: by Roger o f W endover, Jacobus de Voragine, and John o f
Tinem outh (in the version o f Jacobus the adventurer becomes Nicholas
instead o f Owen). The w ork was also rendered into the vernacular languages,
including a French version o f Marie de France. T w o forms o f H enry’s text
and the translation o f Marie have been published by K . W arnke, DasBuch
vom Espurgatoire S. Patrice der Marie de France und seine Quelle. I am confident
that Oresme read the version appearing in Jacobus de V oragine’s Legenda
aurea, Chap. 1^(49) (ed. Graesse, 214), since Oresme’s phraseology is closer to
that version than to the others. Oresme was one o f the earliest writers to call
attention to the similarity between the adventures o f the hero o f this story and
those o f Aeneas.
68-69 “ H e c ... 2a.” — See the Decretum Gratiani, Secunda p ars,cau saX X V I, Quest.
2, c. vi (ed. o f A . L. Richter, Corpus juris canonici, Pars I [Leipzig, 1839],
c. 885; cf. the slightly different wording o f the second edition [Leipzig, 1879],
1021): “ Superstitiosum est quicquid institutum est ab hominibus ad facienda
et colenda idola pertinens, vel ad colendum sicut Deum creaturam, partemve
ullam creaturae, vel ad consultationes et pacta quaedam significationum cum
daemonibus placita atque foederata, qualia sunt molimina magicarum artium,
quae quidem commemorare potius quam docere assolent(mr. in Ivo, solent) poe­
tae.” The same passage is present in Augustine, D e doctrina Christiana, Bk. II,
Commentary to Il.xxxiv-II.xxxvii 487
Chap. 3o(M igne, P E , V ol. 34, c. 50) and in the Decretum o f Ivo o f Chartres,
Pars X I, Cap. 13 (Migne, P L , V ol. 161, c. 748).
IL x x x iv
10 “ freneticis aut melancolicis” — See the recent study o f Klibansky et al., Saturn
and Melancholy for an account o f the history o f the notion o f melancholy and
its early association with madness and frenzy.
I I . X X XV
15-21 “ E t A vicenna.” — The first reference o f Oresme to Avicenna is found in
the Liber canonis, Liber III, Fen I, Tractatus IV , Cap. 15 (ed. o f Venice, 1555,
203V): “ Expositio maniae est daemonium lupinum— E t scias quod materia
faciens daemonium lupinum est in substantia materiae facientis melancholiam
quoniam utraeque sunt melancholicae: Verumtamen causa faciens daemonium
est melancholia adusta facta.” For the second reference to Avicenna, see ibid.,
Cap. 18 (204V): “ E t quibusdam medicorum visum est quod melancholia con­
tingat a daem onio: sed nos non curamus cum physicam docemus, si illud con­
tingat a daemonio, aut non contingat, postquam dicimus, quod si contingat a
daemonio tunc contingit ita ut convertat complexionem ad choleram nigram,
et sit causa eius propinqua cholera n igra: deinde fit causa illius daemonium,
aut non daemonium.”
22-31 “ A lia .. .miraculose.” — Oresme also admits the existence o f demons in the
Quodlibeta, in a question “ utrum naturaliter demones esse et cetera” (Paris,
B N lat. 15126, i26v-28r), but he notes that is true only because faith says so
since this cannot be proved naturally (127V): “ A d propositum dico quod vera­
citer loquendo demones sunt, sicut credendum est ex fide. Sed dico quod non
potest probari naturaliter, ut d ixi__ Nisi autem fides poneret eos esse dicerem
quod ex nullo effectu possent probari esse, quia naturaliter omnes possunt
salvari, ut postea declarabo tam de resurrectione apparenti m ortuorum .”
3 3 “ sicut... rerum” — The reference is to the radiation doctrine o f A lkindi described
in his w ork which circulated under the title D e radiis stellarum (or stellicis),
or sometimes Theorica arcium magicarum. I have read the D e radiis in M S Bruges,
Stadsbibliotheek 486, i74r~79v. Thorndike has described the w ork and its
theory in his History o f Magic, V ol. I, 642-46.
II. x x xv ii
9-10 “ E t . . .trinitate.” — Augustine mentions the passage in Genesis already men­
tioned by Oresme (see Augustine, D e trinitate, III, 8 [Migne, P L , V ol. 42, c.
877]). Later in B ook X I, Chapter 2 {ibid., c. 988), he takes up the case o f the
 488 D e configurationibus qualitatum e t m otuum
chameleon as well as that o f Jacob’s sheep: “ Voluntas autem tantam vim
habet copulandi haec duo, ut et sensum formandum admoveat ei rei quae
cernitur, et in ea formatum teneat. E t si tam violenta est, ut possit vocari
amor, aut cupiditas, aut libido, etiam caeterum corpus animantis vehementer
afficit: et ubi non resistit pigrior duriorque materies, in similem speciem co­
loremque commutat. Licet videre corpusculum chamaeleontis ad colores quos
videt facillima conversione variari. A liorum autem animalium, quia non est ad
conversionem facilis copulentia, fetus plerumque produnt libidines matrum,
quid cum magna delectatione conspexerint. Quam enim teneriora, atque, ut
ita dixerim, formabiliora sunt primordia seminum, tam efficaciter et capaciter
sequuntur intentionem maternae animae, et quae in ea facta est phantasiam
per corpus quod cupide aspexit. Sunt exempla quae copiose commemorari
possint: sed unum sufficit de fidelissimis Libris, quod fecit Jacob, ut oves et
caprae varios coloribus parerent, supponendo eis variata virgulta in canalibus
aquarum, quae potantes intuerentur eo tempore quo conceperant.”
13 “ E t . . .aliis.” — The citation is to the D e anima o f Avicenna, which was
customarily called the Liber sextus naturalium, Part IV , Chap. 4 (ed. o f Venice,
1508, 2ov): “ Dicem us nunc quod actiones iste et quod accidentia ista sunt ex
accidentibus que accidunt anim e: sed dum est in corpore: que non accidunt ei
nisi propter consortium corporis: et ideo trahunt secum complexiones cor­
porum : accidunt etiam ipsa cum accidunt complexiones in corporibus: quas­
dam enim complexiones sequitur aptitudo irascendi: et quasdam aptitudo
concupiscendi: et quasdam pavor et tim o r ....He igitur omnes dispositiones
non sunt nisi ex consortio corporis: sed diversis m odis: quasdam enim prin­
cipaliter habet corpus: sed ex hoc quod est habens animam, quasdam enim
principaliter habet anim a: sed ex hoc quod est corpore: quasdam vero habet
equaliter. Somnus enim et vigilia et egritudo et sanitas sunt dispositiones cor­
poris : quorum principia in ipso sunt, sed non habet ea corpus nisi ex hoc est
habens animam : imaginatio vero et concupiscentia et ira et huiusmodi sunt
anime: sed ex hoc quod est habens corpus.. . .Attende dispositionem infirmi
cum credit se convalescere: aut sani cum credit se egrotare multotiens contin­
git ex hoc ut cum corroboratur forma in anima eius: patiatur ex ea ipsius
materia: et proveniat ex hoc sanitas aut infirmitas. .. . E t propter hoc homo
potest ambulare super trabem que est media v ia : sed si posita fuerit pons super
aquam profundam non audebit ambulare super eam : eo quod imaginatur in
anima eius forma cadendi vehementer impressa: cui obedit natura eius et
virtus membrorum eius.” Compare also the Commentary, Il.xxxviii, lines
19-21. Thorndike in Melanges Eugene Tisserant, V ol. 7, 353-58, mentions an
anonymous Questio (Vat. lat. 1121, 2 i2 r-v): “ Utrum circa corpus humanum
potest fieri aliqua immutatio ex sola ymaginatione,” which bears a strong
resemblance to Oresm e’s discussion as it cites and refutes Avicenna and A l-
gazel.
Commentary to Il.xxxviii 489
Il.x x x v iii
■ 21 “ p er... fieri” — See Avicenna, Liber sextus naturalium, Part I V , Chap. 4(1508
ed., 20V, c. 2): “ Multotiens autem anima operatur in corpore alieno sicut in
proprio: quemadmodum est opus oculi fascinantis et estimationis operantis.
Immo cum anima fuerit constans nobilis similis principiis obediet ei materia
que est in mundo, et patitur ex ea, et invenitur in materia quicquid formabitur
in illa : quod fit propter hoc quod anima humana: sicut postea ostendemus:
non est impressa in materia sua: sed est providens ei. E t quando quidem prop­
ter hunc modum colligationis potest ipsa permutare materiam corporalem,
ab eo quod expetebat materia eius: tunc non est mirum si anima nobilis et
fortissima transcendat operationem suam in corpore proprio: ut cum non
fuerit demersa in affectum illius corporis vehementer: et propter hoc fuerit
nature prevalentis constantis in habitu suo sanet infirmos et debilitet pravos
et contingat privari naturas et permutari sibi elementa, ita ut quod non est
ignis fiat ei ig n is: et quod non est terra fiat ei terra, et pro voluntate eius con­
tingant pluvie et fertilitas, sicut contingit absorbitio a terra et mortalitas, et
hoc totum proveniat secundum virtutem intelligibilem, omnino enim possibile
est ut commitetur eius velle esse id quod pendet ex permutatione materie in
contraria. Nam materia obedit ei naturaliter, et fit ex ea secundum quod vir
eius voluntati: materia etenim omnino est obediens anime: et multo plus
obedit animae quam contrariis agentibus in se.” (Punctuation slightly changed.)
Oresme mentions Avicenna’s contention o f the effectiveness o f imagina­
tive pow er many times in his Quodlibeta. For example (Paris, B N lat. 15126,
69V): “ et hoc concederet Avicenna in 6° naturalium, 4a particula, quod virtus
ymaginativa potest movere rem extrinsecam.” Cf. 77r: “ Ultimo nota quod ex
predictis potest satis patere quod communiter dicitur, scilicet quod virtuti
ymaginative obedit naturalis. H oc patet per Avicennam in 6° naturalium, ca­
pitulo 40 4e particule.” Cf. further 79r: “ A vicenna in 6° naturalium, particula
4, qui ponit quod anima intellectiva seu ymaginativa virtus in aliquibus homi­
nibus est ita potens quod non solum proprium corpus m ovet sed et alienum
{corr. ex alienam) hoc et elementa et potest facere pluvere, etc.” A s in the D e
configurationibus (II.xxxv, lines 34-37 and Il.xxxviii, lines 26-28), he rejects
A vicenna’s views and for the same philosophical reason, namely, the need for
the conjunction o f m over and m oved and thus the impossibility o f action at a
distance (79r): “ E t quom odo anima m ovet corpus? M ovens enim et motum
semper sunt simul.” and (79V): “ virtus ymaginativa sola voluntate non agit in
extrinsecam sibi distans sicut posuerunt Avicenna et A [l]gazel.” T he section
from al-Ghazzali’s Metaphysica has already been quoted in the Commentary,
Il.xxviii, lines 16-18. The first part o f that passage (ed. o f M uckle, 193),
which was omitted in the quotation o f the passage there, includes the more
general references that no doubt go back to Avicenna: “ N onum est de causis
 49° D e configurationibus qualitatum e t m otuum
miraculorum et prodigiorum que sunt tria, primum quod proprietas est in
virtute anime, et eius essencia, ut inprimat in hyle mundi, removendo unam
formam, et conferendo aliam; inprimat enim in aerem convertendo illum in
nubes, et provenit pluvia sicut diluvium.” A n d later (page 194), after giving
the example o f fascination quoted in the Commentary to Il.xxviii, lines 16-
18, the author goes on to say: “ postquam autem hoc possibile est, tunc non
est longe quin aliqua anima multo forcior quam ista, aliquando imprimat in
hile mundi, faciens calorem et frigiditatem, et motum ex quibus tribus, scili­
cet calore, frigiditate, et motu derivatur omnis prosperitas huius mundi, sicut
predictum est in hiis que fiunt in aere et aliis, et huius modi dicitur magnifi-
cencia et miraculum proprie.”
28-29 “ P ro p ter.. .condempnatus.” — The reference is to Article 210 o f the con­
demnations o f 1277. See Denifle, C h a rtu la riu m ol. 1, 555: “ Quodm ateria
exterior obedit substantie spirituali.— Error, si intelligatur simpliciter, et se­
cundum omnem modum transmutationis.” Cf. the specific attack on A vicen­
na in A rticle 112 (page 549): “ Q uod intelligence superiores imprimunt in in­
feriores, sicut anima una imprimit in aliam, et etiam in animam sensitivam; et
per talem impressionem incantator aliquis prohicit camelum in foveam solo
visu.”
39-40 “ s icu t.. .hom inem .” — For the supposed power o f the basilisk to kill men by
his sight alone, see Pliny, Natural History, V III, 77-78. Cf. W illiam o f A u ­
vergne, D e universo, Part I o f Part I, Chap. 46 (1674 ed., 657, c. iD ). Oresme
also mentions the pow er o f the basilisk in his Questiones super de sensu, Quest. 3
(MS Erfurt, Stadtbibl. Am plon Q . 299, 13 i v ) : “ 20 quia alias basiliscus non in­
terficeret homines solo visu. Consequentia tenet, quia hoc [non] videtur posse
fieri nisi ab oculis eius aliquid emittatur__ (132V) A d secundam dico quod
hoc est ideo, quia est aliquod venenosum et ab eo exiunt quidam fumi vene­
nosi per oculos qui sunt partes magis porose et illi fumi in aere permiscuntur
quem homo inspirat et sic inficitur.”
58 “ hoc ibi.” — A t this point manuscript N adds a skeptical comment (see variant,
line 5 8): “ It is better to speak in this way than to attribute [this] to demons.
But I ask ‘H ow is it known that an old woman does this?’ I f it is answered
that she has done it a number o f times, I deny further that the presence o f the
old wom an and the sickness in the child take place together.”
I I .x l
25-27 “ C u m ... ethicorum” — I am not sure which passage Oresme had in mind. It
may be Nicomachean Ethics, Bk. X , Chap. 4-5, 1175a, 10-21. Part o f that pas­
sage in the translation accompanying the Expositio o f Aquinas (Turin, 1964,
527), T ext N os. 1455-56, runs: “ Appetere autem delectationem existimabit
quis utique omnes, quoniam et vivere omnes appetunt. V ita autem operatio
Commentary to II.xl—
Ill.ii 491
quaedam est, et unusquisque circa hoc et in his operatur, quae et maxime dili­
git __Delectatio autem perficit operationes: et vivere autem quod appetunt.
Rationabiliter igitur, et delectationem appetunt: perficit enim unicuique eli­
g ib le ens. Utrum autem propter delectationem vivere eligimus, vel propter
vivere delectationem dimittatur in praesenti. Coniungi quidem enim haec v i­
dentur, et separationem non recipere: sine operatione enim non fit delectatio.”
Thus Aristotle here connects pleasure and the desire to live w ith operatio. The
translation does not appear to have used the w ord volitio, although the basic
idea seems to be present in the first part o f the passage, while operatio and
delectatio are specifically joined in the last part.
IIL i
13 -17 “ A cqu isitio alterata.” — For reasons o f symmetry, Oresme also extends
his concept to the production o f surface and corporeal qualities by the m ove­
ments o f lines and surfaces. But neither here nor in the next chapter on the
summits o f the configurations representing surface or corporeal qualities
does Oresme take up the difficulties o f actually using his imagery. His know l­
edge o f geometry was simply inadequate for any detailed discussions o f the
kind he presents for linear qualities. Z ou b ov, Traktat, 607, in discussing Ores-
me’s efforts in I.iv to represent corporeal qualities remarks that it is “ here the
system o f Oresme encounters its first stumbling block.”
I ll.ii
6 “ s e u .. . summitatis.” — Certainly the “ summit o f intensity” for a corporeal
quality ought to be itself three-dimensional rather than two-dimensional, as
Oresme here suggests. It ought to be the body made up o f the infinitude o f
surfaces limiting the infinitude o f interlacing bodies representing the qualities
o f the infinitude o f surfaces com posing the original body whose quality is
being represented. O r at least it ought to be an infinitude o f surfaces distribut­
ed (although not necessarily joined) in a third dimension. I have already point­
ed out in the preceding comment the difficulty Oresme must have felt in
presenting any kind o f treatment for surface and corporeal qualities compara­
ble to his remarks on linear quality.
16-33 “ Secundum inferri.” — For an excellent treatment o f scholastic views on
“ first and last instants,” see W ilson, William Heytesbury, 29-56. Oresme is
treating a straight line in the manner o f a respermanens consisting o f an indivis­
ible form and thus having both a first and last instant o f straightness, while a
curve is treated like a res successiva which is said to have neither a first nor last
instant o f being curved (ibid., 34-35). From this assumed treatment o f straight
lines and curves, Oresme then deduces that uniform and uniform ly difform
 492 D e configurationibus qualitatum e t m otuum
qualities, which are represented by straight lines, can have first and last in­
stants in which they are uniform or uniformly difform, while difformly dif-
form qualities, representable by curves, cannot have first or last instants in
which they are difformly difform. The distinction is further extended to
parallelism and non-parallelism in the next chapter. Cf. the remarks o f Zou-
b ov (Traktat, -j z j , n. 38).
IIL iv
34-43 “ Item __impossibilia.” — I have stressed in the first chapter and elsewhere
the importance o f this passage in reflecting Oresm e’s intuitive realization o f
the limits o f geom etry in describing physical events. It is clear that in this
passage Oresme is emphasizing that it is possible to construct a hypothetical
case that seems naturally possible on the basis o f the configuration doctrine
(a case involving something becom ing suddenly hot in a maximum degree
after being cold in a maximum degree) but which is in fact know n to be nat­
urally impossible. Oresme suggests that this apparent paradox may be
grounds for questioning the existence o f the indivisible point, the line and the
surface. Cf. the Commentary, I.i, lines 7-9 and Ill.x ii, lines 37-41. W hile
Oresme is only one o f many to suggest the fictional nature o f geometrical
entities, he does seem to be original in seeing that their use may lead to con­
clusions about the physical w orld that are impossible. It is an interesting fact
that in his Questiones de spera, Quest. 1 (ed. o f Droppers, page 22, line 61 to
page 26, line 17; cf. Vat. lat. 2185, 7ir, c. 2— 71V, c. 1) Oresme uses a case not
unlike that described here in the D e configurationibus to argue against the view
that a point is an indivisible accident (and for the view that it is a fiction): “ [Si
punctus sit aliquod accidens indivisibile] i i ° sequitur quod esset aliquis
punctus qui subito alteraretur albedine vel caliditate ita quod esset dare unum
instans in quo esset verum dicere: caliditas summa est in hoc puncto nunc et
nunquam ante hunc fuit ibi aliqua caliditas, et ita dico de linea et ita de super­
ficie. Pro cuius probatione fiat tallis (/) ymaginatio: sit A unum corpus bipe­
dale cuius prima pars proportionalis sit B , 2a C , 3a D , et sic de aliis. E t sit
nunc primum instans alicuius hore in quo prima pars, scilicet B , sit uniformi­
ter diformiter (/) alba terminata a summo gradu usque ad non gradum versus
secundam partem et alteretur in prima parte proportionali hore talliter (/) quod
prima eius medietas sit alba in summo et totum residuum eius remaneat uni­
formiter diformiter terminatum ad non gradum versus C et in 2a parte pro­
portionali hore, 2a pars eius, scilicet B , fiat alba in summo et residuum remaneat
sicut ante, et sic continue procedendo per partes hore et per partes ipsius B . Et
postea sit una alia hora divisa per partes proportionales in qua fiat consimiliter
et sic de aliis partibus proportionalibus A ut de C , D , etc. E t quod casus sit
possibilis patet quia non repugnaret cuicumque quantitati quin ipsa possit
Commentary to IILiv 493
esse alba in summo et etiam quin possit esse totaliter diformiter alba. E t hoc
posito sequuntur iste conclusiones. Una est de proposito quod in aliquo in­
stanti est verum quod in hoc puncto nunc est albedo in summo demonstrato
ultimo puncto A , et immediate ante hoc nulla albedo fuit ultimo puncto A et
immediate ante hoc nulla albedo fuit in isto puncto et ita dico de una superficie
quod ipsa nunc est summe alba et immediate ante fuit summe nigra— 3a conclu­
sio est quod A nunc est album in summo et immediate ante fuit summe nigrum
et tamen nulla albedo fuit acquisita subito. 4a conclusio est quod, immediate
ante hoc capto ultimo instanti quidquid ipsius A erat album, erat album in
summo et tamen immediate ante hoc aliquid eius erat in infinitum remisse
album.” It is obvious that the ymaginatio given in the Questiones is much more
complicated than the one presented here in the D e configurationibus. T h e former
has each proportional part o f a proportional part o f the subject passing from
uniformly difform to uniform at the maximum degree in a proportional part
o f an hour. O n the other hand, the case given in the D e configurationibus has a
single body that commences w ith one half uniform at the maximum degree
and the other h alf uniformly difform and then passes continually to a condi­
tion such that more and more o f the second half becomes uniform until in the
last instant the w hole becomes uniform. T he argument concerning the sudden
alteration o f a point from the maximum degree o f one quality to the maximum
degree o f its contrary seems to be made more directly and lucidly by the sim­
pler example o f the D e configurationibus. I am inclined, therefore, to believe
that Oresme composed this chapter o f the D e configurationibus after the treat­
ment found in the first question o f the Questiones de spera. Incidentally, the
argument in the Questiones, which is advanced as an objection to the existence
o f points as indivisible accidents seems to im ply that such sudden alteration
is impossible (perhaps in Nature?). Oresme in his reply to the argument
admits that there is no logical fallacy in the argument and thus at that point
(since he is defending the plausibility o f the point as an indivisible accident)
Oresme is simply prepared to admit that sudden alteration does take place
(ed. Droppers, 42, lines 47-49; M S Vat. lat. 2185, 71 v, c. 2): “ A d duas ultimas
non video responsionem quin determinative concludant illud consequens.
Tam en potest dici quod consequens vel consequentia non sint inconvenientia,
scilicet, quod punctus m ovetur subito localiter, et quod etiam alteretur subi­
to.” But by the time he w rote the D e configurationibus, he seems less inclined to
accept such a conclusion as naturally possible how ever logically sound it
might be; and he seems to lean more to the view o f the fictional nature o f
geometrical entities, as I have noted in the Commentary, I.i, lines 7-9. Cf.
Z ou b ov, Traktat, 607, w ho emphasizes the “ conditionality” (usolovnost) o f
Oresme’s representation o f a body as an infinitude o f planes, o f a plane as an
infinitude o f lines, and o f a line as an infinitude o f points. Z o u b o v refers to
this passage o f IIL iv for confirmation, as w ell as to the earlier passage in I.i.
 494 D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum
III.v
3-5 “ Universaliter. . .ym aginantur.” — This basic idea was also treated in the
Questions on the Geometry o f Euclid, Question 11. In particular, see Appendix 1 1
Quest. 11, lines 119-20.
I ll.v i
19-20 “ Q u a liter.. .proportionum .” — I have already mentioned the significance o f
this citation for the problem o f dating the D e configurationibus in Introduction
III. A . The rules here cited from the Algorismusproportionum are comprised by
the first tw o regulae (ed. o f Grant, 332; cf. ed. o f Curtze, 14): “ Prima regula.
Proportionem rationalem proportioni rationali addere. Ponatur utraque in
suis minimis numeris et multiplicetur minor terminus vel numerus unius per
minorem alterius et maior per maiorem et exibunt numeri seu termini propor­
tionis composite ex ambabus datis. E t ita possunt addi tres aut quotlibet ad­
dendo duas illarum insimul et deinde toti composito ex ambabus addendo
tertiam, deinde quartam si placet et sic ultra__Secunda regula. Proportionem
rationalem a proportioni rationali subtrahere. Ponatur, ut prius, quelibet in
suis minimis numeris, deinde ducantur contradictorie minor numerus unius
per maiorem alterius et ita de reliquis et exibunt termini illius proportionis in
qua maior excedit minorem. D e proportionibus datis et illa erat maior cuius
maior terminus ductus in minorem alterius producit numerum maiorem.”
A s I indicated in the translation, these are rules for the multiplication and
division o f ratios. Grant has given a translation o f the w hole first part o f the
Algorismus proportionum in a recent article in Isis, V ol. 56 (1965), 327-41. In
that article Grant has corrected Curtze’s misinterpretation o f the first tw o and
other rules. Incidentally, in the manipulation o f these ratios o f intensities and
extensions as applied to velocities, Oresme is in fact producing ratios o f
distances traversed. A lthough this is not specifically stated here, such was
evidently know n to Oresme, as is clear from his statements in Ill.v iii, lines
35- 43 *
I ll.v ii
3-5 “ O m nis... linearis.” — This is, o f course, the famous M erton College Rule o f
uniformly difform. A nd this chapter with its geometric p ro o f constitutes the
most significant chapter o f the w ork, historically speaking, as I have shown in
considerable detail in Introduction II.B. For the origin and earliest exposi­
tions o f the Merton Rule, see The Science o f Mechanics, Chapter V .
14 “ p er... E uclidis” — Proposition 1 .26 in the Campanus version o f the Elements
(ed. o f Basel, 1546, 22-23) runs: “ Omnium duorum triangulorum, quorum
duo anguli unius duobus angulis alterius et uterque se respicienti aequales
Commentary to III.v-III.viii 495
fuerint, latus quoque unius lateri alterius aequale, fueritque latus illud aut
inter duos angulos aequales, aut uni eorum oppositum, erunt quoque duo
unius reliqua latera duobus reliquis alterius trianguli lateribus, unumquodque
se respicienti aequalia, angulusque reliquus unius angulo reliquo alterius
aequalis.” A n d thus, with the sides and angles o f the tw o triangles proved to
be equal by this proposition, the triangles are themselves equal.
33-35 “ D e . . .mensurantis.” — This statement shows that Oresme realized that the
same geometric p ro o f holds for uniform ly difform motion, i.e., uniformly ac­
celerated motion. Hence it is clear that this p roof is essentially the same as G ali­
leo’s first theorem in the “ Third D a y ” o f the Discorsi, as I have stated several
times in Introduction I and II, and w hich has been know n since the early re­
searches o f Pierre Duhem.
46 “ alterius” — Z ou b ov, Traktat, 610, had read this as altioris, although all o f
the manuscripts have alterius. The result is that Z ou b ov has Oresme saying
that the treatment o f “ difformly difform” is the “ object o f higher specula­
tion.”
Ill.v iii
8-28 “ V e rb i divisionem .” — A s I have pointed out in Introduction I.B and
III.B, Oresme has given here a geometric p roof o f the follow ing series:
i + | - 2+ ^ -3+ ... + • n + . . . = 4.
I also mentioned earlier that Oresme has shown by surfaces that this series is
equivalent to the series:
2 + [I + l + ^ + "- + ~H i +•••]•
This has been done by piling on top o f one surface o f tw o parts another such
surface which has been divided into proportional parts according to the ratio
2:1. Thus the key to the p ro o f is to show that the bracketed part o f the sec­
ond series sums at 2, a p ro o f already given in his Questions on the Geometry o f
Euclid (see the next comment). I have already pointed out that the first series
appears without direct reference to surfaces (i.e., in verbal form only) in the
Tiber calculationum o f Richard Swineshead, and I have given that passage in
toto in Introduction II.A , fn. 16. (This passage o f Swineshead is in part com ­
mented on by C. Boyer, The History of the Calculus, 76; and also by H. L. L.
Busard in L ’Enseignement mathematique, Ser. 2, V ol. 8 (1962), 282; incidentally,
Busard also briefly discusses Oresme’s treatment o f series; see, for w hole
article, 281-90.) In fact, the series there is given with the objective o f deter­
mining the average intensity o f a quality whose subject is so divided into
 496 D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum
proportional parts o f arithmetically increasing intensity. I also noted earlier
that a Parisian scribe has added an illustration o f the Swineshead passage by
using surfaces in a manuscript o f that w ork dated in 1375 (see II.B, fn. 10). It
should be remarked further that we find a verbal statement o f the series in a
more general form (with the division into proportional parts made according
to any ratio rather than according to just the ratio o f 2 :1 as found in the
Oresme text) in the Liber de triplici motu, Tract. II, Chap. 3, o f the sixteenth-
century scholastic, Alvarus Thomas, sig. p 4V, c. 2— q ir, c. 1 : “ Secunda con­
clusio. D iviso aliquo tempore per partes proportionales quavis proportione et
sit aliquod mobile quod aliquanta velocitate moveatur in prima parte propor-
portionali, et in secunda in duplo maiori quam in prima, et in tertia in triplo
maiori quam in prima, et in quarta in quadruplo maiori, et sic consequenter
ascendendo per omnes species proportionis multiplicis, talis velocitas totius
illius temporis et omnium illarum partium proportionalium se habet ad veloci­
tatem prime partis proportionalis in ea proportione in qua se habet totum illud
tempus sic divisum in ordine ad primam partem proportionalem, ut si illud
tempus divisum fuerit in partes proportionales proportione sexquialtera et
velocitates illarum partium proportionalium disponantur modo quo ponit con­
clusio, tunc dico quod totalis illa velocitas totius illius temporis adequate se
habet ad velocitatem prime partis proportionalis in proportione tripla, ex eo
quod totum tempus divisum per partes proportionales proportione sexquial­
tera se habet ad primam proportionalem in proportione tripla. Est enim prima
pars una tertia totius ut ostendit quarta conclusio quinti capituli prime partis
huius operis. Probatur tamen universaliter hec conclusio, et suppono quod
quando velocitates se habent eo modo quo textus conclusionis pretendit tunc
per totum tempus extenditur illa velocitas que extenditur per primam partem
proportionalem et per totum residuum a prima extenditur tanta adequate non
communicans cum prima per totum tempus ('corr. ex corpus) extensa et per
totum residuum a prima et secunda parte proportionali iterum extenditur
tanta velocitas adequate non communicans cum aliqua precedentium, et sic
consequenter. Hec suppositio patet manifeste intuenti, quoniam si velocitas
secunde partis proportionalis est dupla ad velocitatem prime et tertie tripla
etc. secunda ipsa continet bis tam intensam velocitatem sicut est prima non
communicantem et tertia pars continet ter tantam et sic consequenter, et per
consequens residuum a prima continet uniformiter bis tantam velocitatem
sicut est prima (quamvis non adequate, continet enim adhuc maiorem) et
residuum a secunda parte proportionali ter tantam per totum quamvis in­
adequate et sic consequenter semper ille partes excedunt se continuo per
equalem velocitatem velocitati prime partis proportionalis. H oc supposito
probatur conclusio et volo quod hora sit divisa per partes proportionales ali­
qua proportione (quamvis libuerit) que sit g et coextendantur ille velocitates
ut dicit casus conclusionis per illas partes proportionales et sit proportio to­
Commentary to Ill.viii 497
tius hore divise per partes proportionales proportione g ad primam partem
proportionalem /. Tunc dico quod tota illa velocitas totius hore se habet in
proportione/ ad velocitatem (corr. ex proportionem) prime partis proportio­
nalis. Q uod probatur sic : quia velocitas equalis velocitati prime partis propor­
tionalis extensa per illam horam aliquid facit ad intensionem totius velocitatis
quia est pars eius ut ostendit suppositio precedens et tanta velocitas sicut illa
superaddita preexistenti extenditur per totum residuum a prima parte propor­
tionali proportione g ut etiam dicit suppositio. Igitur illa in g proportione mi­
nus facit quia est equalis alteri extense per totum et est in tempore in g pro­
portione minori ut dicit prima conclusio quia tempus dividitur proportione £.
E rgo totum se habet ad residuum a prima parte proportionali in g proportio­
ne. Item per totum residuum a prima parte proportionali et secunda extenditur
iterum tanta velocitas non communicans cum aliqua precedentium et illud
tempus residuum a prima et secunda se habet in g proportione ad totum resi­
duum a prima. Igitur illa velocitas ei coextensa in g proportione minus deno­
minat quam precedens velocitas equalis ei coextensa subiecto in £ proportione
maiori et sic consequenter. Igitur denominatio totius illius velocitatis com ­
ponitur ex infinitis continuo se habentibus in proportione g. E rgo illa deno­
minatio totius velocitatis sive illa tota velocitas (quod pro eodem capio) se
habet ad primam illarum denominationum sive velocitatum que est prime par­
tis proportionalis et etiam totius residui a prima in proportione/, quod fuit
inferendum. Patet hec consequentia, quia semper quando aliquid dividitur
proportione g ipsum se habet ad primam partem proportionalem in propor­
tione/, ut positum est. E t ex hoc patet quod in casu conclusionis tota velocitas
se habet ad velocitatem prime partis proportionalis in ea proportione in qua
habet totum tempus in ordine ad primam partem proportionalem proportione
qua dividitur ipsum tempus, quod fuit probandum .” (I have altered the punc­
tuation somewhat.) This w ork was written in part to clarify Swineshead’s
w ork. Hence it is not surprising to find that the point o f departure for this
treatment o f the series by Thomas is closer to that appearing in Swineshead’s
Liber calculationum than to that found in the D e configurationibus. Thus, just as
Swineshead was determining the average intensity o f a quality whose subject
was so divided into proportional parts, so Alvarus was finding the average
velocity for the w hole m otion whose time is divided into proportional parts,
and his conclusion holds that if the whole time is divided into proportional
parts according to the ratio g, then the average velocity over the w hole time is
related to the velocity o f the first proportional part o f the time as 1 :(i — ),
§
where the whole is designated as 1. Oresme, on the other hand, was relating
the total quantity o f velocity to that o f the first part or the whole distance
traversed to that traversed in the first part. Still it w ill be clear that in fact
Thomas in his p roof is actually adding distances in a manner equivalent to
 498 D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum
Oresm e’s geometrical addition o f surfaces when he (Thomas) allows the veloc­
ity o f each proportional part to be extended through the remainder o f the
time and estimates that each such extended velocity contributes less than the
immediately preceding velocity to the denomination o f the w hole by the ratio
g in which the w hole time is proportionally divided, for such denomination is
indeed determined only by distances traversed. A n d the same is true o f Swines-
head’s p ro o f presented above in Introduction II. A , fn. 16. Hence, one can
easily go from the Swineshead-Thomas approach to that o f Oresme by multi­
plying the average intensity into the extension (in the case o f quantities o f
qualities) or the average velocity into the time (in the case o f velocities), and,
in fact, Thomas in the fourth conclusion does essentially this when he deter­
mines that the ratio o f the total space traversed in the hour to the space trav­
ersed in the first proportional part o f the hour is as the square o f the ratio o f the
total time to the time o f the first proportional part (ed. o f 1509, sig. q ir, c. 2):
“ Quarta conclusio. D ivisa hora quavis proportione volueris in partes propor­
tionales et in prima illarum partium proportionalium mobile aliquod ali­
quanta velocitate moveatur et in secunda in duplo maiori velocitate quam in
prima et in tertia in triplo maiori quam in prima et sic consequenter, tunc in
illo casu__spacium in toto tempore adequate pertransitum se habebit ad
spacium absolutum in prima parte proportionali in proportione duplicata__
Demonstratur conclusio sic: sit unum mobile quod adequate moveatur
velocitate prime partis proportionalis per primam partem proportionalem
dumtaxat et transeat spacium c et aliud mobile moveatur per totam horam
velocitate prime partis proportionalis, et pertranseat spacium b et tertium
mobile moveatur per totam horam totali illa velocitate sicut ponitur in casu
conclusionis que se habet in /p ro p o rtio n e ad velocitatem prime partis pro­
portionalis in qua f proportione se habet totum tempus ad primam partem
eius proportionalem, ut dicit secunda conclusio... et pertranseat spacium a.
E t arguitur sic: spacii a ad spacium b estf proportio, quoniam tempora in
quibus pertranseuntur sunt equalia et velocitas qua pertransitur a i n f propor­
tione est maior velocitate qua pertransitur b, ut patet ex casu. E t etiam spacii
{corr. ex spaci) b ad spacium c est proportio / et a est spacium pertransitum in
tota hora in casu conclusionis, et c pertransitum in prima parte proportionali;
igitur propositum. M aior patet ex secunda propositione secundi notabilis
huius capitis. E t minor ex secunda parte prime propositionis eiusdem nota­
bilis. A lio modo et breviter demonstratur conclusio sic: velocitatis totius
hore ad velocitatem prime partis proportionalis est proportio /, et temporis
totius hore quod est maius ad tempus prime partis proportionalis est etiam /
proportio. E rgo spacii pertransiti in tota hora ad spacium pertransitum in
prima parte proportionali est proportio composita ex duplici proportione /,
et per consequens spacium pertransitum in tota hora ad spacium pertransitum
in prima parte proportionali est proportio dupla ad proportionem velocita­
Commentary to IILviii 499
tum que est /. Patet tamen consequentia ex tertia propositione secundi nota­
bilis huius capitis. E x hiis conclusionibus sequitur primo quod divisa hora
per partes proportionales proportione multiplici— sive dupla sive tripla sive
quadrupla sive quavis alia multiplici— et in prima parte proportionali ali­
quod mobile moveatur aliquantulum et in secunda in duplo maiori velocitate
quam in prima et in tertia in triplo quam in prima, ut precedentis theorematis
casus ostendit, totius illius velocitatis ad velocitatem prime partis proportio­
nalis erit proportio dupla si divisio facta fuerit proportione dupla, et sex-
quialtera si tripla, et sexquitertia si quadrupla, et sic in infinitum ascendendo
seriatim per species proportionis superparticularis et multiplicis. E t spacii
pertransiti in tota hora ad spacium pertransitum in prima parte est proportio
quadrupla, que est dupla ad duplam, et hoc si fiat divisio partium proportiona­
lium proportione dupla. Si vero fiat proportione tripla, spacii pertransiti in
tota hora ad spacium pertransitum in prima parte erit proportio dupla ad sex-
quialteram que est dupla sexquiquarta. Si vero fiat divisio proportione qua­
drupla, tunc spacii pertransiti in tota hora ad spacium pertransitum in pri­
ma parte proportionali erit proportio dupla ad sexquitertiam que est supra-
septipartiens nonas. E t si fiat divisio proportione quintupla, tunc totius spacii
ad spacium pertransitum in prima parte proportionali est proportio dupla ad
proportionem sexquiquartam que est proportio supranonipartiens sexdecimas,
et sic in infinitum duplicando proportionem velocitatum .” Incidentally, D u-
hem, Etudes sur Leonard de Vinci, V o l. 3, 548, notes the dependence o f T h o ­
mas’ Spanish colleague, Juan de Celaya, on Thomas for his treatment o f series.
For an analysis o f Alvarus Thom as’ treatment o f this series, see H. Wieleitner
in Bibliotheca Mathematica, 3. Folge, V o l. 14 (1913-14), 155-58.
Before leaving the treatment o f this series in late medieval times, attention
should be called to a somewhat different p ro o f o f the series found in a four­
teenth-century tract. It appears in a fragment attached to the Paris copy o f the
short tract A est mum calidum (BN lat. 16134, 79v-8or), possibly composed by
the Benedictine Johannes Bode (see M S Vat. lat. 4447, 299/, although ac­
cording to H. L. L. Busard in Archivefo r History o f E xa ct Sciences, V o l. 2, N o. 5
[1:965], 387, it is absent from any other copy o f the A estunum calidum. In general
form, it appears to be o f English origin, since it emphasizes the arithmetical,
logical techniques o f the Merton schoolmen, and, in addition, it follows after
the Sophismata o f Richard de Clymeton (Kilvington) in the Paris manuscript.
Still it is not beyond the realm o f possibility that it is a fragment o f a Sophismata
o f N icole Oresme, as I shall remark later in this comment. Before givin g the
text o f the passage containing this series, I should point out that Busard also
gives the text o f this passage in the article mentioned above (394-95), w hich I
received only after this volum e had been completed. O ur readings agree quite
closely, except that I believe that he has erred in the last line o f his third para­
graph and the first tw o lines o f the fourth, where he has: “ et tamen 6a re-
 jo o D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum
maneat ut 3 et 7a ut 4 igitur. Item si demamus a residuo et addamus 6, et 4 et
sic habebimus pertransitam medietatem medietatis et A remanet ut 3.” I
believe that the sense demands that this should read, “ E t cum 6 ^ remaneat ut
3 et 7W ut 4, ergo item, si demamus a residuo et addamus 6£eb erit (corr. ex et)
[ut] 4 et sic habebimus pertransitam medietatem medietatis [medietatis] et 7W
remanet ut 3.” Other divergencies in our tw o texts are minor. M y text runs:
“ M oveatur a per horam et in prima medietate hore moveatur aliqua veloci­
tate et in secunda parte proportionali duplo velocius et in 3a triplo velocius et
in 4a quadruplo {corr. ex 4a) et sic in infinitum secundum processum numero­
rum. D ico quod illud quod acquiret vel transibit in tota hora erit precise qua­
druplum ad partem quam acquisivit (8or) in prima parte proportionali, ita
quod totum illud acquisitum erit precise quadruplum ad partem suam que
fuit in [prima] parte acquisita et illud est generale in motu locali, alterationis,
augmentationis et ubicunque ymaginatur aliquid acquiri successive. Probatur
sic: E t ymaginatur hora divisa per partes proportionales, sitque velocitas a in
prima parte proportionali ut unum, in 2a erit sicut duo, in 3a sicut 3 (corr. ex
3a), in 4a ut 4 (corr. ex 4a) et sic ultra. Sit igitur pertransitum in prima parte
sicut unum. E rgo velocitas a in secunda sit sicut 2 et per consequens dupla ad
velocitatem primam. E rgo a pertransiret duplum ad pertransitum in prima si
secunda duraret tantum quantum prima. E t quia secunda est subdupla prime
[in tempore], ergo a pertransit in 2a subduplum dupli pertransiti in prima et
hoc est equale. E rgo in 2a pertransibit unum. Habemus igitur quod a et in
prima et in secunda pertransit duo. Capiamus ergo tertiam in qua velocitas
est sicut 3 et in ista parte 3a sit tanta sicut totum residuum [in tempore] et ita
etiam de qualibet. Si igitur a tota velocitate residua mutuemus unum gradum
et demus iste 3e parti et hoc de intensione velocitatis, tunc totum erit tantum
quantum fuit prius cum ista sit equalis residue [in tempore]; et cum iste
gradus fuerit demptus a toto residuo, sequitur quod cuiuslibet partis se­
quentis velocitas erit minor uno gradu; ita quod 4ta pars, que erat 4, erit
ut 3 (corr. ex 3a); et j a, que erat ut 5 (corr. ex 5ta), erit ut 4; et 6[ab 5; et
7[a], 6, et sic de aliis in infinitum; et ita 3a, que fuit ut 3 (corr. ex 3a), modo erit
sicut 4. E rgo a pertransiret in ista parte quadruplum ad hoc quod pertransivit
in prima si duraret tantum quantum sicut (corr. ex fecit) prima; et cum ista
pars sit (hic dei. subdupla) subquadrupla prime [in tempore], sequitur quod a
pertransibit tantum quantum in prima. E rgo in prima, 2[ab 3W pertransibit
3 (corr. ex 3am). Capiatur ergo nunc 4a pars, que est nunc sicut 3. E t cum
ipsa sit tanta sicut totum residuum [in tempore], demamus ergo a toto
residuo unum [gradum] et demus sibi. N unc 5a erit sicut 3 (corr. ex 3a), 6W ut
4, 7[a] ut 5, et sic ultra, et ita 4[a] fiet sicut 4 (corr. ex 4a). Igitur cum 3[a]
fuerit sicut 4 in velocitate et 4ta ut 4, [et ipsa est] (hic del. in) subdupla ad
3am [in tempore], sequitur quod a pertransibit in 4ta (corr. ex 4tam) medietatem
unius, scilicet subduplum (corr. ex subduplam) ad pertransitum in 3a. Item
501
Commentary to Ill.viii
capiamus quintam, que est sicut tria et tanta sicut totum residuum [in tem pore].
Mutuemus igitur a residuo unum [gradum] et faciamus velocitatem que sit ut
4. Igitur in 5[a] pertransibit subduplum ad illud quod pertransibit in 4[a] et
sic medietatem medietatis unius. E t cum 6[a] remaneat ut 3 et 7[a] ut 4, ergo
item, si demamus a residuo et addamus 6[e], erit (corr. ex et) [ut] 4 et sic habe­
bimus pertransitam medietatem medietatis [medietatis] et 7[al remanet ut 3.
E t sic procedendo in infinitum de ceteris semper ibimus per medietates me­
dietatum secundum proportionem subduplam. Cum ergo in primo casu per-
transeatur tantum quantum si fierit talis cummutatio, patet quia in prima et
2a et 3a a pertransibit 3 et in 4[a] medietatem unius et in 5ta medietatem me­
dietatis et deinde medietatem medietatis medietatis, igitur in 4a et in omnibus
sequentibus pertransiret unum precise; quare (corr. ex quia) in tota hora per­
transiret 4 (corr. ex 4am) et in prima parte proportionali acquirit unum, et 4 est
quadruplum unius; quare a pertransiret in hora precise quadruplum ad illud
quod pertransiret in prima medietate hore \del. velocitate], ut prius disputatur,
quod est propositum. E t ista conclusio est pulchra, mirabilis et bona.” It is
clear that in this p ro o f the] author has transformed the series: 1 + | * 2. + | ‘ 3
-f- -|— 2— • n + ... into the follow ing series in an ingenious w ay (differing
from that in the D e configurationibus): 1 -f- 1 -f- 1 + [f + i + i + • • • + “ +
. . . ]. Hence, since the subseries in brackets is w ell known to sum at 1, the
total sums at 4, and he has his proof. T he ingenious method o f transformation
is first applied to the third part and then successively to each succeeding part.
It is first noted that in the third, and indeed in every succeeding part, the
time span o f that part is precisely equal to the time remaining. Hence the im­
plication is that there are just as many (instantaneous) velocities in the third
part as in the remaining parts together. A n d so if from all the remaining veloc­
ities o f all the remaining parts w e take one degree and add it to the correspond­
ing velocities in the third part, that third part w ould then become uniform at 4
(instead o f 3), and the uniform velocity o f each o f the remaining parts w ill be
reduced by one. Since the uniform velocity o f the third part is now 4 and so
tw ice the velocity o f the second part and since it is half as extended in time, it
is evident that in the third part just as much space w ill be traversed as in the
second, or evidently a space o f one. Similarly, the velocity o f the fourth part,
having been reduced from 4 to 3 by the increase o f the velocity in the third
part, is now restored to 4 by borrow ing a degree from all the succeeding
velocities. Hence, w ith a velocity o f 4 (equal to the velocity o f the third part)
and w ith a time period one half that o f the third part, the mobile in the fourth
part w ill traverse a distance half o f that traversed in the third part. Similarly
the velocity in the fifth part, now reduced by tw o borrowings from 5 to 3, is
raised to 4 by borrow ing once more from all the succeeding velocities. Hence
 502 D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum Commentary to Ill.viii 503

w ith a velocity now equal to that o f the fourth part and w ith a time period the Paris manuscript is a part o f such a Sophismata. This is given some support
equal to one half o f the fourth part, the mobile in the fifth part w ill traverse by the fact that Torni states that Oresme has described this conclusion as
one half o f the distance traversed in the fourth part. In the same manner all o f “ marvelous” (mirabilis)*, and indeed at the end o f the p roof in the fragment
the velocities o f the succeeding parts are brought up to 4 by borrow ing from appearing in the A est unum calidum the conclusion is so described, while no
the velocities o f the remaining parts; and since each part is one half the time such description appears in the know n w orks o f Oresme. But if this fragment
o f the preceding part, the space traversed in each time period w ill be half o f does come from a Sophismata o f Oresme, w e still have to explain T orn i’s sub­
that traversed in the preceding period. Thus the transformation o f the series sequent remark that he is going to present a different method o f demonstra­
is completed and the p ro o f is obvious. Incidentally, this addition and sub­ tion, for clearly the differences between T orn i’s p roof and that o f the A est
traction process used in the series transformation is illustrated by a table that unum calidum fragment are minor. Hence, it seems somewhat more probable
appears some lines after the p ro o f (8or, c. 2): that, how ever dependent T orni was on the fragment o f the A est mum calidum
(and such dependence can scarcely b y denied even to the extent o f calling the
conclusion “ beautiful” ), it was not this w ork he was referring to in his re­
[Velocities o f first ten parts before borrow­
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 marks on Oresme. Rather one w ould suppose that he had seen Oresm e’s
ing-]
1 2 4 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 [The next six lines represent six successive treatment o f the series in Ill.v iii o f the D e configurationibus (or possibly in the
1 2 4 5
stages of borrowing and lending degrees, as Questions on the Physics) and that he then presented the different p roof o f the
4 3 4 6 7 8
described in the text.] above-mentioned fragment which he had at hand, perhaps assigning by mis­
1 2 4 4 4 3 4 5 6 7
take its statement about the marvelousness o f the conclusion to Oresme.
1 2 4 4 4 4 3 4 5 6
That he w ould use the term sophisms in a general w ay to refer to Oresm e’s
1 2 4 4 4 4 4 3 4 5 presentation o f the series need not surprise us, for, in fact, Torni uses the
1 2 4. 4 4 4 4 4 3 4 w ord sophism in this general sense to label the A est unum calidum in the pas­
sage noted above (1494 ed., 761:, c. 1 ) : “ Unde ut habetur in illo sophismate A
[D iv is io n o f th e t im e a c c o r d in g t o th e r a tio
2 4 8 16 32
2 : 1 . N o t e , I h a v e a d d e d t h e h o r iz o n t a l lin e .]
est unum calidum.” Thus, i f Torni had at hand a copy o f the tract A est mum
calidum which included the series and its proof, a tract which w e know him to
This p ro o f was not w ithout influence, since it was reproduced (although have considered as a kind o f sophismata, it w ould be natural for him, on recall­
w ith some differences) by the fifteenth-century Florentine Bernardus Torni ing the similar conclusion o f Oresme, to speak o f Oresme’s w ork in the same
in his commentary In capitulum de motu locali Hentisberi, w hich was published w ay as sophismata, regardless o f its exact title. A t least, w e can be sure that
w ith H eytesbury’s Regule solvendi sophismata (Venice, 1494, 76V-771:). W hile in T orn i’s reference is not to Oresm e’s Questions on the Geometry o f Euclid since
this passage Torni does not mention the A est unum calidum, he does so in an none o f T orn i’s conclusions is present in that w ork. The full p ro o f o f T orn i’s
immediately preceding passage o f H eytesbury’s w o r k e r , c. 1; cf. P. Duhem, first conclusion follows (1494 ed., 7 6 V -7 7 1 :) : “ Cum his diebus a lectionibus
Etudes sur Leonard de Vinci, V o l. 3, 502) and so w e know that he had read the vacassem, venit in mentem conclusionem quandam N icolaum Orem in suis
medieval tract. But, in fact, in some prefatory remarks Torni hails Oresme sophismatibus declarasse, quam dicit esse mirabilem. Pulchra, inquam, est
as the person w ho has stimulated his interest in this subject with his “ beautiful
* It will be noticed that in the text below I fication o f the fragment in the A est unumcali­
conclusion” and its “ very beautiful p roof.” A nd, as w e shall see, T orn i’s
have given the dependent clause describing dum with a Sophismata o f Oresme collapses. I
p ro o f o f the first conclusion (and indeed his proofs o f all four o f his conclusions)
Oresme’s conclusion as “ quam dicit esse mira­ would prefer to think that Miss Maier and Luiz
are not completed by the use o f Oresme’s configuration technique but rather bilem.” Miss Maier reads dicit as dicam{An der Coronei are correct since their reading would
they are o f the arithmetical, logical type made popular by the English (and in Gren^e, 382) which would then mean that tend to reinforce my doubts that the fragment
the case o f the first proposition the p ro o f is, as I have suggested, virtually Torni declared the conclusion to be marvelous. is a part o f a work o f Oresme; however, I must
If this reading is correct (and Luiz Coronei in confess that the printed text had die, which is
identical w ith that found attached to the -A. est unum calidum). In mentioning
the sixteenth century appears also to have inter­ ordinarily an abbreviation for dicit rather than
Oresm e’s conclusion (presumably identical with the first one presented by dicam(e.g., see A . Pelzer, Abbreviations latines
preted the remarks as a statement o f Torni
Torni), Torni describes its source as some sophisms o f Oresme. N o text o f rather than Oresme, see Duhem, Etudes sur medievales [Louvain, Paris, 1964], 22). It would
Oresme with the title o f Sophismata is now known. One m ight suppose, how ­ Leonard de Vinci, V ol. 3, 546-47), then this be useful to have a manuscript o f Torni’s
ever, that the above-mentioned fragment attached to the A est unum calidum in additional argument in support o f the identi­ work as a check on this point.
 504 D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum
conclusio et pulcherrima probatio. E g o vero, quum principium plusquam
dimidium esse ducam, ex suo fundamento quasdam alias aperiam conclusio­
nes, alioque medio suam demonstrabo, que omnia potius ab ipso quam a me
orta velim existimes. Illius enim fidus ero interpres. Q uod si hic parvus labor
erit cordi, ad maiora in medium producenda concitabis. A d rem igitur devenio
verbis amotis superfluis quam in manus detractorum non ignoro venturam. Si
fuerit hora divisa in partes proportionales proportione dupla minoribus ter­
minatis versus finem et a mobile in prima parte proportionali moveatur certa
velocitate, in secunda in duplo velocius, in tertia in triplo velocius, et sic in
infinitum secundum processum numerorum, a in tota hora pertransibit pre­
cise quadruplum ad illud quod pertransibit in prima parte proportionali. A d
hanc probandam conclusionem presuppono id quod communiter a \corr. ex ad]
omnibus conceditur, quod si a in uno tempore mediante aliquo gradu motus
uniformi pertransibit certum spacium, in consimili et equali tempore mediante
consimili motu spacium pertransiret equale ubi poneretur sic m overi, ceteris
aliis existentibus paribus quantum est possibile. Cum enim velocitas motus
penes effectum in motu locali insequatur spacium pertransitum a puncto velo­
cissime moto vel a puncto medio vel equevalenti, quod pro nunc non curo, si
motus est equalis motui et tempus tempori, sequitur spacium esse equale spa-
cio, et hoc apud omnem opinionem de m otu locali esset concedendum. Se­
cundo presuppono quod si fuerit aliquid divisum in partes continue propor­
tionales aliqua proportione in infinitum, qualis est proportio prime partis ad
secundam talis est totius ad omnes preter primam. Hec suppositio patet per
tertiam decimam quinti Euclidis ubi dicitur quod si fuerint quotim numeri
proportionales, quantus erit unus antecedens ad suum consequentem tanti
erunt omnes antecedentes pariter accepti ad omnes consequentes pariter ac­
ceptos. M odo ubi fuerit aliquid continue divisum in partes proportionales ali­
qua proportione in infinitum, omnes antecedentes pariter accepti sunt ipsum
totum, quia non est accipere ultimam partem proportionalem, ut notum est,
omnes vero consequentes sunt residuum a prima parte proportionali, ut patet.
E rgo qualis est proportio prime partis ad secundam talis est totius hore ad
residuum a prima parte proportionali, et hec est suppositio nostra. His duabus
suppositionibus stantibus probatur conclusio. Sit enim a quod in prima parte
proportionali hore divise ('corr. ex divisa) in partes proportionales proportione
dupla m oveatur certa velocitate, et in secunda in duplo velocius, in tertia in
triplo velocius, et sic in infinitum secundum numerum augendo; b vero in
prima parte proportionali eiusdem hore sic divise moveatur consimili veloci­
tate sicut a in prima, et in secunda eodem m odo sicut a in secunda, in tertia
vero in quadruplo velocius quam in prima, et in quarta consimiliter et in
quarta in quadruplo velocius moveatur, sic quod in omnibus postea eque
velociter moveatur. Q uo casu stante arguitur sic: a et b in tota hora precise
equalia spacia pertransibunt et b pertransibit quadruplum ad illud quod per-
Commentary to Ill.viii 5°5
transibit a in prima parte proportionali, ergo a pertransibit quadruplum ad
spacium pertransitum in prima parte proportionali hore. Consequentia vide­
tur nota et assumptum pro maiori probatur. Nam in prima, secunda et quarta
parte proportionali precise equalia spacia pertransibunt quum precise in illis
partibus eque velociter m ovebuntur, et in tertia parte proportionali precise
tantum plus pertransibit b quam a quantum pertransitum ab a in residuo a
quarta excedet pertransitum a b in eodem tempore. Q uod probatur: dividatur
tertia pars proportionalis in infinitum in partes proportionales proportione
dupla minoribus terminatis versus quartam et arguitur sic. Si in prima parte
proportionali illius tertie moveretur a velocius quam in casu posito per gra­
dum quo motus suus in quinta parte hore excedit motum b in eadem quinta et
removeretur talis gradus a quinta et toto residuo, et in secunda parte propor­
tionali illius tertie moveretur velocius quam in casu posito per gradum quo
motus a in sexta postmodum excederet motum b in eadem sexta parte propor­
tionali hore et removeretur talis gradus a sexta et toto residuo, et sic fieret per
omnes partes proportionales tertie partis proportionalis hore, a precise tan­
tum spacium pertransiret in tertia parte proportionali hore quantum b, et in
residuo a quarta consimiliter. E rgo tantum spacium pertransiret quantum b,
et nunc a tantum spacium pertransiret sicut tunc. E rgo in casu primo in tertia
parte proportionali et residuo a quarta a precise tantum spacium pertransibit
quantum b. E rgo in residuo a quarta plus pertransibit quam b in eodem tem­
pore quantum b plus pertransibit quam a in tertia parte proportionali. Omnes
iste consequentie preter primam videntur note, que sic probatur. Nam in illo
puncto cum residuum a quarta parte proportionali sit equale quarte, aggre­
gatum enim ex quarta et residuo a quarta est duplum ad residuum a quarta, er­
g o est duplum ad quartam, et sic residuum a quarta est equale quarte. Cum
ergo ita sit, sequitur quod est subduplum ad tertiam partem proportionalem.
Per consequens si removeretur unus gradus a residuo a quarta et poneretur in
medietate tertie partis proportionalis que est prima pars proportionalis eius,
tantum faciet quantum si esset in tali residuo per primum presuppositum, et
tunc remaneret motus ipsius a prime partis proportionalis tertie partis hore
eque intensus sicut motus b in eodem tempore, et in quinta parte proportiona­
li hore ille motus a erit eque intensus cum motu b in eadem quinta. E t eodem
m odo probatur, si removeretur postea a residuo a quinta unus gradus et
poneretur in secunda parte proportionali tertie, nam illud residuum est equale
illi parte, et equalis motus removeretur ab illo residuo et adderetur illi parti,
ergo tantum faceret, et patet quod secunda pars proportionalis tertie partis
proportionalis hore haberet motum a eque intensum cum motu b in eadem
parte, et in sexta parte proportionali hore etiam esset motus a eque intensus
precise cum motu b, et sic in infinitum faciendo patet quod motus a esset eque
intensus precise cum motu b in tertia parte proportionali et residuo a quarta,
et per consequens a tantum spacium pertransiret in tertia parte proportionali
 506 D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum
et residuo a quarta quantum spacium pertransiret b et quod in casu primo
tantum spacium pertransibit sicut nunc. Patet quia equalis gradus motus ad­
ditur prime parti proportionali tertie sicut removetur a residuo preter quar­
tam ad sensum est notum. E t sic de singulis discurrendo ergo tantum spacium
pertransibit in casu primo quantum pertransiret nunc, quod erat probandum.
E t sic probata est maior primi argumenti principalis. M inor vero probatur,
nam secunda pars proportionalis est in duplo minor prima et in illa b in duplo
velocius m ovebitur quam in prima, ergo tantum spacium pertransibit in illa
sicut in prim a; tertia vero est in quadruplo minor prima et in quadruplo velo­
cius m ovebitur, ergo etiam in illa tantum spacium pertransibit quantum in
prima. Deinde quarta est subdupla ad tertiam et eque velociter m ovebitur
sicut in tertia, ergo subduplum spacium pertransibit ad id quod pertransibit in
prima; et in quinta subquadruplum quia quinta est subdupla ad quartam et
eque velociter m ovebitur sicut in quarta, ergo subduplum spacium pertransi­
bit b in quinta ad id quod pertransibit in quarta et per consequens subqua­
druplum ad id quod pertransibit in prima; et in sexta subduplum etc. E t per
consequens erunt infinita spacia incipiendo a spacio pertransito in quarta parte
proportionali que se habebunt continue in proportione dupla. E rgo totum ex
eis per presuppositum secundum est precise duplum ad omnia preter id quod
pertransibitur in quarta et precise componitur ex eo spacio quod pertransibi-
tur in quarta et illud (corr. ex in illo) quod pertransibitur in residuis partibus a
quarta ergo est duplum ad illud quod pertransibitur in quarta. Sed in quarta
pertransibitur subduplum ad id quod pertransibitur in prima. E rg o in quarta
et residuo a quarta tantum pertransibit quantum in prima et per consequens in
toto tempore pertransibit precise spacium cuius quartam partem solum per­
transibit in prima et per consequens spacium pertransitum in toto tempore est
precise quadruplum ad spacium pertransitum in prima parte proportionali.
E t ista fuerat minor declaranda. E t sic patet manifeste conclusio.” There is no
basic difference in T orni’s method o f series transformation from that o f the
author o f A est mum calidum. H e poses (i) body a m oving as in the conclusion
w ith the velocity increasing arithmetically in the proportional parts o f the
hour divided according to the ratio 2:1, and (2) body b m oving as a in the
first and second proportional parts o f the hour, but in the third and all succeed-
ding parts m oving uniformly with a velocity four times the velocity o f the first
proportional part o f the time. He shows that b and a traverse equal spaces in
the hour by converting the motion o f a to that o f b w ithout total gain or loss
o f velocity. His procedure is to leave the velocity o f the fourth proportional
part untouched at a velocity o f 4 and then to bring the velocity o f a in the
third proportional part o f the hour up to 4 by making successive additions to
the velocity in the third proportional part o f the hour, that part itself being
divided into proportional parts: first by adding one degree to the velocity o f
the first proportional part o f the third part from the velocities remaining after
Commentary to Ill.viii 5°7
the fourth part o f the hour, then to the velocity o f the second one degree
from the velocities o f the parts remaining after the fifth proportional part o f
the hour, then to that o f the third a degree from the velocities o f the parts
remaining after the sixth proportional part o f the hour, and so on to infinity (and
this borrow ing can be done sufficiently and totally since in each case the pro­
portional part o f the third proportional part o f the hour is equal in duration to
each successive remainder from which a degree o f velocity is borrowed, and
hence there is a corresponding number o f velocities in the one set o f parts as in
the other). T he purpose o f all o f this borrow ing and addition o f degrees is to
show that, in so transforming the motion o f a in the third proportional part o f
the hour to equal that o f b in the same part, all successive excesses o f a beyond
b in the proportional parts o f the hour from the fifth onward are used up and
so the bodies a and b traverse equal spaces. But, as in the p roof in A est unum
calidum, b traverses spaces related as the series: 1 + 1 -f- 1 + [y -f- +
. .. ]. One addition o f T orn i’s p ro o f to that o f the A est mum calidum is a p roof
that i i +£•+... + 1, a conclusion merely assumed in the
earlier treatment. This p ro o f is made on the basis o f Euclid V .13 ( = G reek
text V .12). T he p ro o f is o f this form : Let S be the sum o f the infinite spaces
traversed in the successive proportional parts o f the hour from the fourth,
each o f which is one-half o f its predecessor; and let F be the space traversed
in the fourth part. Then b y V . 13, = f - B ut F = J (when the initial space
traversed is 1). Hence S = 1, and thus the series i + i + i + [ i + i + |- +
. . .] = 4, and so the ratio o f the whole space traversed to that traversed in the
first part is f . Torni follows this first proposition with three further proposi­
tions. For the second, see the Commentary, III.x, lines 47-48. T h e third and
fourth are o f the same form as the first. In the third, the hour is divided into
proportional parts according to the ratio f , w ith the velocity as before in­
creasing arithmetically in the proportional parts o f the hour, and the sum (i.e.,
the w hole space traversed) is thus given as when the space traversed in the
first part is 1 (1494 ed., c. 2). In the fourth conclusion, the hour is divided
into proportional parts according to the ratio with the velocity increasing
arithmetically as before, and the sum or total space traversed is thus given as 9
when the space traversed in the first part is 1 (1494 ed., 77r-v). It w ill be
evident that these tw o additional conclusions, along with the first, have all
been absorbed into the much longer exposition o f Alvarus Thomas mentioned
earlier in this comment. Hence, I assume that Thom as probably had read
T orn i’s w ork, as had his colleagues Jean Dullaert and Luiz Coronei, at Paris.
The former gives T orn i’s four conclusions and ascribes them to Oresme, prob­
ably on the basis o f a misinterpretation o f T orn i’s prefatory remarks on Ores­
me (see P. Duhem , Etudes sur Leonard de Vinci, V ol. 3, 530-31). T he latter
 5o8
D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum
gives the first conclusion, specifically citing T orn i’s reference to Oresme
(ibid., 546-47); he also remarks in the same passage that the calculator Suiset
(Swineshead) gives this same conclusion in his D e dijformibus. A similar ref­
erence to Torni and Oresme is found in the w ork o f Juan de Celaya (/£/*/., 546).
Hence, it is doubtful if Dullaert, Coronei, or Celaya knew Oresm e’s treatment
o f these series first hand. Incidentally, the reception and spread o f the medi­
eval discussions o f infinite series in the sixteenth century require further
investigation.
-44 “ Eodem — difficiliori.” — I have already remarked that Oresme gave this
same example in his Questions on the Physics (see Introduction, II.A , fn. 19).
H owever, I do not believe that this is the w ork to which Oresme is referring
here, for the illustration by surfaces o f this example given in Questions on the
Physics implies the very demonstration given here in the D e configurationibus.
N o r is the statement in the passage in the.Questions on the Physics that just pre­
cedes the geometrical illustration an actual p roof but only a verbal statement
which the geometrical passage illuminates: “ One could concede this to be
demonstratable as follows. It having been posited that in the first part it
traverses the space o f a foot, then if it were m oved with such a degree through
the remainder [of the hour] it w ould traverse tw o feet in the w hole time.
Again, i f with the latitude acquired in the second part it w ould be m oved
through that second part and the rest [of the hour], it w ould traverse one foot.
A nd if it were m oved with the latitude o f the third part through that part and
the rest [o f the hour], it w ould traverse one half foot, and then one half o f one
half, and so on in this w ay continually; it traverses all together precisely as
much as that posited in the case; hence it traverses four feet.” I doubt, then,
that this brief statement is the “ more subtle and difficult demonstration” to
which Oresme is referring in the D e configurationibus. T w o other possibilities
present themselves as to the source to w hich Oresme is referring. (1) He is
referring to a w o rk now lost (as, for example, to a Sophismata o f the kind men­
tioned in the previous comment on this chapter; and this was suggested by A .
Maier, A n d er Gren^e, 338, fn. 101,3 82-8 3). (2) He is referring not too precisely
to the p ro o f o f a similar series in his Questions on the Geometry o f Euclid. In favor
o f the first possibility is the reference by T orni already described in the pre­
ceding comment. But, as I argued there, the fragment attached to the A est
unum calidum does not conclusively appear to be a part o f such a w ork. And,
indeed, until such a w ork turns up, or until some other clear-cut reference to
it by Oresme is found, w e must hold this possibility in abeyance. In the pres­
ent state o f knowledge, the second possibility seems more likely (even though
the Questions on the Geometry o f Euclid does not contain a p ro o f o f exactly the
same series as that treated here in Ill.v iii o f the D e configurationibus). This ten­
tative conclusion rests on the fact that Oresm e’s p roof in this chapter o f the
D e configurationibus is essentially based on the identity o f the tw o series noted
Commentary to Ill.viii 509
in the previous comment, namely, i - j - f - 2 + J * 3 + . . . + •n + ... = 2
A t1 + k i + • • • H— + . ..]. Hence to prove that the left-hand side o f the
equation sums at four, Oresme w ould only have to prove that the series in
brackets in the right-hand side sums at 2. A n d this is done in his Questions on
the Geometry o f Euclid, Question 2 (ed. o f Busard, 5, lines 9-15): “ Prima con­
clusio est quod, si pedalis quantitas sit assumpta et fiat addicio in infinitum
secundum proporcionem subduplam sic, quod addatur ei una 2a unius pedis,
deinde una 4% deinde una 8a et sic in infinitum duplando subduplos, totum
precise erit duplum ad primum assumptum. H oc patet, quia si ab aliquo de­
merentur iste partes per ordinem, ab illo demeretur precise dupla ad primam,
ut patet per primam questionem, igitur pari racione, si adderentur.” The
actual p ro o f derives from his previous question (ibid., 2, 11-34; 3, 1-3),
where the summation o f the similar series:
* + ±+ *+ ...+ ^ + ^ + . . . = 1
is presented as a corollary o f the summation o f a more general series:
where — represents the first aliquot part o f a to be removed. A n d as M urdoch
has pointed out in Scripta Mathematica, V ol. 27 [1964], 69, the summation o f
this is proved b y “ the continued proportion o f the successive remainders left
after subtracting the proportional parts constituting [the] series” ; by means o f
which continued proportion it is clear that the ratio o f the w hole to each suc­
cessive part rises to infinity, w ith the conclusion that the w hole quantity a
w ould be consumed by such continued subtraction. But let me quote the
p roof in Oresm e’s term s: “ prima supposicio talis quod, si aliqua proporcio
augetur in infinitum, maiori termino non mutato, minor terminus diminuitur
in infinitum __ Secunda supposicio est quod, si alicui proporcioni addatur una
tanta et deinde tanta et sic in infinitum, illa augmentabitur in infinitum__
E st ergo prima conclusio quod, si ab aliqua quantitate dematur pars aliquota,
a prim o residuo dematur tanta pars et a secundo residuo tanta pars et sic in in­
finitum, talis quantitas per huiusmodi detraccionem in infinitum precise con­
sumetur nec plus nec minus. H oc probatur, quia totum preassumptum et pri­
mum residuum et secundum et tercium etc. sunt continue proporcionalia, ut
posset probari cum arguendo a terminata proporcione, ergo est ibi aliqua
proporcio, deinde tanta et sic sine fine, ergo tabs proporcio tocius ad resi­
duum crescit in infinitum, quia componitur ex ipsis per secundam supposi-
cionem et alter terminus, puta totum, ymaginatur non mutatum, ergo resi-
 JIO D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum
duum diminuitur in infinitum per primam supposicionem, igitur tota illa
quantitas precise consumitur. E x quo sequitur illud correlarium quod, si ab
aliquo pedali dematur semipedale et deinde medietas residue quantitatis et
deinde medietas alterius residui et sic in infinitum, ab illo amovebitur precise
pedale.” I f my reasoning is correct, this, then, w ould be the “ more subtle and
difficult demonstration” to w hich Oresme is referring. (For Oresm e’s very
considerable accomplishments in the treatment o f infinite series, see M urdoch
in Scripta Mathematica, V o l. 27 [1964], 68-70.)
I ll .i x
2-40 “ Ym aginetur m overetur” — T he follow ing series w ith its sum is here il­
lustrated geometrically, / being the first proportional part o f the time and v
being the velocity during the first proportional part o f the tim e:
2Vt 4v t , -Iv t
+ ... = 2Vt.
™ + - J + l6 +
The p ro o f o f summation is based on showing that the series is reducible to the
follow ing well-known series (see the Commentary, IIL viii, lines 35-43):
Vt(l + I + I + • • • + + • • • ) — 2Vt*
III.X
4-47 “ S it__ propositum .” — The series which is the object o f this chapter is
composed o f an infinite number o f parts constructed on a base divided into
proportional parts according to the ratio 2: 1. T he intensities o f these vary in
such a way that the intensity o f each odd-numbered part is uniform but double
that o f the preceding odd-numbered part, and the intensity o f each even-
numbered part uniformly varies from the uniform degree o f intensity o f the
odd-numbered part preceding it to the uniform degree o f intensity o f the
odd-numbered part succeeding it. Oresme holds that the sum o f this series
has a ratio to the first part o f 7:2. This is proved by showing that the odd-
numbered terms form one series whose summation is known, while similarly
the even-numbered also form a similar series. These series are:
( 1 ) 1 + i + i + ••• + + ... = 2 = (the odd-numbered parts)
2 n -i
(2) f • I + Y * i + • • • + 3 • — r- + • ■ • = ! (the even-numbered parts).
4
It is evident that the second series is o f precisely the same form as the first series
and that Oresme was quite familiar w ith the sum o f such a series (see Commen­
tary, IILviii, lines 35-44). Hence, considering the first part o f odd-num­
bered series as 1 (and this is also the first part o f the combined series), the sum
Commentary to III.ix-IILx 511
o f the first series is related to the first part as ( f ): 1, and the sum o f the second
series is related to that same first part as ( f ) : 1. Hence the total sum is related to
the first part as \ : 1, i.e., as 7:2. Oresme adds an alternate proof. It shows that
each odd-numbered term is -f- the succeeding even-numbered term. Hence the
aggregate o f the odd-numbered terms must be -f the aggregate o f the even-num­
bered terms. But by the previous proof, the sum o f the odd-numbered terms is 4
when the first term is assumed to be 2. Hence the sum o f the even-numbered
terms must be 3, and the total sum 7. Thus the ratio o f the sum to the first term
is 7: 2. Incidentally, in the determination o f the terms o f the series o f even-
numbered parts, Oresme makes use o f the M erton Rule o f uniform ly difform
proved in IILvii.
-48 “ E t...p reced en ti.” — This same series, w ithout graphical representation,
was applied to velocities at the end o f one manuscript o f the short tract A est
mum calidum, as D uhem first noted (Etudes sur Leonard de Vinci, V ol. 3,476), al­
though D uhem mistranslated tripla sexquialtera as 3! rather than the correct
3|, in expressing the ratio o f the sum to the first part. Since D uhem has not
included from the A est unum calidum the Latin text describing this series, and
has not analysed or given the p ro o f added by the author o f this w ork, I have
thought it useful to include here the w hole passage (MS Paris, B N lat. 16134,
8or-v). [Again I should note that after this volum e was prepared for publi­
cation, Busard’s article, “ Unendliche Reihen in A est unum calidum,” appeared
w ith the text o f this passage (396-97); our readings differ but slightly.]
“ Si aliquod mobile moveatur per horam divisam per partes proportionales
(corr. ex partem proportionalem) continue per hunc modum, quod in prima
parte proportionali moveatur aliqua velocitate et continue per secundam
partem intendat uniformiter velocitatem suam usque ad gradum duplum ita
quod in fine 2e [partis] hore attingat gradum duplum ad velocitatem prime
partis et in 3a [parte] hore (corr. ex hora) moveatur continue uniformiter isto
gradu duplo et in principio 4e incipiat intendere velocitatem suam et continue
difformiter per 4am m ovendo intendat uniformiter velocitatem suam usque in
fine et habeat in fine gradum duplum ad gradum tertie (corr. ex triple) et qua­
druplum prime et in 5a moveatur ista velocitate uniformi et in 6a intendat ut
(8ov) prius usque ad duplum et in 7a uniformiter moveatur et sic sine fine
vicibus alternatis, dico quod in tota hora pertransibit precise triplum sex-
quialterum illius quod pertransivit in prima; ita quod si in prima parteper-
transivit duos pedes, in tota hora pertransibit 7 pedes, est enim proportio 7 ad
duo tripla sexquialtera. H oc ostenditur sic: Primo patet ex casu quod velocitas
3e partis est dupla ad velocitatem prime et velocitas 5e (corr. ex 5le) dupla 3e et
velocitas 7[e] dupla 5e et sic in infinitum. N unc tertia pars proportionalis
[temporis] est subquadrupla (corr. ex sexquidupla) prime et 5a subquadrupla
3e et sic sine fine. E t ex istis sequitur quod eadem est proportio totius motus
prime partis ad motum 3e et motus 3e ad motum 5e et sic in infinitum. Cum
 5 12 D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum Commentary to III.x 513

igitur in prima parte mobile pertranseat duos pedes, si tertia pars duraret tan­
tum quantum prima pertransiret 4 pedes; et non durat nisi in subquadruplo,
igitur pertransiret subquadruplum, quod est unum pedale. E t iterum si 5ta
tantum duraret quantum 3a pars, pertransiret duplum, scilicet duos pedes, et
cum ipsa sit subquadrupla pertransit subquadruplum dupli, quod est dimi­
dium pedale. Q uod patet, quia motus 3e ad motum prime ita motus 5e ad
motum 3e. Sed motus 3e est subduplus ad motum prime, ergo motus 5e erit
subduplus ad motum 3e; et pari ratione motus -je et sic in infinitum secundum
proportionem subduplam per numeros impares seu partes impares. Igitur in
prima pertransibit duos pedes, in 3a unum pedem, in 5a ('corr. ex 4a) medieta­
tem pedis, et sic de aliis. Igitur in omnibus aliis temporibus a prim o* per­
transit unum pedum in una hora.
Capiamus nunc secundam partem. E t probatur primo quod velocitas ze
partis sit ad velocitatem prime in proportione sexquialtera in casu prefato.
Quoniam ipsa est uniformiter difformis, ergo est equalis suo gradui medio. E t
gradus ultimus est duplus ad primum; ergo gradus medius continet pri­
mum et eius medietatem, quia est medius secundum proportionem arisme-
tricam, quia vo co gradum medium qui est in medio illius secunde partis et
tantum distat a primo quantum a ( / delete ?) ultimus ab ipso. Igitur velocitas
secunde partis est sexquialtera ad velocitatem prime. Igitur si 2a pars duraret
tantum quantum prima, cum in prima pertranseat duos pedes, in secunda per­
transiret 3 pedes; et de facto 2a pars [temporis] est subdupla prime, igitur per­
transibit pedem cum dimidio. E t sic motus partis secunde est sexquialterus (/)
ad motum prime.1"
N unc de aliis partibus videamus. E t volo demonstrare quod in omnibus
aliis numeris denominatis paribus, scilicet 4% 6a, 8a, io a et sic in infinitum,
pertransibit tantum precise quantum in 2a. E t ponatur primo quod eadem est
proportio motus 4e partis ad 2am et 6e ad 4am et 8e ad 6am et sic de aliis, quo­
niam velocitas 4e est dupla ad velocitatem 2e, quia primus gradus est duplus
primo, et medius medio, et ultimus ultimo, et sic de aliis, ergo velocitas 4e est
* Busard wrongly corrects this to “ 30.’ It is
ersed) and we also correct secunde to prime and
obvious that all the spaces traversed on the prime to secunde (which Busard failed to do), for
time periods after the first form the series the space traversed in the first period is ses­
i + 4 + i + — Hence they do sum at 1, as quitertiate the space traversed in the second.
the author says. Incidentally, the phrase at the N ow it may be that this is a simple restatement
end in una hora should be read after temporibus that the velocity o f the second part is sesquial-
thus: “ in all o f the time periods in one hour
terate the velocity of the first, which is true, but
except the first one.” this would hardly be the conclusion o f the
f As it stands in the manuscript, this sentence argument, since it was already demonstrated
is incorrect, or at least redundant. It will not above by an oblique reference to the mean
do simply to correct sexquialterus to sexquiter- speed theorem. In view of these difficulties, I
tius, as Busard wishes, unless, we understand have decided to leave the sentence as it is in the
motus to mean “ total velocity” ( = space trav­
manuscript.
dupla ad velocitatem 2e et ita velocitas 6e ad velocitatem 4e et velocitas 8e ad
velocitatem 6e, etc. E t iterum 4a pars est subquadrupla {corr. ex subdupla) ze
{corr. ex 8e) et 6a 4e et sic de aliis. Igitur eadem est proportio motus 4e ad m o­
tum 2e et 6e ad motum 4e et 8e ad motum 6e et sic ultra, quod est propositum.
Tunc ultra velocitas 4e est dupla ad velocitatem 2e et ipsa est subquadrupla ad
2am [in tem pore]. E rgo mobile pertransit in 4a subquadruplum {corr. ex sub-
quadruplam) dupli pertransiti {corr. ex pertransitam) in 2a et hoc est medietas vel
subduplum {corr. ex subquadruplum). E rgo motus est subduplus ad motum
secunde per prius probatum, motus 6e est subduplus motui 4e et sic ultra.
E rgo mobile pertransit in 4a [parte] medietatem illius quod pertransivit in 2%
et [in] 6a medietatem medietatis, et sic ultra. Igitur in 4% 6a, 8a, io a, etc. [tan­
tum pertransibit quantum] pertransivit in 2a. E t quoniam {corr. ex 6a) tantum
quantum in 2a, igitur pertransibit pedem cum dimidio. Habemus ergo quan­
tum pertransitum {corr. ex possit) in prima et quantum in 3a et in omni­
bus imparibus et quantum in 2a et in omnibus paribus. Recolligamus igitur
et dicamus quod in prima pertransivit duos pedes et in 3a unum pedem et in
ceteris imparibus unum pedem, in secunda vero pedem cum dimidio et in
omnibus aliis paribus pedem cum dim idio; et si omnia simul congregemus,
habemus 7 pedes, quorum duo pertransiti sunt in prima parte. Unde patet
totum pertransitum in hora ad pertransitum in prima sui parte esse sicut 7 ad
duo, que est proportio tripla sexquialtera, quod fuerat in principio demon­
strandum.” The p ro o f is far less economical than the similar p roof o f Ores-
me. M oreover, since it is w ithout the geometric proof, it probably origi­
nated in the English school. Thus, it could be that this conclusion and its
p roof (rather than the geometrical p roof o f the D e configurationibus') was the
source o f the similar p roof o f the summation o f this series given by Bernardus
Torni in his commentary on Heytesbury’s D e motu locali, w ho, although he
may have seen this series in III.x o f th&De configurationibus, certainly did not use
Oresm e’s configuration technique in his p ro o f (1496 ed., 77r, cc. 1-2): “ Se­
cunda conclusio ex consimili fundamento probanda est ista: Si aliquod mobile
moveretur per horam divisam in partes proportionales proportione dupla
minoribus terminatis versus ultimum, et in prima parte moveretur aliqualiter
velociter, in secunda intenderet motum suum uniformiter usque ad gradum
duplum, et in tertia m overetur uniformiter gradu duplo ad primam, et in
quarta intenderet uniformiter motum suum usque ad gradum duplum gradui
reperto in secunda, et in quinta moveretur uniformiter, etc., dico quod spa-
cium pertransitum in toto tempore est precise triplum sexquialterum ad spa-
cium pertransitum in prima medietate hore, que est prima pars proportionalis.
H ec conclusio probatur sic: spacium pertransitum ab a in omnibus partibus
imparibus est precise duplum ad spacium pertransitum ab eodem in prima
parte proportionali et spacium pertransitum ab a in omnibus partibus paribus
est precise sexquialterum ad spacium pertransitum ab eodem in prima parte
 5H D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum
proportionali; ergo spacium pertransitum in omnibus partibus tam paribus
quam imparibus est triplum sexquialterum ad spacium pertransitum ab eodem
in prima parte proportionali. Consequentia videtur nota. Nam si spacium
quod pertransibitur ab a in prima parte proportionali hore continetur bis in
spacio pertransito in omnibus partibus imparibus et una vice cum dimidio
continetur in spacio pertransito in omnibus partibus paribus, ergo ter cum
dimidio continetur in spacio pertransito in omnibus partibus sive paribus sive
imparibus. Consequentia nota et assumptum patet intelligenti, et exemplariter
potest unusquisque percipere; probata est igitur consequentia. M aior vero sic
declaratur, nam tertia pars est subquadrupla ad primam et in duplo velocius
m ovebitur quam in prima, ergo in duplo minus spacium pertransibit quam in
prima; et eodem modo a in duplo minus spacium pertransibit in quinta quam
in tertia. E rg o per discursum supra factum et adiutorium secunde suppositionis
[vide supra, commentum, I I I .viti, 8-28] duplum spacium in omnibus partibus
imparibus pertransibit ad id quod pertransibit in prima, et sic patet maior.
M inor vero ostenditur, nam motus a in secunda parte proportionali, ut com­
muniter tenetur, correspondet gradui in sexquialtero intensiori quam sit motus
prime partis proportionalis. Si ergo tantum duraret secunda pars quantum
prima, a pertransiret in illa sexquialterum spacium ad id quod pertransiret in
prima. Cum ergo in duplo minus in casu durabit, sequitur quod in secunda
parte pertransibit medietatem sexquialteri spacii ad id quod pertransibitur in
prima. Sed in quarta parte proportionali in duplo velocius m ovebitur quam in
secunda, quia quilibet gradus in quarta erit duplus ad gradum sibi correspon-
dentem in secunda, ut patet, et eadem quarta est subquadrupla ad secundam,
ergo in duplo minus pertransibit in quarta quam in secunda, et in duplo minus
in sexta quam in quarta eadem ratione, et sic arguendum est de aliis partibus
paribus. E rgo per discursum supra factum et adiutorium secunde suppositio­
nis spacium pertransitum in omnibus partibus paribus erit precise duplum ad
spacium pertransitum in secunda parte proportionali. Sed pertransitum in
secunda erit medietas sexquialteri ad spacium pertransitum in prim a; ergo il­
lud spacium quod pertransibit a in omnibus partibus paribus erit precise sex­
quialterum ad spacium pertransitum in prima parte proportionali. E t ista fuit
minor probanda; et sic tota conclusio patet.”
This series was also applied to velocities by A . Thomas, Liber de triplici
motu, Tract. II, Chap. 3, Concl. 9 (1509 ed., sig. q 3V, c. 2— q 4r, c. 1):
“ E x hac conclusione sequitur primo quod partita hora per partes propor­
tionales proportione dupla, et in prima illarum mobile moveatur aliquanta
velocitate uniformi, et in secunda moveatur uniformiter intendendo motum
suum a gradu quo m ovetur in prima usque ad gradum duplum, et in tertia
moveatur illo gradu duplo uniformiter, et in quarta intendat uniformiter
motum suum ab illo gradu duplo usque ad gradum duplum illius, ita quod in-
omnibus partibus imparibus moveatur uniformiter continuo in duplo velo
Commentary to III.x 515
cius in sequenti impari quam immediate precedenti impari, et in qualibet parte
pari moveatur intendendo motum suum uniformiter a gradu partis imparis
immediate precedentis usque ad gradum partis imparis (corr. ex paris) imme­
diate sequentis, ita quod velocitates partium imparium reducte ad uniformi­
tatem etiam si habeant continuo in proportione dupla, tunc spacium totale
pertransitum in hora se habebit in proportione tripla sexquialtera ad spacium
pertransitum in prima parte proportionali impari. Probatur correlarium, et in
prima parte proportionali pertranseat illud m obile unum pedale et arguitur
sic. In omnibus partibus tam paribus quam imparibus pertransit illud mobile
tria pedalia cum dim idio; sed trium pedalium cum dimidio ad unum pedale
est proportio tripla sexquialtera, igitur correlarium verum. A rguitur maior,
quia in prima parte impari pertransit unum pedale et spacia pertransita in om ­
nibus partibus imparibus continuo se habent in proportione dupla quoniam
velocitates continuo se habent in proportione dupla et tempora in quadrupla,
et sic totale spacium pertransitum in omnibus partibus imparibus erit duplum
ad spacium pertransitum in prima illarum, ut patet ex septima conclusione;
ergo per consequens totale spacium pertransitum in omnibus erit bipedale.
E t spacium pertransitum in omnibus paribus est pedale cum dimidio, quod
probatur sic: quia continuo velocitatis partis paris ad velocitatem partis im­
paris immediate precendentis est proportio sexquialtera (cum velocitas illius
partis paris correspondeat gradui medio inter gradum velocitatis illius partis
imparis immediate precedentis et gradum duplum) et semper gradus medius
inter duplum et subduplum est sexquialterus ( /) ad subduplum, ut constat; igitur
talis gradus medius erit sexquialterus ad gradum partis imparis immediate
precedentis; igitur spacium pertransitum in prima parte proportionali impari
se habet ad spacium pertransitum in prima parte proportionali pari in pro­
portione sexquitertia, ut patet ex sexta propositione secundi notabilis; sed
subsexquitertium ad pedale sunt tres quarte et in omnibus sequentibus parti­
bus pertransit tantum; igitur in omnibus simul pertransibit sex quartas que
faciunt pedale cum dim idio; et in imparibus pertransibit bipedale; igitur in
omnibus partibus simul paribus et imparibus pertransibit tria pedalia cum di­
midio, quod fuit probandum. Restat tamen probare quod in omnibus parti­
bus paribus sequentibus primam tantum pertransit sicut in prima. Nam ille
partes pares continuo se habent in proportione quadrupla et velocitates con­
tinue se habent in proportione dupla ascendendo, ut patet ex casu correlarii;
ergo totale spacium pertransitum in omnibus paribus est duplum ad spacium
pertransitum in prima illarum et sic illud spacium est 6 quarte. Consequentia
patet ex septima conclusione, hoc addito quod proportio temporum (corr. ex
temporis) excedit proportionem velocitatum per proportionem duplam, et
totum divisum per partes proportionales proportione dupla est duplum ad
primam illarum.” (I have altered the punctuation somewhat.) Except for the
absence o f any use o f the configuration doctrine, the p ro o f o f Thomas is al-
 5i6 D e configurationibus qualitatum et motuum Commentary to III.xi-III.xiii 517

most identical w ith that o f Oresme. But I suspect that it was T orn i’s proof I ll.x iii
that served as Thom as’ point o f departure.
27 “ Q u a lita s....extense.” — The intent o f this argument is clear. W e have a
finite quantity o f quality that is divided into proportional parts. T he first part
I ll .x i is put into a central sphere. T he second part is put into a sphere-like shell that
is wrapped around the first sphere and the volum e o f the shell is equal to the
3-22 “ Resum atur....pertransiret.” — In this chapter w e are confronted w ith pre­
volum e o f the sphere, and hence the intensity o f the quality must be decreased
cisely the same series as in Ill.v iii. T he only difference is that instead o f the
to one half since half as much has to occupy the same volum e. The remaining
intensity proceeding to infinity as the extension is proportionally divided, we
proportional parts o f the quality are put into succeeding shells, each o f the
have here the extension proceeding to infinity as the intensity is proportional­
same volum e. Hence, the shells and sphere produce an infinite body but their
ly decreased. B y putting the tw o chapters together w e see that Oresm e’s
total quality is finite. Further, there is some portion o f that finite quality in
rudimentary coordinate idea apparently assumed that either coordinate could
every part o f the infinite body. A s M urdoch has noted in Scripta Mathematica,
be projected indefinitely, an important consideration in establishing a useful
V o l. 27 (1964), 86-87, Oresme more than once used sphere-wrapping argu­
coordinate system.
ments. He used them in the Questions on the Physics (Bk. I ll, Quest. 12, M S
Seville, Bibl. Colom b. 7.6.30, 38r; cf. text by M urdoch, 87), possibly in the
I I L x ii Questions on the Geometry o f Euclid, Quest. 4(ed. o f Busard, 10 -11; cf. M urdoch,
87), and in the Livre du del et du monde, fols. 5 5b-5 5d(ed. o f Menut [1968], 234-
5-19 “ E t . . . . pedali.” — The intent o f this transformation is clear enough. Oresme
36); for other citations, see M urdoch, 87.
is merely showing that the cylinder tends to become o f infinite radius as the
depth is proportionally decreased.
28-30 “ in ... loquatur” — It w ill be noticed that I have rejected the reading o f
manuscripts B V F P C in favor o f that o f L A N S G . I have done so because
Oresme’s argument demands the latter reading. In the rejected reading the
infinite line is drawn from B and so is infinite in one direction only. I f this
were the line, one could conceive o f the divergence o f the summit line and the
subject line as increasing indefinitely, and so one could have a uniformly dif-
form quality o f such an infinite line, and this w ould be in flat contradiction to
what Oresme is saying. But in the preferred reading, the line is said to be
drawn through B infinitely in both directions. Being a straight line, and the
summit line o f its intensities also being a straight line, and both lines not being
parallel since this is a case o f uniformly difform, it is obvious that the tw o lines
w ould indeed meet on one side or the other before being infinitely extended
and from that point on the quality w ould not be uniformly difform, at least in
the same fashion as it was before that point. For this reason, no simple uni­
form ly difform quality o f such an infinite line is conceivable, and this is what
Oresme holds.
37-41 “ Item — partis.” — Cf. the Commentary, I.i, lines 7-9 an dIIL iv, lines 34-43.
N otice that this example, used to cast doubt on the existence o f points, lines,
and surfaces, does not appear in Oresme’s extended treatment o f the problem
in his Questiones de spera, Quest. 1 . 1 presume that this case occurred to him on
reconsidering the question.
Appendixes
 A PPE N D IX I

T h e Questions
on the Geometry o f Euclid
b y N ic o le O r e s m e

I have already discussed in Introduction I and II the importance for the develop­
ment o f Oresm e’s configuration doctrine o f his Questions on the Geometry o f Euclid. I
have suggested that this w ork constituted the first lengthy exposition o f the doc­
trine, but that it was relatively immature, as illustrated particularly by Oresm e’s
inability to apply the suitability concept to a quality imagined by a semicircle. His
acceptance o f the uniqueness o f the semicircle to represent such a quality led him to
a series o f remarkable conclusions in Questions 1 1 and 14, not the least o f which
were those holding the equality, in a certain fashion, o f an intensity with a partic­
ular determinate line and the similar equality o f some motion o f alteration with
some local m otion— both conclusions that were certainly startling and unaccept­
able to medieval natural philosophy. A ll o f this disappeared by the time that Oresme
composed the D e configurationibus, for by this time he was able to conceive o f other
figures whose altitudes (i.e., ordinates) were in the same ratios as those o f the
semicircle. Hence the semicircle lost its privileged position, and with the abandon­
ment o f its uniqueness came the abandonment o f all the conclusions dependent
upon it. Another sign o f the immaturity o f the earlier w ork is its brief attention to
the variation in extension lines parallel to the base line. This early concern, though
admittedly only briefly presented in the Questiones, would serve no useful purpose
in the analysis o f qualities or motions. Hence, it is not surprising to find that it has
completely disappeared in the D e configurationibus.
I also pointed out in Introduction II the remarkable originality o f the treat­
ment o f uniformly difform qualities in the Questiones, some o f which did not carry
over into the longer w ork. In the Questiones, Oresme suggested that the rule which
equated uniformly difform qualities with qualities uniform at their mean or middle
degrees was capable o f a p roof by means o f surfaces, the p roof o f which he later
incorporated in the D e configurationibus and which remarkably resembles G alileo’s
first theorem in the Third D ay o f his Discorsi. M oreover he offered tw o further
forms o f the uniformly difform rule, forms that are similar to the second theorem
521
 522 Appendix I
and its corollary in G alileo’s Discorsi (see Introduction II.A , above). I have stated
that the coincidence is notable, but I remark once more that I have not been able to
find any further evidence that Galileo had read either o f Oresm e’s works.
A lso discussed in Introduction II was the dating o f the Questiones. Suffice it to
say here that I believe it to date from the late 1340’s, and almost certainly from
before 1351. It shows some evidence o f acquaintance with the M erton College
authors, at least w ith their rules concerning uniform, uniformly difform, and dif-
form ly difform qualities and motions.
I have given below a new text o f those parts o f the Questiones that seemed
particularly important for the configuration doctrine, namely Questions 10-14 and
the first part o f Question 15. A lthough the doctrine is further employed in the
remaining part o f Question 15 and Questions 16 and 17, nothing new that is
essential to the doctrine appears in these further discussions. I felt the need to
prepare a new text, in spite o f Busard’s recent text o f the w hole w ork, partly be­
cause I disagree w ith some o f his readings and reconstructions, but mainly because
o f the discovery b y G u y Beaujouan o f a new manuscript (MS s, see Sigla) that
provides further assistance to a sounder reading o f a few o f the difficult passages.
I have also included an English translation and explanatory notes that seek to
relate the text to the D e configurationibus and to identify Oresm e’s sources. Inciden­
tally, there is some evidence that the section beginning with Question 1 o and devot­
ed to the configuration doctrine was considered by Oresme as an independent
section. Tw ice he refers to Question 10 as the prima questio (see Question 12, line 40
and Question 13, line 57) and there is a reference to Question 11 as the secunda
questio (Question 13, line 59). Perhaps Oresme originally divided, or intended to
divide, the w o rk into books.
In regard to the manuscripts, there is little doubt that c remains the best o f the
three. But even c must be abandoned in favor o f s and/or v in some places. For
example, in Question 10, line 16, the phrase distantes.. .proportionem added by c has
no relevance in this place; in the same question, line 22, r’s reading o f istos instead
o f the correct isto modo makes no sense; in line 27, secundum generis instead o f secun­
dum gradus is patently incorrect; in line 38, c has omitted proprie, which clearly be­
longs there; in line 41, c omits linee which is certainly demanded there. This list can
be easily extended b y consulting the variant readings, which include all o f the
instances in w hich the reading o f c has been abandoned. Manuscript j is a fair copy
and I have often had to depend on it alone, as in the case already cited for line 27 o f
secundumgradus. A gain, attention by the reader to the variant readings will reveal the
dependence on s. One peculiarity o f s is the profusion o f double consonants. In
almost all cases where the words are written out, we find, among others: simillis,
equallis, bassis, quellibet, aliius, uniformis, extenssio, supperjficies, diccimus, vellocitas,
dimenssio, alliquando, alliqualiter,facilliter, quadrangulius, triangulius, and so on. I have
made no effort to include these double consonants as variants, except where s has
a w holly different phrase and then I have included the spelling o f s as it stands.
Questions on the Geometry o f E u clid 523
M ost o f the time, I have omitted the doubled consonant when I group s’ s other­
wise identical reading w ith c or v. N or have I doubled the consonants when con­
ventional abbreviations appear in s, although no doubt the scribe intended double
consonants as in the cases when the words are written out. Manuscript v is by far
the most wretched o f the three manuscripts: case endings are often carelessly
w rong, subjects occasionally do not agree w ith predicates, a host o f nonsense
words is produced (like lunem instead o f lineam in Question 10, line 11). In order not
to clutter the variant readings with this plethora o f bad readings, I have given them
completely only for the first twenty-five lines o f Question 10. 1 hasten to add, how ­
ever, that v was originally fully collated w ith c and s, and all o f its readings where s
and c disagree are still to be found among the variants, plus a number o f other
interesting cases. In those variants the reader w ill notice a multitude o f fantastic
readings. There are some rare occasions when v is to be preferred to cand/or s, as in
Question 10, line 9: materia instead o f mechanica; same question, line 38: the addi­
tion o f proprie', and so on. In general, however, I have not accepted v’ s readings
against c unless they agree w ith s and make obvious sense, c being clearly w rong.
A final w ord ought to be said about orthography. I have adopted from s and v
the spellings o f intensio and extensio (although to be sure they appear as intenssio and
extenssio in s). Manuscript c usually has intendo or sometimes intentio. I am sure that
the added clarity achieved by this step justifies it. I have taken the spelling sicud
from c and s instead o f v’ s sicut. I have also adopted, for the convenience o f the
reader, s’ s practice o f w riting “ ti” before vow els instead o f “ ci” as found in c, al­
though I admit the w riting o f “ ci” was more common in Oresme’s time.
Manuscript v is w ithout diagrams. Thus I have used the diagrams in c and s,
clearly labelling their source. O n occasion, I have had to reconstruct or add dia­
grams. A gain, as in the main text, I have been careful to indicate which are my
additions.
Incidentally, the questions are not numbered in any o f the three manuscripts.
T h ey are the eighth through the thirteenth in c, the tenth through the fifteenth
in v, and (because o f an extra question at the beginning) the eleventh through
the sixteenth in s. I have preferred the order in v only because there is some
confusion in the leaves in c and the extra question in s may very w ell not have been
Oresm e’s.
Sigla of Manuscripts
and Edition
c = Vatican, Chigi F.IV.66, end o f 14c or beginning o f 15 c, 22V~4or (for whole
w o rk ); 27^-3 ir (for this section).
v = Vat. lat. 2225, 15c, 9or~98v (for w hole w ork); 93V-96V (for this section). It
 524 Appendix I

was on the basis o f examining this manuscript that Dana Durand first called
attention to the significance o f the. Questiones for the development o f the config­
uration doctrine, in Speculum, V o l. 16 (1941), 173-74.
s = Seville, Bibl. Colom b. 7.7.13, 15c, io 2 v -i2 r (for whole w ork); io6v~9r (for
this section). See G . Beaujouan, in Proceedings o f the Tenth International Congress o f
the History o f Science, V o l. 1 (Paris, 1964), 633.
E d (1) = H. L. L. Busard, ed., N icole Oresme, Quaestiones super geometriam Euclidis
(Leiden, 1961), 25-42. C f review by John M urdoch, Scripta Mathematica, V ol.
27^964), 67-91.
 Questiones super geometriam Questions on
Euclidis per Magistrum the Geometry of Euclid by
Nicholaum Oresme Master Nicholas Oresme1

( Q u e s tio io> Question io

27r, c. i Consequenter queritur utrum aliqua superficies quadrangula sit unifor­
miter difformis in altitudine.
Arguitur quod non, quia nulla altitudo est uniformis difformiter, igitur
nulla altitudo est difformis uniformiter. Consequentia tenet per simile. A n-
5 tecedens patet, quia in eo quod est uniforme vel equale nulla est difformitas
sive inequalitas.
Oppositum arguitur: aliqua est altitudo uniformis, igitur aliqua est uni­
formiter difformis.
Primo videndum est de quesito, z° applicandum est ad materiam dictam
io de qualitatibus mediis.
D e prim o sciendum est quod altitudo superficiei attenditur penes lineam
perpendicularem super basim recte iacentem, ut posset patere in figura
[Fig. i]. Notandum z° quod superficies dicitur uniformiter et equaliter alta
Consequently it is sought whether some quadrangular surface is uniformly difform
in altitude.
It is argued in the negative: for no altitude is difformly uniform, therefore no al­
titude is uniformly difform. The consequence holds by analogy. The antecedent is
evident, for in that which is uniform or equal there is no difformity or inequality.
The opposite is argued: there is some uniform altitude, therefore there is some
uniformly difform altitude.
In the first place w e must consider the question under inquiry. Then secondly
w e must apply it to the matter as concerned with mean qualities.
In connection w ith the first, it is to be know n that the altitude o f a surface is
measured by a perpendicular line lying directly upon the base, as can be evident in
a figure [see Fig. 1]. Secondly, it is to be noted that a surface is said to be uniformly

Questio 10
1 quadrangulis v
2 altitudine c latitudine sv
3 Arguitur cv arguo s / altitudo c latitudo s
alteratio v / uniformis difformiter <runiffor-
miter difformis s uniformis v
4 nulla...uniformiter c nulla est difformis s
nullam latam v
5 quod: in quocunque v / uniforme vel equale
c equalle et uniforme s uniformiter vel
equale v
6 sive c vel v seu s
7 arguitur v om. s arguetur c (vide alteras
quaestiones) / post arguitur add. v quia / ali­
qua est c tr. v quia est aliqua s / altitudo
uniformis c latitudo unifformiter difformis
s alterius uniformiter difformis v
7-8 igitur... difformis cv ergo s
8 post difformis add. v in hac genere
9 Primo cv primo ergo s j de sv de in c
9-10 2 °... mediis om .s
9 applicandum est ad c applicando v / ma­
teriam v mechanicam c
9-10 dictam... mediis om. v In c here and in s on f. 107, c. In c here and in s on f. 107, c. 2 In s on f. i o j r , c. 2 and labelled
9 dictam corr. E d ( i ) e x deinde in c 2 and labelled there uniformiter and labelled there uniformiter difformiter difformis.
I o de corr. E d ( 1 ) e x de qua in c unifformis. difformis.
II D e primo c om. s quantum ad propositum
v / est v om. cs / lineam: lunem (!) v
12 posset patere cv patet s
13 Notandum 20 c z° notandum est v z°
1 The full title o f the work as given by laum Oresme Probum Philosophum et solem-
scienddum s I uniformiter et equaliter c
Busard in his edition is: “ Quaestiones super nem disputate Parisius.”
equaliter et uniformiter s mu et equaliter v /
alta sv alia c geometriam Euclidis per Magistrum Nicho-
 528 Appendix I Questions on the Geometry o f E u c lid : Question 10 529

quando omnes linee penes quas attenditur altitudo sunt equales, et dicitur and equally high when all the lines by which the altitude is measured are equal; it
i5 alta difformiter quando sunt inequales et attingunt ad lineam non eque is said to be difformly high when they are unequal and they rise to a line which is
distantem basi. Notandum 30 quod altitudo dicitur uniformiter difformis not parallel to the base. Thirdly, it is to be noted that an altitude is said to be uni­
quando quelibet tres linee vel plures equaliter distantes inter se excedunt form ly difform when any three or more o f the lines which are at equal distances
secundum proportionem arismeticam, hoc est, ita quod quanta una excedat apart exceed one another according to arithmetic proportion, i.e., by the amount
alteram tanta alia immediate etiam excedat alteram [Fig. 2]; ex quo patet that one line exceeds the second, so the second exceeds the third [see Fig. 2]. From
20 quod altissima linea que transit per istas est recta non eque distans basi. this it is evident that the upper line limiting them [i.e., the perpendiculars] is a
Notandum 40quod altitudo dicitur difformiter difformis quando linee se non straight line not parallel to the base. Fourthly, it is to be noted that an altitude is
excedunt isto modo et tunc linea transiens per summitates earum non est said to be difformly difform when the [perpendicular] lines do not exceed one an­
recta [Fig. 3]. E t secundum variationem talis linee variatur difformitas in other in this m anner; and in such a case the line crossing through their summits is
altitudine. not a straight line [see Fig. 3]. A n d the difformity in altitude varies according to the
25 Quantum ad secundum principale, scilicet de mathematica media que est variation o f such a [summit] line.
in qualitatibus et velocitatibus, notandum est primo quod in qualitate A s for the second part, namely the mathematical mean which is in qualities and
ymaginantur duo, scilicet intensio secundum gradus et extensio per subiec- velocities, it is to be noted firstly that in quality tw o things are to be imagined,
tum, et ideo talis qualitas ymaginatur habere duas dimensiones. Propter hoc namely intensity according to degrees and extension through the subject; and
aliquando dicimus quod habet latitudinem intelligendo intensionem acsi per therefore such a quality is imagined to have tw o dimensions.2 A ccordin gly w e
30 longitudinem intelligeremus extensionem. [Quare omnis latitudo presup- sometimes say that it has “ latitude,” understanding by this, “ intensity,” on the
ponit longitudinem.] Notandum 20 quod qualitas potest ymaginari in ground that w e understand its “ extension” by the term “ longitude.” [Hence
puncto, vel in subiecto indivisibili sicud in anima; potest etiam ymaginari in every latitude presupposes longitude.]3 Secondly it is to be noted that a quality can
2 linea atque / etiam in superficie et in corpore. be imagined to reside in a point, or in an indivisible subject like a soul. It can also
Sit ergo prima conclusio quod qualitas puncti sive subiecti indivisibilis be imagined to be in a line, as w ell as in a surface or in a body.
35 ymaginanda est sicud una linea, quia ipsa non habet nisi unam dimensionem, 1. Hence let this be the first conclusion, that the quality o f a point or an indivis­
scilicet intensionem. E x quo sequitur quod talis qualitas, sicud scientia vel ible subject is to be imagined as a line, for it has only one dimension, namely
virtus, non debet dici uniformis neque difformis sicud linea non dicitur intensity. From this it follow s that such a quality, like know ledge or virtue, ought
uniformis nec difformis proprie. Sequitur etiam quod improprie dictum est not to be described as either “ uniform ” or “ difform,” just as a line is not properly
latitudo scientie vel virtutis, cum non sit ibi aliqua longitudo ymaginanda et said to be “ uniform ” or “ difform.” It follow s also that one speaks improperly o f a
40 omnis latitudo presupponit longitudinem. latitude o f knowledge or virtue since no longitude is to be imagined there and
Secunda conclusio est quod qualitas linee ymaginanda est sicud super- every latitude presupposes longitude.
2. The second conclusion is that the quality o f a line is to be imagined as a sur-
14 dicuntur v 22 isto modo sv istos c j earum: istarum v
15 difformiter: diffinitione v / quando sv 22-23 est__ E t om.v
quoniam c / et cv ut s 23 E t c om. sv / difformiter v
16 distantem s, ?v distantes ea inter se exce­ 25 Quantum... principale c in 20 (?) articulo
dunt secundum proportionem c / Notan­ s in secundo quantum v / scilicet de cs ad v / 3 The bracketed phrase added from s seems
2 This description o f qualities as having two
dum 30 c tr.sv j altitudo: alter v / uniformi­ mathematica c mota v methca s / post est scr. to complete the thought o f the preceding
dimensions should be compared with Ores-
ter: numerus v et dei. s quelibet phrase, but it may have crept in here from its
me’s brief statement in th e Questiones super libros
17 se bis s 26 in qualitate cv om. s clearly genuine place in line 40.
de generatione et corruptione quoted above in
18 arismetica v / hoc est v realiter c inequali- 27 secundum gradus et s secundum generis Introduction II.A, fn. 18.
ter s (?) c et v I extensionem c
18-19 h a . . . alteram com. sv 28 talis qualitas sv tr. c
19 q u o:hoc v 32 in1 om. c / indivisibili cv divisibili s / in3om. v 38 proprie v om. c alliqualiter s I est v supra, c
29 dicimus c dicitur v diccemus s
21 Notandum 40 c ultimo notandum v iterum 33 atque c ac v s / etiam in s om. v etiam c om. s
30 intelligeremus c intelligo (?) s intelligemus
notandum r / difformiter cv om. s 34 sive c seu r sunt v 39 virtutis cv latitudo virtutis s
v
2 1-2 2 se non excedunt c excedunt non s non se 35 quia cv quare s / non cv om .s 41 linee sv om. c / ymaginanda est cv ymaginan-
30-31 [Quare... longitudinem] s om. cv
excedunt v 31 Notandum 20 c tr. sv 37 debet sv debent c / neque c nec v et sic s de s
 53° Appendix I Q uestions on the Geometry o f E u clid : Q uestion 10 53 1

ficies cuius longitudo est extensio subiecti rectilinea et latitudo est ipsa in­
face whose longitude is the rectilinear extension o f the subject and whose latitude
tensio, que ymaginatur per lineas perpendiculares super lineam que est subiec- is its intensity w hich is imagined by lines perpendicular to the line w hich is the
tum.
subject.
45 Tertia conclusio est quod per consimilem ymaginationem qualitas super­
3. T he third conclusion is that the quality o f a surface is to be imagined, using a
ficiei est ymaginanda ad modum corporis cuius longitudo et latitudo est
similar imagery, b y means o f a body whose longitude and latitude constitute the
extensio superficiei et profunditas est intensio eius qualitatis. E t pari ratione
extension o f the subject and whose depth is the intensity o f the quality. A nd by like
qualitas totius corporis ymaginanda esset sicud unum corpus cuius longi­
reasoning the quality o f a whole body w ould have to be imagined as a body whose
tudo et latitudo esset extensio totius corporis et profunditas eius intensio.
longitude and latitude w ould be the extent o f the whole body and the depth its
50 Sed dubitaret aliquis: si qualitas puncti ymaginatur ut linea, qualitas linee ut
intensity.4 But someone may raise a d ou b t: if the quality o f a point is imagined as a
superficies, et superficiei ut corpus habens tres dimensiones, ergo qualitas
line, the quality o f a line as a surface, and that o f a surface as a body having three
corporis ymaginabitur habere quattuor dimensiones et in alio genere quanti­
dimensions, therefore the quality o f a body w ill be imagined to have four dimensions
tatis. D ico quod non oportet, quia sicud punctus fluens ymaginative causat
and be in another genus o f quantity. I answer that such is not necessary, for just as a
lineam, linea superficiem, superficies corpus, non oportet, si corpus ymagi-
flow ing point imaginatively produces a line, a line a surface, a surface a body, so if
55 naretur fluere, quod causet quartum genus quantitatis sed solum corpus, et
a body were imagined to flow it is not necessary for it to produce a fourth kind o f
propter hoc dicit Aristoteles primo celi quod ex hoc, scilicet ex corpore, non
quantity but in fact only a body. A n d it is on this account that Aristotle says in the
fit transitus in aliud genus quantitatis per illum modum ymaginandi, et ita
first b ook o f the On the Heaven5 that from this, i.e., from a body, no passage to an­
dicendum est in proposito. Dicendum est ergo de qualitate ipsius linee et
other genus o f quantity takes place by this method o f imagining. One ought to
proportionaliter dicendum de qualitate superficiei vel corporis.
speak similarly in the matter at hand. Hence one ought to speak [thus] o f the quali­
60 E t est quarta conclusio quod qualitas linearis uniformis ymaginanda est
ty o f this line and similarly o f the quality o f a surface and o f a body.
sicud superficies quadrangula rectangula uniformiter alta, ita quod extensio
4. T he fourth conclusion is that a uniform linear quality is to be imagined by a
rectangle that is uniform ly high, so that the extension is imagined by the base6 and
4 Cf. D e configurationibus, I.iv, where this is est manifestum ex praemissis, scilicet quod non
treated much more clearly. Here in the Ques­ fit transitus a corpore in aliud genus magni­
tiones he seems to say that the volume o f the tudinis, sicut fit transitus ex longitudine in
subject can somehow be reduced to the longi­ superficiem, et ex superficie in corpus. E t uti­
tude and latitude o f the imaginative body used tur modo loquendi quo utuntur geometrae,
to represent the quality of the original body, imaginantes quod punctus motus facit lineam,
thus leaving the depth o f the imaginative body linea vero mota facit superficiem, superficies
42 ante longitudo scr. et dei. c latitudo / subie­ 52 et s om. cv
to represent intensity. In the D e configurationi­ autem corpus. A corpore autem non fit transi­
cti ... et c sub qua s sub materia et v 52-53 quantitatis s corporeitatis v qualitatis
bus, it is clear that each o f the infinite parallel tus ad aliam magnitudinem: quia talis exitus,
43-44 post subiectum add. s ut hic (?)c planes making up the body can be imagined to sive processus, ad aliud genus magnitudinis,
43 conclusio sv om. c / consimilem c eandem v 53 Dico c et respondeo s respondeo v
have a body erected on it, so that we have a est secundum defectum eius a quo transitur
eandem vel consimilem s 53 fluens cvom .s
forest o f interlacing bodies that represent the (unde etiam motus naturalis est actus imper­
46 est1 cv om. s j ad modum bis s 54-55 ymaginaretur c ymaginatur s ymagie v
quantity o f the quality. Here again we see fecti). Non est autem possibile quod corpus,
47 profunditas cv profunditatis s / est c om. sv j 5 5 quartum c 4or v 3ms
evidence o f a more mature consideration o f a quod est perfecta magnitudo, deficiat secun­
eius qualitatis c qualitatis eiusdem s eius­ 56 primo cv in primo s
subject in the D e configurationibus. dum hanc rationem, quia est continuum se­
dem qualitatis v 57 genus cv ergo s / quantitatis c quantum v
5 D e caelo, Bk. I, 268a 30— b 3. In the Moer- cundum omnem modum: et ideo non potest
48 ymaginande s j esset c est sv j unum cv om. s quantitas s / ymaginandi cv ymaginanda s
beke translation accompanying Thomas Aqui­ fieri transitus a corpore in aliud genus magni­
49 esset c est sv / totius: eiusdem s / et profun­ 58 est1 sv om. c / ipsius linee c illius linee v yma-
nas’ E xp ositio (Turin, Rome, 1952), 8, Text tudinis.”
ditas v sive c et profunditatis s ginata in linea s
No. 4, the passage reads: “ Sed illud quidem 6 In Introduction II, I have already remarked
50 si cs utrum v / puncti... qualitas s om. cv / 59 dicendum (?)v dicendum erit s considera­
palam, quoniam non est in aliud genus transi­ that for Oresme the base line, as well as the
post linee add. c ymaginatur hic / post linee tur dicendum c / superficiei vel corporis c
tio, quemadmodum ex longitudine in super­ intensity line, was anymaginatio, but, o f course,
add. v ymaginatur / ut2sc ac v ipsius superficiei ac ipsius corporis s super­
ficiem, in corpus autem ex superficie: non the base line as an extension is abstracted from
51 superficiei cs superficies v / habens dei. c et ficiei ante corpis (!)v
enim adhuc talis perfecta erit magnitudo.” the extension o f the subject, while the intensity
supra scr. habere 61 rectangula cv et rectangulla s
Thomas’ commentary is even more instructive perpendicular as a line is not abstracted from
31-52 ergo... dimensiones bis c
for Oresme’s treatment {ibid., 11): “ Tertium the intensity o f the quality since intensity is
 532 Questions on the Geometry o f E u clid : Question 10 533
Appendix I

27v, c. 1 ymaginatur per basim et intensio mensuratur per lineam illi / eque distantem,
sicud patet in figura [Fig. 4], [et patet, quia sic quelibet linea que erigeretur
super lineam datam esset equalis alteri ita et punctus quilibet ibi ymaginatus
65 esset eque intensus.] Sed qualitas uniformiter difformis ymaginanda est per
unam superficiem que esset uniformiter difformiter alta, ita quod linea altitu­
dinis non esset eque distans basi, sicud patet in figura [Fig. 5], tamen esset
recta. H oc potest probari: sicud proportio punctorum in intensione esset
sicud proportio linearum perpendicularum super istos in altitudine. E t hoc
70 potest esse dupliciter sicud etiam superficies potest esse uniformiter difformis
in altitudine dupliciter. Uno modo ut [/ vel ?] talis qualitas terminetur ad non
gradum et tunc est sicud superficies uniformiter difformiter alta ad non
gradum et tunc esset sicud triangulus; vel [terminetur] utrobique ad gradum
et tunc illa esset sicud quadrangulus cuius altitudo esset linea recta non eque
75 distans basi [Fig. 6] .
the intensity is measured by a [summit] line parallel to it, as is evident in the figure
[see Fig. 4] [and it is obvious, for just as any line which w ould be erected on the
given [base] line w ould be equal to another, so any point there w ould be imagined
Fig. 4
In c and s (in s the figure is that already given
earlier with altitude lines drawn).
as equally intense]. But a quality uniformly difform is to be imagined by a surface
which w ould be uniformly difformly high, so that the line o f altitude [i.e., the sum­
mit line,] w ould not be parallel to the base, as is evident in the figure [see Fig. 5];
still it w ould be a straight line. This can be proved. The ratio in intensity o f [any]
points w ould be as the ratio in altitude o f the perpendicular lines on these points.
A n d this can be in tw o ways just as a surface uniformly difform in altitude can
exist in tw o ways. In one w ay such a quality is terminated at no degree [i.e., zero]
and then it is like a surface uniformly difformly high [terminated in one extreme] at
no degree, i.e., like a triangle. O r [it is terminated] on both sides at a degree; in
this case it is like a quadrangle whose [line of] altitude [i.e., summit line] w ould be
a straight line not parallel to the base [see Fig. 6].
5. The penultimate [conclusion] is that from this latter together w ith the afore­
said it can be proved that a quality uniformly difform is equal to the middle degree,

62 per basim c sicut basis v per bassim vel
sicud bassis s / mensuratur sv ymaginatur c
63 sicud... figura om. v
63-65 [et.. . intensus] s om. cv\ sed in lineis 64-
6j correxi equalis e x equallis et intensus ex
intenssus
6 5 post qualitas scr. et del. c per lineam
65-66 ymaginanda.. .esset om. v
6 5 ymaginanda est c esset ymaginanda s
66 difformiter alta c difformis alta v difformiter
difformis s / ita .. .altitudinis c in linea al­
titudinis ut transiens per altitudinem v ita
quod linea latitudinis vel linea longitudi­
nis s
67 sicud: sit s
67-68 tamen... recta om. c sed corr. e x cum
esset rectta in s et tcj linea in altitudine esset
recta in v
68 H oc...sicud c hoc patet quia v Probo per
partem dicente quod s / in intensione: in­
tensive s
69 proportio v om. cs / super istos om. sv sed
corr. ex super istam in c / altitudine cv lati­
tudine s essentially the same proposition in Q . 15,
71 altitudine cv latitudine s / dupliciter sv om. c q.v. ; c does have a right triangle and be­
/ u t... terminetur sv et de2 c low a confused figure which perhaps had
~jz sicud c om. s sicut v its source in a figure like this.
73 esset cv est s j [terminetur] E d ( 1 )
not essentially extended. This is why Oresme two were identical. See Introduction II.B, pp.
74 tunc illa esset c tunc esset s tunc v / altitudo
cv latitudo s / esset2sv esset sicut c often calls the base line the subject, as if the 97-98.
 534 Appendix I Questions on the Geometry o f E u c lid : Q uestion 10 535

Penultima est quod ex hoc cum precedentibus potest probari quod quali­ i.e., that it w ould be just as great in quantity as i f it were uniform at the middle de­
tas uniformiter difformis est equalis gradui medio, hoc est, esset tanta quanta gree. A nd this can be proved as for a surface [see Fig. 7].7
esset si esset uniformis gradu medio, et hoc posset probari sicud de super­ 6. The last conclusion is that a quality difformly difform is to be imagined as a
ficie [Fig. 7]. surface whose subject line w ould be the base and whose altitude [i.e., summit line,]
80 Ultima conclusio est quod qualitas difformiter difformis ymaginanda est w ould be a line w hich is neither straight nor parallel to the base. From this it is
ut superficies cuius linea que est subiectum esset basis et altitudo eius esset evident that such difformity can be imagined in almost an infinitude o f ways accor­
una linea non recta nec eque distans basi. E t ex hoc patet quod quasi infinitis ding as this line o f altitude [i.e., summit line,] can be multiply varied, as is evident
modis potest ymaginari talis difformitas secundum hoc quod ista linea alti­ in the figure [see Fig. 8].
tudinis potest multipliciter variari, ut patet in figura [Fig. 8].
85 Sed aliquis diceret: domine, non oportet sic ymaginari. D ico quod ymagi-
natio est bona, et hoc patet per Aristotelem qui ymaginatur tempus per
modum linee. Similiter in perspectiva expresse ymaginatur quod virtus
activa ymaginanda est ad modum superficierum triangularum. Iterum secun­
dum istam ymaginationem possum facilius intelligere ista que dicuntur de
90 qualitatibus uniformiter difformibus etc. E rgo dico quod ymaginatio est
bona.

F ig . 8

(a ), ( b ) , a n d (c ) a r e in s(a lo n g w i t h t h r e e r e c t a n g u la r f ig u r e s ) , (d ) is i n c( a l o n g w i t h a r e c ta n g u la r

fig u r e ).
76 P e n u ltim a va lia p a r t i c u la c a lia s / q u o d . . . 84 p o t e s t . . . v a r ia r i c v a r ia tu r m u ltip lic ite r s
probari om. v / post p o t e s t add. s f a c i l l i t e r p o te s t m u ltip lic ite r c u r v a r i ( ?)v
76 - 7 7 q u a l i t a s cs q u a n t i t a s v 8 4 -9 1 u t ___ b o n a c R a tio n e s a u te m s o lu te But one m ight say: “ Master, it is not necessary for it to be so imagined.” I
7 7 - 79 d iffo r m is . . . s u p e r f ic ie : d iffo r m ite r est s u n t e tc . vSi a liq u is d ic e r e t q u o d illa y m a ­ answer that the imagination [i.e., imagery,] is a good one. This is evident by
y m a g in a n d a s ic u d q u a d r a n g u liu s , tu n c g in a tio vel non e s t n a tu r a llis v e l m u ltu m
Aristotle w ho imagines time by means o f a line. Similarly in perspective it is ex­
lin e a d y a m e tr a lis d iv id e n s q u a d r a n g u llu m r u d is , r e s p o n d e o quod ym o e s t n a tu r a llis
pressly imagined that active force is to be imagined by means o f triangular surfaces.
in d u o m e d ia fa c c it u n u m q u a d r a n g u llu m e t b o n a . U n d e q u o d lib e t c o n tin u u m y m a g i­

q u i e s t m e d ie t a s q u a d r a t i e t a lia m e d ie t a s nari p o te st secu n d u m q u a m lib e t d iv is io ­

Further, follow ing this imagination I can more easily understand those things
tr ia n g u lli q u i d iv id itu r per r e c ta m (?) est n e m s ic u d A r is t o te le s 4 0 p h y s ic o r u m y m a ­ which are said about qualities uniformly difform and so on. Therefore, I say that
e t a llia m e d ie t a s e s t q u a d r a n g u lli q u e y m a ­ g in a tu r te m p u s a d m o d u m lin e e . S im ilite r the imagination is a good one.8
g in a tu r s ic u d g r a d u s m e d iu s , e r g o e tc . s in s {dei.) p e r s p e c t i v a v ite lla s ( / V ite llo n is )

77 m e d io vm e o c / e s s e t om. v ille a c t o r y m a g in a t u r it a in t e n s io n e m l u m i­

78 g r a d u m e d io c g r a d u s p e r t o t u m in m e d io n is s ic u d s u p e r f ic ie m . S im ilite r e t ia m d i c c i t

gradu v quod v ir tu s a lic u iu s a g e n tis in te lle c tu a lis

78 - 7 9 e t . . . s u p e r f i c i e vom .c c o n tin u e habet y m a g in a r i in te n d i s ic u d

8 0 U l t i m a c o n c l u s i o e s t v u l t i m a e s t c a li a tr ia n g u liu s . C o n fir m a tu r q u ia p e r y m a g in a ­ 7 N o te th a t a corrup t proof appears in are equal to th e fo u r s m a ll tr ia n g le s o f th e

c o n c l u s i o s / q u a l i t a s s q u a n t i t a s cv / d i f f o r ­ tio n e m s e c u n d a m ( / illa m ? ) p o s s u m o m n e s m a n u s c r ip t s and is in c lu d e d in th e v a r ia n t r e c t a n g l e , a s in t h e a c c o m p a n y i n g f ig u r e .
m i t e r cvu n i f f o r m i t e r p r o p o s itio n e s q u a s a d d u c c e r e p o te r is s a l­ r e a d in g s . T h i s p r o o f w a s n o t , I b e lie v e , in th e
8 1 u t s om . c s i c u t v / s u p e r f i c i e s bis c / c u i u s c v a r e e t e tia m v e r ita te m m a n ife s ta r e e t fa c - o r ig in a l te x t, w h ic h seem s to have s a id th a t
ta n tu m ( ?)v c u m s / e s t c om . s esset v / c im u s a n te q u a m illa y m a g in a tio debeat th e p r o p o s itio n “ c a n ( i.e ., w i ll b e a b le to ) b e
s u b i e c t u m cvs o l l u m s / e s s e t 1 csom . v / supra d ic i bona et u tilis ita est q u e s tio (ergo proved as o f a s u r fa c e .” A lth o u g h th e a d d i­
b a s i s scr. cu t e t c . ?). s t io n in s appears h o p e le s s ly c o r r u p t, I b e lie v e
8 2 n e c vs n o n c / p a t e t q u o d q u a s i v q u a s i c 86 mg.ees t b o n a th a t it m e a n s t o d iv id e th e c o m b in e d tr ia n g le
p a te t q u o d s 89 ante q u e d ic u n tu r add. c q u e d ic u n t quod a n d r e c ta n g le in to fiv e e q u a l tr ia n g le s so th a t 8 T h is p a r a g r a p h h a s b e e n d is c u s s e d a b o v e
83 s e c u n d u m h o c s s e c u n d u m v h o c c delevi th e fo u r s m a ll tr ia n g le s o f th e r ig h t tr ia n g le in th e b e g in n in g o f I n t r o d u c tio n I I . A .
 536
Questions on the Geometry o f E u clid : Question 11 537
Appendix I
Q u e stio n 11
<Questio i i >
Consequently it is sought whether a linear quality is to be imagined as a surface.
Consequenter queritur utrum qualitas linearis sit ymaginanda sicud
It is argued in the negative on the ground that, because they are o f diverse
superficies.
natures, therefore there is no comparison between them. T he consequence holds by
A rguitur quod non, quia ista sunt diversarum rationum, igitur inter illa
Aristotle, in the seventh [book] o f the Physics,* and by Euclid and the Commentator
.2 non est comparatio. Consequentia tenet per Aristotelem 70 physicorum / et
[Campanus] in the fifth [book] o f this [work, the Elements].2 A lso it could then be
5 per Euclidem et commentatorem quinto huius. Item tunc posset yma.gina.ri
imagined by any surface at all, and thus by a rhom boid.3 But this is false, for then
per quamcunque superficiem et ita per unum quadrangulum oblongum, sed
the part o f the surface which w ould not be over the base w ould designate quality
hoc est falsum, quia tunc ista pars superficiei que non esset super basim
which w ould not be in the subject since the subject is imagined by the base [see
signaret qualitatem que non esset in subiecto, quia per basim ymaginatur
subiectum [Fig. 9]. Fig- 9 l-
10 Oppositum patet in precedenti questione.
Respondeo quod questio est vera et posset confirmari per perspectives,
qui ita ymaginantur de intensione luminis, sicud Utilo et Lincolniensis, et
per Aristotelem 40 physicorum qui ymaginatur tempus ad modum linee, et
per commentatorem quinto huius, ubi vult quod omne habens naturam
15 continui potest ymaginari sicud linea aut superficies aut corpus, sicud decla­
rat de proportionibus. M odo intensio qualitatis habet naturam continui
quia est divisibilis in infinitum. T he opposite is evident in the preceding question.
Tunc pono aliquas propositiones. I respond that the statement is true and could be confirmed by the writers on
Prima est quod omnium qualitatum eque intensarum vel uniformiter vel perspective like W itelo and Lincoln ,4 w ho in this manner imagine the intensity o f
20 equivalenter est proportio sicud suorum subiectorum, sicud diceremus quod light, and by Aristotle, w ho, in the fourth [book] o f the Physics5 imagines time by
superficierum eque altarum est proportio sicud suarum longitudinum; et means o f a line, and by the Commentator [Campanus] in the fifth [book] o f this
[work, the Elements,]6 where he holds, in expounding ratios, that everything hav­
ing the nature o f a continuum can be imagined as a line, surface, or body. N o w in­
tensity o f a quality has the nature o f a continuum since it is divisible to infinity.
Then I pose some propositions.
Questio 11 m a g in a t {?)v / U t i l o v u l t i m o c e t i a m u l t i ­ 1. The first is that the ratio o f all [uniform] qualities, equally, uniformly, or
3 post r a t i o n u m add. s u t n o t u m e s t / i l l a : e a s m o s equivalently intended, is as the ratio o f their subjects, just as w e w ould say that the
4 t e n e t sv p a t e t c / p e r A r i s t o t e l e m 7 0 vs A ° 1 3 q u i tr. s ante 4 0 ratio o f [rectangular] surfaces o f equal altitude is as their lengths.7 A n d so I say,
V)c 1 4 q u i n t o csp r i m o v / suprah u i u s scr. ce l e m e n ­
5 - 6 p e r . . . s u p e r f ic ie m : p r o s u p e r fic ie v t o r u m / u b i com . vq u i s Question 11 lu m o b lo n g u m .” O n e w o u l d e x p e c t r a th e r “ p e r

1 The r e fe r e n c e is t o th e d is c u s s io n o f th e unum s im ile m a lm u a in ” or “ per un u m rh om -

5 supra h u i u s scr. c e l e m e n t o r u m 15 s ic u d 2 : u t s
c o m p a r is o n o f d iffe r e n t k in d s o f m o t io n in B k . b o id e m ,” s in c e i t is q u i t e e v i d e n t t h a t t h e o b ­
6 q u a d r a n g u lu m corr. ex q u a d r u p l u m c 1 5 - 1 6 d e c l a r a t c d e c l a r a t u r v d e t e r m i n a t u r
V II, Ch. 4 (s e e p a r tic u la r ly 248a 1 0 -1 8 and je c to r has a r h o m b o id in m in d , as th e next
a l o m lum v v e l p e r u n u m q u a d r a n g u l l u m s (?)v
2 4 9 a 8 -2 0 ). T h e m e d ie v a l L a t in tr a n s la tio n s o f s e n te n c e c le a r ly s h o w s .
6 - 7 s e d . . . f a l s u m cs q u o d e s t s i m i l i u m ( !)v 1 6 h a b e n t c / c o n t i n u i s c o n t i n e r i cv
th e s e p a s s a g e s h a v e b e e n g iv e n a n d d is c u s s e d 4 T h i s p a s s a g e is d is c u s s e d in I n t r o d u c t i o n
8 s i g n a r e t csf i g u r a v 1 7 q u i a cv e o q u o d s / d i v i s i b i l i s : d i f f i 0 (?)v
9 post s u b i e c t u m add. s u t d i c t u m
in The Science of Mechanics, 1 7 9 - 8 1 . N o t ic e th e I I . A . F o r th e r e fe r e n c e s t o W it e lo a n d G r o s s e ­
18 p o n o a liq u a s : p o n u n t u r a liq u e v
ph rase: “ I d e fin e th e ‘ s a m e ’ as th a t in w h ic h te s te , se e p a r tic u la r ly fn . 5 o f th a t s e c tio n .
I o p r e c e d e n t i ca l i a sv 1 9 est cvom.s
t h e r e is n o d i v e r s i t y in s p e c ie s o r in m o t i o n . . . ” Ibid., f n s .
5 3 -4 .
I I R e s p o n d e o v r e s p o n s u m (?)c r e s p o n d e t u r 2 0 e q u i v a l e n t e r c e q u a l i t e r sv / d i c e r e m u s cv
( M e d . T e x t n o . 30 : “ e t d ic o id e m illu d in q u o 6 Ibid., f n . 6 w h e r e t h e p a s s a g e is g i v e n in
s I q u e s t i o v q u o cc o n c l u s i o s / e t cs c u m v / d ic c e tu r s

p e r p e r s p e c tiv e s q u i c p e r a u c to re m p e r-
non e st d iv e r s ita s in s p e c ie n e q u e in m o t u ” ). toto.
2 1 a l t a r u m cs l a t a r u m v e l a l t e r a r u m v / e s t cs
2 See Bk. V , D e f. 3 (te x t g iv e n above in 7 B o t h th is a n d th e n e x t p r o p o s it io n s h o u ld
s p e c tiv o r u m q u i sa u c to r ita te p e r s p e c tiv a ­ om. v / p r o p o r t i o vs p r o p o s i t i o ( ?)c / s i c u d
ru m q u e v
I n t r o d u c t i o n I I . A , f n . 6 ). be com pared w ith t h e r u le s g iv e n in th e De
s u a r u m svom .c
3 T h e a u th o r u ses “ per unum qu ad ran gu­ configurationibus, I I I . v -I I I .v i.
1 2 i t a c om . sv/ y m a g i n a n t u r cy m a g i n a t u r si m -
 538 Appendix I Q uestions on the Geometry o f E u clid : Question 11 539

ita dico econtrario quod, si subiecta sint equalia, proportio qualitatum est contrariwise, that if the subjects are equal, the ratio o f the qualities is as that o f
sicud suarum intensionum. their intensities.
Secunda propositio est quod, si proportio suorum subiectorum sit sicud 2. The second proposition is that, if the ratio o f their subjects is inversely as
25 proportio intensionum econtrario, qualitates sunt equales. Verbi gratia: si a the ratio o f their intensities, then the qualities are equal [in quantity]. For example,
subiectum sit duplum ad b et econtrario qualitas in b sit duplo intensior quam if subject a is double subject b, and contrariwise the quality in b is twice as intense
in a, dico quod sunt equales. Similiter dico quod, si subiecta sint inequalia et as that in a, I say that they are equal. Similarly I say that if the subjects are unequal
proportio intensionum sit sicud subiectorum eodem ordine, est proportio and i f the ratio o f the intensities is directly proportional to that o f the subjects,
qualitatum sicud subiectorum duplicata. Verbi gratia: si a subiectum sit then the ratio o f the qualities [in quantity] is as the square o f the ratio o f the sub­
30 duplum ad b et qualitas sit in duplo magis intensa in a quam in b, qualitas jects. For example, if subject a is double subject b and the quality is twice as intense
ipsius a erit quadrupla ad qualitatem ipsius b. H oc posset declarari eo modo in a as in b, then the quality o f a w ill be quadruple the quality o f b. This could be
quo Euclides probat hoc de superficiebus in i8a 61. shown in the way that Euclid proves it for surfaces in [Proposition] V I. 18 [of the
Tertia propositio est quod idem potest dici de velocitatibus sicud de Elements] .8
qualitatibus linearibus ymaginando velocitatem ad modum unius superficiei 3. The third proposition is that the same thing can be said o f velocities as was
35 cuius longitudo sit tempus et latitudo sit velocitatis in gradu intensio. said o f linear qualities by imagining velocity by means o f a surface whose longi­
Quarta propositio est quod si sit aliqua qualitas difformis cuius tamen tude is time and whose latitude is the intensity o f velocity in degrees.9
difformitas ymaginetur per lineam compositam ex lineis rectis, sicud patet 4. The fourth proposition is that, if there is some difform quality whose dif-
in figura [Fig. 10], talis potest reduci ad qualitatem uniformem, ita quod in- formity, however, is imagined by a line composed o f straight lines, as in the fig­
s8r, c.i veniatur aliqua uniformis sibi / equalis; quod patet, quia sumpta una super- ure [see Fig. 10], such a quality can be reduced to a uniform quality, so that there
40 ficie sibi simili, cum ipsa potest resolvi in triangulos, sicud patet primo
huius et 20, tunc potest inveniri aliquis quadrangulus sibi equalis, ut patet
per 44am primi, et etiam quadratum sibi equale, ut patet per ultimam 21; et

24- 25 S e c u n d a . . . in te n s io n u m om. v 34 a d . . . s u p e r f i c i e i svom.c T h e tr ia n g le to r e p r e s e n t th e d iffo r m q u a lity c o m p o s e d o f s t r a i g h t lin e s is in c. I h ave added

24 su o ru m com.s 35 post t e m p u s add. s s i c u d d i c i t A r i s t o t e l e s / b r o k e n lin e s .
25 p r o p o r t i o om.s la t it u d o c a lt it u d o v e l la t it u d o s la tu s v /
2 5- 29 V e r b i...d u p lic a ta o w .c s i t s om . cs i c v / v e l o c i t a t i s . . . i n t e n s i o c i n ­ may be found some uniform quality equal to it. This is evident, for with a surface
26 s u b ie c tu m s s u b ie c to r u m v j in v om. s / te n s io v e lo c ita tis in g r a d u v in c e n tr o v e l- similar to it assumed, since that surface can be resolved into triangles, as in the
d u p lo v d u p la s lo c it a t is in g r a d u s first and second [books] o f this [work, the Elements,] then some [rectangular]
zj d i c o q u o d 2 s om. v / i n e q u a l i a s e q u a l i a v 3 6 p r o p o s i t i o vom . sc quadrangle equal to it can be found, as is evident by [Proposition] 1 .44 [ ° f the
2 8 i n t e n s i o n u m . . . p r o p o r t i o s om .v 3 7 d iffo r m ita s cq u a lita s s d is p a r ita tis v / y m a ­
Elements, a n d also a square equal to that, by the last [proposition] o f the second
2 9 s i c u d s s i t v / s u b i e c t u m c om . sv g i n e t u r corr. ex i m a g i n e t u r in v et y m a g i n a -
3 0 s i t c i n a s i t sv / i n d u p l o c d u p l a s d u p l o v / t u r ss it c 8 F o r P r o p o s it io n V I . 18 o f th e Elements, s e e 10 N o tic e th a t I h a v e e m e n d e d 1. 4 in cv a n d
m a g i s cs om . v/ in aes om. v 3 7 - 38 s i c u d . . . f i g u r a cu t p a t e t vp a t e t i n f i g u r a e d . o f B a s e l, 1546, 152: “ O m n e s du ae su p er­ I .4 1 in s to I . 4 4 . T h e r e f e r e n c e o f c o u r s e is t o

3 1 e r i t q u a d r u p l a ce r i t q u a d r u p l o v e s s e t q u a - s fic ie s s im ile s m u ltia n g u la e su n t d iv is ib ile s in th e Cam panus te x t (e d . o f B a s e l, 1546, 3 5 ):

d r a n g u l l a s / i p s i u s com . sv 3 8 t a l i s cs h i c v / i t a bis c t r ia n g u lo s s im ile s a tq u e n u m e r o e q u a le s ; e s t- “ P r o p o s i t a lin e a r e c ta , s u p e r e a m s u p e r fic ie m

3 2 E u c l i d e s . . . h o c cv i l l u d p r o b a t E u c l i d e s r / 3 8 - 39 in v e n ia tu r c in v e n ie tu r s in v e n ir e tu r v q u e p r o p o r t i o a lt e r iu s e a r u m a d a lte r a m s ic u t a e q u id is ta n tiu m la te r u m , c u iu s a n g u lu s s it

post h o c add. c d i c i / i 8 a 6 1 c 8 ° v 1 4 q u e s ­ 3 9 s i b i om . v / q u i a om. s / u n a ci l l a sv c u iu s lib e t s u i la te r is a d s u u m r e la tiv u m la tu s a n g u lo a d s ig n a to a e q u a lis , ip s a vero su p er­

tio n e s s 4 0 p o t e s t cp o s s i t sv a lt e r iu s , p r o p o r t i o d u p lic a t a .” fic ie s t r i a n g u l o a s s ig n a t o a e q u a lis d e s ig n a r e .”

3 3 e s t svom . c/ i d e m cvi l l u d s 4 1 p o t e s t cp o t e r i t sv 9 See th e De configurationibus, I I I .v i, lin e s J o h n M u r d o c h h a s s u g g e s t e d in Scripta Mathe­

3 3 - 3 4 s i c u d . . . l i n e a r i b u s svom.c 4 2 4 4 am corr. ex 4 i am s 4 am cv 2 2 -2 8 . matica, V o l . 27 (19 6 4 ), 7 8 , n . 50, t h a t t h e p r o o f
 54°
ideo proportio altitudinis illius quadranguli vel quadrati ad altitudinem illius
superficiei date erit sicud proportio gradus qualitatis uniformis ad gradum
45 summum illius qualitatis difformis date, que qualitates essent equales. E t per
eandem rationem posset applicari multa dicta in aliis et in aliis questionibus
in geometria.
Tunc pono aliquas propositiones magis difficiles.
Prima est quod si sit aliqua qualitas linearis difformis, que ymaginanda sit
50 ad modum semicirculi, impossibile est istam ymaginari per aliam figuram
quam per semicirculum, cuius subiectum esset dyameter [Fig. 11]. Probatur:
quia quacunque alia figura data esset alia proportio linearum perpendicula-
riter cadentium super basim quam istarum ; igitur si proportio istarum est si­
cud proportio intensionum in punctis illius basis, proportio aliarum in alia
55 figura non esset talis; ex quo sequitur propositum.
Secunda propositio est quod in tali qualitate taliter difformi summus
gradus ymaginandus est per lineam equalem semidyametro, ita quod im­
possibile est ymaginari per lineam maiorem vel minorem; ex quo statim
Appendix I Questions on the Geometry o f E u c lid : Question 11 541
[book o f the Elements]; and therefore the ratio o f the altitude o f that rectangle or
square to the altitude o f that given surface w ill be as the ratio o f the degree o f the
uniform quality to the maximum degree o f that given difform quality, these qual­
ities being equal. A nd by the same argument many other statements could be
applied to various other questions in geometry.
Then I pose some propositions which are more difficult.11
1. The first is that, if there is some difform linear quality which is to be imagined
in the manner o f a semicircle, then it is impossible for it to be imagined by any
other figure than by the semicircle whose subject w ould be the diameter [see Fig.
11]. Proof: for if any other figure were given, then the ratio o f the lines falling
F ig . 11

sequitur quod intensio puncti medii est equalis medietati subiecti. Ista patet In b o th c a n d s.
60 quia, si ymaginaretur per lineam altiorem, tunc haberet ad alia puncta aliam
perpendicularly on the base w ould be different from the ratio o f these lines [in the
semicircle]; therefore, if the ratio o f these lines is in the ratio o f the intensities in
the points o f the base, the ratios o f others in another figure w ould not be such.
From this the proposition follows.
2. The second proposition is that in such a quality difform in such a w ay the
maximum degree is to be imagined by a line equal to the radius, so that it is im­
possible for it to be imagined by a line that is greater or less. From this it immediately
follows that the intensity o f the middle point is equal to half the subject. This is
evident, for if it were imagined by a higher line it w ould have a different ratio
from the other points, and thus similarly if [it were imagined] by a low er line.

h e r e is i n c o m p l e t e i f O r e s m e i n t e n d e d 1.4 4 to p o i n t i n g o u t t h a t t h e p r o p o s i t i o n o f O r e s m e is

a p p ly , fo r 1 .4 4 w o u ld o n ly a llo w th e c o n s tr u c ­ s ta te d in c o m p le t e g e n e r a lity , a n d f o r its p r o o f

t io n o f a s in g le p a r a lle lo g r a m e q u a l t o a g i v e n I .4 4 w o u l d c e r ta in ly b e in a d e q u a te . F o r P r o p o ­
43 illiu s 1 svom. c 5 3 c a d e n tiu m c om. sv / q u a m i s t a r u m sv om. c tr ia n g le . H o w e v e r , it m a y b e th a t O r e s m e o n ly s itio n I I . 1 4 , a ls o q u o te d in th is s e n te n c e , see

44 g r a d u s q u a lita tis tr. v 54 in te n s io n u m sv i n t e n s i o n u m i s t a r u m c / in te n d e d th e p r o o f fo r th e s in g le e x a m p le o f a e d . o f B a s e l, 1 5 4 6 , 5 1 : “ D a t o t r ig o n o , a e q u u m

4 5 i l l i u s q u a l i t a t i s s om . ci l l i u s v/ d a t e svom. c/ p u n c tis ... b a s i s sv i l l i s p u n c t i s c / a l i a r u m c d iffo r m q u a lity com posed of tw o s tr a ig h t q u a d r a tu m d e s c r ib e r e .”

q u a l i t a t e s c om . sv / e s s e n t e q u a l e s bis c om. sv lin e s , s in c e th e a c c o m p a n y in g fig u r e in c, to 11 I n I n t r o d u c tio n I a n d I I , a n d in th e in t r o ­

4 5 - 4 7 E t . . . g e o m e t r i a s om . ci l l i u s e a n d e m r a ­ 55 e x . . . p r o p o s itu m svom. c w h i c h h e r e fe r s , is j u s t s u c h a n e x a m p le . T h i s d u c t io n t o th is A p p e n d i x , I h a v e a lr e a d y d is ­

tio n e m p o s s e t a p p lic a r i d e m e n s u r a d iffo r - 56 Secunda cs 6 a v / d iffo r m i c d iffo r m ite r s tr ia n g u la r fig u r e w o u ld th e n b e r e s o lv e d in to c u s s e d t h e s ig n if ic a n c e o f O r e s m e ’ s c o n c lu s io n s

m ite r v(et correxi a l i i s 1-2 ex a l l i i s ins) d iffo r v t w o e q u a l r ig h t tr ia n g le s , a n d e a c h w o u ld h a v e b a s e d o n s e m ic ir c u la r q u a litie s . They c le a r ly

4 8 T u n c bis c / T u n c . . . d i f f i c i l e s om . v j pro­ 57 y m a g in a n d u m r a n e q u iv a le n t r e c ta n g le a t th e m id d le d e g r e e o n i n d i c a t e , I b e l i e v e , a n e a r lie r s t a g e o f O r e s m e ’ s

p o s itio n e s c c o n c lu s s io n e s s / m a g is d iffi­ 58 est cve s t illu d s th e b a s is o f 1 .44 and b o th r e c ta n g le s w o u ld u n d e r s ta n d in g o f th e s u ita b ility d o c tr in e . A s I

c i l e s cu t i l l i o r e s s 59 m e d ie ta ti cvi n t e n s i o n i m e d ie ta ti s / s u b ie c ti th e n c o n s titu te a lo n g e r r e c ta n g le e q u a l to th e have in d ic a te d , he w as la t e r to abandon th e

4 9 P r i m a cs q u i n t a v / s i t sv s u n t s u n t c svs t a 11 c o r ig in a l tr ia n g le . T h is is e q u iv a le n t to th e e x c lu s iv e n e s s o f th e s e m ic ir c le to r e p r e s e n t s u c h

5 o i s t a m ci l l a s a l i a m v 60 q u ia : q u a r e t / y m a g i n e m u r r p r o c e d u r e u s e d in t h e De configurationibus, L i x . a q u a lity a n d w it h it th e v a r io u s c o n c lu s io n s

5 2~ 5 3 p e r p e n d i c u l a r i t e r c p e r p e n d i c u l a r u m sv O f co u rse, M u rdoch is p e r fe c tly correct in p r e s e n te d h e re .

 542 Appendix I Questions on the Geometry o f E u clid : Question 11 543

proportionem, et ita similiter si per minorem. Patet ergo ex istis quod aliqua Hence it is evident from these statements that some intensity and some extension
intensio et aliqua extensio sunt sibi invicem aliqualiter equales. are in some w ay equal to one another.
Tertia propositio est quod qualitas uniformis isto gradu summo in tanto 3. T he third proposition is that a quality uniform in this maximum degree in as
subiecto ymaginanda est sicud quadrangulus divisibilis in duo quadrata, sicud great a subject is to be imagined as a rectangle divisible into tw o squares, as is
65 patet in figura [Fig. 12], et similiter qualitas medietatis subiecti per unum evident in the figure [see Fig. 12], and similarly the quality o f half the subject by one
quadratum.
square.
Quarta propositio est quod, si sit aliquod subiectum difforme cuius dif-
formitas sit ad modum semicirculi, impossibile est illud subiectum vel sibi
equale esse taliter difforme cum maiori qualitate aut cum minori. Patet, quia
70 iam tota quantitas illius qualitatis est determinata sicud semicirculus, cuius
2 subiectum esset / dyameter. M odo si poneretur ut maior semicirculus, oportet
quod haberet maiorem dyametrum, ut patet ex principiis tertii Euclidis:
quorum dyametri sunt equales etc. E x istis patet quod nullum subiectum In c. I h a v e a d d e d b r o k e n lin e s . S e e a ls o n e x t fig u r e b e l o w .

maius potest esse taliter difforme nisi habeat maiorem qualitatem nec minus
75 nisi habeat minorem. 4. The fourth proposition is that, if there is some difform subject whose dif-
Tunc pono alias propositiones. form ity is in the manner o f a semicircle, it is impossible for that subject or some­
Prima est quod intensio qualitatis et aliqua extensio possunt dici aliquali­ thing equal to it to be difform in such a w ay w ith either a greater or lesser [amount
ter equales, ita quod intensio ymaginatur per unam lineam talem quod non o f the] quality. This is evident, for the quantity o f the quality is already determined
potest recte ymaginari per maiorem vel minorem, sicud intensio medii as a semicircle whose subject w ould be the diameter. N o w if it were posited as a
80 puncti in tali subiecto ymaginatur per lineam subduplam ad lineam totius greater semicircle, it is necessary for it to have a greater diameter, as is evident
subiecti. from the principles o f the third [book o f the Elements] :12 “ those whose diameters
Secunda est quod qualitas uniformis alicuius subiecti non potest indiffe­ are equal etc.” From these statements it is evident that no subject w hich is larger
renter ymaginari per quemcunque quadrangulum [Fig. 13]. Probatur, quia can be difform in this w ay unless it has a greater [quantity of] quality nor any
smaller subject unless it has less.
Then I pose other propositions.
1. T he first is that [some] intensity o f quality and some extension can be said to
be equal in some w ay, so that an intensity is imagined by one line such that it can­
61 et sv om. c / ex i s t i s sv om. c / q u o d cv q u i a s 70 s e m ic ir c u lu s svc i r c u l u s c not be rightly imagined by a greater or lesser line, as [when] the intensity o f the
62 s i b i . . . a liq u a lite r r om. c a l i q u a l i t e r v 72 e x p r in c ip iis te r tii cv 3 0 s middle point in such a subject is imagined by a line that is one half the line o f the
63 T e r t i a p r o p o s i t i o s T e r t i a c z° v / q u a l i t a s sv 7 3 q u o r u m . . . e t c . om . s / e t c . om. v / i s t i s c i l l o w hole subject.
q u a n t i t a s c / u n i f o r m i s sc d i f f b r m i s v / i s t o vi s t o e t i a m s 2. The second is that the uniform quality o f some subject cannot be indifferently
com. r i l l o v 7 4 d i f f o r m e cv d i f f o r m i s s/ n i s i cs u t v/ h a b e a t cv
y m a g i n a n d a e s t tr. s
imagined by any rectangle [see Fig. 13]. Proof: for let subject ah be posited whose
64 h a b e r e n t s ( e t tr. vpost m a i o r e m ) / m a i o r e m
65 s u b i e c t i r om . cv q u a l i t a t e m sv d e q u a l i t a t e p l u s c
66 post q u a d r a t u m add. s i t a q u o d s i e s s e t a l i ­ 7 5 m i n o r e m sv d e q u a l i t a t e m i n u s c
q u a q u a lita s u n iff o r m ite r d iffb r m is a s u m ­ j 6 p o n o a li a s c p o n o a l l i q u a s s p o n u n t u r a l i ­
m o gra d u u sq u e ad n o n g r a d u m , illa e ss e t que v

y m a g in a n d a s ic u d unus tr ia n g u liu s non 7 7 e s t cvom .s

a lt e r , u t q u i c u n q u e s it is t e , q u i e s t m e d ie t a s 7 7 - 7 8 a l i q u a l i t e r sv e q u a l i t e r c
q u a d r a ti, c u iu s u n u s ( a n g u l u s ) e st r e c tu s et 78 - 80 t a l e m . . . l i n e a m 1 om .v
In b o th c a n d s, a l t h o u g h s lig h t ly o u t o f p la c e .
a lii s u n t m in o r e s r e c to . 7 9 post s i c u d add. s i n t a l i s u b i e c t o
67 Q u a r ta p r o p o s itio cs 8a v / q u o d sv om. c 79 - 80 m e d i i p u n c t i cp u n c t i m e d i o s
68 im p o s s ib ile sv i l l u d s u b i e c t u m i m p o s s i b i l e 80 l i n e a m t o t i u s ci n t e n s i o n e m t o c c i u s s e x t e n ­
12 The fir s t d e fin itio n o f Book III o f th e a e q u a le s e ss e . M a io r e s a u te m , q u o r u m m a io r e s .

c / e s t i l l u d ct a l e v e s t a l i u d {? a d ?) s s io n e m v Elements ( e d . o f B a s e l, 1546, 53) ru n s: “ Q u o - E t m in o r e s , q u o r u m m in o r e s ,

69 t a l i t e r cvt o t a l i t e r s 83 P r o b a t u r q u i a c P r o b o q u i a v p r o b a t u r s ru m d ia m e tr i su n t a e q u a le s , ip s o s c ir c u lo s
 544 Appendix I Questions on the Geometry o f E u clid : Question 11 545

ponatur ab subiectum cuius qualitas sit sicud semicirculus, ut positum est; quality is as a semicircle, as has been posited. Then let it be posited that it becomes
85 deinde ponatur quod fiat uniforme illo gradu sum m o; tunc iste gradus non uniform in the maximum degree. Then this degree is not to be imagined by a great­
erit ymaginandus per maiorem lineam quam erat ante; ergo ille quadrangulus er line than it was before. Therefore that quadrangle by which [this] uniformity is
per quem ymaginatur uniformitas non est altior quam linea que coaptabatur imagined is not higher than the line which was adapted to the maximum degree.
gradui summo. E x eodem patet quod qualitas uniformiter difformis termina­ From this same statement it is evident that [some ] quality uniformly difform ter­
ta ad non gradum non potest ymaginari per quemcunque triangulum; ymo minated at no degree cannot be imagined by [just] any triangle at all. In fact, if
90 si medietas subiecti predicti esset uniformiter difformis a gradu summo usque half o f the aforesaid subject were uniformly difform from the maximum degree to
ad non gradum, ipsa esset ymaginanda per triangulum qui est medietas no degree, it w ould have to be imagined by a triangle which is half o f a square, as
quadrati, sicud patet in figura. Contra hoc obicitur, quia, cum in quolibet is evident in the figure. Objection: since in any rectangle whatsoever, all o f the
quadrangulo rectangulo omnes linee sunt uniformiter alte sicud omnia lines are uniformly high just as all the points o f a uniform [quality] are equally
puncta uniformis sunt equaliter intensa, videtur quod per quemlibet potest intense, it seems that it can be imagined by any [rectangle] at all. It should be
95 ymaginari. Dicendum est quod, licet quoad illud non esset differentia, tamen replied that, although in this regard there w ould be no difference, still there is a dif­
est differentia quoad aliud, sicud est probatum. ference in another regard, as has been proved.
a8v, ci. Tertia est quod ex hoc posset ymaginari qualiter sciretur si caliditas / in 3. T he third is that, from this it could be imagined how it may be known
summo sit magis intensa quam frigiditas in summo, quia, si essent duo subiec- whether calidity at maximum is more intense than frigidity at maximum; for, if
ta a et b et cuiuslibet qualitas esset sicud semicirculus terminata ad summum there were tw o subjects, a and b, and the quality o f each was as a semicircle termi­
100 gradum in puncto intensissimo, tunc si a calidum esset maius quam b frigi­ nated at the maximum degree in the most intense point, then, if the calidity o f a
dum, dico quod caliditas in summo esset magis intensa quam frigiditas in were more than the frigidity o f b, I say that calidity at maximum is more intense
summo. than frigidity at maximum.
Quarta est ista, quod eodem modo potest dici de velocitate, quia potest 4. The fourth is this, that we can speak in the same way concerning velocity, for
ymaginari una velocitas cuius longitudo erit tempus et latitudo erit intensio there can be imagined one velocity, whose longitude w ill be time and whose lati­
105 graduum, que se habebit tota similis ad modum semicirculi, et ex hoc se­ tude will be the intensity o f degrees, which in totality will be disposed in the man­
quitur quod aliqua intensio velocitatis est equalis alicui tempori, sicud forte ner o f a semicircle, and from this it follows that some intensity o f velocity is equal
gradus velocitatis quo movetur primum mobile est equalis uni diei. to some time, as perhaps the degree o f velocity w ith which the prime mobile is
A d rationes in oppositum. A d primam cum probatur quod qualitas m oved is equal to one day.
linearis non est ymaginanda sicud superficies, dico quod et qualitas super­ Answers to the opposing arguments: T o the first where it was proved that
no ficiei est ymaginanda sicud corpus et qualitas corporis sicud corpus, nec ul- linear quality is not to be imagined as a surface, I say that the quality o f a surface is
to be imagined as a body and the quality o f a body as a body without having to
84 ponatur c ponitur sv / ab c a s a et b v / sicud 95-97 Dicendum... ymaginari om. v
sv om. c 95 est c om. s / licet quo- s quamvis c
86 erit sv erat c / maiorem sv, et corr. c ex mino­ 96 est1 c esset s / aliud c illud s
rem 97 sciretur c inveniretur sv / si sv sicud c / cali­
87 non est cv et ideo s / altior sv altius c / coap­ ditas cv quallitas s
tabatur c choortabatur s coalterabatur v 98 sit sv sicud c / quia cv quare s
88 gradui cv gradu s 100 puncto sv om. c / a sv i c / calidum c calidi­
89 gradu c / non2 cv et ideo s / ymo c unde v tas v talliter s / quam om. v
consequentiam (vel forte consequentia pa­ 100-101 frigidum c frigido v frissim0 s
tet) s 1 o 1 esset cv est s / magis cv maius s
91 ipsa com.sv 102 post summo add. s patet ex dictis
92 sicud.. .figura c om. sv / obicitur c potest 103 ista csom.v
obici v posset obicci s / quia sv om. c / in 104 ymaginari om. c / latitudo: altitudo s
quolibet v quollibet s qualibet c 105 similis om. s / post semicirculi add. s sicud positum dicco ad maiorem, ymo quod nec 10 8 A d 1... primam c Ad primum argumentum
93 post alte add. s ut patet in exemplo diccebatur prius / et cv om. s est ultra corpus prosequendum et consi- in oppositum v / qualitas v quantitas c
94 uniformis s uniformia c omnia (?)v / per 106 est c erit sv / forte c om. sv millem ymaginationem ponit cappanus 40 1 0 9 - 1 0 sicud... ymaginanda v om. c

om. s I quemlibet sv quamlibet c 108-12 A d 1__differentia: A d primum in op- huius undeccima diffinitione s n o qualitas corporis c corpus v
 54-6 Appendix I Questions on the Geometry o f E u c lid : Question 11 547

terius procedendum; et consimilem ymaginationem ponit Campanus 50
huius differentia.
E t ad probationem: superficies et qualitas sunt diversarum rationum,
igitur non est propria comparatio, pro consequentia dico quod inter aliqua
115 diversarum rationum bene est propria comparatio, licet non inter omnia,
sicud nos comparamus potentiam ad resistentiam et caliditatem ad frigidita­
tem, et sic de aliis. Pro consequente dico quod inter superficiem et qualitatem
non est propria comparatio, ita quod proprie dicamus superficiem equalem
qualitati vel lineam intensioni, sed est ibi comparatio quoad tria. Primum
120 est quod proportio qualitatum est sicud proportio superficierum eo modo
quo dicimus in musica quod proportio soni ad sonum est sicud corde ad
cordam, et adhuc plus. Secundum est quod similitudo et dissimilitudo quali­
tatum in intensione et extensione est sicud similitudo et dissimilitudo super­
ficierum, sicud patet ex dictis et patebit ex dicendis. Tertium est quod est
.2 aliqua intensio que sic ymaginanda est / per unam lineam, quod impossibile
126 est eam ymaginari per maiorem aut minorem. E t ita dico de qualitate in
comparatione ad superficiem vel corpus, sicud etiam nos dicimus quod
aliqua velocitas consequitur aliquam proportionem que non potest consequi
maiorem aut minorem, quamvis in proposito sit maior similitudo.
130 A d ultimum contra, quod tunc posset ymaginari per quamlibet super­
ficiem, n e g o ; sed solum ymaginatur per eam que talis est quod a quolibet
puncto intrinseco eius ad basim que signat extensionem potest protrahi
linea perpendicularis in illa superficie. E t ita dico de corpore per quod
proceed further; and Campanus posits a similar imagery in the [n th ] definition o f
the fifth [book] o f this [work, the Elements\.13
A s for the p ro o f that since the surface and quality are o f diverse natures there
is no proper comparison, it is answered in regard to the consequence that between
some things o f diverse natures there truly is proper comparison although not be­
tween all things. For example, w e compare pow er and resistance, calidity and
frigidity, and similarly others. A s for the consequent [i.e., the conclusion o f the
consequence], I say there is no proper comparison between a surface and a
quality in such a way that w e can say properly that a surface is equal to a quality or a
line to an intensity. But there is comparison in three respects. The first is that the
ratio o f qualities is as the ratio o f surfaces in the w ay that w e say in music that the ratio
o f sound to sound is as that o f string [length] to string [length,] and so on. The
second is that the similitude and dissimilitude o f qualities in intensity and extension
is as the similitude and dissimilitude o f surfaces, as is evident from the things w e
have said and as w ill be evident from the things to be said. The third is that there
is some intensity which is so imagined by one line that it is impossible for it to be
imagined by a greater- or a lesser-extended line.14 A nd I speak in the same w ay o f a
quality in comparison with a surface or a body, just as w e also say that a certain
velocity follows upon a certain ratio and it cannot follow upon one that is greater
or smaller, although in the matter at hand there is greater similarity.
T o the last argument in opposition, namely that then it [i.e., linear quality] can
be imagined by any surface at all, I deny this. Rather it is only imagined by a sur­
face which is such that from any intrinsic point o f it there can be protracted to the
base designating the extension a perpendicular line in that surface.15 A nd I speak in

112 differentia c conclusione ii vel diffinitione tudo v om. sc

v 123 in intensione s est intencioni c intensione
1 1 3fEt c om. sv I sunt cs subiecte v
114 non.. .propria c est impropria sv / p ro ...
quod om. v / dico c diccatur j
115- 17 bene... aliis: non nos comparemus s om. cv
causam calidum et frigidum v
115 bene est propria c est s
11 6 - 17 sicud... aliis c om. s
116 et caliditatem corr. ex caliditatem et in c
117 Pro consequente s pro consequens c per
consequente v / et2 om. c
118 propria comparatio c comparatio immedi­
ata sv
119 lineam intensioni cs lineas intensui {!)v
119-20 Primum est c prima s primo est v
120 quod om. v / proportio: comparatio s / eo
modo quo c eodem modo s eo quod v
121 dicitur v / in om. c
122 et adhuc plus c om. sv / Secundum c ter­
tium v secunda s / est s om. cv / et dissimili­
v I extentam ( ?)c / et2 cv vel s
124 sicud: ut s / patebit ex om. s point in a quality imagined by a semicircle.
13 Ed. o f Basel, 1546, 108: “ Est ergo ac si
125 aliqua intensio tr. v / sic c om. v est s / est 15 We can point to another change o f em­
diceret: proportio duarum quantitatum est
phasis in the D e configurationibus. In the Ques­
simplex intervallum, et habens naturam sim­
125-126 impossibile est tr. c tiones here, Oresme claims that a linear quality
plicis dimensionis ut lineae: proportionalitas
126 eam c om. sv / aut c vel sv can only be imagined by figures whose inten­
autem trium, est duplex intervallum, et habens
127 ad superficiem sv om. c / vel cv vel ad s j sity lines are all perpendicular to the base line.
naturam duplicis dimensionis ut superficiei:
etiam c om. sv / dicitur v In the later work, I.i, he says that the intensity
proportionalitas autem quattuor, est triplex
128 sequitur s / que c quod v sic quod j / potest line “ could be extended in any direction what­
intervallum, et habens naturam trinae dimen­
consequi cs om. v ever, except that it is more fitting to imagine it
sionis ut solidi. Et quia dimensiones ulterius
129 aut c vel v nec s j in proposito sit c etiam standing up perpendicularly on the subject
non procedunt, ideo non diffinivit proportio­
proportio sit v in proposito sic sit adhuc s informed with the quality.” Hence, what
nem contentam inter extremos proportionali-
130-31 A d ... nego v A d ultimum dicco quod appears as necessary in the earlier system is
tatis in quinque terminis, aut pluribus, consti­
non j- tunc posset ymaginari etc. nego c simply more fitting in the later.
tutae.”
130 quamlibet corr. ex quemlibet in v 14 For example, the intensity o f the middle
a
131 nego c nc v / solum sv secundum solum c /
p er... est c per quemlibet superficiem per tallis est s / a cv in s potest v / signat c signifficat s
talem v per tallem et tallem vel unum quod 132 eius c ipsius sv / que... protrahi cs probari 1 33—34 d ico... qualitas2 om. v
 548 Appendix I Questions on the Geometry o f E u c lid : Question 12 549

ymaginatur aliqua qualitas. E t ideo nulla qualitas potest ymaginari sicud the same w ay o f the body by which some quality is to be imagined. A nd therefore
135 circulus nec sicud maior portio semicirculo. no quality can be imagined as a circle nor as a segment greater than a semicircle.16

<Q u e stio 12> Q u e s tio n 12

Consequenter queritur utrum sit aliqua qualitas difformis absque aliqua
uniformitate.
E t arguitur quod sic, quia quedam est uniformis sine difformitate aliqua,
ergo econtrario aliqua erit difformis sine uniformitate.
5 Oppositum arguitur, quia secundum Boetium in arismetica sua omnis
inequalitas ab equalitate procedit et ad equalitatem reducitur, ergo similiter
omnis difformitas, que est quedam inequalitas, reducitur ad uniformitatem
tanquam ad equalitatem et hoc non fieret nisi participaret aliquid de uniformi­
tate, ut videtur.
io Pono quasdam propositiones dimissa qualitate lineari, de qua non quero.
Prima propositio est quod in quacunque superficie quali qualitercunque
difformi sunt alique linee uniformes. H oc probatur, supposito quod qualitas
superficiei ymaginatur per corpus et quod per quamlibet superficiem illius
corporis perpendicularem super istam superficiem tanquam super basim
15 ymaginatur qualitas alicuius linee. Tunc sumpto tali corpore, in exteriori
parte eius potest aliqua linea protrahi que erit in quolibet sui puncto equaliter
alta, ut patet intuenti. E rgo superficies sibi perpendiculariter subiecta est
uniformiter alta. E rgo qualitas per talem superficiem ymaginata est unifor­
mis et uniformiter intensa, quia per suppositum aliqua qualitas linearis
so ymaginatur per ipsam. D ico notabiliter “ aliqua” quia, si quelibet linea esset
Consequently it is sought whether there is some difform quality without some uni­
formity.
It is argued in the affirmative, for since there is some quality which is uniform
without some difformity, hence conversely there w ill be some which is difform
without uniformity.
The opposite is argued, for, according to Boethius in his Arithm etic,l every in­
equality proceeds from equality and is reduced to equality, therefore similarly
every difformity, w hich is a certain inequality, is reduced to uniformity as to equal­
ity, and this w ould not take place unless it shared something w ith uniformity, as it
seems.
W ith linear quality set aside from consideration, I pose certain propositions.
1. The first proposition is that in any surface however difform in quality there
are some uniform lines. This is proved, it having been supposed that the quality o f
the surface is imagined by a body and that by any surface o f that body w hich is
perpendicular to the [given] surface as a base the quality o f some line is imagined.
W ith such a body assumed, there can be protracted in the exterior part o f it some
line which w ill be equally high in its every point, as is evident to the observant.
Therefore, the surface perpendicularly erected to it from the subject is uniformly
high. Therefore, the quality imagined by such a surface is uniform, i.e., uniformly
intense, for by supposition some linear quality is imagined by it. N ote that I say

134-35 E t ... semicirculo om. s
135 nec c nunc v / portio c proportio v / semi­
circulo corr. ex semicirculi in c et circuli in v
jpost semicirculo (i.e., circuli in v) add. v Si
dicas quod possibile primo quod sumitur
subiectum et sic (/ sit?) dyameter circuli,
tunc potest fieri una qualitas difformiter
difformis ad modum semicirculi; et tunc
possibile quod immaginare (/ immaginare-
tur?) subiecum si (/ sicut?) diameter in­
cendi (/ intendi?) ex aliqua parte, tunc fiet
circulus et sic non potest immaginari, et
sic huius questionis.
Questio 12
1 sit aliqua tr. v / qualitas c om. s quantitas v /
aliqua c nulla v ulla s
2 uniformitate cv difformitate s
3 Et c om. sv / arguitur s om. v arguo c / uni­
formis cv difformis s / aliqua c om. sv
4 aliqua... uniformitate c om. sv
5 arguitur cs autem v / quia sv om. c / arismeti­
ca cs arsmetrica v
6 reducitur cs producitur v
7 quedam sv que c
8 tanquam cs om. v
8-9 e t... uniformitate: uniformitatem v
8 non fieret c non esset s
8-9 aliquid... uniformitate c ad uniformita­
tem s
9 videtur cv videbitur s
I o quasdam cv om. s j d e ... quero cvom.s
II propositio s om. c proportio v / est cv om. s
11-12 quali... difformi cv qualicunque diffor-
16 Cf. D e configurationibus, I.v, particularly ioris libri disputatione digestum est, quemad­
lines 13-16. modum tota inaequalitatis substantia a prin­
Question 12 cipe sui generis aequalitate processerit — Ita
1 D e institutione arithmetica, Book I, Chap. 32 igitur, quoniam ex aequalitatis margine cunc­
(ed. o f G. Friedlein, 66): “ Hoc autem erit tas inaequalitatis species proficisci videmus,
perspicuum, si intellegamus, omnes inaequali­ omnis a nobis inaequalitas ad aequalitatemVe-
tatis species ab aequalitatis crevisse primor­ lut ad quoddam elementum proprii generis
d iis...” Cf. Bk. II, Chap. 1 {ibid., 77): “ Super­*3 resolvatur.”
mis s 15 ymaginetur c / sumpto cs supposito v / cor­
12 alique: autem que c pori c
12-13 H o c ... illius: probatur ex positione de 16 erit sv erat c / sui cs suo suo v
3m corporum supposicionem imaginatur 17 alta cs alia v / sibi sv sicud c / est sv et c
per corpus quod per quamlibet suppocitio- 19-21 e t__uniformis1 om. c
nem istius v 20 per v et per s / quia s om. v
12 supposito c sumpto ex precedentibus s
 55° Appendix I Q uestions on the Geometry o f E u clid : Question 12 551

uniformis, tota superficies esset uniformis. E t etiam intelligendum est “ some,” for if any line were uniform, the w hole surface w ould be uniform. A nd
agr, c.i / “ aliquo gradu” et non “ quolibet gradu,” quia possibile est quod sit aliquis also it is to be understood [as uniform] in “ some” degree and not in “ any” degree,
gradus qui solum reperiatur in isto puncto. for it is possible that there is some degree which may be found only in this point.2
Secunda propositio est quod pari ratione in quolibet corpore quantum- 2. The second proposition is that, by equivalent reasoning, in any body how ­
a5 cunque difformi est aliqua superficies uniformis, quia, sicud sepe dictum ever much difform there is some uniform surface, for as has often been said, the
est, qualitas corporis ymaginatur sicud unum corpus, et ideo arguitur sicud quality o f a body is imagined by one body, and hence the argument is like that for
de superficie. Tamen hoc est aliqualiter in dubium. E t in corpore uniformi­ a surface. H ow ever this is, in a certain way, in doubt. But in a body uniformly dif­
ter difformi non est dubium quin ibi sint alique linee et alique superficies uni­ form there is no doubt but that there are there some uniform lines and surfaces.
formes. Then follow definitions.
3o Tunc sequuntur diffinitiones. 1. The first is that a line uniformly difform w ith some quality is one in which
Prima est quod linea uniformiter difformis aliqua qualitate est cuius any three or more points equally distant apart proportionally exceed one another in
quelibet tria puncta vel plura equaliter inter se distantia se excedunt invicem arithmetical proportion.3
proportionaliter proportionalitate arismetica. 2. The second is that a surface uniformly difform [with some quality] is one in
Secunda est quod superficies uniformiter difformis est cuius quelibet tres which any three or more lines equally distant apart exceed one another according
35 linee vel plures, equaliter distantes inter se, se invicem excedunt in inten­ to the said ratio.
sione secundum dictam proportionem. 3. A n d the third, concerning body, is that a body uniformly difform [with
E t tertia de corpore, quod corpus uniformiter difforme est cuius quelibet some quality] is one in which any three uniform surfaces equally distant apart
tres superficies uniformes equaliter distantes se excedunt secundum dictam exceed one another according to the said ratio. A n d these three definitions, in
proportionem. E t iste tres diffinitiones quantum ad illud quod significant regard to their signification, will already be evident from the first question.
40 iam patebunt ex prima questione. Then other propositions are posed.
Tunc ponuntur alie propositiones. 1. T he first is that, in a quality uniformly difform terminated at no degree, both
Prima est quod qualitatis uniformiter difformis terminate ad non gradum the intensity and the extension are uniformly difform.4 This is obvious because the
intensio est uniformiter difformis ac etiam extensio. Istud patet, quia intensio intensity o f points is imagined by perpendicular lines [see Fig. 14(a)]. N o w these
punctorum ymaginatur per lineas perpendiculares [Fig. 14(a)]. M odo iste se are related as they ought to be related in accordance w ith the definition [of uni-
45 habent sicud se debent habere secundum diffinitionem ante datam. E t ideo
21 etiam cv similiter x / est v om. s quod c nuntur v / diffinitiones: distinctiones s
22 gradu2 v om. cs / est cs om. v 31 est1 c om. sv / aliqua qualitate tr. v original surface which is uniform in quality.
2 I am not sure that I understand precisely
23 isto c illo v uno sollo x 32 invicem : in unamcunque ( ?)s 3 Compare the more precise treatment of
what Oresme is suggesting here. It seems as if
24 Secunda propositio cv secundo s 33 proportionalitate arismetica c proportiona- this definition o f uniformly difform in the
he is saying that one can pass through the
25 sepe o m .s litatem arismeticam s secundum proportio­ representative body a straight line parallel to a D e configurationibus, I.xi.
26 est qualitas c qualitas s equalitas v / et om. s / nem cum sium (!) certam v 4 In the D e configurationibus, Oresme has
line o f the base and then construct a surface
arguitur cs immaginatur v 34 Secunda est v secunda c secundo s abandoned the attempt to describe the varia­
perpendicular to the base extending to that
27 superficie sv una side c / Tam en...dubium 35 distantes tr. sv post se1 / se1 om. c tions in extension as well and indeed it is out
protracted line. If this is what he intends, then
v om. cs I in corpore c om. sv 36 proportionalitatem s he is not proving thereby the existence o f a o f place in such a discussion o f the variation in
28 difformi corr. c ex difformiter, et sv habent 37-39 E t .. .proportionem om. c intensity in a given subject, i.e., a given exten­
line uniform in quality in the original surface.
difformiter / ibi c om. sv 37 corpore s aere v / corpus s corpori v sion. Oresme no doubt felt at the time o f the
For it seems quite evident that, if one had a
28-29 lin ee.. .uniformes cv linea et alliqua 38 tres s tres linee v / equaliter distantes v inter composition of the Questiones that it would be
forest o f perpendiculars erected on the origi­
superficies unifformis s j post uniformes s more complete to describe the variation in
nal surface, there is nothing to prevent all o f
add. v et ita est conformiter [in corpore] 39 proportionalitatem s / iste s ille v ie c / tres c them from being o f different length. And if both dimensions.
difformiter difformi (corr. ex difformiter), om. sv / quantum ad illud v om. c quantum this were so, then there would be no line in the
quia non est aliqua inequalitas quin habeat ad alliud s / quod significant sv om. c
aliquam equalitatem, et ideo non est modus 40 patebunt c patet v apparent s
[ir]regularis quin sit punctus in cuius com­ 41 T u n c... alie v Tunc pono duas s alie c / pro­ 42 est om. s 45 habent... habere: excedunt s / se om. c / ha-
paratione haberet aliquam equalitatem. positiones cs diffiniciones v / post proposi­ 43 est sv om. c / ac etiam c ac in (?)^ similiter s / bere om. c / ante datam. E t: dictam x / da-
30 Tunc c om. sv / sequuntur s sequitur c po­ tiones add. c sunt Istud cv illa x tam c dictam sv
 5 52 Appendix I Q uestions on the Geometry o f E u c lid : Q uestion 13 553

superficies dicitur uniformiter difformiter alta. Iterum extensio graduum form ly difform] given earlier. A nd, therefore, the surface is said to be uniformly
ymaginatur per lineas eque distantes basi et tales se habent sicud debent se­ difformly high. A lso extension o f degrees is imagined by lines parallel to the base,
cundum diffinitionem dictam. E t ideo superficies ista est uniformiter diffor- and such lines are related as they ought to be in accordance w ith the said definition.
mis secundum longitudinem et secundum latitudinem, et longitudo signat A n d therefore the surface is uniformly difform according to longitude and accord­
50 extensionem et latitudo intensionem. ing to latitude, and longitude denotes extension and latitude intensity.
Secunda propositio est quod qualitatis uniformiter difformis terminate ab
utraque parte ad gradum intensio est uniformiter difformis et extensio non.
Patet, quia ymaginatur per quadrangulum, ut patet in figura [Fig. 14(b)].
A d rationes in oppositum, dico quod ista est persuasiva et non valet per-
55 suasio, quia non sequitur: si uniformitas possit esse sine difformitate, quod
posset esse econtrario, sicud patet in aliis; sicud non sequitur: est dare sum­
mum bonum, igitur est dare summum malum.

Fig. 14
(a) reconstructed from x which simply has the triangle without intensity and extension lines
(b) reconstructed from c which makes the quadrangle a rectangle. It, however, has the grid o f
<Questio 13) intensity and extension lines.

c.2 / Consequenter queritur utrum qualitas uniformis et difformis sint 2. The second proposition is that, in the case o f a quality uniformly difform and
equales. terminated on both sides at a degree, the intensity is uniformly difform but the
E t arguitur quod non. E t pono quod a sit aliquod uniforme et b sit extension is not. This is evident, for it is imagined by a quadrangle o f the kind
difforme uniformiter a gradu duplo ad non gradum et sint equalia, tunc evident in the figure [see Fig. 14(b)].
5 iste qualitates essent equales, ut patet ex una questione et per consequens 3. T o the argument in opposition, I say that this is persuasive but the persua­
ista essent equaliter quales sicud calida vel alba. Sed probatur quod non, sion is not valid, for it does not follow that if uniformity could be w ithout dif-
quia b est ita intense calidum sicud et maximus gradus eius, sicud nos dici­ form ity, the contrary could exist, just as is evident in other th ings; for example, it
mus quod una superficies est ita alta sicud altior linea eius et quod aliquid does not follow that, since the highest good can be given, hence the highest evil
can be given.
46 alta sv om. c / Iterum c om. v item x 5 5 - 57 difformitate... malum: difforme sive
48 diffinitionem: superficiem v / dictam cs ante unifor (/) tunc finis v
dictam v / E t om. s / ista c illa v ita x 56 posset c possit x
49 longitudinem... latitudinem: latitudinem 56 - 57 sicud1...m alu m com.s
et longitudinem s j signat cs significat v
Question 13
50 et om. s j latitudo c latus v latitudo omnino x Questio 13
51 est cs om. v / qualitatis v quallitas s qualiter- 3 E t 1 sv om. c j a om. s / sit2 cs om. v Consequently it is sought whether a uniform and a difform quality are equal.
cunque c 4 difforme uniformiter c unifforme x unifor- A n d it is argued in the negative. I posit that a is some [subject with] uniform
51-52 ab utraque parte cs om. v metur difformiter v
[quality] and b one uniformly difform from a double degree to no degree, and let
5 2 intensionem c / e s t e om. v / difformiter v j et 5 equales om. v
6 essent cs erunt v / equaliter cs eque v / quales
them be equal [in subject]. Then these qualities w ould be equal [in quantity], as is
extensio non v et extensionem non c ad ex-
tenssionem s corr. ex qualles in s et equalia in cv / sicud x evident from one o f the questions [i.e., the tenth], and consequently they w ould be
53 Patet1 .. .figura com. sv sicud patet c puncta puta v / calida... proba­ equal in kind, as equally hot or equally white. But it is proved that they are not, for
54 ante in add. v autem / post oppositum add. v tur : probo v / calida vel alba x capida vel al­ b is as intensely hot as the maximum degree in the same w ay that w e say that a sur-
est persuasiva et in talibus non oportet ba c
persuadere iterum / dico quod sv et c 7 quia cs quare v
54-55 ista — persuasio c persuasio non valet 7-8 calidum... ita : alc1 ut1 mensura eius sicut
sv superficies est eque v habet c album ante intense / et c om. s / maxi­ 8 linea om. s / aliquid cs aliquis v
55 si: quod six 7 calidum corr. ex album in sc (cj'. lin. 9) et mus x maximas ( 7 )c
 554 Appendix I Questions on the Geometry o f E u clid : Question 13 555

m ovetur ita velociter sicud punctus velocissime m otus; et sic b erit calidius face is as high as its tallest line and that something is m oved as swiftly as its fastest
io quam a in duplo vel fere. m oving point j1 and so b w ill be tw ice as hot, or almost twice, as a.
Oppositum arguitur per prius dicta. The opposite is argued by means o f what has been said before.
Hic est notandum quod quedam sunt superficies equales, alie inequales, Here it should be noted that some surfaces are equal and others unequal, as has
ut notum est. Item quedam sunt superficies similes, alie dissimiles, sicud been remarked. A lso, certain o f them are similar and others dissimilar, as is said in
dicitur in 6° huius in principio: superficies similes sunt quarum anguli the sixth [book] o f this [work, the Elements,] in the beginning:2 “ Similar surfaces
15 unius angulis alterius equales lateraque equos angulos respicientia propor­ are those o f which the angles o f one are equal to the angles o f the other and the
tionalia. sides opposite those angles are proportional.”
Secundo notandum quod eodem m odo quedam sunt qualitates equales In the second place, it is to be noted that in the same w ay certain qualities are
et alie inequales. E t similiter quedam sunt difformitate qualitatum similes equal and others are unequal. A n d conform ably certain o f the qualities are similar
et alie dissimiles in uniformitate et difformitate. E t similium talis potest dari in their [uniformity and] difformity and others are dissimilar in uniformity and dif-
20 diffinitio: qualitates similes in uniformitate aut difformitate sunt que yma- formity. T he follow ing definition o f similar [qualities] can be g iv e n : Those qual­
ginande sunt per similes superficies; vel si sumantur duo puncta vel tria in ities are similar in uniformity or difformity which are to be imagined by similar
una erit eorum proportio in intensione sicud in alia aliquorum equaliter surfaces. O r, if tw o or three points are assumed in one, the ratio o f them in intensity
distantium vel proportionaliter. w ill be the same as the ratio o f some equally or proportionally distant points in the
Tunc pono propositiones. other.
25 Prima propositio est quod omnes qualitates uniformes sunt sibi invicem Then I pose the propositions.
similes in intensione, quia puncta sunt similiter intensa, et in extensione, 1. The first proposition is that all uniform qualities are similar to one another in
quia sunt similiter extensa, sed non sunt similes in intensione et extensione intensity because the points are similarly intended. [They are also similar] in ex­
simul. E t dico quod non semper est proportio intensionis ad extensionem et tension since they are similarly extended. But they are not [all] similar in intensity
econtrario. Patet, quia ymaginande sunt per quadrangula <dis>similia. and extension simultaneously. A nd I say that the ratio o f intensity to extension and
30 Secunda est quod non omnes uniformiter difformes sunt similes. Patet, vice versa is not always the same. This is obvious, for they are [sometimes] to be
quia una ymaginatur per unum triangulum et alia per triangulum dissimi­ imagined by dissimilar quadrangles.3
lem; et etiam non est eadem proportio intensionis punctorum in una qualis 2. T he second [proposition] is that not all uniformly difform [qualities] are
est in alia. similar. This is evident, for one is imagined by one triangle and another by a dis­
29v, c.i Tertia est quod / si in aliquo subiecto sit aliqua qualitas sicud semicircu- similar triangle; and also there is not the same ratio o f intensity o f the points in one
35 lus, nulla maior aut minor potest esse per tale subiectum extensa per totum as there is in another.
3. The third [proposition] is that, if in some subject there is some quality [imag­
9 motus cs movetur v 19 et1 om. s / in uniformitate et difformitate s ined] as a semicircle, no greater or lesser amount [of the quality] can be extended
9-10 calidius quam v callidius s calidus c om. cv I similium c similiter v non s / talis tr.
10 vel fere om. s sv ante diffinitio in linea 20 j dare v
Question 13 version has continentia and the latter is reflective
11 prius dicta cv per ea que prius dicta sunt s 20 similes om. s
1 For those schoolmen who held that a lati­ o f the Greek text.
12 Hic est notandum c notandum s notandum 21 similes superficies c tr. s supposiciones simi­ 3 Notice that I have emended the text from
tude uniformly difform corresponds to its
est v les v
most intense degree, see M. Clagett, Giovanni similia to dissimilia. Another possibility would
13 ut notum est sv om. c / Item c iterum v itms / 22 erit om. c / eorum om. s / in ... equaliter corr. be to leave similia as written and to add aliter
Marliani and Late Medieval Physics, 10 3-5. See
sunt om. v / alie cs quedam v / sicud c quia ex in aliqua aliorum in c et aliorum eque v after quia; then the translation would read, “ for
also The Science of Mechanics, 264-65, fn. 10.
sicut v et sicud s et alliorum in allia equalliter s 2 See the ed. o f Basel, 1546, 137. Notice that otherwise they are to be imagined by similar
14 dicitur in cs dicit v 23 proportion
where Oresme has respicientia the Campanus quadrangles.”
15 angulis: angulus v / equos angulos tr. v 24 T u n c... propositiones c om. s Tunc v
15-16 proportionalia: equallia s 25 propositio s om. c proportio v / est om. s /
17 quedam sunt tr. s quod sv quomodo c simul c non v /intensionis punctorum cs punctorum
17-18 equales et alie: quedam equalitates que­ 26-29 H 1__ econtrario om. s 29 immaginanda v intensione v / qualis est cs sicut v
dam v 26-27 in1... in com.v 30 non om. v / similes cv equalles s 33 post alia add. s ut patet in figura
18 et1 om. s / Et om. v / difformitate s om. c dif­ 28-29 simul__ econtrario v quia sunt super 31 unum om. v / e t ... triangulum om. s 34 in om. s / qualitas om. c
formes v una extensa sed non sunt similes cac (/) 32 etiam cv ideo s / n o n ...eadem s, (?)c est 35 nulla s in illa c et illa v / per totum c om. sv
 556 Appendix I Q uestions on the Geometry o f E u c lid : Q uestion 13 557

consimiliter difformis. H oc probatur per 22am 3“ huius, quia super eandem
lineam non possunt fieri due portiones circuli sibi invicem similes.
Tunc pono alias propositiones.
Prima est quod cuiuslibet uniformiter difformis ad non gradum quelibet
40 pars terminata ad non gradum est similis suo toti. H oc patet, quia qualitas
totius et qualitas partis sunt sicud duo trianguli, ut patet in figura, qui sunt
equianguli; igitur per 4am sexti latera sunt proportionalia; igitur per diffini­
tionem illi sunt similes; igitur qualitates per quas ymaginantur sunt similes.
Secunda est quod omnis subiecti uniformiter difformis ad non gradum
45 proportio qualitatis totius ad qualitatem partis terminate ad non gradum est
sicud proportio totius subiecti ad istam partem, proportio duplicata. Patet
primo, quia per precedentem tales trianguli et tales qualitates sunt similes,
sed triangulorum similium est proportio sicud lateris ad latus correlativum
proportio duplicata per i7 am 6!, sed extensio subiecti est sicud latus trianguli
50 signantis qualitatem; ex quo patet propositum. Secundo patet ex exemplo,
quia sumpto uno tali sicud a et medietate eius terminata ad non gradum sicud
b, tunc patet ex isto, cum proportio quadrupla sit dupla ad duplam, et quali­
tas totius erit dupla ad illam partem, ut patet in figura [Fig. 15 ], quia possunt
fieri in toto quattuor tales trianguli. Consimiliter dicendum esset quod si
55 subiectum esset trium pedum, tota qualitas esset sicud 9 et qualitas primi
through such a subject so that it is similarly difform [as a semicircle] throughout.
This is proved by III.22 o f this [work, the Elements], for upon the same line there
cannot be constructed tw o mutually similar segments o f a circle.4
Then I pose other propositions.
1. The first is that, in the case o f any [quality] uniformly difform at no degree,
any part terminated at no degree is similar to its whole. This is evident, for the
quality o f the w hole and the quality o f the part are as tw o triangles, as is evident
in the figure. These triangles are equiangular. Hence by V I .4 [of the Elements\ the
sides are proportional.5 Therefore, by definition they are similar. Therefore, the
qualities w hich they represent are similar.6
2. The second is that, in the case o f every subject uniformly difform [in quality]
to no degree, the ratio o f the w hole quality to the quality o f a part terminated at no
degree is as the square o f the ratio o f the w hole subject to that part [of the subject].7
This is evident in the first place because, by the preceding [proposition], such
triangles and such qualities are similar. But the ratio o f similar triangles is as the
square o f the ratio o f a side to a corresponding side, by V I. 17 [of the Elements],8
but the extension o f the subject is as the side o f the triangle designating the quality.
From this, the proposition is evident. In the second place, it is evident by an exam­
ple. Assume a is such a quality and b its half terminated at no degree. Then it is
evident from this, since a quadruple ratio is double a double rado, and [the sub­
ject of] the w hole quality is double that part [of the subject], as is evident in the
figure, while four such triangles can be made in the w hole [triangle] [see Fig. 15].
Similarly it w ould have to be said that, if the subject were three feet, the w hole
quality w ould be as 9, and the quality o f the first foot [starting from the most in-

36 consimiliter sv consimile c j 311 huius cs tr. v /
quia sc quod v / super sv consimiliter c
37 fieri sv sicud c / portiones c proportiones sv
/ circuli... similes: similes sibi invicem cir­
culi v
38 Tunc: Moddo s / alias c aliquas sv / propo­
sitiones v om. cs
39 est om. s
40 toto s I Hoc om. s
tione v
47 prim o... precedentem: per secundam par­
tem precedentem quia v / per om. s
m III.23 in the Greek text.
48 correlativum: corre c core s cormv [Ed( 1)
legit correspondens]
49 i 7 amrx2m (?)r
50 signantis c signans sv / patet1 cv sequitur s /
ex2s om. cv / exemplo cv allio s
4 Ed. o f Basel, 1546, 71: “ Duas similes cir­ traversal. Although Oresme constructs his
culi portiones inaequales supra unam rectam
lineam assignatam ex eadem parte cadere im­
possibile est.” III.22 in the Campanus text is
s Ed. of Basel, 1546,141: “ Omnium duorum
triangulorum, quorum anguli unius angulis
alterius sunt aequales, latera aequos angulos
continentia sunt proportionalia.”
6 I have changed the translation to agree
argument for the quantities o f qualities and
the subjects, he notes after the third proposi­
tion that “ one ought to speak in this w a y ... of
velocities in motions with respect to time.”
And he clearly means that the foregoing propo­
sitions hold for velocities as well. It is of partic­
ular interest that one o f the ways that Oresme
,. , Qx s,2
proposes to prove his theorem: p- = ^
Q 2 C>2

41 qualitas om. v / partis: partis tallis s / ut:
etiam ut v j sunt sv om. c
42 equianguli cs similes v
43 ymaginantur c ymaginatur s immaginatur v /
sunt similes sv et huiusmodo uniformitate
et difformitate c
44 est quod v om. s e s t c j omnis om. v j unifor­
miter c taliter v talliter omnis s / ad ... gra­
dum c om. sv
45 qualitatem om. v
46 subiecti om. s / istam c illam v iam s / propor­
51 sicud1 om. ccorr. ex sic in v et et sit ins j a om.
c j et cs om. v
51-52 sicud b cs et sit b v
52 isto cs illo v I post isto add. cv quod, sed. om.
s I cum cs om. v / proportione s / quadrupla
v om. s tripla c / sit cv sic \?)s j duplam:
dupla c j etc quod sv
53 erit cv est s j ut c om. v et s j quia: quia ibi s
54 fieri tr. v post toto / toto sv ca° c / tales om. s
/ Consimiliter c similiter v ita. s j dicendum
esset c om. v dicendum est s / quod s om. cv
with what is the evident intent o f Oresme, for
the Latin as given must be a slip on Oresme’s
part. Obviously the figures are not imagined
by qualities but rather the qualities by figures.
1 In Introduction II. A , I have remarked that does in his second theorem (see The Science of
this proposition is similar in form to Galileo’s
Theorem II o f the “ Third D ay” in the D is­
corsi, i.e., in the case of uniform acceleration
from rest, ^ di and d2 being the dis-
d2 t22
tances traversed and t! and t2 the times of
(Qi and Q 2 being the quantities o f quali­
ties and Si and S2 the subjects) is by the
mean degree theorem already mentioned in
Question 10, and this is precisely what Galileo
Mechanics, 410-11).
8 Ed. o f Basel, 1546, 151: “ Si fuerint duo
trianguli similes, proportio alterius ad alterum
est tanquam proportio cuiuslibet lateris ad
suum relativum latus alterius duplicata.”
 Questions on the Geometry o f E u c lid : Question 13 559
558 Appendix I

pedis esset sicud 5 et aliorum duorum sicud 4 [Fig. 16]. Tertio arguitur ad
idem, quia per primam questionem patet quod quelibet talis qualitas esset
equalis gradui medio quoad intensionem, ergo intensio totius est dupla ad
intensionem medietatis et extensio ad extensionem, ergo per 2am questionem
2 proportio qualitatum est sicud proportio subiecti ad / subiectum, proportio
61 duplicata, et eodem modo de aliis proportionibus. Fig. 15

Ultima propositio est quod eodem modo potest sciri proportio qualitatis There is a figure like this in s, but without the broken lines which I have added to illustrate lines
52-54. I have also put the letters a and b on it in accordance with the text.
uniformiter difformis terminate ad gradum utrobique ad partes eius, quia
quelibet talis est divisibilis in qualitatem uniformem et aliam uniformiter
65 difformem ad non gradum. E t ita dicendum est de qualitate superficiei
respectu subiecti sui, et de qualitate corporis respectu subiecti sui, et etiam de
velocitatibus in motibus respectu (tem poris).
A d rationem in oppositum queritur casus et dico quod non est dubium
quin iste qualitates sint equales. Utrum vero b debet denominari ita calidum
70 sicud a vel magis vel minus, est difficultas vocalis magis quam realis. Tamen N ot in c. In s there are several miscellaneous triangles and odd figures in io8v, but in none is the
subject divided into three parts. Hence, I have modified the figure in line with the figure as given
apparet rationabilius quod, postquam habent equaliter de qualitate, quod
in Question 14, q.v.
debent dici equaliter intensa, sicud equaliter calida vel alba. Patet ex exem­
plo : si a m ovetur uniformiter per horam et b per eandem horam uniformiter tense degree] w ould be as 5 and that o f the other tw o [together] as 4 [see Fig. 16].
difformiter incipiendo a gradu duplo et terminando ad non gradum, tunc A third argument for it is, that, by the first question [i.e., Question 10] it is obvious
that any such quality w ould be equal to its middle degree with respect to intensity.
56 5 s om. c ii v / duorum v pedum c duorum es­ t e r m in a tu m s Therefore, the [equivalent] intensity o f the w hole [uniformly difform quality] is
set s I arguitur om. s 65 est om. c I s u p e r f i c i e i om. c twice the [equivalent] intensity o f its half; and also the extension [of the w hole is
56-57 ad idem c om. sv 66 s u b i e c t i s u i 1 -2 tr. s / e t i a m a ' c o n s i m i l i t e r est twice] the extension [of its half]. Hence by the second question [i.e., Question 11],
57 questionem cv conclusionem s et s
the ratio o f the qualities is as the square o f the ratio o f subject to subject. One w ould
58 medio: meo c 67 r e s p e c t u om. s r e c / ( t e m p o r is ) add. E d . ( 1 )
59 intensionem medietatis cs partem inten­ c f Quest. 7/, lin. 23
use the same method for other ratios.
siorem v / extensio ad sv om. c / 2am sv 4am c 68 q u e r itu r .. .q u o d cco n ce d o casu m quo po­
3. The last proposition is that one can know in the same w ay the ratio o f a qual­
/ questionem cv conclusionem s s ito v p o n itu r ca su s q u o p o s ito d ic c o q u o d s ity uniformly difform terminated on both sides at a degree to its parts. For any
60 qualitatum: qualitatum vel extensionum c 68- 69 n o n .. .q u in om. s such [quality] is divisible into a uniform quality and one uniformly difform at no
I proportio2... proportio c subiectorum v 69 is te c ille sv / su n t s / e q u a le s : u t e q u a le s v
degree.
proportio subiectorum s / vero cs om.v
61 e t . . .proportionibus om. v / eodem modo:
A nd one ought to speak in this way o f the quality o f a surface w ith respect to its
69- 70 d e b e t...q u a m c (sed c om. m a g is 2 quod
ita dicco s add. ex s') d e b e a t m a g is d e n o m in a r i q u a m
subject and o f the quality o f a body w ith respect to its subject, and o f velocities in
62 U ltim a.. .quod om. s / Ultima c v / pro­ a e s t d iffic u lta s n o ta b ilis q u o d v debeat motions with respect to time.
positio v proportio c / est om. c / eodem: de v o m itis (!) m a g is c a llid u m s ic u d a T o the argument in opposition, the case is queried and I say that there is no
eadem c / sciri c fieri s inveniri v vel m in u s vel eque illa est d iffic u lta s
doubt but that these qualities are equal. N o w whether b ought to be denominated
63 uniformiter difformis 7 om. cv / gradum cs n o ta b ilis m a g is q u a m 7
non gradum v as hot as a, or more, or less, is a verbal rather than a real difficulty.9 Still it appears
71 r a tio n a b iliu s s, (?)c m a g is r a tio n a le v /ha­
63-67 utrobique — ( temporis >: quia omnis ta­ bent sv habet c / e q u a lite r cs eque v / q u a li­
more rational that, since they have equal amounts o f quality, they ought to be called
lis est dissimilis in qualitate( m> uniformem ta te : e q u a lita te c equally intense, as equally hot or equally white. This is evident from an example.
in difformem uniformiter determinatam 72 debent (?) s d e b e t c d e b e a n t v / e q u a lite r 1 cs I f a is m oved uniformly for an hour and b is uniformly decelerated in the same hour
ad non gradum dicendum est de qualitate eque v / s i c u d sv h o c e s t c / vel a lb a c om. by beginning from a degree [of velocity] twice [that o f a\ and terminating at no
superficiei respectu sui subiecti suo modo v v e l e q u a lit e r a lb a s / ex c om. sv
et etiam de velocitatibus v 73 m o v e a tu r s / b om. v / h oram 2 cv f o r m a m s
9 Oresme is correct about this question o f matter. See The Science of Mechanics, 215-16.
64 quelibet c omnis sv / qualitatem: gradum c 74 g r a d u d u p lo cs p r im o d u p lo g r a d u v / te r­
“ denomination.” It is an arbitrary, verbal
64-6 5 aliam... difformem c unifforme difforme m in a n d o cs t e r m i n a t o v
 560 Appendix I Q uestions on the Geometry o f E u c lid : Question 14 561

75 pertranseunt equalia spacia, sicud posset faciliter probari; igitur per diffini­
tionem velocitatis concedendum est quod eque velociter movebantur per
totam horam; ergo totus motus b non debet dici ita velox sicud fuerit
maximus gradus eius; et ita a simili non debet dici ita album sicud intensior
gradus eius.
80 A d probationem de altitudine superficiei, dico quod esse altum aliquid
connotat altitudo, et ideo dicitur ita altum sicud altissima illa linea, sicud
eadem est latitudo sicud altitudo, et tamen superficies non dicitur ita lata
sicud longior linea. Eodem modo dico sicud de alio exemplo.
degree, then they w ill traverse equal distances, as can easily be proved. Therefore,
by the definition o f velocity, it ought to be conceded that they were m oved equally
quickly for the w hole hour. Therefore, the whole motion o f b ought not to be said
to be as fast as is its maximum degree [of velocity]. A n d so by analogy [something]
ought not to be said to be as white as its most intense degree.10
T o the p roof concerning the altitude o f a surface, I say that “ altitude” connotes
that something is high, and therefore it is said to be as high as its tallest line. Still
latitude is the same as altitude and yet a surface is not said to be as broad as its
longest line. I answer the other example in the same way.

<Questio 14) Question 14

Consequenter queritur utrum cuilibet qualitati quantumcunque difformi
possit esse aliqua uniformis equalis vel uniformiter difformis.
E t arguitur quod non, quia, sicud dictum est prius, aliqua ymaginatur
sicud semicirculus et alia sicud quadratum et ista non sunt equalia, cum sint
5 diversarum rationum. Unde propter hoc dicitur 70 physicorum quod motus
circularis et rectus non sunt comparabiles.
Oppositum arguitur: omnis albedo est eiusdem rationis cum qualibet
30r, c .i / alia, igitur ibi est proportio, igitur ibi potest esse equalitas.
Primo videndum de uniformiter difformi in comparatione ad quantitatem
10 discretam et secundo de quesito.
Circum primum sit prima conclusio, quod omnis qualitas uniformiter
difformis ad non gradum cuius subiectum per aliquas partes equales ymagi­
natur dividi signanda est per numerum quadratum, cuius numerus partium
esset radix. V erbi gratia, sit subiectum divisum in 5 equalia [Fig. 17]. D ico
Consequently it is sought whether there could be some uniform or uniformly
difform quality equal to any quality however much difform.
A nd it is argued in the negative, for, as has been stated before, some quality is
imagined as a semicircle and another as a square and these are not equal since they
are o f diverse natures. W hence, for this reason, it is said in [Book] V II o f the
Physics that circular m otion and rectilinear motion are not comparable.1
The opposite is argued. E very whiteness is o f the same nature as another [white­
ness], hence there is a ratio there; therefore, there can be equality there.
In the first place, we ought to consider uniformly difform in relation to discrete
quantity and then secondly turn to the problem under investigation.
1. Concerning the first, let the first conclusion be that every quality uniformly
difform at no degree whose subject is imagined to be divided into some number o f
equal parts ought to be designated by the square number o f which the number o f
parts w ould be the root. For example, let the subject be divided into five equal

75 spacia corr. ex spacium in c. om. sv / sicud c
ut sv / faciliter cs om. v / probari c ostendi
sv
76 concedendum est quod sv om. c / moveban­
tur c movebitur s movebatur v
77 ergo... motus cs totum motum v / velox cv
album s / fuerit v om. c fuit s (et tr. s post gra­
dus in linea y8)
78 eius om. s / simile c / ita album c om. s ita
calidus v
78-79 intensior gradus eius cs punctus eius in-
tensul v
80 de cs ad v / dico om. c
80-83 esse.... exemplo: altitudo convocat et
ideo propter cognotone non est omnino
simile, unde latitudo et altitudo sunt idem
cum totus (?) superficies non dicitur ita
alta sicut maxima linea eius, tunc est finis
v
80 aliquid s om. cv
81 altitudo v om. s aliud ad c / e t... altum c et
ideo propter propter (bis!) illam connota-
tionem diccitur in allium s / ita c in s / illa
com. s
81-82 sicud2... lata c om. s
82 eandem c
83 longior linea c maior linea eius s / sicud2 c
om. s
Questio 14
2 uniformis... uniformiter: equallis s
2-3 uniformis.. .sicud: informis v
10 It is the common practice to use the com-
parative when the superlative is meant. See
Appendix II, fn. 9 to translation.
3 prius cs aliqua v
4 semicirculus cv circullus s / alia cs aliqua v /
quadratus v / cum sint v sed sunt c quia sunt
s 10 discretam: distinctam v / et c om. sv / de sv
5 U nde... h o c: ideo s / propter... quod: 7mo
physicorum dicitur propter hoc v
6 non sv est non c
7 In oppositum s / qualibet c om. sv
8 ibi est c est in v est ibi s / proportio... equa­
Question 14
1 See The Science o f Mechanics, 179-82, for the
pertinent passages in the Physics.
litas : aliqua equalitas cum ibi sit proportio
in alia questione s / ibi2 tr. v post esse
9 de sv est dici c j in comparatione om. v
de in c
11 Circum c circa v circha s / sit cv est s / prima
om. s
13 numerum cs unum v
14 subiectum: sollum s / 5 : e tv
 562 Appendix I Questions on the Geometry o f E u c lid : Question 14 563

i5 quod qualitas eius est sicud 25. H oc patet, quia, sumatur qualitas remissioris
partis, tunc a rg u o : proportio qualitatis totius ad qualitatem illius partis est
sicud proportio subiecti ad illam partem duplicata, sicud demonstratum est ex
questione precedenti. Sed proportionem duplando fit proportionalitas que
est ad minus in tribus terminis, ut patet per 9am [diffinitionem] 5l, et omnium
20 trium numerorum ab unitate continue proportionalium tertius est quadratus
per 8am91, igitur iste tertius numerus qui resultat ex duplicatione proportionis
est quadratus et illo signatur qualitas preassumpta. Igitur etc. V erbi gratia,
prima pars est unum et subiectum est 5 et qualitas 25, qui est numerus qua­
parts [see Fig. 17]. I say that its [whole] quality is as 25. This is evident, for if we
dratus cuius radix est 5. Si queras, nonne posset per alium numerum signari,
take the quality o f the most remiss part, I argue that the ratio o f the w hole quality
25 dico quod sic, sed non ita competenter signatur nec numeratur nisi per
to the quality o f that part is as the square o f the ratio o f the subject [of the whole] to
primos numeros eius. Patet ergo per quem numerum et quam figuram quali­
[the subject of] the part, as has been demonstrated in the preceding question. But
tas uniformiter difformis debet signari.
in duplicating a ratio there arises proportionality, which is at least [constituted of]
Secunda conclusio est quod subiecto taliter diviso, et vocetur semper
three [continually proportional] terms, as is evident in the ninth [definition] o f
pars remissior prima, proportio partialium qualitatum et habitudo earum ad
[Book] V [of the Elements] ;2 and in the case o f three numbers continually propor­
30 invicem est sicud series imparium numerorum, ubi prima est 1, secunda 3,
tional from unity, the third term is the square, b y IX . 8 [of the Elements].3 Therefore,
tertia 5, etc., ut patet in figura [Fig. 17]. Probatur quia prima est similis
this third number which results from the duplication o f the ratio is a square and by
suo toti et similiter aggregatum ex prima et secunda, et etiam ex prima,
it is designated the pre-assumed quality. Hence, etc. For example, the first part is 1,
secunda, et tertia etc., ergo per precedentem sicud totum est sicud numerus
the subject is 5, and the quality is 25, which is the square number whose root is 5.
quadratus ita prima et etiam prima et secunda simul etc., sed ex consimili
I f you ask, “ Could it not be designated by another number?” I answer yes, but it is
35 aggregatione numerorum imparium semper resultant numeri quadrati, ergo
not so suitably designated or numbered as by its least numbers. It is clear, there­
fore, by what number and by what figure a quality uniformly difform ought to be
15 e st s ic u d cv om. s / H o c p a te t v om. c proba­ tio non competenter v non ita comparentur
designated.
tu r s / q u ia cv q u a r e s sicud proportio non ita s / signatur... nume­ 2. The second conclusion is that, w ith a subject so divided [into equal parts] and
16 p a r tis 1 : p a r tiu m v / tu n c : a lia s / argu o c ratur : signifficatur s / nec c ut v with the most remiss part designated as the first part, the ratio o f the partial qual­
a r g u itu r sv / i l l i u s om. v 26 quem...figuram c quam figuram et quem ities, i.e., their mutual relationship, is as the series o f odd numbers where the first
17 d u p lic a ta v d u p lic a ta m cs j s ic u d c u t sv jde­ numerum sv
is 1, the second 3, the third 5, etc., as is evident in the figure [see Fig. 17].4 This
m o n stra tu m cv d e t e r m i n a t u m s 26-27 qualitas: qualifier s
v in s is proved because the first is similar to its whole, and similarly the aggregate o f the
17 -18 e x q u e s tio n e q u e s tio n e e x c o n c lu ­ 27 difformis: difformiter c / signari s figurari v
s io n e c signari vel comparari c (sed dei. c comparari) first and second [is similar to the whole], and also that o f the first, second, and third,
18 p r e c e d e n ti om. v / Sed cs secun dum v d u p li­ 28 Secunda: 3& c j est om. s j vocetur semper c and so on. Therefore by the preceding [proposition], just as the w hole is a square
can d o v vocens (?)v notatur semper s number, so also is the first [part], the aggregate o f the first and second [parts], and
19 ad om. v j 9am sv co n versam 71 c/et: e u c lid is 29 remissior: uniformis ( ?)v / habitudo: alia
so on. But from a similar [i.e., consecutive] aggregation o f the odd numbers
(?) et v latitudo v
20 q u a d ra tu s s om. v q u a d r a t u m c 30 imparium numerorum ir. s / ubi c verbi
21 cv 4am s I 91 cs e u c l i d i s ( ?)v / i s t e c i l l e v i e 2 Ed. o f Basel, 1546, 107: “ Est autem pro­ 4 In Introduction II. A , I have also compared
8am gratia s hb! v
s In u m e ru s om. v cv s portionalitas ad minus inter tres terminos this proposition with Galileo’s corollary to
/ r e s u lta t r e s s is tit / ex 30-31 3 .. .etc.: 3a s
cs v j constituta.” The tenth definition is also em­ Theorem II, which he deduces for uniform
d u p lic a tio n e ad d u p lic a tio n e m pro­ 31 ut patet c patet etiam v patet s / quia cv om. s
cv d u p l i c a t i o n i s s braced by this passage: “ Si fuerint tres quanti­ acceleration from rest. Notice that Oresme
p o r tio n is 32 toti sv toto c / ex1... etiam om. v j et 2om. s
v c s c v tates continue proportionales, dicetur pro­ (like Galileo later) bases his proof on the theo­
22 illo id e o is tu d / s ig n a tu r fig u r a tu r 32-3 3 ex2... precedentem om. c / prima, secun­
sv om. c portio primae ad tertiam proportio primae ad 0 « Sd
s ig n a t ( ? ) j / I g it u r e tc . da corr. ex 2a, 2a in v et prima in s rem of Question 13, namely. in the
s (?)c u n u m f a c t u m v om. s secundam duplicata.” Qz Sd
23 unum m / e t1 / 33 post etc. add. s ut patet per questionem prece­
e t1 ... 5 om. v j q u i om. s dentem 3 Ibid., 222: “ Si fuerint numeri ab unitate case of Oresme, and ^1 = — in the case of
24 s c fig u r a r i v s ig n a r e s continue proportionales, tertius ab unitate d2 t22
posse / s ig n a r i 34 et1.. .prima om. v / etc. et 3a c / ex bis s
25 c ita erit quadratus.” Galileo.
n o n ita c o m p e t e n t e r (?) s ic u t p r o p o r ­ 35 resultant cs fiunt ( ?)v
 564 Appendix I Questions on the Geometry o f E u clid : Q uestion 14 565

ipsi sunt debite ibi coaptati, ut patet exemplo, quia unum et 3 faciunt quat­ [beginning from unity] square numbers always result. Hence they are fittingly
tuor, qui est quadratus; similiter unum, 3, et 5 faciunt / 9, qui est quadratus, adapted to this context, as is evident in the example, for 1 plus 3 makes 4, which is
et sic ulterius procedendo, ut patet intuenti. Istud idem patet auctoritate a square; similarly, 1 plus 3 plus 5 makes 9, w hich is a square; and proceeding thus
Aristotelis in predicamentis, quia primus impar se habet ad unum sicud continually, as is evident to the observant. T he same thing is evident by the au­
40 gnom one et secundus similiter peragens secundum quadratum et ita ultra. thority o f Aristotle in the Categories,5 for the first odd number [3] has itself as a
M odo addito gnom one quadrato non variatur species sed semper fit quadra­ gnom on to 1 [producing the first square, 4], the second [odd number, 5] similarly
tum. H oc patet per commentum in diffinitionibus 21 huius et per Aristotelem producing the second square [4], and so on. Hence with a gnom on added to a
30 physicorum, tractatu de infinito, ubi allegat istam rationem quam faciebat square, the species [of figure] is not varied but always becomes a square. This is
Pictagoras, et ideo dicebat quod numerus impar est causa finitatis et par obvious by the comment in the definitions o f [Book] II o f this [work, the Elements]6
45 causa infinitatis, et ex hoc patet quod numerus impar est numerus perfectus. and by Aristotle in [Book] III o f the Physics? in the tract on the infinite, where he
E x istis sequuntur duo: primum est quom odo potest haberi faciliter pro­ recounts the argument w hich Pythagoras was accustomed to make, and hence he
portio talis qualitatis ad quamlibet eius partem determinatam et etiam par­ was w ont to say that the odd number is the cause o f finiteness and the even number
tium inter se. Secundum est quod idem potest haberi de qualitate terminata the cause o f infinity; and from this is evident that the odd number is the perfect
utrobique ad gradum, quia ipsa est divisibilis in uniformem et uniformiter number. From these, tw o things follow . T he first is the w ay in w hich the ratio o f
50 difformem ad non gradum.
such a quality to any determinate part o f it can be easily found, and also the mutual
N unc respondendum est de quesito.
ratios o f its parts. T he second is that the same result can be found for a quality
E t sit prima conclusio quod omnis qualitas qualitercunque difformis est uniformly difform that is terminated on both sides at a degree, for such a quality is
cuilibet uniformi proportionalis et potest dari aliqua uniformis sibi equalis.
divisible into [one] uniform and [one] uniformly difform at no degree.
Illud patet eo quod sunt eiusdem rationis. Verum tamen, ut dicitur in
N o w w e must respond to the question.
36 i p s i . . . c o a p t a t i c s u n t ib i n u m e r i d e b ite par cvn u m e r u s p a r e s t r 1. A n d let the first conclusion be that every quality how ever difform is propor­
co o p e ra tu s v s u n t d e b ite ib i c o m p lic a ti s / 45 i n f in it a t is c i n f in it is ( ?)v f in it a t is s j e x . . . tional to any uniform quality and there can be given some uniform quality equal to
post c o a p t a t i add. c v e l q u o t a t i (? ) / u t corr. p e r f e c t u s c om . v h o c e s t i n c o m m e n t o 36 it. This is evident, since they are o f the same nature. It is true, how ever, as is said
ex u incet m i n o r ins {sedom. v) j e x e m p l o cs (!, 2 6 , videnotam7 ) s
i n e x e m p l o v/ q u i a cs q u is v/ u n u m e t 3 s 2 e t 4 6 is t i s ch o c sv / f a c i l i t e r tr. vante p o t e s t
3 v 2 e t 4 .3 c 46- 4 7 p r o p o r t i o csom .v
3 6 - 3 7 q u a t t u o r cs 5 v 47- 48 d e t e r m i n a t a m . . . h a b e r i om .c
3 7 q u a d r a t u s 1 : q u a d r a t a c/ s i m i l i t e r . . . q u a d r a ­ 4 7 d e t e r m i n a t a m v d e t e r m i n a t a m p e r s u b ie - 5 Categoriae, C h a p . 1 4 , 1 5 a 30. I n t h e M o e r - t is .”
t u s om . vIe t s om. c j q u i . . . q u a d r a t u s som. c ctu m s 7 Physica, B k . I l l , C h a p . 4, 203a 1 0 - 1 5 ; in
beke tr a n s la tio n (e d . of L. M in io - P a lu e llo ,
3 8 u l t e r i u s com . vu l t r a s / I s t u d i d e m cve t i l l u d 48 S e c u n d u m e s t vs e c u n d o p a t e t s th e M o e r b e k e tr a n s la tio n ( T e x t N o . 26) a c ­
1 1 6 ) , it r u n s : “ se d s u n t a liq u a q u e a u g m e n ta ta
s 48- 4 9 t e r m i n a t a u t r o b i q u e sv tr. c c o m p a n y in g th e Expositio o f T h o m a s A q u in a s
non a lte ra n tu r, v e lu t quod li n e e gnom one
3 8 -3 9 a u c to r ita te A r is to te lis c p e r A r is t o t e ­ 4 9 i p s a cis t a vn u ll a s ( T u r i n , R o m e , 1 9 5 4 ) , 16 3 : “ E t h i ( P y t h a g o r i c i )
c ir c u m p o s ito c r e v it q u id e m , n o n e s t a u te m
le m sv 49- 5 o u n i f o r m e m . . . d i f f o r m e m su n u m f i e m et a l t e r a t u m .” T h e t r a n s l a t i o n o f B o e t h i u s {ibid., q u i d e m i n f i n i t u m e s s e p a r e m : h i c q u i d e m e n im
3 9 p r e d i c a m e n t i s svp u n c t i s c u n i f o r m i t e r d i f f o r m e m cu n i f o r m i t e r d if f o r - c o m p r e h e n s u s e t s u b im p a r i r e c lu s u s , a d h i b e t
4 0 ) is s o m e w h a t c l e a r e r : “ s e d s u n t q u a e d a m
3 9 - 4 0 i m p a r . . . i t a : in q u a d r a t u m e t s ic v m is v iis q u a e s u n t i n f in it a t e m . S i g n u m a u t e m h u iu s
q u a e c re sc u n t et n o n co m m u ta n tu r, u t q u a ­
39 s e com . s / a d u n u m ca d i n v i c e m s 5 1 r e s p o n d e n d u m cd i c e n d u m s v i d e n d u m v e s t q u o d c o n t in g it in n u m e r is . C ir c u m p o s itis
d r a tu m c ir c u m p o s it o g n o m o n e c r e v it q u id e m ,
4 0 g n o m o n e : g ° n e cg n o a s / s i m i l i t e r p e r a g e n s 5 2 ante e s t dei. ce s t e q u a lis e n im g n o m o n ib u s c irc a u n u m e t e x tr a , a li­
se d c o m m u ta tu m n o n e s t.”
c e t i a m ( ? ) s i m i li t e r s e h a b e t a d s / i t a : 5 3 p r o p o r t i o n a l i s s om . c p r o p o r t i o v / e t cs e t 6 E d . o f B a s e l, 1 5 4 6 , 4 0 , c o m m e n t t o t h e q u a n d o q u i d e m a l ia m f i e r i s p e c i e m , a l i q u a n d o
s ic j- / post u l t r a add. s u t d i c i t A r i s t o t e l e s e tia m v a u t e m u n a m .” T h e a c t u a l u s e o f “ c a u s e ” o c ­
s e c o n d d e fin itio n : “ c o m p o n u n t fig u r a m q u a n -
4 1 M o d o om . sIg n o m o n e cg n o n o n e sg am o r e v 5 4 I l l u d sv i t a c / e o s om . c e x v / q u o d cs q u o v c u r s in T h o m a s ’ c o m m e n t {ibid., 16 5 ): “ u n d e
dam , qui gnom o a p p e lla tu r , cu i d eest ad
4 1 - 4 2 s e d . . . q u a d r a t u m om .s 54 -5 6 V e r u m ...ib id e m c U n d e co m m e n ta to r v i d e t u r q u o d p a r s it p e r s e in f i n i t u m , e t c a u s e t
c o m p le m e n tu m p a r a lle lo g r a m m i, p a r a lle l o -
4 2 H o c p a t e t vom . ci d e m p a t e t s / c o m m e n t u m n e 5 1 h u iu s v n u l l u m t a m e n h u i u s m o d i i n a liis in f i n i t a t e m .” C f. A v e r r o e s ’ co m m e n t
gra m m u m unum re liq u u m c irc a d ia m e tr u m
cs c o m m e n t a t o r e m / zi \ p r i m i v / p e r ci m ­ a lliq u a n d o n o n e s t n o t a u n d e in c o m m e n t o c o n s i s t e n s , q u o d s i a d d a t u r , s u p r a d ia m e t r u m no. 26 ( J u n t a e d . , V o l . 4 , 96 H —I ) : “ d i v i s i o
p a r s e t i a m p e r v / A r i s t o t e l e m cvom .s q u in t o e u c lid is s ig it u r in duo m e d ia , c u iu s c a u s a e s t n a tu r a
t o t a li s c o m p o s i t i c o n s i s t e t , e r i t q u e s i m i le t o t a li .
43 f a c c i t r 55 [ d if f in it io n i s ] addidi / i 6 e 5 1 corr. ex n e 5 1 U nde p a r a lle lo g r a m m u m a d d ito gnom one p a r is , e s t c a u s a in essen d o in in fin itu m : et
44 P ic ta g o r a svP i t t a g o r a s r P i c t a g a r i s c j i d e o in v et n e (n e ?) 5 c / i l l u d : i ll a c / s c i b ilis c q u a m v is c r e s c a t, m in im e ta m e n a lte r a tu r , q u e ­ i m p a r , q u i a n o n d i v i d i t u r , e s t c a u s a ill i u s in -
cs om. v / f in it a t is c f in it is ( ?)v in f in it a t is s / m a d m o d u m d ix it A r is to te le s in P r a e d ic a m e n ­ d i v i s i b i l i t a t i s e n t i u m : e r g o e s t c a u s a f i n i t a t i s .”
 566 Appendix I Questions on the Geometry o f E u clid : Question 14 567

55 commento [diffinitionis] i6 e 51, quod illud non est scibile aliquando; dicitur in the comment to the 16th [definition] o f [Book] V [of the Elements] that some­
ibidem quod infinite sunt proportiones irrationales quarum denominationes times a ratio is not knowable.8 It is said in the same place that there are infinite ir­
sunt ignote et non sunt scibiles. rational ratios whose denominations are unknown and are not knowable.
Secunda conclusio est quod aliquo m odo equalitatis potest esse aliqua 2. The second conclusion is that some calidity and some frigidity can be equal in
caliditas et aliqua frigiditas, et aliqua albedo et aliquod lumen sunt sibi in- some way, and some whiteness and some light are mutually equal [in a certain
60 vicem equalia, et ita de aliis qualitatibus. E x quo sequitur quod quelibet fashion], and similarly for other qualities. From this it follows that any such quality
talis qualitas cuilibet alteri est aliqualiter proportionalis sicud frigiditas albe- is in some w ay proportional to any other, as frigidity to whiteness, and thus for
dini et sic de aliis. H oc probatur: sit a calidum et b album et sint equalia et others.9 This is proved: Let there be a hot body a and a w hite body b, and let them
sit quelibet istarum qualitatum difformis ad modum semicirculi, tunc per be equal [in subject]. L et both o f these qualities be difform in the manner o f a semi­
prius dicta iste sunt sicud duo semicirculi equales, ergo inter se sunt equales, circle. Then by the previous statements, these are as tw o equal semicircles. There­
65 et ita dicendum est de aliis. fore, the qualities are equal to each other, and so it ought to be said for others.
30V, c .i Tertia conclusio est / quod aliqua alteratio alicui motui locali equalis est 3. T he third conclusion is that some alteration is in some w ay equal to some
aliqualiter. E x quo etiam sequitur quod omnis alteratio alicui m otui locali local motion. From this it follows that every alteration is in some w ay proportion­
est aliqualiter proportionalis. H oc patet tripliciter: Primo, quia aliqua altera­ al to some local motion. This is evident on three counts. First, because some alter­
tio et aliquis motus localis facti in temporibus equalibus ymaginandi sunt ation and some local m otion produced in equal times are to be imagined by tw o
70 per duos semicirculos equales, ut patet in una questione, ergo sunt aliqualiter equal semicircles, as is evident in one question [, the eleventh]. Therefore, they are
equales, ut dictum est in qualitatibus. Secundo: ex una questione iam patet in some w ay equal, as has been said in regard to qualities. Secondly, from one
quod aliqua linea signans intensionem et aliqua linea extensa sunt aliqualiter question [also the eleventh], it is already evident that some line designating inten­
equales, ut patet in qualitate ymaginata per semicirculum, ergo motus loca­ sity and some line o f extension are in a certain w ay equal, as is evident in the quality
lis, per quem linea extensa pertransitur, et alteratio, qua acquiretur intensio imagined by a semicircle. Therefore, the local motion by which the extended line is
75 similis tali linee, essent aliqualiter equales, sicud patet in figura [Fig. 18]. traversed and the alteration by which an intensity similar to such a line is acquired
Tertio: velocitas in motu consequitur proportionem, ergo alteratio unius w ould in some w ay be equal, as is evident in the figure [see Fig. 18]. Thirdly,
hore consequens proportionem duplam et motus localis consequens consimi­ velocity in motion follows upon a ratio, therefore an alteration follow ing a double
lem proportionem sunt aliqualiter equales; <motus localis est) maior quam ratio and a local m otion follow ing a similar ratio are in some way equal. T he local

56 q u o d om. s / p r o p o r t i o n a l i s i r r a t i o n a l i s s tu d o a lic u i cq u e lib e t a lte r a tio c u ilib e t j

5 6 - 5 7 d e n o m in a tio n e s s u n t svom. c v I llu d p a te t tr ip lic ite r s
68 H o c . . . t r i p l i c i t e r
5 7 e t svq u e c / s u n t om .v ap p aret h o c c j P r i m o : e x p r i m o c / a l iq u a
58 e s t vom . cs / m o d o svom. c om. v
5 9 a l i q u a 1 om . v / e t 2 : c u m v /et3om. c 69 f a c t i cvom . s j s u n t cs om. v
6 0 e q u a l i a ve q u a l e a ce q u a l l e s s /et... q u a l i t a t i ­ 70 d u o s cv s u o s s / e q u a l e t ( !)v j q u e s t i o n e s,
b u s c e t it a d e a liis sv et tr. svpost lu m e n in ( ?)c c o n c l u s i o n e v / a l i q u a l i t e r s a l it e r c
lineajy e q u a lit e r v In c; n o t in s.
6 x a l i q u a l i t e r vom . ca l i q u a s 71 u t cs s ic u t v / i n cs d e v / q u e s t i o n e cs c o n c l u ­
6 1 - 6 2 a l b e d i n i sva l b u m c s io n e v
62 s ic d e a liis : c e te r a s / H o c p r o b a t u r c q u o d 72 s i g n i f i c a n s v / a l i q u a l i t e r c om. s q u o d a m ­
p r o b a t u r q u i a s p r o b a t u r q u i a v / c a li d u m cs m odo v
a l b u m v / a l b u m j- f r i g i d u m a l b u m c c a li d u m 73 e q u a l e s : e x t e n s a s u n t a l i q u a l i t e r e q u a le s c / 8 E d . o f B a s e l, 15 4 6 , i n : “ E t si e s s e t o m n is s ic u t a r ith m e tic u s , e o q u o d m u lta r u m p r o ­
e t s ic v u t cvs i c u d r p r o p o r t io s c ita s iv e r a tio n a lis , t u n c fa c ile e sse t p o r t i o n u m ( u t d i c t u m e s t) s u n t d e n o m i n a t i o ­

6 4 p r i u s cs p r e - v / is t e cs i l l e v / s u n t s i c u d s 74 p e r . . . p e r tr a n s itu r c p e r tr a n s it lin e a m e x ­ in te lle c tu c o g n o s c e r e q u a e p r o p o r t io n e s e s s e n t n e s s im p lic ite r ig n o t a e .”

s u n t cvj e r g o . . . e q u a le s svom .c t e n s i o n i s vq u o p e r t r a n s s i r e t u r l i n e a e x t e n s - u n a e t q u a e d i v e r s a e ___S e d in f in it a e s u n t p r o ­ 9 A s I h a v e n o t e d i n t h e i n t r o d u c t i o n t o t h is

6 5 d i c e n d u m e s t ctr.som.v s i o n i s s I q u a s q u e cv j i n t e n s i o : i n t e d0 c p o r tio n e s ir r a tio n a le s , q u aru m d e n o m in a tio te x t , th is a n d th e n e x t p r o p o s it io n a re e x a m p le s

66 e s t 1 cvom . s / a l t e r a t i o cv a l t i t u d o s 75 t a l i vt a lis cs / s i c u d . . . f i g u r a cvom .s s c i b i li s n o n e s t : q u a r e . . .[ E u c l i d e s ] q u o n i a m o f th e u se m ade o f O re sm e ’s b e l i e f in th e

6 6 - 6 7 e q u a l i s . . . a l i q u a l i t e r c e s t a l i q u a li t e r u n iq u e n e s s o f th e s e m ic ir c le to r e p r e s e n t a c e r ­
76 m o t u csn u m e r o v c o n s id e r a t p r o p o r tio n e m re p e rta m in c o n t i­
p r o p o r t i o n a l i s v e s t c o n s i m i l i t e r e q u a llis s 77 m o t u s l o c a li s : m o t o to t a lis c n u is ... n o n p o tu it d if f i n i r e id e n tita te m p ro ­ t a in q u a l i t y .

6 7 e t i a m c om . sv / o m n i s . . . a l i c u i v o m n i s a l t i ­ 78 m a i o r corr. ex m a iu s c m a g i s s m a t is v p o r tio n u m p e r id e n tita te m d e n o m in a tio n u m ,

 568 Appendix I Q uestions on the Geometry o f E u clid : Q uestion 14 569

(alter at io ) si motus localis consequeretur maiorem proportionem vel (mi- m otion is m ore than the alteration if the local m otion w ould follow upon a greater
80 nor si consequeretur) minorem. ratio and less if it w ould follow upon a lesser ratio.
Iuxta dicta pono aliquas propositiones. Follow ing these, I pose some [further] propositions.
Prima est una descriptio alia qualitatis uniformiter difformis et primo de 1. The first is another description o f a quality uniformly difform, and in the first
qualitate lineari. Unde dico lineam esse uniformiter difformem in aliqua place concerning linear quality. W hence I say that a line is uniformly difform in
qualitate que sic se habet quod, si per ymaginationem aliquis punctus move- some quality w hich is so disposed that if by imagination some point were to m ove
85 retur super eam motu regulari, et illo alterato alteratione regulari, semper on it w ith regular motion, and w ith that [point] altered w ith regular alteration, al­
quilibet punctus super quem esset in linea esset ita intensus sicud ille punctus ways any point in the line over w hich it w ould flow w ould be just as intended as
motus. E t ita dico de qualitate superficiei respectu linee et de qualitate corpo­ that point in m otion.10 A n d I speak thus [also] o f the quality o f a surface w ith re­
ris respectu superficiei. E t si punctus, dum incipit moveri, nullam haberet spect to [the m otion of] a line and o f the quality o f a body w ith respect to [the
qualitatem, tunc talis esset terminata ad non gradum; et si haberet, motion of] a surface. A n d i f the point when it begins to be m oved w ould have no
90 esset terminata ad gradum. E t proportionaliter potest dici si ille punctus quality, then such a quality w ould be terminated at no degree; and if it w ould have
remitteretur. [quality], it w ould be terminated at a degree. One can speak in a similar w ay if that
Secunda propositio est ista, quod si huius intensio puncti vel alteratio point were remitted [in intensity].
puncti et motus localis eius sunt equales modo ante dicto, talis qualitas tunc 2. The second proposition is this, that, i f the intensity o f this point, i.e., the
ymaginanda esset per triangulum qui est medietas quadrati; et si motus alteration o f this point, and its local motion are equal in the aforesaid manner, such
/ localis sit velocior, tunc per triangulum qui esset medietas quadranguli a quality w ould have to be imagined by a triangle which is half o f a square;11 and,
96 longioris; et si alteratio sit velocior, per medietatem altioris. if the local motion is swifter, then by a triangle w hich is h alf o f a longer quadran­
Tertia est quod, si motus puncti et eius alteratio aliter se habeant, tunc gle, [i.e., an oblong w ith the long side horizontal]; and if the alteration is swifter,
qualitas erit difformis nisi fiat aliqua recompensatio alia, quia, si motus by the half o f a taller quadrangle, [i.e., an oblong w ith the long side vertical].
3. T he third is that, if the motion o f a point and its alteration are otherwise
related,12 then the quality w ill be difform unless some other compensation is

7 9 m o t u s : ille m o t u s s / c o n s e q u e r e t u r v om. s 8 9 -9 1 n o n . . . r e m i t t e r e t u r : g r a d u m e t it a d i c o 10 T h i s s a m e i d e a a p p e a r s i n t h e De configura­ s id e a n d BD t h e s h o r te r s id e ; a n d i f th e a lte ra ­

c o n s e q u itu r c d e l i n e a r e s p e c t u s u p e r f i c i e i e t d e s u p e r f ic ie tionibus, I . x i i . t i o n is f a s t e r , t h e n AB is le s s t h a n BE, a n d s o
81 d i c t a c is t a m sv / a l i q u a s : a llia s s j p r o p o s i ­ re s p e c tu c o r p o r is v 11 T h e a s s u m p t i o n t h a t li e s b e h i n d t h e s e c o n d AAEB is o n e h a l f o f a n o b l o n g w i t h BE t h e
tio n e s s p r o p o r t io n e s c c o n c lu s io n e s v e l 90 p r o p o r t i o n a l i t e r . . . d i c i cp a r i r a t i o n e s / s i s c o n c l u s i o n is t h a t w h e n t h e p o i n t w i l l h a v e l o n g e r s id e a n d AB t h e s h o r t e r s id e .
p r o p o r tio n e s v c
s im ilit e r tr a v e r s e d lin e AB, th e in te n s ity o f BC w ill 12 T h a t is , i f t h e p o i n t i m a g i n e d a s m o v i n g in
82 P r i m a cs a lia v j d e s c r i p t i o a lia c tr. s d e s ­ 9 2 s i c om . sv / in t e n s i o om. c / p u n c t i om. s h a v e b e e n a c q u ir e d , s u c h th a t a t th e e n d o f th e P r o p o s i t i o n 1 is n o t u n i f o r m l y m o v e d o r is n o t
c r i p t i o v / p r i m o svom .c 9 2 - 9 3 v e l . . . p u n c t i om .v m o t io n th e s u b je c t’ s q u a lit y w i ll b e im a g in e d u n ifo r m ly a lte re d , o r b o th , th e n th e fig u r e
83 U n d e cs t a n t u m v 9 3 e i u s cs e n i m v/ e q u a l e s : s i m i l l e s s/ a n t e com . as a s e m ic ir c le , a n d th a t th e d e te r m in a te BC r e p r e s e n tin g th e q u a lit y w i ll b e d iffo r m a n d th e
84 q u o d s i p e r s om . vq u o d p e r c sv / d i c t o csd i c o m o d o v / t u n c com. sv w ill b e eq u a l to AB w h ic h h as b e e n tr a v e rs e d f i g u r e w i l l n o t b e a t r i a n g l e u n le s s t h e v a r i a ­
84- 85 a l i q u i s . . . m o v e r e t u r : a l i q u o p u n c9t 4o y m a g i n a n d a e s s e t tr. s / e s s e t om . v / q u i sv b y t h e p o i n t i n u n i f o r m l o c a l m o t i o n . S in c e tio n in m o tio n c o m p e n s a te s f o r th e v a r ia tio n
m o to c q u e c I est ce s s e t sv AB is e q u a l t o BC, t h e n i t is o b v i o u s t h a t t h e in a lte r a tio n . H is e x a m p le o f th e m o t io n b e in g
8 5 e a m : e n i m c / r e g u l a r i 1 csu n i f o r m i v / e t s e t 9 4 - 9 5 m e d i e t a s . . . t r i a n g u l u m om .v tr ia n g le r e p r e s e n tin g th e u n ifo r m a lte r a tio n u n i f o r m l y r e m i t t e d w h i l e t h e a l t e r a t i o n is u n i ­
e t i a m cv / i l l o v om . cn u l l o s / a l t e r a t i o n e sv 9 4 s i om. sv, corr. ex s ic inc w i l l b e h a l f o f a s q u a r e . I f t h e a l t e r a t i o n is f o r m ly in te n d e d d o e s n o t a p p e a r to b e c o r r e c t,
e t i a m a l t e r a t i o n e ill a c / r e g u l a r i 2 cs r e g u l a ­ 95 t u n c c om . ^ y m a g in a n d a e s t s s lo w e r , AB is g r e a te r th a nBD, a n d s o AADB a n d i n t h e s im ila r p a s s a g e in t h e De configuratio­
r i v e l u n ifo r m i v 9 6 s i om . cv, corr. ex s i m ilis (?) ins I sit s om. cv nibus, I . x i i ,
is o n e h a l f o f a n o b l o n g w i t h AB t h e l o n g e r h e d o e s n o t s p e c ify w h a t th e v a r ia ­
85- 8 6 s e m p e r . . . p u n c t u s 1 cs e s t p e r q u e m l i b e t / m e d ie t a t e m cs m e d i e t a t e m q u a d r a n g u l i v tio n s in lo c a l m o t io n and a lte r a tio n w o u ld
E
p u n c tu m v
86 e s s e t 2 sv om
8 7 d i c o om
.c
. v j s u p e r f i c i e i cs u p e r f i c i a l i sv
97-
j a l t i o r i s ca l t e r a t i o n i s s l o n g i o r u t p a t e t v
98 T e r t i a . . . d i f f o r m i s om .v /1 h a v e to b e to p r o d u c e th is c o m p e n s a tio n . A
tw o -d im e n s io n a l s u rfa c e d o e s n o t a p p e a r t o b e

C)1 e s t c om. s / e iu s a l t e r a t i o tr. s a d e q u a t e t o h a n d l e t h e c a s e h e is i m a g i n i n g ,

88 s i cs s ic v / d u m cs c u m (?)v 98 e r i t c e s t r / n i s i cvs i n o n s / a l i q u a c om . sv a n d , as a m a tte r o f fa c t, th e c o n fig u r a tio n
89 t u n c t a lis c t u n c q u a lis v ill a s / t e r m in a t a : 98- 10 0 a l i a . . . r e c o m p e n s a t i o c om. sv d o c t r i n e is n o t e m p l o y e d i n t h is c a s e i n t h e
d e te r m in a ta v De configurationibus.
 57 ° Appendix I Questions on the Geometry o f E u clid : Question 14 571

localis uniformiter remitteretur et qualitas (/ alteratio ?) uniformiter inten- produced. For, if the local motion were uniformly remitted and the quality [i.e.,
ioo deretur, forte fieret recompensatio. alteration?] were uniformly intended, perhaps compensation w ould be produced.
Quarta <est> quod, si motus sit regularis, alteratio potest esse talis quod 4. T h e fourth is that, i f m otion is regular, alteration can be such that the quality
qualitas sit ymaginata sicud unus triangulus qui habeat angulum contingen­ is imagined as a triangle having an angle o f contingence, as some quality can be
de sicud aliqua qualitas potest ymaginari per talem triangulum. imagined by such a triangle.
Quinta est quod isto posito in velocitatibus ut quod, si sit una velocitas qua 5. The fifth is that, w ith it posited in velocities that the velocity w ith which a is
105 a moveatur, que ymaginatur terminari sicud angulus contingende [Fig. 19], m oved is imagined as terminated at an angle o f contingence [see Fig. 19] and that
et b moveatur una alia, que ymaginatur terminari sicud angulus rectilineus,
tunc illa propositio est vera, ut videtur, quod in infinitum tardius moveri a [C]
quam b erit verum et tamen a nunquam movebitur tardius quam b post
movebitur, ymo quacunque tarditate m ovetur unum et etiam reliquum,
no A d rationem in oppositum concedo quod aliquis circulus et aliquod
quadratum sunt equalia vel possunt esse, quamvis sit difficile probare quis
circulus et quod quadratum sunt equalia. T u dicis: rectum et curvum sunt
diversarum rationum. D ico quod cum hoc stat quod sunt equalia et possunt
esse.
I h a v e a d d e d th e le t te r s t o in d ic a te th a t th e a n g le o f c o n t in g e n c e is CDE a n d th e r e c tilin e a r
a n g l e is FDE.

o f b is imagined as terminated at a rectilinear angle, the follow ing proposition is

tru e: It seems that it w ill be true that a is m oved infinitely more slowly than b and
yet a w ill never m ove more slow ly than b after being in m otion; in fact, with
whatever slowness the one is moved, so is the other.13
T o the argument in opposition, I concede that one circle and one square are,
and can be, equal, although it is difficult to prove which circle and which square are
equal.14 Y o u say that a straight line and a curve are o f different natures. I answer
that, in addition, they are, and can be, equal.

10 1 Q u a rta cs 4 a c o n c l u s i o v / < e s t > supplevi j e a d e m (/) m o t u a m o t u q u a m b v

quod svom. c / p o t e s t cp o t e r i t sv
10 2 s ic u d c e t s ic u t v e r it s ic u d sj q u i . . . a n g u ­
l u m c c u iu s u n u s a n g u l u s e s s e t s ic u t u n u s
a n g u l u s sv
10 3 s i c u d . . . t r i a n g u l u m om. c / a l i q u a v e t i a m
a l i q u a r / y m a g i n a r i vp r o b a r i s
1 0 4 Q u i n t a e s t corr. ex q u i n t a in c q u i n t a c o n ­
c l u s i o e s t invet u l t i m o d i c c o ins / is t o cs i l l o
vj ut q u o d s i s om. cu t s i v
10 5 m o v e a t u r c m o v e b a t u r sv / y m a g i n a t u r sv
y m a g in a re tu r c
1 0 6 m o v e a t u r cv m o v e t u r s j u n a a lia cs a l i q u o
a l i o v j t e r m i n a r i s om . cv / r e c t i l i n e a r i s v
10 7 -9 t u n c . . . m o v e b it u r : e tia m eadem h o ra
s i m i li t e r it a e r i t v e r a s c i l i c e t i n in f i n i t u m
107 est ce r i t j / u t v i d e t u r com. s
10 8 e r i t . . . b c om . s / p o s t cp o s t e a s
1 0 9 t a r d i t a t e cv v e l l o c i t a t e s j m o v e t u r cv m o ­ 13 T h e b a s i c i n t e n t o f t h i s e x a m p l e is t h a t c u r v e o f t h e a n g l e o f c o n t i n g e n c e s w e e p s u p ­
v e b i t u r s j e t i a m com . sv h o w e v e r s m a ll t h e r e c t i l i n e a r a n g l e is , a p a r t w a r d . T h e p o in t th a t se e m e d p u z z lin g w a s th a t
1 1 0 r a t i o n e m cvr a t i o n e s s o f th e a n g le o f c o n tin g e n c e to w a r d th e b e g in ­ th is s itu a tio n w a s s o , e v e n t h o u g h th e le n g t h
n i q u i s csq u o d v n i n g w i l l b e s m a ll e r a n d s o t h e p e r p e n d i c u l a r o f th e p e r p e n d ic u la r a p p r o a c h e s z e r o a t th e
1 1 2 e t . . . e q u a li a c q u a d r a t o s i t e q u a li s v c u i lin e r is in g o v e r s o m e p o in t n e a r th e b e g in n in g t e r m in a tio n o f b o t h a n g le s .
q u a d r a t o e s t e q u a llis s w i l l r is e t o t h e c u r v e o f t h e a n g l e o f c o n t i n ­ 14 T h i s is a r o u t i n e a s s e r t io n o f t h e d i f f i c u l t y
112- 1 3 T u . . . r a t i o n u m c d i c i t u r c i r c u l u s id e m g e n c e b e f o r e i t r is e s t o t h e i n c l i n e d l i n e o f t h e o f k n o w in g th e q u a d ra tu re o f a c ir c le , th a t
vc u m d i c c i t u r e t c . s r e c t i l i n e a r a n g l e , a n d t h u s s in c e t h e s e p e r p e n ­ u l t i m a t e l y g o e s b a c k t o A r i s t o t l e i n t h e Cate­
1 1 3 c u m om . v / s u n t cvs i n t s d ic u l a r s r e p r e s e n t v e l o c i t i e s , t h e v e l o c i t y o f a gories ( s e e M . C l a g e t t , Archimedes in the Middle
113 - 14 e t p o s s u n t e sse c e t p r o p o r c io n a lia e t re p re s e n te d b y th e fig u r e e n d in g a t an a n g le o f Ages, A p p e n d i x I , 6 0 7 - 8 ) . B u t o f c o u r s e b y t h e
c o m m e n s u r a b ilia e tc . e t s ic fin is vlic e t s in t c o n t i n g e n c e m u s t a t s o m e e a r ly p o i n t a l w a y s tim e o f O r e s m e , A r c h im e d e s ’ p r o o f fr o m th e
d iv e r s s a s p e c ie e r g o e tc . s b e le s s t h a n t h e v e l o c i t y o f b a t th a t p o in t, De mensura circuli w a s w id e ly a v a ila b le {ibid.,
h o w e v e r m u c h i t la t e r b e c o m e s g r e a t e r a s t h e C h ap s. II, III, and V ).
 572 Appendix I Q uestions on the Geometry o f E u clid : Question // 573

<Questio 15) Question 15

Consequenter queritur utrum quodlibet sit ita album sicud aliqua eius Consequently it is sought whether anything is as white as some part o f it is
pars est alba. white.
A rguitur quod sic; quia superficies est ita alta sicud altissima linea eius et It is argued in the affirmative. Since a surface is as tall as its tallest line, and also
etiam corpus, ergo qualitas cuius intensio ymaginatur per altitudinem a body, therefore a quality whose intensity is imagined by the altitude o f a surface is
5 superficiei est ita intensa sicud punctus intensissimus, ergo subiectum est ita as intense as its most intense point; therefore, a subject is as intensely white as the
intense album sicud pars in qua est maxima intensio. Item corpus dicitur ita part in which the maximum intensity lies. A lso, a body is said to be m oved as
m overi velociter sicud punctus velocissime motus, igitur a simili aliquid quickly as its fastest m oving p o in t; therefore, b y analogy, something is said to be
dicitur ita album sicud etc. as white, etc.
Oppositum arguitur, quia motus factus in aliqua hora non est ita velox The opposite is argued, for the motion produced in some hour is not as fast as
3ir, c .i sicud velocior pars eius, ut potest / patere ex diffinitione velocitatis (/velo- its fastest part, as can be obvious from the definition o f velocity [i.e., o f the quick­
11 cioris ?) 6° physicorum, ergo per simile nec subiectum est ita album etc. er] in the sixth b ook o f the Physics.1 Hence, by analogy, neither is a subject as
Primo videndum est aliquid de comparatione qualitatis uniformis et white, etc.
difformis et secundo de quesito. First w e ought to consider the comparison o f a uniform and a difform quality2
Quantum ad primum ponatur quod a sit uniforme aliqua qualitate et and secondly the question under investigation.
15 quod b sit sibi equale. Tunc prima propositio est quod impossibile est quod 1. A s for the first, let it be posited that a is uniform with some quality and that b
b habeat tantum de qualitate sicud a, que sit uniformiter difformis ad non is equal to it [in subject]. Then the first proposition is that it is impossible for b,
gradum, nisi incipiat a gradu duplo [Fig. 20(a)]. which is uniformly difform to no degree, to have as much quality as a unless it
Secunda, quod potest habere tantum que sit uniformiter difformis a quo­ begins from a degree double [the intensity o f a] [see Fig. 20(a)].
cunque gradu inter gradum a et illum duplum et terminando ad gradum 2. The second is that it \b] can have as much [quality as a] if b is uniformly dif­
20 [Fig. 20 (b)]. form [beginning] from any degree between a and the degree double [the degree o f a]
and terminating [on the other side] at a degree [between no degree and that o f a\
[see Fig. 20(b)].
Questio 1 j 9 q u ia sv om. c / a l iq u a cs a lia v / ante v e lo x dei. c
1-2 a l i q u a e iu s p a r s c q u e lib e t p a r s e iu s v a l i­ a lb u m Question 1 j q u a d r a n g le w i t h r e c ta n g le EBCD r e p r e s e n tin g
q u a p a r s e iu s s 9 -10 v e l o x . . . p a t e r e : s i c u t n o t a p a r s c u iu s u t 1 For th e p e r tin e n t passages c o n c e r n in g th e u n ifo r m q u a lit y . N ow if w e re la te th e
2 post a lb a add. s e t i t a d e q u a l l i t a t i b u s a lia p a te t v A r is to tle ’ s d e fin itio n of th e “ q u ic k e r ,” in t h i r d p r o p o s i t i o n t o F i g . 20 ( c ) , w e s e e t h a t w e
q u a llita te I o p o te s t p a te r e : p a te t s / v e lo c ita tis sv v e lo c is Book VI of th e Physics, see The Science of can co n stru ct an in fin itu d e of q u a d r a n g le s
3 A r g u itu r cs om. v / s ic sv s ic u d c/ a lt a c a lb a c Mechanics, 176 -79 . FBCG th a t r e p r e s e n t a d iffo r m q u a lit y e q u a l
sv II 6° p h y s ic o r u m om. c, corr. ex 6 p h y s i c o r u m 2 T h e b a s i c i d e a o f t h e t h r e e p r o p o s i t i o n s is in q u a n tity t o th e u n ifo r m q u a lity re p re s e n te d
3- 4 a ltis s im a . . . c o r p u s cv a l t u d i n i s e iu s l in e ain v et j p h y s i c o r u m in s / p e r s i m i le cs a s i ­ th a t th e a r e a r e p r e s e n tin g th e d iffo r m q u a lit y o f b y r e c ta n g le EBCD , FB a lw a y s b e in g g re a te r
s m i l i (?)v / n e c . . . e s t : e r i t r / e s t om. c / e t c . b c a n b e a lte r e d b y v a r y in g th e d iffo r m ity a n d th a n AB, w h i c h l a t t e r l i n e is t h e i n t e n s i t y li n e
3 e iu s cs om. v com. v t h e i n i t i a l a n d f in a l t e r m i n i s o t h a t i t r e m a in s eq u a l to tw ic e th e in te n s ity o f th e u n ifo r m
4 e r g o . . . in t e n s i o cs v
e iu s a l t i t u d o 12 e t om.s e q u a l t o th e r e c ta n g u la r a r e a r e p r e s e n tin g th e q u a lit y . O r e s m e s a y s th a t th e d iffo r m q u a lit y
4- 5 a l t i t u d i n e m s u p e r f i c i e i cv li n e a m s 13 e t c om. sv u n ifo r m q u a lity o f a. I n th e fir s t p r o p o s itio n — ca n e ith e r e n d a t n o d e g r e e (C , i n t h e f i g u r e ) o r
5 i t a 1 cv is t a s / p u n c t t l s i n t e n s is s im u s corr. ex 14 Q u a n tu m a d p r im u m cv d e p r im o s s e e F i g . 20 ( a )— w e h a v e w h a t is e s s e n t ia lly a a t s o m e d e f in it e d e g r e e (C '). E x c e p t f o r t h e
i n t e n c i o p u n c t i in c p u n c t u s i n t e n s u s v i n ­ 15 quod1 c om. sv / s ib i e q u a lesv tr. c j T u n c sv re s ta te m e n t o f th e m e a n d e g r e e th e o r e m , h o ld ­ fig u r e s g iv e n in m a n u s c r i p t s, t h e r e is n o t h i n g
te n s io r p u n c tu s s om. c / p r i m a . . . e s t 1 cv s e q u i t u r p r i m o s / i n g a s it d o e s t h a t t h e e q u i v a l e n t u n i f o r m l y to assu re u s th a t O r e s m e d id not have in
S i n t e n s e c om. sv / p a r s c q u e l i b e t p a r s v / p a r s i m p o s s i b i l e . . . q u o d sv p o s s i b i l e q u o d mg. c d if f o r m q u a lit y th a t e n d s a t n o d e g r e e m u s t m i n d f i g u r e s w h o s e s u m m i t l in e s w e r e c u r v e d
. . . i n t e n s i o om. s / I t e m c z° sv 1 7 g r a d u d u p l o sv in d u p l o g r a d u c s ta rt fr o m a d e g r e e d o u b le th a t o f a. T h e sec­ in s te a d o f b e n t li n e s . O f co u rse, O resm e’s
7 m o v e r i v e l o c i t e r c tr. sv j v e l o c i s s i m e m o t u s 18 S e c u n d a cv s e c u n d o s / h a b e r e cs h a b e r i v o n d p r o p o s i t i o n is m a d e c l e a r b y l o o k i n g a t a b i l i t y t o f in d t h e a r e a s u n d e r s u c h c u r v e s w a s
om. v 1 9 - 2 1 g r a d u . . . q u o c u n q u e om. c F i g . 20 ( b ) . I t is o b v i o u s t h a t li n e FG in q u a d ­ v e r y l i m i t e d , a n d s o i t is r e a s o n a b le t o s u p p o s e
7 -8 a l iq u id . . . e tc .c q u a li t a s d i c i t u r in t e n s a s i­ 1 9 g r a d u m 1 s d u p l u m v / i l l u m s i n t e r v j et r a n g le FBCG can , w h ile a lw a y s p a s s in g th a t h e o r ig in a lly p re s e n te d ca ses w ith bent
c u t p u n c tu s e iu s v e t c . s te r m in a n d o s m a d o v / g r a d u m 2 s n o n g r a ­ t h r o u g h H , a ssu m e a n y p o s itio n b e tw e e n ED lin e s a s e x a m p l e s .
dum v and AC w it h o u t a lte r in g th e e q u a lit y o f th e
 574 Appendix I Questions on the Geometry o f E u c lid : Question 1 / 575

Tertia, quod a quocunque gradu maiori potest habere tantum, dum tamen 2]
[ [2 ] [A]
sit difformis sive ad gradum sive ad non gradum [Fig. 20(c)]; et eodem modo
dicendum est de velocitatibus respectu temporum equalium; et omnia ista
possunt patere in figura et in superficiebus et per predicta et cum hoc pos-
25 sunt adhuc dici multa alia. [D]
i[G]

[a]

[C]

Fig. 20
(a) taken from s; not in c. (b) taken from s; not in c. I have added the broken line (see fn. 2).

[F]

[D]
[cl

[C']
[Cl
Fig. 20(c)
The left-hand figure is reconstructed. The right-hand figure is drawn in ms s twice, very crudely.
The broken line indicates a line contained in one figure and missing in the other. Otherwise
the figures are the same. Neither is in c. I have modified them in order to reflect the text.3

3. T he third is that it [b] can have as much [quality as a] so long as it is difform

[in the right way] and begins from a degree greater [than the double degree] and
[this is so] whether it is terminated [on the other side] at [some] degree or at no
degree [see Fig. 20(c)]. A n d the same thing ought to be said concerning velocities
with respect to equal times. A ll o f these can be evident in figure[s] and in surfaces;
and, by means o f the aforesaid, many other things can be said in addition.

21 Tertia: Tertio s / habere s haberi cv / dum 24 et1 om. s / superficiebus cs superioribus v /

tamen cs tantum modo v
22 sive1 om. s / sive2: seu s / ad2 om. s / gradum2
om. v / eodem modo cs in (?)v
23 est de om. v / respectu om. s / temporum e-
qualium cs temporis v / omnia ista c omnia
hec v hec omnia s
et2... predicta c et predicta v predictis s
24-25 cum ...alia: iuxta quod possemus for­
mare multas propositiones s
24 h o c c h ecv
25 adhucom. v

A PPE N D IX II
The Anonymous
Tractatus bonus de uniformi
et dijformi
This appendix is concerned with one o f the earliest and most distinctive tracts
treating the configuration doctrine, the tract included in Erfurt codex, Stadtbibl.
Am plon. Q. 325, ff. 43r—45r, and briefly alluded to above in Introduction II.B.
W . Schum in his catalogue o f the Am plonian manuscripts suggests that the cursive
hand in which this and the succeeding tw o pieces are written dates from the middle
o f the fourteenth century.1 A nd indeed this hand is very much like other German
hands o f this period published elsewhere by Schum.2 Since the scribe does not
give his name, nor that o f the author, nor even the title, we have to reason from
circumstantial evidence for the date, title, and provenience o f this w ork. The key
question concerns the time when this codex was put together. W e know from the
Am plonian catalogue o f about 1412 that the codex existed in its present form, at
least by that date,3 and, o f course, this date must be a terminus ante quem for all o f
the works o f the codex. H owever, certain o f the tracts preceding the treatise
which w e are considering are dated by Schum as being o f later hands.4 So presum­
ably, if Schum is correct, the various items were bound together some time after
the composition o f our treatise but prior to the preparation o f the catalogue o f
1412. H owever, if the pieces were written successively in an already bound codex,
as they w ell m ight have been, we then have more specific evidence o f the date o f
our tract. For item number 9 o f the codex, w hich immediately follows tw o small
tracts (items number 7 and number 8) in the same hand as our tract (item number
6), is a Tractatus Iohannis de Wasia de proportionibus, whose colophon informs us that
1 W. Schum, Beschreibendes Ver^eichniss, 559.
4 Ibid., 559. Items 1-3 are dated by Schum
See items 6-8, and see fn. 4. as “ des spateren 14. Jh.,” item 5 as “ etwas
2 W. Schum, E xem p la codicum Amploniano- alter,” and presumably items 6-8 (item 6 being
rum Erfurtensium (Berlin, 1882), 24-25. See the D e uniformi), since they are all in the same
particularly the specimen plate XIII, No. 48, hand are being referred to under item 8 when
dated 1369. he says “ In feiner kl. Cursive, die mehr der
3 Schum, Beschreibendes Ver^eichniss, 812, Mitte des 14. Jh. anzugehoren scheint.”
item 31.
576
Tractatus bonus de uniform i et dijformi 577
it was compiled at Paris by Iohannes de Wasia in 1369. Furthermore, w e are told
by Schum that it is in the hand o f Iohannes de Wasia. I f this is correct, and if the
codex was already bound at this time, then the D e uniformi et dijformi predates 1369.
A n d even though it is in a different hand than Iohannes de Wasia’s tract, it is at
least possible that it comes from his pen ultimately,5 as I suggested in an earlier
w ork.6
Unfortunately w e cannot be precise as to a terminus post quem o f the tract. The
similarity o f the view s o f the author o f this tract with those found in the D e velo­
citate motus alterationis o f Johannes de Casali and in the Questiones super geometriam
Euclidis o f N icole Oresme suggests that it was probably written after 13 50.7 Finally,
in view o f the German hand and the fact that the codex includes a number o f French
works (such as commentaries o f Buridan and a tract o f Johannes de Lineriis), we
can tentatively suppose that the w ork was composed at Paris and written dow n by
a German student or master.
In selecting the title, I have employed the basic title given in the Amplonian
catalogue o f about 1412, Tractatus bonus de uniformi et dijformi. One should perhaps
add the term superficiebus to it in order to delineate clearly the chief emphasis that
this tract puts on surfaces (see fn. 1 o f the translation below).
I have said above that the author o f this treatise depended for the basic technique
o f graphical representation o f qualities and motions either upon the w ork o f
Casali or the tract o f Oresme on Euclid, or even on both. For the general distinc­
tions o f “ uniform ,” “ uniformly difform” and the like, it is clear that our author’s
ultimate source lies in the works o f the English schoolmen o f M erton College, and
most particularly in the Regule solvendi sophismata o f William Heytesbury,8 which in
a number o f instances he seems not to have understood properly. Still, in spite o f
its dependence on previous works and the mathematical fuzziness and ineptness o f
its author, the D e uniformi et difformi includes several novel twists. In the first place,
w e should note that the author frames his propositions entirely in the sphere o f
geometry. The propositions, then, relate to uniform and uniformly difform sur­
faces. It is only after the propositions are given and proved in geometrical terms
that the author then suggests, as corollaries, that they apply to uniform and uni­
form ly difform qualities and motions. In framing the propositions entirely in geo­
metrical terms, the author borrows some o f the language o f the philosophical
treatment o f uniform and difform qualities and motions and applies it to surfaces.
In this respect, the author is perhaps developing the initial description o f altitudes
in Oresm e’s Questiones, when the latter spoke o f the altitude o f a rectangle as being
uniform and that o f a right triangle as being uniformly difform.9
5 See fn. 24 o f the translation below. duction II.A, above.
6 Clagett, The Science o f Mechanics, 637. 8 See fns. 12, 14, 17, 19-22, 24, 26 o f the
7 For similarities with views o f Oresme and translation below.
Casali, see fns. 4, 5, and 8 o f the translation 9 See Appendix I, Question 10, lines 16-24,
below. On the date o f Casali’s work, see Intro­ 60-61, 65-67,69-75.
 578 Appendix II Tractatus bonus de uniform i et difformi 579

Another point o f individuality in our tract is the generality he achieves for uni­ procedure in a preliminary edition o f it for publication in the Saggi to be published
form and uniformly difform figures. Thus instead o f restricting himself to rec­ in honor o f the quadricentennial anniversary o f G alileo’s birth. Hence, it seemed
tangles for uniform surfaces and right triangles for the first kind o f uniformly dif­ inappropriate to add confusion w ith a new set o f line numbers. Incidentally, in this
form surfaces, he posits that the figures need only be parallelograms to be uni­ new version o f the text, I have here introduced some new considerations and add­
form surfaces and triangles to be the initial kind o f uniformly difform surfaces,10 ed an English translation.
although to be sure in the diagrams o f some o f his propositions the parallelograms The figures in the manuscript are very crudely drawn. Such alterations as I have
are drawn as rectangles and the triangles as isosceles triangles in apparent imita­ made in them are indicated on each drawing. In the variant readings the Erfurt
tion o f Casali (see Figs. 9, 10, 11, 12). In fact, if he intended such generality, it was manuscript is referred to by the siglum H .
achieved at the expense o f almost completely obscuring the graphing or coordinate
idea which emerges much more clearly when the latitude and longitude lines are at
right angles. I f the author w rote his tract after that o f Casali, he also seems to have
borrowed the horizontal orientation o f his latitude lines from the Italian author,
apparently rejecting the common vertical orientation given these lines by Oresme
and his follow ers.11 Finally, w e ought to suggest that our author ignores (if he
knew of) Oresme’s suggestion that the configuration doctrine m ight be extended
to three dimensions to represent a surface quality. Rather he proposes the super­
position o f tw o two-dimensional figures, one upon the other.12 Incidentally, in
erroneously framing Proposition III, the author shows a lack o f knowledge o f
elementary geom etry (see fn. 13 o f the translation below).
In my text o f this w ork, I have for the most part kept the medieval orthography,
such as sicud, relicum (for reliquum), -e for -ae. H owever, where there is a variation in
form like equidistans and equedistans, ti and ci before vow els (as in proportio and pro-
porcio), I have tended to retain the now more conventional first forms. N ote
also that the first tw o times (see variant for lines 9, 12) the scribe has used the
phrase uniforme difformis for “ uniformly difform” while everywhere else he has
used the more common uniformiter difformis. I have accordingly employed the latter
throughout. I have also kept equevelociter as one w ord, as our author gives it, since
this was usually the w ay it was written in the fourteenth century.
M y line numbers indicate the lines o f the manuscript, except that when a w ord
was divided in the manuscript so that half o f it appeared on one line and half on the
other line, I have kept the w hole w ord on the preceding line o f my text. This has
occurred in the follow ing instances:
43V: line 1-2 (pertran/seuntur), 25-26 (extre/mum), 26-27 (dica/tis), 38-39
(D JI), 45-46 (exten/se);
44r: 20-21 (inci/piens), 22-23 (-E /F ), 36-37 (quadri/laterum), 44-45 (as/sum-
ptum );
44V: i- z ( D B C / E ) , 38-39(mo/ventium), 52-53 (pertran/suerunt);
45r: 3-4 (parallelo/gramo), 5-6 (doc/tores), 7-8 (assig/nant).
It w ill be noticed that I have used this procedure o f line numbering only in this
text and nowhere else in this volume. The reason is that I had already follow ed this
10 See fns. 2-4, and 10 of the translation. 12 See fn. 6 o f the translation below.
11 See fn. 4 of the translation below.
 [Tractatus bonus de uniformi
et difformi]
/ Notandum est diligenter qualiter debeamus ymaginare quid sit super­
ficies uniformis et quid sit superficies /2/ uniformiter difformis et quid
superficies difformiter difformis.
Unde sciendum quod superficies uniformis debet ymaginari /3/ tanquam
superficies linearum equidistantium ita quod huiusmodi in una sui parte
non sit supereminens et in alia parte depressa sed quod /4/ uniformiter in
omni eius parte sit equalis latitudinis et extensionis ita quod omnes linee
tracte parallele (/) a lateribus oppositis sint equales. /5/Cuiusmodi est figura
quadrangularis: vel quadratum [vel tetragonus longus] vel figura elmuain
vel aliqua alia similis elmuain.
For 431:
vide notam 2. / elmuain1’2 corr. e x elmouin
5 [vel tetragonus longus] supplevi e x Euclide; (vide notam 2.)
The Good Treatise
on Uniform and DifForm [Surfaces] 1
It is to be carefully noted how w e ought to imagine what a uniform surface is,
what a uniformly difform surface is, and what a difformly difform surface is.
Thus one should know that a uniform surface ought to be imagined as a paral­
lelogram, so that it is not protruding in one part and depressed in another but in
its every part is uniformly o f equal width and extension in such a w ay that all the
parallel lines drawn from opposite sides are equal. This kind o f a figure is quad­
rangular: either a square, [an oblong,] a rhombus, or a rhom boid.2
1 This piece has no title in the manuscript. ficiebus emphasizes the central and fundamental
The title I have used is taken from that given role o f the surfaces.
in the Amplonian catalogue o f 1412 (Schum, 2 The interesting feature here is that the
Beschreibendes Ver^eichniss, 812). As I suggested author does not limit himself to a rectangle as
above, one could perhaps add superficiebus to an example of a uniform surface, specifying as
the title. All five propositions are concerned he does that any parallelogram is a uniform
either with uniform or uniformly difform sur­ surface. In fact he mentions specifically a
faces or both together. It is true that by means square, a rhombus, and a rhomboid. In listing
of the corollaries these propositions are then these “ quadrangular” figures his obvious
related to the conventional statements o f the source is the Elements o f Euclid, Book I, Def.
Merton College authors concerning uniform 22 (see the Adelard II-Campanus version given
and uniformly difform qualities and motions. in the Ratdolt ed.: “ Figurarum autem qua-
One might therefore argue that a more com­ drilaterarum, alia est quadratum, quod est
pletely descriptive title would b e: “ On uniform equilaterum atque rectangulum; alia est tetra­
and uniformly difform surfaces, qualities, and gonus longus, que est figura rectangula sed
motions.” But the most characteristic twist of equilatera non est; alia est helmuaym, que
this tract in relationship to other works of the est equilatera sed rectangula non est; alia est
time concerned wfith the configuration doctrine similis helmuaym, que opposita latera habet
is the transfer to the geometrical figures them­ equalia atque oppositos angulos equales, idem
selves o f some o f the philosophical vocabulary tamen nec rectis angulis nec equis lateribus
associated with the description of the intension continetur.” (I have altered the punctuation.)
and remission of qualities and motions. Thus Incidentally, this passage from Euclid also
we find the surface being described as a “ uni­ provides justification for the addition to the list
form surface” or a “ uniformly difform sur­ of uniform surfaces of tetragonus longus, whose
face” and the like. And furthermore, state­ omission was no doubt an oversight on the part
ments about these surfaces and their relations of the author. For he certainly would not have
are made the point o f departure for statements excluded an oblong from the possible figures,
about qualities and motions, given as corol­ particularly as he used an oblong, at least in
laries. Hence the addition to the title o f super­ Proposition III, to represent a uniform sur-
581
 58 2
Appendix II Tractatus bonus de uniform i et difformi 583
D e liiis dubitaret tamen /6/ aliquis forsan an sit superficies uniformis, et ita
But in regard to these [last tw o]3 one w ould perhaps doubt whether a uniform
dico quod sic: E t propter hoc declarandum suppono quod sit unum latus
surface exists; and so I assert the affirmative. For the clarification o f this I suppose
/7/ huiusmodi figure A B et relicum latus sibi oppositum C D et tertium sit
that A B is one side o f a figure o f this kind, and the other side opposite to it is C D ,
A C [et] quartum sibi oppositum sit B D . D ico tunc /8/ quod ista non debet
and the third side is A C , while the fourth side opposite to it is B D . I say, then,
ymaginari dividi per lineam G H nec per lineam F L sed per lineam G I [vel
that this figure ought not to be imagined as being divided [into similar parts] by
per lineam] K L , ut patet in /9/ hac figura [Fig. 1]. Isto modo debet ymaginari
line G H nor by line F L but rather by line G I [or by line] K L , [lines G I and K L
superficies uniformis.
being parallel to parallel sides A B and C D ,] as is evident in this figure [see Fig. 1].

Fig. i

fa c e . I t o u g h t to b e r e m a r k e d th a t th e g e n e r a l­ la t t e r , O r e s m e i n b o t h o f h is t r e a t m e n t s t h o u g h t
i t y s p e c i f i c a l ly e x p r e s s e d h e r e is i m p l i e d i n t h e i t f i t t i n g t o h a v e t h e i n t e n s i t y o r l a t i t u d e lin e
q u a li f i c a t i o n s t h a t O r e s m e m a k e s i n e s t a b li s h ­ b e p e r p e n d ic u la r , f o r o n e g e t s th e se n se th a t
i n g h is c o n f i g u r a t i o n s y s t e m in t h e D e configu­ t h e i n t e n s i t y lin e s , w h i l e i m a g i n e d as e x t e n d ­
rationibus, L i , w h e n h e s a y s t h a t t h e l i n e o f in g out o f th e s u b je c t in th e d ir e c tio n of
in te n s ity “ c o u ld b e e x te n d e d in a n y d ir e c tio n h e i g h t , w e r e a t le a s t w i t h i n t h e “ e x t e n t ” of
w h a t e v e r e x c e p t t h a t i t is m o r e f i t t i n g t o i m a g ­ th e s u b je c t. O n th e o th e r h a n d , i f o n e h a d th e
in e i t s t a n d i n g u p p e r p e n d i c u l a r l y . ” I n s h o r t , i n t e n s i t y lin e s a t a n o b t u s e a n g l e t o t h e s u b ­
th e g e n e r a lit y ex p ressed by th e unknow n j e c t b a s e li n e , o n e w o u l d h a v e t h e f e e l i n g t h a t
a u th o r o f th is tr a c t c o u ld h a v e b e e n d e d u c e d t h e q u a l i t y e x t e n d s b e y o n d t h e s u b j e c t in b o t h
fro m a c o n s id e r a tio n o f w h a t I h a v e c a ll e d d ir e c tio n s .
O r e s m e ’ s “ s u i t a b i l i t y d o c t r i n e , ” a s a p p li e d t o I n c id e n t a lly , it w i ll b e n o tic e d fr o m th e te x t
u n ifo r m ity , n a m e ly , th a t th e o n ly e s s e n t ia l and v a r ia n t r e a d in g fo r li n e 5 th a t I h a v e
p o i n t in c h o o s i n g t h e f i g u r e t o r e p r e s e n t u n i ­ c h a n g e d t h e a u t h o r ’ s elmouin t o t h e f o r m c o m ­
f o r m i n t e n s i t y is t h a t t h e i n t e n s i t y o r l a t i t u d e m o n in t h e m e d i e v a l E u c l i d m a n u s c r i p t s o f t h e
lin e s b e e q u a l. A r a b i c t r a d i t i o n s , ehmtain, s t a n d i n g a s i t d o e s
I t s h o u ld b e a p p a r e n t th a t in a c h ie v in g th e f o r t h e A r a b i c al-rnu1ayyin ( = rh o m b u s).
g e n e r a l i t y o n e lo s e s b o t h t h e g e o m e t r i c a l c o n ­ 3 I a s s u m e t h a t t h e d o u b t is o n l y a b o u t t h e
v e n ie n c e o f d e a lin g w i t h r e c ta n g u la r fig u r e s , p r o p r ie ty o f u s in g a rh o m b u s o r r h o m b o id to
7 A C corr. ex H G / [ e t] supplevi
l in e a m ] supplevi
a n d th e f e e lin g th a t th e fig u r e a p p r o x im a te s th e rep resen t a u n ifo r m su rfa c e . At le a s t th e
8 F L corr. ex F I / s e d corr. ex s c i l i c e t / [ v e l . . .
p h y s ic a l s itu a tio n . In c o n n e c tio n w ith th e e x a m p l e h e g i v e s is t h a t o f a r h o m b o i d . T o
 584 Appendix II
Superficies vero uniformiter difformis debet ymaginari ut /10/ superficies
cadens inter lineas rectas non equidistantes sed ex una parte et uno puncto
concurrentes et ex alia parte discurrentes /11/ ita quod una illarum linearum
copuletur extremitati unius linee stantis erecte et in aliqua superficie et alia
copuletur alteri /12/ extremitati, cuiusmodi est figura triangularis et talis
superficies vocatur “ uniformiter difformis incipiens a non gradu,” ut patet
in /13/ hac figura [Fig. 2]. Sed alia est “ superficies uniformiter difformis
incipiens a gradu” et illa ymaginatur tanquam superficies /14/ cadens inter
lineas rectas non equidistantes que in nulla parte concurrunt in aliquo uno
puncto, et ex una parte ille linee /15/ terminantur, scilicet una super extremo
unius linee ex eadem parte et alia super alio extremo illius linee ex eadem par­
te, /16/ et ex alia parte consimiliter super extremitatibus unius linee, et illa
9,12 u n ifo r m ite r corr. ex u n ifo r m e
Tractatus bonus de uniform i et difform i
In this way [then] a uniform surface ought to be imagined.
N o w a uniformly difform surface ought to be imagined as a surface falling
between straight lines which are not parallel but which converge in one direction
at a single point and in the other direction diverge in such a way that one o f the
lines is joined to the extremity o f a line standing erectly (and in some surface), and
the other line is joined to the other extremity.*4 A triangular figure is one o f this
kind, and such a surface is called “ uniformly difform beginning from no degree,”
as is evident in this figure [see Fig. 2]. But another one is [called] a surface “ uni­
form ly difform beginning from a degree.” A n d this is imagined as a surface falling
between tw o non-parallel straight lines which do not converge to some one point
in either direction but which are bounded in one direction by a [straight] line to
whose extremities they are respectively joined and similarly in the other direction
by [another straight] line to whose extremities they are respectively joined. A nd
the boundary line in one direction is shorter and bounds the surface with respect to
m a k e se n se o u t o f th e e x a m p le , I h a v e h a d to
c o r r e c t th e fig u r e s o m e w h a t a n d to s u b s titu te
^4 C f o r t h e s c r i b e ’ s HG in lin e 7 a n d FL fo r
h is FI i n l i n e 8. T h e p o i n t w h i c h is o b v i o u s l y
b e i n g m a d e b y t h e a u t h o r is t h a t , t o s h o w t h a t
t h e r h o m b o i d is a u n i f o r m f i g u r e , w e m u s t n o t e
t h a t a ll t h e la t i t u d e l i n e s a r e e q u a l b u t t h a t in
d o in g so w e m u s t b e c a re fu l n o t to ta k e th e
h o r i z o n t a l l in e s b u t r a t h e r t h o s e w h i c h are
p a r a lle l t o t h e s id e s , i . e . , n o t GH nor FL but
ra th e r GI or KL. T h e s e la tit u d e lin e s p la y a
c r u c i a l p a r t i n h is d e s c r i p t i o n o f u n i f o r m a n d
u n ifo r m ly d iffo r m s u r fa c e s as th e s u c c e e d in g
rem arks sh o w .
4 A s I h a v e p o in t e d o u t a b o v e , th e a u th o r o f in d e e d th e fig u r e h e a d d s in th e m a r g in ( F ig .
th is tr a c t h a s g e n e r a lly f o llo w e d th e tr a d itio n o f
C a s a li i n h a v i n g h is l a t i t u d e l in e s h o r i z o n t a l
r a t h e r t h a n v e r t i c a l , a n d t h i s is i n c o n t r o v e r t i b l y
sh ow n in every fig u r e a n d th r o u g h o u t th e
r e m a in d e r o f t h e t e x t . B u t i n t h is d e f i n i t i o n
th e a u th o r m a y h a v e b e e n u s in g a s o u r c e in th e
O r e s m e t r a d it io n o f v e r tic a l (a n d p e r p e n d ic u ­
la r ) la t i t u d e l i n e s ; a t le a s t t h i s s e e m s t o b e t h e
se n se o f th e p h ra s e stantis erecte a p p lie d to th e
li n e o f m a x i m u m d e g r e e o r l a t i t u d e t e r m i n a t ­
in g th e fig u r e u n ifo r m ly d iffo r m b e g in n in g
f r o m z e r o . T h e e x a m p l e t h a t i s a p p a r e n t l y in
h is m i n d is a n O r e s m e - l i k e r i g h t t r i a n g l e w i t h
t h e p e r p e n d i c u l a r lin e s r e p r e s e n t i n g d e g r e e s o f
la t i t u d e . N o w o n e m i g h t i n t e r p r e t t h e p h r a s e
as s im p ly m e a n in g “ p e r p e n d ic u la r ” to o n e o f
t h e i n c l u d i n g l in e s a n d n o t “ v e r t i c a l l y p e r p e n ­
d ic u la r .” In su ch a case th e p e r p e n d i c u la r s
585
w o u ld b e h o r iz o n ta l a n d h e w o u ld b e f o llo w ­
i n g h is c u s t o m a r y o r i e n t a t i o n o f f i g u r e s . H o w ­
e v e r , r e g a r d le s s o f o r i e n t a t i o n , i f t h e a u t h o r is
s a y i n g t h a t t h e l a t i t u d e lin e s a r e p e r p e n d i c u l a r
a n d t h e f i g u r e is a r i g h t t r i a n g l e , h e w o u l d
s e e m to b e a b a n d o n in g th e g e n e r a lit y a c h ie v e d
e a r li e r in d e s c r ib in g a n y p a r a lle lo g r a m as a
“ u n ifo r m su rfa c e ” w h e re it w a s o f n o c o n ­
c e r n w h a t a n g le th e la tit u d e lin e s m a k e w i t h
th e s id e l in e s o f t h e p a r a l l e l o g r a m . B u t h e
s e e m s o n c e a g a in t o r e tu r n to th a t g e n e r a lit y
w h e n h e sa y s in lin e 11 th a t th e fig u r e r e p r e ­
s e n t i n g t h is t y p e o f u n i f o r m l y d i f f o r m s u r f a c e
is “ tr ia n g u la r ” ( n o t “ r i g h t - t r i a n g u l a r ” ). A n d
2 ) is n o t a r i g h t t r i a n g l e . I t s h o u l d b e f u r t h e r
r e m a r k e d th a t in th e p r o p o s it io n s g iv e n la te r
th e tr ia n g u la r fig u r e s u s e d f o r u n if o r m ly d if ­
fo rm s u rfa c e s th a t b e g in at zero are n e v e r
d e s c rib e d as r ig h t tr ia n g le s , a n d in d e e d in o n e
c a s e ( t h e e r r o n e o u s P r o p . I l l ) t h e t r i a n g l e is
s p e c if ie d ( a l t h o u g h i n c o r r e c t l y ) a s a n e q u i l a t e r ­
a l tr ia n g le . F in a lly , it s h o u ld b e o b s e r v e d th a t
in th e s u c c e e d in g d e fin itio n of “ u n ifo r m ly
d iffo r m b e g in n in g fr o m a d e g r e e , ” th e lim it in g
lin e s r e p r e s e n t i n g t h e f ir s t a n d la s t d e g r e e s
a re n o t s p o k e n o f as “ s ta n d in g e r e c t ly ” a n d in
th e fig u r e a c c o m p a n y in g th is d e fin it io n ( F ig .
3) t h e s e l i n e s a r e g i v e n i n h o r i z o n t a l o r i e n t a ­
t io n a n d th e y a re n o t p e r p e n d ic u la r to e it h e r o f
t h e i n c l u d i n g lin e s . A n d s o a g a i n w e h a v e b o t h
h o r iz o n t a l o r ie n ta tio n a n d c o m p le t e g e n e r a l­
it y o f fig u r e .
 586 Appendix II Tractatus bonus de uniform i et difformi 587

linea que in una parte terminatur que est brevior terminat illam super­
ficiem /17/ quantum ad extremum eius remissius et alia terminans illas lineas
ex altera parte est longior quam linea sibi opposita et terminat /18/ illam
superficiem quantum ad extremum eius intensius, sicud est in ista figura
[Fig- 3]-
E t hic debetis considerare quod in superficie uniformiter difformi /19/
inter lineas non equidistantes plures linee traherentur a punctis in istis
lineis non equidistantibus inter que puncta /20/ si esset equalis distantia in
una linea signata omnes tales linee essent adinvicem proportionales propor-
tionalitate arismetica, sicud in ista /21/ figura [Fig. 4].

its more remiss extreme while the other line bounding the [including] lines in the
other direction is longer than the line opposite it and bounds the surface with re­
spect to its more intense extreme, as in this figure [see Fig. 3].

Fig- 3

And here you ought to observe that [if] in the surface uniformly diflform con­
structed between non-parallel lines several [parallel] lines are drawn from points in
these non-parallel lines, and if the points in one of the designated [non-parallel]
lines are equally spaced, then all of these lines would be mutually proportional in
an arithmetical proportion,5 as in this figure [see Fig. 4].
5 T h i s s i m p l y m e a n s t h a t in a u n i f o r m l v d if - f ir s t o f t h o s e t h r e e p o i n t s t h e o n e o f g r e a t e s t
fo rm f i g u r e ( s e e F i g . 4 ) w h e r e la t i t u d e l in e s , in t e n s it y .” A s a m a tte r o f fa c t, O r e s m e h a d

a, b, c, d . . . a r e e q u a l l y d is t a n t , a — b = b — c — e a r lie r in h is Questiones super geometriam Euclidis

c — d = __ T h i s is a n a n a l o g o u s d e s c r i p t i o n ( s e e A p p e n d i x I , Q u e s t i o n 1 2 , lin e s 3 1 - 3 3 ) g i v e n

to O r e s m e ’ s d e s c r ip tio n a p p lie d to a r ig h t a d e f i n i t i o n t h a t is a l m o s t p r e c i s e l y t h a t f o u n d

tr ia n g le (D e configurationibus, I . x i ) : “ if any i n t h is t r a c t . C o m p a r e a l s o J a c o b u s d e S a n c t o

th r e e p o in ts [ o f t h e s u b j e c t lin e ] a re ta k e n , M a r t i n o ’ s D e latitudinibus formarum , P r o p o s i ­

t h e r a t i o o f t h e d is t a n c e b e t w e e n t h e f ir s t a n d tio n 30 (The Science of Mechanics, 3 9 4 , 4 00 )

t h e s e c o n d t o t h e d is t a n c e b e t w e e n t h e s e c o n d w h ere in d is tin g u is h in g b e tw e e n u n ifo r m ly

a n d t h e t h i r d is a s t h e r a t i o o f t h e e x c e s s in d iffo r m a n d u n ifo r m ly d iffo r m ly d iffo r m , th e

i n t e n s i t y o f t h e f ir s t p o i n t o v e r t h a t o f t h e s e c ­ a u t h o r n o t e s t h a t i n t h e f o r m e r “ t h e in c r e m e n t s

o n d p o in t to th e e x ce ss o f th a t o f th e s e co n d o f d e g r e e s e q u id is t a n t a m o n g th e m s e lv e s a re

p o in t o v e r th a t o f th e th ir d p o in t , c a llin g th e e q u a l to e a c h o t h e r .”
 588 Appendix II Tractatus bonus de uniform i et difform i 589

Et notanter dixi quod superficies uniformiter difformis est inter lineas

rectas non equidistantes ad denotandum J z z J quod superficies que est ad
modum vinearum non est uniformiter difformis, sicud in hac figura [Fig. 5].
Superficies vero difformiter /23/ difformis est ubi nulla respicitur uniformi­
ter et quando linee sint tracte, sicud dictum est, non sunt adinvicem propor­
tionales proportionalitate /24/ arismetica, ita quod superficies difformiter
difformis debet ymaginari tanquam superficies ubi nulla respicitur unifor­ F ig . 4
miter, sicud in /25/ ista figura [Fig. 6]. I h a v e a d d e d le t t e r s i n b r a c k e t s . T h e p a r a l l e l l i n e s h a v e b e e n m a d e e q u i d i s t a n t a l t h o u g h i n t h e
H oc ergo applicando ad qualitates et ad motus considerandum est quod in M S n o c a re w a s ta k e n to d o s o . T h e t w o fig u r e s a p p e a r o n th e o p p o s it e m a r g in s .

qualitatibus ymaginantur duo, scilicet intensio /26/ et extensio secundum

And I have stated as a noteworthy point that a uniformly difform surface is be­
gradus et subiectum, scilicet intensio secundum gradus et extensio per
tween s t r a i g h t lines which are not parallel to indicate that the surface which is
subiectum. E t sic possibile est aliquam qualitatem esse uniformem /27/
[shaped] in the manner o f [stepped] arbors is not uniformly difform, as in this fig­
ure [see Fig. 5].

F ig . 5

A surface difformly difform exists where nothing is regarded as uniform ; and,

when [parallel] lines are drawn as before, these lines are not mutually proportional
in an arithmetical proportion. Thus a surface difformly difform ought to be imag­
ined as a surface where nothing is regarded as uniform, as in this figure [see Fig.
6].

F ig . 6

Therefore, in applying this [technique] to qualities and motions, one should

observe that in regard to qualities tw o things are im agined: intensity and extension
according to degrees and subject, i.e., intensity according to degrees and extension
22 v i n e a r u m corr. ex ven earu m vel n en earu m through a subject. A n d so it is possible that some quality is uniform according to
 590 Appendix II Tractatus bonus de uniform i et difformi 591

secundum intensionem graduum [et] esse difformem tamen secundum ex­
tensionem subiecti. Exemplum sicud si una albedo sit uniformis in gradibus
/28/ et extendatur per superficiem uniformiter difformem, scilicet per super­
ficiem alicuius trianguli.
Sed qualitas potest alio modo uniformis /29/ secundum extensionem
subiecti et uniformiter difformis secundum intensionem graduum. Exem ­
plum ut si una albedo uniformiter difformis /30/ in gradibus, que esset que
ut unum, duo, tres, quatuor, et cetera, extenderetur per unam superficiem
quadrati vel per aliquam superficiem uniformem.
/31/ Sed qualitas potest tertio modo esse uniformiter difformis tam secun­
dum intensionem graduum quam secundum extensionem subiecti. Exem ­
plum ut si /32/ aliqua albedo uniformiter difformis per superficiem unifor­
miter difformem extenderetur, puta per superficiem alicuius trianguli. H oc
autem /33/ potest aliquotiens per ymaginationem diversificari: Uno modo
sic quod gradus intensior qualitatis sit in extremo superficiei latiori /34/ et
gradus remissior in extremo minus lato.
A lio modo sic quod gradus intensior qualitatis sit citra extremum super­
ficiei /35/ minus latum et gradus remissior qualitatis sit in extremo eiusdem
superficiei magis lato. Postea ymaginatur de qualitate /36/ uniformiter
difformi et eius subiecto acsi unus triangulus alteri esset superpositus, basis
<unius> basi alterius, conus /37/ unius cono alterius, sicud posset apparere
in tali figura [Fig. 7].
intensity o f degrees but difform according to the extension o f the subject: for
example, if a whiteness is uniform in degrees and extended through a surface which
is uniformly difform, i.e., through the surface o f some triangle.
But, in another w ay, a quality can be uniform according to the extension o f the
subject and uniformly difform according to intensity o f degrees: for example, i f a
whiteness which is uniformly difform in degrees (i.e., as 1, 2, 3, 4, etc.) w ould be
extended through a surface o f a square or through some uniform surface.
But, in a third w ay, a quality can be uniform ly difform both as to intensity o f
degrees and extension o f subject: for example, if some uniformly difform w hite­
ness were extended through a uniformly difform surface, e.g., through the surface
o f some triangle. M oreover, this can be imagined sometimes in different ways: (1)
in one way, so that the more intense degree o f the quality is in the wider extremity
o f the surface and the more remiss degree is in the less wide extremity; (2) in an­
other w ay, so that the more intense degree o f the quality is within the narrower
extremity o f the surface and the more remiss degree o f the quality is in the wider
extremity o f the same surface.
Then one imagines [case (1)] o f a quality uniformly difform with its subject [uni­
form ly difform] as if one triangle were superposed on the other, the base o f one to
the base o f the other and the apex o f one to the apex o f the other. This could be
made apparent in such a figure [see Fig. 7].6
[b]
[B] [f]

Fig- 7
I have added all the letters.

6 We should suppose in connection with
this statement that A A B C representing uni­
formly difform intensity is to be superimposed
on the equivalent triangle abc representing the
uniformly difform subject. In case (2) a similar
type o f superposition in the same plane is
employed but in this case the vertex of A A B C ,
27 [et] supplevi 36 ante alterius scr. et del. H albus representing uniformly difform intensity, is
29 post si del. H sit thought o f as lying in the base o f triangle def
which represents the uniformly difform sub­
ject. There is then here no attempt to represent
such variations in three dimensions as Oresme
suggested in the D e configurationibus, I.xvii,
and earlier in his Questions on the Geometry of
E u clid (Appendix I, Question 10, lines 45-49).
Incidentally, I know of no other author to use
the two-dimensional superpositions used here.
 592 Appendix II
D e qualitate uniformiter difformi extensa per subiectum uniformiter /38/
difforme cuius gradus remissior est in extremo magis lato ymaginor recte
sicud de duobus triangulis quorum unus /39/ alteri superponeretur et basis
unius trianguli cono alterius trianguli et similiter conus unius basi alterius,
sicud patet in /40/ figura superius habenda [Fig. 7].
E t notandum idem suo modo quantum ad motum. Potest dici quod qui­
dam est motus uniformis et quidam uniformiter difformis.
/41/ Item motuum uniformiter difformium quidam est uniformiter
difformis ex parte subiecti, uniformis cum respectu /42/ temporum, et talis
est motus semidyametri qui m ovetur ad motum circuli quia illa semidyame-
ter m ovetur uniformiter quo /43/ ad tempus; et ideo possibile est quod
equalibus partibus temporum vel temporis equale spacium pertranseat
quando tamen talis semidyameter /44/ m ovetur uniformiter difformiter quo
ad partes subiecti, quia interim quod m ovetur uniformiter quo ad tempus
eius partes a centro /45 / remotiores m oventur velocius quam partes centro
propinquiores, eo quod maiorem circumferentiam in eodem tempore et
proportionaliter arismetice /46/ describunt secundum quod partes que
remotiores sunt a centro maiores circumferentias describunt.
Aliquis vero motus potest esse /47/ uniformis tam quo ad tempus quam
quo ad partes subiecti vel mobilis, quod ad presens reputo unum exemplum
ut si aliquis /48/ descenderet et tunc in equalibus partibus temporis equale
spacium pertransiret et tunc quelibet pars eius m overetur ita velociter, siqui
/49/ ita esset, esset motus uniformis quo ad tempus et quo ad subiectum.
43V Similiter aliquis motus potest esse difformiter / difformis. Exemplum ut
esset motus quo in equalibus partibus temporis inequalia et inproportionalia
proportionalitate arismetica pertranseuntur /2/ vel aliquo alio modo dif­
formiter se habentia et consimili; vel est dicendum de intensione motus, de
qua tamen inferius ulterius /3/ dicam.
E t si aliquis querat quo modo superficies uniformiter difformis diffinitur
dicatis quod isto modo superficies uniformiter difformis /4/est cuius quarum­
libet duarum partium sibi invicem immediatarum linearum tractarum ab
uno latere non equidistantium ad aliud laterum /5/ longissima que non est
in una parte est brevissima que non est in alia, sicud linea que est longissima
que non est in illa parte versus /6/ extremum latius est brevissima que non
est in illa parte versus extremum strictius.
E t circa istud debetis considerare quod non nulli /7/ magistri hoc vel illi
aliquod consimile solent sic exponere: “ Linea longissima que non est in
parte latiori” est illa linea que non est ibi, /8/ nec eque longa secum est ibi,
45 partes corr. e x partis For 4 ;v:
47 unum: idem ? H 3 difformis1 corr. ex difformiter
4 mg. diffinitiones terminorum
5 longissima corr. ex longissimam
Tractatus bonus de uniform i et difformi 593
In regard to [case (2) of] a quality uniformly difform extended in a uniform ly dif-
form subject so that its more remiss extreme is in the wider side, I shall imagine it
just as tw o triangles, one o f which w ould be superposed on the other so that the
base o f one triangle w ould be on the apex o f the other triangle, and similarly the
apex o f the first w ould be on the base o f the other, as is evident in the figure to be
had above [see Fig. 7].
The same thing ought to be noted, in its ow n way, w ith respect to motion. It can
be said that certain m otion is uniform and certain other m otion is uniformly dif­
form .7
A lso, o f motions uniformly difform a certain one is uniformly difform as to sub­
ject while being uniform as to time. Such a motion is that o f a radius which is m oved
in rotation, for that radius is m oved uniformly w ith respect to time— and there­
fore it is possible that in equal parts o f the times or time it traverses an equal space
[i.e. an equal sector]; at the same time, however, such a radius is m oved uniformly
difformly with respect to the parts o f the subject, because, during the time that it is
m oved uniformly w ith respect to time, its parts that are further from the center
are m oved more quickly than the parts near the center, describing as they do a
greater circumference in the same tim e; and they describe circumferences that are
greater in arithmetical proportion as they are farther from the center.
But some motion can be uniform both as to time and to parts o f the subject or
mobile. For now I consider as an example some body that w ould be uniformly
descending and traversing an equal space in equal parts o f the tim e; and any part
o f it w ould be m oving at the same speed. I f there were any such motion, it w ould
be motion uniform as to time and to subject.
Similarly some m otion can be difformly difform. A n example w ould be a motion
in which in equal parts o f the time there w ould be traversed [spaces] which are
unequal and not in arithmetical proportion and which are relatable non-uniformly
in some other like fashion. O r one must speak about the intensity o f motion. O f
this I shall speak further below.
A n d i f someone seeks the w ay in which a surface uniformly difform is defined,
you might answer in this way, that a surface uniformly difform is one in which,
when any tw o mutually immediate parts are taken and one considers the [parallel]
lines drawn from one o f the tw o non-parallel sides to the other, the longest line o f
them which is not in one part is the shortest [line] which is not in the other.
[For example] the line which is the longest line not in the part toward the wider
extreme is the shortest [line] which is not in the part toward the narrower extreme.
In this regard you ought to observe that some masters are accustomed to ex­
pound this, or something similar to it, in this w ay: “ The longest line which is not
in the wider part” is a line which is not there [in that part]; nor is a line equally
7 For the common distinctions between uni- Clagett, The Science o f Mechanics, 248-49, 326-
form and uniformly difform given here, see 27,460-62,630-34.
 594 Appendix II Tractatus bonus de uniform i et difform i 595

nec aliqua minus longa est ibi, et quelibet longior ea est ibi; et “ illa est
long w ith it there; nor is some line that is less long there; and any line that is longer
brevissima que non est in parte /9/ strictiori,” i.e., illa non est ibi, nec aliqua
than it is there. A n d “ that is the shortest [line] w hich is not in the narrower part”
secum ita brevis vel eque brevis cum ea est ibi, neque aliqua longior ea est
[is expounded:] It is not there; nor is any line there as short, or equally short, as i t ;
ibi, sed quelibet /10/ brevior in parte strictiori est ibi.
nor is some line there longer than it; but any line shorter than it is there in the
Salva tamen istorum gratia istud non est bene dictum ; et hoc quo ad illas
narrower part.
dicens partes: “ linea /11/ longissima que non est in parte latiori est illa que
But saving their grace, this is not w ell stated. Let me speak to each part [of the
non ibi,” hoc enim potest concedi; et similiter quando dicitur “ et quelibet
exposition. A s for the first part,] “ the longest line which is not in the wider part is
longior illa est ibi” /12/ hoc est falsum, quia ex hoc sequitur quod linea
that which is not there” can be conceded. But similarly when it is said “ and any
longior basi est ibi, quod tamen est falsum. E t ulterius quando dicunt [post]
line longer than it is there,” this is false. For from this it follows that a line longer
“ et illa est brevissima que /13/ non est in parte strictiori” [quod “ illa non
than the base is there, which how ever is false. A n d further [in the second part]
est ibi,” ] hoc bene est verum. E t quando ulterius dicunt quod “ quelibet
when they say [after the clause] “ and that is the shortest [line] which is not in the
brevior ea est ibi” verum est quantum ad /14/ superficiem uniformiter dif-
narrower part,” [that “ that is not there” ] this is indeed true. A n d when they say
formem incipientem a non gradu; et tamen quantum ad superficiem unifor­
further that “ any line shorter than it is there,” this is true for a surface uniformly
miter difformem incipientem a gradu /15/ est falsum, nam linea que est
difform beginning from no degree; but for a surface uniformly difform beginning
brevior quam sit linea terminans partem strictiorem non est ibi. E rgo exposi­
from a degree, it is false. For a line shorter than the line terminating the narrower
tio [linee longissime que non est ibi /16/ et brevissime que non est in alia
part is not there. Therefore the expounding o f “ the longest line which is not there
est insufficiens, ergo] “ linee longissime que non est ibi vel in una parte” et
or in one part” and o f “ the shortest line which is not in the other [part]” is in­
“ linee brevissime que <non> est in /17/ alia” est insufficiens.
sufficient.
E t ergo oportet aliter dicere, scilicet quod linea longissima que non est in
A n d therefore it is necessary to speak in a different way :8 The longest line which
una parte, scilicet in parte latiori, est /18/ illa que non est ibi, et qualibet
is not in one part, namely the wider part, is that which is not there; and there is a
longiori illa linea brevior est ibi, et eadem linea nulla brevior est ibi, nec
line there which is shorter than any line longer than it; and no line shorter than it
aliqua sibi equalis est ibi; et illa eadem /19/ est brevissima que non est in
is there; and no line equal to it is there. A n d that same line is the shortest line
parte strictiori, et hoc, illa que non est ibi, nec aliqua sibi equalis est ibi, et
which is not in the narrower part, i.e., [it is] that which is not there; nor is some
qualibet breviori illa longior est ibi, /20/ ut patet in hac figura [Fig. 8].
line equal to it there; and there is a line there longer than any line shorter than it.
This is evident in this figure [see Fig. 8].

8 The application o f the scholastic concept objects that a line longer than the base o f A is
o f maximum quod non and minimum quod non to
the definition of uniformly difform qualities or
motions was quite popular from about the
middle of the fourteenth century. The author’s
corrected expounding o f linea longissima que non
est in una parte and linea brevissima que non est in
alia parte follows closely the exposition o f
Giovanni Casali and that o f an anonymous
peripatetic author {The Science o f Mechanics,
387; cf. 458, lines 175-84). Incidentally, the
first method o f expounding these terms which
the author has just rejected is found in the
D e proportionibus motuum of Francischus de
Ferraria of 1352 (The Science o f Mechanics, 503).
ReferringtoFig. 8, wecan see what the author’s
correction amounts to. When the expounder
1 5~1 & [linee... ergo] in //, sed delendum est ?
says in the first part of the exposition that any
line longer than O is in part A , our author
not in A . And when the expounder says that
any line shorter than O is in part B , this is true
for a uniformly difform surface terminating at
the apex o f B , but is not true for a uniformly
difform surface that is terminated in a line
short of the apex (say in line R ), for any line
shorter than R would then not be in part B .
So our author (as well as Casali) would sub­
stitute the statement in the first part that there
always exists in part A some line Q which is
shorter than any line P which is itself longer
than O. Or in the second part he says there
always exists in part B a line S that is longer
than any line R which itself is shorter than O.
The whole treatment of uniform variation by
this technique has interesting implications for
the analysis o f continua.
 59 6 Appendix II Tractatus bonus de uniform i et difform i 597

Iterum si aliquis querat alio m odo que [est] qualitatis uniformiter diffor­
mis, dicatis quod sic: qualitas fzi/ uniformiter diffbrmis est cuius quarum­
libet duarum partium sibi invicem immediatarum gradus uniformis intensius
vel intensus fz z j qui non est in una parte eius est remissius qui non est
in alia; vel sic: qualitas etc. est cuius gradus intensus est intensior quolibet
precedente /23/ et remissior quolibet sequente: E t intensissimus gradus
qui non est in A , quo quolibet gradu uniformi intensiori gradus /24/ re­
missior est in A , nec aliquis ita remissus est in A , ita quod A sit extremum
intensius; et ille idem est remississimus qui /25/ non est in B , quo quolibet
gradu uniformi remissiori gradus intensior [est] in B , et eodem nullus ita
intensus est in B , intelligendo per B extremum /26/ remissius, ut patet in
figura precedenti [Fig. 8].
Iterum si aliquis querat quo modo motus uniformiter difformis in inten­
I have added dotted lines and bracketed letters.
sione diffinitur, dicatis /27/ quod diffinitur sic: motus uniformiter difformis
in intensione est cuius quarumlibet duarum partium sibi invicem immediata­ Again, i f someone seeks, in another way, to define a uniformly difform quality,
rum gradus velocitatis /28/ qui est maxime velocitatis qui non est in extremo you might answer as fo llo w s: A uniformly difform quality is one in which, when
any tw o mutually immediate parts are taken, the more intense9 or the intended
uniform degree which is not in its one part is the most remiss degree w hich is not
in the other. O r [you m ight answer] as fo llo w s: A uniformly difform quality is one
whose [any] degree o f intensity is more intense than any preceding degree and more
remiss than any succeeding degree. A n d the most intense degree w hich is not in A
[is to be expounded as:] there exists in A a degree more remiss than any uniform
degree more intense than it; nor is there any degree as remitted as it in A — A thus
being the more intense extreme [i.e. part]. That same degree is the most remiss
degree not in B [which is to be expounded as:] there exists in B a degree more
intense than any uniform degree more remiss [than it], nor is there any degree as
intended as it in B — understanding by B the more remiss extreme [i.e. part]. This
is evident in the preceding figure [see Fig. 8].
Again, i f someone asks how a m otion that is uniformly difform in intensity is
defined, you m ight say that it is defined as fo llo w s: M otion uniformly difform in
intensity is that in which, if any tw o mutually immediate parts are taken, the degree
o f greatest velocity which is not in the more intense extreme [i.e. part] is the degree
o f least velocity which is not in the more remiss part. A n d you m ight understand

9 The use o f intensius and remissius where
intensissimus and remissimus were used by Casali
and others was apparently not uncommon (see,
for example, the tract o f Francischus men­
tioned in the preceding note: The Science o f
Mechanics, 503, asterisk notes). This is no doubt
an instance of using the comparative form to
stand for the superlative just as one often
25 [est] supplevi 27 diffinitur corr. ex diffinitioni (?) finds maior circulus when what is intended is
maximus circulus (see M. Clagett, Archimedes in
the M iddle Ages, Vol. 1, 2250; 280, line 19; 286,
line 90; 328, line 2; 352, line 56; 436, lin e 3).
The justification for this terminology seems to
be that the magnitude which is the maximum
is in fact greater than any other similar magni­
tude to which it can be compared in some
given set of magnitudes.
 598 Appendix II
intensiori est [ille qui] est remissime velocitatis qui non est in parte remissiori;
et intelligatis /29/ hoc iuxta expositionem secundam habitam.
E x premissis igitur secuntur quedam propositiones.
[I.] Prima est: omnis superficies trianguli correspondet superficiei /30/
quadranguli cuius duo latera opposita sunt equalia linee latera trianguli
dividenti per equalia, cuius quadranguli unum de illis lateribus /31/ iacet in
basi illius trianguli et relicum iacet per conum.
Exemplum ut si esset triangulus A B C [Fig. 9], latus dividens duo eius
/32/ latera per equalia sit D E , et fiat unus quadrangulus cuius latus G F
iacet in basi B C trianguli A B C equale linee /33/ D E , et latus sibi oppositum
I K transeat per conum trianguli A B C ', et sequitur quod superficies qua­
dranguli I K F G correspondet /34/ superficiei trianguli A B C quia superficies
quadranguli F I K G excedit superficiem trianguli ex una parte in duobus /35/
triangulis A D I et A E K quos probo esse equilateros [et] equiangulos duo­
bus triangulis D F B et E G C in quibus triangulis /36/ A B C excedit super­
ficiem quadranguli F I K G ex alia parte. E rgo superficies trianguli A B C
correspondet superficiei quadranguli F IK G .
/37/ Tenet consequentia unicuique studioso intuenti, quia, si una super­
ficies excedit aliam in una parte in aliquanto et alia eandem ex /38/ alia
parte in tanto sibi invicem correspondent.
E rgo assumptum ante probo sic: E t pono quod sint duo latera, scilicet
A D et D I /39/ trianguli A D I equalia duobus lateribus D B et D F trianguli
D F B , ex eo quod linea eius D E divisit A B in duo equalia; /40/ et angulus
29 mg. propositiones corollarie prima propo- duobus del. H duobus
sitio / ante superficies scr. H et delevi super 39 D B et D F corr. e x D F et D B
34 ante superficiem scr. et del. H super / ante
Tractatus bonus de uniform i et difformi 599
this according to the second [way of] expounding [a uniformly difform surface]
had [above].
Therefore, from the premises certain propositions fo llo w :
[I.] E very surface o f a triangle corresponds to the surface o f a quadrangle [i.e.
parallelogram] o f w hich tw o opposite sides are each equal to the line bisecting the
sides o f the triangle; one o f the sides o f the quadrangle lies in the base o f the trian­
gle and the other passes through the apex.10
A n example [would be] as i f there were a triangle A B C [ see Fig. 9], line D E bi-
1 A K
secting its tw o sides. A n d let a quadrangle be formed whose side G F lies in the
base B C o f A A B C and is equal to line D E , and the side opposite it, IK , we let pass
through the apex o f A A B C . A n d it follows that the surface o f quadrangle I K F G
corresponds to the surface o f A A B C , because the surface o f quadrangle F I K G
exceeds the surface o f the triangle in one part [i.e., the upper part] b y the amount o f
the tw o triangles A D I and A E K , which I prove to be congruent to the tw o trian­
gles D F B and E G C b y which A A B C exceeds the surface o f quadrangle F I K G
in the other part [i.e., the lower part]. Therefore, the surface o f A A B C corresponds
to the surface o f quadrangle F I K G .
T he consequence holds for anyone paying careful attention. For if one surface
exceeds another in one part by the same amount that it is exceeded by it in the other
part, the tw o surfaces correspond to each other.
Therefore, I prove what has been assumed before [i.e., that A A D I = A D F B
and A A E K = A E G C ] as fo llo w s: I pose that the tw o sides A D and D I o f A A D I
are equal to the tw o sides D B and D F o f A D F B because o f the fact that line D E
10 Compare this geometric proof with that speaks o f the parallelogram as a “ rectangular
found in the D e configurationibus, Ill.vii. See parallelogram” (parallelogrammo rectangulo).
also the various proofs o f the mean speed theo­ This illustration may reflect Casali’s proof
rem given in Chapters Five and Six o f The discussed in Introduction II.A. However, the
Science o f Mechanics. I have already noted in the proof is quite general for any triangle with the
introduction to this appendix that a right parallelogram whose base is equal to the bi­
triangle is not used to represent the uniformly secting line and whose altitude is equal to that
o f the triangle, as is clear from a figure like
difform surface. An isosceles triangle and a
that of triangle ABC and parallelogram
rectangle seem to have been drawn in the
F I K G in fn. 13 below.
figure, and later, on f. 45r, lines 3-4, the author
 6oo
Appendix II Tractatus bonus de uniform i et difformi 601

D unius angulo D alterius quia contra se sunt positi. E t tunc sequitur per
quartam propositionem primi Euclidis relicos angulos /41/ et relica latera
esse equalia et totum triangulum toti triangulo esse equalem et consequenter
esse probabile triangulum A E K esse /42/ equalem triangulo E G C .
E t ex isto sequitur ulterius quod superficies uniformiter diffbrmis corre-
spondet superficiei uniformi vel /43/ superficies uniformiter difformis
correspondet sue medie linee et per mediam lineam debetis intelligere pro
nunc illam lineam /44/ que secat duo latera alicuius trianguli in partes
equales, et bene vocatur media linea quia equaliter distat ab utroque extremo
/45/ superficiei uniformiter difformis, scilicet a cono et a basi, i.e., super­
ficies uniformiter difformis correspondet superficiei uniformi extense /46/
uniformiter ad quantitatem illius linee medie duo eius latera secantis ad
modum ad quem dictum est.
[II.] Secunda propositio /47/ est quod linea dividens duo latera alicuius
trianguli in partes equales est subdubla ad basim eiusdem.
H oc probo sic: Retenta figura /48/ basis trianguli A B C est linea B C ,
dupla ad lineam I K que est equalis F G et D E linee secanti latera / per pre-
dicta. E rgo etiam linea B C est dupla ad lineam D E .
Consequentia tenet per unam propositionem quinti Euclidis que dicit
sic: /2/ “ Si alique quantitates equales ad unam tertiam comparentur, tunc
illius ad ambas est eadem proportio.” E t assumptum probo, quia linea /3/
F G est equalis linee IK , ut patet <per) diffinitionem quadranguli, et linea
B F est equalis linee I A , et etiam linea G C est equalis /4/ linee A K prout in
probatione prime propositionis probavi. Ideo est dupla ad lineam I K tota
linea B C que est basis.
E t istud oritur /5f ex eo, quod solet dici quod in om ni latitudine unifor­
miter difformi incipiente a non gradu gradus medius est precise subduplus
ad /6/ gradum intensissimum eandem latitudinem determinantem.
[III.] Tertia propositio est: cuiuslibet trianguli equilateri (/) quadratum
basis est /7/ duplum ad superficiem trianguli hanc propositi.
has bisected A B ; and /_ D o f the one [triangle] is equal to /_ D o f the other
[triangle], for these are vertical angles. A n d then it follows by Proposition I.4 o f
[the Elements of] Euclid that the remaining angles, remaining sides, and w hole
triangles [ A D I and D F B ] are equal. A n d consequently [it follows] that it is
provable that A A E K = A E G C .
A nd from this it follows further that a surface uniformly difform corresponds to
a uniform surface, or [that] a surface uniformly difform corresponds to its middle
line, and by the middle line you ought to understand for n ow 11 that line which
bisects the tw o sides o f some triangle. A n d it is w ell called the middle line because
it is equally distant from each extreme o f the surface uniformly difform, evidently
from the apex and from the base. A ll o f w hich is to say, that a surface uniformly
difform corresponds to a uniform surface uniformly extended in the quantity o f
the middle line bisecting its tw o sides in the manner described.
[II.] The second proposition is that the line bisecting tw o sides o f some triangle
is one-half o f the base o f the triangle.
This I prove as fo llo w s: W ith the figure [Fig. 9] retained, (1) the base o f A A B C
is line B C ; (2) B C = 2 IK ; (3) I K — F G = D E , D E being the line bisecting the
sides, by the former statements; and therefore (4) B C = 2 D E . The consequence
[namely, “ i f (2) and (3), then (4)” ] holds by a proposition [i.e., Prop. 7] o f [Bk.] V
o f Euclid, which states as fo llo w s: “ I f some equal magnitudes are compared to a
third, then the ratio o f that [third] to each is the same.”
I prove the assumption [i.e., major premise (2)]: (5) F C = IK , as is evident by
the definition o f a parallelogram ; (6) B F — I A and also G C = A K , as I proved in
the p roof o f the first proposition. [But (7) I A -f- A K = I K and B C — B F -f- G C
+ F G .\ Hence (8) the w hole base line B C = 2 IK .
From this arises what is customarily said, that in every latitude uniformly dif­
form beginning from no degree the mean degree is precisely one-half o f the most
intense degree bounding that same latitude.12
[III.] The third proposition is that the square o f the base o f any triangle o f equal
sides (/, should be “ w ith altitude equal to base” ) is double the surface o f the pro­
posed triangle.13

11 See the later discussion o f “ mean degree,”
44V, lines 39-42.
12 Compare Heytesbury’s Regule solvendi so­
phismata, given in The Science of Mechanics, 277,
lines 14-16.
13 As stated this proposition is patently false.
It is true not for an equilateral triangle but for
one whose altitude is equal to the base. One
might argue that a scribe erroneously convert­
41 ante et1 scr. H et delevi alia
48 I K ... D E supra scr. H {et scr. et dei. H : D E ed a phrase such as trianguli equalis basis et al­
45 uniformi corr. e x uniformiter
consequentia tenet per unam propositio­ titudinis to trianguli equilateri. But even if this
46 ntg. 2a propositio
nem) / post linee scr. et del. H D E were true, the original proposition would
still be rather unsatisfactory, since it would
appear to limit the representation o f “ uniform­
ly difform beginning at no degree” to this
specific kind o f a triangle. In order to have a
proposition general enough to preserve the
generality of triangular figure to represent this
kind of uniformly difform and to provide a
basis for the corollary on motion which the
author gives at the end, he should have framed
the proposition as follows: “ The rectangle
arising from the product of the base and alti­
tude o f the triangle and representing some-
 6o 2 Appendix II
Superficies trianguli est equalis quadrangulo linee dividentis duo latera
trianguli, cuius quadranguli /8/ unum extremum est in basi et aliud in cono
sed quadratum basis est duplum ad istum quadrangulum. E rg o etiam est
duplum /9/ ad superficiem trianguli.
Tenet consequentia de se satis, et assumptum probo quoniam quadratum
basis est quadruplum ad quadratum linee /10/ secantis duo latera trianguli, et
ex talibus duobus quadratis quadrangulus predictus est compositus, ut patet
in tali figura [Fig. 10]. E rgo cum quidquid /11/ est quadruplum ad medieta­
tem sit etiam duplum ad totum, sequitur quod quadratum basis sit duplum
ad predictum quadrangulum et per consequens duplum /12/ ad superficiem
trianguli que est equalis illi quadrangulo. E t hoc erat probandum.
Sed quod quadratum basis sit quadruplum ad /13/ quadratum linee secan­
tis duo latera trianguli ex hoc patet, quia basis est dupla ad lineam secantem
duo latera trianguli /14/ in partes equales, et quelibet est proportio linee ad
lineam, talis proportio superficierum huiusmodi linearum proportio dupli­
cata. E rgo si /15 / linee ad lineam est proportio dupla, tunc superficiei ad super­
ficiem illarum linearum est proportio quadrupla, quia proportio quadrupla
est duple dupla.
/16/ E t istud oritur ex eo, quod solet dici: si aliquod mobile m ovetur in
aliquo [tempore] vel in aliqua hora continue suum motum intendendo /17/
a non gradu usque ad aliquem certum gradum, et si aliud mobile moveretur
in eadem hora continue gradu intensissimo illius /18/ velocitatis uniformiter
difformis, secundum pertransiret precise duplum spacium ad spacium a
primo pertransitum.
[IV.] Quarta propositio est quod /19/ in superficie uniformiter difformi
For 44r: 12 post illi scr. H et delevi triangulo
9 de supra scr. H ; (et scr. et del. H : per) / qua- 13 quadratum corr. ex quadrangulum
dratum2 corr. ex quadrangulum 18 mg. 4a propositio
1 o quadratis corr. ex quadrangulis
Tractatus bonus de uniform i et difformi 603
T he surface o f the triangle is equal to the [rectangular] quadrangle o f the line
bisecting the tw o sides o f the triangle, o f which quadrangle one extreme is in the base
and the other on the apex. But the square o f the base is double this quadrangle;
therefore, it is also double the surface o f the triangle.
The consequence is sufficiently valid in itself, and I prove the assumption [i.e.
the premise], since the square o f the base is quadruple the square o f the line bi­
secting the tw o sides o f the triangle, and the aforesaid quadrangle is composed
o f tw o such squares, as is evident in this kind o f a figure [see Fig. 10]. Therefore,
since whatever is quadruple a half is also double the whole, it follow s that the
square o f the base is double the aforesaid quadrangle and is consequently double the
surface o f the triangle w hich is equal to the quadrangle. A n d this was to be proved.
But that the square o f the base is quadruple the square o f the line bisecting the
tw o sides o f the triangle is evident from th is: the base is double the line bisecting
the tw o sides o f the triangle, and whatever ratio there is o f line to line, the ratio o f
the surfaces o f this sort is as the ratio o f the lines squared. Therefore, i f the ratio o f
line to line is a double ratio, then the ratio o f surface to surface [formed from the
squares] o f these lines is a quadruple ratio, for a quadruple ratio is double a double
ratio.
A n d from this arises what is customarily said, namely that i f some m obile is
m oved in some time or in some hour by continually increasing its motion from no
degree up to a certain degree, and if another mobile were m oved in the same hour
continuously at the most intense degree o f that uniformly difform velocity, the
second mobile w ould traverse precisely tw ice the space traversed b y the first.
[IV.] T he fourth proposition is, that in a surface uniformly difform beginning
thing uniformly difform beginning from no square of the bisecting line, since each half
degree is double the triangle.” This would be would have its base and altitude equal to one
a trite proposition but it would be one from half o f the bisecting line. Thus in a sense one
which the corollary would follow and would could still say that the parallelogram would be
still preserve the generality o f triangular figure “ composed o f two such squares.” The accom­
implied by the earlier propositions. Incidental­ panying figure illustrates this. For the corollary
ly, if we assume that the author meant a trian­ on motion, see The Science of Mechanics, 278,
gle whose base was equal to its altitude rather lines 19-23.
than an equilateral triangle, the statement in
line 10 “ the aforesaid quadrangle is composed
out o f two such squares” (if I have corrected it
justly) would certainly suggest that he thought
o f the quadrangle which was equivalent to the
triangle as a rectangle and thus saw the triangle
as an isosceles triangle. Such appears to be the
case in the figure. This would perhaps reflect
Casali’s usage. However, it can be pointed out
that the customary generality o f the author’s
statements could be preserved by supposing
merely that the quadrangle is a parallelogram
each o f whose two halves is equal to the
 6 c >4 Appendix II 605
Tractatus bonus de uniform i et difformi

incipiente a gradu, cuiusmodi est superficies quadrilaterum quod abscindit

conum trianguli, basis /20/ illius non est dupla ad lineam secantem duo eius
latera per equalia.
P robatio: Pono quod sit tale quadrilaterum seu superficies incipiens /21/
a gradu uniformiter difformis A B C D [Fig. 11], et linea secans eius duo
latera per equalia sit E F , et ulterius /22/ quod basis A B non sit dupla ad
lineam E F sed minor quam dupla. E t constituatur unus quadrangulus ad
quantitatem linee E F /23/ cuius latera opposita, scilicet unum puta G L
iacet sibi invicem basi A B et aliud puta I K super lineam C D que terminat
/24/ partem strictiorem illius quadrilateri, qui quadrangulus potest demon­
strari esse equalis superficiei illius quadrilateri uniformiter difformis /25/
incipientis a gradu, recte sicud superius demonstratum est illum quadrangu­
lum, scilicet F G IK , esse equalem triangulo A B C . E t sic arguo: /26/
sicud linea A B , que est basis quadrilateri A B C D non est dupla ad lineam
IK , igitur nec est dupla ad lineam E F ] i j j que est equalis linee IK .
This figure is most crudely drawn in the MS. I have redrawn it, employing a triangle having
equal base and altitude rather than one o f equal sides.

from a degree— a surface o f this sort being a quadrilateral which cuts off the apex
o f a triangle— its base is not double the line bisecting its tw o sides.
P ro o f: I pose that there is such a quadrilateral or surface uniformly difform be­
ginning from a degree, [namely, the surface] A B C D [see Fig. 11], and [that] the
1 c d k

Fig. 11

line bisecting its tw o sides is E F , and further that its base A B is not double line
E F but less than double it. A n d let a parallelogram be constructed in the quantity
o f line E F , a parallelogram whose opposite sides [we let be situated as follow s:]
one side, e.g. G L , lies mutually along the base A B and the other, e.g. IK , on line
C D which bounds the narrower part o f the quadrilateral. This parallelogram can
be correctly demonstrated to be equal to the quadrilateral surface uniformly dif­
form beginning from a degree, just as above it has been demonstrated that the
quadrangle, namely F G I K [see Fig. 9], was equal to A A B C . A n d so I argue as
22 A B corr. ex A 26 A B C D corr. e x A B C follow s: Just as line A B , the base o f quadrilateral A B C D , is not double line IK ,
23 G L corr. e x GB hence neither is it double line E F which is equal to line IK . The consequence
 6o6
Appendix II Tractatus bonus de uniform i et difformi 607

Consequentia tenet de se, et assumptum probo quia linea B L est equalis
D K et linea A G linee /28/ IC . E t hoc potest probari per equalitatem triangu­
lorum I E C et A E G , ut prius, et linea L G est equalis linee IK . E t /29/tunc
manet in additione C D de tota linea IK . Propter quam linea A B non est
dupla ad lineam IK , quia non continet lineam /30/ I K bis sed continet eam
semel et cum hoc duas partes, scilicet I C et D K , ex quo ergo continet cum
hoc lineam C D /31/ non est dupla ad earn.
E x quo sequitur ultra quod communiter solet dici inter magistros et doc-
tores : in latitudine uniformiter /32/ difformi incipiente a gradu gradus inten­
sissimus illius latitudinis uniformiter difformis non est duplus ad gradum
medium /33/ qui correspondet isti latitudini uniformiter difformi, ut patet in
hac figura [Fig. 11].
[V.] Quinta propositio est quod omnis superficies trianguli extensa a /34/
cono usque ad lineam duo latera trianguli secantem in partes equales est
subtripla ad quadrilaterum quod est reliqua pars totius /35/ trianguli.
Hanc probo sic: E t suppono quod sit unus triangulus A B C [Fig. 12], et
linea D E dividens duo latera illius trianguli, A B et A C , /36/ in duas partes
equales, A B in puncto D et A C in puncto E . E t sic sequitur quod super­
ficies A D E est subtripla ad quadrilaterum /37/ D E B C .
P robatio: Protraham a puncto de secante qui eque distat a puncto B [et a
[namely, that if A B ^ 2 I K and if I K = E F , then A B f=- 2 E F , ] holds in itself,
and I prove the assumption [that A B 2 I K ] : For B L = D K and A G = I C —
and this can be proved as before b y the equality o f [triangles B L F and D K F and
the equality of] triangles I E C and A E G ; and L G = IK . A n d then there remains
o f the whole line I K an additional amount C D . A ccordingly [since A B — I K +
I C + D K and I K = I C + D K + C D , therefore A B = z I K - C D ; i.e.,] fine
A B is not double line IK , since it does not contain line I K tw ice but only once plus
the tw o parts I C and D K w hich [IK] contains along with line C D , and so it [i.e.,
line A B ] is not double that line [IK].
From this there further follows what is customarily said b y the masters and the
doctors,14 that, in a latitude uniformly difform beginning from a degree, the most
intense degree o f the latitude uniformly difform is not double the mean degree
which corresponds to this latitude uniformly difform, as is evident in this figure
[see Fig. 11].
[V.] The fifth proposition is that every surface o f [the part of] a triangle extend­
ed from the apex to the line bisecting tw o sides o f the triangle is one-third the quad­
rilateral constituting the remaining part o f the w hole triangle.
I prove this as fo llo w s: I suppose that there be one triangle A B C [see Fig. 12],

with the line D E bisecting the tw o sides A B and A C o f the triangle, A B in point
D and A C in point E . A n d so it follows that surface A D E is one third o f quad­
rilateral D E B C .
Proof: From the bisecting point [i7] o f line B C I protract, by a corollary15 o f

14 See Heytesbury’s statement as given in The
Science o f Mechanics, 278, lines 31-33.
15 Notice that the text has Proposition 39, but
since I can make no sense out o f that and since
some sense can be made out o f Proposition 31
27 ante Consequentia del. H tenet supplevi
as the authority, I have accordingly altered the
37 Probatio: probo ? H j [et... puncto] text. We must realize, however, if I am correct,
that the corollary referred to is not actually in
the text o f Euclid. Still it can be proved that
the lines which Proposition 31 permits to be
drawn parallel to D B and E C respectively
would also pass through points E and D
respectively. The Latin is very curious at this
point. What I have taken to be the preposition
 6o8 Appendix II
puncto] C per unum corollarium /38/ 3 ie conclusionis primi libri geometrie
Euclidis lineam D F equidistantem linee E C et lineam E F equidistantem
linee D B , et sic causabuntur /39/ ibi due superficies equidistantium laterum,
D F C E et E F B D , et linea E F dividit superficiem D F C E in partes /40/
equales, per unum corollarium 34s conclusionis primi Euclidis quod dicit:
“ dyametro dividente eam per medium,” et linea D F dividit /41/ superficiem
E F B D per medium, ut patet per idem corollarium. Ideo triangulus C F E est
equalis triangulo D F E quia uterque /42/ eorum est dimidium superficiei
D F C E , et similiter triangulus D F B erit equalis triangulo D E F . E rgo om­
nes isti trianguli tres/43/inter se sunt equales quia omnes tres simul sumpti
sunt superficies quadrilateri D B C E . Sed unus de istis triangulis, scilicet trian­
gulus /44/ D F E , est equalis triangulo D E A . E rgo totum quadrilaterum est
triplum ad ipsum, quod fuit probandum.
Consequentia tenet de se, et assumptum /45 / probo quia linea D F est
equidistans linee E C et est sibi equalis, ut patet <per> 34am propositionem
primi Euclidis que dicit sic: “ Omnis superficies /46/ equidistantibus lateribus
contenta lineas atque angulos ex adverso collectos habet equales, dyametro
dividente eam per medium.” /47/ E x hoc arguo sic: Linea D F est equalis et
equidistans linee E C , ut predixi. E rgo similiter erit equalis linee E A , que
est equalis /48/ linee E C. H oc patet per dicta m odo: Cum tota linea A C sit
recta, linea D F erit recta et equidistans linee E A , et patet hoc /49/ per ean­
dem rationem, et per idem patet quod linea E F erit equidistans linee D A .
E rgo dyametro pro linea dyametri D E dividente /50/ superficiem totam
F D A E equidistantium laterum per equalia, sequitur triangulum D E F esse
equalem triangulo D E A , quod est demonstrare intentum.
44v / E t ex isto sequitur ulterius, quod totus triangulus A B C sit quadruplus
ad triangulum A D E et sesquitertius ad quadrilaterum D B C E .
/2/ E t istud oritur ex communi dicto magistrorum in physica, arismetica,
et geometria et astronomia peritorum, scilicet in omni latitudine /3/ motus
uniformiter difformi incipiente a non gradu pertransitur subtriplum in
prima medietate temporis ad totum pertransitum in secunda, et in tota /4/
pertransitur quadruplum ad pertransitum in prima eius medietate et ses­
quitertium ad pertransitum in secunda.
E t ex hoc sequitur ulterius, quod aliquod /5/ mobile, si moveretur uni­
formiter difformiter incipiendo motum suum a non gradu et si in prima
medietate temporis pertransiret unum /6/ pedem, in secunda medietate
temporis non pertransiret nec plus nec minus quam tres quia in tota hora
38 31e corr. e x 39e 45 34am corr. e x 3olam
39 ibi:ibi ibi ? H 49 D A corr. ex E A
41 ante idem scr. H et delevi est
42 D F C E corr. ex D FC For 44v:
44 assumptum corr. ex assumpto 1 sesquitertius corr. e x sesquitertium
Tractatus bonus de uniform i et difformi 609
Proposition 31 o f the first book o f the Geometry o f Euclid, line D F parallel to line
JECand line E F parallel to line D B . A nd so there will be formed there tw o paral­
lelograms, D F C E and E F B D , and line E F bisects surface D F C E by one corol­
lary*16 o f Proposition 1 .34 o f Euclid, which says: “ and the diagonal bisects it.” A nd
line D F bisects surface E F B D , as is evident by the same corollary. Therefore
A C F E = A D F E since each o f them is one half o f surface D F C E . A nd similarly
A D F B = A D E F . Therefore, all three o f these triangles are mutually equal, be­
cause all three taken together constitute the surface o f the quadrilateral D B C E . But
one o f these triangles, namely A D F E , is equal to A D E A . Therefore, the w hole
quadrilateral is equal to 3 A D E A , which was to be proved.
The consequence holds in itself, and I prove the assumption [that A D F E =
A D E A ] . For line D F is parallel to line E C and is equal to it, as is evident by
Proposition 1 .34 o f Euclid, which says: “ E very parallelogrammic area has the
opposite sides and angles equal, and its diagonal bisects it.” From this I argue as
fo llo w s: Line D F is equal and parallel to line E C , as I have said before. There­
fore, similarly it [i.e., D F \ w ill be equal to line E A , which is equal to line E C .
This is evident by what has just been said. Since the whole line A C is a straight
line, line D F w ill be a straight line and parallel to line E A , and this is evident by
the same argument. A n d by the same reasoning it is evident that line E F w ill be
parallel to line D A . Therefore, w ith diagonal D E as the diagonal bisecting the
whole parallelogram F D A E , it follows that A D E F = A D E A , w hich is what we
intended to demonstrate.
From this it follows further that the whole A A B C = 4 A A D E = -f- quad.
DBCE.
A n d the follow ing arises from the common statements o f the masters expert in
physics, arithmetic, geometry, and astronomy, namely, in every latitude o f motion
uniformly difform beginning from no degree one third [of the space] traversed in
the second half o f the time is traversed in the first half, and in the w hole time four
times as much space is traversed as in the first half and four thirds as much as that
traversed in the second half.17
A n d from this it follows further that if some mobile were m oved uniformly dif-
form ly beginning from no degree [i.e. from rest], and if in the first half o f the time
it w ould traverse one foot, in the second half o f the time it w ould traverse neither
more nor less than three [feet], because in the whole time it w ould traverse four
de in line 37 may be D E . But if D E were the tried to render it intelligible in the translation.
proper reading, one would find it difficult to 16 That is, the last part o f the proposition,
emend the text in any simple manner, and in which the author takes to be a corollary.
fact several emendations would have to be 17 For Fleytesbury’s statement, see The Sci­
made. Thus by using Ockham’s well-known ence o f Mechanics, 280, lines 84-87; 281, lines
razor, I have left the passage as it is and have 95-100.
 6io Appendix II Tractatus bonus de uniform i et difformi 6x1
pertransiret quatuor, ergo et cetera; [et hoc patet] in figura /7/ immediate
[feet]; therefore, et cetera. [And this is evident] in the figure just produced [see
facta [Fig. 12].
Fig. 12].
Circa superius dicta notandum quod primam conclusionem superius
Concerning the things that have been said above, it ought to be noted that I have
positam posui solum causa exercitii ad intellectus virorum /8/ informandum in
posed that first 18 conclusion posited above only for the sake o f exercise to train
speculationibus, nam ipsa est satis dubitabilis et oppositum possem satis
the understanding o f men in speculations; for it is doubtful enough and I could
demonstrare per dicta auctorum, quod tamen per presens /9/ prolixitati
adequately demonstrate the contrary by means o f the statements o f authors. H ow ­
parcendo omitto.
ever, in order to avoid prolixity I shall omit this for the present.
Iterum et cetera circa predicta ordine premisso debetis advertere de
Again, etc., concerning the things said above, taken in order, you ought to
intensione uniformi et difformi /10/ motuum, quod pro nunc est talis
observe in connection w ith uniform and difform intensity o f motions, that there is
differentia inter istos modos loquendi proportionem maiorationum vel
a difference between the expressions “ the ratio o f increases or augment” and “ the in­
augmenti et inter maiorationem et /11/ augmentationem proportionis. Nam
creasing and augmentation o f a ratio.” For sometimes the ratio o f some things will
aliquotiens proportio aliquorum continue maiorabitur quando tamen maio-
be continually increased when how ever the increase o f the ratio [proportionally]
ratio proportionis diminuitur. V erbi gratia, /12/ ut si proportio duorum ad
diminishes. For example, if a ratio o f 2:1 is increased to a ratio double this, namely,
unum maiorabitur ad unam proportionem que est dupla ad ipsam, scilicet
to 4 :1 , by the addition o f tw o to tw o; and then if again tw o is added to four,
quadrupla, per additionem duorum /13/ ad duo, et secundo si ipsis quatuor
[once more] the ratio is increased, while how ever, the augmentation is [propor­
addantur iterum duo, illa proportio augetur et tamen illa augmentatio dimi­
tionally] decreased, because in the first place the ratio o f 2:1 is increased by the
nuitur, quia augetur primo proportio /14/ duorum ad unum per additionem
addition o f tw o to tw o to form the ratio o f 4 :1 , w hich is a quadruple ratio, and in
duorum ad duo usque ad proportionem quatuor ad unum, que est proportio
the second case, if 4 is added to 2 :1, the ratio w ill be increased because 6 :1 is great­
quadrupla, et postea ad proportionem duorum /15/ ad unum et si quatuor
er than 4 :1 ; and yet the increasing o f the ratio is [proportionally] diminished be­
adduntur, proportio maiorabitur quia proportio sextupla est maior quam
cause the first ratio w ill be doubled and the second w ill be less than doubled.19
quadrupla et tamen maioratio /16/ proportionis diminuitur ex eo quod
18The reading may bo. illam instead ofprimam. is that if in two successive time periods a given
prima proportio maiorabitur ad duplum et secunda minus quam ad duplum.
But since this passage is the first o f a series of ratio increases from 2 to 4 to 6, then the ratio
comments or clarifications pertinent to the itself is increasing (i.e., by 2 each time), while
“first” conclusion, it is clear that whether illam the further ratio of consequent to antecedent
or primam is the actual reading, it is the first term in the series o f changing ratios is de­
conclusion that is meant. For those who held creasing (i.e., 4:2 is greater than 6:4). That is:
some other view than the mean speed theorem, Pi < P2 < P3 because (where P r + AP = P2,
see The Science o f Mechanics, 264, fn. 10. It is and P2 + AP = P,) P r < (Pr + AP) < ( P 2 +
here that the author stresses that his purpose is A P ); at the same time (where AP is a constant)
to train understanding in speculations. This is
a particularly interesting remark in view of
Oresme’s proemium in the D e configurationibus distinction which he will later apply to local
telling us that his purpose is to present a trea­ motion (see fn. 20) he takes from Heytesbury’s
tise that is not only useful as an exercise but treatment o f the “ velocity o f augmentation.”
also as disciplina. Heytesbury had held that such “ velocity varies
19 I.e., 6:1 > 4:1 > 2:1; but 4 :2 = 2 and 6:4 with the ratio of the total quantity, composed
= 3:2 < 2. It is obvious that the author is not o f the quantity previously existing plus the
distinguishing between the changing value o f quantity newly acquired, to the quantity pre­
a ratio and the changing values o f an incre­ viously existing, as reckoned for a given time.”
ment o f a ratio. Rather he is distinguishing (See C. Wilson, William Heytesbury, 129.) This
between arithmetical increase and proportional distinction between arithmetical and propor­
increase o f a ratio, i.e., between the arithmetic­ tional increase is applicable to his next five
al increase of a given ratio and the decreasing examples. Incidentally, Swineshead disputed
value o f the further ratio between any given this view o f the velocity o f augmentation
value o f the given ratio and its predecessor in {ibid.).
7, 9, 19 Circa: contra ? H 7 primam: illam ? H
the series. Thus all he indicates by his example
 6l2 Appendix II
E t sic intelligo pro nunc quod /17/ maioratio proportionis continue diminui­
tur quando proportio continue maioratur; sed hoc est difformiter quia non
ad tantum in secunda parte temporis /18/ sicud in prima nec ad tantum in
tertia sicud in secunda et sic ultra; cum hoc tamen stat quod proportio
continue maioratur eodem modo et illo /19/ stante consimiliter loquendo
possibile est quod aliqua proportio continue diminuatur, cuius tamen
diminutio continue cum hoc intenditur.
E t circa hoc /20/ est ulterius advertendum quod quando inter aliquos
terminos est aliqua proportio et termino maiori in prima parte proportionali
addatur aliquantum, /21/ proportio maiorabitur vel saltem aliquantum pro­
portio maiorabitur; et si in secunda <addatur> tantum, iterum maiorabitur
proportio sed <non> in /22/ tantum sicud in prima parte proportionali; et
si in tertia addatur tantum, et sic iterum maiorabitur proportio et non in
tantum sicud in secunda.
Iterum et cetera /23/ si minor terminus diminuatur maiori termino non
augmentato nec diminuto proportio maiorabitur. Similiter si residuum
diminuatur /24/ deperdendo tantum quantum prius, tunc plus quam prius
maiorabitur proportio.
Iterum et cetera si maior terminus minori termino stante /25/ nec aucto
nec diminuto in prima proportionali decrescat, proportio diminuitur; et si in
secunda parte temporis tantum decrescat, /26/ adhuc diminuitur plus.
Iterum et cetera si minor terminus crescat maiori termino stante, propor­
tio diminuatur; et si in secunda parte /27/ temporis tantum crescat quantum
in prima, proportio non diminuitur in tantum sicud in prima parte temporis.
E t ista ex predictis satis clare /28/ ut videtur mihi elicio per modum proble­
matum disputabilium.
Consequenter advertendum est quod consimiliter differt “ motus intendi­
tur” et “ intensio /29/ motus intenditur,” quoniam possibile est quod aliquis
motus intendatur et quod eius intensio continue remittatur. Exemplum pono,
Tractatus bonus de uniform i et difform i 613
A nd thus I understand for now that the [proportional] increase o f the ratio is
continually diminished while the ratio [itself] is continually increasing. But this is
[increasing] difformly because [it is increasing proportionally] not as much in the
second part o f the time as in the first, nor in the third as in the second, and so on.
But at the same time it remains that the ratio [itself] is continually increasing in the
same way. A n d w ith this granted it is possible, speaking in the same w ay, for some
ratio to be diminished continually while its [proportional] diminution is increasing
continually at the same time.
A n d concerning this it is further remarked that when there is a certain ratio be­
tween some terms, and to the greater term there is added in the first proportional
part [of the time] a certain amount, the ratio w ill be increased, or at least the ratio
will be a certain amount greater; and if in the second just as much is added, again
the ratio w ill be increased but [proportionally] not as much as in the first propor­
tional part; and if in the third there is added just as much, thus once more the ratio
w ill be increased but [proportionally] not as much as in the second.
Again, etc., if the lesser term is diminished with the greater term neither in­
creased nor diminished, the ratio w ill be increased. Similarly if that [lesser term]
left [after this diminution] is diminished [again] by losing as much as before, then
the ratio w ill be increased [proportionally] more than before.
Again, etc., if the greater term decreases w ith the lesser term neither increased
nor diminished in the first proportional part, the ratio is dim inished; and if in the
second part o f the time it [i.e., the greater term] decreases the same amount, the
ratio is diminished [proportionally] still more.
Again, etc., if the lesser term increases w ith the greater term remaining the same,
the ratio is diminished; and if in the second part o f the time it [i.e., the lesser term]
increases as much as in the first part, the ratio is not diminished [proportionally] so
much as in the first part o f the time. A nd I deduce these things clearly enough, as
it seems to me, from the things said before, by the method o f disputable problems.
Consequently it ought to be remarked that in a similar w ay “ velocity o f m otion
is increased” differs from “ the intension o f velocity o f motion is increased,” 20
since it is possible that some motion is increased in velocity while the intension o f
velocity [proportionally] diminishes. A s an example I pose in the first place that if
20 Using the conventional meanings o f motus fact, the author here has only distinguished
and intensio motus one would expect this passage between arithmetical increase and propor­
to mean that there is a difference between tional increase. Once more he is applying the
“ increasing velocity” and “ increasing acceler­ concept of Heytesbury concerning the velocity
ation.” A t least this is what was intended in o f augmentation but this time to local motion.
the cases discussed by the English authors. His first example is one where the velocity
(The whole question o f the rate o f deceleration arithmetically increases by a constant amount,
or acceleration accompanying velocity changes and thus proportionally decreases (i.e., if the
is most brilliantly treated by Richard Swines- velocity grows from 2 to 4 to 6 to 8, the ratio
head at Merton College prior to 1350 [TheSci­ o f a consequent velocity to its antecedent is
ence o f Mechanics, 292-94, 297, 302-4I.) But, in decreasing: i.e., 8:6 < 6:4 < 4:2).
 614 Appendix II
primo quod aliquis /30/ motus intendatur ad duplum et quod postea intenda­
tur ad sesquialterum et postea ad sesquitertium, tunc motus continue /31/
intenditur et tamen intensio eius continue remittitur.
Iterum et cetera possibile est quod aliquis motus continue remittatur et
tamen quod remissio /32/ motus continue intendatur. Exem plum ut si
aliquis motus primo remitteretur ad duplum ita quod fieret in duplo tardior
quam iam /33/ prius erat vel quam iam esset et postea ad quadruplum et
iterum postea ad sextuplum, tunc velocitas istius motus continue remittitur
et /34/ tamen remissio eius continue intenditur, ideo et cetera.
Iterum debetis advertere quod velocitas intensionis attenditur penes
acquisitionem latitudinis /35 [ motus recte sicud velocitas motus localis
attenditur penes spacium linealem maximum descriptum et cetera.
Item scitote /36/ quod motus dicitur intendi uniformiter quando in aliqua
parte temporis intenditur ad aliquem certum gradum velocitatis et intenditur
in tempore sibi /37/ equali ad tantum et cetera.
Item notandum quod tunc motus intenditur difformiter quando in equali-
bus partibus temporis non ad equales /38/ gradus intenditur.
Item suppono ad presens quod proportio velocitatum in motibus sequitur
proportionem proportionum potentiarum moventium J^cjj ad suas resisten­
tias. E t hoc de illo.
Tractatus bonus de uniform i et difform i 615
[in one part o f the time] some velocity is doubled and afterwards [in the next part
o f the time] it increases in | ratio, and afterwards [in the next part] it is increased in
ratio, then the velocity is continually increased but intension is continually [and
proportionally] decreased.
Again, etc., it is possible that some motion is decreased continually while the
remission o f velocity proportionally increases. A n example is if some velocity
were in the first part decreased doubly so that it w ould be tw ice as slow as it was or
w ould be before, and afterwards quadruply, and again afterwards sextuply, then
the velocity o f this motion is continually decreased while its deceleration is con­
tinually increased; therefore, etc.
A gain you ought to observe that velocity o f intensity is attended w ith the ac­
quisition o f latitude o f motion [i.e., velocity increment] just as the velocity o f local
m otion is attended with the maximum linear space described.21
A lso you know that velocity is said to be increased uniformly when in some
period o f time it is increased to a certain degree o f velocity and in any time period
equal to it it is increased the same amount,22 and so on.
A lso it ought to be noted that then velocity is increased difformly when in equal
parts o f the time it is not increased by equal degrees.23
A lso, I suppose for the present that the ratio o f velocities in motions follows the
ratio o f the ratios o f the powers o f the m ovents to their resistances.24 A n d so much
for this.

21 H e r e th e a u th o r appears to have aban­ fo r m ite r e n im in te n d itu r m o tu s q u ic u n q u e ,

d o n e d th e v e lo c ity o f a u g m e n ta tio n co n c e p t. c u m in q u a c u n q u e e q u a li p a r te te m p o r is e q u a -

N o te th a t a s im ila r s ta te m e n t is fo u n d in le m a c q u ir it la titu d in e m v e lo c it a tis .” C o m p a r e

R ic h a r d S w in e s h e a d ’ s sh o r t tr a c t D e motu (The th e D e motu o f John o f H o lla n d {ibid., 249,

Science o f Mechanics, 2 4 5 , lin e s 2 8 -3 0 ): “ S c ie n ­ lin e s 3 7 -3 8 ) .

d u m e st e tia m q u o d c o n s im ilite r h a b e t in te n s io 23 O n c e a g a i n o u r a u t h o r h a s o b s c u r e d t h e

m o tu s ad m o tu m s ic u t se habet m o tu s ad f a c t t h a t i t is t h e i n e q u a l i t y o f t h e increments in

s p a t iu m .” A s I n o t e d th e r e in c o n n e c t io n w i t h e q u a l tim e s th a t d e fin e s t h e d iffo r m ly d iffo r m

th e S w in e s h e a d p a s s a g e , th is ca n b e r e n d e r e d in te n s io n . H e does th is by u s in g th e r a th e r

A /V = V / S , a n d i t is c le a r t h a t t h e r e t h e c o n ­ a m b ig u o u s e x p r e s s io n “ ad e q u a le s d e g r e e s .”

c e p t o f a c c e le r a tio n (intensio motus) has been C om p are th is w ith th e p r e c is io n o f H e y te s-

co n s tr u c te d fro m th e a n a lo g y to s p e e d its e lf, bury {The Science o f Mechanics, 2 4 2 , lin e s 9 5 - 9 7 ) :

b u t in th e p la c e o f th e a c q u is itio n o f s p a c e w e “ D iffo r m ite r vero in te n d itu r a liq u is m o tu s ,

have th e a c q u is itio n o f sp eed. I a ls o n o te d v e l r e m ittitu r , c u m m a io r e m la titu d in e m v e lo ­

th e r e (p p . 2 4 4 , 2 5 1 ) th e s im ila r ity o f th is w it h c ita tis a c q u ir it v e l d e p e r d it in u n a p a r te t e m p o ­

t h e a n a ly s is o f u n if o r m a c c e le r a tio n b y G a li­ r is q u a m in a lia s ib i e q u a l i . ”

le o . 24 T h e a u t h o r g i v e s h e r e t h e c o m m o n f o r m

22 T h i s d e f i n i t i o n i s a m b i g u o u s . T h e p h r a s e s o f w h a t is n o w c a l l e d B r a d w a r d i n e ’ s f u n c t i o n ,

“ a d c e r tu m g r a d u m ” a n d “ a d ta n tu m ” o b sc u r e
n a m e ly i - e -, t h e v e l o c i t y i n ­
t h e f a c t t h a t i t is t h e e q u a l i t y o f increments ac­

q u i r e d i n a n y e q u a l p a r t s o f t i m e t h a t is c r u c i a l c r e a se s a r ith m e tic a lly as th e r a tio o f fo r c e to

fo r th e d e fin itio n o f u n ifo r m in te n s io n . M u c h r e s is ta n c e in c r e a s e s g e o m e tr ic a lly {The Science
m ore p r e c is e is H e y t e s b u r y ’ s d e fin itio n (The o f Mechanics, 4 3 8 ). O n th e u s e o f t h e e x p r e s s io n

Science o f Mechanics, 2 4 1 , lin e s 9 1 -9 3 ): “ U n i­ proportio proportionum in e x p r e s s in g t h is e x p o -

 6i6
Appendix II Tractatus bonus de uniform i et difform i 617

Propter summe dicta est advertendum nunc quid sit medius gradus ali­
cuius /40/ latitudinis uniformiter difformis incipientis a gradu vel a non
gradu; est enim omnis ille gradus qui ab utroque extremorum distat /41/
recte ad modum ad quem dixi superius quod linea que secaret duo latera
superficiei uniformiter difformis equaliter distaret /42/ ab utroque extremo­
rum.
E t secundum hoc ponunt quidam talem regulam in hac materia, quod
omnis latitudo motus vel qualitatis uniformiter /43/ difformis sive incipiat a
gradu sive a non gradu cum ad aliquem gradum sit terminata in extremo
eius intensiori suo medio /44/ gradui corresponderet, i.e., tanta est precise
quanta est latitudo uniformis sub medio gradu latitudinis uniformiter
difformis; /45/ vel sicut si aliquod mobile moveretur uniformiter difformiter
intendendo motum suum et aliud in eadem hora m overetur /46/ uniformiter
medio gradu illius latitudinis uniformiter difformis, talia mobilia equalia
spacia pertransirent et equevelociter /47/ moverentur.
Hanc probo sic : Si A mobile a C gradu intenderet motum suum usque ad
gradum duplum ad C , et [si] B /48/ ab eodem C gradu remitteret motum
suum uniformiter usque ad non gradum latitudinis motus, tunc A et /49/
B tantum pertransiret in hac hora describendo spacia linealia quantum
For the things stated [above] summarily, it ought now to be observed what is
the mean degree o f some latitude uniformly difform beginning from a degree or
from no degree. For every such degree that is equidistant from each o f the ex­
tremes is correctly [represented] in the w ay in which I said above that the line
cutting the tw o sides o f the surface uniformly difform w ould be equally distant
from each o f the extremes.25
A n d accordingly certain people pose in this matter the follow ing rule :26 E very
latitude o f motion or quality uniformly difform whether it begins from a degree or
from no degree— since it is terminated at some degree at its more intense extreme
— corresponds to its mean degree, i.e., it is precisely as great as the latitude uni­
form in the mean degree o f the latitude uniformly difform. Or, for example, if
some mobile were m oved uniformly difformly by increasing its velocity and an­
other were m oved in the same hour uniformly w ith the mean degree o f the latitude
uniformly difform, such mobiles w ould traverse equal spaces and w ould m ove
equally quickly.
This I prove as follows :27 I f mobile A w ould increase its velocity [uniformly]
from C degree to a degree twice C , and, [if mobile] B w ould decrease its velocity
uniformly28 from the same C degree to no degree o f the latitude o f motion, then A
and B [together] in the same hour would, in describing linear spaces, continually

n e n tia l fu n c tio n , see The Science o f Mechanics, th e o r e m to m o tio n s a n d q u a litie s , s ta r tin g o u t

4 4 1 , n . 39. w ith a n o b s e r v a tio n o n “ m e a n d e g r e e .”

N o t i c e th a t h e r e I h a v e tr a n s la te d th e p h r a s e 26 T h e r u l e s e e m s f i r s t t o h a v e b e e n s t a t e d b y

proportio proportionum by th e m ore p r e c is e W illia m H e y te sb u ry in 1335 (The Science of

“ r a tio o f r a tio s ” r a th e r th a n b y th e c o n v e n t io n ­ Mechanics, 2 6 2 - 6 3 ) , an<J w a s m a n y t i m e s s t a t e d

al r e n d e r in g o f “ p r o p o r tio n o f p r o p o r tio n s .” and proved in th e cou rse o f th e fo u r te e n th ,

S e e I n tr o d u c tio n I .A , fn . 18 . I n c id e n ta lly , th e fifte e n th , and six te e n th c e n tu r ie s , as I have

u s e o f th e p h r a s e ad presens in co n n ectio n w ith sh ow n in C h a p te rs F iv e , S ix , a n d E le v e n of

th e a u th o r’s s u p p o s itio n of B r a d w a r d in e ’ s The Science o f Mechanics. B e c a u se o f th e p o p u ­

fu n c t io n m a y im p ly th a t h e in te n d s t o d is c u s s la r ity o f th e r u le it is d iffic u lt t o say w h ic h

it o r p r o v e it la te r . N o w in a c tu a lity a tr e a tis e a u th o r or a u th o r s p r o v id e d th e w o r d in g o f

D e proportionibus o f Johannes d e W a s ia d o e s t h e r u l e a d o p t e d b y o u r a u t h o r . M y f e e l i n g is

b e g in on 46 r (/4 7 1 ) a lth o u g h to b e s u r e in a th a t he depended on b o th H e y te sb u ry and

d i f f e r e n t h a n d , a n d p e r h a p s i t is t h i s t r a c t t h a t C a s a li.

o u r a u t h o r h a s in m in d . I f s o , t h is w o u l d s u b ­ 27 T h i s t y p e o f p r o o f w a s d e v e l o p e d b y t h e

s ta n tia te th e s u g g e s t io n m a d e a b o v e t h a t th is M e r t o n C o l l e g e a u t h o r s ( The Science o f Mechan­

tra c t w a s com posed by Johannes de W a s ia . ics, 2 8 7 -8 8 , 2 9 8 -3 0 0 ). I n p o in t o f a c tu a l w o r d ­

H o w e v e r , in r e b u tta l o n e m ig h t s a y th a t “ th e i n g i t is c l o s e s t t o t h e l a t e r p r o o f o f B l a s i u s o f

r a tio s o f v e lo c itie s in m o tio n s ” is su ch a P arm a (ibid., 4 0 4 -5 ).

com m on s u b je c t th a t th e a u th o r m ay have 28 N o t i c e th a t th e L a tin p h r a s e is a c t u a l l y

s im p ly in te n d e d t o le a v e th e s u b je c t a lo n e as “ r e m itte r e t m o tu m su um u n ifo r m ite r d iffo r ­

n o t b e i n g p a r tic u la r ly g e r m a n e t o th e p r e s e n t m i t e r . ” I n v i e w o f w h a t t h e a u t h o r is p r o v i n g ,

a rg u m e n t. “ u n ifo r m ite r d iffo r m ite r ” s h o u ld be s im p ly

25 U n l i k e th e la s t fo u r t h e o r e m s , t h e fir s t “ u n ifo r m ite r .” H e w as no d o u b t th ro w n o ff

th e o r e m w a s r e s tr ic te d s im p ly t o th e e q u a lity b y t h e f a c t t h a t t h e m o t i o n is o n e o f u n i f o r m
47 d u p lu m corr. e x e q u a liu m / [ s i] supplevi (vide notam 28) o f th e u n ifo r m a n d u n if o r m ly d iffo r m s u r fa c e s . d iffo r m ity , w h ile th e change of m o tio n is
48 post u n ifo r m ite r scr, H et delevi d iffo r m ite r
A nd s o n o w , th e a u th o r in te n d s t o r e la te th a t s im p ly u n ifo r m .
 618 Appendix II Tractatus bonus de uniform i et difformi 619

continue describerent sibi continue [in] ista hora C /50/ gradu, [i.e.,]
quantum si continue C gradu fuissent mota — A in prima medietate hore C
gradu [et] B similiter in secunda medietate C gradu— et non plus /51/ nec
minus.
P robatio: quantumcunque A magis pertransit intendendo motum suum
a C gradu usque ad gradum duplum ad C in prima medietate /52/ hore tanto
B minus per sui motus remissionem a C gradu usque ad non gradum per-
transitum. E rgo precise tantum ambo pertransiverunt /53/ quantum continue
C gradu uniformiter fuisset pertransitum ab eis in ista tota hora. E rgo
motus ipsorum correspondet C /54/ gradui qui est medius inter ambas
latitudines A et B , quia si B in prima medietate intensisset (!) motum suum
a {n o n ) gradu usque /5 5/ ad gradum C et A in secunda parte hore ab eodem
45r C gradu intendisset motum suum usque ad gradum duplum / ad (7, tunc A et
B tantum latitudinem quantum prius acquisivissent nunc acquirunt. E rgo
cum /2/ ista latitudo esset uniformiter difformis et C medio gradui corre­
spondent, sequitur propositum.
E t est recte de latitudine uniformi /3J C gradus velocitatis et de latitudine
uniformiter difformi cuius C est medius gradus sicud superius dixi de illo
parallelogrammo /4/ rectangulo cuius unum latus erat in basi trianguli et
relicum in cono et [de] superficie illius trianguli, quod parallelogrammum
/5/ fuit extensum in latitudine ad quantitatem linee secantis duo latera
trianguli in partes equales.
E x isto inferunt ulterius isti doctores /6/ quod possibile sit aliqua duo
mobilia m overi in hora et in qualibet parte illius hore unum illorum velocius
movetur alio et /7/ in nulla parte hore m oventur equevelociter et tamen in
fine hore equalia spacia describerent. Causam huius assignant /8/ quia quam­
vis in nulla parte temporis equevelociter moveantur tamen in toto tempore
vel in hora tota sumendo totam velocitatem /9/ ista mobilia sunt equeveloci­
ter mota. E t hoc est verum de talibus mobilibus quorum unum moveretur
latitudine motus uniformiter /10/ difformi incipiente a non gradu et relicum
traverse just as much space— no more no less— as i f each m oved with C degree in
that hour, [i.e., ] as i f A had m oved continually in the first half o f the hour w ith C
degree and similarly B [had moved] in the second half o f the hour with C degree.
P ro o f: H ow ever much more A traverses in increasing its velocity from C degree
to a degree tw ice C in the first half hour [than i f it m oved continually w ith C ], by
that same amount does B traverse less space in decreasing its velocity from C de­
gree to no degree [in the second half o f the hour than if it m oved continually with C
degree]. Therefore, both together w ould traverse precisely as much as w ould have
been traversed by them [moving] uniformly and continually w ith C degree in the
w hole hour. Therefore, their motion corresponds to C degree, which is the mean o f
the tw o latitudes o f A and B taken together. For if B in the first half had increased
its velocity from no degree to C degree and A had increased its velocity in the
second part o f the hour from the same C degree to a degree twice C , then A and B
together w ould now acquire just as much latitude as they had acquired before.
Therefore, since this latitude w ould be uniformly difform and w ould correspond
to the mean degree C , that which has been proposed follows.
A nd [we can speak] o f (1) a uniform latitude w ith C degree o f velocity and (2) a
uniformly difform latitude o f which C is the mean degree in just the w ay I spoke
above o f (1) that rectangular parallelogram one o f whose sides was in the base o f
the triangle and the other in the apex and (2) the surface o f the triangle— and the
parallelogram was extended in latitude in the quantity o f the line bisecting the
tw o sides o f the triangle.
From this these doctors29 infer further that it is possible for tw o mobiles to be
m oved in an hour such that in any part o f the hour one [or the other] o f them is
m oved more quickly than the other and in no part o f the hour are they m oved
equally fast and yet by the end o f the hour they w ould traverse equal spaces. They
say that the cause o f this is because, although in no part o f the hour are they m oved
equally fast, yet in the w hole time, or in the w hole hour, and taking into account
the total velocity,30these mobiles are m oved equally fast. A nd this is true o f mobiles
o f the sort that one w ould be m oved with a latitude uniformly difform beginning

29 C f . Tractatus desexinconvenientibus( V e n i c e , i n g t h o s e o f t h e fir s t h a l f as w e ll) a re c o n s id e r e d

1 3 0 5 ), s ig . h - h 2 v , p a r tic u la r ly in th e p r o o f o f S o c ra te s by th e end o f th e hour has m oved

t h e 3 th “ i n c o n v e n i e n c e , ” w h e r e a c a s e is p o s i t ­ e q u a lly fa s t b e c a u s e h e h a s tr a v e r s e d th e sa m e

ed of S o c ra te s m o v in g u n ifo r m ly d iffo r m ly sp a ce . I n c id e n ta lly , th e a u th o r o f th e Six In­

and P la to m o v in g u n ifo r m ly at th e m ean conveniences s e e m s t o h a v e b e e n a t O x f o r d , o r in

d e g r e e , a n d t h e m o tio n s a re s a id t o be equal to u c h w it h th e O x f o r d a u th o r s, in th e i 3 4 o ’ s.

o n ly a t th e e n d o f th e hour because by th a t H e q u o te s B r a d w a r d in e a n d H e y te sb u ry an d

49 [in ] supplevi For 45r: tim e th e y w ill have tra v e rse d equal sp aces. i n t u r n is q u o t e d b y J o h n D u m b l e t o n (Summa
50 supplevi /
[ i.e .,] C 2 corr. ex e t / [e t] supplevi / 1 postzccpihWisse.ntscr.et dei. / / m o t u m su u m H ow ever, th e case d iffe r s s lig h tly fr o m naturalium, V a t . l a t . 9 5 4 , 8 r ).
B corr. ex A u sq u e ad grad u m th a t su g g e ste d by our a u th o r h ere, s in c e it 30 F o r th e c o n c e p t o f “ to ta l v e lo c it y ,” see

52 m in u s . . . m o tu s corr. ex p e r s u i m in u s 3 C 1 corr. ex c u i u s c o n c e n tra te s on th e se c o n d h a lf o f th e hour The Science of Mechanics, 364, a n d a b o v e , In tr o ­

7 t a m e n bis H w h ere S o c r a t e s is a lw a y s m o v in g fa ste r th a n d u c tio n I .B , 4 7 .

8 t o t a m corr. ex t o t u m P la to a n d y e t w h e n th e w h o le m o tio n s (in c lu d ­

 620 Appendix II
moveretur medio gradu eiusdem latitudinis uniformiter difformis, talia
enim in fine hore /i i/ equalia spacia describerent ex eo quod primum mobile
quod uniformiter difformiter movebatur in prima medietate temporis de
sua /12/ velocitate amisit in comparatione ad relicum mobile quod uniformi­
ter movebatur medio gradu motus uniformiter difformis /13/ tantum in
secunda medietate temporis sibi acquisivit. E t hoc de isto.
post v e l o c i t a t e scr. H et delevi e t
Tractatus bonus de uniform i et dijformi 621
from no degree and the other w ould be m oved uniformly w ith the mean degree o f
the same latitude uniformly difform, for such mobiles w ould by the end o f the
hour traverse equal spaces due to the fact that the first mobile, which was m oved
uniformly difformly, in the first half o f the hour lost in comparison w ith the other
body, which was m oved uniformly w ith the mean degree, just as much o f its veloc­
ity as it gained for itself in the second half o f the time. A nd so much for this sub­
ject.
 A PPE N D IX III
T h e S e m ic ir c u la r Q u a lity :

I .x iv o f th e D e configurationibus
in M a n u s c r ip t J

In I.xiv of the D e c o n f i g u r a t i o n i b u s , i t will be recalled, Oresme rejected the unique­

ness o f the semicircle to represent a certain specific difformly difform quality.
He did this by extending the suitability doctrine, developed in connection with
rectangles and triangles used to represent uniform and uniformly difform qualities,
to such “ semicircular” difform qualities. Thus Oresme concluded there that such a
linear quality which is represented by a semicircle constructed on the subject line
as a diameter could just as well be represented by figures higher and lower than
the semicircle. These figures would also be constructed on the diameter and their
altitudes (i.e., ordinates) raised on the subject line would be in the same ratio as the
corresponding altitudes (ordinates) o f the semicircle. As already noted in our
commentary to I.xiv, lines 14-54, Oresme’s conclusions regarding the nature of
these higher and lower figures were not completely s a t i s f a c t o r y . H e r e c o g n i z e d
(but without adequate proof) that the figures higher than the semicircle cannot be
segments of a circle. Furthermore, he leaves aside as a matter to be discussed the
question o f whether the figures lower than the semicircle are circular segments. It
is the discussion of this neglected point (and in general the presentation o f a com­
plete proof o f the assertion that neither higher nor lower figures can be circular
segments) that is the objective o f the remarks o f the commentator in manuscript J
o f the D e c o n f i g u r a t i o n i b u s .
There are several things worth noting about the text and translation o f / ’s
version of I.xiv. The first point is that the scribe o f manuscript J , writing close
to 1500 (see Introduction IV under J ) , was in all probability copying the commen­
tary rather than composing it. I deduce this from the number of errors that seem
to be misreadings rather than mere slips o f an author (see the variant readings
accompanying the text). If this is so, we are left without adequate grounds
for dating the composition of the commentary. It could have been made just
623
 The Semicircular Quality 625
624 Appendix III

prior to the time of its copying in the late fifteenth century, or it could date back e.g. both inmaginari andymaginari as well as dyameter and diameter appear. In such
to the beginning o f the century when the art o f latitudes had become a school cases I have followed the reading o f the manuscript.
subject. In the English translation, I have broken this account o f I.xiv by inserting
The second point o f note is that the commentator focuses attention on the sum­ “ [Oresme]” as a heading for those parts that are either directly quoted or para­
mit lines or curves in an effort to determine whether they are circular, thus extend­ phrased from Oresme’s text, and “ [Commentator]” as a heading for the additional
ing Oresme’s preliminary consideration of such lines and anticipating somewhat comments. Lines 12-23, stressing the suitability doctrine for uniform and uniform­
more pointedly the attention o f analytic geometry to such curves. ly difform qualities, have their general origin in I.vii and the immediately succeed­
Finally, it can be remarked that the commentator applies “ numbers and roots of ing chapters o f the D e configurationibus. Otherwise the rest of the material under
numbers” to the figures, thus taking a further step toward analytic geometry. He “ [Oresme]” comes directly or indirectly from I.xiv.
does this in the last section o f the comment where he indicates that it can be shown
by the use of numbers that the curve in question is non-circular. The procedure is
simply this. One constructs the unknown curve as if it were circular. Then one
determines numerically the ratio o f two ordinates o f the original semicircle (ap­
parently by assuming that the equation of a circle in rectangular coordinates is
x2 -f- y2 = a2). N ow since by supposition the unknown curve has corresponding
ordinates in the same ratio as those o f the circle, one compares this numerically
determined ratio visually with the lengths of the ordinates of the unknown curve
constructed as if it were a segment o f a circle, or rather he compares them in the
case o f a lower figure, with the complementary segments o f those ordinates con­
sidered as parts of chords in the circle completed from the constructed circular
segment, which complementary linear segments (i.e., D H and E G in Fig. 3) ought
to be in the same ratio as the ordinates if the unknown curve is circular. The com­
mentator concludes from the comparison o f the computed ratio with the actually
constructed line segments that such segments are not in the computed ratio and
that thus the curve cannot be circular. It should be pointed out that, like Oresme,
the commentator does not go any further in the positive identification o f the un­
known curves as elliptical.
For a brief description o f manuscript J (Florence, Bibi. Naz. Centrale, Con.
Soppr. J.IX.26), see Introduction IV, where all o f the manuscripts o f the D e con­
figurationibus are described. The section published below occupies folios iq r-i 5v.
The scribe, as I suggested, was somewhat careless in his copying, particularly in
rendering correctly the letters designating the geometrical quantities. Most o f the
time he made no scribal distinction between c and e, and so I have simply tran­
scribed them as the argument required. The figures are well drawn in the manu­
script and are accurately labelled, except that in Figure 1 the letter C appears to
have been written over G , and in Figure 3, the D runs into a line and hence ap­
pears at first glance to be an O (and this accounts, perhaps, for the scribal error in
line 70). Incidentally, it will be noticed that I have made a number of corrections
and additions, all, I hope, justified either on the grounds of a previous reading in
the D e configurationibus (in which cases I have used the phrase: vide textum Oresme)
or on the grounds of mathematical sense. In any case, the manuscript reading has
been given in the variant readings. There is considerable variation in spelling in J,
 [Liber I: cap. i4m] [Book I: Chapter 14]

[Oresme]

Nam difformitas difformis est duplex: scilicet simplex et composita.
Simplex est que designabilis est per figuram cuius linea summitatis seu linea
intensionis est una, non composita ex pluribus. Et ideo oportet quod sit
linea curva, quia, si esset recta, iam esset uniformis simpliciter aut uniformi-
5 ter difformis, ut patet ex dictis. Necesse est etiam ut eius curvitas non sit
maior arcu semicirculi ut angulus supra basim sit maior recto.
Sit igitur verbi gratia linea A B alicuius subiecti qualis cuius linee qualitas
difformiter difformis simpliciter sit signanda per semicirculum A C B [Fig.
i]. Dico igitur quod eadem qualitas linee A B est ymaginabilis per figuram
io maioris altitudinis ac etiam minoris altitudine istius semicirculi et quantum­
libet, dummodo tales altitudines diversorum punctorum, ut E et D linee
A B , sint proportionales primis altitudinibus, sicut et in qualitate uniformi
que figuratur per quadrangulum aut difformis uniformiter alicuius linee
possunt sic quod pro eius significatione consimiles figure quadrangule ac
15 triangule maioris ac minoris altitudinis super eandem basim dum tamen
tales altitudines retineant eandem proportionem super diversis punctis
basis erecte [Fig. 2] ut sic eadem proportio est B C ad D M / que est D M ad
G L , sicut eadem sit proportio B N ad D F , que est D F ad G K , et tunc iste
For difform difformity is twofold: namely simple and composite. The simple is
that which is designatable by a figure whose line o f summit or line o f intensity is
one line, i.e., not composed of several lines. And therefore, it is necessary that it is a
curved line, because if it were straight then it would be simply uniform or uni­
formly difform, as is obvious from the things said. Also it is necessary that its
curvedness be not greater than the arc of a semicircle, as [then] the angle on the
base is greater than a right angle.
For example, let line A B be a subject o f the kind whose difformly difform linear
quality is to be designated by semicircle A C B [Fig. 1]. I say, therefore, that the
same quality o f line A B is imaginable by a figure o f greater or even lesser altitude
than the altitude o f this semicircle and by any amount you please, so long as such
l m c

F ig. 2

2 Simplex est bis J
3 intensionis corr. ex interioris
6 angulus corr. e x arcus (vide textum Oresme)
626
x 3 quadrangulum corr. ex 4m
17 sic corr. ex sint
18 tunc corr. ex tamen
altitudes of the diverse points, as E and D of line A B , are proportional to the first
altitudes, as [they can be] in the case of a uniform quality which is figured by a
rectangle; or the lines o f some uniformly difform quality can be such that for its
signification there can be erected on the same base conformable quadrangular and
triangular figures of greater and lesser altitude so long as such altitudes retain the
same ratio on the diverse points o f the base. Thus they are erected [as in Fig. 2] so
that just as B C J D M = D M j G L , so B N j D F = D F J G K , and then these are dif-
627
 628 Appendix III The Semicircular Quality 629

sunt diverse significationes qualitatis linearis linee A B . Sic et in uniformiter
ao difformi, sicut est eadem proportio altitudinis B C ad D F que est D F ad G 1',
sic eadem proportio altitudinis B N ad D E que est D E ad G H . Igitur
qualitas uniformiter difformis linee A B potest figurari per utrumque triangu­
lum A B C et A B N et sic de aliis.
Protrahantur igitur in dicto semicirculo linee D C et E F perpendiculares
25 super puncta basis E et D . Cum igitur sit possibile 2 alias lineas maiores et
minores super eisdem punctis E et D perpendiculares ad lineam A B produ­
cere que se habeant in eadem proportione sicut et iste 2 que sunt D C et E F ,
et conformiter possint sic fieri super omnia puncta linee A B maiores et
minores semper manente eadem proportione, sequitur quod super basim
30 A B poterit erigi figura magis ac minus alta hoc semicirculo et sibi propor-
tionabilis per quam recte potest inmaginari qualitas linee A B . Nam non
repungit ( /) qualitati punctali D ac punctali E (tunc de aliis) ymaginari et
figurari per maiorem ac minorem lineam quam sit linea D C ac E F , ut patet;
igitur [et cetera]. Verumtamenquelibet figura per quam est inmaginabilis ista
35 qualitas linee A B est curva. Utrum autem figura minor semicirculo per
quam ista qualitas potest ymaginari sit portio circuli discutiendum relinquo.
Ego autem dico quod non, quia si esset portio circuli utique esset maioris
circuli portio, igitur esset minoris curvitatis. Igitur linee super eisdem
punctis dyametri perpendiculariter erecte et ab ista linea curva intersecte
40 non essent proportionales, sicut requiritur, eisdem lineis usque in circum­
fluendam semicirculi deductis, ut patebit statim infra. Igitur et cetera.
Et dico quod per nullam maiorem [figuram] potest designari que sit portio
circuli, quia cum ista qualitas non possit designari nisi super basim A B sed
ferent significations o f the [uniform] linear quality o f line A B . 1 Similarly in the case
of the uniformly difform [quality], just as B C / D F = D F J G I, so B N J D E —
D E I G H .1 Therefore, the uniformly difform quality o f line A B can be figured by
either triangle A B C or triangle A B N , and similarly for others.
Therefore, let lines D C and E F be erected as perpendiculars on points E and
D o f the base in the aforesaid semicircle. Hence, since it is possible to produce on
these same points E and D two other greater or lesser lines perpendicular to line
A B which are in the same ratio as these two lines D C and E F (and in the same
way there can be constructed greater or lesser lines on all o f the points of line A B
with the same ratio maintained), it follows that there could be erected on base A B
a figure that is higher or less high than the semicircle but proportional to it and by
which the quality of line A B can be correctly imagined. For it is not contradictory
for the quality o f point D or that o f point E (and then for the others) to be imag­
ined and figured by a greater or lesser line than line D C or E F , as is evident.
Therefore, et cetera. However, any figure by which this quality o f line A B is
imaginable is a curve. But whether the figure less than a semicircle by which this
quality can be imagined is a segment o f a circle, I leave aside as a matter to be
discussed.
[Commentator]
But I say that it is not [a segment o f a circle]. For if it were a segment o f a circle,
surely it would be the segment o f a larger circle. Hence it would be of less curva­
ture. Hence the lines erected perpendicularly on the same points o f the diameter
and intersected by this curved line would not, as required, be proportional to the
same lines extended up to the circumference o f the semicircle. This will be evident
immediately below. Therefore, et cetera.

[Oresme]

And I say that the quality can be designated by no greater [figure] whichis [atthe same
time] a segment o f a circle. For, since this quality could only be designated [by a

1 It should also be stated that B C / D M = 2 As above, the proportion to highlight in

22 uniformiter corr. e x uniformis
24 Protrahantur corr. e x pertrantur
35 autem corr. ex ac (vide textum Oresme)
36 discutiendum corr. e x discutientis
41 deductis corr. ex deducte
42 dico corr. J e x dicto
B N j D F , for this is what should be high­
lighted in showing the equivalence of the
figures for representing the uniform quality.
Perhaps the author intends this by his rather
loose Latin.
order to show equivalent representations of
the uniformly difform quality is B C j D F =
B N / D E . Again, the author’s Latin may be
interpreted as stating this.
 630 Appendix III
basis A B non potest esse corda in circulo minore quam sit circulus A C B ,
45 igitur qualitas ista non potest inmaginari per maiorem figuram, [que est
portio circuli, quia talis] portio esset maior medietate sui circuli. Et cum
habeant eandem cordam que est dyameter semicirculi A C B , sequitur quod
i5r ipsa sit minor ipso semicirculo: contra positum. Hoc autem faciliter / potest
probari per ultimam sexti. Sequitur igitur quod curvitas huius figure non
50 sit curvitas circularis et tamen terminat altitudinem figure proportionalis ei
in altitudine quam terminat curvitas circularis. Erunt igitur proportionabiles
figure quarum una est curvitas circularis et alia non.
Proportionabiles, dico, scilicet in altitudine; figure non autem proportio­
nabiles ac similes simpliciter, quia hoc non contingit nisi in rectangulis qua-
55 drangulis que sunt figure simpliciter uniformis qualitatis, etc.
Sed tamen geometricus ( ? ) notat quod hec secunda [figura] portio [circuli]
nulla est, nam conceditur simili [modo] quod huiusmodi portio est maioris
circuli quam sit semicirculus datus et ultra conceditur quod est maior
semicirculo. Nec est hoc inconveniens simpliciter et in re sed tuo presu-
60 posito ( ! ) in primo, scilicet quod nulla figura debet habere angulum obtusum
super basim et cetera.
Igitur ego aliter hoc et primum intendo demonstrare. Et sit igitur { s e m i­
circulus A C B [Fig. 3], cuius diameter sit A B , et sit qualitas difformiter
difformis eiusdem dyametri designanda per semicirculum A C B . Et a
65 punctis D et E erigantur due linee altitudinis seu intensionis D C et E F .
Dico igitur quod huiusmodi qualitas super lineam A B precise signabilis
potest [esse] per aliam linea circulari. Nam si sic per adversum, sit ut figure­
tur per lineam curvam primo A I N B et compleatur totus circulus A B G .
Igitur ex premissis sicut se habet D C ad E F sic se habet D N ad E I . Item
70 sic se habet C D ad D N in se habet H D ad D M <ut> patet ex 15** 61, cum
idem perveniat ex C D in D M sicut ex N D in D H , quia tantum est utrinque
sicut id quod fit ex A D in D B per penultimam 41 (/ 34am 3i.?). Item eadem
ratione per 2 quod F E ad E G se habet sicut I E ad E P . Igitur sicut C D ad
F E sic D H ad E G . Tunc sicut N D ad I E sic D H ad E G . Ergo permutarim
49Jprobari corr. ex pri / ultimam corr. ex penul­ 60 obtusum corr. ex octussum
timam (vide textum Oresme) 70 H D corr. e x H O / ad D M corr. e x a.dms
5o tamen corr. e x tunc ('vide textum Oresme) 73 post E G scr. et del. J et / EP corr. e x E N
53 figure corr. e x pcie 74 IE corr. ex D E
631
The Semicircular Quality
figure] on base A B and base A B cannot be a chord in a circle less than circle A C B ,
therefore this quality cannot be imagined by a greater figure [that is at the same
time a segment o f a circle, since such a] segment would be greater than half of its
circle. And since they would have the same chord, namely the diameter o f circle
A C B , it follows that it is less than the semicircle. But this is against that which
has been posited. It moreover can be proved easily by the last [proposition] o f
Book V I [of the Elements]. Hence it follows that the curvedness of this figure is not
at the same time a circular curvedness and the boundary o f the altitude a figure
proportional in altitude to that which the circular curvedness bounds. Hence these
will be proportional figures, one o f which is a circular curvedness and the other is
not.
[Commentator]
I say “ proportional” but only in altitude. The figures are not proportional and
similar simply [i.e., in area].3 For this does not happen except in rectangles* which
are the figures o f a simply uniform quality, etc.
But still the geometer notes that this second [figure] is not a segment [of a circle],
for it is conceded by a similar method that a segment of this sort is o f a circle
larger than the given semicircle, and it is further conceded that it is greater than a
semicircle. Nor is this illogical absolutely and actually but only in respect to your
previous premise, namely that no figure ought to have an obtuse angle on the base,
etc.
Therefore, I intend to demonstrate this and the first alternative in another way.
Hence let there be a semicircle A C B , whose diameter is A B , and let the same diam­
eter have a difformly difform quality that is to be designated by semicircle A C B
[see Fig. 3]. And let there be erected on points D and E two lines of altitude or
intensity, D C and E F . Therefore, I say that a quality of this sort can be precisely
designatable on line A B by a line other than a circular line. For if the opposite is
posed, let it be that it would be figured by the curve A I N B in the first case [of a
figure lower than the semicircle], and let the whole circle A B G be completed.
Therefore, by the premises, (1) D C J E F = D N / E I . Also, (2) C D J D N — H D J
D M , as is evident by VI. 1 5 [of the Elements], since C D • D M — N D • D H (for
C D • D M = A D • D B and N D • D H = A D • D B , by III.34 [ = III.35 of
Greek text of the Elements]). Also by the same argument used twice, (3) F E J E G =
IE J E P [since E G H E = A E • E B and F E - E P = A E • E B , by III.34]. There-
3 See my discussion o f denominating a sur- tangles constructed on the same base. Obvious-
face “ simply” in Introduction II.A, in connec- ly the areas are proportional to the altitudes
tion with the use o f that term by Buridan. but the areas are not similar.
4 In fact, this is not completely true of rec-
 632 Appendix III The Semicircular Quality 633

75 sicut D M ad E P sic D H ad E G et divisim H M ad M D sicut G P <ad> E P . fore, (4) C D J F E — D H j E G [by (1), (2), (3), and the fact that D M = D C and E P
Ducantur igitur a punctis P et G due equidistantes et perpendiculares super = F E \. Then (5) N D f l E = D H J E G [by (4) and (1)]. Therefore, alternately, (6)
lineam D H , linee P E et G K. Patet nunc quod maior est proportio M H ad D M f E P — D H J E G [from (1) and (5) and the fact that D C = D M and E P =
L D quam L H ad M D . Igitur cum maior sit linea L K quam M H quia maior E F ] . Hence, by subtraction, (7) H M J M D = G P J E P [since from (6) D H J D M =
est sagitta L M quam K H , sequitur quod multo magis maior est proportio E G J E P and thus { D H - D M )/ D M = { E G - E P )J E P and D H - D M = H M
15V L K ad L D quam M H ad M D . / Igitur maior est proportio L K ad L D quam and E G — E P = G P ]. Therefore, let there be drawn from points P and G two
81 G P ad P E , quod est manifeste falsum, cum omnino sit eadem proportio parallel lines P L and G K perpendicular to line D H . N ow it is obvious that (8)
quia linee L K et G P sunt invicem eque et similiter linee L D et P E . Igitur M H J L D > L H J M D [this being equivalent to {M K + K H )J L D > {M K KH
relinquitur quod linea curva A I N B non sit circularis, et per consequens + L M )J{L D + L M )]. Hence, since L K > M H (for the versine L M is greater
figura A N B D non est portio circuli.
85 Et consimiliter probatur si designetur per maiorem figuram semicirculo
dato, ut patet per figuram A G P complendo circulum A G B N , et arguo
econtrario declarationis N D et D C per equalitatem proportionum linearum
D H ad G E , D M ad P E , et cetera.
Possent etiam omnia ista probari procedendo per numeros et radices
90 numerorum, ponendo dyametrum et lineas C D et D E notas et cetera, ut si

than the versine K H [o £ the larger circle]) [and since M H < L H ] , it follows that,
by a greater amount, (9) L K J L D > M H JM D . Hence [from (7) and (9)] (10) L K J
L D > G P JP E , which is manifestly false since these are completely in the same ratio,
line L K being equal to line G P and similarly line L D to line P E . Hence it remains
that the curved line A I N B is not circular and consequently the figure A N B D is
not a segment o f a circle.
The proof is the same if it [the linear difformly difform quality] is designated by
a figure that is greater [in height] than the semicircle, as is obvious from figure
A G P , by completing the circle A G B N [the whole figure being inverted]; and I
argue from the contrary o f a declaration relative to N D and D C arising from the
equality of the ratios of lines D H to G E and D M to P E , and so on.
In addition, all o f these things can be proved by operating with numbers and
the roots o f numbers,5 by posing the diameter and lines C D and D E as known,

77 nunc corr. ex na 82 et3 corr. e x ad 3 It is obvious that the equation of the circle rum (and probably also Oresme who is silent
78 M H corr. ex LH 90 D E corr. e x fie posed by the author is x2 + y2 = 16, and thus on numerical or algebraic relations o f latitudes
79 K H corr. ex K L unlike the author o f the D e latitudinibus forma- and longitudes in semicircular qualities), he
 634 Appendix III
linea D C sit 4 et linea D E 2, sequitur quod linea E F sit radix 12; et si sit
linea D N 2, sequitur [quod] E I sit radix 3; et per istas inveniemus quantita­
tes linearum D H et E G secundum figuras circulares hiis quantitatibus non
correspondere.
The Semicircular Quality 635
and so on, so that if line D C is 4 and line D E is 2, it follows that line E F is the
[square] root of 12; and if line D N is 2 [and the same proportion holds as with
circular ordinates], then it follows that E l is the [square] root of 3. And by means
of these we shall find that the quantities of the lines D H and E G in the circular
figures [which according to supposition ought to be in the same ratio o f 2/Vy]
do not correspond to these quantities [determined in the numerical ratio].

correctly understands the equation of a circle
in rectangular coordinates. Hence it appears
that this commentator is the first to impose
91 et linea bis J
correct numerical statements on the Oresme
graphing system, and it is o f course only when
this is done systematically that we have analytic
geometry.
Bibliography

Indexes
 B ib lio g r a p h y

Note: The classical Latin and Greek works are given in somewhat abbreviated form, and
usually in the Teubner or Loeb editions, except when a special textual point demanded
the use of another edition. In the case of works by the Latin Fathers, I have often used
the Migne texts, and the reference is abbreviated “ Migne, P L . ” For the full reference,
see Migne. I have arranged the extended list of Oresme’s works in a very tentative
chronological order instead of the alphabetical order followed for other authors. I have
seen and photographed most of the Oresme manuscripts mentioned in the bibliography.
In the few cases where I have not seen them, and I have had to depend on others, the folio
numbers are sometimes missing, but in every case the manuscript is, I believe, adequately
located.

Abraham ibn Ezra. L ib e r c o n iu n c tio n u m p la n e ta r u m e t r e v o lu tio n u m a n n o ru m m u n d i q u i d ic itu r

d e m u n d o v e ls e c u lo ,in his O p e r a (Venice, 1507),

Affligemensis, Johannes. D e m u s i c a c u m t o n a r i o . Ed. J. Smits van Waesberghe, in C o r p u s
s c r ip to r u m d e m u s i c a , Vol. 1. Rome, 1950

Albert of Saxony. Q u e s t i o n e s i n o c t o l i b r o s p h y s i c o r u m A r i s t o t e l i s . Paris, 1516.

Alhazen. O p t i c a e t h e s a u r u s . Basel, 1572.
Alkindi. See al-Kindi.
Angelus de Fossambruno. D e t r i b u s p r e d i c a m e n t i s H e n t i s b e r i . Venice, 1494. MS Venice,
Bibi. Marc. Lat. VI, 30, ir-i jr.
Anonymous. A e s t u n u m c a l i d u m . MS Paris, BN lat. 16134, 73r-8ov(note: 79V-80V con­
tains section on infinite series not contained in other manuscripts as listed by Busard,
“ Unendliche Reihen in A e s t u n u m c a l i d u m ,” q.v.: hence the latter may be a separate
piece).
--------. A s c l e p i u s . Ed. of A. D. Nock in C o r p u s h e r m e t i c u m , Vol. 2. Paris, 1945.
------- . Q u e s t i o u t r u m o m n i s f o r m a h a b e a t l a t i t u d i n e m n o b i s p r e s e n t a b i l e m p e r f i g u r a s g e o m e t r i c a s .
MS Venice, Bibi. Marc. Lat. VI, 62, 63r-68r.
--------. Q u e s t i o u t r u m o m n i s q u a l i t a s i n i n f i n i t u m d i v i s i b i l i s e x i s t e n s i n s u b i e c t o i n d i v i s i b i l i d e n o ­
m i n e t i p s u m i n f i n i t e t a l e . MS Erfurt, Stadtbibl. Amplon. Q. 325, 53r~54v.

--------. T r a c t a t u s b o n u s d e u n i f o r m i e t d i f f o r m i . First edition in Appendix II from MS Erfurt,

Stadtbibl. Amplon. Q. 325,43^45r.
------- . T r a c t a t u s d e s e x i n c o n v e n i e n t i b u s . Venice, 1505. This is a part of a collected work of
which the first item is Bassianus Politus, Q u e s t i o d e m o d a l i b u s .
------- . V a c c a P l a t o n i s . MS Vat. Pal. lat. 1892.
Antonius de Scarparia. Q u e s t i o n e s d e e l e m e n t i s . MS Vat. lat. 4447.
Apuleius. D e d e o S o c r a t i s . Ed. P. Thomas. Leipzig, 1938.
639
 640 Bibliography Bibliography 641

Aquinas, Thomas. I n A r i s to te lis lib r o s d e c a e lo e t m u n d o , d e g e n e r a tio n e e t c o r r u p tio n e , B ib lia s a c r a v u l g a t a e e d i t i o n i s . Ed. P. M. Hetzenauer. Oeniponte, 1906.

m e te o r o lo g ic o r u m e x p o s itio . Ed. R. M. Spiazzi. Turin, Rome, 1952. Bjornbo, A. A. “ Die mathematischen S. Marcohandschriften,” B i b l i o t h e c a M a t h e m a t i c a ,
------- . I n A r i s t o t e l i s l i b r o s d e s e n s u e t s e n s a t o , d e m e m o r i a e t r e m i n i s c e n t i a c o m m e n t a r i u m . Ed. 3. Folge, Vol. 12 (1911-12), 97-99. For MS/only.
R. M. Spiazzi. Turin, Rome, 1949. Blasius of Parma. Q u e s t i o n e s s u p e r t r a c t a t u d e l a t i t u d i n i b u s f o r m a r u m . Padua, i486; Venice,
--------. I n A r i s t o t e l i s l i b r u m d e a n i m a c o m m e n t a r i u m . Ed. A. M. Pirotta. Turin, 1959. 1505. For MSS, see M. Clagett, T h e S c i e n c e o f M e c h a n i c s i n t h e M i d d l e A g e s , 68 5. An edi­
-------- . I n d e c e m l i b r o s e t h i c o r u m A r i s t o t e l i s a d N i c o m a c h u m e x p o s i t i o . Ed. R. M. Spiazzi. tion has been prepared for publication by Dr. Dean Ware and Father Joseph Brown.
Turin, 1964. Boethius. D e i n s t i t u t i o n e a r i t h m e t i c a l i b r i d u o , D e i n s t i t u t i o n e m u s i c a l i b r i q u i n q u e . A c c e d i t
--------. I n d u o d e c i m l i b r o s m e t a p h y s i c o r u m A r i s t o t e l i s e x p o s i t i o . Ed. M. R. Cathala and R. M. G e o m e t r i a q u a e f e r t u r B o e t i i . Ed. G. Friedlein. Leipzig, 1867.

Spiazza. Turin, Rome, 1950. Borchert, E. “ Die Lehre von der Bewegung bei Nicolaus Oresme,” B e i t r a g e % u r G e -
--------. I n o c t o l i b r o s p h y s i c o r u m A r i s t o t e l i s e x p o s i t i o . Ed. P. M. Maggiolo. Turin, Rome, s c h i c h t e d e r P h i l o s o p h i e u n d T h e o l o g i e d e s M i t t e l a l t e r s , Vol. 31, Heft 3 (1934).

1954. --------. And see Oresme, [19].

--------. S u m m a c o n t r a g e n t i l e s . Ed. Leonina manualis. Rome, 1934. Boyer, C. B. H i s t o r y o f A n a l y t i c G e o m e t r y . New York, 1956.
--------. S u m m a t h e o l o g i a e . Ed. of the Inst, of Medieval Studies, Ottawa. 5 vols., Ottawa, ------- . T h e C o n c e p t s o f t h e C a l c u l u s . New York, 1939. Republished as T h e H i s t o r y o f t h e
1941-45. C a l c u l u s a n d i t s C o n c e p t u a l D e v e l o p m e n t , New York, 1959’

Aristotle. C a t e g o r i a e v e l p r a e d i c a m e n t a . T r a n s l a t i o B o e t h i i , E d i t i o c o m p o s i t a , T r a n s l a t i o G u i l - Bridrey, E. L a T h e o r i e d e l a m o n n a i e a u x i v e s i e c l e : N i c o l e O r e s m e , e t u d e d ’ h i s t o i r e d e s d o c t r i n e s e t
l e l m i d e M o e r b e k a e t c . Ed. L. Minio-Paluello. Bruges, Paris, 1961. This is Volume I 1-5 d e s f a i t s e c o n o m i q u e s . Paris, 1906.

of the A r i s t o t e l e s E a t i n u s . Brugmans, H. C a t a l o g u s c o d i c u m m a n u s c r i p t o r u m u n i v e r s i t a t i s G r o n i n g a n a e b i b l i o t h e c a e . Gro­

--------. D e i n s o m n i i s e t d e d i v i n a t i o n e p e r s o m n u m . Ed., with Latin translations, of H. J. ningen, 1898.
Drossaart Lulofs. 2 vols, Leiden, 1947. Vol. 2 contains both the v e t u s t r a n s l a t i o and Buridan, Jean. A c u t i s s i m i p h i l o s o p h i . . . J o h a n n i s B u r i d a n i s u b t i l i s s i m e q u e s t i o n e s s u p e r o c t o
n o v a t r a n s l a t i o under the title D e s o m p n o e t v i g i l i a . p h i s i c o r u m l i b r o s . . . . (Paris, 1509; offset reprint, Frankfurt a. M., 1964).

------- . O m n i a q u a e e x t a n t o p e r a . . . A v e r r o i s i n e a o p e r a o m n e s . . . c o m m e n t a r i i . Junta ed. of ------- . Q u a e s t i o n e s s u p e r l i b r i s q u a t t u o r d e c a e l o e t m u n d o . Ed. E. A. Moody. Cambridge,

9 vols. plus 3 supplements (Venice, 1562-74). Mass., 1942.
------- . For the medieval translations of the D e c a e l o , the D e g e n e r a t i o n e e t c o r r u p t i o n e , the Busard, H. L. L. “ Ueber unendliche Reihen im Mittelalter,” E E n s e i g n e m e n t m a t h e m a t i q u e ,
M e t e o r o l o g i c a , the D e s e n s u , the D e a n i m a , the E t h i c a , the M e t a p h y s i c a , and the P h y s i c a Ser. 2, Vol. 8 (1962), 281-90.
accompanying the e x p o s i t i o n e s of Thomas Aquinas, see the editions of those e x p o s i t i o n e s --------. “ Unendliche Reihen in A e s t u n u m c a l i d u m ,” A r c h i v e f o r H i s t o r y o f E x a c t S c i e n c e s .
under Aquinas. Vol. 2, No. 5 (1965), 387-97.
Arnaldus de Villanova. A p h o r i s m i d e g r a d i b u s . MS Merton College 230, Aphor. 14-16, 85r. --------. And see Oresme [15].
Augustine. C o n t r a F a u s t u m M a n i c h a e u m . Ed. in Migne, P L , Vol. 42. Calcidius. See Plato.
--------. D e c i v i t a t e d e i . Ed. B. Dombart. 2 vols, Leipzig, 1877-1905. Campanus. See Euclid.
--------. D e d i v i n a t i o n e d c e m o n u m . Ed. in Migne, P E , Vol. 40. Caplan, H. M e d i a e v a l A r t e s P r a e d i c a n d i . C o r n e l l S t u d i e s i n C l a s s i c a l P h i l o l o g y , Vol. 24,
--------. D e doctrina Christiana. Ed. in Migne, P L , Vol. 34. Ithaca, N.Y., 1934. For MS P only.
--------. D e g e n e s i a d l i t t e r a m . Ed. in Migne, P L , Vol. 34. Carlebach, J. See Leo Hebraeus.
--------. D e t r i n i t a t e . Ed. in Migne, P L , Vol. 42. Casali. See Johannes de Casali.
Auvergne. See William of Auvergne. Cassiodorus. V a r i a e . Ed. of Th. Mommsen in M o n u m e n t a G e r m a n i a e H i s t o r i c a , A u c t o r u m
Averroes. See Aristotle. a n tiq u is s im o r u m t o m u s X I I . Berlin, 1894; reprint, 1961.

Avicenna. See Ibn Sina. C a ta lo g u s c o d ic u m m a n u s c r ip to r u m B ib lio th e c a e R e g i s . Vol. 4 (Paris, 1744), 34$- For MS P

Bacon, Roger. D e g r a d u a t i o n e m e d i c i n a r u m c o m p o s i t a r u m . Ed. A. G. Little and E. Withing- only.

ton, O p e r a h a c t e n u s i n e d i t a R o g e r i B a c o n i , Fasc. IX (Oxford, 1928). Cato. D i s t i c h a . Ed. M. Boas. Amsterdam, 1952.
Baudry, L. L e x i q u e p h i l o s o p h i q u e d e G u i l l a u m e d ’ O c k h a m . Paris, 1958. Chatelain. See H. Denifle.
Baur, L. See Grosseteste. Cicero. D e d i v i n a t i o n e . Ed. and trans. W. A. Falconer. Loeb Library, London and New
Beaujouan, G. “ Manuscrits scientifiques medievaux de la Bibliotheque Colombine de York, 1923.
Seville,” P r o c e e d i n g s o f t h e T e n t h I n t e r n a t i o n a l C o n g r e s s o f t h e H i s t o r y o f S c i e n c e , Vol. 1 --------. D e n a t u r a d e o r u m . Ed. and trans. H. Rackham. Loeb Library, London and New
(Paris, 1964), 631-34. York, 1933.
B i b l i a s a c r a c u m g l o s s i s , i n t e r l i n e a r i e t o r d i n a r i a , e t c . Vols. 1 and 6, Lyon, 1545. Clagett, M. A r c h i m e d e s i n t h e M i d d l e A g e s . Vol. 1: T h e A r a b o - L a t i n T r a d i t i o n . Madison,
B ib lia s a c r a iu x ta L a tin a m V u lg a ta m v e rsio n e m a d c o d ic u m f id e m iu s s u P i i X L Ed. of the 1964.
Benedictines. 12 vols. (and continuing). Rome, 1926— . -------- . Giovanni M arliani and L a te M edieval Physics. New York, 1941.
 642 Bibliography
■------- . “Nicole Oresme and Medieval Scientific Thought,” P r o c e e d i n g s o f t h e A m e r i c a n
P h i l o s o p h i c a l S o c i e t y , Vol. 108 (1964), 298-309.
--------. “ Richard Swineshead and Late Medieval Physics,” O s i r i s , Vol. 9 (1950), 131-61.
--------. “ T h e S c i e n c e o f M e c h a n i c s i n t h e M i d d l e A g e s . Madison, 1959; corr. reprint, 1961.
--------. “ The Use of Points in Medieval Natural Philosophy and Most Particularly in
the Q u e s t i o n e s d e s p e r a of Nicole Oresme,” A c t e s d u S y m p o s i u m I n t e r n a t i o n a l R . f .
B o s k o v i c i p 6 1 (Belgrade, 1962), 215-21.
--------. “ The Use of the Moerbeke Translations of Archimedes in the Works of Johan­
nes de Muris,” I s i s , Vol. 43 (1952), 236-42.
Claudianus. D e h e l l o g o t h i c o . Ed. J. Koch, C l a u d i i C l a u d i a n i C a r m i n a . Leipzig, 1893.
Constantinus Africanus. D e g r a d i b u s s i m p l i c i u m m e d i c i n a r u m . Printed as D e g r a d i b u s m e d i c i ­
n a r u m se c u n d u m o r d in e m a l p h a b e t i , in Ysaac, O p e r a o m n i a , Vol. 2, Lyon, 1515, 78r-86v.
Cf. O p e r a C o n s t a n t i n i (Basel, 1536), 342-44. Cf. also Cambridge MS, Trinity College 904,
ii3r-i4v.
-----— . V i a t i c u m . See Ysaac, O p e r a o m n i a , Vol. 2, Lyon, 1515, 144-72.
Coopland, G. W. See Oresme [11], [23].
Curtze, M. D i e m a t h e m a t i s c h e n S c h r i f t e n d e s N i c o l e O r e s m e ( c i r c a 1 3 2 0 - 1 3 8 2 ) . Berlin, 1870.
--------. “ Ueber die Handschrift R. 402: Problematum Euclidis explicatio, der Konigl.
Gymnasialbibliothek zu Thorn,” Z e i t s c h r i f t f u r M a t h e m a t i k u n d P h y s i k , Vol. 13 (1868),
Suppi., 45-104. Separately printed in Leipzig, 1868.
Daniel, N. I s l a m a n d t h e W e s t . Edinburgh, i960.
Delatte, A. L a C a t o p t r o m a n c i e g r e c q u e e t s e s d e r i v e s . Liege and Paris, 1932.
Delisle, L. “Inventaire des manuscrits latins de Saint-Victor,” B i b l i o t h e q u e d e V E c o l e d e s
C h a r t e s , 6 ser., Vol. 5 (1869), 27. For MSS M and N only.
------- . “ Notice sur des manuscrits du Fonds Libri conserves a la Laurentienne,”
N o t i c e s e t e x t r a i t s d e s m a n u s c r i t s , Vol. 32(1886), 49-51. For MS F only.
Denifle, H., and E. Chatelain. C h a r t u l a r i u m U n i v e r s i t a t i s P a r i s i e n s i s . 4 vols., Paris, 1889-97.
De Poorter, A. C a t a l o g u e d e s m a n u s c r i t s d e l a B i b l i o t h e q u e P u b l i q u e d e l a v i l l e d e B r u g e s .
Gembloux and Paris, 1934.
Droppers, G. See Oresme [8].
Duhem, P. E t u d e s s u r L e o n a r d d e V i n c i . 3 vols. Paris, 1906-13; reprint 1955.
--------. L e S y s t ' e m e d u m o n d e . 10 vols. Vols. 1-5, Paris, 1913-16; Vols. 6-10, Paris, 1954-
59-
Durand, D. “Nicole Oresme and the Mediaeval Origins of Modern Science,” S p e c u l u m ,
Vol. 16(1941), 167-85.
Enestrom, G. An untitled note on permutations and combinations in the work of Levi
Ben Gerson, B i b l i o t h e c a M a t h e m a t i c a , 3. Folge, Vol. 14(1913-14), 261.
Eubel, C. H i e r a r c h i a c a t h o l i c a M e d i i A e v i . Vol. 1. Regensburg, 1898.
Euclid. E l e m e n t a . Arabie version of Nasir al-Din al-Tusi. Rome, 1594.
--------. E l e m e n t a . Latin translation known as Adelard II. MS Oxford, Bodleian Library,
Auct. F.5.28.
--------. E l e m e n t o r u m g e o m e t r i c o r u m l i b r i x v . C u m e x p o s i t i o n e T h e o n i s i n p r i o r e s x i i i . . . C a m p a n i
i n o m n e s ..... Basel, 1546. See also the e d . p r i n c e p s of E. Ratdolt, Venice, 1482. Except
for Appendix II, my citations are to the Basel edition.
Galen. D e s y m p t o m a t u m c a u s i s . In O m n i a q u a e e x t a n t o p e r a : L i b r o r u m t e r t i a c l a s s i s .
Venice, 1565.
Bibliography 643
Galilei, Galileo. L e O p e r e . Ed. Naz. 23 vols. Florence, 1891-1909. Particularly Vols. 1
(1890) and 8 (1898).
al-Ghazzall. M e t a p h y s i c s . Ed. of J. T. Muckle, A l g a ^ e T s M e t a p h y s i c s (Toronto, 1933).
Gilbert the Englishman. C o m p e n d i u m m e d i c i n e . Lugduni [1510].
Ginsburg, J. “ Rabbi Ben Ezra on Permutations and Combinations,” T h e M a t h e m a t i c s
T e a c h e r , Vol. 15 (1922), 347-56.
G l o s s a o r d i n a r i a . See B i b l i a s a c r a c u m g l o s s i s .
Gossner, J. W. See Oresme [22a].
Grant, E. “ Late Medieval Thought, Copernicus, and the Scientific Revolution,” J o u r n a l
o f t h e L l i s t o r y o f I d e a s , Vol. 23 (1962), 197-220.
------- . “ Nicole Oresme and his D e p r o p o r t i o n i b u s p r o p o r t i o n u m , ” I s i s , Vol. 51 (i960),
293-314.
------- . “ Nicole Oresme and the Commensurability or Incommensurability of the Celes­
tial Motions,” A r c h i v e f o r H i s t o r y o f E x a c t S c i e n c e s , Vol. 1 (1961), 420-5 8.
------- . “ Part I of the A l g o r i s m u s p r o p o r t i o n u m of Nicole Oresme,” I s i s , Vol. 56 (1965),
327-41.
------- . And see Oresme [6], [7], [10], [14].
Gratian. D e c r e t u m . See Richter.
Gregory the Great. H o m i l i a e i n E ^ e c h i e l e m . Ed. in Migne, P L , Vol. 76.
Grosseteste, Robert. D e i r i d e . Ed. of L. Baur, B e i t r a g e % u r G e s c h i c h t e d e r P h i l o s o p h i c d e s
M i t t e l a l t e r s , Vol. 9 (1912), 72-78.
------- . D e l i n e i s , a n g u l i s e t f i g u r i s . Ed. of L. Baur, i b i d . , 59-65.
Haenel, G. C a t a l o g i l i b r o r u m m a n u s c r i p t o r u m . Leipzig, 1830.
Hariot, Thomas. A fragment on accelerated motion. MS London, Brit. Museum, Add.
Ms. 6789, 62r.
Henry of Hesse. D e r e d u c t i o n e e f f e c t u u m p a r t i c u l a r i u m i n c a u s a s u n i v e r s a l e s . MSS Paris, BN
lat. 2831, io3v-ii5r; London, Brit. Mus. Sloane 2156, 116V-130V; cf. Introduction
III. D, fns. 4-5.
Hermes. See Anonymous, A s c l e p i u s .
Heytesbury, William. R e g u l e s o l v e n d i s o p h i s m a t a . Venice, 1494. For manuscripts, see Cla-
gett, T h e S c i e n c e o f M e c h a n i c s , 691.
Hippocrates. A i r s , W a t e r s , P l a c e s . Loeb Library ed. and trans, of W. H. S. Jones, H i p p o ­
c r a t e s w i t h a n E n g l i s h T r a n s l a t i o n , Vol. 1. London and New York, 1923.
Hughes, D. A. T h e N e w O x f o r d H i s t o r y o f M u s i c . Vol. 2: E a r l y M e d i e v a l M u s i c u p t o 1 3 0 0 .
Oxford, 1954.
Huygens, C. H o r o l o g i u m o s c i l l a t o r i u m s i v e d e m o t u p e n d u l o r u m a d h o r o l o g i a a p t a t o d e m o n s t r a ­
t i o n e s g e o m e t r i a e . Paris, 1673; cf. O e u v r e s c o m p l e t e s d e C h r i s t i a a n H u y g e n s , Vol. 18, Le
Haye, 1934.
Ibn Butlan. T a c u i n u m D e i (or T a c u i n u m s a n i t a t i s ' ) . MS Vat. lat. 2426. Ed., Argentorati,
1531.
Ibn SIna (Avicenna). L i b e r c a n o n i s . Venice, 1555.
------- . L i b e r s e x t u s n a t u r a l i u m (= D e a n i m a ) . Ed. in O p e r a i n l u c e m r e d a c t a (Venice, 1508;
offset reprint, Frankfurt a. M., 1961).
Jacobus de Sancto Martino. T r a c t a t u s d e l a t i t u d i n i b u s f o r m a r u m . Ed. Thomas Smith. Dis­
sertation, University of Wisconsin, 1954. Partial ed. of H. Wieleitner, “ Der ‘Tractatus
de latitudinibus formarum’ des Oresme,” B i b l i o t h e c a M a t h e m a t i c a , 3. Folge, Vol. 13
 644 Bibliography
(1912-i 3), 115-45. Partial English translation by C. G. Wallis, A n A b s t r a c t o f N i c h o l a s
O r e s m e ’s T r e a t i s e o n t h e B r e a d t h s o f F o r m s , Annapolis, 1941. The manuscripts and early
editions are discussed by Smith. See also the Introduction above, Chapter Four, Foot­
note 1 and S c i e n c e o f M e c h a n i c s , 397-98. The eds. of Padua, i486 and Venice, 1505
should be singled out. The latter is in the omnibus volume with Bassianus Politus,
Q u e s t i o d e m o d a l i b u s . See also the Commentary in MS Freiburg i. Breisgau, Bibl. Univ.
238, 2 r - 2 0 V .
------- . T r a c t a t u s d e p e r f e c t i o n e s p e c i e r u m . MSS Vat. Chis. F.IV.66, 6v-i2v; Erfurt, Stadt-
bibl. Amplon. Q. 387, 79r-85v; Munich, Staatsbibl. cod. lat. 4377, i43r-48v.
Jacobus de Voragine. L e g e n d a a u r e a . Ed. Th. Graesse. 2nd ed., Leipzig, 1850. Cf. almost
identical 3rd edition, Breslau, 1890.
Jacopo da Forli. D e i n t e n s i o n e e t r e m i s s i o n e f o r m a r u m . Venice, 1496. MS Venice, Bibl. Marc.
Lat. VII, 7, ir-5 jv.
Jerome. C o m m e n t a r i o r u m i n D a n i e l e m P r o p h e t a m l i b e r u n u s . Ed. in Migne, P L , Vol. 25.
--------. E p i s t o l a e . Ed. in Migne, P L , Vol. 22. Cf. ed. of I. Hilberg (Leipzig, 1910).
Johannes Afflige mensis. See Affligemensis, Johannes.
Johannes de Casali. D e v e l o c i t a t e m o t u s a l t e r a t i o n i s . MSS Florence, Bibl. Riccard. 117,
135r—144V; Oxford, Bodl., Canon. Misc. 376, ; Seville, Bibl. Colomb. 5.1.10,
ir-26v; Vatican lat. 2185, 6iv-7ir; 3026, 29^33^ 3144, ir-i6v; Vienna, Nat.-bibl.
4I27>I 54r-I 72r;(ed. with Bassianus Politus,Q u e s t i o d e m o d a l i b u s [Venice, 1505], 5j r -
70v].
Johannes de Ripa ( o r de Rupa). T r a c t a t u s d e p e r f e c t i o n e s p e c i e r u m . MS Paris, BN lat.
14580, i24v-i49r; this is part of his L e c t u r a s e n t e n t i a r u m ' , see above, Introduction II. B,
fn. 9.
John of Salisbury. P o l i c r a t i c u s . Ed. C. C. I. Webb. 2 vols. Oxford, 1909.
Johnson, C. T h e D e m o n e t a o f N i c h o l a s O r e s m e a n d E n g l i s h M i n t D o c u m e n t s . London, 1956.
Jourdain, C. “ Nicole Oresme et les astrologues de la cour de Charles V ,” R e v u e d e s q u e s ­
t i o n s h i s t o r i q u e s , N o \ . 18(1875), 136-59.
Justin [Marcus Junianus Justinus]. E p i t o m a h i s t o r i a r u m P h i l i p p i c a r u m P o m p e i T r o g i . Ed. O.
Seel. Leipzig, 1935.
al-Kindl. D e r a d i i s s t e l l a r u m (or s t e l l i c i s ) . MS Bruges, Stadsbibliotheek 486,174^79 v.
Klibansky, R., E. Panofsky, and F. Saxi. S a t u m a n d M e l a n c h o l y . New York, 1964.
Knops, J. P. H. E t u d e s s u r l a t r a d u c t i o n f r a n g a i s e d e l a m o r a l e a N i c o m a c h e d ’ A r i s t o t e p a r N i c o l e
O r e s m e . ’s-Gravenhage, [1952].
Koyre, A. E t u d e s g a l i l e e n n e s . Vol. 2, Paris, 1939.
Kren, C. See Oresme [9].
Laude, P. J. C a t a l o g u e d e s m a n u s c r i t s d e l a B i b l i o t h e q u e P u b l i q u e d e B r u g e s . Bruges, 1859.
Leo Hebraeus (Levi ben Gerson). D e h a r m o n i c i s n u m e r i s . MS Basel, F.II.33, i7ir~72r.
Also, poorly edited in Joseph Carlebach, L e w i b e n G e r s o n a l s M a t h e m a t i k e r (Berlin, 1910),
129-44.
Leo Magnus. S e r m o n e s . Ed. in Migne, P L , Vol. 54.
Levy, R. T h e A s t r o l o g i c a l W o r k s o f A b r a h a m i b n E ^ r a . Baltimore and Paris, 1927.
Lowes, J. Livingston. “ The Loveres Maladye of Hereos,” M o d e r n P h i l o l o g y , Vol. 11
(19H-13), 491-546.
Lucan. D e b e l l o c i v i l i . Ed. and trans. J. D. Duff. Loeb Library, London and New York,
1928.
Bibliography 645
Maier, A. A n d e r G r e n ^ e v o n S c h o l a s t i k u n d N a t u r m s s e n s c h a f t . 2nd. ed., Rome, 1952.
--------. A u s g e h e n d e s A l i t t e l a l t e r . Vol. i,Rome, 1964.
____ . “ Die ‘Quaestio de velocitate’ des Johannes von Casale, O. F. M.” A r c h i v u m
F r a n c i s c a n u m H i s t o r i c u m , An. 53 (i960), 276-506.
--------. D i e V o r l d u f e r G a l i l e i s i m 1 4 . J a h r h u n d e r t . Rome, 1949; new edition, 1966, not
used in this volume.
____ . “ La Doctrine de Nicolas d’Oresme sur les ‘configurationes intensionum’,”
R e v u e d e s s c i e n c e s p h i l o s o p h i q u e s e t t h e o l o g i q u e s , Vol. 32 (1948), 52-67. Reprinted in her
A u s g e h e n d e s M i t t e l a l t e r , Vol. 1 (Rome, 1964), 335-52.
--------. M e t a p h y s i s c h e H i n t e r g r u n d e d e r s p a t s c h o l a s t i s c h e n N a t u r p h i l o s o p h i e . Rome, 1955.
--------. Z w e i G r u n d p r o b l e m e d e r s c h o l a s t i s c h e n N a t u r p h i l o s o p h i e . 2nd ed., Rome, 1951.
-------- Z r v i s c h e n P h i l o s o p h i c u n d M e c h a n i k . Rome, 1958.
Maimonides. D u x s e u d i r e c t o r d u b i t a n t i u m a u t p e r p l e x o r u m . Paris, 15 20.
Marsilius of Inghen. Q u e s t i o n e s i n l i b r o s d e g e n e r a t i o n e e t c o r r u p t i o n e A r i s t o t e l i s . Paris, 1518.
------- . Q u e s t i o n e s s u p e r o c t o l i b r o s p h y s i c o r u m . Lyon, 1518; offset reprint, Frankfurt a. M.,
1964.
Martianus Capella. D e n u p t i i s P h i l o l o g i a e e t M e r c u r i i . Ed. F. Eyssenhardt. Leipzig, 1866.
Martin, H. C a t a l o g u e d e s m a n u s c r i t s d e l a B i b l i o t h e q u e d e P A r s e n a l . Vol. 1. Paris, 1885.
Masino Codronchi [Messinus]. Q u e s t i o n e s s u p e r q u e s t i o n e m J o h a n n i s d e C a s a l i . MSS Escorial,
La Real Bibl. f.II.8, ir-49r; Bologna, Univ. Bibl. 1227 (2410), 101-63; Venice, Bibl.
Marc. Lat. VI, 225, ir-76r.
Mathieu, R. “ A la Recherche du ‘De anima’ de Nicole Oresme,” A r c h i v e s d ’ h i s t o i r e d o c ­
t r i n a l e e t l i t t e r a i r e d u m o y e n a g e , Vol. 31 (1957), 243-5 5.
--------. And see Oresme [1a].
Matthieu of Vendome. T o b i a s . Ed. F. A. G. Mueldener. Gottingen, 1855.
McCarthy, L. M. See Oresme [26].
McCue, J. See Symon de Castello.
McVaugh, Michael. T h e M e d i a e v a l T h e o r y o f C o m p o u n d M e d i c i n e s . Princeton University
Dissertation (1965).
Menut, A. D. See Oresme [27], [28], [29], [30].
Meunier, F. E s s a i s u r l a v i e e t l e s o u v r a g e s d e N i c o l e O r e s m e . Paris, 1857.
Migne, J. P. P a t r o l o g i a e c u r s u s c o m p l e t u s . S e r i e s l a t i n a . 221 vols. Paris, 1844-64. Abbreviated
throughout as Migne, P L .
Murdoch, J. Review of N i c o l e O r e s m e : Q u a e s t i o n e s s u p e r g e o m e t r i a m E u c l i d i s edited by H. L.
L. Busard, S c r i p t a M a t h e m a t i c a , Vol. 27 (1964), 67-91.
Nicolaus Cusanus. O p e r a , Vol. 2. Paris, 1514. Reprinted, Frankfurt/Main, 1962.
N o v u m T e s t a m e n t u m d o m i n i n o s t r i I e s u C h r i s t i L a t i n e s e c u n d u m e d i t i o n e m s a n c t i H i e r o n y m i . Ed.
J. Wordsworth and H. J. White. 3 vols. Oxford, 1889-1954.
Oresme, Nicole. [ i \ Q u e s t i o n e s s u p e r l i b r i s m e t e o r o l o g i c o r u m . MSS St. Gall 839, ir-i75v;
UpsalaC. 596, 2-97;Paris,BNlat. 15156, 226r-88v; Erfurt, Stadtbibl. Amplon. Q. 299,
51-103; Berlin, Staatsbibl. Lat. F. 631, 39r-ii4r (?); Breslau, Univ. Library MS War.
IV. Q. 27, 4 4-96; Cracow, Bibl. Jag. CC.VII.12, 59V-108; CC.VIII.31, 1-53.
------- . [ia] I n t e r o m n e s i m p r e s s i o n e s . MS Vat. lat. 4082, 82V—85v. Ed. by R. Mathieu in
A r c h i v e s d ’h i s t o i r e d o c t r i n a l e e t l i t t e r a i r e , Vol. 33 (1959)5 282-94. Against the editor I
believe that the work in this manuscript is probably not the small treatise beginning
“ Inter omnes impressiones....” to which Oresme refers in the L i v r e d u d e l (fol. 202c).
 646 Bibliography
-------• [2] Q u e s t i o n e s s u p e r d e s e n s u e t s e n s a t o (or c i r c a p a r v a n a t u r a l i a ). MS Erfurt, Stadt-
bibl. Amplon. Q. 299, i28r-57v.
------ . [2a] Q u e s t i o e s t u t r u m a l i q u a r e s v i d e t u r . MS Erfurt, Stadtbibl. Amplon. Q. 231,
146^5 or.
------ . [2b] D e v i s i o n e s t e l l a r u m . MSS Bruges, Stadsbibliotheek 530, 3ir-4iv; Florence,
Bibi. Naz. Centrale Conv. soppr. J.X.19, 3ir-42r. The work included in these MSS
may not be Oresme’s, although he apparently did compose a work with this title, as
the fragmentary explicit from the Florence MS (43^ says: “ ...dicta ipsius repugnare.
Explicit N. Orem etc. de visione stellarum tractatus brevis.”
------ • [3\ Q u e s t i o n e s s u p e r l i b r i s d e a n i m a . MSS Bruges 514, 7ir-i 1 ir; Munich, Staatsbibl.
cod. lat. 76 1, ir-4ov. There is a quite different, longer work in Bruges 477, 264V-298V,
which Mathieu for insufficient reasons attributes to Oresme. See Mathieu, “ A la
Recherche du ‘De anima'.”
------ . [3a] E x p o s i t i o s u p e r l i b r i s d e a n i m a . MS Bruges 477, 238v-64r. Believed by Mat­
hieu to be by Oresme. See Mathieu, “ A la Recherche du ‘De anima’.”
------ . [4] L i b e r [i.e., Q u e s t i o n e s ] d e g e n e r a c i o n e e t c o r r u p c i o n e . MS Florence, Bibl. Naz.
Cent. Conv. soppr. H.IX. 1628, ir-77v. This MS bears Oresme’s name (77V). Miss
Maier believes the different anonymous versions in MSS Vat. lat. 2185, 4 0 V -6 1V ; and
3097,10 3-4 6 , to be the work of Oresme.
------ • [5] Q u e s t i o n e s s u p e r s e p t e m l i b r o s p h y s i c o r u m (Bk. VIII is missing). MS Seville,
Bibl. Colo mb. 7.6.30, 2^79 v.
------ . [6] A d p a u c a r e s p i c i e n t e s . Ed. E. Grant. Madison, 1966.
------ . [7] T r a c t a t u s d e p r o p o r t i o n i b u s p r o p o r t i o n u m . Ed. E. Grant. Madison, 1966.
------ . [8] Q u e s t i o n e s s u p e r l i b r u m d e s p e r a . Ed. G. Droppers, Dissertation, University of
Wisconsin, 1966, using MSS Florence, Bibl. Riccard. 117, 125^3jr; Vat. lat. 2185,
7ir-77v; Venice, Bibl. Marc. Lat. VIII, 74, ir-8r; Seville, Bibl. Colomb. 7.7.13.
------• [9] Q u e s t i o n e s s u p e r l i b r o s d e c e l o . Ed. Claudia Kren, Dissertation, University
of Wisconsin, 1965, from MSS Erfurt, Stadtbibl. Amplon. Q. 299, 1-50; Q . 325,
57- 9°v.
------. [10] T r a c t a t u s d e c o m m e n s u r a b i l i t a t e v e l i n c o m m e n s u r a b i l i t a t e m o t u u m c e l i (or c e l e -
s tiu m ) . Ed. in preparation by E. Grant from seven MSS: Vat. lat. 4082, 97V-108V;
Vat. lat. 4275, 96r-ioir [Part III only]; Cambridge, Peterhouse 277 (= Bibl. Pepysiana
2329), m v-28r; Paris, Bibl. Arsenal 522, nor-2ir; Paris, BNlat. 7281, 259-73;Flor-
ence, Bibl. Lauren. Ashburn. 210, 15 9^-71 v; Utrecht, Rijksuniver. 725, 172-93.
------. [11] T r a c t a t u s c o n t r a i u d i c i a r i o s a s t r o n o m o s . Ed. by G. W. Coopland in N i c o l e O r e s ­
m e a n d t h e A s t r o l o g e r s (Liverpool, 1952), 123-41. Cf. ed. of H. Pruckner, S t u d i e n t ( u d e n
a s t r o l o g i s c h e n S c h r i f t e n d e s H e i n r i c h v o n L a n g e n s t e i n (Leipzig, 1933), 227-45.
----- • [12] Q u e s t i o c o n t r a d i v i n a t o r e s . MSS Paris, BN lat. 15126, ir—39r; Florence, Bibl.
Lauren. Ashburn. 210, 3r-2ir. Closely allied to work No. [13].
----- • [13] Q u o d l i b e t a . MSS Paris, BN lat. 15126, 39r-i58r; Florence, Bibl. Lauren.
Ashburn. 210, 2ir-yov.
----- . [14] A l g o r i s m u s p r o p o r t i o n u m . Ed. M. Curtze, D e r A l g o r i s m u s p r o p o r t i o n u m d e s
N i c o l a u s O r e s m e (Thorn, 1868). See also the corrected partial ed. of E. Grant, T h e M a t h ­
e m a tic a l T h e o ry o f P r o p o r tio n a lity o f N ic o le O r e s m e (c a . 1 3 2 0 - 1 3 8 2 ) , Dissertation, Uni­
versity of Wisconsin, 1957. See Grant’s “ Part I of the A l g o r i s m u s p r o p o r t i o n u m ,” for an
English translation of Part I.
Bibliography 647
-----• [15] O u c e s t i o n e s s u p e r g e o m e t r i a m E u c l i d i s . Ed. H. L. L. Busard, Leiden, 1961. New
ed. of Questions 10-15 in Appendix I above, taking into account MS Seville, Bibl.
Colomb. 7.7.13, io2v-ii2r not used by Busard. For further variants, see Murdoch’s
review in S c r i p t a M a t h e m a t i c a , Vol. 27 (1964), 67-91. Busard uses MSS Vat. Chis.
F.IV.66, 22v-4or and Vat. lat. 2225, 9or~98v.
----- • t15a] Q u e s t i o d e p r o p o r t i o n e d y a m e t r i q u a d r a t i a d c o s t a m e i u s d e m . Ed. H. Suter, “ Die
Quaestio ‘De proportione dyametri quadrati ad costam ejusdem’ des Albertusde Saxo-
nia,” Z e i t s c h r i f t f i i r M a t h e m a t i k u n d P h y s i k , Vol. 32 (1887), Hist.-lit. Abth., 41-56. Ores­
me’s authorship was argued by Zoubov. For my doubts, see Introduction II. A, Foot­
note 19.
------. [16] T r a c t a t u s d e c o n f i g u r a t i o n i b u s q u a l i t a t u m e t m o t u u m . For MSS, see above, Intro­
duction IV.B. Partial ed. based on MS P by H. Wieleitner, “ Ueber den Funktions-
begriff und die graphische Darstellung bei Oresme,” B i b l i o t h e c a M a t h e m a t i c a , 3. Folge,
Vol. 14 (1913-14), 193-243. For the partial Russian translation by Zoubov, see his
T r a k ta t N ik o la ia O r e m a .
------. [17] L e c t u r a s u p e r S e n t e n t i a s . Now lost but mentioned by Oresme three times.
------. [18] T r a c t a t u s d e m u t a t i o n i b u s m o n e t a r u m . Many early eds. of 1605, 1609, 1618,
1654, 1677— see the British Museum Catalogue. Ed. with medieval French translations
by L. Wolowski, T r a i c t i e d e l a p r e m i e r e i n v e n t i o n d e s M o n n o i e s d e N . O r e s m e , Paris, 1864.
Oresme was probably the first translator of his work. See also ed. with German trans­
lation by E. Schorer, T r a k t a t u b e r G e l d a b r v e r t u n g e n , Jena, 1937. See further ed. and
English translation of C. Johnson, T h e D e m o n e t a o f N i c h o l a s O r e s m e a n d E n g l i s h M i n t
D o c u m e n t s (London, 1956). My title is in the form given by Oresme himself in his
E t h i q u e s i p d. of Menut, 295, 297).
------ . [19] T r a c t a t u s d e c o m m u n i c a t i o n e i d i o m a t u m . Ed. of E. Borchert, in D e r E i n f l u s s d e s
N o m in a lis m u s a u f d ie C h r is to lo g ie d e r S p d ts c h o la s tik , B e i tr a g e % u r G e s c h ic h te d e r P h ilo s o p h ie
u n d T h e o lo g ie d e s M itte la lte r s , Vol. 35, Heft 4/5 (1940).
------ . [20] D e t e r m i n a t i o f a c t a i n r e s u m p t a i n d o m o N a v a r r e . MS Paris, BN lat. 16535,
m r-i4 v . A resume of a longer determination, which contained an a r t i c u l u s d e p e r f e c ­
tio n e s p e c ie r u m v e l r e r u m , perhaps identical with [20a]. See above, Introduction III.B,
Footnote 1.
------ . [20a] T r a c t a t u s d e p e r f e c t i o n i b u s s p e c i e r u m . Referred to by Oresme, D e c o n f , I.xx.
Maier suggests that MS Vat. lat. 986, i25r-33v is part of it. Also see comment under
[20].
------ . [21] A r s s e r m o c i n a n d i . MS Paris, BN lat. 7371, 279r-82v.
------ . [22] E x p o s i t i o c u i u s d a m l e g i s . MS Paris, BN lat. 14580, 22or-22v.
------ . [22a] L e Q u a d r i p a r t i t P t h o l o m e e . Ed. J. W. Gossner, from MS Paris, BN Frangais
1348, Dissertation, Syracuse University, 1951. This translation is ascribed to a G.
Oresme and may not be by Nicole. See Introduction III.A, Footnote 10.
------ . [23] L i v r e d e d i v i n a c i o n s . Ed. G. W. Coopland, in N i c o l e O r e s m e a n d t h e A s t r o l o g e r s
(Liverpool, 1952), 50-121.
------ . [24] D e m a l i s v e n t u r i s s u p e r e c c l e s i a m . MS Paris, BN lat. 14533, 77r~83v.
------ . [25] S e r m o c o r a m p a p a U r b a n o V e t c a r d i n a l i b u s h a b i t u s a n n o 1364 (1363?). MSS
Paris, BN lat. 1426; Utrecht 261; Vienna, Nat.-Bibl. 4203; 4217; Cues Hospital 64;
Cracow, Bibl. Jag. 1383, ^ 6 o t - 6 ^ v ; etc. Eds. in Flacius Illyricus, C a t a l o g u s t e s t i u m
v e r i t a t i s (Basel, 1556; Lyon, 1597); in J. Wolf, L e c t i o n u m m e m o r a b iliu m e t r e c o n d ita r u m
 648 Bibliography
c e n t e n a r i i X V I , Vol. 2 (Lauingen, 1600); separately by S. Gesner (Wittenberg, 1604);
and O. Gratius, F a s c i c u l u s r e r u m e x p e t e n d a r u m , Vol. 2 (London, 1690).
--------. [26] T r a i t i e d e P e s p e r e . Ed. L. M. McCarthy, Dissertation, University of Toronto,
1943.
--------. [27] L e L i v r e d e e t h i q u e s c W A r i s t a t e . Ed. A. D. Menut. New York, 1940; and see
Knops.
--------. [28] L e L i v r e d e p o l i t i q u e s d ’ A r i s t o t e . Ed. A. Vernard. Paris, 1489. New ed. by
A. D. Menut in preparation.
------- . [29] L e L i v r e d e j c o n o m i q u e d ’ A r i s t o t e . Ed. with the P o l i t i q u e s (Paris, 1489). New
ed. by A. D. Menut in T r a n s a c t i o n s o f t h e A m e r i c a n P h i l o s o p h i c a l S o c i e t y , New Series, Vol.
47, Part 5 ( i 957)> 785-853*
--------. [30] L e L iv r e d u d e l e t d u m o n d e . Ed. A. D. Menut and A. J. Denomy, C. S. B., in
M e d ia e v a l S tu d ie s , Vols. 3-5 (1941-43); Vol. 3, 185-280; 4, 159-297; 5, 167-333. New
ed., Madison, University of Wisconsin Press, 1968.
--------• [3T] D e c i s i o a n i n o m n i c a s u . Noted by Launoy. Perhaps identical with D e t e r m i n a t i o
m a g i s t r i O r e s m e s u p e r d u b i o a n l i c e a t i u d i c i o c c i d e r e i n n o c e n t e m in MS Brussels, Bibl. Royale
MS 18977/81, 51V-54V.
--------. [32] C o n t r a m e n d i c a c i o n e m . MSS Munich, Staatsbibl. cod. lat. 14265; Kiel, Univ.
Bibl. 127; Vienna, Nat.-Bibl. 11799; 4923 (fragment).
------- • [33] S e r m o n e s . MS Paris, BN lat. 16893, ir-i28v.
--------. [Note that the D e i n s t a n t i b u s of MS Paris, Bibl. Arsenal 522, usually found on
lists of Oresme’s works is by John of Holland; similarly a Q u e s t i o n s o n t h e P e r s p e c t i v e ,
sometimes attributed to Oresme, is by Henry of Hesse. There are a number of other
spurious works.]
Ovid. A m o r e s . Ed. and trans. G. Showerman. Loeb Library, London and New York,
1914. Also ed. ofP. Brandt (Leipzig, 1911).
--------. M e t a m o r p h o s e s . Ed. and trans. F. J. Miller. Loeb Library, London and New
York, 1916.
Ovid [pseudo-]. D e v e t u l a . Ed. S. Closius, in B r u n e l l u s V i g e l l i e t V e t u l a O v i d i i e t c . Wolfen-
biittel, 1662.
Palladius. D e a g r i c u l t u r a . Ed. J. C. Schmitt. Leipzig, 1898.
Paoli, C. I C o d i c i A s h b u r n h a m i a n i d e l l a R . B i b l i o t e c a M e d i c e o - L a u r e n y i a n a d i F i r e n z e , in
Ministerio delP Instruzione Pubblice, I n d i c i e c a t a l o g h i , Vol. 8, Fasc. 3. Rome, 1891.
Pease, A. S. See Virgil.
Pederson, O. N i c o l e O r e s m e , o g b a n s N a t u r f i l o s o f i s k e S y s t e m . E n u n d e r s o g e l s e a f b a n s s h r i f t
“ L e L iv r e d u C i e l e t d u M o n d e P Kobenhavn, 1956.
Petrus de Candia. L e c t u r a s u p e r s e n t e n t i a s . MS Paris, BN Nouv. acquis, lat. 1467.
Plato. T i m a e u s a C a l c i d i o t r a n s l a t u s c o m m e n t a r i o q u e i n s t r u c t u s . Ed. J. H. Waszink. London
and Leiden, 1962.
Pliny. N a t u r a l H i s t o r y . Ed. and trans. H. Rackham and W. H. S. Jones. 10 vols. Loeb
Library, London and New York, 1938-63. All my references are to Book and Section
number (not chapter number). Cf. ed. C. Mayhoff, 6 vols. Leipzig, 1875-98, 1906-9.
Richard Swineshead. See Swineshead, Richard.
Richter, A. L., ed. C o r p u s j u r i s c a n o n i c i . Pars I, Leipzig, 1839; cf. 2nd ed., Leipzig, 1879.
Robathan, D. M. “ Introduction to the Pseudo-Ovidian D e V e t u l a ,” T r a n s a c t i o n s o f t h e
A m e r ic a n P h i l o l o g i c a l A s s o c i a t i o n , Vol. 88 (1957), 197-207.
Bibliography 649
Roger Bacon. See Bacon, Roger.
Roger Swineshead. See Swineshead, Roger.
Roger Thomas. T r a c t a t u s p r o p o r t i o n u m . MS Venice, Bibl. Marc. Lat. VIII, 19, i44v-64r.
Roger Thomas (?). U t r u m v e l o c i t a s i n m o t i b u s s i t a t t e n d a p e r l a t i t u d i n e m a c q u i r e n d a m , a n p e n e s
s i m u l . MS Venice, Bibl. Marc. Lat.
g r a d u m la titu d in is , a n p e n e s la titu d in e m e t e x te n s io n e m
VIII, 19, 2i3r-i9v.
Sarton, G. I n t r o d u c t i o n t o t h e H i s t o r y o f S c i e n c e . 3 vols. in 5. Baltimore, 1927-48.
Schmidt, P. “ Die Bibliothek des ehemaligen Dominikanerklosters in Basel,” B a s l e r
Z e i t s c h r i f t f u r G e s c h i c h t e u n d A l t e r u m s k u n d e , Vol. 18 (1919), 160-2 54.
Schum, W. B e s c h r e i b e n d e s V e r y e i c h n i s s d e r A m p l o n i a n i s c h e n H a n d s c h r i f t e n - S a m m l u n g y u E r ­
f u r t . Berlin, 1887.
--------. E x e m p l a c o d i c u m A m p l o n i a n o r u m E r f u r t e n s i u m . Berlin, 1882.
Seneca, Annaeus. O r a t o r u m e t r h e t o r u m s e n t e n t i a e , d i v i s i o n e s , c o l o r e s . Ed. A. Kiessling. Leip­
zig, 1872.
Smalley, B. T h e S t u d y o f t h e B i b l e i n t h e M i d d l e A g e s . 2nd ed., Oxford, 1952.
Smith, D. E. H i s t o r y o f M a t h e m a t i c s . 2 vols. New Dover ed., New York, 195 8.
Smith, T. See Jacobus de Sancto Martino.
Solinus. C o l l e c t a n e a r e r u m m i r a b i l i u m . Ed. Th. Mommsen. Berlin, 1958.
Stainer, J., and W. A. Barrett. A D i c t i o n a r y o f M u s i c a l T e r m s . London, 1888.
Statius. T h e b a i d . Ed. and trans. J. H. Mozley. 2 vols. Loeb Library, London and New
York, 1928.
Swineshead, Richard. L i b e r c a l c u l a t i o n u m . MSS Cambridge, Gon. and Caius 499/268;
Paris, BN lat. 6558; Pavia, Bibl. Univers. Aldini 314. Eds. Padua, ca. 1477; Pavia,
1498; Venice, 1520.
Swineshead, Roger. D e m o t i b u s n a t u r a l i b u s . MSS Erfurt, Stadtbibl. Amplon. F. 135, 25V-
47r; Paris, BN lat. 16621, i4r-84v.
Symon de Castello. D e p r o p o r t i o n i b u s v e l o c i t a t u m i n m o t i b u s . Ed. James McCue, Dissertation,
University of Wisconsin, 1961. Cf. MS Paris, Bibl. de 1’Arsenal 522, i26r—68v.
T a c u i n u m . See Ibn Butlan.
Taton, R. ed. H i s t o i r e g e n e r a l e d e s s c i e n c e s . Vol. 1: L a S c i e n c e a n t i q u e e t m e d i e v a l e . Paris, 1957.
Thomas, Alvarus. L i b e r d e t r i p l i c i m o t u . Paris, 1509.
Thorndike, L. A H i s t o r y o f M a g i c a n d E x p e r i m e n t a l S c i e n c e . 8 vols. New York, 1923-58.
------- . “Imagination and Magic,” M e l a n g e s E u g e n e T i s s e r a n t , Vol. 7 (Vatican City, 1964),
353- 58. . 1
------- . “ Notes upon Some Medieval Astronomical, Astrological and Mathematical
Manuscripts at Florence, Milan, Bologna and Venice,” I s i s , Vol. 5° (I 959)> 33- 5°*
------- . “ The Latin Translations of the Astrological Tracts of Abraham Avenezra,”
I s i s , Vol. 35 (1944), 293-302*
------- . “ Three Astrological Predictions,” f o u r n a l o f t h e W a r b u r g a n d C o u r t a u l d I n s t i t u t e s ,
Vol. 26(1963), 343-47.
Vescovini, G. Federici, “ Les Questions de ‘perspective’ de Dominicus de Clivaxo,”
C e n t a u r u s , U ol. 10(1964), 14-28.
Vincent of Beauvais. S p e c u l u m h i s t o r i a l e , in his B i b l i o t h e c a m u n d i , Vol. 4. Duaci, 1624.
Virgil. A e n e i d o s l i b e r q u a r t u s . Ed. A. S. Pease. Cambridge, Mass., 1935.
--------. E c o l o g u e s , G e o r g i e s , A e n e i d . Ed. and trans. H. R. Fairclough. 2 vols. Loeb Library,
rev. ed. London and Cambridge, Mass., 1950.
 650 Bibliography

Wallis, John. M e c h a n i c a , s i v e d e m o t u t r a c t a t u s g e o m e t r i c u s . London, 1670.

Warnke, K. D a s B u c h v o m E s p u r g a t o i r e S . P a t r i c e d e r M a r i e d e F r a n c e u n d s e i n e Q u e l l e . Halle,
1938.
White, Lynn, Jr. M e d i e v a l T e c h n o l o g y a n d S o c i a l C h a n g e . Oxford, 1962.
Wieleitner, H. “ Zur Geschichte der unendlichen Reihen im christlichen Mittelalter,”
B i b l i o t h e c a M a t h e m a t i c a , 3. Folge, Vol. 14(1913-14), 15 0-6 8.

--------. See Oresme [16], and Jacobus de Sancto Martino.

A Selective Index o f
William of Auvergne. D e u n i v e r s o . Ed. in his O p e r a o m n i a , Vol. 1. Paris, 1674.
William of Ockham.Q u e s t i o n e s i n l i b r o s p h y s i c o r u m . MSS Vat. lat. 956; Vienna, Dominican
Library 187/153. For an ed. of Bk. IV, Quests. 35-57, by F. Corvino, see R i v i s t a c r i t i c a
Latin Terms
d i s t o r i a d e l l a f i l o S o f i a , Anno 11 (195 6), 41-67; Anno 12 (1957), 42-63.

Wilson, C. W i l l i a m H e y t e s b u r y : M e d i e v a l L o g i c a n d t h e R i s e o f M a t h e m a t i c a l P h y s i c s . Madison,
1956. T h e a im o f t h i s i n d e x is t o illu s t r a t e ( r a t h e r t h a n t o g i v e a ll in s t a n c e s o f ) t h e L a t i n t e r m s p e r t a in ­

Witelo. D e n a t u r a d e m o n u m . MS London, Brit. Mus. Sloane 2156, 148V-54V. i n g t o s c ie n c e , m a th e m a tic s , a n d n a tu r a l p h i lo s o p h y . I t in c lu d e s c o m m o n te r m s th a t t a k e o n a

--------. O p t i c a e l i b r i d e c e r n . Basel, 1572. Ed. with Alhazen’s O p t i c a e t h e s a u r u s .
Zoubov, V. P. “ Nicole Oresme et la musique,” M e d i a e v a l a n d R e n a i s s a n c e S t u d i e s , Vol. 5
(196Q, 96-107.
--------. “ Quelques observations sur l’auteur du traite anonyme ‘Utrum dyameter ali­
cuius quadrati sit commensurabilis costae ejusdem,” I s i s , Vol. 50 (1959), 130-34.
--------. T r a k t a t N i k o l a i a O r e m a “ O k o n f i g u r a t s i i k a c h e s t v P In I s t o r i k o - m a t e m a t i c h e s k i e i s -
s l e t s o v a n i i a , No. XI (Moskva, 195 8), 600-731. In Russian. See Oresme [x6].
s p e c ia l s ig n ific a n c e in a s c ie n tific , p h ilo s o p h ic a l, o r m a th e m a tic a l context(Yikeres,ens,ymaginatio,
tempus, representare, arguere, demonstrare, ostendere,probare, reprobare, e t c . ) . A n u m b e r o f v e r y
fr e q u e n tly u s e d w o r d s a re n o t in d e x e d a t a l l : m agnus, parvus, maior, minus, certus, omnis, e t c . ; n o r
a r e w o r d s d e s i g n a t i n g n u m e r a l s ; n o r c o m m o n e x p r e s s i o n s s u c h a s sehabere, a n d o t h e r s . G e n e r a l l y
s p e a k i n g , t h e i n d e x i n g o f t h e m a in t e x t s is m o r e c o m p l e t e t h a n t h a t o f t h e f o o t n o t e s a n d C o m ­
m e n ta r y w h e re o fte n o n ly a fe w in s ta n c e s a re g i v e n . F u r t h e r , p r o p e r n a m e s a p p e a r in g in t h e
m a in t e x t s a re h e r e i n d e x e d b u t n o t t h o s e a p p e a r in g in t h e f o o t n o t e s a n d C o m m e n t a r y ( t h e la t t e r
b e in g in d e x e d in th e G e n e r a l I n d e x ) . T h e d e c is io n t o in c lu d e o r e x c lu d e c o g n a t e te r m s h a s o f t e n

b e e n a r b itr a r y , d e p e n d in g p r im a r ily o n th e r e la tiv e s ig n ific a n c e o f th e te r m f o r p h ilo s o p h ic a l o r

m a th e m a tic a l d is c o u r s e . T h u s t h e f r e q u e n t ly u s e d videre i s n o t in d e x e d b u t previdere i s . S im ila r ly ,

venirea n d invenire are n o t in d e x e d b u t convenirea n d its d e r iv a t e f o r m s a r e . T h e v a r io u s v e r b f o r m s

a r e a ll i n d e x e d u n d e r t h e i n f i n i t i v e e x c e p t in t h e c a s e o f p a r t i c i p le s t h a t a r e u s e d p r im a r i l y a s

a d je c tiv e s . A d je c t iv e s a re in d e x e d u n d e r th e ir m a s c u lin e fo r m s . C o m p a r a t i v e and s u p e r la tiv e

fo r m s a re u s u a lly in d e x e d u n d e r th e p o s itiv e fo r m . A d v e r b s d e r iv e d fr o m a d je c tiv e s a re in d e x e d

s o m e tim e s u n d e r th e a d je c tiv e s . N u m b e r s in R o m a n t y p e a re p a g e n u m b e r s , th o s e in I ta lic t y p e

a r e lin e n u m b e r s . P a g e n u m b e r s w h e n p r e c e d e d b y c,a, o r vr e f e r r e s p e c tiv e ly t o th e Commentary,

t h e A p p e n d i x e s , o r t h e v a r ia n t r e a d in g s . N e e d le s s t o say, th e lin e n um bers fo llo w in g a r e f­

e r e n c e to th e C o m m e n ta r y r e p r e se n t th e lin e n u m b e r s a p p e a r in g o n th e C o m m e n ta r y p a g e s . I f

n o l in e n u m b e r s a r e g i v e n w i t h a C o m m e n t a r y r e f e r e n c e , t h e r e f e r e n c e is t o t h e c o m m e n t c o n ­

tin u e d fr o m th e p r e c e d in g p a g e .
N o e ffo r t h a s b e e n m a d e t o in d e x v a r ia n t r e a d in g s th a t m e r e ly r e p e a t th e te r m s o f th e te x t.

P a g e n u m b e r s s u p p le m e n te d b y n re fe r t o th e u s e o f th e te r m in a f o o t n o t e o n th e s p e c ifie d p a g e .

T h e appearance o f pi ( pluries) i n d i c a t e s m o r e th a n o n e o c c u r r e n c e o f th e te r m .

a b la t io : io 8 n a b s tin e n tia : 3 5 2 , 40-41

a b s c in d e r e : 6 y n ; a 6 0 4 ,1 9
a b s tr a c tio : 5 4 n ; 2 5 0 , / / ; 2 5 2 , 2 7 , 2 / , 12; 370 ,

a b s c o n d itu s : 2 56 , 9; 2 6 0 , 7 4
a b s e n tia : 248 , 6 a b stra h e re : 8 o n ; 250 , 19; 254, 2 7 -2 2 ; 338, 2^ ;

a b s o lu te : 2 4 2 ,7 2 ,
348 /45 352 ,
a b s o lu tu s : 8 o n ; 2 7 2 , 1 2 ; c 462, 1 0 - 1 1 ; c 470 ; a b s u m e r e : io 8 n

c 498 ab su rd u s: 9 3 n ;ii2 n

a b s o r b itio : ^ 4 8 9
a cce d e re : 8 o n ; io 8 n ; n o n pl; 224, j8, 79-, 2 5 0 ,
a b ste rg e re : 2 5 4 , 10-11 19;c4 8 3 , 17-18
a b s t e r s s u s : v 2 5 4 , 9; c f . a b ste rsu s a c c e le r a r e : n o n

a b s t e r s u s : 2 5 4 , 6, 9 a c c e le r a tio : n o n

651
 652 Selective Index of Latin Terms 653
Selective Index of Latin Terms
acceleratus: 10711 p l; io8n; ioc^n; n o n ; i n n a d e q u a re : n 6 n ; 410 , 36,38 a g ita tu s : 258 , 2 7 a l t u s : 6 3 n i ? / ; 10811; 1 8 0 , 14; 1 8 2 , 2 3 ;
186,33-36;
p i; w z n p l a d e q u a te : c4 9 6 pl; c4 9 8 pl 1 8 8 , 7 7 ; 2 0 8 , 7 2 pl;
a 5 2 6 , 13; a 5 2 8 , 13, 20;
a g n o sce re : 174 , 22
a c c id e n s : 16 2 , 62; 218 , 60; 248, 2; 272, 9; 274, a d h ib e r e : a5 6 5 0 a 5 3 2 , 66, 72; a 5 4 0 , 60; a 5 4 4 , 87; a 5 6 0 , 81
a g n u s : 382, 10
14; 300, 11, 27; 330, 38; 346, 3; 358, 43; a d i a c e r e : 1 1 2 n pl; 1 7 0 , / 0,11 pl; a 5 6 8 , 96; a 3 7 2 , 3; a 6 2 8 , 30
D e a g r ic u ltu r a : 360, 9
374, 1, 2, 4, 6, 7, 10, 1 7 ; 376, 20, 24, 3 1 , 7; a d i u n g e r e : 4 2 6 , 9; 4 2 8 , 13 11
a lb a t io : v 2 7 8 ,30 a l u m e n : 360,
378, 19, 26; 384, 42; c 438, 7 - 9 p i; c 457, a d i u r a r e : v 3 6 8 , 37 33
a l b e d o : 620.pl, 7 4 0 pl; 8 4 n ; 8 7 m 2 1 0 , 2 7 ; 2 7 8 , a m a b ilis: 242,
13-13; c 462, 10 -11; c 488, 1 0 - 1 3 pl> c4 9 2> a d i u t o r i u m : c 5 14.pl
32; 3 0 0 , 7 7 , 23; 3 0 2 , 47, 3; 4 0 0 , 33, 34; 4 1 4 , a m a n s : 258, 13; 7434
3 4 -43; c f . p e r a c c i d e n s a d m i r a r i : 3 2 6 , 29
32 pl; c 4 5 5 ; 7 4 7 0 , 9-28pl; c 4 9 2 , 3 4 - 4 3 ; c am atus: 74 54
a c c id e n ta lis : 20 4, 11, 3-4; 232, 24; 326, 4; 328, a d m i r a t i o : 3 2 6 , 7 pl a m b a g o : 372,6
4 9 3 pl; a 5 6 0 , 7 ; a 5 6 6 , 39, 61-62; a 5 9 0 , 2 7 ,
39; 390 ,3 2 a d m o ve re: 7488 40
29,32 a m b i g u u s : 266,
a ccu tu s: c 470 ; cf. a cu tu s 19; 3 4 2 , 4 a l b u s : 620 pl; 740.; 1 6 6 , 2 2 ; 3 9 2 , 12, 13; 4 0 0 ,
a d o le s c e n s : 2 5 4 , a m b r o s i a : 8n
a c ie s : c 483 a5 3 9 m c f . 10-13
a d s ig n a tu s : a s s ig n a tu s 33 pl; 4 1 4 , 29, 30; 7 4 5 5 ; 7 4 9 2 , 34-43 pl; 7 am b u lare: 7488,
a c q u ir e r e : 64m 74n; io 8 n p l; io 9 n p l; n o n ; 3-21 14
4 9 3 pl; a 5 5 2 , 6; a 5 5 8 , 7 2 ; a 5 6 0 , 78; a 5 6 6 ,
a d u stu s: 7 4 8 7 ,/ a m e n s : 372,
n in p l; 278, 33; 280, 41, 30; 394, 24; 7468, a d v e r s ita s : 3 1 6 , 2 / a m f r a c t u s : 3 6 2 ,30
62; a 5 7 2 , 7 , 2 , 6, 8, 11
9 -2 8; c 4 7 0 p l; c 4 9 3 5 7 ^00p l ; c ^01; a 6 1^ 0 p l adversus: 2 5 8 , 14; a60S, 46; <2630, 67 a m ic itia : 160, 29, 30; 2 4 0 , 2; 242, 7 <f, 18, 4;
a lc h im ia : n 8 n
a c q u i s i b i l i s : 1 6 4 , 10; 1 6 8 , 12; 3 0 0 , 3 1 a d v e r t e n d e r e : 3 0 2 ,46 244, 1, 3,6; 2 4 6 , 13, 21
a lc io n e : 2 6 0 , 28
a c q u is itio : 158, 7 7 ; 162, 66; 278, 34; 280, 42; 2I~23 \ c f - a m i c u s : 2 4 6 , 14; 2 3 8 , 13-14
A eg yp tu s: 7459, E g ip tu s a l e s i n u s : 3 3 2 , 41
300, 34; 392, 2, 3, 6, 8, 13; 394, 13, 18, 21, pl; joyn pl; pl; a m i g d a l a r i s : 2 4 0 ,3 8 ,3 9 ; c f . a m y g d a l a r i s
a e q u a b ilis : io 7n ; io 8 n n i n
Algazel: 3 4 4 , 17; 374, i i ; 382, 20
26, 27, 3 0 , 3 3 , 3 6 , 37; 3 9 6 , 13; a 6 1 4 , 34 n 2n pl 26-27
a l g o r i s m u s p r o p o r t i o n u m : 4 0 6 , 20 a m m issu s: 74 78 ,
a c tio : 9 n ; j m ; 16 0 , 23, 30; 226, 1, 3, 9; 230, a m o r : 242, 3; 246, 26; 378, 26; c 4 5 4 ; 7 483,
a l i e n a r e : 3 5 4 , 70; 3 5 6 , 2 2 ; 3 6 8 , 31; 7 4 8 4 , 20-23
a e q u a b ilite r : n o n
48, 49, 3 - 4 ; 234, 17; 2 4 2 , 2, 6; 294, 6; 302, a e q u a lis : 5 3 n pl; 1070 pl; i o 8 n ; i o 9 n pl; n o n 17-18; 7488
a lie n u s : 7 4 8 9 ^ /
16; 346, 18; 382, 7, 17; 386, 63, 2; 388, 9; pl; n i n pl; i i 2 n pl; c 442, 23, 27, 28pl; c a m o r h e r e o s : 3 3 0 , 37; c 4 7 8 , 21-29, 37
a lk a m is ta : r i 8 n
389m 7 463; c 4 6 4 , 27 -3 2 ; c 4 8 8 , 1 0 - 1 3 4 4 3 , 48; c 4 6 8 , 3-6; c 4 9 4 , 14; c 4 9 5 pl; a am o vere: 7310
A lkind us: 374, i i
a c tiv ita s : 226, 6; 228, 3 1,3 2 ,3 3 ; 358, 62 5 3 9 n pl; a 5 4 3 n pl; 5 5 7 m c f . e q u a l i s a m p h i b o l i c u s : 266, 40
a llo q u i: 3 1 6 , 2 7
a c tiv u s : u jn ; n 8 n p l; 166, 3 4 ,3 3 ; 2 2 6 , 1 3 , 1 7 ; a e q u a l i t a s : a 5 4 9 n pl; c f . e q u a l i t a s v 266, 40
a lm u a in : a5 3 7 0 ; c f. e lm u a in , h e lm u a y m a m p h ib o lo icu s:
228, 26, 29, 37 ; 230, 34, 36; 234, 18; a 534, a e q u a l i t e r : 5 4 m i o 8 n pl; i o g n pl; n o n pl; c a m p h y b o l i c u s : v 266, 40
a l t e r a r e : 1 6 8 , 3; 1 9 4 , 10; 1 9 6 , 21; 3 3 8 , 2 7 ; 3 4 0 ,
88 4 6 6 , 13-23pl; 7 4 8 2 , 3-8; c f . e q u a l i t e r a m p l u s : 7 4 4 8 , 17
14; 3 3 2 , 41; 3 8 4 ,34; 3 9 8 , 27, 31; 400, 32,33,
a c tu a lis : 3 2 6 , 18 a m y g d a l a r i s : c 4 5 6 , 39-40 pl; c f . a m i g d a l a r i s
a eq u a re: in n / ) / ;c f . equ are 34, 16; c4 9 2 , 34-43; c4 9 3 ; a ^630pl
a c tu s : 8 o n ; 252, 23; 3 3 2 , 7, 8; 3 6 6 , 16; 3 7 8 , 2 2 ; a a n e l i t u s : v 3 6 0 , 11; c f . a n h e l i t u s , a n n e l i t u s
a e q u id is ta n s : 539m cf. e q u e d is ta n s , e q u i- a l t e r a t i o : 7 4 m 8 i n pl; 8 7 n pl; i o o n ; 1 6 0 , 42;
c 4 6 3 , 1 7 - 1 9 p l; a 5 3 m a n g e l u s : 1 6 8 , 14; 262, 8, 22; 2 6 8 , 2 7 ; 3 4 0 , 10;
d is ta n s 1 6 2 , 38; 1 6 8 , 3, 10, 12; 1 9 4 , 7 ; 2 0 0 , 34; 2 3 0 ,
acum en : 30 7n pl a e q u ila te r u s : 54n 8; 2 7 6 , 13-16; 2 7 8 , 30 pl; 2 8 0 , 61; 2 8 2 , 11; 37° , 1J\ 39°> x7>27, i i
a c u tie s : 210, 1 6 p l; 226, 86, 8; 230, 43; 300,
30
a e q u u s : 7 44 2, 2 / , 2 7 ; a 5 57 n ; cf. e q u u s 2 8 6 , 2 ; 2 9 6 , 2 7 , 13; 3 4 4 , 7 ; 3 5 0 , 7 2 ; 3 8 4 , 38; a n g u i s : 366,
28; 306, 4 2 , 33, 3 7 -3 8 , 43, 43; 308, 47, 49, 19; 3 1 6 , 42; 3 6 4 , 34, 36; 37, 38, 21; 28
a er: 302, 384, 3 9 8 , 24, 23; 4 0 0 , 14; 4 0 2 , 24, 23,33; 4 0 6 , 31; a n g u l a r i s : 208, 30 0 ,
32, 3, 13, 14; 310 , 13; 314 , 44, 49; 3 16 , 43; 37; 7 4 8 5 ; c4 9 0 pl; 7 4 9 0 , 39-40 an g u lu s: 54 m 76n; 770; 7S0.pl; 7 9 n ; 8 o n ; 8 i n ;
4 2 8 , 24; c 5 0 0 ; a 5 6 6 , 66, 67, 68-69, 74, 76; a
3 18 , 2 7 ; 320, 38; 324, 13 p l; 332, 47; c 4 7 x, 9 o n pl; 9 2 n ; 9 3 n pl; 9 4 m 9 7 m 9 8 n ; i o o n pl;
5 6 8 , 79, 89,92,96,97
a e s ta s : 2 9 9 m c f. e sta s
40 16-17; 29, 3; 18, 20, 1 7 8 , 14; 1 8 4 , 2, 4,19,20; 1 8 6,32,2-3,4,6, 8,9
a ffe c tio : 374, 376, 378, a l t e r a t u s : 3 8 4 , 34; 3 9 4 , 19 pl, 17 pl; 4 0 2 , 29; a
a cu tu s: 7 9 n ; 8on ; 9 o n p l; i 2 o n ; 1 8 6 , 4 , I2‘, 1 8 8 , 24, 2 J l 4 pl, 12; 1 8 8 , 23, 23, 28, 29, 30, 32; 1 9 0 , 14, 19
3 84 , J 5 6 5 0 ; a 5 6 8 , 83
23; 19 0 , 19; 226, 1 3 - 1 6 , 17; 5 0 5 n p l; 3 0 6 , pl, 6; 1 9 8 , 9, 10; 2 0 8 , 11; 2 1 4 , 11 pl; 2 1 6 , 19
a l t e r n a t i m : 2 2 8 , 20; 4 2 0 ,11
a ffe c tu s : 7 4 8 9
33 ; 6; $ \ 2 ,3 3 , 3 4 ; c 44%, I 7 p l ; c 4 ^
308, pl, 16, 19, 20pl, 26, 27, 28, 31, 33, 37; 2170;
a l t e r n a t i o : 3 0 4 , 16; 3 1 2 , 34
a ffic e r e : 3 38 , / / ; 7 4 8 8
ad su rsu m : 260, 4 43 2 1 8 , 41, 48, 49; 220, 13; 2 2 2 , 24pl; 226, 86;
a l t e r n a t u s : 3 1 2 , 40; c 5 1 1 , 47-48
a fflu e r e : 3 48 ,
a d a m a s : 2 4 4 , 14
agen s: ji n ; io 8 n ; n 8 n ; 230, 30; 2 3 2 , 26; 2 3 4 , a ltitu d o : 6 4 m 76m 770; i 0 3 n pl; n i n pl; 2 7 8 , 10; 3 0 0 , 33; 3 1 6, 38, 39; 7 4 4 2 , 2 3, 27pl;
addere: 78n p l; 83m 84n; 92n p l; io p n p l; 29, 33', 9; 42, 47; c 4 8 9 ; a v 5 3 4 , c 4 4 3 , 48pl; 7 4 4 8 , 7 7 pl; c 4 6 5 , 7 - 7 0 5 7 4 9 4 ,
268, 430, i i 2 n ; 1 7 2 , 24, 4; 1 7 4 , 10, 17,18; 1 7 6 , 6; 1 8 0 ,
i2 7 n ; 334, 7 ; 338, 23: 406, 19; c 4 8 2 , 47 -6 3; 84-91 16, 3, 3, 7, 13; 1 8 2 , 14, 17, 19, 23, 27, 28, 1 4 pl; c 4 9 3 pl; a 5 3 9 n pl; a 5 5 4 , 14, 1 3 p l ’, a
c 4 9 4 , 19-2 0 p l; c 5 0 0 p l; c 50 1; c 505; c 506; 5 5 7 n pl; a 5 7 0 , 102, 109, 106; a 5 8 m pl; a
a g g reg a re : 7445 33; 1 8 4 , 7 , 10, 16, 17; 1 8 6 , 31; 1 9 0 , 7 , 8, 16;
c 5 0 9 p l; a 5 6 4 , 41; a 5650 p l; a 610 , 13, 13 ; 21, 22, 24; 3 1 8 , 4, 3; 3 2 2 , 3; 5 9 8 , 40; a 6 0 0 , 4 0 pl; a 6 0 8 , 46; a 62 6 , 6; a
a g g r e g a tio : 306, 1 9 2 , 26, 29; 1 9 4 , 40; 1 9 8 , 19; 2 0 0 , 24; 202,
a 6 1 2 , 20, 21, 22 c4 6 9 pl; a 5 6 2 , 33 6 3 0 , 6 0 ; et passim
32, 33, 3, 7; 2 1 8 , 38, 99; 2 7 0 , 13; 2 9 0 , 16, 20,
a d d ic io : 7 8 n p l; 92n p l; c 509
a g g r e g a t u s or a g r e g a t u s : 8 4 n ; 1 1 8 n ; 2 1 2 , 3, 7 7 , 22, 28; 4 3 0 , 34; 7 4 4 2 , 20-23; 7 4 8 5 ; a 5 2 6 , 2 , an gu stu s: 7448, 77
a d d ic tio : c4 7 0 13, 20; 2 1 4 , 30; 3 1 6 , 21; 4 1 6 , 28; 4 1 8 , 30; 3, 4, 7, n;a 5 2 8 , 14,16, 21, 24;a 5 3 2 , 66-67, a n h e l i t u s : 360, 7 7 ; cf. a n e l i t u s , a n n e l it u s
a d d itio : i2 8 n ; 7 4 6 9 p l; c 4 7 0 ; a 606, 29; a (no, 4 2 0 , 24; 424, 40, 41, 43, 44; c 3 0 5 ; a 562, 32 a n im a : i i 3 n ; H 4 n ; 1 3 o n ; 160, 33, 34; 1 6 2 , 98,
71, 74‘,a 3 3 4 , 81; a 5 6 0 , 80, 81, 82; a 6 2 6 , 10
12, 14 a g i l i t a s : 3 5 8 , 47; 3 9 0 , 23 61, 62; 14; 24, 19; 2 5 2 ,
pl, 11,12,13,16; a6 2 8 , 20;a63 0 , 30, 31,33, 63 168, 248, 2 ; 230, 22,
 654 Selective Index of Latin Terms Selective Index of Latin Terms 6 55

D e arismetica: a 548, / aspectus: 256, 20; 298, 27; 350, 25; 7 454p l; c
22, I , 2, I I ; 254, 21, 2, 6; 256, 20, 22; 258, I , apparere: i29n; 162, 47; 180, 18; 194, 45; 214,
i i , 13; 260, 6, 10; 262, 3, 16; 264, 5, 1 1 ; 268, arismetice: 516, 36; a 592, 43 458, 4-20
55, <?; 226, 84, 88; 244, 6; 250, 6; 256, 7; 514,
arismeticus: 8on; a 528, 18; a 550, 55; a asper: 250, 13; 252, 3; 254, 20; 258, 7, 20; 310,
6, 8, 10, 1 1 , 13, 20, 21; 26911; 328, 3; 330, 77, 7 2 4 >/; 7 4 5 9 , 5 - 4 4 >/
38; 338, 21; 344, 2; 346, 20, 21; 348, 34, 34; 586, 20; a 588, 24; a 592, 7; cf. arismetricus, 77; 745 8, 4-20; 7459,3 - 4 p l
apparitio: i2n; 340, 33 ; 348, /4; 350, 1 6 - 1 3 ;
arithmeticus aspere: 250, 20
3 5 °, 3 , V i 3 5 2 , 5 / 5 3 6o> I 2 '> 3 7 °, A A * 3 ', 3 5 4 , 63; 370, 74; 372, 25-24; 7482, 47 -6 3; c
arismetrica: n 3 n ; 204, 1 1 asperitas: 9n; 250, 24; 252, 20; 254, 27; 310,
114 , 5 4 , 3 ) , 1, 2, 4 J , i o \ 378, 26, 27,33-, 380, 483
3 ; 382, 7, 2(5"; 384, 386, 10; 388, 3 3 ; 390, appellare: 276, 5 arismetricus: 7 512; cf. arismeticus, arithmeti­ 13 1459 3-4
', ,

cus aspis: 368, 57

i 7\ 1 4 5 3 » J 3 ' , c 463
464, 27-52; 7 478,
P h 1 appetere: 7490, 23-23
21-23-, c 481, 1 6 - 1 8 pl\ c 483, 1 3 - 1 8 ; c 488, Aristoteles: 238, 3-8, 1 1 ; 258, /; 274, 14, 13, assequi: n 2 n
appetitus: 374, 77, 7
30; 288, 6; 386, 7; 388, 7; 390, 26-23; a 530, assignare: 174, 22; 204, 6; 228, 27; 230, 4; 232,
1 0 - 1 3 pi', c 489 p l ; c 490 pi, 28-23 pi-, a 528, applicare: 9n; 208, 25; 236, 12; 266, 41; 286,
36; a 534, 86; a 536, 4, 75; a 564,55, 42 28; 236, 25; 244, 7/, 24; 246, 2<?; 252, 4;
32 57; 424, 48; 7483; a 526, 4; <2588, 23
animabus (dat. andabl. plural o f anima): 25 2,74; applicatio: 1070; io8n; n o n ; 162, 33, 63; 234, arithmetica: 54n p l 276, /
256, 8; 260, 23 arithmetice: io8n; 1090; cf. arismetice assignatus: <2 539n; ^ 557n; cf. adsignatus
57; 236, 7 0 , 75, 27; 334, 7; 336, / ; 354, 5, 4;
arithmeticus: a 5670; cf. arismeticus, arisme­ assimilare: 92m n 3 n ; 174, 13, 23-26, 23-28;
animal: 8n; 11611; ii9 n ; 232, 3; 234, 27; 236, 380, /; 382,
186, 52-55, 55, 7; 188, 1 4 - 1 3 , 13; 2x8, 38;
8; 242, 50; 244, 3; 246, <
5"; 248, 75; 294, 14; applicatus: io8n; io9n; n o n ; ii5 n ; 166, 23; tricus
armiger: 244, 1 3 278,57; 282, 7 / ; c 440, 23-28
346, 2 7 ; 354, 10; 366, 72, 27; c 453, 28-23 234, 23
pl\ c 4^4pl\ 7488 armonia: n 8 n ; 330, 20; 332, 1 2 - 1 3 ; har- assimilatio: 206, 4 1 - 4 2 ; 236, 8; 264, 1 2 - 1 3 ;
apponere: 9n
animalis: 9n; n 6 n ; 7453, 75 monia 278,57; 280, 33
appositio: 7469
animans: 7488 armonice: 310, 13; 316, 33; 388, 23; cf. har­ assumere: 7509
apprehendens: 376,5
animatus: 332,4 0 monice assumptio: 258, 23
apprehensio: 374, 7 0 -7 7 , 77, 13; 376, 5; 7 483,
armonicus: i26n p l; 12311 p l ; 240, 3 p l ; 310, assumptus: 74n; 96n; c 505; c 509; 7 514; a
an im u s: 78n p l ; n o n ; 254, 70; 256, 20; 258, 13-18 p l
75; 268,5; 298, 7 j ; 328, 34, 10; 330, 13, 23; 16, 20; 312, 22, 24; 314, 46, 30, 33; 320, 38 606, 27; a 608, 44
apprehensivus: 346, 3; 7483, 1 3 - 1 8 p l
33m ; 338, 26; 340, 14, 23; 342, 26, 4; 352, p l, 33 p l, 40, 44; 322, 20; 324, 1 4 - 1 3 ; 390, astrologia: 6n; 338, 1 3
appropinquare: 67n; 278, 23-28
57; 7 4 7 1 ,1 8 - 2 4 p l; cf. harmonicus astrologus: i3on; 278 ,13; 298, 8, 23; c 486
47; 356, 13, 22; 362, 40; 378, 45; 380, /0; c appropinquatio: 278, 2 7
478, 2 1- 2 3 , 2 6 - 2 3 pl', 0484, 20-23 aromaticus: 364, 3 6 - 3 3 astronomia: v 338,13; a 608, 2
appropriatus: 1150
a n n elitu s: v 360, 7 7 ; cf. a nelitus, a n h elitu s arrepticius: 346, 25; 3 7 2 ,1 4 - 1 3 astrum: 1290; 234,5^; 298, 1 1
approximatio: 278, 23
a n n o n a : 356, 27 arreptus: 372, 13 atendere: 7 461, 25-2/ p l ; cf. attendere
aptitudo: 7488, 1 0 - 1 3 p l
atendere penes: 7 461, 23-23; cf. attendere
annus: 274p l ; c 463,1 3 - 2 1 ; 7464, 27-52 Apuleius: 374, 3 8 arripiens: 294, 1 4
antecedens: 8n; 77n; 78n; 83n; ioo n p l; c 459, ars: n 6 n p l ; 12 m ; 162, 33, 36, 33, 60; 234, 27; penes
aqua: 230, 13; 258, 3 p l, 10, 22; 388, 42; 7 483,
5 -4 ; 7 504 j&/; a 526, 4 -/ 334, A 3, 9, 14, 16; 336, 18, 33, 1, 3; 338, 6, Athis: 378, 74
1 3 - 1 8 ; 7488; 7488, 1 0 - 1 3
antecedere: 378, 44 3, 10, 14, 13, 33; 339n; 340, 10, 16, 13; 342, athomale: 226, 3
aquaticus: 330, 23
anthrax: 7454 40; 3 4 4 , i?', 346, 1 7 ; 3 5 °, 2 0 ', 3 62, 46', c 453, athomus: 226, /
aqueus: 370, 77
75; 7 478, 26-23; 7 485, 20-25; 7 486p l, 68- atribuere: ^368, 33 -3 3 ; cf. attribuere
Antiochus or Anthiochus: 266,5/-5^ aquila: 232, 75, 74; 244, 1 6
7456, 3 - 10 attendere: 53m 170, 6; 214, 8; 276, 4; 278, 13;
antip athia:
arbitrium: 13m ; 33m 63
antiphona: 306, 25; 318, 3-8; 320, 47 arsmetrica: a v 548, / 304, 27; cf. atendere
arbor: 280,33, 40
attendere penes: 168, 10; 214, 3; 220, / ; 222,
antiquitus: 328, 8 ; c 478, 26 -23 Archimenides: 222,3 3; 224, 36 arterea: v 3 1 2 ,1 3 - 1 6
23; 224, /5; 244, 7; 276, 4; 278, <?, 7 0 , 20, 2/,
antiquus: 8n; 56ns 226, 4; 268, 2/; 340, 8, 1 1 ; arcus: 89npl; 7443, 48; a 626, 6 arteria: 312, 1 3 - 1 6
54; <7 526, 1 1 ; a 528, 74; <7 614, 54; cf. aten­
7438, 3 - 3 ; 7451; 7483 ardor: 7454 articulus Parisius: 382, 28
antrum: 362, 33, 40 artificatus 17456, 33 -40 dere penes
argenteus: 230,75
anus: 344, 20, 28 artificialis: 230, 33 attingere: a 528, 13
arguere: 8n p l; 6on p l; 6$n; j j n p l; 78n; 790
Apocalipsis: 334, 26 artificialiter: 234, 28, 23; 332, 4 - 3 ,1 0 ; 364, 63; attractivus: 244, 20
p l ; 8on p l; 84m 96n p l; 162, 33, 3 8 p l; 186,
Apollinarius: 266, 3 6 372, 1 1 attrahere: 242, 7
23; 194, 47, 42; 342, 28; c 514; a 526, 5, 7; a
Apollo: 266, 42; 362, 23, 33, 42 a rtific io se : 342, 41 attribuere: ii9 n
608, 47; a 632, 86; etpassim
a r tific io su s: 334, 7; 446 auctor: 256, 2; 330, 55; 332, 44; 344, 4; 346,
Apollo Delphicus: 362, 28, 23 argumendum(= argumentum?): 7474 7

Apollonides: 344, 24 234, 22

a rtific iu m :
7/; 360, 77; a 610, <?
argumentare: 7509
apostema: 346, 10 ascendere: 9on; n o n ; 224, 72; 394, 13, 22; c auctoritas: i22n; 338, n ; a 564, 38
argumentum: 6on; 340, 4, 13; 344, 13; 430,
auctus: a 612, 23
Apostolus: 174, 26-, 254, 77; 264, 75, 7 / ; 376, 40; 7 506; et passim 4 4 5 ; 7 496;7 499 57515
ascensus: io9n; n o n ; 320, 46; 394, 25, 2/, 27, audacia: 330, 2/; 7478, 21- 2 3
27 ariolus: 362, 43; 380, 33
apparens: 314, 12 28 audibilis: 246,10; 308, 8
Arion: 330, 50
apparentia: 354, 74 asinus: 234, 13; 240, 52; 246, <?; r 457, <? auditor: 328, 7; 330, 52
arismetica: a 608, 2
 6 56
auditus: 1 1911; 304, 7; 306, 33; 308, 7, 77; 318,
2 3 \ 3 3 ° > i/ ; 3 4 8 , 63; 366, 73
auferre: 10911; n o n
augere: 7n; ii3 n ; 166, 20; 302, 49; 324, 8, 77;
328, 40; 390, 72; 400, <?, 1 1 , i y , 404, 22, 25?;
406, 31, 33; 412, </; 426, 10; c 469p l ; c 482,
4 7 - 6 4; 7 504; r 509; 61 o, 13 p i
augmentabilis: ii5 n
augmentare: 280,39, 41; 400,3; 4 1 6 , 1 3
augmentatio: 7n; 276, 7 7 ; 278, 3/ , 37 ; 280,
43, 34; 282, 77, 29; c 469p i; c 500; a 610, 1 1 ,
augmentatus: 412, 6; 414, 22; 428, 18; a 365n;
a 612, 2 3
augmentum: 7n; 63n; 278, 34; 300, ij
24; 332, 77 ; 412, 4; 426, / ; 428, 72, 16; 430,
4; a 610, 10
augur: 258,17; 7486
augurium: 258,18; 380, 60; 7482,3 1 - 3 3
Augustinus: 236,19; 266, 28; 346 , 1 4 - i j ; 356,
2 4 \ 362, 4 3 ', 376, 9 ) 386, 4, /; 390, 39
aura: 360, 8; 362, 1 8
aurifaber: 358, 3 9
auris: 298, 13; 30jn
aurum: n 8 n
auspicari: 260, 26
auspicium: 380, 3 1
avaricia: c 478, 2 1 - 2 3
avaritia: 330, 2 4
Avenare: c 446
aversio: c 482, 3 1 - 3 3
Avicenna: 372 ,13, 21; 376, 1 1 ; 382, 20
avis: 260, 23, 28
axis: 288, 28, 29
baiulare: 356, 27
Balaam: 346, 29, 32
basiliscus: 384, 39; 7454; 7490, 39-40
basis: 5 in ; 67np i; 76n; -j-jnpl;-]8u; yzu; io in ;
io3n; i n n ; 172, 3, 3; 176, 3 1; 178, 13; 180,
6, 10; 182, 3 1; 184, 3, 4, 16, 20, 22; 186, 32,
3, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12; 188, 13, 26, 29, 3 1 , 3; 190,
14, 16, 6; 192, 26; 194,39, 40; 196, 6 pi, 8, 9;
198, 1 1 , 12 , 13, 9, 10; 200, 23; 202, 39; 208,
4, 1 7 pi, 19, 24, 26, 30, 32; 210, 36, 8, 77;
z \ z , i 6 ; 224, 3 6 ; 286, 22; a 526,12; a 528, 16,
20; a 532, 62, 67, 73; a 534, 81, 82; a 536, 7,
8; a 540, 33, 34; a 590, 36; a 592, 39 p i; a
594, 12; a 598, 3 1 ; a 600, 43, 47, 48, 4, 6; a
Selective Index of Latin Terms Selective Index of Latin Terms 657
602, 8pi; a 626, 6, 13, 17; ,2628,23, 29, 4 3 ; a 29 ,30,32, 36; 162, 44, 47, 33, 63; 228, 27, 32,
calidum: 36u.pl; 212, 9
630, 44, 6 1 ; etpassim calidus: 6on; 65 u p l ; 6 j n p l; 99m ioon p l ; 228, 34,41; 230, 12; 232, 23, 28; 234, 22, /; 236,
bassis: v 332, 62p i 11, 22, 32, 33; 240, 2; 242, 19, 17, 18, 21, 28,
40; 230, 14; 234, 33 ; 402, 17 , 23, 2 6 p l , 3 6 -
beatitudo: 334, 24 37; 404, 26; 414, 29; a 544, 100; a 552, 6, 7; 1,3, 9; 244, 24, 1; 246, 20, 28,1; 248,14, 23;
beatus: 334, 26; 390, 17, 23, 2 7 ,3 4 , 39 250, 3; 252, 1; 268, 1, 2, 13, 22; z6^n; 294,
a 554, 9; a 558, 69, 72; a 566, 62
bellum: 260, 28 1, 17; 296, 19, 20, 24; 298, 19; 338, 30; 350,
callidus: i? 554, 9 - 1 0 ; v 558, 69-70
benignus: 298, 20p i 7; 370,77, 18; 372, 2^; 7 4 5 5 ; 7457, 13-13pl;
callion: v 3 3 6 ,1 9 ; 7484, 1 4 - 1 9
benivolentia: 246, 26 c 472 pl; c 479, 23-24; c 480, 1 pl; c 481; c
calor: 56np l ; n 6 n p l ; n 8 n ; 228, 24, 23; 230,
benivolus: 298, 21 481, 1 6 - 1 8 pl; c 483, 17-18; 7 484 pl; c 487,
2 4 ', 2 32 > L b x 4 ', 234, 23 , 30, 3 3 , 3 7 P h 30 2 ,
biffurcatus: 79n 13-21 pl; c 489; a 564, 44, 49; a 565n pl; a
18; 388, 42; 7469; <1490p l
binarius: 7445 610, 7; a 618, 7
cameleonta: 376, 9 - 1 0 ; cf. chamaeleon
bipartitus: 314, 9 camelus: 330, 27; 7 478, 26-27 ; c 481, 1 6 - 1 8 causare: 67m 74m 78n pl, 9on pl; i28n; 234,
bipedalis: 64np i; c 492, 34 -4 3 ; 7515 p i 39; 268, 14, 27; 304, 29,3; 310, 27; 316, 16;
p l; 7490, 28-29
Bitia: 344, 23 326, 7; 334, 63; 360, 19; 370, 8; 402, 33; c
campana: 306,34 -3 9 ; 3 1 6 ,13, 14
; 322, bitumen: 360, 1 1 455; 74 72 pl; a 330, 33, 33; a 363U; a 608, 38
canalis: 7488
Boetius: 304, 8; 306, 39; 320, 44; 328, 33; 330, causatus: 304, 2, 8; 316, 42
candens: 228, 32
2 7 , 3 3 , 3 9 ',“ 54 %, 3 cautela: 312,6
caninus: 242, 20
bonum: 390, 19, 23 cecus: 350,/; 354, 74
canis: 242,19; 368, 48; c 433, 1 3
bos: 234, 19; 294, 7/, 16 celer: 305n
canna:306, 3 4
bobus {dat. plural o f bos): 330, 27 celeritas: io7n; io8n pl; io9n pl; n o n pl; m n
canon: 236,19
brachium: 9n; 7483, 17—18 canonica Iacobi: 264, 9 pl; u z u p l ; 30511
brevis: i3n; j i n ; 3070; «586, 16; a 382, 3, 6; celestis: i28n; 162, 46; 296, /; 298, 9
cantare: 334, 28; 7478, 2 6 - 2 7
D e celo: a 530, 96
a 594 , 8, 9 , 10, 12, 1 3 , J 3 , *8, T9 cantatio: 7480, 23-24
brutus: 246, 10; 260, 23; 264, 17 ; 328, 1 1 ; De celo et mundo: 238, 1 1
canticum: 334, 28, 29; 393n
330, 26,36 ; 366,30; 36 8,39; 376, 8 celum or caelum: 6n; ~]u pl; 8n pl; 9n pl; i2n
cantilena: 306, 23; 318, 8; 320, 30; 326, 23;
bubo: 260, 26 pl; 1 i9n; iz8upl; \30upl; 230, 92; 234, 39,
3 3 o, 39 ;c 41 ° , 23 1 c 411 , S - 1 2
buccina: 328, 12; 3290 36 pl; 238, 12; 268, 22; 272, 28; 274, 32 pl;
cantio: 322, 27; 336, 23
bucina: v 328,12 278, 19; 288, 23, 28; 296, 2; 298, 16, 19; 342,
cantor: 3 18 ,14, 23; c 478
Bucolica: 382, 9 37 , 39 , 43 ', c 464, 27-32 p l;c 4<H, 39~40pl;c
cantus: H 3n; 318, 13; 320, 48; 326, 9, 17 , 19,
buttomen: v 360,1 1 480, 1
20, 21; 328, 36, 38, 9; 330, 29; 366, 21, 22;
cencere: 304, 14
368,34; 7478, 2 6 - 2 7 p l
caballus: 356, 27 centrum: 9 n pl; 198, 16; 222, 46; 224, 62, 67,
capacitas: 229n
cadaver: 360, 7;362, 20 70, 78; 278, 10, 14, 21, 23, 26, 27, 28; 286,
capere: 7465, 7 - 1 0
cadere: 93n; i n n ; ii 7 n ; 216, 32; c 448, 17 ; c 13 5288,28; 296,4;zc)8,7; 7443,48; 7463,7-10
capra: 7488, 9 - 1 0
481, 1 6 - 1 8 ; 7 482; 7 488, 1 0 - 1 3 ; a 540, 33; a captio: 336 ,3 3 pl',a 592, 44, 43, 46
557n; a 584, 10, 14 caput: 362,19; 384, 40; 7483 cera: 248, 7
caecitas: 7 484 cerebrum: n 6 n ; 344, 19; 346, 10; 372, 16;
caracter: see c[h]aracter
caecus: 7484 384, 48
cardo: 7 457, 8
caelestis: 7 45 9, 2 1- 2 3 ; c 479, 23 - 2 4 p i cernere: 252, 10; 256, 11; 264, 20
caritas: 83n; 170, 20
caelum: cf. celum certifficare: i28n
carmen: 366, 23, 24
caldarius: c 4 8 1,1 6 - 1 8 cespitare: 380, 9 1
carnalis: c 479
calefacere: 228,39; 232, 22; 404, 2/ chamaeleon: 7 488; cf. cameleonta
caro: 342, 6; 384, 90
calefactio: 13u.pl; 296, 27; 404, 29 c[h]aracter: 230, / / ; 338, 24
caseus: 356, 2/
calefieri: 232, 22 chelis: 326,13
Cassiodorus: 298,14; 330, 21; 334, 24
caliditas: 6onp l; 63Upl; 73U pl; 8 in p l ; 8211 p l; cholera: 74547?/; c 487, 13-21 p l
casus: 424,33; 7498
99np l; ioonp l; n 6 n p l; 12m ; 210, 20; 212, chorda: 3070p l
categorice: 13 on
19 p l, 21; 214, 24; 226, 19; 228, 28, 29 pl; chorus: 306, 29
Catho: 316, 22; 330, 28
300, 17 , 23; 302, 44, 8; 402, 28; 404, 29; c christianus: 340, 11
catus: 312, 13; 336, 19
453, 28-29; c 468, 9-28; c 470 p l; c 492, 3 4 - Christus: 174, 26; 262, 18; 266, 29; 392, 40;
causa: 7m 8n; 9n; 92n; ioon; io8n p l; n o n ;
4 3 p l ; a 344, 97, i o i ; a 546, 116 ; a <366, 39 n 6 n ; i28n p l; i29n pl; 130m 160, 26, 28, 393n
 6j8 Selective Index of Latin Terms Selective Index of Latin Terms 659

Cicero: cf. Tullius claudicare: 380, 72 communis: 78np l; 79ns 117ns ri8n; 214, 7 7 ; conatus: 6n; 7np l; 8np l; 9n
Circe: 236, 2/ coalterare: ^ 5 4 4 , 87 745 5; 7469; 74 8 3 ,1 7 - 1 8 concavitas: C458, 4-20
circuire: 222, 43; 224, 73?; 278, 8, 12, 14, 13, coaptare: 286,72; a 544, 87; a 564, 7 6 communiter: a 606, 7 1 concavus: 204, 8, 10 pl, ij ; 206, 3 1 ; 210, n ;
17; 280,/7 coaptatio: 160, 17 ; 180, 1 commutare: a 36^ n p l 2 14 ,32; 256, 6, 1 0 , 1 4 ; 7458, 4 -2 0 p l
circuitio: 222, 44, 43; 278 ,1 0 , 1 8 ; 280, /2 coartari: 336,72; 352, 74 commutatio -.7501 concedere: a 560, 76; a 570, n o ; a 630, 37, 38
circulare: 9311 coequalis: 2 2 2 ,7 7 ; 388, 4 compacitas: 228, 3 2 , 7 4 ; 22$n concentrice: 432, 1 3 - 1 4
circularis: 8n; 911 p l; 9311; 202, / 7 , /^, 74 pi, coextendere: 432, 77 compactio: 229n concentricus: 288, 28; 4 32 ,18
7; 220, 222, 70, 40; 224, 6 7 - 6 6 ; 272, coextensus: c 4 7 7 p l compactus: 404, 23 concentus: 298, i 4 p l , 1 6 , 1 8 ; 390,3 9
276, 7; 288, 2 7 - 2 8 ,7 0 ; 290, / 7 ^ 4 4 2 , 1 4 - 7 4 ; cogere: 8n; 9n comparabilis: 53ns 74ns 200, 3 2 , 3 3 ; 222, 23 concepcio: 7 8 n p l
c 464, 27 -7 2 ; c 465, 7 - 1 0 p i; a 560, 6; a 630, cogitare: 7463 comparacio: 77ns cf. comparatio concinens: 7479, 23 -24
70, 7 1 , 72, 67; a 6 32, ; <2634,3)/ cogitatio: 248, 18; 250, 22, 14, 20; 252, 20, 24, comparare: 74ns 92ns 250, 23; c 455; a 546, concipere: 166, 26-27 ; 236, 18; 74 66 ,13 - 2 3
circulariter: 911; i2 n p i; 9311 p i; 278, 1 1 ; 288, 7, 1 1 , 16; 254, 21; 258, 20; 374, 72; 382, 7; 7 n 6 ; a 600, 2 concludere: i ^ n p l ; 7493
27; 426,7 479 comparatio: 7ns 54np l ; 6 in ; 74np l; 160, 43; conclusio: 8n; 9n p l ; 54ns 6on; 63n p l ; 64ns
circulatio: 7 464, 2 7 - 7 2 p i cogitativus: 348, 77 292; a 546, 11 4 , 1 1 3 , 118 , 113 , 127; a 560,3) 67ns 68n; 74ns 78ns 8on; 8in p l; 84n pl;
circullus: a v 560, 4 cognitio: 172, 16; 174, 27; 208, 7; 290, 78; comparatus: 210, 17; 234, 3; 240, 10; 270, 1 7 ioon; 222,33; 4 2 0 ,1 6 ; c 4 7 8 p l ; 7499; 7513;
circulus: 6n; 9211; 941ap i; 178, 16; 198, 8, 9; 358, 78; c 476, 8 compellere: 7 454 7514 p l; c ^ ly , a 528, 34, 41; a 530, 43, 60; a
200,7 7 ; 202, 78, 40 p i, 42, 47, 44, 47, 46, 47, cognoscens: 268, 27 competere: 79n 560, n ; a 562, 28; a 564, 32; a 566, 38, 66;
4; 220, 6, 7 p i, 1 1 ; 222, 74; 224, 76; 240, 1 1 ; cognoscere: 119ns 164, 6, 7; 174, 12, 20; 262, compilatus: 75n a 608, 38, 4 o ; a G \ o , 7
278, 17 ; 286, 8, 17 ; 342, 8; 426, 7, 10; 428, 26; 264, 7, 17 complementum: a 56 5n conclussio: a v 540, 48
14, 17 ; 430, 70; c 443, 48; c 444p i; c 448, 1 7 cognoscitivus: 160,7 1 ; 242, 7 ; 248, 1; 268, 8 complere: i o 8 n p l ; 109ns w o n p l ; 1 1 1 ^ 7 4 6 3 concomitans: 350, 2; 366,14 ; $jG, 4
p l ; c 4 4 c,,7 7 - 7 6 ; c 4 7 6 ;a 548, 1 7 7 ^ ^ 6 , 7 7 ; colera: 3 72 ,17 , 20 p l ; a G 30, 68; a G32, 86 concomitari: 380, 43; 390, 26
a 5571a; a 570, n o , 1 1 2 ; a 592, 42; a 59711 p i; colligantia: 242, 7 complexe: 274, 17 ; 7463 concomitative: 326, 1 8
a 628, 76, 7 7, 78, 47; a 630, 4 4 pi, 4 6 pi, 78, colligatio: 7489 complexio: 56ns 162, 37; 238, 18, 21, 23; 242, concorda (/): 316, 2 9
67, 68; a 632, 84, 86 collocare: 9m 20; 248, 2 7 , 24; 274, 77, l 8 ; 326, 26; 328, concordantia: c 45 5
circumdare: 432, 1 7 collocatio: 78n 3 1; 340, 2, 7 /, 24, 23; 342, 34; 344, 13; 352, concordare: 316, 17 , 27, 33; 322, 77; 404, 24;
circumducere: 224, 67, 68, 77 color: 79np l; 87n p l; 248,10; 258, 4 , 1 2 ; 305ns 41; 372, 13, 23; 376, 7 2 S 384, 40, 48; C 463 S 7 7438, 7 - 7
circumductus: 224, 64-67 3X4, /, 9, 10, 11, 12; 350, 27; 356, 76; 370, 478, 26 -27; c 4 8 7,1 3 - 2 1 ; 488,1 0 - 1 3 p l concordia: 316, 27
circumferentia or circunferentia: 74n; 220, 1 1 ; 7 455 p l; c 456p l; c 459, 7 - 4 p l ; c 476, 8 complexionabilis: ii5 n concors: 316, 21, 29-30; 390, 3 7
6- 7 \ 222, 3 °, 33 - 3 4 , 3 3 , 3 6 , 3 7 , 3 8 , 3 9 P h 4 °, p l ; c 477p l ; 7488 p l complexionalis: 232, 1 1 ; 236, 27; 240, 23; 296, concupiscentia: 254,14; c 479; 7488,1 0 - 1 3
4 1-42, 47, 46; 224, 7 1 ; c 443, 48; c 448, 77 coloratus: 370, 7; c 476, 8p l 356,^7
77; concupiscere: 7488,1 0 -1 3
p i; c 449,3 7 -3 6 ; a 592, 47, 46 columnarius: 7458, 4 - 2 0 p l complexionatus: 238, 20; 340, 13 concurrere: 8on; 242, 16; 248,14; 252, 4; 324,
circumfluencia: a 628, 40 columpna: 210, 1 8 2; 358, 49; a 584, 7 0 , 14
complexus: 7463
circumpositus: a 565n.pl columpnarius: 256, 7 / componere: 75ns u r n ; 206, 21; 218, 46; 410, concursus: 8onp l ; ii9 n
circumscriptus: io8n; m n p i; w 2 n .p l; 240, 7 combinare: 75 n p l; 119ns 1 2on 42; c 463 p l ; c 497s 7 506; 7 509; a 565ns a condelectari: 7478, 21-2 3
circumstantia: 162, 72; 252, 8; 308, 12; 324, combinatio: 117ns n 8 n p l ; \ 1 7 n p l ; i2on p l; 602, 10 condensare: 8n; 404, 23, 23, 27
72, 6, 7, 10, 1 1 , 17, 18; 326, 1, 7 pi, 14, 26; 204, 7 2 , 14; 308, 70 compos: 348, 62; 350, 28 condensatio: 404, 20, 28-29; 406,34
328, 7 7 , 7 6 , 7 ^, 3 9 \ W , 4 &, 3 ‘, 3 3 4 , 2 2 , 7 commemorare: 7488 compositio: 204, 12, 17; 206, 29; 336, 29; conditio: 264, 8; 312, 42; 324, 2, 3-6; 380, 46
circumvolvere: 224, 77 commensurabilis: n n ; i2on; 166, 17, 16; c confectio: 119ns 334, 13; 354, 9
338, 13; 366, 23
citarista: v 330,7 0 p i 433 p l ; c 4 1 4 p l compositor: 322, 27 conferre: 7 490
cithara: v 32 2 , 1 7 ; 32311; 33711; cf. cythara commensurabiliter: 218, 77, 74 compositus: 65ns m n ; w ^ n p l ; 160, 13; 188, configurare: 174, 23, 27; 254, 1 2 - 1 3 ; z %4, 7',
citharista: v 33o, 7 0 commensurare: i2on 13; 198, 13, 3, 3; 204, 7, 9, 13, ,14, 17; 206, 376, 26, 28, 29; c 466,13 - 2 3
citius ( = cicius): ii3 n commensuratio: 7 455 23, 37 ; 208, 2 7 ; 210, 7 / s 266, 27; 290, 38; configuratio: 119ns 120ns 12m ; 160, 23-26;
civitas: 393n; 7486 Commentator(Averroes): 8n; 9n; (Campanus): 296, 4; 306, 24; 312, 30; 322, 3; 372, 23; 230, 3; 232, 19; 234, 26, 34, 4; 236, 26; 238,
D e civitate D e i: 356, 24; 387ns 393n a 5 36, 3 ,1 4 406, 4, 12; 7454p l; 7458, 4-20; 7469; 7476, 13, 1 3 - 1 4 , 18, 21, 23, 23; 240, 29, 3 1 , 34,
clamitare: v 369, 7 7 commentum: 7 474; a 564, 42 8; c 494, 19-20 p l; c 498; a 538, 37; a 565ns 1 2 - 1 3 ; 242, 16; 244, 9 -10 , 18, 1 8 - 1 3 ; 248,
clangor: 328, 12; 329n commixtio: iig n a 626, 7 , 3 23- 24, 1 7 pl; 284, 4; 286, 2 8 - 2 9 2S>6, 7 8, 23,
clarificare: 254, 17 commotio: 352, 7 2 comprehendere: 6n; 57n ; c 463 1, 3, 6, 7, 8, n , 12; 336, 27; 342, 37 ; 376, 24,
claritas: 174, 27, 28; c 440, 2 7 - 2 8 p i commovere: 258,17; 376, 6; c 454 compressio: 384, 49 2 3 ; 7 466, 7 3 - 2 3; et passim
clarus: 370,12, 14 communicare: 53np l; 79ns 83np l; 84ns 7455; computatus: io8n configurative: 12m
Claudianus: 258, 17 7496 p l confirmare: i2on; 12m ; 342, 33; a 536, 77
computus: n o n
 66o Selective Index of Latin Terms Selective Index of Latin Terms 661

conformare: 322, 9 244, 1 2 - 1 3 ; 246, 9 - 1 0 ; 288, 32; 426, 18; 0 contrahere: 254, 8 1 1 , 12; 210, /, 27; 226, 3, 4, 3, 7 , 1 0 ; 230, 33,
conformis: 96np l; 240, 8; 242, 7/5 416, 44 4 9 2 , 34-43 5030450/passim contrariari: 8np l; 1170. 3 , 7 p l; 232, 2 7 , /, I O ; 234, 2 7 , 3; 236, 7 / 5
conformitas: 242, 23, 26; 244, 72; 246, 775 322, consim illis: a v 3 4 4, 10 8 -1 2 contrarietas: 8n p l; 75n/)/; 212, 8; 240, 4; 0454 238, 705 252, <
5"5 260, 4; 298, 6, 19; 506,42;
<?, 7 7 - 7 2 consistere: 79n; 0433, 28 -29; c 456 />/ contrarius: 7n 58n; 75 n ; 1 o8n p l; 1o9np l; 11 on; 328, /5 330, 32, 36; 33m ; 376, /, 72; 378,
conformiter: 79n; ii7 n ; 166, 1 3 - 1 6 ; 168, 7; consonans: 242, 2/; 312, 34; 314, 7 7 - 3 6 ; 390, 160, 21; 212, 7, 2, /, <f, 77, 13, 14, 20; 214, 18, 28; c 438 7 - 9 p l; c 440, 27-2 8 ; c 453, 13
170, 7/5 182, /75 186, 2/5 188, 73»; 200, 20; i 7 5 7 472 28, 3 1 ; 2 2 8 , 3 6 , 3 7 , 41; 230, 705 232, 26; 310, p l ; 0 454; 0 478, 2 6 - 2 7 p h c 48i 5 1 6 - 1 8 p l ; c
206, 2<?, /2 ; 208, 8; 214, /2 ; 226, 70; 238, consonantia: 244, 9, 10; 246, 13, 19; 312, 2<f, 2/; 316, 378, 47; 388, 404, 22, 23, 27; 483, 1 7 - 1 8 ; 0486 p l ; 0488 p l; c 489 p l; a 528,
72; 244, <?; 250, 2 0 , 77; 258, 27; 260, 6; 306, 23), 29-30, 38, 39, 42; 314, 4*; 322, *-7, 7 2 , 406, 3 1 ; 0454; 04695 0470p l; 0489 33; a 550, 46, 48, 49, 31, 32, 3 4 p l, 33, 36,39-,
/75 308, /<?; 410, 3 2 ; 432, 73); a 628, 2 8 ; e t 7 <y, 19 -20, 27, 2/, 2/5 0455, 8p l ; c 4 7 2 p i conuntiare: v 386, / a 5450; a 546, 127; a 572, 4, 6
passim consonare: 316, 2 1 , 3 3 , 3 J \ 3 22j 7/ conus: 5 in; 62np l; 6-]npl; io in ; 305^ a 590, corpusculum: 84n; 0488
confortatio: 0483, i j - 1 8 consonus: 240, 9; 294,3 1 - 3 2 ; 298,12 36, 37; a 592, 3 9 p l; a 598, 3 1 , 3 3 5a 600, 43; correlarium: ic>3n; 162, 68 p l; 398, 1; 400, 1; c
confundere: 258, 72; 260, 2/; 264, 8; c 457, consortium: 0488,1 0 - 1 3 p i a 602, 8; a 604,19; a 606, 34; <2618, 4 51050515 pl; cf. corollarium
1 3 - 1 3 ; c 476, (? constans: 0489p i convalescere: 0488,1 0 - 1 3 correlativus: a 556, 48
congrue: 166, 18; 184, 20; 290, 18; 332, 72 Constantinus: 330, 27 conveniens: i2on; 166, 24, 28; 224, <$7; 240, correspondens: 7405770; 920; 970 p l; 99n pl;
congruens: n 6 n p i constellatio: 230, 32; 234, /25 342, 30, 33, 4 2 - 36; 242, 74; 320, 3 8 ; 322, 24; 402,39 246, 77; 250, 7/50514
coniectura: i29n; 372, 23? 43 convenienter: 168, 41; 246,19; 2 7 4 , 3 1 correspondenter: 6on; 74n p l; 79n; 180, 72;
coniecturare: 262, 27 constituere: 78n; 8on; 83n; 9 9 ^ a 604, 22 convenientia: 242, 19, 21, 23, 8; 244, 9, 12, 7; 208, 7/
coniecturatio: v 358, 4 7 -4 8 constitutus: 67n; 9 9 ^ 188, / ; 190, 8, 16; 214, 246, 205 248, 73, 1 6 correspondere: 6on; 7711; 8on; 9on; 9m ; 97n
coniunctio: 1 2n; 13 on p i; c 445 p i; c 446 p i 1 1 , 1 2 ; a 547n;a 563n convenire: io3n; 238, 70; 240, 3, 6; 274, 19; p l ; ioon; ii6 n ; 226, 16; c 514; 0 515; <2 598,
coniunctionalis: i2on consuetudo: 326, 9 286,30; 316,22 29, 33, 36, 38; a 600, 42, 43, 43; a 606, / / ; a
coniunctus: 329n consultatio: 0486, 68-69 conversio: 250,13; 390,32; 0485 616, 44; a 618, 33, 2; a 634, 94
coniungere: 84n7)/; 196, 3»; 198, 1 1 , 12; c 445 consumere :05O9;05io conversive: 426,13 corroborare 10488,7 0-13
/>/50491 consummatio: 04 33, 3 - 3 3 convertere: 305^ 330,34; 424, 4 ;c 4 6 8 , 3 - 6 p l; corrumpere: 115n.pl; 150n.pl; 308, 9; 344, 13;
coniurare: 336, 70; 338, 24 consurgere: 92n; 93np l; 94n; n 8 n 0485, 63-66; 0487,1 3 - 2 1 ; 0490 0479
coniuratio: 340, 7, /, 20, 27; 342, 74; 344, 27; contactus: 9cm; 236, 9 convexus: 204, 8, 9, 10, 12; 206, 27; 214, 3 1 ; corruptio: ii4 n ; 256, 21; 544, 29; 346, 9; 384,
352,/i, // contaminatus: 234, / 256, 1 1 , 1 4 ; 0458, 4-20/>/ 49
coniurator: 350, 73) contentus: 0448, 77 cooperiens: 264, / corumptio: v 346, 9
conmixtio: 312, 77, 4 0 -41; 320, 3 8 contiguus: 318, 22 copulare: 0488; a 58 4,1 1 p l costa: 6 5 n p l ; c 4 6 5,19 - 2 9 ; c 474; c 476
connaturalis: 232, 24; 0472 continere: 32n5051250514/)/ copulentia: 0488 creator: c 484p l
connotare: 96n; 274, 4 4 ; 276,7; a 560, <F7 contingentia: 8on5 214, 725 216, 27; a 570, cor: i i 6 n p l; ii7 n ; 1190; 236, 75 252, 21; 264, creatura: 390,34; 0486, 6 8 -6 9 p l
connumeratus: 7 ^ n p l 102-3,103 28 ,3 2; 330, 19; 346, 1 1 ; 0 504 credere: I29n
conpacitas: x>228, 3 2-33 contingere 1292,2/50 4 4 8 , 1 7 corda: 202, 39, 40, 46; 316, 19, 28, 2 9 p l, 30; a credibilis: 266, 3 1
consecutio 10482, 3 1 - 3 3 continuare: 83n; io8n; H 3 n ; 280, /2 546, 7 2 7 , 722; a 630, 44, 47 credulitas: 338, 27; 340, 6 - 7 ; 542, 40, 4; 348,
consequencia: 77n; 78n continuati v e : 84n corium: 250,3 , 4, 3 ; 316, 40, 47, 44; 318, 4/ 4 1,3 1-, 35*, 43 -, 3 6 8 > / 2
consequens: 76n p i; io9n; 234, 3; 304, 2; 0 continue: 8n; i3n p l; 62n; 64n; 84n; io8n5 corollarium: 54n; 6305 640; 870p l; a 608, 37, credulus: 340, 1 4
469; 0 493 p i; 0 498; 0 304 />/; cf. per conse­ ic>9n p l; iio n p l 5 i2 7n ; i3 o n ; 194, 7, 10; 40, 41; cf. correlarium crepusculum 10485
quens 208, 32; 210, 33; 224, 64, 66; 414, 10; c 472; corporalis: 78n; 176, 39; 210, /7, 13; 214, /4; crescere: 11 on p l ; m n ; c 509 505650 p l ; a 6 \ 2,
consequenter: 67ns 7 5n p i; 3x2, 47; 314, 5 0 492, 34-43; 0 5 1 1 , 4 7 -4 8 p l; a 563n p l; 240, /7 ; 286, 2 8 5 292, 7<?; 396, / ; 408, <£; 26, 27
4 3 2 ,1 4 ; a 496p i a 6 0 2 , 16; a 612, 77 p l ; cf. continuo 410, 32; 414, / / ; 420, 7/; 0 457, 1 3 - 1 3 ; c croceus: 045 5; c 456
consequentia: 8npi; 6on;67n;68n;96n; xoon; continuitas: 54n; 158, 72; 164, 2; 1 6 6 , 17 ; 270, 470; 0482, 3 1 - 3 3 ; 0489 cruciare: 388, 39
0 490, 39-40; 0 493; 0 499; 0 305; 0 314p i; 0 6 , 7 , 9 ; 312, 14 corporaliter: 230, 16; 232, 225 248, 16; 332, 17 c r u x :270,13
315; a 526, 4; a 536, 4; a 546, 774; a 598, 77; continuo: 1070 p l; io8n corporeitas: v 162, 48; 176, 40 cubitus: 045 5p l
a 600, 7; a 602, 9; a 606, 27; a 608, 44 continuum : 53n pl; 54n; 78n; 166, 23, 24, 27; corporeus: 160, 205 208, /, 77; 210, 1, 3, 6; cuculus '.0478
consequi: 8n; a 546, 128 216, 22, 29, 36; a 53 m ; a 536, 7/, 16; a 5670 226, 83; 228, /25 230, 18; 232, 27, 725 236, culex: 0453, 13

conservare: 304, 4; 0478, 26-27
considerare: 276, 6, 8
consimilis: 74n; 8on; 182, 19, 22, 23, 32; 184,
16; 208, 22; 258, 70505° 4 ; 05i3;0Z 330, 4/5
a 626, 74; et passim
consimiliter: 216, 28, 30, 3 1 ; 224, 7/; 242, 27;
continuus: io n ; 5 m p l ; 79n pl; 84n; 97n; io 7n ;
io8n; n o n ; 164, 4; 168, 3; 304, 7, 10; 306,
18; 308, 3; 310, 4, 9; 314, 4; 0 45 5 p l; c 468,
3 - 6 pl; 0 4 7 1 , 18 -2 4; 0474 p l
contradictio: 92n; 2 7 2 ,11; 430,//
contradictorie: 04 9 4, 19-20
7/; 238, 8, 14; 248, 3); 292, 74; 300, / / ; 360, cultus: 0480
4; 370, 3); 394, 7 /, /0; 396, 6; 402, 3 3 5 406, cupiditas 10488
22; 426, 4 ;4 30 ,39 cupire: 386, 6
corpus: jin ; 53np l; 62n; 6$n; 65ns 8on; 84n cuprum: 1 i8n
pl; 92n; ii6 n ; 162, 64; 168, 36; 170, 8; 174, curare: 0478, 26-27; c 4%1, 1 3 - 2 1
26, 27, 28; 176, 3 1 p l, 32, 3 4 pl, 37 , 38; 208, curatio: 236, 1 0
 662 Selective Index of Latin Terms Selective Index of Latin Terms 663

curiositas: 358, 6p decenter: 298, IO) 322, 2/ demonstrabilis: 218, 41 designans: 97np l) 99np l) io3n; 208, 775 210,
curiosus: 360, 77 decentia: 248, 23 dem onstracio: y6n 3 4 )2 12 ,16
currere: i2 8n, 12911 decentus: 298, 1 2 demonstrare: 53m 64n; 7 6 n p l) 77n; io o n p l) designare: 103^ m n ; 166, 725 170, 75 172,
currus: 711 deceptio: 162, 6 i ) 256, 18) 336, 33) 358, /2; ii2 n ; 216, i j , 3J ) 224, j 6 ) 238, / ; c 4 72 p l) 45 176, 4, 7", 7; 178, 4; 180, 7 <?, 2; 182, 77, 20,
cursus: 12011 p l) 220, 775 262, 27; 346, 7/; c 370, 7; 74635 7 484, 42-43 c 498 p l) 7 504; 7 512; a 604, 24; a 608, 40 5 a 27; 184, 74; 188, 4; 190, 7 <?; 194, 34) 200,
445 deceptus: 340, 2/; 364, 44 610, 8) a 630, 62 2 p 5 2 0 2 , /<?, 77, 44, 47, 705 2 1 0 , 7 , 705 2 l 8,
curvare: 286, / /; a v 534, 84 decidentia: ic>9n demonstratio : 0 439 49) 394, 275 7 441, 1 4 - 1 6 ) a 539^ a 628, 42,
curvatus: 288,/0 decisio: 326, 28 dem onstrative: u n 43) a 630, ^4
curvilineus: 8711 p l declarare: 87np l ) 92n; 1290p l) 174, 7/; 7 514 demonstratus: 6n; 218, 425 280, / 7 ; c 463; 7 designatus: ioon; 168, 2
curvitas: 160, 22, 27; 168, /75 202, /7, /2, /4 declaratio: 9on; 162,4 0 493 ; a 562, i j ) a 604, 24 desinere: 84n; 13on
p l , 4, 214, /, 3 p l, 4, 8, p; 216, 24 p l, 26, decorus: 322, 26 denom inans: 276, 3 detegere: 264,18
40-, 218, 44, 44, 46, 48, 4P, 40, 41, 4 2 p l, 4 4 - decrementum: 7n denominare: 6 on p l) 62n p l) 83n; 212,705280, determinare: io8n p l) n o n ; ii3 n ; n 6 n p l)
46, j6> 37, 6°, 66\ 220, 2, 3, 3 - 4 , 6, 8, 1 1 decrescere: 2.612, 24p l 46) 420, 2 6 5 7 473, 4 1 - 4 6 ) c 4 74 p l ) c 497; a i 2 i n p l ) 188, 24, 27, 2 8 , 3 0 , 3 1 ) 200,77; 202,
p l, 12, 13, 14 p l, 77; 222, 23, 26, 28-2p, 30, Decretum: 364, 6p 7, 6) 222, 2 j ) 232, 7, 6, i o ) 238, i j ) 266, /(?;
5 5 8, 69
3 6, 3 7 p l, 3 $, 3 9 , 40, 42, 44 , 47 , j o ) 224, 43, deducere: i2on; a 628, 47 denom inatio: 6on p l) 6 rn p l ) -]<pn) 8on p l) 276, 7 463, 7 7-2 7 p l ) 7 464; 7 469
44, 60, 68, j o , J4\ 226, 80; 230, 44) 256, 16) deductio: p) 280, 70, 77, 4P) 7 4 74 p l ) c 4 9 7 p l ) a 566, determinatio: 12m ; i26n; 162, 6 i ) 272, 77;
258, 23) 300, 72, 13, 14, 14, 24) 302, 44, 4 J , deesse:a 4 6 ) a ^6jn 3 7 2>*
3, 7; c 443, / ; c 468, p-2 8) a 626, / ; a 628, defectus: 310, 26) c 45 5; 7 484p l) a 53in denominatus: 3 12 ,7^ ,775 4 2 0 , 16, 24) 422,70; determinative 17493
38) a 630, 4p, 40, 41, 42 deficere: 33m ; 7463p l ) 7482; a 53m 424, 47, 42; 7 512 determinatus: 53n p l) 9on; ii5 n ; 236, 77; 7

curvus: 198, 14, 6\ 200, 3 6 ; 202, 40; 208, 27;
214, 1 1 , 12) 216, 16, 26, 28-23, 30) 218, 44)
220, 16, i p p l, 20) 222, 21 p l, 22 p l, 23, 2 4 p l,
36) 224, 4 6 p l, 48) 256, 4, 14, 18) 286, 4 pl,
deformis: 240, /<?; 256, 2 0 ; 74 56 ,3P-40 denotare: 92n; 93n;98n 5178,775222, 44; 396, 469
deformitas: n 6 n 13 , 24 detraccio : 7 509
deitas: 268, 26 densitas: io9 n; 2 3 0 , 18) 33m Deus: 8on />/; i28n p l) 250, 27; 262, 72, 22;
delectabilis: 238, 6) 246, 4, 6) 248, 72; 296, densus: 212, 4 , 18) 232, 225 404, 27 270, 2<?; 298, <
5, 75 360, j i ) 362, 445 380,

i j ) 288, 23) c 444p l ) 7470; a 570, 772; a 626, 308, 6) 310, 23) 322, 2 6 ) c 455 p l ) c 4 5 6 p l denudare: 7468, p -2 8 /7
4 ) a 62%, 3 4 , 3P) a 650, 68) a 6 32, <?/ delectare: 246, i o ) 248, i p ) 326, 72, i p , 2p) D e deo deorum : 336, 27; 7480 deus: 268, 27; 269^ 340, 775 362,775 368, 4^
cyrurgicus: 358, /7 328, / 7 , /4, /<?; 330, 20, 2/, /05 336, 245 388, D e deo Socratis: 374, 7 8 Deuteronomium: 380, 7<?
Cyrus: 378, 7^ <?; 389n; 7 477, <?-7 2 57478, 27-2/5 7 480 deorsum: jn.) io 9 n ; n o n ; 260, 7; 7469 devenire: 290, 705 292,77, 77
cythara: 322, 77; 334, 2<?; 336, 27; cf. cithara delectatio: 160, /75 246, 7; 248, 18) 326, 7, 70; dependere: 12 9 ^ 2 5 0 , 18 devotio: 328, 7
cytharedus: 334, 27 388, 2, 4; 390, 2<f, 28, 34) 406, 275 7 4885 7 deperdere: 276, 775 394, 74; a 612, 24; a diagonalis: m n
cytharista : 316, 77 5 33o, / 0 490, 27-275 7491 p l 6i5n diameter: 7 448, 77 />/; 7 449, 3 4 - 3 6 ) c 476;
cytharizans: 334, 27 delenitas: v 312, 16 deperditio: 300,74; 394, 34,34,36,3J 543n; 565n/>/; a 630, 63) cf. dyameter
delere: 250, 16 deprehendere: 292, 22 diapason: 313^045650 47 2; cf. dyapason
dabilis: c 466,1 3 - 2 3 p l delfinus: v 260, 28 depressus: <2 580, 7 diapente: 313n 57 45 6 5cf. dyapente
daemon 17459, 27-2 /50486, 6 8 -6 p 5 cf. demon definitus: 312, 1 6 derelinquere: 394, 27, 2p, 3 1 diatesseron: v 312, 40; 313n; 74725 cf. dyates-
daemonium: c 487, 1 4 - 2 1 p l Delius: 362, /7, 40 derivare: 7 490 seron
dampnatio: 352, 3 4 Delphi: 362, 2p descendere: 83n; 10 9 ^ 110 p l) 208, 7 7 ; 224, diathessaron: v 312, 2<?
dampnus: 260, 26 delphinis: v 260, 28 66) 278, 22, 24, 275 280, 72; 36m ; 7 465, dies: n 8 n ; 262, 20, 275 298, 775 7 463, 77-27
Daniel: 262, 8, p) 266, 3 4 p l) 270, 28 delphinus: 260, 28) 330, 2p 7 p—2 p p l ) c 483, i j - 1 8 ) a 592, 48 p l) 7464, 27-72
datus: 6n; 84n; 9 3 ^ 11 j n p l ) 216, 33, 38) 218, demens: 1 ion; 338, 2 8 descensus: io9n p l ) m n p l) 278, 77, 20, 275 dies iudicii: 332, 7^
41) 7494, i p - 2 0 p l ) a 630, 48) a 632, 86 dementare: 364, 64 280, 77; 320, 4<$'; 7465, i p —2 p p l dieta: 352,7 tP
David: 336, 26 dementia: 342, 36 descindere: 320, 36 differens: n 8 n ; ii9 n ; 240, 27
dealbare: 278, 3 1 demere: io 8 n; 7 500p l 57 50157509/)/ describere: 74 n p l) 194, 8) 196, 13, 14, ip , 24) differenter: 320, 42
dealbatio: 278, 30 demon: i28n p l) 336, i p p l, 22, 24, 24, 28, 31, 224, 64, 68, j o , j i , J3) 226, 80 differentia: 7n; i09np l) i28n; 160, 24, 33-34,

dearticulare: 262, 24; 266, 24 descripcio: 76n 34, 34, 42) 172, 775 192, 7; 194, 2; 204, 8, 1 1
3 3 ',
3 3 8, 23 , 2 4 , 3 4 ', 3 4 °, 3 , 7 , 1 2, 2 o\ 3 4 *,
dearticulatio: 160, 74; 178, 7 42, i i ) 344, i p , 3 5 346, 7, 14, 32) 348, 6 i) descriptio; 192, 77; 194, 36) 208, 22; 218, 64) p l, 75 208, 27; 226, 82) 230, 47 p l, 1, 3, 45
debilis: i2on; 308, 8) c 483, i j - 1 8 352, /2; 362, 36) 370, 7/5 372, 245 374, /(/57 224, 48) 286, 2p, 16 234, 20; 238, 72, 24; 242, 70; 256, 7, 25 258,
debilitare: 7 457, 7 4-7/57489 480, I p l) c 4815 7 482, 3 1 - 3 3 ) c 484, 42-43) c descriptus: 6n 5 9 7n ; 170, 7 ; 196, 1 j 7; 260, 7; 262, 7, 7; 286, 7
debilitas: 75n; 306, 38, 44; 308, 46 485; 7487, 2 2 - 3 1 p l) cf. daemon desiderium: 254, 13 differre: 7n; 240, 26,33
debite: 320, 34, 42) a 564, 36 demonium: 372, 16, ij , 18, 21 p l) cf. daemo­ designabilis: 198, 4, 12, 14) 410, 70; 430, 38) a difficultas: 6n; 7n ; 911; « 5 58, 70
debitus: 320, 38 nium 626, 2 diffinicio: a v 550, 47
 664 Selective Index of Latin Terms Selective Index of Latin Terms 665

diffinire: 53n; a 547m a 567m a 592, 4; a 596, diformiter: c 492, 44-44 p i; c 493; cf. difformi­ pl; 174, 12, 20; 206, 205 274, i j ; 340, 24; diversus: 7911 p l; 98n; 1130; H 5n; 160, 40;
26, 27 ter 362, 22; 382, ^25/488 I O - I j p l 174, 21; 218, 62, 6 j ; 224, 60; 230, 46, 48;
diffinitio: 53n; / 469; / 474; / 476; a 550, ^0, digitus: 280, 40p i dispositivus: 8n; 352,^4 234, /75 238, 2/5 248, 1 4 5 260, 4 5 262, 45
3 9 , 431 * 55 z , 4 $',“ 5 5 4 , -20;« 556, 42-,a 560, dilectus: 242, j j dispositus: 62n; f/n; 190, 85 230, 75 252, 9; 296, 4 p l ; a ) G j n ; a GzG, i 6 ; a G z % , 19
7 3 1 * 562, /5); a 564, 42; a 566, / / ; <2 572, /0; diligere: 244, 4; 246, 27; 248, 24 254, 2, 7; 308,11; 386, 64 dividens: 216, 40; 284, /7, 18; 392, /4; 394,
a 600, diluvium: c 490 disproportionatus: 236, 27; p 236,27 16; a 598, 40, 4 1 ; a 600, 47; a 602, 7; a GoG,
difformis: 6on 4)/; 67n p l; jGn pi; y j n p i; 78n dimensio: 630; 8on p i; 830; 84m ioon; 168, disputabilis: a 612, 2 8 j j ; a 608, 40, 46,49
p i; 79n p i; 83n; S j n p i; yon p i; y i n p i; yGn; 6, 16; 170, 7; 172, 18; 176, 49, 41; 292, i j ; dissidentia: 244, 1 1 dividere: 8n p l; 9n p l ; 530; G)n p l; j l n ; 830
y j n p i; 98n p i; ioon p i; io in ; io3n; ii5 n ; 394, 3 2 1 412, j , j ; 426, 4; a 328, 28, j j ; a dissidere: 316, 24 p l ; 840 p l; yyn p l; 1030; m n ; ii2 n ; 178,
n 6 n pi; u 8 n ; 160, /7, 18, 19, 49; 164, 7 0, 5 3 °, 3 i , 3 2 ! * 54 i n p l dissimilis: 182, 27; 216, 49; 218, 49, jO, j 2 ‘, 8 5 216, 28; 29, 4 1 , 44, 44, 48; 218, 41; 320,
73 , 76', 174, *6, 1 7 ', 184, 8; 188, 16; 190, dimensionalis: ioon p i 222, jo; 236, 27; 244, j , 12; 294,41; 296, 225 j j ; 4 1 4 ,10, i j ; 418, 431 420, 4; 426, 6; 432,
* 7~ * 8, *, 3 , 3 , 75 1 9 2, 1 4, *8; 1 9 4 , 34 , 3 7 , 43 , dimidium: 64m m n p i; c 445 p i; c 504; c 512 8; c 468, 4 -6 ; c 474; / 476, 8; c 496; / 497 p l ;
« 5 5 4 , * 9 , 29 , 3 *
1 1 ; 196, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 8-9; 198, p i ; c 515 p i; c 51 4P I; c 515 p i ; a 608, 42 dissimiliter: 234, 20 c 503; a 560, 14, 14; a 3650; a 382, 8; a 398,
14, i j , 1, 2, 4; 202, 2, j ; 204, 9, 8-9, i j , 16; diminibilis: ii5 n dissimilitudo: n 8 n ; 236, 20; 294, 41, 46; 49; a 608,49, 40
206, 2 j , 26, j o , j j , j 8 ; 208, 8, 14, 19, 20, j i ; diminuere: 7n; 1130; 166, 19; 302, 40, j o - j i , 300, 16, 24; 322, 11; a 546, 122, 124 divina: 342, 1 1
210, j j ; 212, 22; 2x4, 2 j , / ; 218, 46, j i , j 2, 3*1 3 I0>271 3 4 2 ,341 348, 48; 400,i , /25416, dissipatus: 232, 2 1 divinare: 264, 40; 266, 4/5 362, j j ; c 486, 4 /-
60, 61, 6 j , 66 p i; 220, 4; 224, 69, j o , J4; 226, 14; c 509; c 510; a 610, 1 1 , i j , 16; a 612, i j , dissonantia: 322, 19 46
80; 228, 21, 44; 248, 2 0 , 1 4 ; 250, i j ; 252,12; 19, 2 j p l , 2 j , 26, 2 J dissonare: 316, 44 divinatio: 266, 4 4 5 zG jn ; 268, 245 362, 46;
256, 22; 272, 28, j o , 2; 274, 26, 41, 46; 296, diminutio: 7n; 8n p i; 64n; 256, 9; zjG , 18; dissonus: 294, 42; 316, 24; 334, 21; 368, 47; 380, j 8
10; 298, j ; c 459, 4 - 4 p i; c 512; a 526, 2, 4, 8; 280, 44; 400,1 0 p i; a 612, 1 9 382, 28 D e divinatione: 266, 42; 336, 24
a 528, 16, 21, j j , j 8 ; a 332, 6 j , j o ; a 348, 1, diminutive: 83n distancia: 76n pl; 77m cf. distantia divinator: i28n; 372, 4; 380, / /
4 1 * 5 5 0 , 28, j i , j 4 , j j , 42, 4 j ; a 5 )2 ,4 8 , j i , directus: 8n; 278, 27 distans: 670 pl; 9on; 244, 10; c 4895 a 328, i j , divinitus: 336, 4 2
32; a 380, 2 p i; a 584, 12, i j ; a 586, 18; a dirigere: c 483 20; a 532, 6j, j j ; a 534, £25 a 550, j j , 48; a divinus (N): 362, 4/; 368, 49; 380, 61
388, 21, 22, 2 j , 24; a 626, 1, j , 8, i j ; a 628, discernere: ii9 n 552, 4j; a 334, 24 divinus (Adj.): 264,1 4 5 268, 2 4 5 272, /2
20, 22; a 630, 64; etpassim disciplina: 138, /; c 437, j ; a G n n distantia: 570 pl; Gjn; 960 pl; 160, 46; 192, 1 j divisibilis: 8on; 830 p l; 9on; 166, 24, 2 j , 44;
difformitas: 7 4 ^ 98m io3np i; n 6 n p i; 158, 2, discontiguitas: 3 18 ,16, 19, 26; v 318, 26 pl, 2j, 42, 42-44; 194, 42, 48; 214, 10; 218, 186, 4 ; 270, j p l; c 438, j - 9 ; a 336, /7; a
8, 9; 160, 18, 1 9 p i, 22, 24, j i , j 2, j 8, 41, 4 j ; discontiguus: 318, 27 64pl; 262, 2, 4pl, 6 , 12,14, i j ; 276, / /; 308, 339n;a 542, 64; a 538, 64; a 564, 49
162, 44, 46, 48, j j , 62, 64-6j , 6 j - 6 8 ; 164, discontinuitas: 3 18 ,19, 26 12; 384, j j ; a 586, 20; cf. distancia divisibilitas: 830; 168, /2; 270, 7; 280, 25 282,
ji, J2; 174, 1 2—i j , 20, 22; 196, 9 - 1 0 ; 198, discontinuus: 286,1 4 - 1 4 ; 304,12, i j distare: 670 pl; 9on; c 512; a 600, 44; a GoG, j j ; 23 , 331 284,3 3
1 1 , 1, 2, 4, j ; 202, /, j ; 204, 9, 12, 1, j , j , 8, disconveniens: 242,14 a 616, 40, 41 divisibiliter: 298, 4
12, 16; 206, 2 j, 2j , j 6 , 49, 40; 210, 19; 214, disconvenientia: 242, 27; 244, 12, 14; 248, 16, distendere: 230, 6; 348, j j divisim: a G^z, j j
25218, 6j-68; 224, 61, J9-80; 226, 82, 8j, 2; distensio: 230, 10; 252, 24 divisio: m n ; 218, 43; 270, 6; 320, 42, 44, 44;
17
2 3 4 >371 248, 1, 31 25°, *, 16, 19; 252, 9, i j ; discooperire: 264, 6 distinctio: jnpl; 208, 22 414, 27; 416, 75/468, 4 - 6 p l; c 474; / 499 P h
236, 22; 238, 7, 19; 270, 2, 4, 20; 272, 22, 24, discordans: 316, 29 distinctus: 74 6 2 , 10-11 p l a 5630
26, j j ; 274, 24, 42, 4 j ; z j G , j ; 280, /7; 284, discordia: 322, 19; 368, 47 distinguere: 284, //57463 divisionatus: 63-640
j ; 296, 2 j, j , 8; a 526, /; a 528, 2 j; a 534, discors: 316, 29 diurnalis: v 328, /2 divisus: 640; 414, 12; 420, 48; c 492, 44-44; c
S31 * 5 3 8, 371 * 5 4 2 , 6j; a 548, j , j ; a 334, discreptio: ) \ n p l diurnus: i2n; /464, 2J-42 496 p l 5 / 497 5/498 5/ 499 5 / 5 0 0 5 / 5 0 4 ^ /;/
1 8 , 1 9 , 20; a 626, 1 ; et passim discretio: 3405304, / diuturnitas: /461, 4 511, 4J-4 8; /313 5 * 562, 28
difformiter: i3 n p i; G z n ; G ) n ; G j n p i ; j j n ; 83m discretus: )$n; 540p l; 78n; a 560, 10 diuturnus 1/4 6 1,4 divitiae: 230, 24
87npi; y j n ; 98np i; 99n; roonp i; i i 6 n pl\ discurrere: c 5065 a 584, 1 0 divariatio: /■ 238, j - 6 doctor: 76m 236, 19 5 390, 21; a GoG, 4 1 ; a 618,
n j n ; 11811; 190, 7; 194, 44; 196, 20, 24-24; discursum: c 514 p l divaricatio: 258, j - 6 3
198, 1 6 - i j ; 208, 8, 20; 210, j 4 ~ j j ; 224, j8 , discutere: a 628, } 6 diversificare: 1130; ii4 n ; i28n; 214, 28; 226, doctrina: 336,4 1 5/437, /5 /446
J9; 226, 80; 250, 20; 278, i j , 2 j ; c 459, j ; disgredi: 338, 8 81; 248, 14; 280, /7 ; 284, 8; 302, 16; 308, dolere: 386, 6
c 511, 4 j ; a 526, j ; a 528, //, 21; a 332, 66, disiunctus: 304, 12 361c4 )y ,j-4 ;a ) y o ,jj dolor: 386, 4, j , 8,10
j 2; a 552, 46; a ) 9>o, 2; a 5%%, 22, 24; a G\)n; disparere: 250, 7 diversimode: 1 1 3n; 226,4 5 248, 14 5 260, / dolorosus: 332, 1 8
a 617m a 626, 8; a 630, 6 j ; et passim; cf. disparitas: a v 538, j j diversimodus: 1 1 8n Dominus: 234, 20; 262, 9; 264, 40, 4 1 , 42;
diformiter dispartire: c 446 5c 472 diversitas: 8on; i28n pl; 160, 2^5 162, j6; 206, 380, j 8 , 62; /463
diffugere: c 45 4, j - j / p i displicere: 246, 7, 8, 9 40; 226, 1, 6; 230,4; 240, 28-29; 248, / 4 , 1 1 5 Dorius: 328, 8
diffusio: 5in disponere: 8cn; 332, 44; 384, 46; 7496 294, /5^478, 26-2j;a 5370 dubitare: 11 4n 5 1 1 9n
diffusus: 168, j j dispositio: n ^ n p l; 115n p l ; n 6 n ; n 8 n ; i28n diverssus: av 570, 114-14 dubium: 258, /7
 666 Selective Index of Latin Terms Selective Index of Latin Terms 667

dubius: i28n dyapente: U 3n; 244, 1 1 ; 312, 27, 3 1 , 40 pi; c elongare: 262, 20 equalitas: 340; io$n; 228, 34; 276, 3; 322, 10;
ducere: 99m c 448, 77; 7 494, 19-20', a 632, 7 6 472; cf. diapente elyca: v 224, 74 a 548, 6 p l, 8; a 566, 38; a G06, 28; a 632, 87;
ductus: ic>3n; m n p l ; c 448, 77; c 472; c dyatessaron: v 312, 28, 40 elyx: v 224, 74 cf. aequalitas
494,19-20 dyatesseron: 244, 1 1 ; 312, 28, 40; v 312, 2 8 pi, emensus: io8np l; 1090p l ; n o n equaliter: 9n; 6in; 63m 79n; 9on; ioon; 192,
dulcedo: 210, 22; 330,1 9 , 3 3 ; 332>43 40p i; cf. diatesseron emetiri: n o n 13; 194, 46; 212, 9; 290, 21; 312, 32; 388,
dulcis: 7479, 23 ’ 24 dyathessaron: v 312, 40 emissio: c 45 8 27; 7488, 1 0 - 1 3 ; a 526, 13; a 528, 77; a 548,
dulciter: 3 1 6 ,14 dyatonicus: 320, 43 emittere: 268,17 ; c 490,39-40 16; a 550, 32, 39; a 552, 6; a 534, 22; a 600,
duplare: 4 1 6 ,12; c 509; a 562,18 enarmonicus: 240, 7; v 240, 7; p 31 o, 7/ 44; <7616, 47; cf. aequaliter
duplex: 160, 38; 176, 40; 270, 4, 1 1 , 18, 19; ebes: 326, 27 enbarmonicus w 310 ,1 9 ; cf. eubarmonicus equallis: a v 32G, 9; a v 532, 69; a v 554, 1 9 - 1 6 ,
272, 2 2 p i; 312, 30; 344, 21, 23, 30; 384, 60; ebrietas: 254, 1 6 encarmonichus: v 240, 7 30; a v 560, 2; a v 566, 60, 66, 67; a v 570,
390, 1 8 p i, 2 8 p i; c 466, 13 - 2 3 ; c 476; c 481, ebrius: 356,13 Eneas: 362,3 9 ; 364, 91 772
I 9 ~ 2 i ; a 547n; a 6 2 6 , 1 eburneus: 7482, 47-6 3 E neid: cf. Eneyd equalliter: v 5 54, 22
duplicare: 7499 ecclesia sancta: 362, 77 energia: 366,1 6 , 1 7 equare: n i n
duplicatio: a 562, 21 Ecclesiasticus: 246, 1 4 Eneyd: 266, 28; 386, 6 eque: 67m 84m 9on p l; ioon pl; n 6 n ; 212, 3 ;
duplicatus: io8n; io 9 n p i ; c 498; a 538, 29; a ecclipsis: i2n enharmonicus: 310, 7 / 228, 26; c 504; 7 505 p l; c 306; a 528, 19, 20;
539m a 556, 46, 49; a 5570; a 558, 61; a 562, edere: 74 54 ,19 enigma: 160,36; 264,1, 14 a 532, 69, 67, 74; a 534, 82; a 552, 47; a GoG,
77; a 563a; a 602, 14 educere: ii5 n ens: 8n; 79np l; 8onp l; 274, 1 4 p l, 1 3 p l; 7462, 3 7 ; a 632, 82
dupliciter: 7n; 7771; 9on; 202, 7; 250, 8 p i; eductio: r i5 n p l 74 p l; c 463p l; 7491; a equedistans: G f n p l ; -]Gnpl; 77m 78np l; 99m
2 5 6 ,7 ^ 5 3 2 , 70, 77 effectus: 7n; ii3 n p l ; H 7n ; n 8 n ; p l; ensis: 348, 90 192, 27p l; 194,38, 40; 196, 6, 8; 208, 17 , 19,
duplo: 6onp i ; 6 in p i ; G^npi; 640; 178, 9 ; 180, i2on; i2 8 n p l; 160, 26; 162, 44, 47, 30, 34, entharmonichus: v 240, 7 30; 396, 8, 9; 398, 3; 410, 22, 24; cf. aequi-
7 2, 14, i j ; 182, 23; 186, 3 J p i ; 220, 77; 222, 63, 64; 234, 2; 236, 1 1 , 30; 244, 23; 258, 77; entharmonicus: v 240, 7 distans, equidistans
36, 38; c 441, 9 p i; c 496; 7 498; 7 499; 7500; 264, 20; 294, 7 ; 296, 20, 24; c 454; 7 480, 7; entitas: 8on p l equedistanter: v 192, 21
7 504 p i; 75i4 ;^ 5 38 , 26, 30 7487, 22 - 3 1; 7 504 entrogeneus: 11 6n; cf. ethrogeneus equedistantia: 398, 3 , 6 , 7 , 23; 400, 6, 9
duplus: 7n; 6on; 63m 64m 870p i; 90a; ii3 n effeminatus: 329n enumerare: 324, 2; 334, 4; 366, 77 equevalens: c 504
p i ; 1270; 166, 32 p i; 182, 22; 214, 6; 216, efficatia: 230, 32, 34; 328, 4; 332, 44; 334, 1 1 ; epar: n 6 n ; 1 i7n equevelociter: 278, 1 7 , 2 2 p l , 24; 284, 19; 286,
3 j ; 218, 48, 32, 33; 220, 10; 222, 37 ; 246, 350, 21; 356, 1 1 , 39; 358, 36; 366, 9, 13, 18 epilenticus: v 346, 23, 23-24, 24 10; a 616, 46; a 618, 7, 8, 9
18; c 472 p i; c 474 p i; c 476 p i; c 496; c 498 efficere: n n ; io8n epilepticus: 346, 23, 24; c 482p l; cf. epylepti- equiangulus: j 6 n ; 186, 23, 27; 192, 22; a 356,
p i ; c 4<)<)pl; c 500p i; c 506_/>/; 7 509/»/; 7 511, efficiens: 160, 37; 252, 3; 268, 1, 1 1 ; 370, 18 cus 4 2 ; a 598, 39
4 7 -4 8 p i; 7 512 p i ; 7 513 p i; c 514 p i; c 515 eger: 7478, 2 6-27 Epiphanes: 266, 39 equidistans: jm ; a 580, 3; a 584, 10, 14; a 386,
p i; a 538, 26, 30; a 600, 7; a 602, 8, 1 1 pi, 13, Egiptus: 266, 22; cf. Aegyptus Epistola ad Galatas: 382, 7 0; 384, 33 19 p l ; a 588, 27; a 592, 4; a 608, 38 p l, 39, 43,
13 p i egritudo: 236, 10; 304, 29; 330, 36; 342, 37; epylenticus: v 346, 23, 24 46, 47, 48, 49, 90; a 632, 76; cf. equedistans
durabilitas: 260, 9 346, 3 , 1 6 , 23; 348, 40; 362, 19; 372, 13; 376, epylepticus: v 346, 23, 24; cf. epilepticus equilaterus: a 5 8 m p l ; a 598, 3 3 ; a 600, 6; a
durans: 194, 8; 306,36; 3 7 4 ,13 13; 382, 3 2 ; c 4 70;7488 ,1 0 - 1 3 equa: 356,14, 1 7 601 n; cf. aequilaterus
durare: 288, 2; 298, 4, 7; 318, 1 1 , 13; 374, 72; egrotare: 1 iG n p l ; 7488,1 0 - 1 3 equalis: 6ynp l; 7411 p l; 75m 76np l; 77m 78n equivalens: 396,10; 434, 26; c 463
406, 26, 27; 7 463p i; c 480; 7 500p i; 7 3 12 p i; egrotus: 372, 1 4 p l; 83m 9onp l ; 9m ; 990p l; ioo n p l; i03n; equivalenter: 214, 29; 388, 27; a 336, 20
c 514 p i eiectio: 258, 2 3 n j n ; 166, 3 1 p l; 172, 28, 29; 174, 9; 176, equivalentia: 196, 22; 368, 41
duratio: 270, 7 , 1 4 ; 272, 24, 3; 274, 22, 28, 3 1 , elementum: 53m ii3 n ; H4n; 232, 4 p l; 234, 33; \ 7 7 n p l ; 190, 12; 192, 2 4 pl; 194, 9; 2oo, equivalere: G411
38, 42; 288, 2; 290, 19; 302, 6; 304, 23; 406, 34; 308, 32; 332, 4 0 ; 382, 2 2 ; 434, 28; 7472; 32; 216, 29, 30, 38; 222, 30, 39, 41, 42, 47; equivoce: 92m 274, 13
24; c 461, 4; 7 462; 7 469/>/ 7 489 p l; a J49n 226, 13, 19; 228, 38; 276, 13; 278, 28; 290, equus(N): 7m 56m 260, 27; 328, 1 1
durities: 244, 74 elephans: 7453, 1 i 22; 312, 39, 3 7 ; 318, 21; 386, 12, 16, 20, 23, equus (Adj.): a 5 54, 19; a 58m; cf. aequus
durus:7 470 elevare: 398, 29 26; 388, 27; 404, 72, 14, 16; 408, 4; 410, 13, erectio: 400, 7
dyabolus: i28n; 336, 37; 354, 77 elevatio: 400, 7 17 , 18, 24, 26, 27, 3 1 ; 4x2, 9; 428, 19; 432, erectus: 76np l; 83m 92np l ; 97np l; 99m 166,
dyameter: 65n p i; 96m 202, 41; 286, 8; 430, elica: v 224, 74 72, 17; c 445; 7 465, 7 - 1 0 ; 7 485; 7 497 p l; c 1 1 ; 172, 9; 176, 3; 178, 6; 180, 4, 6; 182, 31;
30; 7 465, 19-29 p i; 7 474; £ 540, /7 ; a 542, eligere: 7491 498/1/; 7 504; 7 505 p l; c 506; 7 512; a 526, 9; 186, 30; 192, 20, 29; a 584, 1 1 ; a 626, 17; a
7 1 , 72, 73; a 608, 40, 46, 49 p i; a 628, 39; a eligibilis: 7491 a 528, 14; a 532, 64; a 534, 77; a 538, 22, 23, 628, 3 9
630, 4 7 , 64; a 652, 90; cf. diameter elimatio: 254, 77 27; a 544, 106; a 552, 2, 4, 9; a 554, 7/, 17 ; a erigere: 32n p l; 830; 930 p l ; 1030; 166, 29;
dyametralis: 402, 19 elix: v 224, 74; cf. helix 580, 4 p l; a 58m p l; a 586, 20; a 592, 43 p l, 170, 4; 180, 10; 182, 16; 184, 23; 200, 23;
dyametricalis: 74 6 5 ,19-29; v 534, 7 7 -7 9 elmouin: a v 580, 3; a 5830; cf. almuain, hel- 4 8 p l, 1; a GoG, 28; a 608, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 290, 74 ;a 532, 63; a 628, 30; a 630, 69
dyapason: 113n p l ; 244, 9; 246,18; 312, 26,30, muayn 43, 46, 47pl, 30; a G i ^ n p l ; a 618, 7; cf. aequ­ error: i28npl; 338, 30; 342, 29; 372, 3
3 1 , 39; cf. diapason elmuain: a 580, 3 p l; a 5830 alis eruere: 160, 2/;230,2
 668 Selective Index of Latin Terms Selective Index of Latin Terms 669

esse: 298, 4, 3, 7; etpassim excogitare: n o n extensivus: 83n; 84n fatigare: 8n; 9np l
essencia: c 490 excrescere: c 451 extenssio: av 552, 3 2 ; a v 566, 74 fatigatio: 7n, 8np l ; 90
essentia: 298, 4, 7; 300,10, 29 execu tivu s: 8n extensus: 54n; 6on p l ; 6in p l; 63n; 83n; 84n fatum: 380, 47
essentialis: 79np i; 8on exem plar: c 446 p l; 9m ; 96n; 170, 2; 222, 3 2 p l, 36, 47; 226, febrilis: 7454
essentialiter: 79n; 8on; 12m ; 168, 3; 406, 33 exemplare: 8n 18; 274, 23, 23; 430, 33, 44; c 496; c 497; a femella: 244, 6
estas: 298, /7 exem plariter: 2 88 ,//; 402, 43 femina: 244,1 1 ; 246,19; 344, 23
554 , 3 3 ', a 600, 4 3 ; a G o G ,3 3
estimacio: c 4 8 1,1 6 - 1 8 p i; cf. estimatio exem plificare: ii3 n ; 214,^4; 302, 44 extentio: 11 6n; cf. extensio fenestra exteriorum sensuum: 348, 39
estimare: 262, 2/; 338,^2 exem plum : 8n; 6 3 ^ 67n; 75n; j ^ n p l ; 8on p l; extentus\ a v 546, 123; cf. extensus feralis: 260, 26
estimatio: 262, 27; 352, 49; c 489 cf. estimacio ii3 n ; 162, 30; 164, 72; 174, 13; 206, 2 3 ,3 3 ; exterior: 232, 26; 234, 29, 3 1 ; 246, 3; 248, /; ferre: n o n , m n
estimativus: 346, 9; 348, 44 248, 26; 250, 2, 3; 256, 12; 260, 29; /t488 258, 13; 346, 23; 348, 43, 39; 354, 72; 382, ferrum: ii 3 n p l; 228,32; 242, 7; 244,14
estus: 298, 1 7 exercere: 378, 22; c 437, 4; c 478, 2 6 - 2 7 6; c 483p l ; c 490, 28-29; a 548,13 fertilitas: 7489
etas: 162, /7 ; 326, 26; 342, 2, 9; 344,13, 30 exercitatio: c 437, 4 extispicum: c 486 fetus: 7454, 19; 7488
eternaliter: 332, 9 exercitium : 4 0 4 , 1 1 ; a 610, 7 extollere: 33m fiala: 348, 49, 36, 61, 63; cf. fiola, phiala, phio-
eternitas: 260,10; 298, 8 exhaurire: n o n extornare: 305n la, phyala
eternus: 8n p i; yn p i; 1300; 388, 34; 392, 40; exire: c 445 p l; c 484; 0 4 9 4 , 1 9 - 2 0 p l extrahere: c 445; c 446 fictus: 176 ,3 7
426,20 existens: 83n; 9on; 99n; io o n ; n 8 n ; 214, 3 1; extraneus: 218, 67; 314, 33; 356, 39; 366, /; fidedignus: 372, 9
De ethicis: 388, 7; 390, 27 228, 36, 37 , 41; 300, 36; c 453, 28 -29; 7 504 fides, -ei: 382, 28; c 487, 2 2 - 3 1
368, 43
Ethiopia: 362, 2/ existere: 307^ 0 4 6 2 ,10 -1 1 extremitas: 56n; 224, 64; a 584, 1 1 , 1 2 , 16 fides, -is: 316, 23
ethrogeneus: 116n; cf. entrogeneus exitu s: 7 4847»/; 5 3 in extremus: 6in; 67np l; ~iGn; 7711 p l; 84n; 99n; fidus 17504
eubarmonicus: v 310, 13 exorbitare: 380, 31 190, 18, 19; 196, 9, 10; 198, 72, 18; 204, 14, figmentum: 359n
eucarmonicus: v 240, 7; v 310, 13 exorcism ata: c 482, 47-6 3 17; 414, 14, 29; 430, 44; c 476, 8; a 547n; a figura: 5m ; 56n; 77W pl; 78n; 8on; 83n; 84n;
Euclid: 186, 2/; 192, 23; 202, 48; 2 16 ,17; 314, exp ansio : n G n p l 584, 13 p l; a 586, 17 , 18; a 590, 33, 34, 33; 87n pl; 89np l; yzn pl; 93n p l; 94n; 96n p l;
J 3 , J 4 \ 4 ° 8 , J 4 \ a 5 3 6 , / ; a 538, 32; a 542, experientia: i2 n ; 232, 3; 310, 22; 344, 4; 404, a 592,38, 6; a 600, 44; a 602, 8; a 616, 40,42, io3n p l; io8n; io9n; m n p l ; n z n p l ; i26n;
72; a 600, 40, 1; a 608, 38, 40, 4/ 24 i29n; 160,1 4 , 1 3 ; 172, 2 7 p l ; 1 7 4 ,13, 23, 24;
43
eukarmonicus: ^ 31 o , i j experim entaliter: i2on extrinsecus: 8n; 9n; n o n ; 348, 32; 352, 37; 178, 8 , 1 4 , 1 7 , 1 , 2, 4, 7; 180, 1 4 , 1 6 , 1 9 , 1 , 2,
Eusebius Cesariensis: 26 6 , 3 6 experimentum: n o n ; i2 o n ; 236, 30; 244, 23; 370,18; 7489p l 4, 7, 13; 182, 13, 21, 23, 26, 27, 30; 184, 4,
evadiatio: v 268, 1 6 250, 17; 306, 32; 358, 63; 376, 1 1 ; c 482, Ezechiel: 260,14; 264, 28; 266, 43 14, 13; 186, 3; 188, 3; 190, 7; 192, 1 1 , 12;
evangelicus: 254, /2 3 - 8 ; c 485, 63-66 196, 3 , J, 75 198» l 6 , 4 , I 3 ', z0° , 23 , 2 &, z8 ,
evenire: 346, 8 experiri: 340, 16 fabricatus: 430, 28 33, 36; 202, 39, 42, 49, 30, 31, 32, 33, 3, 6;
eventus: 266, 41; 380, 48 exp o sitio : c 487, 1 3 - 2 1 fabulosus: 342,12 206, 42; 208, 3, 4, 3, 16, 18, 30, 3 1 ; 210, 34,
evertere: 2 1 2 ,16; 214, 2/ expositor: 346, 33 facies: 236, 13; 264, 14 p l ; 350, 27; 376, 6; c 6, 7, 8, 9, 1 0 p l; 212, 13, 16, 17; 214, 26, 31,
evidens: 79n; 12in expresse: «534, 87 483; 7485, 63-66 32; 218, 37, 38, 39; 224, 3 6 p l, 62; 226, 4, 9,
evidenter: 76n; 99n; 192,^0 expulsivus: 302, 22 falco: 232, 1 4 1 0 , 1 4 , 1 7 ; 230, 31; 232, 3 , 1 2 ; 236, 7, 8; 238,
evomere: 384, j 8 exsanguis: v 348, 44; cf. exanguis fallacia: 1290 p l 4, 8, 14; 240, 3 7 pl, 39, 4, 8; 248, 2 0 , 9 ; 256,
exalare: 360, 8 , 1 2 extasis: 2 52 , 3; 346, 26 fallere: 256,18; 266, 21 77, 19; 258, 4 p l, 10, 1 1 ; 264, 3, 3; 298, 10;
exalatio: 360, 13; 362, 24; 364, 73, 39, 62, 7 1 extendere: 6on p l; 168, 39; 272, 21; 386, //; falsitas: 338, 9 c 441, 4-8; 7 451; 7 456,39-40; 745 8, 4-2 0 pl;
exanguis: 348, 44; cf. exsanguis 408, 3 1 ; 428, 24; 430, 3; 432, 13, 22; c 459, falsus: 8n; io3n; 256, 20; 258, 2 3 p l; 266, 29; c 459, 3 - 4 pl; c 466, 1 3 - 2 3 ; a 526, 12; a 532,
excaecatus: c 482,3 1 - 3 3 ; c 484 3 - 4 ; c 496 p l; c 4 9 7 p l; a 590, 28, 30, 32; et 316, 20, 23; 342, 39; 348, 41, 31; 352, 49 63, 67; a 534, 84; a 544, 92; a 565^ a 380, 3
excantare: 366, 27; 368, 46 passim familia: 236, 23 p l; a 581; a 582, 7 , 9 ; a 584, 12, 13; a 586, 18,
excedere: 75n pi; 8onp i; 9cm; ii2 n ; 216, 21; extense: 83n ; ^485 fantasia: 7 jn ; 326, 16; 354, 7/ 21; a 588, 22, 23; a 626, 2, 9, 14; a 628, 30,
228, 30; 406, 13; c 494, 19 -20 ; c 496; c 505 extensio: 54n p l; 6on; 630 p l ; G$n; 79n; 84n; fantasmatice: r 352, 3 4 34, 33; a 630, 43, 49, 30, 32, 33, 33, 60; a
p l; c 515; a 528, 17, 18, 19, 22; a 550, 32, 33, 9on; 9 2 n pl; 9 3 0 p l; 96n; ii5 n ; n 6 n ; 164, fantasticus: 346, 7; 352, 34; 364, 63 632, 84, 83, 86; a 634, 93
59 %, 3 4 , 3 *, 37 7 3 , 74, 7J\ 168, 4, 13, 14; 170, 2, 3, 3, 6, 8, fascinacio: 7 481, 7 6 - 18 figurabilis: 2 10 ,12, 17 , 20; 232, 14
excelsus: 260, 7 10, 12, 14; 172, 13, 18, 23; 174, 10; 176, 40; fascinare: 382, 10, 77; 7 4 8 1 ,1 6 - 1 8 p l; c 4 ^ figurare: ii9 n ; 174, 19; 176, 2; 208, 27; 210,
excessus: 76n p l; j j n ; j y n ; 8on p l; 8in p l; 200, 33; 214, 4; 224, 32; 248, 2; 250, 7; 270, fascinatio: 344, 18; 382, 8, 12, 13, 16, 20; 4, 7; 232, 27, 8; 234, 36, 37 ; 248, 3, 8, 1 1 ;
83n; 9cm; 1030; m n p l ; m n ; 192, 16, 23, 6, 1 1 , 12, 14, 17 , 19 p l ; 272, 23; 276, 7, 19; 3830;384, 47 250, 20; 294, 28; 296,19; 298,1 0 p l; 300, 41;
24, 26, 30, 3 1; 194, 42, 4 7 p l; 218, 62; 252, 3; a 528, 27, 30; a 530, 42, 47, 49, 61; a 542, 77; fascinus: 382, 1 1 7 466, 13 - 2 3 p l; a 626, 13; a 628, 22, 33; a
256, 9; C A V p l a 546, 123; a 558 , 39p l ; a 580, 4; a 588, 2 6 p l; fastidium: 326,10; c 477, 8-12 630, 67; et passim
excludere: 8on a 590, 27, 29, 3 1; et passim fatalis: 342, 1 1 figuratio: 1140 pl; ii5 n ; n 6 n ; n 8 n ; 158, 7 , 9 ,
exclusive :9 m extensive: 83n; 84n; ii5 n fatigabilis: 8np l 10; 160, 14, 21 p l, 23, 27, 28; 162, 43 pl;
 6jo Selective Index of Latin Terms Selective Index of Latin Terms 671

174, 20; 176, 1; 182, 22; 188, 27; 204, /, 8, fortitudo: 306, 32, 36, 38, 44; 308, 46, 44, 33, 16, 17 , 18, 10; 198, 1 1 , 14, 17, 1 8 p l; 204, 72
Galata: 382, 1 1
p, 77; 206, 20; 210, 2, 4; 2x2, 7; 214, 28, 2p; 7; 310, 27, 24; 314, 38; 316, 43; 320, 31; p l, 13, 14 p l, 13, 16, 17, 4 p l; 208, 33; 2X0,
Galienus: 362, 20
226, 84, 77; 228, /7; 230, 47, /0, /4, p, 77; 322, 28 ,30; 324, 72, 74; 332, 47; 7471, 40 34; 212, 22 pl; 23; 214, 27; 270, 8; 276, 7 2 ,
gama: v 320, 47p l
232, 2, 7, <?, 7 0 ; 234, 7<fi / 2 ; 236, 7 2 p l, 14, 20, fortuna: 258, 13; 378, 41 p l ; 380, 46; c 481, 74, 16 ; 278, p p l; 280, 48, 31, 32, 33, 34;
gamma: 320, 4 7 ; c 477, 4 4 - 4 7
32; 238, 7; 240, / / , 7; 242, 2 7 , 2(?; 248, 2 7 , 16-18 300, 18; 388, 3; 400, 32, 34, 33; 402, 18, ip ;
gamma-ut: c 477, 44-47
13, I4\ 250, 7 7 , 7 2 , I 3 ‘, 256, 4; 294, /2 ; 296, fossa: 7 4 8 1 ,1 6 - 1 8 404, 72; 408, 4, 6, 7, p, 1 1 , 12; 410, 77, 2 7 ,
gaudere: 328, 33; 386, 6 ; 390, 3 1
7; etpassim fractio: 396, 24; 7473, / 7~/^p l ‘, c 476 23, 2p; 420, 7, 8, p, 10; 424, 33, 34 pl; 7 468,
gaudium: 162, 63; 376, 6; 386, 4, 6; 388, 1, 2;
figuratus: 8311; n 6 n ; n 8 n ; 176, /; 228, 22, fractus: 286, 77; 288, 30; 396, ip , 21 p -2 8 p l; c 469 pl; 7 470 p l; c 492, 3 4 - 4 3 p l ; c
3 9 ° , 3 2 , 33
42; 230, 12; 234, 2 7 ; 248, 7 (5"; 288, 32; 292, fragilis: 344, 3 0 500 p l ; 7 501; 7 504; 7 505 p l ; 7 506; 7 5 11,
gemitus: 368, 48
2(5"; 322, 28; 334, 2 7 ; 7456, 39-40 frangere: 244, 14; 286, 13 4 7 - 4 8 p l; c 512; 7 513 p l; c 51445/; 7 515 p l; a
gemma: 236, 7 / ; 7454
filius: 236, 2/; 256, 2/; 378, 74 fremitus: 304,1 1 ; 316, 42; 328, 1 0 528, 2 7 ; a 532, 72, 7 3 p l ; a 534, 77, 7 8 ; a 540,
genera et species: 290, 33; 376, 1 8
finalis: 390, 20 freneticus: 268, 12; 346, 1 1 ; 350, p; 354, 76; 44; a 544, 83 pl, 88, 8p, po, p i , 100, 103,
generalis: 9 m ; 97n; 236, 2p; 244, 4; 294, 33
finis: i2on; I28n; 13cm; 356, i p , 20; 390, 24; c 370, 10; 372, 13; cf. phreneticus generare: i3 n p l; ii 3 n p l; ii5 n ; i3on; 234, 24, 107; a 564, 4p, 30; a 584, 72, 13; a 588, 26pl;
5 0 4 ;7 5 1 1 ,4 7 -4 8 p i frequens: 304, 6; 7 479, 23 - 2 4 <2 5 9 ° , 27 >3 °, 3 i , 3 3 , 3 4 ', “ 59 2, 3 8; a 606, 32
28; 282, i p ; 304, 26; 326, 7; 360, 4, 6; c 453,
finitas: a 564, 44; a 565n frequentatio: 7479, 23-24 pl
2<S’-2<?
finitus: 64np l ; 65n; 8onp l ; 84n; 87n; 164, 74, frequentia: 310, 3 ; 326,3? gratia: 254, 1 2 ; 392, 40; 393n; 7482, 3 1 - 3 3
generatio: 266, 24; 282, 72, 13, 13; 360, /
73 , 7 6 \ 424, 2; 426, 3\ 430, 3, 32, 3P, 43, 46, frigefacere: 228, 40; 232, 24; 404, 26 gravis: 8n p l ; iogn p l ; n o n p l ; i i i n ; i2on;
generativus: 302, 21
47 , ^ , i ; 4 3 2>7 ; 4 3 4 , 2/; 7476 frigiditas: 75n p l; 8in p l ; u 6 n p l, 212, ip pl; D e genesi ad litteram: 346, 13 272, 28; 305n; 308, 3; 428, 23; c 455; 7 465,
fiola: v 348, j 6 , 61, 63; cf. fiala, phiala, phiola, 214, 24, 23, 26; c 490; a 544, p8, 10 1; a 546, 1 p—2 p ; 7 470; 7 478, 2 6 - 2 7
Genesis: 298,17 ; 376, 8
phyala 11 6 ; a 566, 3p, 61 gravitas: 9n; i09np l ; i i o n p l; 306, 37, 40, 43,
gens: 2 3 6 ,2 4 ;3 2 8 ,//; 7486
firmamentum: 7464, 27 -32 frigidum: 56n; 2x2, p 43; 307n p l; 308, 47; 324, 13; 328, 7; 428,
gentilis: 340, 8
fistula: 304, p, 77; 306, 34; 326, 13; 330, 28; 7
frigidus: 228, 40; 230, 13; 362, 32; 366, 30; genus: 5 3n p l; 74n; 78n; 79n; 8on; 160, 18; 2 7 , 23; 432, 7, 7 2 , l 6 , 21, 22, 23, 24; 7 47O
453, 'i 402, 27, 36; 404, 26; a 544, 700 202, 7; 204, p, 3, 7, 10, 1 1 , 13; 206, 24, 2/, Gregorius: 260,1 3
fixus: 84n_/?/; 298, 8; 7466, 13 - 2 3 Frigius: 330, 74 grosse: 320, 36
28, 2p, 30, 3 1 , 32, 33, 34, 37, 38; 210, 6, ip ;
flatus: 304, 10 frigus: 228, 24; 230, 74; 298, 17; 302, 7<? grossibilis: 330, 26
2x2, 8p l; 218, 67; 230, 36; 236, 23; 282, 23;
flebilis: 334, 20 fructificare: 250, 24 grossus: 250,2; 304, 1 1
284, 38; 320, 4/, 47; 322, 13 p l ; 362, 4^;
flectere: 7 478, 2 1- 2 3 frustra: 332,3) gustus: 246, 8;c 457, 8p l
374, 70; 7 438, / ; 7 454p l; 7 486; <2 530, 32,
flexilocus: 266, 40 frutex: 244, 1 6 gutm a: v 320, 47
33 , 3 7 ',a ) $ i n p l ; a 549n
flexiloquus: ^ 266, 40 fu ga : 236, 27 geometres: # 5 3 in
fluctuosus: 258, 20 fugibilis: 388,^7, 36 habilitas: 7478, 2 6 - 2 7
geometria: 54n; 404, 8; a 540, 47
fluere: 282, 8; 392, 7; 7484; 530, 33, 33 fulcrum: iogn habitudo: 530pl; 242, 1 3 , 1 6 ; c4 5 4 p l ; c 45 5 ; 7
D e geometria: a 608, 2
fluxus: 276, 2; 280, 44; 394,2 3 , 3 1 ; c 483, 1 7 - 1 8 fulgor = fulgur: 7486 462, 74; a 562, 2p
geometrice: 77n
fodere: 360, 70 fu lgu r: 244, 77, 20, 21 habitus: 252, 2/57489
geometricus: 54n; 8on p l; 96n; i n n ; a 630,
foederatus: 7486, 68-6p fulmen: 244, 13, ip halicacabon: 7 484, 1 4 - 1 3
56
foramen: 348, 33-, 362, 3 1 , 38; 364, 48; 384, fulminare: 344, 23 harmonia: 7 472; 7 479, 23 -24; cf. armonia
gignere: 7477, <?-72
40;7484 fumerea: v 364, 67 harmonicus: 74727?/; cf. armonicus
gladius: 7482, /-<?
forma: 830; 87n p l ; <42.13. p l ; 930 p l; <p(in p l ; fumus: 364, 36, 64, 63; 7490,3 P - 4 0 p l Flayten: 7 484, 3 2 - 3 3 ; 7 48 5
gloria: 254, 20, 24; 392, 40
97n; 1130 /?/; ii4 n p l; ii5 n p l; u 6 n ; 232, fundamentum: 6on; 8on; 162, 33; 366, 2; c hebes: 326, 27,3 0
Glosa (ordinaria): 174, 27; 382, 77, 77
70, 72 p / ; 248, 4, 6, 8, 1 1 ; 264, 77; 282, 12, 504575x3 Hecate: 340, 11
gnomon: a 564, 40, 47; a 565n
i p ; 500, 30, 33, 34; 302, 44; 316, 13; 364, fundare: 6on; 92n hedera: 224, 7/
gracilis: 306, 74
<$/; 74 51; 7 45 3, 13 p l; c 468, p-2 8; c 470 pl; funus: 260, 26 gradualis: 83n; 96n; 276, 4, 70, / ; 282, 74; helix: 224, 74, 7 6
7482, 3 -8 ; 7485 p l ; c 488, 1 0 - 1 3 ; ^490 furiosus: 350, 27 helmuaym: a 58m p l; cf. almuain, elmuain
284, 33; 406, 2 3
forma substantialis materialis: 282, 12; 300, 32 furor: 350, 7 0 ; 7485, 43 -4 6 helyx: v 224, 7 6
gra d u a tu s: 206, 23; 310, 16, 17 , i p
formabilis: 7488 furtum: 7483 herba: 368, 46; 7454
grad u s: 1 3n; ^Gn pl; 57np l; 6onp l; 62n; 63n;
formalis: 8on; 96np l futurus: io8n; 1290 pl; 1300p l; 252, 10; 254, heri: 7463, i p - 2 1 p l
64n; 6511 p l; G jn p l ; p l; pGn p l; i~]n pl;
formare: 236, 17 ; 268,1 1 ; 7488; 7489 13; 256, p, 13; 258, 1 1 , 16; 260, 23, 12; 78np l ; 79n p l ; 8onp l; 89n pl; 9on pl; Hermes Egiptius: 266, 21; 7 459, 2 1 - 2 3 ; c 460
formatio: 234, 34; 334, 8; 368, 3 7 26m ; 262, 16; 264, 13, 18; 268, 13, 17 , 20, hiems: v 298,17 ; z<)<pn
9m pl; 96m 97n p l; 990 p l; ioon p l; io in
formatus: 8on; 7488 23; 269n; 342, 34; 346, 28; 370, i p ; 378, 42, hiitayn: 7484-85
p l; io8n p l; iogn p l; n o n p l ; ii4 n ; 115n.pl;
fortificare: 348, 33 44; 380, 47; 460p l; 462, 463 p l; hile: c 490; cf. hyle, yle
7 7 70 -77; 7 n 6 n ; i2 in p /; 184, 8 , 1 1 ; i85n; 188,16; 190,
fortis: 1 2n; 51 n p l ; 12on 7 486 hircinus: 244, 1 3
18, 3, 3', 192, i p ; 194, 37, 6, 7, 1 1 ; 196, 14,
 672 Selective Index of Latin Terms Selective Index of Latin Terms 673

historia: 244, 22; 256, /2; 266, 2<f; 344, 4; 346, iacere: 378, 3 1 immutare: 226, 19; 338, 27; 340, 19; 330, 27, inchoans: 1090; m n
2<?; 360, /<$"; 372, 9; 7 460, 7 7 -7 7 ; cf. hys- Iacobus: 264, 9; 376, 9 26; 332, 40, 41, 39; 336, 72, 22, 33; 338, 44, incidere 174 59 ,7-4 p l
toria idemptitas: 12 in 43; 362, 24; 366, 2<f, 2y; 368, 39, 31; 376, 4, incipere: 62n; 8y n p l ; 9on; 9 m ; n o n ; ii3 n ;
historia naturalis: 260, 2y; cf. Naturalis his­ identitas: a 567n <f, 72; 380,7; 382,77; 384, 42, /<f, /77)/ 1 29n; 262, 757 5 06 57511, 47 -48
toria idolatres: 7480 immutatio: n 8 n ; 350, 30; 334, 7; 384, /y ;7 incitatio: 328, 9
historiacus: v 330 ,7/; cf. hystoriacus idolum: 479, 23-24; 486, 68-69 488, 70-77 inclinare: 8n; 342, 42; 378, 40, 41
historicus: 330, 7 /; cf. hystoricus ieiunium: 352, 7«? impar: 312, 77; 420, 7^, 2/; 422, 27; 424, 47, inclinatio: 8npl; 1 1 8n; 400, 3
hodie: 74 6 3 ,1 9 - 2 1 p i Ieremias: 2 58, 24; 264, 77 44; 7 446; 7 512 />/; 7 313 />/; 7 51 4 ^ / ; 7 315
incommensurabilis: 13on p l; 166, 13, 17 ; c
homo: 8n; <jnp l ; 97a; U 4 n />/; n j n p i; 1190 Ieronimus: 266, 77 p l; a 562,70, 7 / ; <2 5 64 , 7 ?, 7 7 , 7 / i * 5 6 5 n 45 5 />/; 7- 4 5 6, 7 ; ^4 7 3 >3 I ~ j 6 p l ; c 4 1 4 p l
/>/; i2on />/; 12m ; i28n; 1290 p i; 162, /7 ; Ieronymus: 366, 7 *5' impedimentum: io8np l; i09n; 160, 77; 254, 7 incommensurabiliter: 218, /7
234, 27; 236, 7 /, 77, 27, 27, 2«?; 242, j p ; 244, Ierosolima: 258, 24 impedire: 9n; io9n; n o n ; 298, 22 incommunicans -.5 3 ^ 7 4 5 6 ,7
/y; 246, 7<^, 2/, y, 77; 254, 2; 258, 77, 74; ignavus: 330, 7<? impeditivus: io8np l; I09np l incommutabilis: 390, 19, 2 9 p l
264, <f, 77; 269m 296, y; 330, 19; 356, 7 /; igneus: 370, 77 imperceptibilis: 230, 10; 236, 72; 306, 19; 310, incomparabilis: 220, 19; 222, 27, 2/; 288, 4
376, 7; c 454; 7 456, 39-40; c 478, 26-27; c ignis: 226, / ; 228, 29; 244, 74; 282, 13; 302, incomplexe: 274, 7<f
/, 7 ; 3 T4 , 3 , ^ 3 l8 , ^
480, 7; 7 481, 1 6 - 1 8 ; c 484, 32-33; c 485 p i; 4 4 ; 35°, 364, 37; c 451; 7 468, 9-28; 7 imperceptibilitas: 318, 22 incomplexus: 7 46 3
7488,1 0 - 1 3 ; c 490,39-40 489 imperfectio: 232, / incompositus: 256, 19
homogenius: 228, 47 illesus: 236, 23 imperfectus: 0 5 3m incongruus: 170, 22
homologus: 1090 illuminare: 268, 77 ; 402,77 impetus: 9n; n o n p l; i i ^ n p l inconsuetudo: 326, /, 6
honeratus: 7478, 2 6 - 2 7 illusio: 354, 7 implicare: 92n; 430, 77 inconveniens: 92n; 176, 74; 334, 20; 368, 33;
honestas: 248, 27; 328, 7 illustratio: 268, 22 impolitus: 252, y; 258, 7, 20 7 493; a 630, /3?
honus: 7478, 2 6 - 2 7 illuvies: 254, 77 imponere: i3on; 2 1 1 , 9 ; 266, 29 inconvenienter: 328, 77
hora: 64n; 6jn p i; 74n p i; 129m 13m ; 262, imaginabilis: 3in ; cf. ymaginabilis importare: 7462, 70-77 incorporeus: 238,7/
27; 302, 8 pi, 10, 77; 318, 72; 374, 72, 13; imaginacio: c 481, 1 6 - 1 8 ; cf. imaginatio, im- impositio: 172, 20 incrementum: io7n
418, 77; 7 463, 1 9 - 2 1 ; c 464, 2 7 -32 ; 7 492, maginatio, ymaginatio impossibilis: 93ns i2on p l; a $ y jn incurrere: i28n, i29n
3 4 -4 3 pl\ c
4 9 6 ; c 4 9 7 p l ‘> c 498 p i; 7 499 pi; imaginans: cf. ymaginans impossibilitas: 7n indago:8on
c 500 p i; 7 501 p i; 7 504 p i; c 505 p i; 7 511, imaginare: 7 488, 1 0 - 1 3 ; cf- immaginare, in- impressio: 250, /, 6; 336, 27; 384, 36, 34; c indebite: 314, 77; 320, 41
4 7 - 4 8 p i; c 5x2; 7 513/>/; 7 5147^/; 7 515 maginare, ymaginare 454; 7490, 28-29 indelebiliter: 256, 27
horologium: 1 in imaginarius: 7439; 7486 imprimere: io8n; n o n ; 248, /, 8; 250, 4; 326, indemonstrabilis: c 474
horror: 352, 46 imaginatio: 7484; 7488, 1 0 - 1 3 ; cf- imaginacio, 16; 7489; cf. inprimere indigestus: 7458
humanitas: 7479, 23 -24 immaginatio, ymaginatio imprudens: 342, 27 indiscretus: 342, 27
humanus: 8n; ii7 n ; 236, 7; 240, 7<f; 242, 20; imaginativus: 7 457, 1 3 - 1 3 ; 7 483, 1 7 - 1 8 p l; c impudicus: 256, 20 indispositio: i28n
246, 4, </; 248, 7 <f; 256, 19; 302, 27; 322, 74; 484; cf. ymaginativus impulsus: 294, 7, 8, 9 individuum: 8on p l
3 3 4 , /0; 358, / 7 , 66; 364, 380, 4/; 7454 imitare: 346, 77; cf. ymitare in acutie: c 471, 40 individuus: 240, 27, 28; 244, 4; 246, 24, 7;7469
p i; 7488, 1 0 - 1 3 ; ^489 immaculatus: 254, 77 in confuso: 262, 1 7 indivisibilis: 8n; 79n; 8on; 83n; 9on; 164, 8;
humiditas: n 6 n immaginare: c 470; cf. imaginare, ymaginare in fortitudine: c 471, 40 168, 74; 170, 19; 248, 13; 268, 70; 298, 6, 9;
humidum: 56n immaginatio: c 481, 1 9 - 2 1 ; cf. imaginacio, in profundum: 260, 8 374, 2; 402, 38; 430, 43; c 438, 7 - 9 ; c 468,
humor: 302, 20 imaginatio, ymaginatio in summo: 402, 17 , 23, 26p l, 27 9-28; 7 469,/)/; 7492, 74-47; a 528,32, 34
hyemps: v 298, 1 7 immaterialis: 298, 6 inadequatus: 7496 indivisibilitas: a
hyems: 298, 77; 346, 77 immediate: 8on p l; ii4 n ; ii5 n ; 234, 77, 74, inaequalis: 53np l; a 5 57 n ; cf. inequalis indivisibiliter: i o n p l; 298, 8
hyle: 7481, 1 6 - 1 8 ; 7490; cf. hile, yle 7 7; 268, 27; 7473, 3 1 - 3 6 ; c 474; 7476; 7493 inaequalitas: a 549n p l; cf. inequalitas indomabilis: 244, 74
hymnus: 7479, 27-24 p l; c 515 p l; a 528, 19 inaequaliter: 7466, 77-27 indubitanter 17484
hypothesis: non/)/; cf. ypothesis immediatus: 9m pl; 1140p l; i28np l; 318, 27; inanimatus: 254, 4; 258, 27; 260, 7 inducere: 232, 26
hypothetice: n o n a 592, 4; a 396, 27, 27; cf. inmediatatus inarmonice: 388,70 inductio: 338, 72
hystoria: v 344, 4; v 346, 28 immensus: 8on inarmonicus: 308, 14 inductivus: 302, 22
hystoriacus: v 330, 77; cf. historiacus immittere: 298, 19 incantans: 368, 32, 33 indus: 7445
hystoricus: v 330, 77; cf. historicus immobilis: 286, 77 incantatio: 340, 8; 366, 27; 368, 43, 49 ineptus: 250, 24;256, 2 1
immotus: 390, 20; 402, 22 incantator: 380, 60; 7490, 28-29 inequalis: ~nn; 172, 28, 29; 182, 19, 2 7 p l ; i 84,
iacens: 830; 260, / immunditia: 248, 20 incantatoria: 366, 21 9, 10; 190, 9, 14, 6; 220, 77; 222, 26, 42;
iacere(2): 260, 9; 398, 29; 424, 8; c 455; a 526, immundus: 7479 inceptio: 1300; 282, 3 224, 32; 298, 7; 314, 43; 318, 21; a 528, 13; a
72; a 598, 7 7 pi, 32; a 604, 27 immutabilis: 9n p l incessus: 7478, 2 6 - 2 7 538, 27; a 554, 18; a 592, 7; cf. inaequalis
 674 Selective Index of Latin Terms Selective Index of Latin Terms 675

inequalitas: 5411; 10311; 228, 77; 276, 7; 286, inflammatus: 74 8 3 ,1 7 - 1 8 insipiens: 264, 29 31, //, l 6, J 8, 6 l ‘, 220> 3', 222, 2<?S 224, 31,
1 1 , /7; 314, 49; 322, /7; 386, /7; a 526, <
5"; a inflexus: 256, 16 insonare: 332, 42 33; 226, 84, 86, 12; 228, 30, 38; 232, 9, 14;
348, 7; cf. inaequalitas influentia: 117ns 119ns i28n; 168, 36; 268, 22; inspirare: c 490,39- 40 234, 20, 23, 33; 236, 6, 12 ; 238, 22; 270, 8,
inequaliter: 210, 33 ; 222, 47; 286, 1 1 ; 312, 298, 19; 342,7 9; 348, 3 6 ; c 480, 1 p i; 7481; c instans: 115ns 290, 21, 27; 396, /7, 21, 26, 27, 12, 13, 16, 17, 19; 272, 21; 274, 23, 44; 276,
7 /S 3 7 4 >27; 388, 3 9 ; cf. inaequaliter 7, 2, 4, 6 , 1 0 , 1 7 , 4; 278, 9; 315ns 7441, 4-8;
484 30, 3 P 3 2 ’, 3 9 8 , 4 , J, 9 , i 2, 13 , * 4 , 2 I >2J ’>
inequedistans: 400, 4; v 400, 4 - 3 p l influxus: n 8 n 402, 2 3 ; 410, 3 4 ; c 463,1 9 - 2 1 ; c 493 c 449, 3-8; c 455; 7469; 7470; 7497; c 500;
inequedistantia: 398, 7; 400, 2, 6, 7 , 9 , 10 informare: 83ns 96ns 176 ,3; 4 32 ,1 2 , 1 7 ; a 610, instantaneus: 292, // a 528, 27, 2 9 , 3 6 ; a 530, 47, 49; a 532, 62, 68;
inequidistantia: v 400, 7 -/ 8 instantia: 109ns 286, 8; 360, 73 a 544, 104, 106; a 588, 23, 26; a 590, 27, 29,
inesse: 5 in informatus: 168, 42; 174, 7; 176, 3 1 ; 180, 4; instinctus: 260, 24 3 1 ; a 592, 2; a 6x511; a 61511; a 626, 3; a 630,
inextensus: 84n 208,7, 24; 269n instituere: n o n 63; cf. intentio
infans: 382, 72; 384, 30 p l, 34 infortunium: 380, 47 instrumentum: 304, 14; 322, 13; c 478, 26 -27; intensive: 8npl; 8on; 83ns 8qnp l; 115ns n 6 n
infatigabilis: 8np i ingeniari: 234, 2 7 c 482, 4 7 - 6 3 p l, 3 - 8 ; *-483p l p l; n y n ; n 8 n ; 7468, 9 -28
infatigabiliter: 8np l; 9n ingenium: 326, 3 0 insufficiens: a 5 94, 1 6 , 1 7 intensivus: 9ns 84ns 114ns 115ns xx6xxpl; n 8 n
infectus: 254, 3; 30511 inhonestus: 248, 1 9 integer: 57np l; 33m intensus: 6on pl; 6in pl; 63n p l; 76x1; 84n pl;
infelicitas: 378, 4 2 inicium: i2on integer valor: 7 4 7 7 ,1 4 - 1 3 9onp l; 9m ; 96ns 99ns n 6 n p l; i2on; 186,
inferior: 7n; 77ns 8on p i; ii7 n ; 119ns 260, 3; inimicitia: 160, 29; 240, 2: 242,17 , 28, 4 intellectio: 250, 18 33; 190, 18; 192, 14, 17 ; 194, 46; 220, 1 1 ;
332, 3 ’> c 4 4 5 1 c 446; c 480, 1; c 481; 7 490, inimicus: 318, 43 intellectivus: 248, 13; 250, 13; 268, 9; 374, 2; 7 222, 77, 48; 228, 20, 26, 29, 30; 232, 27; 234,
28-29 initium: xoixip l; 109ns n o n 489 19; 274, 27; 276, 72, 13; 290, 21; 300, 39; 7
infernalis: 388, 4 2 inmaginabilis: a 628,34; cf. imaginabilis, yma- intellectus: 53ns 75ns 8on; 164, 7; 250, 21; 496; 7505 p l ; a 532, 63; a 536, 19; a 538, 28,
infernus: 388,40 ginabilis 268, 9 p l ; a 567x1; a 610, 7 30; a 544, 98, 100, 101; a 548, 19; a 552, 7;
inferre: 9on; 92n; 93n; n 6 n ; ii7 n ; 12m ; 396, inmaginare: a 628,3 1 ; a 630, 43; cf. imaginare, intelligentia: 6n p l ; 7x1 p l; 8n; 9n p l; 8on; 268, a 568, 86; a 586, 18; a 590, 77, 34; a 596, 2 7
77; 7497; a 618, 3 immaginare, ymaginare 27; c 490, 28-29 p l, 2 2 p l, 23p l, 24, 23p l ; a 597np l ; a 598, 28;
inferus: 260, 8 inmediatus: 212, 8; cf. immediatus intelligere: 87ns 92npl;^jxipl;c)<)ii; 109ns 1 ion a 6x6, 43
inficere: ii7 n ; 254, 18; 384, 3 7 , 3 2 , /7; r 458; innatus: 83n p l; 130ns 166, 77s 170, 20; 172, 22, 26; 174, intentio: 115ns 307ns 7488; cf. intensio
^ 4 8 1,1 6 - 1 8 ; 7 490,39-40 innocens: 342, 9 6 , 1 6 ; 206,36; 208, 26, 27; 288,3 1 , 33; 408, intercapedo: 305ns cf. intercipedo
infimus: 79np l; m n innominabilis: 314, 34; c 476 75^-463,1 9 - 2 1 interceptus: 320,7/
infinitas: 388,74; a 564, 7/; a 565n innovatio: 334, 29 intelligibilis: c 489 intercipedo: 306, 20; cf. intercapedo
infinite: 6onp l ; 8onp l; 830; 84np l ; io8n; 298, innuere: 7463 intencio: a v 546, i 2 3 ; a v 572, 3 intercipere: 306,19, 21
8 innum erabilis: 256,12; 344, 4 intendere: i2n; 57ns 115ns 194, 10; 196, 12, intercisio: 304,16; 308, 49, 37, 60; 310, 1 8
infinities: 176, 42 inordinatio: 258, 6; 350, 77, 12 19; 278, 72; 282, 30, 3 1 ; 298, 21, 22; 302, 8, intercisus: 304, 72; 306,19; 5 x 0 , 3 , 1 0
in infinitum: 6on; 63n p i; 64n; 83n pi; 84n; inordinatus: 258, 6; 350, 10 9; 307n p l; 322, 3 1 ; 324, 12; 374, / /; 382, interficere: c 454; c 481, 1 9 - 2 1 ; c 490, 39-40
9 m ; 98n; 115ns 127ns 164, 70, 73; 166, 19, inorganicus: 248, 13 30; 386, 1 1 ; 404, 20, 24, 30; 406, 77; 414, interior: 248, 6, 8, 10; 250, 19; 346, 9, 21, 26,
20, 23; 206, 18, 19; 324, 12, 14; 334, 6; 412, inprim ere : c 490 p l ; cf. imprimere 38; 420, 38; 7 469 pl; c 470; r 483; c 484; c 3 1 ; 348, 77, /7 ; 3 5 2» 3 7 0 , 1 4 ; 3 84 , 4i \ c
/; 414, 10, 16, 21, 3 1 , 38; 416, 2, 3, 1 1 ; 420, inproportionabilis: 2x5x1 p l; 2x6, 24; 218, 43, 5 i i , 4 7 - 4 8 p l; c 5 1 3 p l ; c 5 \ \ p l ; c 515 ;a 570, 483,1 7 - 1 8 p l
38, 4°, 4, 7\ 424, / ; 426, 16, 20; 428, 17, 18, 47; 222, 23 99; a 602, 16; a 612, 19, 28, 29 p l; a 614, 30 intermedius: io8n
21, 2 2 ', 4 3 ° , 3 2, 3 4 , 3 ’, 4 3 2 , * 9 , 23 ’, 4 3 4 , 27; 7 inproportiona[bi]lis: 214, 7; 216, 16, 19; 220, p l, 31, 32, 34, 3 6 p l, 37, 38; a 615ns a 6x6, interminabilis: 298, 9
478; c 493 ; c 499 pi; c 500pi; c 501; c 504p i; 17 ; 224, 31, 32; 3 x 6 ,3 7 43;a6x%, 34, 33 intermissio. 334, 2 6
c 505 pi; c 509pi; c 511, 4 7 - 4 8 p l; c 512 p i; a inproportionabilitas: 220, 1 6 intensibilis: 113ns 166, 1 1 ; 282, 28; 300, 13, interpositio: 230, 9; 304, 6; 318, 7
536, 17 ; a 56511; a 5 j o , 107 inproportionabiliter: 3 20 ,36 17 , 26, 27; c 469 interpres: 258, i 7 ; c 504
infinitus: %xi p l; 9ns 53ns 6onp i; 63ns 6411 p i; inproportionalis: 215n ;c 476; a 5 92, / intensio: 54n p l ; 560; 6 m ; 63ns 74n p l; 76x1 interpretans: 7486
G50.pl; 8on; $>3x1 p i; %4npl;x)%xx; 113ns n 6 n ; inquietudo: 258, 8 pl; 77x1; 890p l; 9onpl; 9211 p l; 93np l ; 96ns intersecare: 270, 77; 7460, 1 2 - 1 3
120ns129ns130ns 16 4 ,74, 73; 176, 77 s 180, inquirere: 212, 2 x x 5x1 p l; 158, 2, 12; 160, 39; 164, 70, 2, 9; intersectio: 182, 29
19; 2x0, 18; 218, 47; 304, 16; 416, 28; 426, inquisitio: 380, 47 166, 12, 13 p l, 16, 18, 19, 21, 22 pl, 30, 31, intersectus: a 628, 39
4 3 °, 2 9 , 30, 3 2, 3 3 , 3 7 , 3 #, 4 6, 47 , /; 432, insania: 352, 4 7 32, 33, 3 4 ’, 168, 77, 39, 2, 6, 8 , 1 0 , 1 1 , 1 2 , 1 3 , intervallum: a 547np l
6, 10, 13, 20, 24; 434, 23 p i; c 463; c 466, insanitas: 356, 20 16; 170, 27, 22, 4, 3, 6, 7, 13; 172, 1 3 , 1 7 , 1 9 , intestinum: 316,72, 77
27-27; c 472; c 474; c 476; c 497s c 506; a inscibilis: 314, 34; c 476 23; 1 7 4 ,1 0 , 1 8 ; 176, 42, 7; 178, 9, 3 , 1 1 ; 180, intimus: 36m
565n />/; a 567x1 inscriptus: io8n p l; m n p l; xx2xi p l; 240, 9 77, 4, 3, 8, 1 1 pl, 13; 182, 14, 22; 184, 6, 9, intollerabilis: v 388, 77
infirmitas: 252, 26; 372, 14; 7488, 1 0 - 1 3 insensibilis: 166, 33; 306, 19 18; 186, 33; 188, 6; 190, 72, 27, 22; 192, 9, intransmutabilis: 8n
infirmus: 268, 13; 342, 26; 346, 6; c 488, 1 0 - insequi: 7 504 16, 27, 28, 3 1 ; 194, /, 7; 196, 77, 7; 198, 13, intrare: 216, 40
13; c 489 insipide: 312, 1 3 3; 200, 30, 31, 32; 204, 8; 214, 4, 6, 8; 218, intrepidus: 7484, 32-33
 676 Selective Index of Latin Terms Selective Index of Latin Terms 677
intrinsecus: 8n; 97n; 7 448, /7; 7 463; a 546, iuventas: 326, 27 ledere: 308, 9 530, 47 />/, /0 />/, /4 p l, 78; a y $ m p l ; a 332,
132 iuxtapositus : 7 476, <? legislator: 346, 29 <S2, 6 j , 64, 66, 69, 74; a 334, 81, 82, 8 j, 87; a
introducere: 75n legista: 322, 1 6 539n; a 547m a 565m a 380, 7, 4; a 582, 8
intromittere: 360, 7/ kaloren: v 356, 7/ lenire: 236, 24; 237n p l; a 584, 7 0 , 7 7 p l, 1 4 p l, 1 7 p l, 16; a 586, 16,
intuere: 194, 47; 262, 4 , 19 k a lo y o n : 356, i j ; 0484, 1 4 - 1 3 lenis: 7458, 4-20 17 p l, 19 pl, 20 p l; a 588, 27, 27; a 626, 2, 4,
in variabilis: 8n; 390, 20 Leo [I]: 254, 7 0 7 7 >/, 9, 7 7 , 77; a 628, 79, 22, 24, 27, 26, 28,
investigare: i2on; 7484 labes: 254, 8 leo: 232, 7 2 , i j ; 234, 18; 294, 14; 296, 1 8 3 1 , 3 3 , 3 3 , 3 8 , 3 9 , 40; a G30, (S'/, (S'zS', (S'7, 68; a
investigatio: i2on laetus: 7479, 23~24 lesio: 252, 26 632, 77 p l, 78, 82 p i, 83, 87, 90; a 634, 97 p l,
invidiosus: 7 4 8 1, 16 -18 lana: 314, 8; c 476, (?; 0477 lesus: 348, 4/ 9 2, 9 7; et passim; cf. lignea
invidus: 383n lancea: 378, 70 leticia: c 478, 2 1 - 2 7 linealis: 83n; 84n; v 174, 6; a 614, 7/; a 616, 49
invisibilis17485,4 3-46 lapis: 7n; 13m ; 232, (S'; 234, /; 238, 74; 354, letitia: 326, 18; 330, 24; 390, 12 linearis: jjs x p l; 78n; 172, 2; 174, (S', 70; 176,
invocare: 336, 27, 7/; 340, 1 0 ,1 1 7 0 ; 358, 96; 0454, /-7/7)/ leuca: 420, 73? p l 2; 178, 77, 7, 4; 180, 2; 190, 7; 208, /, 7, 9,
invocatio: 336, 20; 340, 6; 344, 27; 350, 20; largitas: 330, 2/; 0478, 2 1 - 2 4 levare: 237n 77, 74; 210, 77; 214, 74, 7/; 278, 9; 286, 2<S,
352»jo largus: 53n; 54n levis: 8n p l; 330, 14; 338, 26; 342, 2<S"; 7 478, 27; 410, 77; 7494, 7-/; 530, 60; a 336, i ; a
invocator: 354, 64 lascivus: 326, 24; 328,74 p l 2 6 -2 7 338, 74; a 540, 4 9 ; a 544, 709; a 548, 10, 19;
invocatorius: 342,70 latens: 0463,1 7 - 1 9 levitas: 312, 14; 342, 4 a 568, 83; a 628, 79
Ioannes: 334, 26 latentia: 1 19n; 236,77; 298, 27 lex: 340, 4; 358, 66; 380, /7 lingua: 368, 47
Iob: 260, 27; 298, 16; 328, 11 lateraliter: 83n; 260, / liber: 7n; 9n liquet: 53np l
ioculator: 358,4 8 latitudinalis: 76n; n 6 n p l; n 8 n ; ii9 n ; 12m Liber sine titulo: 344, 22 littera: 2 3o, 7, 7 0
iocunditas: 326, 13 latitudinaliter: ii7 n ; ii9 n ; 12m liberare: 393n localis: 74n; 870; 160, 42; 168, 6, 9; 200, 77;
iocundus:326, 24 latitudo: p n ; 57n; 630; 64n p l; G jn p l; 68n; libertas: 316, 26 224, 62; 276, 74; 280, 4(S', (S7; 282, /, 7(S"; 286,
ira: 330, 24; c 454 pl; c 478, 27-2/; 7 488, 10- 7 5 n p l; jGn p l; j j n p l; 78n p l; j g n p l; 8on libido: 7488 7 , 4; 0 469; o 500; c 504p l; a 566, 66, 67, 69,

13 p l; 8in p l; 83n p l; %-jn p l; 890; 9on p l; 9m libra: 428, 21, 2 j ; 432, 8 7 3 - 7 4 , 77, 78; a 368, 97, 93; a 614, 7/
irasci: 7488, /0-/7 p l; 92n p l; 93n p l; 94n p l; <)6n p l; 97n p l; Lidius: 330, 7/ localiter: 8n; 286, 6; 380, /; 7493
irradiatio: 268,16, 20 98n p l; 990 p l; ioon p l; io in pl; 103n p l; lignea : v 176, 1 7 ; v 180, 2 ; cf. linea locus: 9n p l; 5m ; 330 p l; 212, 17; 232, 70;
irrationabilis: 352, /7; 382, 27; 404, 28 i i j n p l; 116n p l; n 8 n p l; 12m ; 158, 77; lignealis: v 190, 7; v 176, 2; cf. linealis 268, 79; 328, 38; 36m; 7 438, 4-20; 7 485,
irrationalis: 53n; 54n; 87npl; 9cm; 202, /; 204, 168, 7, 13; 170, 77, 19, 20 p l, 21, 27, 2, 7, 8, ligneus: 230, i j p l 63—66
10 pl, /7, 16; 216, 7 6; 240, 6; 256, 16; 314, 9, 10, i j ; 172, i j , 19, 24, 2j , 26, 27, 29, 4; lignum: 230,18; 232, 19, 20, 21 longitudo: 63m 650; 8on p l; 830 p l; 84n p l;
3 2, 3 3 ', c 4 4 3 » 3 \ c 4 4 4 ; c 4 5 6 , 75 c 4 7 3 » 27°> U , 288, 7; 302, 47; 324, 18; 374, 8; limitatus: i2on; 262, 7; 7434 92n p l; 93n p l; ioon; io8n; io9n p l; n o n p l;
31-36', c 474 pl; c 476 p l ; a ^6G, j 6 ; a ^Gjn 400,16; 426, 10; c 439, 7-24 p l; 7440, 19-2 0; Lincolniensis: a 336, 7 2 i n n ; 158 , 13; 168, 7, 6 -7 , 8-9, 9 - 1 0 , 1 1 , 1 3 ;
irrecompensabilis: 226, 80 c 469 p l; a 528, 29, j o , j 9 , 40; a 330, 42, 46, linea: 5m/»/; j z n p l ; 53n 7>/; 54n; 56 n />/; 64m 170, 77, 18, 21, 1, 6, 8, 9, 1 1 , 13; 172, 7 /, 79,
irregularis: 272, 27, 705298,7 49; a 538, j j ; a 544, 10 4; a 552, 49, j o ; a 560, 74n p l; jG n p l; i j n p l; 78n p l; 8on; 83n p l; 27, 7; 174, 70; 270, 74, 7<?p l; 288, 7; 290,
irregularitas: 272, 2/, 27,77 82; a 580, 4; a 600, j , 6; a 606, j i , j 2 , 77; a 9on p l; 92n p l; 93n p l; 9 4 n; 97n p l; 98n; 99n 79/>/; 302, 47; 306, 77; 307n; 374, <?; 412, 4;
irregulariter: 196, 21 608, 2; a 614, 74; a G i^ n p l ; a 616, 40, 42, 44 p l; ioon p l; io3n p l; 164, 4, 8, 10; 166, 14 416, 77, 7/; 424, 4; 7439, 2-24; 7454, 9 -3 3;
Israel: 252, 18; 266, 44 7>/, 4^ p l, i j p l, 18, 19, 2 j , 26, 27 p l, j i , 72 ; 168, c 473, 3 1 -3 6 ; a 528, 70,77, 79, 40; a 530, 42,
iteratio: 304, /2 latratus: 368, 47 79, 2; 170, 7, 4, 9 pl, 1 1 p l; 172, 7, 4; 174, (S, 4^, 48-49; a 5 3 m p l; a 536, 2 7 ; zz 538, 7/; <z
iucundus: 393n latro: 7 483, j - 8 70; 176, 7; 178, <?, 9, 6, 8, 10; 180, 7 2 p l, I j , 344, 704; (Z552, 49 />/; 7/passim
judex astronomicus: 0453, 3~33 latus (N): 65n; 6yn; 76n; 78n/>/; 990 p l; ioon 17, 4, 6 pl, 9, 10, 12; 182, 16, 20, j i ; 184, 27, longus: 63n p l; 64ns 65m 83n; 84n p l; 9on;
iudicare: 222, 27; 326, £ p l; io8n; ic>9np l; 260, /, 3); 386, 27; c 442, 24; 186, 29; 188, 74, 77, 79, 27, < 5"; 190, 20pl, ioon; 386, 27 7>/; 412, 7; 428, 7(?, 27; 430,
iudicium: 262, 2/; 326, 27 2/, 27; c 466, 1 j —2 j p l; c 495 p l; a 539n p l; 21; 192, 20, 27 pl, 2j , 27, 28, 29; 194, j 8 , j 9 , 72, 74; 7465, 79-29; 7480, 27-24; a 560, <?7;
iumentum: 356, 27 zz 5 54, 7 / ; zz 5 56, 42, 48, 49; a 5 57n p l; a 380, 4 pl, 8; 196, 2, 7 p l, 4, j , 9; 198, 72, 77, 7/,/ a 568, 9^; a 580, /; a 58m p l; a 586, 1 7 ; a
iunctus: 3050 4; a 58m p l ; a 582, 6, 7; a 592, 4 p l ; a 398,70 7?/, (i, 7 2 , 74, 7 (S'; 200, 77, l8 , 20, 21, 22, 26, 592, / p l, 7, 8; a 594, 9, 7 7 p l, 12, 13, 16, 17,
iungere: 56n; 214, 77 />/, 77, 72 7 >/, 77, j 8 , j 9 ; zz 600, 47, 4<f 27, 3 ° p h 3 J, 33,33', 2°8, -2/; 210, 9; 212, 14; 18, 19; et passim
jungere: G^npl latus (Adj.): 64ns 67 n />/; 92n; ioon p l; 428, 7 / 214, 77, 74 pl; 216, 22, 27, 2(f, 28, 70, 77, 72, lotium: 358, 40; 359n
Tupiter: 244, 77; 326, 77 pl, 18, 22; a 560, 82; a 590, 77, 74, 7/; zz 592, i-/» 3 8, 39 8, 47 7 >/, // 7 >/, j 6 , 79, 64; lubricare: 380, 31
Iupiter (planeta): c 445 />/; 0446 p l 7<?, 6, 7; a 594, 77, 77 220, 7<ipl, 19 p l; 224, /(S', 77, 62, 7 j , 76; 278, lubricus: 380, /7
iustificans: c 482, 77-77 laurus: 244, 16 27 pl, 27; 0438, 7 -9 p l ; c 439; 7444/S/; 7448, Lucanus: 352, 47; 356, 17; 362, 38; 364, 67;
lustinus: 362, 2i?, 74 laus: c 479, 27-24 1 7 pl; c 465, 7-70, 79-29 p l; c 466, 77-27 />/; 366, 26, 28; 368, 4/
iuvamentum: 0478, 26 -27 laxare: 316, 77 7 473, 7 1 - 7 6 p l; 7492,74-47; zz 526, 7 7 ; zz 528, lucerna: 36m
iuvenis: 254, 77 ; 326, 70; 328, 77; 342, 4 lectio: 7 478, 26 -27 74, 7 / , 77, 20, 27, 22, 27, 77, 7/, 77, 47; <2 Lucia: 358, 40
 678 Selective Index of Latin Terms Selective Index of Latin Terms 679

luciditas: c 482, 47-6 3 malitia: 384, 48; 7482,3 1 - 3 3 ; cf. malicia medietas: 6on pl; 63n p l; 64n p l; 65n p l ; 84n 27; 260, 70 ; 276, <?; 392, 2; 402,7?; 404,1, 4,
lucidus: 370, 72; 384, 44-, 430, 43 malivolus: 298, 21, 22 p l; 99n; ioon p l; i26n; 202, 47, 43, 10; 406, 27 p l; 408, 7; 410, 77, 47; 412, 7;

ludificatio: 7 459, 2 1 - 2 3 malum: 390, 27 46; 218, 33; 222, 42, 47; 284, 19; 290, 2<f; 424, 7; 426, 257455 p l; 7 461, 4; c 464, 27-72
lumen: j i n ; 12m ; 1300; 168, 36', 300, /2; mandragoras: ii4 n p l; i i 5 n p l; 236, 16; 7454, 402, 77, 7 <?; 414, 77, 40, 47; 416, 24 p l 5420, Pl
344, 23-, 350, 74; 402, 77; 406, 27; 430, 19 p l; 424, 7; 432, 7 7 ; 7 445 />/; 7 4 7 4 p l; c mensurabilis: 67n; 164,7
r 469; 7 470, 3>-2(? />/; 7 483, 17 -18 ', c 484, mandragoricus: 7454, 19 476; 7 492, 7 4 -4 7; 7 500/>/; 7 501 />/; 7 505 ; c mensurare: 8n; 67n; 92n; 168, 10; 274, 2 8 , 3 1 ,
1 7 - 1 8 ; a 5 3 6 , 1 2 ; a 366, /4 manere: 224, 64; 286, 3 p l, 6; c 466, 13 - 2 3 ; a 510 p l; c 512 p l; c 513 p l ; c 514; a 540, 39; 33, 37, 42; 276, 4; 310, <?, 10; 320, 7 / ; 410,
luminaris: c 4 54, / - 3 / 628,29 a 542, 63; a 544, 90, 91; a 556, 31; a 558, 39; 7/, 47; 7455; 7464, 2 7 - 3 2 p l; 7 4 6 5 ,19 - 2 9 ; c
luminositas: 7483,3 - 8 ; 74 8 3 ,1 7 - 1 8 mania: 338, 2^5 346, 3; 7487, 1 3 - 2 1 a 568, 94, 93, 96; a 602, 1 1 ; a 608, 7, 4, 3 , 6 ; 485; a 532, <$2
luminosus: 402,3 1 , 3 2 manifestare: 214, / a 618, 30, 34; a 620, 7 7 , 77; a 630, 46 mensuratio: 164, 4; 404, 9; 406, 27; 41 o, 43
luna: 8n; 9np l; i $ o n p l ; 346, /2; 408, 28 mansuetudo: 330, 245 7478, 27-2/ m ediocris: 56n mentalis: 274, 77
lunaticus: 346, 12 manubrium: 7482, 47-6 3 m editatio: 250, 77 Mercurius: 336, 27
lupinus: 316,74, 4757487, 1 3 - 2 1 p l manus: 9np l; 294,1 0 , 1 2 , 77; 74 8 3 ,1 7 - 1 8 m edium: 8n; 9 n p l; i0 9 n p l; 166, 33; 168, 36; D e metheorologicis: 258, /
lupus: 242, 24; 316,72, 40; 368, 48 mare: 260, 28; 274, 405 7 464,3 9 - 4 0 p l 324, 77; 356, 36; 384, 74; 402, 3 1 , 3 4 ', 43°, Methodius: 266,77
lux: 3in p l ; 166, 7 / ; 258, 9; 408, 28, 29 p l, 30 margo: a 549n 46; 7 4 6 6 , 13 - 2 3 metiri: 55n.pl; 507a
p l ; 430, 4/57459, 3 - 4 p l marinus: 244,1 6 medius: ji n ; 560; 6on; 62n; 670p l ; 740; 770 metrum: 316, 28; c 438, //>/
Mars 1278, 7257 445 p l ; c 446 p l; 7%n; 83n; 890p l; yzn ; 97n; 990p l ; ioon metuere: 386,
Marsus: 236, 2/ p l; 1030; 216, 77; 314, 77, 12; 324, 1 7 pl; metus: 258, 1 8
Machometus: 346, 28 Martianus: 330, 2 9 408, /, 6, 7, 10; 410, 77, 27, 29, 3 4 p l ; 424, minime: 62n
macies: 350, 27 masculus: 244, 6 , 1 1 ; 246,19; 3290 77, 74; 7445; 7454; 7455/)/; 7466, 77-27; 7 minimus: 212, 27
macula: 254, / ; 74 58 ,1 6 - 1 9 mater: 246,16; 7488 468, 3 - 6 , 8 p l; 7 477; 7 488, 1 0 - 1 3 ; c 5 °4 pl\ ministerium: 336, 20
maga: 336, 225 364, 67; 7484, 20-23 materia: 8n; 79n; 8on; 830; ii4n5 p l; c 512 />/; 7 515 />/; a 526, 70; a 528, 23; a 534, minuere: io9n; n o n ; 324, 77; 326, 10; 328,
magica: 340,10; 342, 7; 7482,3 1 - 3 3 ii9 n ; i28n; 208, 6; 230, 32; 234, 28; 250, 3; 77, 7<?; a 540, 39; a 542, 79; a 558, 38; a 40; 400, 6, 1 1 ; 404, 27, 70; 406, 72, 77; 412,
magicus: 162, 33, 36, 39, 60, 61; 334, 2, 16; 328, 36; 332, /5 382, 19; 7487, 1 3 - 2 1 ; 7488, 5650; a 600, 47 />/, 44, 46, 3 ; a 606,72; a 608, 7 ; 4 3 ° ,4
336, /<?, 77, /, 7; 338, 74, 77; 342, 40; 344, 70 -77; ^489p l ; 7490, 28-29; a 526, 9; a 616, 40, 47, 46; a G\(, 39; cf. per medium mirabilis: ii9 n p l; i2on p l ; i28n; i29n; 218,
14, 77; 7486, 68-69 42 melancholia: 7 4 8 7 ,1 3 - 2 1 p l 67; 230, 32; 236, 70; 242, 6; 346, 22; 362,
magister: 75n; jG n p l ; 790; 92n p l ; 93n; 96n materialis: n n ; ii5 n ; n 8 n ; 234, 7 / ; 282, 77; melancholicus: 7 487, 7/-27 2<^; 364, 30; 366, /; 372, 70, 22, 25?; 382, 22;
p l; i2on p l; i z 6 n ; 434, 72; 7 471, 18 -3 4 ; a melancolia: 372, 77, 20 430, 27; 7 480, 7; 7 483, 1 7 - 1 8 ; 7 501; 7
3 °o, 33
592, 7; a 606, 775 a 608, 2 materies: 7488 melancolicus: 342, 2<f; 370, 1 0 503
magnes: 113 0 p l; 242, 75 7 434, 3 - 3 3 p l; 7 456, maternus: 7488 melicus: 330, 29 mirabilitas: 7480, 1
7-70 mathematica: 358, 4 6 meliorare: 324, 9 miraculose: 372 ,13; 374, 77
magnificencia: 7490,1 9 - 2 1 mathematice: 13cm; 164, 8; 168 ,13 mellicus: v 330, 29 miraculum: 372, 70; 7481, 1 6 - 1 8 ; 7484; 7490
magnitudo: ;i n p l; 9205 256, 17, 18; 258, 7; mathematicus (N ): 8on; 224, 74 m elodia: 326, 13, 16; 334, 17 ; 336, 22; 390, 77 pl
262, /, 74; 264, 7, 4; 278, 77, 7<f/>/, 7<?5 280, mathematicus (Adj.): 5 m p l ; 79n p l ; 8on p l ; m elodiose: 322, 77 mirari: i28n; 1290; 374, 77; 7454
47; 304, 27; 306, 475 316, 7/5 7 468, 3 - 6 p l; ixon; 176, 36; 354, 75 7 471, 18 -24; a 528, m e m b r u m : n 6 n p l; 1170 ; 236, 8; 294, 7 / ; mirus: 366, 9; 7484; 7485, 43-46
7469pl; a 53m 2J 380, /; 382,77; 384,74; 7488, 70-77 miscere: 232, 23; 7486
magus: 336, /5 338, 7/; 340, 4; 342, 2<?, 40; matutinus 17485, 32-33 memini: 7485, 20-27 miser: i28n; 342, 26; 393n
346, 77; 348, 42, 47; 352, 30; 356, 74; 358, maxime: 62n; 438, 3; c 464, 27-72; et passim memorare: 7485, 20-27 mitigare: 298, 22; 336, 28; c 478, 2 6 - 2 7
4 ' , 44 maximodus: 7 4 7 7 ,1 4 - 1 3 memoria: i28n; 326, 74, 7 <f, 7 <? mittere 17481, 1 6 - 1 8
maiorare: a 610, 77 , 12, 13, 16; a 612, 77, 18, maximum: io8np l mendacium: 264, 70 mixtio: 206, 32-33, 77, 34; 308, 49 p l, 37, 60;
21 p l, 22, 23, 24 maximus: i28np l mendax: 338, 74 3 * 4 , 3 , /, 3 5 8 , 63
m aioratio: 278, 33; a ( no, 1 0 pl, 1 1 , 13; a 612, mechanica\av 526, 9 mens: 6n; 252, 7; 254, 7 0 ; 328, 33; 338, 7 0 ; mixtus: 1130 p l; 228, 43; 232, 4; 316, 13; 360,
17 medians: 53n; 294, 70, 12; 7464, 27-72; 7481, 340, 27; 350, 7 2 , 27; 352, 77, 40; 356, 20, 22; 7757477
maioritas: 214, 9; 302, 47 1 9 - 2 1 ; c 504p l 358, 44; 362, 24,77; 3^4, / i l 366, 2<fp l; 368, mobilis: 8n pl; 9n p l; io8n p l; m n p l; ii2 n
maleficia: 344,1 3 - 1 4 ; 3390 mediate: c 474p l ; 7 476 p l /7; 380, 48; 7483p l ; 7484, 20-27; f 5°3 p l; 270, 6; 272, 23, 6; 276, 7; 278, 1 1 ; 280,
maleficus: 380, 60; 384, /7, 3 9 5 7 482, 47-63; c medicina: 334, 14; 344, 4; 356, 19; 7 454, 3-33 mensis: 74 6 3 ,1 9 - 2 1 p l 45, /7; 282, 6, 8; 284, 40; 290, 77, 77; 350,
484,20-23 pl; c 478 2 6-27 m enstruosus: 254, 17; 350, 26; 384, 77; 7 458 10; 390, 2/; 414, 33, 39; 418, 7 /; 426, 18; 7

malicia: 344, 13; cf. malitia medicus: n 8 n p l; i29n; 328, 7; 330, 77; 358, menstruus: 7458 461, 23-23; c 462, 70 -77; 7 465, 19 - 2 9 ; 7

malignitas: 382,16; 3830p l 39; 372, 77; 7478, 2 6 - 2 7 pl\ 7486 ; 7487, 7 / - mensura: 54n; 8on; i39n; 158, 8, 11; 162, 68, 496; 7 498 p l; 7 499; 7 504; 7 511, 47-48; 7

malignus: 336, 27; 372, 27; 7481, 1 6 - 1 8 27 69; 164, 70, 77, 74, 9; 166, 7 <f; 170, /; 174, 512; 7 513 />/; 7 514; 7 515 pl; a 544, 107; a
 68o
592, 475 a 602, 16, 17; a 608, 3; a 616, 4/, 4^,
475 a 618, 6, 9; a 620, 77, 12
m obilitas: 258, 8
m oderatus: 308, 7 , 1 3
m odernus: 8on; 172, 2/; 184, /2; 340, 9; 396,
16
m odicus: 6on; 84n; i2 8 n pl; 342, 10; 7454
modulamen: 306, 2/; 336, 2/
m odulus: 7478
modus: 7n pi; 5405 56n; 670; 77n; 78n pi; 79n
7!)/; 8on p i; 8in; 83n p i; 94n; 97ns io in ;
ii3 n ; ii5 n ; n 6 n p i; u 8 n p i; 119 0 p i; 160,
40; 162, 49, 31, 32, 61; 164, 7; 166, 19, 2 3 pi,
2 j ; 172, 21 pi; 174, 2/ p i; 176, 2; 194, 36,
44; 198, 2; 202, 7; 208, 22; 210, 6 , 1 2 , 14, 17,
18, 20, 21; 2 1 4 ,1 , 3 , 9 ; 216, 29; 22 0 ,1, 4, 13;
222, 2/, 41, 49; 224, J3, j j , 69; 228, 22;
240, 10; 244, 3, 3; 246, 24; 248, 22, 2; 250,
2/, 13; 252, 7, /; 234, 4; 256, <?; 258, /0, I I ,
19, 22; 260, 24; 268, 7, 77; 270, <
5", 7 , 8 , 1 3 pi;
272, / i ; 274, 16; 276, 7; 318, 2,7, /, #,77/»/,
7 <?, 24 p i, 23; 320, 27, 2 pi, 32, 34; 322, 2;
3 24 > 4 » / ; 328, 74, i / , 7«?, 737, /, <?, 13; 330,
*4> J6', 3 74 ,10; c 45 5 />/; 7466, 13 - 2 3 ; c 470;
7 477, 1 4 - 1 3 ; c 480, 7; 7 485, 43-46; c 489;
7490, 28 -29; a 612,
molim en: 364, 7486, <*"(?-<($?
m ollitia: 330, 74
mom entum : io8n />/; ic>9n pi; n o n pi; m n ;
3 4 2 ,30
m onocordus: 320, 43 p i
mons Parnasus: 362, 29
m onstrum : 7486
m oratus: 328,9 ; 529x1
m orbus: i2 9 n pi; 304, 26; 527x1; 366, 18; 7454
m orosus: 272, 4; 274, 31; 7461, 4p i
m ors: 52711; c 454
mortalitas: 360,13; 382, 23; 7489
m ortifer: 36m
m ortuus: 328, 37; 370, 1 3
m os: 316, 24; 328, 33, 33, 7; 7478, 26—27
m otetus: ii3 n
m otio: 278, 8, 18
m otivus: io gn ; 7 4 8 3 ,1 7 - 1 8
motor: 8npi; 9x1
m otrix: 10705 io8n; 1090pi; 1 ion
motus (N): 6n pi; 7n pi; 8n pi; 9n pi; ion pi;
1 in ; i2n pi; 5 in pi; 64n pi; 74n pi; 75n; 87n
pi; 107x1; io8n pi; io9n pi; n o n pi; i n n pi;
H 2 n pi; H 3 n ; i2 o n ; i28n; i3 o n pi; 160,38,
Selective Index of Latin Terms
47, 42; 168, 6, 9; 170, 74; 194, 3, 6, 8, 9 pi;
196, 72, 74, 13; 200, 33; 224, 62, 72; 238,
21; 270, 4, 3, 9, 10, 13; 272, 2 7 , 23, 28 pi, 31,
6 p i; 274, 29, 30, 32, 33, 37 , 41 pi, 42; 276, 2,
74, 19, 2, 7; 278, 13, 19 p i, 29, 36; 280, 46,
38, 61; 286, 7, 3, 4, 8, 1 1 , 12; 288, 28, 29;
294, 6, 7, 1 1 , 12, 17 ; 296, 19, 2, 3; 378, 33; c
453, 13; c 461, 23- 23; c 462, 74 p i; 7 463 pi;
746475/; 7465, 7 - 1 0 p i; 7466, 13 - 2 3 pi; 7468,
9-28; c 472; 7 490; 7 500; 7 504p i; 7 305 75/;
7 511 7 ?/; 7 512 />/; 7 513 7>/; 7 514 p i; c 513; a
53in;tf 537n;a 558, 6 7 ; a 566, 66, 67, 69, 73,
76, 77, 78; a 568, 79, 83; a 388, 23; a 592, 40
p i, 41, 42, 46, 49 pi, 1, 2; a 596, 26, 27; a 608,
3, /; <2612, 28, 29; a 615x1 p l; a 614, 3 0 pi, 3 1 ,
3 2 P h 3 4 P h 36, 37, 38; a 6 15np i; a 616, 47,
48; a 618, 31, 32, 34, 33; etpassim
motus (Part.): 272, 7; 278, 77; 286, 13; 288,
24, 2/5 7489; 7 504; <7 53m/)/
movere: 6n; 7n p i; 8n p i ; 9n p i; \ zn p l ; 5 in pi;
62x1 pi; 64np i; 115x1 p l; 194, 3; 196, 18, 21;
224, 63; 272, 7, 8; 276, 7; 278, 7 2 ,13, 13, 16,
22, 23, 24, 26; 279x1; 298, 3, 8, 1 1 ; 328, 6;
33m ; 414, 33, 36; 418, 36; 420, 40; c 438,
7~9\ c 4 4 3 » J ’ c 4 4 4 ; c 4 5 3 » I 3 \ c 461, 23-23
p i; 7 465, 19 - 2 9 ; c 466, 13 - 2 3 p i; 7 486; 7
489; 7493 ; 7496; 7498p i; 7499; 7 500;
p i; c 505 p i; c 511 p i; c 515 pi; c 5 1 4 p i; c 315;
a 544, 107; a 554, 9; a 558, 73; a 360, 76; a
592, 42 pi, 44 p i, 43, 48; a 614, 38
M oyses: cf. Rabi Moyses Egiptius
mulier: i29n; 234, 26; 236, 18; 246, 13; 254,
77; 256, 20, 24; 350, 23; 336, 16; 384, 37;
7458; 74 8 3 ,1 7 - 1 8
multiangulus \ a 5 39n
multifarius: 190, 8
multiformis: 250, 22; 294,77
multilaterus: 21 o, 7 /5 74 4 8 ,13
multiplex: 160, 20-2 1; 210, 7; 250, 14; 280,
33; 390, 18; 7445 p i; 7496; 7499p i
multiplicare: 7 445 p i; c 483, 1 7 - 1 8 ; c 494, 1 9 -
20
multiplicatio: 7443 pi; c 483,1 7 - 1 8
multiplicitas: v 280, 36
multipliciter: 9on; 208, 8; 226, 81; 246, 9, 1 1 ;
270, 20; 280, 36
multitudo: 176, 42; 300, 18; c 468, 9-28; c 483,
17-18
multocies: 7 477, 8-12
mundatus: 254, 6
Selective Index of Latin Terms 68l
mundificatus: v 2 54, 9 2757453, 28-29; 7459, 29 ’ ^480, 7 pl; 7483,
mundus (N): 911; 67ns 260, 9; 552, 3; 382, 19; 1 7 - 1 8 ; c 486 p l; c 489 p l; a 53 m ; cf. natural-
7 463, 19-29 57489; 7 490p i lis
mundus (Adj.): 2 54, 3, 17 Naturalis historia: 236, 22; 3 6 6 , 1 7
munus 17483,7 7 -7 8 naturaliter: 9n; H 4 n ; 11505 n 6 n ; i i 7 n ; n 9 n
musica: 53n; H 3 n p i; 162, 34; 238, 3; 242, 24; p l ; i2 o n ; i28n; i29n; i3 o n ; 166, 30; 244,
244, 8; 246, 10; 306, 41; 322, 22; 328, 4, 9; 27, 4; 248, 19, 22; 254, 19 -20 ; 572, 1 1 ; 7
3290; 330, 26, 30, 32; 332, 40, 4 4 , 1 ; 334, 77; 487, 2 2 - 3 1 p l; 7489
336, 24; c 478, 2 6 - 2 7 p h a 54-6»12 1 naturallis : a v 534, 8 4-9 1; cf. naturalis
De musica: 304, 8; 320, 44; 328,77 natus: 342,7/
musicalis: c 480 necessarius : 53n ; 8on ; et passim
musicus: 320, 48; 322, 77; 328, 77, 6; 334, 23; negare: 9n pl; 6on; 7905 et passim
336, 27; 7480 n eg a tiv e : 1 94, 43
musitare: 370, 39 nemus: 7485 p l
mussitare: v 370, 39 nervus: 53n; 304, 9; 306, 74; 316, 18, 19, 20,
mutabilis: 232, 24; 272, 4; 2 7 4 ,3 8 ; 5(90, 21, 23 3 2, 3 3 »3 4 * 3 6, 3 7
p i ; cf. res mutabilis niger: 62n; 370, 10; 372, 19, 20; c 455 p l ; c
mutabilitas: v 238, 8 487, 77-27 pl; 7493 p l
mutare: 332, 41; 364, 33; 366, 7257484, 20-23; n igritu d o : 350,2/
c 309 p l nigrom antia: 336, 2 0 , 3 p l
mutatio: 160, 72; 250, 1; 298, 18; 304, 26, 27, nigrom anticus : 238, 74; 338, 18; 350, 20; 364,
28, 29; 326, 72, 28; 356, 36; c 464p l; c 469 66
p l ; 7470 nixus: 7n
mutuere: 750057501 nobilis: 238, 9, 1 4 - 1 3 , 1 3 - 1 6 , 17 , 18, 22, 23;
mutus: 378, 1 4 242,775 248, 24; 256, 21; 298, 77; 748 9 p l
nobilitas: 238, 27
7 504 nares: 360, 1 2 nocturnus: 3 4 2 , 1 1 ; 350, 745 352,4/
nasci: 307n; 344, 23 nom en: 212, 3)5 264, 7; 266, 2/5 7 463, 1 9 - 2 1 ;
nativitas: I29n; 13m ; 254, 7; 264, 9; 342, 77 7485, 20-23
nativus: c 48 3 , 1 7 - 1 8 nom inaliter: 274, 21
natura: 53n p l ; 8on; n 6 n p l ; i2on; 162, 47; nom inare: c 476 p l
172, 775 234, 26; 236, 77; 238, 1 1 , 19; 240, non grad u s : 184, 8; 284, 3»; 286, 275 a 5 5 8, 7 4 ;
3; 250, 4; 254, 2, 7 ; 260, 2/; 296, 18; 298, a 600, 3 5 a 602, 775 7/ passim; cf. gradus
7 / 5 304, 7; 507x1; 554, 3 , 9 ; 342, 42; 346, 74, notabilis: 87n; i28n; 258, 14; c 498 p l; c 499; c
1 6 , 1 7 ; 348, 7/, 74; 358, 60, 66; 360, 77, 78; 5D
574, 32; 380, 34, 37; c 438, 7 - 9 ; c 4 5 4 p l ; c notabiliter: a 548, 20
456, 39~4°\ c 47°» I >^483,1 7 - 1 8 p l ; c 486; c notanter: a 588, 27
488, 1 0 - 1 3 ; 7489; a 536, 74, 16; a 547npl; a notare: 87x1; 9611; a 526, 775 528, 16, 21, 26,
5 ^5 n 3 1 ; a 5 54, 775 a 580, 1; a 650, 7 6
D e natura demonum: 358, 33 (Witelo); 362, n oticia : 76n
43 - 4 6 (Augustinus) notificans: 96n
D e natura deorum: 268, 24 notificare: 1 9 2 , 10; 290,72
De naturalibus: 376, 77; 382, 20 notificatio: 1 9 2 , 1 1 ; 208, 22; 286, 29
naturalis: 7n p l; 8n p l ; 9n; ji n ; 56n p l; 790.; notitia: 166, 30; 174, 23; 194, 2; 206, 40; 208,
H 4n; n 6 n ; 119 p l; i2on p l ; i28n p l ; 160, 4; 224, 60; 250, 2; 268, 2<f; 290, 10; 292, 75?;
23, 29 pl; 230, 34; 232, 27, 7, 7, 4, 7, 10, 312, 1 8
1 1 - 1 2 , 13; 234, 7 8, 19, 2 1- 2 2 , 30, 3; 236, 6; notula: 318, 20
240, 7; 242, 1 3 - 1 6 , 17 , 1 8 - 1 9 , 22, 26, 29, 32, novitas: 526,6; c 477, 8-12
2, 4, 3, 75 244, 9, I I , l 8 , 23, 3 , 6 ; 246, 77, 2 7 , novus: 8on p l
23; 248, 2 7 , 24; 260, 29; 302, l 6 ; 572, 14, n o x : 298, 77
 682
nubecula: 254, 1 8
n u b es : 264, 1 3 , 1 6 ; c 490
nugacitas: 3 8 3 0 p l
numeralis: 8on p l ; c 455 p i ; 7456 p i
numerare: 2 7 4 ,/ /; 290, /<£57464, 27-32 ; c 473,
j i - j 6 ; a 562, 2/
numerus: i n p i; 53n />/; 54n; -j^npl; -jyn; 8on
./>/; 84n; 9m ; H 3 n p i; n 8 n ; i2on; 127n.pl;
164, / ; 206, 19; 216, 21; 246, /<?; 274, /75
306, 47; 307n; 312, 18, 21, 23, 24, 36; 314,
44; 322, 6; 4 1 4 , 3 1 ; 420, 16, 23; 422, 27, 29;
424, f L 42; ' 4 4 5 ^ 5 M 4 6 5 M 55 pl\ c ^ G ; c
46357 464, 2 7 - 3 2 p i; 7 469; c 471, 1 8 - 2 4 P h
c 472 p i; c 473, 3 1 - 3 6 ; c 474 p i; 7 476 />/; c
4 9 4 »I 9 ~20^>/5750057504p l ; c 5x2p i ; a 539n;
a 560, //5 a 562, 20, 27, 2/, 24, 30, 33, 3 3 pi;
a 56305 a 564, 44, 43; a 5650; a 632, 89, 90
nutrimentum: 242,3 1 ; 7469
obediens: 7489
obedire: 7489 p i; 7490, 28-29
o bex: n o n ; 7 4 8 3 , 1 3 - 1 8
obiccere: v 544, 9 2
o b icere : 9n ; a 544, 9 2
obiecta res: 354, 7; 356, 33; 358, 44; 7459,
3~4
obiectum : 1 6 6 ,3 3 ; 348, J 2 ', 370, //57485
oblectare: 7479, 23-24
o b livio : 362, 22
oblivisci: 362, 23; 7485, 20-23
oblongus: 2 5 6 , 19; 7456, 39-40; c 458, 4-20; a
536, 6; a 537n
obnubilare: 254, 70
obprobrium : 370, /c?
obscurare: 3830
obscurus: 266, 40; 352, 46
observantia: 7482, 47 -63
observatio: 7459, 21 ~23
obstupescere: 362, 23
obtundere: io9n
obturatio: 7 4 8 3 , 1 7 - 1 8
obtusus: 5 m ; 7905 8on; 920; 930; 94n; 186,
6; 188, 26; 190, 19; 326, 27
occasus: i2n
occidere: I2n
occultus: 1170 pl; n 8 n ; n g n ; 160, 29; 236,
i 6-,}0,33; 242, 7; 250, 2—3 5 256, 20; 258, 77;
260, 2/; 262, 6; 264, 775 268, 14; 338, 16;
346, 28; 358, 36; 370, 19; 7 454; 7 482,
47 -63
Selective Index of Latin Terms
occulus: 7 481, 1 9 - 2 1 5cf. oculus
octogonus: 240, 77-72
octuplo: 6onp l ; 4 1 6 , 1 1 ; 4 2 0 , 3 7
oculus: 236, 7; 240, 38; 248, 10; 344, 2 7 , 22,
2h } ° \ 346, jio, 3 1 p l ; 350, 6, 10, 1 1 , 23;
382, 1 3 5 384, 37, 40, 43, 44, 32, 3 7 p l, 60; c
456, 39 ~ 4 ° pl\ c 458; 7 481, 1 6 - 1 8 ; 7 482,
3 1 - 3 3 ; c 484; 7 489 57 490,3 9 - 4 0 p l
odi: 336, 24
odibilis: 242,33, 34
odium: 242,32, 6; 2 4 4 , 1 1 ; 378, 26; 7454/)/
odor: 228, 24
odorare: 260, 2 7 -28
offendere: 308, 6
offendiculum: 380, 31
officium: u 6 n
oleum: 7482, 47-6 3
omnipotens: 7484
omogenius: v 228, 4 3
operans: 7489
operari: 330, 26; 336, 36; 338, 13; 340, 21;
376, 8 5 378, 24; 384, 62; 7 483; 7 489; 7 491
operatio: 1130 p l; ii4 n p l; n8n5 ii9 n p l;
23 4 >4 ’> 3 7 2>-245 3 9 °> 2 ^\ c 4545 c 478, 26 -27;
74895 7490, 23-27; 7491, 2 3 - 3 7 p l
operative: 12m
opera tivus: 12 in p l
opinari: 298, 1 0
opinio: 8n; 6on; 75n; 92n; 7 504
oportunitas: 176, 4/5^426, 1 1
oppinio: i2n; 6on
opponere: 260, 4
oppositio: i2n
oppositus: 8n p l; 6on; 92n; ioon; 244, 72;
310, 26; 320, 33; 324, 32; 394, 33; 7 495 5 a
526, 75 a 536, 10; a 544, 108; a 554, 1 1 ; a
558, 68; a 580, 4; a 5 8 m ; a 582, 7 p l ; a 586,
775 a 598, 30, 33; a 604, 23; a 610, 8
opus: 75np l ; 117 0 ; c 456,39-40 ; c 471, 18 -24;
7489
oraculum: 362, 3 2 , 3 7
oratio: 266, 40; 338, 27; 7478, 2 6 - 2 7
orbis: 6np l; 7n; q n p l ; i3on; 344, 23; c 445
ordinare: 79n; 8on; 9cm; 208, 32; 252, 7, 13; c
4 5 9 »3 - 4 \ c 4 7 8 , 2 6-27
ordinatio: 1270; 7 478, 2 1- 2 3
ordo: 54np l; 8on; n 6 n ; n 8 n ; 206, 20; 262,
16; 312, 23, 36; 322, 26; 390, 24; c 459, 3 - 4
p l ; c 4745 7 496; 74975 75095(2538, 28
organicus: 268, 75 7478, 2 1- 2 3
Selective Index of Latin Terms
organizatio: ii4 n
organum: 248, 3, 7, 1 1 ; 256, 22; 268, 8; 346,
8; 348, 44, 43; 370, 13; 384, 41; 7 453, 13;
7484
originare: 308, /7
o rigo : 258, 1 6
o rire : 1 zn p l
O rpheus: 330, 21
orthogonaliter: 270, 13; c 448, 1 7 p l ; cf. orto-
gonaliter
orthogonius: 83n; 74 66 ,1 3 - 2 3
ortogonaliter: 9205 v 270, 13; cf. orthogona­
liter
ortogonius: 78n; cf. orthogonius
o s : 264, 3 2 ; 304,10; c 4 X 2 ,3 1 -3 3
ostendere: 53ns io8np l ; m n ; n z n p l ; n 8 n ;
252, 77; 284, 8; 338, 72; 344, 3; 346, 19;
366, 9 5 408, 8 5 422, 275 7 4895 7 499; 7 511,
47 - 4 8 1 7514
Ovidius: 266, /0; 344, 22; 356, 7/; 366, 24
ovilis: 316, 3 6
ovinus: 316, 41, 44; 318, 43
ovis: 242, 29; 316, 33; 376, 8; 7488
ovum: 7482, 47-6 3
palea: 7454
Palladius: 360, 9
pannus: 314, 8; c 476, 8
p a p a :254, 1 0
papirus: 84n
par: j m ; m n ; 3 1 2 ,/7 ; 38 8 ,//; 390, 7/5422,
29; 424, 42, 43; c 504; 7 509; 7 5 12 p l; c 513
p l; 7515 p l; a 530, 47; a 550, 24; a 565n p l
parabola: 7482, 3 1 - 3 3
parallelogrammum: 6 j n p l; io8n; n o n p l; a
^G$n pl;a 5990; a 618, 3, 4
parallelus: 9on; 1 o8n; a 580, 4
parere: c 472; 7488
paries: 7 485 p l
parire: 7 454, 19 p l
paritas: 228, 34
pariter: 7504
pars: 8n p l; 9n; j m p l; 53n p l ; 6on p l ; G \ n p l ;
G z n p l ; 630; G411 p l; 65n p l; Gjn p l; 78n p l;
i^ n p l ; 84n pl; yzn p l; 96n pl; 980; 10305
1090 pl; n o n p l; m n p l; ii2 n p l; n 6 n pl;
158, 8,9; 168, 41, 4; 174, 2/; 188, 14, 19, 20,
4; 190, 12; 192, 13; 194, 4 6 5 202, 47; 208,
32; 210, // , 4; 212, /, /, 7; 216, 34; 218, 62;
232, 6; 272, 23, 24; 282, 20 pl; 300, 38, 42;
683
414, 13; c 444; 7 454; 7 459, 3 - 4 ; 7 461, 2 3 -
2 3 p l; c 463 p l; c 464, 27-32 ; c 465, 19 - 2 9 ; c
469 p l; c 474 pl; c 475; c 476, 8p l; 7490, 3 9 -
40; 7 492, 34-43 p l; c 496 p l; 7 497 p l; c 498
p l ; c 499pl; c ^00pl; c 504p l; c 505 p l ; c 506
p l ; 7 509p l; 7 5 1 1 , 4 7 - 4 8 p l; c 512/>/; 7513
p l ; 7 5 14 pl; c 515 p l ; a 536, 7; a 548, 16; a
557n; a 560, 12; a 562, 1 6 p l, 29; a 580, 3 pl,
4; a 584, 10 p l, 14 p l, 16; a 586, 16, 17 ; a
6i6n
pars cognoscitiva: 268, 7 - 8
pars organica: 268, 7
partialis: 188, 14, 16; 216, 2 0 5 310, 24; 312,
32; 3 16 ,13; a 562, 29
partialiter: 300,3 6 , 3 7 ; 302, 48
partibilis: 990
participare: 5305 240,30; a 548, 8
particula: 226,1 2 , 1 3 , 1 6 ; 228, 20, 21; 230,10;
306, /75 310, 6; 320, 29
particularis: i28n; 266, 23
partim: 324, 1 3 , 1 6
partitus: c 514
parvitas: 222, 29; 224, 34
parvulus: 312, 1 7 , 3 2
Pascasius: 358, 40
pasibilis: *>230, 8
passibilis: 230, 8; v 268, 9; 332, 6, 1 1
passio: 160, 24; 230,1, 4; 234, /; 250,14; 252,
1 1 , 1 3 - 1 6 ; 254, 7 -8 ; 258, 20; 328, 4; 352,
3 1 ; 3 7 4 ,1 1 , 17; 376, 4, 13; 378, 18; 386, 2; 7
4 6 2,14; 7482
passivus: 1280
passus: 9n; jin ; n 8 n p l
pater: 246,16; 378, 1 6
patere: 8n p l; j m p l; 53n; 54n p l; 56n; 6in;
630p l ; 650; 170, /<?; 172, 24; 174, //, 22;
182, 29; 184, 3, 14, 18; 188, 18, 24, 4; 192,
30; 198, 13, 7, 13; 202, 44, 47; 206, 37 , 40;
210, 3; 214, 26, 30; 216, 32; 218, 39, 64; 7
459, 3—4 pl\ c 462, 14; 7 463, 1 9 - 2 1 ; c 464,
2 7 -32 ; a 526, 3, 12; a 582, 8; a 584, 12; a
594, 205 a 600, 3; a 626, / ; a 628, 33, 41; a
630, 70; a 63 2, 77, 86; et passim ubique
pati: ii4 n ; ii5 n ; 230, 6; 232, 26; 236, 13;
238, 1 1 ; 7488,1 0 - 1 3 ; 7489,1 9 - 2 1
patiens: 7480
Patricius: 364, 48
pausa: n 8 n ; 304, 6; 306, 17 , 20, 21; 308, 37;
310, 18, 7, 10; 318, 7, 8, 10, 12, 13, 16, 18,
22, 23, 23, 28, 29p l, 30, 3 4 , 3 3
 684 Selective Index of Latin Terms Selective Index of Latin Terms 685
pausa unius temporis: 318, 14 permanere: 298, 2, 3, 8; 302, 3 ip , 23; 254, 20; 256, /, 7, 8; 7 458, 4-20 p l
phantasia: 7488
pausula: 31 o, 4, 8,12 permiscere: ii4 n ; c 490,3P-40 phiala: v 348, 61; cf. fiala, fiola, phiola, phyala Plato: 328, 8
pavor: 352, 62; 7488, 10 -13 permutacio: 7 4 8 1 ,1 6 - 1 8 ; cf. permutatio Platonicus: 3 7 4 ,^
philosophans: 74 83,1 7 - 1 8
pax domestica: 316, 28 permutare: 329^7489 plausus iocundus: 296, 8
philosophia: 382, 27
peccatum: 336,36 permutatim: a 630, 74 philosophia naturalis: 232,^; 336,3 0 plicabilis: 282, 1 0
pectus: 368, J3 permutatio: 7 489; cf. permutacio plicare: 286, 1 3
philosophus: 230, 33; 236, i p ; 232, 4; 328, 3;
pedalis: 64n; 412, 8; 414, 22; 426, 6; 428, ip; perpendere: 174, 13; 262, 77; 288, 21; 324, 21 Plinius: 224, 76; 236, 22; 244, 16; 330, 3 1 ;
3 7 4 >38
c 509; c 510 p l ; c 5 1 2 ; c 515 p l perpendicularis: j i n ; 76n p l ; i n n ; 188, 13 ; 338,7; 366, 1 7
Philosophus (Aristoteles): 164, 3
pellere: yn; n o n ; 305n 192, 20; 198, 16; 200, 77, 22; 210, 8; 290, pluralitas: 9n; 113m i28n
phiola: v 348, 61, 63; cf. fiala, fiola, phiala,
pellicula: 356, 14 13; 394, 20, 26; 402, 21; a 526,12; a 530, 43; P lu to :340, 1 1
phyala
pena: 8n; 162, 83; 386, I, 8, 10, 13, 18, ip, 21, a 532, 6p; a 546, 133; a 548, 14; a 550, 44; a pluvere: 7489
phisica: 372, 18; cf. physica
22, 26; 388,3 1 , 3 3 , 34 ,38, 40, 42 ; 406, 27 628, 24, 26; a 632, 7 6 pluvia: 382, 22; 7489; 7490
Dephisica: 344, 17 ; 382, 20
penetrabilis: 230, 8 perpendicularitas: 400, 4 poeta: 7486, 68-6p
Dephisicis: 288, 6; cf. De physicis
penetrare: 230,14; 33m ; 7486 perpendiculariter: 76n; 9on; 93n; io3n; 164, Policraticus: 330, 3 4
phisicus: 96m cf. physicus
penetratio: 176 ,3 6 , 3 3 10; 166, 2p; 168, 42; 170, 4, p, 1 1 ; 172, 3; politus: 232, 8 , 1 3 ; 258, 23; 7483, 1 7 - 1 8
Phitia: 362, 3P
penetrativus: 226, 14 176, 3; 178, 8, 12, 6, 1 1 ; 180, 3, 6; 184, 23; polluere: 256, 21
phiton: 368, 4p, 33, 36; 370, 38; v 380, 61; cf.
pensare: 276, 6\ 338, 10 188, 23; 192, 2p; 200, i p ; 208, 3; 394, 22; polus: 62n pl; 2 7 8 , 16; 296, 4; 298, 6
phyton, pithon, python
penthagonus: 240, 12 40o, 8; a 540, 32; a 548, 77; a 628,33 pom um : 7434, i p
phitonicus: 1 7 0 , 1 6 ; cf. phytonicus
per accidens: 8n; 280, 38 perpetuitas: 8n p o n d u s : 5 3n p l; 8on
phreneticus: 347m cf. freneticus
per consequens: 8n; <pn; jjn; 78n; 87n; 200, perseverare: io% npl; n o n ponere: 7n; 9n; 63n p l ; G jn ; 78m 84n p l ; 9 m ;
phyala: v 348, 61, 63; cf. fiala, fiola, phiala,
33; 218, 83; a 632, 83 perspectiva: ji n ; 52n; 358, 46; a 534, 87 92n; 93n; <pGnpl; io8n; m n ; ii3 n p / ; i i7 n ;
phiola
per medium: 218, 47; 284, 77, ip D e perspectiva: 238,;?; 240, 40 172, 3; 206, 22; 214, 26; 226, 3; 242, 28;
phylosophia n 232, 3
per se: 8n; 280, 38; c 462, 74 perspectivus: a 536, 77 268, 23; 286, 23; 4 0 6 , 13; 4 1 4 , 1 4 , 1 3 p l ; 418,
physala: v 348, 36
peractus: 11 in; m n p / persuasio: 162, 34; 332, 1; 336, 3; 338, 14, i p ; physica: v 402, 42; 7 487, 1 3 - 2 1 ; a 608, 2; cf. 33; 432, 10, 12; 7 494, i p - 2 0 p l; c 498 ; 7 504;
peragere: m n ; ii2 n 3 4 8 , 4 7 ^ 5 5 2 , 34 7 505; 7 512 ;a 542, 7 1; a 344, 84, 83 ;a 598,
phisica
perceptibilis: 318, 74 persuasivus: a 5 52, 34 38; a 600, 40 ; et passim
De physicis: a 536, 4, 13; a 560, /; a 364, 43; a
percipere: I29n; 252, 2; 262, 74; 264, 2; 304, perterritus: 350, p; 372, 26 pons: 7488, 1 0 - 1 3
57 2 ,1 1 ; cf. D e phisicis
7 >c 463 i r 514 pertractus: v 178, 7 porositas: 232, 2/
physicus: n o n ; cf. phisicus
percurrere: i i m p l ; n z n p l pertransire: 6411 p l; J4n; ioon; 224, 77; 276, porosus: 230, /, p, 16; 232, i p , 22; c 490, 3 p -
phyton: 380, 61; 38m; cf. phiton, pithon,
percussio: 306,34 13 ; 278, p; 282, p; 4 14 ,3p, 40, 41, 42p l; 420, 40
python
percutere: 236, 24; 316, 40; 378,^7 3 P p l; 426, 20, 22; c 465, 13; c 498 p l ; c 500 Porphyrius: 266, 33
phytonicus: v 370,17 ; cf. phitonicus
perditio: c 470 p l; c 501 p l; c 504 p l; c 505 p l ; c 506p l ; c 511, portio: 53n; 94n; 178, 1 6 p l; 198, 8; 200, 37;
Pictagoras: a 364, 44
perfecte: ii3 n ; 174, 74 4 7 -4 8 p l ; 7 5 12 p l ; c 513 p l ; c 514 p l ; c 315 202, 38, 42, 43, 43, 47, 4P, 4, 4-3 ; 210, 18;
pietas: 328, 7
perfectio: 79n pl; 8on; 9 m pl; i26n; 160, 28; p l ; a 560, 73; a 366, 74; a 592, 43, 48, 1; a 212, 12, 14; 220, 7; 222, 41, 46; 236, 13; 7
piger: 7488
238, 2; 240, 28; 2 76 , 13 602,18; a 608,3, 4, 3, 6; a 616, 46 444; a 348, I 3 3 ; a 356, 37; a 357m a 628, 36,
pigritia: 7 4 3 7 ,1 3 - 1 3
D e perfectionibus specierum: ~i<pnpl; 216, 18 pertransitus: 64n; 278, 20; 282, 8, p; 392, 10 3 7 , 38, 42; a 630, 46, 36, 3 7; a 632, 84
pilus: 7477
perfectus: 238, 6, p-10 pl, 13, 18 -ip ; 240, 30, p l, 1 2 p l ; 426, 21, 22; c 498p l ; c 499p l; c 300 positio : 5 m; 6on; 17G, 3 7
pipus: 228, 23
3 i , 3 Jpl\ 244, 9 ; 246, 1 3 i 2 74 , 18; $12,3ppl, p l; c 301; 7 503 p l; c 506p l; c 513 p l; c 5 1 4 p l; piramidalis: 5 in ; v 210, i 3 - i 6 ; v 256,13; 7458, positus: 64n; io8n p l; 109m m n ; 182, 30;
41; 324, 3; 332, 3, 8, 10, 13; 334, 4; a 53m ; 7513 p l ; a 6 o 2 , 18; a 608, 3, 4 p l 4-2 0; cf. pyramidalis 208, 23; 210, i p ; 222, 23, 28, 37 ; 224, 38;
a 564, 43 pertranssire: av 366, 74 228, 22; 230, 46, p; 238, 13; 238, 22; 32G,3;
piramis: ji n ; i3on; v 210, 1 3 - 1 6 ; cf. pyramis
perficere: 1 1 3n pl; c 491 perturbatio: 332,^^ 402, 30; 7473, 3 1 - 3 6 ; a 630, 48
piscator: 294, 10
perforatus: 2x0, 1 0 pervenire: a 630, 77 possibilis: 8on p l; i2on p l ; 129m i3on; 268,
piscis: 294, 10, 1 1
perfrui: 334, 23 pes: 63np l; 64np l; G^npl; 414, i p , 20, 41, 42, p ; 332, 6
pithon: v 368, 33; cf. phiton, phyton, python
perfundere: 358,40 43; c 483,1 7 - 1 8 ; 7 509; 7 5 n , 4 7 - 4 8 p l ; c 312 possibilitas: 332, 7, p
placere: 93m 246, 7, 8; 326, 13; c 477, 8 -12; c
periculum: 352,^/; 360,10 p l ; a 356, / 3; a 558, 36; a 608, 6 posterior: 6 m ; 109m c 461, 3
481, 1 6 - 1 8 ; 7486, 68-6p; 7494, i p - 2 0
perimere: 344, 26 pestifer: 302, 22; 360, 3 , 1 4 ; 364, 33 posterius: 5 m p l; 272, 3; 274, 23
planeta: 8n; i2n; n o n p l ; 296, 3; 7443 p l
permanens: 158, 10; 170, 12; 226, 83, 87; 284, pestilens: 362, 18, ip postilla: 384, //
planicies: 250, i p , 7; 254, 22
6; 298, 3; 300, 10, 21, 22, 23, 24, 23pl, 2p, pestilentia: 362, 20 planta: 232, 6; 236, 6 , 1 3 ; 354, p; 358, 36 potens: H 3 n ; 348, 37; 7489
36; 304, 4; c 462, 1 0 - 1 1 pl; cf. res perma­ pestis: 360, 12; 7485, 20-23 planus: 9on p l ; 93n; io8n; m n p l ; ii2 n p l ; potentia: 8 n p l; 5 3 n p l; 8on; H 3 n ; 138, 8, p,
nens Petrus: 254, 77; 376, 27 10; 160, 3 1; 248, 1, 13; 250, 21, 12, 13; 236,
178, 17, 2; 180, 2; 184, 17 ; 208, /7, 18,
 686
Selective Index of Latin Terms Selective Index of Latin Terms 687
4; zSz, n ; 268, 8, 9; 328, 4; 334, 17; 346,
previdere: 160, 34; 252, 2; 254, 8; 256, 10, 2 1;
promotio: 7482,3 1 - 3 3 proportionabilis: v 190, 8, 1 3 - 1 6 ; 218, 30, 3 1;
3 4 8 , / i ! 366, 8, 72; 374,34, 6; 384, <L>;7
258, 2; 262,1 2 ,1 6 ; cf. praevidere
463 ; 7469; 7 473, 7 1 - 7 6 p l ; a 546, 116; 0 614, propagatio: 234,2 4 220, 13; 220, 13; 222, 24, 26; 224, 3 1; 0 628,
primarius: 308, 3 1-3 2
jS propheta: 252, 7 7 ,18; 254,1 4 , 1 3 - 1 6 ; 258, 24; 30; 0 630, /7, 3 3 p l
primitus: 326, 27
praedicere: c 459, 2 1 - 2 7 ; c 486; cf. predicere 262, 26; 264, 29, 13; 266, 33, 39; 368, 3 1 ; c proportionabilitas: v 2 2 0 ,1 6
primordius: c 488; a 549n
praedictio: 7486 4 5 7 » 1 3 - 1 J P h c 4601 3 3 -3 7 proportionabiliter: 7jn/5/; 7466, 13 -2 3
principalis: 79n; 248, 7/57476
praemissus: 0 53m ; cf. premissus prophetare: 254, 1 4 - 1 3 ; 262, 8; 264, 28; 266, proportionalis: 6on p l; 61 n p l; 64n p l; 65n p l;
principaliter: 96n; c 48 8, 1 0 - 1 3 ; et passim
praenoscere: 7486; cf. prenoscere 27-28 ; c 4 5 7 ,1 3 - 1 3 84n p l; 8/n p l; io8n; io9n p l; n o n ; 127ns
principium: 13ns io 8 n p l; io y n p l; 11 in ; i28n;
praesens: 26m ; 74 6 2 ,1 0 - 1 1 ; cf. presens prophetia: 260, 13; 26m ; 262, 23; 264, 17 ; 180, 3, 3, 7, 13; 182, 77, 28, 33; 184, 6, 16,
182, 23; 194, 6, 9; 196, 14; c 445; c 472; c 17 ; 186, 3 1; 188, 6; 190, 7, 8, 13 ; 192, 26;
praesensio: 2690; cf. presensio 266, 24, 32, 34; 362, 44; c 457, 1 3 - 1 3 p l;
488,1 0 -1 3 ; 7489; c 511, 47-48 ; a 542, 72
praeteritus: 26m ; c 460, 3 3 -3 7 ; c 462, 1 0 - 1 1 ; 7 4 8 3 ,1 7 - 1 8 200, 24; 202, 32, 33, 4, 7 5 216, 3 8 5 218, 3 0 5
prior: 7461, 4
c 463 p l; cf. preteritus propheticus: 266, 37; 74 8 3 ,1 7 - 1 8 p l 220, 7/; 224, /7; 226, 72, 14, 13 ; 230, 47;
pristinus: 252, 23; 350, 29
praevidere: 7486; cf. previdere propinquitas: 242, 23, 23-26; 244, 75 7485 236, 6 ; 238, 14; 242, 3 5 290, 16, 28; 292, 26;
prius: j i n p l; 272, 3; 274, 23
pravus: 254 ,19, 21 propinquius: v 238, 20 414, 70, 24; 7 442, 23, 27; c 449, 3 3 -3 6 ; c
privare: 7489
preassumptus: c 509 propinquus: 6 in ; 62n; 210, 3 3 5 242, 24; 372, 472 p l, 7 476 p l; c 492, 3 4 -4 3 p l; 7 496 p l; 7
privatio: 184, 77; 310, 26; 74 8 3 ,1 7 - 1 8
precise: 67 n p l; n $ n ; et passim 72; 384, 33; 7 457, 13 —1 3 5 c 469; 7 487, 1 3 - 497 p l; 7 498 p l; 7 499 />/; 7 500 />/; 7 501; 7
privativus: 99n
precognoscens: 268, 1 3 21; a 592, 43 504/>/; 7 505 />/; 7 506/>/; 7 5 11, 47-48 ; c 513
probabilis: 230, 33; 238, 10; 248, 13 ; 268, 14;
D e predicamentis: a 564, 39 proponere: 84n; 1 io n 57459, 3 - 4 />/57514/>/57515 p l; a 554, 7/50 556, 42 50
366,10; 7438, 7 -9 ; 7454; 7469; a 600, 41 557n; 0 562, 20; 0 563np l; a 564, /3; 0 566,
predicamentum: 272, 9 proporcio: 75n; 76n/>/57509/5/
probabilitas: 220, 1 4
predicere: 262,18; cf. praedicere proporcionalis: 76np l; c 509; a v 570, 1 1 3 - 1 4 ; <$7; 0 586, 20; 0 588, 2/; 0 612, 20, 22, 2/; 0
probabiliter: 218,4 2 ; 242, 6
preexistens: 7497 cf. proportionalis 626, 72; 0 628, 4050 630, 30
probare: 8np l; 9np l; 6on; 6$n; 6411; 65n; 74n proportionalitas: 416, 24; 0 547n/>/; 0 550, 33;
prefinitus: 262,10 proportio: 6np l; ~;npl; 8n; 9n; 53n ; 54np l;
p l; 7 7n p l; j 8 n p l ; 830; 84n; %-jnpl; y ^ n p l; 0562, 7<y; 0 563ns 0 586, 2050588, 2/505 92,
premissus: 8on; 162, 32, 62; 194, 2; 208, 24; 65n p l; 67n p l; 790; 8on p l; 87 p l; 9on p l;
99n; ioon; 130ns 184, 20; 202, 48, 3 1; 342, 7
226, 84; 232, 9; 246, 23; 270, 16; 280, 39; io i n p l; m n ; n ^ n p l ; ii4 n ; w ^ n p l; n 6 n ;
35 410, 23; 416, 20; 420, 16; 426, 13 ; 7465, proportionaliter: ji n ; 6on; 64n; 166, /2 ; 182,
282, 4; 314, 4; 324, /; 372, 2; 432, i 7 ; a 598, n 8 n ; H9n; i2on; m n p l; i26n; I27n p l;
1 9 - 2 9 ; 7 487, 2 2 -3 1 p l; c 496p l; c 497; 7300;
29; a 630, 6 9 5cf. praemissus 164, 6, 9; 166, 72, 1 3 - 1 4 , 26; 178, 3 -6 , 6; 2/5 186, 36; 220, 8; 2 2 2 ,3 2 ; 278,37; 290, 27;
750457505 p l ; 7 506 p l ; c 509 p l 57 5x2; 7 513 388, 3; 404, /0; 412, 7; 426, 1 1 ; 430, 4; 432,
premittere: 790; 194,345 3 1 2 ,18; 328, 4 1; 380, 180, 77, 10, 1 1 ; 182, 30 p l; 186, 2/, 26, 27,
p l; 7515 p l; a 532, 68; a 534, 76, 78; a 542,
jo 2 8 p l, 29; 1 9 2 ,13, 16, 2 3 p l, 23, 26, 2 8 p l, 30, 13, 18; a 530, /450 550, 3350 554, 2350 568,
83; a 544, 96, 108; a 548, 12 ; a 598, 3/, 38; a 9 0 ;a 592, 4/
prenoscere: 378, 43; cf. praenoscere 32; 194, 47, 48; 200, 19 -2 0 , 22; 214, 3, 6;
600, 47, 2, 4; a 630, 49; a 632, 83, 89
prenosticare: 262, 24 216, 2 7 , 33 5 218, /2, 33, 34, 6 1-6 2 , 63 p l; proportionari: 119ns 184, 70; 200, 2<?; 284, 7;
probatio: I2n; 162, 3 6 5 340, 75 7 492, 3 4 -4 3 ; c 314, <^, 7 0 , 1 1 ; 316,3^5414, ^/5 45 5
prenuntiare: 260, 28 220, 12; 222, 33, 34; 228, 38; 232, 20 p l; 7
504; a 546, 1 1 3 ; a 560, 80; a 600, 4; a 604, 238, 3, 22, 24; 240, 27, 33, 4, 3, 6, 7; 242, proportionatus: ii3 n ; i i 5 n p l; n 8 n ; 310, 70;
prenuntiatio: 256, 1 2 - 1 3 ; *64, 1 7 - 1 8
20; a 606, 3 7 5a 618, /7
preostendere: 424, 44 7 /, 7 9, 20, 23, 27, 8; 2 4 4 ,9 ; 246,18, 20; 248, 7 45 5 ^ / ; 7456
problema: a 612, 28
preparatorius: 352, 33» l6 , 21; 278, 23, 36; 288, 4, 7; 300, 7 7 , 7 / 5 propositio: 83n; 92n p l; 93m 94n p l; 96n;
procedere: 5 in; 79ns 7 492, 3 4 -4 3 ; a 548, 6 5 a 11 on; 119ns i2on p l; 1 2 m 50 536, 18; a 538,
preposterus: 262, 1 3 302, 47; 307n; 312, 2 1, 2 2 p l, 23, 23, 26, 27,
549n 33; 0 540, 48, 36; a 600, 40, 4<f, 1, 4, 6 ;a 602,
presagium: 258,1 6 28; 314, 4 3 p l, 49, 30, 31 p l, 33; 7442, 2 8 p l;
processus: j i n p l; c 5 00 575 04 5053m
presens: 268,19; cf. praesens 7 443, 48p l ; c 455 p l; c 456p l; c 4705 7 4 7 2 p l; 18; 0 608, 4/
procreatio: 246, 21
presensatio: ^268, 24 c 473, 3 1 - 3 6 p l; c 474p l; c 476 p l; c 494, 1 9 - propositum: 8n; i2n; 62n; 8on; 9on; 158, 3;
prodere: 298,13 ; 7488
presensio: 268, 24; cf. praesensio 20 p l; c 496 p l; 7 497 p l; c 498 p l; c 499 p l; c 174, 29; 192, 30; 242, 7 <?; 256, 3; 276, 77;
prodigium: 7 481, 7 6 - 1 8 ; 7 490
presentabilis: 96n 50157504/5/57511, 4 7 -4 8 /5/57512/>/57513 3 4 2 , i i i 3 3 2»i 7 ; ^ 4 9 3 ; * 5 4 °, / / ; <2 546, t^ 5>
producere: 130 p l; 107ns n 8 n ; 7 4725 7 494, proprietas: 53n; 164, /5 194, 36; 307ns c 490
presentatio: v 268, 24 p l; 7 5 145 7 5 p l; a 528, 18; a 532, 68, 69; a
19 -2 0 ; a 628, 26
presentia: 238, 34; 340,3 3 536, 16, 20, 21; a 538, 22, 24, 23, 28 p l; a proprius: 8on; 264, 7, <?; 266, 23; 7 453, 13 p l;
profunditas: 92ns 0 530, 47, 49
presentire: 258,12; 260, 23 539np l; a 540, 43, 44, 32, 3 4 p l; a 542, 61; a 7 45 9 ,3 -4 57 462 57 489
profundus: 428, 12; 430, 42, 43; c 488, 1 0 -1 3 protensio: n 8 n
presupositus: a 630, 39 546, 720 p l, 1 2 1 , 128; a 547n; a 554, 22, 28,
progenies: 236, 28-29
presupponere: c 504p l; a 528, 30 32; a 556, 43, 4 6 p l, 48, 49, 32; a 5 57n p l; a protensus: 424, /
proicere: i2n; 378,3 0 ,3 3
preteritus: 13on; cf. praeteritus 558, 60 p l, 62; a 5630; a 567 n; a 602, 14 p l, protraccio: 77ns 78n
projectrix: iogn
pretermittere: 276, 2 13 p l ; a 610, 70, 7 7 p l, 12 p l, 13 p l, 14 p l, 13 protractio: 1 i9n
projicere: soyn p l; n o n p l
pretiosus: 234, /5238, 34 p l, 1 6 p l ; a 6 i 2 , 1 7 p l, 18, 19, 20, 21 p l, 22, 23, protrahere: 74ns 76ns 77np l; 78np l; 90ns 172,
proles: 246, 22
prevalens: 7489 24, 23, 26, 27; a 626, 16, 17 , 18; a 628, 20, 35 186, 12; 192, 205 194, 38, 39; 198, 16;
prolixitas: a 610, 9
prevenire: 380, 43 27, 27, 29 50632, 77, 79, 80, 87 200, 775 210, <?; 410, 22, 23, 245 430, 2(?; 0
prolixus: 7469
proportio proportionum: 0614, 38; a 61 ~jn 546, 73250548, 7<5/ 0 606,375 0 628, 24
 688
p roverbiu m : 322, 16; 326, i o \ c 4 8 1 ,16-18
p rovidere: 266, 21
p rovocare: 479
proxim us: n o n ; 208, 32; 7464, 27-32
pruritus: 378, 44
psalmista: 380, 73
psalmus: 368, 3 1 ; 393n
psalterium : 322, 1 6
puella: 342, 7
puer: 342, 3, 8, 10; 348, 47; 350, 4; c 483
puerilis: c 482, 47-63
pulcher: ii3 n ; 162, 33; 238, 7, 13; 240, 33, 36,
37, 10; 242, 33; 296, 7, 7 0 ; 298, 10, 12; 308,
6, 8, 10; 310, 22; 312, 42; 314, 3, 7, 11; 320,
43; 322, /2; 324, 4, 7, <?, 16; $z6, 2, 4, 6, 8,
9, 7/, 20, 27, 2<?; 390, 36; 430, 2<?; 7 456,
39-40 pl; 7477, <?> *2
pulcritudo 0r p u lch ritu d o : 160, 27, 2^; 162,4/,
48, 49, 30, 31; v 162, /4, // ; 238, /, /, 4, 7;
240, 39, 7; 296, 7, 4; 308, 7, 4, 77, 7/; 310,
21, 27, 7, / ; 312, / / , /<?; 314, /7 ; 316, 16;
318, 7; 320, 31, 32, 49, 30; 322, 7, 4, 77, 24;
324, 44, 4, (?; 328, 40; v 328, 40; 376, 24, 2/;
384, 4?
pulla: 356, 74
pulm entum : 246, <?
pulsare: 304, 10
pulsus: 304, 4, 8
punctalis: a 628, 42/»/
punctaliter: 93n
punctualis: 174, 29; 292, 6, 7, 77; 394, 7<?
punctum : 63n; 6 7n pl; -;Gnpl; 7711 pl; 8gnpl;
9 m ; 93n pl; 97n pl; 99n pl; io3 n; n o n ;
n 6 n ; 164, 4, 7; 166, 77, 24; 168, 40; 178, /,
6, 8, 9 pl, 10 pl, 11; 180, 72, 77, 8, 11, 12 pl;
182, 29; 184, 24; 188, 74, 24; 192, 74, 77, 2/,
27, 2#, 27, 47, 42; 194, 44, 4<5'; 200, 19, 21,
29, 30; 210, 7; 212, 22, 24; 214, 27, 74; 7466,
13 -2 3 pl; c 504pl; c 505; a 528, 42, 44; a 530,
30; a 532, 4 (?, 97; a 546, 742; a 548, 16; a
550, 24, 42; £ 568, 42, 74; a 584, 10, 14; a
586, 19 pl; a 626, 11, 16; a 628, 23, 26, 28,
39; a 630, 63; a 632, 76 (Passages where the
nominative is ambiguous are referred to punc­
tum.)
punctus: 740 pl; 7711 pl; 78n; 194, 4, 4, /, 6, 9,
10; 196, 20; 224, 64, 66, 68, 71 pl, 73, 77; c
438, 7-9 pl; c 466, 13-23; c 492, 34-43 pl; a
530, /4; a 53 m ; a 532, 64; a 568, 84, 86pl,
88;a 572, /, 7
Selective Index of Latin Terms
pungere: 226, 7
pun gitivus: 228, 24, 26
puniceus: c 45 5
pupilla: 344, 27, 22, 23, 30; 384, 60; c 481,
19 -2 1
purgare: 364, 36
purgativus: 302, 20
purgatorium : 364, 47; 7486, 47-30
purificatus: 254, 9
puritas: 248, 24; 2 5 4 , 10
purpureus: 7455; 7456
purus: 7n; i2 8n ; 254, /, 19
putare: 266, 24
puteus: 360, 10; 364, 49
putredo: 370, 1 2
putrefactio: 234, 28; 360, 6 ; c 453, 28-29
putrescere: 7453, 28-29
pyram idalis: 210, 14; v 210, 13, 16; 226, 3;
2 56 , 1 3 ; cf. piramidalis
pyram idaliter: 228, 41; 230, 1 1
pyram is: 210, 14, 13, 1 6 p l; 226, 6, 12, 16, 17 ;
228, 22; 230, 4/, 12; 7 448, 13; cf. piramis
pyram oides: 7451
pyth on : v 368, 49; v 380, 61; 3 8 m ; cf. phiton,
phyton, pithon
quadrangularis: 97n; 160, 16; 188, 1; a 580, 9
quadrangulius: v 534, 7 7 - 7 9 p l; v 336, 6; v 538,
quadrangulum : a 554, 29
quadrangulus: 6711; 77n p l; 7811 p l; 96n; 99n p l;
io o n p l; 1 7 8 , 19; 180, 18; 188, 2, 3 ,6 ; 190, 7,
1 0 p l, 1 3 , 1 9 p l, 2, 9; 194, 38, 40; \C)6, 3; 208,
10; 2 1 2 , 1 1 , 12, 20; 290, 24; 386, 22, 24; 404,
74; 408, 74; 410, 16, 18, 21, 23, 26, 27, 28,
30; c 466, 74-24; a 526, 1; a 530, 61; a 532,
74; a 536, 6; a 540, 44; a 542, 64, 83; a 344,
86, 93; a 352, /4; a 368, 99; a 598, 30 p l, 32,
33, 34, 3 6 p l; a 600, 4; a 602, 7 p l, 8, 10, 77,
7 2 ; a 604, 22, 24, 2/; a 626, 74, 74; # 630,
34
quadrangulus rectangulus: 180, 18; 188, 2, 9;
190, 7, 2; 208, 10; 212, 7 7 , 20; 290, 24; (2
544,
quadratum : \oyn pl; 240, 11; 386, 24; 7 465,
19 -2 9 ; 7 476; <2 538, 42; a 540, 44; « 542, 44,
4 4 ; <2 544, 72; <2 560, 4, 74; a 364, 4 , 40, 47
p l; a 5650; a 568, 94; a 570, 7 7 7 , 112 ; a 580,
3; a 58m ; a 590, 30; a 6oc, 6; a 602, <?, 7 p l,
10, 1 1 , 12, 13; et passim
Selective Index of Latin Terms
quadratura: 224, 77; 7450, 76-7 7
quadratus: 412, 8; c 473 ; a 562, 20, 22, 23, 34,
3 9 ;a ^G^n; a 5G4, 3 7 p l
quadrilaterus: a 58m ; a 604, 19, 20, 2 4 pl, 26;
a 606, 44, 36; a 608, 44, 44, 7
q u a d r u p l o : G$n; G^n; 4x4, 30, 37; 416, 7 7 ;
420, 47; 428, 19; c 496; 7 500; 7 504 pl; c
506 pl
quadruplus: 64n; 650; 312, 30; 414, 24, 26,38,
40; 416, 4; 420, 7 8pl; 424, 7; 7 499 pl; c 500
pl; c 501 pl; c 504 pl; c 305; c 306; 7 511, 4 7-
48 ;c 515 p l; a 538, 47;*? 556, /2; <2602, 7, 7 7 ,
7 2 , 7/ />/; a 608, 7 , 4; # 610, 74, 7 / ; 614,
33
qualificatus: 392, 10, 11
qualitas: 7 n pl; 54n; 57n; 6on pl; 6 i n pl; G$n
pl; pGn; 77W, 78n; 830 pl; 840 pl; 92n pl;
93n pl; io o n ; ii3 n pl; H 4 n ; pl; n 6 n
pl; \ \7s\pl; n 8 n pl; ii9 n ; i2 o n ; 1 2 m ; 158,
7, 11, 13 pl; 160, 14 pl, 13, 1 6 pl, 20 pl, 24,
27; 162, 67, 69; 164, 70, 73, 73; 166, 7 2 , 44;
168, 42, 7 , 4, 7, 7 7 , 74; 170, 7 <?, 24, 7 , 2, 4, /,
7 0 , 7 2 , 74; I72, 24, 2/, 27, 7 , 2; 174, 6, 7, 9,
10, I I , l6, l8, 20, 29, 30; 176, 42, 38, 39, 42,
1, 2, 4, 7; 178, 7 0 , 74, 77, 4, 4, /; 180, 74, 7 <?,
2, 4, 9 pl, 13; 182, 74, 7 /, 7 7 , 2 7 , 22, 24, 2/;
184, 7 , 2, /, 7, 7, 74, 77, 7 <?, 77; 186, 44, 44,
7, 2, 4, /, 7, 7 7 ; 188, 7 4 , 7 /, l6 , 19, 21, 24, 27,
I, 2, 6; I90, 7, 7 7 , 74, 77, 20, 7 , 2, 4, 4, 7;
192, 74, 7 8, 27; 194, 44, 47, 44, 49, 8, 9, 77;
196, 72 , 74, 7 /, 7 6, 17 pl, 20, 22, 23, 3, 6, 7,
8; 198, 77, 74, 16, 12, 14; 200, 26, 27, 39, 37;
202, 47, 47, 44, 48; 204, <5"; 206, 2/, 47; 208,
7, 3 , /, 7 , £ ./>/, 7 0 , 7 2 , 74, 74, 7/, 16, 18,
20, 24, 29, 30, 31; 2 X0, 44, 7 , 4, 4, (5”, 7, 7 0 ,
72, 74, 7/; 212, 2, 74, 74, 7 (5"; 214, 44, 4; 218,
/7, 44; 222, 47; 224, ///)/; 226, <?/, 2, 7 7 , 74,
7/, 16, 18, 19; 228, 2 7 , 24, 23, 28, 44; 230,
47, 4$, 30, 94, 99, 3, 8, 10, 11, 17; 232, 77,
20, 22, 24, 2 (5) 27, 7, 7 7 ; 234, 7 (5, 2 7 , 40, 44;
236, <5", 72 , 74, 2(5, 27, 42; 238, 7, 74, 7(?, 20,
24, 24, 2/; 240, 27, 27, 47, 44, 44; 242, 74,
7/, 20, 22, 2<f; 244, 7, 7 0 , 7 (f; 248, 7 (5", 22, 24,
4; 250, /; 266, 21; 276, (?, 77; 296, 4 , 77, 74;
300, 72, 7(5", 77, 20, 27; 304, 24; c 455 pl; c
462, 74; c 469 pl; c 470 />/; a 536, (?; <2 538,
2/, 2(5) 27, 40 pl, 31, 34, 36; a 540, 44, 4 / p/,
47, /4; a 542, 04, 4 /, 69, 70, 74, 77, 82; a
544, 84, 108, 109, 110; a 588, 23pl, 26; a 590,
3 i, 33, 34, 3 3 pl', a 592, 47; a 626, 7, 7,
689
72; a 628, 77, 22, 47, 42, 39, 36, 43; a 630,
43, 33, 63, 66; et passim ubique
qualitative: 248, 9 , 1 1 , 1 6
qualitativus: 204, 8; 232, 23; 236, 13 , 20; 230,
12; 286, 30
quallitas: v 544, 77; v 352, 31; v 572, 2 p l
quantitas: 6n; 33n p l ; 54n.pl; 67ns 79n pl; 8on
pl; 84n pl; 97n; n i n pl; 158, 13; 160, 47;
16 4 ,4 ; 166, 26; 172, 7 , 2; 174, 8; 188,29, 28;
200, 47, 44; 214, 11; 220, 3; 222, 44; 256, 4 ,
7, (?; 276, 7 , 4, 4 , 7<?/>/, 4; 313 n ; 7438, 3 pl,
7-9 pl; 7442, 28; 74 55pl; 7458, 4-20; 7461,
23-29; 7462, 74; c 474pl; 7485pl; 74 9 2 ,4 4 -
44; 7 509; a 330, /2, 33, 97; a 542, 70; a
547m a 560, 7; a 56 3 ^ a 600, 44, 2; a 604,
22; ^ 618, / ; a 634, 72, 74
quantitative: 248, 7; 302, 47
quantitativus: 79n />/; 160, 41; 230, 4 ; 250,77;
282, 7 2 , 74; 284, 2; 288, 44; 300, 47
quantum libet: 8qn p l
quaternarius: 7 445; 7 446
quidditas: c 462, 74
quies: 8n; i n n ; 330, 18
quiescere: I2n p l; 224, 62; 272, 7; 282, 7
quinternarius: 7 446 p l
quintuplus: 7499
Rabi M oyses E gip tius: 254, 74
racio: 78n; c 309; cf. ratio
radere: 254, 1 1 ; 2550
radialis: j i n
radicalis: n 6 n ; 232, 24, 23, 1 1 ; 234, 40, 42;
238,20
radicare: n 8n
radiosus: 52n
radius: 252, 7; 258, 4 ; 268, 17 ; 374, 44; 384,
4 7; 7 439 />/; 7 459, 4 -4 />/; 7 483, 1 7 - 1 8 ; 7
485
radix: 162, / 4 , /7, 4 0 p l; 236, 77; 336, 2; 338,
7, 74; 348, 42; 352, /0; 334, 64, 1, 2, 3, 9;
358, 90 p l, 94; 370, 8; 7433, 3-33', a 560, 74;
(2 562, 24; 632, 89; a G54, 9 1, 92
rarefactio: 65m 84m 280, 44, 4/, 44; 404, 27;
428, 72 , 74
raritas: 2 3 0 , 17, 18; 232, 20, 2 7 ; 300,12, 13, 14,
13, 23
rarus: 230, 9, 16; 3050; 310, 12 p l; 328, 3 1;
384, 47; 404, 28; 7470
ratio: 7n; 8n pl; 90; i2 n ; 790 pl; 8on pl;
83m 87n; 92n; io8n pl; io9n pl; i i i n pl;
 690 Selective Index of Latin Terms 691
Selective Index of Latin Terms

i i j n p l) 12811; 166, 13 ) 206, 19 p i) 216, 34, 37) 322, 30) 374, 74, 13 )4 0 4 , 2 1 ; a 568, 9 1) a restituere: c 478, 2 6 -2 7
recurrere: 1 1 8n; c 480,1 p i) c 481; c 484
3 7 p i) 218, 43, 4J, 47, 60, 6 i) 220, 13, 18) reddere: 294, 9 570, 99) a 612, 29) a 614, 32, 33 resultancia: 780p l
222, 49) 230, 4<f, 48, 49, 30, 4) 236, 29) 244, remotus: 6211; 210, 36) 248, 74; 310, 13) a 592, resultare: 830; 840; ii9 n ;a $62,33
redigere: ii5 n
// ; 296, 24; 298, 14) 304, 14) 332, //; 336, 43 , 46 resumere: 424,3
reducere: 63n; 84np i) io3n; i i 3 n p i) 282, 22,
i / ; 338, 342, i ; <^455; ^462, 74; 7 474^/; removere: c 490; 7505 p l) c 506 resurrectio: 332,13) c 487, 2 1 - 3 1
24\ 284, 38) 308, /7 ; 332, 8) 372, 23) 382,
r 512; c 514; 530, 47; a 53 m ; <2 536, a repellere: 7434; 7483 retardare: 9np l) io8np l) 1090
23 i c 5 * 5 ) a 5 38) a 548, 6 ,7
546, 1 13 , u y , a 350, 24) a 560, 3, 7) a 564, repercutere: 348, 31 retardatio: 8n; 9n; io8n
reducibilis: 282, 4; 434, 26
43, 34) a 608, 49) a 6 30, 73 reperibilis: 226, 87 retentio 17483,7 7 - 1 8
reductive: 7438, 7 -9
ratio naturalis : 33 6 ,3 3 redundare: $ $ 2 ,3 1 repetitus: c 477, 8 -12 rethe: 294,1 0 ,1 2 p l
rationabilis: 226, io ) 238, 12 ) 332, 7; 372, 23) refellere: 8on p i replicatio: 334,3 0 retractio: 346, 20
382, 29) a 5 5 8, 7 1 repraesentare: n o n p l retrahere: 346, 22, 24; 7478, 2 6 -2 7
referre: 109n; i n n p i
rationabiliter: 318, 9) 372, 8) 390, /7; 7491 reflectere: 232, 7; c 439, 3 -4 ) c 483 representare: 87np l) 93n; io3n; 236, 6, 9, 17 ) retroactus: 260, 1 2
rationalis: 7n; 5 3n; 54n; 87npi) iz-jnpl) 202, 258, 3 , 4 ) 260, 3, 4, 3) c 459, 3 -4 reubarbarum: 7 45 4
reflexio: 304,1 2 ; 7439,3 - 4 4?/; 7 48 3; 7 48 3, 1 7 - 1 8
6) 204, 9, 10, 12, 16) 206, 27, 3 1 ) 216, 33) reflexus: 258, 6 representativus: 87n revelare: 254, 20, 23) 262, 9 ,1 3 , 23
222, 44) 240, 6 p i) c 444; 7 473, 3 1-3 6 ) c 474; reprobare: 8n revelatio: 1290; 254, 72; 262, 26) 346, 32) c
refocillare: 3370
7 476 p i ) c 4 9 4 , 1 9 -2 0 p i) a 567n reformare: 174,2 6 repugnantia: 75n 49,2, 3 1 - 3 3 p l) 7483
raucus: 310, // refrigerare: 7454 repulsivus: 244, 20 reverbere: 348, 32
realis : 300, /<?; a 5 38, 70 regirare: 314,9 repungere: a 628, 32 revocatio: 346, 20
recedere: 214, /0; 224, 69, 78, 79) 324, / /; regressus: 330, 1 3 res: 168, 40) 176, 38) 178, 13 ) 256, 6, 7, 17 ) revolutio: 274,3 2 ,3 4
337n ; 400, 7463 264, /, 1 1 , 14, 18, 20) 268, 6, 17 , 19, 21 p l) revolvere: 6n; 278, 74; 7464, 27-3 2
regula: n o n ; 12 -jn p l) 204, 7 7 ^ 4 9 4 ,1 9 - 2 0 p i)
receptio: 248,1 0 a 616, 42 2 72 ,1 0 , 1 1 , 1 3 ) 2 74 ,13 ,3 8 ) 302,4 8 ) $ 2 6 ,12 ) rex: 266,2 3
recipere: 252, /; 2 6 8 , 18 364, 64) 374, 33) c 439, 40-47; 7445; 7458, Romanus: 266, 28
regularis: ion; 272, 2 8 ,3 0 ) 274, 29)0 461, 2 3 -
recludere: 346, 24; 348, 34) 362, 23) a 565n 2 7 )1 4 6 4 , 2 7 -3 2 p i) c 463, 7 ~ io -,a 368, 83p i) 4 -2 0 p l) c 459, 3 - 4 p l) c 304) a 630, 39 r o ta :1 in
reclusio: 162, /<?; 344, 2; 346, 20) 3 4 8 ,^ ; 350, res mutabilis \ 2 7 4 ,3 8 ) c 461, 4 rotundus: 210, 7/; 230, 4/; 240, 3 7 , 38) c 456,
a 570 ,10 1
3, 13, 77; 352,^2; 370,/ regularitas: 272, 23, 2 7 ,3 2 res permanens 17491, 16 -3 3 39-40
recollectio: 162, /2; 3 2 4 , 1 res publica: 329n rubeus: 370, io ) 7456; 7458
regulariter: 194,3 ,1 0 ) 19 6 ,1 2 , 1 3 , 1 9 ) 278, 26)
recolligere: 79n; 346, 22; c 513 res successiva: 7 461 , 4 ; 7 491 , 7 6-33 rupes: 362,2 9
279n
recom pensare: 62n relatio: 190, 20; 192, io ) 280, 39) 300, 24; cf. res temporalis: 2 72 ,1 0 p l
recom pensatio: 196, 21, 23) a 568, 98 rellatio res visa: 268, 6,13, 16, 21 pl, 22 sacer: 236,18) 230, 2 1
recreare: 8n residuum: 64n pl) 84n; 402, 24; 414, 42; 416, sacerdos: 254, 7 / ; 266,42
relativus: 78n; 7469; a 339n; a 5570
rectangulla: a v 530, 61 relatus: 240, 2 4, 3, 8, 29) 418, 33) 420, 6) 432, 72; 7 492, Sacra Scriptura: 230, 27; 338, 30) 388, 41
rectangulus: 670pi) 68n; 76n; 77n pi) m n pi) relaxatio: 2 5o, 9 34-43 p l ) c 496 pl) 7497 pl) c 300 pl) c 501 pl) Sacre Littere: 336, 26) 346, 29
m n ; 530, 6 1 ; a 544, 9 3 )a $ S m p l) a 599n; relevare: 330,3 3 c $04) c $0$ p l ) c $06p l ) c $09pl) a 612, 23 sacrificia: 340, 6) c 479, 23-24
a 618, 4; a 630, 34 rellatio: c 46(3p i residuus: 11 on; c 500 pl) c 506 sacrilegus: 338, 1 6
rectificare: 208, 27; 224, /7 ; 2250 resistentia: 6n; 7 n pl) 8n pl) 9n pl) 64n; a 346, sagitta: 1 2n; a 6 32, 79
relucere: 232, 10, 14) 238, 9) 260, 7; 370, 13
rectilineus: 8on p i) 870 p i) 90n p l) 1030; 316, remanere: c 492,3 4 -4 3 p i) c 305; etpassim 116) a 6 14 , 39 salus: 7482,3 1-3 3
39) a 330, 42; 3 70 , 10 6 remissibilis: 8n; n $ n )t> 282, 28) 300, 13, 27) c resistere: 6n; 7n; 8n p l) 9n p l) io9n; cf. res- salutiferus: 7 478, 2 6 -2 7
rectitudo: 214, 10 p i) 396, 22; 398, 2, 2^; c 469 sistere salvare: i2n p l) ii7 n p l) i28n; 7 487, 2 2 -3 1
438, 4-20 remissio: 8np l) 56n; 62n; 890p l) 234, 23, 33) reso lvere: 7435 538, 4<?;<» 549n Salvator: 262, 21
rectus: 9n; 77n; 78n; 790; 9on; 9 m ; 9 2 n p i) 238, 22) 300, 18) 302, 4, 19) 304, 24; 306, resonantia: 316 ,3 3 ,3 6 sanare: 330,3 7 ) $ 6 6 ,18 ) 7454
93n p i) 94n; io8n p i) io9n p i) n o n p i) 164, resonare: 306, 24, 42; 316, 7/, 20; 322, 4 sanitas: 356, 19) 376, 72; 382, 32) c 470; 7 478
3 7 , 3 9 , 4 2 ', 3 ° 7 n ; 3 IO> 3 3 2> 4 7 ; 4 * 8 , -245
10) 178, 13) 184, 2, 3, 13, 20) 186, 32, 2, 4, 7470; a 6 14 ,3 1 , 3 4 ) a 618, /2; et passim respectivus: n o n p l) 7488, 10 -1 3
7) 188, 29, 30, 32) 190, 74, 6) 196, 8) 198, respectus: a 558, 66 p l, 67) a 574, 23) a 592, sanquis: 244, 13) 348, 43) 376, /; 393n; 7456,
remissus: 6on; 6in; 62n; 6 jn ) 8on; 9on; io in ;
13 p i, 6, 9, 10) 208, I I , 23 p i) 214, I I , 12) n 6 n ; i2on; 190, 19) 222, 38) 228, 20, 29) 4i 1 3 - 1 4 ) 7458; 7485, 63-66
216, 7 6, 32, 34) 218, 43) 220, 16, 19) 222, 27 234,19) 7493 ; a 362, 13, 29) a 586, 77; a 390, respicere: a 388, 23, 24 sanus: n 6 n ; 246, 9) 338, io ) c 470; 7 484, 3 2 -
p i, 22, 24) 224, 72; 236, /; 278, 19) 286, 4, 44, 4 /; a 592, 38) a 396, 22, 23, 2 4 p l, 23, 26) respiciens: 76n; 9cm; 7 494, 74; 7495, 74; a 554, 33) 7488,10 -1 3
3, 6, 7, 9) 288, 23, 23) c 448, 7 7 p i) c 466, a 598, 28 p l) et passim 15 Sapientia Salomonis: 382, 13
13 -2 3 ) a 328, 20, 23) a 532, 68, 74) a 534, remittens: 3C>7n respiratio: 3 18 ,16 sapor: 228, 24; 354, 76
82) a 5 39n; a 560, 6) a j 8 i n ; a 384, 10, 14) a remittere: 8n; 75n; ii5 n ; 196,13, 17 , 19) 278, responsorius: 320, 49 sapphirus: 7454
388, 27; a 392, 38) a 608, 48 p i) a 626, 4, 6 32) 298, 27; 302, 9) 306, 36) 3Q7n; 316, 18, ressistere: a v 562, 27; cf. resistere Sardinia: $ 44,26
 692 Selective Index of Latin Terms Selective Index of Latin Terms 693
Sardis: 378, 1 4 sensim: io9n
sibulus: 304, 9 20, 24, 23, 37, 39; 296, 2; 306, 22; 312, 29;
Sarraceni: 346, 29 sensitivus: 248, 2; 250, 12; 268, 9; 346, 27;
siccitas: 1 i6n 318, 4, 6; 322, 28; 32905 384, 44; 7458, 4-20;
Saturnus: 7445p l; c 446p l 348, 3 2 ', 352, 3 1, 32; 362, 20, 2/; 374, 4; 7
siccum: 56n 7 464, 27-32 57 469; a 54711; a 626, 1, 2
sauciatus: 348, 44 490, 2(?-2?
Sidonius: 326, 1 3 simpliciter: 530; 79 p l; 8on; 8405 ioon p l;
Saul: 336, 26 D e sensu et sensato: 238, 8
sidus: 234, 32 1090p l; 160, 27; 196, 75 222, 30, 33, 40, 47;
scabies: 378, 44 sensus: 53m H3n; 11711; 160, 31-, 174, 18;
sigillum: 248, 7; 250, 4 224, /25 228, 43; 238, 2, 7 , 9 , 1 3 ; 2 4 0 ,3 3 ,3 7 ;
scabrositas: 75n 246, 1, 75 248, j , 6, 8, 10, 13-, 250, 7 8 p l, 19;
signabilis: 7n p l 242, 32; 274, 16; 296, 25 308, 10; 332, 3; et
scibilis: 7 474p l; a 566, / 3, /7 3 ° 4 > * 3 ', 305n; 308, 4; 326, 26; 346, 8, 23;
signare: 6on; 74m 92n p l; 182, 2 1, 29; 186, passim
scientia: 52np l; a 528, 36, 77 3 4 8 , 4/, 38, 39; 356, 4/; 358, 44; 362, 2/;
34, 33; 192, 19; 208, 6; 262, 10, 21; 288, 28, sincategreunta: v 2 74 ,19-20
scientia musicalis: 7 4 7 1 ,18 -2 4 364» O ; 384, 41; c 463 ; 7 472; 7 482, 3 1-3 3 ',
2 9 ; a 560, 13; a 562, 22; a 626, 8 sincathegorematicum: 274, 19
scientia speculativa: 7 43 7, / 74 83 ,1 7 - 1 8 pl\ 7484/>/5 7486; 7488
signative: 416, 25 426, 6 sincathegoreunta: v 2 74 ,19 -20
scire: 190, 77; 262, 22; 264, 7 sententia: 93np l
signifficare: a v 546, 132; a v 562, 23; cf. sig­ singularis: 356, 39
sciscitari: 380, 60 Sententiae: 13 on
nificare singulariter: 234, 34
Scithia: 344, 24 sentire: i29n; 306,33; c 486; cf. sencire
significabilis: 7m 74np l singulus: 650.; 1090; m n ; 204, 1 1 , 14, 13 p l;
scriptura: 8on; 250, 7; cf. Sacra Scriptura separatio: 7491
significabilis complexe: 274, 1 6 - 1 7 ; c 462, 208,2 3
scrutinium: 8on separativus: 294, 74
17 -19 situalis: 96n
secans: a 600, 46, 48; a 602, /0, 77; a 604, 20, separatus: 9n; 268, 22
significabilis simpliciter incomplexe: 274, 16; situs: 84n; 160,7/; 176, i / ; 208,7; 260, 2 ,7
2/; a 606, 34, 37; a 618, / septempliciter: 408, 29,30
7462, 1 7 - 1 9 sodalis: 246, 1 4
secare: 184, 24; 226, 8; a 600, 44; a 616, 41 septinarius : 7 446
significans: 274, 32, 33; c 462, 14; c 463, 1 9 - 2 1 sol: 8n; 9np l; i2 n p l; 13005 168, 36; 234, 36;
secretum: 252,1 0 sequi: 8n/>/; 9n; 5 in ;6 o n 56205630; 870; 1150
significare: 7n; 96np l; io in ; 236, 16; 274, 19; 258, 8, 9; 278, 77, 14; 408, 29 p l; c 445; 7
secta: 162, /7 ; 340, 2, 4 pl', 182, 19; 186, 2/; 236, 70; 264, 24; 7 459,
c 462, 14 p l; 7 463, 1 9 - 2 1 p l; cf. signifficare 446
sectio: io3n 3 -4 ; a 528, 36, 38; a 598, 77; a 600, 40, 42', a
significatio: 272, 4, 9; 274, 30; 338, 21; 340, solatium: 326, 13
seculum: 162, /4; 250, 24 602, 77; a 628, 24; a 630, 47, 49', a 632, 79', a
13; 368, 37, 39, 40; 7486, 68-69; a 626, 14; a solicitudo: 7 4795 cf. sollicitudo
secundine: 356, 14, 13 634, 91,92-, et passim
628, 1 9 solidus: 21 o, 6; a 5 47x1
segregare: 0453, 2 8 -2 9 p l seriatum: 7 499
significativus: 368, 43 Solinus: 236, 24; 332, 40; 344, 24; 376, 77
semen: 234, 24; 250, 24; 354, 70; 358, 36; c series: i27n; 414, 77; 422, 27; a 562,3 0
signum: 8n; 162, 39; 248, 21, 23; 252, 14; 304, solitarius: 352,7?
488 serm o: 262, 10; 7454
28; 344, 29; 7445; 74865a 5650 solitudo: 352, 41
semicirculus: 74n p l; 89n; 94n; 178, 16; 180, serotinus 17485, 32-33
silentium: 352,4 3 sollicitudo: 250, 22, 18; 330, 20; cf. solicitudo
74; 198, 8, 13, 7/; 200, 24, 24, 27, 36; 202, serpens: 236, 23, 23, 27; 368, 31-, 7454
similis: 53m 65n; 67n; io8n p l; io9n; ii3 n ; somnus: 7482,3 1-3 3 ', 7486; 7488,1 0 -1 3
-/7 »c 44l , a 540, /0, /7 ; a 542, servare: 9on
ii4 n p l; n 8 n p l 5 12m ; i3on p l 5 166, 13; sompniare: 2 5 2 ,18 ; 268, 12
70, 77; a 544, 84, 99, i o j ; a 548, 77/5 a 560, servire: 7482, 3 1 - 3 3
170, 14; 174, 70, 14; 182, 14, 28; 186, 3 1, sompnium: 252, 2, 18; 356, 26; 380, 60
4; a 566, <57, <*4, 70, 77; <2626, 6, 8, 10; a 628, servitus: 316, 2/
3 3 ; 194, 3; 216, 26; 218, 48, 36; 222, 41, 46; sonare: 3 16 ,14; 322, 1 8
•24» i 0, i / , /r; a 630, 47, 48, 38, /4, <54; a sesquialter: i i 3 n p l; 312, 27; 406, 16, 18; 420,
224, 34; 226, 82; 228, 37, 38; 232, 28; 236, 7, sonorus: 322, 24
632, <?/ I 2 \ 4 2 4 , 5 4 , 3 6, 4 7 ', c 4 5 5 ; ^ 4 7 2; c 4 9 9 ; a 7 / ; 238, 14; 240, 27; 244, 3; 246, 22; 248, sonus: 530 p l; n 8 n ; 11905 i2on; 162, 48 p l,
semidyameter or semidiameter: 7405 220, 6, 7, 614,30; cf. sexqu ialter, sexqu ialterus
2 3 ; 292, 2 6 ; 294, 3 1 ; 7 454; 7 483, 1 7 - 1 8 ; 7 49, 31 p l, 33, 3 3 5 170, 14; 238, 6; 242, 2 4 p l;
y, 70 p l; 222, 29, 34; 224, /7, 63, 64, 66, 67, se s q u io c ta v u s : 7 472
488; 7 489; a 526, 4; a 537n; a 538, 40; a 246, 78 ; 248, 205 304, 7 , 2, 7, 4, 3, 7, 8, 9, 13,
7 1, 72, 77, 78-, 286, 72; a 592, 42/>/, 44 sesquitertius: 312, 28; 424, 38, 41; 7 455; 7
539n;a 55 7n p l; a 56511; a 580, 3; a 58m; a 16; 3050; 306, 17 , 18, 23, 24, 26, 27, 30, 3 1
semimortuus: 330, 24 474; a 608, 7, 4; a 614, 30; cf. sexquitertius
630, 3 4; et passim p l, 3 3 , 3 4 , 33 p l, 3 6, 4 2, 43 , 44 , 4 3 ', 3 ° 8» 4 *>
seminalis: 234, 23 sexquialter: 87np l; 9on; 7 496 p l; c 511, 47-48
similitudinarie: yn; 9n 30, 33, 36, 37, 3$, 1, 3, 3, 10, 13, 14; 310, 18,
seminatus: 310, 12 p l; c 512 p l; c 513 p l; c 514 p l; c 515 p l; cf.
similitudo: 6n; 7n; 54m 79m 8on; 92m 1130 2 1, 22, 23, 28; c 470p l; c 479, 23-24; a 546,
semipedalis: 7510 sesquialter
p l; n 8 n ; 160, 33; 164, 7; 174, 23; 210, 13; 7 27; et passim
sencire: 0476, 8; cf. sentire sexquialterus (/): 7 51257 515 p l; cf. sesquial­
236, 1 1 ; 244, 7; 256, 4; 260, 2; 278, 33; 294, sophisma: 7 503p l
Seneca: 380, 4/ ter
36; 300,12; 322, 70; 7459, 2 1~ 23 5& 546, I 2 2 \ sophisticus: 1300
senectus: 326, 2/; 327n sexquiduplus: 7 511, 4 7 -4 8
1 2 3 ,1 2 9 sopire: 346, 2 3 5 348, 43
senes: 2 52,18; 326, 22, 70 sexquiquartus: 7499 p l
simillis: 7 469; a v 5 68, 9 3 ; cf. similis sopor: 330, 78
senilis: 344, 13 ,3 0 sexquitercius: 870
simius: c 485, 63-66 sors: 7486
sensibilis: ii7 n ; n 8 n ; 166, 4/; 174, 13; 248, sexquitertius: 7 499 p l; c 515; cf. sesquitertius
simphonia: 322, 18; cf. symphonia sortilegia: 380, 38
I 2 > 4, 3, 250, 2; 304, /; 306, 27; 7 476, (? sexternarius: 7 446
simphonicus: 238, 7; 312, 17 , 23; 322, 21 spacium: 640 p l; ioon; 12005 7 498 p l; c 499
sensibilitas :5 m sextuplus: 406, 12; a 610, 13; a 614, 33
simplex: i i 3 n p l; n 8 n ; 160, 1 8 p l; 198, 1, 3 p l, p l; c 504p l; c 505 p l; c 50 6p l; c 5 13 p l; c 5 14
sensibiliter: 304, 74; 320, 49 sexus: 236, 77; 244,12; 344,70
4; 202, 7, 3; 204,9, 3, 7, 8, 9 , 1 1 , 13; 206, 7 8 , p l; 7 515 p l; a 560, 73; a 592, 43, 48; a 602,
 694
i 8 p l; a 614, 33; a 616, 46, 49; a 618, 7; a
620,1 1
spatium: 6511; i n n p i; i n n p i; 116, / / ; 168,
7, 10; 262, 7; 276, i j ; 278, 8, 20; 30711 p i;
408, 77; 426, 2/, 22; a 61511
specialis: n 8 n p i; 119117?/; 236, 3 1; 244, / ;
246, 24
specialitas: 162, 60; 360,1
specialiter: 382,2 4
species: 5411; 7811; 7911 p i; 8on p i; 8m ; 8711;
9 m p i; 11311 p i; 115a; n 6 n p i; 11711; n 8 n
p i; 11911 p i; 12011 p i; 12 in p i; 12611; 13011 p i;
160, 20, 30; 166, 24, 27; 168, 36; 13 4 ,2 1 ;
204, 2, 12, 14, 16, 17 ; 206, 13, 20, 22, 34, 3 j ,
3 6 ,3 7 , 3 8 ,4 0 ; 208, 23; 2x8 ,/7; 224, 7/; 228,
26; 238, iy , 19, 2 1, 23; 240, 27, 28, 29, 3 1,
33, 36; 242, iy , 22, 30, 32, 33, 33; 244, iy ,
2, 3; 246, 7; 248, 8, 10, 12; 268, 77; 290, 33,
38; 338, 28; 346, / ; 378, 26; c 448, 1 8 p i; c
4 5 3 > I 3 p h c 469 p l; c 470; c 472 p i; c 483,
1 7 - 1 8 ; c 488; c 496; c 499; a 53711; a 54911; a
564, 41; a 56511
specificus: 7911 p l; 8onp l; y m p l ; 12m
spectare: 292, 3
speculari: 430,2 8
speculatio: 268, 2; 410, 46; a 610, 8
speculum: 252, y, 1 0 ,1 3 ; 254, 22, 2, 3 p l, 4, 10,
1 7 ; 256, 4, 3, 8, 10, 1 1 , 14, 20; 258, 3 , y, 8;
260, 23, 24, 3, 6; 262, 3, 3, 14, 13 ; 264, 2, 4,
y, 8 ,10 , 1 2 ,1 4 ; 268, 7 p l, 8 ,10 ; 348, 49; 370,
/ , 7, 14; 384, 38; c 458; 7 458, 4-20; c 459,
3 - 4 ; c 482, 4 7 -6 3 ,3 - 8 ; c 483, 1 7 - 1 8
specus: 364, 34
spera: 8n; 2 10 ,18; 256, 13 ; 432, 10, 12, 17 ; cf.
sphaera
spericatus: v 256, 1 6
spericus: 911; 8on; 238, 12; 256, 13, 16; 258,
23
sperma: 354,10; 358, 62
spes: 386, 4, 8
sphaera: 62n.pl; 7464, 2 7-3 2 ; cf. spera
spina: 250,2 4
spiritualis: 1170; 248, 17 ; 25o, 13 ; 346, 18;
352,3 8 ; 7490, 28-29
spiritus: 9n; 238,7/; 264, 29; 266, 32; 336, 27,
28; 342, 3 1; 346, 20, 22, 24; 348, 36, 39, 43,
32; 350, 7, 1 1 , 12, 13; 352, 32, 33, 34; 360,
4, 6, 7, 1 1 , 14; 3 6 m ; 362, 18, 19, 2 3 ,3 2 ; 370,
9, 13, 16, 17 ; 372, 30; 374, 32, 36; c 481,
1 6 - 1 8 ; c 482, 3 1 - 3 3
Selective Index of Latin Terms Selective Index of Latin Terms 695
spiritus malus: 33611 23, 23, 33; 410, 29; c 469; a 528, 27, 32, 3 4; a superabundantia: 7 455
Spiritus Sanctus: 346,3 3 530, 42, 43; a 534, 81; a 536, 8, 9; a 588, 26 superaddere: 8on; 1 o8n p l; c 469; 7 497
spissus: 305n p l; a 590, 27, 3 1, 36; a 592, 41, 44, 47, 49; a superadditio: 7483, 1 7 - 1 8
splendens: 348, 30 626, 7 superare: io9n; ii2 n
splendidus: 350, 4 subiectus: 77m 78m 176, 7; 208, 77 p l, 24, 26, supercelestis: 334, 24; 390,77
splendor: 1:483,1 7 - 1 8 p l 30, 32; 210, 36 supereminens: a 580, 7
stanneus: 2 3 0 ,13 subquadruplus: 6onp l; 290, 26; 416, 24, 13; c superficialis: 78m 84n; 160, 20; 176, 38; 208,
stannum: 230,1 6 , 1 7 p l; 232, 20, 21 500, it 506 p l; c 511, 4 7 -4 8 p l; c 512 p l; c 513 7, 2, 3, 9, 10, 19, 16, 19; 210, 77, 9; 214, 34;
stans erecte: a 584, / /; a 585n p l ; c 514 p l 286, 26, 27; 292, 14, 17 , 18, 19; 300,77; 376,
stare: 200,19, 21; 214, 24; 1:466,13 -2 3 subsexquitertius: c 515 20, 21; 392, 14; 394, 28; 396, 6; 406, 22;
stationarius: 8n substantia: 7n; 228, 44; 268, 22; 274, 16; 298, 408, 6; 410, 72; 414, 77; 416, 13 ; 420, 14;
Statius: 258,16; 260, 26; 352, 46 6; 346, 18; 358, 43; c 438, 7 -9 ; c 462, 1 4 p l; 4 3 °, 3 *, 47
status: n 6 n ; 252, 23; 262, 27; 302, 9; 348, c 469; c 476, 8; c 487, 1 3 - 2 1 ; c 490, 28-29 superficies: 52m 33n.pl; 54n; 56m 63n; 6411 p l;
7 8 ', 3 5 °) 29 substantialis: H3n; ii5 n p l; 282, 12; 300, 3 1 65m 78n p l; 8on; 9on p l; <320p l; <930; <370 p l;
stella: 9n; ii7 n ; 13on; 298, 8; 338, 16; c 4 4 3 ; c substantialiter: ii3 n 98n; ioon; i03n; 164, 9; 170, 8; 172, 26, 27,
454 substinere: 7438, 7 -9 2; 174, 8, 9 ,3 0 ; 176 ,77, 77, 43, 2, 9 p l, 6 ,7 ;
sterilitas: 382, 23 subtilis: 326, 28 \7711; 178, 14; 180, 7, 9, 13; 182, 14, 13, 16,
stilus: 266, 3 7 subtilitas: 334, 7; 7486 1 8 p l, 2 6 p l, 32 p l; 208, 7, 16, 18, 19, 2 1, 23,
stimulus: 3 3 0 ,14 subtrahere: I27n; 406, 7, 13, 19; c 494, 19-20 23; 216, 2 3 p l; 222, 36; 224, 96, 97; 258, 7,
stirps: 236, 28 subtriplus: a 606, 34, 36; a 608, 7 8; 288, 72; 290, 19, 17 ; 292, 77; 424, 7, 8, 9
stomachus: ii9 n succedere: i09n; 318, 7 p l, 10; c 438, 7 -9 ; c 455; c 458, 4-20; c 473,
strictus: a 592, 6; a 594, 9, 1 0 , 1 3 , 1 3 , 19; a 604, successio: 160, 40; 168, 4, 3, 7, 8; 272, 4, 6; 9 1 - 3 6 p l; c 492, 3 4 -4 3 ; a 539np l; a 3470; a
24 274, 22; 280, 7, 2, 3; 282, /, 1 1 , 13, 13, 19, 58m p l; a 326, 1, 1 1 , 13; a 528, 7 7; a 530,
studiosus: 256, 22 21, 24, 27, 33; 302, 4; 7461, 4 47, 7 i P h 74, 79, 61; a 332, 66, 70, 72; a 534,
stultus: 258, 2/ successive: io in ; 164, 10; 298, 4; 300, 3 1, 42 78, 88; a 580, 7 p l, 2 p l, 3; a 582, 6, 9; a 584,
stupefacere: 294,1 0 successivus: 158, 10; 162, 46; 170, 13; 226, 10, 1 1 , 12, 1 3 p l; a 586, 16, 1 8 p l; a 588, 21,
stupidus: 348, 43 87; 272, 3, 3; 298, 7, 2, 3, 7, 8; 300, 1 1 , 13, 22, 24 p l; a 3 90, 28; et passim
stupor: 294,13; 352, 62; 364, 33 20, 22, 23, 24, 23, 26, 30, 36, 37, 38; 302, superior: 790; 8onp l; ii7 n ; i28n; 188, 27,
suapte: n o n 47 , 49 , 4 ', 3 ° 4 ,
7 ) 308, 3 9 ) 3 7 4 , 7 ; 0 461, 4 29; 260, 4; 396, 7, /; c 490, 28-29; cf- sup-
subalternare: 52n p l; 7 462; cf. res successiva perior
subconcavus: 210,1 0 suffumigare: 7 485, 6 3 -6 6 supernaturaliter: 262, 12
subduplus: 6 o o .p l; 222, 37, 39; 290, 26; 416, suffumigatio: 364, 66 superparticularis: c 499
23; 426, 12; c 476; c 500 p l; 7 501; c 505; c suggerere: 3 3 6 ,3 7 superponere: a 590, 36; a 392, 39
506p l; c 509; c 512; c 513 p l; c 515; a 542, sulphur: 360, 1 1 superpositio: 176, 36; 17711; 300, 18; c 468,
80; a 600, 47, 3 sumere: 92n; 96n; io8n p l; iogn p l; 212, 12; 9 -2 8
subiacere: 342, 42 272, 13; 274, 40; 414, 77; 420, 16; 430, 39; superstitio: 338, 16; 378, 44; 380, 30, 94
subiective: 7462, 1 0 - 1 1 p l 432, 1 1 , 16; a 538, 39; a 548, 13; a 554, 21; a superstitiosus: 380, 46; 7486, 68-69
556, 3 1; a 562, 1 3 ;a 608, 43 superveniens: 3 3 2 ,9 6
subiectivus: 270, 1 1 , 14; 292, 3, 6, 8, 16, 20,
Summa contra gentiles: 390, 22 supperior: i28n
2 3 ', 294,70; 3 ° 6, 28; 3 7 4 , 3, y , 376,72; 392,
9; 394,1 9 , 21, 22, 24; 398, 29; 408,10; 426, 4 summe: 402, 3 6 suppletio: 7483,1 7 - 1 8
subiectum or subjectum: 6on p l; 630 p l; 650 summitas: 178, 7; 180, 14, 7; 188, 20; 190, 20; suppocitio: a v 548, 1 2 - 1 3 ; cf- supposicio,
p l; 75n; 770; 830 p l; 84n; 920 p l; 93n p l; 196, 7, 3; 198, 7/, 3; 202, 3, 6; 208, 7/, 18, suppositio
96n p l; 97n p l; 980 p l; 990 p l; toon p l; 20, 29, 3 1, 34; 210, 34; 212, 13; 396, 4, 6, 8, supponere: i09n; 386, 10; c 496; a 606,7/
ii5 n ; 160, 42; 162, 63; 166, 1 1 , 28, 33; 168, 9, 12, 22, 24; 398, 29; 402, 19; c 491, 6; a supposicio: 7 509; a v 548, 1 2 - 1 3 ; a v 554, 27;
40, 42, 3, 14; 170, 19, 3, 12; 172, 7; 174, 7; 528, 22; a 626, 2 cf. suppocitio
176, 41, 43; 178, 8 , 1 0 , 1 1 p l, 1 2 ,1 3 ; 192, 77; summum bonum : a 552, 36 suppositio: 930; 176, 36; 17711; c 459, 3 - 4 p l;
194, 46; 210, 4; 212,7, 4, 7, 9 ,1 8 , 21; 218, 61; summum malum: a 5 52, /7 7 463, 1 9 - 2 1 ; c 474; 7 496; 7 497p l; c 504p l;
2 2 6 ,18 ; 228, 27, 3 6 ,3 8 ; 2 3 0 ,10 ; 232, 8; 248, summus: 62n; 75n p l; 89n p l; 9m ; io in ; 7 514/?/; cf. suppocitio
2; 270, 3; 272, 26; 276, 9; 278, 7 7 ; 280, 49; io8n; 402, 77, 23, 2 6 p l, 27; c 492, 3 4 -4 3 p l; suppositus: 76n; ii5 n p l; n 8 n ; c 496; a 548,
376, 2; 380, 7; 396, 29; 398, 26, 3 1 ; 402, 77, 7 493/?/; a 544, 8 3 ,9 0 ,9 8 p l 17 , *9
 Selective Index of Latin Terms 697
696 Selective Index of Latin Terms
supranonipartiens: 0499 timor: 254, 74; 258, 13, 16, 17 ; 330, 23; 338, transversalis: 77m 194, 40; 278, 27; 0 465,
534, 86; a 536, 77; a 544, 104; c 558, 67; et
supraseptipartiens: 0499 passim 3 1 P h 3 3 ', 3 5 °, J3 ', 3 5 2» 6 z \ 3 7 6, 6, J3 ', 3 7 8, 19 -2 9
supremus: 7911 p l 7/; 386, 4, 7; 0 478, 2 1-2 3 ; 0488,1 0 -1 3 trapezium: io8n/)/; n o n p l
tendere: n o n ; 316, 18, 23, 37
surdus: 240, 7; 332, 40; 0456, 7 p i tenebre: 350,74 timpanum: 306, 77; v 306, 3 4 -3 3 ; cf. tym­ tremens: 258, 22
sursum: i2n; 10911 p i; 1 io n p i; 0469 panum tremulus: 258, 9
tenebrosus: 352, 4/;384, 4/
susceptivus: 384, / / tiriaca: v 334,13 trepeda: v 362, 38 -39
tener: 0488
suscipiens: 0443, 48 tollerabilis: 386,18; 388,7 7 , 72 triangularis: 160, 16; 186, 1, 7 ; 188, 24; a 534,
tenor: 322,70; 390, 3 6
sustractio: i2 8n tollere: io 8 n p l; 109a 88; a 584, 12
tepidus: 228, 39
sympathia: 0456, 7 -1 0 tonus: 314, 47; 0472; 7478, 26 -27 triangularis rectangulus: 160, 13; 184, 1
terminans: y o n p l ; 9 m ; 9311; 10311; 430, 43; a
symphonia: 045 5; 045 6; cf. simphonia torpefacere: v 294, 10 p l triangulius: a v 534, 7 7 -7 9 , 84 -9 1; a v 542, 66
586, 77; a 594, 7 /
torquens: 252, 21 triangulus: 67n p l; 68n p l; y6n p l; yyn p l;
terminare: 6in; 67n p l; yyn p l; 8911 p l; 9on
tabula: 0445 tortuosus: 224, 73 j8 n p l; 83m 960; 970; 990 p l; ioon p l;
p l; 96n; 184, 1 1 ; 188, 20; 192, 18; 196, 10;
tactus: 226, 19; 236, 24; 246, 7, 4, 6; 33m ; 0 totalis: 62n; ii5 n ; 188, 13, 21; 212, 7(9; 216, io in ; io3n p l; io8n p l; io9n p l; n o n p l;
198, 1 1 , 17 ; 202, /2; 204, 1 1 , 13, 16, 17 , 4;
20, 7 7 ; 218, 47; 0 496; 0 498; 0 515; a 5650 m n p l; n z n p l; 174, 17 , 19; 184, 2, 7, /, 7,
4 7 7 , 1 4 - iJ 208, 77 p l; 262, 7 7 ; a 532, 77, 77; a 558,
D e tacuino: 330, 27, 3 6 totaliter: 300,7750493 9, 13, 16, 19, 22, 23, 24; 186, 26, 30 p l, 3 1,
74; *z 570, 70/, 7 0 (9 ; a 572, 7y; a 584, 7/; a
tangere: 9n; 220, 4 totus: 6onp l; 6 m p l; 63ap l; 64m 780p l; 8on; 34, 36, 2, 4, 3, 7, 9, 1 1 ; 188, 74, 77, 18,
586, 7 <
9 4 >/, 77; a 604, 27; a 630, /0, /7
tangibilis: 246, /, 7 84n p l; 9on; 930 p l; 99n p l; ioon p l; 1030 20, 22p l; 190, 4; 192, 19, 22; 194, 7 /, 39, 41
terminatus: 67m 7 6 n .p l; y j n p l; 780; 10m ;
tarditas: ^ n p l ; 306, 44, 4/; 328, 6; a 570, 109 p l; io8n; io9n p l; i n n p l; ii2 n p l; ii5 n ; p l, 42; 214, 24, 23; 286, 22; 290, 29; 408, 9,
103m 178, 7; 184, 8; 188, 7(9; 190, 18, 3, 3;
tardus: 7n; 8n p 9np i ; 270, 274, n 6 n ; 172,2/,2(9; 212, /, 7/; 214,70; 218, ^7; 14; 410, 7/, 78, 23, 23; 0 442, 23; c 466, 7 7 -
i ; 6 z n p i ; j o ;
194, 3 7 , I Z > 196, 77, 7(9, 18; 198, 74; 212,
27; 276, 9; 278, 16; 30511; 326, 27; c 463, 3050; 0446; 0464, 27-72; 0492, 74-47; 0494, 27 p l; c 494, 14; a 532, 73; a 534, 0 538,
22; 214, 27; 290, 70; 408, 9; 410, 20; 0 492,
26-29; 0464p i; 0469; a 570, 107, 108 19-20 ; 0 496 p l; 0 497 p l; 0 498 p l; 0 499 p l; 0 40; 0 539n/>/; 0 544, 89, 9 1; a 554,3 1; a 556,
74-47 />/; 0 504; 0 505; 0 509; 0 5135a 544,
taurus: 368, 7/, 36; cf. thaurus 500p l; 0 501; 0 509p l; 0 511, 4 7 -4 8 p l ; c 513; 47, 4<f, /y, /4; 0 557« />/; 0 568, y/, y /; 0
<?<?, y y ; 0 550, 42; 0 5 52, / 7 ; zz 5 56, 40, 4/, / 7 ;
tectonicus: r 453, 79 0 5147)/; a 556, 4/, 4<9; a 562,72 570, 702, 707; (Z 590, 28, 32, 36; a 592, 38,
a 5 58, (97; a 564, 48; a 568, 89; a 616, 47
tegens: 264, 6 trabes: 0488,10-13 39; a 598, 29, 30, 3 1 p l, 32, 33, 34 p l, 33 p l,
terminus: 92m 96n/>/; 99m ii5 n ; 244, 9 ,1 0 ;
tegumentum: 264, 16 tractare: 13 on 36, 39 pl", a 600, 47 p l, 42, 44; a 6oin p l; a
284, 9; 406, 9; 0 448, 77; 0 463, 1 9 - 2 1 p l; c
telum: 378, 70 tradere: 760 626, 13; a 628, 22; et passim
466, 13 -2 3 ; c 469 p l; c 483; c 494, 7y-2 0 71/;
temperamentum: 57n ; 2 34, 2/; 7 48 5 traditus: 256, 2 triangulus rectangulus: 174, 17 ; 188, 14 ; 190,
0 509 p l; a 547n; a 562, 19; a 6 \ z, 20 p l, 23
temperare: 234, 27; 308, /; 310, 77 trahere: 7n; 113n p l; 246, 23; 258, 18; 294, 13, 4; 290,2 9
p l, 24, 26p l
tempestas: 260, 28 16, 17 ; 0 445; 0 454p l; c 476; 0 488, 1 0 -1 3 ; a tribulus: 246, 8
ternarius: 0445
temporalis: n 8 n ; 270, 1 1 ; 272, 70 71/; 292, /, 580, 4; a 586, 19; a 588, 27; a 592, 4 D e trinitate: 376, 10
terra: xzn p l; i3on; 250, 27; 274, 40; 0 464,
72, 77, 77, 27, 2<f; 294, 70; 304, 2/; c 463, traiectatio: 358, 47 trinus: 284, 33; 426, 4
39-40p l; 0489,19-21
7 .9 - 2 7 ; 7479 trajicere: ii2 n tripeda: v 362,38 -39
terrere: 352, <97; 354, 66
temporaliter: 298, 4 tranquillitas: 260, 29 tripedalis: 640
terribilis: 258, 7/
tempus: 6n; 8n p l; 13m ; i n p l; 53n41/; 54n; tranquillus: 258, 10 tripida: v 56 2 ,3 8 -3 9
terror: 236, 27; 348, 44; 352, 47, 60; 354, 6 3 ,7 4
64n p l; io y n ; io8n p l; io9n p l; n o n p l; transcendere: 0489 triplex: 160, 70; 244, 1; 294, 33; 374, 10; a
tersus: 252, 8
m n p l; ii2 n p l; n8n; i2on p l; 160, testare: n o n transferre: 79m 0454; 0455 547«
7y, 43; 170, 74; 224, 70; 236, 2<y; 246, 74; transfigurare: 428, 27 triplo: 640; 178, 10; 180, 13 , 13 ; c 441, y; 0
testimonium: 328,7; 372, 9
250, 9; 252, 2(9; 254, 74; 260, 77, 72; 262, transfiguratio: 428,1 3 , 1 7 ; 0440, 2 7 -2 8 498; 0 500; 0 5044?/
tetragonus: a58o, / ;a 5 8 m
<
9, 70, 20, 24, 27; 268, 19; 270, 7; 272, 2(9, 27, transibilis: 184,12 triplus: 7n; 6on; 63m 87np l; 9on; 127m 312,
thaurus: v 368, 3 3 ,3 6 ; cf. taurus
7 , 7 />/, /, 7, (?/>/, 77; 274, 7/, 20, 2/, 2(9, 27, transigere: 1090p l; n o n p l ; m n 7y, 70; 0 496 />/; 0 499 />/; 0 511, 4 7 - 4 8 p l; 0
theologus: 170, 19; 174, 24; 252, 7; 328, 7 ;c
28, 70, 77, y(9, 40, 474>/, 44, 4/; 276, 77; 280, transire: 670 p l; m n ; 1300p l; 248, /; 3890; 513 5051450515
478, 3
49; 282, 20; 288, 7, 2 p l, 4, 7; 290, 77, 27, 398, 77, 20; 0 468, 3 -6 ; 0 498; a 528, 20, 22; tripoda: 0 362, 38-39
theorema: 110050499
24; 298, 77; 300, 7/, 7<?, 42; 302, 47; 306, tripoda delii: 362, 7<?
theoreuma: 0472 a 5 3° , 3 7 ; a 5 3 i n p l; a 598 , 33
70; 318, 18, 22; 328, 7 8; 350, 22; 389n; 406, transitio: a 53m tripuda: v 362, 38-39
theorica: 238, /
24; 414, 7(9; 0 445; c 457, 7 7 -7 /; 0 460; 0 transmittere: 1 n n p l; 1 \zn p l; c 484 tripudium: 296, 8; 298, 13
theriaca: 0454; cf. tyriaca
460, 7 7 -7 7 ; 0 461, 4 />/; 0 462, 70 -77 />/, 74; transmutare: n 8 n tristabilis: 246, 4, 6; 248, 1 2 - 1 3
thibia: v 294, 7/; cf. tibia
0 463 />/; 0 463, 1 9 - 2 1 ; 0 464; 0 464, 2 7-7 2 p l, transmutatio: 380, 4; 382, 22; 0490, 28-29 tristare: 0482
thiriatha: v 334, 13
9 41/; 0 477, 74-
3 9 -4 0 ; 0 465, 7-70; 0 468, 7—< transmutative: 540 tristicia: 0478, 2 1-2 3
thyriaca: v 334, 13
7//>/; 0480; 0496/>/; 0 49741/; 0 4984>/; 0 504 transsibilis: v 184, 12 tristitia: 248, 18; 254, 14; 326, 1 1 , 20, 22; 330,
Tiberius Cesar: 244, 22
p l; c 511, 47-48 ; c 512; 0 513 p l; c 515 p l; a tibia: 294, 13; 0483,1 7 - 1 8 transsumptio: 170, 22 2 4 ‘, c 4 5 7 , 1 3 - i J
 698 Selective Index of Latin Terms Selective Index of Latin Terms 699
tro cu s:314, 8 uniformitas: 630; 84n; 1030p l) 138, 2, 3) 162, varietas: 790; i2on; 160, 2/; 190, 27; 226, 4; verisimilis: i3 o n p l) 268, 23) 338, 20; c 480, 1
truncatus: io8n 67) 174, 12) 198, 6) 204, 7; 206, 33) 2io, 13) 232, i ) 252, i i ) 238, 20) 308, 30) 376, 7 veritas: 8on; n o n ; i3on; 220, 18) 254, 72;
tuba: 304, 1 1 p l) 306,33 214, 30) 224, 60) 226, 87) 248,3, 13, 14) 230, varius: n 8 n p l) ii9 n ; 234, 77; 248, 1 1 , 12) 310, 4; 326, i2 ) 342, 23) 352, 37) 360, 73) c
tubalis: 368,3 3 13) 272, 22, 23, 26, 32) 274, 44) 276, 2) 280, 2 6 0 ,3 ) 262, 4) 272, 2 7 458, 4 -2 0 p l ) c 482,3 1 - 3 3
Tullius: 266, 42) 268, 24) 356, 24) 374, 33) 37) 284, 3) c 477, 8 -12 ) r 515; «a 544, 87) a vas: 230,1 3 ,1 3 ) 348, 62 vermis: 7453, I3
386, 4 548,2, 4, 8) a 332, 33 vates: 362,33, 41 versiculus: 316, 2 2
tumultus: 252, 1 6 uniformiter: 15n.pl) 65m 670p l)-j6 n p l)-j-jn p l) vaticinatio: 7486 versificator: 348,4«?; 349n
turbare: 350,1 0 78np l) 790p l) 830p l) 84n; 870p l) 9onp l) vecordia: 362, 33 vertere: 260, 4; 424, 4
turbator: 31 6 ,2 8 <)inpl)^6n)C)-]npl)(3<3n) ioon p l) io in ;io 3 n ; vectula17 4 8 1,1 3 - 2 1 ; cf. vetula verus: i2n; 6on; 6 in ; 96n; n o n ; 258, 24; 268,
turbatus: v 550, 26 -23 ii5 n ; n 6 n ; 164, 73) 174, 16, 17 ) 184, 7, 3, vehementer: 230, 13 J3
tu r b o :303n io ) 188, 13) 190, 17 , 3, 4) 192, 14, 18) 194, vellocitas: a v 538, 33) a v 570, 103) cf. veloci­ vestigium: 248, 7; 268, 1 8
turpiloquius: 248, 20 3 7) 196, 13, 16, 17 , 22, 8) 198, /4; 206, 26, tas vestimentum: 264, /
turpis: 242, 33, 34) 254, 18) 296, 3) 310, i j p l ) 23) 2o-jn) 208, 8, 13, 3 1 ) 212, 4, 8, 10, 18, velocitare: 9n; i3n; 272, 8 vetula: 342, io ) 344, 14, 20) 366, 24; 372, <?;
314, 46, JO, J I , j6 , J , 8, 1 2 ) 324, 1 0 , IJ , 20) 22) 214, 26) 218, 60 p l) 224, 68, 63 p l, 70, velocitas: 6np l) -jn p l) % npl) 9m 62n; 64np l) 384, 48, 32, 34, 3 3 ; cf. vectula
72, 74, 775 226, 18) 278, 13, 26) 2790; c 447, 75n; 890 p l) i2on; 158, 77; 160, 40 p l, 41, De vetula: 266, 23
turpiter: 316, 1 4 30) c 461, 23-23) c 492, 3 4 -4 3 p l) c 51 1, 47- 43) 162, 43, 46, 63) 164, 70, 74) 168, 3, io ) vexatio: 336, 28
turpitudo: 162, 48) 248, 22) 296, 4; 308, 1, 12) 4<?/>/; 7 512; 7 513 />/; 7 514 />/; 7 515; <7 526, 200, 34) 224, 67) 270, 3, 13, 16, 18, 20) 272, via: i2n; 96n; i3on; 168, 7; 254, 20) 256, 24;
310, 23, i i ) 312, 94; 316, /7; 320, /4; 324,1 0 1, 4, 7 ,1 3 ) a 528, 16) a 330, <
5 7 ; a 532, 63, 66, 2 1) 276, 7, 4, 3, 6, 8, 12 , 14, 16, 1, 3) 278, 8, 258, 18) 292, 40) 346, 74, 16, 17 ) 348, 33)
tybia: v 294, ij ; cf. tibia 70, 72) a 348,18, i p ) a 380, 2, 4) a 584, 3, 12, 3, 1 8 p l, 13, 20, 23) 280, 43) 282, 27, 23, 30) 372, 22, 24; 380, 33) c 438, 7 -3 p l) c 470; 7
tympanum: v 306, 3 4 -3 3 ) 316, 40 p l, 43) cf. 13 ) a 386, 18) a 588, 22, 23) cf. unifformiter 296, 27, 23) 2, 3, 7, 13, i ) 298, 3. 6, 7, 8, 3, 488,10 -1 3
timpanum unigenius: 228, 44 12 ) 305n; 328, 3) c 465, 7 -1 0 ) c 470; c 496 D e viatico: 330, 21
tyriaca: 244, 77; 334, //; c 456, 77; cf. theriaca unitas: 53n; i27n; 312, 18, 20) 318, 12, 17 , 18, p l) c 497 p l) c 498 p l) c 499 p l) c 300 p l) c vibrare: 378,3 0
23) 320, 27; 420,2 6 p l) c 455 p l ) c 4 7 1 ,18 -2 4 301; <r 504p l) c 3x 1, 4 7 -4 8 p l) c 5 1 2 p l) c 513 viciare: 310, i i ) 344,13
ulterior: 268, 2 p l) a 562, 20) a 563np l p l) c 515 p l) a 528, 26) a 338, 33, 34) a 344, vicis: 75x1, 47-48 ) 7514
ultimus: 8ynp l) 97n; c 512 unitivus: 8onp l 103, 104, 106, 10 7) a 346, 128) a 338, <57; a vigilia: 7488,10 -1 3
umbra: 1300; 264,16) 342, 1 1 universaliter: 87n; 214, 27; 280, 48) c 496 560, 76) a 396, 27, 28) a 602, 18) a 614, 33, vilitas: 248, 21
unctio: c 482, 43-63 D e universo: 350, 17 34, 33, 38) a 6i5n; a 618, 3) cf. vellocitas vin ea:a 588, 22
unctus: 312, 16 univocus: 530 velocitatio: 9m 282, 28, 2 3 ,3 0 ,3 2 vinum: 230, 74; 254, 16) 356, 74; 364, /<?; c
ungere: c 483, 63-6 6 uterus: 234, 2<
5" velociter: 9n; 174, 74; 278, 72; 280, 30) c 500 478, 2 1-2 3
unguis: 348, 30) 7482, 43-63 utilitas: 358,6 3 p l) c 504p l) c 505 pl)\ c 313; c 514) a 334, 3) violentare: 8n
ungula: 294, 1 3 utillis: a v 340, 48 a 560, 76) a 572, 7 p l) a 392, 48) et passim violente: 8n; 9n
unicus: 8n; 316, 16) c 466, 13 -2 3 Utilo: a 536, 72; cf. Vitelo velox: 7n p l) 8n; $ n p l) i$ n ) 62np l) 64n; 166, violentia: % npl)<)npl
unifformis: a v 530, 28 -23) a v 332, 4; a v 358, uxor: 246, 16 22) 230, 8) 232, 26) 270, io ) 272, 7; 274, 27; violentus: 7488
64-63) cf. uniformis 326, 28) c 464p l) c 469; a 554, 3) a 560, 77; a v ir : 1 29n; 246, 1 3 ; 264, 3) 354, 63) 7434, 13)
unifformiter: a v 526, 7; a v 334, 80) cf. uni­ vacare:c 503 568, 33, 36) a 572,4 c 483, 1 7 -1 8 ) 7489
formiter V acca Platonis: 358, 63 veneficium: 358, 64 virens: 382, 74
uniformis: 6on ) 6 5 n ) 6 7 n p l) 7 7 n p l) 7 8 n ) 8 jn p l) vacuum: 9n veneficus: 356,18) 366, 28) 368, 32 virgo: 7483
9on; 96n; 97n p l) ioonp l) ii5 n ; n 6 n ; 160, valere: a 5 52, /4 venenosus: 360,/; 7 4 9 0 , 3 3 -4 0 p l virtus: 6 n p l) -jn p l) %npl) <3npl) ji n ; i i 3 n p l)
/7; 162,63) 164,3 2 , 33) 190,1 1 , 1 , 2) 192 ,1 3 ; valor: cf. integer valor venenum: 244, i i ) 354, io ) 356, 2/; 358, <
52; i\~in p l) n 8 n p l) ii9 n ; i2on p l) 160, 2/;
194, 8) 196, 3, io ) 198, 7; 204, 7; 206, 24, vanitas: 360, 72 366, 27; 74544?/; 7456, 77 168, 3 7) 230, 33, 34, 36) 232, 7; 234, 77, 7 8,
23, 3 1 , 39', 208, 7, 9, 10, 14, 16, 30) 212, 13) va p o r:c 438 venter: 368, 37 33, 36) 236, 16, 18, 30) 238, 34) 244, 13, 20)
214, 4; 220, 3, 3) 224, 34, 63, 63) 226, 13) variabilis: 234, 3 1 ventriloquus: 368, 36 294, i i ) 296, 18) 318, 43) 330, 42; 334, 1 1 ,
228, 30) 252, 12) 256, 3) 272, 23 p l, 3 1) 274, variacio: j j n ) cf. variatio ventus: 362, 34 13, I 7 ', 336, /; 340, 3 , J3 , l 6 , 2 I ’, 342, 44;
26, 28, 23, 41, 46) 296, 2) 298, 6) 302, 43) c variare: 8on; 980 p l) ii5 n ; n 6 n ; i2on; 180, Venus: 7445 344, 14, 27) 346, 3, 21, 26) 348, 36, 44, 33)
439, 3~4', c 461, 23-23 p l) c 464, 23-32) c 16) 190, 21) 200, 3 1 ) 214, 23) 226, 81, 83, 3) veraciter: 7 469; c 487, 2 2 -3 1 350, 7, i i ) 352, 33, 36) 360, <
5"; 362, 24) 364,
304; c 3 11, 43-48) c 514; a 526, 3, 3, 3) a 248, IO) 270, 20) 280, /<5"; a 528, 23) a 534, verbum: 250, 2/; 336, 23) 340, 13) 366, 18, 77; 366, 4, 77, 7<?; 368, 47, 40, 41) 5 7 4 ,3 4 ’,
528, 37, 38) a 330, 60) a 538, 33) a 348, 18) a *4 23) 368, 40) 7482, 3 1 - 3 3 434, 2/; 7 454 p l) 7 457, 1 3 - 1 3 p l) 7 469
550, 21 p l, 23) a 580, /, 2) a 582, 6, 3) a 588, variatio: 8n; 160, 23) 190, 8) 204, 3) 206, 13) Vergilius: 266, 28) 326, 2/; 362, 33, 42) 364, 4?/; 7483, 1 7 - 1 8 p l) 7484; 7489p l) a 528, 47,
26) a 590, 27) a 626, 4, 12) a 630, / / ; cf. 2io, 18) 226, i ) 284, 4; 296, io ) 322, 2 3)0 /7; 366,30) 382, 3) 386 ,3 ) 3 9 ’, a 5 3 4 , <?7
unifformis 528, 23) cf. variacio verificare: 208, 27 virus: 356, 7 <3
 7 oo Selective Index of Latin Terms

v is: 10711; io8n pi; 10911 pi; n o n pi; n 8 n ; ymaginabilis: 77n p i; 78n; 8on; 184, 2, j , 18;
1 1 9 a p i; 1 2 m p i; 286, 8; 294, 14; 33m ; 338, 186, 2, 4, /, 77; 188, 28, 2; 190, 9, 13, 3, 7;
*r> 3 5 2 , 3 1, 33\ 358, 62; 362, 19; 368, 77; 196, 7; 198,16, 14; 200, 27, 32, 3 j ; 202, 7, /;
378, i j ; 0484//; 0488 208, 2, 70; 210, 74; 212, 7 7 , 77; 224, / / ;
viscus: 360, 7 286, 22; 7 469; 626, 9; cf. imaginabilis, in-
visibilis: 174, i j ; 262, 7, j ; 340, 7 / ; c 458, maginabilis
4-20 ymaginabiliter: 332,74 A n I n d e x o f M a n u s c r ip ts C ite d
visio : 160, 7 2, 77, 74, 7/, 7 if, 7 7 ; 252, /, 2, 4, ymaginans: 376, 72; 382, 77; cf. imaginans
/0, //; 2 5 4 ,19, 2 3 ,1, 2, 7; 256, 2 2,1, 2; 258, ymaginare: 8n p i; i2n p i; 5m ; 54n p i; 63n;
27, 22; 260, /7; 262, 1 , 1 1 , i j , 2j; 264, 7/, /, 64m 65m 77n p i; 78m 79n p i; 8on; 83n;
7 , (J, /<?; zGjn; 268, /, 2, 4, /, /7, 74, 7 7 , 20, 84n; 87np i; 9onp i; 9 m p i; <92n.pl; 93np i; Basel, Bibl. Univ. Q - 3 87 : 6 4 4
27; 346, 27; 348, 74; 350, / ; 362, 2<T; 370, 94n p i; y jn p i; ioon; n 6 n ; n 8 n ; i27n; F.II.33: 85n, 471 Escorial Library, f.II.8: 92n, 645
i j , 18, 7757482, 47-63; 7483 162, 66; 164, 7, 4, 10; 166, 18, 24, 27; 168, F .III.3 1: 154
visivus: 262, 350, 7, 7 7 47, 72, 77, i j ; 17 0 ,10; 172, 2; 174, 9, 1 1 , 29, F .V .6 : i23n Florence, Biblioteca Nazionale Centrale
visu alis: 5 2n ; 384,74; 7 485 30; 176, 77, 74, 7/, 38, 39, 40, j , 6; 178, 72, Berlin, Staatsbibl., Lat. F .6 3 1: 645 Conventi Soppressi
visus: 344, 2<f; 348, 63; 350, 70; 382, 77; 384, 74, 77, 2, 7, 4; 180, 74, 7; 182, 2 7 , 2/; 184, Bern, Stadtbibl., A.50: 65n H.IX.1628: 63n, 646
/4; 7 458; 7 481, 19-21; 7 483, 17-18; 7 484 7, 4, 20; 186, 74; 188, 27; 190, 2, / ; 192, 75?; Bologna, Univ. Library, 1227 (2410): 643 J.IX.26: 151, 624
//; 7486; 7490,39-40; cf. res visa 194, 38, 3; 196, 7, 6; 200, 2<J, 2<?, 77; 202, Breslau, Univ. Library, MS W ar.IV.Q.27: 645 J.X .19: 646
vita: 8on pi; 230, 27; 332, 14; 352, 38; c 490, 47; 208, 77, 72, 16, 17 , 18, 20, 30; 210, 7; Bruges, Stadsbibl. Bibl. Medicea-Laurenziana
2J—2J 212, 7/, 20; 214, 24, 2/, 7 7 / / ; 218, j6 , j8 ;
477:439» 457» 646 Ashb. 210: i22n, 127-29, i37n, 150, 646
V ita sancte A gn etis: 35 6, 20 224, 248, 19, 17 ; 230, 72; 260, 6; 270, 486:148 Bibl. Riccard.
V ita sancti Silvestri: 368,7/ 72; 280, 7; 300, 16; 378, 7 / ; c 439; 7 500 //; 514:439, 646 117 : 7n,68n, 644, 646
vitalis: ii4 n ; pi 7 509; ^ 328,27,2<y, 7 7 ,7 2 ,7 /,7 7 ,4 7 ; ,2530,47, 530:646 Freiburg i. Breisgau, Univ.-bibl., 238: 103,
V itelo or W itelo: 238, 7 ; 240, 39; 358, /7 ; cf. 4^, 48, J0, J2 ;a 5 3 2 , <^4, 6j ;a 3 8 0 , 7 , 2 ; a 5 8 2 , Brussels, Bibl. Roy. i42n, 644
U tilo <?, 7; a 384, 77; a 588, 24, 2/; a 628, 72, 7<f; 9505/6: 4n
vitium : 234, 8; 346, 8; c 479 cf. imaginare, immaginare 18977/81: 648 Groningen, Bibl. Rijksuniv., 103 : 150-31
vitreus: 348, j o ymaginatio: i^ n p l; 6 $ n p l; 78n; ii3 n ; 158, 2;
vitulus: 2 4 4 , 16 i59n; 160, 3 1 ; 166, 74; 168, 40; 174, 14, 23; Cambridge Kiel, Univ.-bibl., 127: 648
v iv e n s :ii4 n 176, 47; 178, 77; 192, 70, 72; 194, 2; 206, Gonville and Caius College, 499/268: 6on,
vocabilis: 318, i j 42; 210, 7, 77; 212, 7; 224, j8 , 61; 228, 22, 649 Leipzig, Univ.-bibl., 79: 56n
vocalis: a 558, 70 27, 42; 230, 4^, 77; 232, 9; 246, 2; 248, 18; Peterhouse College, 277 ( = Bibl. Pepysiana London, British Museum
volatilis: 330, 27 290, 77; 300, 40; 348, 7<?; 374, 74, 7/, 72; 2329): 646 Addit. 6789: 106, 643
vo litio : 7n; 390, 18, 19, 26, 28; c 491 376, 2<f, 7, 77; 378, 7(5’, 27, 27; 382, 7; 424, Trinity College, 904: 56n, 642 Sloane 2156: ii4 n et seq., i37n, 152, 447,
volitum : 390, 2 7 , 27 4; c 437, 2 //; 7 438, 7 -9 ; c 439, 40 -4 7//; c Chicago, Univ. Library, Cod. 3 : i42n 484, 643,650
volu cer: 330, 28 440, 8-26; c 452; c 481, 1 6 - 1 8 p i; c 488, 70- Cracow, Bibl. Jagiellonska
voluntarius: yn //; 8n; ynpl; io n ; 380, /4 77; 7 492, 74-47; r 4 9 3 5 * 5 3 V 4 3 1 * 5 3 I n ; 7 3 3 :79n Munich, Staatsbibl.
voluntas: 6n; 7n pi; 8npl;<)n; 390, 22; 7484; c a 534, (?/, 89, 90; a 390, 77; cf. imaginacio, 1383:647 761:439, 646
488; 7 489p i imaginatio, immaginatio CC.V II.12: 645 4377:644
voluptas: 250, 27 ymaginative: 9on; 270, <?p i CC.V III.31: 645 14265:648
v o x : 246, 19; 307n; 312, 14, i j ; 322, 9, 13, 14; ymaginativus: 78n; 344, 14, 29; 346, 7; 348, Cues Hospital, 64: 647
366, i j , 16; 368, 7 2 ,74 , 42, 44, /7 ; 370, j8; 7 /7 ; 7489//; cf. imaginativus N ew York, Columbia Univ., Plimpton
455 ymaginatus: 76n; 78n; 176, 77, 47; 178, 7, 77; Erfurt, Stadtbibl. Library, 156: 54n
vulneratus: 348, 47 180, 72, 77; 224, /7 ; 7 441, 4 -7; <z 348, 18; a Amplonian
vultus: 236, 7; 2 5 6 , 19; 264, 6, 9; 350, 22 366, 77; etpassim F .13 5 :650,649 Oxford, Bodleian Library
ymago: 230, /7; 236, 17 ; 250, 4, 7, 4 Q .1 5 0 :149-50 Auct. F.5.28: 456
ydeom ate: v 368, 41 ymitare: v 340, 74; cf. imitare Q .2 3 1:646 Canon, lat. 278: 9m
ydeota: 350, 27 Ypocras: 304, 2/ Q .2 9 8 :149 Canon. Misc. 177: 94n
ydiom a: 368, 41 ypothesis: 6$n; cf. hypothesis Q.299: 7n, n n , I2n, i3on, 458, 468, 490, Canon. Misc. 376: 644
ydolum : 266, 22; 362,7^ yppomanes: 356, 74 645,646 Merton College Library 230: 57n, 640
yle: 382, 18; cf. hile, hyle Ysaias: 252, 16; 254, 7/; 368, 4<f, j j ; 408, 2<? Q .325: 83n-84n, 376, 639, 646

701
 702 ndex of Manuscripts Cited
Paris Utrecht, Univ. Library, 725: 646
Bibl. de l’Arsenal
522: 75n-78n, 147-48, 646, 648, 649 Vatican Library
Bibl. Nationale, Fonds latin Chigi
1426:647 E. I V .109:148-49
2831: 115n, 13711, 643 F. IV.66: 9on, 9m, 523, 644, 647
6558: 6on, 8in, 649
7216:456
Ottob. lat. 1850: 450
Pal. lat. 1892: 485
General Index
7281: 44611, 477, 646 Vat. lat.
7 3 7 1 : 1 5 3 - 5 4 , 4 4 4 , 647 954:6190
M5 33: 647 956:650
14579: U 2 986:125, i2 6 n ,647
14580: 79n, 153,644, 647 1121: 488
15126: nn, i2n, i3n, ;in , ii3n -i4n , 2185: 7n, 68n, 461, 465, 492-93, 644, 646
i26n, 127-31, 469, 476-77, 480, 487, 2225: 523,647
489, 646 2426:478, 643
15156:645 3026:644
1 5 3 6 9 : 7 9 n - 8 on 3097:154-55,646
16134:499,511,639 3 14 4 :68n,644
16408:i26n 4082:1 i n , 645, 646
16535: I26n, 647 4275:646 Place names used in relation to manuscripts have not been indexed here, since the separate Index
16 6 2 1:65n,649 4 4 4 7:ioin , 499,639 o f Manuscripts Cited is arranged by cities. In general, I have not included Latin terms (with a
16893: 648 Venice, Bibl. Marc. few exceptions), for such terms are included in the Selective Index o f Latin Terms. There are,
Nouv. acquis, lat. 1467: 78n, 648 Lat. however, occasional cross-references to that index. Many medieval schoolmen are indexed here
Fonds franj. 565: 4n V I ,30: 639 by their Christian names (e.g., Gaetano de Thienis is under Gaetano), but occasionally, when a
Fonds frang. 1348: 1240, 647 V I,62: 96n~97n, 639 schoolman is well known by his last name, he is indexed under that name (e.g., Roger Bacon is
Pavia, Bibl. Univ., Aldini 314: 6on, 102, 649 V I, 225: 92n, 645 indexed under Bacon). The reader is advised to consult both names before deciding that a given
Prague, Bib. Univ., 1601 VIII. G. 19 (Y.III.3, V II, 7: 102 schoolman has not been mentioned. Incidentally, John and Johannes, Albert and Albertus,
n.63): 103 V III, i9: 97, 98n~99n, 649 Peter and Petrus are indexed together and ordered only by the last names with which they are
V III,74: 646 associated. In regard to the indexing o f the Latin texts, page references are only to the Latin
Seville, Bibl. Colombina Vienna texts themselves (although the references also appear on the facing pages o f the English transla­
5.1.10: I42n, 644 Nat.-bibl. tions as well). However, when a title is cited in the footnotes appearing on the English page,
7.6.30: 54n, 64n, i26n, 461, 463-64, 469, 4127: 137^ 644 the reference is made to the English page number accompanied by n. But in other places if an entry
476, 481,517, 646 4203:647 appears in a footnote as well as in the main body o f the text, reference is made only to the page
7.7.13 : i42n, 524, 646, 647 4217:647 number. And if the entry refers only to the footnote, the page number is 'followed by n for
St. Gall 839: i2n, 453, 458-59, 645 4923:648 note. The Bibliography has not been indexed, since it is arranged in alphabetical order o f authors.
4 9 5 3 :io2n
Thorn, Gymn.-bibl., R 40 2: 85n, 642 11799:648 Albumasar, 445
Acceleration: in general, 33, 282-84,466,613n,
Dominican Library 187/153:650 6 15n; uniform ( = uniformly difform mo­ Alcabitius, 154
Upsala, Univ. Library, C.596: 645 Alexander V , 78, and see Petrus de Candia
tion), 13 -14 ,15 , 33-34, 46-47, 7 I_73, 86-87,
101, 103-120, 290, 410, 467, 494, 558-60, Alfarabi, 148
574, 592, 596, 602, 608, 614, 616-20; and see Algazel or al-Ghazzall, 43, 134, 344, 374, 382,
Merton Rule 481, 488,489
Adelard o f Bath, 456, 581 Alhazen, 239^ 439, 484-85
A . est mum calidum, see Johannes Bode Alkindi, 43, 56, 134, 148, 374, 487
Aegidius Romanus, 468 Alteration, 22, 36-37, 66, 74, 100, 200, 286,
Aeneas, 362, 364, 486, and see Virgil 292,300,398-400, 45 2, 468-70, 492-93, 521,
Aesthetics, 38-40, 296-98, 308-28 566
Albert o f Saxony, I3n, 6 5 n ,74-75, 76n, 102 Alvarus Thomas: Liber de triplici motu, 496-
Albertus Magnus, 148, 149, 152, 154 9 9 , 5° 7 , 5 M -i 6
 7°4
A m o r hsreos, 330, 478-79
Amplonianus, 102, and see Index of Manu­
scripts, Erfurt
Angelus de Fossambruno, 101, 102
Angles o f contingence and mixed angles, 24,
125, 126, 214-18, 448, 570
Annaeus Seneca, 134, 380, 38m
Anonymous: Asclepius (D e deo deorum), 133,
2670, 336, 459, 479, 480; Commentary on
A lca bitius’ Isagoge, 154; D e generatione et cor­
ruptione, 154; D e proportione dyametri quadrati
ad costam eiusdem, xin, 650; D e reprobatione
iudicorum astrologie, 154; D e vetula, 134, 266,
460; Glossa ordinaria, 134, I75n, 382, 3830,
440, 482; L ife o f S t. Agatha, 484; L ife o f St.
Agnes, 356, 484; L ife o f S t. Lucy, 359ns L ife
o f S t. Sylvester, 42, 368, 36911; Postilla, 134,
384, 385ns Questiones (Vat. lat. 986), 125,
126ns Questio utrum omnis forma habeat lati­
tudinem nobis presentabilem per figuras geome­
tricas, 96; Questio utrum omnis qualitas in in­
finitum divisibilis existens in subiecto indivisibili
denominet ipsum infinite tale, 82-84; Summa
naturalium, 154; Tractatus bonus de uniformi et
difformi, 17, 69, 81, 576-621; Tractatus de
proportionibus, 149; Tractatus de sex incon­
venientibus, 619ns Utrum circa corpus, 488;
Utrum velocitas in motibus sit attenda penes la­
titudinem etc., 97-99; Vacca Platonis, 134,
358, 359n, 485
Anselm o f Laon, 440
Antiochus, 266, 460
Antonius de Scarparia, 120
Apollinarius, 266, 460
Apollo, 266, 362
Apollonides, 344
Apollonius o f Perga, 22, 56, 443
Apuleius, 134, 374, 3750
Aquinas, Thomas: Commentary on D e anima,
453; Commentary on D e caelo, 2390, 53m ;
Commentary on D e sensu, 45 5—56; Commentary
on the Ethics, 389ns Commentary on the
Metaphysics, 462; Commentary on the Physics,
5 in ; Summa contra gentiles, 134, 390; Summa
theologica, 461; mentioned, 134, 152
Archimedes, 133, 222, 224, 450, 57m , and see
Johannes de Tinemue
Aristotle: D e anima, 5, 133, 453, 472; D e
caelo, 5, i28n, 133, 238, 239^ 440, 451, 530,
53m ; D e sensu, 38, 133, 238, 2390, 3i5n,
General Index
455 s D e somno et vigilia, 8n, 133, 457-58;
Economics, 5; Ethics, 5, 133, 387^ 388, 3890,
390, 490; Generation and Corruption, 5; H is ­
toria animalium, 468; Metaphysica, 8n, 9n, 54,
133, 438, 45 5,462, 468; Meteorologica, 5, i2n,
133, 258, 453, 459; Parva naturalia, 5;
Physics, 5, 8n, 9n, 51, 54, 55, 133, 288, 461,
462, 463, 464, 468, 536, 537n, 560, 56m,
564, 5650, 572; Politics, 5; Praedicamenta
( Categories) , 52, 530, 564, 5650, 57m ; men­
tioned, 5, 6, 7n, 8n, 9n, i2n, i3n, 16, 30, 34,
38, 5 °, 5 F 54 , 5 5, 51 , I 2 5n , i28n, 129, 133,
140, 164, 274, 386, 453, 462, 463, 468, 491
Arithmetic, 11, 1 1 3n, 204, 444, 608
Arnald o f Villanova, 57, 152,479
Asclepius, see Anonymous
Astrology, 5, 11, 14, 27, 36, 127-29, 234, 268,
298, 338, 486
Astronomy, 6 -11, 278, 296-98, 608
Athis, 378
Atomism, 25-26, 226, 451-5 3
Augmentation, 32, 278-80, 465, 610, 61 in,
6i3n,6i5n
Augustine: Contra Faustum Manichaeum, 134,
454; D e civitate D ei, 134, 267^ 356, 357n,
387n, 393n, 459; D e divinatione, 134, 485;
D e doctrina Christiana, 486; D e genesi ad lit­
teram, 134, 346, 347n; D e natura demonum,
362; D e trinitate, 134, 376, 487-88; men­
tioned, 134, 236, 266, 267^ 375n, 386, 390,
480, 486
Averroes, 6n, 133, 134, 453, 459, 462, 565ns
and see Commentator in Selective Index
Avicenna, 134, 372, 376, 382, 487, 488, 489-90
Bachon Alardus, 151
Bacon, Roger, 57, 150, 152
Balaam, 346
Barrett, W. A., 470
Bate, Henri, 446n
Baudry, L., 462
Baur, L., 52n
Beat (musical), 477, and see Tempus
Beaujouan, G., io4n, 522, 524
Beauty, 28-29, 36, 39, 238-42, 296-98, 308-28,
456
Beeckmann, I., 106
Being(ens), 272-74, 462-63, 491
Bernard o f Verdun, 154
Bewitchment, see Fascination
General Index
Bhaskara, 445
Bible, Books of: Genesis, 134, 2370, 247^ 298,
2990, 376, 377n, 487; Numbers, z6$n, 3470,
482; Deuteronomy, 380, 38 m \ISam uel, 337ns
Psalms, 368, 369^ 380, 38m, 393ns Proverbs,
257ns Wisdom, 335n, 382, 383ns Ecclesiasti­
cus, 246, 36m ; Isaias, 134, 252, 254, 25 5n,
263n, 36311, 368, 369n, 37m, 408, 409ns
Jeremias, 258, 259^ 264, 265nsE^echial, 260,
26m, 264, 265n, 266, 267ns D aniel, 262,
263n, 266, 267n, 270, 27m , 460; Joel, 253ns
Job, 134, 253n, 260, 26m, 298, 299, 328,
329n, 389ns Matthew, 134, 247^ 25 m , 263^
333n, 385ns L u k e, 39m ; A c ts , 253 ; I Corin­
thians, 265 ns Galatians, 382, 384; Philippians,
134, 175ns E p istle o f James, 264, 265; I Peter,
254, 255n, 376, 377ns Apocalypse, 39, 334,
335ns editions of, 146, 48 2
Bjornbo, A . A ., 151
Blasius o f Parma: Questiones super tractatum de
latitudinibus Jormarum, 94-96, 105, 106;
mentioned, 6i7n
Boethius: D e arithmetica, 548, 549ns D e musica,
37, 39, 5 2 ,53n, 120,126, 134, 304, 305n, 306,
307n, 320, 328, 329n, 330, 33m, 472; men­
tioned, 299n,444
Bologna, University of, ~jos\, 71, 9m, 101
Borchert, E., 14m , 152
Boyer, C., 5 5n-56n, 443, 495
Bradwardine, Thomas, 10, n n , I3n, 6 15n,
6i9n
Breve, 477
Bridrey, E., 4n, 123
Brown, J., 94
Brugmans, H., 150
Buridan, Jean: impetus theory, 6, Quaestio­
nes de celo, 62ns Questiones super octo physico­
rum libros, 58, 61-62, 213n, 461; mentioned,
4, i3n, 74, 100, 135, 577,63m
Buron, E., 4n
Burton, R., 479
Busard, H. L. L., n n , i26n, 495, 499, 509,511,
5i2n, 517, 522, 524
C adiga(= Khadijah), 482
Caen,4
Calcidius, 451
Cambrai, 147
Cambridge, 7on
Campanus: On the Elements o f Euclid, 51-54,
7°5
134, 440, 442, 443, 473, 536, 5390, 546,
5 4 7 n, 5 5 5 n, 5 5 7 n>5 <>5 n, 56711, 58m
Cantilena, 306, 318, 320, 326, 330, 470-71, 477
Caplan, H., 153
Carlebach, J., 471
Casali, Johannes de: Questio de velocitate motus
alterationis, 66-70, 76n, 82, 96, 105, io6n,
140, 577—78; discussed and mentioned, 66—
71, 74, 78n, 85, 86, 95, 98, 101, 106, 585^
5 9 5 n, 5 9 7 n, 5 9 9 n , 6 o 3 n , 6 i 7 n
Cassiodorus, 134, 298, 299^ 330, 33m, 334,
335n
Cato, 134, 316, 31711, 330, 33m
Catoptrics and catoptromancy, 29-30, 252-70,
457, 458-59
Celaya, see Juan de
Chameleon, 44, 376, 488
Charles V , 4, 5, 123n, 124
Chatelain, E., 7on
Chaucer, 478-79
Cicero: D e divinatione, 133, 26m, 266, 2670,
356, 35711, 37511, 486; D e natura deorum,
133, 268, 269n, 375ns Dream o f Scipio,
375ns Tusculan Disputations, 387ns men­
tioned, 134, 135, 374, 375n>386
Circe, 236
Circle: equation of, 442, 624, 633ns curvature
of, 220-22, 449 s and see Quality, semicircular
Clagett, M .: Archimedes in the M iddle Ages,
i46n, 151, 448, 449, 450, 57m , 597ns G io­
vanni M arliani, 555ns “ Nicole Oresme and
Medieval Scientific Thought,” 3ns “ Richard
Swineshead,” 55n, 440; The Science o f Mechan­
ics, 4n, ion, i2n, i3n, 57, 58-59, 62n, 67n,
7on, 7m , 78n, 85n, 88n, 9m, 95n, 98n, io2n,
i03n, io4n, io6n, ii2 n , i35n, i42n, 293^
440, 461, 464, 465, 466, 494, 537n, 5 55n,
55711, 5 5 9 n, 56m, 573^ 57 7 n, 587^ 593n,
595n, 597n, 599n, 6oin, 6o3n, 6o7n, 6090,
6i3n, 6i5n, 6i7n, 619ns “ The Use of
Points,” 1 in, 438; “ The Use o f the Moer-
beke Translations,” 450
Claudianus, 134, 258, 259n
Cleanthes, 269n
Clock metaphor, 6, i n , 10-11
Closius, S., 460
Cohen, I.B., 110-11
Cologne, 102
Color, 477
Combes, A ., 79n
 706
Commentary on A lca bitius' Isagoge, see Anony­
mous
Compounds, theory of, 3
Condemnations o f 1277, 45, 382,490
Configuration doctrine: nature of, 14-49;
history of, 50-121; spiritual, 29, 248-50;
and passim throughout volume
Conic sections, 22, 442-43, 624
Consonance, 39, 242, 244, 312-14, 322, 455,
471-73
Constantinus Africanus: L ib er graduum, 56; his
Viaticum , 134, 330, 478, 479
Continuum and continuity: 16, 34, 51-53,
97, 164-66, 216, 304, 468-70, 595n
Coopland, G . W., 5n, i2 3n, 130^ 3 in, i33n,
i4on
Coordinate graphing, 15, 34-35, 55-56, 73 et
seq., 516, 583n-85n, and see Configuration
doctrine
Copernicus, 3, 12
Coronei, Luiz, 503^ 507,508
Corvino, F., 462
Curtze, M., 85n, i2 3n, i26n, i27n, 494
Curvature, 21-25, 202-204, 214-26, 442-44,
449-50, 623-24
d’Ailly, Pierre, 4 0 ,14 7,15 2,15 3
d’Alverny, M .-T h ., 152,153
Daniel, 262, 266,460, and see Bible, D aniel
Daniel, N., 482
David, 336
Deceleration, 71, 466, 467, 558
D e generatione et corruptione, see Anonymous
Delaisse, L. M. J., 4n
Delatte, A ., 482
Delisle, L., 1 26n, 150, 152, 153
Delphi, 362
Demons: Apuleius on, 375n; Augustine on,
347n, 485-86; Avicenna on, 372, 487; Cice­
ro on, 375n ; Oresme on, 40-43, i28n, 1290,
334-48, 352, 362-64, 368-70, 37m , 372-74,
375n, 480-82, 487; William o f Auvergne on,
480; Witelo on, 484-85
Denifle, H., 7on, 490
Denomy, A . J., 4n
De Poorter, L ’Abbe A., 148
D e proportione dyametri quadrati ad costam eius­
dem, see Anonymous
D e reprobatione iudicorum astrologie, see Anony­
mous
General Index
Descartes, 3, 106
D e Soto, Domingo, 1 3n
D e vetula, see Anonymous
Difformity: simple difform, 20-23, 198-204,
626-28; composite difform, 23, 204-206,
626; distinguished from irregularity, 31,
270-72; o f accidents o f the soul, 374-76;
o f altitude, 82, 577; o f cognitive powers,
248-50; o f differences in action, 226-30; o f
joy, 388-90; o f natural powers, 232-34; o f
pain, 386-88; o f passions, 230-32; o f per­
manent qualities, see Part I o f D e configura­
tionibus, passim', o f sound, 304-10, 334-36,
471; o f successive things, 270-72, and see
Part II o f D e configurationibus, passim', o f
surfaces, 82, 580-608; o f time, 272-74;
uniform, see Acceleration, uniform, and
Quality, uniformly difform, and Merton
Rule; o f velocity and quality, 396-434
D isciplina, 5, 158, 437, 61 in
Divination: Augustine on, 485-86; Cicero on,
268,486; Oresme on, 30,44-45,268, 362-64,
380, and see Oresme, L e Livre de divinacions
Doctrina, 5, 437
Dorian mode, 328, 3290
Droppers, G., 7n, 443, 465, 493
D u Cange, C. D ., 1 3on
Duhem, Pierre: f i tudes sur Leonard de Vinci,
65n, ro3n, io5n, 154, 499, 502, 5030, 507,
511; L e Systhme du monde, 5n, 55n, 750, 850,
io3n, H2n, H4n, 1390, 154, 2130, 440,
444, 468; mentioned, ix, 55n, 5711, 75, 103,
105, 114, 138, 444, 495
Dullaert, J., 102, 507, 508
Dumbleton, John, 58, 7on, 78n, 6i9n
Durand, D., x, 45 3
Durandus de St. Pour$ain, 470
Eager, G ., x
Emden, A . B., 7on
Enestrom, G., 447
Epiphanes, 266, 460
Erfurt, 102
Eubel, C., i23n
E uclid: Elements, 5, 24, 51, 52-53, 66, 72, 78n,
ioon, 186, 192, 202, 216, 314, 456, 473, 494,
504, 507, 527n, 536, 537n, 538, 539^ 54m,
542, 543^ 547n, 556, 5 57n, 562, 563^ 564,
565n, 566, 567n, 58m, 583^ 600, 6o7n,
608-9, 630
General Index 7°7
Eusebius, 266, 460 Gratian, 134, 486
Exponential ratios, see Ratio Gregory the Great, 134, 260, 26 m
Extension o f qualities and motions, 15-17, 31, Gresham, T ., 3
58-106 passim, 168-72, 270-76, 392-94, Grosseteste, Robert, 51, 536, 537n
439-41, 460-61, 516, 530, 53in~33n, 536— Guido o f Arezzo, 477
3 8>5 4 6 , 5 5 4 , 5 5 6 - 5 8
Haenel, G ., 1230
Faragius, 478 Hagin, 4460
Fascination, 344, 382-84, and see fascinatio in Halcyon, 260, 26 m
Selective Index Haly ( = Hall ibn Ridwan), 120, 447
Febris ephimera, 479 Hansen, B., x
Figuration ( = configuration), 137, 451, and Hariot, Thomas, 106-7
see Configuration doctrine Harmonic numbers and ratios, see Number and
Forli, Jacopo, see Jacopo Ratio
Form and forms, 57, 88, 91-92, 102, 232, 248, Harmony o f spheres, 298, 2990,479
264, 282, 300, 302, 364, and see Jacobus de Hecate, 340
Sancto Martino, D e latitudinibus formarum Heidelberg, 102
Francischus de Ferraria, 595n Helkot, see Holkot, Robert
Free fall, 3, 13-14, io6n -i2n , and see Accelera­ Henry o f Hesse: D e habitudine causarum, 152;
tion, uniform D e reductione effectuum, 114 -21, 137, 447,
Freiling, L., x 454; Questio de cometa, 147; mentioned, 75,
Friendship, 240-46 149, 150, 152, 153
Henry o f Saltrey, 486
Gabriel the Archangel, 482 Hermes, 266, 459-60
Gaetano deThienis, 105, 149 Hero, 56
Gagliano, T., x Herodotus, 3790
Galen, 57n, 133, 362, 485 Heytesbury, William: Regule solvendi sophismata
Galileo, 3, 12, 13, 47, 71-73, 103-6, n o n , (1or D e tribus predicamentis), 62n, 9m , 101,
1 1 2n, 495, 521, 5 57n, 563^ 6i5n 102, 105, 106, 149, 465, 502, 513, 577, 6oin,
Geometry: analytic, 3, 20, 56n, 101, 443, 624; 6o jn , 6oyn, 61 in, 6 i^ n, 6150, 6i7n, 6i9n
fictional character and limits of, 164, 402, Hippocrates, 37, 133, 304, 3050
430, 438-39, 492-93, 516; Oresme and, 491; Hippomanes, 356,484
mentioned, 11, 14, 54n, 404, 608; and see Holkot, Robert, 153
Euclid and Configuration doctrine Horn angles, i26n, and see Angles o f contin-
George dePera, 149 gence
Gerard o f Brussels, 33, 466 Hughes, D . A., 477
Gerard of Cremona, 456 Hume, D ., 3
Germanus de Rungiaco, 153 Huygens, Christiaan, 106, m n - i 2 n
Gerson, Jean de, 152 Hypnotism, 41, 346-48, 482
Gilbert the Englishman, 479
Ginsburg, J., 446 Ibn al-Jazzar, 478
Glossa ordinaria, see Anonymous Ibn Butlan and his Tacuinum sanitatis, 134, 330,
Gordon, Bernard, 479 478
Gossner, J., i24n Ibn Ezra, Abraham, 445-46
Grant, E . ; The D e proportionibus proportionum, Ibn Sina, see Avicenna
4n, 6n, ion, 65n,i24n,i32n, i4on, 444, 473- Imagination: Avicenna’s and Algazel’s theory
75; “ NicoleOresme and h is'D e proportioni­ of, 376, 382, 481, 488, 489; magic and, 41,
bus proportionum’,” ion; “ Late Medieval 43, 338, 342-44; virtusymaginativa, 346, 483;
Thought,” i2n; edition o f Algorism us pro­ ymaginatio as a speculative device, i3n, 158,
portionum, 1230, 494; mentioned, ix, 132 192, 290, 402, 437-39, 493, 534, as a faculty,
 708 General Index
166, 168, 270; and see ymaginatio in Selec­ Kingfisher, 261
tive Index Klibansky, R., 487
Impetus theory, 6-10, 1 $n Knops, J. P. H., 6n
Infinite and infinitesimal, 17, 35, 47, 59-60, Koyre, A ., i03n, io6n
63-64, 65n, 8on, 83-84, 89-90, x 17, 176, 206, Kren, C., 7n, 9n, ion, i2n, 13on, 439
412-34, 4 9 5 - 5 17» 5 7 °
Instant and instants: first and last, 396-402, Latitude: as intensity, 16, 31, 55, 63, 96, 97,
491; velocity at an instant, 15, 32-33, 290, 168-72, 270, 439-40, 528, 530, 552; as
292,410, 465,467, 493 quantity o f quality, 67, 77-78, 80, 83-101
Intelligences, celestial, 6-10 passim, 600, 606, 616; and see latitudo in
Intensity: figuration of, 15-16, 55-106passim, Selective Index
164-70, 180-82, 528 etseq., 588-920; line of Laude, P. J., 148
( = line o f summit), 20, 190, 627; line of Leo the Great, 134, 254, 25 5n, 457
( = latitude), 168, and see Latitude; nature of, Leonardo da Vinci, 3, 104-5
54, 166, 299-302, 440-42, 536; o f sound, Levi ben Gerson, 447, 471
306; o f velocity, 270, 288-90 Levy, R., 446
Irrational ratios, see Ratio Lia, 454
Ivo of Chartres, 487 L ife o f S t. Agatha, see Anonymous
Ja co b ,376,488 L ife o f S t. Agnes, see Anonymous
Jacobus de Sancto Martino: D e latitudinibus L ife o f S t. Lucy, see Anonymous
formarum, 85-96, 102-3, 106, ii7 n , 136, 137, L ife o f S t. Sylvester, see Anonymous
139,5 8711, 633; D e perfectione specierum, ~!%n, Linacre, Thomas, 485
89-90, 448; mentioned, 78,85 Line o f summit, see Intensity, line of
Jacobus de Voragine: Legenda aurea, 134, 35 9n, Lisieux, 4, 43
369^ 484, 486 Little, A . G., 57n
Jacopo da Forli, 102 Longitude: as extension or subject line, 16,
Jean de Ripa, 79n-8in, 448 63, 92-98, 170-74, 439, 528-30, 53m, 578;
Jerome, 42, 134, 266, 2670, 366, 367^ 460 o f sound, 306; as time, 31, 270, 288-90,
Jesus Christ, 174, 262, 266, 392, 393n 538, 544; and see longitudo in Selective
Johannes Affligemensis, 56n Index
Johannes Bode, 499; A est unum calidum (?), Lowes, J. L., 479
4 9 9 - 5 0 3 =506, 507, 511-13
Lucan, 42, 134, 352, 35 3n, 356, 357n, 362,
Johannes de Lineriis, 577 363^ 364, 3650, 366, 367^ 368, 369n
Johannes Monachus, 75 Lucia, 358, 359n
Johannes de Muris, 450 Luiz Coronei, see Coronei
Johannes de Ripa, see Jean de Ripa Lulofs, H. J. Drossaart, 458
Johannes de Tinemue: D e curvis superficiebus Lydian mode, 330
Archimenidis, 133, 222, 448, 449
Johannes de Wasia, 149, 576,6i7n Macrobius, 375n
John o f Holland, 147, 6i5n Madness, 338, 346, 350, 352, 354, 356, 3570,
John o f Liibeck, 460 370-72,487
John of Salisbury, 134, 330, 33 m, 457 Maggiolo, P. M., 5 in
Johnson, C., i4on, 152, 153 Magic: canon law and, 486-87; catoptrics and,
Jourdain, C., 5n, 13m 42, 358, 482-83; difformity o f sound and,
334-36; drugs and, 42, 354-58; effects of,
Jove (Jupiter), 244, 326, 4 4 5 - 4 *5 , 4 5 6-5 7
Juan de Celaya, 499, 508 40, 127, 1 31, 338, 350; hypnotism and, 41,
Justin, 134, 362, 363n 348; incantation and, 42, 366-70; in the
Middle Ages, 480; Oresme on, 14, 40-43,
Kargon, R., io6n-io7n 334-74; Pliny on, 338; roots of, 336-70;
Khadijah (Cadiga), 482 sickness and, 346-50; suggestion and, 336-
General Index
54; and see Demons and Fascination and
Necromancy
Magnetism, 28, 1130, 242-44, 454, 456
Maier, A .: A n der Gren^e, 85n, 95n, 97n, 100,
i03n, 155, 453, 503n, 508; “ La Doctrine de
Nicolas d’Oresme,” 451-52; “ Die Quaes­
tio de velocitate, ” 68n, 70; D ie Vorldufer
Galileis, 6411, i26n; Zivei Grundprobleme, 711,
57n; mentioned, ix, 15, 55n, 81, 97, 148,
i 54 - 55 >4 5 i - 5 3
Maimonides ( = Rabbi Moses), 134, 254, 457
Mandrake, 27, 114, 236, 454
Marci, I. M., 1 ian
Marie de France, 486
Marsilius o f Inghen: Questiones de generatione et
corruptione, 75, 448; Questiones super octo
libros physicorum, 461, 463, 464; mentioned,
102
Martianus Capella, 134, 330, 33m
Martin, H., 147
Masino Codronchi: Questiones super questionem
fohannis de Casali, 91-94, 98
Mathieu, R., 439, 457
Matthieu de Vendome ( = Versificator), 134,
348, 3490
McCarthy, L. M., 5n, 1230, 14m
McCue, J., 750-770
McPeek, G., ix, 470, 477
McVaugh, M., 56n-57n
Mean speed theorem, 14, 5730, 61 in, and see
Merton Rule
Meaux, 122-23
Medicine, 56, 236, 334, 344-46, 356, 479, 487
Meiss, M., 4n
Melancholy, 370-72, 479, 487
Menstruation, 30, 254, 350, 384, 457-58
Menut, A . D ., 4n, 6n, i23n, i24n, i33n, 460,
517, and see citations o f his editions o f Livre
de ethiques, Livre de yconomiqtte, and Livre du
d el under Oresme
Mercurius, 480
Merton College, 31, 33, 68, 73, 82, 103, 135,
465, 499, 522, 577, 6 13n
Merton Rule, 13, 14, 33, 46, 68, 71, 72, 73, 77,
84, 88, 95, 98, 102, 103, 104, 105, 106, n o n ,
115, 408-10, 494, 511, 534, 558, 573n, 601,
616-18
Messinus, see Masino Codronchi
Methodius, 266, 460
Meunier, F., 4n, 123
7°9
Minio-Paluello, L., 565
Mirrors: analogy between souls and, 29-30,
252-68; effect o f menstruation on, 30, 254,
384, 457-58; types and powers of, 254-68,
458-59
Modes, musical, 320, 328, 3290, 330
Moerbeke, William, jin , 453, 459, 462, 463,
56 5n
Moody, E. A ., 62n
Moses the Egyptian, see Maimonides
Motion: acceleration of, see Acceleration;
celestial, 6 -11, 296-98, 464; configuration
of, 31-36, 270-302, 538, 544, and see Con­
figuration doctrine; curvilinear, 32, 102,
276-78, 465, 466; perfection and, 276; ter­
restrial, 1 1 -1 2 ; uniform, see Uniformity o f
motion and velocity; uniformly difform, see
Acceleration, uniform
Muckle, J. T., 481, 489
Muhammad, 346, 482
Murdoch, J.E.,66n, 509-10, 517, 524, 53911
Music, 37-39, 11311, 304-36, 470-73, 476-80;
novelty in, 326, 334, 33511, 470, 477-78
Musical intervals and scales: 39, 56n, 312-14,
320, 4 7 3 = 4 7 7
Naslr al-Dln al-TusI, 456
Navarre, College of, 4, 14, 7on, i2 3n, 124,
125,126, i3on, 147
Necromancy, 28, 40, 238, 336-38, 350, 364
Nicholas o f Cusa, 102, 466-67
Nicholas the Knight, 486
Nicolaus de Lyra, 134, 152, 153, 385^ 482
N ock, A . D., 459, 479
Number: even and odd, 72, 73, 104, 420-24,
562-64; harmonic, 39, i27n, 312, 4 71-72;
quantification and, 455-56; square, 560-62
Ockham, William, 152, 153, 461, 462, 6o9n
Oresme, Guillaume, 123, 124
Oresme, Nicole: concepts of, 5-14, and passim',
configuration doctrine of, 14-49, 63-64, 7 1 -
73; life, 4-5, 7on; sceptical or problematic
tendency of, 12-130, 26-27, 35; works, 5,
1250, 645-48; citation or mention o f in­
dividual works (excepting D e configurationi­
bus): A d pauca respicientes, 4n, 1 in, 1240, 132,
1400; Algorismus proportionum, 39, 46, 122,
123, 125, 126, 127, 151, 32m, 406, 447, 471,
494; A r s sermocinandi, 1250, 153; Commen-
 7io
surability or Incommensurability o f the Celestial
Motions, 5, ion, u , 132, 470, 477-78; Com ­
mentary on the Sentences, 4, 13 on (?); Contra
mendicationem, i25n; Decisio an in omni casu,
i25n; D e malis venturis, i25n; D e mutationi­
bus monetarum, 5, i23n, 1240, i25n, 140, 152,
153, 437; D e proportionibus proportionum, 4n,
6n, 10, n n , i3n, 650, i24n, 132, 140, 142,
1 53, 473-76; Determinatio facta in resumpta,
12 5n, 1 26n, 448; E xp ositio cuiusdam legis, 12 3n ;
E xp ositio super libris de anima, 457; Livre
de divi nacions, 5,1m , 123, 124, i25n, 130,
131, 133, 137, 140, 141, 26m, 38m; Livre
de ethiques, 4n, 5, 6n, i24n, I33n, 387^ 437;
Livre de politiques, 5, 6n, 137, 329^ 33m,
472-73; Livre de yconomique, 5, 6n, 123a,
i24n, i33n; Livre du del, 3, 6, 7n, n n ,
i2n, 66n, i24n, 441, 460-61, 470, 317; L e
Quadripartit Ptholomee, 123, 124; Questio
contra divinatores, 5n, jin , 112, 1130, i25n,
127-31, 1330,480; Questio de proportione dya-
metri quadrati ad costam eiusdem, see Anony­
mous ; Questiones de anima, 130, 439; Questio­
nes de celo, 7n-ion, 9, n n , I2n, 130, 439,
46 8; Questiones de generatione et corruptione, 39,
63, 64, 66, 83n, 5290; Questiones de sensu, 458,
476, 490;Questiones de spera, qn, n n , 12, 32,
438, 439, 443, 465, 492-93, 316; Questiones
super geometriam, n n , 14, 16, 21, 22, 23, 47,
48, 50, 66-68, 71-73, 74, 82, 85, 104, 126,
x 31, 227n, 405n, 407n, 437, 440, 441, 4 5 1-
32, 494, 4 9 5 > 503, 50B, 317, 5 2 I - 7 5 > 5 7 7 ,
5 87n, 5 9 m \Questiones super meteorologica, 1 2n,
453, 458, 459; Questiones super physica, 50,
54-53, 61, 64, 66, 126, 131, 461-64, 469,
475-76, 481, 503, 508, 5 17 \ Quodlibeta, 5n,
n n , 12, i3n, 40, 112, H3n, ii4 n , i25n,
i26n, 127-31, i33n, 469, 476, 480, 489;
Sermones, I25n; Sophismata, 48, 132, 499,
502-3, 508; Tertius tractatus, 126, 32m ;
Tractatus contra iudiciarios astronomos, 5n, 1 in,
127, 130, 131, 133, 141, 38m; Tractatus de
communicatione idiomatum, 125n, 14m ; Trac­
tatus de perfectionibusspecierum, 125, 216, 448;
Traitie de Vespere, 5, 123, i24n, I25n, 141
Orpheus, 330, 478
Otte, J., x
O vid, 42, 134, 26m, 266, 344, 345n, 356, 357n,
366,367n,460, 481
O vid, Pseudo-, see Pseudo- O vid
General Index General Index 711
O w en the Knight, 486 Pseudo-Ovid, 134, 266, 460 2890; o f intensity and extension, 164-68,
Oxford, University of, 13, 50, 55, 58, 82, 140, Psychology, 29-30, 246-68, 370-86; the doc­ 178-86; o f qualities and velocities, 46, 86-
6190, and see Merton College trine o f the withdrawal o f the soul inward 87, 404-8, 536-38; related as proportional
an d ,350-54,483-84 parts, 414-34 passim, 495-516 passim ; rules
Padua, 101,105 Ptolemy, 120, 123-24, 447, and see Oresme, L e for multiplying and dividing, 46, 127, 406,
Palladius, 134, 360, 36m Quadripartit 494; and see proportio and proportionalis in
Paoli, C., 150 Purgatorium o f St. Patrick, 364, 486 Selective Index
Paris, 4, 45,150, 382 Puy en Velay, 147 Richard de Clymeton (de Kilvington), 499
Paris, University of, 4, 50, 55, 58, 73, 75, 78, Pyramids and cones: atoms o f fire as, 25, 226, Richard de Fournival, 460
79, 85, 86, 98, 102, 1250, 129, 137, 138, 140, 451; qualities imaginable by, 23, 25-26, 210, Richter, A . L., 486
447; configuration doctrine at, 73-82 226-32; mentioned, 210, 448 Ripa, see Jean de
Pascasius, 358, 359n Pythagoras and Pythagorean, 103, i22n, 564 Robathan, D . M., 460
Patrick, St., 364, 486 Robinson, F. N ., 478
Paul o f Pergola, 149 Quadrature of circle, 224, 450, 570, 57m Roger Bacon, see Bacon
Paul, St. (“ the Apostle” ), 174, 264 Quality and qualities: configuration of, Intro­ Roger o f Wendover, 486
Paul von Geldern, 149 duction, section I.B., and passim in whole Roger Thomas, 97, 100
Pause (musical term), 304, 306, 308, 318-20 volume; contrary, 23-24, 75, 212-14; cor­ Rotation o f the earth, 3, 11-12
Pavia, 9m poreal, 17, 23, 210, 394, 396, 491, 530, 544, Rouen, 4
Pease, A . S., 484 550, 558, 568; extension and intensity of,
Pelzer, A ., 503 15-16, 20, 63-64, 66-102 passim, 164-72, Sacrobosco, Johannes, 5, 133, and see Oresme,
Perugia, 101 440, 441, 526-74 {passim, and particularly, Questiones de spera
Peter Lombard: Sentences, 4, 13 on 528, 538), 588-92; linear, 16-17, 172-78, Sainte Chapelle, La, 4
Peter, St., 254, 255n, 376, 376n 392, 491, 528-32, 536-52; ontology of, 25- Saint-Genois, J. de, 446n
Petrus de Candia, 68-69, 78, 78n-79n 26, 451-52; quadrangular, 18, 19, 188-90, Salviati, 104
Petrus de Guclina (or Modena), 85n 451-52; quantity of, 15, 63-64, 66-103 P as~ Sarton, G ., 447
Petrus de Maricourt, 150 sim, 172-76, 404-34 passim, 441, 530, 536- Schum, W., 149,576,577
Pharmacology, 56 38, 588-92; semicircular, 21-23, 74, 88-89, Series, infinite, 47-48, 59-61, 64, 65n, 131-32,
Philippe de Meaux (de Vitry), 122-23, 447» 101, 198-202, 442-43, 521, 542-44, 566, 412-34, 4 9 5 - 5 1 7
4 7 I~7 2»4 7 7 623-35; surface, 16-17, 23, 174-76, 208-10, Sidonius, 134, 326, 327n
Philosophy, natural, 3, 4 392-94, 491, 530, 544, 550, 558, 568, 578, Smalley, B., 440
Phrygian mode (modus Frigius), 328-30 590-92; triangular, 19, 184-88, 452; uni­ Smith, D. E ., 445
Pitch, 306-8, 309n, 316, 320, 324, 471 formly difform, 15,19 , 46, 67-73, 76-77, 82- Smith, T., 85n, 8yn, 93n
Planets, 56n, 445-47 84, 87, 88, 97-100, xi 5, 184-88, 190-98, Socrates, 6\<)n
Plato: Republic, 329ns Timaeus, 52, 5 3n, 57n, 408-10, 494, 5 3 2- 3 4 , 5 4 4 , 5 5 0- 5 2, 556-58, Soissons, 75n
133, 451, 472; mentioned, 328, 485, 6i9n 560-64, 568, 572, 590, 596, 606, 616, and see Solinus, 134, 236, 2370, 332, 333n, 344, 345n,
Pliny: N a tu ral History, 56n, 134, 146, 224, Merton Rule 376- 78, 379n
225n, 236, 237n, 244, 26m, 330, 33m, 338, Questiones (Vat. lat. 986), see Anonymous Sound: beauty and ugliness of, 308-28; magic
339n, 366, 367^ 456-57, 458, 468, 481, 484, Questio utrum omnis form a habeat latitudinem no­ and, 40, 334-36, 366; nature o f difform,
490; mentioned, 42 bis presentabilem per figuras geometricas, see 304-10, 471; Oresme’s views of, summar­
Pluto, 340 Anonymous ized, 37-40,470; intension and remission of,
Points, lines and surfaces: nature of, 164-66, Questio utrum omnis qualitas in infinitum divisibilis 3090; psychological power of, 39, 328-32
402,430,438-39, 492-93 existens in subiecto indivisibili denominet ipsum Sphere-wrapping arguments, 65n, 426-34, 517
Pompeius Trogus, 134, 363n infinite tale, see Anonymous Spiral, 25, 221, 224, 450
Porphyry, 266, 460 Stainer, J., 470
Postilla, see Anonymous Rachel, 454 Statius, 134, 258, 259n, 260, 26m, 352, 353n
Prophecy, 29-30, 252-68, 3570, 372, 457, Ratio and ratios: arithmetic, 67, 105, 528, 586, Strayer, J. R., ix
459-60 61 in ; consonant and harmonic, 39, 126, Subjunctive mood: its significance in the
Proportionality theorems, 7, 10 -11, i3n, 473- i27n, 312, 4 71-73 ; exponential ( = ratio o f definition o f instantaneous velocity, 32,
76, 615 n -i 6n; and see Ratio ratios), 10, 473-76, 6 i5 n -i6 n ; Greek and 465
Pseudo-Dionysius, 375n medieval concepts of, 24, 34, 47, 52-53, Suetonius, 457
 712
Suiset, Richard, 508; and see Swineshead,
Richard
Suitability doctrine, 15-16, 17-19, 21-23, 66,
441-42, 583n
Summa naturalium, see Anonymous
Surfaces: uniform, see uniformity o f altitude
and surface; uniformly difform, 100,526-34,
552, 584-88, 592-94
Suter, H., 650
Swineshead, Richard: D e motu, 6 15n; Liber
calculationum, 33, 58-61, 79, 8in, 102, 105,
466, 467, 495, 496, 497-98, 508; its date,
7on; mentioned, 63, 465, 6i3n
Swineshead, Roger, 65n, 7cm
Symon de Castello, 75-78, 80, 86, 950, 98,
138, 147; date of, y6n
Taton, R., 4n
Temkin, O ., 479
Tempus (musical term), 318, 477
Theriac, 244, 334, 454, 456
Thomas, Alvarus, see Alvarus Thomas
Thorndike, L . : History o f Magic, $n, ion, 114,
121, 122, i 3 7 n, 147, 1 4 9 » 150, T5 2, 4 5 3 » 4 7 ®,
480, 485, 487; “ Imagination and Magic,”
488; “ Notes Upon Some Medieval Manu­
scripts,” 85n; “ The Latin Translations,”
446n; “ Three Astrological Predictions,”
460; mentioned, ix, 114
Thucydides, 485
Tiberius Caesar, 244, 457
Time: celestial motion and, 274, 296-98, 464;
convertibility o f with magnitude, 51, 55,
288, 468; motion, velocity and, 31, 51, 272,
288-94, 298-302, 462, 464, 468; nature of,
31-35, 272-74, 461-64
Torni, Bernardus, i05n, 502-8, 513-14
Tractatus bonus de uniformi et difformi, see
Anonymous
Tractatus de proportionibus, see Anonymous
Tractatus de sex inconvenientibus, see Anonymous
Uniformity: of altitude and surface, 82, 188-
90, 526-28, 577, 580-82, 583n-85n, 600;
distinguished from regularity, 31, 270-72,
461; o f difformity, see Acceleration and Qual­
ities, uniformly difform; o f motion and
velocity, 15, 31, 33, 104, 272, 282, 404-8,
408-22 passim, 461, 495-516 passim, 544,
558, 577, 592, 602, 616-18; of qualities, 15,
General Index General Index 713
18-19, 67-69, 77, 95, 97-99, 190, 404-8, William o f Auvergne: D e universo, 134, 135, Withington, E., 57n
408-22 passim, 530-32, 536-38, 542-44, 3 3 7 n, 350, 3 5 5 n, 453-54, 4 7 8, 4 7 9 ~8 o, 482-
552-74 passim, 588-90 84, 490 Zavacky, A., x
Utrum circa corpus, see Anonymous William Heytesbury, see Heytesbury Zoubov, V . P.: “ Nicole Oresme et la mu-
Utrum velocitas in motibus sit attenda penes latitu­ Wilson, C., ix, 491, 61 in sique,” 299^ 3270,470-71,477,478; “ Quel-
dinem etc., see Anonymous Witelo: D e natura demonum, 134, 358, 484-85; ques observations,” 65n; Traktat, 4n, 47,
Perspectiva (Optica), 5 in, 134, 238, 239n, 240, 57n, 444,448,491,492,493,495; mentioned,
Vacca Platonis, see Anonymous 456, 534n, 536, 537n; mentioned, 51, 375n ix
Velocity: angular distinguished from curvi­
linear, 32, 276-78, 465; definitions of, 3 1 -
32, 51, 276, 280, 464-65; instantaneous, 15,
32-33, 290, 292, 410, 465, 467, 493 ; o f alter­
ation, 32, 66, 100, 278, 280, 282; o f aug­
mentation, 32, 278, 280, 282, 61 in, 6i3n,
6i5n; of descent, 32, 278, 465; theorems of,
10, 46-47, 408-34, 496-515, 538, 544, 554,
558-60, 568-70, 574; total, 47, 414, 618,
6i9n; uniform, see Uniformity o f motion
and velocity; uniformly difform, according
to time, see Acceleration and Merton Rule;
according to subject, 31, 272, 284-86, 466-
67 » 5 9 2
Venice, 105
Vernard, A., i26n, 137
Vescovini, G . F., 439
Vienna, 102
Vienna, University of, 102, 149
Vignaux, P., 790
Vincent o f Beauvais, 481-82
Virgil: Aeneid, 133, 266, 267^ 362, 363^ 386,
38yn; Eclogae, 133, 366, 3670, 382, 383^
Georgies, 133, 326, 327n; mentioned, 42, 364
Visions, 29-30, 252-70, 35 5n, 483
Vitry, see Philippe de Meaux
Volume (sound), 306-10, 316, 324, 332
Waesberghe, J. S. van, 56n
Wallis, C. G., 85n
Wallis, John, 106, io y n -i in, 1 1 2n
Walter o f Burley, 465
Ware, D., 94n
Warnke, K., 486
Waszink, J. H., 451
Webb, C. C., 331, 457
White, L., 6
Wieleitner, H .: “Der ‘Tractatus de latitudini­
bus formarum’,” 850, 93n; “ Ueber den
Funktionsbegriff,” io3n, i39n, 154, 444;
“ Zur Geschichte der unendlichen Reihen,”
499; mentioned, ix, 138